This is ../../info/emacs, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from
emacs.texi.

   This is the Sixteenth edition of the `GNU Emacs Manual',
updated for Emacs version 23.2.

   Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1987, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010
Free Software Foundation, Inc.

     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
     Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
     Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being "The GNU Manifesto,"
     "Distribution" and "GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE," with the
     Front-Cover texts being "A GNU Manual," and with the Back-Cover
     Texts as in (a) below.  A copy of the license is included in the
     section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License."

     (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: "You have the freedom to copy and
     modify this GNU manual.  Buying copies from the FSF supports it in
     developing GNU and promoting software freedom."

INFO-DIR-SECTION Emacs
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* Emacs: (emacs).	The extensible self-documenting text editor.
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY


File: emacs,  Node: Top,  Next: Distrib,  Prev: (dir),  Up: (dir)

The Emacs Editor
****************

Emacs is the extensible, customizable, self-documenting real-time
display editor.  This Info file describes how to edit with Emacs and
some of how to customize it; it corresponds to GNU Emacs version
23.2.

   To learn more about the Info documentation system, type `h', to
visit a programmed instruction sequence for the Info commands.

   For information on extending Emacs, see *Note Emacs Lisp: (elisp)Top.

   This is the Sixteenth edition of the `GNU Emacs Manual',
updated for Emacs version 23.2.

   Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1987, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010
Free Software Foundation, Inc.

     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
     Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
     Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being "The GNU Manifesto,"
     "Distribution" and "GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE," with the
     Front-Cover texts being "A GNU Manual," and with the Back-Cover
     Texts as in (a) below.  A copy of the license is included in the
     section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License."

     (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: "You have the freedom to copy and
     modify this GNU manual.  Buying copies from the FSF supports it in
     developing GNU and promoting software freedom."

* Menu:

* Distrib::	        How to get the latest Emacs distribution.
* Intro::	        An introduction to Emacs concepts.
* Glossary::	        Terms used in this manual.

Indexes (each index contains a large menu)
* Key Index::	        An item for each standard Emacs key sequence.
* Option Index::        An item for every command-line option.
* Command Index::       An item for each command name.
* Variable Index::      An item for each documented variable.
* Concept Index::       An item for each concept.

* Acknowledgments::     Major contributors to GNU Emacs.

Important General Concepts
* Screen::	        How to interpret what you see on the screen.
* User Input::	        Kinds of input events (characters, buttons,
                          function keys).
* Keys::	        Key sequences: what you type to request one
                          editing action.
* Commands::	        Named functions run by key sequences to do editing.
* Entering Emacs::      Starting Emacs from the shell.
* Exiting::	        Stopping or killing Emacs.

Fundamental Editing Commands
* Basic::	        The most basic editing commands.
* Minibuffer::	        Entering arguments that are prompted for.
* M-x::		        Invoking commands by their names.
* Help::	        Commands for asking Emacs about its commands.

Important Text-Changing Commands
* Mark::	        The mark: how to delimit a ``region'' of text.
* Killing::	        Killing (cutting) text.
* Yanking::	        Recovering killed text.  Moving text. (Pasting.)
* Accumulating Text::   Other ways of copying text.
* Rectangles::	        Operating on the text inside a rectangle on the screen.
* CUA Bindings::        Using C-x, C-c, C-v for copy
                          and paste, with enhanced rectangle support.
* Registers::	        Saving a text string or a location in the buffer.
* Display::	        Controlling what text is displayed.
* Search::	        Finding or replacing occurrences of a string.
* Fixit::	        Commands especially useful for fixing typos.
* Keyboard Macros::	A keyboard macro records a sequence of
			  keystrokes to be replayed with a single command.

Major Structures of Emacs
* Files::	        All about handling files.
* Buffers::	        Multiple buffers; editing several files at once.
* Windows::	        Viewing two pieces of text at once.
* Frames::	        Running the same Emacs session in multiple X windows.
* International::       Using non-ASCII character sets.

Advanced Features
* Major Modes::	        Text mode vs. Lisp mode vs. C mode...
* Indentation::	        Editing the white space at the beginnings of lines.
* Text::	        Commands and modes for editing English.
* Programs::	        Commands and modes for editing programs.
* Building::	        Compiling, running and debugging programs.
* Maintaining::         Features for maintaining large programs.
* Abbrevs::	        How to define text abbreviations to reduce
			  the number of characters you must type.

* Picture Mode::        Editing pictures made up of characters using
                          the quarter-plane screen model.
* Sending Mail::        Sending mail in Emacs.
* Rmail::	        Reading mail in Emacs.
* Dired::	        You can ``edit'' a directory to manage files in it.
* Calendar/Diary::      The calendar and diary facilities.
* Document View::       Viewing PDF, PS and DVI files.
* Gnus::	        How to read netnews with Emacs.
* Shell::	        Executing shell commands from Emacs.
* Emacs Server::        Using Emacs as an editing server for `mail', etc.
* Printing::	        Printing hardcopies of buffers or regions.
* Sorting::	        Sorting lines, paragraphs or pages within Emacs.
* Narrowing::	        Restricting display and editing to a portion
		          of the buffer.
* Two-Column::	        Splitting apart columns to edit them
		          in side-by-side windows.
* Editing Binary Files::Using Hexl mode to edit binary files.
* Saving Emacs Sessions:: Saving Emacs state from one session to the next.
* Recursive Edit::      A command can allow you to do editing
			  "within the command".  This is called a
			  "recursive editing level".
* Emulation::	        Emulating some other editors with Emacs.
* Hyperlinking::        Following links in buffers.
* Dissociated Press::   Dissociating text for fun.
* Amusements::	        Various games and hacks.
* Customization::       Modifying the behavior of Emacs.

Recovery from Problems
* Quitting::	        Quitting and aborting.
* Lossage::	        What to do if Emacs is hung or malfunctioning.
* Bugs::	        How and when to report a bug.
* Contributing::        How to contribute improvements to Emacs.
* Service::	        How to get help for your own Emacs needs.

Appendices
* Copying::	        The GNU General Public License gives you permission
			  to redistribute GNU Emacs on certain terms;
			  it also explains that there is no warranty.
* GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation.
* Emacs Invocation::    Hairy startup options.
* X Resources::         X resources for customizing Emacs.
* Antinews::	        Information about Emacs version 22.
* Mac OS / GNUstep::    Using Emacs under Mac OS and GNUstep.
* Microsoft Windows::   Using Emacs on Microsoft Windows and MS-DOS.
* Manifesto::	        What's GNU?  Gnu's Not Unix!


 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
 ---------------------------------

Here are some other nodes which are really inferiors of the ones
already listed, mentioned here so you can get to them in one step:

The Organization of the Screen

* Point::	        The place in the text where editing commands operate.
* Echo Area::           Short messages appear at the bottom of the screen.
* Mode Line::	        Interpreting the mode line.
* Menu Bar::            How to use the menu bar.

Basic Editing Commands

* Inserting Text::      Inserting text by simply typing it.
* Moving Point::        Moving the cursor to the place where you want to
                        change something.
* Erasing::	        Deleting and killing text.
* Basic Undo::	        Undoing recent changes in the text.
* Basic Files::         Visiting, creating, and saving files.
* Basic Help::          Asking what a character does.
* Blank Lines::	        Making and deleting blank lines.
* Continuation Lines::  How Emacs displays lines too wide for the screen.
* Position Info::       What page, line, row, or column is point on?
* Arguments::	        Numeric arguments for repeating a command N times.
* Repeating::           Repeating the previous command quickly.

The Minibuffer

* Minibuffer File::     Entering file names with the minibuffer.
* Minibuffer Edit::     How to edit in the minibuffer.
* Completion::		An abbreviation facility for minibuffer input.
* Minibuffer History::	Reusing recent minibuffer arguments.
* Repetition::		Re-executing commands that used the minibuffer.
* Passwords::           Entering passwords in the echo area.

Completion

* Completion Example::  Examples of using completion.
* Completion Commands:: A list of completion commands.
* Strict Completion::   Different types of completion.
* Completion Options::  Options for completion.

Help

* Help Summary::	Brief list of all Help commands.
* Key Help::		Asking what a key does in Emacs.
* Name Help::		Asking about a command, variable or function name.
* Apropos::		Asking what pertains to a given topic.
* Help Mode::           Special features of Help mode and Help buffers.
* Library Keywords::	Finding Lisp libraries by keywords (topics).
* Language Help::       Help relating to international language support.
* Misc Help::		Other help commands.
* Help Files::          Commands to display pre-written help files.
* Help Echo::           Help on active text and tooltips (`balloon help').

The Mark and the Region

* Setting Mark::	Commands to set the mark.
* Marking Objects::	Commands to put region around textual units.
* Using Region::	Summary of ways to operate on contents of the region.
* Mark Ring::   	Previous mark positions saved so you can go back there.
* Global Mark Ring::    Previous mark positions in various buffers.
* Shift Selection::     Using shifted cursor motion keys.
* Persistent Mark::	Keeping the mark active all the time.

Killing and Moving Text

* Deletion::		Commands for deleting small amounts of text and
			  blank areas.
* Killing by Lines::	How to kill entire lines of text at one time.
* Other Kill Commands:: Commands to kill large regions of text and
			  syntactic units such as words and sentences.
* Kill Options::        Options that affect killing.

Yanking

* Kill Ring::		Where killed text is stored.  Basic yanking.
* Appending Kills::	Several kills in a row all yank together.
* Earlier Kills::	Yanking something killed some time ago.

Registers

* RegPos::      	Saving positions in registers.
* RegText::     	Saving text in registers.
* RegRect::     	Saving rectangles in registers.
* RegConfig::           Saving window configurations in registers.
* RegNumbers::          Numbers in registers.
* RegFiles::    	File names in registers.
* Bookmarks::           Bookmarks are like registers, but persistent.

Controlling the Display

* Scrolling::	           Commands to move text up and down in a window.
* Auto Scrolling::         Redisplay scrolls text automatically when needed.
* Horizontal Scrolling::   Moving text left and right in a window.
* Follow Mode::            Follow mode lets two windows scroll as one.
* Faces::	           How to change the display style using faces.
* Standard Faces::         Emacs' predefined faces.
* Temporary Face Changes:: Commands to temporarily modify the default text face
* Font Lock::              Minor mode for syntactic highlighting using faces.
* Highlight Interactively:: Tell Emacs what text to highlight.
* Fringes::                Enabling or disabling window fringes.
* Displaying Boundaries::  Displaying top and bottom of the buffer.
* Useless Whitespace::     Showing possibly-spurious trailing whitespace.
* Selective Display::      Hiding lines with lots of indentation.
* Optional Mode Line::     Optional mode line display features.
* Text Display::           How text characters are normally displayed.
* Cursor Display::         Features for displaying the cursor.
* Line Truncation::        Truncating lines to fit the screen width instead
                             of continuing them to multiple screen lines.
* Visual Line Mode::       Word wrap and screen line-based editing.
* Display Custom::         Information on variables for customizing display.

Searching and Replacement

* Incremental Search::	   Search happens as you type the string.
* Nonincremental Search::  Specify entire string and then search.
* Word Search::		   Search for sequence of words.
* Regexp Search::	   Search for match for a regexp.
* Regexps::		   Syntax of regular expressions.
* Regexp Backslash::       Regular expression constructs starting with `\'.
* Regexp Example::         A complex regular expression explained.
* Search Case::		   To ignore case while searching, or not.
* Replace::		   Search, and replace some or all matches.
* Other Repeating Search:: Operating on all matches for some regexp.

Incremental Search

* Basic Isearch::       Basic incremental search commands.
* Repeat Isearch::      Searching for the same string again.
* Error in Isearch::    When your string is not found.
* Special Isearch::     Special input in incremental search.
* Isearch Yank::        Commands that grab text into the search string
                          or else edit the search string.
* Isearch Scroll::      Scrolling during an incremental search.
* Isearch Minibuffer::  Incremental search of the minibuffer history.
* Slow Isearch::        Incremental search features for slow terminals.

Replacement Commands

* Unconditional Replace::  Replacing all matches for a string.
* Regexp Replace::	   Replacing all matches for a regexp.
* Replacement and Case::   How replacements preserve case of letters.
* Query Replace::	   How to use querying.

Commands for Fixing Typos

* Undo::                The Undo commands.
* Transpose::	        Exchanging two characters, words, lines, lists...
* Fixing Case::         Correcting case of last word entered.
* Spelling::	        Apply spelling checker to a word, or a whole file.

Keyboard Macros

* Basic Keyboard Macro::     Defining and running keyboard macros.
* Keyboard Macro Ring::      Where previous keyboard macros are saved.
* Keyboard Macro Counter::   Inserting incrementing numbers in macros.
* Keyboard Macro Query::     Making keyboard macros do different things each time.
* Save Keyboard Macro::      Giving keyboard macros names; saving them in files.
* Edit Keyboard Macro::      Editing keyboard macros.
* Keyboard Macro Step-Edit:: Interactively executing and editing a keyboard
                                macro.

File Handling

* File Names::          How to type and edit file-name arguments.
* Visiting::            Visiting a file prepares Emacs to edit the file.
* Saving::              Saving makes your changes permanent.
* Reverting::           Reverting cancels all the changes not saved.
* Autorevert::          Auto Reverting non-file buffers.
* Auto Save::           Auto Save periodically protects against loss of data.
* File Aliases::        Handling multiple names for one file.
* Directories::         Creating, deleting, and listing file directories.
* Comparing Files::     Finding where two files differ.
* Diff Mode::           Mode for editing file differences.
* Misc File Ops::       Other things you can do on files.
* Compressed Files::    Accessing compressed files.
* File Archives::       Operating on tar, zip, jar etc. archive files.
* Remote Files::        Accessing files on other sites.
* Quoted File Names::   Quoting special characters in file names.
* File Name Cache::     Completion against a list of files you often use.
* File Conveniences::   Convenience Features for Finding Files.
* Filesets::            Handling sets of files.

Saving Files

* Save Commands::       Commands for saving files.
* Backup::              How Emacs saves the old version of your file.
* Customize Save::      Customizing the saving of files.
* Interlocking::        How Emacs protects against simultaneous editing
                          of one file by two users.
* File Shadowing::      Copying files to "shadows" automatically.
* Time Stamps::         Emacs can update time stamps on saved files.

Backup Files

* Backup Names::	How backup files are named.
* Backup Deletion::	Emacs deletes excess numbered backups.
* Backup Copying::	Backups can be made by copying or renaming.

Auto Reverting Non-File Buffers

* Auto Reverting the Buffer Menu:: Auto Revert of the Buffer Menu.
* Auto Reverting Dired::           Auto Revert of Dired buffers.
* Supporting additional buffers::  How to add more Auto Revert support.

Auto-Saving: Protection Against Disasters

* Auto Save Files::     The file where auto-saved changes are
                          actually made until you save the file.
* Auto Save Control::   Controlling when and how often to auto-save.
* Recover::	        Recovering text from auto-save files.

Using Multiple Buffers

* Select Buffer::       Creating a new buffer or reselecting an old one.
* List Buffers::        Getting a list of buffers that exist.
* Misc Buffer::	        Renaming; changing read-onlyness; copying text.
* Kill Buffer::	        Killing buffers you no longer need.
* Several Buffers::     How to go through the list of all buffers
			  and operate variously on several of them.
* Indirect Buffers::    An indirect buffer shares the text of another buffer.
* Buffer Convenience::  Convenience and customization features for
                          buffer handling.

Convenience Features and Customization of Buffer Handling

* Uniquify::            Making buffer names unique with directory parts.
* Iswitchb::            Switching between buffers with substrings.
* Buffer Menus::        Configurable buffer menu.

Multiple Windows

* Basic Window::        Introduction to Emacs windows.
* Split Window::        New windows are made by splitting existing windows.
* Other Window::        Moving to another window or doing something to it.
* Pop Up Window::       Finding a file or buffer in another window.
* Force Same Window::   Forcing certain buffers to appear in the selected
                          window rather than in another window.
* Change Window::       Deleting windows and changing their sizes.
* Window Convenience::  Convenience functions for window handling.

Frames and Graphical Displays

* Cut and Paste::       Mouse commands for cut and paste.
* Mouse References::    Using the mouse to select an item from a list.
* Menu Mouse Clicks::   Mouse clicks that bring up menus.
* Mode Line Mouse::     Mouse clicks on the mode line.
* Creating Frames::     Creating additional Emacs frames with various contents.
* Frame Commands::      Iconifying, deleting, and switching frames.
* Fonts::               Changing the frame font.
* Speedbar::            How to make and use a speedbar frame.
* Multiple Displays::   How one Emacs job can talk to several displays.
* Special Buffer Frames::  You can make certain buffers have their own frames.
* Frame Parameters::    Changing the colors and other modes of frames.
* Scroll Bars::	        How to enable and disable scroll bars; how to use them.
* Wheeled Mice::        Using mouse wheels for scrolling.
* Drag and Drop::       Using drag and drop to open files and insert text.
* Menu Bars::	        Enabling and disabling the menu bar.
* Tool Bars::           Enabling and disabling the tool bar.
* Dialog Boxes::        Controlling use of dialog boxes.
* Tooltips::            Displaying information at the current mouse position.
* Mouse Avoidance::     Moving the mouse pointer out of the way.
* Non-Window Terminals::  Multiple frames on terminals that show only one.
* Text-Only Mouse::     Using the mouse in text-only terminals.

Killing and Yanking on Graphical Displays

* Mouse Commands::      Moving, cutting, and pasting, with the mouse.
* Word and Line Mouse:: Mouse commands for selecting whole words or lines.
* Cut/Paste Other App:: Transfering text between Emacs and other apps.
* Secondary Selection:: Cutting without altering point and mark.
* Clipboard::           Using the clipboard for selections.

International Character Set Support

* International Chars::     Basic concepts of multibyte characters.
* Enabling Multibyte::      Controlling whether to use multibyte characters.
* Language Environments::   Setting things up for the language you use.
* Input Methods::           Entering text characters not on your keyboard.
* Select Input Method::     Specifying your choice of input methods.
* Coding Systems::          Character set conversion when you read and
                              write files, and so on.
* Recognize Coding::        How Emacs figures out which conversion to use.
* Specify Coding::          Specifying a file's coding system explicitly.
* Output Coding::           Choosing coding systems for output.
* Text Coding::             Choosing conversion to use for file text.
* Communication Coding::    Coding systems for interprocess communication.
* File Name Coding::        Coding systems for file _names_.
* Terminal Coding::         Specifying coding systems for converting
                              terminal input and output.
* Fontsets::                Fontsets are collections of fonts
                              that cover the whole spectrum of characters.
* Defining Fontsets::       Defining a new fontset.
* Modifying Fontsets::      Modifying an existing fontset.
* Undisplayable Characters::When characters don't display.
* Unibyte Mode::            You can pick one European character set
                              to use without multibyte characters.
* Charsets::                How Emacs groups its internal character codes.

Major Modes

* Choosing Modes::      How major modes are specified or chosen.

Indentation

* Indentation Commands::  Various commands and techniques for indentation.
* Tab Stops::		  You can set arbitrary "tab stops" and then
			    indent to the next tab stop when you want to.
* Just Spaces::		  You can request indentation using just spaces.

Commands for Human Languages

* Words::	        Moving over and killing words.
* Sentences::	        Moving over and killing sentences.
* Paragraphs::	        Moving over paragraphs.
* Pages::	        Moving over pages.
* Filling::	        Filling or justifying text.
* Case::	        Changing the case of text.
* Text Mode::	        The major modes for editing text files.
* Outline Mode::        Editing outlines.
* TeX Mode::	        Editing input to the formatter TeX.
* HTML Mode::           Editing HTML and SGML files.
* Nroff Mode::	        Editing input to the formatter nroff.
* Formatted Text::      Editing formatted text directly in WYSIWYG fashion.
* Text Based Tables::   Editing text-based tables in WYSIWYG fashion.

Filling Text

* Auto Fill::	        Auto Fill mode breaks long lines automatically.
* Fill Commands::       Commands to refill paragraphs and center lines.
* Fill Prefix::	        Filling paragraphs that are indented
                          or in a comment, etc.
* Adaptive Fill::       How Emacs can determine the fill prefix automatically.
* Refill::              Keeping paragraphs filled.
* Longlines::           Editing text with very long lines.

Outline Mode

* Outline Format::      What the text of an outline looks like.
* Outline Motion::	Special commands for moving through
                          outlines.
* Outline Visibility::  Commands to control what is visible.
* Outline Views::       Outlines and multiple views.
* Foldout::             Folding means zooming in on outlines.

TeX Mode

* TeX Editing::         Special commands for editing in TeX mode.
* LaTeX Editing::       Additional commands for LaTeX input files.
* TeX Print::           Commands for printing part of a file with TeX.
* TeX Misc::            Customization of TeX mode, and related features.

Editing Formatted Text

* Requesting Formatted Text::   Entering and exiting Enriched mode.
* Hard and Soft Newlines::      There are two different kinds of newlines.
* Editing Format Info::         How to edit text properties.
* Format Faces::                Bold, italic, underline, etc.
* Format Colors::               Changing the color of text.
* Format Indentation::          Changing the left and right margins.
* Format Justification::        Centering, setting text flush with the
                                  left or right margin, etc.
* Format Properties::           The "special" text properties submenu.
* Forcing Enriched Mode::       How to force use of Enriched mode.


Editing Text-based Tables

* Table Definition::    What is a text based table.
* Table Creation::      How to create a table.
* Table Recognition::   How to activate and deactivate tables.
* Cell Commands::       Cell-oriented commands in a table.
* Cell Justification::  Justifying cell contents.
* Row Commands::        Manipulating rows of table cell.
* Column Commands::     Manipulating columns of table cell.
* Fixed Width Mode::    Fixing cell width.
* Table Conversion::    Converting between plain text and tables.
* Measuring Tables::    Analyzing table dimension.
* Table Misc::          Table miscellany.

Editing Programs

* Program Modes::       Major modes for editing programs.
* Defuns::              Commands to operate on major top-level parts
                          of a program.
* Program Indent::      Adjusting indentation to show the nesting.
* Parentheses::         Commands that operate on parentheses.
* Comments::	        Inserting, killing, and aligning comments.
* Documentation::       Getting documentation of functions you plan to call.
* Hideshow::            Displaying blocks selectively.
* Symbol Completion::   Completion on symbol names of your program or language.
* Glasses::             Making identifiersLikeThis more readable.
* Semantic::            Suite of editing tools based on source code parsing.
* Misc for Programs::   Other Emacs features useful for editing programs.
* C Modes::             Special commands of C, C++, Objective-C,
                          Java, and Pike modes.
* Asm Mode::            Asm mode and its special features.
* Fortran::             Fortran mode and its special features.

Top-Level Definitions, or Defuns

* Left Margin Paren::   An open-paren or similar opening delimiter
                          starts a defun if it is at the left margin.
* Moving by Defuns::    Commands to move over or mark a major definition.
* Imenu::               Making buffer indexes as menus.
* Which Function::      Which Function mode shows which function you are in.

Indentation for Programs

* Basic Indent::	Indenting a single line.
* Multi-line Indent::   Commands to reindent many lines at once.
* Lisp Indent::		Specifying how each Lisp function should be indented.
* C Indent::		Extra features for indenting C and related modes.
* Custom C Indent::	Controlling indentation style for C and related modes.

Commands for Editing with Parentheses

* Expressions::         Expressions with balanced parentheses.
* Moving by Parens::    Commands for moving up, down and across
                          in the structure of parentheses.
* Matching::	        Insertion of a close-delimiter flashes matching open.

Manipulating Comments

* Comment Commands::    Inserting, killing, and aligning comments.
* Multi-Line Comments:: Commands for adding and editing multi-line comments.
* Options for Comments::Customizing the comment features.

Documentation Lookup

* Info Lookup::         Looking up library functions and commands
                          in Info files.
* Man Page::            Looking up man pages of library functions and commands.
* Lisp Doc::            Looking up Emacs Lisp functions, etc.

C and Related Modes

* Motion in C::         Commands to move by C statements, etc.
* Electric C::          Colon and other chars can automatically reindent.
* Hungry Delete::       A more powerful DEL command.
* Other C Commands::    Filling comments, viewing expansion of macros,
                          and other neat features.

Fortran Mode

* Fortran Motion::	Moving point by statements or subprograms.
* Fortran Indent::	Indentation commands for Fortran.
* Fortran Comments::	Inserting and aligning comments.
* Fortran Autofill::	Auto fill support for Fortran.
* Fortran Columns::	Measuring columns for valid Fortran.
* Fortran Abbrev::	Built-in abbrevs for Fortran keywords.

Fortran Indentation

* ForIndent Commands::  Commands for indenting and filling Fortran.
* ForIndent Cont::      How continuation lines indent.
* ForIndent Num::       How line numbers auto-indent.
* ForIndent Conv::      Conventions you must obey to avoid trouble.
* ForIndent Vars::      Variables controlling Fortran indent style.

Compiling and Testing Programs

* Compilation::		Compiling programs in languages other
			  than Lisp (C, Pascal, etc.).
* Compilation Mode::    The mode for visiting compiler errors.
* Compilation Shell::   Customizing your shell properly
                          for use in the compilation buffer.
* Grep Searching::      Searching with grep.
* Flymake::             Finding syntax errors on the fly.
* Debuggers::		Running symbolic debuggers for non-Lisp programs.
* Executing Lisp::	Various modes for editing Lisp programs,
			  with different facilities for running
			  the Lisp programs.
* Lisp Libraries::      Creating Lisp programs to run in Emacs.
* Lisp Eval::		Executing a single Lisp expression in Emacs.
* Lisp Interaction::    Executing Lisp in an Emacs buffer.
* External Lisp::	Communicating through Emacs with a separate Lisp.

Running Debuggers Under Emacs

* Starting GUD::	How to start a debugger subprocess.
* Debugger Operation::	Connection between the debugger and source buffers.
* Commands of GUD::	Key bindings for common commands.
* GUD Customization::	Defining your own commands for GUD.
* GDB Graphical Interface::  An enhanced mode that uses GDB features to
                          implement a graphical debugging environment through
                          Emacs.

GDB Graphical Interface

* GDB-UI Layout::       Control the number of displayed buffers.
* Source Buffers::      Use the mouse in the fringe/margin to
                          control your program.
* Breakpoints Buffer::  A breakpoint control panel.
* Stack Buffer::        Select a frame from the call stack.
* Other GDB-UI Buffers::Input/output, locals, registers,
                          assembler, threads and memory buffers.
* Watch Expressions::   Monitor variable values in the speedbar.

Maintaining Large Programs

* Version Control::     Using version control systems.
* Change Log::	        Maintaining a change history for your program.
* Tags::	        Go directly to any function in your program in one
			  command.  Tags remembers which file it is in.
* EDE::                 An integrated development environment for Emacs.
* Emerge::              A convenient way of merging two versions of a program.

Version Control

* Introduction to VC::  How version control works in general.
* VC Mode Line::        How the mode line shows version control status.
* Basic VC Editing::    How to edit a file under version control.
* Old Revisions::       Examining and comparing old versions.
* Secondary VC Commands:: The commands used a little less frequently.
* VC Directory Mode::   Listing files managed by version control.
* Branches::            Multiple lines of development.
* Remote Repositories:: Efficient access to remote CVS servers.
* Revision Tags::       Symbolic names for revisions.
* Miscellaneous VC::    Various other commands and features of VC.
* Customizing VC::      Variables that change VC's behavior.

Introduction to Version Control

* Why Version Control?::    Understanding the problems it addresses.
* Version Control Systems:: Supported version control back-end systems.
* VCS Concepts::            Words and concepts related to version control.
* Types of Log File::       The VCS log in contrast to the ChangeLog.

Basic Editing under Version Control

* VC With A Merging VCS::  Without locking: default mode for CVS.
* VC With A Locking VCS::  RCS in its default mode, SCCS, and optionally CVS.
* Advanced C-x v v::       Advanced features available with a prefix argument.
* Log Buffer::             Features available in log entry buffers.

The Secondary Commands of VC

* Registering::         Putting a file under version control.
* VC Change Log::       Viewing the VC Change Log.
* VC Undo::             Canceling changes before or after check-in.

VC Directory Mode

* VC Directory Buffer::   What the buffer looks like and means.
* VC Directory Commands:: Commands to use in a VC directory buffer.

Multiple Branches of a File

* Switching Branches::    How to get to another existing branch.
* Creating Branches::     How to start a new branch.
* Merging::               Transferring changes between branches.
* Multi-User Branching::  Multiple users working at multiple branches
                            in parallel.

Remote Repositories

* Version Backups::       Keeping local copies of repository versions.
* Local Version Control:: Using another version system for local editing.

Revision Tags

* Making Revision Tags::  The tag facilities.
* Revision Tag Caveats::  Things to be careful of when using tags.

Miscellaneous Commands and Features of VC

* Change Logs and VC::    Generating a change log file from log entries.
* Renaming and VC::       A command to rename both the source and master
                            file correctly.
* Version Headers::       Inserting version control headers into working files.

Customizing VC

* General VC Options::    Options that apply to multiple back ends.
* RCS and SCCS::          Options for RCS and SCCS.
* CVS Options::           Options for CVS.

Change Logs

* Change Log Commands:: Commands for editing change log files.
* Format of ChangeLog:: What the change log file looks like.

Tags Tables

* Tag Syntax::		Tag syntax for various types of code and text files.
* Create Tags Table::	Creating a tags table with `etags'.
* Etags Regexps::       Create arbitrary tags using regular expressions.
* Select Tags Table::	How to visit a tags table.
* Find Tag::		Commands to find the definition of a specific tag.
* Tags Search::		Using a tags table for searching and replacing.
* List Tags::		Listing and finding tags defined in a file.

Merging Files with Emerge

* Overview of Emerge::	How to start Emerge.  Basic concepts.
* Submodes of Emerge::	Fast mode vs. Edit mode.
			  Skip Prefers mode and Auto Advance mode.
* State of Difference::	You do the merge by specifying state A or B
			  for each difference.
* Merge Commands::	Commands for selecting a difference,
			  changing states of differences, etc.
* Exiting Emerge::	What to do when you've finished the merge.
* Combining in Emerge::	    How to keep both alternatives for a difference.
* Fine Points of Emerge::   Miscellaneous issues.

Abbrevs

* Abbrev Concepts::     Fundamentals of defined abbrevs.
* Defining Abbrevs::    Defining an abbrev, so it will expand when typed.
* Expanding Abbrevs::   Controlling expansion: prefixes, canceling expansion.
* Editing Abbrevs::     Viewing or editing the entire list of defined abbrevs.
* Saving Abbrevs::      Saving the entire list of abbrevs for another session.
* Dynamic Abbrevs::     Abbreviations for words already in the buffer.
* Dabbrev Customization:: What is a word, for dynamic abbrevs.  Case handling.


Editing Pictures

* Basic Picture::         Basic concepts and simple commands of Picture Mode.
* Insert in Picture::     Controlling direction of cursor motion
                            after "self-inserting" characters.
* Tabs in Picture::       Various features for tab stops and indentation.
* Rectangles in Picture:: Clearing and superimposing rectangles.

Sending Mail

* Mail Format:: 	Format of the mail being composed.
* Mail Headers::        Details of some standard mail header fields.
* Mail Aliases::        Abbreviating and grouping mail addresses.
* Mail Commands::   	Special commands for editing mail being composed.
* Mail Signature::      Adding a signature to every message.
* Mail Amusements::     Distracting the NSA; adding fortune messages.
* Mail Methods::        Using alternative mail-composition methods.

Mail Commands

* Mail Sending::        Commands to send the message.
* Header Editing::      Commands to move to header fields and edit them.
* Citing Mail::         Quoting a message you are replying to.
* Mail Misc::           Attachments, spell checking, etc.

Reading Mail with Rmail

* Rmail Basics::        Basic concepts of Rmail, and simple use.
* Rmail Scrolling::     Scrolling through a message.
* Rmail Motion::        Moving to another message.
* Rmail Deletion::      Deleting and expunging messages.
* Rmail Inbox::         How mail gets into the Rmail file.
* Rmail Files::         Using multiple Rmail files.
* Rmail Output::        Copying message out to files.
* Rmail Labels::        Classifying messages by labeling them.
* Rmail Attributes::    Certain standard labels, called attributes.
* Rmail Reply::         Sending replies to messages you are viewing.
* Rmail Summary::       Summaries show brief info on many messages.
* Rmail Sorting::       Sorting messages in Rmail.
* Rmail Display::       How Rmail displays a message; customization.
* Rmail Coding::        How Rmail handles decoding character sets.
* Rmail Editing::       Editing message text and headers in Rmail.
* Rmail Digest::        Extracting the messages from a digest message.
* Rmail Rot13::         Reading messages encoded in the rot13 code.
* Movemail::            More details of fetching new mail.
* Remote Mailboxes::    Retrieving mail from remote mailboxes.
* Other Mailbox Formats:: Retrieving mail from local mailboxes in
                          various formats.

Summaries

* Rmail Make Summary::	     Making various sorts of summaries.
* Rmail Summary Edit::	     Manipulating messages from the summary.

Dired, the Directory Editor

* Dired Enter:: 	     How to invoke Dired.
* Dired Navigation::         Special motion commands in the Dired buffer.
* Dired Deletion::           Deleting files with Dired.
* Flagging Many Files::      Flagging files based on their names.
* Dired Visiting::           Other file operations through Dired.
* Marks vs Flags::	     Flagging for deletion vs marking.
* Operating on Files::	     How to copy, rename, print, compress, etc.
			       either one file or several files.
* Shell Commands in Dired::  Running a shell command on the marked files.
* Transforming File Names::  Using patterns to rename multiple files.
* Comparison in Dired::	     Running `diff' by way of Dired.
* Subdirectories in Dired::  Adding subdirectories to the Dired buffer.
* Subdir Switches::          Subdirectory switches in Dired.
* Subdirectory Motion::	     Moving across subdirectories, and up and down.
* Hiding Subdirectories::    Making subdirectories visible or invisible.
* Dired Updating::           Discarding lines for files of no interest.
* Dired and Find::	     Using `find' to choose the files for Dired.
* Wdired::                   Operating on files by editing the Dired buffer.
* Image-Dired::              Viewing image thumbnails in Dired.
* Misc Dired Features::      Various other features.

The Calendar and the Diary

* Calendar Motion::     Moving through the calendar; selecting a date.
* Scroll Calendar::     Bringing earlier or later months onto the screen.
* Counting Days::       How many days are there between two dates?
* General Calendar::    Exiting or recomputing the calendar.
* Writing Calendar Files:: Writing calendars to files of various formats.
* Holidays::            Displaying dates of holidays.
* Sunrise/Sunset::      Displaying local times of sunrise and sunset.
* Lunar Phases::        Displaying phases of the moon.
* Other Calendars::     Converting dates to other calendar systems.
* Diary::               Displaying events from your diary.
* Appointments::	Reminders when it's time to do something.
* Importing Diary::     Converting diary events to/from other formats.
* Daylight Saving::    How to specify when daylight saving time is active.
* Time Intervals::      Keeping track of time intervals.
* Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage:: Advanced Calendar/Diary customization.

Movement in the Calendar

* Calendar Unit Motion::      Moving by days, weeks, months, and years.
* Move to Beginning or End::  Moving to start/end of weeks, months, and years.
* Specified Dates::	      Moving to the current date or another
				specific date.

Conversion To and From Other Calendars

* Calendar Systems::	   The calendars Emacs understands
			     (aside from Gregorian).
* To Other Calendar::	   Converting the selected date to various calendars.
* From Other Calendar::	   Moving to a date specified in another calendar.
* Mayan Calendar::	   Moving to a date specified in a Mayan calendar.

The Diary

* Displaying the Diary::   Viewing diary entries and associated calendar dates.
* Format of Diary File::   Entering events in your diary.
* Date Formats::	   Various ways you can specify dates.
* Adding to Diary::	   Commands to create diary entries.
* Special Diary Entries::  Anniversaries, blocks of dates, cyclic entries, etc.

Customizing the Calendar and Diary

* Calendar Customizing::   Calendar layout and hooks.
* Holiday Customizing::    Defining your own holidays.
* Date Display Format::    Changing the format.
* Time Display Format::    Changing the format.
* Diary Customizing::      Defaults you can set.
* Non-Gregorian Diary::    Diary entries based on other calendars.
* Diary Display::          A choice of ways to display the diary.
* Fancy Diary Display::    Sorting diary entries, using included diary files.
* Sexp Diary Entries::     More flexible diary entries.

Document Viewing

* Navigation::	Navigation inside DocView buffers.
* Searching::	Searching inside documents.
* Slicing::	Specifying which part of pages should be displayed.
* Conversion::	Influencing and triggering conversion.

Gnus

* Buffers of Gnus::	The group, summary, and article buffers.
* Gnus Startup::	What you should know about starting Gnus.
* Summary of Gnus::	A short description of the basic Gnus commands.

Running Shell Commands from Emacs

* Single Shell::	How to run one shell command and return.
* Interactive Shell::	Permanent shell taking input via Emacs.
* Shell Mode::		Special Emacs commands used with permanent shell.
* Shell Prompts::       Two ways to recognize shell prompts.
* Shell History::       Repeating previous commands in a shell buffer.
* Directory Tracking::  Keeping track when the subshell changes directory.
* Shell Options::       Options for customizing Shell mode.
* Terminal emulator::   An Emacs window as a terminal emulator.
* Term Mode::           Special Emacs commands used in Term mode.
* Paging in Term::      Paging in the terminal emulator.
* Remote Host::		Connecting to another computer.
* Serial Terminal::     Connecting to a serial port.

Shell Command History

* Shell Ring::           Fetching commands from the history list.
* Shell History Copying::Moving to a command and then copying it.
* History References::   Expanding `!'-style history references.

Using Emacs as a Server

* Invoking emacsclient:: Connecting to the Emacs server.
* emacsclient Options::  Emacs client startup options.

Printing Hard Copies

* PostScript::	         Printing buffers or regions as PostScript.
* PostScript Variables:: Customizing the PostScript printing commands.
* Printing Package::     An optional advanced printing interface.

Hyperlinking and Navigation Features

* Browse-URL::          Following URLs.
* Goto Address mode::   Activating URLs.
* FFAP::                Finding files etc. at point.

Customization

* Minor Modes::		Each minor mode is a feature you can turn on
			  independently of any others.
* Easy Customization::  Convenient way to browse and change settings.
* Variables::		Many Emacs commands examine Emacs variables
			  to decide what to do; by setting variables,
			  you can control their functioning.
* Key Bindings::	The keymaps say what command each key runs.
			  By changing them, you can "redefine keys".
* Syntax::		The syntax table controls how words and
			  expressions are parsed.
* Init File::		How to write common customizations in the
			  `.emacs' file.

Easy Customization Interface

* Customization Groups::     How settings are classified in a structure.
* Browsing Custom::          Browsing and searching for settings.
* Changing a Variable::      How to edit an option's value and set the option.
* Saving Customizations::    Specifying the file for saving customizations.
* Face Customization::       How to edit the attributes of a face.
* Specific Customization::   Making a customization buffer for specific
                                variables, faces, or groups.
* Custom Themes::            How to define collections of customized options
                                that can be loaded and unloaded together.

Variables

* Examining::	        Examining or setting one variable's value.
* Hooks::	        Hook variables let you specify programs for parts
		          of Emacs to run on particular occasions.
* Locals::	        Per-buffer values of variables.
* File Variables::      How files can specify variable values.
* Directory Variables:: How variable values can be specified by directory.

Local Variables in Files

* Specifying File Variables:: Specifying file local variables.
* Safe File Variables::       Making sure file local variables are safe.

Customizing Key Bindings

* Keymaps::             Generalities.  The global keymap.
* Prefix Keymaps::      Keymaps for prefix keys.
* Local Keymaps::       Major and minor modes have their own keymaps.
* Minibuffer Maps::     The minibuffer uses its own local keymaps.
* Rebinding::           How to redefine one key's meaning conveniently.
* Init Rebinding::      Rebinding keys with your init file, `.emacs'.
* Modifier Keys::       Using modifier keys in key bindings.
* Function Keys::       Rebinding terminal function keys.
* Named ASCII Chars::   Distinguishing <TAB> from C-i, and so on.
* Mouse Buttons::       Rebinding mouse buttons in Emacs.
* Disabling::           Disabling a command means confirmation is required
                          before it can be executed.  This is done to protect
                          beginners from surprises.

The Init File, `~/.emacs'

* Init Syntax::	        Syntax of constants in Emacs Lisp.
* Init Examples::       How to do some things with an init file.
* Terminal Init::       Each terminal type can have an init file.
* Find Init::	        How Emacs finds the init file.
* Init Non-ASCII::      Using non-ASCII characters in an init file.

Dealing with Emacs Trouble

* DEL Does Not Delete:: What to do if <DEL> doesn't delete.
* Stuck Recursive::     `[...]' in mode line around the parentheses.
* Screen Garbled::      Garbage on the screen.
* Text Garbled::        Garbage in the text.
* Memory Full::         How to cope when you run out of memory.
* After a Crash::       Recovering editing in an Emacs session that crashed.
* Emergency Escape::    Emergency escape---
                          What to do if Emacs stops responding.
* Total Frustration::   When you are at your wits' end.

Reporting Bugs

* Bug Criteria::        Have you really found a bug?
* Understanding Bug Reporting::	How to report a bug effectively.
* Checklist::		Steps to follow for a good bug report.
* Sending Patches::	How to send a patch for GNU Emacs.

Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

* Action Arguments::	Arguments to visit files, load libraries,
			  and call functions.
* Initial Options::     Arguments that take effect while starting Emacs.
* Command Example::     Examples of using command line arguments.
* Resume Arguments::	Specifying arguments when you resume a running Emacs.
* Environment::         Environment variables that Emacs uses.
* Display X::           Changing the default display and using remote login.
* Font X::	        Choosing a font for text, under X.
* Colors::	        Choosing display colors.
* Window Size X::       Start-up window size, under X.
* Borders X::	        Internal and external borders, under X.
* Title X::             Specifying the initial frame's title.
* Icons X::             Choosing what sort of icon to use, under X.
* Misc X::              Other display options.

Environment Variables

* General Variables::	Environment variables that all versions of Emacs use.
* Misc Variables::	Certain system-specific variables.
* MS-Windows Registry:: An alternative to the environment on MS-Windows.

X Options and Resources

* Resources::           Using X resources with Emacs (in general).
* Table of Resources::  Table of specific X resources that affect Emacs.
* Face Resources::      X resources for customizing faces.
* Lucid Resources::     X resources for Lucid menus.
* LessTif Resources::   X resources for LessTif and Motif menus.
* GTK resources::       Resources for GTK widgets.

GTK resources

* GTK widget names::      How widgets in GTK are named in general.
* GTK Names in Emacs::    GTK widget names in Emacs.
* GTK styles::            What can be customized in a GTK widget.

Emacs and Mac OS / GNUstep

* Mac / GNUstep Basics::        Basic Emacs usage under GNUstep or Mac OS.
* Mac / GNUstep Customization:: Customizations under GNUstep or Mac OS.
* Mac / GNUstep Events::        How window system events are handled.
* GNUstep Support::             Details on status of GNUstep support.

Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

* Text and Binary::     Text files use CRLF to terminate lines.
* Windows Files::       File-name conventions on Windows.
* ls in Lisp::          Emulation of `ls' for Dired.
* Windows HOME::        Where Emacs looks for your `.emacs'.
* Windows Keyboard::    Windows-specific keyboard features.
* Windows Mouse::       Windows-specific mouse features.
* Windows Processes::   Running subprocesses on Windows.
* Windows Printing::    How to specify the printer on MS-Windows.
* Windows Fonts::       Specifying fonts on MS-Windows.
* Windows Misc::        Miscellaneous Windows features.
* MS-DOS::              Using Emacs on MS-DOS (otherwise known as "MS-DOG").

Emacs and MS-DOS

* MS-DOS Keyboard::     Keyboard conventions on MS-DOS.
* MS-DOS Mouse::        Mouse conventions on MS-DOS.
* MS-DOS Display::      Fonts, frames and display size on MS-DOS.
* MS-DOS File Names::   File name conventions on MS-DOS.
* MS-DOS Printing::     Printing specifics on MS-DOS.
* MS-DOS and MULE::     Support for internationalization on MS-DOS.
* MS-DOS Processes::    Running subprocesses on MS-DOS.


File: emacs,  Node: Distrib,  Next: Intro,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top

Distribution
************

GNU Emacs is "free software"; this means that everyone is free to use
it and free to redistribute it on certain conditions.  GNU Emacs is not
in the public domain; it is copyrighted and there are restrictions on
its distribution, but these restrictions are designed to permit
everything that a good cooperating citizen would want to do.  What is
not allowed is to try to prevent others from further sharing any
version of GNU Emacs that they might get from you.  The precise
conditions are found in the GNU General Public License that comes with
Emacs and also appears in this manual(1).  *Note Copying::.

   One way to get a copy of GNU Emacs is from someone else who has it.
You need not ask for our permission to do so, or tell any one else;
just copy it.  If you have access to the Internet, you can get the
latest distribution version of GNU Emacs by anonymous FTP; see
`http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs' on our website for more information.

   You may also receive GNU Emacs when you buy a computer.  Computer
manufacturers are free to distribute copies on the same terms that
apply to everyone else.  These terms require them to give you the full
sources, including whatever changes they may have made, and to permit
you to redistribute the GNU Emacs received from them under the usual
terms of the General Public License.  In other words, the program must
be free for you when you get it, not just free for the manufacturer.

   You can also order copies of GNU Emacs from the Free Software
Foundation.  This is a convenient and reliable way to get a copy; it is
also a good way to help fund our work.  We also sell hardcopy versions
of this manual and `An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp', by
Robert J. Chassell.  You can visit our online store at
`http://shop.fsf.org/'.  For further information, write to

     Free Software Foundation
     51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor
     Boston, MA 02110-1301
     USA

   The income from sales goes to support the foundation's purpose: the
development of new free software, and improvements to our existing
programs including GNU Emacs.

   If you find GNU Emacs useful, please *send a donation* to the Free
Software Foundation to support our work.  Donations to the Free
Software Foundation are tax deductible in the US.  If you use GNU Emacs
at your workplace, please suggest that the company make a donation.  If
company policy is unsympathetic to the idea of donating to charity, you
might instead suggest ordering a CD-ROM from the Foundation
occasionally, or subscribing to periodic updates.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) This manual is itself covered by the GNU Free Documentation
License (see the reverse title page in the printed manual or view the
full source for online formats to see the precise conditions).  This
license is similar in spirit to the General Public License, but is more
suitable for documentation.  *Note GNU Free Documentation License::.


File: emacs,  Node: Intro,  Next: Glossary,  Prev: Distrib,  Up: Top

Introduction
************

You are reading about GNU Emacs, the GNU incarnation of the advanced,
self-documenting, customizable, extensible editor Emacs.  (The `G' in
`GNU' is not silent.)

   We call Emacs "advanced" because it can do much more than simple
insertion and deletion of text.  It can control subprocesses, indent
programs automatically, show multiple files at once, and more.  Emacs
editing commands operate in terms of characters, words, lines,
sentences, paragraphs, and pages, as well as expressions and comments
in various programming languages.

   "Self-documenting" means that at any time you can use special
commands, known as "help commands", to find out what your options are,
or to find out what any command does, or to find all the commands that
pertain to a given topic.  *Note Help::.

   "Customizable" means that you can easily alter the behavior of Emacs
commands in simple ways.  For instance, if you use a programming
language in which comments start with `<**' and end with `**>', you can
tell the Emacs comment manipulation commands to use those strings
(*note Comments::).  To take another example, you can rebind the basic
cursor motion commands (up, down, left and right) to any keys on the
keyboard that you find comfortable.  *Note Customization::.

   "Extensible" means that you can go beyond simple customization and
create entirely new commands.  New commands are simply programs written
in the Lisp language, which are run by Emacs's own Lisp interpreter.
Existing commands can even be redefined in the middle of an editing
session, without having to restart Emacs.  Most of the editing commands
in Emacs are written in Lisp; the few exceptions could have been
written in Lisp but use C instead for efficiency.  Writing an extension
is programming, but non-programmers can use it afterwards.  *Note Emacs
Lisp Intro: (eintr)Top, if you want to learn Emacs Lisp programming.


File: emacs,  Node: Screen,  Next: User Input,  Prev: Acknowledgments,  Up: Top

1 The Organization of the Screen
********************************

On a text-only terminal, the Emacs display occupies the entire terminal
screen.  On a graphical display, such as on GNU/Linux using the X
Window System, Emacs creates its own windows to use.  We use the term
"frame" to mean the entire terminal screen or graphical window used by
Emacs.  Emacs uses both kinds of frames, in the same way, to display
your editing.  Emacs normally starts out with just one frame, but you
can create additional frames if you wish (*note Frames::).

   The frame consists of several distinct regions.  At the top of the
frame is a "menu bar", which allows you to access commands via a series
of menus.  On a graphical display, directly below the menu bar is a
"tool bar", a row of icons that perform editing commands if you click
on them.  At the very bottom of the frame is a special "echo area",
where short informative messages are displayed and where you enter
information when Emacs asks for it.

   The main area of the frame, below the tool bar (if one exists) and
above the echo area, is called "the window".  This is where Emacs
displays the "buffer": the text that you are editing.  On a graphical
display, the window possesses a "scroll bar" on one side, which you can
use to display different parts of the buffer in the window.  The last
line of the window is a "mode line".  This displays various information
about what is going on in the buffer, such as whether there are unsaved
changes, the editing modes that are in use, the current line number,
and so forth.

   When you start Emacs, there is normally only one window in the
frame.  However, you can subdivide this window horizontally or
vertically to create multiple windows, each of which can independently
display a buffer (*note Windows::).  In this manual, the word "window"
refers to the initial large window if not subdivided, or any one of the
multiple windows you have subdivided it into.

   At any time, one window is the "selected window".  On graphical
displays, the selected window normally shows a more prominent cursor
(usually solid and blinking) while other windows show a weaker cursor
(such as a hollow box).  Text terminals have just one cursor, so it
always appears in the selected window.  The buffer displayed in the
selected window is called the "current buffer", and it is where editing
happens.  Most Emacs commands implicitly apply to the current buffer;
the text displayed in unselected windows is mostly visible for
reference.  If you use multiple frames on a graphical display,
selecting a particular frame selects a window in that frame.

* Menu:

* Point::	        The place in the text where editing commands operate.
* Echo Area::           Short messages appear at the bottom of the screen.
* Mode Line::	        Interpreting the mode line.
* Menu Bar::            How to use the menu bar.


File: emacs,  Node: Point,  Next: Echo Area,  Up: Screen

1.1 Point
=========

The active cursor shows the location at which editing commands will
take effect, which is called "point"(1).  Many Emacs commands move
point to different places in the buffer; for example, you can place
point by clicking mouse button 1 (normally the left button) at the
desired location.

   While the cursor appears to be _on_ a character, you should think of
point as _between_ two characters; it points _before_ the character
that appears under the cursor.  For example, if your text looks like
`frob' with the cursor over the `b', then point is between the `o' and
the `b'.  If you insert the character `!' at that position, the result
is `fro!b', with point between the `!' and the `b'.  Thus, the cursor
remains over the `b', as before.

   Sometimes people speak of "the cursor" when they mean "point," or
speak of commands that move point as "cursor motion" commands.

   If you are editing several files in Emacs, each in its own buffer,
each buffer has its own point location.  A buffer that is not currently
displayed remembers its point location in case you display it again
later.  When Emacs displays multiple windows, each window has its own
point location.  If the same buffer appears in more than one window,
each window has its own point position in that buffer.

   On a graphical display, Emacs shows a cursor in each window; the
selected window's cursor is solid and blinking, and the other cursors
are hollow.  On a text-only terminal, there is just one cursor, in the
selected window; even though the unselected windows have their own
point positions, they do not display a cursor.  *Note Cursor Display::,
for customizable variables that control cursor display.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The term "point" comes from the character `.', which was the
command in TECO (the language in which the original Emacs was written)
for accessing the value now called "point."


File: emacs,  Node: Echo Area,  Next: Mode Line,  Prev: Point,  Up: Screen

1.2 The Echo Area
=================

The line at the very bottom of the frame is the "echo area".  It is
used to display small amounts of text for various purposes.

   "Echoing" means displaying the characters that you type.
Single-character commands, including most simple editing operations,
are not echoed.  Multi-character commands are echoed if you pause while
typing them: if you pause for more than a second in the middle of a
command, Emacs echoes all the characters of the command so far, to
prompt you for the rest of the command.  The echoed characters are
displayed in the echo area.  Once echoing has started, the rest of the
command echoes immediately as you type it.  This behavior is designed
to give confident users fast response, while giving hesitant users
maximum feedback.  *Note Display Custom::.

   If a command cannot do its job, it may display an "error message".
Error messages are also displayed in the echo area.  They may be
accompanied by beeping or by flashing the screen.

   Some commands display informative messages in the echo area.  Unlike
error messages, these messages are not announced with a beep or flash.
Sometimes the message tells you what the command has done, when this is
not obvious from looking at the text being edited.  Other times, the
sole purpose of a command is to show you a message giving you specific
information.  For example, `C-x =' (hold down <CTRL> and type `x', then
let go of <CTRL> and type `=') displays a message describing the
character position of point in the text and its current column in the
window.  Commands that take a long time often display messages ending
in `...' while they are working, and add `done' at the end when they
are finished.  They may also indicate progress with percentages.

   Informative echo-area messages are saved in a special buffer named
`*Messages*'.  (We have not explained buffers yet; see *Note Buffers::,
for more information about them.)  If you miss a message that appeared
briefly on the screen, you can switch to the `*Messages*' buffer to see
it again.  The `*Messages*' buffer is limited to a certain number of
lines, specified by the variable `message-log-max'.  (We have not
explained variables either; see *Note Variables::, for more information
about them.)  Beyond this limit, one line is deleted from the beginning
whenever a new message line is added at the end.

   The echo area is also used to display the "minibuffer", a special
window where you can input arguments to commands, such as the name of a
file to be edited.  When the minibuffer is in use, the text displayed
in the echo area begins with a "prompt string" (usually ending with a
colon); also, the active cursor appears within the minibuffer, which is
temporarily considered the selected window.  You can always get out of
the minibuffer by typing `C-g'.  *Note Minibuffer::.


File: emacs,  Node: Mode Line,  Next: Menu Bar,  Prev: Echo Area,  Up: Screen

1.3 The Mode Line
=================

At the bottom of each window is a "mode line", which describes what is
going on in the current buffer.  When there is only one window, the
mode line appears right above the echo area; it is the next-to-last
line in the frame.  On a graphical display, the mode line is drawn with
a 3D box appearance, and the mode line of the selected window has a
brighter color than that of unselected windows to make it stand out.
On a text-only terminal, the mode line is usually drawn in inverse
video.

   The text displayed in the mode line has the following format:

     -CS:CH-FR  BUF      POS LINE   (MAJOR MINOR)------

The CS string and the colon character after it describe the character
set and newline convention used for the current buffer.  Normally,
Emacs handles these settings intelligently, but it is sometimes useful
to have this information.

   CS describes the character set of the buffer (*note Coding
Systems::).  If it is a dash (`-'), that indicates the default state of
affairs: no special character set handling, except for the end-of-line
translations described in the next paragraph.  `=' means no conversion
whatsoever.  Letters represent various nontrivial "coding systems"--for
example, `1' represents ISO Latin-1.  On a text-only terminal, CS is
preceded by two additional characters that describe the coding system
for keyboard input and the coding system for terminal output.
Furthermore, if you are using an input method, CS is preceded by a
string that identifies the input method, which takes the form `I>',
`I+', or `I@' (*note Input Methods::).

   The character after CS is usually a colon.  However, under some
circumstances a different string is displayed, which indicates a
nontrivial end-of-line convention.  Usually, lines of text are
separated by "newline characters", but two other conventions are
sometimes used.  The MS-DOS convention is to use a "carriage-return"
character followed by a "linefeed" character; when editing such files,
the colon changes to either a backslash (`\') or `(DOS)', depending on
the operating system.  The Macintosh end-of-line convention is to use a
"carriage-return" character instead of a newline; when editing such
files, the colon indicator changes to either a forward slash (`/') or
`(Mac)'.  On some systems, Emacs displays `(Unix)' instead of the colon
for files that use newline as the line separator.

   The next element on the mode line is the string indicated by CH.
This shows two dashes (`--') if the buffer displayed in the window has
the same contents as the corresponding file on the disk; i.e., if the
buffer is "unmodified".  If the buffer is modified, it shows two stars
(`**').  For a read-only buffer, it shows `%*' if the buffer is
modified, and `%%' otherwise.

   The character after CH is normally a dash (`-').  However, if the
default-directory for the current buffer is on a remote machine, `@' is
displayed instead (*note File Names::).

   FR gives the selected frame name (*note Frames::).  It appears only
on text-only terminals.  The initial frame's name is `F1'.

   BUF is the name of the buffer displayed in the window.  Usually,
this is the same as the name of a file you are editing.  *Note
Buffers::.

   POS tells you whether there is additional text above the top of the
window, or below the bottom.  If your buffer is small and it is all
visible in the window, POS is `All'.  Otherwise, it is `Top' if you are
looking at the beginning of the buffer, `Bot' if you are looking at the
end of the buffer, or `NN%', where NN is the percentage of the buffer
above the top of the window.  With Size Indication mode, you can
display the size of the buffer as well.  *Note Optional Mode Line::.

   LINE is the character `L' followed by the line number at point.
(You can display the current column number too, by turning on Column
Number mode.  *Note Optional Mode Line::.)

   MAJOR is the name of the "major mode" used in the buffer.  A major
mode is a principal editing mode for the buffer, such as Text mode,
Lisp mode, C mode, and so forth.  *Note Major Modes::.

   Some major modes display additional information after the major mode
name.  For example, Rmail buffers display the current message number and
the total number of messages.  Compilation buffers and Shell buffers
display the status of the subprocess.

   MINOR is a list of some of the "minor modes" turned on in the
buffer.  Minor modes are optional editing modes that provide additional
features on top of the major mode.  *Note Minor Modes::.

   Some features are listed together with the minor modes whenever they
are turned on, even through they are not really minor modes.  `Narrow'
means that the buffer being displayed has editing restricted to only a
portion of its text (*note Narrowing::).  `Def' means that a keyboard
macro is currently being defined (*note Keyboard Macros::).

   In addition, if Emacs is inside a recursive editing level, square
brackets (`[...]') appear around the parentheses that surround the
modes.  If Emacs is in one recursive editing level within another,
double square brackets appear, and so on.  Since recursive editing
levels affect Emacs globally, not just one buffer, the square brackets
appear in every window's mode line or not in any of them.  *Note
Recursive Edit::.

   You can change the appearance of the mode line as well as the format
of its contents.  *Note Optional Mode Line::.  In addition, the mode
line is mouse-sensitive; clicking on different parts of the mode line
performs various commands.  *Note Mode Line Mouse::.


File: emacs,  Node: Menu Bar,  Prev: Mode Line,  Up: Screen

1.4 The Menu Bar
================

Each Emacs frame normally has a "menu bar" at the top which you can use
to perform common operations.  There's no need to list them here, as
you can more easily see them yourself.

   On a graphical display, you can use the mouse to choose a command
from the menu bar.  A right-arrow at the end of a menu item means it
leads to a subsidiary menu, or "submenu".  A `...' at the end of a menu
item means that the command invoked will prompt you for further input
before it actually does anything.

   Some of the commands in the menu bar have ordinary key bindings as
well; if so, a key binding is shown in parentheses after the item
itself.  To view the full command name and documentation for a menu
item, type `C-h k', and then select the menu bar with the mouse in the
usual way (*note Key Help::).

   Instead of using the mouse, you can also invoke the first menu bar
item by pressing <F10> (to run the command `menu-bar-open').  You can
then navigate the menus with the arrow keys.  To activate a selected
menu item, press <RET>; to cancel menu navigation, press <ESC>.

   On text-only terminals with no mouse, you can use the menu bar by
typing `M-`' or <F10> (these run the command `tmm-menubar').  This lets
you select a menu item with the keyboard.  A provisional choice appears
in the echo area.  You can use the up and down arrow keys to move
through the menu to different items, and then you can type <RET> to
select the item.

   Each menu item also has an assigned letter or digit which designates
that item; it is usually the initial of some word in the item's name.
This letter or digit is separated from the item name by `=>'.  You can
type the item's letter or digit to select the item.


File: emacs,  Node: User Input,  Next: Keys,  Prev: Screen,  Up: Top

2 Kinds of User Input
*********************

GNU Emacs is primarily designed for use with the keyboard.  While it is
possible to use the mouse to issue editing commands through the menu
bar and tool bar, that is not as efficient as using the keyboard.
Therefore, this manual mainly documents how to edit with the keyboard.

   Keyboard input into Emacs is based on a heavily-extended version of
ASCII.  The simplest characters that you can input into Emacs
correspond to graphic symbols such as `a', `B', `3', `=', the space
character (conventionally denoted as <SPC>), and so on.  Entering these
using the keyboard is straightforward.  Certain characters found on
non-English keyboards also fall into this category (*note
International::).

   In addition to these simple characters, Emacs recognizes "control
characters" such as <RET>, <TAB>, <DEL>, <ESC>, <F1>, <Home>, <left>,
etc.  Most keyboards have special keys for entering these.

   Emacs also recognizes control characters that are entered using
"modifier keys".  Two commonly-used modifier keys are <Control> (which
is usually labelled as <Ctrl>), and <Meta> (which is usually labeled as
<Alt>)(1).  For example, `Control-a' is entered by holding down the
<Ctrl> key while pressing `a'; we will refer to this as `C-a' for short.
Similarly `Meta-a', or `M-a' for short, is entered by holding down the
<Alt> key and pressing `a'.

   You can also type Meta characters using two-character sequences
starting with <ESC>.  Thus, you can enter `M-a' by typing `<ESC> a'.
You can enter `C-M-a' by typing `<ESC> C-a'.  Unlike <Meta>, <ESC> is
entered as a separate character.  You don't hold down <ESC> while
typing the next character; instead, press <ESC> and release it, then
enter the next character.  This feature is useful on certain text-only
terminals where the <Meta> key does not function reliably.

   Modifier keys can apply not only to alphanumerical characters, but
also to special input characters, such as the arrow keys and mouse
buttons.

   *Note Input Events: (elisp)Input Events, for the full Lisp-level
details about keyboard and mouse input, which are collectively referred
to as "input events".  If you are not doing Lisp programming, but
simply want to redefine the meaning of some characters or non-character
events, see *Note Customization::.

   On graphical displays, the window manager is likely to block the
character `M-<TAB>' before Emacs can see it.  It may also block
`M-<SPC>', `C-M-d' and `C-M-l'.  If you have these problems, we
recommend that you customize your window manager to turn off those
commands, or put them on key combinations that Emacs does not use.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) We refer to <Alt> as <Meta> for historical reasons.


File: emacs,  Node: Keys,  Next: Commands,  Prev: User Input,  Up: Top

3 Keys
******

Some Emacs commands are invoked by just one input event; for example,
`C-f' moves forward one character in the buffer.  But Emacs also has
commands that take two or more input events to invoke, such as `C-x
C-f' and `C-x 4 C-f'.

   A "key sequence", or "key" for short, is a sequence of one or more
input events that is meaningful as a unit.  If a key sequence invokes a
command, we call it a "complete key"; for example, `C-f', `C-x C-f' and
`C-x 4 C-f' are all complete keys.  If a key sequence isn't long enough
to invoke a command, we call it a "prefix key"; from the preceding
example, we see that `C-x' and `C-x 4' are prefix keys.  Every key is
either a complete key or a prefix key.

   A prefix key combines with the following input event to make a
longer key sequence, which may itself be complete or a prefix.  For
example, `C-x' is a prefix key, so `C-x' and the next input event
combine to make a two-event key sequence.  This two-event key sequence
could itself be a prefix key (such as `C-x 4'), or a complete key (such
as `C-x C-f').  There is no limit to the length of a key sequence, but
in practice people rarely use sequences longer than three or four input
events.

   You can't add input events onto a complete key.  For example, the
two-event sequence `C-f C-k' is not a key, because the `C-f' is a
complete key in itself, so `C-f C-k' cannot have an independent meaning
as a command.  `C-f C-k' is two key sequences, not one.

   By default, the prefix keys in Emacs are `C-c', `C-h', `C-x', `C-x
<RET>', `C-x @', `C-x a', `C-x n', `C-x r', `C-x v', `C-x 4', `C-x 5',
`C-x 6', <ESC>, `M-g', and `M-o'.  (<F1> and <F2> are aliases for `C-h'
and `C-x 6'.)  This list is not cast in stone; if you customize Emacs,
you can make new prefix keys.  You could even eliminate some of the
standard ones, though this is not recommended for most users; for
example, if you remove the prefix definition of `C-x 4', then `C-x 4
ANYTHING' would become an invalid key sequence.  *Note Key Bindings::.

   Typing the help character (`C-h' or <F1>) after a prefix key
displays a list of the commands starting with that prefix.  The sole
exception to this rule is <ESC>: `<ESC>C-h' is equivalent to `C-M-h',
which does something else entirely.  You can, however, use <F1> to
displays a list of the commands starting with <ESC>.


File: emacs,  Node: Commands,  Next: Entering Emacs,  Prev: Keys,  Up: Top

4 Keys and Commands
*******************

This manual is full of passages that tell you what particular keys do.
But Emacs does not assign meanings to keys directly.  Instead, Emacs
assigns meanings to named "commands", and then gives keys their
meanings by "binding" them to commands.

   Every command has a name chosen by a programmer.  The name is
usually made of a few English words separated by dashes; for example,
`next-line' or `forward-word'.  A command also has a "function
definition" which is a Lisp program; this is how the command does its
work.  In Emacs Lisp, a command is a Lisp function with special
properties that make it suitable for interactive use.  For more
information on commands and functions, see *Note What Is a Function:
(elisp)What Is a Function.

   The bindings between keys and commands are recorded in tables called
"keymaps".  *Note Keymaps::.

   When we say that "`C-n' moves down vertically one line" we are
glossing over a subtle distinction that is irrelevant in ordinary use,
but vital for Emacs customization.  The command `next-line' does a
vertical move downward.  `C-n' has this effect _because_ it is bound to
`next-line'.  If you rebind `C-n' to the command `forward-word', `C-n'
will move forward one word instead.

   In this manual, we will often speak of keys like `C-n' as commands,
even though strictly speaking the key is bound to a command.  Usually
we state the name of the command which really does the work in
parentheses after mentioning the key that runs it.  For example, we
will say that "The command `C-n' (`next-line') moves point vertically
down," meaning that the command `next-line' moves vertically down, and
the key `C-n' is normally bound to it.

   Since we are discussing customization, we should tell you about
"variables".  Often the description of a command will say, "To change
this, set the variable `mumble-foo'."  A variable is a name used to
store a value.  Most of the variables documented in this manual are
meant for customization: some command or other part of Emacs examines
the variable and behaves differently according to the value that you
set.  You can ignore the information about variables until you are
interested in customizing them.  Then read the basic information on
variables (*note Variables::) and the information about specific
variables will make sense.


File: emacs,  Node: Entering Emacs,  Next: Exiting,  Prev: Commands,  Up: Top

5 Entering Emacs
****************

The usual way to invoke Emacs is with the shell command `emacs'.  From
a terminal window running in the X Window System, you can also run
Emacs in the background with `emacs&'; this way, Emacs won't tie up the
terminal window, so you can use it to run other shell commands.

   When Emacs starts up, the initial frame displays a special buffer
named `*GNU Emacs*'.  This buffer contains some information about
Emacs, and includes "links" to common tasks that might be useful to
beginning users.  For instance, activating the `Emacs Tutorial' link
opens the Emacs tutorial; this does the same thing as the command `C-h
t' (`help-with-tutorial').  To activate a link, either move point onto
it and type `<RET>', or click on it with `mouse-1' (the left mouse
button).

   Using a command line argument, you can tell Emacs to visit one or
more specific files as soon as it starts up.  For example, `emacs
foo.txt' starts Emacs with a buffer displaying the contents of the file
`foo.txt'.  This feature exists mainly for compatibility with other
editors, which are designed to edit one file at a time: once you are
done with that file, you exit the editor, and start it again the next
time you need it.

   Using Emacs in this way--starting it afresh each time you want to
edit a file--is unnecessary and wasteful.  Emacs can visit more than
one file in a single editing session, and exiting the Emacs session
loses valuable accumulated context, such as the kill ring, registers,
undo history, and mark ring.  These features, described later in the
manual, are useful for performing edits across multiple files, or
continuing edits to a single file.

   The recommended way to use Emacs is to start it only once, just
after you log in, and do all your editing in the same Emacs session.
Each time you edit a file, visit it with the existing Emacs, which
eventually has many files in it ready for editing.  *Note Files::, for
more information on visiting more than one file.

   To edit a file from another program while Emacs is running, you can
use the `emacsclient' helper program to open a file in the already
running Emacs.  *Note Emacs Server::.

   Emacs accepts other command line arguments that tell it to load
certain Lisp files, call certain functions, and so forth.  These
features exist mainly for advanced users.  *Note Emacs Invocation::.

   If the variable `inhibit-startup-screen' is non-`nil', Emacs does
not display the startup screen.  In that case, if one or more files
were specified on the command line, Emacs simply displays those files;
otherwise, it displays a buffer named `*scratch*', which can be used to
evaluate Emacs Lisp expressions interactively.  *Note Lisp
Interaction::.  You can set the variable `inhibit-startup-screen' using
the Customize facility (*note Easy Customization::), or by editing your
initialization file (*note Init File::).(1)

   You can also force Emacs to display a file or directory at startup
by setting the variable `initial-buffer-choice' to a non-`nil' value.
(In that case, even if you specify one or more files on the command
line, Emacs opens but does not display them.)  The value of
`initial-buffer-choice' can be either the name of the desired file or
directory, or `t', which means to display the `*scratch*' buffer.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Note that setting `inhibit-startup-screen' in `site-start.el'
doesn't work, because the startup screen is set up before reading
`site-start.el'.  *Note Init File::, for information about
`site-start.el'.


File: emacs,  Node: Exiting,  Next: Basic,  Prev: Entering Emacs,  Up: Top

6 Exiting Emacs
***************

`C-x C-c'
     Kill Emacs (`save-buffers-kill-terminal').

`C-z'
     On a text terminal, suspend Emacs; on a graphical display,
     "minimize" the selected frame (`suspend-emacs').

   "Killing" Emacs means terminating the Emacs program.  To do this,
type `C-x C-c' (`save-buffers-kill-terminal').  A two-character key is
used to make it harder to type by accident.  If there are any modified
file-visiting buffers when you type `C-x C-c', Emacs first offers to
save these buffers.  If you do not save them all, it asks for
confirmation again, since the unsaved changes will be lost.  Emacs also
asks for confirmation if any subprocesses are still running, since
killing Emacs will also kill the subprocesses (*note Shell::).

   `C-x C-c' behaves specially if you are using Emacs as a server.  If
you type it from a "client frame", it closes the client connection.
*Note Emacs Server::.

   Emacs can, optionally, record certain session information when you
kill it, such as the files you were visiting at the time.  This
information is then available the next time you start Emacs.  *Note
Saving Emacs Sessions::.

   If the value of the variable `confirm-kill-emacs' is non-`nil', `C-x
C-c' assumes that its value is a predicate function, and calls that
function.  If the result of the function call is non-`nil', the session
is killed, otherwise Emacs continues to run.  One convenient function
to use as the value of `confirm-kill-emacs' is the function
`yes-or-no-p'.  The default value of `confirm-kill-emacs' is `nil'.

   To kill Emacs without being prompted about saving, type `M-x
kill-emacs'.

   You can "exit" Emacs in two other ways.  On a graphical display, you
can "minimize" (or "iconify") an Emacs frame; depending on the window
system, this either replaces the Emacs frame with a tiny "icon" or
conceals the frame entirely (*note Frames::).  On a text-only terminal,
you can "suspend" Emacs; this means stopping the Emacs program
temporarily, returning control to its parent process (usually a shell).

   `C-z' runs the command `suspend-frame'.  On a graphical display,
this "minimizes" (or "iconifies") the selected Emacs frame.  On a text
terminal, this suspends the Emacs process.

   After minimizing or suspending Emacs, you can return to it and
continue editing wherever you left off.  The way to do this depends on
the window system or shell.  In most common shells, you can resume
Emacs after suspending it with the shell command `%emacs'.

   On very old systems that don't support suspending programs, `C-z'
starts an inferior shell that communicates directly with the terminal,
and Emacs waits until you exit the subshell.  (The way to exit the
subshell is usually `C-d' or `exit'.)  On these systems, you can only
get back to the shell from which Emacs was run (to log out, for
example) when you kill Emacs.  Suspending can also fail if you run
Emacs under a shell that doesn't support suspending jobs, even if the
system itself does support it.  In this case, you can set the variable
`cannot-suspend' to a non-`nil' value to force `C-z' to start an
inferior shell.

   Text-only terminals usually listen for certain special characters
whose meaning is to kill or suspend the program you are running.  This
terminal feature is turned off while you are in Emacs.  The meanings of
`C-z' and `C-x C-c' as keys in Emacs were inspired by the use of `C-z'
and `C-c' on several operating systems as the characters for stopping
or killing a program, but that is their only relationship with the
operating system.  You can customize these keys to run any commands of
your choice (*note Keymaps::).


File: emacs,  Node: Basic,  Next: Minibuffer,  Prev: Exiting,  Up: Top

7 Basic Editing Commands
************************

Here we explain the basics of how to enter text, make corrections, and
save the text in a file.  If this material is new to you, we suggest
you first run the Emacs learn-by-doing tutorial, by typing `Control-h
t' inside Emacs.  (`help-with-tutorial').

* Menu:


* Inserting Text::      Inserting text by simply typing it.
* Moving Point::        Moving the cursor to the place where you want to
			  change something.
* Erasing::	        Deleting and killing text.
* Basic Undo::	        Undoing recent changes in the text.
* Files: Basic Files.   Visiting, creating, and saving files.
* Help: Basic Help.     Asking what a character does.
* Blank Lines::	        Making and deleting blank lines.
* Continuation Lines::  How Emacs displays lines too wide for the screen.
* Position Info::       What page, line, row, or column is point on?
* Arguments::	        Numeric arguments for repeating a command N times.
* Repeating::           Repeating the previous command quickly.


File: emacs,  Node: Inserting Text,  Next: Moving Point,  Up: Basic

7.1 Inserting Text
==================

You can insert an ordinary "graphic character" (e.g., `a', `B', `3',
and `=') by typing the associated key.  This adds the character to the
buffer at point.  Insertion moves point forward, so that point remains
just after the inserted text.  *Note Point::.

   To end a line and start a new one, type <RET>.  This key may be
labeled <Return> or <Enter> on your keyboard, but we refer to it as
<RET> in this manual.  Pressing it inserts a newline character in the
buffer.  If point is at the end of the line, this creates a new blank
line after it; if point is in the middle of a line, the line is split
at that position.

   As we explain later in this manual, you can change the way Emacs
handles text insertion by turning on "minor modes".  For instance, if
you turn on a minor mode called "Auto Fill" mode, Emacs can split lines
automatically when they become too long (*note Filling::).  If you turn
on a minor mode called "Overwrite" mode, inserted characters replace
(overwrite) existing text, instead of shoving it to the right.  *Note
Minor Modes::.

   Only graphic characters can be inserted by typing the associated
key; other keys act as editing commands and do not insert themselves.
For instance, `DEL' runs the command `delete-backward-char' by default
(some modes bind it to a different command); it does not insert a
literal `DEL' character (ASCII character code 127).

   To insert a non-graphic character, or a character that your keyboard
does not support, first "quote" it by typing `C-q' (`quoted-insert').
There are two ways to use `C-q':

   * `C-q' followed by any non-graphic character (even `C-g') inserts
     that character.  For instance, `C-q <DEL>' inserts a literal `DEL'
     character.

   * `C-q' followed by a sequence of octal digits inserts the character
     with the specified octal character code.  You can use any number of
     octal digits; any non-digit terminates the sequence.  If the
     terminating character is <RET>, it serves only to terminate the
     sequence.  Any other non-digit terminates the sequence and then
     acts as normal input--thus, `C-q 1 0 1 B' inserts `AB'.

     The use of octal sequences is disabled in ordinary non-binary
     Overwrite mode, to give you a convenient way to insert a digit
     instead of overwriting with it.

To use decimal or hexadecimal instead of octal, set the variable
`read-quoted-char-radix' to 10 or 16.  If the radix is greater than 10,
some letters starting with `a' serve as part of a character code, just
like digits.

   A numeric argument tells `C-q' how many copies of the quoted
character to insert (*note Arguments::).

   Instead of `C-q', you can use `C-x 8 <RET>' (`ucs-insert') to insert
a character based on its Unicode name or code-point.  This commands
prompts for a character to insert, using the minibuffer; you can
specify the character using either (i) the character's name in the
Unicode standard, or (ii) the character's code-point in the Unicode
standard.  If you specify the character's name, the command provides
completion.


File: emacs,  Node: Moving Point,  Next: Erasing,  Prev: Inserting Text,  Up: Basic

7.2 Changing the Location of Point
==================================

To do more than insert characters, you have to know how to move point
(*note Point::).  The keyboard commands `C-f', `C-b', `C-n', and `C-p'
move point to the right, left, up and down respectively.  These are
equivalent to the commands `<right>', `<left>', `<down>', and `<up>',
entered using the "arrow keys" present on many keyboards.  Many Emacs
users find that it is slower to use the arrow keys than the equivalent
control keys.  You can also click the left mouse button to move point
to the position clicked.  Emacs also provides a variety of additional
keyboard commands that move point in more sophisticated ways.

`C-a'
`<Home>'
     Move to the beginning of the line (`move-beginning-of-line').

`C-e'
`<End>'
     Move to the end of the line (`move-end-of-line').

`C-f'
`<right>'
     Move forward one character (`forward-char').

`C-b'
`<left>'
     Move backward one character (`backward-char').

`M-f'
`M-<right>'
`C-<right>'
     Move forward one word (`forward-word').

`M-b'
`M-<left>'
`C-<left>'
     Move backward one word (`backward-word').

`C-n'
`<down>'
     Move down one screen line (`next-line').  This command attempts to
     keep the horizontal position unchanged, so if you start in the
     middle of one line, you move to the middle of the next.

`C-p'
`<up>'
     Move up one screen line (`previous-line').  This command preserves
     position within the line, like `C-n'.

`M-r'
     Without moving the text on the screen, reposition point on the left
     margin of the center-most text line of the window; on subsequent
     consecutive invocations, move point to the left margin of the
     top-most line, the bottom-most line, and so forth, in cyclic order
     (`move-to-window-line-top-bottom').

     A numeric argument says which screen line to place point on,
     counting downward from the top of the window (zero means the top
     line).  A negative argument counts lines up from the bottom (-1
     means the bottom line).

`M-<'
     Move to the top of the buffer (`beginning-of-buffer').  With
     numeric argument N, move to N/10 of the way from the top.  *Note
     Arguments::, for more information on numeric arguments.

`M->'
     Move to the end of the buffer (`end-of-buffer').

`C-v'
`<PageDown>'
`<next>'
     Scroll the display one screen forward, and move point if necessary
     to put it on the screen (`scroll-up').  If your keyboard has a
     <PageDown> key (sometimes labelled <next>), it does the same thing
     as <C-v>.  Scrolling commands are described further in *Note
     Scrolling::.

`M-v'
`<PageUp>'
`<prior>'
     Scroll one screen backward, and move point if necessary to put it
     on the screen (`scroll-down').  If your keyboard has a <PageUp>
     key (sometimes labelled <prior>), it does the same thing as `M-v'.

`M-x goto-char'
     Read a number N and move point to buffer position N.  Position 1
     is the beginning of the buffer.

`M-g M-g'
`M-g g'
     Read a number N and move point to the beginning of line number N
     (`goto-line').  Line 1 is the beginning of the buffer.  If point
     is on or just after a number in the buffer, that is the default
     for N.  Just type <RET> in the minibuffer to use it.  You can also
     specify N by giving `M-g M-g' a numeric prefix argument.  *Note
     Select Buffer::, for the behavior of `M-g M-g' when you give it a
     plain prefix argument.

`C-x C-n'
     Use the current column of point as the "semipermanent goal column"
     for `C-n' and `C-p' (`set-goal-column').  When a semipermanent
     goal column is in effect, those commands always try to move to
     this column, or as close as possible to it, after moving
     vertically.  The goal column remains in effect until canceled.

`C-u C-x C-n'
     Cancel the goal column.  Henceforth, `C-n' and `C-p' try to
     preserve the horizontal position, as usual.

   When a line of text in the buffer is longer than the width of the
window, Emacs usually displays it on two or more "screen lines".  For
convenience, `C-n' and `C-p' move point by screen lines, as do the
equivalent keys `<down>' and `<up>'.  You can force these commands to
move according to "logical lines" (i.e., according to the text lines in
the buffer) by setting the variable `line-move-visual' to `nil'; if a
logical line occupies multiple screen lines, the cursor then skips over
the additional screen lines.  Moving by logical lines was the default
behavior prior to Emacs 23.1.  For details, see *Note Continuation
Lines::.  *Note Variables::, for how to set variables such as
`line-move-visual'.

   Unlike `C-n' and `C-p', most of the Emacs commands that work on
lines work on _logical_ lines.  For instance, `C-a'
(`move-beginning-of-line') and `C-e' (`move-end-of-line') respectively
move to the beginning and end of the logical line.  Whenever we
encounter commands that work on screen lines, such as `C-n' and `C-p',
we will point these out.

   When `line-move-visual' is `nil', you can also set the variable
`track-eol' to a non-`nil' value.  Then `C-n' and `C-p', when starting
at the end of the logical line, move to the end of the next logical
line.  Normally, `track-eol' is `nil'.

   `C-n' normally stops at the end of the buffer when you use it on the
last line of the buffer.  However, if you set the variable
`next-line-add-newlines' to a non-`nil' value, `C-n' on the last line
of a buffer creates an additional line at the end and moves down into
it.


File: emacs,  Node: Erasing,  Next: Basic Undo,  Prev: Moving Point,  Up: Basic

7.3 Erasing Text
================

`<DEL>'
`<Backspace>'
     Delete the character before point (`delete-backward-char').

`C-d'
`<Delete>'
     Delete the character after point (`delete-char').

`C-k'
     Kill to the end of the line (`kill-line').

`M-d'
     Kill forward to the end of the next word (`kill-word').

`M-<DEL>'
     Kill back to the beginning of the previous word
     (`backward-kill-word').

   The key `<DEL>' (`delete-backward-char') removes the character
before point, moving the cursor and all the characters after it
backwards.  On most keyboards, <DEL> is labelled <Backspace>, but we
refer to it as <DEL> in this manual.  Do not confuse <DEL> with another
key, labelled <Delete>, that exists on many keyboards; we will discuss
<Delete> momentarily.

   Typing <DEL> when the cursor is at the beginning of a line deletes
the preceding newline character, joining the line with the one before
it.

   On some text-only terminals, Emacs may not recognize the <DEL> key
properly.  If <DEL> does not do the right thing (e.g., if it deletes
characters forwards), see *Note DEL Does Not Delete::.

   The key `C-d' (`delete-char') deletes the character after point,
i.e., the character under the cursor.  This shifts the rest of the text
on the line to the left.  If you type `C-d' at the end of a line, it
joins that line with the following line.  This command is also bound to
the key labelled <Delete> on many keyboards.

   To erase a larger amount of text, use the `C-k' key, which erases
(kills) a line at a time.  If you type `C-k' at the beginning or middle
of a line, it kills all the text up to the end of the line.  If you
type `C-k' at the end of a line, it joins that line with the following
line.

   To learn more about killing text, see *Note Killing::.


File: emacs,  Node: Basic Undo,  Next: Basic Files,  Prev: Erasing,  Up: Basic

7.4 Undoing Changes
===================

`C-/'
     Undo one entry of the undo records--usually, one command worth
     (`undo').

`C-x u'

`C-_'
     The same.

   Emacs records a list of changes made in the buffer text, so you can
undo recent changes.  This is done using the `undo' command, which is
bound to `C-/' (as well as `C-x u' and `C-_').  Normally, this command
undoes the last change, moving point back to where it was before the
change.  The undo command applies only to changes in the buffer; you
can't use it to undo cursor motion.

   Although each editing command usually makes a separate entry in the
undo records, very simple commands may be grouped together.  Sometimes,
an entry may cover just part of a complex command.

   If you repeat `C-/' (or its aliases), each repetition undoes
another, earlier change, back to the limit of the undo information
available.  If all recorded changes have already been undone, the undo
command displays an error message and does nothing.

   To learn more about the `undo' command, see *Note Undo::.


File: emacs,  Node: Basic Files,  Next: Basic Help,  Prev: Basic Undo,  Up: Basic

7.5 Files
=========

Text that you insert in an Emacs buffer lasts only as long as the Emacs
session.  To keep any text permanently, you must put it in a "file".
Files are named units of text which are stored by the operating system
for you to retrieve later by name.  To use the contents of a file in
any way, including editing it with Emacs, you must specify the file
name.

   Suppose there is a file named `test.emacs' in your home directory.
To begin editing this file in Emacs, type

     C-x C-f test.emacs <RET>

Here the file name is given as an "argument" to the command `C-x C-f'
(`find-file').  That command uses the "minibuffer" to read the
argument, and you type <RET> to terminate the argument (*note
Minibuffer::).

   Emacs obeys this command by "visiting" the file: it creates a
buffer, copies the contents of the file into the buffer, and then
displays the buffer for editing.  If you alter the text, you can "save"
the new text in the file by typing `C-x C-s' (`save-buffer').  This
copies the altered buffer contents back into the file `test.emacs',
making them permanent.  Until you save, the changed text exists only
inside Emacs, and the file `test.emacs' is unaltered.

   To create a file, just visit it with `C-x C-f' as if it already
existed.  This creates an empty buffer, in which you can insert the
text you want to put in the file.  Emacs actually creates the file the
first time you save this buffer with `C-x C-s'.

   To learn more about using files in Emacs, see *Note Files::.


File: emacs,  Node: Basic Help,  Next: Blank Lines,  Prev: Basic Files,  Up: Basic

7.6 Help
========

If you forget what a key does, you can find out with the Help
character, which is `C-h' (or <F1>, which is an alias for `C-h').  Type
`C-h k', followed by the key of interest; for example, `C-h k C-n'
tells you what `C-n' does.  `C-h' is a prefix key; `C-h k' is just one
of its subcommands (the command `describe-key').  The other subcommands
of `C-h' provide different kinds of help.  Type `C-h' twice to get a
description of all the help facilities.  *Note Help::.


File: emacs,  Node: Blank Lines,  Next: Continuation Lines,  Prev: Basic Help,  Up: Basic

7.7 Blank Lines
===============

Here are special commands and techniques for inserting and deleting
blank lines.

`C-o'
     Insert a blank line after the cursor (`open-line').

`C-x C-o'
     Delete all but one of many consecutive blank lines
     (`delete-blank-lines').

   We have seen how `<RET>' (`newline') starts a new line of text.
However, it may be easier to see what you are doing if you first make a
blank line and then insert the desired text into it.  This is easy to
do using the key `C-o' (`open-line'), which inserts a newline after
point but leaves point in front of the newline.  After `C-o', type the
text for the new line.

   You can make several blank lines by typing `C-o' several times, or
by giving it a numeric argument specifying how many blank lines to make.
*Note Arguments::, for how.  If you have a fill prefix, the `C-o'
command inserts the fill prefix on the new line, if typed at the
beginning of a line.  *Note Fill Prefix::.

   The easy way to get rid of extra blank lines is with the command
`C-x C-o' (`delete-blank-lines').  If point lies within a run of
several blank lines, `C-x C-o' deletes all but one of them.  If point
is on a single blank line, `C-x C-o' deletes it.  If point is on a
nonblank line, `C-x C-o' deletes all following blank lines, if any
exists.


File: emacs,  Node: Continuation Lines,  Next: Position Info,  Prev: Blank Lines,  Up: Basic

7.8 Continuation Lines
======================

Sometimes, a line of text in the buffer--a "logical line"--is too long
to fit in the window, and Emacs displays it as two or more "screen
lines".  This is called "line wrapping" or "continuation", and the long
logical line is called a "continued line".  On a graphical display,
Emacs indicates line wrapping with small bent arrows in the left and
right window fringes.  On a text-only terminal, Emacs indicates line
wrapping by displaying a `\' character at the right margin.

   Most commands that act on lines act on logical lines, not screen
lines.  For instance, `C-k' kills a logical line.  As described
earlier, `C-n' (`next-line') and `C-p' (`previous-line') are special
exceptions: they move point down and up, respectively, by one screen
line (*note Moving Point::).

   Emacs can optionally "truncate" long logical lines instead of
continuing them.  This means that every logical line occupies a single
screen line; if it is longer than the width of the window, the rest of
the line is not displayed.  On a graphical display, a truncated line is
indicated by a small straight arrow in the right fringe; on a text-only
terminal, it is indicated by a `$' character in the right margin.
*Note Line Truncation::.

   By default, continued lines are wrapped at the right window edge.
Since the wrapping may occur in the middle of a word, continued lines
can be difficult to read.  The usual solution is to break your lines
before they get too long, by inserting newlines.  If you prefer, you
can make Emacs insert a newline automatically when a line gets too
long, by using Auto Fill mode.  *Note Filling::.

   Sometimes, you may need to edit files containing many long logical
lines, and it may not be practical to break them all up by adding
newlines.  In that case, you can use Visual Line mode, which enables
"word wrapping": instead of wrapping long lines exactly at the right
window edge, Emacs wraps them at the word boundaries (i.e., space or
tab characters) nearest to the right window edge.  Visual Line mode
also redefines editing commands such as `C-a', `C-n', and `C-k' to
operate on screen lines rather than logical lines.  *Note Visual Line
Mode::.


File: emacs,  Node: Position Info,  Next: Arguments,  Prev: Continuation Lines,  Up: Basic

7.9 Cursor Position Information
===============================

Here are commands to get information about the size and position of
parts of the buffer, and to count lines.

`M-x what-page'
     Display the page number of point, and the line number within that
     page.

`M-x what-line'
     Display the line number of point in the whole buffer.

`M-x line-number-mode'
`M-x column-number-mode'
     Toggle automatic display of the current line number or column
     number.  *Note Optional Mode Line::.

`M-x count-lines-region'
     Display the number of lines in the current region.  Normally bound
     to `M-=', except in a few specialist modes.  *Note Mark::, for
     information about the region.

`C-x ='
     Display the character code of character after point, character
     position of point, and column of point (`what-cursor-position').

`M-x hl-line-mode'
     Enable or disable highlighting of the current line.  *Note Cursor
     Display::.

`M-x size-indication-mode'
     Toggle automatic display of the size of the buffer.  *Note
     Optional Mode Line::.

   `M-x what-line' displays the current line number in the echo area.
This command is usually redundant, because the current line number is
shown in the mode line (*note Mode Line::).  However, if you narrow the
buffer, the mode line shows the line number relative to the accessible
portion (*note Narrowing::).  By contrast, `what-line' displays both
the line number relative to the narrowed region and the line number
relative to the whole buffer.

   `M-x what-page' counts pages from the beginning of the file, and
counts lines within the page, showing both numbers in the echo area.
*Note Pages::.

   Use `M-x count-lines-region' (normally bound to `M-=') to display
the number of lines in the region (*note Mark::).  *Note Pages::, for
the command `C-x l' which counts the lines in the current page.

   The command `C-x =' (`what-cursor-position') shows information about
the current cursor position and the buffer contents at that position.
It displays a line in the echo area that looks like this:

     Char: c (99, #o143, #x63) point=28062 of 36168 (78%) column=53

   After `Char:', this shows the character in the buffer at point.  The
text inside the parenthesis shows the corresponding decimal, octal and
hex character codes; for more information about how `C-x =' displays
character information, see *Note International Chars::.  After `point='
is the position of point as a character count (the first character in
the buffer is position 1, the second character is position 2, and so
on).  The number after that is the total number of characters in the
buffer, and the number in parenthesis expresses the position as a
percentage of the total.  After `column=' is the horizontal position of
point, in columns counting from the left edge of the window.

   If the buffer has been narrowed, making some of the text at the
beginning and the end temporarily inaccessible, `C-x =' displays
additional text describing the currently accessible range.  For
example, it might display this:

     Char: C (67, #o103, #x43) point=252 of 889 (28%) <231-599> column=0

where the two extra numbers give the smallest and largest character
position that point is allowed to assume.  The characters between those
two positions are the accessible ones.  *Note Narrowing::.


File: emacs,  Node: Arguments,  Next: Repeating,  Prev: Position Info,  Up: Basic

7.10 Numeric Arguments
======================

In the terminology of mathematics and computing, "argument" means "data
provided to a function or operation."  You can give any Emacs command a
"numeric argument" (also called a "prefix argument").  Some commands
interpret the argument as a repetition count.  For example, giving
`C-f' an argument of ten causes it to move point forward by ten
characters instead of one.  With these commands, no argument is
equivalent to an argument of one, and negative arguments cause them to
move or act in the opposite direction.

   The easiest way to specify a numeric argument is to type a digit
and/or a minus sign while holding down the <META> key.  For example,

     M-5 C-n

moves down five lines.  The keys `M-1', `M-2', and so on, as well as
`M--', are bound to commands (`digit-argument' and `negative-argument')
that set up an argument for the next command.  `Meta--' without digits
normally means -1.

   If you enter more than one digit, you need not hold down the <META>
key for the second and subsequent digits.  Thus, to move down fifty
lines, type

     M-5 0 C-n

Note that this _does not_ insert five copies of `0' and move down one
line, as you might expect--the `0' is treated as part of the prefix
argument.

   (What if you do want to insert five copies of `0'?  Type `M-5 C-u
0'.  Here, `C-u' "terminates" the prefix argument, so that the next
keystroke begins the command that you want to execute.  Note that this
meaning of `C-u' applies only to this case.  For the usual role of
`C-u', see below.)

   Instead of typing `M-1', `M-2', and so on, another way to specify a
numeric argument is to type `C-u' (`universal-argument') followed by
some digits, or (for a negative argument) a minus sign followed by
digits.  A minus sign without digits normally means -1.

   `C-u' alone has the special meaning of "four times": it multiplies
the argument for the next command by four.  `C-u C-u' multiplies it by
sixteen.  Thus, `C-u C-u C-f' moves forward sixteen characters.  Other
useful combinations are `C-u C-n', `C-u C-u C-n' (move down a good
fraction of a screen), `C-u C-u C-o' (make "a lot" of blank lines), and
`C-u C-k' (kill four lines).

   You can use a numeric argument before a self-inserting character to
insert multiple copies of it.  This is straightforward when the
character is not a digit; for example, `C-u 6 4 a' inserts 64 copies of
the character `a'.  But this does not work for inserting digits; `C-u 6
4 1' specifies an argument of 641.  You can separate the argument from
the digit to insert with another `C-u'; for example, `C-u 6 4 C-u 1'
does insert 64 copies of the character `1'.

   Some commands care whether there is an argument, but ignore its
value.  For example, the command `M-q' (`fill-paragraph') fills text;
with an argument, it justifies the text as well.  (*Note Filling::, for
more information on `M-q'.)  For these commands, it is enough to the
argument with a single `C-u'.

   Some commands use the value of the argument as a repeat count, but
do something special when there is no argument.  For example, the
command `C-k' (`kill-line') with argument N kills N lines, including
their terminating newlines.  But `C-k' with no argument is special: it
kills the text up to the next newline, or, if point is right at the end
of the line, it kills the newline itself.  Thus, two `C-k' commands
with no arguments can kill a nonblank line, just like `C-k' with an
argument of one.  (*Note Killing::, for more information on `C-k'.)

   A few commands treat a plain `C-u' differently from an ordinary
argument.  A few others may treat an argument of just a minus sign
differently from an argument of -1.  These unusual cases are described
when they come up; they exist to make an individual command more
convenient, and they are documented in that command's documentation
string.

   We use the term "prefix argument" as well as "numeric argument," to
emphasize that you type these argument before the command, and to
distinguish them from minibuffer arguments that come after the command.


File: emacs,  Node: Repeating,  Prev: Arguments,  Up: Basic

7.11 Repeating a Command
========================

Many simple commands, such as those invoked with a single key or with
`M-x COMMAND-NAME <RET>', can be repeated by invoking them with a
numeric argument that serves as a repeat count (*note Arguments::).
However, if the command you want to repeat prompts for input, or uses a
numeric argument in another way, that method won't work.

   The command `C-x z' (`repeat') provides another way to repeat an
Emacs command many times.  This command repeats the previous Emacs
command, whatever that was.  Repeating a command uses the same arguments
that were used before; it does not read new arguments each time.

   To repeat the command more than once, type additional `z''s: each
`z' repeats the command one more time.  Repetition ends when you type a
character other than `z', or press a mouse button.

   For example, suppose you type `C-u 2 0 C-d' to delete 20 characters.
You can repeat that command (including its argument) three additional
times, to delete a total of 80 characters, by typing `C-x z z z'.  The
first `C-x z' repeats the command once, and each subsequent `z' repeats
it once again.


File: emacs,  Node: Minibuffer,  Next: M-x,  Prev: Basic,  Up: Top

8 The Minibuffer
****************

The "minibuffer" is where Emacs commands read complicated arguments,
such as file names, buffer names, Emacs command names, or Lisp
expressions.  We call it the "minibuffer" because it's a
special-purpose buffer with a small amount of screen space.  You can
use the usual Emacs editing commands in the minibuffer to edit the
argument text.

   When the minibuffer is in use, it appears in the echo area, with a
cursor.  The minibuffer display starts with a "prompt" in a distinct
color, usually ending with a colon.  The prompt states what kind of
input is expected, and how it will be used.

   The simplest way to enter a minibuffer argument is to type the text,
then <RET> to submit the argument and exit the minibuffer.  You can
cancel the minibuffer, and the command that wants the argument, by
typing `C-g'.

   Sometimes, a "default argument" appears in the prompt, inside
parentheses before the colon.  The default will be used as the argument
value if you just type <RET>.  For example, commands that read buffer
names usually show a buffer name as the default; you can type <RET> to
operate on that default buffer.

   Since the minibuffer appears in the echo area, it can conflict with
other uses of the echo area.  If an error occurs while the minibuffer
is active, the error message hides the minibuffer for a few seconds, or
until you type something; then the minibuffer comes back.  If a command
such as `C-x =' needs to display a message in the echo area, the
message hides the minibuffer for a few seconds, or until you type
something; then the minibuffer comes back.  While the minibuffer is in
use, keystrokes do not echo.

* Menu:

* Minibuffer File::       Entering file names with the minibuffer.
* Minibuffer Edit::       How to edit in the minibuffer.
* Completion::		  An abbreviation facility for minibuffer input.
* Minibuffer History::    Reusing recent minibuffer arguments.
* Repetition::		  Re-executing commands that used the minibuffer.
* Passwords::             Entering passwords in the echo area.


File: emacs,  Node: Minibuffer File,  Next: Minibuffer Edit,  Up: Minibuffer

8.1 Minibuffers for File Names
==============================

Commands such as `C-x C-f' (`find-file') use the minibuffer to read a
file name argument (*note Basic Files::).  When the minibuffer is used
to read a file name, it typically starts out with some initial text
ending in a slash.  This is the "default directory".  For example, it
may start out like this:

     Find File: /u2/emacs/src/

Here, `Find File: ' is the prompt and `/u2/emacs/src/' is the default
directory.  If you now type `buffer.c' as input, that specifies the
file `/u2/emacs/src/buffer.c'.  *Note File Names::, for information
about the default directory.

   You can specify the parent directory by adding `..': for example,
`/u2/emacs/src/../lisp/simple.el' is equivalent to
`/u2/emacs/lisp/simple.el'.  Alternatively, you can use `M-<DEL>' to
kill directory names backwards (*note Words::).

   To specify a file in a completely different directory, you can kill
the entire default with `C-a C-k' (*note Minibuffer Edit::).
Alternatively, you can ignore the default, and enter an absolute file
name starting with a slash or a tilde after the default directory.  For
example, you can specify `/etc/termcap' as follows:

     Find File: /u2/emacs/src//etc/termcap

Emacs interprets a double slash as "ignore everything before the second
slash in the pair."  In the example above, `/u2/emacs/src/' is ignored,
so the argument you supplied is `/etc/termcap'.  The ignored part of
the file name is dimmed if the terminal allows it (to disable this
dimming, turn off File Name Shadow mode with the command `M-x
file-name-shadow-mode'.)

   Emacs interprets `~/' as your home directory.  Thus, `~/foo/bar.txt'
specifies a file named `bar.txt', inside a directory named `foo', which
is in turn located in your home directory.  In addition, `~USER-ID/'
means the home directory of a user whose login name is USER-ID.  Any
leading directory name in front of the `~' is ignored: thus,
`/u2/emacs/~/foo/bar.txt' is equivalent to `~/foo/bar.txt'.

   On MS-Windows and MS-DOS systems, where a user doesn't always have a
home directory, Emacs uses several alternatives.  For MS-Windows, see
*Note Windows HOME::; for MS-DOS, see *Note HOME on MS-DOS: MS-DOS File
Names.  On these systems, the `~USER-ID/' construct is supported only
for the current user, i.e., only if USER-ID is the current user's login
name.

   To prevent Emacs from inserting the default directory when reading
file names, change the variable `insert-default-directory' to `nil'.
In that case, the minibuffer starts out empty.  Nonetheless, relative
file name arguments are still interpreted based on the same default
directory.


File: emacs,  Node: Minibuffer Edit,  Next: Completion,  Prev: Minibuffer File,  Up: Minibuffer

8.2 Editing in the Minibuffer
=============================

The minibuffer is an Emacs buffer, albeit a peculiar one, and the usual
Emacs commands are available for editing the argument text.  (The
prompt, however, is "read-only", and cannot be changed.)

   Since <RET> in the minibuffer is defined to exit the minibuffer, you
can't use it to insert a newline in the minibuffer.  To do that, type
`C-o' or `C-q C-j'.  (The newline character is really the ASCII
character control-J.)

   Inside a minibuffer, the keys `<TAB>', `<SPC>', and `<?>' are often
bound to commands that perform "completion".  *Note Completion::.  You
can use `C-q' (`quoted-insert') to insert a <TAB>, <SPC>, or <?>
character.  For example, `C-q <TAB>' inserts a <TAB> character.  *Note
Inserting Text::.

   For convenience, `C-a' (`move-beginning-of-line') in a minibuffer
moves point to the beginning of the argument text, not the beginning of
the prompt.  For example, this allows you to erase the entire argument
with `C-a C-k'.

   When the minibuffer is active, the echo area is treated much like an
ordinary Emacs window.  For instance, you can switch to another window
(with `C-x o'), edit text there, then return to the minibuffer window
to finish the argument.  You can even kill text in another window,
return to the minibuffer window, and yank the text into the argument.
There are some restrictions on the minibuffer window, however: for
instance, you cannot split it.  *Note Windows::.

   Normally, the minibuffer window occupies a single screen line.
However, if you add two or more lines' worth of text into the
minibuffer, it expands automatically to accomodate the text.  The
variable `resize-mini-windows' controls the resizing of the minibuffer.
The default value is `grow-only', which means the behavior we have
just described.  If the value is `t', the minibuffer window will also
shrink automatically if you remove some lines of text from the
minibuffer, down to a minimum of one screen line.  If the value is
`nil', the minibuffer window never changes size automatically, but you
can use the usual window-resizing commands on it (*note Windows::).

   The variable `max-mini-window-height' controls the maximum height
for resizing the minibuffer window.  A floating-point number specifies
a fraction of the frame's height; an integer specifies the maximum
number of lines; `nil' means do not resize the minibuffer window
automatically.  The default value is 0.25.

   The `C-M-v' command in the minibuffer scrolls the help text from
commands that display help text of any sort in another window.  You can
also scroll the help text with `M-<prior>' and `M-<next>' (or,
equivalently, `M-<PageUp>' and `M-<PageDown>').  This is especially
useful with long lists of possible completions.  *Note Other Window::.

   Emacs normally disallows most commands that use the minibuffer while
the minibuffer is active.  To allow such commands in the minibuffer,
set the variable `enable-recursive-minibuffers' to `t'.


File: emacs,  Node: Completion,  Next: Minibuffer History,  Prev: Minibuffer Edit,  Up: Minibuffer

8.3 Completion
==============

Sometimes, you can use a feature called "completion" to help you enter
arguments.  This means that after you type part of the argument, Emacs
can fill in the rest, or some of it, based on what you have typed so
far.

   When completion is available, certain keys (usually <TAB>, <RET>,
and <SPC>) are rebound to complete the text in the minibuffer into a
longer string chosen from a set of "completion alternatives".  The set
of completion alternatives depends on the command that requested the
argument, and on what you have typed so far.  In addition, you can
usually type `?' to display a list of possible completions.

   For example, `M-x' uses the minibuffer to read the name of a
command, so completion works by matching the minibuffer text against
the names of existing Emacs commands.  So, to run the command
`insert-buffer', you can type `M-x ins <SPC> b <RET>' instead of the
full `M-x insert-buffer <RET>'.

   Case is significant in completion when it is significant in the
argument you are entering, such as command names.  Thus,
`insert-buffer' is not a valid completion for `IN'.  Completion ignores
case distinctions for certain arguments in which case does not matter.

* Menu:

* Example: Completion Example.    Examples of using completion.
* Commands: Completion Commands.  A list of completion commands.
* Strict Completion::             Different types of completion.
* Options: Completion Options.    Options for completion.


File: emacs,  Node: Completion Example,  Next: Completion Commands,  Up: Completion

8.3.1 Completion Example
------------------------

A concrete example may help here.  If you type `M-x a u <TAB>', the
<TAB> looks for alternatives (in this case, command names) that start
with `au'.  There are several, including `auto-fill-mode' and
`autoconf-mode', but they all begin with `auto', so the `au' in the
minibuffer completes to `auto'.

   If you type <TAB> again immediately, it cannot determine the next
character; it could be `-', `a', or `c'.  So it does not add any
characters; instead, <TAB> displays a list of all possible completions
in another window.

   Next, type `- f'.  The minibuffer now contains `auto-f', and the
only command name that starts with this is `auto-fill-mode'.  If you
now type <TAB>, completion fills in the rest of the argument
`auto-fill-mode' into the minibuffer.  You have been able to enter
`auto-fill-mode' by typing just `a u <TAB> - f <TAB>'.


File: emacs,  Node: Completion Commands,  Next: Strict Completion,  Prev: Completion Example,  Up: Completion

8.3.2 Completion Commands
-------------------------

Here is a list of the completion commands defined in the minibuffer
when completion is allowed.

`<TAB>'
     Complete the text in the minibuffer as much as possible; if unable
     to complete, display a list of possible completions
     (`minibuffer-complete').

`<SPC>'
     Complete up to one word from the minibuffer text before point
     (`minibuffer-complete-word').  <SPC> for completion is not
     available when entering a file name, since file names often include
     spaces.

`<RET>'
     Submit the text in the minibuffer as the argument, possibly
     completing first as described in the next node
     (`minibuffer-complete-and-exit').  *Note Strict Completion::.

`?'
     Display a list of possible completions of the text before point
     (`minibuffer-completion-help').

   <TAB> (`minibuffer-complete') is the most fundamental completion
command.  It searches for all possible completion alternatives that
match the existing minibuffer text, and attempts to complete as much as
it can.  The matching of completion alternatives to the minibuffer text
is performed according to somewhat intricate rules, which are designed
so that plausible completions are offered under most circumstances.  A
valid completion alternative must satisfy the following criteria:

   * The minibuffer text before point must be the same as the beginning
     of the completion alternative.  If there is any minibuffer text
     after point, it must be a substring of the remainder of the
     completion alternative.

   * If no completion alternative satisfies the above rules, try using
     "partial completion" rules: divide the minibuffer text into words
     separated by hyphens or spaces, and complete each word separately.
     Thus, when completing command names, `em-l-m' completes to
     `emacs-lisp-mode'.

   * If there is still no completion alternative, try the first rule
     again, but ignore the minibuffer text after point (i.e., don't try
     matching it).

When performing these comparisons, a `*' in the minibuffer text acts as
a "wildcard"--it matches any character at the corresponding position in
the completion alternative.

   <SPC> (`minibuffer-complete-word') completes like <TAB>, but only up
to the next hyphen or space.  If you have `auto-f' in the minibuffer
and type <SPC>, it finds that the completion is `auto-fill-mode', but
it only inserts `ill-', giving `auto-fill-'.  Another <SPC> at this
point completes all the way to `auto-fill-mode'.

   If <TAB> or <SPC> is unable to complete, it displays a list of
possible completions (if there are any) in a separate window.  You can
choose a completion from this list using the following commands:

`Mouse-1'
`Mouse-2'
     Clicking mouse button 1 or 2 on a completion possibility chooses
     that completion (`mouse-choose-completion').

`M-v'
`<PageUp>'
`<prior>'
     Typing `M-v', while in the minibuffer, selects the window showing
     the completion list buffer (`switch-to-completions').  This paves
     the way for using the commands below.  Typing <PageUp> or <prior>
     does the same, as does selecting that window in other ways.

`<RET>'
     Typing <RET>, while in the completion list buffer, chooses the
     completion that point is in or next to (`choose-completion').  To
     use this command, you must first switch to the completion list
     window.

`<Right>'
     Typing the right-arrow key <Right>, while in the completion list
     buffer, moves point to the following completion possibility
     (`next-completion').

`<Left>'
     Typing the left-arrow key <Left>, while in the completion list
     buffer, moves point to the previous completion possibility
     (`previous-completion').


File: emacs,  Node: Strict Completion,  Next: Completion Options,  Prev: Completion Commands,  Up: Completion

8.3.3 Strict Completion
-----------------------

There are three different ways that <RET> can do completion, depending
on how the argument will be used.

   * "Strict" completion accepts only known completion candidates.  For
     example, when `C-x k' reads the name of a buffer to kill, only the
     name of an existing buffer makes sense.  In strict completion,
     <RET> refuses to exit if the text in the minibuffer does not
     complete to an exact match.

   * "Cautious" completion is similar to strict completion, except that
     <RET> exits only if the text is an already exact match.
     Otherwise, <RET> does not exit, but it does complete the text.  If
     that completes to an exact match, a second <RET> will exit.

     Cautious completion is used for reading file names for files that
     must already exist, for example.

   * "Permissive" completion allows any input; the completion
     candidates are just suggestions.  For example, when `C-x C-f'
     reads the name of a file to visit, any file name is allowed,
     including nonexistent file (in case you want to create a file).
     In permissive completion, <RET> does not complete, it just submits
     the argument as you have entered it.

   The completion commands display a list of all possible completions
whenever they can't determine even one more character by completion.
Also, typing `?' explicitly requests such a list.  You can scroll the
list with `C-M-v' (*note Other Window::).


File: emacs,  Node: Completion Options,  Prev: Strict Completion,  Up: Completion

8.3.4 Completion Options
------------------------

If `completion-auto-help' is set to `nil', the completion commands
never display the completion list buffer; you must type `?'  to display
the list.  If the value is `lazy', Emacs only shows the completion list
buffer on the second attempt to complete.  In other words, if there is
nothing to complete, the first <TAB> echoes `Next char not unique'; the
second <TAB> does the completion list buffer.

   When completing file names, certain file names are usually ignored.
The variable `completion-ignored-extensions' contains a list of
strings; a file name ending in any of those strings is ignored as a
completion candidate.  The standard value of this variable has several
elements including `".o"', `".elc"', and `"~"'.  For example, if a
directory contains `foo.c' and `foo.elc', `foo' completes to `foo.c'.
However, if _all_ possible completions end in "ignored" strings, they
are not ignored: in the previous example, `foo.e' completes to
`foo.elc'.  Displaying a list of possible completions disregards
`completion-ignored-extensions'; it shows them all.

   If an element of `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a slash
(`/'), it's a subdirectory name; that directory and its contents are
ignored.  Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions' that do not end
in a slash are ordinary file names.

   When completing file names, Emacs ignores case differences if the
variable `read-file-name-completion-ignore-case' is non-`nil'.  The
default value is `nil' on systems that have case-sensitive file-names,
such as GNU/Linux; it is non-`nil' on systems that have
case-insensitive file-names, such as Microsoft Windows.  When
completing buffer names, Emacs ignores case differences if
`read-buffer-completion-ignore-case' is non-`nil' (the default value is
`nil').

   You can customize the matching rules for completion alternatives
using the variable `completion-styles'.  Its value should be a list of
symbols, each representing a "completion style"; valid style symbols
are `basic', `partial-completion', `emacs22', `emacs21', and
`initials'.  When completing, Emacs attempts to use the first
completion style in the list; if this does not return any completion
alternatives, it tries the next completion style in the list, and so
on.  The completion rules described in *Note Completion Commands::
correspond to the default value of `completion-styles', which is
`(basic partial-completion emacs22)'.

   Icomplete mode presents a constantly-updated display that tells you
what completions are available for the text you've entered so far.  The
command to enable or disable this minor mode is `M-x icomplete-mode'.


File: emacs,  Node: Minibuffer History,  Next: Repetition,  Prev: Completion,  Up: Minibuffer

8.4 Minibuffer History
======================

Every argument that you enter with the minibuffer is saved in a
"minibuffer history list" so you can easily use it again later.  You
can use the following arguments to quickly fetch an earlier argument
into the minibuffer:

`M-p'
`<Up>'
     Move to the previous item in the minibuffer history, an earlier
     argument (`previous-history-element').

`M-n'
`<Down>'
     Move to the next item in the minibuffer history
     (`next-history-element').

`M-r REGEXP <RET>'
     Move to an earlier item in the minibuffer history that matches
     REGEXP (`previous-matching-history-element').

`M-s REGEXP <RET>'
     Move to a later item in the minibuffer history that matches REGEXP
     (`next-matching-history-element').

   While in the minibuffer, typing `M-p' or <Up>
(`previous-history-element') moves up through the minibuffer history
list, one item at a time.  Each `M-p' fetches an earlier item from the
history list into the minibuffer, replacing its existing contents.
Similarly, typing `M-n' or <Down> (`next-history-element') moves back
down the history list, fetching later entries into the minibuffer.  You
can think of these commands as "backwards" and "forwards" through the
history list.

   If you type `M-n' in the minibuffer when there are no later entries
in the minibuffer history (e.g., if you haven't previously typed
`M-p'), Emacs tries fetching from a list of default argument: values
that you are likely to enter.  You can think of this as moving through
the "future list" instead of the "history list".

   The input that `M-p' or `M-n' fetches into the minibuffer entirely
replaces the existing contents of the minibuffer, so you can simply
type <RET> to use it as an argument.  You can also edit the text before
you reuse it; this does not change the history element that you "moved"
to, but your new argument does go at the end of the history list in its
own right.

   There are also commands to search forward or backward through the
history; they search for history elements that match a regular
expression.  `M-r' (`previous-matching-history-element') searches older
elements in the history, while `M-s' (`next-matching-history-element')
searches newer elements.  These commands are unusual: they use the
minibuffer to read the regular expression even though they are invoked
from the minibuffer.  As with incremental searching, an upper-case
letter in the regular expression makes the search case-sensitive (*note
Search Case::).  You can also search through the history using an
incremental search (*note Isearch Minibuffer::).

   All uses of the minibuffer record your input on a history list, but
there are separate history lists for different kinds of arguments.  For
example, there is a list for file names, used by all the commands that
read file names.  (As a special feature, this history list records the
absolute file name, even if the name you entered was not absolute.)

   There are several other specific history lists, including one for
buffer names, one for arguments of commands like `query-replace', one
used by `M-x' for command names, and one used by `compile' for
compilation commands.  Finally, there is one "miscellaneous" history
list that most minibuffer arguments use.

   The variable `history-length' specifies the maximum length of a
minibuffer history list; adding a new element deletes the oldest
element if the list gets too long.  If the value of `history-length' is
`t', there is no maximum length.

   The variable `history-delete-duplicates' specifies whether to delete
duplicates in history.  If it is non-`nil', adding a new element
deletes from the list all other elements that are equal to it.  The
default is `nil'.


File: emacs,  Node: Repetition,  Next: Passwords,  Prev: Minibuffer History,  Up: Minibuffer

8.5 Repeating Minibuffer Commands
=================================

Every command that uses the minibuffer once is recorded on a special
history list, the "command history", together with the values of its
arguments, so that you can repeat the entire command.  In particular,
every use of `M-x' is recorded there, since `M-x' uses the minibuffer
to read the command name.

`C-x <ESC> <ESC>'
     Re-execute a recent minibuffer command from the command history
     (`repeat-complex-command').

`M-x list-command-history'
     Display the entire command history, showing all the commands `C-x
     <ESC> <ESC>' can repeat, most recent first.

   `C-x <ESC> <ESC>' is used to re-execute a recent command that used
the minibuffer.  With no argument, it repeats the last such command.  A
numeric argument specifies which command to repeat; 1 means the last
one, 2 the previous, and so on.

   `C-x <ESC> <ESC>' works by turning the previous command into a Lisp
expression and then entering a minibuffer initialized with the text for
that expression.  Even if you don't understand Lisp syntax, it will
probably be obvious which command is displayed for repetition.  If you
type just <RET>, that repeats the command unchanged.  You can also
change the command by editing the Lisp expression before you execute
it.  The repeated command is added to the front of the command history
unless it is identical to the most recent item.

   Once inside the minibuffer for `C-x <ESC> <ESC>', you can use the
minibuffer history commands (`M-p', `M-n', `M-r', `M-s'; *note
Minibuffer History::) to move through the history list of saved entire
commands.  After finding the desired previous command, you can edit its
expression as usual and then repeat it by typing <RET>.

   Incremental search does not, strictly speaking, use the minibuffer.
Therefore, although it behaves like a complex command, it normally does
not appear in the history list for `C-x <ESC> <ESC>'.  You can make
incremental search commands appear in the history by setting
`isearch-resume-in-command-history' to a non-`nil' value.  *Note
Incremental Search::.

   The list of previous minibuffer-using commands is stored as a Lisp
list in the variable `command-history'.  Each element is a Lisp
expression which describes one command and its arguments.  Lisp programs
can re-execute a command by calling `eval' with the `command-history'
element.


File: emacs,  Node: Passwords,  Prev: Repetition,  Up: Minibuffer

8.6 Entering passwords
======================

Sometimes, you may need to enter a password into Emacs.  For instance,
when you tell Emacs to visit a file on another machine via a network
protocol such as FTP, you often need to supply a password to gain
access to the machine (*note Remote Files::).

   Entering a password is, in a basic sense, similar to using a
minibuffer.  Emacs displays a prompt in the echo area (such as
`Password: '); after you type the required password, press <RET> to
submit it.  To prevent others from seeing your password, every
character you type is displayed as a dot (`.') instead of its usual
form.

   Most of the features and commands associated with the minibuffer can
_not_ be used when entering a password.  There is no history or
completion, and you cannot change windows or perform any other action
with Emacs until you have submitted the password.

   While you are typing the password, you may press <DEL> to delete
backwards, removing the last character entered.  <C-u> deletes
everything you have typed so far.  `C-g' quits the password prompt
(*note Quitting::).  `C-y' inserts the current kill into the password
(*note Killing::).  You may type either <RET> or <ESC> to submit the
password.  Any other self-inserting character key inserts the
associated character into the password, and all other input is ignored.


File: emacs,  Node: M-x,  Next: Help,  Prev: Minibuffer,  Up: Top

9 Running Commands by Name
**************************

Every Emacs command has a name that you can use to run it.  For
convenience, many commands also have key bindings.  You can run those
commands by typing the keys, or run them by name.  Most Emacs commands
have no key bindings, so the only way to run them is by name.  (*Note
Key Bindings::, for how to set up key bindings.)

   By convention, a command name consists of one or more words,
separated by hyphens; for example, `auto-fill-mode' or `manual-entry'.
Command names mostly use complete English words to make them easier to
remember.

   To run a command by name, start with `M-x', type the command name,
then terminate it with <RET>.  `M-x' uses the minibuffer to read the
command name.  The string `M-x' appears at the beginning of the
minibuffer as a "prompt" to remind you to enter a command name to be
run.  <RET> exits the minibuffer and runs the command.  *Note
Minibuffer::, for more information on the minibuffer.

   You can use completion to enter the command name.  For example, to
invoke the command `forward-char', you can type

     M-x forward-char <RET>

or

     M-x forw <TAB> c <RET>

Note that `forward-char' is the same command that you invoke with the
key `C-f'.  The existence of a key binding does not stop you from
running the command by name.

   To cancel the `M-x' and not run a command, type `C-g' instead of
entering the command name.  This takes you back to command level.

   To pass a numeric argument to the command you are invoking with
`M-x', specify the numeric argument before `M-x'.  The argument value
appears in the prompt while the command name is being read, and finally
`M-x' passes the argument to that command.

   When the command you run with `M-x' has a key binding, Emacs
mentions this in the echo area after running the command.  For example,
if you type `M-x forward-word', the message says that you can run the
same command by typing `M-f'.  You can turn off these messages by
setting the variable `suggest-key-bindings' to `nil'.

   In this manual, when we speak of running a command by name, we often
omit the <RET> that terminates the name.  Thus we might say `M-x
auto-fill-mode' rather than `M-x auto-fill-mode <RET>'.  We mention the
<RET> only for emphasis, such as when the command is followed by
arguments.

   `M-x' works by running the command `execute-extended-command', which
is responsible for reading the name of another command and invoking it.


File: emacs,  Node: Help,  Next: Mark,  Prev: M-x,  Up: Top

10 Help
*******

Emacs provides extensive help features, all accessible through the
"help character", `C-h'.  This is a prefix key that is used for
commands that display documentation; the next character you type should
be a "help option", to ask for a particular kind of help.  You can
cancel the `C-h' command with `C-g'.  The function key <F1> is
equivalent to `C-h'.

   `C-h' itself is one of the help options; `C-h C-h' displays a list
of help options, with a brief description of each one
(`help-for-help').  You can scroll the list with <SPC> and <DEL>, then
type the help option you want.  To cancel, type `C-g'.

   `C-h' or <F1> means "help" in various other contexts as well.  For
instance, you can type them after a prefix key to display a list of the
keys that can follow the prefix key.  (A few prefix keys don't support
`C-h' in this way, because they define other meanings for it, but they
all support <F1> for help.)

   Most help buffers use a special major mode, Help mode, which lets
you scroll conveniently with <SPC> and <DEL>.  You can also follow
hyperlinks to URLs, and to other facilities including Info nodes and
customization buffers.  *Note Help Mode::.

   If you are looking for a certain feature, but don't know what it is
called or where to look, we recommend three methods.  First, try an
apropos command, then try searching the manual index, then look in the
FAQ and the package keywords.

`C-h a TOPICS <RET>'
     This searches for commands whose names match the argument TOPICS.
     The argument can be a keyword, a list of keywords, or a regular
     expression (*note Regexps::).  *Note Apropos::.

`C-h i d m emacs <RET> i TOPIC <RET>'
     This searches for TOPIC in the indices of the on-line Emacs
     manual, and displays the first match found.  Press `,' to see
     subsequent matches.  You can use a regular expression as TOPIC.

`C-h i d m emacs <RET> s TOPIC <RET>'
     Similar, but searches the _text_ of the manual rather than the
     indices.

`C-h C-f'
     This displays the Emacs FAQ.  You can use the Info commands to
     browse it.

`C-h p'
     This displays the available Emacs packages based on keywords.
     *Note Library Keywords::.

* Menu:

* Help Summary::	Brief list of all Help commands.
* Key Help::		Asking what a key does in Emacs.
* Name Help::		Asking about a command, variable or function name.
* Apropos::		Asking what pertains to a given topic.
* Help Mode::           Special features of Help mode and Help buffers.
* Library Keywords::	Finding Lisp libraries by keywords (topics).
* Language Help::       Help relating to international language support.
* Misc Help::		Other help commands.
* Help Files::          Commands to display pre-written help files.
* Help Echo::           Help on active text and tooltips (`balloon help').


File: emacs,  Node: Help Summary,  Next: Key Help,  Up: Help

10.1 Help Summary
=================

   Here is a summary of the Emacs interactive help commands.  (The
character that follows `C-h' is the "help option.")  See *Note Help
Files::, for other help commands that display fixed files of
information.

`C-h a TOPICS <RET>'
     Display a list of commands whose names match TOPICS
     (`apropos-command'; *note Apropos::).

`C-h b'
     Display all active key bindings; minor mode bindings first, then
     those of the major mode, then global bindings
     (`describe-bindings').

`C-h c KEY'
     Given a key sequence KEY, show the name of the command that it
     runs (`describe-key-briefly').  Here `c' stands for "character."
     For more extensive information on KEY, use `C-h k'.

`C-h d TOPICS <RET>'
     Display the commands and variables whose documentation matches
     TOPICS (`apropos-documentation').

`C-h e'
     Display the `*Messages*' buffer (`view-echo-area-messages').

`C-h f FUNCTION <RET>'
     Display documentation on the Lisp function named FUNCTION
     (`describe-function').  Since commands are Lisp functions, this
     works for commands too.

`C-h h'
     Display the `HELLO' file, which shows examples of various character
     sets.

`C-h i'
     Run Info, the GNU documentation browser (`info').  The complete
     Emacs manual is available on-line in Info.

`C-h k KEY'
     Display the name and documentation of the command that KEY runs
     (`describe-key').

`C-h l'
     Display a description of your last 300 keystrokes (`view-lossage').

`C-h m'
     Display documentation of the current major mode (`describe-mode').

`C-h n'
     Display news of recent Emacs changes (`view-emacs-news').

`C-h p'
     Find packages by topic keyword (`finder-by-keyword').  For an
     alternative interface to the same information, try the
     `info-finder' command.

`C-h r'
     Display the Emacs manual in Info (`info-emacs-manual').

`C-h s'
     Display the current contents of the syntax table, with an
     explanation of what they mean (`describe-syntax').  *Note Syntax::.

`C-h t'
     Enter the Emacs interactive tutorial (`help-with-tutorial').

`C-h v VAR <RET>'
     Display the documentation of the Lisp variable VAR
     (`describe-variable').

`C-h w COMMAND <RET>'
     Show which keys run the command named COMMAND (`where-is').

`C-h C CODING <RET>'
     Describe the coding system CODING (`describe-coding-system').

`C-h C <RET>'
     Describe the coding systems currently in use.

`C-h F COMMAND <RET>'
     Enter Info and go to the node that documents the Emacs command
     COMMAND (`Info-goto-emacs-command-node').

`C-h I METHOD <RET>'
     Describe the input method METHOD (`describe-input-method').

`C-h K KEY'
     Enter Info and go to the node that documents the key sequence KEY
     (`Info-goto-emacs-key-command-node').

`C-h L LANGUAGE-ENV <RET>'
     Display information on the character sets, coding systems, and
     input methods used in language environment LANGUAGE-ENV
     (`describe-language-environment').

`C-h S SYMBOL <RET>'
     Display the Info documentation on symbol SYMBOL according to the
     programming language you are editing (`info-lookup-symbol').

`C-h .'
     Display the help message for a special text area, if point is in
     one (`display-local-help').  (These include, for example, links in
     `*Help*' buffers.)


File: emacs,  Node: Key Help,  Next: Name Help,  Prev: Help Summary,  Up: Help

10.2 Documentation for a Key
============================

The help commands to get information about a key sequence are `C-h c'
and `C-h k'.  `C-h c KEY' displays in the echo area the name of the
command that KEY is bound to.  For example, `C-h c C-f' displays
`forward-char'.  Since command names are chosen to describe what the
commands do, this gives you a very brief description of what KEY does.

   `C-h k KEY' is similar but gives more information: it displays the
documentation string of the command as well as its name.  It displays
this information in a window, since it may not fit in the echo area.

   To find the documentation of a key sequence KEY, type `C-h K KEY'.
This displays the appropriate manual section which contains the
documentation of KEY.

   `C-h c', `C-h k' and `C-h K' work for any sort of key sequences,
including function keys, menus, and mouse events.  For instance, after
`C-h k' you can select a menu item from the menu bar, to view the
documentation string of the command it runs.

   `C-h w COMMAND <RET>' lists the keys that are bound to COMMAND.  It
displays the list in the echo area.  If it says the command is not on
any key, that means you must use `M-x' to run it.  `C-h w' runs the
command `where-is'.


File: emacs,  Node: Name Help,  Next: Apropos,  Prev: Key Help,  Up: Help

10.3 Help by Command or Variable Name
=====================================

`C-h f FUNCTION <RET>' (`describe-function') displays the documentation
of Lisp function FUNCTION, in a window.  Since commands are Lisp
functions, you can use this method to view the documentation of any
command whose name you know.  For example,

     C-h f auto-fill-mode <RET>

displays the documentation of `auto-fill-mode'.  This is the only way
to get the documentation of a command that is not bound to any key (one
which you would normally run using `M-x').

   `C-h f' is also useful for Lisp functions that you use in a Lisp
program.  For example, if you have just written the expression
`(make-vector len)' and want to check that you are using `make-vector'
properly, type `C-h f make-vector <RET>'.  Because `C-h f' allows all
function names, not just command names, you may find that some of your
favorite completion abbreviations that work in `M-x' don't work in `C-h
f'.  An abbreviation that is unique among command names may not be
unique among all function names.

   If you type `C-h f <RET>', it describes the function called by the
innermost Lisp expression in the buffer around point, _provided_ that
function name is a valid, defined Lisp function.  (That name appears as
the default while you enter the argument.)  For example, if point is
located following the text `(make-vector (car x)', the innermost list
containing point is the one that starts with `(make-vector', so `C-h f
<RET>' will describe the function `make-vector'.

   `C-h f' is also useful just to verify that you spelled a function
name correctly.  If the minibuffer prompt for `C-h f' shows the
function name from the buffer as the default, it means that name is
defined as a Lisp function.  Type `C-g' to cancel the `C-h f' command
if you don't really want to view the documentation.

   `C-h v' (`describe-variable') is like `C-h f' but describes Lisp
variables instead of Lisp functions.  Its default is the Lisp symbol
around or before point, if that is the name of a defined Lisp variable.
*Note Variables::.

   Help buffers that describe Emacs variables and functions normally
have hyperlinks to the corresponding source definition, if you have the
source files installed.  (*Note Hyperlinking::.)  If you know Lisp (or
C), this provides the ultimate documentation.  If you don't know Lisp,
you should learn it.  (The Introduction to Emacs Lisp Programming,
available from the FSF through fsf.org, is a good way to get started.)
If Emacs feels you are just _using_ it, treating it as an object
program, its feelings may be hurt.  For real intimacy, read the Emacs
source code.

   To find a command's documentation in a manual, use `C-h F'
(`Info-goto-emacs-command-node').  This knows about various manuals,
not just the Emacs manual, and finds the right one.


File: emacs,  Node: Apropos,  Next: Help Mode,  Prev: Name Help,  Up: Help

10.4 Apropos
============

The "apropos" commands answer questions like, "What are the commands
for working with files?"  More precisely, you specify an "apropos
pattern", which means either a word, a list of words, or a regular
expression.  Each apropos command displays a list of items that match
the pattern, in a separate buffer.

`C-h a PATTERN <RET>'
     Search for commands whose names match PATTERN.

`M-x apropos <RET> PATTERN <RET>'
     Search for functions and variables whose names match PATTERN.
     Both interactive functions (commands) and noninteractive functions
     can be found by this command.

`M-x apropos-variable <RET> PATTERN <RET>'
     Search for user-option variables whose names match PATTERN.

`M-x apropos-value <RET> PATTERN <RET>'
     Search for functions whose definitions match PATTERN, and
     variables whose values match PATTERN.

`C-h d PATTERN <RET>'
     Search for functions and variables whose *documentation strings*
     match PATTERN.

   The simplest kind of apropos pattern is one word.  Anything which
contains that word matches the pattern.  Thus, to find the commands
that work on files, type `C-h a file <RET>'.  This displays a list of
all command names that contain `file', including `copy-file',
`find-file', and so on.  Each command name comes with a brief
description and a list of keys you can currently invoke it with.  In
our example, it would say that you can invoke `find-file' by typing
`C-x C-f'.

   The `a' in `C-h a' stands for "Apropos"; `C-h a' runs the command
`apropos-command'.  This command normally checks only commands
(interactive functions); if you specify a prefix argument, it checks
noninteractive functions as well.

   For more information about a function definition, variable or symbol
property listed in the apropos buffer, you can click on it with
`Mouse-1' or `Mouse-2', or move there and type <RET>.

   When you specify more than one word in the apropos pattern, a name
must contain at least two of the words in order to match.  Thus, if you
are looking for commands to kill a chunk of text before point, you
could try `C-h a kill back backward behind before <RET>'.  The real
command name `kill-backward' will match that; if there were a command
`kill-text-before', it would also match, since it contains two of the
specified words.

   For even greater flexibility, you can specify a regular expression
(*note Regexps::).  An apropos pattern is interpreted as a regular
expression if it contains any of the regular expression special
characters, `^$*+?.\['.

   Following the conventions for naming Emacs commands, here are some
words that you'll find useful in apropos patterns.  By using them in
`C-h a', you will also get a feel for the naming conventions.

     char, line, word, sentence, paragraph, region, page, sexp, list,
     defun, rect, buffer, frame, window, face, file, dir, register,
     mode, beginning, end, forward, backward, next, previous, up, down,
     search, goto, kill, delete, mark, insert, yank, fill, indent,
     case, change, set, what, list, find, view, describe, default.

   Use `M-x apropos' instead of `C-h a' to list all the Lisp symbols
that match an apropos pattern, not just the symbols that are commands.
This command does not list key bindings by default; specify a numeric
argument if you want it to list them.

   Use `M-x apropos-variable' to list user-customizable variables that
match an apropos pattern.  If you specify a prefix argument, it lists
all matching variables.

   The `apropos-documentation' command is like `apropos' except that it
searches documentation strings instead of symbol names for matches.

   The `apropos-value' command is like `apropos' except that it
searches variables' values for matches for the apropos pattern.  With a
prefix argument, it also checks symbols' function definitions and
property lists.

   If the variable `apropos-do-all' is non-`nil', the apropos commands
always behave as if they had been given a prefix argument.

   By default, apropos lists the search results in alphabetical order.
If the variable `apropos-sort-by-scores' is non-`nil', the apropos
commands try to guess the relevance of each result, and display the
most relevant ones first.

   By default, apropos lists the search results for
`apropos-documentation' in order of relevance of the match.  If the
variable `apropos-documentation-sort-by-scores' is `nil', apropos lists
the symbols found in alphabetical order.


File: emacs,  Node: Help Mode,  Next: Library Keywords,  Prev: Apropos,  Up: Help

10.5 Help Mode Commands
=======================

Help buffers provide the same commands as View mode (*note Misc File
Ops::), plus a few special commands of their own.

`<SPC>'
     Scroll forward.

`<DEL>'
     Scroll backward.

`<RET>'
     Follow a cross reference at point.

`<TAB>'
     Move point forward to the next cross reference.

`S-<TAB>'
     Move point back to the previous cross reference.

`Mouse-1'
`Mouse-2'
     Follow a cross reference that you click on.

`C-c C-c'
     Show all documentation about the symbol at point.

   When a function name (*note Running Commands by Name: M-x.),
variable name (*note Variables::), or face name (*note Faces::) appears
in the documentation, it normally appears inside paired single-quotes.
To view the documentation of that command, variable or face, you can
click on the name with `Mouse-1' or `Mouse-2', or move point there and
type <RET>.  Use `C-c C-b' to retrace your steps.

   You can follow cross references to URLs (web pages) also.  This uses
the `browse-url' command to view the page in the browser you choose.
*Note Browse-URL::.

   There are convenient commands to move point to cross references in
the help text.  <TAB> (`help-next-ref') moves point down to the next
cross reference.  `S-<TAB>' moves up to the previous cross reference
(`help-previous-ref').

   To view all documentation about any symbol name that appears in the
text, move point to the symbol name and type `C-c C-c'
(`help-follow-symbol').  This shows all available documentation about
the symbol as a variable, function and/or face.  As above, use `C-c
C-b' to retrace your steps.


File: emacs,  Node: Library Keywords,  Next: Language Help,  Prev: Help Mode,  Up: Help

10.6 Keyword Search for Lisp Libraries
======================================

The `C-h p' command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
by topic keywords.  Here is a partial list of keywords you can use:

abbrev        abbreviation handling, typing shortcuts, macros.
bib           code related to the `bib' bibliography processor.
c             support for the C language and related languages.
calendar      calendar and time management support.
comm          communications, networking, remote access to files.
convenience   convenience features for faster editing.
data          support for editing files of data.
docs          support for Emacs documentation.
emulations    emulations of other editors.
extensions    Emacs Lisp language extensions.
faces         support for multiple fonts.
files         support for editing and manipulating files.
frames        support for Emacs frames and window systems.
games         games, jokes and amusements.
hardware      support for interfacing with exotic hardware.
help          support for on-line help systems.
hypermedia    support for links between text or other media types.
i18n          internationalization and alternate character-set support.
internal      code for Emacs internals, build process, defaults.
languages     specialized modes for editing programming languages.
lisp          Lisp support, including Emacs Lisp.
local         code local to your site.
maint         maintenance aids for the Emacs development group.
mail          modes for electronic-mail handling.
matching      various sorts of searching and matching.
mouse         mouse support.
multimedia    images and sound support.
news          support for netnews reading and posting.
oop           support for object-oriented programming.
outlines      support for hierarchical outlining.
processes     process, subshell, compilation, and job control support.
terminals     support for terminal types.
tex           supporting code for the TeX formatter.
tools         programming tools.
unix          front-ends/assistants for, or emulators of, UNIX-like
              features.
wp            word processing.


File: emacs,  Node: Language Help,  Next: Misc Help,  Prev: Library Keywords,  Up: Help

10.7 Help for International Language Support
============================================

You can use the command `C-h L' (`describe-language-environment') to
get information about a specific language environment.  *Note Language
Environments::.  This tells you which languages this language
environment supports.  It also lists the character sets, coding
systems, and input methods that work with this language environment,
and finally shows some sample text to illustrate scripts.

   The command `C-h h' (`view-hello-file') displays the file
`etc/HELLO', which shows how to say "hello" in many languages.

   The command `C-h I' (`describe-input-method') describes an input
method--either a specified input method, or by default the input method
currently in use.  *Note Input Methods::.

   The command `C-h C' (`describe-coding-system') describes coding
systems--either a specified coding system, or the ones currently in
use.  *Note Coding Systems::.


File: emacs,  Node: Misc Help,  Next: Help Files,  Prev: Language Help,  Up: Help

10.8 Other Help Commands
========================

`C-h i' (`info') runs the Info program, which browses structured
documentation files.  The entire Emacs manual is available within Info,
along with many other manuals for the GNU system.  Type `h' after
entering Info to run a tutorial on using Info.

   With a numeric argument N, `C-h i' selects the Info buffer
`*info*<N>'.  This is useful if you want to browse multiple Info
manuals simultaneously.  If you specify just `C-u' as the prefix
argument, `C-h i' prompts for the name of a documentation file, so you
can browse a file which doesn't have an entry in the top-level Info
menu.

   The help commands `C-h F FUNCTION <RET>' and `C-h K KEY', described
above, enter Info and go straight to the documentation of FUNCTION or
KEY.

   When editing a program, if you have an Info version of the manual
for the programming language, you can use `C-h S'
(`info-lookup-symbol') to find an entry for a symbol (keyword, function
or variable) in the proper manual.  The details of how this command
works depend on the major mode.

   If something surprising happens, and you are not sure what you typed,
use `C-h l' (`view-lossage').  `C-h l' displays your last 300 input
keystrokes.  If you see commands that you don't know, you can use `C-h
c' to find out what they do.

   To review recent echo area messages, use `C-h e'
(`view-echo-area-messages').  This displays the buffer `*Messages*',
where those messages are kept.

   Each Emacs major mode typically redefines a few keys and makes other
changes in how editing works.  `C-h m' (`describe-mode') displays
documentation on the current major mode, which normally describes the
commands and features that are changed in this mode.

   `C-h b' (`describe-bindings') and `C-h s' (`describe-syntax') show
other information about the current environment within Emacs.  `C-h b'
displays a list of all the key bindings now in effect: first the local
bindings of the current minor modes, then the local bindings defined by
the current major mode, and finally the global bindings (*note Key
Bindings::).  `C-h s' displays the contents of the syntax table, with
explanations of each character's syntax (*note Syntax::).

   You can get a list of subcommands for a particular prefix key by
typing `C-h' after the prefix key.  (There are a few prefix keys for
which this does not work--those that provide their own bindings for
`C-h'.  One of these is <ESC>, because `<ESC> C-h' is actually `C-M-h',
which marks a defun.)


File: emacs,  Node: Help Files,  Next: Help Echo,  Prev: Misc Help,  Up: Help

10.9 Help Files
===============

The Emacs help commands described above display dynamic help based on
the current state within Emacs, or refer to manuals.  Other help
commands display pre-written, static help files.

   Except for `C-h g', these commands all have the form `C-h C-CHAR';
that is, `C-h' followed by a control character.

`C-h C-c'
     Display the Emacs copying conditions (`describe-copying').  These
     are the rules under which you can copy and redistribute Emacs.

`C-h C-d'
     Display how to debug Emacs problems (`view-emacs-debugging').

`C-h C-f'
     Display the Emacs frequently-answered-questions list
     (`view-emacs-FAQ').

`C-h g'
     Display general information about the GNU Project
     (`describe-gnu-project').

`C-h C-m'
     Display how to order printed copies of Emacs manuals
     (`view-order-manuals').

`C-h C-n'
     Display the Emacs "news" file, which lists new features in the most
     recent version of Emacs (`view-emacs-news').

`C-h C-o'
     Display how to order or download the latest version of Emacs and
     other GNU software (`describe-distribution').

`C-h C-p'
     Display the list of known Emacs problems, sometimes with suggested
     workarounds (`view-emacs-problems').

`C-h C-t'
     Display the Emacs to-do list (`view-emacs-todo').

`C-h C-w'
     Display the full details on the complete absence of warranty for
     GNU Emacs (`describe-no-warranty').


File: emacs,  Node: Help Echo,  Prev: Help Files,  Up: Help

10.10 Help on Active Text and Tooltips
======================================

When text on the screen is "active", so that it does something special
in response to mouse clicks or `RET', it often has associated help
text.  For instance, most parts of the mode line have help text.  On
terminals that support mouse tracking, Emacs displays the help text as a
"tooltip" (sometimes known as "balloon help") or in the echo area,
whenever you leave the mouse stationary over the active text.  *Note
Tooltips::.

   If your terminal doesn't support mouse-tracking, you can display the
help text for active buffer text using the keyboard.  `C-h .'
(`display-local-help') displays any help text associated with the
character after point, using the echo area.  To display help text
automatically whenever it is available on the character after point, set
the variable `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' to `t'.


File: emacs,  Node: Mark,  Next: Killing,  Prev: Help,  Up: Top

11 The Mark and the Region
**************************

Many Emacs commands operate on an arbitrary contiguous part of the
current buffer.  To specify the text for such a command to operate on,
you set "the mark" at one end of it, and move point to the other end.
The text between point and the mark is called "the region".  The region
always extends between point and the mark, no matter which one comes
earlier in the text; each time you move point, the region changes.

   Setting the mark at a position in the text also "activates" it.
When the mark is active, Emacs indicates the extent of the region by
highlighting the text within it, using the `region' face (*note Face
Customization::).  After certain non-motion commands, including any
command that changes the text in the buffer, Emacs automatically
"deactivates" the mark; this turns off the highlighting.  You can also
explicitly deactivate the mark at any time, by typing `C-g' (*note
Quitting::).

   This default behavior of the mark is known as Transient Mark mode.
Disabling Transient Mark mode switches Emacs to an alternative
behavior, in which the mark is always active, which was the default
prior to Emacs 23.  *Note Persistent Mark::.

   Setting the mark in one buffer has no effect on the marks in other
buffers.  When you return to a buffer with an active mark, the mark is
at the same place as before.  When multiple windows show the same
buffer, they can have different values of point, and thus different
regions, but they all share one common mark position.  *Note Windows::.
Ordinarily, only the selected window highlights its region; however, if
the variable `highlight-nonselected-windows' is non-`nil', each window
highlights its own region.

* Menu:

* Setting Mark::	Commands to set the mark.
* Marking Objects::	Commands to put region around textual units.
* Using Region::	Summary of ways to operate on contents of the region.
* Mark Ring::   	Previous mark positions saved so you can go back there.
* Global Mark Ring::    Previous mark positions in various buffers.
* Shift Selection::     Using shifted cursor motion keys.
* Persistent Mark::	Keeping the mark active all the time.


File: emacs,  Node: Setting Mark,  Next: Marking Objects,  Up: Mark

11.1 Setting the Mark
=====================

Here are some commands for setting the mark:

`C-<SPC>'
     Set the mark at point, and activate it (`set-mark-command').

`C-@'
     The same.

`C-x C-x'
     Set the mark at point, and move point where the mark was
     (`exchange-point-and-mark').

`Drag-Mouse-1'
     Set point and the mark around the text you drag across.

`Mouse-3'
     Set the mark at point, then move point to where you click
     (`mouse-save-then-kill').

``Shifted motion keys''
     Set the mark at point if the mark is inactive, then move point.

   The most common way to set the mark is with `C-<SPC>'
(`set-mark-command')(1).  This sets the mark where point is, and
activates it.  You can then move point away, leaving the mark behind.

   For example, suppose you wish to convert part of the buffer to upper
case.  To accomplish this, go to the beginning of the desired text,
type `C-<SPC>', and move point until the desired portion of text is
highlighted.  Now type `C-x C-u' (`upcase-region').  This converts the
text in the region to upper case, and then deactivates the mark.

   The command `C-x C-x' (`exchange-point-and-mark') exchanges the
positions of point and the mark, keeping the region unchanged.  If the
mark is inactive, Emacs first reactivates the mark wherever it was last
set.  `C-x C-x' is useful when you are satisfied with the position of
point but want to move the other end of the region (where the mark is).
Using `C-x C-x' a second time, if necessary, puts the mark at the new
position with point back at its original position.

   You can also set the mark with the mouse.  If you press the left
mouse button (`down-mouse-1') and drag the mouse across a range of text
while holding down this button, this sets the mark where you first
pressed the mouse button and puts point where you release it.
Alternatively, clicking the right mouse button (`mouse-3') sets the
mark at point and then moves point to where you clicked.  Using the
mouse to mark a region also copies the region into the kill ring (*note
Kill Ring::).  *Note Mouse Commands::, for a more detailed description
of these mouse commands.

   Finally, you can set the mark by holding down the shift key while
typing certain cursor motion commands (such as `S-<right>', `S-C-f',
`S-C-n', etc.)  This is referred to as "shift-selection".  This sets
the mark at point before moving point, but only if there is no active
mark set via shift-selection.  The mark set by mouse commands and by
shift-selection behaves slightly differently from the usual mark: any
subsequent unshifted cursor motion command deactivates it
automatically.  For details, *Note Shift Selection::.

   Whenever the mark is active, you can deactivate it by typing `C-g'
(*note Quitting::).  The mark is also automatically deactivated after
certain non-motion commands.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) There is no `C-<SPC>' character in ASCII; usually, typing
`C-<SPC>' on a text terminal gives the character `C-@'.  This key is
also bound to `set-mark-command', so unless you are unlucky enough to
have a text terminal that behaves differently, you might as well think
of `C-@' as `C-<SPC>'.


File: emacs,  Node: Marking Objects,  Next: Using Region,  Prev: Setting Mark,  Up: Mark

11.2 Commands to Mark Textual Objects
=====================================

Here are the commands for placing point and the mark around a textual
object such as a word, list, paragraph or page:

`M-@'
     Set mark after end of next word (`mark-word').  This does not move
     point.

`C-M-@'
     Set mark after end of following balanced expression (`mark-sexp').
     This does not move point.

`M-h'
     Move point to the beginning of the current paragraph, and set mark
     at the end (`mark-paragraph').

`C-M-h'
     Move point to the beginning of the current defun, and set mark at
     the end (`mark-defun').

`C-x C-p'
     Move point to the beginning of the current page, and set mark at
     the end (`mark-page').

`C-x h'
     Move point to the beginning of the buffer, and set mark at the end
     (`mark-whole-buffer').

   `M-@' (`mark-word') puts the mark at the end of the next word, while
`C-M-@' (`mark-sexp') puts it at the end of the next balanced
expression (*note Expressions::).  These commands handle arguments just
like `M-f' and `C-M-f'.

   The other commands in the above list set both point and mark, so as
to delimit an object in the buffer.  `M-h' (`mark-paragraph') moves
point to the beginning of the paragraph that surrounds or follows
point, and sets the mark at the end of that paragraph (*note
Paragraphs::).  As a special exception, repeated invocations of `M-h'
extend the region to subsequent paragraphs.  This is convenient for
indenting, case-converting, or killing entire paragraphs.

   The `M-h' command accepts prefix arguments.  If the argument's value
is positive, `M-h' marks that many paragraphs starting with the one
surrounding point; therefore, `C-u M-h' is equivalent to `M-h M-h M-h
M-h'.  If the prefix argument is -N, `M-h' marks N paragraphs running
back from the one surrounding point; in this case, point moves forward
to the end of that paragraph, and the mark goes at the start of the
region.

   Similarly, `C-M-h' (`mark-defun') sets mark and point around major
top-level definitions (*note Moving by Defuns::), and `C-x C-p'
(`mark-page') does the same for pages (*note Pages::).  These treat
repeated invocations and prefix arguments similarly to `mark-paragraph'.

   Finally, `C-x h' (`mark-whole-buffer') sets up the entire buffer as
the region, by putting point at the beginning and the mark at the end.
(In some programs this is called "select all.")


File: emacs,  Node: Using Region,  Next: Mark Ring,  Prev: Marking Objects,  Up: Mark

11.3 Operating on the Region
============================

Once you have a region, here are some of the ways you can operate on it:

   * Kill it with `C-w' (*note Killing::).

   * Copy it to the kill ring with `M-w' (*note Yanking::).

   * Convert case with `C-x C-l' or `C-x C-u' (*note Case::).

   * Undo changes within it using `C-u C-/' (*note Undo::).

   * Replace text within it using `M-%' (*note Query Replace::).

   * Indent it with `C-x <TAB>' or `C-M-\' (*note Indentation::).

   * Fill it as text with `M-x fill-region' (*note Filling::).

   * Print hardcopy with `M-x print-region' (*note Printing::).

   * Evaluate it as Lisp code with `M-x eval-region' (*note Lisp
     Eval::).

   * Save it in a register with `C-x r s' (*note Registers::).

   * Save it in a buffer or a file (*note Accumulating Text::).

   Most commands that operate on the text in the region have the word
`region' in their names.

   Some commands have a default behavior when the mark is inactive, but
operate on the text in the region if the mark is active.  For example,
`M-$' (`ispell-word') normally checks the spelling of the word at
point, but it checks the text in the region if the region is active
(*note Spelling::).  Normally, such commands use their default behavior
if the region is empty (i.e., if mark and point are at the same
position).  If you want them to operate on the empty region, change the
variable `use-empty-active-region' to `t'.

   If you enable Delete Selection mode, a minor mode, then inserting
text while the mark is active causes the selected text to be deleted
first.  This also deactivates the mark.  Many graphical applications
follow this convention, but Emacs does not.  To toggle Delete Selection
mode on or off, type `M-x delete-selection-mode'.  Another effect of
this mode is that some keys, such as <DEL> and `C-d', always kill the
region if one exists.


File: emacs,  Node: Mark Ring,  Next: Global Mark Ring,  Prev: Using Region,  Up: Mark

11.4 The Mark Ring
==================

Aside from delimiting the region, the mark is also useful for
remembering spots that you may want to go back to.  Each buffer
remembers 16 previous locations of the mark, in the "mark ring".
Commands that set the mark also push the old mark onto this ring.

`C-<SPC> C-<SPC>'
     Set the mark, pushing it onto the mark ring, without activating it.

`C-u C-<SPC>'
     Move point to where the mark was, and restore the mark from the
     ring of former marks.

   The command C-<SPC> C-<SPC> is handy when you want to use the mark
to remember a position to which you may wish to return.  It pushes the
current point onto the mark ring, without activating the mark (which
would cause Emacs to highlight the region).  This is actually two
consecutive invocations of `C-<SPC>' (`set-mark-command'); the first
`C-<SPC>' sets the mark, and the second `C-<SPC>' deactivates it.
(When Transient Mark mode is off, C-<SPC> C-<SPC> instead activates
Transient Mark mode temporarily.  *Note Persistent Mark::.)

   To return to a marked position, use `set-mark-command' with a prefix
argument: `C-u C-<SPC>'.  This moves point to where the mark was, and
deactivates the mark if it was active.  Each subsequent `C-u C-<SPC>'
jumps to a prior position stored in the mark ring.  The positions you
move through in this way are not lost; they go to the end of the ring.

   If you set `set-mark-command-repeat-pop' to non-`nil', then
immediately after you type `C-u C-<SPC>', you can type `C-<SPC>'
instead of `C-u C-<SPC>' to cycle through the mark ring.  By default,
`set-mark-command-repeat-pop' is `nil'.

   Each buffer has its own mark ring.  All editing commands use the
current buffer's mark ring.  In particular, `C-u C-<SPC>' always stays
in the same buffer.

   The variable `mark-ring-max' specifies the maximum number of entries
to keep in the mark ring.  If that many entries exist and another one
is pushed, the earliest one in the list is discarded.  Repeating `C-u
C-<SPC>' cycles through the positions currently in the ring.

   If the variable `mark-even-if-inactive' is `nil', commands can only
use the mark and the region when it is active.  This variable is
non-`nil' by default.

   If you want to move back to the same place over and over, the mark
ring may not be convenient enough.  If so, you can record the position
in a register for later retrieval (*note Saving Positions in Registers:
RegPos.).


File: emacs,  Node: Global Mark Ring,  Next: Shift Selection,  Prev: Mark Ring,  Up: Mark

11.5 The Global Mark Ring
=========================

In addition to the ordinary mark ring that belongs to each buffer,
Emacs has a single "global mark ring".  Each time you set a mark, in
any buffer, this is recorded in the global mark ring in addition to the
current buffer's own mark ring.

   The command `C-x C-<SPC>' (`pop-global-mark') jumps to the buffer
and position of the latest entry in the global ring.  It also rotates
the ring, so that successive uses of `C-x C-<SPC>' take you to earlier
buffers and mark positions.


File: emacs,  Node: Shift Selection,  Next: Persistent Mark,  Prev: Global Mark Ring,  Up: Mark

11.6 Shift Selection
====================

If you hold down the shift key while typing a cursor motion command,
this sets the mark before moving point, so that the region extends from
the original position of point to its new position.  This feature,
newly introduced in Emacs 23, is referred to as "shift-selection".  It
is similar to the way text is selected in other editors.

   The mark set via shift-selection behaves a little differently from
what we have described above.  Firstly, in addition to the usual ways
of deactivating the mark (such as changing the buffer text or typing
`C-g'), the mark is deactivated by any _unshifted_ cursor motion
command.  Secondly, any subsequent _shifted_ cursor motion command
avoids setting the mark anew.  Therefore, a series of shifted cursor
motion commands will continuously extend the region.

   Shift-selection only works if the shifted cursor motion key is not
already bound to a separate command (*note Customization::).  For
example, if you bind `S-C-f' to another command, typing `S-C-f' runs
that command instead of performing a shift-selected version of `C-f'
(`forward-char').

   A mark set via mouse commands behaves the same as a mark set via
shift-selection (*note Setting Mark::).  For example, if you specify a
region by dragging the mouse, you can continue to extend the region
using shifted cursor motion commands.  In either case, any unshifted
cursor motion command deactivates the mark.

   To turn off shift-selection, set `shift-select-mode' to `nil'.
Doing this does not disable setting the mark via mouse commands.


File: emacs,  Node: Persistent Mark,  Prev: Shift Selection,  Up: Mark

11.7 Persistent Marks
=====================

By default, the mark is activated by setting it, and deactivated by
most non-motion commands (including all commands that change the text
in the buffer).  This behavior is called Transient Mark mode(1).

   Turning off Transient Mark mode switches Emacs to an alternative
mode of operation, which was the default prior to Emacs 23.  When
Transient Mark mode is off, the mark is _never_ deactivated, but it can
be set to different locations using commands such as `C-<SPC>'.  Emacs
does not highlight the region, because that would be a nuisance.  As a
special exception, the region is temporarily highlighted if you set it
with the mouse (*note Setting Mark::), or with shift-selection (*note
Shift Selection::).

   To turn off Transient Mark mode, type `M-x transient-mark-mode'.
This command toggles the mode; you can use the same command to turn it
on again.  You can also toggle Transient Mark mode using the `Active
Region Highlighting' menu item in the `Options' menu.

   Here are the details of how Emacs behaves when Transient Mark mode
is off:

   * Emacs does not show where the mark is located--you have to
     remember.  The usual solution to this problem is to set the mark
     and then use it soon, before you forget where it is.
     Alternatively, you can check the location of the mark by using
     `C-x C-x', which exchanges the positions of the point and the mark
     (*note Setting Mark::).

   * Many commands that insert text, such as `C-y' (`yank'), position
     point and the mark at opposite ends of the inserted text, so that
     the region consists of the text just inserted.  You can tell when
     a command sets the mark because it displays `Mark set' in the echo
     area.

   * Many commands that move point long distances, like `M-<' and
     `C-s', first set the mark where point was.

   * Some commands, which ordinarily act on the region when the mark is
     active, no longer do so.  For example, normally `M-%'
     (`query-replace') performs replacements within the region, if the
     mark is active.  When Transient Mark mode is off, it always
     operates from point to the end of the buffer.  Commands that act
     this way are identified in their own documentation.

   While Transient Mark mode is off, you can activate it temporarily
using `C-<SPC> C-<SPC>' or `C-u C-x C-x'.

`C-<SPC> C-<SPC>'
     Set the mark at point (like plain `C-<SPC>') and enable Transient
     Mark mode just once, until the mark is deactivated.  (This is not
     really a separate command; you are using the `C-<SPC>' command
     twice.)

`C-u C-x C-x'
     Activate the mark and enable Transient Mark mode temporarily, until
     the mark is next deactivated.  (This is the `C-x C-x' command,
     `exchange-point-and-mark', with a prefix argument.)

   These commands set or activate the mark, and enable Transient Mark
mode only until the mark is deactivated.  One reason you may want to
use them is that some commands operate on the entire buffer instead of
the region when Transient Mark mode is off.  Enabling Transient Mark
mode momentarily gives you a way to use these commands on the region.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) It is also sometimes called "Zmacs mode", because the Zmacs
editor on the MIT Lisp Machine handled the mark in a similar way.


File: emacs,  Node: Killing,  Next: Yanking,  Prev: Mark,  Up: Top

12 Killing and Moving Text
**************************

"Killing" means erasing text and copying it into the "kill ring", from
which you can bring it back into the buffer by "yanking" it.  (Some
applications use the terms "cutting" and "pasting" for similar
operations.)  This is the most common way of moving or copying text
within Emacs.  It is very versatile, because there are commands for
killing many different types of syntactic units.

   Most commands which erase text from the buffer save it in the kill
ring.  These are known as "kill" commands.  The kill ring stores
several recent kills, not just the last one, so killing is a very safe
operation: when you make a new kill, you don't have to worry much about
losing text that you previously killed.

   You can yank text from the kill ring into any position in a buffer,
including a position in a different buffer; the kill ring is shared by
all buffers.  The `C-/' (`undo') command can undo both kill and delete
commands (*note Undo::); the importance of the kill ring is that you
can yank the text in a different place.

   Commands that erase text but do not save it in the kill ring are
known as "delete" commands.  These include `C-d' (`delete-char') and
<DEL> (`delete-backward-char'), which delete only one character at a
time, and those commands that delete only spaces or newlines.  Commands
that can erase significant amounts of nontrivial data generally do a
kill operation instead.  The commands' names and individual
descriptions use the words `kill' and `delete' to say which kind of
operation they perform.

   You can also use the mouse to kill and yank.  *Note Cut and Paste::.

* Menu:

* Deletion::            Commands for deleting small amounts of text and
                          blank areas.
* Killing by Lines::    How to kill entire lines of text at one time.
* Other Kill Commands:: Commands to kill large regions of text and
                          syntactic units such as words and sentences.
* Kill Options::        Options that affect killing.


File: emacs,  Node: Deletion,  Next: Killing by Lines,  Up: Killing

12.1 Deletion
=============

Deletion means erasing text and not saving it in the kill ring.  For
the most part, the Emacs commands that delete text are those that erase
just one character or only whitespace.

`C-d'
`<Delete>'
     Delete next character (`delete-char').

`<DEL>'
`<Backspace>'
     Delete previous character (`delete-backward-char').

`M-\'
     Delete spaces and tabs around point (`delete-horizontal-space').

`M-<SPC>'
     Delete spaces and tabs around point, leaving one space
     (`just-one-space').

`C-x C-o'
     Delete blank lines around the current line (`delete-blank-lines').

`M-^'
     Join two lines by deleting the intervening newline, along with any
     indentation following it (`delete-indentation').

   We have already described the basic deletion commands `C-d'
(`delete-char') and <DEL> (`delete-backward-char').  *Note Erasing::.

   The other delete commands are those that delete only whitespace
characters: spaces, tabs and newlines.  `M-\'
(`delete-horizontal-space') deletes all the spaces and tab characters
before and after point.  With a prefix argument, this only deletes
spaces and tab characters before point.  `M-<SPC>' (`just-one-space')
does likewise but leaves a single space after point, regardless of the
number of spaces that existed previously (even if there were none
before).  With a numeric argument N, it leaves N spaces after point.

   `C-x C-o' (`delete-blank-lines') deletes all blank lines after the
current line.  If the current line is blank, it deletes all blank lines
preceding the current line as well (leaving one blank line, the current
line).  On a solitary blank line, it deletes that line.

   `M-^' (`delete-indentation') joins the current line and the previous
line, by deleting a newline and all surrounding spaces, usually leaving
a single space.  *Note M-^: Indentation.


File: emacs,  Node: Killing by Lines,  Next: Other Kill Commands,  Prev: Deletion,  Up: Killing

12.2 Killing by Lines
=====================

`C-k'
     Kill rest of line or one or more lines (`kill-line').

`C-S-backspace'
     Kill an entire line at once (`kill-whole-line')

   The simplest kill command is `C-k'.  If given at the beginning of a
line, it kills all the text on the line(1), leaving it blank.  When
used on a blank line, it kills the whole line including its newline.

   More precisely, `C-k' kills from point up to the end of the line,
unless it is at the end of a line.  In that case it kills the newline
following point, thus merging the next line into the current one.
Spaces and tabs at the end of the line are ignored when deciding which
case applies, so as long as point is after the last visible character
in the line, you can be sure that `C-k' will kill the newline.  To kill
an entire non-blank line, go to the beginning and type `C-k' twice.

   When `C-k' is given a positive argument N, it kills N lines and the
newlines that follow them (text on the current line before point is not
killed).  With a negative argument -N, it kills N lines preceding the
current line, together with the text on the current line before point.
`C-k' with an argument of zero kills the text before point on the
current line.

   If the variable `kill-whole-line' is non-`nil', `C-k' at the very
beginning of a line kills the entire line including the following
newline.  This variable is normally `nil'.

   `C-S-backspace' (`kill-whole-line') will kill a whole line including
its newline regardless of the position of point within the line.  Note
that many character terminals will prevent you from typing the key
sequence `C-S-backspace'.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Here, "line" means a logical text line, not a screen line.
*Note Continuation Lines::.


File: emacs,  Node: Other Kill Commands,  Next: Kill Options,  Prev: Killing by Lines,  Up: Killing

12.3 Other Kill Commands
========================

`C-w'
     Kill region (`kill-region').  *Note Mark::.

`M-w'
     Save region as last killed text without actually killing it
     (`kill-ring-save').  Some programs call this "copying."

`M-d'
     Kill word (`kill-word').  *Note Words::.

`M-<DEL>'
     Kill word backwards (`backward-kill-word').

`C-x <DEL>'
     Kill back to beginning of sentence (`backward-kill-sentence').
     *Note Sentences::.

`M-k'
     Kill to end of sentence (`kill-sentence').

`C-M-k'
     Kill the following balanced expression (`kill-sexp').  *Note
     Expressions::.

`M-z CHAR'
     Kill through the next occurrence of CHAR (`zap-to-char').

   Apart from `C-k', the most commonly-used kill command is `C-w'
(`kill-region'), which kills the text in the region (i.e., between
point and mark).  *Note Mark::.  If the mark is inactive when you type
`C-w', it first reactivates the mark where it was last set.  The mark
is deactivated at the end of the command.

   The command `M-w' (`kill-ring-save') copies the region into the kill
ring without removing it from the buffer.  This is approximately
equivalent to `C-w' followed by `C-/', except that `M-w' does not alter
the undo history.

   Emacs also provides commands to kill specific syntactic units:
words, with `M-<DEL>' and `M-d' (*note Words::); balanced expressions,
with `C-M-k' (*note Expressions::); and sentences, with `C-x <DEL>' and
`M-k' (*note Sentences::).

   The command `M-z' (`zap-to-char') combines killing with searching:
it reads a character and kills from point up to (and including) the
next occurrence of that character in the buffer.  A numeric argument
acts as a repeat count; a negative argument means to search backward
and kill text before point.


File: emacs,  Node: Kill Options,  Prev: Other Kill Commands,  Up: Killing

12.4 Options for Killing
========================

Some specialized buffers contain "read-only text", which cannot be
modified and therefore cannot be killed.  But some users like to use
the kill commands to copy read-only text into the kill ring, without
actually changing it.  Therefore, the kill commands work specially in a
read-only buffer: they move over text, and copy it to the kill ring,
without actually deleting it from the buffer.  Normally, kill commands
beep and display an error message when this happens.  But if you set
the variable `kill-read-only-ok' to a non-`nil' value, they just print
a message in the echo area to explain why the text has not been erased.

   If you change the variable `kill-do-not-save-duplicates' to a
non-`nil' value, identical subsequent kills yield a single kill-ring
entry, without duplication.


File: emacs,  Node: Yanking,  Next: Accumulating Text,  Prev: Killing,  Up: Top

13 Yanking
**********

"Yanking" means reinserting text previously killed.  The usual way to
move or copy text is to kill it and then yank it elsewhere one or more
times.

`C-y'
     Yank last killed text (`yank').

`M-y'
     Replace text just yanked with an earlier batch of killed text
     (`yank-pop').

`C-M-w'
     Append next kill to last batch of killed text (`append-next-kill').

   On graphical displays with window systems, if there is a current
selection in some other application, and you selected it more recently
than you killed any text in Emacs, `C-y' copies the selection instead
of text killed within Emacs.

* Menu:

* Kill Ring::		Where killed text is stored.  Basic yanking.
* Appending Kills::	Several kills in a row all yank together.
* Earlier Kills::	Yanking something killed some time ago.


File: emacs,  Node: Kill Ring,  Next: Appending Kills,  Up: Yanking

13.1 The Kill Ring
==================

All killed text is recorded in the "kill ring", a list of blocks of
text that have been killed.  There is only one kill ring, shared by all
buffers, so you can kill text in one buffer and yank it in another
buffer.  This is the usual way to move text from one file to another.
(There are several other methods: for instance, you could store the
text in a register.  *Note Registers::, for information about
registers.  *Note Accumulating Text::, for some other ways to move text
around.)

   The command `C-y' (`yank') reinserts the text of the most recent
kill, leaving the cursor at the end of the text.  It also adds the
position of the beginning of the text to the mark ring, without
activating the mark; this allows you to jump easily to that position
with `C-x C-x' (*note Setting Mark::).  With a plain prefix argument
(`C-u C-y'), it instead leaves the cursor in front of the text, and
adds the position of the end of the text to the mark ring.  Using other
sort of prefix argument specifies an earlier kill; for example, `C-u 4
C-y' reinserts the fourth most recent kill.  *Note Earlier Kills::.

   The yank commands discard certain properties from the yanked text.
These are properties that might lead to annoying results, such as
causing the text to respond to the mouse or specifying key bindings.
The list of properties to discard is stored in the variable
`yank-excluded-properties'.  Yanking of register contents and
rectangles also discard these properties.  *Note Text Properties:
(elisp)Text Properties, for more information about text properties.


File: emacs,  Node: Appending Kills,  Next: Earlier Kills,  Prev: Kill Ring,  Up: Yanking

13.2 Appending Kills
====================

Normally, each kill command pushes a new entry onto the kill ring.
However, two or more kill commands in a row combine their text into a
single entry, so that a single `C-y' yanks all the text as a unit, just
as it was before it was killed.

   Thus, if you want to yank text as a unit, you need not kill all of it
with one command; you can keep killing line after line, or word after
word, until you have killed it all, and you can still get it all back at
once.

   Commands that kill forward from point add onto the end of the
previous killed text.  Commands that kill backward from point add text
onto the beginning.  This way, any sequence of mixed forward and
backward kill commands puts all the killed text into one entry without
rearrangement.  Numeric arguments do not break the sequence of
appending kills.  For example, suppose the buffer contains this text:

     This is a line -!-of sample text.

with point shown by -!-.  If you type `M-d M-<DEL> M-d M-<DEL>',
killing alternately forward and backward, you end up with `a line of
sample' as one entry in the kill ring, and `This is  text.' in the
buffer.  (Note the double space between `is' and `text', which you can
clean up with `M-<SPC>' or `M-q'.)

   Another way to kill the same text is to move back two words with
`M-b M-b', then kill all four words forward with `C-u M-d'.  This
produces exactly the same results in the buffer and in the kill ring.
`M-f M-f C-u M-<DEL>' kills the same text, all going backward; once
again, the result is the same.  The text in the kill ring entry always
has the same order that it had in the buffer before you killed it.

   If a kill command is separated from the last kill command by other
commands (not just numeric arguments), it starts a new entry on the kill
ring.  But you can force it to append by first typing the command
`C-M-w' (`append-next-kill') right before it.  The `C-M-w' tells the
following command, if it is a kill command, to append the text it kills
to the last killed text, instead of starting a new entry.  With
`C-M-w', you can kill several separated pieces of text and accumulate
them to be yanked back in one place.

   A kill command following `M-w' (`kill-ring-save') does not append to
the text that `M-w' copied into the kill ring.


File: emacs,  Node: Earlier Kills,  Prev: Appending Kills,  Up: Yanking

13.3 Yanking Earlier Kills
==========================

To recover killed text that is no longer the most recent kill, use the
`M-y' command (`yank-pop').  It takes the text previously yanked and
replaces it with the text from an earlier kill.  So, to recover the
text of the next-to-the-last kill, first use `C-y' to yank the last
kill, and then use `M-y' to replace it with the previous kill.  `M-y'
is allowed only after a `C-y' or another `M-y'.

   You can understand `M-y' in terms of a "last yank" pointer which
points at an entry in the kill ring.  Each time you kill, the "last
yank" pointer moves to the newly made entry at the front of the ring.
`C-y' yanks the entry which the "last yank" pointer points to.  `M-y'
moves the "last yank" pointer to a different entry, and the text in the
buffer changes to match.  Enough `M-y' commands can move the pointer to
any entry in the ring, so you can get any entry into the buffer.
Eventually the pointer reaches the end of the ring; the next `M-y'
loops back around to the first entry again.

   `M-y' moves the "last yank" pointer around the ring, but it does not
change the order of the entries in the ring, which always runs from the
most recent kill at the front to the oldest one still remembered.

   `M-y' can take a numeric argument, which tells it how many entries
to advance the "last yank" pointer by.  A negative argument moves the
pointer toward the front of the ring; from the front of the ring, it
moves "around" to the last entry and continues forward from there.

   Once the text you are looking for is brought into the buffer, you can
stop doing `M-y' commands and it will stay there.  It's just a copy of
the kill ring entry, so editing it in the buffer does not change what's
in the ring.  As long as no new killing is done, the "last yank"
pointer remains at the same place in the kill ring, so repeating `C-y'
will yank another copy of the same previous kill.

   If you know how many `M-y' commands it would take to find the text
you want, you can yank that text in one step using `C-y' with a numeric
argument.  `C-y' with an argument restores the text from the specified
kill ring entry, counting back from the most recent as 1.  Thus, `C-u 2
C-y' gets the next-to-the-last block of killed text--it is equivalent
to `C-y M-y'.  `C-y' with a numeric argument starts counting from the
"last yank" pointer, and sets the "last yank" pointer to the entry that
it yanks.

   The length of the kill ring is controlled by the variable
`kill-ring-max'; no more than that many blocks of killed text are saved.

   The actual contents of the kill ring are stored in a variable named
`kill-ring'; you can view the entire contents of the kill ring with the
command `C-h v kill-ring'.


File: emacs,  Node: Accumulating Text,  Next: Rectangles,  Prev: Yanking,  Up: Top

14 Accumulating Text
********************

Usually we copy or move text by killing it and yanking it, but there
are other convenient methods for copying one block of text in many
places, or for copying many scattered blocks of text into one place.
Here we describe the commands to accumulate scattered pieces of text
into a buffer or into a file.

`M-x append-to-buffer'
     Append region to the contents of a specified buffer.

`M-x prepend-to-buffer'
     Prepend region to the contents of a specified buffer.

`M-x copy-to-buffer'
     Copy region into a specified buffer, deleting that buffer's old
     contents.

`M-x insert-buffer'
     Insert the contents of a specified buffer into current buffer at
     point.

`M-x append-to-file'
     Append region to the contents of a specified file, at the end.

   To accumulate text into a buffer, use `M-x append-to-buffer'.  This
reads a buffer name, then inserts a copy of the region into the buffer
specified.  If you specify a nonexistent buffer, `append-to-buffer'
creates the buffer.  The text is inserted wherever point is in that
buffer.  If you have been using the buffer for editing, the copied text
goes into the middle of the text of the buffer, starting from wherever
point happens to be at that moment.

   Point in that buffer is left at the end of the copied text, so
successive uses of `append-to-buffer' accumulate the text in the
specified buffer in the same order as they were copied.  Strictly
speaking, `append-to-buffer' does not always append to the text already
in the buffer--it appends only if point in that buffer is at the end.
However, if `append-to-buffer' is the only command you use to alter a
buffer, then point is always at the end.

   `M-x prepend-to-buffer' is just like `append-to-buffer' except that
point in the other buffer is left before the copied text, so successive
prependings add text in reverse order.  `M-x copy-to-buffer' is
similar, except that any existing text in the other buffer is deleted,
so the buffer is left containing just the text newly copied into it.

   The command `M-x insert-buffer' can be used to retrieve the
accumulated text from another buffer.  This prompts for the name of a
buffer, and inserts a copy of all the text in that buffer into the
current buffer at point, leaving point at the beginning of the inserted
text.  It also adds the position of the end of the inserted text to the
mark ring, without activating the mark.  *Note Buffers::, for
background information on buffers.

   Instead of accumulating text in a buffer, you can append text
directly into a file with `M-x append-to-file'.  This prompts for a
filename, and adds the text of the region to the end of the specified
file.  The file is changed immediately on disk.

   You should use `append-to-file' only with files that are _not_ being
visited in Emacs.  Using it on a file that you are editing in Emacs
would change the file behind Emacs's back, which can lead to losing
some of your editing.

   Another way to move text around is to store it in a register.  *Note
Registers::.


File: emacs,  Node: Rectangles,  Next: CUA Bindings,  Prev: Accumulating Text,  Up: Top

15 Rectangles
*************

"Rectangle" commands operate on rectangular areas of the text: all the
characters between a certain pair of columns, in a certain range of
lines.  Emacs has commands to kill rectangles, yank killed rectangles,
clear them out, fill them with blanks or text, or delete them.
Rectangle commands are useful with text in multicolumn formats, and for
changing text into or out of such formats.

   When you must specify a rectangle for a command to work on, you do it
by putting the mark at one corner and point at the opposite corner.  The
rectangle thus specified is called the "region-rectangle" because you
control it in much the same way as the region is controlled.  But
remember that a given combination of point and mark values can be
interpreted either as a region or as a rectangle, depending on the
command that uses them.

   If point and the mark are in the same column, the rectangle they
delimit is empty.  If they are in the same line, the rectangle is one
line high.  This asymmetry between lines and columns comes about
because point (and likewise the mark) is between two columns, but within
a line.

`C-x r k'
     Kill the text of the region-rectangle, saving its contents as the
     "last killed rectangle" (`kill-rectangle').

`C-x r d'
     Delete the text of the region-rectangle (`delete-rectangle').

`C-x r y'
     Yank the last killed rectangle with its upper left corner at point
     (`yank-rectangle').

`C-x r o'
     Insert blank space to fill the space of the region-rectangle
     (`open-rectangle').  This pushes the previous contents of the
     region-rectangle rightward.

`C-x r c'
     Clear the region-rectangle by replacing all of its contents with
     spaces (`clear-rectangle').

`M-x delete-whitespace-rectangle'
     Delete whitespace in each of the lines on the specified rectangle,
     starting from the left edge column of the rectangle.

`C-x r t STRING <RET>'
     Replace rectangle contents with STRING on each line
     (`string-rectangle').

`M-x string-insert-rectangle <RET> STRING <RET>'
     Insert STRING on each line of the rectangle.

   The rectangle operations fall into two classes: commands for
deleting and inserting rectangles, and commands for blank rectangles.

   There are two ways to get rid of the text in a rectangle: you can
discard the text (delete it) or save it as the "last killed" rectangle.
The commands for these two ways are `C-x r d' (`delete-rectangle') and
`C-x r k' (`kill-rectangle').  In either case, the portion of each line
that falls inside the rectangle's boundaries is deleted, causing any
following text on the line to move left into the gap.

   Note that "killing" a rectangle is not killing in the usual sense;
the rectangle is not stored in the kill ring, but in a special place
that can only record the most recent rectangle killed.  This is because
yanking a rectangle is so different from yanking linear text that
different yank commands have to be used.  It is hard to define
yank-popping for rectangles, so we do not try.

   To yank the last killed rectangle, type `C-x r y'
(`yank-rectangle').  Yanking a rectangle is the opposite of killing
one.  Point specifies where to put the rectangle's upper left corner.
The rectangle's first line is inserted there, the rectangle's second
line is inserted at the same horizontal position, but one line
vertically down, and so on.  The number of lines affected is determined
by the height of the saved rectangle.

   You can convert single-column lists into double-column lists using
rectangle killing and yanking; kill the second half of the list as a
rectangle and then yank it beside the first line of the list.  *Note
Two-Column::, for another way to edit multi-column text.

   You can also copy rectangles into and out of registers with `C-x r r
R' and `C-x r i R'.  *Note Rectangle Registers: RegRect.

   There are two commands you can use for making blank rectangles: `C-x
r c' (`clear-rectangle') which blanks out existing text, and `C-x r o'
(`open-rectangle') which inserts a blank rectangle.  Clearing a
rectangle is equivalent to deleting it and then inserting a blank
rectangle of the same size.

   The command `M-x delete-whitespace-rectangle' deletes horizontal
whitespace starting from a particular column.  This applies to each of
the lines in the rectangle, and the column is specified by the left
edge of the rectangle.  The right edge of the rectangle does not make
any difference to this command.

   The command `C-x r t' (`string-rectangle') replaces the contents of
a region-rectangle with a string on each line.  The string's width need
not be the same as the width of the rectangle.  If the string's width
is less, the text after the rectangle shifts left; if the string is
wider than the rectangle, the text after the rectangle shifts right.

   The command `M-x string-insert-rectangle' is similar to
`string-rectangle', but inserts the string on each line, shifting the
original text to the right.


File: emacs,  Node: CUA Bindings,  Next: Registers,  Prev: Rectangles,  Up: Top

16 CUA Bindings
***************

The command `M-x cua-mode' sets up key bindings that are compatible
with the Common User Access (CUA) system used in many other
applications.  `C-x' means cut (kill), `C-c' copy, `C-v' paste (yank),
and `C-z' undo.  Standard Emacs commands like `C-x C-c' still work,
because `C-x' and `C-c' only take effect when the mark is active (and
the region is highlighted).  However, if you don't want to override
these bindings in Emacs at all, set `cua-enable-cua-keys' to `nil'.

   To enter an Emacs command like `C-x C-f' while the mark is active,
use one of the following methods: either hold `Shift' together with the
prefix key, e.g. `S-C-x C-f', or quickly type the prefix key twice,
e.g. `C-x C-x C-f'.

   In CUA mode, typed text replaces the active region as in
Delete-Selection mode (*note Mouse Commands::).

   CUA mode provides enhanced rectangle support with visible rectangle
highlighting.  Use `C-RET' to start a rectangle, extend it using the
movement commands, and cut or copy it using `C-x' or `C-c'.  `RET'
moves the cursor to the next (clockwise) corner of the rectangle, so
you can easily expand it in any direction.  Normal text you type is
inserted to the left or right of each line in the rectangle (on the
same side as the cursor).

   With CUA you can easily copy text and rectangles into and out of
registers by providing a one-digit numeric prefix to the kill, copy,
and yank commands, e.g. `C-1 C-c' copies the region into register `1',
and `C-2 C-v' yanks the contents of register `2'.

   CUA mode also has a global mark feature which allows easy moving and
copying of text between buffers.  Use `C-S-SPC' to toggle the global
mark on and off.  When the global mark is on, all text that you kill or
copy is automatically inserted at the global mark, and text you type is
inserted at the global mark rather than at the current position.

   For example, to copy words from various buffers into a word list in
a given buffer, set the global mark in the target buffer, then navigate
to each of the words you want in the list, mark it (e.g. with `S-M-f'),
copy it to the list with `C-c' or `M-w', and insert a newline after the
word in the target list by pressing <RET>.


File: emacs,  Node: Registers,  Next: Display,  Prev: CUA Bindings,  Up: Top

17 Registers
************

Emacs "registers" are compartments where you can save text, rectangles,
positions, and other things for later use.  Once you save text or a
rectangle in a register, you can copy it into the buffer once, or many
times; once you save a position in a register, you can jump back to
that position once, or many times.

   Each register has a name that consists of a single character, which
we will denote by R; R can be a letter (such as `a') or a number (such
as `1'); case matters, so register `a' is not the same as register `A'.

   A register can store a position, a piece of text, a rectangle, a
number, a window configuration, or a file name, but only one thing at
any given time.  Whatever you store in a register remains there until
you store something else in that register.  To see what register R
contains, use `M-x view-register':

`M-x view-register <RET> R'
     Display a description of what register R contains.

   "Bookmarks" record files and positions in them, so you can return to
those positions when you look at the file again.  Bookmarks are similar
enough in spirit to registers that they seem to belong in this chapter.

* Menu:

* Position: RegPos.           Saving positions in registers.
* Text: RegText.              Saving text in registers.
* Rectangle: RegRect.         Saving rectangles in registers.
* Configurations: RegConfig.  Saving window configurations in registers.
* Numbers: RegNumbers.        Numbers in registers.
* Files: RegFiles.            File names in registers.
* Bookmarks::                 Bookmarks are like registers, but persistent.


File: emacs,  Node: RegPos,  Next: RegText,  Up: Registers

17.1 Saving Positions in Registers
==================================

`C-x r <SPC> R'
     Record the position of point and the current buffer in register R
     (`point-to-register').

`C-x r j R'
     Jump to the position and buffer saved in register R
     (`jump-to-register').

   Typing `C-x r <SPC>' (`point-to-register'), followed by a character
`R', saves both the position of point and the current buffer in
register R.  The register retains this information until you store
something else in it.

   The command `C-x r j R' switches to the buffer recorded in register
R, and moves point to the recorded position.  The contents of the
register are not changed, so you can jump to the saved position any
number of times.

   If you use `C-x r j' to go to a saved position, but the buffer it
was saved from has been killed, `C-x r j' tries to create the buffer
again by visiting the same file.  Of course, this works only for buffers
that were visiting files.


File: emacs,  Node: RegText,  Next: RegRect,  Prev: RegPos,  Up: Registers

17.2 Saving Text in Registers
=============================

When you want to insert a copy of the same piece of text several times,
it may be inconvenient to yank it from the kill ring, since each
subsequent kill moves that entry further down the ring.  An alternative
is to store the text in a register and later retrieve it.

`C-x r s R'
     Copy region into register R (`copy-to-register').

`C-x r i R'
     Insert text from register R (`insert-register').

`M-x append-to-register <RET> R'
     Append region to text in register R.

`M-x prepend-to-register <RET> R'
     Prepend region to text in register R.

   `C-x r s R' stores a copy of the text of the region into the
register named R.  If the mark is inactive, Emacs first reactivates the
mark where it was last set.  The mark is deactivated at the end of this
command.  *Note Mark::.  `C-u C-x r s R', the same command with a
prefix argument, copies the text into register R and deletes the text
from the buffer as well; you can think of this as "moving" the region
text into the register.

   `M-x append-to-register <RET> R' appends the copy of the text in the
region to the text already stored in the register named R.  If invoked
with a prefix argument, it deletes the region after appending it to the
register.  The command `prepend-to-register' is similar, except that it
_prepends_ the region text to the text in the register instead of
_appending_ it.

   `C-x r i R' inserts in the buffer the text from register R.
Normally it leaves point before the text and places the mark after, but
with a numeric argument (`C-u') it puts point after the text and the
mark before.


File: emacs,  Node: RegRect,  Next: RegConfig,  Prev: RegText,  Up: Registers

17.3 Saving Rectangles in Registers
===================================

A register can contain a rectangle instead of linear text.  *Note
Rectangles::, for basic information on how to specify a rectangle in
the buffer.

`C-x r r R'
     Copy the region-rectangle into register R
     (`copy-rectangle-to-register').  With numeric argument, delete it
     as well.

`C-x r i R'
     Insert the rectangle stored in register R (if it contains a
     rectangle) (`insert-register').

   The `C-x r i R' command inserts a text string if the register
contains one, and inserts a rectangle if the register contains one.

   See also the command `sort-columns', which you can think of as
sorting a rectangle.  *Note Sorting::.


File: emacs,  Node: RegConfig,  Next: RegNumbers,  Prev: RegRect,  Up: Registers

17.4 Saving Window Configurations in Registers
==============================================

You can save the window configuration of the selected frame in a
register, or even the configuration of all windows in all frames, and
restore the configuration later.  *Note Windows::, for information
about window configurations.

`C-x r w R'
     Save the state of the selected frame's windows in register R
     (`window-configuration-to-register').

`C-x r f R'
     Save the state of all frames, including all their windows, in
     register R (`frame-configuration-to-register').

   Use `C-x r j R' to restore a window or frame configuration.  This is
the same command used to restore a cursor position.  When you restore a
frame configuration, any existing frames not included in the
configuration become invisible.  If you wish to delete these frames
instead, use `C-u C-x r j R'.


File: emacs,  Node: RegNumbers,  Next: RegFiles,  Prev: RegConfig,  Up: Registers

17.5 Keeping Numbers in Registers
=================================

There are commands to store a number in a register, to insert the
number in the buffer in decimal, and to increment it.  These commands
can be useful in keyboard macros (*note Keyboard Macros::).

`C-u NUMBER C-x r n R'
     Store NUMBER into register R (`number-to-register').

`C-u NUMBER C-x r + R'
     Increment the number in register R by NUMBER
     (`increment-register').

`C-x r i R'
     Insert the number from register R into the buffer.

   `C-x r i' is the same command used to insert any other sort of
register contents into the buffer.  `C-x r +' with no numeric argument
increments the register value by 1; `C-x r n' with no numeric argument
stores zero in the register.


File: emacs,  Node: RegFiles,  Next: Bookmarks,  Prev: RegNumbers,  Up: Registers

17.6 Keeping File Names in Registers
====================================

If you visit certain file names frequently, you can visit them more
conveniently if you put their names in registers.  Here's the Lisp code
used to put a file name in a register:

     (set-register ?R '(file . NAME))

For example,

     (set-register ?z '(file . "/gd/gnu/emacs/19.0/src/ChangeLog"))

puts the file name shown in register `z'.

   To visit the file whose name is in register R, type `C-x r j R'.
(This is the same command used to jump to a position or restore a frame
configuration.)


File: emacs,  Node: Bookmarks,  Prev: RegFiles,  Up: Registers

17.7 Bookmarks
==============

"Bookmarks" are somewhat like registers in that they record positions
you can jump to.  Unlike registers, they have long names, and they
persist automatically from one Emacs session to the next.  The
prototypical use of bookmarks is to record "where you were reading" in
various files.

`C-x r m <RET>'
     Set the bookmark for the visited file, at point.

`C-x r m BOOKMARK <RET>'
     Set the bookmark named BOOKMARK at point (`bookmark-set').

`C-x r b BOOKMARK <RET>'
     Jump to the bookmark named BOOKMARK (`bookmark-jump').

`C-x r l'
     List all bookmarks (`list-bookmarks').

`M-x bookmark-save'
     Save all the current bookmark values in the default bookmark file.

   The prototypical use for bookmarks is to record one current position
in each of several files.  So the command `C-x r m', which sets a
bookmark, uses the visited file name as the default for the bookmark
name.  If you name each bookmark after the file it points to, then you
can conveniently revisit any of those files with `C-x r b', and move to
the position of the bookmark at the same time.

   To display a list of all your bookmarks in a separate buffer, type
`C-x r l' (`list-bookmarks').  If you switch to that buffer, you can
use it to edit your bookmark definitions or annotate the bookmarks.
Type `C-h m' in the bookmark buffer for more information about its
special editing commands.

   When you kill Emacs, Emacs offers to save your bookmark values in
your default bookmark file, `~/.emacs.bmk', if you have changed any
bookmark values.  You can also save the bookmarks at any time with the
`M-x bookmark-save' command.  The bookmark commands load your default
bookmark file automatically.  This saving and loading is how bookmarks
persist from one Emacs session to the next.

   If you set the variable `bookmark-save-flag' to 1, each command that
sets a bookmark will also save your bookmarks; this way, you don't lose
any bookmark values even if Emacs crashes.  (The value, if a number,
says how many bookmark modifications should go by between saving.)

   Bookmark position values are saved with surrounding context, so that
`bookmark-jump' can find the proper position even if the file is
modified slightly.  The variable `bookmark-search-size' says how many
characters of context to record on each side of the bookmark's position.

   Here are some additional commands for working with bookmarks:

`M-x bookmark-load <RET> FILENAME <RET>'
     Load a file named FILENAME that contains a list of bookmark
     values.  You can use this command, as well as `bookmark-write', to
     work with other files of bookmark values in addition to your
     default bookmark file.

`M-x bookmark-write <RET> FILENAME <RET>'
     Save all the current bookmark values in the file FILENAME.

`M-x bookmark-delete <RET> BOOKMARK <RET>'
     Delete the bookmark named BOOKMARK.

`M-x bookmark-insert-location <RET> BOOKMARK <RET>'
     Insert in the buffer the name of the file that bookmark BOOKMARK
     points to.

`M-x bookmark-insert <RET> BOOKMARK <RET>'
     Insert in the buffer the _contents_ of the file that bookmark
     BOOKMARK points to.


File: emacs,  Node: Display,  Next: Search,  Prev: Registers,  Up: Top

18 Controlling the Display
**************************

Since only part of a large buffer fits in the window, Emacs tries to
show a part that is likely to be interesting.  Display-control commands
and variables allow you to specify which part of the text you want to
see, and how to display it.

* Menu:

* Scrolling::	           Commands to move text up and down in a window.
* Auto Scrolling::         Redisplay scrolls text automatically when needed.
* Horizontal Scrolling::   Moving text left and right in a window.
* Follow Mode::            Follow mode lets two windows scroll as one.
* Faces::	           How to change the display style using faces.
* Standard Faces::         Emacs' predefined faces.
* Temporary Face Changes:: Commands to temporarily modify the default text face
* Font Lock::              Minor mode for syntactic highlighting using faces.
* Highlight Interactively:: Tell Emacs what text to highlight.
* Fringes::                Enabling or disabling window fringes.
* Displaying Boundaries::  Displaying top and bottom of the buffer.
* Useless Whitespace::     Showing possibly-spurious trailing whitespace.
* Selective Display::      Hiding lines with lots of indentation.
* Optional Mode Line::     Optional mode line display features.
* Text Display::           How text characters are normally displayed.
* Cursor Display::         Features for displaying the cursor.
* Line Truncation::        Truncating lines to fit the screen width instead
                             of continuing them to multiple screen lines.
* Visual Line Mode::       Word wrap and screen line-based editing.
* Display Custom::         Information on variables for customizing display.


File: emacs,  Node: Scrolling,  Next: Auto Scrolling,  Up: Display

18.1 Scrolling
==============

If a buffer contains text that is too large to fit entirely within a
window that is displaying the buffer, Emacs shows a contiguous portion
of the text.  The portion shown always contains point.

   "Scrolling" means moving text up or down in the window so that
different parts of the text are visible.  Scrolling "forward" or "up"
means that text moves up, and new text appears at the bottom.
Scrolling "backward" or "down" moves text down, and new text appears at
the top.

   Scrolling happens automatically if you move point past the bottom or
top of the window.  You can also scroll explicitly with these commands:

`C-l'
     Scroll the selected window so that the current line is the
     center-most text line; on subsequent consecutive invocations, make
     the current line the top-most line, the bottom-most line, and so
     forth in cyclic order; also, maybe redisplay the screen
     (`recenter-top-bottom').

`C-v'
`<next>'
`<PageDown>'
     Scroll forward by nearly a full window (`scroll-up').

`M-v'
`<prior>'
`<PageUp>'
     Scroll backward (`scroll-down').

`C-M-l'
     Scroll heuristically to bring useful information onto the screen
     (`reposition-window').

   `C-l' (`recenter-top-bottom') is a basic scrolling command.  It
"recenters" the selected window, scrolling it so that the current
screen line is exactly in the center of the window, or as close to the
center as possible.

   Typing `C-l' twice in a row (`C-l C-l') scrolls the window so that
point is on the topmost screen line.  Typing a third `C-l' scrolls the
window so that point is on the bottom-most screen line.  Each
successive `C-l' cycles through these three screen positions.

   You can change the cycling order by customizing the list variable
`recenter-positions'.  Each list element should be the symbol `top',
`middle', or `bottom', or a number; an integer number means to move the
line to the specified screen line, while a floating-point number
between 0.0 and 1.0 specifies a percentage of the screen space from the
top.  The default, `(middle top bottom)', is the cycling order
described above.  Furthermore, if you change the variable
`scroll-margin' to a non-zero value N, Emacs always leaves N screen
lines between point and the top or bottom of the window (*note Auto
Scrolling::).

   You can also supply `C-l' with a prefix argument.  With a plain
prefix argument, `C-u C-l', Emacs simply recenters point.  With a
positive argument N, it scrolls to place point N lines down from the
top of the window.  An argument of zero puts point on the topmost line.
A negative argument -N puts point N lines from the bottom of the
window.  For example, `C-u - 1 C-l' puts point on the bottom line, and
`C-u - 5 C-l' puts it five lines from the bottom.  When given an
argument, `C-l' does not clear the screen or cycle through different
screen positions.

   The more primitive command `recenter' behaves like
`recenter-top-bottom', but does not cycle among screen positions.
Prior to Emacs 23, `C-l' was bound to `recenter'.

   If the variable `recenter-redisplay' has a non-`nil' value, Emacs
clears and redisplays the screen each time `C-l' recenters the window;
the special value `tty' (the default) says to do this on text-terminal
frames only.  Redisplaying is useful in case the screen becomes garbled
for any reason (*note Screen Garbled::).

   To read the buffer a windowful at a time, type `C-v' (`scroll-up').
This scrolls forward by nearly the whole window height.  The effect is
to take the two lines at the bottom of the window and put them at the
top, followed by lines that were not previously visible.  If point was
in the text that scrolled off the top, it ends up at the new top of the
window.

   `M-v' (`scroll-down') scrolls backward in a similar way.

   The variable `next-screen-context-lines' controls the number of
lines of overlap left by `C-v' or `M-v'; by default, it is 2.  The
function keys <next> and <prior>, or <PageDown> and <PageUp>, are
equivalent to `C-v' and `M-v' respectively.

   You can supply `C-v' or `M-v' with a numeric prefix argument N.
This scrolls the window by N lines, while attempting to leave point
unchanged (so that the text and point move up or down together).  `C-v'
with a negative argument is like `M-v' and vice versa.

   The names of scroll commands are based on the direction that the
text moves in the window.  Thus, the command to scroll forward is
called `scroll-up' because it moves the text upward on the screen.  The
keys <PageUp> and <PageDown> derive their names and customary meanings
from a different convention that developed elsewhere; hence the strange
result that <PageDown> runs `scroll-up'.

   Some users like the full-screen scroll commands to keep point at the
same screen position.  To enable this behavior, set the variable
`scroll-preserve-screen-position' to a non-`nil' value.  Then, whenever
a command scrolls the text around point offscreen (or within
`scroll-margin' lines of the edge), Emacs moves point to keep it at the
same vertical and horizontal position within the window.  This mode is
convenient for browsing through a file by scrolling by screenfuls; if
you come back to the screen where you started, point goes back to the
line where it started.

   The `C-M-l' command (`reposition-window') scrolls the current window
heuristically in a way designed to get useful information onto the
screen.  For example, in a Lisp file, this command tries to get the
entire current defun onto the screen if possible.


File: emacs,  Node: Auto Scrolling,  Next: Horizontal Scrolling,  Prev: Scrolling,  Up: Display

18.2 Automatic Scrolling
========================

Emacs performs "automatic scrolling" when point moves out of the
visible portion of the text.

   Normally, this centers point vertically within the window.  However,
if you set `scroll-conservatively' to a small number N, then if you
move point just a little off the screen (less than N lines), Emacs
scrolls the text just far enough to bring point back on screen.  By
default, `scroll-conservatively' is 0.

   When the window does scroll by a longer distance, you can control
how aggressively it scrolls by setting the variables
`scroll-up-aggressively' and `scroll-down-aggressively'.  The value of
`scroll-up-aggressively' should be either `nil', or a fraction F
between 0 and 1.  A fraction specifies where on the screen to put point
when scrolling upward: when a window scrolls up because point is above
the window start, the new start position is chosen to put point F parts
of the window height from the top.  Thus, larger F means more aggressive
scrolling.  The default value, `nil', is equivalent to 0.5.

   Likewise, `scroll-down-aggressively' is used for scrolling down.
The value specifies how far point should be placed from the bottom of
the window; thus, as with `scroll-up-aggressively', a larger value is
more aggressive.

   The variable `scroll-margin' restricts how close point can come to
the top or bottom of a window.  Its value is a number of screen lines;
if point comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the
window, Emacs performs automatic scrolling.  By default,
`scroll-margin' is 0.


File: emacs,  Node: Horizontal Scrolling,  Next: Follow Mode,  Prev: Auto Scrolling,  Up: Display

18.3 Horizontal Scrolling
=========================

"Horizontal scrolling" means shifting all the lines sideways within a
window, so that some of the text near the left margin is not displayed.
When the text in a window is scrolled horizontally, text lines are
truncated rather than continued (*note Line Truncation::).  If a window
shows truncated lines, Emacs performs automatic horizontal scrolling
whenever point moves off the left or right edge of the screen.  To
disable automatic horizontal scrolling, set the variable
`auto-hscroll-mode' to `nil'.  Note that when the automatic horizontal
scrolling is turned off, if point moves off the edge of the screen, the
cursor disappears to indicate that.  (On text-mode terminals, the
cursor is left at the edge instead.)

   The variable `hscroll-margin' controls how close point can get to
the window's edges before automatic scrolling occurs.  It is measured
in columns.  For example, if the value is 5, then moving point within 5
columns of an edge causes horizontal scrolling away from that edge.

   The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns to scroll
the window when point gets too close to the edge.  Zero, the default
value, means to center point horizontally within the window.  A
positive integer value specifies the number of columns to scroll by.  A
floating-point number specifies the fraction of the window's width to
scroll by.

   You can also perform explicit horizontal scrolling with the
following commands:

`C-x <'
     Scroll text in current window to the left (`scroll-left').

`C-x >'
     Scroll to the right (`scroll-right').

   `C-x <' (`scroll-left') scrolls text in the selected window to the
left by the full width of the window, less two columns.  (In other
words, the text in the window moves left relative to the window.)  With
a numeric argument N, it scrolls by N columns.

   If the text is scrolled to the left, and point moves off the left
edge of the window, the cursor will freeze at the left edge of the
window, until point moves back to the displayed portion of the text.
This is independent of the current setting of `auto-hscroll-mode',
which, for text scrolled to the left, only affects the behavior at the
right edge of the window.

   `C-x >' (`scroll-right') scrolls similarly to the right.  The window
cannot be scrolled any farther to the right once it is displayed
normally, with each line starting at the window's left margin;
attempting to do so has no effect.  This means that you don't have to
calculate the argument precisely for `C-x >'; any sufficiently large
argument will restore the normal display.

   If you use those commands to scroll a window horizontally, that sets
a lower bound for automatic horizontal scrolling.  Automatic scrolling
will continue to scroll the window, but never farther to the right than
the amount you previously set by `scroll-left'.


File: emacs,  Node: Follow Mode,  Next: Faces,  Prev: Horizontal Scrolling,  Up: Display

18.4 Follow Mode
================

"Follow mode" is a minor mode that makes two windows, both showing the
same buffer, scroll as a single tall "virtual window."  To use Follow
mode, go to a frame with just one window, split it into two
side-by-side windows using `C-x 3', and then type `M-x follow-mode'.
From then on, you can edit the buffer in either of the two windows, or
scroll either one; the other window follows it.

   In Follow mode, if you move point outside the portion visible in one
window and into the portion visible in the other window, that selects
the other window--again, treating the two as if they were parts of one
large window.

   To turn off Follow mode, type `M-x follow-mode' a second time.


File: emacs,  Node: Faces,  Next: Standard Faces,  Prev: Follow Mode,  Up: Display

18.5 Faces: Controlling Text Display Style
==========================================

Emacs can display text in several different styles, which are called
"faces".  Each face can specify various "face attributes", such as the
font, height, weight and slant, the foreground and background color,
and underlining or overlining.  A face does not have to specify all of
these attributes; often it inherits most of them from another face.

   On a text-only terminal, not all face attributes are meaningful.
Some text-only terminals support inverse video, bold, and underline
attributes; some support colors.  Text-only terminals generally do not
support changing the height, width or font.

   Most major modes assign faces to the text automatically through the
work of Font Lock mode.  *Note Font Lock::, for more information about
Font Lock mode and syntactic highlighting.  You can print the current
buffer with the highlighting that appears on your screen using the
command `ps-print-buffer-with-faces'.  *Note PostScript::.

   Enriched mode, the mode for editing formatted text, provides
commands and menus for specifying faces for text in the buffer.  *Note
Format Faces::.

   To alter the appearance of a face, use the customization buffer.
*Note Face Customization::.  You can also use X resources to specify
attributes of any particular face (*note Resources::).  When displaying
a character, any attribute that isn't specified by its face is taken
from the `default' face, whose attributes reflect the default settings
of the frame itself.

   You can also change the foreground and background colors of a
specific face with `M-x set-face-foreground' and `M-x
set-face-background'.  These commands prompt in the minibuffer for a
face name and a color name, with completion, and then set that face to
use the specified color.  *Note Face Customization::, for information
about color names.  These commands affect the face colors on all
frames, both existing and those to be created in the future.  These
changes do not, however, persist for future Emacs sessions; to make
lasting changes, use the customization buffer (*note Face
Customization::).

   You can also set foreground and background colors for the current
frame only; see *Note Frame Parameters::.

   Emacs can display variable-width fonts, but some of the Emacs
commands that calculate width and indentation do not know how to
calculate variable widths.  This can sometimes lead to incorrect
results when you use variable-width fonts.  In particular, indentation
commands can give inconsistent results, so we recommend you avoid
variable-width fonts, especially for editing program source code.


File: emacs,  Node: Standard Faces,  Next: Temporary Face Changes,  Prev: Faces,  Up: Display

18.6 Standard Faces
===================

To see what faces are currently defined, and what they look like, type
`M-x list-faces-display'.  It's possible for a given face to look
different in different frames; this command shows the appearance in the
frame in which you type it.  With a prefix argument, this prompts for a
regular expression, and displays only faces with names matching that
regular expression.

   Here are the standard faces for specifying text appearance.  You can
apply them to specific text when you want the effects they produce.

`default'
     This face is used for ordinary text that doesn't specify any face.

`bold'
     This face uses a bold variant of the default font.

`italic'
     This face uses an italic variant of the default font.

`bold-italic'
     This face uses a bold italic variant of the default font.

`underline'
     This face underlines text.

`fixed-pitch'
     This face forces use of a fixed-width font.  It's reasonable to
     customize this face to use a different fixed-width font, if you
     like, but you should not make it a variable-width font.

`variable-pitch'
     This face forces use of a variable-width font.

`shadow'
     This face is used for making the text less noticeable than the
     surrounding ordinary text.  Usually this can be achieved by using
     shades of gray in contrast with either black or white default
     foreground color.

   Here's an incomplete list of faces used to highlight parts of the
text temporarily for specific purposes.  (Many other modes define their
own faces for this purpose.)

`highlight'
     This face is used for highlighting portions of text, in various
     modes.  For example, mouse-sensitive text is highlighted using
     this face.

`isearch'
     This face is used for highlighting the current Isearch match
     (*note Incremental Search::).

`query-replace'
     This face is used for highlighting the current Query Replace match
     (*note Replace::).

`lazy-highlight'
     This face is used for lazy highlighting of Isearch and Query
     Replace matches other than the current one.

`region'
     This face is used for displaying a selected region (*note Mark::).

`secondary-selection'
     This face is used for displaying a secondary X selection (*note
     Secondary Selection::).

`trailing-whitespace'
     The face for highlighting excess spaces and tabs at the end of a
     line when `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-`nil'; see *Note
     Useless Whitespace::.

`nobreak-space'
     The face for displaying the character "nobreak space."

`escape-glyph'
     The face for highlighting the `\' or `^' that indicates a control
     character.  It's also used when `\' indicates a nobreak space or
     nobreak (soft) hyphen.

   These faces control the appearance of parts of the Emacs frame.
They exist as faces to provide a consistent way to customize the
appearance of these parts of the frame.

`mode-line'
     This face is used for the mode line of the currently selected
     window, and for menu bars when toolkit menus are not used.  By
     default, it's drawn with shadows for a "raised" effect on
     graphical displays, and drawn as the inverse of the default face
     on non-windowed terminals.

`mode-line-inactive'
     Like `mode-line', but used for mode lines of the windows other
     than the selected one (if `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' is
     non-`nil').  This face inherits from `mode-line', so changes in
     that face affect mode lines in all windows.

`mode-line-highlight'
     Like `highlight', but used for portions of text on mode lines.

`mode-line-buffer-id'
     This face is used for buffer identification parts in the mode line.

`header-line'
     Similar to `mode-line' for a window's header line, which appears
     at the top of a window just as the mode line appears at the bottom.
     Most windows do not have a header line--only some special modes,
     such Info mode, create one.

`vertical-border'
     This face is used for the vertical divider between windows.  By
     default this face inherits from the `mode-line-inactive' face on
     character terminals.  On graphical displays the foreground color of
     this face is used for the vertical line between windows without
     scrollbars.

`minibuffer-prompt'
     This face is used for the prompt strings displayed in the
     minibuffer.  By default, Emacs automatically adds this face to the
     value of `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is a list of text
     properties used to display the prompt text.  (This variable takes
     effect when you enter the minibuffer.)

`fringe'
     The face for the fringes to the left and right of windows on
     graphic displays.  (The fringes are the narrow portions of the
     Emacs frame between the text area and the window's right and left
     borders.)  *Note Fringes::.

`scroll-bar'
     This face determines the visual appearance of the scroll bar.
     *Note Scroll Bars::.

`border'
     This face determines the color of the frame border.

`cursor'
     This face determines the color of the cursor.

`mouse'
     This face determines the color of the mouse pointer.

`tool-bar'
     This face determines the color of tool bar icons.  *Note Tool
     Bars::.

`tooltip'
     This face is used for tooltips.  *Note Tooltips::.

`menu'
     This face determines the colors and font of Emacs's menus.  *Note
     Menu Bars::.  This has no effect in Emacs built with GTK and in the
     MS-Windows/Mac ports; you need to use system-wide styles and
     options to change the appearance of GTK, Windows, or Mac menus.
     Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not
     supported; attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.


File: emacs,  Node: Temporary Face Changes,  Next: Font Lock,  Prev: Standard Faces,  Up: Display

18.7 Temporary Face Changes
===========================

The following commands change the default face within a buffer.

   To increase the height of the default face in the current buffer,
type `C-x C-+' or `C-x C-='.  To decrease it, type `C-x C--'.  To
restore the default (global) face height, type `C-x C-0'.  These keys
are all bound to the same command, `text-scale-adjust', which looks at
the last key typed to determine which action to take.

   The final key of these commands may be repeated without the leading
`C-x'.  For instance, `C-x C-= C-= C-=' increases the face height by
three steps.  Each step scales the height of the default face by the
value of the variable `text-scale-mode-step'.  As a special case, an
argument of 0 removes any scaling currently active.

   The commands `text-scale-increase' and `text-scale-decrease'
increase or decrease the height of the default face, just like `C-x
C-+' and `C-x C--' respectively.  You may find it convenient to bind to
these commands, rather than `text-scale-adjust'.

   The command `text-scale-set' sets the height of the default face in
the current buffer to an absolute level specified by its prefix
argument.

   The above commands automatically enable or disable the minor mode
`text-scale-mode', depending on whether the current font scaling is
other than 1 or not.

   To temporarily change the face in the current buffer to a
variable-pitch ("proportional") font, use the command `M-x
variable-pitch-mode' to enable or disable the Variable Pitch minor mode.


File: emacs,  Node: Font Lock,  Next: Highlight Interactively,  Prev: Temporary Face Changes,  Up: Display

18.8 Font Lock mode
===================

Font Lock mode is a minor mode, always local to a particular buffer,
which highlights (or "fontifies") the buffer contents according to the
syntax of the text you are editing.  It can recognize comments and
strings in most programming languages; in several languages, it can
also recognize and properly highlight various other important
constructs, such as names of functions being defined or reserved
keywords.  Some special modes, such as Occur mode and Info mode, have
completely specialized ways of assigning fonts for Font Lock mode.

   Font Lock mode is turned on by default in all modes which support it.
You can toggle font-lock for each buffer with the command `M-x
font-lock-mode'.  Using a positive argument unconditionally turns Font
Lock mode on, and a negative or zero argument turns it off.

   If you do not wish Font Lock mode to be turned on by default,
customize the variable `global-font-lock-mode' using the Customize
interface (*note Easy Customization::), or use the function
`global-font-lock-mode' in your `.emacs' file, like this:

     (global-font-lock-mode 0)

This variable, like all the variables that control Font Lock mode, take
effect whenever fontification is done; that is, potentially at any time.

   If you have disabled Global Font Lock mode, you can still enable Font
Lock for specific major modes by adding the function
`turn-on-font-lock' to the mode hooks (*note Hooks::).  For example, to
enable Font Lock mode for editing C files, you can do this:

     (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock)

   Font Lock mode uses several specifically named faces to do its job,
including `font-lock-string-face', `font-lock-comment-face', and
others.  The easiest way to find them all is to use `M-x
customize-group <RET> font-lock-faces <RET>'.  You can then use that
customization buffer to customize the appearance of these faces.  *Note
Face Customization::.

   The variable `font-lock-maximum-decoration' specifies the preferred
level of fontification, for modes that provide multiple levels.  Level
1 is the least amount of fontification; some modes support levels as
high as 3.  The normal default is "as high as possible."  You can
specify an integer, which applies to all modes, or you can specify
different numbers for particular major modes; for example, to use level
1 for C/C++ modes, and the default level otherwise, use this:

     (setq font-lock-maximum-decoration
           '((c-mode . 1) (c++-mode . 1)))

   Fontification can be too slow for large buffers, so you can suppress
it for buffers above a certain size.  The variable
`font-lock-maximum-size' specifies a buffer size, beyond which buffer
fontification is suppressed.

   Comment and string fontification (or "syntactic" fontification)
relies on analysis of the syntactic structure of the buffer text.  For
the sake of speed, some modes, including Lisp mode, rely on a special
convention: an open-parenthesis or open-brace in the leftmost column
always defines the beginning of a defun, and is thus always outside any
string or comment.  (*Note Left Margin Paren::.)  If you don't follow
this convention, Font Lock mode can misfontify the text that follows an
open-parenthesis or open-brace in the leftmost column that is inside a
string or comment.

   The variable `font-lock-beginning-of-syntax-function' (always
buffer-local) specifies how Font Lock mode can find a position
guaranteed to be outside any comment or string.  In modes which use the
leftmost column parenthesis convention, the default value of the
variable is `beginning-of-defun'--that tells Font Lock mode to use the
convention.  If you set this variable to `nil', Font Lock no longer
relies on the convention.  This avoids incorrect results, but the price
is that, in some cases, fontification for a changed text must rescan
buffer text from the beginning of the buffer.  This can considerably
slow down redisplay while scrolling, particularly if you are close to
the end of a large buffer.

   Font Lock highlighting patterns already exist for many modes, but you
may want to fontify additional patterns.  You can use the function
`font-lock-add-keywords', to add your own highlighting patterns for a
particular mode.  For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C
comments, use this:

     (add-hook 'c-mode-hook
               (lambda ()
                (font-lock-add-keywords nil
                 '(("\\<\\(FIXME\\):" 1 font-lock-warning-face t)))))

   To remove keywords from the font-lock highlighting patterns, use the
function `font-lock-remove-keywords'.  *Note Search-based
Fontification: (elisp)Search-based Fontification.

   Fontifying large buffers can take a long time.  To avoid large
delays when a file is visited, Emacs fontifies only the visible portion
of a buffer.  As you scroll through the buffer, each portion that
becomes visible is fontified as soon as it is displayed; this type of
Font Lock is called "Just-In-Time" (or "JIT") Lock.  You can control
how JIT Lock behaves, including telling it to perform fontification
while idle, by customizing variables in the customization group
`jit-lock'.  *Note Specific Customization::.


File: emacs,  Node: Highlight Interactively,  Next: Fringes,  Prev: Font Lock,  Up: Display

18.9 Interactive Highlighting
=============================

Highlight Changes mode is a minor mode that "highlights" the parts of
the buffer were changed most recently, by giving that text a different
face.  To enable or disable Highlight Changes mode, use `M-x
highlight-changes-mode'.

   Hi Lock mode is a minor mode that highlights text that matches
regular expressions you specify.  For example, you can use it to
highlight all the references to a certain variable in a program source
file, highlight certain parts in a voluminous output of some program,
or highlight certain names in an article.  To enable or disable Hi Lock
mode, use the command `M-x hi-lock-mode'.  To enable Hi Lock mode for
all buffers, use `M-x global-hi-lock-mode' or place
`(global-hi-lock-mode 1)' in your `.emacs' file.

   Hi Lock mode works like Font Lock mode (*note Font Lock::), except
that you specify explicitly the regular expressions to highlight.  You
control them with these commands:

`C-x w h REGEXP <RET> FACE <RET>'
     Highlight text that matches REGEXP using face FACE
     (`highlight-regexp').  The highlighting will remain as long as the
     buffer is loaded.  For example, to highlight all occurrences of
     the word "whim" using the default face (a yellow background) `C-x
     w h whim <RET> <RET>'.  Any face can be used for highlighting, Hi
     Lock provides several of its own and these are pre-loaded into a
     list of default values.  While being prompted for a face use `M-n'
     and `M-p' to cycle through them.

     You can use this command multiple times, specifying various regular
     expressions to highlight in different ways.

`C-x w r REGEXP <RET>'
     Unhighlight REGEXP (`unhighlight-regexp').

     If you invoke this from the menu, you select the expression to
     unhighlight from a list.  If you invoke this from the keyboard, you
     use the minibuffer.  It will show the most recently added regular
     expression; use `M-p' to show the next older expression and `M-n'
     to select the next newer expression.  (You can also type the
     expression by hand, with completion.)  When the expression you
     want to unhighlight appears in the minibuffer, press `<RET>' to
     exit the minibuffer and unhighlight it.

`C-x w l REGEXP <RET> FACE <RET>'
     Highlight entire lines containing a match for REGEXP, using face
     FACE (`highlight-lines-matching-regexp').

`C-x w b'
     Insert all the current highlighting regexp/face pairs into the
     buffer at point, with comment delimiters to prevent them from
     changing your program.  (This key binding runs the
     `hi-lock-write-interactive-patterns' command.)

     These patterns are extracted from the comments, if appropriate, if
     you invoke `M-x hi-lock-find-patterns', or if you visit the file
     while Hi Lock mode is enabled (since that runs
     `hi-lock-find-patterns').

`C-x w i'
     Extract regexp/face pairs from comments in the current buffer
     (`hi-lock-find-patterns').  Thus, you can enter patterns
     interactively with `highlight-regexp', store them into the file
     with `hi-lock-write-interactive-patterns', edit them (perhaps
     including different faces for different parenthesized parts of the
     match), and finally use this command (`hi-lock-find-patterns') to
     have Hi Lock highlight the edited patterns.

     The variable `hi-lock-file-patterns-policy' controls whether Hi
     Lock mode should automatically extract and highlight patterns
     found in a file when it is visited.  Its value can be `nil' (never
     highlight), `ask' (query the user), or a function.  If it is a
     function, `hi-lock-find-patterns' calls it with the patterns as
     argument; if the function returns non-`nil', the patterns are
     used.  The default is `ask'.  Note that patterns are always
     highlighted if you call `hi-lock-find-patterns' directly,
     regardless of the value of this variable.

     Also, `hi-lock-find-patterns' does nothing if the current major
     mode's symbol is a member of the list `hi-lock-exclude-modes'.


File: emacs,  Node: Fringes,  Next: Displaying Boundaries,  Prev: Highlight Interactively,  Up: Display

18.10 Window Fringes
====================

On a graphical display, each Emacs window normally has narrow "fringes"
on the left and right edges.  The fringes are used to display symbols
that provide information about the text in the window.

   The most common use of the fringes is to indicate a continuation
line, when one line of text is split into multiple lines on the screen.
The left fringe shows a curving arrow for each screen line except the
first, indicating that "this is not the real beginning."  The right
fringe shows a curving arrow for each screen line except the last,
indicating that "this is not the real end."

   The fringes indicate line truncation with short horizontal arrows
meaning "there's more text on this line which is scrolled horizontally
out of view;" clicking the mouse on one of the arrows scrolls the
display horizontally in the direction of the arrow.   The fringes can
also indicate other things, such as empty lines, or where a program you
are debugging is executing (*note Debuggers::).

   You can enable and disable the fringes for all frames using `M-x
fringe-mode'.  To enable and disable the fringes for the selected
frame, use `M-x set-fringe-style'.


File: emacs,  Node: Displaying Boundaries,  Next: Useless Whitespace,  Prev: Fringes,  Up: Display

18.11 Displaying Boundaries
===========================

On a graphical display, Emacs can indicate the buffer boundaries in the
fringes.  It indicates the first line and the last line with angle
images in the fringes.  This can be combined with up and down arrow
images which say whether it is possible to scroll the window up and
down.

   The buffer-local variable `indicate-buffer-boundaries' controls how
the buffer boundaries and window scrolling is indicated in the fringes.
If the value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are
displayed in the left or right fringe, respectively.

   If value is an alist, each element `(INDICATOR .  POSITION)'
specifies the position of one of the indicators.  The INDICATOR must be
one of `top', `bottom', `up', `down', or `t' which specifies the default
position for the indicators not present in the alist.  The POSITION is
one of `left', `right', or `nil' which specifies not to show this
indicator.

   For example, `((top . left) (t . right))' places the top angle
bitmap in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and
both arrow bitmaps in right fringe.  To show just the angle bitmaps in
the left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use `((top .  left) (bottom .
left))'.


File: emacs,  Node: Useless Whitespace,  Next: Selective Display,  Prev: Displaying Boundaries,  Up: Display

18.12 Useless Whitespace
========================

It is easy to leave unnecessary spaces at the end of a line, or empty
lines at the end of a file, without realizing it.  In most cases, this
"trailing whitespace" has no effect, but there are special
circumstances where it matters, and it can be a nuisance.

   You can make trailing whitespace at the end of a line visible by
setting the buffer-local variable `show-trailing-whitespace' to `t'.
Then Emacs displays trailing whitespace, using the face
`trailing-whitespace'.

   This feature does not apply when point is at the end of the line
containing the whitespace.  Strictly speaking, that is "trailing
whitespace" nonetheless, but displaying it specially in that case looks
ugly while you are typing in new text.  In this special case, the
location of point is enough to show you that the spaces are present.

   To delete all trailing whitespace within the buffer's accessible
portion (*note Narrowing::), type `M-x delete-trailing-whitespace
<RET>'.  This command does not remove newline characters.

   Emacs can indicate unused lines at the end of the window with a
small image in the left fringe (*note Fringes::).  The image appears
for window lines that do not correspond to any buffer text.  Blank
lines at the end of the buffer then stand out because they do not have
this image in the fringe.

   To enable this feature, set the buffer-local variable
`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-`nil' value.  You can enable or disable
this feature for all new buffers by setting the default value of this
variable, e.g. `(setq-default indicate-empty-lines t)';.  (This feature
currently doesn't work on text-only terminals.)


File: emacs,  Node: Selective Display,  Next: Optional Mode Line,  Prev: Useless Whitespace,  Up: Display

18.13 Selective Display
=======================

Emacs has the ability to hide lines indented more than a given number
of columns.  You can use this to get an overview of a part of a program.

   To hide lines in the current buffer, type `C-x $'
(`set-selective-display') with a numeric argument N.  Then lines with
at least N columns of indentation disappear from the screen.  The only
indication of their presence is that three dots (`...') appear at the
end of each visible line that is followed by one or more hidden ones.

   The commands `C-n' and `C-p' move across the hidden lines as if they
were not there.

   The hidden lines are still present in the buffer, and most editing
commands see them as usual, so you may find point in the middle of the
hidden text.  When this happens, the cursor appears at the end of the
previous line, after the three dots.  If point is at the end of the
visible line, before the newline that ends it, the cursor appears before
the three dots.

   To make all lines visible again, type `C-x $' with no argument.

   If you set the variable `selective-display-ellipses' to `nil', the
three dots do not appear at the end of a line that precedes hidden
lines.  Then there is no visible indication of the hidden lines.  This
variable becomes local automatically when set.

   See also *Note Outline Mode:: for another way to hide part of the
text in a buffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Optional Mode Line,  Next: Text Display,  Prev: Selective Display,  Up: Display

18.14 Optional Mode Line Features
=================================

The buffer percentage POS indicates the percentage of the buffer above
the top of the window.  You can additionally display the size of the
buffer by typing `M-x size-indication-mode' to turn on Size Indication
mode.  The size will be displayed immediately following the buffer
percentage like this:

     POS of SIZE

Here SIZE is the human readable representation of the number of
characters in the buffer, which means that `k' for 10^3, `M' for 10^6,
`G' for 10^9, etc., are used to abbreviate.

   The current line number of point appears in the mode line when Line
Number mode is enabled.  Use the command `M-x line-number-mode' to turn
this mode on and off; normally it is on.  The line number appears after
the buffer percentage POS, with the letter `L' to indicate what it is.

   Similarly, you can display the current column number by turning on
Column number mode with `M-x column-number-mode'.  The column number is
indicated by the letter `C'.  However, when both of these modes are
enabled, the line and column numbers are displayed in parentheses, the
line number first, rather than with `L' and `C'.  For example:
`(561,2)'.  *Note Minor Modes::, for more information about minor modes
and about how to use these commands.

   If you have narrowed the buffer (*note Narrowing::), the displayed
line number is relative to the accessible portion of the buffer.  Thus,
it isn't suitable as an argument to `goto-line'.  (Use `what-line'
command to see the line number relative to the whole file.)

   If the buffer is very large (larger than the value of
`line-number-display-limit'), Emacs won't compute the line number,
because that would be too slow; therefore, the line number won't appear
on the mode-line.  To remove this limit, set
`line-number-display-limit' to `nil'.

   Line-number computation can also be slow if the lines in the buffer
are too long.  For this reason, Emacs doesn't display line numbers if
the average width, in characters, of lines near point is larger than
the value of `line-number-display-limit-width'.  The default value is
200 characters.

   Emacs can optionally display the time and system load in all mode
lines.  To enable this feature, type `M-x display-time' or customize
the option `display-time-mode'.  The information added to the mode line
usually appears after the buffer name, before the mode names and their
parentheses.  It looks like this:

     HH:MMpm L.LL

Here HH and MM are the hour and minute, followed always by `am' or
`pm'.  L.LL is the average number of running processes in the whole
system recently.  (Some fields may be missing if your operating system
cannot support them.)  If you prefer time display in 24-hour format,
set the variable `display-time-24hr-format' to `t'.

   The word `Mail' appears after the load level if there is mail for
you that you have not read yet.  On a graphical display you can use an
icon instead of `Mail' by customizing `display-time-use-mail-icon';
this may save some space on the mode line.  You can customize
`display-time-mail-face' to make the mail indicator prominent.  Use
`display-time-mail-file' to specify the mail file to check, or set
`display-time-mail-directory' to specify the directory to check for
incoming mail (any nonempty regular file in the directory is considered
as "newly arrived mail").

   When running Emacs on a laptop computer, you can display the battery
charge on the mode-line, by using the command `display-battery-mode' or
customizing the variable `display-battery-mode'.  The variable
`battery-mode-line-format' determines the way the battery charge is
displayed; the exact mode-line message depends on the operating system,
and it usually shows the current battery charge as a percentage of the
total charge.

   By default, the mode line is drawn on graphics displays with
3D-style highlighting, like that of a button when it is not being
pressed.  If you don't like this effect, you can disable the 3D
highlighting of the mode line, by customizing the attributes of the
`mode-line' face.  *Note Face Customization::.

   By default, the mode line of nonselected windows is displayed in a
different face, called `mode-line-inactive'.  Only the selected window
is displayed in the `mode-line' face.  This helps show which window is
selected.  When the minibuffer is selected, since it has no mode line,
the window from which you activated the minibuffer has its mode line
displayed using `mode-line'; as a result, ordinary entry to the
minibuffer does not change any mode lines.

   You can disable use of `mode-line-inactive' by setting variable
`mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' to `nil'; then all mode lines are
displayed in the `mode-line' face.

   You can customize the mode line display for each of the end-of-line
formats by setting each of the variables `eol-mnemonic-unix',
`eol-mnemonic-dos', `eol-mnemonic-mac', and `eol-mnemonic-undecided' to
the strings you prefer.


File: emacs,  Node: Text Display,  Next: Cursor Display,  Prev: Optional Mode Line,  Up: Display

18.15 How Text Is Displayed
===========================

ASCII printing characters (octal codes 040 through 0176) in Emacs
buffers are displayed with their graphics, as are non-ASCII multibyte
printing characters (octal codes above 0400).

   Some ASCII control characters are displayed in special ways.  The
newline character (octal code 012) is displayed by starting a new line.
The tab character (octal code 011) is displayed by moving to the next
tab stop column (normally every 8 columns).  The number of spaces per
tab is controlled by the variable `tab-width', which must have an
integer value between 1 and 1000, inclusive, and is made buffer-local
by changing it.  Note that how the tab character in the buffer is
displayed has nothing to do with the definition of <TAB> as a command.

   Other ASCII control characters are normally displayed as a caret
(`^') followed by the non-control version of the character; thus,
control-A is displayed as `^A'.  The caret appears in face
`escape-glyph'.

   Non-ASCII characters 0200 through 0237 (octal) are displayed with
octal escape sequences; thus, character code 0230 (octal) is displayed
as `\230'.  The backslash appears in face `escape-glyph'.

   If the variable `ctl-arrow' is `nil', control characters in the
buffer are displayed with octal escape sequences, except for newline
and tab.  Altering the value of `ctl-arrow' makes it local to the
current buffer; until that time, the default value is in effect.  The
default is initially `t'.

   The display of character codes 0240 through 0377 (octal) may be
either as escape sequences or as graphics.  They do not normally occur
in multibyte buffers, but if they do, they are displayed as Latin-1
graphics.  In unibyte mode, if you enable European display they are
displayed using their graphics (assuming your terminal supports them),
otherwise as escape sequences.  *Note Unibyte Mode::.

   Some character sets define "no-break" versions of the space and
hyphen characters, which are used where a line should not be broken.
Emacs normally displays these characters with special faces
(respectively, `nobreak-space' and `escape-glyph') to distinguish them
from ordinary spaces and hyphens.  You can turn off this feature by
setting the variable `nobreak-char-display' to `nil'.  If you set the
variable to any other value, that means to prefix these characters with
an escape character.

   You can customize the way any particular character code is displayed
by means of a display table.  *Note Display Tables: (elisp)Display
Tables.


File: emacs,  Node: Cursor Display,  Next: Line Truncation,  Prev: Text Display,  Up: Display

18.16 Displaying the Cursor
===========================

You can customize the cursor's color, and whether it blinks, using the
`cursor' Custom group (*note Easy Customization::).  On a graphical
display, the command `M-x blink-cursor-mode' enables or disables the
blinking of the cursor.  (On text terminals, the terminal itself blinks
the cursor, and Emacs has no control over it.)  You can control how the
cursor appears when it blinks off by setting the variable
`blink-cursor-alist'.

   Some text terminals offer two different cursors: the normal cursor
and the very visible cursor, where the latter may be e.g. bigger or
blinking.  By default Emacs uses the very visible cursor, and switches
to it when you start or resume Emacs.  If the variable `visible-cursor'
is `nil' when Emacs starts or resumes, it doesn't switch, so it uses
the normal cursor.

   Normally, the cursor appears in non-selected windows without
blinking, with the same appearance as when the blinking cursor blinks
"off."  For a box cursor, this is a hollow box; for a bar cursor, this
is a thinner bar.  To turn off cursors in non-selected windows,
customize the variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' and assign it a
`nil' value.

   On graphical displays, Emacs can optionally draw the block cursor as
wide as the character under the cursor--for example, if the cursor is
on a tab character, it would cover the full width occupied by that tab
character.  To enable this feature, set the variable `x-stretch-cursor'
to a non-`nil' value.

   To make the cursor even more visible, you can use HL Line mode, a
minor mode that highlights the line containing point.  Use `M-x
hl-line-mode' to enable or disable it in the current buffer.  `M-x
global-hl-line-mode' enables or disables the same mode globally.


File: emacs,  Node: Line Truncation,  Next: Visual Line Mode,  Prev: Cursor Display,  Up: Display

18.17 Truncation of Lines
=========================

As an alternative to continuation (*note Continuation Lines::), Emacs
can display long lines by "truncation".  This means that all the
characters that do not fit in the width of the screen or window do not
appear at all.  On graphical displays, a small straight arrow in the
fringe indicates truncation at either end of the line.  On text-only
terminals, `$' appears in the first column when there is text truncated
to the left, and in the last column when there is text truncated to the
right.

   Horizontal scrolling automatically causes line truncation (*note
Horizontal Scrolling::).  You can explicitly enable line truncation for
a particular buffer with the command `M-x toggle-truncate-lines'.  This
works by locally changing the variable `truncate-lines'.  If that
variable is non-`nil', long lines are truncated; if it is `nil', they
are continued onto multiple screen lines.  Setting the variable
`truncate-lines' in any way makes it local to the current buffer; until
that time, the default value is in effect.  The default value is
normally `nil'.

   If the variable `truncate-partial-width-windows' is non-`nil', it
forces truncation rather than continuation in any window less than the
full width of the screen or frame, regardless of the value of
`truncate-lines'.  See also *Note Display: (elisp)Display.

   If the variable `overflow-newline-into-fringe' is non-`nil' on a
graphical display, then Emacs does not continue or truncate a line
which is exactly as wide as the window.  Instead, the newline overflows
into the right fringe, and the cursor appears in the fringe when
positioned on that newline.


File: emacs,  Node: Visual Line Mode,  Next: Display Custom,  Prev: Line Truncation,  Up: Display

18.18 Visual Line Mode
======================

Another alternative to ordinary line continuation is to use "word
wrap".  Here, each long logical line is divided into two or more screen
lines, like in ordinary line continuation.  However, Emacs attempts to
wrap the line at word boundaries near the right window edge.  This
makes the text easier to read, as wrapping does not occur in the middle
of words.

   Word wrap is enabled by Visual Line mode, an optional minor mode.
To turn on Visual Line mode in the current buffer, type `M-x
visual-line-mode'; repeating this command turns it off.  You can also
turn on Visual Line mode using the menu bar: in the Options menu,
select the `Line Wrapping in this Buffer' submenu, followed by the
`Word Wrap (Visual Line Mode)' menu item.  While Visual Line mode is
enabled, the mode-line shows the string `wrap' in the mode display.
The command `M-x global-visual-line-mode' toggles Visual Line mode in
all buffers.

   In Visual Line mode, some editing commands work on screen lines
instead of logical lines: `C-a' (`beginning-of-visual-line') moves to
the beginning of the screen line, `C-e' (`end-of-visual-line') moves to
the end of the screen line, and `C-k' (`kill-visual-line') kills text
to the end of the screen line.

   To move by logical lines, use the commands `M-x next-logical-line'
and `M-x previous-logical-line'.  These move point to the next logical
line and the previous logical line respectively, regardless of whether
Visual Line mode is enabled.  If you use these commands frequently, it
may be convenient to assign key bindings to them.  *Note Init
Rebinding::.

   By default, word-wrapped lines do not display fringe indicators.
Visual Line mode is often used to edit files that contain many long
logical lines, so having a fringe indicator for each wrapped line would
be visually distracting.  You can change this by customizing the
variable `visual-line-fringe-indicators'.


File: emacs,  Node: Display Custom,  Prev: Visual Line Mode,  Up: Display

18.19 Customization of Display
==============================

This section describes variables (*note Variables::) that you can
change to customize how Emacs displays.  Beginning users can skip it.

   If the variable `visible-bell' is non-`nil', Emacs attempts to make
the whole screen blink when it would normally make an audible bell
sound.  This variable has no effect if your terminal does not have a way
to make the screen blink.

   The variable `echo-keystrokes' controls the echoing of
multi-character keys; its value is the number of seconds of pause
required to cause echoing to start, or zero, meaning don't echo at all.
The value takes effect when there is someting to echo.  *Note Echo
Area::.

   The variable `baud-rate' holds the output speed of the terminal.
Setting this variable does not change the speed of actual data
transmission, but the value is used for calculations.  On text-only
terminals, it affects padding, and decisions about whether to scroll
part of the screen or redraw it instead.  It also affects the behavior
of incremental search.  On graphical displays, `baud-rate' is only used
to determine how frequently to look for pending input during display
updating.  A higher value of `baud-rate' means that check for pending
input will be done less frequently.

   On graphical displays, Emacs displays the mouse pointer as an
hourglass if Emacs is busy.  To disable this feature, set the variable
`display-hourglass' to `nil'.  The variable `hourglass-delay'
determines the number of seconds of "busy time" before the hourglass is
shown; the default is 1.

   If the mouse pointer lies inside an Emacs frame, Emacs makes it
invisible each time you type a character to insert text, to prevent it
from obscuring the text.  (To be precise, the hiding occurs when you
type a "self-inserting" character.  *Note Inserting Text::.)  Moving
the mouse pointer makes it visible again.  To disable this feature, set
the variable `make-pointer-invisible' to `nil'.

   On graphical displays, the variable `underline-minimum-offset'
determines the minimum distance between the baseline and underline, in
pixels, for underlined text.  By default, the value is 1; increasing it
may improve the legibility of underlined text for certain fonts.
(However, Emacs will never draw the underline below the current line
area.)  The variable `x-underline-at-descent-line' determines how to
draw underlined text.  The default is `nil', which means to draw it at
the baseline level of the font; if you change it to `nil', Emacs draws
the underline at the same height as the font's descent line.

   The variable `overline-margin' specifies the vertical position of an
overline above the text, including the height of the overline itself,
in pixels; the default is 2.

   On some text-only terminals, bold face and inverse video together
result in text that is hard to read.  Call the function
`tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors' with a non-`nil' argument to
suppress the effect of bold-face in this case.

   On a text-only terminal, when you reenter Emacs after suspending,
Emacs normally clears the screen and redraws the entire display.  On
some terminals with more than one page of memory, it is possible to
arrange the termcap entry so that the `ti' and `te' strings (output to
the terminal when Emacs is entered and exited, respectively) switch
between pages of memory so as to use one page for Emacs and another
page for other output.  On such terminals, you might want to set the
variable `no-redraw-on-reenter' non-`nil'; this tells Emacs to assume,
when resumed, that the screen page it is using still contains what
Emacs last wrote there.


File: emacs,  Node: Search,  Next: Fixit,  Prev: Display,  Up: Top

19 Searching and Replacement
****************************

Like other editors, Emacs has commands to search for occurrences of a
string.  Emacs also has commands to replace occurrences of a string
with a different string.  There are also commands that do the same
thing, but search for patterns instead of fixed strings.

   You can also search multiple files under the control of a tags table
(*note Tags Search::) or through the Dired `A' command (*note Operating
on Files::), or ask the `grep' program to do it (*note Grep
Searching::).

* Menu:

* Incremental Search::		Search happens as you type the string.
* Nonincremental Search::	Specify entire string and then search.
* Word Search::			Search for sequence of words.
* Regexp Search::		Search for match for a regexp.
* Regexps::			Syntax of regular expressions.
* Regexp Backslash::            Regular expression constructs starting with `\'.
* Regexp Example::              A complex regular expression explained.
* Search Case::			To ignore case while searching, or not.
* Replace::			Search, and replace some or all matches.
* Other Repeating Search::	Operating on all matches for some regexp.


File: emacs,  Node: Incremental Search,  Next: Nonincremental Search,  Up: Search

19.1 Incremental Search
=======================

The principal search command in Emacs is "incremental": it begins
searching as soon as you type the first character of the search string.
As you type in the search string, Emacs shows you where the string (as
you have typed it so far) would be found.  When you have typed enough
characters to identify the place you want, you can stop.  Depending on
what you plan to do next, you may or may not need to terminate the
search explicitly with <RET>.

`C-s'
     Incremental search forward (`isearch-forward').

`C-r'
     Incremental search backward (`isearch-backward').

* Menu:

* Basic Isearch::       Basic incremental search commands.
* Repeat Isearch::      Searching for the same string again.
* Error in Isearch::    When your string is not found.
* Special Isearch::     Special input in incremental search.
* Isearch Yank::        Commands that grab text into the search string
                          or else edit the search string.
* Isearch Scroll::      Scrolling during an incremental search.
* Isearch Minibuffer::  Incremental search of the minibuffer history.
* Slow Isearch::        Incremental search features for slow terminals.


File: emacs,  Node: Basic Isearch,  Next: Repeat Isearch,  Up: Incremental Search

19.1.1 Basics of Incremental Search
-----------------------------------

`C-s'
     Begin incremental search (`isearch-forward').

`C-r'
     Begin reverse incremental search (`isearch-backward').

   `C-s' (`isearch-forward') starts a forward incremental search.  It
reads characters from the keyboard, and moves point just past the end
of the next occurrence of those characters in the buffer.

   For instance, if you type `C-s' and then `F', that puts the cursor
after the first `F' that occurs in the buffer after the starting point.
Then if you then type `O', the cursor moves to just after the first
`FO'; the `F' in that `FO' might not be the first `F' previously found.
After another `O', the cursor moves to just after the first `FOO'.

   At each step, Emacs highlights the "current match"--the buffer text
that matches the search string--using the `isearch' face (*note
Faces::).  The current search string is also displayed in the echo area.

   If you make a mistake typing the search string, type <DEL>.  Each
<DEL> cancels the last character of the search string.

   When you are satisfied with the place you have reached, type <RET>.
This stops searching, leaving the cursor where the search brought it.
Also, any command not specially meaningful in searches stops the
searching and is then executed.  Thus, typing `C-a' exits the search
and then moves to the beginning of the line.  <RET> is necessary only
if the next command you want to type is a printing character, <DEL>,
<RET>, or another character that is special within searches (`C-q',
`C-w', `C-r', `C-s', `C-y', `M-y', `M-r', `M-c', `M-e', and some others
described below).

   As a special exception, entering <RET> when the search string is
empty launches nonincremental search (*note Nonincremental Search::).

   When you exit the incremental search, it adds the original value of
point to the mark ring, without activating the mark; you can thus use
`C-u C-<SPC>' to return to where you were before beginning the search.
*Note Mark Ring::.  It only does this if the mark was not already
active.

   To search backwards, use `C-r' (`isearch-backward') instead of `C-s'
to start the search.  A backward search finds matches that end before
the starting point, just as a forward search finds matches that begin
after it.


File: emacs,  Node: Repeat Isearch,  Next: Error in Isearch,  Prev: Basic Isearch,  Up: Incremental Search

19.1.2 Repeating Incremental Search
-----------------------------------

Suppose you search forward for `FOO' and find a match, but not the one
you expected to find: the `FOO' you were aiming for occurs later in the
buffer.  In this event, type another `C-s' to move to the next
occurrence of the search string.  You can repeat this any number of
times.  If you overshoot, you can cancel some `C-s' characters with
<DEL>.  Similarly, each `C-r' in a backward incremental search repeats
the backward search.

   If you pause for a little while during incremental search, Emacs
highlights all the other possible matches for the search string that
are present on the screen.  This helps you anticipate where you can get
to by typing `C-s' or `C-r' to repeat the search.  The other matches
are highlighted differently from the current match, using the
customizable face `lazy-highlight' (*note Faces::).  If you don't like
this feature, you can disable it by setting `isearch-lazy-highlight' to
`nil'.

   After exiting a search, you can search for the same string again by
typing just `C-s C-s'.  The first `C-s' is the key that invokes
incremental search, and the second `C-s' means "search again."
Similarly, `C-r C-r' searches backward for the last search string.  In
determining the last search string, it doesn't matter whether the
string was searched for with `C-s' or `C-r'.

   If you are searching forward but you realize you were looking for
something before the starting point, type `C-r' to switch to a backward
search, leaving the search string unchanged.  Similarly, `C-s' in a
backward search switches to a forward search.

   If a search is failing and you ask to repeat it by typing another
`C-s', it starts again from the beginning of the buffer.  Repeating a
failing reverse search with `C-r' starts again from the end.  This is
called "wrapping around", and `Wrapped' appears in the search prompt
once this has happened.  If you keep on going past the original
starting point of the search, it changes to `Overwrapped', which means
that you are revisiting matches that you have already seen.

   To reuse earlier search strings, use the "search ring".  The
commands `M-p' and `M-n' move through the ring to pick a search string
to reuse.  These commands leave the selected search ring element in the
minibuffer, where you can edit it.  To edit the current search string
in the minibuffer without replacing it with items from the search ring,
type `M-e'.  Type `C-s' or `C-r' to terminate editing the string and
search for it.


File: emacs,  Node: Error in Isearch,  Next: Special Isearch,  Prev: Repeat Isearch,  Up: Incremental Search

19.1.3 Errors in Incremental Search
-----------------------------------

If your string is not found at all, the echo area says `Failing
I-Search'.  The cursor is after the place where Emacs found as much of
your string as it could.  Thus, if you search for `FOOT', and there is
no `FOOT', you might see the cursor after the `FOO' in `FOOL'.  In the
echo area, the part of the search string that failed to match is
highlighted using the customizable face `isearch-fail'.

   At this point, there are several things you can do.  If your string
was mistyped, you can use <DEL> to erase some of it and correct it.  If
you like the place you have found, you can type <RET> to remain there.
Or you can type `C-g', which removes from the search string the
characters that could not be found (the `T' in `FOOT'), leaving those
that were found (the `FOO' in `FOOT').  A second `C-g' at that point
cancels the search entirely, returning point to where it was when the
search started.

   The quit command, `C-g', does special things during searches; just
what it does depends on the status of the search.  If the search has
found what you specified and is waiting for input, `C-g' cancels the
entire search, moving the cursor back to where you started the search.
If `C-g' is typed when there are characters in the search string that
have not been found--because Emacs is still searching for them, or
because it has failed to find them--then the search string characters
which have not been found are discarded from the search string.  With
them gone, the search is now successful and waiting for more input, so
a second `C-g' will cancel the entire search.


File: emacs,  Node: Special Isearch,  Next: Isearch Yank,  Prev: Error in Isearch,  Up: Incremental Search

19.1.4 Special Input for Incremental Search
-------------------------------------------

Some of the characters you type during incremental search have special
effects.

   If the search string you entered contains only lower-case letters,
the search is case-insensitive; as long as an upper-case letter exists
in the search string, the search becomes case-sensitive.  If you delete
the upper-case character from the search string, it ceases to have this
effect.  *Note Search Case::.

   To search for a newline character, type `C-j'.

   To search for other control characters, such as <control-S>, quote
it by typing `C-q' first (*note Inserting Text::).  To search for
non-ASCII characters, you can either use `C-q' and enter its octal
code, or use an input method (*note Input Methods::).  If an input
method is enabled in the current buffer when you start the search, you
can use it in the search string also.  While typing the search string,
you can toggle the input method with the command `C-\'
(`isearch-toggle-input-method').  You can also turn on a non-default
input method with `C-^' (`isearch-toggle-specified-input-method'),
which prompts for the name of the input method.  When an input method
is active during incremental search, the search prompt includes the
input method mnemonic, like this:

     I-search [IM]:

where IM is the mnemonic of the active input method.  Any input method
you enable during incremental search remains enabled in the current
buffer afterwards.

   Typing `M-%' in incremental search invokes `query-replace' or
`query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current
search string used as the string to replace.  *Note Query Replace::.

   Typing `M-<TAB>' in incremental search invokes `isearch-complete',
which attempts to complete the search string using the search ring as a
list of completion alternatives.  *Note Completion::.  In many
operating systems, the `M-<TAB>' key sequence is captured by the window
manager; you then need to rebind `isearch-complete' to another key
sequence if you want to use it (*note Rebinding::).

   When incremental search is active, you can type `C-h C-h' to access
interactive help options, including a list of special keybindings.
These keybindings are part of the keymap `isearch-mode-map' (*note
Keymaps::).


File: emacs,  Node: Isearch Yank,  Next: Isearch Scroll,  Prev: Special Isearch,  Up: Incremental Search

19.1.5 Isearch Yanking
----------------------

Within incremental search, you can use `C-w' and `C-y' to grab text
from the buffer into the search string.  This makes it convenient to
search for another occurrence of text at point.

   `C-w' copies the character or word after point and adds it to the
search string, advancing point over it.  (The decision, whether to copy
a character or a word, is heuristic.)

   `C-y' is similar to `C-w' but copies all the rest of the current
line into the search string.  If point is already at the end of a line,
it grabs the entire next line.  If the search is currently
case-insensitive, both `C-y' and `C-w' convert the text they copy to
lower case, so that the search remains case-insensitive.

   `C-M-w' and `C-M-y' modify the search string by only one character
at a time: `C-M-w' deletes the last character from the search string
and `C-M-y' copies the character after point to the end of the search
string.  An alternative method to add the character after point into
the search string is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e' and to type `C-f'
at the end of the search string in the minibuffer.

   The character `M-y' copies text from the kill ring into the search
string.  It uses the same text that `C-y' would yank.  `Mouse-2' in the
echo area does the same.  *Note Yanking::.


File: emacs,  Node: Isearch Scroll,  Next: Isearch Minibuffer,  Prev: Isearch Yank,  Up: Incremental Search

19.1.6 Scrolling During Incremental Search
------------------------------------------

You can enable the use of vertical scrolling during incremental search
(without exiting the search) by setting the customizable variable
`isearch-allow-scroll' to a non-`nil' value.  This applies to using the
vertical scroll-bar and to certain keyboard commands such as <prior>
(`scroll-down'), <next> (`scroll-up') and `C-l' (`recenter').  You must
run these commands via their key sequences to stay in the search--typing
`M-x' will terminate the search.  You can give prefix arguments to
these commands in the usual way.

   This feature won't let you scroll the current match out of
visibility, however.

   The feature also affects some other commands, such as `C-x 2'
(`split-window-vertically') and `C-x ^' (`enlarge-window') which don't
exactly scroll but do affect where the text appears on the screen.  In
general, it applies to any command whose name has a non-`nil'
`isearch-scroll' property.  So you can control which commands are
affected by changing these properties.

   For example, to make `C-h l' usable within an incremental search in
all future Emacs sessions, use `C-h c' to find what command it runs.
(You type `C-h c C-h l'; it says `view-lossage'.)  Then you can put the
following line in your `.emacs' file (*note Init File::):

     (put 'view-lossage 'isearch-scroll t)

This feature can be applied to any command that doesn't permanently
change point, the buffer contents, the match data, the current buffer,
or the selected window and frame.  The command must not itself attempt
an incremental search.


File: emacs,  Node: Isearch Minibuffer,  Next: Slow Isearch,  Prev: Isearch Scroll,  Up: Incremental Search

19.1.7 Searching the Minibuffer
-------------------------------

If you start an incremental search while the minibuffer is active,
Emacs searches the contents of the minibuffer.  Unlike searching an
ordinary buffer, the search string is not shown in the echo area,
because that is used to display the minibuffer.

   If an incremental search fails in the minibuffer, it tries searching
the minibuffer history.  *Note Minibuffer History::.  You can visualize
the minibuffer and its history as a series of "pages", with the
earliest history element on the first page and the current minibuffer
on the last page.  A forward search, `C-s', searches forward to later
pages; a reverse search, `C-r', searches backwards to earlier pages.
Like in ordinary buffer search, a failing search can wrap around, going
from the last page to the first page or vice versa.

   When the current match is on a history element, that history element
is pulled into the minibuffer.  If you exit the incremental search
normally (e.g. by typing <RET>), it remains in the minibuffer
afterwards.  Cancelling the search, with `C-g', restores the contents
of the minibuffer when you began the search.


File: emacs,  Node: Slow Isearch,  Prev: Isearch Minibuffer,  Up: Incremental Search

19.1.8 Slow Terminal Incremental Search
---------------------------------------

Incremental search on a slow terminal uses a modified style of display
that is designed to take less time.  Instead of redisplaying the buffer
at each place the search gets to, it creates a new single-line window
and uses that to display the line that the search has found.  The
single-line window comes into play as soon as point moves outside of
the text that is already on the screen.

   When you terminate the search, the single-line window is removed.
Emacs then redisplays the window in which the search was done, to show
its new position of point.

   The slow terminal style of display is used when the terminal baud
rate is less than or equal to the value of the variable
`search-slow-speed', initially 1200.  See also the discussion of the
variable `baud-rate' (*note Customization of Display: baud-rate.).

   The number of lines to use in slow terminal search display is
controlled by the variable `search-slow-window-lines'.  Its normal
value is 1.


File: emacs,  Node: Nonincremental Search,  Next: Word Search,  Prev: Incremental Search,  Up: Search

19.2 Nonincremental Search
==========================

Emacs also has conventional nonincremental search commands, which
require you to type the entire search string before searching begins.

`C-s <RET> STRING <RET>'
     Search for STRING.

`C-r <RET> STRING <RET>'
     Search backward for STRING.

   To start a nonincremental search, first type `C-s <RET>'.  This
enters the minibuffer to read the search string; terminate the string
with <RET>, and then the search takes place.  If the string is not
found, the search command signals an error.

   When you type `C-s <RET>', the `C-s' invokes incremental search as
usual.  That command is specially programmed to invoke nonincremental
search, `search-forward', if the string you specify is empty.  (Such an
empty argument would otherwise be useless.)  `C-r <RET>' does likewise,
for a reverse incremental search.

   Forward and backward nonincremental searches are implemented by the
commands `search-forward' and `search-backward'.  These commands may be
bound to other keys in the usual manner.


File: emacs,  Node: Word Search,  Next: Regexp Search,  Prev: Nonincremental Search,  Up: Search

19.3 Word Search
================

A "word search" finds a sequence of words without regard to the type of
punctuation between them.  For instance, if you enter a search string
that consists of two words separated by a single space, the search
matches any sequence of those two words separated by one or more
spaces, newlines, or other punctuation characters.  This is
particularly useful for searching text documents, because you don't
have to worry whether the words you are looking for are separated by
newlines or spaces.

`M-s w'
     If incremental search is active, toggle word search mode
     (`isearch-toggle-word'); otherwise, begin an incremental forward
     word search (`isearch-forward-word').

`M-s w <RET> WORDS <RET>'
     Search for WORDS, using a forward nonincremental word search.

`M-s w C-r <RET> WORDS <RET>'
     Search backward for WORDS, using a nonincremental word search.

   To begin a forward incremental word search, type `M-s w'.  If
incremental search is not already active, this runs the command
`isearch-forward-word'.  If incremental search is already active
(whether a forward or backward search), `M-s w' switches to a word
search while keeping the direction of the search and the current search
string unchanged.  You can toggle word search back off by typing `M-s
w' again.

   To begin a nonincremental word search, type `M-s w <RET>' for a
forward search, or `M-s w C-r <RET>' for a backward search.  These run
the commands `word-search-forward' and `word-search-backward'
respectively.

   A nonincremental word search differs slightly from the incremental
version in the way it finds a match: the last word in the search string
must be an exact match for a whole word.  In an incremental word
search, the last word in the search string can match part of a word;
this allows the matching to proceed incrementally as you type.


File: emacs,  Node: Regexp Search,  Next: Regexps,  Prev: Word Search,  Up: Search

19.4 Regular Expression Search
==============================

A "regular expression" (or "regexp" for short) is a pattern that
denotes a class of alternative strings to match.  GNU Emacs provides
both incremental and nonincremental ways to search for a match for a
regexp.  The syntax of regular expressions is explained in the
following section.

`C-M-s'
     Begin incremental regexp search (`isearch-forward-regexp').

`C-M-r'
     Begin reverse incremental regexp search
     (`isearch-backward-regexp').

   Incremental search for a regexp is done by typing `C-M-s'
(`isearch-forward-regexp'), by invoking `C-s' with a prefix argument
(whose value does not matter), or by typing `M-r' within a forward
incremental search.  This command reads a search string incrementally
just like `C-s', but it treats the search string as a regexp rather
than looking for an exact match against the text in the buffer.  Each
time you add text to the search string, you make the regexp longer, and
the new regexp is searched for.  To search backward for a regexp, use
`C-M-r' (`isearch-backward-regexp'), `C-r' with a prefix argument, or
`M-r' within a backward incremental search.

   All of the special key sequences in an ordinary incremental search
do similar things in an incremental regexp search.  For instance,
typing `C-s' immediately after starting the search retrieves the last
incremental search regexp used and searches forward for it.
Incremental regexp and non-regexp searches have independent defaults.
They also have separate search rings, which you can access with `M-p'
and `M-n'.

   If you type <SPC> in incremental regexp search, it matches any
sequence of whitespace characters, including newlines.  If you want to
match just a space, type `C-q <SPC>'.  You can control what a bare
space matches by setting the variable `search-whitespace-regexp' to the
desired regexp.

   In some cases, adding characters to the regexp in an incremental
regexp search can make the cursor move back and start again.  For
example, if you have searched for `foo' and you add `\|bar', the cursor
backs up in case the first `bar' precedes the first `foo'.  *Note
Regexps::.

   Forward and backward regexp search are not symmetrical, because
regexp matching in Emacs always operates forward, starting with the
beginning of the regexp.  Thus, forward regexp search scans forward,
trying a forward match at each possible starting position.  Backward
regexp search scans backward, trying a forward match at each possible
starting position.  These search methods are not mirror images.

   Nonincremental search for a regexp is done by the functions
`re-search-forward' and `re-search-backward'.  You can invoke these
with `M-x', or by way of incremental regexp search with `C-M-s <RET>'
and `C-M-r <RET>'.

   If you use the incremental regexp search commands with a prefix
argument, they perform ordinary string search, like `isearch-forward'
and `isearch-backward'.  *Note Incremental Search::.


File: emacs,  Node: Regexps,  Next: Regexp Backslash,  Prev: Regexp Search,  Up: Search

19.5 Syntax of Regular Expressions
==================================

This manual describes regular expression features that users typically
want to use.  There are additional features that are mainly used in
Lisp programs; see *Note Regular Expressions: (elisp)Regular
Expressions.

   Regular expressions have a syntax in which a few characters are
special constructs and the rest are "ordinary".  An ordinary character
is a simple regular expression which matches that same character and
nothing else.  The special characters are `$', `^', `.', `*', `+', `?',
`[', and `\'.  The character `]' is special if it ends a character
alternative (see later).  The character `-' is special inside a
character alternative.  Any other character appearing in a regular
expression is ordinary, unless a `\' precedes it.  (When you use
regular expressions in a Lisp program, each `\' must be doubled, see
the example near the end of this section.)

   For example, `f' is not a special character, so it is ordinary, and
therefore `f' is a regular expression that matches the string `f' and
no other string.  (It does _not_ match the string `ff'.)  Likewise, `o'
is a regular expression that matches only `o'.  (When case distinctions
are being ignored, these regexps also match `F' and `O', but we
consider this a generalization of "the same string," rather than an
exception.)

   Any two regular expressions A and B can be concatenated.  The result
is a regular expression which matches a string if A matches some amount
of the beginning of that string and B matches the rest of the string.

   As a simple example, we can concatenate the regular expressions `f'
and `o' to get the regular expression `fo', which matches only the
string `fo'.  Still trivial.  To do something nontrivial, you need to
use one of the special characters.  Here is a list of them.

`.' (Period)
     is a special character that matches any single character except a
     newline.  Using concatenation, we can make regular expressions
     like `a.b', which matches any three-character string that begins
     with `a' and ends with `b'.

`*'
     is not a construct by itself; it is a postfix operator that means
     to match the preceding regular expression repetitively as many
     times as possible.  Thus, `o*' matches any number of `o's
     (including no `o's).

     `*' always applies to the _smallest_ possible preceding
     expression.  Thus, `fo*' has a repeating `o', not a repeating
     `fo'.  It matches `f', `fo', `foo', and so on.

     The matcher processes a `*' construct by matching, immediately, as
     many repetitions as can be found.  Then it continues with the rest
     of the pattern.  If that fails, backtracking occurs, discarding
     some of the matches of the `*'-modified construct in case that
     makes it possible to match the rest of the pattern.  For example,
     in matching `ca*ar' against the string `caaar', the `a*' first
     tries to match all three `a's; but the rest of the pattern is `ar'
     and there is only `r' left to match, so this try fails.  The next
     alternative is for `a*' to match only two `a's.  With this choice,
     the rest of the regexp matches successfully.

`+'
     is a postfix operator, similar to `*' except that it must match
     the preceding expression at least once.  So, for example, `ca+r'
     matches the strings `car' and `caaaar' but not the string `cr',
     whereas `ca*r' matches all three strings.

`?'
     is a postfix operator, similar to `*' except that it can match the
     preceding expression either once or not at all.  For example,
     `ca?r' matches `car' or `cr'; nothing else.

`*?', `+?', `??'
     are non-greedy variants of the operators above.  The normal
     operators `*', `+', `?' are "greedy" in that they match as much as
     they can, as long as the overall regexp can still match.  With a
     following `?', they are non-greedy: they will match as little as
     possible.

     Thus, both `ab*' and `ab*?' can match the string `a' and the
     string `abbbb'; but if you try to match them both against the text
     `abbb', `ab*' will match it all (the longest valid match), while
     `ab*?'  will match just `a' (the shortest valid match).

     Non-greedy operators match the shortest possible string starting
     at a given starting point; in a forward search, though, the
     earliest possible starting point for match is always the one
     chosen.  Thus, if you search for `a.*?$' against the text `abbab'
     followed by a newline, it matches the whole string.  Since it
     _can_ match starting at the first `a', it does.

`\{N\}'
     is a postfix operator that specifies repetition N times--that is,
     the preceding regular expression must match exactly N times in a
     row.  For example, `x\{4\}' matches the string `xxxx' and nothing
     else.

`\{N,M\}'
     is a postfix operator that specifies repetition between N and M
     times--that is, the preceding regular expression must match at
     least N times, but no more than M times.  If M is omitted, then
     there is no upper limit, but the preceding regular expression must
     match at least N times.
     `\{0,1\}' is equivalent to `?'.
     `\{0,\}' is equivalent to `*'.
     `\{1,\}' is equivalent to `+'.

`[ ... ]'
     is a "character set", which begins with `[' and is terminated by
     `]'.  In the simplest case, the characters between the two
     brackets are what this set can match.

     Thus, `[ad]' matches either one `a' or one `d', and `[ad]*'
     matches any string composed of just `a's and `d's (including the
     empty string), from which it follows that `c[ad]*r' matches `cr',
     `car', `cdr', `caddaar', etc.

     You can also include character ranges in a character set, by
     writing the starting and ending characters with a `-' between
     them.  Thus, `[a-z]' matches any lower-case ASCII letter.  Ranges
     may be intermixed freely with individual characters, as in
     `[a-z$%.]', which matches any lower-case ASCII letter or `$', `%'
     or period.

     Note that the usual regexp special characters are not special
     inside a character set.  A completely different set of special
     characters exists inside character sets: `]', `-' and `^'.

     To include a `]' in a character set, you must make it the first
     character.  For example, `[]a]' matches `]' or `a'.  To include a
     `-', write `-' as the first or last character of the set, or put
     it after a range.  Thus, `[]-]' matches both `]' and `-'.

     To include `^' in a set, put it anywhere but at the beginning of
     the set.  (At the beginning, it complements the set--see below.)

     When you use a range in case-insensitive search, you should write
     both ends of the range in upper case, or both in lower case, or
     both should be non-letters.  The behavior of a mixed-case range
     such as `A-z' is somewhat ill-defined, and it may change in future
     Emacs versions.

`[^ ... ]'
     `[^' begins a "complemented character set", which matches any
     character except the ones specified.  Thus, `[^a-z0-9A-Z]' matches
     all characters _except_ ASCII letters and digits.

     `^' is not special in a character set unless it is the first
     character.  The character following the `^' is treated as if it
     were first (in other words, `-' and `]' are not special there).

     A complemented character set can match a newline, unless newline is
     mentioned as one of the characters not to match.  This is in
     contrast to the handling of regexps in programs such as `grep'.

`^'
     is a special character that matches the empty string, but only at
     the beginning of a line in the text being matched.  Otherwise it
     fails to match anything.  Thus, `^foo' matches a `foo' that occurs
     at the beginning of a line.

     For historical compatibility reasons, `^' can be used with this
     meaning only at the beginning of the regular expression, or after
     `\(' or `\|'.

`$'
     is similar to `^' but matches only at the end of a line.  Thus,
     `x+$' matches a string of one `x' or more at the end of a line.

     For historical compatibility reasons, `$' can be used with this
     meaning only at the end of the regular expression, or before `\)'
     or `\|'.

`\'
     has two functions: it quotes the special characters (including
     `\'), and it introduces additional special constructs.

     Because `\' quotes special characters, `\$' is a regular
     expression that matches only `$', and `\[' is a regular expression
     that matches only `[', and so on.

     See the following section for the special constructs that begin
     with `\'.

   Note: for historical compatibility, special characters are treated as
ordinary ones if they are in contexts where their special meanings make
no sense.  For example, `*foo' treats `*' as ordinary since there is no
preceding expression on which the `*' can act.  It is poor practice to
depend on this behavior; it is better to quote the special character
anyway, regardless of where it appears.

   As a `\' is not special inside a character alternative, it can never
remove the special meaning of `-' or `]'.  So you should not quote
these characters when they have no special meaning either.  This would
not clarify anything, since backslashes can legitimately precede these
characters where they _have_ special meaning, as in `[^\]' (`"[^\\]"'
for Lisp string syntax), which matches any single character except a
backslash.


File: emacs,  Node: Regexp Backslash,  Next: Regexp Example,  Prev: Regexps,  Up: Search

19.6 Backslash in Regular Expressions
=====================================

For the most part, `\' followed by any character matches only that
character.  However, there are several exceptions: two-character
sequences starting with `\' that have special meanings.  The second
character in the sequence is always an ordinary character when used on
its own.  Here is a table of `\' constructs.

`\|'
     specifies an alternative.  Two regular expressions A and B with
     `\|' in between form an expression that matches some text if
     either A matches it or B matches it.  It works by trying to match
     A, and if that fails, by trying to match B.

     Thus, `foo\|bar' matches either `foo' or `bar' but no other string.

     `\|' applies to the largest possible surrounding expressions.
     Only a surrounding `\( ... \)' grouping can limit the grouping
     power of `\|'.

     Full backtracking capability exists to handle multiple uses of
     `\|'.

`\( ... \)'
     is a grouping construct that serves three purposes:

       1. To enclose a set of `\|' alternatives for other operations.
          Thus, `\(foo\|bar\)x' matches either `foox' or `barx'.

       2. To enclose a complicated expression for the postfix operators
          `*', `+' and `?' to operate on.  Thus, `ba\(na\)*' matches
          `bananana', etc., with any (zero or more) number of `na'
          strings.

       3. To record a matched substring for future reference.

     This last application is not a consequence of the idea of a
     parenthetical grouping; it is a separate feature that is assigned
     as a second meaning to the same `\( ... \)' construct.  In practice
     there is usually no conflict between the two meanings; when there
     is a conflict, you can use a "shy" group.

`\(?: ... \)'
     specifies a "shy" group that does not record the matched substring;
     you can't refer back to it with `\D'.  This is useful in
     mechanically combining regular expressions, so that you can add
     groups for syntactic purposes without interfering with the
     numbering of the groups that are meant to be referred to.

`\D'
     matches the same text that matched the Dth occurrence of a `\( ...
     \)' construct.  This is called a "back reference".

     After the end of a `\( ... \)' construct, the matcher remembers
     the beginning and end of the text matched by that construct.  Then,
     later on in the regular expression, you can use `\' followed by the
     digit D to mean "match the same text matched the Dth time by the
     `\( ... \)' construct."

     The strings matching the first nine `\( ... \)' constructs
     appearing in a regular expression are assigned numbers 1 through 9
     in the order that the open-parentheses appear in the regular
     expression.  So you can use `\1' through `\9' to refer to the text
     matched by the corresponding `\( ... \)' constructs.

     For example, `\(.*\)\1' matches any newline-free string that is
     composed of two identical halves.  The `\(.*\)' matches the first
     half, which may be anything, but the `\1' that follows must match
     the same exact text.

     If a particular `\( ... \)' construct matches more than once
     (which can easily happen if it is followed by `*'), only the last
     match is recorded.

`\`'
     matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the string
     or buffer (or its accessible portion) being matched against.

`\''
     matches the empty string, but only at the end of the string or
     buffer (or its accessible portion) being matched against.

`\='
     matches the empty string, but only at point.

`\b'
     matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
     word.  Thus, `\bfoo\b' matches any occurrence of `foo' as a
     separate word.  `\bballs?\b' matches `ball' or `balls' as a
     separate word.

     `\b' matches at the beginning or end of the buffer regardless of
     what text appears next to it.

`\B'
     matches the empty string, but _not_ at the beginning or end of a
     word.

`\<'
     matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a word.
     `\<' matches at the beginning of the buffer only if a
     word-constituent character follows.

`\>'
     matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word.  `\>'
     matches at the end of the buffer only if the contents end with a
     word-constituent character.

`\w'
     matches any word-constituent character.  The syntax table
     determines which characters these are.  *Note Syntax::.

`\W'
     matches any character that is not a word-constituent.

`\_<'
     matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a symbol.
     A symbol is a sequence of one or more symbol-constituent
     characters.  A symbol-constituent character is a character whose
     syntax is either `w' or `_'.  `\_<' matches at the beginning of the
     buffer only if a symbol-constituent character follows.

`\_>'
     matches the empty string, but only at the end of a symbol.  `\_>'
     matches at the end of the buffer only if the contents end with a
     symbol-constituent character.

`\sC'
     matches any character whose syntax is C.  Here C is a character
     that designates a particular syntax class: thus, `w' for word
     constituent, `-' or ` ' for whitespace, `.' for ordinary
     punctuation, etc.  *Note Syntax::.

`\SC'
     matches any character whose syntax is not C.

`\cC'
     matches any character that belongs to the category C.  For
     example, `\cc' matches Chinese characters, `\cg' matches Greek
     characters, etc.  For the description of the known categories,
     type `M-x describe-categories <RET>'.

`\CC'
     matches any character that does _not_ belong to category C.

   The constructs that pertain to words and syntax are controlled by the
setting of the syntax table (*note Syntax::).


File: emacs,  Node: Regexp Example,  Next: Search Case,  Prev: Regexp Backslash,  Up: Search

19.7 Regular Expression Example
===============================

Here is an example of a regexp--the regexp that Emacs uses, by default,
to recognize the end of a sentence, not including the following space
(i.e., the variable `sentence-end-base'):


     [.?!][]\"'””)}]*

This contains two parts in succession: a character set matching period,
`?', or `!', and a character set matching close-brackets, quotes, or
parentheses, repeated zero or more times.


File: emacs,  Node: Search Case,  Next: Replace,  Prev: Regexp Example,  Up: Search

19.8 Searching and Case
=======================

Searches in Emacs normally ignore the case of the text they are
searching through, if you specify the text in lower case.  Thus, if you
specify searching for `foo', then `Foo' and `foo' are also considered a
match.  Regexps, and in particular character sets, are included: `[ab]'
would match `a' or `A' or `b' or `B'.

   An upper-case letter anywhere in the incremental search string makes
the search case-sensitive.  Thus, searching for `Foo' does not find
`foo' or `FOO'.  This applies to regular expression search as well as
to string search.  The effect ceases if you delete the upper-case
letter from the search string.

   Typing `M-c' within an incremental search toggles the case
sensitivity of that search.  The effect does not extend beyond the
current incremental search to the next one, but it does override the
effect of adding or removing an upper-case letter in the current search.

   If you set the variable `case-fold-search' to `nil', then all
letters must match exactly, including case.  This is a per-buffer
variable; altering the variable normally affects only the current
buffer, unless you change its default value.  *Note Locals::.  This
variable applies to nonincremental searches also, including those
performed by the replace commands (*note Replace::) and the minibuffer
history matching commands (*note Minibuffer History::).

   Several related variables control case-sensitivity of searching and
matching for specific commands or activities.  For instance,
`tags-case-fold-search' controls case sensitivity for `find-tag'.  To
find these variables, do `M-x apropos-variable <RET> case-fold-search
<RET>'.


File: emacs,  Node: Replace,  Next: Other Repeating Search,  Prev: Search Case,  Up: Search

19.9 Replacement Commands
=========================

Emacs provides several commands for performing search-and-replace
operations.  In addition to the simple `M-x replace-string' command,
there is `M-%' (`query-replace'), which presents each occurrence of the
pattern and asks you whether to replace it.

   The replace commands normally operate on the text from point to the
end of the buffer.  When the mark is active, they operate on the region
instead (*note Mark::).  The basic replace commands replace one "search
string" (or regexp) with one "replacement string".  It is possible to
perform several replacements in parallel, using the command
`expand-region-abbrevs' (*note Expanding Abbrevs::).

* Menu:

* Unconditional Replace::	Replacing all matches for a string.
* Regexp Replace::		Replacing all matches for a regexp.
* Replacement and Case::	How replacements preserve case of letters.
* Query Replace::		How to use querying.


File: emacs,  Node: Unconditional Replace,  Next: Regexp Replace,  Prev: Replace,  Up: Replace

19.9.1 Unconditional Replacement
--------------------------------

`M-x replace-string <RET> STRING <RET> NEWSTRING <RET>'
     Replace every occurrence of STRING with NEWSTRING.

   To replace every instance of `foo' after point with `bar', use the
command `M-x replace-string' with the two arguments `foo' and `bar'.
Replacement happens only in the text after point, so if you want to
cover the whole buffer you must go to the beginning first.  All
occurrences up to the end of the buffer are replaced; to limit
replacement to part of the buffer, activate the region around that
part.  When the region is active, replacement is limited to the region
(*note Mark::).

   When `replace-string' exits, it leaves point at the last occurrence
replaced.  It adds the prior position of point (where the
`replace-string' command was issued) to the mark ring, without
activating the mark; use `C-u C-<SPC>' to move back there.  *Note Mark
Ring::.

   A prefix argument restricts replacement to matches that are
surrounded by word boundaries.  The argument's value doesn't matter.

   *Note Replacement and Case::, for details about case-sensitivity in
replace commands.


File: emacs,  Node: Regexp Replace,  Next: Replacement and Case,  Prev: Unconditional Replace,  Up: Replace

19.9.2 Regexp Replacement
-------------------------

The `M-x replace-string' command replaces exact matches for a single
string.  The similar command `M-x replace-regexp' replaces any match
for a specified pattern.

`M-x replace-regexp <RET> REGEXP <RET> NEWSTRING <RET>'
     Replace every match for REGEXP with NEWSTRING.

   In `replace-regexp', the NEWSTRING need not be constant: it can
refer to all or part of what is matched by the REGEXP.  `\&' in
NEWSTRING stands for the entire match being replaced.  `\D' in
NEWSTRING, where D is a digit, stands for whatever matched the Dth
parenthesized grouping in REGEXP.  (This is called a "back reference.")
`\#' refers to the count of replacements already made in this command,
as a decimal number.  In the first replacement, `\#' stands for `0'; in
the second, for `1'; and so on.  For example,

     M-x replace-regexp <RET> c[ad]+r <RET> \&-safe <RET>

replaces (for example) `cadr' with `cadr-safe' and `cddr' with
`cddr-safe'.

     M-x replace-regexp <RET> \(c[ad]+r\)-safe <RET> \1 <RET>

performs the inverse transformation.  To include a `\' in the text to
replace with, you must enter `\\'.

   If you want to enter part of the replacement string by hand each
time, use `\?' in the replacement string.  Each replacement will ask
you to edit the replacement string in the minibuffer, putting point
where the `\?' was.

   The remainder of this subsection is intended for specialized tasks
and requires knowledge of Lisp.  Most readers can skip it.

   You can use Lisp expressions to calculate parts of the replacement
string.  To do this, write `\,' followed by the expression in the
replacement string.  Each replacement calculates the value of the
expression and converts it to text without quoting (if it's a string,
this means using the string's contents), and uses it in the replacement
string in place of the expression itself.  If the expression is a
symbol, one space in the replacement string after the symbol name goes
with the symbol name, so the value replaces them both.

   Inside such an expression, you can use some special sequences.  `\&'
and `\N' refer here, as usual, to the entire match as a string, and to
a submatch as a string.  N may be multiple digits, and the value of
`\N' is `nil' if subexpression N did not match.  You can also use `\#&'
and `\#N' to refer to those matches as numbers (this is valid when the
match or submatch has the form of a numeral).  `\#' here too stands for
the number of already-completed replacements.

   Repeating our example to exchange `x' and `y', we can thus do it
also this way:

     M-x replace-regexp <RET> \(x\)\|y <RET>
     \,(if \1 "y" "x") <RET>

   For computing replacement strings for `\,', the `format' function is
often useful (*note Formatting Strings: (elisp)Formatting Strings.).
For example, to add consecutively numbered strings like `ABC00042' to
columns 73 to 80 (unless they are already occupied), you can use

     M-x replace-regexp <RET> ^.\{0,72\}$ <RET>
     \,(format "%-72sABC%05d" \& \#) <RET>


File: emacs,  Node: Replacement and Case,  Next: Query Replace,  Prev: Regexp Replace,  Up: Replace

19.9.3 Replace Commands and Case
--------------------------------

If the first argument of a replace command is all lower case, the
command ignores case while searching for occurrences to
replace--provided `case-fold-search' is non-`nil'.  If
`case-fold-search' is set to `nil', case is always significant in all
searches.

   In addition, when the NEWSTRING argument is all or partly lower
case, replacement commands try to preserve the case pattern of each
occurrence.  Thus, the command

     M-x replace-string <RET> foo <RET> bar <RET>

replaces a lower case `foo' with a lower case `bar', an all-caps `FOO'
with `BAR', and a capitalized `Foo' with `Bar'.  (These three
alternatives--lower case, all caps, and capitalized, are the only ones
that `replace-string' can distinguish.)

   If upper-case letters are used in the replacement string, they remain
upper case every time that text is inserted.  If upper-case letters are
used in the first argument, the second argument is always substituted
exactly as given, with no case conversion.  Likewise, if either
`case-replace' or `case-fold-search' is set to `nil', replacement is
done without case conversion.


File: emacs,  Node: Query Replace,  Prev: Replacement and Case,  Up: Replace

19.9.4 Query Replace
--------------------

`M-% STRING <RET> NEWSTRING <RET>'
`M-x query-replace <RET> STRING <RET> NEWSTRING <RET>'
     Replace some occurrences of STRING with NEWSTRING.

`C-M-% REGEXP <RET> NEWSTRING <RET>'
`M-x query-replace-regexp <RET> REGEXP <RET> NEWSTRING <RET>'
     Replace some matches for REGEXP with NEWSTRING.

   If you want to change only some of the occurrences of `foo' to
`bar', not all of them, use `M-%' (`query-replace').  This command
finds occurrences of `foo' one by one, displays each occurrence and
asks you whether to replace it.  Aside from querying, `query-replace'
works just like `replace-string' (*note Unconditional Replace::).  In
particular, it preserves case provided `case-replace' is non-`nil', as
it normally is (*note Replacement and Case::).  A numeric argument
means consider only occurrences that are bounded by word-delimiter
characters.

   `C-M-%' performs regexp search and replace (`query-replace-regexp').
It works like `replace-regexp' except that it queries like
`query-replace'.

   These commands highlight the current match using the face
`query-replace'.  They highlight other matches using `lazy-highlight'
just like incremental search (*note Incremental Search::).  By default,
`query-replace-regexp' will show substituted replacement string for the
current match in the minibuffer.  If you want to keep special sequences
`\&' and `\N' unexpanded, customize `query-replace-show-replacement'
variable.

   The characters you can type when you are shown a match for the string
or regexp are:

`<SPC>'
     to replace the occurrence with NEWSTRING.

`<DEL>'
     to skip to the next occurrence without replacing this one.

`, (Comma)'
     to replace this occurrence and display the result.  You are then
     asked for another input character to say what to do next.  Since
     the replacement has already been made, <DEL> and <SPC> are
     equivalent in this situation; both move to the next occurrence.

     You can type `C-r' at this point (see below) to alter the replaced
     text.  You can also type `C-x u' to undo the replacement; this
     exits the `query-replace', so if you want to do further
     replacement you must use `C-x <ESC> <ESC> <RET>' to restart (*note
     Repetition::).

`<RET>'
     to exit without doing any more replacements.

`. (Period)'
     to replace this occurrence and then exit without searching for more
     occurrences.

`!'
     to replace all remaining occurrences without asking again.

`^'
     to go back to the position of the previous occurrence (or what
     used to be an occurrence), in case you changed it by mistake or
     want to reexamine it.

`C-r'
     to enter a recursive editing level, in case the occurrence needs
     to be edited rather than just replaced with NEWSTRING.  When you
     are done, exit the recursive editing level with `C-M-c' to proceed
     to the next occurrence.  *Note Recursive Edit::.

`C-w'
     to delete the occurrence, and then enter a recursive editing level
     as in `C-r'.  Use the recursive edit to insert text to replace the
     deleted occurrence of STRING.  When done, exit the recursive
     editing level with `C-M-c' to proceed to the next occurrence.

`e'
     to edit the replacement string in the minibuffer.  When you exit
     the minibuffer by typing <RET>, the minibuffer contents replace the
     current occurrence of the pattern.  They also become the new
     replacement string for any further occurrences.

`C-l'
     to redisplay the screen.  Then you must type another character to
     specify what to do with this occurrence.

`C-h'
     to display a message summarizing these options.  Then you must type
     another character to specify what to do with this occurrence.

   Some other characters are aliases for the ones listed above: `y',
`n' and `q' are equivalent to <SPC>, <DEL> and <RET>.

   Aside from this, any other character exits the `query-replace', and
is then reread as part of a key sequence.  Thus, if you type `C-k', it
exits the `query-replace' and then kills to end of line.

   To restart a `query-replace' once it is exited, use `C-x <ESC>
<ESC>', which repeats the `query-replace' because it used the
minibuffer to read its arguments.  *Note C-x ESC ESC: Repetition.

   *Note Operating on Files::, for the Dired `Q' command which performs
query replace on selected files.  See also *Note Transforming File
Names::, for Dired commands to rename, copy, or link files by replacing
regexp matches in file names.


File: emacs,  Node: Other Repeating Search,  Prev: Replace,  Up: Search

19.10 Other Search-and-Loop Commands
====================================

Here are some other commands that find matches for a regular
expression.  They all ignore case in matching, if the pattern contains
no upper-case letters and `case-fold-search' is non-`nil'.  Aside from
`occur' and its variants, all operate on the text from point to the end
of the buffer, or on the region if it is active.

`M-x multi-isearch-buffers'
     Prompt for one or more buffer names, ending with <RET>; then,
     begin a multi-buffer incremental search in those buffers.  (If the
     search fails in one buffer, the next `C-s' tries searching the
     next specified buffer, and so forth.)  With a prefix argument,
     prompt for a regexp and begin a multi-buffer incremental search in
     buffers matching that regexp.

`M-x multi-isearch-buffers-regexp'
     This command is just like `multi-isearch-buffers', except it
     performs an incremental regexp search.

`M-x occur'
     Prompt for a regexp, and display a list showing each line in the
     buffer that contains a match for it.  To limit the search to part
     of the buffer, narrow to that part (*note Narrowing::).  A numeric
     argument N specifies that N lines of context are to be displayed
     before and after each matching line.  Currently, `occur' can not
     correctly handle multiline matches.

     The buffer `*Occur*' containing the output serves as a menu for
     finding the occurrences in their original context.  Click
     `Mouse-2' on an occurrence listed in `*Occur*', or position point
     there and type <RET>; this switches to the buffer that was
     searched and moves point to the original of the chosen occurrence.
     `o' and `C-o' display the match in another window; `C-o' does not
     select it.

     After using `M-x occur', you can use `next-error' to visit the
     occurrences found, one by one.  *Note Compilation Mode::.

`M-s o'
     Run `occur' using the search string of the last incremental string
     search.  You can also run `M-s o' when an incremental search is
     active; this uses the current search string.

`M-x list-matching-lines'
     Synonym for `M-x occur'.

`M-x multi-occur'
     This command is just like `occur', except it is able to search
     through multiple buffers.  It asks you to specify the buffer names
     one by one.

`M-x multi-occur-in-matching-buffers'
     This command is similar to `multi-occur', except the buffers to
     search are specified by a regular expression that matches visited
     file names.  With a prefix argument, it uses the regular
     expression to match buffer names instead.

`M-x how-many'
     Prompt for a regexp, and print the number of matches for it in the
     buffer after point.  If the region is active, this operates on the
     region instead.

`M-x flush-lines'
     Prompt for a regexp, and delete each line that contains a match for
     it, operating on the text after point.  This command deletes the
     current line if it contains a match starting after point.  If the
     region is active, it operates on the region instead; if a line
     partially contained in the region contains a match entirely
     contained in the region, it is deleted.

     If a match is split across lines, `flush-lines' deletes all those
     lines.  It deletes the lines before starting to look for the next
     match; hence, it ignores a match starting on the same line at which
     another match ended.

`M-x keep-lines'
     Prompt for a regexp, and delete each line that _does not_ contain
     a match for it, operating on the text after point.  If point is
     not at the beginning of a line, this command always keeps the
     current line.  If the region is active, the command operates on
     the region instead; it never deletes lines that are only partially
     contained in the region (a newline that ends a line counts as part
     of that line).

     If a match is split across lines, this command keeps all those
     lines.


File: emacs,  Node: Fixit,  Next: Keyboard Macros,  Prev: Search,  Up: Top

20 Commands for Fixing Typos
****************************

In this chapter we describe the commands that are especially useful
when you catch a mistake in your text after you have made it, or change
your mind while composing text on the fly.

   The most fundamental command for correcting erroneous editing is the
undo command `C-/' (which is also bound to `C-x u' and `C-_').  This
undoes a single command, or a part of a command (as in the case of
`query-replace'), or several consecutive self-inserting characters.
Consecutive repetitions of `C-/' undo earlier and earlier changes, back
to the limit of the undo information available.

   Aside from the commands described here, you can erase text using
deletion commands such as <DEL> (`delete-backward-char').  These were
described earlier in this manual.  *Note Erasing::.

* Menu:

* Undo::        The Undo commands.
* Transpose::   Exchanging two characters, words, lines, lists...
* Fixing Case:: Correcting case of last word entered.
* Spelling::    Apply spelling checker to a word, or a whole file.


File: emacs,  Node: Undo,  Next: Transpose,  Up: Fixit

20.1 Undo
=========

The "undo" command reverses recent changes in the buffer's text.  Each
buffer records changes individually, and the undo command always
applies to the current buffer.  You can undo all the changes in a
buffer for as far as back its records go.  Usually, each editing
command makes a separate entry in the undo records, but some commands
such as `query-replace' divide their changes into multiple entries for
flexibility in undoing.  Consecutive character insertion commands are
usually grouped together into a single undo record, to make undoing
less tedious.

`C-/'
`C-x u'
`C-_'
     Undo one entry in the current buffer's undo records (`undo').

   To begin to undo, type `C-/' (or its aliases, `C-_' or `C-x u')(1).
This undoes the most recent change in the buffer, and moves point back
to where it was before that change.

   Consecutive repetitions of `C-/' (or its aliases) undo earlier and
earlier changes in the current buffer.  If all the recorded changes
have already been undone, the undo command signals an error.

   Any command other than an undo command breaks the sequence of undo
commands.  Starting from that moment, the entire sequence of undo
commands that you have just performed are themselves placed into the
undo record, as a single set of changes.  Therefore, to re-apply
changes you have undone, type `C-f' or any other command that
harmlessly breaks the sequence of undoing; then type `C-/' to undo the
undo command.

   On the other hand, if you want to resume undoing, without redoing
previous undo commands, use `M-x undo-only'.  This is like `undo', but
will not redo changes you have just undone.

   If you notice that a buffer has been modified accidentally, the
easiest way to recover is to type `C-/' repeatedly until the stars
disappear from the front of the mode line (*note Mode Line::).
Whenever an undo command makes the stars disappear from the mode line,
it means that the buffer contents are the same as they were when the
file was last read in or saved.  If you do not remember whether you
changed the buffer deliberately, type `C-/' once.  When you see the
last change you made undone, you will see whether it was an intentional
change.  If it was an accident, leave it undone.  If it was deliberate,
redo the change as described above.

   When there is an active region, any use of `undo' performs
"selective undo": it undoes the most recent change within the region,
instead of the entire buffer.  However, when Transient Mark mode is off
(*note Persistent Mark::), `C-/' always operates on the entire buffer,
ignoring the region.  In this case, you can perform selective undo by
supplying a prefix argument to the `undo' command: `C-u C-/'.  To undo
further changes in the same region, repeat the `undo' command (no
prefix argument is needed).

   Some specialized buffers do not make undo records.  Buffers whose
names start with spaces never do; these buffers are used internally by
Emacs to hold text that users don't normally look at or edit.

   When the undo records for a buffer becomes too large, Emacs discards
the oldest undo records from time to time (during "garbage
collection").  You can specify how much undo records to keep by setting
the variables `undo-limit', `undo-strong-limit', and
`undo-outer-limit'.  Their values are expressed in bytes.

   The variable `undo-limit' sets a soft limit: Emacs keeps undo data
for enough commands to reach this size, and perhaps exceed it, but does
not keep data for any earlier commands beyond that.  Its default value
is 80000.  The variable `undo-strong-limit' sets a stricter limit: any
previous command (though not the most recent one) that pushes the size
past this amount is forgotten.  The default value of
`undo-strong-limit' is 120000.

   Regardless of the values of those variables, the most recent change
is never discarded unless it gets bigger than `undo-outer-limit'
(normally 12,000,000).  At that point, Emacs discards the undo data and
warns you about it.  This is the only situation in which you cannot
undo the last command.  If this happens, you can increase the value of
`undo-outer-limit' to make it even less likely to happen in the future.
But if you didn't expect the command to create such large undo data,
then it is probably a bug and you should report it.  *Note Reporting
Bugs: Bugs.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Aside from `C-/', the `undo' command is also bound to `C-x u'
because that is more straightforward for beginners to remember: `u'
stands for "undo".  It is also bound to `C-_' because typing `C-/' on
some text-only terminals actually enters `C-_'.


File: emacs,  Node: Transpose,  Next: Fixing Case,  Prev: Undo,  Up: Fixit

20.2 Transposing Text
=====================

`C-t'
     Transpose two characters (`transpose-chars').

`M-t'
     Transpose two words (`transpose-words').

`C-M-t'
     Transpose two balanced expressions (`transpose-sexps').

`C-x C-t'
     Transpose two lines (`transpose-lines').

   The common error of transposing two characters can be fixed, when
they are adjacent, with the `C-t' command (`transpose-chars').
Normally, `C-t' transposes the two characters on either side of point.
When given at the end of a line, rather than transposing the last
character of the line with the newline, which would be useless, `C-t'
transposes the last two characters on the line.  So, if you catch your
transposition error right away, you can fix it with just a `C-t'.  If
you don't catch it so fast, you must move the cursor back between the
two transposed characters before you type `C-t'.  If you transposed a
space with the last character of the word before it, the word motion
commands are a good way of getting there.  Otherwise, a reverse search
(`C-r') is often the best way.  *Note Search::.

   `M-t' transposes the word before point with the word after point
(`transpose-words').  It moves point forward over a word, dragging the
word preceding or containing point forward as well.  The punctuation
characters between the words do not move.  For example, `FOO, BAR'
transposes into `BAR, FOO' rather than `BAR FOO,'.

   `C-M-t' (`transpose-sexps') is a similar command for transposing two
expressions (*note Expressions::), and `C-x C-t' (`transpose-lines')
exchanges lines.  They work like `M-t' except as regards what units of
text they transpose.

   A numeric argument to a transpose command serves as a repeat count:
it tells the transpose command to move the character (word, expression,
line) before or containing point across several other characters (words,
expressions, lines).  For example, `C-u 3 C-t' moves the character
before point forward across three other characters.  It would change
`f-!-oobar' into `oobf-!-ar'.  This is equivalent to repeating `C-t'
three times.  `C-u - 4 M-t' moves the word before point backward across
four words.  `C-u - C-M-t' would cancel the effect of plain `C-M-t'.

   A numeric argument of zero is assigned a special meaning (because
otherwise a command with a repeat count of zero would do nothing): to
transpose the character (word, expression, line) ending after point
with the one ending after the mark.


File: emacs,  Node: Fixing Case,  Next: Spelling,  Prev: Transpose,  Up: Fixit

20.3 Case Conversion
====================

`M-- M-l'
     Convert last word to lower case.  Note `Meta--' is Meta-minus.

`M-- M-u'
     Convert last word to all upper case.

`M-- M-c'
     Convert last word to lower case with capital initial.

   A very common error is to type words in the wrong case.  Because of
this, the word case-conversion commands `M-l', `M-u' and `M-c' have a
special feature when used with a negative argument: they do not move the
cursor.  As soon as you see you have mistyped the last word, you can
simply case-convert it and go on typing.  *Note Case::.


File: emacs,  Node: Spelling,  Prev: Fixing Case,  Up: Fixit

20.4 Checking and Correcting Spelling
=====================================

This section describes the commands to check the spelling of a single
word or of a portion of a buffer.  These commands only work if the
spelling checker program Aspell, Ispell or Hunspell is installed.
Aspell, Ispell or Hunspell are not part of Emacs, but one or the other
is usually installed in GNU/Linux and other free operating systems.
*Note Aspell: (aspell)Top.

`M-$'
     Check and correct spelling of the active region or the word at
     point (`ispell-word').

`M-x ispell'
     Check and correct spelling in the active region or the entire
     buffer.

`M-x ispell-buffer'
     Check and correct spelling in the buffer.

`M-x ispell-region'
     Check and correct spelling in the region.

`M-x ispell-message'
     Check and correct spelling in a draft mail message, excluding cited
     material.

`M-x ispell-change-dictionary <RET> DICT <RET>'
     Restart the Aspell/Ispell/Hunspell process, using DICT as the
     dictionary.

`M-x ispell-kill-ispell'
     Kill the Aspell/Ispell/Hunspell subprocess.

`M-<TAB>'
`<ESC> <TAB>'
     Complete the word before point based on the spelling dictionary
     (`ispell-complete-word').

`M-x flyspell-mode'
     Enable Flyspell mode, which highlights all misspelled words.

`M-x flyspell-prog-mode'
     Enable Flyspell mode for comments and strings only.

   To check the spelling of the word around or before point, and
optionally correct it as well, type `M-$' (`ispell-word').  If a region
is active, `M-$' checks the spelling of all words within the region.
*Note Mark::.  (When Transient Mark mode is off, `M-$' always acts on
the word around or before point, ignoring the region.  *Note Persistent
Mark::.)

   Similarly, the command `M-x ispell' performs spell-checking in the
region if one is active, or in the entire buffer otherwise.  The
commands `M-x ispell-buffer' and `M-x ispell-region' explicitly perform
spell-checking on the entire buffer or the region respectively.  To
check spelling in an email message you are writing, use `M-x
ispell-message'; that command checks the whole buffer, except for
material that is indented or appears to be cited from other messages.
*Note Sending Mail::.

   When one of these commands encounters what appears to be an
incorrect word, it asks you what to do.  It usually displays a list of
numbered "near-misses"--words that are close to the incorrect word.
Then you must type a single-character response.  Here are the valid
responses:

`DIGIT'
     Replace the word, just this time, with one of the displayed
     near-misses.  Each near-miss is listed with a digit; type that
     digit to select it.

`<SPC>'
     Skip this word--continue to consider it incorrect, but don't
     change it here.

`r NEW <RET>'
     Replace the word, just this time, with NEW.  (The replacement
     string will be rescanned for more spelling errors.)

`R NEW <RET>'
     Replace the word with NEW, and do a `query-replace' so you can
     replace it elsewhere in the buffer if you wish.  (The replacements
     will be rescanned for more spelling errors.)

`a'
     Accept the incorrect word--treat it as correct, but only in this
     editing session.

`A'
     Accept the incorrect word--treat it as correct, but only in this
     editing session and for this buffer.

`i'
     Insert this word in your private dictionary file so that Aspell or
     Ispell or Hunspell will consider it correct from now on, even in
     future sessions.

`m'
     Like `i', but you can also specify dictionary completion
     information.

`u'
     Insert the lower-case version of this word in your private
     dictionary file.

`l WORD <RET>'
     Look in the dictionary for words that match WORD.  These words
     become the new list of "near-misses"; you can select one of them as
     the replacement by typing a digit.  You can use `*' in WORD as a
     wildcard.

`C-g'
`X'
     Quit interactive spell checking, leaving point at the word that was
     being checked.  You can restart checking again afterward with `C-u
     M-$'.

`x'
     Quit interactive spell checking and move point back to where it was
     when you started spell checking.

`q'
     Quit interactive spell checking and kill the Aspell/Ispell/Hunspell
     subprocess.

`?'
     Show the list of options.

   In Text mode and related modes, the command `M-<TAB>'
(`ispell-complete-word') shows a list of completions based on spelling
correction.  Insert the beginning of a word, and then type `M-<TAB>';
the command displays a completion list window.  (If your window manager
intercepts `M-<TAB>', type `<ESC> <TAB>' or `C-M-i'.)  To choose one of
the completions listed, click `Mouse-2' or `Mouse-1' fast on it, or
move the cursor there in the completions window and type <RET>.  *Note
Text Mode::.

   Once started, the Aspell or Ispell or Hunspell subprocess continues
to run, waiting for something to do, so that subsequent spell checking
commands complete more quickly.  If you want to get rid of the process,
use `M-x ispell-kill-ispell'.  This is not usually necessary, since the
process uses no time except when you do spelling correction.

   Ispell, Aspell and Hunspell use two dictionaries together for spell
checking: the standard dictionary and your private dictionary.  The
standard dictionary is specified by `ispell-local-dictionary' or, if
`nil', by `ispell-dictionary'.  If both are `nil' the default
dictionary is selected.  The command `M-x ispell-change-dictionary'
sets the standard dictionary for the buffer and then restarts the
subprocess, so that it will use a different standard dictionary.
Personal dictionary is specified by `ispell-personal-dictionary'.  If
`nil', default value is used.

   Set variable `ispell-dictionary' to select a specific default
dictionary for all your documents. Set variable
`ispell-local-dictionary' in the local variables section to select a
specific dictionary for a given document.

   A separate dictionary is used for word completion.  The variable
`ispell-complete-word-dict' specifies the file name of this dictionary.
The completion dictionary must be different because it cannot use root
and affix information.  For some languages, there is a spell checking
dictionary but no word completion dictionary.

   Flyspell mode is a fully-automatic way to check spelling as you edit
in Emacs.  It operates by checking words as you change or insert them.
When it finds a word that it does not recognize, it highlights that
word.  This does not interfere with your editing, but when you see the
highlighted word, you can move to it and fix it.  Type `M-x
flyspell-mode' to enable or disable this mode in the current buffer.  To
enable `flyspell-mode' in all text mode buffers, add `turn-on-flyspell'
to `text-mode-hook'.

   When Flyspell mode highlights a word as misspelled, you can click on
it with `Mouse-2' to display a menu of possible corrections and
actions.  You can also correct the word by editing it manually in any
way you like.

   Flyspell Prog mode works just like ordinary Flyspell mode, except
that it only checks words in comments and string constants.  This
feature is useful for editing programs.  Type `M-x flyspell-prog-mode'
to enable or disable this mode in the current buffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Keyboard Macros,  Next: Files,  Prev: Fixit,  Up: Top

21 Keyboard Macros
******************

In this chapter we describe how to record a sequence of editing
commands so you can repeat it conveniently later.

   A "keyboard macro" is a command defined by an Emacs user to stand for
another sequence of keys.  For example, if you discover that you are
about to type `C-n M-d C-d' forty times, you can speed your work by
defining a keyboard macro to do `C-n M-d C-d', and then executing it 39
more times.

   You define a keyboard macro by executing and recording the commands
which are its definition.  Put differently, as you define a keyboard
macro, the definition is being executed for the first time.  This way,
you can see the effects of your commands, so that you don't have to
figure them out in your head.  When you close the definition, the
keyboard macro is defined and also has been, in effect, executed once.
You can then do the whole thing over again by invoking the macro.

   Keyboard macros differ from ordinary Emacs commands in that they are
written in the Emacs command language rather than in Lisp.  This makes
it easier for the novice to write them, and makes them more convenient
as temporary hacks.  However, the Emacs command language is not powerful
enough as a programming language to be useful for writing anything
intelligent or general.  For such things, Lisp must be used.

* Menu:

* Basic Keyboard Macro::     Defining and running keyboard macros.
* Keyboard Macro Ring::      Where previous keyboard macros are saved.
* Keyboard Macro Counter::   Inserting incrementing numbers in macros.
* Keyboard Macro Query::     Making keyboard macros do different things each time.
* Save Keyboard Macro::      Giving keyboard macros names; saving them in files.
* Edit Keyboard Macro::      Editing keyboard macros.
* Keyboard Macro Step-Edit:: Interactively executing and editing a keyboard
                               macro.


File: emacs,  Node: Basic Keyboard Macro,  Next: Keyboard Macro Ring,  Up: Keyboard Macros

21.1 Basic Use
==============

`<F3>'
     Start defining a keyboard macro
     (`kmacro-start-macro-or-insert-counter').

`<F4>'
     If a keyboard macro is being defined, end the definition;
     otherwise, execute the most recent keyboard macro
     (`kmacro-end-or-call-macro').

`C-u <F3>'
     Re-execute last keyboard macro, then append keys to its definition.

`C-u C-u <F3>'
     Append keys to the last keyboard macro without re-executing it.

`C-x C-k r'
     Run the last keyboard macro on each line that begins in the region
     (`apply-macro-to-region-lines').

   To start defining a keyboard macro, type <F3>.  From then on, your
keys continue to be executed, but also become part of the definition of
the macro.  `Def' appears in the mode line to remind you of what is
going on.  When you are finished, type <F4>
(`kmacro-end-or-call-macro') to terminate the definition.  For example,

     <F3> M-f foo <F4>

defines a macro to move forward a word and then insert `foo'.  Note
that <F3> and <F4> do not become part of the macro.

   After defining the macro, you can call it with <F4>.  For the above
example, this has the same effect as typing `M-f foo' again.  (Note the
two roles of the <F4> command: it ends the macro if you are in the
process of defining one, or calls the last macro otherwise.)  You can
also supply <F4> with a numeric prefix argument `n', which means to
invoke the macro `n' times.  An argument of zero repeats the macro
indefinitely, until it gets an error or you type `C-g' (or, on MS-DOS,
`C-<BREAK>').

   The above example demonstrates a handy trick that you can employ
with keyboard macros: if you wish to repeat an operation at regularly
spaced places in the text, include a motion command as part of the
macro.  In this case, repeating the macro inserts the string `foo'
after each successive word.

   After terminating the definition of a keyboard macro, you can append
more keystrokes to its definition by typing `C-u <F3>'.  This is
equivalent to plain <F3> followed by retyping the whole definition so
far.  As a consequence, it re-executes the macro as previously defined.
If you change the variable `kmacro-execute-before-append' to `nil',
the existing macro will not be re-executed before appending to it (the
default is `t').  You can also add to the end of the definition of the
last keyboard macro without re-executing it by typing `C-u C-u <F3>'.

   When a command reads an argument with the minibuffer, your
minibuffer input becomes part of the macro along with the command.  So
when you replay the macro, the command gets the same argument as when
you entered the macro.  For example,

     <F3> C-a C-k C-x b foo <RET> C-y C-x b <RET> <F4>

defines a macro that kills the current line, yanks it into the buffer
`foo', then returns to the original buffer.

   Most keyboard commands work as usual in a keyboard macro definition,
with some exceptions.  Typing `C-g' (`keyboard-quit') quits the
keyboard macro definition.  Typing `C-M-c' (`exit-recursive-edit') can
be unreliable: it works as you'd expect if exiting a recursive edit
that started within the macro, but if it exits a recursive edit that
started before you invoked the keyboard macro, it also necessarily
exits the keyboard macro too.  Mouse events are also unreliable, even
though you can use them in a keyboard macro: when the macro replays the
mouse event, it uses the original mouse position of that event, the
position that the mouse had while you were defining the macro.  The
effect of this may be hard to predict.

   The command `C-x C-k r' (`apply-macro-to-region-lines') repeats the
last defined keyboard macro on each line that begins in the region.  It
does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of the line
and then executing the macro.

   In addition to the <F3> and <F4> commands described above, Emacs
also supports an older set of keybindings for defining and executing
keyboard macros.  To begin a macro definition, type `C-x ('
(`kmacro-start-macro'); as with <F3>, a prefix argument appends this
definition to the last keyboard macro.  To end a macro definition, type
`C-x )' (`kmacro-end-macro').  To execute the most recent macro, type
`C-x e' (`kmacro-end-and-call-macro').  If you enter `C-x e' while
defining a macro, the macro is terminated and executed immediately.
Immediately after typing `C-x e', you can type <e> repeatedly to
immediately repeat the macro one or more times.  You can also give `C-x
e' a repeat argument, just like <F4>.

   `C-x )' can be given a repeat count as an argument.  This means to
repeat the macro right after defining it.  The macro definition itself
counts as the first repetition, since it is executed as you define it,
so `C-u 4 C-x )' executes the macro immediately 3 additional times.


File: emacs,  Node: Keyboard Macro Ring,  Next: Keyboard Macro Counter,  Prev: Basic Keyboard Macro,  Up: Keyboard Macros

21.2 The Keyboard Macro Ring
============================

All defined keyboard macros are recorded in the "keyboard macro ring".
There is only one keyboard macro ring, shared by all buffers.

`C-x C-k C-k'
     Execute the keyboard macro at the head of the ring
     (`kmacro-end-or-call-macro-repeat').

`C-x C-k C-n'
     Rotate the keyboard macro ring to the next macro (defined earlier)
     (`kmacro-cycle-ring-next').

`C-x C-k C-p'
     Rotate the keyboard macro ring to the previous macro (defined
     later) (`kmacro-cycle-ring-previous').

   All commands which operate on the keyboard macro ring use the same
`C-x C-k' prefix.  Most of these commands can be executed and repeated
immediately after each other without repeating the `C-x C-k' prefix.
For example,

     C-x C-k C-p C-p C-k C-k C-k C-n C-n C-k C-p C-k C-d

will rotate the keyboard macro ring to the "second previous" macro,
execute the resulting head macro three times, rotate back to the
original head macro, execute that once, rotate to the "previous" macro,
execute that, and finally delete it from the macro ring.

   The command `C-x C-k C-k' (`kmacro-end-or-call-macro-repeat')
executes the keyboard macro at the head of the macro ring.  You can
repeat the macro immediately by typing another `C-k', or you can rotate
the macro ring immediately by typing `C-n' or `C-p'.

   When a keyboard macro is being defined, `C-x C-k C-k' behaves like
<F4> except that, immediately afterward, you can use most key bindings
of this section without the `C-x C-k' prefix.  For instance, another
`C-k' will re-execute the macro.

   The commands `C-x C-k C-n' (`kmacro-cycle-ring-next') and `C-x C-k
C-p' (`kmacro-cycle-ring-previous') rotate the macro ring, bringing the
next or previous keyboard macro to the head of the macro ring.  The
definition of the new head macro is displayed in the echo area.  You
can continue to rotate the macro ring immediately by repeating just
`C-n' and `C-p' until the desired macro is at the head of the ring.  To
execute the new macro ring head immediately, just type `C-k'.

   Note that Emacs treats the head of the macro ring as the "last
defined keyboard macro."  For instance, <F4> will execute that macro,
and `C-x C-k n' will give it a name.

   The maximum number of macros stored in the keyboard macro ring is
determined by the customizable variable `kmacro-ring-max'.


File: emacs,  Node: Keyboard Macro Counter,  Next: Keyboard Macro Query,  Prev: Keyboard Macro Ring,  Up: Keyboard Macros

21.3 The Keyboard Macro Counter
===============================

Each keyboard macro has an associated counter, which is initialized to
0 when you start defining the macro.  This counter allows you to insert
a number into the buffer that depends on the number of times the macro
has been called.  The counter is incremented each time its value is
inserted into the buffer.

`<F3>'
     In a keyboard macro definition, insert the keyboard macro counter
     value in the buffer (`kmacro-start-macro-or-insert-counter').

`C-x C-k C-i'
     Insert the keyboard macro counter value in the buffer
     (`kmacro-insert-counter').

`C-x C-k C-c'
     Set the keyboard macro counter (`kmacro-set-counter').

`C-x C-k C-a'
     Add the prefix arg to the keyboard macro counter
     (`kmacro-add-counter').

`C-x C-k C-f'
     Specify the format for inserting the keyboard macro counter
     (`kmacro-set-format').

   When you are defining a keyboard macro, the command <F3>
(`kmacro-start-macro-or-insert-counter') inserts the current value of
the keyboard macro's counter into the buffer, and increments the
counter by 1.  (If you are not defining a macro, <F3> begins a macro
definition instead.  *Note Basic Keyboard Macro::.)  You can use a
numeric prefix argument to specify a different increment.  If you just
specify a `C-u' prefix, that is the same as an increment of zero: it
inserts the current counter value without changing it.

   As an example, let us show how the keyboard macro counter can be
used to build a numbered list.  Consider the following key sequence:

     <F3> C-a <F3> . <SPC> <F4>

As part of this keyboard macro definition, the string `0. ' was
inserted into the beginning of the current line.  If you now move
somewhere else in the buffer and type <F4> to invoke the macro, the
string `1. ' is inserted at the beginning of that line.  Subsequent
invocations insert `2. ', `3. ', and so forth.

   The command `C-x C-k C-i' (`kmacro-insert-counter') does the same
thing as <F3>, but it can be used outside a keyboard macro definition.
When no keyboard macro is being defined or executed, it inserts and
increments the counter of the macro at the head of the keyboard macro
ring.

   The command `C-x C-k C-c' (`kmacro-set-counter') sets the current
macro counter to the value of the numeric argument.  If you use it
inside the macro, it operates on each repetition of the macro.  If you
specify just `C-u' as the prefix, while executing the macro, that
resets the counter to the value it had at the beginning of the current
repetition of the macro (undoing any increments so far in this
repetition).

   The command `C-x C-k C-a' (`kmacro-add-counter') adds the prefix
argument to the current macro counter.  With just `C-u' as argument, it
resets the counter to the last value inserted by any keyboard macro.
(Normally, when you use this, the last insertion will be in the same
macro and it will be the same counter.)

   The command `C-x C-k C-f' (`kmacro-set-format') prompts for the
format to use when inserting the macro counter.  The default format is
`%d', which means to insert the number in decimal without any padding.
You can exit with empty minibuffer to reset the format to this default.
You can specify any format string that the `format' function accepts
and that makes sense with a single integer extra argument (*note
Formatting Strings: (elisp)Formatting Strings.).  Do not put the format
string inside double quotes when you insert it in the minibuffer.

   If you use this command while no keyboard macro is being defined or
executed, the new format affects all subsequent macro definitions.
Existing macros continue to use the format in effect when they were
defined.  If you set the format while defining a keyboard macro, this
affects the macro being defined from that point on, but it does not
affect subsequent macros.  Execution of the macro will, at each step,
use the format in effect at that step during its definition.  Changes
to the macro format during execution of a macro, like the corresponding
changes during its definition, have no effect on subsequent macros.

   The format set by `C-x C-k C-f' does not affect insertion of numbers
stored in registers.

   If you use a register as a counter, incrementing it on each
repetition of the macro, that accomplishes the same thing as a keyboard
macro counter.  *Note RegNumbers::.  For most purposes, it is simpler
to use a keyboard macro counter.


File: emacs,  Node: Keyboard Macro Query,  Next: Save Keyboard Macro,  Prev: Keyboard Macro Counter,  Up: Keyboard Macros

21.4 Executing Macros with Variations
=====================================

In a keyboard macro, you can create an effect similar to that of
`query-replace', in that the macro asks you each time around whether to
make a change.

`C-x q'
     When this point is reached during macro execution, ask for
     confirmation (`kbd-macro-query').

   While defining the macro, type `C-x q' at the point where you want
the query to occur.  During macro definition, the `C-x q' does nothing,
but when you run the macro later, `C-x q' asks you interactively
whether to continue.

   The valid responses when `C-x q' asks are:

<SPC> (or `y')
     Continue executing the keyboard macro.

<DEL> (or `n')
     Skip the remainder of this repetition of the macro, and start right
     away with the next repetition.

<RET> (or `q')
     Skip the remainder of this repetition and cancel further
     repetitions.

`C-r'
     Enter a recursive editing level, in which you can perform editing
     which is not part of the macro.  When you exit the recursive edit
     using `C-M-c', you are asked again how to continue with the
     keyboard macro.  If you type a <SPC> at this time, the rest of the
     macro definition is executed.  It is up to you to leave point and
     the text in a state such that the rest of the macro will do what
     you want.

   `C-u C-x q', which is `C-x q' with a numeric argument, performs a
completely different function.  It enters a recursive edit reading
input from the keyboard, both when you type it during the definition of
the macro, and when it is executed from the macro.  During definition,
the editing you do inside the recursive edit does not become part of
the macro.  During macro execution, the recursive edit gives you a
chance to do some particularized editing on each repetition.  *Note
Recursive Edit::.


File: emacs,  Node: Save Keyboard Macro,  Next: Edit Keyboard Macro,  Prev: Keyboard Macro Query,  Up: Keyboard Macros

21.5 Naming and Saving Keyboard Macros
======================================

`C-x C-k n'
     Give a command name (for the duration of the Emacs session) to the
     most recently defined keyboard macro (`kmacro-name-last-macro').

`C-x C-k b'
     Bind the most recently defined keyboard macro to a key sequence
     (for the duration of the session) (`kmacro-bind-to-key').

`M-x insert-kbd-macro'
     Insert in the buffer a keyboard macro's definition, as Lisp code.

   If you wish to save a keyboard macro for later use, you can give it
a name using `C-x C-k n' (`kmacro-name-last-macro').  This reads a name
as an argument using the minibuffer and defines that name to execute
the last keyboard macro, in its current form.  (If you later add to the
definition of this macro, that does not alter the name's definition as
a macro.)  The macro name is a Lisp symbol, and defining it in this way
makes it a valid command name for calling with `M-x' or for binding a
key to with `global-set-key' (*note Keymaps::).  If you specify a name
that has a prior definition other than a keyboard macro, an error
message is shown and nothing is changed.

   You can also bind the last keyboard macro (in its current form) to a
key, using `C-x C-k b' (`kmacro-bind-to-key') followed by the key
sequence you want to bind.  You can bind to any key sequence in the
global keymap, but since most key sequences already have other
bindings, you should select the key sequence carefully.  If you try to
bind to a key sequence with an existing binding (in any keymap), this
command asks you for confirmation before replacing the existing binding.

   To avoid problems caused by overriding existing bindings, the key
sequences `C-x C-k 0' through `C-x C-k 9' and `C-x C-k A' through `C-x
C-k Z' are reserved for your own keyboard macro bindings.  In fact, to
bind to one of these key sequences, you only need to type the digit or
letter rather than the whole key sequences.  For example,

     C-x C-k b 4

will bind the last keyboard macro to the key sequence `C-x C-k 4'.

   Once a macro has a command name, you can save its definition in a
file.  Then it can be used in another editing session.  First, visit
the file you want to save the definition in.  Then use this command:

     M-x insert-kbd-macro <RET> MACRONAME <RET>

This inserts some Lisp code that, when executed later, will define the
same macro with the same definition it has now.  (You need not
understand Lisp code to do this, because `insert-kbd-macro' writes the
Lisp code for you.)  Then save the file.  You can load the file later
with `load-file' (*note Lisp Libraries::).  If the file you save in is
your init file `~/.emacs' (*note Init File::) then the macro will be
defined each time you run Emacs.

   If you give `insert-kbd-macro' a numeric argument, it makes
additional Lisp code to record the keys (if any) that you have bound to
MACRONAME, so that the macro will be reassigned the same keys when you
load the file.


File: emacs,  Node: Edit Keyboard Macro,  Next: Keyboard Macro Step-Edit,  Prev: Save Keyboard Macro,  Up: Keyboard Macros

21.6 Editing a Keyboard Macro
=============================

`C-x C-k C-e'
     Edit the last defined keyboard macro (`kmacro-edit-macro').

`C-x C-k e NAME <RET>'
     Edit a previously defined keyboard macro NAME (`edit-kbd-macro').

`C-x C-k l'
     Edit the last 300 keystrokes as a keyboard macro
     (`kmacro-edit-lossage').

   You can edit the last keyboard macro by typing `C-x C-k C-e' or `C-x
C-k RET' (`kmacro-edit-macro').  This formats the macro definition in a
buffer and enters a specialized major mode for editing it.  Type `C-h
m' once in that buffer to display details of how to edit the macro.
When you are finished editing, type `C-c C-c'.

   You can edit a named keyboard macro or a macro bound to a key by
typing `C-x C-k e' (`edit-kbd-macro').  Follow that with the keyboard
input that you would use to invoke the macro--`C-x e' or `M-x NAME' or
some other key sequence.

   You can edit the last 300 keystrokes as a macro by typing `C-x C-k
l' (`kmacro-edit-lossage').


File: emacs,  Node: Keyboard Macro Step-Edit,  Prev: Edit Keyboard Macro,  Up: Keyboard Macros

21.7 Stepwise Editing a Keyboard Macro
======================================

You can interactively replay and edit the last keyboard macro, one
command at a time, by typing `C-x C-k SPC' (`kmacro-step-edit-macro').
Unless you quit the macro using `q' or `C-g', the edited macro replaces
the last macro on the macro ring.

   This macro editing feature shows the last macro in the minibuffer
together with the first (or next) command to be executed, and prompts
you for an action.  You can enter `?' to get a summary of your options.
These actions are available:

   * `SPC' and `y' execute the current command, and advance to the next
     command in the keyboard macro.

   * `n', `d', and `DEL' skip and delete the current command.

   * `f' skips the current command in this execution of the keyboard
     macro, but doesn't delete it from the macro.

   * `<TAB>' executes the current command, as well as all similar
     commands immediately following the current command; for example,
     <TAB> may be used to insert a sequence of characters
     (corresponding to a sequence of `self-insert-command' commands).

   * `c' continues execution (without further editing) until the end of
     the keyboard macro.  If execution terminates normally, the edited
     macro replaces the original keyboard macro.

   * `C-k' skips and deletes the rest of the keyboard macro, terminates
     step-editing, and replaces the original keyboard macro with the
     edited macro.

   * `q' and `C-g' cancels the step-editing of the keyboard macro;
     discarding any changes made to the keyboard macro.

   * `i KEY... C-j' reads and executes a series of key sequences (not
     including the final `C-j'), and inserts them before the current
     command in the keyboard macro, without advancing over the current
     command.

   * `I KEY...' reads one key sequence, executes it, and inserts it
     before the current command in the keyboard macro, without advancing
     over the current command.

   * `r KEY... C-j' reads and executes a series of key sequences (not
     including the final `C-j'), and replaces the current command in
     the keyboard macro with them, advancing over the inserted key
     sequences.

   * `R KEY...' reads one key sequence, executes it, and replaces the
     current command in the keyboard macro with that key sequence,
     advancing over the inserted key sequence.

   * `a KEY... C-j' executes the current command, then reads and
     executes a series of key sequences (not including the final
     `C-j'), and inserts them after the current command in the keyboard
     macro; it then advances over the current command and the inserted
     key sequences.

   * `A KEY... C-j' executes the rest of the commands in the keyboard
     macro, then reads and executes a series of key sequences (not
     including the final `C-j'), and appends them at the end of the
     keyboard macro; it then terminates the step-editing and replaces
     the original keyboard macro with the edited macro.


File: emacs,  Node: Files,  Next: Buffers,  Prev: Keyboard Macros,  Up: Top

22 File Handling
****************

The operating system stores data permanently in named "files", so most
of the text you edit with Emacs comes from a file and is ultimately
stored in a file.

   To edit a file, you must tell Emacs to read the file and prepare a
buffer containing a copy of the file's text.  This is called "visiting"
the file.  Editing commands apply directly to text in the buffer; that
is, to the copy inside Emacs.  Your changes appear in the file itself
only when you "save" the buffer back into the file.

   In addition to visiting and saving files, Emacs can delete, copy,
rename, and append to files, keep multiple versions of them, and operate
on file directories.

* Menu:

* File Names::          How to type and edit file-name arguments.
* Visiting::            Visiting a file prepares Emacs to edit the file.
* Saving::              Saving makes your changes permanent.
* Reverting::           Reverting cancels all the changes not saved.

* Autorevert::          Auto Reverting non-file buffers.
* Auto Save::           Auto Save periodically protects against loss of data.
* File Aliases::        Handling multiple names for one file.
* Directories::         Creating, deleting, and listing file directories.
* Comparing Files::     Finding where two files differ.
* Diff Mode::           Mode for editing file differences.
* Misc File Ops::       Other things you can do on files.
* Compressed Files::    Accessing compressed files.
* File Archives::       Operating on tar, zip, jar etc. archive files.
* Remote Files::        Accessing files on other sites.
* Quoted File Names::   Quoting special characters in file names.
* File Name Cache::     Completion against a list of files you often use.
* File Conveniences::   Convenience Features for Finding Files.
* Filesets::            Handling sets of files.


File: emacs,  Node: File Names,  Next: Visiting,  Up: Files

22.1 File Names
===============

Many Emacs commands that operate on a file require you to specify the
file name, using the minibuffer (*note Minibuffer::).  You can use
"completion" to specify long file names (*note Completion::).  Note
that file name completion ignores file names whose extensions appear in
the variable `completion-ignored-extensions' (*note Completion
Options::).

   For most operations, there is a "default file name" which is used if
you type just <RET> to enter an empty argument.  Normally, the default
file name is the name of the file visited in the current buffer.

   Each buffer has a "default directory" which is normally the same as
the directory of the file visited in that buffer.  For example, if the
default file name is `/u/rms/gnu/gnu.tasks', the default directory is
normally `/u/rms/gnu/'.  The default directory is kept in the variable
`default-directory', which has a separate value in every buffer.  When
a command reads a file name using the minibuffer, the default directory
usually serves as the initial contents of the minibuffer.  To inhibit
the insertion of the default directory, set the variable
`insert-default-directory' to `nil'.

   If you enter a file name without a directory, that specifies a file
in the default directory.  If you specify a directory in a relative
fashion, with a name that does not start with a slash, it is
interpreted with respect to the default directory.  For example,
suppose the default directory is `/u/rms/gnu/'.  Entering just `foo' in
the minibuffer, with a directory omitted, specifies the file
`/u/rms/gnu/foo'; entering `../.login' specifies `/u/rms/.login'; and
entering `new/foo' specifies `/u/rms/gnu/new/foo'.

   When typing a file name into the minibuffer, you can make use of a
couple of shortcuts: a double slash is interpreted as "ignore
everything before the second slash in the pair," and `~/' is
interpreted as your home directory.  *Note Minibuffer File::, for more
information about these shortcuts.

   The command `M-x pwd' displays the default directory, and the
command `M-x cd' sets it to a value read using the minibuffer.  A
buffer's default directory changes only when the `cd' command is used.
A file-visiting buffer's default directory is initialized to the
directory of the file it visits.  If you create a buffer with `C-x b',
its default directory is copied from that of the buffer that was
current at the time (*note Select Buffer::).

   The character `$' is used to substitute an environment variable into
a file name.  The name of the environment variable consists of all the
alphanumeric characters after the `$'; alternatively, it can be
enclosed in braces after the `$'.  For example, if you have used the
shell command `export FOO=rms/hacks' to set up an environment variable
named `FOO', then both `/u/$FOO/test.c' and `/u/${FOO}/test.c' are
abbreviations for `/u/rms/hacks/test.c'.  If the environment variable
is not defined, no substitution occurs, so that the character `$' stands
for itself.

   Note that environment variables affect Emacs only if they are
applied before Emacs is started.

   To access a file with `$' in its name, if the `$' causes expansion,
type `$$'.  This pair is converted to a single `$' at the same time
that variable substitution is performed for a single `$'.
Alternatively, quote the whole file name with `/:' (*note Quoted File
Names::).  File names which begin with a literal `~' should also be
quoted with `/:'.

   You can include non-ASCII characters in file names if you set the
variable `file-name-coding-system' to a non-`nil' value.  *Note File
Name Coding::.


File: emacs,  Node: Visiting,  Next: Saving,  Prev: File Names,  Up: Files

22.2 Visiting Files
===================

`C-x C-f'
     Visit a file (`find-file').

`C-x C-r'
     Visit a file for viewing, without allowing changes to it
     (`find-file-read-only').

`C-x C-v'
     Visit a different file instead of the one visited last
     (`find-alternate-file').

`C-x 4 f'
     Visit a file, in another window (`find-file-other-window').  Don't
     alter what is displayed in the selected window.

`C-x 5 f'
     Visit a file, in a new frame (`find-file-other-frame').  Don't
     alter what is displayed in the selected frame.

`M-x find-file-literally'
     Visit a file with no conversion of the contents.

   "Visiting" a file means reading its contents into an Emacs buffer so
you can edit them.  Emacs makes a new buffer for each file that you
visit.

   Emacs normally constructs the buffer name from the file name,
omitting the directory name.  For example, a file named
`/usr/rms/emacs.tex' is visited in a buffer named `emacs.tex'.  If
there is already a buffer with that name, Emacs constructs a unique
name; the normal method is to append `<2>', `<3>', and so on, but you
can select other methods.  *Note Uniquify::.

   Each window's mode line shows the name of the buffer that is being
displayed in that window, so you can always tell what buffer you are
editing.  *note Mode Line::.

   The changes you make with editing commands are made in the Emacs
buffer.  They do not take effect in the file that you visited, or any
permanent place, until you "save" the buffer (*note Saving::).

   If a buffer contains changes that have not been saved, we say the
buffer is "modified".  This implies that some changes will be lost if
the buffer is not saved.  The mode line displays two stars near the
left margin to indicate that the buffer is modified.

   To visit a file, type `C-x C-f' (`find-file') and use the minibuffer
to enter the name of the desired file.  The usual defaulting and
completion behavior is available in this minibuffer (*note Minibuffer
File::).  Note, also, that completion ignores certain file names (*note
Completion Options::).  While in the minibuffer, you can abort `C-x
C-f' by typing `C-g'.

   Your can tell that `C-x C-f' has completed successfully by the
appearance of new text on the screen and a new buffer name in the mode
line.  If the specified file does not exist and you could not create
it, or exists but you can't read it, an error message is displayed in
the echo area.

   If you visit a file that is already in Emacs, `C-x C-f' does not make
another copy.  It selects the existing buffer containing that file.
However, before doing so, it checks whether the file itself has changed
since you visited or saved it last.  If the file has changed, Emacs
offers to reread it.

   If you try to visit a file larger than
`large-file-warning-threshold' (the default is 10000000, which is about
10 megabytes), Emacs asks you for confirmation first.  You can answer
`y' to proceed with visiting the file.  Note, however, that Emacs
cannot visit files that are larger than the maximum Emacs buffer size,
which is around 512 megabytes on 32-bit machines (*note Buffers::).  If
you try, Emacs will display an error message saying that the maximum
buffer size has been exceeded.

   If the file name you specify contains shell-style wildcard
characters, Emacs visits all the files that match it.  (On
case-insensitive filesystems, Emacs matches the wildcards disregarding
the letter case.)  Wildcards include `?', `*', and `[...]' sequences.
To enter the wild card `?' in a file name in the minibuffer, you need
to type `C-q ?'.  *Note Quoted File Names::, for information on how to
visit a file whose name actually contains wildcard characters.  You can
disable the wildcard feature by customizing `find-file-wildcards'.

   On graphical displays, there are two additional methods for visiting
files.  Firstly, when Emacs is built with a suitable GUI toolkit,
commands invoked with the mouse (by clicking on the menu bar or tool
bar) use the toolkit's standard "File Selection" dialog instead of
prompting for the file name in the minibuffer.  On GNU/Linux and Unix
platforms, Emacs does this when built with GTK, LessTif, and Motif
toolkits; on MS-Windows and Mac, the GUI version does that by default.
For information on how to customize this, see *Note Dialog Boxes::.

   Secondly, Emacs supports "drag and drop": dropping a file into an
ordinary Emacs window visits the file using that window.  As an
exception, dropping a file into a window displaying a Dired buffer
moves or copies the file into the displayed directory.  For details,
see *Note Drag and Drop::, and *Note Misc Dired Features::.

   What if you want to create a new file?  Just visit it.  Emacs
displays `(New file)' in the echo area, but in other respects behaves
as if you had visited an existing empty file.  If you make changes and
save them, the file is created.

   When <TAB> completion results in a nonexistent file name and you
type <RET> immediately to visit it, Emacs asks for confirmation; this
is because it's possible that you expected completion to go further and
give you an existing file's name.  The string `[Confirm]' appears for a
short time after the file name to indicate the need to confirm in this
way.  Type <RET> to confirm and visit the nonexistent file.  The
variable `confirm-nonexistent-file-or-buffer' controls whether Emacs
asks for confirmation before visiting a new file.  The default value,
`after-completion', gives the behavior we have just described.  If the
value is `nil', Emacs never asks for confirmation; for any other
non-`nil' value, Emacs always asks for confirmation.  This variable
also affects the `switch-to-buffer' command (*note Select Buffer::).
*Note Completion::, for more information about completion.

   If you visit a nonexistent file unintentionally (because you typed
the wrong file name), type `C-x C-v' (`find-alternate-file') to visit
the file you really wanted.  `C-x C-v' is similar to `C-x C-f', but it
kills the current buffer (after first offering to save it if it is
modified).  When `C-x C-v' reads the file name to visit, it inserts the
entire default file name in the buffer, with point just after the
directory part; this is convenient if you made a slight error in typing
the name.

   If you "visit" a file that is actually a directory, Emacs invokes
Dired, the Emacs directory browser; this lets you "edit" the contents
of the directory.  *Note Dired::.  You can disable this behavior by
setting the variable `find-file-run-dired' to `nil'; in that case, it
is an error to try to visit a directory.

   Files which are actually collections of other files, or "file
archives", are visited in special modes which invoke a Dired-like
environment to allow operations on archive members.  *Note File
Archives::, for more about these features.

   If you visit a file that the operating system won't let you modify,
or that is marked read-only, Emacs makes the buffer read-only too, so
that you won't go ahead and make changes that you'll have trouble
saving afterward.  You can make the buffer writable with `C-x C-q'
(`toggle-read-only').  *Note Misc Buffer::.

   If you want to visit a file as read-only in order to protect
yourself from entering changes accidentally, visit it with the command
`C-x C-r' (`find-file-read-only') instead of `C-x C-f'.

   `C-x 4 f' (`find-file-other-window') is like `C-x C-f' except that
the buffer containing the specified file is selected in another window.
The window that was selected before `C-x 4 f' continues to show the
same buffer it was already showing.  If this command is used when only
one window is being displayed, that window is split in two, with one
window showing the same buffer as before, and the other one showing the
newly requested file.  *Note Windows::.

   `C-x 5 f' (`find-file-other-frame') is similar, but opens a new
frame, or makes visible any existing frame showing the file you seek.
This feature is available only when you are using a window system.
*Note Frames::.

   Emacs recognizes from the contents of a file which end-of-line
convention it uses to separate lines--newline (used on GNU/Linux and on
Unix), carriage-return linefeed (used on Microsoft systems), or just
carriage-return (used on the Macintosh)--and automatically converts the
contents to the normal Emacs convention, which is that the newline
character separates lines.  This is a part of the general feature of
coding system conversion (*note Coding Systems::), and makes it
possible to edit files imported from different operating systems with
equal convenience.  If you change the text and save the file, Emacs
performs the inverse conversion, changing newlines back into
carriage-return linefeed or just carriage-return if appropriate.

   If you wish to edit a file as a sequence of ASCII characters with no
special encoding or conversion, use the `M-x find-file-literally'
command.  This visits a file, like `C-x C-f', but does not do format
conversion (*note Formatted Text::), character code conversion (*note
Coding Systems::), or automatic uncompression (*note Compressed
Files::), and does not add a final newline because of
`require-final-newline' (*note Customize Save::).  If you have already
visited the same file in the usual (non-literal) manner, this command
asks you whether to visit it literally instead.

   Two special hook variables allow extensions to modify the operation
of visiting files.  Visiting a file that does not exist runs the
functions in the list `find-file-not-found-functions'; this variable
holds a list of functions, and the functions are called one by one
(with no arguments) until one of them returns non-`nil'.  This is not a
normal hook, and the name ends in `-functions' rather than `-hook' to
indicate that fact.

   Successful visiting of any file, whether existing or not, calls the
functions in the list `find-file-hook', with no arguments.  This
variable is a normal hook.  In the case of a nonexistent file, the
`find-file-not-found-functions' are run first.  *Note Hooks::.

   There are several ways to specify automatically the major mode for
editing the file (*note Choosing Modes::), and to specify local
variables defined for that file (*note File Variables::).


File: emacs,  Node: Saving,  Next: Reverting,  Prev: Visiting,  Up: Files

22.3 Saving Files
=================

"Saving" a buffer in Emacs means writing its contents back into the file
that was visited in the buffer.

* Menu:

* Save Commands::       Commands for saving files.
* Backup::              How Emacs saves the old version of your file.
* Customize Save::      Customizing the saving of files.
* Interlocking::        How Emacs protects against simultaneous editing
                          of one file by two users.
* Shadowing: File Shadowing.  Copying files to "shadows" automatically.
* Time Stamps::         Emacs can update time stamps on saved files.


File: emacs,  Node: Save Commands,  Next: Backup,  Up: Saving

22.3.1 Commands for Saving Files
--------------------------------

These are the commands that relate to saving and writing files.

`C-x C-s'
     Save the current buffer in its visited file on disk
     (`save-buffer').

`C-x s'
     Save any or all buffers in their visited files
     (`save-some-buffers').

`M-~'
     Forget that the current buffer has been changed (`not-modified').
     With prefix argument (`C-u'), mark the current buffer as changed.

`C-x C-w'
     Save the current buffer with a specified file name (`write-file').

`M-x set-visited-file-name'
     Change the file name under which the current buffer will be saved.

   When you wish to save the file and make your changes permanent, type
`C-x C-s' (`save-buffer').  After saving is finished, `C-x C-s'
displays a message like this:

     Wrote /u/rms/gnu/gnu.tasks

If the selected buffer is not modified (no changes have been made in it
since the buffer was created or last saved), saving is not really done,
because it would have no effect.  Instead, `C-x C-s' displays a message
like this in the echo area:

     (No changes need to be saved)

   With a prefix argument, `C-u C-x C-s', Emacs also marks the buffer
to be backed up when the next save is done.  *Note Backup::.

   The command `C-x s' (`save-some-buffers') offers to save any or all
modified buffers.  It asks you what to do with each buffer.  The
possible responses are analogous to those of `query-replace':

`y'
     Save this buffer and ask about the rest of the buffers.

`n'
     Don't save this buffer, but ask about the rest of the buffers.

`!'
     Save this buffer and all the rest with no more questions.

`<RET>'
     Terminate `save-some-buffers' without any more saving.

`.'
     Save this buffer, then exit `save-some-buffers' without even asking
     about other buffers.

`C-r'
     View the buffer that you are currently being asked about.  When
     you exit View mode, you get back to `save-some-buffers', which
     asks the question again.

`d'
     Diff the buffer against its corresponding file, so you can see what
     changes you would be saving.  This calls the command
     `diff-buffer-with-file' (*note Comparing Files::).

`C-h'
     Display a help message about these options.

   `C-x C-c', the key sequence to exit Emacs, invokes
`save-some-buffers' and therefore asks the same questions.

   If you have changed a buffer but do not wish to save the changes,
you should take some action to prevent it.  Otherwise, each time you
use `C-x s' or `C-x C-c', you are liable to save this buffer by
mistake.  One thing you can do is type `M-~' (`not-modified'), which
clears out the indication that the buffer is modified.  If you do this,
none of the save commands will believe that the buffer needs to be
saved.  (`~' is often used as a mathematical symbol for `not'; thus
`M-~' is `not', metafied.)  Alternatively, you can cancel all the
changes made since the file was visited or saved, by reading the text
from the file again.  This is called "reverting".  *Note Reverting::.
(You could also undo all the changes by repeating the undo command `C-x
u' until you have undone all the changes; but reverting is easier.)

   `M-x set-visited-file-name' alters the name of the file that the
current buffer is visiting.  It reads the new file name using the
minibuffer.  Then it marks the buffer as visiting that file name, and
changes the buffer name correspondingly.  `set-visited-file-name' does
not save the buffer in the newly visited file; it just alters the
records inside Emacs in case you do save later.  It also marks the
buffer as "modified" so that `C-x C-s' in that buffer _will_ save.

   If you wish to mark the buffer as visiting a different file and save
it right away, use `C-x C-w' (`write-file').  This is equivalent to
`set-visited-file-name' followed by `C-x C-s', except that `C-x C-w'
asks for confirmation if the file exists.  `C-x C-s' used on a buffer
that is not visiting a file has the same effect as `C-x C-w'; that is,
it reads a file name, marks the buffer as visiting that file, and saves
it there.  The default file name in a buffer that is not visiting a
file is made by combining the buffer name with the buffer's default
directory (*note File Names::).

   If the new file name implies a major mode, then `C-x C-w' switches
to that major mode, in most cases.  The command `set-visited-file-name'
also does this.  *Note Choosing Modes::.

   If Emacs is about to save a file and sees that the date of the latest
version on disk does not match what Emacs last read or wrote, Emacs
notifies you of this fact, because it probably indicates a problem
caused by simultaneous editing and requires your immediate attention.
*Note Simultaneous Editing: Interlocking.


File: emacs,  Node: Backup,  Next: Customize Save,  Prev: Save Commands,  Up: Saving

22.3.2 Backup Files
-------------------

On most operating systems, rewriting a file automatically destroys all
record of what the file used to contain.  Thus, saving a file from Emacs
throws away the old contents of the file--or it would, except that
Emacs carefully copies the old contents to another file, called the
"backup" file, before actually saving.

   Emacs makes a backup for a file only the first time the file is
saved from a buffer.  No matter how many times you subsequently save
the file, its backup remains unchanged.  However, if you kill the
buffer and then visit the file again, a new backup file will be made.

   For most files, the variable `make-backup-files' determines whether
to make backup files.  On most operating systems, its default value is
`t', so that Emacs does write backup files.

   For files managed by a version control system (*note Version
Control::), the variable `vc-make-backup-files' determines whether to
make backup files.  By default it is `nil', since backup files are
redundant when you store all the previous versions in a version control
system.  *Note General VC Options::.

   At your option, Emacs can keep either a single backup for each file,
or make a series of numbered backup files for each file that you edit.
*Note Backup Names::.

   The default value of the `backup-enable-predicate' variable prevents
backup files being written for files in the directories used for
temporary files, specified by `temporary-file-directory' or
`small-temporary-file-directory'.

   You can explicitly tell Emacs to make another backup file from a
buffer, even though that buffer has been saved before.  If you save the
buffer with `C-u C-x C-s', the version thus saved will be made into a
backup file if you save the buffer again.  `C-u C-u C-x C-s' saves the
buffer, but first makes the previous file contents into a new backup
file.  `C-u C-u C-u C-x C-s' does both things: it makes a backup from
the previous contents, and arranges to make another from the newly
saved contents if you save again.

* Menu:

* Names: Backup Names.		How backup files are named.
* Deletion: Backup Deletion.	Emacs deletes excess numbered backups.
* Copying: Backup Copying.	Backups can be made by copying or renaming.


File: emacs,  Node: Backup Names,  Next: Backup Deletion,  Up: Backup

22.3.2.1 Single or Numbered Backups
...................................

When Emacs makes a backup file, its name is normally constructed by
appending `~' to the file name being edited; thus, the backup file for
`eval.c' would be `eval.c~'.

   If access control stops Emacs from writing backup files under the
usual names, it writes the backup file as `%backup%~' in your home
directory.  Only one such file can exist, so only the most recently
made such backup is available.

   Emacs can also make "numbered backup files".  Numbered backup file
names contain `.~', the number, and another `~' after the original file
name.  Thus, the backup files of `eval.c' would be called `eval.c.~1~',
`eval.c.~2~', and so on, all the way through names like `eval.c.~259~'
and beyond.

   The variable `version-control' determines whether to make single
backup files or multiple numbered backup files.  Its possible values
are:

`nil'
     Make numbered backups for files that have numbered backups already.
     Otherwise, make single backups.  This is the default.

`t'
     Make numbered backups.

`never'
     Never make numbered backups; always make single backups.

The usual way to set this variable is globally, through your `.emacs'
file or the customization buffer.  However, you can set
`version-control' locally in an individual buffer to control the making
of backups for that buffer's file (*note Locals::).  You can have Emacs
set `version-control' locally whenever you visit a given file (*note
File Variables::).  Some modes, such as Rmail mode, set this variable.

   If you set the environment variable `VERSION_CONTROL', to tell
various GNU utilities what to do with backup files, Emacs also obeys the
environment variable by setting the Lisp variable `version-control'
accordingly at startup.  If the environment variable's value is `t' or
`numbered', then `version-control' becomes `t'; if the value is `nil'
or `existing', then `version-control' becomes `nil'; if it is `never'
or `simple', then `version-control' becomes `never'.

   You can customize the variable `backup-directory-alist' to specify
that files matching certain patterns should be backed up in specific
directories.  This variable applies to both single and numbered
backups.  A typical use is to add an element `("."  . DIR)' to make all
backups in the directory with absolute name DIR; Emacs modifies the
backup file names to avoid clashes between files with the same names
originating in different directories.  Alternatively, adding, `("." .
".~")' would make backups in the invisible subdirectory `.~' of the
original file's directory.  Emacs creates the directory, if necessary,
to make the backup.

   If you define the variable `make-backup-file-name-function' to a
suitable Lisp function, that overrides the usual way Emacs constructs
backup file names.


File: emacs,  Node: Backup Deletion,  Next: Backup Copying,  Prev: Backup Names,  Up: Backup

22.3.2.2 Automatic Deletion of Backups
......................................

To prevent excessive consumption of disk space, Emacs can delete
numbered backup versions automatically.  Generally Emacs keeps the
first few backups and the latest few backups, deleting any in between.
This happens every time a new backup is made.

   The two variables `kept-old-versions' and `kept-new-versions'
control this deletion.  Their values are, respectively, the number of
oldest (lowest-numbered) backups to keep and the number of newest
(highest-numbered) ones to keep, each time a new backup is made.  The
backups in the middle (excluding those oldest and newest) are the
excess middle versions--those backups are deleted.  These variables'
values are used when it is time to delete excess versions, just after a
new backup version is made; the newly made backup is included in the
count in `kept-new-versions'.  By default, both variables are 2.

   If `delete-old-versions' is `t', Emacs deletes the excess backup
files silently.  If it is `nil', the default, Emacs asks you whether it
should delete the excess backup versions.  If it has any other value,
then Emacs never automatically deletes backups.

   Dired's `.' (Period) command can also be used to delete old versions.
*Note Dired Deletion::.


File: emacs,  Node: Backup Copying,  Prev: Backup Deletion,  Up: Backup

22.3.2.3 Copying vs. Renaming
.............................

Backup files can be made by copying the old file or by renaming it.
This makes a difference when the old file has multiple names (hard
links).  If the old file is renamed into the backup file, then the
alternate names become names for the backup file.  If the old file is
copied instead, then the alternate names remain names for the file that
you are editing, and the contents accessed by those names will be the
new contents.

   The method of making a backup file may also affect the file's owner
and group.  If copying is used, these do not change.  If renaming is
used, you become the file's owner, and the file's group becomes the
default (different operating systems have different defaults for the
group).

   Having the owner change is usually a good idea, because then the
owner always shows who last edited the file.  Also, the owners of the
backups show who produced those versions.  Occasionally there is a file
whose owner should not change; it is a good idea for such files to
contain local variable lists to set `backup-by-copying-when-mismatch'
locally (*note File Variables::).

   The choice of renaming or copying is controlled by four variables.
Renaming is the default choice.  If the variable `backup-by-copying' is
non-`nil', copying is used.  Otherwise, if the variable
`backup-by-copying-when-linked' is non-`nil', then copying is used for
files that have multiple names, but renaming may still be used when the
file being edited has only one name.  If the variable
`backup-by-copying-when-mismatch' is non-`nil', then copying is used if
renaming would cause the file's owner or group to change.
`backup-by-copying-when-mismatch' is `t' by default if you start Emacs
as the superuser.  The fourth variable,
`backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch', gives the highest numeric
user-id for which `backup-by-copying-when-mismatch' will be forced on.
This is useful when low-numbered user-ids are assigned to special
system users, such as `root', `bin', `daemon', etc., which must
maintain ownership of files.

   When a file is managed with a version control system (*note Version
Control::), Emacs does not normally make backups in the usual way for
that file.  But check-in and check-out are similar in some ways to
making backups.  One unfortunate similarity is that these operations
typically break hard links, disconnecting the file name you visited from
any alternate names for the same file.  This has nothing to do with
Emacs--the version control system does it.


File: emacs,  Node: Customize Save,  Next: Interlocking,  Prev: Backup,  Up: Saving

22.3.3 Customizing Saving of Files
----------------------------------

If the value of the variable `require-final-newline' is `t', saving or
writing a file silently puts a newline at the end if there isn't
already one there.  If the value is `visit', Emacs adds a newline at
the end of any file that doesn't have one, just after it visits the
file.  (This marks the buffer as modified, and you can undo it.)  If
the value is `visit-save', that means to add newlines both on visiting
and on saving.  If the value is `nil', Emacs leaves the end of the file
unchanged; if it's neither `nil' nor `t', Emacs asks you whether to add
a newline.  The default is `nil'.

   Many major modes are designed for specific kinds of files that are
always supposed to end in newlines.  These major modes set the variable
`require-final-newline' according to `mode-require-final-newline'.  By
setting the latter variable, you can control how these modes handle
final newlines.

   When Emacs saves a file, it invokes the `fsync' system call to force
the data immediately out to disk.  This is important for safety if the
system crashes or in case of power outage.  However, it can be
disruptive on laptops using power saving, because it requires the disk
to spin up each time you save a file.  Setting
`write-region-inhibit-fsync' to a non-`nil' value disables this
synchronization.  Be careful--this means increased risk of data loss.


File: emacs,  Node: Interlocking,  Next: File Shadowing,  Prev: Customize Save,  Up: Saving

22.3.4 Protection against Simultaneous Editing
----------------------------------------------

Simultaneous editing occurs when two users visit the same file, both
make changes, and then both save them.  If nobody were informed that
this was happening, whichever user saved first would later find that his
changes were lost.

   On some systems, Emacs notices immediately when the second user
starts to change the file, and issues an immediate warning.  On all
systems, Emacs checks when you save the file, and warns if you are
about to overwrite another user's changes.  You can prevent loss of the
other user's work by taking the proper corrective action instead of
saving the file.

   When you make the first modification in an Emacs buffer that is
visiting a file, Emacs records that the file is "locked" by you.  (It
does this by creating a specially-named symbolic link in the same
directory.)  Emacs removes the lock when you save the changes.  The
idea is that the file is locked whenever an Emacs buffer visiting it
has unsaved changes.

   If you begin to modify the buffer while the visited file is locked by
someone else, this constitutes a "collision".  When Emacs detects a
collision, it asks you what to do, by calling the Lisp function
`ask-user-about-lock'.  You can redefine this function for the sake of
customization.  The standard definition of this function asks you a
question and accepts three possible answers:

`s'
     Steal the lock.  Whoever was already changing the file loses the
     lock, and you gain the lock.

`p'
     Proceed.  Go ahead and edit the file despite its being locked by
     someone else.

`q'
     Quit.  This causes an error (`file-locked'), and the buffer
     contents remain unchanged--the modification you were trying to make
     does not actually take place.

   Note that locking works on the basis of a file name; if a file has
multiple names, Emacs does not realize that the two names are the same
file and cannot prevent two users from editing it simultaneously under
different names.  However, basing locking on names means that Emacs can
interlock the editing of new files that will not really exist until
they are saved.

   Some systems are not configured to allow Emacs to make locks, and
there are cases where lock files cannot be written.  In these cases,
Emacs cannot detect trouble in advance, but it still can detect the
collision when you try to save a file and overwrite someone else's
changes.  Every time Emacs saves a buffer, it first checks the
last-modification date of the existing file on disk to verify that it
has not changed since the file was last visited or saved.  If the date
does not match, it implies that changes were made in the file in some
other way, and these changes are about to be lost if Emacs actually
does save.  To prevent this, Emacs displays a warning message and asks
for confirmation before saving.  Occasionally you will know why the
file was changed and know that it does not matter; then you can answer
`yes' and proceed.  Otherwise, you should cancel the save with `C-g'
and investigate the situation.

   If Emacs or the operating system crashes, this may leave behind lock
files which are stale, so you may occasionally get warnings about
spurious collisions.  When you determine that the collision is spurious,
just use `p' to tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.

   The first thing you should do when notified that simultaneous editing
has already taken place is to list the directory with `C-u C-x C-d'
(*note Directories::).  This shows the file's current author.  You
should attempt to contact him to warn him not to continue editing.
Often the next step is to save the contents of your Emacs buffer under a
different name, and use `diff' to compare the two files.


File: emacs,  Node: File Shadowing,  Next: Time Stamps,  Prev: Interlocking,  Up: Saving

22.3.5 Shadowing Files
----------------------

`M-x shadow-initialize'
     Set up file shadowing.

`M-x shadow-define-literal-group'
     Declare a single file to be shared between sites.

`M-x shadow-define-regexp-group'
     Make all files that match each of a group of files be shared
     between hosts.

`M-x shadow-define-cluster <RET> NAME <RET>'
     Define a shadow file cluster NAME.

`M-x shadow-copy-files'
     Copy all pending shadow files.

`M-x shadow-cancel'
     Cancel the instruction to shadow some files.

   You can arrange to keep identical "shadow" copies of certain files
in more than one place--possibly on different machines.  To do this,
first you must set up a "shadow file group", which is a set of
identically-named files shared between a list of sites.  The file group
is permanent and applies to further Emacs sessions as well as the
current one.  Once the group is set up, every time you exit Emacs, it
will copy the file you edited to the other files in its group.  You can
also do the copying without exiting Emacs, by typing `M-x
shadow-copy-files'.

   To set up a shadow file group, use `M-x shadow-define-literal-group'
or `M-x shadow-define-regexp-group'.  See their documentation strings
for further information.

   Before copying a file to its shadows, Emacs asks for confirmation.
You can answer "no" to bypass copying of this file, this time.  If you
want to cancel the shadowing permanently for a certain file, use `M-x
shadow-cancel' to eliminate or change the shadow file group.

   A "shadow cluster" is a group of hosts that share directories, so
that copying to or from one of them is sufficient to update the file on
all of them.  Each shadow cluster has a name, and specifies the network
address of a primary host (the one we copy files to), and a regular
expression that matches the host names of all the other hosts in the
cluster.  You can define a shadow cluster with `M-x
shadow-define-cluster'.


File: emacs,  Node: Time Stamps,  Prev: File Shadowing,  Up: Saving

22.3.6 Updating Time Stamps Automatically
-----------------------------------------

You can arrange to put a time stamp in a file, so that it will be
updated automatically each time you edit and save the file.  The time
stamp has to be in the first eight lines of the file, and you should
insert it like this:

     Time-stamp: <>

or like this:

     Time-stamp: " "

   Then add the hook function `time-stamp' to the hook
`before-save-hook'; that hook function will automatically update the
time stamp, inserting the current date and time when you save the file.
You can also use the command `M-x time-stamp' to update the time stamp
manually.  For other customizations, see the Custom group `time-stamp'.
Note that non-numeric fields in the time stamp are formatted according
to your locale setting (*note Environment::).


File: emacs,  Node: Reverting,  Next: Autorevert,  Prev: Saving,  Up: Files

22.4 Reverting a Buffer
=======================

If you have made extensive changes to a file and then change your mind
about them, you can get rid of them by reading in the previous version
of the file.  To do this, use `M-x revert-buffer', which operates on
the current buffer.  Since reverting a buffer unintentionally could lose
a lot of work, you must confirm this command with `yes'.

   `revert-buffer' tries to position point in such a way that, if the
file was edited only slightly, you will be at approximately the same
piece of text after reverting as before.  However, if you have made
drastic changes, point may wind up in a totally different piece of text.

   Reverting marks the buffer as "not modified".

   Some kinds of buffers that are not associated with files, such as
Dired buffers, can also be reverted.  For them, reverting means
recalculating their contents.  Buffers created explicitly with `C-x b'
cannot be reverted; `revert-buffer' reports an error if you try.

   When you edit a file that changes automatically and frequently--for
example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you.  To
request this behavior, set the variable `revert-without-query' to a
list of regular expressions.  When a file name matches one of these
regular expressions, `find-file' and `revert-buffer' will revert it
automatically if it has changed--provided the buffer itself is not
modified.  (If you have edited the text, it would be wrong to discard
your changes.)

   In addition, you can tell Emacs to periodically revert a buffer by
typing `M-x auto-revert-mode'.  This turns on Auto-Revert mode, a minor
mode that makes Emacs automatically revert the current buffer every
five seconds.  You can change this interval through the variable
`auto-revert-interval'.  Typing `M-x global-auto-revert-mode' enables
Global Auto-Revert mode, which does the same for all file buffers.
Auto-Revert mode and Global Auto-Revert modes do not check or revert
remote files, because that is usually too slow.

   One use of Auto-Revert mode is to "tail" a file such as a system
log, so that changes made to that file by other programs are
continuously displayed.  To do this, just move the point to the end of
the buffer, and it will stay there as the file contents change.
However, if you are sure that the file will only change by growing at
the end, use Auto-Revert Tail mode instead (`auto-revert-tail-mode').
It is more efficient for this.  Auto-Revert Tail mode works also for
remote files.

   *Note VC Mode Line::, for Auto Revert peculiarities in buffers that
visit files under version control.


File: emacs,  Node: Autorevert,  Next: Auto Save,  Prev: Reverting,  Up: Files

22.5 Auto Reverting Non-File Buffers
====================================

Global Auto Revert Mode normally only reverts file buffers.  There are
two ways to auto-revert certain non-file buffers: enabling Auto Revert
Mode in those buffers (using `M-x auto-revert-mode'); and setting
`global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers' non-`nil'.  The latter enables
Auto Reverting for all types of buffers for which it is implemented
(listed in the menu below).

   Like file buffers, non-file buffers should normally not revert while
you are working on them, or while they contain information that might
get lost after reverting.  Therefore, they do not revert if they are
"modified".  This can get tricky, because deciding when a non-file
buffer should be marked modified is usually more difficult than for
file buffers.

   Another tricky detail is that, for efficiency reasons, Auto Revert
often does not try to detect all possible changes in the buffer, only
changes that are "major" or easy to detect.  Hence, enabling
auto-reverting for a non-file buffer does not always guarantee that all
information in the buffer is up-to-date, and does not necessarily make
manual reverts useless.

   At the other extreme, certain buffers automatically revert every
`auto-revert-interval' seconds.  (This currently only applies to the
Buffer Menu.)  In this case, Auto Revert does not print any messages
while reverting, even when `auto-revert-verbose' is non-`nil'.

   The details depend on the particular types of buffers and are
explained in the corresponding sections.

* Menu:

* Auto Reverting the Buffer Menu:: Auto Revert of the Buffer Menu.
* Auto Reverting Dired::           Auto Revert of Dired buffers.
* Supporting additional buffers::  How to add more Auto Revert support.


File: emacs,  Node: Auto Reverting the Buffer Menu,  Next: Auto Reverting Dired,  Up: Autorevert

22.5.1 Auto Reverting the Buffer Menu
-------------------------------------

If auto-reverting of non-file buffers is enabled, the Buffer Menu
automatically reverts every `auto-revert-interval' seconds, whether
there is a need for it or not.  (It would probably take longer to check
whether there is a need than to actually revert.)

   If the Buffer Menu inappropriately gets marked modified, just revert
it manually using `g' and auto-reverting will resume.  However, if you
marked certain buffers to get deleted or to be displayed, you have to
be careful, because reverting erases all marks.  The fact that adding
marks sets the buffer's modified flag prevents Auto Revert from
automatically erasing the marks.


File: emacs,  Node: Auto Reverting Dired,  Next: Supporting additional buffers,  Prev: Auto Reverting the Buffer Menu,  Up: Autorevert

22.5.2 Auto Reverting Dired buffers
-----------------------------------

Auto-reverting Dired buffers currently works on GNU or Unix style
operating systems.  It may not work satisfactorily on some other
systems.

   Dired buffers only auto-revert when the file list of the buffer's
main directory changes (e.g. when a new file is added).  They do not
auto-revert when information about a particular file changes (e.g. when
the size changes) or when inserted subdirectories change.  To be sure
that _all_ listed information is up to date, you have to manually
revert using `g', _even_ if auto-reverting is enabled in the Dired
buffer.  Sometimes, you might get the impression that modifying or
saving files listed in the main directory actually does cause
auto-reverting.  This is because making changes to a file, or saving
it, very often causes changes in the directory itself; for instance,
through backup files or auto-save files.  However, this is not
guaranteed.

   If the Dired buffer is marked modified and there are no changes you
want to protect, then most of the time you can make auto-reverting
resume by manually reverting the buffer using `g'.  There is one
exception.  If you flag or mark files, you can safely revert the
buffer.  This will not erase the flags or marks (unless the marked file
has been deleted, of course).  However, the buffer will stay modified,
even after reverting, and auto-reverting will not resume.  This is
because, if you flag or mark files, you may be working on the buffer
and you might not want the buffer to change without warning.  If you
want auto-reverting to resume in the presence of marks and flags, mark
the buffer non-modified using `M-~'.  However, adding, deleting or
changing marks or flags will mark it modified again.

   Remote Dired buffers are not auto-reverted (because it may be slow).
Neither are Dired buffers for which you used shell wildcards or file
arguments to list only some of the files.  `*Find*' and `*Locate*'
buffers do not auto-revert either.


File: emacs,  Node: Supporting additional buffers,  Prev: Auto Reverting Dired,  Up: Autorevert

22.5.3 Adding Support for Auto-Reverting additional Buffers.
------------------------------------------------------------

This section is intended for Elisp programmers who would like to add
support for auto-reverting new types of buffers.

   To support auto-reverting the buffer must first of all have a
`revert-buffer-function'.  *Note Reverting: (elisp)Definition of
revert-buffer-function.

   In addition, it _must_ have a `buffer-stale-function'.

 -- Variable: buffer-stale-function
     The value of this variable is a function to check whether a
     non-file buffer needs reverting.  This should be a function with
     one optional argument NOCONFIRM.  The function should return
     non-`nil' if the buffer should be reverted.  The buffer is current
     when this function is called.

     While this function is mainly intended for use in auto-reverting,
     it could be used for other purposes as well.  For instance, if
     auto-reverting is not enabled, it could be used to warn the user
     that the buffer needs reverting.  The idea behind the NOCONFIRM
     argument is that it should be `t' if the buffer is going to be
     reverted without asking the user and `nil' if the function is just
     going to be used to warn the user that the buffer is out of date.
     In particular, for use in auto-reverting, NOCONFIRM is `t'.  If
     the function is only going to be used for auto-reverting, you can
     ignore the NOCONFIRM argument.

     If you just want to automatically auto-revert every
     `auto-revert-interval' seconds (like the Buffer Menu), use:

          (set (make-local-variable 'buffer-stale-function)
               #'(lambda (&optional noconfirm) 'fast))

     in the buffer's mode function.

     The special return value `fast' tells the caller that the need for
     reverting was not checked, but that reverting the buffer is fast.
     It also tells Auto Revert not to print any revert messages, even if
     `auto-revert-verbose' is non-`nil'.  This is important, as getting
     revert messages every `auto-revert-interval' seconds can be very
     annoying.  The information provided by this return value could
     also be useful if the function is consulted for purposes other than
     auto-reverting.

   Once the buffer has a `revert-buffer-function' and a
`buffer-stale-function', several problems usually remain.

   The buffer will only auto-revert if it is marked unmodified.  Hence,
you will have to make sure that various functions mark the buffer
modified if and only if either the buffer contains information that
might be lost by reverting, or there is reason to believe that the user
might be inconvenienced by auto-reverting, because he is actively
working on the buffer.  The user can always override this by manually
adjusting the modified status of the buffer.  To support this, calling
the `revert-buffer-function' on a buffer that is marked unmodified
should always keep the buffer marked unmodified.

   It is important to assure that point does not continuously jump
around as a consequence of auto-reverting.  Of course, moving point
might be inevitable if the buffer radically changes.

   You should make sure that the `revert-buffer-function' does not
print messages that unnecessarily duplicate Auto Revert's own messages,
displayed if `auto-revert-verbose' is `t', and effectively override a
`nil' value for `auto-revert-verbose'.  Hence, adapting a mode for
auto-reverting often involves getting rid of such messages.  This is
especially important for buffers that automatically revert every
`auto-revert-interval' seconds.

   If the new auto-reverting is part of Emacs, you should mention it in
the documentation string of `global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers'.

   Similarly, you should add a node to this chapter's menu.  This node
should at the very least make clear whether enabling auto-reverting for
the buffer reliably assures that all information in the buffer is
completely up to date (or will be after `auto-revert-interval' seconds).


File: emacs,  Node: Auto Save,  Next: File Aliases,  Prev: Autorevert,  Up: Files

22.6 Auto-Saving: Protection Against Disasters
==============================================

From time to time, Emacs automatically saves each visited file in a
separate file, without altering the file you actually use.  This is
called "auto-saving".  It prevents you from losing more than a limited
amount of work if the system crashes.

   When Emacs determines that it is time for auto-saving, it considers
each buffer, and each is auto-saved if auto-saving is enabled for it
and it has been changed since the last time it was auto-saved.  The
message `Auto-saving...' is displayed in the echo area during
auto-saving, if any files are actually auto-saved.  Errors occurring
during auto-saving are caught so that they do not interfere with the
execution of commands you have been typing.

* Menu:

* Files: Auto Save Files.       The file where auto-saved changes are
                                  actually made until you save the file.
* Control: Auto Save Control.   Controlling when and how often to auto-save.
* Recover::		        Recovering text from auto-save files.


File: emacs,  Node: Auto Save Files,  Next: Auto Save Control,  Up: Auto Save

22.6.1 Auto-Save Files
----------------------

Auto-saving does not normally save in the files that you visited,
because it can be very undesirable to save a change that you did not
want to make permanent.  Instead, auto-saving is done in a different
file called the "auto-save file", and the visited file is changed only
when you request saving explicitly (such as with `C-x C-s').

   Normally, the auto-save file name is made by appending `#' to the
front and rear of the visited file name.  Thus, a buffer visiting file
`foo.c' is auto-saved in a file `#foo.c#'.  Most buffers that are not
visiting files are auto-saved only if you request it explicitly; when
they are auto-saved, the auto-save file name is made by appending `#'
to the front and rear of buffer name, then adding digits and letters at
the end for uniqueness.  For example, the `*mail*' buffer in which you
compose messages to be sent might be auto-saved in a file named
`#*mail*#704juu'.  Auto-save file names are made this way unless you
reprogram parts of Emacs to do something different (the functions
`make-auto-save-file-name' and `auto-save-file-name-p').  The file name
to be used for auto-saving in a buffer is calculated when auto-saving
is turned on in that buffer.

   The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' allows a degree of
control over the auto-save file name.  It lets you specify a series of
regular expressions and replacements to transform the auto save file
name.  The default value puts the auto-save files for remote files
(*note Remote Files::) into the temporary file directory on the local
machine.

   When you delete a substantial part of the text in a large buffer,
auto save turns off temporarily in that buffer.  This is because if you
deleted the text unintentionally, you might find the auto-save file more
useful if it contains the deleted text.  To reenable auto-saving after
this happens, save the buffer with `C-x C-s', or use `C-u 1 M-x
auto-save-mode'.

   If you want auto-saving to be done in the visited file rather than
in a separate auto-save file, set the variable
`auto-save-visited-file-name' to a non-`nil' value.  In this mode,
there is no real difference between auto-saving and explicit saving.

   A buffer's auto-save file is deleted when you save the buffer in its
visited file.  (You can inhibit this by setting the variable
`delete-auto-save-files' to `nil'.)  Changing the visited file name
with `C-x C-w' or `set-visited-file-name' renames any auto-save file to
go with the new visited name.


File: emacs,  Node: Auto Save Control,  Next: Recover,  Prev: Auto Save Files,  Up: Auto Save

22.6.2 Controlling Auto-Saving
------------------------------

Each time you visit a file, auto-saving is turned on for that file's
buffer if the variable `auto-save-default' is non-`nil' (but not in
batch mode; *note Entering Emacs::).  The default for this variable is
`t', so auto-saving is the usual practice for file-visiting buffers.
Auto-saving can be turned on or off for any existing buffer with the
command `M-x auto-save-mode'.  Like other minor mode commands, `M-x
auto-save-mode' turns auto-saving on with a positive argument, off with
a zero or negative argument; with no argument, it toggles.

   Emacs does auto-saving periodically based on counting how many
characters you have typed since the last time auto-saving was done.
The variable `auto-save-interval' specifies how many characters there
are between auto-saves.  By default, it is 300.  Emacs doesn't accept
values that are too small: if you customize `auto-save-interval' to a
value less than 20, Emacs will behave as if the value is 20.

   Auto-saving also takes place when you stop typing for a while.  The
variable `auto-save-timeout' says how many seconds Emacs should wait
before it does an auto save (and perhaps also a garbage collection).
(The actual time period is longer if the current buffer is long; this
is a heuristic which aims to keep out of your way when you are editing
long buffers, in which auto-save takes an appreciable amount of time.)
Auto-saving during idle periods accomplishes two things: first, it
makes sure all your work is saved if you go away from the terminal for
a while; second, it may avoid some auto-saving while you are actually
typing.

   Emacs also does auto-saving whenever it gets a fatal error.  This
includes killing the Emacs job with a shell command such as `kill
%emacs', or disconnecting a phone line or network connection.

   You can request an auto-save explicitly with the command `M-x
do-auto-save'.


File: emacs,  Node: Recover,  Prev: Auto Save Control,  Up: Auto Save

22.6.3 Recovering Data from Auto-Saves
--------------------------------------

You can use the contents of an auto-save file to recover from a loss of
data with the command `M-x recover-file <RET> FILE <RET>'.  This visits
FILE and then (after your confirmation) restores the contents from its
auto-save file `#FILE#'.  You can then save with `C-x C-s' to put the
recovered text into FILE itself.  For example, to recover file `foo.c'
from its auto-save file `#foo.c#', do:

     M-x recover-file <RET> foo.c <RET>
     yes <RET>
     C-x C-s

   Before asking for confirmation, `M-x recover-file' displays a
directory listing describing the specified file and the auto-save file,
so you can compare their sizes and dates.  If the auto-save file is
older, `M-x recover-file' does not offer to read it.

   If Emacs or the computer crashes, you can recover all the files you
were editing from their auto save files with the command `M-x
recover-session'.  This first shows you a list of recorded interrupted
sessions.  Move point to the one you choose, and type `C-c C-c'.

   Then `recover-session' asks about each of the files that were being
edited during that session, asking whether to recover that file.  If
you answer `y', it calls `recover-file', which works in its normal
fashion.  It shows the dates of the original file and its auto-save
file, and asks once again whether to recover that file.

   When `recover-session' is done, the files you've chosen to recover
are present in Emacs buffers.  You should then save them.  Only
this--saving them--updates the files themselves.

   Emacs records information about interrupted sessions for later
recovery in files named
`~/.emacs.d/auto-save-list/.saves-PID-HOSTNAME'.  The directory used,
`~/.emacs.d/auto-save-list/', is determined by the variable
`auto-save-list-file-prefix'.  You can record sessions in a different
place by customizing that variable.  If you set
`auto-save-list-file-prefix' to `nil' in your `.emacs' file, sessions
are not recorded for recovery.


File: emacs,  Node: File Aliases,  Next: Directories,  Prev: Auto Save,  Up: Files

22.7 File Name Aliases
======================

Symbolic links and hard links both make it possible for several file
names to refer to the same file.  Hard links are alternate names that
refer directly to the file; all the names are equally valid, and no one
of them is preferred.  By contrast, a symbolic link is a kind of defined
alias: when `foo' is a symbolic link to `bar', you can use either name
to refer to the file, but `bar' is the real name, while `foo' is just
an alias.  More complex cases occur when symbolic links point to
directories.

   Normally, if you visit a file which Emacs is already visiting under
a different name, Emacs displays a message in the echo area and uses
the existing buffer visiting that file.  This can happen on systems
that support hard or symbolic links, or if you use a long file name on
a system that truncates long file names, or on a case-insensitive file
system.  You can suppress the message by setting the variable
`find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' to a non-`nil' value.  You can
disable this feature entirely by setting the variable
`find-file-existing-other-name' to `nil': then if you visit the same
file under two different names, you get a separate buffer for each file
name.

   If the variable `find-file-visit-truename' is non-`nil', then the
file name recorded for a buffer is the file's "truename" (made by
replacing all symbolic links with their target names), rather than the
name you specify.  Setting `find-file-visit-truename' also implies the
effect of `find-file-existing-other-name'.


File: emacs,  Node: Directories,  Next: Comparing Files,  Prev: File Aliases,  Up: Files

22.8 File Directories
=====================

The file system groups files into "directories".  A "directory listing"
is a list of all the files in a directory.  Emacs provides commands to
create and delete directories, and to make directory listings in brief
format (file names only) and verbose format (sizes, dates, and authors
included).  Emacs also includes a directory browser feature called
Dired; see *Note Dired::.

`C-x C-d DIR-OR-PATTERN <RET>'
     Display a brief directory listing (`list-directory').

`C-u C-x C-d DIR-OR-PATTERN <RET>'
     Display a verbose directory listing.

`M-x make-directory <RET> DIRNAME <RET>'
     Create a new directory named DIRNAME.

`M-x delete-directory <RET> DIRNAME <RET>'
     Delete the directory named DIRNAME.  If it isn't empty, you will
     be asked whether you want to delete it recursively.

   The command to display a directory listing is `C-x C-d'
(`list-directory').  It reads using the minibuffer a file name which is
either a directory to be listed or a wildcard-containing pattern for
the files to be listed.  For example,

     C-x C-d /u2/emacs/etc <RET>

lists all the files in directory `/u2/emacs/etc'.  Here is an example
of specifying a file name pattern:

     C-x C-d /u2/emacs/src/*.c <RET>

   Normally, `C-x C-d' displays a brief directory listing containing
just file names.  A numeric argument (regardless of value) tells it to
make a verbose listing including sizes, dates, and owners (like `ls
-l').

   The text of a directory listing is mostly obtained by running `ls'
in an inferior process.  Two Emacs variables control the switches
passed to `ls': `list-directory-brief-switches' is a string giving the
switches to use in brief listings (`"-CF"' by default), and
`list-directory-verbose-switches' is a string giving the switches to
use in a verbose listing (`"-l"' by default).

   In verbose directory listings, Emacs adds information about the
amount of free space on the disk that contains the directory.  To do
this, it runs the program specified by `directory-free-space-program'
with arguments `directory-free-space-args'.

   The command `M-x delete-directory' prompts for a directory name
using the minibuffer, and deletes the directory if it is empty.  If the
directory is not empty, you will be asked whether you want to delete it
recursively.  On systems that have a "Trash" or "Recycle Bin" feature,
you can make this command move the specified directory to the Trash or
Recycle Bin, instead of deleting it outright, by changing the variable
`delete-by-moving-to-trash' to `t'.  *Note Misc File Ops::, for more
information about using the Trash.


File: emacs,  Node: Comparing Files,  Next: Diff Mode,  Prev: Directories,  Up: Files

22.9 Comparing Files
====================

The command `M-x diff' prompts for two file names, using the
minibuffer, and displays the differences between the two files in a
buffer named `*diff*'.  This works by running the `diff' program, using
options taken from the variable `diff-switches'.  The value of
`diff-switches' should be a string; the default is `"-c"' to specify a
context diff.  *Note Diff: (diff)Top, for more information about `diff'
output formats.

   The output of the `diff' command is shown using a major mode called
Diff mode.  *Note Diff Mode::.

   The command `M-x diff-backup' compares a specified file with its
most recent backup.  If you specify the name of a backup file,
`diff-backup' compares it with the source file that it is a backup of.
In all other respects, this behaves like `M-x diff'.

   The command `M-x diff-buffer-with-file' compares a specified buffer
with its corresponding file.  This shows you what changes you would
make to the file if you save the buffer.

   The command `M-x compare-windows' compares the text in the current
window with that in the next window.  (For more information about
windows in Emacs, *Note Windows::.)  Comparison starts at point in each
window, after pushing each initial point value on the mark ring in its
respective buffer.  Then it moves point forward in each window, one
character at a time, until it reaches characters that don't match.
Then the command exits.

   If point in the two windows is followed by non-matching text when
the command starts, `M-x compare-windows' tries heuristically to
advance up to matching text in the two windows, and then exits.  So if
you use `M-x compare-windows' repeatedly, each time it either skips one
matching range or finds the start of another.

   With a numeric argument, `compare-windows' ignores changes in
whitespace.  If the variable `compare-ignore-case' is non-`nil', the
comparison ignores differences in case as well.  If the variable
`compare-ignore-whitespace' is non-`nil', `compare-windows' normally
ignores changes in whitespace, and a prefix argument turns that off.

   You can use `M-x smerge-mode' to turn on Smerge mode, a minor mode
for editing output from the `diff3' program.  This is typically the
result of a failed merge from a version control system "update" outside
VC, due to conflicting changes to a file.  Smerge mode provides
commands to resolve conflicts by selecting specific changes.

   *Note Emerge::, for the Emerge facility, which provides a powerful
interface for merging files.


File: emacs,  Node: Diff Mode,  Next: Misc File Ops,  Prev: Comparing Files,  Up: Files

22.10 Diff Mode
===============

Diff mode is a major mode used for the output of `M-x diff' and other
similar commands, as well as the output of the `diff' program.  This
kind of output is called a "patch", because it can be passed to the
`patch' command to automatically apply the specified changes.  To
select Diff mode manually, type `M-x diff-mode'.

   The changes specified in a patch are grouped into "hunks", which are
contiguous chunks of text that contain one or more changed lines.
Hunks can also include unchanged lines to provide context for the
changes.  Each hunk is preceded by a "hunk header", which specifies the
old and new line numbers at which the hunk occurs.  Diff mode
highlights each hunk header, to distinguish it from the actual contents
of the hunk.

   You can edit a Diff mode buffer like any other buffer.  (If it is
read-only, you need to make it writable first.  *Note Misc Buffer::.)
Whenever you change a hunk, Diff mode attempts to automatically correct
the line numbers in the hunk headers, to ensure that the diff remains
"correct".  To disable automatic line number correction, change the
variable `diff-update-on-the-fly' to `nil'.

   Diff mode treats each hunk as an "error message," similar to
Compilation mode.  Thus, you can use commands such as `C-x '' to visit
the corresponding source locations.  *Note Compilation Mode::.

   In addition, Diff mode provides the following commands to navigate,
manipulate and apply parts of patches:

`M-n'
     Move to the next hunk-start (`diff-hunk-next').

`M-p'
     Move to the previous hunk-start (`diff-hunk-prev').

`M-}'
     Move to the next file-start, in a multi-file patch
     (`diff-file-next').

`M-{'
     Move to the previous file-start, in a multi-file patch
     (`diff-file-prev').

`M-k'
     Kill the hunk at point (`diff-hunk-kill').

`M-K'
     In a multi-file patch, kill the current file part.
     (`diff-file-kill').

`C-c C-a'
     Apply this hunk to its target file (`diff-apply-hunk').  With a
     prefix argument of `C-u', revert this hunk.

`C-c C-b'
     Highlight the changes of the hunk at point with a finer granularity
     (`diff-refine-hunk').  This allows you to see exactly which parts
     of each changed line were actually changed.

`C-c C-c'
     Go to the source file and line corresponding to this hunk
     (`diff-goto-source').

`C-c C-e'
     Start an Ediff session with the patch (`diff-ediff-patch').  *Note
     Ediff: (ediff)Top.

`C-c C-n'
     Restrict the view to the current hunk (`diff-restrict-view').
     *Note Narrowing::.  With a prefix argument of `C-u', restrict the
     view to the current file of a multiple-file patch.  To widen again,
     use `C-x n w' (`widen').

`C-c C-r'
     Reverse the direction of comparison for the entire buffer
     (`diff-reverse-direction').

`C-c C-s'
     Split the hunk at point (`diff-split-hunk').  This is for manually
     editing patches, and only works with the "unified diff format"
     produced by the `-u' or `--unified' options to the `diff' program.
     If you need to split a hunk in the "context diff format" produced
     by the `-c' or `--context' options to `diff', first convert the
     buffer to the unified diff format with `C-c C-u'.

`C-c C-d'
     Convert the entire buffer to the "context diff format"
     (`diff-unified->context').  With a prefix argument, convert only
     the text within the region.

`C-c C-u'
     Convert the entire buffer to unified diff format
     (`diff-context->unified').  With a prefix argument, convert
     unified format to context format.  When the mark is active, convert
     only the text within the region.

`C-c C-w'
     Refine the current hunk so that it disregards changes in whitespace
     (`diff-refine-hunk').

`C-x 4 A'
     Generate a ChangeLog entry, like `C-x 4 a' does (*note Change
     Log::), for each one of the hunks
     (`diff-add-change-log-entries-other-window').  This creates a
     skeleton of the log of changes that you can later fill with the
     actual descriptions of the changes.  `C-x 4 a' itself in Diff mode
     operates on behalf of the current hunk's file, but gets the
     function name from the patch itself.  This is useful for making
     log entries for functions that are deleted by the patch.

`M-x diff-show-trailing-whitespaces RET'
     Highlight trailing whitespace characters, except for those used by
     the patch syntax (*note Useless Whitespace::).


File: emacs,  Node: Misc File Ops,  Next: Compressed Files,  Prev: Diff Mode,  Up: Files

22.11 Miscellaneous File Operations
===================================

Emacs has commands for performing many other operations on files.  All
operate on one file; they do not accept wildcard file names.

   `M-x view-file' allows you to scan or read a file by sequential
screenfuls.  It reads a file name argument using the minibuffer.  After
reading the file into an Emacs buffer, `view-file' displays the
beginning.  You can then type <SPC> to scroll forward one windowful, or
<DEL> to scroll backward.  Various other commands are provided for
moving around in the file, but none for changing it; type `?' while
viewing for a list of them.  They are mostly the same as normal Emacs
cursor motion commands.  To exit from viewing, type `q'.  The commands
for viewing are defined by a special minor mode called View mode.

   A related command, `M-x view-buffer', views a buffer already present
in Emacs.  *Note Misc Buffer::.

   `M-x insert-file' (also `C-x i') inserts a copy of the contents of
the specified file into the current buffer at point, leaving point
unchanged before the contents.  The position after the inserted
contents is added to the mark ring, without activating the mark (*note
Mark Ring::).

   `M-x insert-file-literally' is like `M-x insert-file', except the
file is inserted "literally": it is treated as a sequence of ASCII
characters with no special encoding or conversion, similar to the `M-x
find-file-literally' command (*note Visiting::).

   `M-x write-region' is the inverse of `M-x insert-file'; it copies
the contents of the region into the specified file.  `M-x
append-to-file' adds the text of the region to the end of the specified
file.  *Note Accumulating Text::.  The variable
`write-region-inhibit-fsync' applies to these commands, as well as
saving files; see *Note Customize Save::.

   `M-x delete-file' deletes the specified file, like the `rm' command
in the shell.  If you are deleting many files in one directory, it may
be more convenient to use Dired rather than `delete-file'.  *Note
Dired::.

   On some systems, there is a facility called the "Trash" (or "Recycle
Bin"); "deleting" a file normally means moving it into the Trash, and
you can bring the file back from the Trash if you later change your
mind.  By default, Emacs does _not_ use the Trash for file
deletion--when Emacs deletes a file, it is gone forever.  You can tell
Emacs to use the Trash by changing the variable
`delete-by-moving-to-trash' to `t'.  This applies to file deletion via
`M-x delete-file', as well as `M-x delete-directory' (*note
Directories::) and file deletion in Dired (*note Dired Deletion::).  In
addition, you can explicitly move a file into the Trash with the
command `M-x move-file-to-trash'.

   `M-x rename-file' reads two file names OLD and NEW using the
minibuffer, then renames file OLD as NEW.  If the file name NEW already
exists, you must confirm with `yes' or renaming is not done; this is
because renaming causes the old meaning of the name NEW to be lost.  If
OLD and NEW are on different file systems, the file OLD is copied and
deleted.

   If the argument NEW is just a directory name, the real new name is
in that directory, with the same non-directory component as OLD.  For
example, `M-x rename-file RET ~/foo RET /tmp RET' renames `~/foo' to
`/tmp/foo'.  The same rule applies to all the remaining commands in
this section.  All of them ask for confirmation when the new file name
already exists, too.

   The similar command `M-x add-name-to-file' is used to add an
additional name to an existing file without removing its old name.  The
new name is created as a "hard link" to the existing file.  The new
name must belong on the same file system that the file is on.  On
MS-Windows, this command works only if the file resides in an NTFS file
system.  On MS-DOS, it works by copying the file.

   `M-x copy-file' reads the file OLD and writes a new file named NEW
with the same contents.  `M-x copy-directory' does the same for
directories, by recursive copying all files and subdirectories.

   `M-x make-symbolic-link' reads two file names TARGET and LINKNAME,
then creates a symbolic link named LINKNAME, which points at TARGET.
The effect is that future attempts to open file LINKNAME will refer to
whatever file is named TARGET at the time the opening is done, or will
get an error if the name TARGET is nonexistent at that time.  This
command does not expand the argument TARGET, so that it allows you to
specify a relative name as the target of the link.

   Not all systems support symbolic links; on systems that don't
support them, this command is not defined.

   `M-x set-file-modes' reads a file name followed by a "file mode",
and applies that file mode to the specified file.  File modes, also
called "file permissions", determine whether a file can be read,
written to, or executed, and by whom.  This command reads file modes
using the same symbolic or octal format accepted by the `chmod'
command; for instance, `u+x' means to add execution permission for the
user who owns the file.  It has no effect on operating systems that do
not support file modes.  `chmod' is a convenience alias for this
function.


File: emacs,  Node: Compressed Files,  Next: File Archives,  Prev: Misc File Ops,  Up: Files

22.12 Accessing Compressed Files
================================

Emacs automatically uncompresses compressed files when you visit them,
and automatically recompresses them if you alter them and save them.
Emacs recognizes compressed files by their file names.  File names
ending in `.gz' indicate a file compressed with `gzip'.  Other endings
indicate other compression programs.

   Automatic uncompression and compression apply to all the operations
in which Emacs uses the contents of a file.  This includes visiting it,
saving it, inserting its contents into a buffer, loading it, and byte
compiling it.

   To disable this feature, type the command `M-x
auto-compression-mode'.  You can disable it permanently by customizing
the variable `auto-compression-mode'.


File: emacs,  Node: File Archives,  Next: Remote Files,  Prev: Compressed Files,  Up: Files

22.13 File Archives
===================

A file whose name ends in `.tar' is normally an "archive" made by the
`tar' program.  Emacs views these files in a special mode called Tar
mode which provides a Dired-like list of the contents (*note Dired::).
You can move around through the list just as you would in Dired, and
visit the subfiles contained in the archive.  However, not all Dired
commands are available in Tar mode.

   If Auto Compression mode is enabled (*note Compressed Files::), then
Tar mode is used also for compressed archives--files with extensions
`.tgz', `.tar.Z' and `.tar.gz'.

   The keys `e', `f' and <RET> all extract a component file into its
own buffer.  You can edit it there, and if you save the buffer, the
edited version will replace the version in the Tar buffer.  `v'
extracts a file into a buffer in View mode.  `o' extracts the file and
displays it in another window, so you could edit the file and operate
on the archive simultaneously.  `d' marks a file for deletion when you
later use `x', and `u' unmarks a file, as in Dired.  `C' copies a file
from the archive to disk and `R' renames a file within the archive.
`g' reverts the buffer from the archive on disk.

   The keys `M', `G', and `O' change the file's permission bits, group,
and owner, respectively.

   If your display supports colors and the mouse, moving the mouse
pointer across a file name highlights that file name, indicating that
you can click on it.  Clicking `Mouse-2' on the highlighted file name
extracts the file into a buffer and displays that buffer.

   Saving the Tar buffer writes a new version of the archive to disk
with the changes you made to the components.

   You don't need the `tar' program to use Tar mode--Emacs reads the
archives directly.  However, accessing compressed archives requires the
appropriate uncompression program.

   A separate but similar Archive mode is used for archives produced by
the programs `arc', `jar', `lzh', `zip', `rar', and `zoo', which have
extensions corresponding to the program names.  Archive mode also works
for those `exe' files that are self-extracting executables.

   The key bindings of Archive mode are similar to those in Tar mode,
with the addition of the `m' key which marks a file for subsequent
operations, and `M-<DEL>' which unmarks all the marked files.  Also,
the `a' key toggles the display of detailed file information, for those
archive types where it won't fit in a single line.  Operations such as
renaming a subfile, or changing its mode or owner, are supported only
for some of the archive formats.

   Unlike Tar mode, Archive mode runs the archiving program to unpack
and repack archives.  Details of the program names and their options
can be set in the `Archive' Customize group.  However, you don't need
these programs to look at the archive table of contents, only to
extract or manipulate the subfiles in the archive.


File: emacs,  Node: Remote Files,  Next: Quoted File Names,  Prev: File Archives,  Up: Files

22.14 Remote Files
==================

You can refer to files on other machines using a special file name
syntax:

     /HOST:FILENAME
     /USER@HOST:FILENAME
     /USER@HOST#PORT:FILENAME
     /METHOD:USER@HOST:FILENAME
     /METHOD:USER@HOST#PORT:FILENAME

To carry out this request, Emacs uses a remote-login program such as
`ftp', `ssh', `rlogin', or `telnet'.  You can always specify in the
file name which method to use--for example, `/ftp:USER@HOST:FILENAME'
uses FTP, whereas `/ssh:USER@HOST:FILENAME' uses `ssh'.  When you don't
specify a method in the file name, Emacs chooses the method as follows:

  1. If the host name starts with `ftp.' (with dot), then Emacs uses
     FTP.

  2. If the user name is `ftp' or `anonymous', then Emacs uses FTP.

  3. If the variable `tramp-default-method' is set to `ftp', then Emacs
     uses FTP.

  4. If `ssh-agent' is running, then Emacs uses `scp'.

  5. Otherwise, Emacs uses `ssh'.

You can entirely turn off the remote file name feature by setting the
variable `tramp-mode' to `nil'.  You can turn off the feature in
individual cases by quoting the file name with `/:' (*note Quoted File
Names::).

   Remote file access through FTP is handled by the Ange-FTP package,
which is documented in the following.  Remote file access through the
other methods is handled by the Tramp package, which has its own manual.
*Note The Tramp Manual: (tramp)Top.

   When the Ange-FTP package is used, Emacs logs in through FTP using
your user name or the name USER.  It may ask you for a password from
time to time (*note Passwords::); this is used for logging in on HOST.
The form using PORT allows you to access servers running on a
non-default TCP port.

   If you want to disable backups for remote files, set the variable
`ange-ftp-make-backup-files' to `nil'.

   By default, the auto-save files (*note Auto Save Files::) for remote
files are made in the temporary file directory on the local machine.
This is achieved using the variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms'.

   Normally, if you do not specify a user name in a remote file name,
that means to use your own user name.  But if you set the variable
`ange-ftp-default-user' to a string, that string is used instead.

   To visit files accessible by anonymous FTP, you use special user
names `anonymous' or `ftp'.  Passwords for these user names are handled
specially.  The variable `ange-ftp-generate-anonymous-password'
controls what happens: if the value of this variable is a string, then
that string is used as the password; if non-`nil' (the default), then
the value of `user-mail-address' is used; if `nil', then Emacs prompts
you for a password as usual (*note Passwords::).

   Sometimes you may be unable to access files on a remote machine
because a "firewall" in between blocks the connection for security
reasons.  If you can log in on a "gateway" machine from which the
target files _are_ accessible, and whose FTP server supports gatewaying
features, you can still use remote file names; all you have to do is
specify the name of the gateway machine by setting the variable
`ange-ftp-gateway-host', and set `ange-ftp-smart-gateway' to `t'.
Otherwise you may be able to make remote file names work, but the
procedure is complex.  You can read the instructions by typing `M-x
finder-commentary <RET> ange-ftp <RET>'.


File: emacs,  Node: Quoted File Names,  Next: File Name Cache,  Prev: Remote Files,  Up: Files

22.15 Quoted File Names
=======================

You can "quote" an absolute file name to prevent special characters and
syntax in it from having their special effects.  The way to do this is
to add `/:' at the beginning.

   For example, you can quote a local file name which appears remote, to
prevent it from being treated as a remote file name.  Thus, if you have
a directory named `/foo:' and a file named `bar' in it, you can refer
to that file in Emacs as `/:/foo:/bar'.

   `/:' can also prevent `~' from being treated as a special character
for a user's home directory.  For example, `/:/tmp/~hack' refers to a
file whose name is `~hack' in directory `/tmp'.

   Quoting with `/:' is also a way to enter in the minibuffer a file
name that contains `$'.  In order for this to work, the `/:' must be at
the beginning of the minibuffer contents.  (You can also double each
`$'; see *Note File Names with $::.)

   You can also quote wildcard characters with `/:', for visiting.  For
example, `/:/tmp/foo*bar' visits the file `/tmp/foo*bar'.

   Another method of getting the same result is to enter
`/tmp/foo[*]bar', which is a wildcard specification that matches only
`/tmp/foo*bar'.  However, in many cases there is no need to quote the
wildcard characters because even unquoted they give the right result.
For example, if the only file name in `/tmp' that starts with `foo' and
ends with `bar' is `foo*bar', then specifying `/tmp/foo*bar' will visit
only `/tmp/foo*bar'.


File: emacs,  Node: File Name Cache,  Next: File Conveniences,  Prev: Quoted File Names,  Up: Files

22.16 File Name Cache
=====================

You can use the "file name cache" to make it easy to locate a file by
name, without having to remember exactly where it is located.  When
typing a file name in the minibuffer, `C-<tab>'
(`file-cache-minibuffer-complete') completes it using the file name
cache.  If you repeat `C-<tab>', that cycles through the possible
completions of what you had originally typed.  (However, note that the
`C-<tab>' character cannot be typed on most text-only terminals.)

   The file name cache does not fill up automatically.  Instead, you
load file names into the cache using these commands:

`M-x file-cache-add-directory <RET> DIRECTORY <RET>'
     Add each file name in DIRECTORY to the file name cache.

`M-x file-cache-add-directory-using-find <RET> DIRECTORY <RET>'
     Add each file name in DIRECTORY and all of its nested
     subdirectories to the file name cache.

`M-x file-cache-add-directory-using-locate <RET> DIRECTORY <RET>'
     Add each file name in DIRECTORY and all of its nested
     subdirectories to the file name cache, using `locate' to find them
     all.

`M-x file-cache-add-directory-list <RET> VARIABLE <RET>'
     Add each file name in each directory listed in VARIABLE to the
     file name cache.  VARIABLE should be a Lisp variable such as
     `load-path' or `exec-path', whose value is a list of directory
     names.

`M-x file-cache-clear-cache <RET>'
     Clear the cache; that is, remove all file names from it.

   The file name cache is not persistent: it is kept and maintained
only for the duration of the Emacs session.  You can view the contents
of the cache with the `file-cache-display' command.


File: emacs,  Node: File Conveniences,  Next: Filesets,  Prev: File Name Cache,  Up: Files

22.17 Convenience Features for Finding Files
============================================

In this section, we introduce some convenient facilities for finding
recently-opened files, reading file names from a buffer, and viewing
image files.

   If you enable Recentf mode, with `M-x recentf-mode', the `File' menu
includes a submenu containing a list of recently opened files.  `M-x
recentf-save-list' saves the current `recent-file-list' to a file, and
`M-x recentf-edit-list' edits it.

   The `M-x ffap' command generalizes `find-file' with more powerful
heuristic defaults (*note FFAP::), often based on the text at point.
Partial Completion mode offers other features extending `find-file',
which can be used with `ffap'.  *Note Completion Options::.

   Visiting image files automatically selects Image mode.  This major
mode allows you to toggle between displaying the file as an image in
the Emacs buffer, and displaying its underlying text representation,
using the command `C-c C-c' (`image-toggle-display').  This works only
when Emacs can display the specific image type.  If the displayed image
is wider or taller than the frame, the usual point motion keys (`C-f',
`C-p', and so forth) cause different parts of the image to be displayed.

   See also the Image-Dired package (*note Image-Dired::) for viewing
images as thumbnails.


File: emacs,  Node: Filesets,  Prev: File Conveniences,  Up: Files

22.18 Filesets
==============

If you regularly edit a certain group of files, you can define them as
a "fileset".  This lets you perform certain operations, such as
visiting, `query-replace', and shell commands on all the files at once.
To make use of filesets, you must first add the expression
`(filesets-init)' to your `.emacs' file (*note Init File::).  This adds
a `Filesets' menu to the menu bar.

   The simplest way to define a fileset is by adding files to it one at
a time.  To add a file to fileset NAME, visit the file and type `M-x
filesets-add-buffer RET NAME RET'.  If there is no fileset NAME, this
creates a new one, which initially creates only the current file.  The
command `M-x filesets-remove-buffer' removes the current file from a
fileset.

   You can also edit the list of filesets directly, with `M-x
filesets-edit' (or by choosing `Edit Filesets' from the `Filesets'
menu).  The editing is performed in a Customize buffer (*note Easy
Customization::).  Filesets need not be a simple list of files--you can
also define filesets using regular expression matching file names.
Some examples of these more complicated filesets are shown in the
Customize buffer.  Remember to select `Save for future sessions' if you
want to use the same filesets in future Emacs sessions.

   You can use the command `M-x filesets-open' to visit all the files
in a fileset, and `M-x filesets-close' to close them.  Use `M-x
filesets-run-cmd' to run a shell command on all the files in a fileset.
These commands are also available from the `Filesets' menu, where each
existing fileset is represented by a submenu.

   Emacs uses the concept of a fileset elsewhere *note Version
Control:: to describe sets of files to be treated as a group for
purposes of version control operations.  Those filesets are unnamed and
do not persist across Emacs sessions.


File: emacs,  Node: Buffers,  Next: Windows,  Prev: Files,  Up: Top

23 Using Multiple Buffers
*************************

The text you are editing in Emacs resides in an object called a
"buffer".  Each time you visit a file, a buffer is created to hold the
file's text.  Each time you invoke Dired, a buffer is created to hold
the directory listing.  If you send a message with `C-x m', a buffer
named `*mail*' is used to hold the text of the message.  When you ask
for a command's documentation, that appears in a buffer called `*Help*'.

   Each buffer has a unique name, which can be of any length.  When a
buffer is displayed in a window, its name is shown in the mode line
(*note Mode Line::).  The distinction between upper and lower case
matters in buffer names.  Most buffers are made by visiting files, and
their names are derived from the files' names; however, you can also
create an empty buffer with any name you want.  A newly started Emacs
has a buffer named `*scratch*', which is not associated with any file
and can be used for evaluating Lisp expressions in Emacs (*note Lisp
Interaction::).

   At any time, one and only one buffer is "current".  This is also
called the "selected buffer".  We often say that a command operates on
"the buffer"; this really means that the command operates on the
current buffer (most commands do).  When there is only one Emacs
window, the buffer displayed in that window is current.  When there are
multiple windows present, the buffer displayed in the "selected window"
is current.  *Note Windows::.

   Each buffer records individually what file it is visiting (if any),
whether it is modified, and what major mode and minor modes are in
effect (*note Major Modes::).  Any Emacs variable can be made "local
to" a particular buffer, meaning its value in that buffer can be
different from the value in other buffers.  *Note Locals::.

   A buffer's size cannot be larger than some maximum, which is defined
by the largest buffer position representable by the "Emacs integer"
data type.  This is because Emacs tracks buffer positions using that
data type.  For 32-bit machines, the largest buffer size is 512
megabytes.

* Menu:

* Select Buffer::       Creating a new buffer or reselecting an old one.
* List Buffers::        Getting a list of buffers that exist.
* Misc Buffer::	        Renaming; changing read-onlyness; copying text.
* Kill Buffer::	        Killing buffers you no longer need.
* Several Buffers::     How to go through the list of all buffers
			  and operate variously on several of them.
* Indirect Buffers::    An indirect buffer shares the text of another buffer.
* Buffer Convenience::  Convenience and customization features for
                          buffer handling.


File: emacs,  Node: Select Buffer,  Next: List Buffers,  Up: Buffers

23.1 Creating and Selecting Buffers
===================================

`C-x b BUFFER <RET>'
     Select or create a buffer named BUFFER (`switch-to-buffer').

`C-x 4 b BUFFER <RET>'
     Similar, but select BUFFER in another window
     (`switch-to-buffer-other-window').

`C-x 5 b BUFFER <RET>'
     Similar, but select BUFFER in a separate frame
     (`switch-to-buffer-other-frame').

`C-x <LEFT>'
     Select the previous buffer in the list of existing buffers.

`C-x <RIGHT>'
     Select the next buffer in the list of existing buffers.

`C-u M-g M-g'
`C-u M-g g'
     Read a number N and move to line N in the most recently selected
     buffer other than the current buffer.

   To select the buffer named BUFNAME, type `C-x b BUFNAME <RET>'.
This runs the command `switch-to-buffer' with argument BUFNAME.  While
entering the buffer name, you can use the usual minibuffer completion
and history commands (*note Minibuffer::).  An empty argument to `C-x
b' specifies the buffer that was current most recently among those not
now displayed in any window.

   If you specify a buffer that does not exist, `C-x b' creates a new,
empty buffer that is not visiting any file, and selects it for editing.
First, however, Emacs might prompt you for confirmation, in case you
entered the wrong buffer name.  Emacs asks for confirmation only if the
last key you typed, before submitting the minibuffer input with <RET>,
was <TAB> (`minibuffer-complete').  This catches a common mistake, in
which one types <RET> before realizing that <TAB> did not complete far
enough to yield the desired buffer name (*note Completion::).  Emacs
asks for confirmation by putting the message `[Confirm]' in the
minibuffer; type <RET> again to confirm and visit the buffer.

   The variable `confirm-nonexistent-file-or-buffer' controls whether
Emacs asks for confirmation before visiting a buffer that did not
previously exist.  The default value, `after-completion', gives the
behavior we have just described.  If the value is `nil', Emacs never
asks for confirmation; for any other non-`nil' value, Emacs always asks
for confirmation.  This variable also affects the `find-file' command
(*note Visiting::).

   One reason to create a new buffer is to use it for making temporary
notes.  If you try to save it, Emacs asks for the file name to use.
The default value of the variable `major-mode' determines the new
buffer's major mode; the default value is Fundamental mode.  *Note
Major Modes::.

   For conveniently switching between a few buffers, use the commands
`C-x <LEFT>' and `C-x <RIGHT>'.  `C-x <RIGHT>' (`previous-buffer')
selects the previous buffer (following the order of most recent
selection in the current frame), while `C-x <LEFT>' (`next-buffer')
moves through buffers in the reverse direction.

   To select a buffer in a window other than the current one, type `C-x
4 b' (`switch-to-buffer-other-window').  This prompts for a buffer name
using the minibuffer, displays that buffer in another window, and
selects that window.  By default, if displaying the buffer causes two
vertically adjacent windows to be displayed, the heights of those
windows are evened out; to countermand that and preserve the window
configuration, set the variable `even-window-heights' to `nil'.

   Similarly, `C-x 5 b' (`switch-to-buffer-other-frame') prompts for a
buffer name, displays that buffer in another frame, and selects that
frame.

   In addition, `C-x C-f', and any other command for visiting a file,
can also be used to switch to an existing file-visiting buffer.  *Note
Visiting::.

   You can control how certain buffers are handled by these commands by
customizing the variables `special-display-buffer-names',
`special-display-regexps', `same-window-buffer-names', and
`same-window-regexps'.  See *Note Force Same Window::, and *Note
Special Buffer Frames::, for more about these variables.  In addition,
if the value of `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is non-`nil', and the
buffer you want to switch to is already displayed in some frame, Emacs
will just raise that frame.

   `C-u M-g M-g', that is `goto-line' with a plain prefix argument,
reads a number N using the minibuffer, selects the most recently
selected buffer other than the current buffer in another window, and
then moves point to the beginning of line number N in that buffer.
This is mainly useful in a buffer that refers to line numbers in
another buffer: if point is on or just after a number, `goto-line' uses
that number as the default for N.  Note that prefix arguments other
than just `C-u' behave differently.  `C-u 4 M-g M-g' goes to line 4 in
the _current_ buffer, without reading a number from the minibuffer.
(Remember that `M-g M-g' without prefix argument reads a number N and
then moves to line number N in the current buffer.  *Note Moving
Point::.)

   Emacs uses buffer names that start with a space for internal
purposes.  It treats these buffers specially in minor ways--for
example, by default they do not record undo information.  It is best to
avoid using such buffer names yourself.


File: emacs,  Node: List Buffers,  Next: Misc Buffer,  Prev: Select Buffer,  Up: Buffers

23.2 Listing Existing Buffers
=============================

`C-x C-b'
     List the existing buffers (`list-buffers').

   To display a list of existing buffers, type `C-x C-b'.  Each line in
the list shows one buffer's name, major mode and visited file.  The
buffers are listed in the order that they were current; the buffers
that were current most recently come first.

   `.' in the first field of a line indicates that the buffer is
current.  `%' indicates a read-only buffer.  `*' indicates that the
buffer is "modified."  If several buffers are modified, it may be time
to save some with `C-x s' (*note Save Commands::).  Here is an example
of a buffer list:

     CRM Buffer                Size  Mode              File
     . * .emacs                3294  Emacs-Lisp        ~/.emacs
      %  *Help*                 101  Help
         search.c             86055  C                 ~/cvs/emacs/src/search.c
      %  src                  20959  Dired by name     ~/cvs/emacs/src/
       * *mail*                  42  Mail
      %  HELLO                 1607  Fundamental       ~/cvs/emacs/etc/HELLO
      %  NEWS                481184  Outline           ~/cvs/emacs/etc/NEWS
         *scratch*              191  Lisp Interaction
       * *Messages*            1554  Fundamental

The buffer `*Help*' was made by a help request (*note Help::); it is
not visiting any file.  The buffer `src' was made by Dired on the
directory `~/cvs/emacs/src/'.  You can list only buffers that are
visiting files by giving the command a prefix argument, as in `C-u C-x
C-b'.

   `list-buffers' omits buffers whose names begin with a space, unless
they visit files: such buffers are used internally by Emacs.


File: emacs,  Node: Misc Buffer,  Next: Kill Buffer,  Prev: List Buffers,  Up: Buffers

23.3 Miscellaneous Buffer Operations
====================================

`C-x C-q'
     Toggle read-only status of buffer (`toggle-read-only').

`M-x rename-buffer <RET> NAME <RET>'
     Change the name of the current buffer.

`M-x rename-uniquely'
     Rename the current buffer by adding `<NUMBER>' to the end.

`M-x view-buffer <RET> BUFFER <RET>'
     Scroll through buffer BUFFER.

   A buffer can be "read-only", which means that commands to change its
contents are not allowed.  The mode line indicates read-only buffers
with `%%' or `%*' near the left margin.  Read-only buffers are usually
made by subsystems such as Dired and Rmail that have special commands
to operate on the text; also by visiting a file whose access control
says you cannot write it.

   If you wish to make changes in a read-only buffer, use the command
`C-x C-q' (`toggle-read-only').  It makes a read-only buffer writable,
and makes a writable buffer read-only.  This works by setting the
variable `buffer-read-only', which has a local value in each buffer and
makes the buffer read-only if its value is non-`nil'.  If you have
files under version control, you may find it convenient to bind `C-x
C-q' to `vc-toggle-read-only' instead.  This will guard you against an
operation that will confuse most modern version-conmtrol systems. *Note
Version Control::.

   `M-x rename-buffer' changes the name of the current buffer.  You
specify the new name as a minibuffer argument; there is no default.  If
you specify a name that is in use for some other buffer, an error
happens and no renaming is done.

   `M-x rename-uniquely' renames the current buffer to a similar name
with a numeric suffix added to make it both different and unique.  This
command does not need an argument.  It is useful for creating multiple
shell buffers: if you rename the `*shell*' buffer, then do `M-x shell'
again, it makes a new shell buffer named `*shell*'; meanwhile, the old
shell buffer continues to exist under its new name.  This method is
also good for mail buffers, compilation buffers, and most Emacs
features that create special buffers with particular names.  (With some
of these features, such as `M-x compile', `M-x grep' an `M-x info', you
need to switch to some other buffer before using the command, in order
for it to make a different buffer.)

   `M-x view-buffer' is much like `M-x view-file' (*note Misc File
Ops::) except that it examines an already existing Emacs buffer.  View
mode provides commands for scrolling through the buffer conveniently
but not for changing it.  When you exit View mode with `q', that
switches back to the buffer (and the position) which was previously
displayed in the window.  Alternatively, if you exit View mode with
`e', the buffer and the value of point that resulted from your perusal
remain in effect.

   The commands `M-x append-to-buffer' and `M-x insert-buffer' can be
used to copy text from one buffer to another.  *Note Accumulating
Text::.


File: emacs,  Node: Kill Buffer,  Next: Several Buffers,  Prev: Misc Buffer,  Up: Buffers

23.4 Killing Buffers
====================

If you continue an Emacs session for a while, you may accumulate a
large number of buffers.  You may then find it convenient to "kill" the
buffers you no longer need.  On most operating systems, killing a
buffer releases its space back to the operating system so that other
programs can use it.  Here are some commands for killing buffers:

`C-x k BUFNAME <RET>'
     Kill buffer BUFNAME (`kill-buffer').

`M-x kill-some-buffers'
     Offer to kill each buffer, one by one.

`M-x kill-matching-buffers'
     Offer to kill all buffers matching a regular expression.

   `C-x k' (`kill-buffer') kills one buffer, whose name you specify in
the minibuffer.  The default, used if you type just <RET> in the
minibuffer, is to kill the current buffer.  If you kill the current
buffer, another buffer becomes current: one that was current in the
recent past but is not displayed in any window now.  If you ask to kill
a file-visiting buffer that is modified, then you must confirm with
`yes' before the buffer is killed.

   The command `M-x kill-some-buffers' asks about each buffer, one by
one.  An answer of `y' means to kill the buffer, just like
`kill-buffer'.  This command ignores buffers whose names begin with a
space, which are used internally by Emacs.

   The command `M-x kill-matching-buffers' prompts for a regular
expression and kills all buffers whose names match that expression.
*Note Regexps::.  Like `kill-some-buffers', it asks for confirmation
before each kill.  This command normally ignores buffers whose names
begin with a space, which are used internally by Emacs.  To kill
internal buffers as well, call `kill-matching-buffers' with a prefix
argument.

   The buffer menu feature is also convenient for killing various
buffers.  *Note Several Buffers::.

   If you want to do something special every time a buffer is killed,
you can add hook functions to the hook `kill-buffer-hook' (*note
Hooks::).

   If you run one Emacs session for a period of days, as many people do,
it can fill up with buffers that you used several days ago.  The command
`M-x clean-buffer-list' is a convenient way to purge them; it kills all
the unmodified buffers that you have not used for a long time.  An
ordinary buffer is killed if it has not been displayed for three days;
however, you can specify certain buffers that should never be killed
automatically, and others that should be killed if they have been unused
for a mere hour.

   You can also have this buffer purging done for you, every day at
midnight, by enabling Midnight mode.  Midnight mode operates each day
at midnight; at that time, it runs `clean-buffer-list', or whichever
functions you have placed in the normal hook `midnight-hook' (*note
Hooks::).  To enable Midnight mode, use the Customization buffer to set
the variable `midnight-mode' to `t'.  *Note Easy Customization::.


File: emacs,  Node: Several Buffers,  Next: Indirect Buffers,  Prev: Kill Buffer,  Up: Buffers

23.5 Operating on Several Buffers
=================================

`M-x buffer-menu'
     Begin editing a buffer listing all Emacs buffers.

`M-x buffer-menu-other-window.'
     Similar, but do it in another window.

   The "buffer menu" opened by `C-x C-b' (*note List Buffers::) does
not merely list buffers.  It also allows you to perform various
operations on buffers, through an interface similar to Dired (*note
Dired::).  You can save buffers, kill them (here called "deleting"
them, for consistency with Dired), or display them.

   To use the buffer menu, type `C-x C-b' and switch to the window
displaying the `*Buffer List*' buffer.  You can also type `M-x
buffer-menu' to open the buffer menu in the selected window.
Alternatively, the command `M-x buffer-menu-other-window' opens the
buffer menu in another window, and selects that window.

   The buffer menu is a read-only buffer, and can be changed only
through the special commands described in this section.  The usual
Emacs cursor motion commands can be used in this buffer.  The following
commands apply to the buffer described on the current line:

`d'
     Request to delete (kill) the buffer, then move down.  The request
     shows as a `D' on the line, before the buffer name.  Requested
     deletions take place when you type the `x' command.

`C-d'
     Like `d' but move up afterwards instead of down.

`s'
     Request to save the buffer.  The request shows as an `S' on the
     line.  Requested saves take place when you type the `x' command.
     You may request both saving and deletion for the same buffer.

`x'
     Perform previously requested deletions and saves.

`u'
     Remove any request made for the current line, and move down.

`<DEL>'
     Move to previous line and remove any request made for that line.

   The `d', `C-d', `s' and `u' commands to add or remove flags also
move down (or up) one line.  They accept a numeric argument as a repeat
count.

   These commands operate immediately on the buffer listed on the
current line:

`~'
     Mark the buffer "unmodified."  The command `~' does this
     immediately when you type it.

`%'
     Toggle the buffer's read-only flag.  The command `%' does this
     immediately when you type it.

`t'
     Visit the buffer as a tags table.  *Note Select Tags Table::.

   There are also commands to select another buffer or buffers:

`q'
     Quit the buffer menu--immediately display the most recent formerly
     visible buffer in its place.

`<RET>'
`f'
     Immediately select this line's buffer in place of the `*Buffer
     List*' buffer.

`o'
     Immediately select this line's buffer in another window as if by
     `C-x 4 b', leaving `*Buffer List*' visible.

`C-o'
     Immediately display this line's buffer in another window, but don't
     select the window.

`1'
     Immediately select this line's buffer in a full-screen window.

`2'
     Immediately set up two windows, with this line's buffer selected in
     one, and the previously current buffer (aside from the buffer
     `*Buffer List*') displayed in the other.

`b'
     Bury the buffer listed on this line.

`m'
     Mark this line's buffer to be displayed in another window if you
     exit with the `v' command.  The request shows as a `>' at the
     beginning of the line.  (A single buffer may not have both a delete
     request and a display request.)

`v'
     Immediately select this line's buffer, and also display in other
     windows any buffers previously marked with the `m' command.  If
     you have not marked any buffers, this command is equivalent to `1'.

   There is also a command that affects the entire buffer list:

`T'
     Delete, or reinsert, lines for non-file buffers.  This command
     toggles the inclusion of such buffers in the buffer list.

   What `buffer-menu' actually does is create and switch to a suitable
buffer, and turn on Buffer Menu mode in it.  Everything else described
above is implemented by the special commands provided in Buffer Menu
mode.  One consequence of this is that you can switch from the `*Buffer
List*' buffer to another Emacs buffer, and edit there.  You can
reselect the `*Buffer List*' buffer later, to perform the operations
already requested, or you can kill it, or pay no further attention to
it.

   Normally, the buffer `*Buffer List*' is not updated automatically
when buffers are created and killed; its contents are just text.  If
you have created, deleted or renamed buffers, the way to update
`*Buffer List*' to show what you have done is to type `g'
(`revert-buffer').  You can make this happen regularly every
`auto-revert-interval' seconds if you enable Auto Revert mode in this
buffer, as long as it is not marked modified.  Global Auto Revert mode
applies to the `*Buffer List*' buffer only if
`global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers' is non-`nil'.  *Note
global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers: Autorevert, for details.


File: emacs,  Node: Indirect Buffers,  Next: Buffer Convenience,  Prev: Several Buffers,  Up: Buffers

23.6 Indirect Buffers
=====================

An "indirect buffer" shares the text of some other buffer, which is
called the "base buffer" of the indirect buffer.  In some ways it is
the analogue, for buffers, of a symbolic link between files.

`M-x make-indirect-buffer <RET> BASE-BUFFER <RET> INDIRECT-NAME <RET>'
     Create an indirect buffer named INDIRECT-NAME whose base buffer is
     BASE-BUFFER.  

`M-x clone-indirect-buffer <RET>'
     Create an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current
     buffer.

`C-x 4 c'
     Create an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current
     buffer, and select it in another window
     (`clone-indirect-buffer-other-window').

   The text of the indirect buffer is always identical to the text of
its base buffer; changes made by editing either one are visible
immediately in the other.  But in all other respects, the indirect
buffer and its base buffer are completely separate.  They can have
different names, different values of point, different narrowing,
different markers, different major modes, and different local variables.

   An indirect buffer cannot visit a file, but its base buffer can.  If
you try to save the indirect buffer, that actually works by saving the
base buffer.  Killing the base buffer effectively kills the indirect
buffer, but killing an indirect buffer has no effect on its base buffer.

   One way to use indirect buffers is to display multiple views of an
outline.  *Note Outline Views::.

   A quick and handy way to make an indirect buffer is with the command
`M-x clone-indirect-buffer'.  It creates and selects an indirect buffer
whose base buffer is the current buffer.  With a numeric argument, it
prompts for the name of the indirect buffer; otherwise it uses the name
of the current buffer, with a `<N>' suffix added.  `C-x 4 c'
(`clone-indirect-buffer-other-window') works like `M-x
clone-indirect-buffer', but it selects the new buffer in another
window.  These functions run the hook `clone-indirect-buffer-hook'
after creating the indirect buffer.

   The more general way to make an indirect buffer is with the command
`M-x make-indirect-buffer'.  It creates an indirect buffer from buffer
BASE-BUFFER, under the name INDIRECT-NAME.  It prompts for both
BASE-BUFFER and INDIRECT-NAME using the minibuffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Buffer Convenience,  Prev: Indirect Buffers,  Up: Buffers

23.7 Convenience Features and Customization of Buffer Handling
==============================================================

This section describes several modes and features that make it more
convenient to switch between buffers.

* Menu:

* Uniquify::               Making buffer names unique with directory parts.
* Iswitchb::               Switching between buffers with substrings.
* Buffer Menus::           Configurable buffer menu.


File: emacs,  Node: Uniquify,  Next: Iswitchb,  Up: Buffer Convenience

23.7.1 Making Buffer Names Unique
---------------------------------

When several buffers visit identically-named files, Emacs must give the
buffers distinct names.  The usual method for making buffer names
unique adds `<2>', `<3>', etc. to the end of the buffer names (all but
one of them).

   Other methods work by adding parts of each file's directory to the
buffer name.  To select one, load the library `uniquify' (e.g.  using
`(require 'uniquify)'), and customize the variable
`uniquify-buffer-name-style' (*note Easy Customization::).

   To begin with, the `forward' naming method includes part of the
file's directory name at the beginning of the buffer name; using this
method, buffers visiting the files `/u/rms/tmp/Makefile' and
`/usr/projects/zaphod/Makefile' would be named `tmp/Makefile' and
`zaphod/Makefile', respectively (instead of `Makefile' and
`Makefile<2>').

   In contrast, the `post-forward' naming method would call the buffers
`Makefile|tmp' and `Makefile|zaphod', and the `reverse' naming method
would call them `Makefile\tmp' and `Makefile\zaphod'.  The nontrivial
difference between `post-forward' and `reverse' occurs when just one
directory name is not enough to distinguish two files; then `reverse'
puts the directory names in reverse order, so that `/top/middle/file'
becomes `file\middle\top', while `post-forward' puts them in forward
order after the file name, as in `file|top/middle'.

   Which rule to follow for putting the directory names in the buffer
name is not very important if you are going to _look_ at the buffer
names before you type one.  But as an experienced user, if you know the
rule, you won't have to look.  And then you may find that one rule or
another is easier for you to remember and apply quickly.


File: emacs,  Node: Iswitchb,  Next: Buffer Menus,  Prev: Uniquify,  Up: Buffer Convenience

23.7.2 Switching Between Buffers using Substrings
-------------------------------------------------

Iswitchb global minor mode provides convenient switching between
buffers using substrings of their names.  It replaces the normal
definitions of `C-x b', `C-x 4 b', `C-x 5 b', and `C-x 4 C-o' with
alternative commands that are somewhat "smarter."

   When one of these commands prompts you for a buffer name, you can
type in just a substring of the name you want to choose.  As you enter
the substring, Iswitchb mode continuously displays a list of buffers
that match the substring you have typed.

   At any time, you can type <RET> to select the first buffer in the
list.  So the way to select a particular buffer is to make it the first
in the list.  There are two ways to do this.  You can type more of the
buffer name and thus narrow down the list, excluding unwanted buffers
above the desired one.  Alternatively, you can use `C-s' and `C-r' to
rotate the list until the desired buffer is first.

   <TAB> while entering the buffer name performs completion on the
string you have entered, based on the displayed list of buffers.

   To enable Iswitchb mode, type `M-x iswitchb-mode', or customize the
variable `iswitchb-mode' to `t' (*note Easy Customization::).


File: emacs,  Node: Buffer Menus,  Prev: Iswitchb,  Up: Buffer Convenience

23.7.3 Customizing Buffer Menus
-------------------------------

`M-x bs-show'
     Make a list of buffers similarly to `M-x list-buffers' but
     customizable.

   `M-x bs-show' pops up a buffer list similar to the one normally
displayed by `C-x C-b' but which you can customize.  If you prefer this
to the usual buffer list, you can bind this command to `C-x C-b'.  To
customize this buffer list, use the `bs' Custom group (*note Easy
Customization::).

   MSB global minor mode ("MSB" stands for "mouse select buffer")
provides a different and customizable mouse buffer menu which you may
prefer.  It replaces the bindings of `mouse-buffer-menu', normally on
`C-Down-Mouse-1', and the menu bar buffer menu.  You can customize the
menu in the `msb' Custom group.


File: emacs,  Node: Windows,  Next: Frames,  Prev: Buffers,  Up: Top

24 Multiple Windows
*******************

Emacs can split a frame into two or many windows.  Multiple windows can
display parts of different buffers, or different parts of one buffer.
Multiple frames always imply multiple windows, because each frame has
its own set of windows.  Each window belongs to one and only one frame.

* Menu:

* Basic Window::        Introduction to Emacs windows.
* Split Window::        New windows are made by splitting existing windows.
* Other Window::        Moving to another window or doing something to it.
* Pop Up Window::       Finding a file or buffer in another window.
* Force Same Window::   Forcing certain buffers to appear in the selected
                          window rather than in another window.
* Change Window::       Deleting windows and changing their sizes.
* Window Convenience::  Convenience functions for window handling.


File: emacs,  Node: Basic Window,  Next: Split Window,  Up: Windows

24.1 Concepts of Emacs Windows
==============================

Each Emacs window displays one Emacs buffer at any time.  A single
buffer may appear in more than one window; if it does, any changes in
its text are displayed in all the windows where it appears.  But these
windows can show different parts of the buffer, because each window has
its own value of point.

   At any time, one Emacs window is the "selected window"; the buffer
this window is displaying is the current buffer.  The terminal's cursor
shows the location of point in this window.  Each other window has a
location of point as well.  On text-only terminals, there is no way to
show where those locations are, since the terminal has only one cursor.
On a graphical display, the location of point in a non-selected window
is indicated by a hollow box; the cursor in the selected window is
blinking or solid.

   Commands to move point affect the value of point for the selected
Emacs window only.  They do not change the value of point in other Emacs
windows, even those showing the same buffer.  The same is true for
commands such as `C-x b' to switch buffers in the selected window; they
do not affect other windows at all.  However, there are other commands
such as `C-x 4 b' that select a different window and switch buffers in
it.  Also, all commands that display information in a window, including
(for example) `C-h f' (`describe-function') and `C-x C-b'
(`list-buffers'), work by switching buffers in a nonselected window
without affecting the selected window.

   When multiple windows show the same buffer, they can have different
regions, because they can have different values of point.  However,
they all have the same value for the mark, because each buffer has only
one mark position.

   Each window has its own mode line, which displays the buffer name,
modification status and major and minor modes of the buffer that is
displayed in the window.  The selected window's mode line appears in a
different color.  *Note Mode Line::, for full details on the mode line.


File: emacs,  Node: Split Window,  Next: Other Window,  Prev: Basic Window,  Up: Windows

24.2 Splitting Windows
======================

`C-x 2'
     Split the selected window into two windows, one above the other
     (`split-window-vertically').

`C-x 3'
     Split the selected window into two windows positioned side by side
     (`split-window-horizontally').

`C-Mouse-2'
     In the mode line or scroll bar of a window, split that window.

   The command `C-x 2' (`split-window-vertically') breaks the selected
window into two windows, one above the other.  Both windows start out
displaying the same buffer, with the same value of point.  By default
the two windows each get half the height of the window that was split; a
numeric argument specifies how many lines to give to the top window.

   `C-x 3' (`split-window-horizontally') breaks the selected window
into two side-by-side windows.  A numeric argument specifies how many
columns to give the one on the left.  If you are not using scrollbars,
a vertical line separates the two windows.  You can customize its color
with the face `vertical-border'.  Windows that are not the full width
of the screen have mode lines, but they are truncated.  On terminals
where Emacs does not support highlighting, truncated mode lines
sometimes do not appear in inverse video.

   You can split a window horizontally or vertically by clicking
`C-Mouse-2' in the mode line or the scroll bar.  The line of splitting
goes through the place where you click: if you click on the mode line,
the new scroll bar goes above the spot; if you click in the scroll bar,
the mode line of the split window is side by side with your click.

   When a window occupies less than the full width of the frame, it may
become too narrow for most of the text lines in its buffer.  If most of
its lines are continued (*note Continuation Lines::), the buffer may
become difficult to read.  Therefore, Emacs automatically truncates
lines if the window width becomes narrower than 50 columns.  This
truncation occurs regardless of the value of the variable
`truncate-lines' (*note Line Truncation::); it is instead controlled by
the variable `truncate-partial-width-windows'.  If the value of
`truncate-partial-width-windows' is a positive integer (the default is
50), that specifies the minimum width for a partial-width window before
automatic line truncation occurs; if the value is `nil', automatic line
truncation is disabled; and for any other non-`nil' value, Emacs
truncates lines in every partial-width window regardless of its width.

   Horizontal scrolling is often used in side-by-side windows.  *Note
Horizontal Scrolling::.

   If `split-window-keep-point' is non-`nil', the default, both of the
windows resulting from `C-x 2' inherit the value of point from the
window that was split.  This means that scrolling is inevitable.  If
this variable is `nil', then `C-x 2' tries to avoid scrolling the text
currently visible on the screen, by putting point in each window at a
position already visible in the window.  It also selects whichever
window contains the screen line that the cursor was previously on.
Some users prefer that mode on slow terminals.


File: emacs,  Node: Other Window,  Next: Pop Up Window,  Prev: Split Window,  Up: Windows

24.3 Using Other Windows
========================

`C-x o'
     Select another window (`other-window').  That is `o', not zero.

`C-M-v'
     Scroll the next window (`scroll-other-window').

`M-x compare-windows'
     Find next place where the text in the selected window does not
     match the text in the next window.

`Mouse-1'
     `Mouse-1', in a window's mode line, selects that window but does
     not move point in it (`mouse-select-window').

   To select a different window, click with `Mouse-1' on its mode line.
With the keyboard, you can switch windows by typing `C-x o'
(`other-window').  That is an `o', for "other," not a zero.  When there
are more than two windows, this command moves through all the windows
in a cyclic order, generally top to bottom and left to right.  After
the rightmost and bottommost window, it goes back to the one at the
upper left corner.  A numeric argument means to move several steps in
the cyclic order of windows.  A negative argument moves around the
cycle in the opposite order.  When the minibuffer is active, the
minibuffer is the last window in the cycle; you can switch from the
minibuffer window to one of the other windows, and later switch back and
finish supplying the minibuffer argument that is requested.  *Note
Minibuffer Edit::.

   The usual scrolling commands (*note Display::) apply to the selected
window only, but there is one command to scroll the next window.
`C-M-v' (`scroll-other-window') scrolls the window that `C-x o' would
select.  It takes arguments, positive and negative, like `C-v'.  (In
the minibuffer, `C-M-v' scrolls the window that contains the minibuffer
help display, if any, rather than the next window in the standard
cyclic order.)

   The command `M-x compare-windows' lets you compare two files or
buffers visible in two windows, by moving through them to the next
mismatch.  *Note Comparing Files::, for details.

   If you set `mouse-autoselect-window' to a non-`nil' value, moving
the mouse into a different window selects that window.  This feature is
off by default.


File: emacs,  Node: Pop Up Window,  Next: Force Same Window,  Prev: Other Window,  Up: Windows

24.4 Displaying in Another Window
=================================

`C-x 4' is a prefix key for commands that select another window
(splitting the window if there is only one) and select a buffer in that
window.  Different `C-x 4' commands have different ways of finding the
buffer to select.

`C-x 4 b BUFNAME <RET>'
     Select buffer BUFNAME in another window.  This runs
     `switch-to-buffer-other-window'.

`C-x 4 C-o BUFNAME <RET>'
     Display buffer BUFNAME in another window, but don't select that
     buffer or that window.  This runs `display-buffer'.

`C-x 4 f FILENAME <RET>'
     Visit file FILENAME and select its buffer in another window.  This
     runs `find-file-other-window'.  *Note Visiting::.

`C-x 4 d DIRECTORY <RET>'
     Select a Dired buffer for directory DIRECTORY in another window.
     This runs `dired-other-window'.  *Note Dired::.

`C-x 4 m'
     Start composing a mail message in another window.  This runs
     `mail-other-window'; its same-window analogue is `C-x m' (*note
     Sending Mail::).

`C-x 4 .'
     Find a tag in the current tags table, in another window.  This runs
     `find-tag-other-window', the multiple-window variant of `M-.'
     (*note Tags::).

`C-x 4 r FILENAME <RET>'
     Visit file FILENAME read-only, and select its buffer in another
     window.  This runs `find-file-read-only-other-window'.  *Note
     Visiting::.

   By default, these commands split the window vertically when there is
only one.  You can customize the variables `split-height-threshold' and
`split-width-threshold' to split the window horizontally instead.


File: emacs,  Node: Force Same Window,  Next: Change Window,  Prev: Pop Up Window,  Up: Windows

24.5 Forcing Display in the Same Window
=======================================

Certain Emacs commands switch to a specific buffer with special
contents.  For example, `M-x shell' switches to a buffer named
`*shell*'.  By convention, all these commands are written to pop up the
buffer in a separate window.  But you can specify that certain of these
buffers should appear in the selected window.

   If you add a buffer name to the list `same-window-buffer-names', the
effect is that such commands display that particular buffer by
switching to it in the selected window.  For example, if you add the
element `"*grep*"' to the list, the `grep' command will display its
output buffer in the selected window.

   The default value of `same-window-buffer-names' is not `nil': it
specifies buffer names `*info*', `*mail*' and `*shell*' (as well as
others used by more obscure Emacs packages).  This is why `M-x shell'
normally switches to the `*shell*' buffer in the selected window.  If
you delete this element from the value of `same-window-buffer-names',
the behavior of `M-x shell' will change--it will pop up the buffer in
another window instead.

   You can specify these buffers more generally with the variable
`same-window-regexps'.  Set it to a list of regular expressions; then
any buffer whose name matches one of those regular expressions is
displayed by switching to it in the selected window.  (Once again, this
applies only to buffers that normally get displayed for you in a
separate window.)  The default value of this variable specifies Telnet
and rlogin buffers.

   An analogous feature lets you specify buffers which should be
displayed in their own individual frames.  *Note Special Buffer
Frames::.


File: emacs,  Node: Change Window,  Next: Window Convenience,  Prev: Force Same Window,  Up: Windows

24.6 Deleting and Rearranging Windows
=====================================

`C-x 0'
     Delete the selected window (`delete-window').  The last character
     in this key sequence is a zero.

`C-x 1'
     Delete all windows in the selected frame except the selected window
     (`delete-other-windows').

`C-x 4 0'
     Delete the selected window and kill the buffer that was showing in
     it (`kill-buffer-and-window').  The last character in this key
     sequence is a zero.

`C-x ^'
     Make selected window taller (`enlarge-window').

`C-x }'
     Make selected window wider (`enlarge-window-horizontally').

`C-x {'
     Make selected window narrower (`shrink-window-horizontally').

`C-x -'
     Shrink this window if its buffer doesn't need so many lines
     (`shrink-window-if-larger-than-buffer').

`C-x +'
     Make all windows the same height (`balance-windows').

   To delete a window, type `C-x 0' (`delete-window').  (That is a
zero.)  The space occupied by the deleted window is given to an
adjacent window (but not the minibuffer window, even if that is active
at the time).  Once a window is deleted, its attributes are forgotten;
only restoring a window configuration can bring it back.  Deleting the
window has no effect on the buffer it used to display; the buffer
continues to exist, and you can select it in any window with `C-x b'.

   `C-x 4 0' (`kill-buffer-and-window') is a stronger command than `C-x
0'; it kills the current buffer and then deletes the selected window.

   `C-x 1' (`delete-other-windows') is more powerful in a different
way; it deletes all the windows except the selected one (and the
minibuffer); the selected window expands to use the whole frame except
for the echo area.

   To readjust the division of space among vertically adjacent windows,
use `C-x ^' (`enlarge-window').  It makes the currently selected window
one line bigger, or as many lines as is specified with a numeric
argument.  With a negative argument, it makes the selected window
smaller.  `C-x }' (`enlarge-window-horizontally') makes the selected
window wider by the specified number of columns.  `C-x {'
(`shrink-window-horizontally') makes the selected window narrower by
the specified number of columns.

   When you make a window bigger, the space comes from its peers.  If
this makes any window too small, it is deleted and its space is given
to an adjacent window.  The minimum size is specified by the variables
`window-min-height' and `window-min-width'.

   The command `C-x -' (`shrink-window-if-larger-than-buffer') reduces
the height of the selected window, if it is taller than necessary to
show the whole text of the buffer it is displaying.  It gives the extra
lines to other windows in the frame.

   You can also use `C-x +' (`balance-windows') to even out the heights
of all the windows in the selected frame.

   Mouse clicks on the mode line provide another way to change window
heights and to delete windows.  *Note Mode Line Mouse::.


File: emacs,  Node: Window Convenience,  Prev: Change Window,  Up: Windows

24.7 Window Handling Convenience Features and Customization
===========================================================

`M-x winner-mode' is a global minor mode that records the changes in
the window configuration (i.e. how the frames are partitioned into
windows), so that you can "undo" them.  To undo, use `C-c left'
(`winner-undo').  If you change your mind while undoing, you can redo
the changes you had undone using `C-c right' (`M-x winner-redo').
Another way to enable Winner mode is by customizing the variable
`winner-mode'.

   The Windmove commands move directionally between neighboring windows
in a frame.  `M-x windmove-right' selects the window immediately to the
right of the currently selected one, and similarly for the "left," "up,"
and "down" counterparts.  `M-x windmove-default-keybindings' binds
these commands to `S-right' etc.  (Not all terminals support shifted
arrow keys, however.)

   Follow minor mode (`M-x follow-mode') synchronizes several windows
on the same buffer so that they always display adjacent sections of
that buffer.  *Note Follow Mode::.

   `M-x scroll-all-mode' provides commands to scroll all visible
windows together.  You can also turn it on by customizing the variable
`scroll-all-mode'.  The commands provided are `M-x
scroll-all-scroll-down-all', `M-x scroll-all-page-down-all' and their
corresponding "up" equivalents.  To make this mode useful, you should
bind these commands to appropriate keys.


File: emacs,  Node: Frames,  Next: International,  Prev: Windows,  Up: Top

25 Frames and Graphical Displays
********************************

When using a graphical display, you can create multiple system-level
"windows" in a single Emacs session.  We refer to these system-level
windows as "frames".  A frame initially contains a single Emacs window;
however, you can subdivide this Emacs window into smaller windows, all
fitting into the same frame.  Each frame normally contains its own echo
area and minibuffer.

   To avoid confusion, we reserve the word "window" for the
subdivisions that Emacs implements, and never use it to refer to a
frame.

   Any editing you do in one frame affects the other frames.  For
instance, if you put text in the kill ring in one frame, you can yank
it in another frame.  If you exit Emacs through `C-x C-c' in one frame,
it terminates all the frames.  To delete just one frame, use `C-x 5 0'
(that is zero, not `o').

   Emacs compiled for MS-DOS emulates some windowing functionality, so
that you can use many of the features described in this chapter.  *Note
MS-DOS Mouse::.

* Menu:

* Cut and Paste::       Mouse commands for cut and paste.
* Mouse References::    Using the mouse to select an item from a list.
* Menu Mouse Clicks::   Mouse clicks that bring up menus.
* Mode Line Mouse::     Mouse clicks on the mode line.
* Creating Frames::     Creating additional Emacs frames with various contents.
* Frame Commands::      Iconifying, deleting, and switching frames.
* Fonts::               Changing the frame font.
* Speedbar::            How to make and use a speedbar frame.
* Multiple Displays::   How one Emacs job can talk to several displays.
* Special Buffer Frames::  You can make certain buffers have their own frames.
* Frame Parameters::    Changing the colors and other modes of frames.
* Scroll Bars::	        How to enable and disable scroll bars; how to use them.
* Wheeled Mice::        Using mouse wheels for scrolling.
* Drag and Drop::       Using drag and drop to open files and insert text.
* Menu Bars::	        Enabling and disabling the menu bar.
* Tool Bars::           Enabling and disabling the tool bar.
* Dialog Boxes::        Controlling use of dialog boxes.
* Tooltips::            Displaying information at the current mouse position.
* Mouse Avoidance::     Preventing the mouse pointer from obscuring text.
* Non-Window Terminals::  Multiple frames on terminals that show only one.
* Text-Only Mouse::     Using the mouse in text-only terminals.


File: emacs,  Node: Cut and Paste,  Next: Mouse References,  Up: Frames

25.1 Killing and Yanking on Graphical Displays
==============================================

This section describes commands for selecting a region, killing, and
yanking using the mouse.

* Menu:

* Mouse Commands::      Moving, cutting, and pasting, with the mouse.
* Word and Line Mouse:: Mouse commands for selecting whole words or lines.
* Cut/Paste Other App:: Transfering text between Emacs and other apps.
* Secondary Selection:: Cutting without altering point and mark.
* Clipboard::           Using the clipboard for selections.


File: emacs,  Node: Mouse Commands,  Next: Word and Line Mouse,  Up: Cut and Paste

25.1.1 Mouse Commands for Editing
---------------------------------

`Mouse-1'
     Move point to where you click (`mouse-set-point').

`Drag-Mouse-1'
     Activate the region around the text selected by dragging, and copy
     it to the kill ring (`mouse-set-region').

`Mouse-2'
     Yank the last killed text at the click position
     (`mouse-yank-at-click').

`Mouse-3'
     If the region is active, move the nearer end of the region to the
     click position; otherwise, set mark at the current value of point
     and point at the click position.  Save the resulting region in the
     kill ring; on a second click, kill it (`mouse-save-then-kill').

   The most basic mouse command is `mouse-set-point', which is called
by clicking with the left mouse button, `Mouse-1', in the text area of
a window.  This moves point to the position where you clicked.

   Normally, Emacs does not distinguish between ordinary mouse clicks
and clicks that select a frame.  When you click on a frame to select
it, that also changes the selected window and cursor position according
to the mouse click position.  On the X window system, you can change
this behavior by setting the variable
`x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position' to `t'.  Then the first click
selects the frame, but does not affect the selected window or cursor
position.  If you click again in the same place, that click will be in
the selected frame, so it will change the window or cursor position.

   Holding down `Mouse-1' and "dragging" the mouse over a stretch of
text activates the region around that text (`mouse-set-region').  *Note
Mark::.  Emacs places the mark where you started holding down the mouse
button, and point where you release it.  In addition, the region is
copied into the kill ring (*note Kill Ring::).  If you don't want Emacs
to copy the region, change the variable `mouse-drag-copy-region' to
`nil'.

   If you move the mouse off the top or bottom of the window while
dragging, the window scrolls at a steady rate until you move the mouse
back into the window.  This way, you can select regions that don't fit
entirely on the screen.  The number of lines scrolled per step depends
on how far away from the window edge the mouse has gone; the variable
`mouse-scroll-min-lines' specifies a minimum step size.

   Clicking with the middle mouse button, `Mouse-2', moves point to the
position where you clicked and performs a yank (`mouse-yank-at-click').
*Note Yanking::.  If you change the variable `mouse-yank-at-point' to
a non-`nil' value, `Mouse-2' does not move point.  Then it does not
matter where you click, or even which of the frame's windows you click
on; the yank occurs at the existing point.  This variable also affects
yanking the primary and secondary selections (*note Cut/Paste Other
App::).

   Clicking with the right mouse button, `Mouse-3', runs the command
`mouse-save-then-kill'.  This performs several actions depending on
where you click and the status of the region:

   * If no region is active, clicking `Mouse-3' activates the region,
     placing the mark where point was and point at the clicked position.
     In addition, the text in the region is copied to the kill ring.

   * If a region is active, clicking `Mouse-3' adjusts the nearer end
     of the region by moving it to the clicked position.  The adjusted
     region's text is copied to the kill ring; if the text in the
     original region was already on the kill ring, it replaces it there.

   * If you originally specified the region using a double or triple
     `Mouse-1', so that the region is defined to consist of entire
     words or lines, then adjusting the region with `Mouse-3' also
     proceeds by entire words or lines.

   * If you use `Mouse-3' a second time consecutively, at the same
     place, that kills the region already selected.  Thus, the simplest
     way to kill text with the mouse is to click `Mouse-1' at one end,
     then click `Mouse-3' twice at the other end.  To copy the text
     into the kill ring without deleting it from the buffer, press
     `Mouse-3' just once--or just drag across the text with `Mouse-1'.
     Then you can copy it elsewhere by yanking it.

   Whenever you set the region using any of the mouse commands
described above, the mark will be deactivated by any subsequent
unshifted cursor motion command, in addition to the usual ways of
deactivating the mark.  *Note Shift Selection::.  While the region
remains active, typing <Backspace> or <Delete> deletes the text in that
region and deactivates the mark; this behavior follows a convention
established by other graphical programs, and it does _not_ apply when
you set the region any other way, including shift-selection (*note
Shift Selection::).

   Many graphical applications also follow the convention that
insertion while text is selected deletes the selected text.  You can
make Emacs behave this way by enabling Delete Selection mode.  *Note
Using Region::.


File: emacs,  Node: Word and Line Mouse,  Next: Cut/Paste Other App,  Prev: Mouse Commands,  Up: Cut and Paste

25.1.2 Mouse Commands for Words and Lines
-----------------------------------------

These variants of `Mouse-1' select entire words or lines at a time.
Emacs activates the region around the selected text, which is also
copied to the kill ring.

`Double-Mouse-1'
     Select the text around the word which you click on.

     Double-clicking on a character with "symbol" syntax (such as
     underscore, in C mode) selects the symbol surrounding that
     character.  Double-clicking on a character with open- or
     close-parenthesis syntax selects the parenthetical grouping which
     that character starts or ends.  Double-clicking on a character
     with string-delimiter syntax (such as a singlequote or doublequote
     in C) selects the string constant (Emacs uses heuristics to figure
     out whether that character is the beginning or the end of it).

`Double-Drag-Mouse-1'
     Select the text you drag across, in the form of whole words.

`Triple-Mouse-1'
     Select the line you click on.

`Triple-Drag-Mouse-1'
     Select the text you drag across, in the form of whole lines.


File: emacs,  Node: Cut/Paste Other App,  Next: Secondary Selection,  Prev: Word and Line Mouse,  Up: Cut and Paste

25.1.3 Cut and Paste with Other Window Applications
---------------------------------------------------

When running Emacs under the X window system, you can easily transfer
text between Emacs and other X applications using the "primary
selection" (also called the "X selection").  This is _not_ the same
thing as the "clipboard", which is a separate facility used on desktop
environments such as Gnome, and on operating systems such as Microsoft
Windows (*note Clipboard::).

   Under X, whenever you select some text in Emacs by dragging or
clicking the mouse (*note Mouse Commands::), it is also saved in the
primary selection.  You can then "paste" that text into any other X
application, usually by clicking `Mouse-2' in that application.  Unlike
the Emacs kill ring (*note Kill Ring::), the primary selection has no
"memory": each time you save something in the primary selection, either
in Emacs or in another X application, the previous contents of the
primary selection are lost.

   Whenever you kill some text using a command such as `C-w'
(`kill-region'), or copy it into the kill ring using a command such as
`M-w' (`kill-ring-save'), that text is also saved in the primary
selection.  *Note Killing::.

   If you set the region using the keyboard--for instance, by typing
`C-<SPC>' and moving point away from the mark--the text in the region
is not normally saved to the primary selection.  However, if you change
the variable `select-active-regions' to `t', the region is saved to the
primary selection whenever you activate the mark.  Each change to the
region also updates the primary selection.

   If you change `yank-pop-change-selection' to `t', rotating the kill
ring with `M-y' (`yank-pop') also saves the new yank to the primary
selection (*note Yanking::).

   If you change `save-interprogram-paste-before-kill' to `t', each
kill command first saves the existing selection onto the kill ring.
This prevents you from losing the existing selection, at the risk of
large memory consumption if other applications generate large
selections.

   Whenever Emacs saves some text to the primary selection, it may also
save it to the "cut buffer".  The cut buffer is an obsolete predecessor
to the primary selection; most modern applications do not use it.
Saving text to the cut buffer is slow and inefficient, so Emacs only
does it if the text is shorter than the value of `x-cut-buffer-max'
(20000 characters by default).

   You can yank the primary selection into Emacs using the usual yank
commands, such as `C-y' (`yank') and `Mouse-2' (`mouse-yank-at-click').
These commands actually check the primary selection before referring
to the kill ring; if no primary selection is available, the kill ring
contents are used.  To prevent yank commands from accessing the primary
selection, set the variable `x-select-enable-primary' to `nil'.

   The standard coding system for the primary selection is
`compound-text-with-extensions'.  You may find that the pasted text is
not what you expected.  In such a case, you can specify another coding
system for the selection by typing `C-x <RET> x' or `C-x <RET> X'.
Alternatively, you can request a different data type by modifying the
variable `x-select-request-type'.  *Note Communication Coding::.


File: emacs,  Node: Secondary Selection,  Next: Clipboard,  Prev: Cut/Paste Other App,  Up: Cut and Paste

25.1.4 Secondary Selection
--------------------------

In addition to the primary selection, the X Window System provides a
second similar facility known as the "secondary selection".  Nowadays,
few X applications make use of the secondary selection, but you can
access it using the following Emacs commands:

`M-Drag-Mouse-1'
     Set the secondary selection, with one end at the place where you
     press down the button, and the other end at the place where you
     release it (`mouse-set-secondary').  The selected text is
     highlighted, using the `secondary-selection' face, as you drag.
     The window scrolls automatically if you drag the mouse off the top
     or bottom of the window, just like `mouse-set-region' (*note Mouse
     Commands::).

     This command does not alter the kill ring.

`M-Mouse-1'
     Set one endpoint for the "secondary selection"
     (`mouse-start-secondary').

`M-Mouse-3'
     Set the secondary selection, with one end at the position clicked
     and the other at the position specified with `M-Mouse-1'
     (`mouse-secondary-save-then-kill').  This also puts the selected
     text in the kill ring.  A second `M-Mouse-3' at the same place
     kills the secondary selection just made.

`M-Mouse-2'
     Insert the secondary selection where you click, placing point at
     the end of the yanked text (`mouse-yank-secondary').

   Double or triple clicking of `M-Mouse-1' operates on words and
lines, much like `Mouse-1'.

   If `mouse-yank-at-point' is non-`nil', `M-Mouse-2' yanks at point.
Then it does not matter precisely where you click, or even which of the
frame's windows you click on.  *Note Mouse Commands::.


File: emacs,  Node: Clipboard,  Prev: Secondary Selection,  Up: Cut and Paste

25.1.5 Using the Clipboard
--------------------------

In desktop environments such as Gnome, and operating systems such as
Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X, you can transfer data (usually text)
between different applications using the "clipboard".  The clipboard is
distinct from the primary selection and secondary selection discussed
earlier.  You can access the clipboard through the `Edit' menu of the
menu bar (*note Menu Bar::).

   The command `clipboard-kill-region', which is bound to the `Cut'
menu item, kills the region and saves it in the clipboard.

   The command `clipboard-kill-ring-save', which is bound to the `Copy'
menu item, copies the region to the kill ring and saves it in the
clipboard.

   The `Paste' menu item in the Edit menu yanks the contents of the
clipboard at point (`clipboard-yank').

   You can customize the variable `x-select-enable-clipboard' to make
the Emacs yank functions consult the clipboard before the primary
selection, and to make the kill functions to store in the clipboard as
well as the primary selection.  Otherwise, these commands do not access
the clipboard at all.  Using the clipboard is the default on MS-Windows
and Mac OS, but not on other systems.


File: emacs,  Node: Mouse References,  Next: Menu Mouse Clicks,  Prev: Cut and Paste,  Up: Frames

25.2 Following References with the Mouse
========================================

Some Emacs buffers include "buttons".  A button is a piece of text that
performs some action when you activate it, such as following a
reference.  Usually, a button's text is visually highlighted: it is
underlined, or a box is drawn around it.  If you move the mouse over a
button, the shape of the mouse cursor changes and the button lights up
(if you change the variable `mouse-highlight' to `nil', Emacs disables
this highlighting).

   You can activate a button by moving point to it and typing <RET>, or
by clicking either `Mouse-1' or `Mouse-2' on the button.  For example,
typing <RET> or clicking on a file name in a Dired buffer visits that
file (*note Dired::).  Doing it on an error message in the
`*Compilation*' buffer goes to the source code for that error message
(*note Compilation::).  Doing it on a completion in the `*Completions*'
buffer chooses that completion (*note Completion::).

   Although clicking `Mouse-1' on a button usually activates that
button, if you hold the mouse button down for a short period of time
before releasing it (specifically, for more than 450 milliseconds),
then Emacs moves point where you clicked instead.  This behavior allows
you to use the mouse to move point over a button without following it.
Dragging--moving the mouse while it is held down--has its usual
behavior of setting the region, even if you drag from or onto a button.

   Normally, clicking `Mouse-1' on a button activates the button even
if it is in a nonselected window.  If you change the variable
`mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows' to `nil', clicking `Mouse-1' on
a button in an un-selected window moves point to the clicked position
and selects that window, without activating the button.

   In Emacs versions before 22, only `Mouse-2' activates buttons and
`Mouse-1' always sets point.  If you prefer this older behavior, set
the variable `mouse-1-click-follows-link' to `nil'.  This variable also
lets you choose various other alternatives for following links with the
mouse.  Type `C-h v mouse-1-click-follows-link <RET>' for more details.


File: emacs,  Node: Menu Mouse Clicks,  Next: Mode Line Mouse,  Prev: Mouse References,  Up: Frames

25.3 Mouse Clicks for Menus
===========================

Several mouse clicks with the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> modifiers bring up
menus.

`C-Mouse-1'
     This menu is for selecting a buffer.

     The MSB ("mouse select buffer") global minor mode makes this menu
     smarter and more customizable.  *Note Buffer Menus::.

`C-Mouse-2'
     This menu is for specifying faces and other text properties for
     editing formatted text.  *Note Formatted Text::.

`C-Mouse-3'
     This menu is mode-specific.  For most modes if Menu-bar mode is on,
     this menu has the same items as all the mode-specific menu-bar
     menus put together.  Some modes may specify a different menu for
     this button.(1)  If Menu-bar mode is off, this menu contains all
     the items which would be present in the menu bar--not just the
     mode-specific ones--so that you can access them without having to
     display the menu bar.

`S-Mouse-1'
     This menu is for changing the default face within the window's
     buffer.  *Note Temporary Face Changes::.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Some systems use `Mouse-3' for a mode-specific menu.  We took a
survey of users, and found they preferred to keep `Mouse-3' for
selecting and killing regions.  Hence the decision to use `C-Mouse-3'
for this menu.  To use `Mouse-3' instead, do `(global-set-key [mouse-3]
'mouse-popup-menubar-stuff)'.


File: emacs,  Node: Mode Line Mouse,  Next: Creating Frames,  Prev: Menu Mouse Clicks,  Up: Frames

25.4 Mode Line Mouse Commands
=============================

You can use mouse clicks on window mode lines to select and manipulate
windows.

   Some areas of the mode line, such as the buffer name, and major and
minor mode names, have their own special mouse bindings.  These areas
are highlighted when you hold the mouse over them, and information about
the special bindings will be displayed (*note Tooltips::).  This
section's commands do not apply in those areas.

`Mouse-1'
     `Mouse-1' on a mode line selects the window it belongs to.  By
     dragging `Mouse-1' on the mode line, you can move it, thus
     changing the height of the windows above and below.  Changing
     heights with the mouse in this way never deletes windows, it just
     refuses to make any window smaller than the minimum height.

`Mouse-2'
     `Mouse-2' on a mode line expands that window to fill its frame.

`Mouse-3'
     `Mouse-3' on a mode line deletes the window it belongs to.  If the
     frame has only one window, it buries the current buffer instead,
     and switches to another buffer.

`C-Mouse-2'
     `C-Mouse-2' on a mode line splits the window above horizontally,
     above the place in the mode line where you click.

   Using `Mouse-1' on the divider between two side-by-side mode lines,
you can move the vertical boundary left or right.  Using `C-Mouse-2' on
a scroll bar splits the corresponding window vertically.  *Note Split
Window::.


File: emacs,  Node: Creating Frames,  Next: Frame Commands,  Prev: Mode Line Mouse,  Up: Frames

25.5 Creating Frames
====================

The prefix key `C-x 5' is analogous to `C-x 4', with parallel
subcommands.  The difference is that `C-x 5' commands create a new
frame rather than just a new window in the selected frame (*note Pop Up
Window::).  If an existing visible or iconified ("minimized") frame
already displays the requested material, these commands use the
existing frame, after raising or deiconifying ("un-minimizing") as
necessary.

   The various `C-x 5' commands differ in how they find or create the
buffer to select:

`C-x 5 2'
     Create a new frame (`make-frame-command').

`C-x 5 b BUFNAME <RET>'
     Select buffer BUFNAME in another frame.  This runs
     `switch-to-buffer-other-frame'.

`C-x 5 f FILENAME <RET>'
     Visit file FILENAME and select its buffer in another frame.  This
     runs `find-file-other-frame'.  *Note Visiting::.

`C-x 5 d DIRECTORY <RET>'
     Select a Dired buffer for directory DIRECTORY in another frame.
     This runs `dired-other-frame'.  *Note Dired::.

`C-x 5 m'
     Start composing a mail message in another frame.  This runs
     `mail-other-frame'.  It is the other-frame variant of `C-x m'.
     *Note Sending Mail::.

`C-x 5 .'
     Find a tag in the current tag table in another frame.  This runs
     `find-tag-other-frame', the multiple-frame variant of `M-.'.
     *Note Tags::.

`C-x 5 r FILENAME <RET>'
     Visit file FILENAME read-only, and select its buffer in another
     frame.  This runs `find-file-read-only-other-frame'.  *Note
     Visiting::.

   You can control the appearance of new frames you create by setting
the frame parameters in `default-frame-alist'.  You can use the
variable `initial-frame-alist' to specify parameters that affect only
the initial frame.  *Note Initial Parameters: (elisp)Initial
Parameters, for more information.

   Here is an example of using `default-frame-alist' to specify the
default foreground color and font:

     (add-to-list 'default-frame-alist '(font . "10x20"))
     (add-to-list 'default-frame-alist '(foreground-color . "blue"))

By putting such customizations in your init file, you can control the
appearance of all the frames Emacs creates, including the initial one
(*note Init File::).  *Note Fonts::, for other ways to set the default
font.


File: emacs,  Node: Frame Commands,  Next: Fonts,  Prev: Creating Frames,  Up: Frames

25.6 Frame Commands
===================

The following commands let you create, delete and operate on frames:

`C-z'
     Minimize (or "iconify) the selected Emacs frame (`suspend-frame').
     *Note Exiting::.

`C-x 5 0'
     Delete the selected frame (`delete-frame').  This is not allowed
     if there is only one frame.

`C-x 5 o'
     Select another frame, raise it, and warp the mouse to it.  If you
     repeat this command, it cycles through all the frames on your
     terminal.

`C-x 5 1'
     Delete all frames except the selected one.

   The `C-x 5 0' (`delete-frame') command will never delete the last
frame, to prevent you from losing the ability to interact with the
Emacs process.  Note that when Emacs is run as a daemon (*note Emacs
Server::), there is always a "virtual frame" that remains after all the
ordinary, interactive frames are deleted.  In this case, `C-x 5 0' can
delete the last interactive frame; you can use `emacsclient' to
reconnect to the Emacs session.

   On X, you may have to tell Emacs how the system (or the window
manager) handles focus-switching between windows, in order for the
command `C-x 5 o' (`other-frame') to work properly.  Unfortunately,
there is no way for Emacs to detect this automatically, so you should
set the variable `focus-follows-mouse'.  If simply moving the mouse
onto a window selects it and gives it focus, the variable should be
`t'; if you have to click on the window to select it, the variable
should be `nil'.  The default is `t'.

   The window manager that is part of MS-Windows always gives focus to
a frame that raises, so this variable has no effect in the native
MS-Windows build of Emacs.


File: emacs,  Node: Fonts,  Next: Speedbar,  Prev: Frame Commands,  Up: Frames

25.7 Fonts
==========

By default, Emacs displays text in X using a 12-point monospace font.
There are several different ways to specify a different font:

   * Click on `Set Default Font' in the `Options' menu.  To save this
     for future sessions, click on `Save Options' in the `Options' menu.

   * Add a line to your init file (*note Init File::), modifying the
     variable `default-frame-alist' to specify the `font' parameter
     (*note Creating Frames::), like this:

          (add-to-list 'default-frame-alist '(font . "DejaVu Sans Mono-12"))

   * Add an `emacs.font' X resource setting to your X resource file,
     like this:

          emacs.font: DejaVu Sans Mono-12

     You must restart X, or use the `xrdb' command, for the X resources
     file to take effect.  *Note Resources::.  When specifying a font
     in your X resources file, you should not quote it.

   * If you are running Emacs on the GNOME desktop, you can tell Emacs
     to use the default system font by setting the variable
     `font-use-system-font' to `t' (the default is `nil').  For this to
     work, Emacs must be compiled with Gconf support; this is done
     automatically if the libraries are present at compile time.

   * Use the command line option `-fn' (or `--font').  *Note Font X::.

   On X, there are four different ways to express a "font name".  The
first is to use a "Fontconfig pattern".  Fontconfig patterns have the
following form:

     FONTNAME[-FONTSIZE][:NAME1=VALUES1][:NAME2=VALUES2]...

Within this format, any of the elements in braces may be omitted.
Here, FONTNAME is the "family name" of the font, such as `Monospace' or
`DejaVu Serif'; FONTSIZE is the "point size" of the font (one
"printer's point" is about 1/72 of an inch); and the `NAME=VALUES'
entries specify settings such as the slant and weight of the font.
Each VALUES may be a single value, or a list of values separated by
commas.  In addition, some property values are valid with only one kind
of property name, in which case the `NAME=' part may be omitted.

   Here is a list of common font properties:

`slant'
     One of `italic', `oblique' or `roman'.

`weight'
     One of `light', `medium', `demibold', `bold' or `black'.

`style'
     Some fonts define special styles which are a combination of slant
     and weight.  For instance, `Dejavu Sans' defines the `book' style,
     which overrides the slant and weight properties.

`width'
     One of `condensed', `normal', or `expanded'.

`spacing'
     One of `monospace', `proportional', `dual-width', or `charcell'.

Here are some examples of Fontconfig patterns:

     Monospace
     Monospace-12
     Monospace-12:bold
     DejaVu Sans Mono:bold:italic
     Monospace-12:weight=bold:slant=italic

   See the Fontconfig manual for a more detailed description of
Fontconfig patterns.  This manual is located in the file
`fontconfig-user.html', distributed with Fontconfig.  It is also
available online at `http://fontconfig.org/fontconfig-user.html'.  In
particular, that manual describes additional font properties that
influence how the font is hinted, antialiased, or scaled.

   The second way to specify a font is to use a "GTK font description".
These have the syntax

     FONTNAME [PROPERTIES] [FONTSIZE]

where FONTNAME is the family name, PROPERTIES is a list of property
values separated by spaces, and FONTSIZE is the point size.  The
properties that you may specify are as follows:

`style'
     One of `roman', `italic' or `oblique'.  If omitted, the `roman'
     style is used.

`weight'
     One of `medium', `ultra-light', `light', `semi-bold', or `bold'.
     If omitted, `medium' weight is used.

Here are some examples of GTK font descriptions:

     Monospace 12
     Monospace Bold Italic 12

   The third way to specify a font is to use an "XLFD" ("X Logical Font
Description").  This is the traditional method for specifying fonts
under X.  Each XLFD consists of fourteen words or numbers, separated by
dashes, like this:

     -misc-fixed-medium-r-semicondensed--13-*-*-*-c-60-iso8859-1

A wildcard character (`*') in an XLFD matches any sequence of
characters (including none), and `?' matches any single character.
However, matching is implementation-dependent, and can be inaccurate
when wildcards match dashes in a long name.  For reliable results,
supply all 14 dashes and use wildcards only within a field.  Case is
insignificant in an XLFD.  The syntax for an XLFD is as follows:

     -MAKER-FAMILY-WEIGHT-SLANT-WIDTHTYPE-STYLE...
     ...-PIXELS-HEIGHT-HORIZ-VERT-SPACING-WIDTH-REGISTRY-ENCODING

The entries have the following meanings:

MAKER
     The name of the font manufacturer.

FAMILY
     The name of the font family (e.g. `courier').

WEIGHT
     The font weight--normally either `bold', `medium' or `light'.
     Some font names support other values.

SLANT
     The font slant--normally `r' (roman), `i' (italic), `o' (oblique),
     `ri' (reverse italic), or `ot' (other).  Some font names support
     other values.

WIDTHTYPE
     The font width--normally `condensed', `extended', `semicondensed'
     or `normal' (some font names support other values).

STYLE
     An optional additional style name.  Usually it is empty--most long
     font names have two hyphens in a row at this point.

PIXELS
     The font height, in pixels.

HEIGHT
     The font height on the screen, measured in tenths of a printer's
     point.  This is the point size of the font, times ten.  For a given
     vertical resolution, HEIGHT and PIXELS are proportional;
     therefore, it is common to specify just one of them and use `*'
     for the other.

HORIZ
     The horizontal resolution, in pixels per inch, of the screen for
     which the font is intended.

VERT
     The vertical resolution, in pixels per inch, of the screen for
     which the font is intended.  Normally the resolution of the fonts
     on your system is the right value for your screen; therefore, you
     normally specify `*' for this and HORIZ.

SPACING
     This is `m' (monospace), `p' (proportional) or `c' (character
     cell).

WIDTH
     The average character width, in pixels, multiplied by ten.

REGISTRY
ENCODING
     The X font character set that the font depicts.  (X font character
     sets are not the same as Emacs character sets, but they are
     similar.)  You can use the `xfontsel' program to check which
     choices you have.  Normally you should use `iso8859' for REGISTRY
     and `1' for ENCODING.

   The fourth and final method of specifying a font is to use a "font
nickname".  Certain fonts have shorter nicknames, which you can use
instead of a normal font specification.  For instance, `6x13' is
equivalent to

     -misc-fixed-medium-r-semicondensed--13-*-*-*-c-60-iso8859-1

   On X, Emacs recognizes two types of fonts: "client-side" fonts,
which are provided by the Xft and Fontconfig libraries, and
"server-side" fonts, which are provided by the X server itself.  Most
client-side fonts support advanced font features such as antialiasing
and subpixel hinting, while server-side fonts do not.  Fontconfig and
GTK patterns match only client-side fonts.

   You will probably want to use a fixed-width default font--that is, a
font in which all characters have the same width.  For Xft and
Fontconfig fonts, you can use the `fc-list' command to list the
available fixed-width fonts, like this:

     fc-list :spacing=mono fc-list :spacing=charcell

For server-side X fonts, you can use the `xlsfonts' program to list the
available fixed-width fonts, like this:

     xlsfonts -fn '*x*' | egrep "^[0-9]+x[0-9]+"
     xlsfonts -fn '*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-m*'
     xlsfonts -fn '*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-c*'

Any font with `m' or `c' in the SPACING field of the XLFD is a
fixed-width font.  To see what a particular font looks like, use the
`xfd' command.  For example:

     xfd -fn 6x13

displays the entire font `6x13'.

   While running Emacs, you can also set the font of a specific kind of
text (*note Faces::), or a particular frame (*note Frame Parameters::).


File: emacs,  Node: Speedbar,  Next: Multiple Displays,  Prev: Fonts,  Up: Frames

25.8 Speedbar Frames
====================

The "speedbar" is a special frame for conveniently navigating in or
operating on another frame.  The speedbar, when it exists, is always
associated with a specific frame, called its "attached frame"; all
speedbar operations act on that frame.

   Type `M-x speedbar' to create the speedbar and associate it with the
current frame.  To dismiss the speedbar, type `M-x speedbar' again, or
select the speedbar and type `q'.  (You can also delete the speedbar
frame like any other Emacs frame.)  If you wish to associate the
speedbar with a different frame, dismiss it and call `M-x speedbar'
from that frame.

   The speedbar can operate in various modes.  Its default mode is
"File Display" mode, which shows the files in the current directory of
the selected window of the attached frame, one file per line.  Clicking
on a file name visits that file in the selected window of the attached
frame, and clicking on a directory name shows that directory in the
speedbar (*note Mouse References::).  Each line also has a box, `[+]'
or `<+>', that you can click on to "expand" the contents of that item.
Expanding a directory adds the contents of that directory to the
speedbar display, underneath the directory's own line.  Expanding an
ordinary file adds a list of the tags in that file to the speedbar
display; you can click on a tag name to jump to that tag in the
selected window of the attached frame.  When a file or directory is
expanded, the `[+]' changes to `[-]'; you can click on that box to
"contract" the item, hiding its contents.

   You navigate through the speedbar using the keyboard, too.  Typing
`RET' while point is on a line in the speedbar is equivalent to
clicking the item on the current line, and `SPC' expands or contracts
the item.  `U' displays the parent directory of the current directory.
To copy, delete, or rename the file on the current line, type `C', `D',
and `R' respectively.  To create a new directory, type `M'.

   Another general-purpose speedbar mode is "Buffer Display" mode; in
this mode, the speedbar displays a list of Emacs buffers.  To switch to
this mode, type `b' in the speedbar.  To return to File Display mode,
type `f'.  You can also change the display mode by clicking `mouse-3'
anywhere in the speedbar window (or `mouse-1' on the mode-line) and
selecting `Displays' in the pop-up menu.

   Some major modes, including Rmail mode, Info, and GUD, have
specialized ways of putting useful items into the speedbar for you to
select.  For example, in Rmail mode, the speedbar shows a list of Rmail
files, and lets you move the current message to another Rmail file by
clicking on its `<M>' box.

   For more details on using and programming the speedbar, *Note
Speedbar: (speedbar)Top.


File: emacs,  Node: Multiple Displays,  Next: Special Buffer Frames,  Prev: Speedbar,  Up: Frames

25.9 Multiple Displays
======================

A single Emacs can talk to more than one X display.  Initially, Emacs
uses just one display--the one specified with the `DISPLAY' environment
variable or with the `--display' option (*note Initial Options::).  To
connect to another display, use the command `make-frame-on-display':

`M-x make-frame-on-display <RET> DISPLAY <RET>'
     Create a new frame on display DISPLAY.

   A single X server can handle more than one screen.  When you open
frames on two screens belonging to one server, Emacs knows they share a
single keyboard, and it treats all the commands arriving from these
screens as a single stream of input.

   When you open frames on different X servers, Emacs makes a separate
input stream for each server.  Each server also has its own selected
frame.  The commands you enter with a particular X server apply to that
server's selected frame.

   It is even possible to use this feature to let two or more users
type simultaneously on the two displays, within the same Emacs job.  In
practice, however, the different users can easily interfere with each
others' edits if they are not careful.


File: emacs,  Node: Special Buffer Frames,  Next: Frame Parameters,  Prev: Multiple Displays,  Up: Frames

25.10 Special Buffer Frames
===========================

You can make certain chosen buffers, which Emacs normally displays in
"another window," appear in special frames of their own.  To do this,
set the variable `special-display-buffer-names' to a list of buffer
names; any buffer whose name is in that list automatically gets a
special frame, when an Emacs command wants to display it "in another
window."

   For example, if you set the variable this way,

     (setq special-display-buffer-names
           '("*Completions*" "*grep*" "*tex-shell*"))

then completion lists, `grep' output and the TeX mode shell buffer get
individual frames of their own.  These frames, and the windows in them,
are never automatically split or reused for any other buffers.  They
continue to show the buffers they were created for, unless you alter
them by hand.  Killing the special buffer deletes its frame
automatically.

   More generally, you can set `special-display-regexps' to a list of
regular expressions; then a buffer gets its own frame if its name
matches any of those regular expressions.  (Once again, this applies
only to buffers that normally get displayed for you in "another
window.")

   The variable `special-display-frame-alist' specifies the frame
parameters for these frames.  It has a default value, so you don't need
to set it.

   For those who know Lisp, an element of
`special-display-buffer-names' or `special-display-regexps' can also be
a list.  Then the first element is the buffer name or regular
expression; the rest of the list specifies how to create the frame.  It
can be an association list specifying frame parameter values; these
values take precedence over parameter values specified in
`special-display-frame-alist'.  If you specify the symbol `same-window'
as a "frame parameter" in this list, with a non-`nil' value, that means
to use the selected window if possible.  If you use the symbol
`same-frame' as a "frame parameter" in this list, with a non-`nil'
value, that means to use the selected frame if possible.

   Alternatively, the value can have this form:

     (FUNCTION ARGS...)

where FUNCTION is a symbol.  Then the frame is constructed by calling
FUNCTION; its first argument is the buffer, and its remaining arguments
are ARGS.

   An analogous feature lets you specify buffers which should be
displayed in the selected window.  *Note Force Same Window::.  The
same-window feature takes precedence over the special-frame feature;
therefore, if you add a buffer name to `special-display-buffer-names'
and it has no effect, check to see whether that feature is also in use
for the same buffer name.


File: emacs,  Node: Frame Parameters,  Next: Scroll Bars,  Prev: Special Buffer Frames,  Up: Frames

25.11 Setting Frame Parameters
==============================

These commands are available for controlling the window management
behavior of the selected frame:

`M-x auto-raise-mode'
     Toggle whether or not the selected frame should auto-raise.
     Auto-raise means that every time you move the mouse onto the
     frame, it raises the frame.

     Some window managers also implement auto-raise.  If you enable
     auto-raise for Emacs frames in your window manager, it will work,
     but it is beyond Emacs' control, so `auto-raise-mode' has no effect
     on it.

`M-x auto-lower-mode'
     Toggle whether or not the selected frame should auto-lower.
     Auto-lower means that every time you move the mouse off the frame,
     the frame moves to the bottom of the stack on the screen.

     The command `auto-lower-mode' has no effect on auto-lower
     implemented by the window manager.  To control that, you must use
     the appropriate window manager features.

   In Emacs versions that use an X toolkit, the color-setting and
font-setting functions don't affect menus and the menu bar, since they
are displayed by their own widget classes.  To change the appearance of
the menus and menu bar, you must use X resources (*note Resources::).
*Note Colors::, regarding colors.  *Note Font X::, regarding choice of
font.

   Colors, fonts, and other attributes of the frame's display can also
be customized by setting frame parameters in the variable
`default-frame-alist' (*note Creating Frames::).  For a detailed
description of frame parameters and customization, see *Note Frame
Parameters: (elisp)Frame Parameters.


File: emacs,  Node: Scroll Bars,  Next: Wheeled Mice,  Prev: Frame Parameters,  Up: Frames

25.12 Scroll Bars
=================

On graphical displays, Emacs normally makes a "scroll bar" at the left
of each Emacs window, running the height of the window.(1)

   When Emacs is compiled with GTK+ support on the X window system, or
in operating systems such as Microsoft Windows or Mac OS, you can use
the scroll bar as you do in other graphical applications.  If you click
`Mouse-1' on the scroll bar's up and down buttons, that scrolls the
window by one line at a time.  Clicking `Mouse-1' above or below the
scroll bar's inner box scrolls the window by nearly the entire height
of the window, like `M-v' and `C-v' respectively (*note Moving
Point::).  Dragging the inner box with `Mouse-1' scrolls the window
continuously.

   If Emacs is compiled without GTK+ support on the X window system,
the scroll bar behaves differently.  The scroll bar's inner box is
drawn to represent the portion of the buffer currently displayed, with
the entire height of the scroll bar representing the entire length of
the buffer.  `Mouse-1' anywhere on the scroll bar scrolls forward like
`C-v', and `Mouse-3' scrolls backward like `M-v'.  Clicking `Mouse-2'
in the scroll bar lets you move or drag the inner box up and down.

   You can also click `C-Mouse-2' in the scroll bar to split a window
vertically.  The split occurs on the line where you click.

   You can toggle the use of the scroll bar with the command `M-x
scroll-bar-mode'.  With a prefix argument, this command turns use of
scroll bars on if and only if the argument is positive.  This command
applies to all frames, including frames yet to be created.  Customize
the variable `scroll-bar-mode' to control the use of scroll bars at
startup.  You can use it to specify that they are placed at the right
of windows if you prefer that.  You have to set this variable through
the `Customize' interface (*note Easy Customization::), or it will not
work properly.  You can also use the X resource `verticalScrollBars' to
control the initial setting of Scroll Bar mode.  *Note Resources::.

   To enable or disable scroll bars for just the selected frame, use the
command `M-x toggle-scroll-bar'.

   You can control the scroll bar width by changing the value of the
`scroll-bar-width' frame parameter.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Placing it at the left is usually more useful with overlapping
frames with text starting at the left margin.


File: emacs,  Node: Wheeled Mice,  Next: Drag and Drop,  Prev: Scroll Bars,  Up: Frames

25.13 Scrolling With "Wheeled" Mice
===================================

Some mice have a "wheel" instead of a third button.  You can usually
click the wheel to act as either `Mouse-2' or `Mouse-3', depending on
the setup.  You can also use the wheel to scroll windows instead of
using the scroll bar or keyboard commands.  Mouse wheel support only
works if the system generates appropriate events; whenever possible, it
is turned on by default.  To toggle this feature, use `M-x
mouse-wheel-mode'.

   The two variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and
`mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' determine where and by how much buffers are
scrolled.  The variable `mouse-wheel-progressive-speed' determines
whether the scroll speed is linked to how fast you move the wheel.


File: emacs,  Node: Drag and Drop,  Next: Menu Bars,  Prev: Wheeled Mice,  Up: Frames

25.14 Drag and Drop
===================

Emacs supports "drag and drop" using the mouse.  For instance, dropping
text onto an Emacs frame inserts the text where it is dropped.
Dropping a file onto an Emacs frame visits that file.  As a special
case, dropping the file on a Dired buffer moves or copies the file
(according to the conventions of the application it came from) into the
directory displayed in that buffer.

   Dropping a file normally visits it in the window you drop it on.  If
you prefer to visit the file in a new window in such cases, customize
the variable `dnd-open-file-other-window'.

   The XDND and Motif drag and drop protocols, and the old KDE 1.x
protocol, are currently supported.


File: emacs,  Node: Menu Bars,  Next: Tool Bars,  Prev: Drag and Drop,  Up: Frames

25.15 Menu Bars
===============

You can turn display of menu bars on or off with `M-x menu-bar-mode' or
by customizing the variable `menu-bar-mode'.  With no argument, this
command toggles Menu Bar mode, a minor mode.  With an argument, the
command turns Menu Bar mode on if the argument is positive, off if the
argument is not positive.  You can use the X resource `menuBar' to
control the initial setting of Menu Bar mode.  *Note Resources::.

   Expert users often turn off the menu bar, especially on text-only
terminals, where this makes one additional line available for text.  If
the menu bar is off, you can still pop up a menu of its contents with
`C-Mouse-3' on a display which supports pop-up menus.  *Note Menu Mouse
Clicks::.

   *Note Menu Bar::, for information on how to invoke commands with the
menu bar.  *Note X Resources::, for how to customize the menu bar
menus' visual appearance.


File: emacs,  Node: Tool Bars,  Next: Dialog Boxes,  Prev: Menu Bars,  Up: Frames

25.16 Tool Bars
===============

The "tool bar" is a line (or lines) of icons at the top of the Emacs
window, just below the menu bar.  You can click on these icons with the
mouse to do various jobs.

   The global tool bar contains general commands.  Some major modes
define their own tool bars to replace it.  A few "special" modes that
are not designed for ordinary editing remove some items from the global
tool bar.

   Tool bars work only on a graphical display.  The tool bar uses
colored XPM icons if Emacs was built with XPM support.  Otherwise, the
tool bar uses monochrome icons (PBM or XBM format).

   You can turn display of tool bars on or off with `M-x tool-bar-mode'
or by customizing the option `tool-bar-mode'.


File: emacs,  Node: Dialog Boxes,  Next: Tooltips,  Prev: Tool Bars,  Up: Frames

25.17 Using Dialog Boxes
========================

A dialog box is a special kind of menu for asking you a yes-or-no
question or some other special question.  Many Emacs commands use a
dialog box to ask a yes-or-no question, if you used the mouse to invoke
the command that led to the question.

   To disable the use of dialog boxes, change the variable
`use-dialog-box' to `nil'.  In that case, Emacs always performs
yes-or-no prompts using the echo area and keyboard input.  This
variable also controls whether to use file selection windows (but those
are not supported on all platforms).

   A file selection window is a special kind of dialog box for asking
for file names.  You can customize the variable `use-file-dialog' to
suppress the use of file selection windows, even if you still want
other kinds of dialogs.  This variable has no effect if you have
suppressed all dialog boxes with the variable `use-dialog-box'.

   When Emacs is compiled with GTK+ support, it uses the GTK+ "file
chooser" dialog.  Emacs adds an additional toggle button to this
dialog, which you can use to enable or disable the display of hidden
files (files starting with a dot) in that dialog.  If you want this
toggle to be activated by default, change the variable
`x-gtk-show-hidden-files' to `t'.  In addition, Emacs adds help text to
the GTK+ file chooser dialog; to disable this help text, change the
variable `x-gtk-file-dialog-help-text' to `nil'.

   In GTK+ versions 2.4 through 2.10, you can choose to use an older
version of the GTK+ file dialog by setting the variable
`x-gtk-use-old-file-dialog' to a non-`nil' value.  If Emacs is built
with a GTK+ version that has only one file dialog, this variable has no
effect.


File: emacs,  Node: Tooltips,  Next: Mouse Avoidance,  Prev: Dialog Boxes,  Up: Frames

25.18 Tooltips
==============

"Tooltips" are small windows that display text information at the
current mouse position.  They activate when there is a pause in mouse
movement.  There are two types of tooltip: help tooltips and GUD
tooltips.

   "Help tooltips" typically display over text--including the mode
line--but are also available for other parts of the Emacs frame, such
as the tool bar and menu items.

   You can toggle display of help tooltips (Tooltip mode) with the
command `M-x tooltip-mode'.  When Tooltip mode is disabled, the help
text is displayed in the echo area instead.

   "GUD tooltips" show values of variables.  They are useful when you
are debugging a program.  *Note Debugger Operation::.

   The variables `tooltip-delay' specifies how long Emacs should wait
before displaying a tooltip.  For additional customization options for
displaying tooltips, use `M-x customize-group <RET> tooltip <RET>'.
*Note X Resources::, for information on customizing the windows that
display tooltips.


File: emacs,  Node: Mouse Avoidance,  Next: Non-Window Terminals,  Prev: Tooltips,  Up: Frames

25.19 Mouse Avoidance
=====================

On graphical terminals, the mouse pointer may obscure the text in the
Emacs frame.  Emacs provides two methods to avoid this problem.

   Firstly, Emacs hides the mouse pointer each time you type a
self-inserting character, if the pointer lies inside an Emacs frame;
moving the mouse pointer makes it visible again.  To disable this
feature, set the variable `make-pointer-invisible' to `nil'.

   Secondly, you can use Mouse Avoidance mode, a minor mode, to keep
the mouse pointer away from point.  To use Mouse Avoidance mode,
customize the variable `mouse-avoidance-mode'.  You can set this to
various values to move the mouse in several ways:

`banish'
     Move the mouse to the upper-right corner on any key-press;

`exile'
     Move the mouse to the corner only if the cursor gets too close,
     and allow it to return once the cursor is out of the way;

`jump'
     If the cursor gets too close to the mouse, displace the mouse a
     random distance & direction;

`animate'
     As `jump', but shows steps along the way for illusion of motion;

`cat-and-mouse'
     The same as `animate';

`proteus'
     As `animate', but changes the shape of the mouse pointer too.

   You can also use the command `M-x mouse-avoidance-mode' to enable
the mode.  Whenever Mouse Avoidance mode moves the mouse, it also
raises the frame.


File: emacs,  Node: Non-Window Terminals,  Next: Text-Only Mouse,  Prev: Mouse Avoidance,  Up: Frames

25.20 Non-Window Terminals
==========================

On a text-only terminal, Emacs can display only one Emacs frame at a
time.  However, you can still create multiple Emacs frames, and switch
between them.  Switching frames on these terminals is much like
switching between different window configurations.

   Use `C-x 5 2' to create a new frame and switch to it; use `C-x 5 o'
to cycle through the existing frames; use `C-x 5 0' to delete the
current frame.

   Each frame has a number to distinguish it.  If your terminal can
display only one frame at a time, the selected frame's number N appears
near the beginning of the mode line, in the form `FN'.

   `FN' is in fact the frame's initial name.  You can give frames more
meaningful names if you wish, and you can select a frame by its name.
Use the command `M-x set-frame-name <RET> NAME <RET>' to specify a new
name for the selected frame, and use `M-x select-frame-by-name <RET>
NAME <RET>' to select a frame according to its name.  The name you
specify appears in the mode line when the frame is selected.


File: emacs,  Node: Text-Only Mouse,  Prev: Non-Window Terminals,  Up: Frames

25.21 Using a Mouse in Terminal Emulators
=========================================

Some text-only terminals support mouse clicks in the terminal window.

   In a terminal emulator which is compatible with `xterm', you can use
`M-x xterm-mouse-mode' to give Emacs control over simple use of the
mouse--basically, only non-modified single clicks are supported.  The
normal `xterm' mouse functionality for such clicks is still available
by holding down the `SHIFT' key when you press the mouse button.  Xterm
Mouse mode is a global minor mode (*note Minor Modes::).  Repeating the
command turns the mode off again.

   In the console on GNU/Linux, you can use `M-x gpm-mouse-mode' to
enable terminal mouse support.  You must have the gpm package installed
and running on your system in order for this to work.


File: emacs,  Node: International,  Next: Major Modes,  Prev: Frames,  Up: Top

26 International Character Set Support
**************************************

Emacs supports a wide variety of international character sets,
including European and Vietnamese variants of the Latin alphabet, as
well as Cyrillic, Devanagari (for Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopic, Greek,
Han (for Chinese and Japanese), Hangul (for Korean), Hebrew, IPA,
Kannada, Lao, Malayalam, Tamil, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts.
Emacs also supports various encodings of these characters used by other
internationalized software, such as word processors and mailers.

   Emacs allows editing text with international characters by supporting
all the related activities:

   * You can visit files with non-ASCII characters, save non-ASCII
     text, and pass non-ASCII text between Emacs and programs it
     invokes (such as compilers, spell-checkers, and mailers).  Setting
     your language environment (*note Language Environments::) takes
     care of setting up the coding systems and other options for a
     specific language or culture.  Alternatively, you can specify how
     Emacs should encode or decode text for each command; see *Note
     Text Coding::.

   * You can display non-ASCII characters encoded by the various
     scripts.  This works by using appropriate fonts on graphics
     displays (*note Defining Fontsets::), and by sending special codes
     to text-only displays (*note Terminal Coding::).  If some
     characters are displayed incorrectly, refer to *Note Undisplayable
     Characters::, which describes possible problems and explains how
     to solve them.

   * You can insert non-ASCII characters or search for them.  To do
     that, you can specify an input method (*note Select Input
     Method::) suitable for your language, or use the default input
     method set up when you set your language environment.  If your
     keyboard can produce non-ASCII characters, you can select an
     appropriate keyboard coding system (*note Terminal Coding::), and
     Emacs will accept those characters.  Latin-1 characters can also
     be input by using the `C-x 8' prefix, see *Note Unibyte Mode::.

     On X Window systems, your locale should be set to an appropriate
     value to make sure Emacs interprets keyboard input correctly; see
     *Note locales: Language Environments.

   The rest of this chapter describes these issues in detail.

* Menu:

* International Chars::     Basic concepts of multibyte characters.
* Enabling Multibyte::      Controlling whether to use multibyte characters.
* Language Environments::   Setting things up for the language you use.
* Input Methods::           Entering text characters not on your keyboard.
* Select Input Method::     Specifying your choice of input methods.
* Coding Systems::          Character set conversion when you read and
                              write files, and so on.
* Recognize Coding::        How Emacs figures out which conversion to use.
* Specify Coding::          Specifying a file's coding system explicitly.
* Output Coding::           Choosing coding systems for output.
* Text Coding::             Choosing conversion to use for file text.
* Communication Coding::    Coding systems for interprocess communication.
* File Name Coding::        Coding systems for file _names_.
* Terminal Coding::         Specifying coding systems for converting
                              terminal input and output.
* Fontsets::                Fontsets are collections of fonts
                              that cover the whole spectrum of characters.
* Defining Fontsets::       Defining a new fontset.
* Modifying Fontsets::      Modifying an existing fontset.
* Undisplayable Characters:: When characters don't display.
* Unibyte Mode::            You can pick one European character set
                              to use without multibyte characters.
* Charsets::                How Emacs groups its internal character codes.


File: emacs,  Node: International Chars,  Next: Enabling Multibyte,  Up: International

26.1 Introduction to International Character Sets
=================================================

The users of international character sets and scripts have established
many more-or-less standard coding systems for storing files.  These
coding systems are typically "multibyte", meaning that sequences of two
or more bytes are used to represent individual non-ASCII characters.

   Internally, Emacs uses its own multibyte character encoding, which
is a superset of the "Unicode" standard.  This internal encoding allows
characters from almost every known script to be intermixed in a single
buffer or string.  Emacs translates between the multibyte character
encoding and various other coding systems when reading and writing
files, and when exchanging data with subprocesses.

   The command `C-h h' (`view-hello-file') displays the file
`etc/HELLO', which shows how to say "hello" in many languages.  This
illustrates various scripts.  If some characters can't be displayed on
your terminal, they appear as `?' or as hollow boxes (*note
Undisplayable Characters::).

   Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are
used, generally don't have keys for all the characters in them.  You
can insert characters that your keyboard does not support, using `C-q'
(`quoted-insert') or `C-x 8 <RET>' (`ucs-insert').  *Note Inserting
Text::.  Emacs also supports various "input methods", typically one for
each script or language, which make it easier to type characters in the
script.  *Note Input Methods::.

   The prefix key `C-x <RET>' is used for commands that pertain to
multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.

   The command `C-x =' (`what-cursor-position') shows information about
the character at point.  In addition to the character position, which
was described in *Note Position Info::, this command displays how the
character is encoded.  For instance, it displays the following line in
the echo area for the character `c':

     Char: c (99, #o143, #x63) point=28062 of 36168 (78%) column=53

   The four values after `Char:' describe the character that follows
point, first by showing it and then by giving its character code in
decimal, octal and hex.  For a non-ASCII multibyte character, these are
followed by `file' and the character's representation, in hex, in the
buffer's coding system, if that coding system encodes the character
safely and with a single byte (*note Coding Systems::).  If the
character's encoding is longer than one byte, Emacs shows `file ...'.

   As a special case, if the character lies in the range 128 (0200
octal) through 159 (0237 octal), it stands for a "raw" byte that does
not correspond to any specific displayable character.  Such a
"character" lies within the `eight-bit-control' character set, and is
displayed as an escaped octal character code.  In this case, `C-x ='
shows `part of display ...' instead of `file'.

   With a prefix argument (`C-u C-x ='), this command displays a
detailed description of the character in a window:

   * The character set name, and the codes that identify the character
     within that character set; ASCII characters are identified as
     belonging to the `ascii' character set.

   * The character's syntax and categories.

   * The character's encodings, both internally in the buffer, and
     externally if you were to save the file.

   * What keys to type to input the character in the current input
     method (if it supports the character).

   * If you are running Emacs on a graphical display, the font name and
     glyph code for the character.  If you are running Emacs on a
     text-only terminal, the code(s) sent to the terminal.

   * The character's text properties (*note Text Properties:
     (elisp)Text Properties.), including any non-default faces used to
     display the character, and any overlays containing it (*note
     Overlays: (elisp)Overlays.).

   Here's an example showing the Latin-1 character A with grave accent,
in a buffer whose coding system is `utf-8-unix':

             character: A` (192, #o300, #xc0)
     preferred charset: unicode (Unicode (ISO10646))
            code point: 0xC0
                syntax: w 	which means: word
              category: j:Japanese l:Latin v:Vietnamese
           buffer code: #xC3 #x80
             file code: not encodable by coding system undecided-unix
               display: by this font (glyph code)
         xft:-unknown-DejaVu Sans Mono-normal-normal-normal-*-13-*-*-*-m-0-iso10646-1 (#x82)

     Character code properties: customize what to show
       name: LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH GRAVE
       general-category: Lu (Letter, Uppercase)
       decomposition: (65 768) ('A' '̀')
       old-name: LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A GRAVE

     There are text properties here:
       auto-composed        t


File: emacs,  Node: Enabling Multibyte,  Next: Language Environments,  Prev: International Chars,  Up: International

26.2 Enabling Multibyte Characters
==================================

By default, Emacs starts in multibyte mode: it stores the contents of
buffers and strings using an internal encoding that represents
non-ASCII characters using multi-byte sequences.  Multibyte mode allows
you to use all the supported languages and scripts without limitations.

   Under very special circumstances, you may want to disable multibyte
character support, for a specific buffer.  When multibyte characters
are disabled in a buffer, we call that "unibyte mode".  In unibyte
mode, each character in the buffer has a character code ranging from 0
through 255 (0377 octal); 0 through 127 (0177 octal) represent ASCII
characters, and 128 (0200 octal) through 255 (0377 octal) represent
non-ASCII characters.

   To edit a particular file in unibyte representation, visit it using
`find-file-literally'.  *Note Visiting::.  You can convert a multibyte
buffer to unibyte by saving it to a file, killing the buffer, and
visiting the file again with `find-file-literally'.  Alternatively, you
can use `C-x <RET> c' (`universal-coding-system-argument') and specify
`raw-text' as the coding system with which to visit or save a file.
*Note Text Coding::.  Unlike `find-file-literally', finding a file as
`raw-text' doesn't disable format conversion, uncompression, or auto
mode selection.

   Emacs normally loads Lisp files as multibyte.  This includes the
Emacs initialization file, `.emacs', and the initialization files of
Emacs packages such as Gnus.  However, you can specify unibyte loading
for a particular Lisp file, by putting `-*-unibyte: t;-*-' in a comment
on the first line (*note File Variables::).  Then that file is always
loaded as unibyte text.  The motivation for these conventions is that
it is more reliable to always load any particular Lisp file in the same
way.  However, you can load a Lisp file as unibyte, on any one
occasion, by typing `C-x <RET> c raw-text <RET>' immediately before
loading it.

   The mode line indicates whether multibyte character support is
enabled in the current buffer.  If it is, there are two or more
characters (most often two dashes) near the beginning of the mode line,
before the indication of the visited file's end-of-line convention
(colon, backslash, etc.).  When multibyte characters are not enabled,
nothing precedes the colon except a single dash.  *Note Mode Line::,
for more details about this.

   You can turn on multibyte support in a specific buffer by invoking
the command `toggle-enable-multibyte-characters' in that buffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Language Environments,  Next: Input Methods,  Prev: Enabling Multibyte,  Up: International

26.3 Language Environments
==========================

All supported character sets are supported in Emacs buffers whenever
multibyte characters are enabled; there is no need to select a
particular language in order to display its characters in an Emacs
buffer.  However, it is important to select a "language environment" in
order to set various defaults.  Roughly speaking, the language
environment represents a choice of preferred script rather than a
choice of language.

   The language environment controls which coding systems to recognize
when reading text (*note Recognize Coding::).  This applies to files,
incoming mail, and any other text you read into Emacs.  It may also
specify the default coding system to use when you create a file.  Each
language environment also specifies a default input method.

   To select a language environment, customize the variable
`current-language-environment' or use the command `M-x
set-language-environment'.  It makes no difference which buffer is
current when you use this command, because the effects apply globally
to the Emacs session.  The supported language environments include:

     ASCII, Belarusian, Bengali, Brazilian Portuguese, Bulgarian,
     Chinese-BIG5, Chinese-CNS, Chinese-EUC-TW, Chinese-GB, Chinese-GBK,
     Chinese-GB18030, Croatian, Cyrillic-ALT, Cyrillic-ISO,
     Cyrillic-KOI8, Czech, Devanagari, Dutch, English, Esperanto,
     Ethiopic, French, Georgian, German, Greek, Gujarati, Hebrew, IPA,
     Italian, Japanese, Kannada, Khmer, Korean, Lao, Latin-1, Latin-2,
     Latin-3, Latin-4, Latin-5, Latin-6, Latin-7, Latin-8 (Celtic),
     Latin-9 (updated Latin-1 with the Euro sign), Latvian, Lithuanian,
     Malayalam, Oriya, Polish, Punjabi, Romanian, Russian, Sinhala,
     Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, TaiViet, Tajik, Tamil,
     Telugu, Thai, Tibetan, Turkish, UTF-8 (for a setup which prefers
     Unicode characters and files encoded in UTF-8), Ukrainian,
     Vietnamese, Welsh, and Windows-1255 (for a setup which prefers
     Cyrillic characters and files encoded in Windows-1255).

   To display the script(s) used by your language environment on a
graphical display, you need to have a suitable font.  If some of the
characters appear as empty boxes, you should install the GNU Intlfonts
package, which includes fonts for most supported scripts.(1) *Note
Fontsets::, for more details about setting up your fonts.

   Some operating systems let you specify the character-set locale you
are using by setting the locale environment variables `LC_ALL',
`LC_CTYPE', or `LANG'.(2)  During startup, Emacs looks up your
character-set locale's name in the system locale alias table, matches
its canonical name against entries in the value of the variables
`locale-charset-language-names' and `locale-language-names', and
selects the corresponding language environment if a match is found.
(The former variable overrides the latter.)  It also adjusts the display
table and terminal coding system, the locale coding system, the
preferred coding system as needed for the locale, and--last but not
least--the way Emacs decodes non-ASCII characters sent by your keyboard.

   If you modify the `LC_ALL', `LC_CTYPE', or `LANG' environment
variables while running Emacs, you may want to invoke the
`set-locale-environment' function afterwards to readjust the language
environment from the new locale.

   The `set-locale-environment' function normally uses the preferred
coding system established by the language environment to decode system
messages.  But if your locale matches an entry in the variable
`locale-preferred-coding-systems', Emacs uses the corresponding coding
system instead.  For example, if the locale `ja_JP.PCK' matches
`japanese-shift-jis' in `locale-preferred-coding-systems', Emacs uses
that encoding even though it might normally use `japanese-iso-8bit'.

   You can override the language environment chosen at startup with
explicit use of the command `set-language-environment', or with
customization of `current-language-environment' in your init file.

   To display information about the effects of a certain language
environment LANG-ENV, use the command `C-h L LANG-ENV <RET>'
(`describe-language-environment').  This tells you which languages this
language environment is useful for, and lists the character sets,
coding systems, and input methods that go with it.  It also shows some
sample text to illustrate scripts used in this language environment.
If you give an empty input for LANG-ENV, this command describes the
chosen language environment.

   You can customize any language environment with the normal hook
`set-language-environment-hook'.  The command
`set-language-environment' runs that hook after setting up the new
language environment.  The hook functions can test for a specific
language environment by checking the variable
`current-language-environment'.  This hook is where you should put
non-default settings for specific language environment, such as coding
systems for keyboard input and terminal output, the default input
method, etc.

   Before it starts to set up the new language environment,
`set-language-environment' first runs the hook
`exit-language-environment-hook'.  This hook is useful for undoing
customizations that were made with `set-language-environment-hook'.
For instance, if you set up a special key binding in a specific language
environment using `set-language-environment-hook', you should set up
`exit-language-environment-hook' to restore the normal binding for that
key.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If you run Emacs on X, you need to inform the X server about the
location of the newly installed fonts with the following commands:

      xset fp+ /usr/local/share/emacs/fonts
      xset fp rehash

   (2) If more than one of these is set, the first one that is nonempty
specifies your locale for this purpose.


File: emacs,  Node: Input Methods,  Next: Select Input Method,  Prev: Language Environments,  Up: International

26.4 Input Methods
==================

An "input method" is a kind of character conversion designed
specifically for interactive input.  In Emacs, typically each language
has its own input method; sometimes several languages which use the same
characters can share one input method.  A few languages support several
input methods.

   The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters
into another alphabet; this allows you to use one other alphabet
instead of ASCII.  The Greek and Russian input methods work this way.

   A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
characters into one letter.  Many European input methods use composition
to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence that consists of a
letter followed by accent characters (or vice versa).  For example, some
methods convert the sequence `a'' into a single accented letter.  These
input methods have no special commands of their own; all they do is
compose sequences of printing characters.

   The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
by composition.  The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
mapped into one syllable sign.

   Chinese and Japanese require more complex methods.  In Chinese input
methods, first you enter the phonetic spelling of a Chinese word (in
input method `chinese-py', among others), or a sequence of portions of
the character (input methods `chinese-4corner' and `chinese-sw', and
others).  One input sequence typically corresponds to many possible
Chinese characters.  You select the one you mean using keys such as
`C-f', `C-b', `C-n', `C-p', and digits, which have special meanings in
this situation.

   The possible characters are conceptually arranged in several rows,
with each row holding up to 10 alternatives.  Normally, Emacs displays
just one row at a time, in the echo area; `(I/J)' appears at the
beginning, to indicate that this is the Ith row out of a total of J
rows.  Type `C-n' or `C-p' to display the next row or the previous row.

   Type `C-f' and `C-b' to move forward and backward among the
alternatives in the current row.  As you do this, Emacs highlights the
current alternative with a special color; type `C-<SPC>' to select the
current alternative and use it as input.  The alternatives in the row
are also numbered; the number appears before the alternative.  Typing a
digit N selects the Nth alternative of the current row and uses it as
input.

   <TAB> in these Chinese input methods displays a buffer showing all
the possible characters at once; then clicking `Mouse-2' on one of them
selects that alternative.  The keys `C-f', `C-b', `C-n', `C-p', and
digits continue to work as usual, but they do the highlighting in the
buffer showing the possible characters, rather than in the echo area.

   In Japanese input methods, first you input a whole word using
phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.  One
phonetic spelling corresponds to a number of different Japanese words;
to select one of them, use `C-n' and `C-p' to cycle through the
alternatives.

   Sometimes it is useful to cut off input method processing so that the
characters you have just entered will not combine with subsequent
characters.  For example, in input method `latin-1-postfix', the
sequence `e '' combines to form an `e' with an accent.  What if you
want to enter them as separate characters?

   One way is to type the accent twice; this is a special feature for
entering the separate letter and accent.  For example, `e ' '' gives
you the two characters `e''.  Another way is to type another letter
after the `e'--something that won't combine with that--and immediately
delete it.  For example, you could type `e e <DEL> '' to get separate
`e' and `''.

   Another method, more general but not quite as easy to type, is to use
`C-\ C-\' between two characters to stop them from combining.  This is
the command `C-\' (`toggle-input-method') used twice.  *Note Select
Input Method::.

   `C-\ C-\' is especially useful inside an incremental search, because
it stops waiting for more characters to combine, and starts searching
for what you have already entered.

   To find out how to input the character after point using the current
input method, type `C-u C-x ='.  *Note Position Info::.

   The variables `input-method-highlight-flag' and
`input-method-verbose-flag' control how input methods explain what is
happening.  If `input-method-highlight-flag' is non-`nil', the partial
sequence is highlighted in the buffer (for most input methods--some
disable this feature).  If `input-method-verbose-flag' is non-`nil',
the list of possible characters to type next is displayed in the echo
area (but not when you are in the minibuffer).

   Another facility for typing characters not on your keyboard is by
using the `C-x 8 <RET>' (`ucs-insert') to insert a single character
based on its Unicode name or code-point; see *Note Inserting Text::.


File: emacs,  Node: Select Input Method,  Next: Coding Systems,  Prev: Input Methods,  Up: International

26.5 Selecting an Input Method
==============================

`C-\'
     Enable or disable use of the selected input method.

`C-x <RET> C-\ METHOD <RET>'
     Select a new input method for the current buffer.

`C-h I METHOD <RET>'
`C-h C-\ METHOD <RET>'
     Describe the input method METHOD (`describe-input-method').  By
     default, it describes the current input method (if any).  This
     description should give you the full details of how to use any
     particular input method.

`M-x list-input-methods'
     Display a list of all the supported input methods.

   To choose an input method for the current buffer, use `C-x <RET>
C-\' (`set-input-method').  This command reads the input method name
from the minibuffer; the name normally starts with the language
environment that it is meant to be used with.  The variable
`current-input-method' records which input method is selected.

   Input methods use various sequences of ASCII characters to stand for
non-ASCII characters.  Sometimes it is useful to turn off the input
method temporarily.  To do this, type `C-\' (`toggle-input-method').
To reenable the input method, type `C-\' again.

   If you type `C-\' and you have not yet selected an input method, it
prompts for you to specify one.  This has the same effect as using `C-x
<RET> C-\' to specify an input method.

   When invoked with a numeric argument, as in `C-u C-\',
`toggle-input-method' always prompts you for an input method,
suggesting the most recently selected one as the default.

   Selecting a language environment specifies a default input method for
use in various buffers.  When you have a default input method, you can
select it in the current buffer by typing `C-\'.  The variable
`default-input-method' specifies the default input method (`nil' means
there is none).

   In some language environments, which support several different input
methods, you might want to use an input method different from the
default chosen by `set-language-environment'.  You can instruct Emacs
to select a different default input method for a certain language
environment, if you wish, by using `set-language-environment-hook'
(*note set-language-environment-hook: Language Environments.).  For
example:

     (defun my-chinese-setup ()
       "Set up my private Chinese environment."
       (if (equal current-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
           (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")))
     (add-hook 'set-language-environment-hook 'my-chinese-setup)

This sets the default input method to be `chinese-tonepy' whenever you
choose a Chinese-GB language environment.

   You can instruct Emacs to activate a certain input method
automatically.  For example:

     (add-hook 'text-mode-hook
       (lambda () (set-input-method "german-prefix")))

This activates the input method "german-prefix" automatically in the
Text mode.

   Some input methods for alphabetic scripts work by (in effect)
remapping the keyboard to emulate various keyboard layouts commonly used
for those scripts.  How to do this remapping properly depends on your
actual keyboard layout.  To specify which layout your keyboard has, use
the command `M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout'.

   You can use the command `M-x quail-show-key' to show what key (or
key sequence) to type in order to input the character following point,
using the selected keyboard layout.  The command `C-u C-x =' also shows
that information in addition to the other information about the
character.

   To see a list of all the supported input methods, type `M-x
list-input-methods'.  The list gives information about each input
method, including the string that stands for it in the mode line.


File: emacs,  Node: Coding Systems,  Next: Recognize Coding,  Prev: Select Input Method,  Up: International

26.6 Coding Systems
===================

Users of various languages have established many more-or-less standard
coding systems for representing them.  Emacs does not use these coding
systems internally; instead, it converts from various coding systems to
its own system when reading data, and converts the internal coding
system to other coding systems when writing data.  Conversion is
possible in reading or writing files, in sending or receiving from the
terminal, and in exchanging data with subprocesses.

   Emacs assigns a name to each coding system.  Most coding systems are
used for one language, and the name of the coding system starts with
the language name.  Some coding systems are used for several languages;
their names usually start with `iso'.  There are also special coding
systems, such as `no-conversion', `raw-text', and `emacs-internal'.

   A special class of coding systems, collectively known as
"codepages", is designed to support text encoded by MS-Windows and
MS-DOS software.  The names of these coding systems are `cpNNNN', where
NNNN is a 3- or 4-digit number of the codepage.  You can use these
encodings just like any other coding system; for example, to visit a
file encoded in codepage 850, type `C-x <RET> c cp850 <RET> C-x C-f
FILENAME <RET>'.

   In addition to converting various representations of non-ASCII
characters, a coding system can perform end-of-line conversion.  Emacs
handles three different conventions for how to separate lines in a file:
newline, carriage-return linefeed, and just carriage-return.

`C-h C CODING <RET>'
     Describe coding system CODING.

`C-h C <RET>'
     Describe the coding systems currently in use.

`M-x list-coding-systems'
     Display a list of all the supported coding systems.

   The command `C-h C' (`describe-coding-system') displays information
about particular coding systems, including the end-of-line conversion
specified by those coding systems.  You can specify a coding system
name as the argument; alternatively, with an empty argument, it
describes the coding systems currently selected for various purposes,
both in the current buffer and as the defaults, and the priority list
for recognizing coding systems (*note Recognize Coding::).

   To display a list of all the supported coding systems, type `M-x
list-coding-systems'.  The list gives information about each coding
system, including the letter that stands for it in the mode line (*note
Mode Line::).

   Each of the coding systems that appear in this list--except for
`no-conversion', which means no conversion of any kind--specifies how
and whether to convert printing characters, but leaves the choice of
end-of-line conversion to be decided based on the contents of each file.
For example, if the file appears to use the sequence carriage-return
linefeed to separate lines, DOS end-of-line conversion will be used.

   Each of the listed coding systems has three variants which specify
exactly what to do for end-of-line conversion:

`...-unix'
     Don't do any end-of-line conversion; assume the file uses newline
     to separate lines.  (This is the convention normally used on Unix
     and GNU systems.)

`...-dos'
     Assume the file uses carriage-return linefeed to separate lines,
     and do the appropriate conversion.  (This is the convention
     normally used on Microsoft systems.(1))

`...-mac'
     Assume the file uses carriage-return to separate lines, and do the
     appropriate conversion.  (This is the convention normally used on
     the Macintosh system.)

   These variant coding systems are omitted from the
`list-coding-systems' display for brevity, since they are entirely
predictable.  For example, the coding system `iso-latin-1' has variants
`iso-latin-1-unix', `iso-latin-1-dos' and `iso-latin-1-mac'.

   The coding systems `unix', `dos', and `mac' are aliases for
`undecided-unix', `undecided-dos', and `undecided-mac', respectively.
These coding systems specify only the end-of-line conversion, and leave
the character code conversion to be deduced from the text itself.

   The coding system `raw-text' is good for a file which is mainly
ASCII text, but may contain byte values above 127 which are not meant
to encode non-ASCII characters.  With `raw-text', Emacs copies those
byte values unchanged, and sets `enable-multibyte-characters' to `nil'
in the current buffer so that they will be interpreted properly.
`raw-text' handles end-of-line conversion in the usual way, based on
the data encountered, and has the usual three variants to specify the
kind of end-of-line conversion to use.

   In contrast, the coding system `no-conversion' specifies no
character code conversion at all--none for non-ASCII byte values and
none for end of line.  This is useful for reading or writing binary
files, tar files, and other files that must be examined verbatim.  It,
too, sets `enable-multibyte-characters' to `nil'.

   The easiest way to edit a file with no conversion of any kind is with
the `M-x find-file-literally' command.  This uses `no-conversion', and
also suppresses other Emacs features that might convert the file
contents before you see them.  *Note Visiting::.

   The coding system `emacs-internal' (or `utf-8-emacs', which is
equivalent) means that the file contains non-ASCII characters stored
with the internal Emacs encoding.  This coding system handles
end-of-line conversion based on the data encountered, and has the usual
three variants to specify the kind of end-of-line conversion.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) It is also specified for MIME `text/*' bodies and in other
network transport contexts.  It is different from the SGML reference
syntax record-start/record-end format which Emacs doesn't support
directly.


File: emacs,  Node: Recognize Coding,  Next: Specify Coding,  Prev: Coding Systems,  Up: International

26.7 Recognizing Coding Systems
===============================

Whenever Emacs reads a given piece of text, it tries to recognize which
coding system to use.  This applies to files being read, output from
subprocesses, text from X selections, etc.  Emacs can select the right
coding system automatically most of the time--once you have specified
your preferences.

   Some coding systems can be recognized or distinguished by which byte
sequences appear in the data.  However, there are coding systems that
cannot be distinguished, not even potentially.  For example, there is no
way to distinguish between Latin-1 and Latin-2; they use the same byte
values with different meanings.

   Emacs handles this situation by means of a priority list of coding
systems.  Whenever Emacs reads a file, if you do not specify the coding
system to use, Emacs checks the data against each coding system,
starting with the first in priority and working down the list, until it
finds a coding system that fits the data.  Then it converts the file
contents assuming that they are represented in this coding system.

   The priority list of coding systems depends on the selected language
environment (*note Language Environments::).  For example, if you use
French, you probably want Emacs to prefer Latin-1 to Latin-2; if you use
Czech, you probably want Latin-2 to be preferred.  This is one of the
reasons to specify a language environment.

   However, you can alter the coding system priority list in detail
with the command `M-x prefer-coding-system'.  This command reads the
name of a coding system from the minibuffer, and adds it to the front
of the priority list, so that it is preferred to all others.  If you
use this command several times, each use adds one element to the front
of the priority list.

   If you use a coding system that specifies the end-of-line conversion
type, such as `iso-8859-1-dos', what this means is that Emacs should
attempt to recognize `iso-8859-1' with priority, and should use DOS
end-of-line conversion when it does recognize `iso-8859-1'.

   Sometimes a file name indicates which coding system to use for the
file.  The variable `file-coding-system-alist' specifies this
correspondence.  There is a special function
`modify-coding-system-alist' for adding elements to this list.  For
example, to read and write all `.txt' files using the coding system
`chinese-iso-8bit', you can execute this Lisp expression:

     (modify-coding-system-alist 'file "\\.txt\\'" 'chinese-iso-8bit)

The first argument should be `file', the second argument should be a
regular expression that determines which files this applies to, and the
third argument says which coding system to use for these files.

   Emacs recognizes which kind of end-of-line conversion to use based on
the contents of the file: if it sees only carriage-returns, or only
carriage-return linefeed sequences, then it chooses the end-of-line
conversion accordingly.  You can inhibit the automatic use of
end-of-line conversion by setting the variable `inhibit-eol-conversion'
to non-`nil'.  If you do that, DOS-style files will be displayed with
the `^M' characters visible in the buffer; some people prefer this to
the more subtle `(DOS)' end-of-line type indication near the left edge
of the mode line (*note eol-mnemonic: Mode Line.).

   By default, the automatic detection of coding system is sensitive to
escape sequences.  If Emacs sees a sequence of characters that begin
with an escape character, and the sequence is valid as an ISO-2022
code, that tells Emacs to use one of the ISO-2022 encodings to decode
the file.

   However, there may be cases that you want to read escape sequences
in a file as is.  In such a case, you can set the variable
`inhibit-iso-escape-detection' to non-`nil'.  Then the code detection
ignores any escape sequences, and never uses an ISO-2022 encoding.  The
result is that all escape sequences become visible in the buffer.

   The default value of `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' is `nil'.  We
recommend that you not change it permanently, only for one specific
operation.  That's because many Emacs Lisp source files in the Emacs
distribution contain non-ASCII characters encoded in the coding system
`iso-2022-7bit', and they won't be decoded correctly when you visit
those files if you suppress the escape sequence detection.

   The variables `auto-coding-alist', `auto-coding-regexp-alist' and
`auto-coding-functions' are the strongest way to specify the coding
system for certain patterns of file names, or for files containing
certain patterns; these variables even override `-*-coding:-*-' tags in
the file itself.  Emacs uses `auto-coding-alist' for tar and archive
files, to prevent it from being confused by a `-*-coding:-*-' tag in a
member of the archive and thinking it applies to the archive file as a
whole.  Likewise, Emacs uses `auto-coding-regexp-alist' to ensure that
RMAIL files, whose names in general don't match any particular pattern,
are decoded correctly.  One of the builtin `auto-coding-functions'
detects the encoding for XML files.

   When you get new mail in Rmail, each message is translated
automatically from the coding system it is written in, as if it were a
separate file.  This uses the priority list of coding systems that you
have specified.  If a MIME message specifies a character set, Rmail
obeys that specification, unless `rmail-decode-mime-charset' is `nil'.
For reading and saving Rmail files themselves, Emacs uses the coding
system specified by the variable `rmail-file-coding-system'.  The
default value is `nil', which means that Rmail files are not translated
(they are read and written in the Emacs internal character code).


File: emacs,  Node: Specify Coding,  Next: Output Coding,  Prev: Recognize Coding,  Up: International

26.8 Specifying a File's Coding System
======================================

If Emacs recognizes the encoding of a file incorrectly, you can reread
the file using the correct coding system by typing `C-x <RET> r
CODING-SYSTEM <RET>'.  To see what coding system Emacs actually used to
decode the file, look at the coding system mnemonic letter near the
left edge of the mode line (*note Mode Line::), or type `C-h C <RET>'.

   You can specify the coding system for a particular file in the file
itself, using the `-*-...-*-' construct at the beginning, or a local
variables list at the end (*note File Variables::).  You do this by
defining a value for the "variable" named `coding'.  Emacs does not
really have a variable `coding'; instead of setting a variable, this
uses the specified coding system for the file.  For example, `-*-mode:
C; coding: latin-1;-*-' specifies use of the Latin-1 coding system, as
well as C mode.  When you specify the coding explicitly in the file,
that overrides `file-coding-system-alist'.


File: emacs,  Node: Output Coding,  Next: Text Coding,  Prev: Specify Coding,  Up: International

26.9 Choosing Coding Systems for Output
=======================================

Once Emacs has chosen a coding system for a buffer, it stores that
coding system in `buffer-file-coding-system'.  That makes it the
default for operations that write from this buffer into a file, such as
`save-buffer' and `write-region'.  You can specify a different coding
system for further file output from the buffer using
`set-buffer-file-coding-system' (*note Text Coding::).

   You can insert any character Emacs supports into any Emacs buffer,
but most coding systems can only handle a subset of these characters.
Therefore, it's possible that the characters you insert cannot be
encoded with the coding system that will be used to save the buffer.
For example, you could visit a text file in Polish, encoded in
`iso-8859-2', and add some Russian words to it.  When you save that
buffer, Emacs cannot use the current value of
`buffer-file-coding-system', because the characters you added cannot be
encoded by that coding system.

   When that happens, Emacs tries the most-preferred coding system (set
by `M-x prefer-coding-system' or `M-x set-language-environment').  If
that coding system can safely encode all of the characters in the
buffer, Emacs uses it, and stores its value in
`buffer-file-coding-system'.  Otherwise, Emacs displays a list of
coding systems suitable for encoding the buffer's contents, and asks
you to choose one of those coding systems.

   If you insert the unsuitable characters in a mail message, Emacs
behaves a bit differently.  It additionally checks whether the
most-preferred coding system is recommended for use in MIME messages;
if not, Emacs tells you that the most-preferred coding system is not
recommended and prompts you for another coding system.  This is so you
won't inadvertently send a message encoded in a way that your
recipient's mail software will have difficulty decoding.  (You can
still use an unsuitable coding system if you type its name in response
to the question.)

   When you send a message with Message mode (*note Sending Mail::),
Emacs has four different ways to determine the coding system to use for
encoding the message text.  It tries the buffer's own value of
`buffer-file-coding-system', if that is non-`nil'.  Otherwise, it uses
the value of `sendmail-coding-system', if that is non-`nil'.  The third
way is to use the default coding system for new files, which is
controlled by your choice of language environment, if that is
non-`nil'.  If all of these three values are `nil', Emacs encodes
outgoing mail using the Latin-1 coding system.


File: emacs,  Node: Text Coding,  Next: Communication Coding,  Prev: Output Coding,  Up: International

26.10 Specifying a Coding System for File Text
==============================================

In cases where Emacs does not automatically choose the right coding
system for a file's contents, you can use these commands to specify one:

`C-x <RET> f CODING <RET>'
     Use coding system CODING for saving or revisiting the visited file
     in the current buffer.

`C-x <RET> c CODING <RET>'
     Specify coding system CODING for the immediately following command.

`C-x <RET> r CODING <RET>'
     Revisit the current file using the coding system CODING.

`M-x recode-region <RET> RIGHT <RET> WRONG <RET>'
     Convert a region that was decoded using coding system WRONG,
     decoding it using coding system RIGHT instead.

   The command `C-x <RET> f' (`set-buffer-file-coding-system') sets the
file coding system for the current buffer--in other words, it says
which coding system to use when saving or reverting the visited file.
You specify which coding system using the minibuffer.  If you specify a
coding system that cannot handle all of the characters in the buffer,
Emacs warns you about the troublesome characters when you actually save
the buffer.

   You can also use this command to specify the end-of-line conversion
(*note end-of-line conversion: Coding Systems.) for encoding the
current buffer.  For example, `C-x <RET> f dos <RET>' will cause Emacs
to save the current buffer's text with DOS-style CRLF line endings.

   Another way to specify the coding system for a file is when you visit
the file.  First use the command `C-x <RET> c'
(`universal-coding-system-argument'); this command uses the minibuffer
to read a coding system name.  After you exit the minibuffer, the
specified coding system is used for _the immediately following command_.

   So if the immediately following command is `C-x C-f', for example,
it reads the file using that coding system (and records the coding
system for when you later save the file).  Or if the immediately
following command is `C-x C-w', it writes the file using that coding
system.  When you specify the coding system for saving in this way,
instead of with `C-x <RET> f', there is no warning if the buffer
contains characters that the coding system cannot handle.

   Other file commands affected by a specified coding system include
`C-x i' and `C-x C-v', as well as the other-window variants of `C-x
C-f'.  `C-x <RET> c' also affects commands that start subprocesses,
including `M-x shell' (*note Shell::).  If the immediately following
command does not use the coding system, then `C-x <RET> c' ultimately
has no effect.

   An easy way to visit a file with no conversion is with the `M-x
find-file-literally' command.  *Note Visiting::.

   The default value of the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'
specifies the choice of coding system to use when you create a new file.
It applies when you find a new file, and when you create a buffer and
then save it in a file.  Selecting a language environment typically sets
this variable to a good choice of default coding system for that
language environment.

   If you visit a file with a wrong coding system, you can correct this
with `C-x <RET> r' (`revert-buffer-with-coding-system').  This visits
the current file again, using a coding system you specify.

   If a piece of text has already been inserted into a buffer using the
wrong coding system, you can redo the decoding of it using `M-x
recode-region'.  This prompts you for the proper coding system, then
for the wrong coding system that was actually used, and does the
conversion.  It first encodes the region using the wrong coding system,
then decodes it again using the proper coding system.


File: emacs,  Node: Communication Coding,  Next: File Name Coding,  Prev: Text Coding,  Up: International

26.11 Coding Systems for Interprocess Communication
===================================================

This section explains how to specify coding systems for use in
communication with other processes.

`C-x <RET> x CODING <RET>'
     Use coding system CODING for transferring selections to and from
     other window-based applications.

`C-x <RET> X CODING <RET>'
     Use coding system CODING for transferring _one_ selection--the
     next one--to or from another window-based application.

`C-x <RET> p INPUT-CODING <RET> OUTPUT-CODING <RET>'
     Use coding systems INPUT-CODING and OUTPUT-CODING for subprocess
     input and output in the current buffer.

`C-x <RET> c CODING <RET>'
     Specify coding system CODING for the immediately following command.

   The command `C-x <RET> x' (`set-selection-coding-system') specifies
the coding system for sending selected text to other windowing
applications, and for receiving the text of selections made in other
applications.  This command applies to all subsequent selections, until
you override it by using the command again.  The command `C-x <RET> X'
(`set-next-selection-coding-system') specifies the coding system for
the next selection made in Emacs or read by Emacs.

   The variable `x-select-request-type' specifies the data type to
request from the X Window System for receiving text selections from
other applications.  If the value is `nil' (the default), Emacs tries
`COMPOUND_TEXT' and `UTF8_STRING', in this order, and uses various
heuristics to choose the more appropriate of the two results; if none
of these succeed, Emacs falls back on `STRING'.  If the value of
`x-select-request-type' is one of the symbols `COMPOUND_TEXT',
`UTF8_STRING', `STRING', or `TEXT', Emacs uses only that request type.
If the value is a list of some of these symbols, Emacs tries only the
request types in the list, in order, until one of them succeeds, or
until the list is exhausted.

   The command `C-x <RET> p' (`set-buffer-process-coding-system')
specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.  This
command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess has its
own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify translation to
and from a particular subprocess by giving the command in the
corresponding buffer.

   You can also use `C-x <RET> c' just before the command that runs or
starts a subprocess, to specify the coding system to use for
communication with that subprocess.

   The default for translation of process input and output depends on
the current language environment.

   The variable `locale-coding-system' specifies a coding system to use
when encoding and decoding system strings such as system error messages
and `format-time-string' formats and time stamps.  That coding system
is also used for decoding non-ASCII keyboard input on X Window systems.
You should choose a coding system that is compatible with the
underlying system's text representation, which is normally specified by
one of the environment variables `LC_ALL', `LC_CTYPE', and `LANG'.
(The first one, in the order specified above, whose value is nonempty
is the one that determines the text representation.)

   The variable `x-select-request-type' specifies a selection data type
of selection to request from the X server.  The default value is `nil',
which means Emacs tries `COMPOUND_TEXT' and `UTF8_STRING', and uses
whichever result seems more appropriate.  You can explicitly specify
the data type by setting the variable to one of the symbols
`COMPOUND_TEXT', `UTF8_STRING', `STRING' and `TEXT'.


File: emacs,  Node: File Name Coding,  Next: Terminal Coding,  Prev: Communication Coding,  Up: International

26.12 Coding Systems for File Names
===================================

`C-x <RET> F CODING <RET>'
     Use coding system CODING for encoding and decoding file _names_.

   The variable `file-name-coding-system' specifies a coding system to
use for encoding file names.  It has no effect on reading and writing
the _contents_ of files.

   If you set the variable to a coding system name (as a Lisp symbol or
a string), Emacs encodes file names using that coding system for all
file operations.  This makes it possible to use non-ASCII characters in
file names--or, at least, those non-ASCII characters which the
specified coding system can encode.  Use `C-x <RET> F'
(`set-file-name-coding-system') to specify this interactively.

   If `file-name-coding-system' is `nil', Emacs uses a default coding
system determined by the selected language environment.  In the default
language environment, non-ASCII characters in file names are not
encoded specially; they appear in the file system using the internal
Emacs representation.

   *Warning:* if you change `file-name-coding-system' (or the language
environment) in the middle of an Emacs session, problems can result if
you have already visited files whose names were encoded using the
earlier coding system and cannot be encoded (or are encoded
differently) under the new coding system.  If you try to save one of
these buffers under the visited file name, saving may use the wrong file
name, or it may get an error.  If such a problem happens, use `C-x C-w'
to specify a new file name for that buffer.

   If a mistake occurs when encoding a file name, use the command `M-x
recode-file-name' to change the file name's coding system.  This
prompts for an existing file name, its old coding system, and the
coding system to which you wish to convert.


File: emacs,  Node: Terminal Coding,  Next: Fontsets,  Prev: File Name Coding,  Up: International

26.13 Coding Systems for Terminal I/O
=====================================

`C-x <RET> k CODING <RET>'
     Use coding system CODING for keyboard input.

`C-x <RET> t CODING <RET>'
     Use coding system CODING for terminal output.

   The command `C-x <RET> t' (`set-terminal-coding-system') specifies
the coding system for terminal output.  If you specify a character code
for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
translated into that coding system.

   This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built to
support specific languages or character sets--for example, European
terminals that support one of the ISO Latin character sets.  You need to
specify the terminal coding system when using multibyte text, so that
Emacs knows which characters the terminal can actually handle.

   By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all, unless
Emacs can deduce the proper coding system from your terminal type or
your locale specification (*note Language Environments::).

   The command `C-x <RET> k' (`set-keyboard-coding-system') or the
variable `keyboard-coding-system' specifies the coding system for
keyboard input.  Character-code translation of keyboard input is useful
for terminals with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for
example, some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.

   By default, keyboard input is translated based on your system locale
setting.  If your terminal does not really support the encoding implied
by your locale (for example, if you find it inserts a non-ASCII
character if you type `M-i'), you will need to set
`keyboard-coding-system' to `nil' to turn off encoding.  You can do
this by putting

     (set-keyboard-coding-system nil)

in your init file.

   There is a similarity between using a coding system translation for
keyboard input, and using an input method: both define sequences of
keyboard input that translate into single characters.  However, input
methods are designed to be convenient for interactive use by humans, and
the sequences that are translated are typically sequences of ASCII
printing characters.  Coding systems typically translate sequences of
non-graphic characters.


File: emacs,  Node: Fontsets,  Next: Defining Fontsets,  Prev: Terminal Coding,  Up: International

26.14 Fontsets
==============

A font typically defines shapes for a single alphabet or script.
Therefore, displaying the entire range of scripts that Emacs supports
requires a collection of many fonts.  In Emacs, such a collection is
called a "fontset".  A fontset is defined by a list of font specs, each
assigned to handle a range of character codes, and may fall back on
another fontset for characters which are not covered by the fonts it
specifies.

   Each fontset has a name, like a font.  However, while fonts are
stored in the system and the available font names are defined by the
system, fontsets are defined within Emacs itself.  Once you have
defined a fontset, you can use it within Emacs by specifying its name,
anywhere that you could use a single font.  Of course, Emacs fontsets
can use only the fonts that the system supports; if certain characters
appear on the screen as hollow boxes, this means that the fontset in
use for them has no font for those characters.(1)

   Emacs creates three fontsets automatically: the "standard fontset",
the "startup fontset" and the "default fontset".  The default fontset
is most likely to have fonts for a wide variety of non-ASCII characters
and is the default fallback for the other two fontsets, and if you set
a default font rather than fontset.  However it does not specify font
family names, so results can be somewhat random if you use it directly.
You can specify use of a specific fontset with the `-fn' option.  For
example,

     emacs -fn fontset-standard

You can also specify a fontset with the `Font' resource (*note X
Resources::).

   If no fontset is specified for use, then Emacs uses an ASCII font,
with `fontset-default' as a fallback for characters the font does not
cover.  The standard fontset is only used if explicitly requested,
despite its name.

   A fontset does not necessarily specify a font for every character
code.  If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
display that character properly.  It will display that character as an
empty box instead.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The Emacs installation instructions have information on
additional font support.


File: emacs,  Node: Defining Fontsets,  Next: Modifying Fontsets,  Prev: Fontsets,  Up: International

26.15 Defining fontsets
=======================

When running on X, Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically
according to the value of `standard-fontset-spec'.  This fontset's name
is

     -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-16-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-standard

or just `fontset-standard' for short.

   On GNUstep and Mac, fontset-standard is created using the value of
`ns-standard-fontset-spec', and on Windows it is created using the
value of `w32-standard-fontset-spec'.

   Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the standard fontset are
created automatically.  Their names have `bold' instead of `medium', or
`i' instead of `r', or both.

   Emacs generates a fontset automatically, based on any default ASCII
font that you specify with the `Font' resource or the `-fn' argument,
or the default font that Emacs found when it started.  This is the
"startup fontset" and its name is `fontset-startup'.  It does this by
replacing the CHARSET_REGISTRY field with `fontset', and replacing
CHARSET_ENCODING field with `startup', then using the resulting string
to specify a fontset.

   For instance, if you start Emacs this way,

     emacs -fn "*courier-medium-r-normal--14-140-*-iso8859-1"

Emacs generates the following fontset and uses it for the initial X
window frame:

     -*-courier-medium-r-normal-*-14-140-*-*-*-*-fontset-startup

   The startup fontset will use the font that you specify or a variant
with a different registry and encoding for all the characters which are
supported by that font, and fallback on `fontset-default' for other
characters.

   With the X resource `Emacs.Font', you can specify a fontset name
just like an actual font name.  But be careful not to specify a fontset
name in a wildcard resource like `Emacs*Font'--that wildcard
specification matches various other resources, such as for menus, and
menus cannot handle fontsets.

   You can specify additional fontsets using X resources named
`Fontset-N', where N is an integer starting from 0.  The resource value
should have this form:

     FONTPATTERN, [CHARSET:FONT]...

FONTPATTERN should have the form of a standard X font name, except for
the last two fields.  They should have the form `fontset-ALIAS'.

   The fontset has two names, one long and one short.  The long name is
FONTPATTERN.  The short name is `fontset-ALIAS'.  You can refer to the
fontset by either name.

   The construct `CHARSET:FONT' specifies which font to use (in this
fontset) for one particular character set.  Here, CHARSET is the name
of a character set, and FONT is the font to use for that character set.
You can use this construct any number of times in defining one fontset.

   For the other character sets, Emacs chooses a font based on
FONTPATTERN.  It replaces `fontset-ALIAS' with values that describe the
character set.  For the ASCII character font, `fontset-ALIAS' is
replaced with `ISO8859-1'.

   In addition, when several consecutive fields are wildcards, Emacs
collapses them into a single wildcard.  This is to prevent use of
auto-scaled fonts.  Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable
for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not useful because it is
better to use the smaller font in its own size, which is what Emacs
does.

   Thus if FONTPATTERN is this,

     -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24

the font specification for ASCII characters would be this:

     -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1

and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this:

     -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*

   You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font
specification.  Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that
have `song ti' or `fangsong ti' in FAMILY field.  In such a case,
`Fontset-N' can be specified as below:

     Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\
             chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*

Then, the font specifications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have
`fixed' in the FAMILY field, and the font specification for Chinese
GB2312 characters has a wild card `*' in the FAMILY field.

   The function that processes the fontset resource value to create the
fontset is called `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec'.  You can also
call this function explicitly to create a fontset.

   *Note Fonts::, for more information about font naming.


File: emacs,  Node: Modifying Fontsets,  Next: Undisplayable Characters,  Prev: Defining Fontsets,  Up: International

26.16 Modifying Fontsets
========================

Fontsets do not always have to be created from scratch.  If only minor
changes are required it may be easier to modify an existing fontset.
Modifying `fontset-default' will also affect other fontsets that use it
as a fallback, so can be an effective way of fixing problems with the
fonts that Emacs chooses for a particular script.

   Fontsets can be modified using the function `set-fontset-font',
specifying a character, a charset, a script, or a range of characters
to modify the font for, and a font-spec for the font to be used. Some
examples are:

     ;; Use Liberation Mono for latin-3 charset.
     (set-fontset-font "fontset-default" 'iso-8859-3 "Liberation Mono")

     ;; Prefer a big5 font for han characters
     (set-fontset-font "fontset-default" 'han (font-spec :registry "big5")
                       nil 'prepend)

     ;; Use DejaVu Sans Mono as a fallback in fontset-startup before
     ;; resorting to fontset-default.
     (set-fontset-font "fontset-startup" nil "DejaVu Sans Mono" nil 'append)

     ;; Use MyPrivateFont for the Unicode private use area.
     (set-fontset-font "fontset-default"  '(#xe000 . #xf8ff) "MyPrivateFont")


File: emacs,  Node: Undisplayable Characters,  Next: Unibyte Mode,  Prev: Modifying Fontsets,  Up: International

26.17 Undisplayable Characters
==============================

There may be a some non-ASCII characters that your terminal cannot
display.  Most text-only terminals support just a single character set
(use the variable `default-terminal-coding-system' (*note Terminal
Coding::) to tell Emacs which one); characters which can't be encoded
in that coding system are displayed as `?' by default.

   Graphical displays can display a broader range of characters, but
you may not have fonts installed for all of them; characters that have
no font appear as a hollow box.

   If you use Latin-1 characters but your terminal can't display
Latin-1, you can arrange to display mnemonic ASCII sequences instead,
e.g. `"o' for o-umlaut.  Load the library `iso-ascii' to do this.

   If your terminal can display Latin-1, you can display characters
from other European character sets using a mixture of equivalent
Latin-1 characters and ASCII mnemonics.  Customize the variable
`latin1-display' to enable this.  The mnemonic ASCII sequences mostly
correspond to those of the prefix input methods.


File: emacs,  Node: Unibyte Mode,  Next: Charsets,  Prev: Undisplayable Characters,  Up: International

26.18 Unibyte Editing Mode
==========================

The ISO 8859 Latin-N character sets define character codes in the range
0240 to 0377 octal (160 to 255 decimal) to handle the accented letters
and punctuation needed by various European languages (and some
non-European ones).  Note that Emacs considers bytes with codes in this
range as raw bytes, not as characters, even in a unibyte session, i.e.
if you disable multibyte characters.  However, Emacs can still handle
these character codes as if they belonged to _one_ of the single-byte
character sets at a time.  To specify _which_ of these codes to use,
invoke `M-x set-language-environment' and specify a suitable language
environment such as `Latin-N'.

   For more information about unibyte operation, see *Note Enabling
Multibyte::.  Note particularly that you probably want to ensure that
your initialization files are read as unibyte if they contain non-ASCII
characters.

   Emacs can also display bytes in the range 160 to 255 as readable
characters, provided the terminal or font in use supports them.  This
works automatically.  On a graphical display, Emacs can also display
single-byte characters through fontsets, in effect by displaying the
equivalent multibyte characters according to the current language
environment.  To request this, set the variable
`unibyte-display-via-language-environment' to a non-`nil' value.  Note
that setting this only affects how these bytes are displayed, but does
not change the fundamental fact that Emacs treats them as raw bytes,
not as characters.

   If your terminal does not support display of the Latin-1 character
set, Emacs can display these characters as ASCII sequences which at
least give you a clear idea of what the characters are.  To do this,
load the library `iso-ascii'.  Similar libraries for other Latin-N
character sets could be implemented, but we don't have them yet.

   Normally non-ISO-8859 characters (decimal codes between 128 and 159
inclusive) are displayed as octal escapes.  You can change this for
non-standard "extended" versions of ISO-8859 character sets by using the
function `standard-display-8bit' in the `disp-table' library.

   There are two ways to input single-byte non-ASCII characters:

   * You can use an input method for the selected language environment.
     *Note Input Methods::.  When you use an input method in a unibyte
     buffer, the non-ASCII character you specify with it is converted
     to unibyte.

   * If your keyboard can generate character codes 128 (decimal) and up,
     representing non-ASCII characters, you can type those character
     codes directly.

     On a graphical display, you should not need to do anything special
     to use these keys; they should simply work.  On a text-only
     terminal, you should use the command `M-x
     set-keyboard-coding-system' or the variable
     `keyboard-coding-system' to specify which coding system your
     keyboard uses (*note Terminal Coding::).  Enabling this feature
     will probably require you to use `ESC' to type Meta characters;
     however, on a console terminal or in `xterm', you can arrange for
     Meta to be converted to `ESC' and still be able type 8-bit
     characters present directly on the keyboard or using `Compose' or
     `AltGr' keys.  *Note User Input::.

   * For Latin-1 only, you can use the key `C-x 8' as a "compose
     character" prefix for entry of non-ASCII Latin-1 printing
     characters.  `C-x 8' is good for insertion (in the minibuffer as
     well as other buffers), for searching, and in any other context
     where a key sequence is allowed.

     `C-x 8' works by loading the `iso-transl' library.  Once that
     library is loaded, the <ALT> modifier key, if the keyboard has
     one, serves the same purpose as `C-x 8': use <ALT> together with
     an accent character to modify the following letter.  In addition,
     if the keyboard has keys for the Latin-1 "dead accent characters,"
     they too are defined to compose with the following character, once
     `iso-transl' is loaded.

     Use `C-x 8 C-h' to list all the available `C-x 8' translations.


File: emacs,  Node: Charsets,  Prev: Unibyte Mode,  Up: International

26.19 Charsets
==============

In Emacs, "charset" is short for "character set".  Emacs supports most
popular charsets (such as `ascii', `iso-8859-1', `cp1250', `big5', and
`unicode'), in addition to some charsets of its own (such as `emacs',
`unicode-bmp', and `eight-bit').  All supported characters belong to
one or more charsets.

   Emacs normally "does the right thing" with respect to charsets, so
that you don't have to worry about them.  However, it is sometimes
helpful to know some of the underlying details about charsets.

   One example is font selection (*note Fonts::).  Each language
environment (*note Language Environments::) defines a "priority list"
for the various charsets.  When searching for a font, Emacs initially
attempts to find one that can display the highest-priority charsets.
For instance, in the Japanese language environment, the charset
`japanese-jisx0208' has the highest priority, so Emacs tries to use a
font whose `registry' property is `JISX0208.1983-0'.

   There are two commands that can be used to obtain information about
charsets.  The command `M-x list-charset-chars' prompts for a charset
name, and displays all the characters in that character set.  The
command `M-x describe-character-set' prompts for a charset name, and
displays information about that charset, including its internal
representation within Emacs.

   To display a list of all supported charsets, type `M-x
list-character-sets'.  The list gives the names of charsets and
additional information to identity each charset (see
`http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/' for details).  In this list,
charsets are divided into two categories: "normal charsets" are listed
first, followed by "supplementary charsets".  A supplementary charset
is one that is used to define another charset (as a parent or a
subset), or to provide backward-compatibility for older Emacs versions.

   To find out which charset a character in the buffer belongs to, put
point before it and type `C-u C-x =' (*note International Chars::).


File: emacs,  Node: Major Modes,  Next: Indentation,  Prev: International,  Up: Top

27 Major Modes
**************

Emacs provides many alternative "major modes", each of which customizes
Emacs for editing text of a particular sort.  The major modes are
mutually exclusive, and each buffer has one major mode at any time.
The mode line normally shows the name of the current major mode, in
parentheses (*note Mode Line::).

   The least specialized major mode is called "Fundamental mode".  This
mode has no mode-specific redefinitions or variable settings, so that
each Emacs command behaves in its most general manner, and each user
option variable is in its default state.  For editing text of a
specific type that Emacs knows about, such as Lisp code or English
text, you should switch to the appropriate major mode, such as Lisp
mode or Text mode.

   Selecting a major mode changes the meanings of a few keys to become
more specifically adapted to the language being edited.  The ones that
are changed frequently are <TAB>, <DEL>, and `C-j'.  The prefix key
`C-c' normally contains mode-specific commands.  In addition, the
commands which handle comments use the mode to determine how comments
are to be delimited.  Many major modes redefine the syntactical
properties of characters appearing in the buffer.  *Note Syntax::.

   The major modes fall into three major groups.  The first group
contains modes for normal text, either plain or with mark-up.  It
includes Text mode, HTML mode, SGML mode, TeX mode and Outline mode.
The second group contains modes for specific programming languages.
These include Lisp mode (which has several variants), C mode, Fortran
mode, and others.  The remaining major modes are not intended for use
on users' files; they are used in buffers created for specific purposes
by Emacs, such as Dired mode for buffers made by Dired (*note Dired::),
Message mode for buffers made by `C-x m' (*note Sending Mail::), and
Shell mode for buffers used for communicating with an inferior shell
process (*note Interactive Shell::).

   Most programming-language major modes specify that only blank lines
separate paragraphs.  This is to make the paragraph commands useful.
(*Note Paragraphs::.)  They also cause Auto Fill mode to use the
definition of <TAB> to indent the new lines it creates.  This is
because most lines in a program are usually indented (*note
Indentation::).

* Menu:

* Choosing Modes::     How major modes are specified or chosen.


File: emacs,  Node: Choosing Modes,  Prev: Major Modes,  Up: Major Modes

27.1 How Major Modes are Chosen
===============================

You can select a major mode explicitly for the current buffer, but most
of the time Emacs determines which mode to use based on the file name
or on special text in the file.

   To explicitly select a new major, you use an `M-x' command.  Take
the name of a major mode and add `-mode' to get the name of the command
to select that mode.  Thus, you can enter Lisp mode by executing `M-x
lisp-mode'.

   When you visit a file, Emacs usually chooses the right major mode
automatically.  Normally, it makes the choice based on the file
name--for example, files whose names end in `.c' are normally edited in
C mode--but sometimes it chooses the major mode based on the contents
of the file.  Here is the exact procedure:

   First, Emacs checks whether the file contains a file-local variable
that specifies the major mode.  If so, it uses that major mode,
ignoring all other criteria.  *Note File Variables::.  There are
several methods to specify a major mode using a file-local variable;
the simplest is to put the mode name in the first nonblank line,
preceded and followed by `-*-'.  Other text may appear on the line as
well.  For example,

     ; -*-Lisp-*-

tells Emacs to use Lisp mode.  Note how the semicolon is used to make
Lisp treat this line as a comment.  Alternatively, you could write

     ; -*- mode: Lisp;-*-

The latter format allows you to specify local variables as well, like
this:

     ; -*- mode: Lisp; tab-width: 4; -*-

   Second, Emacs checks whether the file's contents begin with `#!'.
If so, that indicates that the file can serve as an executable shell
command, which works by running an interpreter named on the file's
first line (the rest of the file is used as input to the interpreter).
Therefore, Emacs tries to use the interpreter name to choose a mode.
For instance, a file that begins with `#!/usr/bin/perl' is opened in
Perl mode.  The variable `interpreter-mode-alist' specifies the
correspondence between interpreter program names and major modes.

   When the first line starts with `#!', you usually cannot use the
`-*-' feature on the first line, because the system would get confused
when running the interpreter.  So Emacs looks for `-*-' on the second
line in such files as well as on the first line.  The same is true for
man pages which start with the magic string `'\"' to specify a list of
troff preprocessors.

   Third, Emacs tries to determine the major mode by looking at the
text at the start of the buffer, based on the variable
`magic-mode-alist'.  By default, this variable is `nil' (an empty
list), so Emacs skips this step; however, you can customize it in your
init file (*note Init File::).  The value should be a list of elements
of the form

     (REGEXP . MODE-FUNCTION)

where REGEXP is a regular expression (*note Regexps::), and
MODE-FUNCTION is a Lisp function that toggles a major mode.  If the
text at the beginning of the file matches REGEXP, Emacs chooses the
major mode specified by MODE-FUNCTION.

   Alternatively, an element of `magic-mode-alist' may have the form

     (MATCH-FUNCTION . MODE-FUNCTION)

where MATCH-FUNCTION is a Lisp function that is called at the beginning
of the buffer; if the function returns non-`nil', Emacs set the major
mode wit MODE-FUNCTION.

   Fourth--if Emacs still hasn't found a suitable major mode--it looks
at the file's name.  The correspondence between file names and major
modes is controlled by the variable `auto-mode-alist'.  Its value is a
list in which each element has this form,

     (REGEXP . MODE-FUNCTION)

or this form,

     (REGEXP MODE-FUNCTION FLAG)

For example, one element normally found in the list has the form
`("\\.c\\'" . c-mode)', and it is responsible for selecting C mode for
files whose names end in `.c'.  (Note that `\\' is needed in Lisp
syntax to include a `\' in the string, which must be used to suppress
the special meaning of `.' in regexps.)  If the element has the form
`(REGEXP MODE-FUNCTION FLAG)' and FLAG is non-`nil', then after calling
MODE-FUNCTION, Emacs discards the suffix that matched REGEXP and
searches the list again for another match.

   On systems with case-insensitive file names, such as Microsoft
Windows, Emacs performs a single case-insensitive search through
`auto-mode-alist'.  On other systems, Emacs normally performs a single
case-sensitive search through the alist.  However, if you change the
variable `auto-mode-case-fold' to `t', Emacs performs a second
case-insensitive search if the first search fails.

   Finally, if Emacs _still_ hasn't found a major mode to use, it
compares the text at the start of the buffer to the variable
`magic-fallback-mode-alist'.  This variable works like
`magic-mode-alist', described above, except that is consulted only
after `auto-mode-alist'.  By default, `magic-fallback-mode-alist'
contains forms that check for image files, HTML/XML/SGML files, and
Postscript files.

   Once a major mode is chosen, Emacs sets the value of the variable
`major-mode' to the symbol for that major mode (e.g., `text-mode' for
Text mode).  This is a per-buffer variable (*note Locals::); its
buffer-local value is set automatically, and you should not change it
yourself.

   The default value of `major-mode' determines the major mode to use
for files that do not specify a major mode, and for new buffers created
with `C-x b'.  Normally, this default value is the symbol
`fundamental-mode', which specifies Fundamental mode.  You can change
it via the Customization interface (*note Easy Customization::), or by
adding a line like this to your init file (*note Init File::):

     (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)

If the default value of `major-mode' is `nil', the major mode is taken
from the previously current buffer.

   If you have changed the major mode of a buffer, you can return to
the major mode Emacs would have chosen automatically, by typing `M-x
normal-mode'.  This is the same function that `find-file' calls to
choose the major mode.  It also processes the file's `-*-' line or
local variables list (if any).  *Note File Variables::.

   The commands `C-x C-w' and `set-visited-file-name' change to a new
major mode if the new file name implies a mode (*note Saving::).  (`C-x
C-s' does this too, if the buffer wasn't visiting a file.)  However,
this does not happen if the buffer contents specify a major mode, and
certain "special" major modes do not allow the mode to change.  You can
turn off this mode-changing feature by setting
`change-major-mode-with-file-name' to `nil'.


File: emacs,  Node: Indentation,  Next: Text,  Prev: Major Modes,  Up: Top

28 Indentation
**************

This chapter describes the Emacs commands that add, remove, or adjust
indentation.

`<TAB>'
     Indent the current line appropriately, in a mode-dependent fashion.

`C-j'
     Perform <RET> followed by <TAB> (`newline-and-indent').

`M-^'
     Merge the previous and the current line (`delete-indentation').
     This would cancel the effect of a preceding `C-j'.

`C-M-o'
     Split the current line at point; text on the line after point
     becomes a new line indented to the same column where point is
     located (`split-line').

`M-m'
     Move (forward or back) to the first nonblank character on the
     current line (`back-to-indentation').

`C-M-\'
     Indent lines in the region to the same column (`indent-region').

`C-x <TAB>'
     Shift lines in the region rigidly right or left (`indent-rigidly').

`M-i'
     Indent from point to the next prespecified tab stop column
     (`tab-to-tab-stop').

`M-x indent-relative'
     Indent from point to under an indentation point in the previous
     line.

The <TAB> key runs `indent-for-tab-command' in most major modes (in C
and related modes, <TAB> runs a separate command,
`c-indent-line-or-region', which behaves similarly).  The major mode
determines just what this entails.

   In text modes, <TAB> inserts some combination of space and tab
characters to advance point to the next tab stop (*note Tab Stops::).
If the region is active and spans multiple lines, it advances the first
character of each of those lines to the next tab stop (*note Using
Region::).  For the purposes of this command, the position of the first
non-whitespace character on the preceding line is treated as an
additional tab stop.  Thus, you can use <TAB> to "align" point with the
preceding line.

   In programming modes, <TAB> adds or removes some combination of
space and tab characters at the start of the line, in a way that makes
sense given the text in the preceding lines.  If the region is active
and spans multiple lines, all those lines are indented this way.  If
point was initially within the current line's indentation, it is
positioned after that indentation; otherwise, it remains at same point
in the newly-indented text.  *Note Program Indent::.

   Normally, indentation commands insert (or remove) an optimal mix of
"tab characters" and spaces to align to the desired column.  Tab
characters (ASCII code 9) are displayed as a stretch of empty space
extending to the next "display tab stop".  By default, there is one
display tab stop every eight columns; the number of columns is
determined by the variable `tab-width'.  You can insert a single tab
character by typing `C-q <TAB>'.  *Note Text Display::.

   The command `M-i' (`tab-to-tab-stop') adjusts the whitespace
characters around point, inserting just enough whitespace to advance
point up to the next tab stop.  By default, this involves deleting the
existing whitespace and inserting a single tab character.

   *Note Just Spaces::, for how to disable use of tabs.  However, `C-q
<TAB>' always inserts a tab, even when tabs are disabled for the
indentation commands.

   The variable `tab-always-indent' tweaks the behavior of the <TAB>
(`indent-for-tab-command') command.  The default value, `t', gives the
behavior described above.  If you change the value to the symbol
`complete', then <TAB> first tries to indent the current line, and if
the line was already indented, it tries to complete the text at point
(*note Symbol Completion::).  If the value is `nil', then <TAB> indents
the current line only if point is at the left margin or in the line's
indentation; otherwise, it inserts a real tab character.

* Menu:

* Indentation Commands::  Various commands and techniques for indentation.
* Tab Stops::             You can set arbitrary "tab stops" and then
                            indent to the next tab stop when you want to.
* Just Spaces::           You can request indentation using just spaces.


File: emacs,  Node: Indentation Commands,  Next: Tab Stops,  Prev: Indentation,  Up: Indentation

28.1 Indentation Commands and Techniques
========================================

To move over the indentation on a line, do `M-m'
(`back-to-indentation').  This command, given anywhere on a line,
positions point at the first nonblank character on the line, if any, or
else at the end of the line.

   To insert an indented line before the current line, do `C-a C-o
<TAB>'.  To make an indented line after the current line, use `C-e C-j'.

   If you just want to insert a tab character in the buffer, type `C-q
<TAB>'.

   `C-M-o' (`split-line') moves the text from point to the end of the
line vertically down, so that the current line becomes two lines.
`C-M-o' first moves point forward over any spaces and tabs.  Then it
inserts after point a newline and enough indentation to reach the same
column point is on.  Point remains before the inserted newline; in this
regard, `C-M-o' resembles `C-o'.

   To join two lines cleanly, use the `M-^' (`delete-indentation')
command.  It deletes the indentation at the front of the current line,
and the line boundary as well, replacing them with a single space.  As
a special case (useful for Lisp code) the single space is omitted if
the characters to be joined are consecutive open parentheses or closing
parentheses, or if the junction follows another newline.  To delete
just the indentation of a line, go to the beginning of the line and use
`M-\' (`delete-horizontal-space'), which deletes all spaces and tabs
around the cursor.

   If you have a fill prefix, `M-^' deletes the fill prefix if it
appears after the newline that is deleted.  *Note Fill Prefix::.

   There are also commands for changing the indentation of several lines
at once.  They apply to all the lines that begin in the region.
`C-M-\' (`indent-region') indents each line in the "usual" way, as if
you had typed <TAB> at the beginning of the line.  A numeric argument
specifies the column to indent to, and each line is shifted left or
right so that its first nonblank character appears in that column.
`C-x <TAB>' (`indent-rigidly') moves all of the lines in the region
right by its argument (left, for negative arguments).  The whole group
of lines moves rigidly sideways, which is how the command gets its name.

   To remove all indentation from all of the lines in the region,
invoke `C-x <TAB>' with a large negative argument, such as -1000.

   `M-x indent-relative' indents at point based on the previous line
(actually, the last nonempty line).  It inserts whitespace at point,
moving point, until it is underneath the next indentation point in the
previous line.  An indentation point is the end of a sequence of
whitespace or the end of the line.  If point is farther right than any
indentation point in the previous line, `indent-relative' runs
`tab-to-tab-stop' (*note Tab Stops::), unless it is called with a
numeric argument, in which case it does nothing.

   *Note Format Indentation::, for another way of specifying the
indentation for part of your text.


File: emacs,  Node: Tab Stops,  Next: Just Spaces,  Prev: Indentation Commands,  Up: Indentation

28.2 Tab Stops
==============

For typing in tables, you can use `M-i' (`tab-to-tab-stop').  This
command inserts indentation before point, enough to reach the next tab
stop column.

   You can change the tab stops used by `M-i' and other indentation
commands, so that they need not be spaced every eight characters, or
even regularly spaced.  The tab stops are stored in the variable
`tab-stop-list', as a list of column numbers in increasing order.

   A convenient way to set the tab stops is with `M-x edit-tab-stops',
which creates and selects a buffer containing a description of the tab
stop settings.  You can edit this buffer to specify different tab
stops, and then type `C-c C-c' to make those new tab stops take effect.
The buffer uses Overwrite mode (*note Minor Modes::).
`edit-tab-stops' records which buffer was current when you invoked it,
and stores the tab stops back in that buffer; normally all buffers
share the same tab stops and changing them in one buffer affects all,
but if you happen to make `tab-stop-list' local in one buffer then
`edit-tab-stops' in that buffer will edit the local settings.

   Here is what the text representing the tab stops looks like for
ordinary tab stops every eight columns.

             :       :       :       :       :       :
     0         1         2         3         4
     0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678
     To install changes, type C-c C-c

   The first line contains a colon at each tab stop.  The remaining
lines are present just to help you see where the colons are and know
what to do.

   Note that the tab stops that control `tab-to-tab-stop' have nothing
to do with how tab characters are displayed in the buffer.  Tab
characters are always displayed as empty spaces extending to the next
display tab stop, which occurs every `tab-width' columns regardless of
the contents of `tab-stop-list'.  *Note Text Display::.


File: emacs,  Node: Just Spaces,  Prev: Tab Stops,  Up: Indentation

28.3 Tabs vs. Spaces
====================

Emacs normally uses both tabs and spaces to indent lines.  If you
prefer, all indentation can be made from spaces only.  To request this,
set `indent-tabs-mode' to `nil'.  This is a per-buffer variable, so
altering the variable affects only the current buffer, but there is a
default value which you can change as well.  *Note Locals::.

   A tab is not always displayed in the same way.  By default, tabs are
eight columns wide, but some people like to customize their editors to
use a different tab width (e.g., by changing the variable `tab-width'
in Emacs).  By using spaces only, you can make sure that your file
looks the same regardless of the tab width setting.

   There are also commands to convert tabs to spaces or vice versa,
always preserving the columns of all nonblank text.  `M-x tabify' scans
the region for sequences of spaces, and converts sequences of at least
two spaces to tabs if that can be done without changing indentation.
`M-x untabify' changes all tabs in the region to appropriate numbers of
spaces.


File: emacs,  Node: Text,  Next: Programs,  Prev: Indentation,  Up: Top

29 Commands for Human Languages
*******************************

This chapter describes Emacs commands that act on "text", by which we
mean sequences of characters in a human language (as opposed to, say, a
computer programming language).  These commands act in ways that take
into account the syntactic and stylistic conventions of human
languages: conventions involving words, sentences, paragraphs, and
capital letters.  There are also commands for "filling", which means
rearranging the lines of a paragraph to be approximately equal in
length.  These commands, while intended primarily for editing text, are
also often useful for editing programs.

   Emacs has several major modes for editing human-language text.  If
the file contains ordinary text, use Text mode, which customizes Emacs
in small ways for the syntactic conventions of text.  Outline mode
provides special commands for operating on text with an outline
structure.

   Emacs has other major modes for text which contains "embedded"
commands, such as TeX and LaTeX (*note TeX Mode::); HTML and SGML
(*note HTML Mode::); XML (*note nXML Mode: (nxml-mode)Top.); and Groff
and Nroff (*note Nroff Mode::).  In addition, you can edit formatted
text in WYSIWYG style ("what you see is what you get"), using Enriched
mode (*note Formatted Text::).

   If you need to edit pictures made out of text characters (commonly
referred to as "ASCII art"), use Picture mode, a special major mode for
editing such pictures.  *Note Picture Mode::.

   The "automatic typing" features may be useful when writing text.
*note (autotype)Top::.

* Menu:

* Words::	        Moving over and killing words.
* Sentences::	        Moving over and killing sentences.
* Paragraphs::	        Moving over paragraphs.
* Pages::	        Moving over pages.
* Filling::	        Filling or justifying text.
* Case::	        Changing the case of text.
* Text Mode::	        The major modes for editing text files.
* Outline Mode::        Editing outlines.
* TeX Mode::	        Editing input to the formatter TeX.
* HTML Mode::           Editing HTML and SGML files.
* Nroff Mode::	        Editing input to the formatter nroff.
* Formatted Text::      Editing formatted text directly in WYSIWYG fashion.
* Text Based Tables::   Editing text-based tables in WYSIWYG fashion.


File: emacs,  Node: Words,  Next: Sentences,  Up: Text

29.1 Words
==========

Emacs has commands for moving over or operating on words.  By
convention, the keys for them are all Meta characters.

`M-f'
     Move forward over a word (`forward-word').

`M-b'
     Move backward over a word (`backward-word').

`M-d'
     Kill up to the end of a word (`kill-word').

`M-<DEL>'
     Kill back to the beginning of a word (`backward-kill-word').

`M-@'
     Mark the end of the next word (`mark-word').

`M-t'
     Transpose two words or drag a word across others
     (`transpose-words').

   Notice how these keys form a series that parallels the
character-based `C-f', `C-b', `C-d', <DEL> and `C-t'.  `M-@' is cognate
to `C-@', which is an alias for `C-<SPC>'.

   The commands `M-f' (`forward-word') and `M-b' (`backward-word') move
forward and backward over words.  These <Meta>-based key sequences are
analogous to the key sequences `C-f' and `C-b', which move over single
characters.  The analogy extends to numeric arguments, which serve as
repeat counts.  `M-f' with a negative argument moves backward, and
`M-b' with a negative argument moves forward.  Forward motion stops
right after the last letter of the word, while backward motion stops
right before the first letter.

   `M-d' (`kill-word') kills the word after point.  To be precise, it
kills everything from point to the place `M-f' would move to.  Thus, if
point is in the middle of a word, `M-d' kills just the part after
point.  If some punctuation comes between point and the next word, it
is killed along with the word.  (If you wish to kill only the next word
but not the punctuation before it, simply do `M-f' to get the end, and
kill the word backwards with `M-<DEL>'.)  `M-d' takes arguments just
like `M-f'.

   `M-<DEL>' (`backward-kill-word') kills the word before point.  It
kills everything from point back to where `M-b' would move to.  For
instance, if point is after the space in `FOO, BAR', it kills `FOO, '.
If you wish to kill just `FOO', and not the comma and the space, use
`M-b M-d' instead of `M-<DEL>'.

   `M-t' (`transpose-words') exchanges the word before or containing
point with the following word.  The delimiter characters between the
words do not move.  For example, `FOO, BAR' transposes into `BAR, FOO'
rather than `BAR FOO,'.  *Note Transpose::, for more on transposition.

   To operate on the next N words with an operation which acts on the
region, use the command `M-@' (`mark-word').  This command does not
move point, but sets the mark where `M-f' would move to.  Once the mark
is active, each additional `M-@' advances the mark by one additional
word.  `M-@' also accepts a numeric argument that says how many words
to scan for the place to put the mark.

   The word commands' understanding of word boundaries is controlled by
the syntax table.  Any character can, for example, be declared to be a
word delimiter.  *Note Syntax::.


File: emacs,  Node: Sentences,  Next: Paragraphs,  Prev: Words,  Up: Text

29.2 Sentences
==============

The Emacs commands for manipulating sentences and paragraphs are mostly
on Meta keys, so as to be like the word-handling commands.

`M-a'
     Move back to the beginning of the sentence (`backward-sentence').

`M-e'
     Move forward to the end of the sentence (`forward-sentence').

`M-k'
     Kill forward to the end of the sentence (`kill-sentence').

`C-x <DEL>'
     Kill back to the beginning of the sentence
     (`backward-kill-sentence').

   The commands `M-a' and `M-e' (`backward-sentence' and
`forward-sentence') move to the beginning and end of the current
sentence, respectively.  They were chosen to resemble `C-a' and `C-e',
which move to the beginning and end of a line.  Unlike them, `M-a' and
`M-e' move over successive sentences if repeated.

   Moving backward over a sentence places point just before the first
character of the sentence; moving forward places point right after the
punctuation that ends the sentence.  Neither one moves over the
whitespace at the sentence boundary.

   Just as `C-a' and `C-e' have a kill command, `C-k', to go with them,
`M-a' and `M-e' have a corresponding kill command: `M-k'
(`kill-sentence') kills from point to the end of the sentence.  With a
positive numeric argument N, it kills the next N sentences; with a
negative argument -N, it kills back to the beginning of the Nth
preceding sentence.

   The `C-x <DEL>' (`backward-kill-sentence') kills back to the
beginning of a sentence.

   The sentence commands assume that you follow the American typist's
convention of putting two spaces at the end of a sentence; they consider
a sentence to end wherever there is a `.', `?' or `!' followed by the
end of a line or two spaces, with any number of `)', `]', `'', or `"'
characters allowed in between.  A sentence also begins or ends wherever
a paragraph begins or ends.  It is useful to follow this convention,
because it makes a distinction between periods that end a sentence and
periods that indicate abbreviations; that enables the Emacs sentence
commands to distinguish, too.  These commands do not stop for periods
that indicate abbreviations.

   If you want to use just one space between sentences, you can set the
variable `sentence-end-double-space' to `nil' to make the sentence
commands stop for single spaces.  However, this has a drawback: there
is no way to distinguish between periods that end sentences and those
that indicate abbreviations.  For convenient and reliable editing, we
therefore recommend you follow the two-space convention.  The variable
`sentence-end-double-space' also affects filling (*note Fill
Commands::) in related ways.

   The variable `sentence-end' controls how to recognize the end of a
sentence.  If non-`nil', its value should be a regular expression,
which is used to match the last few characters of a sentence, together
with the whitespace following the sentence (*note Regexps::).  If the
value is `nil', the default, then Emacs computes sentence ends
according to various criteria such as the value of
`sentence-end-double-space'.

   Some languages do not use periods to indicate the end of a sentence.
For example, sentences in Thai end with a double space but without a
period.  Set the variable `sentence-end-without-period' to `t' in such
cases.


File: emacs,  Node: Paragraphs,  Next: Pages,  Prev: Sentences,  Up: Text

29.3 Paragraphs
===============

The Emacs commands for manipulating paragraphs are also on Meta keys.

`M-{'
     Move back to previous paragraph beginning (`backward-paragraph').

`M-}'
     Move forward to next paragraph end (`forward-paragraph').

`M-h'
     Put point and mark around this or next paragraph
     (`mark-paragraph').

   `M-{' moves to the beginning of the current or previous paragraph,
while `M-}' moves to the end of the current or next paragraph.  Blank
lines and text-formatter command lines separate paragraphs and are not
considered part of any paragraph.  If there is a blank line before the
paragraph, `M-{' moves to the blank line, because that is convenient in
practice.

   In Text mode, an indented line is not a paragraph break.  If you
want indented lines to have this effect, use Paragraph-Indent Text mode
instead.  *Note Text Mode::.

   In major modes for programs, paragraphs begin and end only at blank
lines.  This makes the paragraph commands useful, even though there are
no paragraphs as such in a program.

   When you have set a fill prefix, then paragraphs are delimited by
all lines which don't start with the fill prefix.  *Note Filling::.

   When you wish to operate on a paragraph, type `M-h'
(`mark-paragraph') to set the region around it.  For example, `M-h C-w'
kills the paragraph around or after point.  `M-h' puts point at the
beginning and mark at the end of the paragraph point was in.  If point
is between paragraphs (in a run of blank lines, or at a boundary), the
paragraph following point is surrounded by point and mark.  If there
are blank lines preceding the first line of the paragraph, one of these
blank lines is included in the region.  If the region is already
active, the command sets the mark without changing point; furthermore,
each subsequent `M-h' further advances the mark by one paragraph.

   The precise definition of a paragraph boundary is controlled by the
variables `paragraph-separate' and `paragraph-start'.  The value of
`paragraph-start' is a regexp that should match any line that either
starts or separates paragraphs.  The value of `paragraph-separate' is
another regexp that should match only lines that separate paragraphs
without being part of any paragraph (for example, blank lines).  Lines
that start a new paragraph and are contained in it must match only
`paragraph-start', not `paragraph-separate'.  Each regular expression
must match at the left margin.  For example, in Fundamental mode,
`paragraph-start' is `"\f\\|[ \t]*$"', and `paragraph-separate' is
`"[ \t\f]*$"'.

   Normally it is desirable for page boundaries to separate paragraphs.
The default values of these variables recognize the usual separator for
pages.


File: emacs,  Node: Pages,  Next: Filling,  Prev: Paragraphs,  Up: Text

29.4 Pages
==========

Within some text files, text is divided into "pages", which are
delimited by the "formfeed character" (ASCII code 12, sometimes denoted
as <control-L>).  When you print hardcopy for a file, the formfeed
character forces a page break: each page of the file goes on a separate
page on paper.  Most Emacs commands treat the formfeed character just
like any other character: you can insert it with `C-q C-l', and delete
it with <DEL>.  However, since pages are often meaningful divisions of
the file, Emacs provides commands to move over them and operate on them.

`C-x ['
     Move point to previous page boundary (`backward-page').

`C-x ]'
     Move point to next page boundary (`forward-page').

`C-x C-p'
     Put point and mark around this page (or another page)
     (`mark-page').

`C-x l'
     Count the lines in this page (`count-lines-page').

   The `C-x [' (`backward-page') command moves point to immediately
after the previous page delimiter.  If point is already right after a
page delimiter, it skips that one and stops at the previous one.  A
numeric argument serves as a repeat count.  The `C-x ]' (`forward-page')
command moves forward past the next page delimiter.

   The `C-x C-p' command (`mark-page') puts point at the beginning of
the current page and the mark at the end.  The page delimiter at the
end is included (the mark follows it).  The page delimiter at the front
is excluded (point follows it).

   `C-x C-p C-w' is a handy way to kill a page to move it elsewhere.
If you move to another page delimiter with `C-x [' and `C-x ]', then
yank the killed page, all the pages will be properly delimited once
again.  The reason `C-x C-p' includes only the following page delimiter
in the region is to ensure that.

   A numeric argument to `C-x C-p' specifies which page to go to,
relative to the current one.  Zero means the current page.  One means
the next page, and -1 means the previous one.

   The `C-x l' command (`count-lines-page') is good for deciding where
to break a page in two.  It displays in the echo area the total number
of lines in the current page, and then divides it up into those
preceding the current line and those following, as in

     Page has 96 (72+25) lines

Notice that the sum is off by one; this is correct if point is not at
the beginning of a line.

   The variable `page-delimiter' controls where pages begin.  Its value
is a regular expression that matches the beginning of a line that
separates pages (*note Regexps::).  The normal value of this variable
is `"^\f"', which matches a formfeed character at the beginning of a
line.


File: emacs,  Node: Filling,  Next: Case,  Prev: Pages,  Up: Text

29.5 Filling Text
=================

"Filling" text means breaking it up into lines that fit a specified
width.  Emacs does filling in two ways.  In Auto Fill mode, inserting
text with self-inserting characters also automatically fills it.  There
are also explicit fill commands that you can use when editing text
leaves it unfilled.  When you edit formatted text, you can specify a
style of filling for each portion of the text (*note Formatted Text::).

* Menu:

* Auto Fill::	        Auto Fill mode breaks long lines automatically.
* Fill Commands::       Commands to refill paragraphs and center lines.
* Fill Prefix::	        Filling paragraphs that are indented
                          or in a comment, etc.
* Adaptive Fill::       How Emacs can determine the fill prefix automatically.
* Refill::              Keeping paragraphs filled.
* Longlines::           Editing text with very long lines.


File: emacs,  Node: Auto Fill,  Next: Fill Commands,  Up: Filling

29.5.1 Auto Fill Mode
---------------------

"Auto Fill" mode is a minor mode in which lines are broken
automatically when they become too wide.  Breaking happens only when
you type a <SPC> or <RET>.

`M-x auto-fill-mode'
     Enable or disable Auto Fill mode.

`<SPC>'
`<RET>'
     In Auto Fill mode, break lines when appropriate.

   `M-x auto-fill-mode' turns Auto Fill mode on if it was off, or off
if it was on.  With a positive numeric argument it always turns Auto
Fill mode on, and with a negative argument always turns it off.  You can
see when Auto Fill mode is in effect by the presence of the word `Fill'
in the mode line, inside the parentheses.  Auto Fill mode is a minor
mode which is enabled or disabled for each buffer individually.  *Note
Minor Modes::.

   In Auto Fill mode, lines are broken automatically at spaces when they
get longer than the desired width.  Line breaking and rearrangement
takes place only when you type <SPC> or <RET>.  If you wish to insert a
space or newline without permitting line-breaking, type `C-q <SPC>' or
`C-q C-j' (recall that a newline is really a control-J).  Also, `C-o'
inserts a newline without line breaking.

   Auto Fill mode works well with programming-language modes, because it
indents new lines with <TAB>.  If a line ending in a comment gets too
long, the text of the comment is split into two comment lines.
Optionally, new comment delimiters are inserted at the end of the first
line and the beginning of the second so that each line is a separate
comment; the variable `comment-multi-line' controls the choice (*note
Comments::).

   Adaptive filling (*note Adaptive Fill::) works for Auto Filling as
well as for explicit fill commands.  It takes a fill prefix
automatically from the second or first line of a paragraph.

   Auto Fill mode does not refill entire paragraphs; it can break lines
but cannot merge lines.  So editing in the middle of a paragraph can
result in a paragraph that is not correctly filled.  The easiest way to
make the paragraph properly filled again is usually with the explicit
fill commands.  *Note Fill Commands::.

   Many users like Auto Fill mode and want to use it in all text files.
The section on init files says how to arrange this permanently for
yourself.  *Note Init File::.


File: emacs,  Node: Fill Commands,  Next: Fill Prefix,  Prev: Auto Fill,  Up: Filling

29.5.2 Explicit Fill Commands
-----------------------------

`M-q'
     Fill current paragraph (`fill-paragraph').

`C-x f'
     Set the fill column (`set-fill-column').

`M-x fill-region'
     Fill each paragraph in the region (`fill-region').

`M-x fill-region-as-paragraph'
     Fill the region, considering it as one paragraph.

`M-o M-s'
     Center a line.

   To refill a paragraph, use the command `M-q' (`fill-paragraph').
This operates on the paragraph that point is inside, or the one after
point if point is between paragraphs.  Refilling works by removing all
the line-breaks, then inserting new ones where necessary.  When there
is an active region, this command operates on the text within the
region like `fill-region'.

   To refill many paragraphs, use `M-x fill-region', which finds the
paragraphs in the region and fills each of them.

   `M-q' and `fill-region' use the same criteria as `M-h' for finding
paragraph boundaries (*note Paragraphs::).  For more control, you can
use `M-x fill-region-as-paragraph', which refills everything between
point and mark as a single paragraph.  This command deletes any blank
lines within the region, so separate blocks of text end up combined
into one block.

   A numeric argument to `M-q' tells it to "justify" the text as well
as filling it.  This means that extra spaces are inserted to make the
right margin line up exactly at the fill column.  To remove the extra
spaces, use `M-q' with no argument.  (Likewise for `fill-region'.)
Another way to control justification, and choose other styles of
filling, is with the `justification' text property; see *Note Format
Justification::.

   The command `M-o M-s' (`center-line') centers the current line
within the current fill column.  With an argument N, it centers N lines
individually and moves past them.  This binding is made by Text mode
and is available only in that and related modes (*note Text Mode::).

   The maximum line width for filling is in the variable `fill-column'.
Altering the value of `fill-column' makes it local to the current
buffer; until that time, the default value is in effect.  The default
is initially 70.  *Note Locals::.  The easiest way to set `fill-column'
is to use the command `C-x f' (`set-fill-column').  With a numeric
argument, it uses that as the new fill column.  With just `C-u' as
argument, it sets `fill-column' to the current horizontal position of
point.

   Emacs commands normally consider a period followed by two spaces or
by a newline as the end of a sentence; a period followed by just one
space indicates an abbreviation and not the end of a sentence.  To
preserve the distinction between these two ways of using a period, the
fill commands do not break a line after a period followed by just one
space.

   If the variable `sentence-end-double-space' is `nil', the fill
commands expect and leave just one space at the end of a sentence.
Ordinarily this variable is `t', so the fill commands insist on two
spaces for the end of a sentence, as explained above.  *Note
Sentences::.

   If the variable `colon-double-space' is non-`nil', the fill commands
put two spaces after a colon.

   The variable `fill-nobreak-predicate' is a hook (an abnormal hook,
*note Hooks::) specifying additional conditions where line-breaking is
not allowed.  Each function is called with no arguments, with point at
a place where Emacs is considering breaking the line.  If a function
returns a non-`nil' value, then that's a bad place to break the line.
Two standard functions you can use are `fill-single-word-nobreak-p'
(don't break after the first word of a sentence or before the last) and
`fill-french-nobreak-p' (don't break after `(' or before `)', `:' or
`?').


File: emacs,  Node: Fill Prefix,  Next: Adaptive Fill,  Prev: Fill Commands,  Up: Filling

29.5.3 The Fill Prefix
----------------------

To fill a paragraph in which each line starts with a special marker
(which might be a few spaces, giving an indented paragraph), you can use
the "fill prefix" feature.  The fill prefix is a string that Emacs
expects every line to start with, and which is not included in filling.
You can specify a fill prefix explicitly; Emacs can also deduce the
fill prefix automatically (*note Adaptive Fill::).

`C-x .'
     Set the fill prefix (`set-fill-prefix').

`M-q'
     Fill a paragraph using current fill prefix (`fill-paragraph').

`M-x fill-individual-paragraphs'
     Fill the region, considering each change of indentation as
     starting a new paragraph.

`M-x fill-nonuniform-paragraphs'
     Fill the region, considering only paragraph-separator lines as
     starting a new paragraph.

   To specify a fill prefix for the current buffer, move to a line that
starts with the desired prefix, put point at the end of the prefix, and
type `C-x .' (`set-fill-prefix').  (That's a period after the `C-x'.)
To turn off the fill prefix, specify an empty prefix: type `C-x .' with
point at the beginning of a line.

   When a fill prefix is in effect, the fill commands remove the fill
prefix from each line of the paragraph before filling and insert it on
each line after filling.  (The beginning of the first line of the
paragraph is left unchanged, since often that is intentionally
different.)  Auto Fill mode also inserts the fill prefix automatically
when it makes a new line.  The `C-o' command inserts the fill prefix on
new lines it creates, when you use it at the beginning of a line (*note
Blank Lines::).  Conversely, the command `M-^' deletes the prefix (if
it occurs) after the newline that it deletes (*note Indentation::).

   For example, if `fill-column' is 40 and you set the fill prefix to
`;; ', then `M-q' in the following text

     ;; This is an
     ;; example of a paragraph
     ;; inside a Lisp-style comment.

produces this:

     ;; This is an example of a paragraph
     ;; inside a Lisp-style comment.

   Lines that do not start with the fill prefix are considered to start
paragraphs, both in `M-q' and the paragraph commands; this gives good
results for paragraphs with hanging indentation (every line indented
except the first one).  Lines which are blank or indented once the
prefix is removed also separate or start paragraphs; this is what you
want if you are writing multi-paragraph comments with a comment
delimiter on each line.

   You can use `M-x fill-individual-paragraphs' to set the fill prefix
for each paragraph automatically.  This command divides the region into
paragraphs, treating every change in the amount of indentation as the
start of a new paragraph, and fills each of these paragraphs.  Thus,
all the lines in one "paragraph" have the same amount of indentation.
That indentation serves as the fill prefix for that paragraph.

   `M-x fill-nonuniform-paragraphs' is a similar command that divides
the region into paragraphs in a different way.  It considers only
paragraph-separating lines (as defined by `paragraph-separate') as
starting a new paragraph.  Since this means that the lines of one
paragraph may have different amounts of indentation, the fill prefix
used is the smallest amount of indentation of any of the lines of the
paragraph.  This gives good results with styles that indent a
paragraph's first line more or less that the rest of the paragraph.

   The fill prefix is stored in the variable `fill-prefix'.  Its value
is a string, or `nil' when there is no fill prefix.  This is a
per-buffer variable; altering the variable affects only the current
buffer, but there is a default value which you can change as well.
*Note Locals::.

   The `indentation' text property provides another way to control the
amount of indentation paragraphs receive.  *Note Format Indentation::.


File: emacs,  Node: Adaptive Fill,  Next: Refill,  Prev: Fill Prefix,  Up: Filling

29.5.4 Adaptive Filling
-----------------------

The fill commands can deduce the proper fill prefix for a paragraph
automatically in certain cases: either whitespace or certain punctuation
characters at the beginning of a line are propagated to all lines of the
paragraph.

   If the paragraph has two or more lines, the fill prefix is taken from
the paragraph's second line, but only if it appears on the first line as
well.

   If a paragraph has just one line, fill commands _may_ take a prefix
from that line.  The decision is complicated because there are three
reasonable things to do in such a case:

   * Use the first line's prefix on all the lines of the paragraph.

   * Indent subsequent lines with whitespace, so that they line up
     under the text that follows the prefix on the first line, but
     don't actually copy the prefix from the first line.

   * Don't do anything special with the second and following lines.

   All three of these styles of formatting are commonly used.  So the
fill commands try to determine what you would like, based on the prefix
that appears and on the major mode.  Here is how.

   If the prefix found on the first line matches
`adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp', or if it appears to be a
comment-starting sequence (this depends on the major mode), then the
prefix found is used for filling the paragraph, provided it would not
act as a paragraph starter on subsequent lines.

   Otherwise, the prefix found is converted to an equivalent number of
spaces, and those spaces are used as the fill prefix for the rest of the
lines, provided they would not act as a paragraph starter on subsequent
lines.

   In Text mode, and other modes where only blank lines and page
delimiters separate paragraphs, the prefix chosen by adaptive filling
never acts as a paragraph starter, so it can always be used for filling.

   The variable `adaptive-fill-regexp' determines what kinds of line
beginnings can serve as a fill prefix: any characters at the start of
the line that match this regular expression are used.  If you set the
variable `adaptive-fill-mode' to `nil', the fill prefix is never chosen
automatically.

   You can specify more complex ways of choosing a fill prefix
automatically by setting the variable `adaptive-fill-function' to a
function.  This function is called with point after the left margin of a
line, and it should return the appropriate fill prefix based on that
line.  If it returns `nil', `adaptive-fill-regexp' gets a chance to
find a prefix.


File: emacs,  Node: Refill,  Next: Longlines,  Prev: Adaptive Fill,  Up: Filling

29.5.5 Refill Mode
------------------

Refill minor mode provides support for keeping paragraphs filled as you
type or modify them in other ways.  It provides an effect similar to
typical word processor behavior.  This works by running a
paragraph-filling command at suitable times.

   To toggle the use of Refill mode in the current buffer, type `M-x
refill-mode'.  When you are typing text, only characters which normally
trigger auto filling, like the space character, will trigger refilling.
This is to avoid making it too slow.  Apart from self-inserting
characters, other commands which modify the text cause refilling.

   The current implementation is preliminary and not robust.  You can
get better "line wrapping" behavior using Longlines mode.  *Note
Longlines::.  However, Longlines mode has an important side-effect: the
newlines that it inserts for you are not saved to disk, so the files
that you make with Longlines mode will appear to be completely unfilled
if you edit them without Longlines mode.


File: emacs,  Node: Longlines,  Prev: Refill,  Up: Filling

29.5.6 Long Lines Mode
----------------------

Sometimes, you may come across "unfilled" text files, which Emacs
normally displays as a bunch of extremely long lines.  Comfortably
reading and editing such files normally requires "word wrap", a feature
that breaks up each long text line into multiple screen lines in a
readable manner--by putting the breaks at word boundaries.  Many text
editors, such as those built into many web browsers, perform word
wrapping by default.

   There are two different minor modes in Emacs that perform word
wrapping.  The first is Visual Line mode, which does it by altering the
behavior of screen line continuation.  *Note Visual Line Mode::, for
information about Visual Line mode.

   Instead of using Visual Line mode, you can use a minor mode called
Long Lines mode.  Long Lines mode wraps lines by inserting or deleting
"soft newlines" as you type (*note Hard and Soft Newlines::).  These
soft newlines won't show up when you save the buffer into a file, or
when you copy the text into the kill ring, clipboard, or a register.
Unlike Visual Line mode, Lone Lines mode breaks long lines at the fill
column (*note Fill Commands::), rather than the right window edge.  To
enable Long Lines mode, type `M-x longlines-mode'.  If the text is full
of long lines, this also immediately "wraps" them all.

   The word wrap performed by Long Lines mode is _not_ the same as
ordinary filling (*note Fill Commands::).  It does not contract
multiple spaces into a single space, recognize fill prefixes (*note
Fill Prefix::), or perform adaptive filling (*note Adaptive Fill::).
The reason for this is that a wrapped line is still, conceptually, a
single line.  Each soft newline is equivalent to exactly one space in
that long line, and vice versa.  However, you can still call filling
functions such as `M-q', and these will work as expected, inserting
soft newlines that won't show up on disk or when the text is copied.
You can even rely entirely on the normal fill commands by turning off
automatic line wrapping, with `C-u M-x longlines-auto-wrap'.  To turn
automatic line wrapping back on, type `M-x longlines-auto-wrap'.

   Type `RET' to insert a hard newline, one which automatic refilling
will not remove.  If you want to see where all the hard newlines are,
type `M-x longlines-show-hard-newlines'.  This will mark each hard
newline with a special symbol.  The same command with a prefix argument
turns this display off.

   Long Lines mode does not change normal text files that are already
filled, since the existing newlines are considered hard newlines.
Before Long Lines can do anything, you need to transform each paragraph
into a long line.  One way is to set `fill-column' to a large number
(e.g., `C-u 9999 C-x f'), re-fill all the paragraphs, and then set
`fill-column' back to its original value.


File: emacs,  Node: Case,  Next: Text Mode,  Prev: Filling,  Up: Text

29.6 Case Conversion Commands
=============================

Emacs has commands for converting either a single word or any arbitrary
range of text to upper case or to lower case.

`M-l'
     Convert following word to lower case (`downcase-word').

`M-u'
     Convert following word to upper case (`upcase-word').

`M-c'
     Capitalize the following word (`capitalize-word').

`C-x C-l'
     Convert region to lower case (`downcase-region').

`C-x C-u'
     Convert region to upper case (`upcase-region').

   The word conversion commands are the most useful.  `M-l'
(`downcase-word') converts the word after point to lower case, moving
past it.  Thus, repeating `M-l' converts successive words.  `M-u'
(`upcase-word') converts to all capitals instead, while `M-c'
(`capitalize-word') puts the first letter of the word into upper case
and the rest into lower case.  All these commands convert several words
at once if given an argument.  They are especially convenient for
converting a large amount of text from all upper case to mixed case,
because you can move through the text using `M-l', `M-u' or `M-c' on
each word as appropriate, occasionally using `M-f' instead to skip a
word.

   When given a negative argument, the word case conversion commands
apply to the appropriate number of words before point, but do not move
point.  This is convenient when you have just typed a word in the wrong
case: you can give the case conversion command and continue typing.

   If a word case conversion command is given in the middle of a word,
it applies only to the part of the word which follows point.  (This is
comparable to what `M-d' (`kill-word') does.)  With a negative
argument, case conversion applies only to the part of the word before
point.

   The other case conversion commands are `C-x C-u' (`upcase-region')
and `C-x C-l' (`downcase-region'), which convert everything between
point and mark to the specified case.  Point and mark do not move.

   The region case conversion commands `upcase-region' and
`downcase-region' are normally disabled.  This means that they ask for
confirmation if you try to use them.  When you confirm, you may enable
the command, which means it will not ask for confirmation again.  *Note
Disabling::.


File: emacs,  Node: Text Mode,  Next: Outline Mode,  Prev: Case,  Up: Text

29.7 Text Mode
==============

When you edit files of text in a human language, it's more convenient
to use Text mode rather than Fundamental mode.  To enter Text mode, type
`M-x text-mode'.

   In Text mode, only blank lines and page delimiters separate
paragraphs.  As a result, paragraphs can be indented, and adaptive
filling determines what indentation to use when filling a paragraph.
*Note Adaptive Fill::.

   Text mode defines <TAB> to run `indent-relative' (*note
Indentation::), so that you can conveniently indent a line like the
previous line.

   Text mode turns off the features concerned with comments except when
you explicitly invoke them.  It changes the syntax table so that
single-quotes are considered part of words.  However, if a word starts
with single-quotes, these are treated as a prefix for purposes such as
capitalization.  That is, `M-c' will convert `'hello'' into `'Hello'',
as expected.

   If you indent the first lines of paragraphs, then you should use
Paragraph-Indent Text mode rather than Text mode.  In this mode, you do
not need to have blank lines between paragraphs, because the first-line
indentation is sufficient to start a paragraph; however paragraphs in
which every line is indented are not supported.  Use `M-x
paragraph-indent-text-mode' to enter this mode.  Use `M-x
paragraph-indent-minor-mode' to enable an equivalent minor mode in
situations where you can't change the major mode--in mail composition,
for instance.

   Text mode, and all the modes based on it, define `M-<TAB>' as the
command `ispell-complete-word', which performs completion of the
partial word in the buffer before point, using the spelling dictionary
as the space of possible words.  *Note Spelling::.  If your window
manager defines `M-<TAB>' to switch windows, you can type `<ESC> <TAB>'
or `C-M-i'.

   Entering Text mode runs the hook `text-mode-hook'.  Other major
modes related to Text mode also run this hook, followed by hooks of
their own; this includes Paragraph-Indent Text mode, Nroff mode, TeX
mode, Outline mode, and Message mode.  Hook functions on
`text-mode-hook' can look at the value of `major-mode' to see which of
these modes is actually being entered.  *Note Hooks::.


File: emacs,  Node: Outline Mode,  Next: TeX Mode,  Prev: Text Mode,  Up: Text

29.8 Outline Mode
=================

Outline mode is a major mode much like Text mode but intended for
editing outlines.  It allows you to make parts of the text temporarily
invisible so that you can see the outline structure.  Type `M-x
outline-mode' to switch to Outline mode as the major mode of the current
buffer.

   When Outline mode makes a line invisible, the line does not appear
on the screen.  The screen appears exactly as if the invisible line
were deleted, except that an ellipsis (three periods in a row) appears
at the end of the previous visible line.  (Multiple consecutive
invisible lines produce just one ellipsis.)

   Editing commands that operate on lines, such as `C-n' and `C-p',
treat the text of the invisible line as part of the previous visible
line.  Killing the ellipsis at the end of a visible line really kills
all the following invisible lines.

   Outline minor mode provides the same commands as the major mode,
Outline mode, but you can use it in conjunction with other major modes.
Type `M-x outline-minor-mode' to enable the Outline minor mode in the
current buffer.  You can also specify this in the text of a file, with
a file local variable of the form `mode: outline-minor' (*note File
Variables::).

   The major mode, Outline mode, provides special key bindings on the
`C-c' prefix.  Outline minor mode provides similar bindings with `C-c
@' as the prefix; this is to reduce the conflicts with the major mode's
special commands.  (The variable `outline-minor-mode-prefix' controls
the prefix used.)

   Entering Outline mode runs the hook `text-mode-hook' followed by the
hook `outline-mode-hook' (*note Hooks::).

* Menu:

* Format: Outline Format.	   What the text of an outline looks like.
* Motion: Outline Motion.	   Special commands for moving through
                                     outlines.
* Visibility: Outline Visibility.  Commands to control what is visible.
* Views: Outline Views.            Outlines and multiple views.
* Foldout::                        Folding means zooming in on outlines.


File: emacs,  Node: Outline Format,  Next: Outline Motion,  Up: Outline Mode

29.8.1 Format of Outlines
-------------------------

Outline mode assumes that the lines in the buffer are of two types:
"heading lines" and "body lines".  A heading line represents a topic in
the outline.  Heading lines start with one or more stars; the number of
stars determines the depth of the heading in the outline structure.
Thus, a heading line with one star is a major topic; all the heading
lines with two stars between it and the next one-star heading are its
subtopics; and so on.  Any line that is not a heading line is a body
line.  Body lines belong with the preceding heading line.  Here is an
example:

     * Food
     This is the body,
     which says something about the topic of food.

     ** Delicious Food
     This is the body of the second-level header.

     ** Distasteful Food
     This could have
     a body too, with
     several lines.

     *** Dormitory Food

     * Shelter
     Another first-level topic with its header line.

   A heading line together with all following body lines is called
collectively an "entry".  A heading line together with all following
deeper heading lines and their body lines is called a "subtree".

   You can customize the criterion for distinguishing heading lines by
setting the variable `outline-regexp'.  (The recommended ways to do
this are in a major mode function or with a file local variable.)  Any
line whose beginning has a match for this regexp is considered a
heading line.  Matches that start within a line (not at the left
margin) do not count.

   The length of the matching text determines the level of the heading;
longer matches make a more deeply nested level.  Thus, for example, if
a text formatter has commands `@chapter', `@section' and `@subsection'
to divide the document into chapters and sections, you could make those
lines count as heading lines by setting `outline-regexp' to
`"@chap\\|@\\(sub\\)*section"'.  Note the trick: the two words
`chapter' and `section' are equally long, but by defining the regexp to
match only `chap' we ensure that the length of the text matched on a
chapter heading is shorter, so that Outline mode will know that
sections are contained in chapters.  This works as long as no other
command starts with `@chap'.

   You can explicitly specify a rule for calculating the level of a
heading line by setting the variable `outline-level'.  The value of
`outline-level' should be a function that takes no arguments and
returns the level of the current heading.  The recommended ways to set
this variable are in a major mode command or with a file local variable.


File: emacs,  Node: Outline Motion,  Next: Outline Visibility,  Prev: Outline Format,  Up: Outline Mode

29.8.2 Outline Motion Commands
------------------------------

Outline mode provides special motion commands that move backward and
forward to heading lines.

`C-c C-n'
     Move point to the next visible heading line
     (`outline-next-visible-heading').

`C-c C-p'
     Move point to the previous visible heading line
     (`outline-previous-visible-heading').

`C-c C-f'
     Move point to the next visible heading line at the same level as
     the one point is on (`outline-forward-same-level').

`C-c C-b'
     Move point to the previous visible heading line at the same level
     (`outline-backward-same-level').

`C-c C-u'
     Move point up to a lower-level (more inclusive) visible heading
     line (`outline-up-heading').

   `C-c C-n' (`outline-next-visible-heading') moves down to the next
heading line.  `C-c C-p' (`outline-previous-visible-heading') moves
similarly backward.  Both accept numeric arguments as repeat counts.
The names emphasize that invisible headings are skipped, but this is
not really a special feature.  All editing commands that look for lines
ignore the invisible lines automatically.

   More powerful motion commands understand the level structure of
headings.  `C-c C-f' (`outline-forward-same-level') and `C-c C-b'
(`outline-backward-same-level') move from one heading line to another
visible heading at the same depth in the outline.  `C-c C-u'
(`outline-up-heading') moves backward to another heading that is less
deeply nested.


File: emacs,  Node: Outline Visibility,  Next: Outline Views,  Prev: Outline Motion,  Up: Outline Mode

29.8.3 Outline Visibility Commands
----------------------------------

The other special commands of outline mode are used to make lines
visible or invisible.  Their names all start with `hide' or `show'.
Most of them fall into pairs of opposites.  They are not undoable;
instead, you can undo right past them.  Making lines visible or
invisible is simply not recorded by the undo mechanism.

   Many of these commands act on the "current" heading line.  If point
is on a heading line, that is the current heading line; if point is on
a body line, the current heading line is the nearest preceding header
line.

`C-c C-c'
     Make the current heading line's body invisible (`hide-entry').

`C-c C-e'
     Make the current heading line's body visible (`show-entry').

`C-c C-d'
     Make everything under the current heading invisible, not including
     the heading itself (`hide-subtree').

`C-c C-s'
     Make everything under the current heading visible, including body,
     subheadings, and their bodies (`show-subtree').

`C-c C-l'
     Make the body of the current heading line, and of all its
     subheadings, invisible (`hide-leaves').

`C-c C-k'
     Make all subheadings of the current heading line, at all levels,
     visible (`show-branches').

`C-c C-i'
     Make immediate subheadings (one level down) of the current heading
     line visible (`show-children').

`C-c C-t'
     Make all body lines in the buffer invisible (`hide-body').

`C-c C-a'
     Make all lines in the buffer visible (`show-all').

`C-c C-q'
     Hide everything except the top N levels of heading lines
     (`hide-sublevels').

`C-c C-o'
     Hide everything except for the heading or body that point is in,
     plus the headings leading up from there to the top level of the
     outline (`hide-other').

   Two commands that are exact opposites are `C-c C-c' (`hide-entry')
and `C-c C-e' (`show-entry').  They apply to the body lines directly
following the current heading line.  Subheadings and their bodies are
not affected.

   Two more powerful opposites are `C-c C-d' (`hide-subtree') and `C-c
C-s' (`show-subtree').  Both apply to the current heading line's
"subtree": its body, all its subheadings, both direct and indirect, and
all of their bodies.  In other words, the subtree contains everything
following the current heading line, up to and not including the next
heading of the same or higher rank.

   Intermediate between a visible subtree and an invisible one is having
all the subheadings visible but none of the body.  There are two
commands for doing this, depending on whether you want to hide the
bodies or make the subheadings visible.  They are `C-c C-l'
(`hide-leaves') and `C-c C-k' (`show-branches').

   A little weaker than `show-branches' is `C-c C-i' (`show-children').
It makes just the direct subheadings visible--those one level down.
Deeper subheadings remain invisible, if they were invisible.

   Two commands have a blanket effect on the whole file.  `C-c C-t'
(`hide-body') makes all body lines invisible, so that you see just the
outline structure (as a special exception, it will not hide lines at
the top of the file, preceding the first header line, even though these
are technically body lines).  `C-c C-a' (`show-all') makes all lines
visible.  These commands can be thought of as a pair of opposites even
though `C-c C-a' applies to more than just body lines.

   The command `C-c C-q' (`hide-sublevels') hides all but the top level
headings.  With a numeric argument N, it hides everything except the
top N levels of heading lines.

   The command `C-c C-o' (`hide-other') hides everything except the
heading and body text that point is in, plus its parents (the headers
leading up from there to top level in the outline) and the top level
headings.

   When incremental search finds text that is hidden by Outline mode,
it makes that part of the buffer visible.  If you exit the search at
that position, the text remains visible.  You can also automatically
make text visible as you navigate in it by using `M-x reveal-mode'.


File: emacs,  Node: Outline Views,  Next: Foldout,  Prev: Outline Visibility,  Up: Outline Mode

29.8.4 Viewing One Outline in Multiple Views
--------------------------------------------

You can display two views of a single outline at the same time, in
different windows.  To do this, you must create an indirect buffer using
`M-x make-indirect-buffer'.  The first argument of this command is the
existing outline buffer name, and its second argument is the name to
use for the new indirect buffer.  *Note Indirect Buffers::.

   Once the indirect buffer exists, you can display it in a window in
the normal fashion, with `C-x 4 b' or other Emacs commands.  The Outline
mode commands to show and hide parts of the text operate on each buffer
independently; as a result, each buffer can have its own view.  If you
want more than two views on the same outline, create additional indirect
buffers.


File: emacs,  Node: Foldout,  Prev: Outline Views,  Up: Outline Mode

29.8.5 Folding Editing
----------------------

The Foldout package extends Outline mode and Outline minor mode with
"folding" commands.  The idea of folding is that you zoom in on a
nested portion of the outline, while hiding its relatives at higher
levels.

   Consider an Outline mode buffer with all the text and subheadings
under level-1 headings hidden.  To look at what is hidden under one of
these headings, you could use `C-c C-e' (`M-x show-entry') to expose
the body, or `C-c C-i' to expose the child (level-2) headings.

   With Foldout, you use `C-c C-z' (`M-x foldout-zoom-subtree').  This
exposes the body and child subheadings, and narrows the buffer so that
only the level-1 heading, the body and the level-2 headings are
visible.  Now to look under one of the level-2 headings, position the
cursor on it and use `C-c C-z' again.  This exposes the level-2 body
and its level-3 child subheadings and narrows the buffer again.  Zooming
in on successive subheadings can be done as much as you like.  A string
in the mode line shows how deep you've gone.

   When zooming in on a heading, to see only the child subheadings
specify a numeric argument: `C-u C-c C-z'.  The number of levels of
children can be specified too (compare `M-x show-children'), e.g. `M-2
C-c C-z' exposes two levels of child subheadings.  Alternatively, the
body can be specified with a negative argument: `M-- C-c C-z'.  The
whole subtree can be expanded, similarly to `C-c C-s' (`M-x
show-subtree'), by specifying a zero argument: `M-0 C-c C-z'.

   While you're zoomed in, you can still use Outline mode's exposure and
hiding functions without disturbing Foldout.  Also, since the buffer is
narrowed, "global" editing actions will only affect text under the
zoomed-in heading.  This is useful for restricting changes to a
particular chapter or section of your document.

   To unzoom (exit) a fold, use `C-c C-x' (`M-x foldout-exit-fold').
This hides all the text and subheadings under the top-level heading and
returns you to the previous view of the buffer.  Specifying a numeric
argument exits that many levels of folds.  Specifying a zero argument
exits all folds.

   To cancel the narrowing of a fold without hiding the text and
subheadings, specify a negative argument.  For example, `M--2 C-c C-x'
exits two folds and leaves the text and subheadings exposed.

   Foldout mode also provides mouse commands for entering and exiting
folds, and for showing and hiding text:

`C-M-Mouse-1' zooms in on the heading clicked on
          single click: expose body.

          double click: expose subheadings.

          triple click: expose body and subheadings.

          quad click: expose entire subtree.

`C-M-Mouse-2' exposes text under the heading clicked on
          single click: expose body.

          double click: expose subheadings.

          triple click: expose body and subheadings.

          quad click: expose entire subtree.

`C-M-Mouse-3' hides text under the heading clicked on or exits fold
          single click: hide subtree.

          double click: exit fold and hide text.

          triple click: exit fold without hiding text.

          quad click: exit all folds and hide text.

   You can specify different modifier keys (instead of `Control-Meta-')
by setting `foldout-mouse-modifiers'; but if you have already loaded
the `foldout.el' library, you must reload it in order for this to take
effect.

   To use the Foldout package, you can type `M-x load-library <RET>
foldout <RET>'; or you can arrange for to do that automatically by
putting this in your `.emacs' file:

     (eval-after-load "outline" '(require 'foldout))


File: emacs,  Node: TeX Mode,  Next: HTML Mode,  Prev: Outline Mode,  Up: Text

29.9 TeX Mode
=============

Emacs provides special major modes for editing files written in TeX and
its related formats.  TeX is a powerful text formatter written by
Donald Knuth; like GNU Emacs, it is free software.  LaTeX is a
simplified input format for TeX, implemented using TeX macros.  DocTeX
is a special file format in which the LaTeX sources are written,
combining sources with documentation.  SliTeX is an obsolete special
form of LaTeX.(1)

   TeX mode has four variants: Plain TeX mode, LaTeX mode, DocTeX mode,
and SliTeX mode.  These distinct major modes differ only slightly, and
are designed for editing the four different formats.  Emacs selects the
appropriate mode by looking at the contents of the buffer.  (This is
done by the `tex-mode' command, which is normally called automatically
when you visit a TeX-like file.  *Note Choosing Modes::.)  If the
contents are insufficient to determine this, Emacs chooses the mode
specified by the variable `tex-default-mode'; its default value is
`latex-mode'.  If Emacs does not guess right, you can select the
correct variant of TeX mode using the command `M-x plain-tex-mode', `M-x
latex-mode', `M-x slitex-mode', or `doctex-mode'.

   Emacs also provides BibTeX mode, a major mode for editing BibTeX
files.  BibTeX is a tool for storing and formatting bibliographic
references, which is commonly used together with LaTeX.  In addition,
the RefTeX package provides a minor mode which can be used in
conjunction with LaTeX mode to manage bibliographic references.  *note
(reftex)Top::.

* Menu:

* Editing: TeX Editing.   Special commands for editing in TeX mode.
* LaTeX: LaTeX Editing.   Additional commands for LaTeX input files.
* Printing: TeX Print.    Commands for printing part of a file with TeX.
* Misc: TeX Misc.         Customization of TeX mode, and related features.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) It has been replaced by the `slides' document class, which comes
with LaTeX.


File: emacs,  Node: TeX Editing,  Next: LaTeX Editing,  Up: TeX Mode

29.9.1 TeX Editing Commands
---------------------------

`"'
     Insert, according to context, either ```' or `"' or `'''
     (`tex-insert-quote').

`C-j'
     Insert a paragraph break (two newlines) and check the previous
     paragraph for unbalanced braces or dollar signs
     (`tex-terminate-paragraph').

`M-x tex-validate-region'
     Check each paragraph in the region for unbalanced braces or dollar
     signs.

`C-c {'
     Insert `{}' and position point between them (`tex-insert-braces').

`C-c }'
     Move forward past the next unmatched close brace (`up-list').

   In TeX, the character `"' is not normally used; instead, quotations
begin with ```' and end with `'''.  For convenience, TeX mode overrides
the normal meaning of the key `"' with a command that inserts a pair of
single-quotes or backquotes (`tex-insert-quote').  To be precise, it
inserts ```' after whitespace or an open brace, `"' after a backslash,
and `''' after any other character.

   As a special exception, if you type `"' when the text before point
is either ```' or `''', Emacs replaces that preceding text with a
single `"' character.  You can therefore type `""' to insert `"',
should you ever need to do so.  (You can also use `C-q "' to insert
this character.)

   To disable the `"' expansion feature, eliminate that binding in the
local map (*note Key Bindings::).

   In TeX mode, `$' has a special syntax code which attempts to
understand the way TeX math mode delimiters match.  When you insert a
`$' that is meant to exit math mode, the position of the matching `$'
that entered math mode is displayed for a second.  This is the same
feature that displays the open brace that matches a close brace that is
inserted.  However, there is no way to tell whether a `$' enters math
mode or leaves it; so when you insert a `$' that enters math mode, the
previous `$' position is shown as if it were a match, even though they
are actually unrelated.

   TeX uses braces as delimiters that must match.  Some users prefer to
keep braces balanced at all times, rather than inserting them singly.
Use `C-c {' (`tex-insert-braces') to insert a pair of braces.  It
leaves point between the two braces so you can insert the text that
belongs inside.  Afterward, use the command `C-c }' (`up-list') to move
forward past the close brace.

   There are two commands for checking the matching of braces.  `C-j'
(`tex-terminate-paragraph') checks the paragraph before point, and
inserts two newlines to start a new paragraph.  It outputs a message in
the echo area if any mismatch is found.  `M-x tex-validate-region'
checks a region, paragraph by paragraph.  The errors are listed in the
`*Occur*' buffer, and you can use `C-c C-c' or `Mouse-2' in that buffer
to go to a particular mismatch.

   Note that Emacs commands count square brackets and parentheses in
TeX mode, not just braces.  This is not strictly correct for the
purpose of checking TeX syntax.  However, parentheses and square
brackets are likely to be used in text as matching delimiters, and it
is useful for the various motion commands and automatic match display
to work with them.


File: emacs,  Node: LaTeX Editing,  Next: TeX Print,  Prev: TeX Editing,  Up: TeX Mode

29.9.2 LaTeX Editing Commands
-----------------------------

LaTeX mode (and its obsolete variant, SliTeX mode) provide a few extra
features not applicable to plain TeX:

`C-c C-o'
     Insert `\begin' and `\end' for LaTeX block and position point on a
     line between them (`tex-latex-block').

`C-c C-e'
     Close the innermost LaTeX block not yet closed
     (`tex-close-latex-block').

   In LaTeX input, `\begin' and `\end' commands are used to group
blocks of text.  To insert a `\begin' and a matching `\end' (on a new
line following the `\begin'), use `C-c C-o' (`tex-latex-block').  A
blank line is inserted between the two, and point is left there.  You
can use completion when you enter the block type; to specify additional
block type names beyond the standard list, set the variable
`latex-block-names'.  For example, here's how to add `theorem',
`corollary', and `proof':

     (setq latex-block-names '("theorem" "corollary" "proof"))

   In LaTeX input, `\begin' and `\end' commands must balance.  You can
use `C-c C-e' (`tex-close-latex-block') to insert automatically a
matching `\end' to match the last unmatched `\begin'.  It indents the
`\end' to match the corresponding `\begin'.  It inserts a newline after
`\end' if point is at the beginning of a line.


File: emacs,  Node: TeX Print,  Next: TeX Misc,  Prev: LaTeX Editing,  Up: TeX Mode

29.9.3 TeX Printing Commands
----------------------------

You can invoke TeX as an inferior of Emacs on either the entire
contents of the buffer or just a region at a time.  Running TeX in this
way on just one chapter is a good way to see what your changes look
like without taking the time to format the entire file.

`C-c C-r'
     Invoke TeX on the current region, together with the buffer's header
     (`tex-region').

`C-c C-b'
     Invoke TeX on the entire current buffer (`tex-buffer').

`C-c <TAB>'
     Invoke BibTeX on the current file (`tex-bibtex-file').

`C-c C-f'
     Invoke TeX on the current file (`tex-file').

`C-c C-l'
     Recenter the window showing output from the inferior TeX so that
     the last line can be seen (`tex-recenter-output-buffer').

`C-c C-k'
     Kill the TeX subprocess (`tex-kill-job').

`C-c C-p'
     Print the output from the last `C-c C-r', `C-c C-b', or `C-c C-f'
     command (`tex-print').

`C-c C-v'
     Preview the output from the last `C-c C-r', `C-c C-b', or `C-c
     C-f' command (`tex-view').

`C-c C-q'
     Show the printer queue (`tex-show-print-queue').

`C-c C-c'
     Invoke some other compilation command on the entire current buffer
     (`tex-compile').

   You can pass the current buffer through an inferior TeX by means of
`C-c C-b' (`tex-buffer').  The formatted output appears in a temporary
file; to print it, type `C-c C-p' (`tex-print').  Afterward, you can
use `C-c C-q' (`tex-show-print-queue') to view the progress of your
output towards being printed.  If your terminal has the ability to
display TeX output files, you can preview the output on the terminal
with `C-c C-v' (`tex-view').

   You can specify the directory to use for running TeX by setting the
variable `tex-directory'.  `"."' is the default value.  If your
environment variable `TEXINPUTS' contains relative directory names, or
if your files contains `\input' commands with relative file names, then
`tex-directory' _must_ be `"."' or you will get the wrong results.
Otherwise, it is safe to specify some other directory, such as `"/tmp"'.

   If you want to specify which shell commands are used in the inferior
TeX, you can do so by setting the values of the variables
`tex-run-command', `latex-run-command', `slitex-run-command',
`tex-dvi-print-command', `tex-dvi-view-command', and
`tex-show-queue-command'.  The default values may (or may not) be
appropriate for your system.

   Normally, the file name given to these commands comes at the end of
the command string; for example, `latex FILENAME'.  In some cases,
however, the file name needs to be embedded in the command; an example
is when you need to provide the file name as an argument to one command
whose output is piped to another.  You can specify where to put the
file name with `*' in the command string.  For example,

     (setq tex-dvi-print-command "dvips -f * | lpr")

   The terminal output from TeX, including any error messages, appears
in a buffer called `*tex-shell*'.  If TeX gets an error, you can switch
to this buffer and feed it input (this works as in Shell mode; *note
Interactive Shell::).  Without switching to this buffer you can scroll
it so that its last line is visible by typing `C-c C-l'.

   Type `C-c C-k' (`tex-kill-job') to kill the TeX process if you see
that its output is no longer useful.  Using `C-c C-b' or `C-c C-r' also
kills any TeX process still running.

   You can also pass an arbitrary region through an inferior TeX by
typing `C-c C-r' (`tex-region').  This is tricky, however, because most
files of TeX input contain commands at the beginning to set parameters
and define macros, without which no later part of the file will format
correctly.  To solve this problem, `C-c C-r' allows you to designate a
part of the file as containing essential commands; it is included before
the specified region as part of the input to TeX.  The designated part
of the file is called the "header".

   To indicate the bounds of the header in Plain TeX mode, you insert
two special strings in the file.  Insert `%**start of header' before the
header, and `%**end of header' after it.  Each string must appear
entirely on one line, but there may be other text on the line before or
after.  The lines containing the two strings are included in the header.
If `%**start of header' does not appear within the first 100 lines of
the buffer, `C-c C-r' assumes that there is no header.

   In LaTeX mode, the header begins with `\documentclass' or
`\documentstyle' and ends with `\begin{document}'.  These are commands
that LaTeX requires you to use in any case, so nothing special needs to
be done to identify the header.

   The commands (`tex-buffer') and (`tex-region') do all of their work
in a temporary directory, and do not have available any of the auxiliary
files needed by TeX for cross-references; these commands are generally
not suitable for running the final copy in which all of the
cross-references need to be correct.

   When you want the auxiliary files for cross references, use `C-c
C-f' (`tex-file') which runs TeX on the current buffer's file, in that
file's directory.  Before running TeX, it offers to save any modified
buffers.  Generally, you need to use (`tex-file') twice to get the
cross-references right.

   The value of the variable `tex-start-options' specifies options for
the TeX run.

   The value of the variable `tex-start-commands' specifies TeX
commands for starting TeX.  The default value causes TeX to run in
nonstop mode.  To run TeX interactively, set the variable to `""'.

   Large TeX documents are often split into several files--one main
file, plus subfiles.  Running TeX on a subfile typically does not work;
you have to run it on the main file.  In order to make `tex-file'
useful when you are editing a subfile, you can set the variable
`tex-main-file' to the name of the main file.  Then `tex-file' runs TeX
on that file.

   The most convenient way to use `tex-main-file' is to specify it in a
local variable list in each of the subfiles.  *Note File Variables::.

   For LaTeX files, you can use BibTeX to process the auxiliary file
for the current buffer's file.  BibTeX looks up bibliographic citations
in a data base and prepares the cited references for the bibliography
section.  The command `C-c <TAB>' (`tex-bibtex-file') runs the shell
command (`tex-bibtex-command') to produce a `.bbl' file for the current
buffer's file.  Generally, you need to do `C-c C-f' (`tex-file') once
to generate the `.aux' file, then do `C-c <TAB>' (`tex-bibtex-file'),
and then repeat `C-c C-f' (`tex-file') twice more to get the
cross-references correct.

   To invoke some other compilation program on the current TeX buffer,
type `C-c C-c' (`tex-compile').  This command knows how to pass
arguments to many common programs, including `pdflatex', `yap', `xdvi',
and `dvips'.  You can select your desired compilation program using the
standard completion keys (*note Completion::).


File: emacs,  Node: TeX Misc,  Prev: TeX Print,  Up: TeX Mode

29.9.4 TeX Mode Miscellany
--------------------------

Entering any variant of TeX mode runs the hooks `text-mode-hook' and
`tex-mode-hook'.  Then it runs either `plain-tex-mode-hook',
`latex-mode-hook', or `slitex-mode-hook', whichever is appropriate.
Starting the TeX shell runs the hook `tex-shell-hook'.  *Note Hooks::.

   The commands `M-x iso-iso2tex', `M-x iso-tex2iso', `M-x
iso-iso2gtex' and `M-x iso-gtex2iso' can be used to convert between
Latin-1 encoded files and TeX-encoded equivalents.

   For managing all kinds of references for LaTeX, you can use RefTeX.
*note (reftex)Top::.


File: emacs,  Node: HTML Mode,  Next: Nroff Mode,  Prev: TeX Mode,  Up: Text

29.10 SGML and HTML Modes
=========================

The major modes for SGML and HTML provide indentation support and
commands for operating on tags.  HTML mode is a slightly customized
variant of SGML mode.

`C-c C-n'
     Interactively specify a special character and insert the SGML
     `&'-command for that character.

`C-c C-t'
     Interactively specify a tag and its attributes (`sgml-tag').  This
     command asks you for a tag name and for the attribute values, then
     inserts both the opening tag and the closing tag, leaving point
     between them.

     With a prefix argument N, the command puts the tag around the N
     words already present in the buffer after point.  Whenever a
     region is active, it puts the tag around the region (when Transient
     Mark mode is off, it does this when a numeric argument of -1 is
     supplied.)

`C-c C-a'
     Interactively insert attribute values for the current tag
     (`sgml-attributes').

`C-c C-f'
     Skip across a balanced tag group (which extends from an opening tag
     through its corresponding closing tag) (`sgml-skip-tag-forward').
     A numeric argument acts as a repeat count.

`C-c C-b'
     Skip backward across a balanced tag group (which extends from an
     opening tag through its corresponding closing tag)
     (`sgml-skip-tag-forward').  A numeric argument acts as a repeat
     count.

`C-c C-d'
     Delete the tag at or after point, and delete the matching tag too
     (`sgml-delete-tag').  If the tag at or after point is an opening
     tag, delete the closing tag too; if it is a closing tag, delete the
     opening tag too.

`C-c ? TAG <RET>'
     Display a description of the meaning of tag TAG (`sgml-tag-help').
     If the argument TAG is empty, describe the tag at point.

`C-c /'
     Insert a close tag for the innermost unterminated tag
     (`sgml-close-tag').  If called from within a tag or a comment,
     close this element instead of inserting a close tag.

`C-c 8'
     Toggle a minor mode in which Latin-1 characters insert the
     corresponding SGML commands that stand for them, instead of the
     characters themselves (`sgml-name-8bit-mode').

`C-c C-v'
     Run a shell command (which you must specify) to validate the
     current buffer as SGML (`sgml-validate').

`C-c TAB'
     Toggle the visibility of existing tags in the buffer.  This can be
     used as a cheap preview.

   The default mode for editing XML documents is called nXML mode
(`xml-mode' or `nxml-mode').  This is a powerful major mode that can
recognize many existing XML schema and use them to provide completion
of XML elements via `C-<RET>' or `M-<TAB>', as well as "on-the-fly" XML
validation with error highlighting.  It is described in its own manual.
*Note nXML Mode: (nxml-mode)Top.

   However, you can also use SGML mode to edit XML, since XML is a
strict subset of SGML.  In XML, every opening tag must have an explicit
closing tag.  When the variable `sgml-xml-mode' is non-`nil', the tag
insertion commands described above always insert explicit closing tags
as well.  When you visit a file in SGML mode, Emacs determines whether
it is XML by examining the file contents, and sets `sgml-xml-mode'
accordingly.


File: emacs,  Node: Nroff Mode,  Next: Formatted Text,  Prev: HTML Mode,  Up: Text

29.11 Nroff Mode
================

Nroff mode is a mode like Text mode but modified to handle nroff
commands present in the text.  Invoke `M-x nroff-mode' to enter this
mode.  It differs from Text mode in only a few ways.  All nroff command
lines are considered paragraph separators, so that filling will never
garble the nroff commands.  Pages are separated by `.bp' commands.
Comments start with backslash-doublequote.  Also, three special
commands are provided that are not in Text mode:

`M-n'
     Move to the beginning of the next line that isn't an nroff command
     (`forward-text-line').  An argument is a repeat count.

`M-p'
     Like `M-n' but move up (`backward-text-line').

`M-?'
     Displays in the echo area the number of text lines (lines that are
     not nroff commands) in the region (`count-text-lines').

   The other feature of Nroff mode is that you can turn on Electric
Nroff mode.  This is a minor mode that you can turn on or off with `M-x
electric-nroff-mode' (*note Minor Modes::).  When the mode is on, each
time you use <RET> to end a line that contains an nroff command that
opens a kind of grouping, the matching nroff command to close that
grouping is automatically inserted on the following line.  For example,
if you are at the beginning of a line and type `. ( b <RET>', this
inserts the matching command `.)b' on a new line following point.

   If you use Outline minor mode with Nroff mode (*note Outline Mode::),
heading lines are lines of the form `.H' followed by a number (the
header level).

   Entering Nroff mode runs the hook `text-mode-hook', followed by the
hook `nroff-mode-hook' (*note Hooks::).


File: emacs,  Node: Formatted Text,  Next: Text Based Tables,  Prev: Nroff Mode,  Up: Text

29.12 Editing Formatted Text
============================

"Enriched mode" is a minor mode for editing files that contain
formatted text in WYSIWYG fashion, as in a word processor.  Currently,
formatted text in Enriched mode can specify fonts, colors, underlining,
margins, and types of filling and justification.  In the future, we plan
to implement other formatting features as well.

   Enriched mode is a minor mode (*note Minor Modes::).  It is
typically used in conjunction with Text mode (*note Text Mode::), but
you can also use it with other major modes such as Outline mode and
Paragraph-Indent Text mode.

   Potentially, Emacs can store formatted text files in various file
formats.  Currently, only one format is implemented: "text/enriched"
format, which is defined by the MIME protocol.  *Note Format
Conversion: (elisp)Format Conversion, for details of how Emacs
recognizes and converts file formats.

   The Emacs distribution contains a formatted text file that can serve
as an example.  Its name is `etc/enriched.doc'.  It contains samples
illustrating all the features described in this section.  It also
contains a list of ideas for future enhancements.

* Menu:

* Requesting Formatted Text::   Entering and exiting Enriched mode.
* Hard and Soft Newlines::      There are two different kinds of newlines.
* Editing Format Info::         How to edit text properties.
* Faces: Format Faces.          Bold, italic, underline, etc.
* Color: Format Colors.         Changing the color of text.
* Indent: Format Indentation.   Changing the left and right margins.
* Justification: Format Justification.
                                Centering, setting text flush with the
                                  left or right margin, etc.
* Special: Format Properties.   The "special" text properties submenu.
* Forcing Enriched Mode::       How to force use of Enriched mode.


File: emacs,  Node: Requesting Formatted Text,  Next: Hard and Soft Newlines,  Up: Formatted Text

29.12.1 Requesting to Edit Formatted Text
-----------------------------------------

Whenever you visit a file that Emacs saved in the text/enriched format,
Emacs automatically converts the formatting information in the file
into Emacs's own internal format (known as "text properties"), and
turns on Enriched mode.

   To create a new file of formatted text, first visit the nonexistent
file, then type `M-x enriched-mode' before you start inserting text.
This command turns on Enriched mode.  Do this before you begin inserting
text, to ensure that the text you insert is handled properly.

   More generally, the command `enriched-mode' turns Enriched mode on
if it was off, and off if it was on.  With a prefix argument, this
command turns Enriched mode on if the argument is positive, and turns
the mode off otherwise.

   When you save a buffer while Enriched mode is enabled in it, Emacs
automatically converts the text to text/enriched format while writing it
into the file.  When you visit the file again, Emacs will automatically
recognize the format, reconvert the text, and turn on Enriched mode
again.

   You can add annotations for saving additional text properties, which
Emacs normally does not save, by adding to `enriched-translations'.
Note that the text/enriched standard requires any non-standard
annotations to have names starting with `x-', as in `x-read-only'.
This ensures that they will not conflict with standard annotations that
may be added later.

   *Note Text Properties: (elisp)Text Properties, for more information
about text properties.


File: emacs,  Node: Hard and Soft Newlines,  Next: Editing Format Info,  Prev: Requesting Formatted Text,  Up: Formatted Text

29.12.2 Hard and Soft Newlines
------------------------------

In formatted text, Emacs distinguishes between two different kinds of
newlines, "hard" newlines and "soft" newlines.  (You can enable or
disable this feature separately in any  buffer with the command
`use-hard-newlines'.)

   Hard newlines are used to separate paragraphs, or items in a list, or
anywhere that there should always be a line break regardless of the
margins.  The <RET> command (`newline') and `C-o' (`open-line') insert
hard newlines.

   Soft newlines are used to make text fit between the margins.  All the
fill commands, including Auto Fill, insert soft newlines--and they
delete only soft newlines.

   Although hard and soft newlines look the same, it is important to
bear the difference in mind.  Do not use <RET> to break lines in the
middle of filled paragraphs, or else you will get hard newlines that are
barriers to further filling.  Instead, let Auto Fill mode break lines,
so that if the text or the margins change, Emacs can refill the lines
properly.  *Note Auto Fill::.

   On the other hand, in tables and lists, where the lines should always
remain as you type them, you can use <RET> to end lines.  For these
lines, you may also want to set the justification style to `unfilled'.
*Note Format Justification::.


File: emacs,  Node: Editing Format Info,  Next: Format Faces,  Prev: Hard and Soft Newlines,  Up: Formatted Text

29.12.3 Editing Format Information
----------------------------------

There are two ways to alter the formatting information for a formatted
text file: with keyboard commands, and with the mouse.

   The easiest way to add properties to your document is with the Text
Properties menu.  You can get to this menu in two ways: from the Edit
menu in the menu bar (use `<F10> e t' if you have no mouse), or with
`C-Mouse-2' (hold the <CTRL> key and press the middle mouse button).
There are also keyboard commands described in the following section.

   These items in the Text Properties menu run commands directly:

`Remove Face Properties'
     Delete from the region all face and color text properties
     (`facemenu-remove-face-props').

`Remove Text Properties'
     Delete _all_ text properties from the region
     (`facemenu-remove-all').

`Describe Properties'
     List all the text properties, widgets, buttons, and overlays of the
     character following point (`describe-text-properties').

`Display Faces'
     Display a list of all the defined faces (`list-faces-display').

`Display Colors'
     Display a list of all the defined colors (`list-colors-display').

   Other items in the Text Properties menu lead to submenus:

* Menu:

* Faces: Format Faces.          Bold, italic, underline, etc.
* Color: Format Colors.         Changing the color of text.
* Indent: Format Indentation.   Changing the left and right margins.
* Justification: Format Justification.
                                Centering, setting text flush with the
                                  left or right margin, etc.
* Special: Format Properties.   The "special" text properties submenu.


File: emacs,  Node: Format Faces,  Next: Format Colors,  Prev: Editing Format Info,  Up: Formatted Text

29.12.4 Faces in Formatted Text
-------------------------------

The Faces submenu under Text Properties lists various Emacs faces
including `bold', `italic', and `underline' (*note Faces::).  These
menu items operate on the region if it is active and nonempty.
Otherwise, they specify to use that face for an immediately following
self-inserting character.  There is also an item `Other' with which you
can enter a face name through the minibuffer (*note Standard Faces::).

   Instead of the Faces submenu, you can use these keyboard commands:

`M-o d'
     Remove all `face' properties from the region (which includes
     specified colors), or force the following inserted character to
     have no `face' property (`facemenu-set-default').  

`M-o b'
     Add the face `bold' to the region or to the following inserted
     character (`facemenu-set-bold').  

`M-o i'
     Add the face `italic' to the region or to the following inserted
     character (`facemenu-set-italic').  

`M-o l'
     Add the face `bold-italic' to the region or to the following
     inserted character (`facemenu-set-bold-italic').  

`M-o u'
     Add the face `underline' to the region or to the following inserted
     character (`facemenu-set-underline').  

`M-o o FACE <RET>'
     Add the face FACE to the region or to the following inserted
     character (`facemenu-set-face').

   With a prefix argument, all these commands apply to an immediately
following self-inserting character, disregarding the region.

   A self-inserting character normally inherits the `face' property
(and most other text properties) from the preceding character in the
buffer.  If you use the above commands to specify face for the next
self-inserting character, or the next section's commands to specify a
foreground or background color for it, then it does not inherit the
`face' property from the preceding character; instead it uses whatever
you specified.  It will still inherit other text properties, though.

   Strictly speaking, these commands apply only to the first following
self-inserting character that you type.  But if you insert additional
characters after it, they will inherit from the first one.  So it
appears that these commands apply to all of them.

   Enriched mode defines two additional faces: `excerpt' and `fixed'.
These correspond to codes used in the text/enriched file format.

   The `excerpt' face is intended for quotations.  This face is the
same as `italic' unless you customize it (*note Face Customization::).

   The `fixed' face means, "Use a fixed-width font for this part of the
text."  Applying the `fixed' face to a part of the text will cause that
part of the text to appear in a fixed-width font, even if the default
font is variable-width.  This applies to Emacs and to other systems
that display text/enriched format.  So if you specifically want a
certain part of the text to use a fixed-width font, you should specify
the `fixed' face for that part.

   By default, the `fixed' face looks the same as `bold'.  This is an
attempt to distinguish it from `default'.  You may wish to customize
`fixed' to some other fixed-width medium font.  *Note Face
Customization::.

   If your terminal cannot display different faces, you will not be
able to see them, but you can still edit documents containing faces,
and even add faces and colors to documents.  The faces you specify will
be visible when the file is viewed on a terminal that can display them.


File: emacs,  Node: Format Colors,  Next: Format Indentation,  Prev: Format Faces,  Up: Formatted Text

29.12.5 Colors in Formatted Text
--------------------------------

You can specify foreground and background colors for portions of the
text.  Under Text Properties, there is a submenu for specifying the
foreground color, and a submenu for specifying the background color.
Each one lists all the colors that you have used in Enriched mode in
the current Emacs session.

   If the region is active, the command applies to the text in the
region; otherwise, it applies to any immediately following
self-inserting input.  When Transient Mark mode is off (*note
Persistent Mark::), it always applies to the region unless a prefix
argument is given, in which case it applies to the following input.

   Each of the two color submenus contains one additional item:
`Other'.  You can use this item to specify a color that is not listed
in the menu; it reads the color name with the minibuffer.  To display a
list of available colors and their names, use the `Display Colors' menu
item in the Text Properties menu (*note Editing Format Info::).

   Any color that you specify in this way, or that is mentioned in a
formatted text file that you read in, is added to the corresponding
color menu for the duration of the Emacs session.

   There are no predefined key bindings for specifying colors, but you
can do so with the extended commands `M-x facemenu-set-foreground' and
`M-x facemenu-set-background'.  Both of these commands read the name of
the color with the minibuffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Format Indentation,  Next: Format Justification,  Prev: Format Colors,  Up: Formatted Text

29.12.6 Indentation in Formatted Text
-------------------------------------

When editing formatted text, you can specify different amounts of
indentation for the right or left margin of an entire paragraph or a
part of a paragraph.  The margins you specify automatically affect the
Emacs fill commands (*note Filling::) and line-breaking commands.

   The Indentation submenu of Text Properties provides a convenient
interface for specifying these properties.  The submenu contains four
items:

`Indent More'
     Indent the region by 4 columns (`increase-left-margin').  In
     Enriched mode, this command is also available on `C-x <TAB>'; if
     you supply a numeric argument, that says how many columns to add
     to the margin (a negative argument reduces the number of columns).

`Indent Less'
     Remove 4 columns of indentation from the region.

`Indent Right More'
     Make the text narrower by indenting 4 columns at the right margin.

`Indent Right Less'
     Remove 4 columns of indentation from the right margin.

   You can use these commands repeatedly to increase or decrease the
indentation.

   The most common way to use them is to change the indentation of an
entire paragraph.  For other uses, the effects of refilling can be hard
to predict, except in some special cases like the one described next.

   The most common other use is to format paragraphs with "hanging
indents", which means that the first line is indented less than
subsequent lines.  To set up a hanging indent, increase the indentation
of the region starting after the first word of the paragraph and
running until the end of the paragraph.

   Indenting the first line of a paragraph is easier.  Set the margin
for the whole paragraph where you want it to be for the body of the
paragraph, then indent the first line by inserting extra spaces or tabs.

   The variable `standard-indent' specifies how many columns these
commands should add to or subtract from the indentation.  The default
value is 4.  The overall default right margin for Enriched mode is
controlled by the variable `fill-column', as usual.

   There are also two commands for setting the left or right margin of
the region absolutely: `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin'.
Enriched mode binds these commands to `C-c [' and `C-c ]',
respectively.  You can specify the margin width either with a numeric
argument or in the minibuffer.

   Sometimes, as a result of editing, the filling of a paragraph becomes
messed up--parts of the paragraph may extend past the left or right
margins.  When this happens, use `M-q' (`fill-paragraph') to refill the
paragraph.

   The fill prefix, if any, works in addition to the specified paragraph
indentation: `C-x .' does not include the specified indentation's
whitespace in the new value for the fill prefix, and the fill commands
look for the fill prefix after the indentation on each line.  *Note
Fill Prefix::.


File: emacs,  Node: Format Justification,  Next: Format Properties,  Prev: Format Indentation,  Up: Formatted Text

29.12.7 Justification in Formatted Text
---------------------------------------

When editing formatted text, you can specify various styles of
justification for a paragraph.  The style you specify automatically
affects the Emacs fill commands.

   The Justification submenu of Text Properties provides a convenient
interface for specifying the style.  The submenu contains five items:

`Left'
     This is the most common style of justification (at least for
     English).  Lines are aligned at the left margin but left uneven at
     the right.

`Right'
     This aligns each line with the right margin.  Spaces and tabs are
     added on the left, if necessary, to make lines line up on the
     right.

`Full'
     This justifies the text, aligning both edges of each line.
     Justified text looks very nice in a printed book, where the spaces
     can all be adjusted equally, but it does not look as nice with a
     fixed-width font on the screen.  Perhaps a future version of Emacs
     will be able to adjust the width of spaces in a line to achieve
     elegant justification.

`Center'
     This centers every line between the current margins.

`Unfilled'
     This turns off filling entirely.  Each line will remain as you
     wrote it; the fill and auto-fill functions will have no effect on
     text which has this setting.  You can, however, still indent the
     left margin.  In unfilled regions, all newlines are treated as
     hard newlines (*note Hard and Soft Newlines::) .

   In Enriched mode, you can also specify justification from the
keyboard using the `M-j' prefix character:

`M-j l'
     Make the region left-filled (`set-justification-left').  

`M-j r'
     Make the region right-filled (`set-justification-right').  

`M-j b'
     Make the region fully justified (`set-justification-full').  

`M-j c'
`M-S'
     Make the region centered (`set-justification-center').  

`M-j u'
     Make the region unfilled (`set-justification-none').

   Justification styles apply to entire paragraphs.  All the
justification-changing commands operate on the paragraph containing
point, or, if the region is active, on all paragraphs which overlap the
region.

   The default justification style is specified by the variable
`default-justification'.  Its value should be one of the symbols
`left', `right', `full', `center', or `none'.  This is a per-buffer
variable.  Setting the variable directly affects only the current
buffer.  However, customizing it in a Custom buffer sets (as always)
the default value for buffers that do not override it.  *Note Locals::,
and *Note Easy Customization::.


File: emacs,  Node: Format Properties,  Next: Forcing Enriched Mode,  Prev: Format Justification,  Up: Formatted Text

29.12.8 Setting Other Text Properties
-------------------------------------

The Special Properties submenu of Text Properties can add or remove
three other useful text properties: `read-only', `invisible' and
`intangible'.  The `intangible' property disallows moving point within
the text, the `invisible' text property hides text from display, and
the `read-only' property disallows alteration of the text.

   Each of these special properties has a menu item to add it to the
region.  The last menu item, `Remove Special', removes all of these
special properties from the text in the region.

   Currently, the `invisible' and `intangible' properties are _not_
saved in the text/enriched format.  The `read-only' property is saved,
but it is not a standard part of the text/enriched format, so other
editors may not respect it.


File: emacs,  Node: Forcing Enriched Mode,  Prev: Format Properties,  Up: Formatted Text

29.12.9 Forcing Enriched Mode
-----------------------------

Normally, Emacs knows when you are editing formatted text because it
recognizes the special annotations used in the file that you visited.
However, sometimes you must take special actions to convert file
contents or turn on Enriched mode:

   * When you visit a file that was created with some other editor,
     Emacs may not recognize the file as being in the text/enriched
     format.  In this case, when you visit the file you will see the
     formatting commands rather than the formatted text.  Type `M-x
     format-decode-buffer' to translate it.  This also automatically
     turns on Enriched mode.

   * When you _insert_ a file into a buffer, rather than visiting it,
     Emacs does the necessary conversions on the text which you insert,
     but it does not enable Enriched mode.  If you wish to do that,
     type `M-x enriched-mode'.

   The command `format-decode-buffer' translates text in various
formats into Emacs's internal format.  It asks you to specify the format
to translate from; however, normally you can type just <RET>, which
tells Emacs to guess the format.

   If you wish to look at a text/enriched file in its raw form, as a
sequence of characters rather than as formatted text, use the `M-x
find-file-literally' command.  This visits a file, like `find-file',
but does not do format conversion.  It also inhibits character code
conversion (*note Coding Systems::) and automatic uncompression (*note
Compressed Files::).  To disable format conversion but allow character
code conversion and/or automatic uncompression if appropriate, use
`format-find-file' with suitable arguments.


File: emacs,  Node: Text Based Tables,  Prev: Formatted Text,  Up: Text

29.13 Editing Text-based Tables
===============================

Table mode provides an easy and intuitive way to create and edit WYSIWYG
text-based tables.  Here is an example of such a table:

     +-----------------+--------------------------------+-----------------+
     |     Command     |          Description           |   Key Binding   |
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+-----------------+
     |  forward-char   |Move point right N characters   |       C-f       |
     |                 |(left if N is negative).        |                 |
     |                 |                                |                 |
     |                 |On reaching end of buffer, stop |                 |
     |                 |and signal error.               |                 |
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+-----------------+
     |  backward-char  |Move point left N characters    |       C-b       |
     |                 |(right if N is negative).       |                 |
     |                 |                                |                 |
     |                 |On attempt to pass beginning or |                 |
     |                 |end of buffer, stop and signal  |                 |
     |                 |error.                          |                 |
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+-----------------+

   Table mode allows the contents of the table such as this one to be
easily manipulated by inserting or deleting characters inside a cell.
A cell is effectively a localized rectangular edit region and edits to
a cell do not affect the contents of the surrounding cells.  If the
contents do not fit into a cell, then the cell is automatically
expanded in the vertical and/or horizontal directions and the rest of
the table is restructured and reformatted in accordance with the growth
of the cell.

* Menu:

* Table Definition::          What is a text based table.
* Table Creation::            How to create a table.
* Table Recognition::         How to activate and deactivate tables.
* Cell Commands::             Cell-oriented commands in a table.
* Cell Justification::        Justifying cell contents.
* Row Commands::              Manipulating rows of table cell.
* Column Commands::           Manipulating columns of table cell.
* Fixed Width Mode::          Fixing cell width.
* Table Conversion::          Converting between plain text and tables.
* Measuring Tables::          Analyzing table dimension.
* Table Misc::                Table miscellany.


File: emacs,  Node: Table Definition,  Next: Table Creation,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.1 What is a Text-based Table?
-----------------------------------

Keep the following examples of valid tables in mind as a reference
while you read this section:

                   +--+----+---+     +-+     +--+-----+
                   |  |    |   |     | |     |  |     |
                   +--+----+---+     +-+     |  +--+--+
                   |  |    |   |             |  |  |  |
                   +--+----+---+             +--+--+  |
                                             |     |  |
                                             +-----+--+

   A table consists of a rectangular frame whose inside is divided into
cells.  Each cell must be at least one character wide and one character
high, not counting its border lines.  A cell can be subdivided into
multiple rectangular cells, but cells cannot overlap.

   The table frame and cell border lines are made of three special
characters.  These variables specify those characters:

`table-cell-vertical-char'
     Holds the character used for vertical lines.  The default value is
     `|'.

`table-cell-horizontal-chars'
     Holds the characters used for horizontal lines.  The default value
     is `"-="'.

`table-cell-intersection-char'
     Holds the character used at where horizontal line and vertical line
     meet.  The default value is `+'.

Based on this definition, the following five tables are examples of
invalid tables:

        +-----+    +-----+       +--+    +-++--+    ++
        |     |    |     |       |  |    | ||  |    ++
        | +-+ |    |     |       |  |    | ||  |
        | | | |    +--+  |    +--+--+    +-++--+
        | +-+ |    |  |  |    |  |  |    +-++--+
        |     |    |  |  |    |  |  |    | ||  |
        +-----+    +--+--+    +--+--+    +-++--+
          a           b          c          d        e

   From left to right:

  a. Overlapped cells or non-rectangular cells are not allowed.

  b. Same as a.

  c. The border must be rectangular.

  d. Cells must have a minimum width/height of one character.

  e. Same as d.


File: emacs,  Node: Table Creation,  Next: Table Recognition,  Prev: Table Definition,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.2 How to Create a Table?
------------------------------

The command to create a table is `table-insert'.  When called
interactively, it asks for the number of columns, number of rows, cell
width and cell height.  The number of columns is the number of cells
horizontally side by side.  The number of rows is the number of cells
vertically within the table's height.  The cell width is a number of
characters that each cell holds, left to right.  The cell height is a
number of lines each cell holds.  The cell width and the cell height
can be either an integer (when the value is constant across the table)
or a series of integer, separated by spaces or commas, where each
number corresponds to the next cell within a row from left to right, or
the next cell within a column from top to bottom.


File: emacs,  Node: Table Recognition,  Next: Cell Commands,  Prev: Table Creation,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.3 Table Recognition
-------------------------

Table mode maintains special text properties in the buffer to allow
editing in a convenient fashion.  When a buffer with tables is saved to
its file, these text properties are lost, so when you visit this file
again later, Emacs does not see a table, but just formatted text.  To
resurrect the table text properties, issue the `M-x table-recognize'
command.  It scans the current buffer, recognizes valid table cells,
and attaches appropriate text properties to allow for table editing.
The converse command, `table-unrecognize', is used to remove the
special text properties and convert the buffer back to plain text.

   Special commands exist to enable or disable tables within a region,
enable or disable individual tables, and enable/disable individual
cells.  These commands are:

`M-x table-recognize-region'
     Recognize tables within the current region and activate them.  

`M-x table-unrecognize-region'
     Deactivate tables within the current region.  

`M-x table-recognize-table'
     Recognize the table under point and activate it.  

`M-x table-unrecognize-table'
     Deactivate the table under point.  

`M-x table-recognize-cell'
     Recognize the cell under point and activate it.  

`M-x table-unrecognize-cell'
     Deactivate the cell under point.

   For another way of converting text into tables, see *Note Table
Conversion::.


File: emacs,  Node: Cell Commands,  Next: Cell Justification,  Prev: Table Recognition,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.4 Commands for Table Cells
--------------------------------

The commands `table-forward-cell' and `table-backward-cell' move point
from the current cell to an adjacent cell forward and backward
respectively.  The order of the cells is cyclic: when point is in the
last cell of a table, typing `M-x table-forward-cell' moves to the
first cell in the table.  Likewise `M-x table-backward-cell' from the
first cell in a table moves to the last cell.

   The command `table-span-cell' merges the current cell with the
adjacent cell in a specified direction--right, left, above or below.
You specify the direction with the minibuffer.  It does not allow
merges which don't result in a legitimate cell layout.

   The command `table-split-cell' splits the current cell vertically or
horizontally.  This command is a wrapper to the direction specific
commands `table-split-cell-vertically' and
`table-split-cell-horizontally'.  You specify the direction with a
minibuffer argument.

   The command `table-split-cell-vertically' splits the current cell
vertically and creates a pair of cells above and below where point is
located.  The content in the original cell is split as well.

   The command `table-split-cell-horizontally' splits the current cell
horizontally and creates a pair of cells right and left of where point
is located.  If the cell being split is not empty, this asks you how to
handle the cell contents.  The three options are: `split', `left', or
`right'.  `split' splits the contents at point literally, while the
`left' and `right' options move the entire contents into the left or
right cell respectively.

   The next four commands enlarge or shrink a cell.  They use numeric
arguments (*note Arguments::) to specify how many columns or rows to
enlarge or shrink a particular table.

`M-x table-heighten-cell'
     Enlarge the current cell vertically.  

`M-x table-shorten-cell'
     Shrink the current cell vertically.  

`M-x table-widen-cell'
     Enlarge the current cell horizontally.  

`M-x table-narrow-cell'
     Shrink the current cell horizontally.


File: emacs,  Node: Cell Justification,  Next: Row Commands,  Prev: Cell Commands,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.5 Cell Justification
--------------------------

You can specify text justification for each cell.  The justification is
remembered independently for each cell and the subsequent editing of
cell contents is subject to the specified justification.

   The command `table-justify' ask you to specify what to justify: a
cell, a column, or a row.  If you select cell justification, this
command sets the justification only for the current cell.  Selecting
column or row justification sets the justification for all the cells
within a column or row respectively.  The command then ask you which
kind of justification to apply: `left', `center', `right', `top',
`middle', `bottom', or `none'.  Horizontal justification and vertical
justification are specified independently.  The options `left',
`center', and `right' specify horizontal justification while the options
`top', `middle', `bottom', and `none' specify vertical justification.
The vertical justification `none' effectively removes vertical
justification.  Horizontal justification must be one of `left',
`center', or `right'.

   Justification information is stored in the buffer as a part of text
property.  Therefore, this information is ephemeral and does not
survive through the loss of the buffer (closing the buffer and
revisiting the buffer erase any previous text properties).  To
countermand for this, the command `table-recognize' and other
recognition commands (*note Table Recognition::) are equipped with a
convenience feature (turned on by default).  During table recognition,
the contents of a cell are examined to determine which justification
was originally applied to the cell and then applies this justification
to the cell.  This is a speculative algorithm and is therefore not
perfect, however, the justification is deduced correctly most of the
time.  To disable this feature, customize the variable
`table-detect-cell-alignment' and set it to `nil'.


File: emacs,  Node: Row Commands,  Next: Column Commands,  Prev: Cell Justification,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.6 Commands for Table Rows
-------------------------------

The command `table-insert-row' inserts a row of cells before the
current row in a table.  The current row where point is located is
pushed down after the newly inserted row.  A numeric prefix argument
specifies the number of rows to insert.  Note that in order to insert
rows _after_ the last row at the bottom of a table, you must place
point below the table--that is, outside the table--prior to invoking
this command.

   The command `table-delete-row' deletes a row of cells at point.  A
numeric prefix argument specifies the number of rows to delete.


File: emacs,  Node: Column Commands,  Next: Fixed Width Mode,  Prev: Row Commands,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.7 Commands for Table Columns
----------------------------------

The command `table-insert-column' inserts a column of cells to the left
of the current row in a table.  This pushes the current column to the
right.  To insert a column to the right side of the rightmost column,
place point to the right of the rightmost column, which is outside of
the table, prior to invoking this command.  A numeric prefix argument
specifies the number of columns to insert.

   A command `table-delete-column' deletes a column of cells at point.
A numeric prefix argument specifies the number of columns to delete.


File: emacs,  Node: Fixed Width Mode,  Next: Table Conversion,  Prev: Column Commands,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.8 Fix Width of Cells
--------------------------

The command `table-fixed-width-mode' toggles fixed width mode on and
off.  When fixed width mode is turned on, editing inside a cell never
changes the cell width; when it is off, the cell width expands
automatically in order to prevent a word from being folded into
multiple lines.  By default, fixed width mode is disabled.


File: emacs,  Node: Table Conversion,  Next: Measuring Tables,  Prev: Fixed Width Mode,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.9 Conversion Between Plain Text and Tables
------------------------------------------------

The command `table-capture' captures plain text in a region and turns
it into a table.  Unlike `table-recognize' (*note Table Recognition::),
the original text does not have a table appearance but may hold a
logical table structure.  For example, some elements separated by known
patterns form a two dimensional structure which can be turned into a
table.

   Here's an example of data that `table-capture' can operate on.  The
numbers are horizontally separated by a comma and vertically separated
by a newline character.

     1, 2, 3, 4
     5, 6, 7, 8
     , 9, 10

Invoking `M-x table-capture' on that text produces this table:

     +-----+-----+-----+-----+
     |1    |2    |3    |4    |
     +-----+-----+-----+-----+
     |5    |6    |7    |8    |
     +-----+-----+-----+-----+
     |     |9    |10   |     |
     +-----+-----+-----+-----+

The conversion uses `,' for the column delimiter and newline for a row
delimiter, cells are left justified, and minimum cell width is 5.

   The command `table-release' does the opposite of `table-capture'.
It releases a table by removing the table frame and cell borders.  This
leaves the table contents as plain text.  One of the useful
applications of `table-capture' and `table-release' is to edit a text
in layout.  Look at the following three paragraphs (the latter two are
indented with header lines):

     `table-capture' is a powerful command, but mastering its
     power requires some practice.  Here are some things it can do:

     Parse Cell Items      By using column delimiter regular
                           expression and raw delimiter regular
                           expression, it parses the specified text
                           area and extracts cell items from
                           non-table text and then forms a table out
                           of them.

     Capture Text Area     When no delimiters are specified it
                           creates a single cell table.  The text in
                           the specified region is placed in that
                           cell.

Applying `table-capture' to a region containing the above three
paragraphs, with empty strings for column delimiter regexp and row
delimiter regexp, creates a table with a single cell like the following
one.

     +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
     |`table-capture' is a powerful command, but mastering its         |
     |power requires some practice.  Here are some things it can do:   |
     |                                                                 |
     |Parse Cell Items      By using column delimiter regular          |
     |                      expression and raw delimiter regular       |
     |                      expression, it parses the specified text   |
     |                      area and extracts cell items from          |
     |                      non-table text and then forms a table out  |
     |                      of them.                                   |
     |                                                                 |
     |Capture Text Area     When no delimiters are specified it        |
     |                      creates a single cell table.  The text in  |
     |                      the specified region is placed in that     |
     |                      cell.                                      |
     +-----------------------------------------------------------------+

By splitting the cell appropriately we now have a table consisting of
paragraphs occupying its own cell.  Each cell can now be edited
independently without affecting the layout of other cells.

     +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
     |`table-capture' is a powerful command, but mastering its         |
     |power requires some practice.  Here are some things it can do:   |
     +---------------------+-------------------------------------------+
     |Parse Cell Items     |By using column delimiter regular          |
     |                     |expression and raw delimiter regular       |
     |                     |expression, it parses the specified text   |
     |                     |area and extracts cell items from          |
     |                     |non-table text and then forms a table out  |
     |                     |of them.                                   |
     +---------------------+-------------------------------------------+
     |Capture Text Area    |When no delimiters are specified it        |
     |                     |creates a single cell table.  The text in  |
     |                     |the specified region is placed in that     |
     |                     |cell.                                      |
     +---------------------+-------------------------------------------+

By applying `table-release', which does the opposite process, the
contents become once again plain text.  `table-release' works as a
companion command to `table-capture'.


File: emacs,  Node: Measuring Tables,  Next: Table Misc,  Prev: Table Conversion,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.10 Analyzing Table Dimensions
-----------------------------------

The command `table-query-dimension' analyzes a table structure and
reports information regarding its dimensions.  In case of the above
example table, the `table-query-dimension' command displays in echo
area:

     Cell: (21w, 6h), Table: (67w, 16h), Dim: (2c, 3r), Total Cells: 5

This indicates that the current cell is 21 character wide and 6 lines
high, the entire table is 67 characters wide and 16 lines high.  The
table has 2 columns and 3 rows.  It has a total of 5 cells, since the
first row has a spanned cell.


File: emacs,  Node: Table Misc,  Prev: Measuring Tables,  Up: Text Based Tables

29.13.11 Table Miscellany
-------------------------

The command `table-insert-sequence' inserts a string into each cell.
Each string is a part of a sequence i.e. a series of increasing integer
numbers.

   The command `table-generate-source' generates a table formatted for
a specific markup language.  It asks for a language (which must be one
of `html', `latex', or `cals'), a destination buffer where to put the
result, and the table caption (a string), and then inserts the
generated table in the proper syntax into the destination buffer.  The
default destination buffer is `table.LANG', where LANG is the language
you specified.


File: emacs,  Node: Programs,  Next: Building,  Prev: Text,  Up: Top

30 Editing Programs
*******************

Emacs provides many features to facilitate editing programs.  Some of
these features can

   * Find or move over top-level definitions (*note Defuns::).

   * Apply the usual indentation conventions of the language (*note
     Program Indent::).

   * Balance parentheses (*note Parentheses::).

   * Insert, kill or align comments (*note Comments::).

   * Highlight program syntax (*note Font Lock::).

   This chapter describes these features and many more.

* Menu:

* Program Modes::       Major modes for editing programs.
* Defuns::              Commands to operate on major top-level parts
                          of a program.
* Program Indent::      Adjusting indentation to show the nesting.
* Parentheses::         Commands that operate on parentheses.
* Comments::	        Inserting, killing, and aligning comments.
* Documentation::       Getting documentation of functions you plan to call.
* Hideshow::            Displaying blocks selectively.
* Symbol Completion::   Completion on symbol names of your program or language.
* Glasses::             Making identifiersLikeThis more readable.
* Semantic::            Suite of editing tools based on source code parsing.
* Misc for Programs::   Other Emacs features useful for editing programs.
* C Modes::             Special commands of C, C++, Objective-C,
                          Java, and Pike modes.
* Asm Mode::            Asm mode and its special features.

* Fortran::             Fortran mode and its special features.


File: emacs,  Node: Program Modes,  Next: Defuns,  Up: Programs

30.1 Major Modes for Programming Languages
==========================================

Emacs has specialized major modes for various programming languages.
*Note Major Modes::.  A programming language major mode typically
specifies the syntax of expressions, the customary rules for
indentation, how to do syntax highlighting for the language, and how to
find the beginning or end of a function definition.  It often
customizes or provides facilities for compiling and debugging programs
as well.

   Ideally, Emacs should provide a major mode for each programming
language that you might want to edit; if it doesn't have a mode for
your favorite language, you can contribute one.  But often the mode for
one language can serve for other syntactically similar languages.  The
major mode for language L is called `L-mode', and you can select it by
typing `M-x L-mode <RET>'.  *Note Choosing Modes::.

   The existing programming language major modes include Lisp, Scheme
(a variant of Lisp) and the Scheme-based DSSSL expression language,
Ada, ASM, AWK, C, C++, Delphi (Object Pascal), Fortran, Icon, IDL
(CORBA), IDLWAVE, Java, Javascript, Metafont (TeX's companion for font
creation), Modula2, Objective-C, Octave, Pascal, Perl, Pike,
PostScript, Prolog, Python, Ruby, Simula, Tcl, and VHDL.  An
alternative mode for Perl is called CPerl mode.  Modes are available
for the scripting languages of the common GNU and Unix shells, VMS DCL,
and MS-DOS/MS-Windows `BAT' files.  There are also major modes for
editing makefiles, DNS master files, and various sorts of configuration
files.

   In most programming languages, indentation should vary from line to
line to illustrate the structure of the program.  So the major modes
for programming languages arrange for <TAB> to update the indentation
of the current line (*note Program Indent::).  They also rebind <DEL>
to treat a tab as if it were the equivalent number of spaces; this lets
you delete one column of indentation without worrying whether the
whitespace consists of spaces or tabs.  Use `C-b C-d' to delete a tab
character before point, in these modes.

   Separate manuals are available for the modes for Ada (*note Ada
Mode: (ada-mode)Top.), C/C++/Objective C/Java/Corba IDL/Pike/AWK (*note
CC Mode: (ccmode)Top.) and the IDLWAVE modes (*note IDLWAVE:
(idlwave)Top.).  For Fortran mode, see *Note Fortran::.

   Turning on a major mode runs a normal hook called the "mode hook",
which is the value of a Lisp variable.  Each major mode has a mode
hook, and the hook's name is always made from the mode command's name
by adding `-hook'.  For example, turning on C mode runs the hook
`c-mode-hook', while turning on Lisp mode runs the hook
`lisp-mode-hook'.  The purpose of the mode hook is to give you a place
to set up customizations for that major mode.  *Note Hooks::.


File: emacs,  Node: Defuns,  Next: Program Indent,  Prev: Program Modes,  Up: Programs

30.2 Top-Level Definitions, or Defuns
=====================================

In Emacs, a major definition at the top level in the buffer, such as a
function, is called a "defun".  The name comes from Lisp, but in Emacs
we use it for all languages.

* Menu:

* Left Margin Paren::   An open-paren or similar opening delimiter
                          starts a defun if it is at the left margin.
* Moving by Defuns::    Commands to move over or mark a major definition.
* Imenu::               Making buffer indexes as menus.
* Which Function::      Which Function mode shows which function you are in.


File: emacs,  Node: Left Margin Paren,  Next: Moving by Defuns,  Up: Defuns

30.2.1 Left Margin Convention
-----------------------------

Many programming-language modes assume by default that any opening
delimiter found at the left margin is the start of a top-level
definition, or defun.  Therefore, *don't put an opening delimiter at
the left margin unless it should have that significance*.  For
instance, never put an open-parenthesis at the left margin in a Lisp
file unless it is the start of a top-level list.

   The convention speeds up many Emacs operations, which would
otherwise have to scan back to the beginning of the buffer to analyze
the syntax of the code.

   If you don't follow this convention, not only will you have trouble
when you explicitly use the commands for motion by defuns; other
features that use them will also give you trouble.  This includes the
indentation commands (*note Program Indent::) and Font Lock mode (*note
Font Lock::).

   The most likely problem case is when you want an opening delimiter
at the start of a line inside a string.  To avoid trouble, put an
escape character (`\', in C and Emacs Lisp, `/' in some other Lisp
dialects) before the opening delimiter.  This will not affect the
contents of the string, but will prevent that opening delimiter from
starting a defun.  Here's an example:

       (insert "Foo:
     \(bar)
     ")

   To help you catch violations of this convention, Font Lock mode
highlights confusing opening delimiters (those that ought to be quoted)
in bold red.

   If you need to override this convention, you can do so by setting
this user option:

 -- Variable: open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start
     If this user option is set to `t' (the default), opening
     parentheses or braces at column zero always start defuns.  When
     it's `nil', defuns are found by searching for parens or braces at
     the outermost level.

   Usually, you should leave this option at its default value of `t'.
If your buffer contains parentheses or braces in column zero which
don't start defuns, and it is somehow impractical to remove these
parentheses or braces, it might be helpful to set the option to `nil'.
Be aware that this might make scrolling and display in large buffers
quite sluggish.  Furthermore, the parentheses and braces must be
correctly matched throughout the buffer for it to work properly.


File: emacs,  Node: Moving by Defuns,  Next: Imenu,  Prev: Left Margin Paren,  Up: Defuns

30.2.2 Moving by Defuns
-----------------------

These commands move point or set up the region based on top-level major
definitions, also called "defuns".

`C-M-a'
     Move to beginning of current or preceding defun
     (`beginning-of-defun').

`C-M-e'
     Move to end of current or following defun (`end-of-defun').

`C-M-h'
     Put region around whole current or following defun (`mark-defun').

   The commands to move to the beginning and end of the current defun
are `C-M-a' (`beginning-of-defun') and `C-M-e' (`end-of-defun').  If
you repeat one of these commands, or use a positive numeric argument,
each repetition moves to the next defun in the direction of motion.

   `C-M-a' with a negative argument -N moves forward N times to the
next beginning of a defun.  This is not exactly the same place that
`C-M-e' with argument N would move to; the end of this defun is not
usually exactly the same place as the beginning of the following defun.
(Whitespace, comments, and perhaps declarations can separate them.)
Likewise, `C-M-e' with a negative argument moves back to an end of a
defun, which is not quite the same as `C-M-a' with a positive argument.

   To operate on the current defun, use `C-M-h' (`mark-defun'), which
sets the mark at the end of the current defun and puts point at its
beginning.  *Note Marking Objects::.  This is the easiest way to get
ready to kill the defun in order to move it to a different place in the
file.  If you use the command while point is between defuns, it uses
the following defun.  If you use the command while the mark is already
active, it sets the mark but does not move point; furthermore, each
successive use of `C-M-h' extends the end of the region to include one
more defun.

   In C mode, `C-M-h' runs the function `c-mark-function', which is
almost the same as `mark-defun'; the difference is that it backs up
over the argument declarations, function name and returned data type so
that the entire C function is inside the region.  This is an example of
how major modes adjust the standard key bindings so that they do their
standard jobs in a way better fitting a particular language.  Other
major modes may replace any or all of these key bindings for that
purpose.


File: emacs,  Node: Imenu,  Next: Which Function,  Prev: Moving by Defuns,  Up: Defuns

30.2.3 Imenu
------------

The Imenu facility offers a way to find the major definitions in a file
by name.  It is also useful in text formatter major modes, where it
treats each chapter, section, etc., as a definition.  (*Note Tags::,
for a more powerful feature that handles multiple files together.)

   If you type `M-x imenu', it reads the name of a definition using the
minibuffer, then moves point to that definition.  You can use
completion to specify the name; the command always displays the whole
list of valid names.

   Alternatively, you can bind the command `imenu' to a mouse click.
Then it displays mouse menus for you to select a definition name.  You
can also add the buffer's index to the menu bar by calling
`imenu-add-menubar-index'.  If you want to have this menu bar item
available for all buffers in a certain major mode, you can do this by
adding `imenu-add-menubar-index' to its mode hook.  But if you have
done that, you will have to wait a little while each time you visit a
file in that mode, while Emacs finds all the definitions in that buffer.

   When you change the contents of a buffer, if you add or delete
definitions, you can update the buffer's index based on the new
contents by invoking the `*Rescan*' item in the menu.  Rescanning
happens automatically if you set `imenu-auto-rescan' to a non-`nil'
value.  There is no need to rescan because of small changes in the text.

   You can customize the way the menus are sorted by setting the
variable `imenu-sort-function'.  By default, names are ordered as they
occur in the buffer; if you want alphabetic sorting, use the symbol
`imenu--sort-by-name' as the value.  You can also define your own
comparison function by writing Lisp code.

   Imenu provides the information to guide Which Function mode (*note
Which Function::).  The Speedbar can also use it (*note Speedbar::).


File: emacs,  Node: Which Function,  Prev: Imenu,  Up: Defuns

30.2.4 Which Function Mode
--------------------------

Which Function mode is a minor mode that displays the current function
name in the mode line, updating it as you move around in a buffer.

   To either enable or disable Which Function mode, use the command
`M-x which-function-mode'.  This command applies to all buffers, both
existing ones and those yet to be created.  However, it takes effect
only in certain major modes, those listed in the value of
`which-func-modes'.  If the value of `which-func-modes' is `t' rather
than a list of modes, then Which Function mode applies to all major
modes that know how to support it--in other words, all the major modes
that support Imenu.


File: emacs,  Node: Program Indent,  Next: Parentheses,  Prev: Defuns,  Up: Programs

30.3 Indentation for Programs
=============================

The best way to keep a program properly indented is to use Emacs to
reindent it as you change it.  Emacs has commands to indent either a
single line, a specified number of lines, or all of the lines inside a
single parenthetical grouping.

* Menu:

* Basic Indent::	Indenting a single line.
* Multi-line Indent::   Commands to reindent many lines at once.
* Lisp Indent::		Specifying how each Lisp function should be indented.
* C Indent::		Extra features for indenting C and related modes.
* Custom C Indent::	Controlling indentation style for C and related modes.

   Emacs also provides a Lisp pretty-printer in the library `pp'.  This
program reformats a Lisp object with indentation chosen to look nice.


File: emacs,  Node: Basic Indent,  Next: Multi-line Indent,  Up: Program Indent

30.3.1 Basic Program Indentation Commands
-----------------------------------------

The basic indentation commands indent a single line according to the
usual conventions of the language you are editing.

`<TAB>'
     Adjust indentation of current line.

`C-j'
     Insert a newline, then adjust indentation of following line
     (`newline-and-indent').

   The basic indentation command is <TAB>.  In any programming-language
major mode, <TAB> gives the current line the correct indentation as
determined from the previous lines.  It does this by inserting or
deleting whitespace at the beginning of the current line.  If point was
inside the whitespace at the beginning of the line, <TAB> puts it at
the end of that whitespace; otherwise, <TAB> keeps point fixed with
respect to the characters around it.  If the region is active (*note
Mark::), <TAB> indents every line within the region instead of just the
current line.  The function that <TAB> runs depends on the major mode;
for instance, it is `c-indent-line-or-region' in C mode.  Each function
is aware of the syntax and conventions for its particular language.

   Use `C-q <TAB>' to insert a tab character at point.

   When entering lines of new code, use `C-j' (`newline-and-indent'),
which inserts a newline and then adjusts indentation after it.  (It
also deletes any trailing whitespace which remains before the new
newline.)  For instance, `C-j' at the end of a line creates a blank
line with appropriate indentation.  In programming language modes, it
is equivalent to <RET> <TAB>.

   When Emacs indents a line that starts within a parenthetical
grouping, it usually places the start of the line under the preceding
line within the group, or under the text after the parenthesis.  If you
manually give one of these lines a nonstandard indentation, the lines
below will tend to follow it.  This behavior is convenient in cases
where you have overridden the standard result of <TAB> indentation
(e.g., for aesthetic purposes).

   Many programming-language modes assume that an open-parenthesis,
open-brace or other opening delimiter at the left margin is the start
of a function.  This assumption speeds up indentation commands.  If the
text you are editing contains opening delimiters in column zero that
aren't the beginning of a functions--even if these delimiters occur
inside strings or comments--then you must set
`open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start'.  *Note Left Margin Paren::.

   Normally, Emacs indents lines using an "optimal" mix of tab and
space characters.  If you want Emacs to use spaces only, set
`indent-tabs-mode' (*note Just Spaces::).


File: emacs,  Node: Multi-line Indent,  Next: Lisp Indent,  Prev: Basic Indent,  Up: Program Indent

30.3.2 Indenting Several Lines
------------------------------

Sometimes, you may want to reindent several lines of code at a time.
One way to do this is to use the mark; when the mark is active and the
region is non-empty, <TAB> indents every line within the region.  In
addition, Emacs provides several other commands for indenting large
chunks of code:

`C-M-q'
     Reindent all the lines within one parenthetical grouping.

`C-M-\'
     Reindent all lines in the region (`indent-region').

`C-u <TAB>'
     Shift an entire parenthetical grouping rigidly sideways so that its
     first line is properly indented.

`M-x indent-code-rigidly'
     Shift all the lines in the region rigidly sideways, but do not
     alter lines that start inside comments and strings.

   To reindent the contents of a single parenthetical grouping,
position point before the beginning of the grouping and type `C-M-q'.
This changes the relative indentation within the grouping, without
affecting its overall indentation (i.e., the indentation of the line
where the grouping starts).  The function that `C-M-q' runs depends on
the major mode; it is `indent-pp-sexp' in Lisp mode, `c-indent-exp' in
C mode, etc.  To correct the overall indentation as well, type <TAB>
first.

   `C-M-\' (`indent-region') applies <TAB> to the region.  This is
useful when Transient Mark mode is disabled (*note Persistent Mark::),
because in that case <TAB> does not act on the region.

   If you like the relative indentation within a grouping but not the
indentation of its first line, move point to that first line and type
`C-u <TAB>'.  In Lisp, C, and some other major modes, <TAB> with a
numeric argument reindents the current line as usual, then reindents by
the same amount all the lines in the parenthetical grouping starting on
the current line.  It is clever, though, and does not alter lines that
start inside strings.  Neither does it alter C preprocessor lines when
in C mode, but it does reindent any continuation lines that may be
attached to them.

   The command `M-x indent-code-rigidly' rigidly shifts all the lines
in the region sideways, like `indent-rigidly' does (*note Indentation
Commands::).  It doesn't alter the indentation of lines that start
inside a string, unless the region also starts inside that string.  The
prefix arg specifies the number of columns to indent.


File: emacs,  Node: Lisp Indent,  Next: C Indent,  Prev: Multi-line Indent,  Up: Program Indent

30.3.3 Customizing Lisp Indentation
-----------------------------------

The indentation pattern for a Lisp expression can depend on the function
called by the expression.  For each Lisp function, you can choose among
several predefined patterns of indentation, or define an arbitrary one
with a Lisp program.

   The standard pattern of indentation is as follows: the second line
of the expression is indented under the first argument, if that is on
the same line as the beginning of the expression; otherwise, the second
line is indented underneath the function name.  Each following line is
indented under the previous line whose nesting depth is the same.

   If the variable `lisp-indent-offset' is non-`nil', it overrides the
usual indentation pattern for the second line of an expression, so that
such lines are always indented `lisp-indent-offset' more columns than
the containing list.

   Certain functions override the standard pattern.  Functions whose
names start with `def' treat the second lines as the start of a "body",
by indenting the second line `lisp-body-indent' additional columns
beyond the open-parenthesis that starts the expression.

   You can override the standard pattern in various ways for individual
functions, according to the `lisp-indent-function' property of the
function name.  Normally you would use this for macro definitions and
specify it using the `declare' construct (*note Defining Macros:
(elisp)Defining Macros.).


File: emacs,  Node: C Indent,  Next: Custom C Indent,  Prev: Lisp Indent,  Up: Program Indent

30.3.4 Commands for C Indentation
---------------------------------

Here are special features for indentation in C mode and related modes:

`C-c C-q'
     Reindent the current top-level function definition or aggregate
     type declaration (`c-indent-defun').

`C-M-q'
     Reindent each line in the balanced expression that follows point
     (`c-indent-exp').  A prefix argument inhibits warning messages
     about invalid syntax.

`<TAB>'
     Reindent the current line, and/or in some cases insert a tab
     character (`c-indent-command').

     If `c-tab-always-indent' is `t', this command always reindents the
     current line and does nothing else.  This is the default.

     If that variable is `nil', this command reindents the current line
     only if point is at the left margin or in the line's indentation;
     otherwise, it inserts a tab (or the equivalent number of spaces,
     if `indent-tabs-mode' is `nil').

     Any other value (not `nil' or `t') means always reindent the line,
     and also insert a tab if within a comment or a string.

   To reindent the whole current buffer, type `C-x h C-M-\'.  This
first selects the whole buffer as the region, then reindents that
region.

   To reindent the current block, use `C-M-u C-M-q'.  This moves to the
front of the block and then reindents it all.


File: emacs,  Node: Custom C Indent,  Prev: C Indent,  Up: Program Indent

30.3.5 Customizing C Indentation
--------------------------------

C mode and related modes use a flexible mechanism for customizing
indentation.  C mode indents a source line in two steps: first it
classifies the line syntactically according to its contents and
context; second, it determines the indentation offset associated by
your selected "style" with the syntactic construct and adds this onto
the indentation of the "anchor statement".

`C-c . <RET> STYLE <RET>'
     Select a predefined style STYLE (`c-set-style').

   A "style" is a named collection of customizations that can be used
in C mode and the related modes.  *Note Styles: (ccmode)Styles, for a
complete description.  Emacs comes with several predefined styles,
including `gnu', `k&r', `bsd', `stroustrup', `linux', `python', `java',
`whitesmith', `ellemtel', and `awk'.  Some of these styles are
primarily intended for one language, but any of them can be used with
any of the languages supported by these modes.  To find out what a
style looks like, select it and reindent some code, e.g., by typing
<C-M-q> at the start of a function definition.

   To choose a style for the current buffer, use the command `C-c .'.
Specify a style name as an argument (case is not significant).  This
command affects the current buffer only, and it affects only future
invocations of the indentation commands; it does not reindent the code
already in the buffer.  To reindent the whole buffer in the new style,
you can type `C-x h C-M-\'.

   You can also set the variable `c-default-style' to specify the
default style for various major modes.  Its value should be either the
style's name (a string) or an alist, in which each element specifies
one major mode and which indentation style to use for it.  For example,

     (setq c-default-style
           '((java-mode . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu")))

specifies explicit choices for Java and AWK modes, and the default
`gnu' style for the other C-like modes.  (These settings are actually
the defaults.)  This variable takes effect when you select one of the
C-like major modes; thus, if you specify a new default style for Java
mode, you can make it take effect in an existing Java mode buffer by
typing `M-x java-mode' there.

   The `gnu' style specifies the formatting recommended by the GNU
Project for C; it is the default, so as to encourage use of our
recommended style.

   *Note Indentation Engine Basics: (ccmode)Indentation Engine Basics,
and *Note Customizing Indentation: (ccmode)Customizing Indentation, for
more information on customizing indentation for C and related modes,
including how to override parts of an existing style and how to define
your own styles.


File: emacs,  Node: Parentheses,  Next: Comments,  Prev: Program Indent,  Up: Programs

30.4 Commands for Editing with Parentheses
==========================================

This section describes the commands and features that take advantage of
the parenthesis structure in a program, or help you keep it balanced.

   When talking about these facilities, the term "parenthesis" also
includes braces, brackets, or whatever delimiters are defined to match
in pairs.  The major mode controls which delimiters are significant,
through the syntax table (*note Syntax::).  In Lisp, only parentheses
count; in C, these commands apply to braces and brackets too.

   You can use `M-x check-parens' to find any unbalanced parentheses
and unbalanced string quotes in the buffer.

* Menu:

* Expressions::         Expressions with balanced parentheses.
* Moving by Parens::    Commands for moving up, down and across
                          in the structure of parentheses.
* Matching::	        Insertion of a close-delimiter flashes matching open.


File: emacs,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Moving by Parens,  Up: Parentheses

30.4.1 Expressions with Balanced Parentheses
--------------------------------------------

These commands deal with balanced expressions, also called "sexps"(1).

`C-M-f'
     Move forward over a balanced expression (`forward-sexp').

`C-M-b'
     Move backward over a balanced expression (`backward-sexp').

`C-M-k'
     Kill balanced expression forward (`kill-sexp').

`C-M-t'
     Transpose expressions (`transpose-sexps').

`C-M-@'
`C-M-<SPC>'
     Put mark after following expression (`mark-sexp').

   Each programming language major mode customizes the definition of
balanced expressions to suit that language.  Balanced expressions
typically include symbols, numbers, and string constants, as well as
any pair of matching delimiters and their contents.  Some languages
have obscure forms of expression syntax that nobody has bothered to
implement in Emacs.

   By convention, the keys for these commands are all Control-Meta
characters.  They usually act on expressions just as the corresponding
Meta characters act on words.  For instance, the command `C-M-b' moves
backward over a balanced expression, just as `M-b' moves back over a
word.

   To move forward over a balanced expression, use `C-M-f'
(`forward-sexp').  If the first significant character after point is an
opening delimiter (`(' in Lisp; `(', `[' or `{' in C), `C-M-f' moves
past the matching closing delimiter.  If the character begins a symbol,
string, or number, `C-M-f' moves over that.

   The command `C-M-b' (`backward-sexp') moves backward over a balanced
expression.  The detailed rules are like those above for `C-M-f', but
with directions reversed.  If there are prefix characters
(single-quote, backquote and comma, in Lisp) preceding the expression,
`C-M-b' moves back over them as well.  The balanced expression commands
move across comments as if they were whitespace, in most modes.

   `C-M-f' or `C-M-b' with an argument repeats that operation the
specified number of times; with a negative argument, it moves in the
opposite direction.

   Killing a whole balanced expression can be done with `C-M-k'
(`kill-sexp').  `C-M-k' kills the characters that `C-M-f' would move
over.

   A somewhat random-sounding command which is nevertheless handy is
`C-M-t' (`transpose-sexps'), which drags the previous balanced
expression across the next one.  An argument serves as a repeat count,
moving the previous expression over that many following ones.  A
negative argument drags the previous balanced expression backwards
across those before it (thus canceling out the effect of `C-M-t' with a
positive argument).  An argument of zero, rather than doing nothing,
transposes the balanced expressions ending at or after point and the
mark.

   To set the region around the next balanced expression in the buffer,
use `C-M-<SPC>' (`mark-sexp'), which sets mark at the same place that
`C-M-f' would move to.  `C-M-<SPC>' treats numeric arguments in the
same way as `C-M-f'; in particular, a negative argument puts the mark
at the beginning of the previous balanced expression.  The alias
`C-M-@' is equivalent to `C-M-<SPC>'.  While the mark is active, each
successive use of `C-M-<SPC>' extends the region by shifting the mark
by one sexp.

   In languages that use infix operators, such as C, it is not possible
to recognize all balanced expressions as such because there can be
multiple possibilities at a given position.  For example, C mode does
not treat `foo + bar' as a single expression, even though it _is_ one C
expression; instead, it recognizes `foo' as one expression and `bar' as
another, with the `+' as punctuation between them.  Both `foo + bar'
and `foo' are legitimate choices for "the expression following point"
when point is at the `f', so the expression commands must perforce
choose one or the other to operate on.  Note that `(foo + bar)' is
recognized as a single expression in C mode, because of the parentheses.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The word "sexp" is used to refer to an expression in Lisp.


File: emacs,  Node: Moving by Parens,  Next: Matching,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Parentheses

30.4.2 Moving in the Parenthesis Structure
------------------------------------------

The Emacs commands for handling parenthetical groupings see nothing
except parentheses (or whatever characters must balance in the language
you are working with).  They ignore strings and comments (including any
parentheses within them) and ignore parentheses quoted by an escape
character.  They are mainly intended for editing programs, but can be
useful for editing any text that has parentheses.  They are sometimes
called "list" commands because in Lisp these groupings are lists.

   These commands assume that the starting point is not inside a string
or a comment.  Sometimes you can invoke them usefully from one of these
places (for example, when you have a parenthesised clause in a comment)
but this is unreliable.

`C-M-n'
     Move forward over a parenthetical group (`forward-list').

`C-M-p'
     Move backward over a parenthetical group (`backward-list').

`C-M-u'
     Move up in parenthesis structure (`backward-up-list').

`C-M-d'
     Move down in parenthesis structure (`down-list').

   The "list" commands `C-M-n' (`forward-list') and `C-M-p'
(`backward-list') move forward or backward over one (or N)
parenthetical groupings.

   `C-M-n' and `C-M-p' try to stay at the same level in the parenthesis
structure.  To move _up_ one (or N) levels, use `C-M-u'
(`backward-up-list').  `C-M-u' moves backward up past one unmatched
opening delimiter.  A positive argument serves as a repeat count; a
negative argument reverses the direction of motion, so that the command
moves forward and up one or more levels.

   To move _down_ in the parenthesis structure, use `C-M-d'
(`down-list').  In Lisp mode, where `(' is the only opening delimiter,
this is nearly the same as searching for a `('.  An argument specifies
the number of levels to go down.


File: emacs,  Node: Matching,  Prev: Moving by Parens,  Up: Parentheses

30.4.3 Automatic Display Of Matching Parentheses
------------------------------------------------

The Emacs parenthesis-matching feature is designed to show
automatically how parentheses (and other matching delimiters) match in
the text.  Whenever you type a self-inserting character that is a
closing delimiter, the cursor moves momentarily to the location of the
matching opening delimiter, provided that is on the screen.  If it is
not on the screen, Emacs displays some of the text near it in the echo
area.  Either way, you can tell which grouping you are closing off.

   If the opening delimiter and closing delimiter are mismatched--such
as in `[x)'--a warning message is displayed in the echo area.

   Three variables control parenthesis match display:

   `blink-matching-paren' turns the feature on or off: `nil' disables
it, but the default is `t' to enable match display.

   `blink-matching-delay' says how many seconds to leave the cursor on
the matching opening delimiter, before bringing it back to the real
location of point; the default is 1, but on some systems it is useful
to specify a fraction of a second.

   `blink-matching-paren-distance' specifies how many characters back
to search to find the matching opening delimiter.  If the match is not
found in that distance, scanning stops, and nothing is displayed.  This
is to prevent the scan for the matching delimiter from wasting lots of
time when there is no match.  The default is 102400.

   Show Paren mode provides a more powerful kind of automatic matching.
Whenever point is before an opening delimiter or after a closing
delimiter, both that delimiter and its opposite delimiter are
highlighted.  Use the command `M-x show-paren-mode' to enable or
disable this mode.

   Show Paren mode uses the faces `show-paren-match' and
`show-paren-mismatch' to highlight parentheses; you can customize them
to control how highlighting looks.  *Note Face Customization::.


File: emacs,  Node: Comments,  Next: Documentation,  Prev: Parentheses,  Up: Programs

30.5 Manipulating Comments
==========================

Because comments are such an important part of programming, Emacs
provides special commands for editing and inserting comments.  It can
also do spell checking on comments with Flyspell Prog mode (*note
Spelling::).

* Menu:

* Comment Commands::    Inserting, killing, and aligning comments.
* Multi-Line Comments:: Commands for adding and editing multi-line comments.
* Options for Comments::Customizing the comment features.


File: emacs,  Node: Comment Commands,  Next: Multi-Line Comments,  Up: Comments

30.5.1 Comment Commands
-----------------------

The commands in this table insert, kill and align comments:

`M-;'
     Insert or realign comment on current line; alternatively, comment
     or uncomment the region (`comment-dwim').

`C-u M-;'
     Kill comment on current line (`comment-kill').

`C-x ;'
     Set comment column (`comment-set-column').

`C-M-j'
`M-j'
     Like <RET> followed by inserting and aligning a comment
     (`comment-indent-new-line').  *Note Multi-Line Comments::.

`M-x comment-region'
`C-c C-c' (in C-like modes)
     Add or remove comment delimiters on all the lines in the region.

   The command to create or align a comment is `M-;' (`comment-dwim').
The word "dwim" is an acronym for "Do What I Mean"; it indicates that
this command can be used for many different jobs relating to comments,
depending on the situation where you use it.

   When a region is active, `M-;' either adds or removes comment
delimiters on each line of the region.  *Note Mark::.  If every line in
the region is a comment, it removes comment delimiters from each;
otherwise, it adds comment delimiters to each.  You can also use the
commands `comment-region' and `uncomment-region' to explicitly comment
or uncomment the text in the region (*note Multi-Line Comments::).  If
you supply a prefix argument to `M-;' when a region is active, that
specifies how many comment delimiters to add or how many to delete.

   If the region is not active, `M-;' inserts a new comment if there is
no comment already on the line.  The new comment is normally aligned at
a specific column called the "comment column"; if the text of the line
extends past the comment column, `M-;' aligns the comment start string
to a suitable boundary (usually, at least one space is inserted).  The
comment begins with the string Emacs thinks comments should start with
(the value of `comment-start'; see below).  Emacs places point after
that string, so you can insert the text of the comment right away.  If
the major mode has specified a string to terminate comments, `M-;'
inserts that string after point, to keep the syntax valid.

   You can also use `M-;' to align an existing comment.  If a line
already contains the comment-start string, `M-;' realigns it to the
conventional alignment and moves point after it.  (Exception: comments
starting in column 0 are not moved.)  Even when an existing comment is
properly aligned, `M-;' is still useful for moving directly to the
start of the text inside the comment.

   `C-u M-;' kills any comment on the current line, along with the
whitespace before it.  To reinsert the comment on another line, move to
the end of that line, do `C-y', and then do `M-;' to realign it.

   Note that `C-u M-;' is not a distinct key; it is `M-;'
(`comment-dwim') with a prefix argument.  That command is programmed so
that when it receives a prefix argument it calls `comment-kill'.
However, `comment-kill' is a valid command in its own right, and you
can bind it directly to a key if you wish.

   Some major modes have special rules for aligning certain kinds of
comments in certain contexts.  For example, in Lisp code, comments which
start with two semicolons are indented as if they were lines of code,
instead of at the comment column.  Comments which start with three
semicolons are supposed to start at the left margin and are often used
for sectioning purposes.  Emacs understands these conventions by
indenting a double-semicolon comment using <TAB>, and by not changing
the indentation of a triple-semicolon comment at all.

     ;; This function is just an example.
     ;;; Here either two or three semicolons are appropriate.
     (defun foo (x)
     ;;;  And now, the first part of the function:
       ;; The following line adds one.
       (1+ x))           ; This line adds one.

   For C-like modes, you can configure the exact effect of `M-;' by
setting the variables `c-indent-comment-alist' and
`c-indent-comments-syntactically-p'.  For example, on a line ending in
a closing brace, `M-;' puts the comment one space after the brace
rather than at `comment-column'.  For full details see *Note Comment
Commands: (ccmode)Comment Commands.


File: emacs,  Node: Multi-Line Comments,  Next: Options for Comments,  Prev: Comment Commands,  Up: Comments

30.5.2 Multiple Lines of Comments
---------------------------------

If you are typing a comment and wish to continue it on another line,
you can use the command `C-M-j' or `M-j' (`comment-indent-new-line').
If `comment-multi-line' (*note Options for Comments::) is non-`nil', it
moves to a new line within the comment.  Otherwise it closes the
comment and starts a new comment on a new line.  When Auto Fill mode is
on, going past the fill column while typing a comment causes the
comment to be continued in just this fashion.

   To turn existing lines into comment lines, use the `M-x
comment-region' command (or type `C-c C-c' in C-like modes).  It adds
comment delimiters to the lines that start in the region, thus
commenting them out.  With a negative argument, it does the
opposite--it deletes comment delimiters from the lines in the region.

   With a positive argument, `comment-region' duplicates the last
character of the comment start sequence it adds; the argument specifies
how many copies of the character to insert.  Thus, in Lisp mode, `C-u 2
M-x comment-region' adds `;;' to each line.  Duplicating the comment
delimiter is a way of calling attention to the comment.  It can also
affect how the comment is aligned or indented.  In Lisp, for proper
indentation, you should use an argument of two or three, if between
defuns; if within a defun, it must be three.

   You can configure C Mode such that when you type a `/' at the start
of a line in a multi-line block comment, this closes the comment.
Enable the `comment-close-slash' clean-up for this.  *Note Clean-ups:
(ccmode)Clean-ups.


File: emacs,  Node: Options for Comments,  Prev: Multi-Line Comments,  Up: Comments

30.5.3 Options Controlling Comments
-----------------------------------

The "comment column", the column at which Emacs tries to place
comments, is stored in the variable `comment-column'.  You can set it
to a number explicitly.  Alternatively, the command `C-x ;'
(`comment-set-column') sets the comment column to the column point is
at.  `C-u C-x ;' sets the comment column to match the last comment
before point in the buffer, and then does a `M-;' to align the current
line's comment under the previous one.

   The variable `comment-column' is per-buffer: setting the variable in
the normal fashion affects only the current buffer, but there is a
default value which you can change with `setq-default'.  *Note
Locals::.  Many major modes initialize this variable for the current
buffer.

   The comment commands recognize comments based on the regular
expression that is the value of the variable `comment-start-skip'.
Make sure this regexp does not match the null string.  It may match more
than the comment starting delimiter in the strictest sense of the word;
for example, in C mode the value of the variable is
`"/\\*+ *\\|//+ *"', which matches extra stars and spaces after the
`/*' itself, and accepts C++ style comments also.  (Note that `\\' is
needed in Lisp syntax to include a `\' in the string, which is needed
to deny the first star its special meaning in regexp syntax.  *Note
Regexp Backslash::.)

   When a comment command makes a new comment, it inserts the value of
`comment-start' to begin it.  The value of `comment-end' is inserted
after point, so that it will follow the text that you will insert into
the comment.  When `comment-end' is non-empty, it should start with a
space.  For example, in C mode, `comment-start' has the value `"/* "'
and `comment-end' has the value `" */"'.

   The variable `comment-padding' specifies how many spaces
`comment-region' should insert on each line between the comment
delimiter and the line's original text.  The default is 1, to insert
one space.  `nil' means 0.  Alternatively, `comment-padding' can hold
the actual string to insert.

   The variable `comment-multi-line' controls how `C-M-j'
(`indent-new-comment-line') behaves when used inside a comment.
Specifically, when `comment-multi-line' is `nil', the command inserts a
comment terminator, begins a new line, and finally inserts a comment
starter.  Otherwise it does not insert the terminator and starter, so
it effectively continues the current comment across multiple lines.  In
languages that allow multi-line comments, the choice of value for this
variable is a matter of taste.  The default for this variable depends
on the major mode.

   The variable `comment-indent-function' should contain a function
that will be called to compute the alignment for a newly inserted
comment or for aligning an existing comment.  It is set differently by
various major modes.  The function is called with no arguments, but with
point at the beginning of the comment, or at the end of a line if a new
comment is to be inserted.  It should return the column in which the
comment ought to start.  For example, in Lisp mode, the indent hook
function bases its decision on how many semicolons begin an existing
comment, and on the code in the preceding lines.


File: emacs,  Node: Documentation,  Next: Hideshow,  Prev: Comments,  Up: Programs

30.6 Documentation Lookup
=========================

Emacs provides several features you can use to look up the
documentation of functions, variables and commands that you plan to use
in your program.

* Menu:

* Info Lookup::         Looking up library functions and commands
                          in Info files.
* Man Page::            Looking up man pages of library functions and commands.
* Lisp Doc::            Looking up Emacs Lisp functions, etc.


File: emacs,  Node: Info Lookup,  Next: Man Page,  Up: Documentation

30.6.1 Info Documentation Lookup
--------------------------------

For major modes that apply to languages which have documentation in
Info, you can use `C-h S' (`info-lookup-symbol') to view the Info
documentation for a symbol used in the program.  You specify the symbol
with the minibuffer; the default is the symbol appearing in the buffer
at point.  For example, in C mode this looks for the symbol in the C
Library Manual.  The command only works if the appropriate manual's
Info files are installed.

   The major mode determines where to look for documentation for the
symbol--which Info files to look in, and which indices to search.  You
can also use `M-x info-lookup-file' to look for documentation for a
file name.

   If you use `C-h S' in a major mode that does not support it, it asks
you to specify the "symbol help mode."  You should enter a command such
as `c-mode' that would select a major mode which `C-h S' does support.


File: emacs,  Node: Man Page,  Next: Lisp Doc,  Prev: Info Lookup,  Up: Documentation

30.6.2 Man Page Lookup
----------------------

On Unix, the main form of on-line documentation was the "manual page"
or "man page".  In the GNU operating system, we aim to replace man
pages with better-organized manuals that you can browse with Info
(*note Misc Help::).  This process is not finished, so it is still
useful to read manual pages.

   You can read the man page for an operating system command, library
function, or system call, with the `M-x man' command.  It runs the
`man' program to format the man page; if the system permits, it runs
`man' asynchronously, so that you can keep on editing while the page is
being formatted.  (On MS-DOS and MS-Windows 3, you cannot edit while
Emacs waits for `man' to finish.)  The result goes in a buffer named
`*Man TOPIC*'.  These buffers use a special major mode, Man mode, that
facilitates scrolling and jumping to other manual pages.  For details,
type `C-h m' while in a man page buffer.

   Each man page belongs to one of ten or more "sections", each named
by a digit or by a digit and a letter.  Sometimes there are multiple
man pages with the same name in different sections.  To read a man page
from a specific section, type `TOPIC(SECTION)' or `SECTION TOPIC' when
`M-x manual-entry' prompts for the topic.  For example, to read the man
page for the C library function `chmod' (as opposed to a command of the
same name), type `M-x manual-entry <RET> chmod(2) <RET>'.  (`chmod' is
a system call, so it is in section `2'.)

   If you do not specify a section, the results depend on how the `man'
program works on your system.  Some of them display only the first man
page they find.  Others display all man pages that have the specified
name, so you can move between them with the `M-n' and `M-p' keys(1).
The mode line shows how many manual pages are present in the Man buffer.

   By default, Emacs highlights the text in man pages.  For a long man
page, highlighting can take substantial time.  You can turn off
highlighting of man pages by setting the variable
`Man-fontify-manpage-flag' to `nil'.

   If you insert the text of a man page into an Emacs buffer in some
other fashion, you can use the command `M-x Man-fontify-manpage' to
perform the same conversions that `M-x manual-entry' does.

   An alternative way of reading manual pages is the `M-x woman'
command(2).  Unlike `M-x man', it does not run any external programs to
format and display the man pages; instead it does the job in Emacs
Lisp, so it works on systems such as MS-Windows, where the `man'
program (and other programs it uses) are not generally available.

   `M-x woman' prompts for a name of a manual page, and provides
completion based on the list of manual pages that are installed on your
machine; the list of available manual pages is computed automatically
the first time you invoke `woman'.  The word at point in the current
buffer is used to suggest the default for the name of the manual page.

   With a numeric argument, `M-x woman' recomputes the list of the
manual pages used for completion.  This is useful if you add or delete
manual pages.

   If you type a name of a manual page and `M-x woman' finds that
several manual pages by the same name exist in different sections, it
pops up a window with possible candidates asking you to choose one of
them.

   For more information about setting up and using `M-x woman', see
*Note WoMan: (woman)Top.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) On some systems, the `man' program accepts a `-a' command-line
option which tells it to display all the man pages for the specified
topic.  If you want this behavior, you can add this option to the value
of the variable `Man-switches'.

   (2) The name of the command, `woman', is an acronym for "w/o
(without) man," since it doesn't use the `man' program.


File: emacs,  Node: Lisp Doc,  Prev: Man Page,  Up: Documentation

30.6.3 Emacs Lisp Documentation Lookup
--------------------------------------

As you edit Lisp code to be run in Emacs, you can use the commands `C-h
f' (`describe-function') and `C-h v' (`describe-variable') to view
documentation of functions and variables that you want to use.  These
commands use the minibuffer to read the name of a function or variable
to document, and display the documentation in a window.  Their default
arguments are based on the code in the neighborhood of point.  For `C-h
f', the default is the function called in the innermost list containing
point.  `C-h v' uses the symbol name around or adjacent to point as its
default.

   A more automatic but less powerful method is Eldoc mode.  This minor
mode constantly displays in the echo area the argument list for the
function being called at point.  (In other words, it finds the function
call that point is contained in, and displays the argument list of that
function.)  If point is over a documented variable, it shows the first
line of the variable's docstring.  Eldoc mode applies in Emacs Lisp and
Lisp Interaction modes, and perhaps a few others that provide special
support for looking up doc strings.  Use the command `M-x eldoc-mode'
to enable or disable this feature.


File: emacs,  Node: Hideshow,  Next: Symbol Completion,  Prev: Documentation,  Up: Programs

30.7 Hideshow minor mode
========================

Hideshow minor mode provides selective display of portions of a
program, known as "blocks".  You can use `M-x hs-minor-mode' to enable
or disable this mode, or add `hs-minor-mode' to the mode hook for
certain major modes in order to enable it automatically for those modes.

   Just what constitutes a block depends on the major mode.  In C mode
or C++ mode, they are delimited by braces, while in Lisp mode and
similar modes they are delimited by parentheses.  Multi-line comments
also count as blocks.

`C-c @ C-h'
     Hide the current block (`hs-hide-block').

`C-c @ C-s'
     Show the current block (`hs-show-block').

`C-c @ C-c'
     Either hide or show the current block (`hs-toggle-hiding').

`S-Mouse-2'
     Either hide or show the block you click on
     (`hs-mouse-toggle-hiding').

`C-c @ C-M-h'
     Hide all top-level blocks (`hs-hide-all').

`C-c @ C-M-s'
     Show everything in the buffer (`hs-show-all').

`C-c @ C-l'
     Hide all blocks N levels below this block (`hs-hide-level').

   These variables exist for customizing Hideshow mode.

`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all'
     Non-`nil' says that `hs-hide-all' should hide comments too.

`hs-isearch-open'
     Specifies what kind of hidden blocks incremental search should make
     visible.  The value should be one of these four symbols:

    `code'
          Open only code blocks.

    `comment'
          Open only comments.

    `t'
          Open both code blocks and comments.

    `nil'
          Open neither code blocks nor comments.

`hs-special-modes-alist'
     A list of elements, each specifying how to initialize Hideshow
     variables for one major mode.  See the variable's documentation
     string for more information.


File: emacs,  Node: Symbol Completion,  Next: Glasses,  Prev: Hideshow,  Up: Programs

30.8 Completion for Symbol Names
================================

In Emacs, completion is something you normally do in the minibuffer
(*note Completion::).  But one kind of completion is available in all
buffers: completion for symbol names.

   The character `M-<TAB>' runs a command to complete the partial
symbol before point against the set of meaningful symbol names.  This
command inserts at point any additional characters that it can
determine from the partial name.

   If your window manager defines `M-<TAB>' to switch windows, you can
type `<ESC> <TAB>' or `C-M-i' instead.  However, most window managers
let you customize these shortcuts, so you can change any that interfere
with the way you use Emacs.

   If the partial name in the buffer has multiple possible completions
that differ in the very next character, so that it is impossible to
complete even one more character, `M-<TAB>' displays a list of all
possible completions in another window.

   In most programming language major modes, `M-<TAB>' runs the command
`complete-symbol', which provides two kinds of completion.  Normally it
does completion based on a tags table (*note Tags::); with a numeric
argument (regardless of the value), it does completion based on the
names listed in the Info file indexes for your language.  Thus, to
complete the name of a symbol defined in your own program, use
`M-<TAB>' with no argument; to complete the name of a standard library
function, use `C-u M-<TAB>'.  Of course, Info-based completion works
only if there is an Info file for the standard library functions of
your language, and only if it is installed at your site.

   In Emacs-Lisp mode, the name space for completion normally consists
of nontrivial symbols present in Emacs--those that have function
definitions, values or properties.  However, if there is an
open-parenthesis immediately before the beginning of the partial symbol,
only symbols with function definitions are considered as completions.
The command which implements this is `lisp-complete-symbol'.

   In Text mode and related modes, `M-<TAB>' completes words based on
the spell-checker's dictionary.  *Note Spelling::.


File: emacs,  Node: Glasses,  Next: Semantic,  Prev: Symbol Completion,  Up: Programs

30.9 Glasses minor mode
=======================

Glasses minor mode makes `unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis' readable by
altering the way they display.  It knows two different ways to do this:
by displaying underscores between a lower-case letter and the following
capital letter, and by emboldening the capital letters.  It does not
alter the buffer text, only the way they display, so you can use it
even on read-only buffers.  You can use the command `M-x glasses-mode'
to enable or disable the mode in the current buffer; you can also add
`glasses-mode' to the mode hook of the programming language major modes
in which you normally want to use Glasses mode.


File: emacs,  Node: Semantic,  Next: Misc for Programs,  Prev: Glasses,  Up: Programs

30.10 Semantic
==============

Semantic is a package that provides language-aware editing commands
based on `source code parsers'.  This section provides a brief
description of Semantic; for full details, see *Note Semantic:
(semantic)Top.

   Most of the "language aware" features in Emacs, such as font lock
(*note Font Lock::), rely on "rules of thumb"(1) that usually give good
results but are never completely exact.  In contrast, the parsers used
by Semantic have an exact understanding of programming language syntax.
This allows Semantic to provide search, navigation, and completion
commands that are powerful and precise.

   To begin using Semantic, type `M-x semantic-mode' or click on the
menu item named `Source Code Parsers (Semantic)' in the `Tools' menu.
This enables Semantic mode, a global minor mode.

   When Semantic mode is enabled, Emacs automatically attempts to
parses each file you visit.  Currently, Semantic understands C, C++,
Scheme, Javascript, Java, HTML, and Make.  Within each parsed buffer,
the following commands are available:

`C-c , j'
     Prompt for the name of a function defined in the current file, and
     move point there (`semantic-complete-jump-local').

`C-c , J'
     Prompt for the name of a function defined in any file Emacs has
     parsed, and move point there (`semantic-complete-jump').

`C-c , <SPC>'
     Display a list of possible completions for the symbol at point
     (`semantic-complete-analyze-inline').  This also activates a set
     of special keybindings for choosing a completion: <RET> accepts
     the current completion, `M-n' and `M-p' cycle through possible
     completions, <TAB> completes as far as possible and then cycles,
     and `C-g' or any other key aborts completion.

`C-c , l'
     Display a list of the possible completions of the symbol at point,
     in another window (`semantic-analyze-possible-completions').

In addition to the above commands, the Semantic package provides a
variety of other ways to make use of parser information.  For instance,
you can use it to display a list of completions when Emacs is idle.
*Note Semantic: (semantic)Top, for details.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Regular expressions and syntax tables.


File: emacs,  Node: Misc for Programs,  Next: C Modes,  Prev: Semantic,  Up: Programs

30.11 Other Features Useful for Editing Programs
================================================

A number of Emacs commands that aren't designed specifically for
editing programs are useful for that nonetheless.

   The Emacs commands that operate on words, sentences and paragraphs
are useful for editing code.  Most symbols names contain words (*note
Words::); sentences can be found in strings and comments (*note
Sentences::).  Paragraphs in the strict sense can be found in program
code (in long comments), but the paragraph commands are useful in other
places too, because programming language major modes define paragraphs
to begin and end at blank lines (*note Paragraphs::).  Judicious use of
blank lines to make the program clearer will also provide useful chunks
of text for the paragraph commands to work on.  Auto Fill mode, if
enabled in a programming language major mode, indents the new lines
which it creates.

   The selective display feature is useful for looking at the overall
structure of a function (*note Selective Display::).  This feature
hides the lines that are indented more than a specified amount.
Programming modes often support Outline minor mode (*note Outline
Mode::).  The Foldout package provides folding-editor features (*note
Foldout::).

   The "automatic typing" features may be useful for writing programs.
*Note Autotyping: (autotype)Top.


File: emacs,  Node: C Modes,  Next: Asm Mode,  Prev: Misc for Programs,  Up: Programs

30.12 C and Related Modes
=========================

This section gives a brief description of the special features
available in C, C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL, Pike and AWK modes.
(These are called "C mode and related modes.")  *Note CC Mode:
(ccmode)Top, for a more extensive description of these modes and their
special features.

* Menu:

* Motion in C::                 Commands to move by C statements, etc.
* Electric C::                  Colon and other chars can automatically reindent.
* Hungry Delete::               A more powerful DEL command.
* Other C Commands::            Filling comments, viewing expansion of macros,
                                and other neat features.


File: emacs,  Node: Motion in C,  Next: Electric C,  Up: C Modes

30.12.1 C Mode Motion Commands
------------------------------

This section describes commands for moving point, in C mode and related
modes.

`M-x c-beginning-of-defun'
`M-x c-end-of-defun'
     Move point to the beginning or end of the current function or
     top-level definition.  These are found by searching for the least
     enclosing braces.  (By contrast, `beginning-of-defun' and
     `end-of-defun' search for braces in column zero.)  If you are
     editing code where the opening brace of a function isn't placed in
     column zero, you may wish to bind `C-M-a' and `C-M-e' to these
     commands.  *Note Moving by Defuns::.

`C-c C-u'
     Move point back to the containing preprocessor conditional,
     leaving the mark behind.  A prefix argument acts as a repeat
     count.  With a negative argument, move point forward to the end of
     the containing preprocessor conditional.

     `#elif' is equivalent to `#else' followed by `#if', so the
     function will stop at a `#elif' when going backward, but not when
     going forward.

`C-c C-p'
     Move point back over a preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark
     behind.  A prefix argument acts as a repeat count.  With a negative
     argument, move forward.

`C-c C-n'
     Move point forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving the
     mark behind.  A prefix argument acts as a repeat count.  With a
     negative argument, move backward.

`M-a'
     Move point to the beginning of the innermost C statement
     (`c-beginning-of-statement').  If point is already at the beginning
     of a statement, move to the beginning of the preceding statement.
     With prefix argument N, move back N - 1 statements.

     In comments or in strings which span more than one line, this
     command moves by sentences instead of statements.

`M-e'
     Move point to the end of the innermost C statement or sentence;
     like `M-a' except that it moves in the other direction
     (`c-end-of-statement').


File: emacs,  Node: Electric C,  Next: Hungry Delete,  Prev: Motion in C,  Up: C Modes

30.12.2 Electric C Characters
-----------------------------

In C mode and related modes, certain printing characters are
"electric"--in addition to inserting themselves, they also reindent the
current line, and optionally also insert newlines.  The "electric"
characters are `{', `}', `:', `#', `;', `,', `<', `>', `/', `*', `(',
and `)'.

   You might find electric indentation inconvenient if you are editing
chaotically indented code.  If you are new to CC Mode, you might find
it disconcerting.  You can toggle electric action with the command `C-c
C-l'; when it is enabled, `/l' appears in the mode line after the mode
name:

`C-c C-l'
     Toggle electric action (`c-toggle-electric-state').  With a prefix
     argument, this command enables electric action if the argument is
     positive, disables it if it is negative.

   Electric characters insert newlines only when, in addition to the
electric state, the "auto-newline" feature is enabled (indicated by
`/la' in the mode line after the mode name).  You can turn this feature
on or off with the command `C-c C-a':

`C-c C-a'
     Toggle the auto-newline feature (`c-toggle-auto-newline').  With a
     prefix argument, this command turns the auto-newline feature on if
     the argument is positive, and off if it is negative.

   Usually the CC Mode style configures the exact circumstances in
which Emacs inserts auto-newlines.  You can also configure this
directly.  *Note Custom Auto-newlines: (ccmode)Custom Auto-newlines.


File: emacs,  Node: Hungry Delete,  Next: Other C Commands,  Prev: Electric C,  Up: C Modes

30.12.3 Hungry Delete Feature in C
----------------------------------

If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can
use "hungry deletion".  This deletes all the contiguous whitespace
either before point or after point in a single operation.  "Whitespace"
here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or preprocessor
commands.

`C-c C-<DEL>'
`C-c <DEL>'
     `c-hungry-delete-backwards'--Delete the entire block of whitespace
     preceding point.

`C-c C-d'
`C-c C-<DELETE>'
`C-c <DELETE>'
     `c-hungry-delete-forward'--Delete the entire block of whitespace
     following point.

   As an alternative to the above commands, you can enable "hungry
delete mode".  When this feature is enabled (indicated by `/h' in the
mode line after the mode name), a single <DEL> deletes all preceding
whitespace, not just one space, and a single `C-c C-d' (but _not_ plain
<DELETE>) deletes all following whitespace.

`M-x c-toggle-hungry-state'
     Toggle the hungry-delete feature (`c-toggle-hungry-state')(1).
     With a prefix argument, this command turns the hungry-delete
     feature on if the argument is positive, and off if it is negative.

   The variable `c-hungry-delete-key' controls whether the
hungry-delete feature is enabled.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) This command had the binding `C-c C-d' in earlier versions of
Emacs.  `C-c C-d' is now bound to `c-hungry-delete-forward'.


File: emacs,  Node: Other C Commands,  Prev: Hungry Delete,  Up: C Modes

30.12.4 Other Commands for C Mode
---------------------------------

`C-c C-w'
`M-x subword-mode'
     Enable (or disable) "subword mode".  In subword mode, Emacs's word
     commands recognize upper case letters in `StudlyCapsIdentifiers'
     as word boundaries.  This is indicated by the flag `/w' on the
     mode line after the mode name (e.g. `C/law').  You can even use
     `M-x subword-mode' in non-CC Mode buffers.

     In the GNU project, we recommend using underscores to separate
     words within an identifier in C or C++, rather than using case
     distinctions.

`M-x c-context-line-break'
     This command inserts a line break and indents the new line in a
     manner appropriate to the context.  In normal code, it does the
     work of `C-j' (`newline-and-indent'), in a C preprocessor line it
     additionally inserts a `\' at the line break, and within comments
     it's like `M-j' (`c-indent-new-comment-line').

     `c-context-line-break' isn't bound to a key by default, but it
     needs a binding to be useful.  The following code will bind it to
     `C-j'.  We use `c-initialization-hook' here to make sure the
     keymap is loaded before we try to change it.

          (defun my-bind-clb ()
            (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-j" 'c-context-line-break))
          (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-bind-clb)

`C-M-h'
     Put mark at the end of a function definition, and put point at the
     beginning (`c-mark-function').

`M-q'
     Fill a paragraph, handling C and C++ comments (`c-fill-paragraph').
     If any part of the current line is a comment or within a comment,
     this command fills the comment or the paragraph of it that point
     is in, preserving the comment indentation and comment delimiters.

`C-c C-e'
     Run the C preprocessor on the text in the region, and show the
     result, which includes the expansion of all the macro calls
     (`c-macro-expand').  The buffer text before the region is also
     included in preprocessing, for the sake of macros defined there,
     but the output from this part isn't shown.

     When you are debugging C code that uses macros, sometimes it is
     hard to figure out precisely how the macros expand.  With this
     command, you don't have to figure it out; you can see the
     expansions.

`C-c C-\'
     Insert or align `\' characters at the ends of the lines of the
     region (`c-backslash-region').  This is useful after writing or
     editing a C macro definition.

     If a line already ends in `\', this command adjusts the amount of
     whitespace before it.  Otherwise, it inserts a new `\'.  However,
     the last line in the region is treated specially; no `\' is
     inserted on that line, and any `\' there is deleted.

`M-x cpp-highlight-buffer'
     Highlight parts of the text according to its preprocessor
     conditionals.  This command displays another buffer named `*CPP
     Edit*', which serves as a graphic menu for selecting how to
     display particular kinds of conditionals and their contents.
     After changing various settings, click on `[A]pply these settings'
     (or go to that buffer and type `a') to rehighlight the C mode
     buffer accordingly.

`C-c C-s'
     Display the syntactic information about the current source line
     (`c-show-syntactic-information').  This information directs how
     the line is indented.

`M-x cwarn-mode'
`M-x global-cwarn-mode'
     CWarn minor mode highlights certain suspicious C and C++
     constructions:

        * Assignments inside expressions.

        * Semicolon following immediately after `if', `for', and `while'
          (except after a `do ... while' statement);

        * C++ functions with reference parameters.

     You can enable the mode for one buffer with the command `M-x
     cwarn-mode', or for all suitable buffers with the command `M-x
     global-cwarn-mode' or by customizing the variable
     `global-cwarn-mode'.  You must also enable Font Lock mode to make
     it work.

`M-x hide-ifdef-mode'
     Hide-ifdef minor mode hides selected code within `#if' and
     `#ifdef' preprocessor blocks.  If you change the variable
     `hide-ifdef-shadow' to `t', Hide-ifdef minor mode "shadows"
     preprocessor blocks by displaying them with a less prominent face,
     instead of hiding them entirely.  See the documentation string of
     `hide-ifdef-mode' for more information.

`M-x ff-find-related-file'
     Find a file "related" in a special way to the file visited by the
     current buffer.  Typically this will be the header file
     corresponding to a C/C++ source file, or vice versa.  The variable
     `ff-related-file-alist' specifies how to compute related file
     names.


File: emacs,  Node: Asm Mode,  Next: Fortran,  Prev: C Modes,  Up: Programs

30.13 Asm Mode
==============

Asm mode is a major mode for editing files of assembler code.  It
defines these commands:

`<TAB>'
     `tab-to-tab-stop'.

`C-j'
     Insert a newline and then indent using `tab-to-tab-stop'.

`:'
     Insert a colon and then remove the indentation from before the
     label preceding colon.  Then do `tab-to-tab-stop'.

`;'
     Insert or align a comment.

   The variable `asm-comment-char' specifies which character starts
comments in assembler syntax.


File: emacs,  Node: Fortran,  Prev: Asm Mode,  Up: Programs

30.14 Fortran Mode
==================

Fortran mode is meant for editing "fixed form" (and also "tab format")
source code (normally Fortran 77).  For editing more modern "free form"
source code (Fortran 90, 95, 2003), use F90 mode (`f90-mode').  Emacs
normally uses Fortran mode for files with extension `.f', `.F' or
`.for', and F90 mode for the extensions `.f90' and `.f95'.  Customize
`auto-mode-alist' to add more extensions.  GNU Fortran supports both
free and fixed form.  This manual mainly documents Fortran mode, but
the corresponding F90 mode features are mentioned when revelant.

   Fortran mode provides special motion commands for Fortran statements
and subprograms, and indentation commands that understand Fortran
conventions of nesting, line numbers and continuation statements.
Fortran mode has support for Auto Fill mode that breaks long lines into
proper Fortran continuation lines.  Fortran mode also supports Hideshow
minor mode (*note Hideshow::), and Imenu (*note Imenu::).

   Special commands for comments are provided because Fortran comments
are unlike those of other languages.  Built-in abbrevs optionally save
typing when you insert Fortran keywords.

   Use `M-x fortran-mode' to switch to this major mode.  This command
runs the hook `fortran-mode-hook'.  *Note Hooks::.

* Menu:

* Motion: Fortran Motion.	 Moving point by statements or subprograms.
* Indent: Fortran Indent.	 Indentation commands for Fortran.
* Comments: Fortran Comments.	 Inserting and aligning comments.
* Autofill: Fortran Autofill.	 Auto fill support for Fortran.
* Columns: Fortran Columns.	 Measuring columns for valid Fortran.
* Abbrev: Fortran Abbrev.	 Built-in abbrevs for Fortran keywords.


File: emacs,  Node: Fortran Motion,  Next: Fortran Indent,  Up: Fortran

30.14.1 Motion Commands
-----------------------

In addition to the normal commands for moving by and operating on
"defuns" (Fortran subprograms--functions and subroutines, using the
commands `fortran-beginning-of-subprogram' and
`fortran-end-of-subprogram'; as well as modules for F90 mode), Fortran
mode provides special commands to move by statements and other program
units.

`C-c C-n'
     Move to the beginning of the next statement
     (`fortran-next-statement'/`f90-next-statement').

`C-c C-p'
     Move to the beginning of the previous statement
     (`fortran-previous-statement'/`f90-previous-statement').  If there
     is no previous statement (i.e. if called from the first statement
     in the buffer), move to the start of the buffer.

`C-c C-e'
     Move point forward to the start of the next code block, or the end
     of the current block, whichever is encountered first.
     (`f90-next-block').  A code block is a subroutine, `if'-`endif'
     statement, and so forth.  This command exists for F90 mode only,
     not Fortran mode.  With a numeric argument, this moves forward
     that many blocks.

`C-c C-a'
     Move point backward to the previous code block
     (`f90-previous-block').  This is like `f90-next-block', but moves
     backwards.

`C-M-n'
     Move to the end of the current code block
     (`fortran-end-of-block'/`f90-end-of-block').  With a numeric
     argument, move forward that number of blocks.  The mark is set
     before moving point.  The F90 mode version of this command checks
     for consistency of block types and labels (if present), but it
     does not check the outermost block since that may be incomplete.

`C-M-p'
     Move to the start of the current code block
     (`fortran-beginning-of-block'/`f90-beginning-of-block'). This is
     like `fortran-end-of-block', but moves backwards.

   The commands `fortran-beginning-of-subprogram' and
`fortran-end-of-subprogram' move to the start or end of the current
subprogram, respectively.  The commands `fortran-mark-do' and
`fortran-mark-if' mark the end of the current `do' or `if' block, and
move point to the start.


File: emacs,  Node: Fortran Indent,  Next: Fortran Comments,  Prev: Fortran Motion,  Up: Fortran

30.14.2 Fortran Indentation
---------------------------

Special commands and features are needed for indenting fixed (or tab)
form Fortran code in order to make sure various syntactic entities (line
numbers, comment line indicators and continuation line flags) appear in
the required columns.

* Menu:

* Commands: ForIndent Commands.  Commands for indenting and filling Fortran.
* Contline: ForIndent Cont.      How continuation lines indent.
* Numbers:  ForIndent Num.       How line numbers auto-indent.
* Conv:     ForIndent Conv.      Conventions you must obey to avoid trouble.
* Vars:     ForIndent Vars.      Variables controlling Fortran indent style.


File: emacs,  Node: ForIndent Commands,  Next: ForIndent Cont,  Up: Fortran Indent

30.14.2.1 Fortran Indentation and Filling Commands
..................................................

`C-M-j'
     Break the current line at point and set up a continuation line
     (`fortran-split-line').

`M-^'
     Join this line to the previous line (`fortran-join-line').

`C-M-q'
     Indent all the lines of the subprogram point is in
     (`fortran-indent-subprogram').

`M-q'
     Fill a comment block or statement (using `fortran-fill-paragraph'
     or `fortran-fill-statement').

   The key `C-M-q' runs `fortran-indent-subprogram', a command to
reindent all the lines of the Fortran subprogram (function or
subroutine) containing point.

   The key `C-M-j' runs `fortran-split-line', which splits a line in
the appropriate fashion for Fortran.  In a non-comment line, the second
half becomes a continuation line and is indented accordingly.  In a
comment line, both halves become separate comment lines.

   `M-^' or `C-c C-d' runs the command `fortran-join-line', which joins
a continuation line back to the previous line, roughly as the inverse
of `fortran-split-line'.  The point must be on a continuation line when
this command is invoked.

   `M-q' in Fortran mode fills the comment block or statement that
point is in.  This removes any excess statement continuations.


File: emacs,  Node: ForIndent Cont,  Next: ForIndent Num,  Prev: ForIndent Commands,  Up: Fortran Indent

30.14.2.2 Continuation Lines
............................

Most Fortran 77 compilers allow two ways of writing continuation lines.
If the first non-space character on a line is in column 5, then that
line is a continuation of the previous line.  We call this "fixed
form".  (In GNU Emacs we always count columns from 0; but note that the
Fortran standard counts from 1.)  The variable
`fortran-continuation-string' specifies what character to put in column
5.  A line that starts with a tab character followed by any digit
except `0' is also a continuation line.  We call this style of
continuation "tab format".  (Fortran 90 introduced "free form," with
another style of continuation lines).

   Fortran mode can use either style of continuation line.  When you
enter Fortran mode, it tries to deduce the proper continuation style
automatically from the buffer contents.  It does this by scanning up to
`fortran-analyze-depth' (default 100) lines from the start of the
buffer.  The first line that begins with either a tab character or six
spaces determines the choice.  If the scan fails (for example, if the
buffer is new and therefore empty), the value of
`fortran-tab-mode-default' (`nil' for fixed form, and non-`nil' for tab
format) is used.  `/t' (`fortran-tab-mode-string') in the mode line
indicates tab format is selected.  Fortran mode sets the value of
`indent-tabs-mode' accordingly.

   If the text on a line starts with the Fortran continuation marker
`$', or if it begins with any non-whitespace character in column 5,
Fortran mode treats it as a continuation line.  When you indent a
continuation line with <TAB>, it converts the line to the current
continuation style.  When you split a Fortran statement with `C-M-j',
the continuation marker on the newline is created according to the
continuation style.

   The setting of continuation style affects several other aspects of
editing in Fortran mode.  In fixed form mode, the minimum column number
for the body of a statement is 6.  Lines inside of Fortran blocks that
are indented to larger column numbers always use only the space
character for whitespace.  In tab format mode, the minimum column
number for the statement body is 8, and the whitespace before column 8
must always consist of one tab character.


File: emacs,  Node: ForIndent Num,  Next: ForIndent Conv,  Prev: ForIndent Cont,  Up: Fortran Indent

30.14.2.3 Line Numbers
......................

If a number is the first non-whitespace in the line, Fortran
indentation assumes it is a line number and moves it to columns 0
through 4.  (Columns always count from 0 in GNU Emacs.)

   Line numbers of four digits or less are normally indented one space.
The variable `fortran-line-number-indent' controls this; it specifies
the maximum indentation a line number can have.  The default value of
the variable is 1.  Fortran mode tries to prevent line number digits
passing column 4, reducing the indentation below the specified maximum
if necessary.  If `fortran-line-number-indent' has the value 5, line
numbers are right-justified to end in column 4.

   Simply inserting a line number is enough to indent it according to
these rules.  As each digit is inserted, the indentation is recomputed.
To turn off this feature, set the variable
`fortran-electric-line-number' to `nil'.


File: emacs,  Node: ForIndent Conv,  Next: ForIndent Vars,  Prev: ForIndent Num,  Up: Fortran Indent

30.14.2.4 Syntactic Conventions
...............................

Fortran mode assumes that you follow certain conventions that simplify
the task of understanding a Fortran program well enough to indent it
properly:

   * Two nested `do' loops never share a `continue' statement.

   * Fortran keywords such as `if', `else', `then', `do' and others are
     written without embedded whitespace or line breaks.

     Fortran compilers generally ignore whitespace outside of string
     constants, but Fortran mode does not recognize these keywords if
     they are not contiguous.  Constructs such as `else if' or `end do'
     are acceptable, but the second word should be on the same line as
     the first and not on a continuation line.

If you fail to follow these conventions, the indentation commands may
indent some lines unaesthetically.  However, a correct Fortran program
retains its meaning when reindented even if the conventions are not
followed.


File: emacs,  Node: ForIndent Vars,  Prev: ForIndent Conv,  Up: Fortran Indent

30.14.2.5 Variables for Fortran Indentation
...........................................

Several additional variables control how Fortran indentation works:

`fortran-do-indent'
     Extra indentation within each level of `do' statement (default 3).

`fortran-if-indent'
     Extra indentation within each level of `if', `select case', or
     `where' statements (default 3).

`fortran-structure-indent'
     Extra indentation within each level of `structure', `union',
     `map', or `interface' statements (default 3).

`fortran-continuation-indent'
     Extra indentation for bodies of continuation lines (default 5).

`fortran-check-all-num-for-matching-do'
     In Fortran 77, a numbered `do' statement is ended by any statement
     with a matching line number.  It is common (but not compulsory) to
     use a `continue' statement for this purpose.  If this variable has
     a non-`nil' value, indenting any numbered statement must check for
     a `do' that ends there.  If you always end `do' statements with a
     `continue' line (or if you use the more modern `enddo'), then you
     can speed up indentation by setting this variable to `nil'.  The
     default is `nil'.

`fortran-blink-matching-if'
     If this is `t', indenting an `endif' (or `enddo' statement moves
     the cursor momentarily to the matching `if' (or `do') statement to
     show where it is.  The default is `nil'.

`fortran-minimum-statement-indent-fixed'
     Minimum indentation for Fortran statements when using fixed form
     continuation line style.  Statement bodies are never indented less
     than this much.  The default is 6.

`fortran-minimum-statement-indent-tab'
     Minimum indentation for Fortran statements for tab format
     continuation line style.  Statement bodies are never indented less
     than this much.  The default is 8.

   The variables controlling the indentation of comments are described
in the following section.


File: emacs,  Node: Fortran Comments,  Next: Fortran Autofill,  Prev: Fortran Indent,  Up: Fortran

30.14.3 Fortran Comments
------------------------

The usual Emacs comment commands assume that a comment can follow a
line of code.  In Fortran 77, the standard comment syntax requires an
entire line to be just a comment.  Therefore, Fortran mode replaces the
standard Emacs comment commands and defines some new variables.

   Fortran mode can also handle the Fortran 90 comment syntax where
comments start with `!' and can follow other text.  Because only some
Fortran 77 compilers accept this syntax, Fortran mode will not insert
such comments unless you have said in advance to do so.  To do this,
set the variable `fortran-comment-line-start' to `"!"'.  If you use an
unusual value, you may also need to adjust
`fortran-comment-line-start-skip'.

`M-;'
     Align comment or insert new comment (`comment-dwim').

`C-x ;'
     Applies to nonstandard `!' comments only.

`C-c ;'
     Turn all lines of the region into comments, or (with argument)
     turn them back into real code (`fortran-comment-region').

   `M-;' in Fortran mode runs the standard `comment-dwim'.  This
recognizes any kind of existing comment and aligns its text
appropriately; if there is no existing comment, a comment is inserted
and aligned.  Inserting and aligning comments are not the same in
Fortran mode as in other modes.

   When a new comment must be inserted, if the current line is blank, a
full-line comment is inserted.  On a non-blank line, a nonstandard `!'
comment is inserted if you have said you want to use them.  Otherwise a
full-line comment is inserted on a new line before the current line.

   Nonstandard `!' comments are aligned like comments in other
languages, but full-line comments are different.  In a standard
full-line comment, the comment delimiter itself must always appear in
column zero.  What can be aligned is the text within the comment.  You
can choose from three styles of alignment by setting the variable
`fortran-comment-indent-style' to one of these values:

`fixed'
     Align the text at a fixed column, which is the sum of
     `fortran-comment-line-extra-indent' and the minimum statement
     indentation.  This is the default.

     The minimum statement indentation is
     `fortran-minimum-statement-indent-fixed' for fixed form
     continuation line style and `fortran-minimum-statement-indent-tab'
     for tab format style.

`relative'
     Align the text as if it were a line of code, but with an additional
     `fortran-comment-line-extra-indent' columns of indentation.

`nil'
     Don't move text in full-line comments automatically.

   In addition, you can specify the character to be used to indent
within full-line comments by setting the variable
`fortran-comment-indent-char' to the single-character string you want
to use.

   Compiler directive lines, or preprocessor lines, have much the same
appearance as comment lines.  It is important, though, that such lines
never be indented at all, no matter what the value of
`fortran-comment-indent-style'.  The variable `fortran-directive-re' is
a regular expression that specifies which lines are directives.
Matching lines are never indented, and receive distinctive font-locking.

   The normal Emacs comment command `C-x ;' has not been redefined.  If
you use `!' comments, this command can be used with them.  Otherwise it
is useless in Fortran mode.

   The command `C-c ;' (`fortran-comment-region') turns all the lines
of the region into comments by inserting the string `C$$$' at the front
of each one.  With a numeric argument, it turns the region back into
live code by deleting `C$$$' from the front of each line in it.  The
string used for these comments can be controlled by setting the
variable `fortran-comment-region'.  Note that here we have an example
of a command and a variable with the same name; these two uses of the
name never conflict because in Lisp and in Emacs it is always clear
from the context which one is meant.


File: emacs,  Node: Fortran Autofill,  Next: Fortran Columns,  Prev: Fortran Comments,  Up: Fortran

30.14.4 Auto Fill in Fortran Mode
---------------------------------

Fortran mode has specialized support for Auto Fill mode, which is a
minor mode that automatically splits statements as you insert them when
they become too wide.  Splitting a statement involves making
continuation lines using `fortran-continuation-string' (*note ForIndent
Cont::).  This splitting happens when you type <SPC>, <RET>, or <TAB>,
and also in the Fortran indentation commands.  You activate Auto Fill
in Fortran mode in the normal way.  *Note Auto Fill::.

   Auto Fill breaks lines at spaces or delimiters when the lines get
longer than the desired width (the value of `fill-column').  The
delimiters (besides whitespace) that Auto Fill can break at are `+',
`-', `/', `*', `=', `<', `>', and `,'.  The line break comes after the
delimiter if the variable `fortran-break-before-delimiters' is `nil'.
Otherwise (and by default), the break comes before the delimiter.

   To enable Auto Fill in all Fortran buffers, add `turn-on-auto-fill'
to `fortran-mode-hook'.  *Note Hooks::.


File: emacs,  Node: Fortran Columns,  Next: Fortran Abbrev,  Prev: Fortran Autofill,  Up: Fortran

30.14.5 Checking Columns in Fortran
-----------------------------------

In standard Fortran 77, anything beyond column 72 is ignored.  Most
compilers provide an option to change this (for example,
`-ffixed-line-length-N' in gfortran).  Customize the variable
`fortran-line-length' to change the line length in Fortran mode.
Anything beyond this point is font-locked as a comment.  (Unless it is
inside a string: strings that extend beyond `fortran-line-length' will
confuse font-lock.)

`C-c C-r'
     Display a "column ruler" momentarily above the current line
     (`fortran-column-ruler').

`C-c C-w'
     Split the current window horizontally temporarily so that it is
     `fortran-line-length' columns wide
     (`fortran-window-create-momentarily').  This may help you avoid
     making lines longer than the character limit imposed by your
     Fortran compiler.

`C-u C-c C-w'
     Split the current window horizontally so that it is
     `fortran-line-length' columns wide (`fortran-window-create').  You
     can then continue editing.

`M-x fortran-strip-sequence-nos'
     Delete all text in column `fortran-line-length' and beyond.

   The command `C-c C-r' (`fortran-column-ruler') shows a column ruler
momentarily above the current line.  The comment ruler is two lines of
text that show you the locations of columns with special significance in
Fortran programs.  Square brackets show the limits of the columns for
line numbers, and curly brackets show the limits of the columns for the
statement body.  Column numbers appear above them.

   Note that the column numbers count from zero, as always in GNU Emacs.
As a result, the numbers may be one less than those you are familiar
with; but the positions they indicate in the line are standard for
Fortran.

   The text used to display the column ruler depends on the value of the
variable `indent-tabs-mode'.  If `indent-tabs-mode' is `nil', then the
value of the variable `fortran-column-ruler-fixed' is used as the
column ruler.  Otherwise, the value of the variable
`fortran-column-ruler-tab' is displayed.  By changing these variables,
you can change the column ruler display.

   `C-c C-w' (`fortran-window-create-momentarily') temporarily splits
the current window horizontally, making a window `fortran-line-length'
columns wide, so you can see any lines that are too long.  Type a space
to restore the normal width.

   You can also split the window horizontally and continue editing with
the split in place.  To do this, use `C-u C-c C-w' (`M-x
fortran-window-create').  By editing in this window you can immediately
see when you make a line too wide to be correct Fortran.

   The command `M-x fortran-strip-sequence-nos' deletes all text in
column `fortran-line-length' and beyond, on all lines in the current
buffer.  This is the easiest way to get rid of old sequence numbers.


File: emacs,  Node: Fortran Abbrev,  Prev: Fortran Columns,  Up: Fortran

30.14.6 Fortran Keyword Abbrevs
-------------------------------

Fortran mode provides many built-in abbrevs for common keywords and
declarations.  These are the same sort of abbrev that you can define
yourself.  To use them, you must turn on Abbrev mode.  *Note Abbrevs::.

   The built-in abbrevs are unusual in one way: they all start with a
semicolon.  For example, one built-in Fortran abbrev is `;c' for
`continue'.  If you insert `;c' and then insert a punctuation character
such as a space or a newline, the `;c' expands automatically to
`continue', provided Abbrev mode is enabled.

   Type `;?' or `;C-h' to display a list of all the built-in Fortran
abbrevs and what they stand for.


File: emacs,  Node: Building,  Next: Maintaining,  Prev: Programs,  Up: Top

31 Compiling and Testing Programs
*********************************

The previous chapter discusses the Emacs commands that are useful for
making changes in programs.  This chapter deals with commands that
assist in the larger process of compiling and testing programs.

* Menu:

* Compilation::         Compiling programs in languages other
                          than Lisp (C, Pascal, etc.).
* Compilation Mode::    The mode for visiting compiler errors.
* Compilation Shell::   Customizing your shell properly
                          for use in the compilation buffer.
* Grep Searching::      Searching with grep.
* Flymake::             Finding syntax errors on the fly.
* Debuggers::	        Running symbolic debuggers for non-Lisp programs.
* Executing Lisp::      Various modes for editing Lisp programs,
                          with different facilities for running
                          the Lisp programs.
* Libraries: Lisp Libraries.      Creating Lisp programs to run in Emacs.
* Eval: Lisp Eval.      Executing a single Lisp expression in Emacs.
* Interaction: Lisp Interaction.  Executing Lisp in an Emacs buffer.
* External Lisp::         Communicating through Emacs with a separate Lisp.


File: emacs,  Node: Compilation,  Next: Compilation Mode,  Up: Building

31.1 Running Compilations under Emacs
=====================================

Emacs can run compilers for noninteractive languages such as C and
Fortran as inferior processes, feeding the error log into an Emacs
buffer.  It can also parse the error messages and show you the source
lines where compilation errors occurred.

`M-x compile'
     Run a compiler asynchronously under Emacs, with error messages
     going to the `*compilation*' buffer.

`M-x recompile'
     Invoke a compiler with the same command as in the last invocation
     of `M-x compile'.

`M-x kill-compilation'
     Kill the running compilation subprocess.

   To run `make' or another compilation command, do `M-x compile'.
This command reads a shell command line using the minibuffer, and then
executes the command in an inferior shell, putting output in the buffer
named `*compilation*'.  The current buffer's default directory is used
as the working directory for the execution of the command; normally,
therefore, the compilation happens in this directory.

   The default for the compilation command is normally `make -k', which
is correct most of the time for nontrivial programs.  *Note Make:
(make)Top.  If you have done `M-x compile' before, the default each
time is the command you used the previous time.  `compile' stores this
command in the variable `compile-command', so setting that variable
specifies the default for the next use of `M-x compile'.  If a file
specifies a file local value for `compile-command', that provides the
default when you type `M-x compile' in that file's buffer.  *Note File
Variables::.

   Starting a compilation displays the buffer `*compilation*' in
another window but does not select it.  The buffer's mode line tells
you whether compilation is finished, with the word `run', `signal' or
`exit' inside the parentheses.  You do not have to keep this buffer
visible; compilation continues in any case.  While a compilation is
going on, the string `Compiling' appears in the mode lines of all
windows.  When this string disappears, the compilation is finished.

   If you want to watch the compilation transcript as it appears, switch
to the `*compilation*' buffer and move point to the end of the buffer.
When point is at the end, new compilation output is inserted above
point, which remains at the end.  If point is not at the end of the
buffer, it remains fixed while more compilation output is added at the
end of the buffer.

   If you change the variable `compilation-scroll-output' to a
non-`nil' value, the compilation buffer will scroll automatically to
follow the output as it comes in.  If the value is `first-error', the
scrolling stops at the first error that appears, leaving point at that
error.  For any other non-`nil' value, the buffer continues scrolling
until there is no more output.

   To rerun the last compilation with the same command, type `M-x
recompile'.  This automatically reuses the compilation command from the
last invocation of `M-x compile'.  It also reuses the `*compilation*'
buffer and starts the compilation in its default directory, which is
the directory in which the previous compilation was started.

   When the compiler process terminates, for whatever reason, the mode
line of the `*compilation*' buffer changes to say `exit' (followed by
the exit code, `[0]' for a normal exit), or `signal' (if a signal
terminated the process), instead of `run'.

   Starting a new compilation also kills any compilation already
running in `*compilation*', as the buffer can only handle one
compilation at any time.  However, `M-x compile' asks for confirmation
before actually killing a compilation that is running.  You can also
kill the compilation process with `M-x kill-compilation'.

   If you want to run two compilations at once, you should start the
first one, then rename the `*compilation*' buffer (perhaps using
`rename-uniquely'; *note Misc Buffer::), and start the other
compilation.  That will create a new `*compilation*' buffer.

   Emacs does not expect a compiler process to launch asynchronous
subprocesses; if it does, and they keep running after the main compiler
process has terminated, Emacs may kill them or their output may not
arrive in Emacs.  To avoid this problem, make the main process wait for
its subprocesses to finish.  In a shell script, you can do this using
`$!' and `wait', like this:

     (sleep 10; echo 2nd)& pid=$!  # Record pid of subprocess
     echo first message
     wait $pid                     # Wait for subprocess

   If the background process does not output to the compilation buffer,
so you only need to prevent it from being killed when the main
compilation process terminates, this is sufficient:

     nohup COMMAND; sleep 1

   You can control the environment passed to the compilation command
with the variable `compilation-environment'.  Its value is a list of
environment variable settings; each element should be a string of the
form `"ENVVARNAME=VALUE"'.  These environment variable settings
override the usual ones.


File: emacs,  Node: Compilation Mode,  Next: Compilation Shell,  Prev: Compilation,  Up: Building

31.2 Compilation Mode
=====================

The `*compilation*' buffer uses a special major mode, Compilation mode,
whose main feature is to provide a convenient way to visit the source
line corresponding to an error message.  These commands are also
available in other special buffers that list locations in files,
including those made by `M-x grep' and `M-x occur'.

`M-g M-n'
`M-g n'
`C-x `'
     Visit the locus of the next error message or match.

`M-g M-p'
`M-g p'
     Visit the locus of the previous error message or match.

`<RET>'
     Visit the locus of the error message that point is on.  This
     command is used in the compilation buffer.

`Mouse-2'
     Visit the locus of the error message that you click on.

`M-n'
     Find and highlight the locus of the next error message, without
     selecting the source buffer.

`M-p'
     Find and highlight the locus of the previous error message, without
     selecting the source buffer.

`M-}'
     Move point to the next error for a different file than the current
     one.

`M-{'
     Move point to the previous error for a different file than the
     current one.

`C-c C-f'
     Toggle Next Error Follow minor mode, which makes cursor motion in
     the compilation buffer produce automatic source display.

   You can visit the source for any particular error message by moving
point in the `*compilation*' buffer to that error message and typing
<RET> (`compile-goto-error').  Alternatively, you can click `Mouse-2'
on the error message; you need not switch to the `*compilation*' buffer
first.  If you set the variable `compilation-auto-jump-to-first-error'
to a non-`nil' value, Emacs automatically jumps to the first error, if
any, as soon as it appears in the `*compilation*' buffer.

   To parse the compiler error messages sequentially, type `C-x `'
(`next-error').  The character following the `C-x' is the backquote or
"grave accent," not the single-quote.  This command is available in all
buffers, not just in `*compilation*'; it displays the next error
message at the top of one window and source location of the error in
another window.  It also temporarily highlights the relevant source
line, for a period controlled by the variable `next-error-highlight'.

   The first time `C-x `' is used after the start of a compilation, it
moves to the first error's location.  Subsequent uses of `C-x `'
advance down to subsequent errors.  If you visit a specific error
message with <RET> or `Mouse-2', subsequent `C-x `' commands advance
from there.  When `C-x `' gets to the end of the buffer and finds no
more error messages to visit, it fails and signals an Emacs error.
`C-u C-x `' starts scanning from the beginning of the compilation
buffer, and goes to the first error's location.

   By default, `C-x `' skips less important messages.  The variable
`compilation-skip-threshold' controls this.  If its value is 2, `C-x `'
skips anything less than error, 1 skips anything less than warning, and
0 doesn't skip any messages.  The default is 1.

   When the window has a left fringe, an arrow in the fringe points to
the current message in the compilation buffer. The variable
`compilation-context-lines' controls the number of lines of leading
context to display before the current message.  Going to an error
message location scrolls the `*compilation*' buffer to put the message
that far down from the top.  The value `nil' is special: if there's a
left fringe, the window doesn't scroll at all if the message is already
visible.  If there is no left fringe, `nil' means display the message
at the top of the window.

   If you're not in the compilation buffer when you run `next-error',
Emacs will look for a buffer that contains error messages.  First, it
looks for one displayed in the selected frame, then for one that
previously had `next-error' called on it, and then at the current
buffer.  Finally, Emacs looks at all the remaining buffers.
`next-error' signals an error if it can't find any such buffer.

   To parse messages from the compiler, Compilation mode uses the
variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' which lists various formats
of error messages and tells Emacs how to extract the source file and
the line number from the text of a message.  If your compiler isn't
supported, you can tailor Compilation mode to it by adding elements to
that list.  A similar variable `grep-regexp-alist' tells Emacs how to
parse output of a `grep' command.

   Compilation mode also redefines the keys <SPC> and <DEL> to scroll
by screenfuls, and `M-n' (`compilation-next-error') and `M-p'
(`compilation-previous-error') to move to the next or previous error
message.  You can also use `M-{' (`compilation-next-file' and `M-}'
(`compilation-previous-file') to move up or down to an error message
for a different source file.

   You can type `C-c C-f' to toggle Next Error Follow mode.  In this
minor mode, ordinary cursor motion in the compilation buffer
automatically updates the source buffer.  For instance, moving the
cursor to the next error message causes the location of that error to
be displayed immediately.

   The features of Compilation mode are also available in a minor mode
called Compilation Minor mode.  This lets you parse error messages in
any buffer, not just a normal compilation output buffer.  Type `M-x
compilation-minor-mode' to enable the minor mode.  This defines the keys
<RET> and `Mouse-2', as in the Compilation major mode.

   Compilation minor mode works in any buffer, as long as the contents
are in a format that it understands.  In an Rlogin buffer (*note Remote
Host::), Compilation minor mode automatically accesses remote source
files by FTP (*note File Names::).


File: emacs,  Node: Compilation Shell,  Next: Grep Searching,  Prev: Compilation Mode,  Up: Building

31.3 Subshells for Compilation
==============================

Emacs uses a shell to run the compilation command, but specifies the
option for a noninteractive shell.  This means, in particular, that the
shell should start with no prompt.  If you find your usual shell prompt
making an unsightly appearance in the `*compilation*' buffer, it means
you have made a mistake in your shell's init file by setting the prompt
unconditionally.  (This init file's name may be `.bashrc', `.profile',
`.cshrc', `.shrc', or various other things, depending on the shell you
use.)  The shell init file should set the prompt only if there already
is a prompt.  Here's how to do it in bash:

     if [ "${PS1+set}" = set ]
     then PS1=...
     fi

And here's how to do it in csh:

     if ($?prompt) set prompt = ...

   There may well be other things that your shell's init file ought to
do only for an interactive shell.  You can use the same method to
conditionalize them.

   The MS-DOS "operating system" does not support asynchronous
subprocesses; to work around this lack, `M-x compile' runs the
compilation command synchronously on MS-DOS.  As a consequence, you must
wait until the command finishes before you can do anything else in
Emacs.  *Note MS-DOS::.


File: emacs,  Node: Grep Searching,  Next: Flymake,  Prev: Compilation Shell,  Up: Building

31.4 Searching with Grep under Emacs
====================================

Just as you can run a compiler from Emacs and then visit the lines with
compilation errors, you can also run `grep' and then visit the lines on
which matches were found.  This works by treating the matches reported
by `grep' as if they were "errors."  The buffer of matches uses Grep
mode, which is a variant of Compilation mode (*note Compilation Mode::).

`M-x grep'
`M-x lgrep'
     Run `grep' asynchronously under Emacs, with matching lines listed
     in the buffer named `*grep*'.

`M-x grep-find'
`M-x find-grep'
`M-x rgrep'
     Run `grep' via `find', and collect output in the buffer named
     `*grep*'.

`M-x zrgrep'
     Run `zgrep' and collect output in the buffer named `*grep*'.

`M-x kill-grep'
     Kill the running `grep' subprocess.

   To run `grep', type `M-x grep', then enter a command line that
specifies how to run `grep'.  Use the same arguments you would give
`grep' when running it normally: a `grep'-style regexp (usually in
single-quotes to quote the shell's special characters) followed by file
names, which may use wildcards.  If you specify a prefix argument for
`M-x grep', it finds the tag (*note Tags::) in the buffer around point,
and puts that into the default `grep' command.

   Your command need not simply run `grep'; you can use any shell
command that produces output in the same format.  For instance, you can
chain `grep' commands, like this:

     grep -nH -e foo *.el | grep bar | grep toto

   The output from `grep' goes in the `*grep*' buffer.  You can find
the corresponding lines in the original files using `C-x `', <RET>, and
so forth, just like compilation errors.

   Some grep programs accept a `--color' option to output special
markers around matches for the purpose of highlighting.  You can make
use of this feature by setting `grep-highlight-matches' to `t'.  When
displaying a match in the source buffer, the exact match will be
highlighted, instead of the entire source line.

   The command `M-x grep-find' (also available as `M-x find-grep') is
similar to `M-x grep', but it supplies a different initial default for
the command--one that runs both `find' and `grep', so as to search
every file in a directory tree.  See also the `find-grep-dired'
command, in *Note Dired and Find::.

   The commands `M-x lgrep' (local grep) and `M-x rgrep' (recursive
grep) are more user-friendly versions of `grep' and `grep-find', which
prompt separately for the regular expression to match, the files to
search, and the base directory for the search.  Case sensitivity of the
search is controlled by the current value of `case-fold-search'.  The
command `M-x zrgrep' is similar to `rgrep', but it calls `zgrep'
instead of `grep' to search the contents of gzipped files.

   These commands build the shell commands based on the variables
`grep-template' (for `lgrep') and `grep-find-template' (for `rgrep').
The files to search can use aliases defined in the variable
`grep-files-aliases'.

   Subdirectories listed in the variable
`grep-find-ignored-directories' such as those typically used by various
version control systems, like CVS and arch, are automatically skipped
by `rgrep'.


File: emacs,  Node: Flymake,  Next: Debuggers,  Prev: Grep Searching,  Up: Building

31.5 Finding Syntax Errors On The Fly
=====================================

Flymake mode is a minor mode that performs on-the-fly syntax checking
for many programming and markup languages, including C, C++, Perl,
HTML, and TeX/LaTeX.  It is somewhat analogous to Flyspell mode, which
performs spell checking for ordinary human languages in a similar
fashion (*note Spelling::).  As you edit a file, Flymake mode runs an
appropriate syntax checking tool in the background, using a temporary
copy of the buffer.  It then parses the error and warning messages, and
highlights the erroneous lines in the buffer.  The syntax checking tool
used depends on the language; for example, for C/C++ files this is
usually the C compiler.  Flymake can also use build tools such as
`make' for checking complicated projects.

   To activate Flymake mode, type `M-x flymake-mode'.  You can move to
the errors spotted by Flymake mode with `M-x flymake-goto-next-error'
and `M-x flymake-goto-prev-error'.  To display any error messages
associated with the current line, use `M-x
flymake-display-err-menu-for-current-line'.

   For more details about using Flymake, see *Note Flymake:
(flymake)Top.


File: emacs,  Node: Debuggers,  Next: Executing Lisp,  Prev: Flymake,  Up: Building

31.6 Running Debuggers Under Emacs
==================================

The GUD (Grand Unified Debugger) library provides an Emacs interface to
a wide variety of symbolic debuggers.  Unlike the GDB graphical
interface, which only runs GDB (*note GDB Graphical Interface::), GUD
can also run DBX, SDB, XDB, Perl's debugging mode, the Python debugger
PDB, or the Java Debugger JDB.

   In addition, Emacs contains a built-in system for debugging Emacs
Lisp programs.  *Note The Lisp Debugger: (elisp)Debugging, for
information on the Emacs Lisp debugger.

* Menu:

* Starting GUD::	How to start a debugger subprocess.
* Debugger Operation::	Connection between the debugger and source buffers.
* Commands of GUD::	Key bindings for common commands.
* GUD Customization::	Defining your own commands for GUD.
* GDB Graphical Interface::  An enhanced mode that uses GDB features to
                        implement a graphical debugging environment through
                        Emacs.


File: emacs,  Node: Starting GUD,  Next: Debugger Operation,  Up: Debuggers

31.6.1 Starting GUD
-------------------

There are several commands for starting a debugger under GUD, each
corresponding to a particular debugger program.

`M-x gdb <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Run GDB as a subprocess of Emacs.  This uses an IDE-like graphical
     interface; see *Note GDB Graphical Interface::.  Only GDB works
     with the graphical interface.

`M-x gud-gdb <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Run GDB as a subprocess of Emacs.  This command creates a buffer
     for input and output to GDB, and switches to it.  If a GDB buffer
     already exists, it just switches to that buffer.

`M-x dbx <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Run DBX as a subprocess of Emacs.  Since Emacs does not implement a
     graphical interface for DBX, communication with DBX works by typing
     commands in the GUD interaction buffer.  The same is true for all
     the other supported debuggers.

`M-x xdb <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Run XDB as a subprocess of Emacs.  Use the variable
     `gud-xdb-directories' to specify directories to search for source
     files.

`M-x sdb <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Run SDB as a subprocess of Emacs.

     Some versions of SDB do not mention source file names in their
     messages.  When you use them, you need to have a valid tags table
     (*note Tags::) in order for GUD to find functions in the source
     code.  If you have not visited a tags table or the tags table
     doesn't list one of the functions, you get a message saying `The
     sdb support requires a valid tags table to work'.  If this
     happens, generate a valid tags table in the working directory and
     try again.

`M-x perldb <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Run the Perl interpreter in debug mode to debug FILE, a Perl
     program.

`M-x jdb <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Run the Java debugger to debug FILE.

`M-x pdb <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Run the Python debugger to debug FILE.

   Each of these commands takes one argument: a command line to invoke
the debugger.  In the simplest case, specify just the name of the
executable file you want to debug.  You may also use options that the
debugger supports.  However, shell wildcards and variables are not
allowed.  GUD assumes that the first argument not starting with a `-'
is the executable file name.

   Tramp provides a facility to debug programs on remote hosts (*note
Running a debugger on a remote host: (tramp)Running a debugger on a
remote host.), whereby both the debugger and the program being debugged
are on the same remote host.  This should not be confused with
debugging programs remotely, where the program and the debugger run on
different machines, as can be done using the GDB remote debugging
feature, for example (*note Debugging Remote Programs: (gdb)Remote
Debugging.).


File: emacs,  Node: Debugger Operation,  Next: Commands of GUD,  Prev: Starting GUD,  Up: Debuggers

31.6.2 Debugger Operation
-------------------------

Generally when you run a debugger with GUD, the debugger uses an Emacs
buffer for its ordinary input and output.  This is called the GUD
buffer.  Input and output from the program you are debugging also use
this buffer.  We call this "text command mode".  The GDB Graphical
Interface can use further buffers (*note GDB Graphical Interface::).

   The debugger displays the source files of the program by visiting
them in Emacs buffers.  An arrow in the left fringe indicates the
current execution line.(1)  Moving point in this buffer does not move
the arrow.  The arrow is not part of the file's text; it appears only
on the screen.

   You can start editing these source files at any time in the buffers
that display them.  If you do modify a source file, keep in mind that
inserting or deleting lines will throw off the arrow's positioning; GUD
has no way of figuring out which line corresponded before your changes
to the line number in a debugger message.  Also, you'll typically have
to recompile and restart the program for your changes to be reflected
in the debugger's tables.

   The Tooltip facility (*note Tooltips::) provides support for GUD.
You activate this feature by turning on the minor mode
`gud-tooltip-mode'.  Then you can display a variable's value in a
tooltip simply by pointing at it with the mouse.  This operates in the
GUD buffer and in source buffers with major modes in the list
`gud-tooltip-modes'.  If the variable `gud-tooltip-echo-area' is
non-`nil' then the variable's value is displayed in the echo area.
When debugging a C program using the GDB Graphical Interface, you can
also display macro definitions associated with an identifier when the
program is not executing.

   GUD tooltips are disabled when you use GDB in text command mode
(*note GDB Graphical Interface::), because displaying an expression's
value in GDB can sometimes expand a macro and result in a side effect
that interferes with the program's operation.  The GDB graphical
interface supports GUD tooltips and assures they will not cause side
effects.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) On a text-only terminal, the arrow appears as `=>' and overlays
the first two text columns.


File: emacs,  Node: Commands of GUD,  Next: GUD Customization,  Prev: Debugger Operation,  Up: Debuggers

31.6.3 Commands of GUD
----------------------

The GUD interaction buffer uses a variant of Shell mode, so the Emacs
commands of Shell mode are available (*note Shell Mode::).  All the
usual commands for your debugger are available, and you can use the
Shell mode history commands to repeat them.  If you wish, you can
control your debugger process entirely through this buffer.

   GUD mode also provides commands for setting and clearing
breakpoints, for selecting stack frames, and for stepping through the
program.  These commands are available both in the GUD buffer and
globally, but with different key bindings.  It also has its own tool
bar from which you can invoke the more common commands by clicking on
the appropriate icon.  This is particularly useful for repetitive
commands like `gud-next' and `gud-step', and allows you to keep the GUD
buffer hidden.

   The breakpoint commands are normally used in source file buffers,
because that is the easiest way to specify where to set or clear the
breakpoint.  Here's the global command to set a breakpoint:

`C-x <SPC>'
     Set a breakpoint on the source line that point is on.

   Here are the other special commands provided by GUD.  The keys
starting with `C-c' are available only in the GUD interaction buffer.
The key bindings that start with `C-x C-a' are available in the GUD
interaction buffer and also in source files.  Some of these commands
are not available to all the supported debuggers.

`C-c C-l'
`C-x C-a C-l'
     Display in another window the last line referred to in the GUD
     buffer (that is, the line indicated in the last location message).
     This runs the command `gud-refresh'.

`C-c C-s'
`C-x C-a C-s'
     Execute a single line of code (`gud-step').  If the line contains
     a function call, execution stops after entering the called
     function.

`C-c C-n'
`C-x C-a C-n'
     Execute a single line of code, stepping across entire function
     calls at full speed (`gud-next').

`C-c C-i'
`C-x C-a C-i'
     Execute a single machine instruction (`gud-stepi').

`C-c C-p'
`C-x C-a C-p'
     Evaluate the expression at point (`gud-print').  If Emacs does not
     print the exact expression that you want, mark it as a region
     first.

`C-c C-r'
`C-x C-a C-r'
     Continue execution without specifying any stopping point.  The
     program will run until it hits a breakpoint, terminates, or gets a
     signal that the debugger is checking for (`gud-cont').

`C-c C-d'
`C-x C-a C-d'
     Delete the breakpoint(s) on the current source line, if any
     (`gud-remove').  If you use this command in the GUD interaction
     buffer, it applies to the line where the program last stopped.

`C-c C-t'
`C-x C-a C-t'
     Set a temporary breakpoint on the current source line, if any
     (`gud-tbreak').  If you use this command in the GUD interaction
     buffer, it applies to the line where the program last stopped.

`C-c <'
`C-x C-a <'
     Select the next enclosing stack frame (`gud-up').  This is
     equivalent to the GDB command `up'.

`C-c >'
`C-x C-a >'
     Select the next inner stack frame (`gud-down').  This is
     equivalent to the GDB command `down'.

`C-c C-u'
`C-x C-a C-u'
     Continue execution to the current line (`gud-until').  The program
     will run until it hits a breakpoint, terminates, gets a signal
     that the debugger is checking for, or reaches the line on which the
     cursor currently sits.

`C-c C-f'
`C-x C-a C-f'
     Run the program until the selected stack frame returns or stops
     for some other reason (`gud-finish').

   If you are using GDB, these additional key bindings are available:

`C-x C-a C-j'
     Only useful in a source buffer, `gud-jump' transfers the program's
     execution point to the current line.  In other words, the next
     line that the program executes will be the one where you gave the
     command.  If the new execution line is in a different function from
     the previously one, GDB prompts for confirmation since the results
     may be bizarre.  See the GDB manual entry regarding `jump' for
     details.

`<TAB>'
     With GDB, complete a symbol name (`gud-gdb-complete-command').
     This key is available only in the GUD interaction buffer.

   These commands interpret a numeric argument as a repeat count, when
that makes sense.

   Because <TAB> serves as a completion command, you can't use it to
enter a tab as input to the program you are debugging with GDB.
Instead, type `C-q <TAB>' to enter a tab.


File: emacs,  Node: GUD Customization,  Next: GDB Graphical Interface,  Prev: Commands of GUD,  Up: Debuggers

31.6.4 GUD Customization
------------------------

On startup, GUD runs one of the following hooks: `gdb-mode-hook', if
you are using GDB; `dbx-mode-hook', if you are using DBX;
`sdb-mode-hook', if you are using SDB; `xdb-mode-hook', if you are
using XDB; `perldb-mode-hook', for Perl debugging mode;
`pdb-mode-hook', for PDB; `jdb-mode-hook', for JDB.  You can use these
hooks to define custom key bindings for the debugger interaction
buffer.  *Note Hooks::.

   Here is a convenient way to define a command that sends a particular
command string to the debugger, and set up a key binding for it in the
debugger interaction buffer:

     (gud-def FUNCTION CMDSTRING BINDING DOCSTRING)

   This defines a command named FUNCTION which sends CMDSTRING to the
debugger process, and gives it the documentation string DOCSTRING.  You
can then use the command FUNCTION in any buffer.  If BINDING is
non-`nil', `gud-def' also binds the command to `C-c BINDING' in the GUD
buffer's mode and to `C-x C-a BINDING' generally.

   The command string CMDSTRING may contain certain `%'-sequences that
stand for data to be filled in at the time FUNCTION is called:

`%f'
     The name of the current source file.  If the current buffer is the
     GUD buffer, then the "current source file" is the file that the
     program stopped in.

`%l'
     The number of the current source line.  If the current buffer is
     the GUD buffer, then the "current source line" is the line that
     the program stopped in.

`%e'
     In transient-mark-mode the text in the region, if it is active.
     Otherwise the text of the C lvalue or function-call expression at
     or adjacent to point.

`%a'
     The text of the hexadecimal address at or adjacent to point.

`%p'
     The numeric argument of the called function, as a decimal number.
     If the command is used without a numeric argument, `%p' stands for
     the empty string.

     If you don't use `%p' in the command string, the command you define
     ignores any numeric argument.

`%d'
     The name of the directory of the current source file.

`%c'
     Fully qualified class name derived from the expression surrounding
     point (jdb only).


File: emacs,  Node: GDB Graphical Interface,  Prev: GUD Customization,  Up: Debuggers

31.6.5 GDB Graphical Interface
------------------------------

The command `gdb' starts GDB in a graphical interface, using Emacs
windows for display program state information.  With it, you do not
need to use textual GDB commands; you can control the debugging session
with the mouse.  For example, you can click in the fringe of a source
buffer to set a breakpoint there, or on a stack frame in the stack
buffer to select that frame.

   This mode requires telling GDB that its "screen size" is unlimited,
so it sets the height and width accordingly.  For correct operation you
must not change these values during the GDB session.

   To run GDB in text command mode, like the other debuggers in Emacs,
use `M-x gud-gdb'.  You need to use text command mode to debug multiple
programs within one Emacs session.

* Menu:

* GDB-UI Layout::               Control the number of displayed buffers.
* Source Buffers::              Use the mouse in the fringe/margin to
                                control your program.
* Breakpoints Buffer::          A breakpoint control panel.
* Stack Buffer::                Select a frame from the call stack.
* Other GDB-UI Buffers::        Input/output, locals, registers,
                                assembler, threads and memory buffers.
* Watch Expressions::           Monitor variable values in the speedbar.
* Reverse Debugging::           Execute and reverse debug your program.


File: emacs,  Node: GDB-UI Layout,  Next: Source Buffers,  Up: GDB Graphical Interface

31.6.5.1 GDB User Interface Layout
..................................

If the variable `gdb-many-windows' is `nil' (the default value) then
`M-x gdb' normally displays only the GUD buffer.  However, if the
variable `gdb-show-main' is also non-`nil', it starts with two windows:
one displaying the GUD buffer, and the other showing the source for the
`main' function of the program you are debugging.

   If `gdb-many-windows' is non-`nil', then `M-x gdb' displays the
following frame layout:

     +--------------------------------+--------------------------------+
     |   GUD buffer (I/O of GDB)      |   Locals/Registers buffer      |
     |--------------------------------+--------------------------------+
     |   Primary Source buffer        |   I/O buffer for debugged pgm  |
     |--------------------------------+--------------------------------+
     |   Stack buffer                 |   Breakpoints/Threads buffer   |
     +--------------------------------+--------------------------------+

   However, if `gdb-use-separate-io-buffer' is `nil', the I/O buffer
does not appear and the primary source buffer occupies the full width
of the frame.

   If you change the window layout, for example, while editing and
re-compiling your program, then you can restore this standard window
layout with the command `gdb-restore-windows'.

   To switch between this standard layout and a simple layout
containing just the GUD buffer and a source file, type `M-x
gdb-many-windows'.

   You may also specify additional GDB-related buffers to display,
either in the same frame or a different one.  Select the buffers you
want with the `GUD->GDB-Windows' and `GUD->GDB-Frames' sub-menus.  If
the menu-bar is unavailable, type `M-x gdb-display-BUFFERTYPE-buffer'
or `M-x gdb-frame-BUFFERTYPE-buffer' respectively, where BUFFERTYPE is
the relevant buffer type, such as `breakpoints'.  Most of these buffers
are read-only, and typing `q' in them kills them.

   When you finish debugging, kill the GUD buffer with `C-x k', which
will also kill all the buffers associated with the session.  However
you need not do this if, after editing and re-compiling your source
code within Emacs, you wish continue debugging.  When you restart
execution, GDB will automatically find your new executable.  Keeping
the GUD buffer has the advantage of keeping the shell history as well
as GDB's breakpoints.  You do need to check that the breakpoints in
recently edited source files are still in the right places.


File: emacs,  Node: Source Buffers,  Next: Breakpoints Buffer,  Prev: GDB-UI Layout,  Up: GDB Graphical Interface

31.6.5.2 Source Buffers
.......................

Many GDB commands can be entered using key bindings or the tool bar but
sometimes it is quicker to use the fringe.  These commands either
manipulate breakpoints or control program execution.  When there is no
fringe, you can use the margin but this is only present when the source
file already has a breakpoint.

   You can click `Mouse-1' in the fringe or display margin of a source
buffer to set a breakpoint there and, on a graphical display, a red
bullet will appear on that line.  If a breakpoint already exists on
that line, the same click will remove it.  You can also enable or
disable a breakpoint by clicking `C-Mouse-1' on the bullet.

   A solid arrow in the left fringe of a source buffer indicates the
line of the innermost frame where the debugged program has stopped. A
hollow arrow indicates the current execution line of higher level
frames.

   If you drag the arrow in the fringe with `Mouse-1'
(`gdb-mouse-until'), execution will continue to the line where you
release the button, provided it is still in the same frame.
Alternatively, you can click `Mouse-3' at some point in the fringe of
this buffer and execution will advance to there.  A similar command
(`gdb-mouse-jump') allows you to jump to a source line without
executing the intermediate lines by clicking `C-Mouse-3'.  This command
allows you to go backwards which can be useful for running through code
that has already executed, in order to examine its execution in more
detail.

`Mouse-1'
     Set or clear a breakpoint.

`C-Mouse-1'
     Enable or disable a breakpoint.

`Mouse-3'
     Continue execution to here.

`C-Mouse-3'
     Jump to here.

   If the variable `gdb-find-source-frame' is non-`nil' and execution
stops in a frame for which there is no source code e.g after an
interrupt, then Emacs finds and displays the first frame further up
stack for which there is source.  If it is `nil' then the source buffer
continues to display the last frame which maybe more useful, for
example, when re-setting a breakpoint.


File: emacs,  Node: Breakpoints Buffer,  Next: Stack Buffer,  Prev: Source Buffers,  Up: GDB Graphical Interface

31.6.5.3 Breakpoints Buffer
...........................

The breakpoints buffer shows the existing breakpoints, watchpoints and
catchpoints (*note Breakpoints: (gdb)Breakpoints.).  It has these
special commands, which mostly apply to the "current breakpoint", the
breakpoint which point is on.

`<SPC>'
     Enable/disable the current breakpoint (`gdb-toggle-breakpoint').
     On a graphical display, this changes the color of a bullet in the
     margin of a source buffer at the relevant line.  This is red when
     the breakpoint is enabled and grey when it is disabled.  Text-only
     terminals correspondingly display a `B' or `b'.

`D'
     Delete the current breakpoint (`gdb-delete-breakpoint').

`<RET>'
     Visit the source line for the current breakpoint
     (`gdb-goto-breakpoint').

`Mouse-2'
     Visit the source line for the breakpoint you click on.

   When `gdb-many-windows' is non-`nil', the breakpoints buffer shares
its window with the threads buffer.  To switch from one to the other
click with `Mouse-1' on the relevant button in the header line.


File: emacs,  Node: Stack Buffer,  Next: Other GDB-UI Buffers,  Prev: Breakpoints Buffer,  Up: GDB Graphical Interface

31.6.5.4 Stack Buffer
.....................

The stack buffer displays a "call stack", with one line for each of the
nested subroutine calls ("stack frames") now active in the program.
*Note Backtraces: (gdb)Backtrace.

   An arrow in the fringe points to the selected frame or, if the
fringe is not present, the number of the selected frame is displayed in
reverse contrast.  To select a frame in GDB, move point in the stack
buffer to that stack frame and type <RET> (`gdb-frames-select'), or
click `Mouse-2' on a stack frame.  If the locals buffer is visible,
selecting a stack frame updates it to display the local variables of the
new frame.


File: emacs,  Node: Other GDB-UI Buffers,  Next: Watch Expressions,  Prev: Stack Buffer,  Up: GDB Graphical Interface

31.6.5.5 Other Buffers
......................

Input/Output Buffer
     If the variable `gdb-use-separate-io-buffer' is non-`nil', the
     program being debugged takes its input and displays its output
     here.  Otherwise it uses the GUD buffer for that.  To toggle
     whether GUD mode uses this buffer, do `M-x
     gdb-use-separate-io-buffer'.  This takes effect when you next
     restart the program you are debugging.

     The history and replay commands from Shell mode are available here,
     as are the commands to send signals to the debugged program.
     *Note Shell Mode::.

Locals Buffer
     The locals buffer displays the values of local variables of the
     current frame for simple data types (*note Frame Info: (gdb)Frame
     Info.).  Press <RET> or click `Mouse-2' on the value if you want
     to edit it.

     Arrays and structures display their type only.  With GDB 6.4 or
     later, move point to their name and press <RET>, or alternatively
     click `Mouse-2' there, to examine their values.  With earlier
     versions of GDB, use `Mouse-2' or <RET> on the type description
     (`[struct/union]' or `[array]').  *Note Watch Expressions::.

Registers Buffer
     The registers buffer displays the values held by the registers
     (*note Registers: (gdb)Registers.).  Press <RET> or click
     `Mouse-2' on a register if you want to edit its value.  With GDB
     6.4 or later, recently changed register values display with
     `font-lock-warning-face'.  With earlier versions of GDB, you can
     press <SPC> to toggle the display of floating point registers
     (`toggle-gdb-all-registers').

Assembler Buffer
     The assembler buffer displays the current frame as machine code.
     An arrow points to the current instruction, and you can set and
     remove breakpoints as in a source buffer.  Breakpoint icons also
     appear in the fringe or margin.

Threads Buffer
     The threads buffer displays a summary of all threads currently in
     your program (*note Threads: (gdb)Threads.).  Move point to any
     thread in the list and press <RET> to select it
     (`gdb-threads-select') and display the associated source in the
     primary source buffer.  Alternatively, click `Mouse-2' on a thread
     to select it.  If the locals buffer is visible, its contents
     update to display the variables that are local in the new thread.

     When there is more than one main thread and the threads buffer is
     present, Emacs displays the selected thread number in the mode
     line of many of the GDB-UI Buffers.

Memory Buffer
     The memory buffer lets you examine sections of program memory
     (*note Memory: (gdb)Memory.).  Click `Mouse-1' on the appropriate
     part of the header line to change the starting address or number
     of data items that the buffer displays.  Alternatively, use `S' or
     `N' respectively.  Click `Mouse-3' on the header line to select
     the display format or unit size for these data items.

   When `gdb-many-windows' is non-`nil', the threads buffer shares its
window with the breakpoints buffer, and the locals buffer with the
registers buffer.  To switch from one to the other click with `Mouse-1'
on the relevant button in the header line.


File: emacs,  Node: Watch Expressions,  Next: Reverse Debugging,  Prev: Other GDB-UI Buffers,  Up: GDB Graphical Interface

31.6.5.6 Watch Expressions
..........................

If you want to see how a variable changes each time your program stops,
move point into the variable name and click on the watch icon in the
tool bar (`gud-watch') or type `C-x C-a C-w'.  If you specify a prefix
argument, you can enter the variable name in the minibuffer.

   Each watch expression is displayed in the speedbar.  Complex data
types, such as arrays, structures and unions are represented in a tree
format.  Leaves and simple data types show the name of the expression
and its value and, when the speedbar frame is selected, display the
type as a tooltip.  Higher levels show the name, type and address value
for pointers and just the name and type otherwise.  Root expressions
also display the frame address as a tooltip to help identify the frame
in which they were defined.

   To expand or contract a complex data type, click `Mouse-2' or press
<SPC> on the tag to the left of the expression.  Emacs asks for
confirmation before expanding the expression if its number of immediate
children exceeds the value of the variable `gdb-max-children'.

   To delete a complex watch expression, move point to the root
expression in the speedbar and type `D' (`gdb-var-delete').

   To edit a variable with a simple data type, or a simple element of a
complex data type, move point there in the speedbar and type <RET>
(`gdb-edit-value').  Or you can click `Mouse-2' on a value to edit it.
Either way, this reads the new value using the minibuffer.

   If you set the variable `gdb-show-changed-values' to non-`nil' (the
default value), Emacs uses `font-lock-warning-face' to highlight values
that have recently changed and `shadow' face to make variables which
have gone out of scope less noticeable.  When a variable goes out of
scope you can't edit its value.

   If the variable `gdb-delete-out-of-scope' is non-`nil' (the default
value), Emacs automatically deletes watch expressions which go out of
scope.  Sometimes, when re-entering the same function, it may be useful
to set this value to `nil' so that you don't need to recreate the watch
expression.

   If the variable `gdb-use-colon-colon-notation' is non-`nil', Emacs
uses the `FUNCTION::VARIABLE' format.  This allows the user to display
watch expressions which share the same variable name.  The default
value is `nil'.

   To automatically raise the speedbar every time the display of watch
expressions updates, set `gdb-speedbar-auto-raise' to non-`nil'.  This
can be useful if you are debugging with a full screen Emacs frame.


File: emacs,  Node: Reverse Debugging,  Prev: Watch Expressions,  Up: GDB Graphical Interface

31.6.5.7 Reverse Debugging
..........................

The GDB tool bar shares many buttons with the other GUD debuggers for
tasks like stepping and printing expressions.  It also has a further
set of buttons that allow reverse debugging (*note Process Record and
Replay: (gdb)Process Record and Replay.).  This is useful when it takes
a long time to reproduce the conditions where your program fails or for
transient problems, like race conditions in multi-threaded programs,
where a failure might otherwise be hard to reproduce.

   To use reverse debugging, set a breakpoint slightly before the
location of interest and run your program to that point.  Enable
process recording by clicking on the record button.  At this point, a
new set of buttons appear.  These buttons allow program execution in
the reverse direction.  Run your program over the code where the
problem occurs, and then use the new set of buttons to retrace your
steps, examine values, and analyze the problem.  When analysis is
complete, turn off process recording by clicking on the record button
again.


File: emacs,  Node: Executing Lisp,  Next: Lisp Libraries,  Prev: Debuggers,  Up: Building

31.7 Executing Lisp Expressions
===============================

Emacs has several different major modes for Lisp and Scheme.  They are
the same in terms of editing commands, but differ in the commands for
executing Lisp expressions.  Each mode has its own purpose.

Emacs-Lisp mode
     The mode for editing source files of programs to run in Emacs Lisp.
     This mode defines `C-M-x' to evaluate the current defun.  *Note
     Lisp Libraries::.

Lisp Interaction mode
     The mode for an interactive session with Emacs Lisp.  It defines
     `C-j' to evaluate the sexp before point and insert its value in the
     buffer.  *Note Lisp Interaction::.

Lisp mode
     The mode for editing source files of programs that run in Lisps
     other than Emacs Lisp.  This mode defines `C-M-x' to send the
     current defun to an inferior Lisp process.  *Note External Lisp::.

Inferior Lisp mode
     The mode for an interactive session with an inferior Lisp process.
     This mode combines the special features of Lisp mode and Shell mode
     (*note Shell Mode::).

Scheme mode
     Like Lisp mode but for Scheme programs.

Inferior Scheme mode
     The mode for an interactive session with an inferior Scheme
     process.

   Most editing commands for working with Lisp programs are in fact
available globally.  *Note Programs::.


File: emacs,  Node: Lisp Libraries,  Next: Lisp Eval,  Prev: Executing Lisp,  Up: Building

31.8 Libraries of Lisp Code for Emacs
=====================================

Lisp code for Emacs editing commands is stored in files whose names
conventionally end in `.el'.  This ending tells Emacs to edit them in
Emacs-Lisp mode (*note Executing Lisp::).

   Emacs Lisp code can be compiled into byte-code, which loads faster,
takes up less space, and executes faster.  *Note Byte Compilation:
(elisp)Byte Compilation.  By convention, the compiled code for a
library goes in a separate file whose name ends in `.elc'.  Thus, the
compiled code for `foo.el' goes in `foo.elc'.

   To execute a file of Emacs Lisp code, use `M-x load-file'.  This
command reads a file name using the minibuffer and then executes the
contents of that file as Lisp code.  It is not necessary to visit the
file first; in any case, this command reads the file as found on disk,
not text in an Emacs buffer.

   Once a file of Lisp code is installed in the Emacs Lisp library
directories, users can load it using `M-x load-library'.  Programs can
load it by calling `load', a more primitive function that is similar
but accepts some additional arguments.

   `M-x load-library' differs from `M-x load-file' in that it searches
a sequence of directories and tries three file names in each directory.
Suppose your argument is LIB; the three names are `LIB.elc', `LIB.el',
and lastly just `LIB'.  If `LIB.elc' exists, it is by convention the
result of compiling `LIB.el'; it is better to load the compiled file,
since it will load and run faster.

   If `load-library' finds that `LIB.el' is newer than `LIB.elc' file,
it issues a warning, because it's likely that somebody made changes to
the `.el' file and forgot to recompile it.  Nonetheless, it loads
`LIB.elc'.  This is because people often leave unfinished edits the
source file, and don't recompile it until they think it is ready to use.

   The variable `load-path' specifies the sequence of directories
searched by `M-x load-library'.  Its value should be a list of strings
that are directory names; in addition, `nil' in this list stands for
the current default directory.  (Generally, it is not a good idea to
put `nil' in the list; if you find yourself wishing that `nil' were in
the list, most likely what you really want is to do `M-x load-file'
this once.)

   The default value of `load-path' is a list of directories where the
Lisp code for Emacs itself is stored.  If you have libraries of your
own, put them in a single directory and add that directory to
`load-path', by adding a line like this to your init file (*note Init
File::):

     (add-to-list 'load-path "/path/to/lisp/libraries")

   Some commands are "autoloaded": when you run them, Emacs will
automatically load the associated library first.  For instance, the
`compile' and `compilation-mode' commands (*note Compilation::) are
autoloaded; if you call either command, Emacs automatically loads the
`compile' library.  In contrast, the command `recompile' is not
autoloaded, so it is unavailable until you load the `compile' library.

   By default, Emacs refuses to load compiled Lisp files which were
compiled with XEmacs, a modified versions of Emacs--they can cause
Emacs to crash.  Set the variable `load-dangerous-libraries' to `t' if
you want to try loading them.


File: emacs,  Node: Lisp Eval,  Next: Lisp Interaction,  Prev: Lisp Libraries,  Up: Building

31.9 Evaluating Emacs Lisp Expressions
======================================

Lisp programs intended to be run in Emacs should be edited in
Emacs-Lisp mode; this happens automatically for file names ending in
`.el'.  By contrast, Lisp mode itself is used for editing Lisp programs
intended for other Lisp systems.  To switch to Emacs-Lisp mode
explicitly, use the command `M-x emacs-lisp-mode'.

   For testing of Lisp programs to run in Emacs, it is often useful to
evaluate part of the program as it is found in the Emacs buffer.  For
example, after changing the text of a Lisp function definition,
evaluating the definition installs the change for future calls to the
function.  Evaluation of Lisp expressions is also useful in any kind of
editing, for invoking noninteractive functions (functions that are not
commands).

`M-:'
     Read a single Lisp expression in the minibuffer, evaluate it, and
     print the value in the echo area (`eval-expression').

`C-x C-e'
     Evaluate the Lisp expression before point, and print the value in
     the echo area (`eval-last-sexp').

`C-M-x'
     Evaluate the defun containing or after point, and print the value
     in the echo area (`eval-defun').

`M-x eval-region'
     Evaluate all the Lisp expressions in the region.

`M-x eval-buffer'
     Evaluate all the Lisp expressions in the buffer.

   `M-:' (`eval-expression') is the most basic command for evaluating a
Lisp expression interactively.  It reads the expression using the
minibuffer, so you can execute any expression on a buffer regardless of
what the buffer contains.  When the expression is evaluated, the current
buffer is once again the buffer that was current when `M-:' was typed.

   In Emacs-Lisp mode, the key `C-M-x' is bound to the command
`eval-defun', which parses the defun containing or following point as a
Lisp expression and evaluates it.  The value is printed in the echo
area.  This command is convenient for installing in the Lisp environment
changes that you have just made in the text of a function definition.

   `C-M-x' treats `defvar' expressions specially.  Normally, evaluating
a `defvar' expression does nothing if the variable it defines already
has a value.  But `C-M-x' unconditionally resets the variable to the
initial value specified in the `defvar' expression.  `defcustom'
expressions are treated similarly.  This special feature is convenient
for debugging Lisp programs.  Typing `C-M-x' on a `defface' expression
reinitializes the face according to the `defface' specification.

   The command `C-x C-e' (`eval-last-sexp') evaluates the Lisp
expression preceding point in the buffer, and displays the value in the
echo area.  It is available in all major modes, not just Emacs-Lisp
mode.  It does not treat `defvar' specially.

   When the result of an evaluation is an integer, you can type `C-x
C-e' a second time to display the value of the integer result in
additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, and character).

   If `C-x C-e', or `M-:' is given a numeric argument, it inserts the
value into the current buffer at point, rather than displaying it in
the echo area.  The argument's value does not matter.  `C-M-x' with a
numeric argument instruments the function definition for Edebug (*note
Instrumenting for Edebug: (elisp)Instrumenting.).

   The most general command for evaluating Lisp expressions from a
buffer is `eval-region'.  `M-x eval-region' parses the text of the
region as one or more Lisp expressions, evaluating them one by one.
`M-x eval-buffer' is similar but evaluates the entire buffer.  This is
a reasonable way to install the contents of a file of Lisp code that
you are ready to test.  Later, as you find bugs and change individual
functions, use `C-M-x' on each function that you change.  This keeps
the Lisp world in step with the source file.

   The two customizable variables `eval-expression-print-level' and
`eval-expression-print-length' control the maximum depth and length of
lists to print in the result of the evaluation commands before
abbreviating them.  `eval-expression-debug-on-error' controls whether
evaluation errors invoke the debugger when these commands are used; its
default is `t'.


File: emacs,  Node: Lisp Interaction,  Next: External Lisp,  Prev: Lisp Eval,  Up: Building

31.10 Lisp Interaction Buffers
==============================

When Emacs starts up, it contains a buffer named `*scratch*', which is
provided for evaluating Lisp expressions interactively inside Emacs.
Its major mode is Lisp Interaction mode.

   The simplest way to use the `*scratch*' buffer is to insert Lisp
expressions and type `C-j' (`eval-print-last-sexp') after each
expression.  This command reads the Lisp expression before point,
evaluates it, and inserts the value in printed representation before
point.  The result is a complete typescript of the expressions you have
evaluated and their values.

   At startup, the `*scratch*' buffer contains a short message, in the
form of a Lisp comment, that explains what it is for.  This message is
controlled by the variable `initial-scratch-message', which should be
either a string or `nil'.  If you set it to the empty string, or `nil',
the initial message is suppressed.

   All other commands in Lisp Interaction mode are the same as in Emacs
Lisp mode.  You can enable Lisp Interaction mode by typing `M-x
lisp-interaction-mode'.

   An alternative way of evaluating Emacs Lisp expressions interactively
is to use Inferior Emacs-Lisp mode, which provides an interface rather
like Shell mode (*note Shell Mode::) for evaluating Emacs Lisp
expressions.  Type `M-x ielm' to create an `*ielm*' buffer which uses
this mode.  For more information see that command's documentation.


File: emacs,  Node: External Lisp,  Prev: Lisp Interaction,  Up: Building

31.11 Running an External Lisp
==============================

Emacs has facilities for running programs in other Lisp systems.  You
can run a Lisp process as an inferior of Emacs, and pass expressions to
it to be evaluated.  You can also pass changed function definitions
directly from the Emacs buffers in which you edit the Lisp programs to
the inferior Lisp process.

   To run an inferior Lisp process, type `M-x run-lisp'.  This runs the
program named `lisp', the same program you would run by typing `lisp'
as a shell command, with both input and output going through an Emacs
buffer named `*lisp*'.  That is to say, any "terminal output" from Lisp
will go into the buffer, advancing point, and any "terminal input" for
Lisp comes from text in the buffer.  (You can change the name of the
Lisp executable file by setting the variable `inferior-lisp-program'.)

   To give input to Lisp, go to the end of the buffer and type the
input, terminated by <RET>.  The `*lisp*' buffer is in Inferior Lisp
mode, which combines the special characteristics of Lisp mode with most
of the features of Shell mode (*note Shell Mode::).  The definition of
<RET> to send a line to a subprocess is one of the features of Shell
mode.

   For the source files of programs to run in external Lisps, use Lisp
mode.  You can switch to this mode with `M-x lisp-mode', and it is used
automatically for files whose names end in `.l', `.lsp', or `.lisp'.

   When you edit a function in a Lisp program you are running, the
easiest way to send the changed definition to the inferior Lisp process
is the key `C-M-x'.  In Lisp mode, this runs the function
`lisp-eval-defun', which finds the defun around or following point and
sends it as input to the Lisp process.  (Emacs can send input to any
inferior process regardless of what buffer is current.)

   Contrast the meanings of `C-M-x' in Lisp mode (for editing programs
to be run in another Lisp system) and Emacs-Lisp mode (for editing Lisp
programs to be run in Emacs; see *note Lisp Eval::): in both modes it
has the effect of installing the function definition that point is in,
but the way of doing so is different according to where the relevant
Lisp environment is found.


File: emacs,  Node: Maintaining,  Next: Abbrevs,  Prev: Building,  Up: Top

32 Maintaining Large Programs
*****************************

This chapter describes Emacs features for maintaining large programs.

* Menu:

* Version Control::     Using version control systems.
* Change Log::	        Maintaining a change history for your program.
* Tags::	        Go directly to any function in your program in one
			  command.  Tags remembers which file it is in.
* EDE::                 An integrated development environment for Emacs.

* Emerge::              A convenient way of merging two versions of a program.


File: emacs,  Node: Version Control,  Next: Change Log,  Up: Maintaining

32.1 Version Control
====================

A "version control system" is a package that can record multiple
versions of a source file, storing information such as the creation
time of each version, who created it, and a description of what was
changed in that version.

   The Emacs version control interface is called VC.  Its commands work
with several different version control systems; currently, it supports
GNU Arch, Bazaar, CVS, Git, Mercurial, Monotone, RCS, SCCS/CSSC, and
Subversion.  Of these, the GNU project distributes CVS, GNU Arch, RCS,
and Bazaar.

   VC is enabled automatically whenever you visit a file that is
governed by a version control system.  To disable VC entirely, set the
customizable variable `vc-handled-backends' to `nil' (*note Customizing
VC::).

* Menu:

* Introduction to VC::  How version control works in general.
* VC Mode Line::        How the mode line shows version control status.
* Basic VC Editing::    How to edit a file under version control.
* Old Revisions::       Examining and comparing old versions.
* Secondary VC Commands::    The commands used a little less frequently.
* VC Directory Mode::   Listing files managed by version control.
* Branches::            Multiple lines of development.

* Remote Repositories:: Efficient access to remote CVS servers.
* Revision Tags::       Symbolic names for revisions.
* Miscellaneous VC::    Various other commands and features of VC.
* Customizing VC::      Variables that change VC's behavior.


File: emacs,  Node: Introduction to VC,  Next: VC Mode Line,  Up: Version Control

32.1.1 Introduction to Version Control
--------------------------------------

VC allows you to use a version control system from within Emacs,
integrating the version control operations smoothly with editing.
Though VC cannot completely bridge the gaps between version control
systems with widely differing capabilities, it does provide a uniform
interface to many version control operations. Regardless of which
version control system is in use, you will be able to do basic
operations in much the same way.

   This section provides a general overview of version control, and
describes the version control systems that VC supports.  You can skip
this section if you are already familiar with the version control system
you want to use.

* Menu:

* Why Version Control?::    Understanding the problems it addresses.
* Version Control Systems:: Supported version control back-end systems.
* VCS Concepts::            Words and concepts related to version control.
* Types of Log File::       The VCS log in contrast to the ChangeLog.


File: emacs,  Node: Why Version Control?,  Next: Version Control Systems,  Up: Introduction to VC

32.1.1.1 Understanding the problems it addresses
................................................

Version control systems provide you with three important capabilities:

   * "Reversibility": the ability to back up to a previous state if you
     discover that some modification you did was a mistake or a bad
     idea.

   * "Concurrency": the ability to have many people modifying the same
     collection of files knowing that conflicting modifications can be
     detected and resolved.

   * "History": the ability to attach historical data to your data,
     such as explanatory comments about the intention behind each
     change to it.  Even for a programmer working solo, change
     histories are an important aid to memory; for a multi-person
     project, they are a vitally important form of communication among
     developers.


File: emacs,  Node: Version Control Systems,  Next: VCS Concepts,  Prev: Why Version Control?,  Up: Introduction to VC

32.1.1.2 Supported Version Control Systems
..........................................

VC currently works with many different version control systems or "back
ends":

   * SCCS was the first version control system ever built, and was long
     ago superseded by more advanced ones.  VC compensates for certain
     features missing in SCCS (e.g., tag names for releases) by
     implementing them itself.  Other VC features, such as multiple
     branches, are simply unavailable.  Since SCCS is non-free, we
     recommend avoiding it.

   * CSSC is a free replacement for SCCS.  You should use CSSC only if,
     for some reason, you cannot use a more recent and better-designed
     version control system.

   * RCS is the free version control system around which VC was
     initially built.  Almost everything you can do with RCS can be
     done through VC.  However, you cannot use RCS over the network,
     and it only works at the level of individual files rather than
     projects.

   * CVS is the free version control system that was, until recently
     (circa 2008), used by the majority of free software projects.
     Nowadays, it is slowly being superseded by newer systems.  CVS
     allows concurrent multi-user development either locally or over
     the network.  It lacks support for atomic commits or file
     moving/renaming.  VC supports all basic editing operations under
     CVS.  For some less common tasks, you still need to call CVS from
     the command line.  Note also that before using CVS you must set up
     a repository, which is a subject too complex to treat here.

   * Subversion (SVN) is a free version control system designed to be
     similar to CVS but without its problems.  It supports atomic
     commits of filesets, and versioning of directories, symbolic
     links, meta-data, renames, copies, and deletes.

   * GNU Arch is a version control system designed for distributed work.
     It differs in many ways from older systems like CVS and RCS.  It
     provides different methods for interoperating between users,
     support for offline operations, and good branching and merging
     features.  It also supports atomic commits of filesets and file
     moving/renaming.  VC does not support all operations provided by
     GNU Arch, so you must sometimes invoke it from the command line.

   * Git is a distributed version control system invented by Linus
     Torvalds to support development of Linux (his kernel).  It
     supports atomic commits of filesets and file moving/renaming.  One
     significant feature of git is that it largely abolishes the notion
     of a single centralized repository; instead, each working copy of
     a git project is its own repository and coordination is done
     through repository-sync operations.  VC supports most git
     operations, with the exception of news merges and repository
     syncing; these must be done from the command line.

   * Mercurial (hg) is a distributed version control system broadly
     resembling GNU Arch and git, with atomic fileset commits and file
     moving/renaming.  Like git, it is fully decentralized.  VC supports
     most Mercurial commands, with the exception of repository sync
     operations; this needs to be done from the command line.

   * Bazaar (bzr) is a distributed version control system that supports
     both repository-based and distributed versioning, with atomic
     fileset commits and file moving/renaming.  VC supports most basic
     editing operations under Bazaar.

   Previous versions of VC supported a version control system known as
Meta-CVS.  This support has been dropped because of limited interest
from users and developers.


File: emacs,  Node: VCS Concepts,  Next: Types of Log File,  Prev: Version Control Systems,  Up: Introduction to VC

32.1.1.3 Concepts of Version Control
....................................

When a file is under version control, we say that it is "registered" in
the version control system.  The system has a "repository" which stores
both the file's present state and its change history--enough to
reconstruct the current version or any earlier version.  The repository
also contains other information, such as "log entries" that describe
the changes made to each file.

   A file "checked out" of a repository is called the "work file".  You
edit the work file and make changes in it, as you would with an
ordinary file.  After you are done with a set of changes, you "check
in" or "commit" the file; this records the changes in the repository,
along with a log entry for those changes.

   A copy of a file stored in a repository is called a "revision".  The
history of a file is a sequence of revisions.  Each revision is named
by a "revision ID".  The format of the revision ID depends on the
version control system; in the simplest case, it is just an integer.

   To go beyond these basic concepts, you will need to understand three
aspects in which version control systems differ.  They can be
locking-based or merging-based; they can be file-based or
changeset-based; and they can be centralized or decentralized.  VC
handles all these modes of operation, but it cannot hide the
differences.

   A version control system typically has some mechanism to coordinate
between users who want to change the same file.  There are two ways to
do this: merging and locking.

   In a version control system that uses merging, each user may check
out and modify a work file at any time.  The system lets you "merge"
your work file, which may contain changes that have not been checked
in, with the latest changes that others have checked into the
repository.

   Older version control systems use a "locking" scheme instead.  Here,
work files are normally read-only.  To edit a file, you ask the version
control system to make it writable for you by "locking" it; only one
user can lock a given file at any given time.  This procedure is
analogous to, but different from, the locking that Emacs uses to detect
simultaneous editing of ordinary files (*note Interlocking::).  When
you check in your changes, that unlocks the file, and the work file
becomes read-only again.  Other users may then lock the file to make
their own changes.

   Both locking and merging systems can have problems when multiple
users try to modify the same file at the same time.  Locking systems
have "lock conflicts"; a user may try to check a file out and be unable
to because it is locked.  In merging systems, "merge conflicts" happen
when you check in a change to a file that conflicts with a change
checked in by someone else after your checkout.  Both kinds of conflict
have to be resolved by human judgment and communication.  Experience
has shown that merging is superior to locking, both in convenience to
developers and in minimizing the number and severity of conflicts that
actually occur.

   SCCS always uses locking.  RCS is lock-based by default but can be
told to operate in a merging style.  CVS and Subversion are merge-based
by default but can be told to operate in a locking mode.  Distributed
version control systems, such as GNU Arch, git, and Mercurial, are
exclusively merging-based.

   VC mode supports both locking and merging version control.  The
terms "checkin" and "checkout" come from locking-based version control
systems; newer version control systems have slightly different
operations usually called "commit" and "update", but VC hides the
differences between them as much as possible.

   On SCCS, RCS, CVS, and other early version control systems, version
control operations are "file-based": each file has its own comment and
revision history separate from that of all other files in the system.
Later systems, beginning with Subversion, are "changeset-based": a
checkin may include changes to several files, and the entire set of
changes is treated as a unit by the system.  Any comment associated
with the change does not belong to a single file, but to the changeset
itself.

   Changeset-based version control is more flexible and powerful than
file-based version control; usually, when a change to multiple files
has to be reversed, it's good to be able to easily identify and remove
all of it.

   Early version control systems were designed around a "centralized"
model in which each project has only one repository used by all
developers.  SCCS, RCS, CVS, and Subversion share this kind of model.
One of its drawbacks is that the repository is a choke point for
reliability and efficiency.

   GNU Arch pioneered the concept of "decentralized" version control,
later implemented in git, Mercurial, and Bazaar.  A project may have
several different repositories, and these systems support a sort of
super-merge between repositories that tries to reconcile their change
histories.  At the limit, each developer has his/her own repository,
and repository merges replace checkin/commit operations.

   VC's job is to help you manage the traffic between your personal
workfiles and a repository.  Whether that repository is a single master
or one of a network of peer repositories is not something VC has to
care about.  Thus, the difference between a centralized and a
decentralized version control system is invisible to VC mode.


File: emacs,  Node: Types of Log File,  Prev: VCS Concepts,  Up: Introduction to VC

32.1.1.4 Types of Log File
..........................

Projects that use a version control system can have two types of log
for changes.  One is the log maintained by the version control system:
each time you check in a change, you fill out a "log entry" for the
change (*note Log Buffer::).  This is called the "version control log".

   The other kind of log is the file `ChangeLog' (*note Change Log::).
It provides a chronological record of all changes to a large portion of
a program--typically one directory and its subdirectories.  A small
program would use one `ChangeLog' file; a large program may have a
`ChangeLog' file in each major directory.  *Note Change Log::.
Programmers have used change logs since long before version control
systems.

   Changeset-based version systems typically maintain a changeset-based
modification log for the entire system, which makes change log files
somewhat redundant.  One advantage that they retain is that it is
sometimes useful to be able to view the transaction history of a single
directory separately from those of other directories.

   A project maintained with version control can use just the version
control log, or it can use both kinds of logs.  It can handle some
files one way and some files the other way.  Each project has its
policy, which you should follow.

   When the policy is to use both, you typically want to write an entry
for each change just once, then put it into both logs.  You can write
the entry in `ChangeLog', then copy it to the log buffer with `C-c C-a'
when checking in the change (*note Log Buffer::).  Or you can write the
entry in the log buffer while checking in the change, and later use the
`C-x v a' command to copy it to `ChangeLog' (*note Change Logs and
VC::).


File: emacs,  Node: VC Mode Line,  Next: Basic VC Editing,  Prev: Introduction to VC,  Up: Version Control

32.1.2 Version Control and the Mode Line
----------------------------------------

When you visit a file that is under version control, Emacs indicates
this on the mode line.  For example, `RCS-1.3' says that RCS is used
for that file, and the current version is 1.3.

   The character between the back-end name and the revision ID
indicates the version control status of the file.  `-' means that the
work file is not locked (if locking is in use), or not modified (if
locking is not in use).  `:' indicates that the file is locked, or that
it is modified.  If the file is locked by some other user (for
instance, `jim'), that is displayed as `RCS:jim:1.3'.

   On a graphical display, you can move the mouse over this mode line
indicator to pop up a "tool-tip", which displays a more verbose
description of the version control status.  Pressing `Mouse-1' over the
indicator pops up a menu of VC commands.  This menu is identical to the
`Tools / Version Control' menu item.

   When Auto Revert mode (*note Reverting::) reverts a buffer that is
under version control, it updates the version control information in
the mode line.  However, Auto Revert mode may not properly update this
information if the version control status changes without changes to
the work file, from outside the current Emacs session.  If you set
`auto-revert-check-vc-info' to `t', Auto Revert mode updates the
version control status information every `auto-revert-interval'
seconds, even if the work file itself is unchanged.  The resulting CPU
usage depends on the version control system, but is usually not
excessive.


File: emacs,  Node: Basic VC Editing,  Next: Old Revisions,  Prev: VC Mode Line,  Up: Version Control

32.1.3 Basic Editing under Version Control
------------------------------------------

Most VC commands operate on "VC filesets".  A VC fileset is a
collection of one or more files that a VC operation acts on.  When you
type VC commands in a buffer visiting a version-controlled file, the VC
fileset is simply that one file.  When you type them in a VC Directory
buffer, and some files in it are marked, the VC fileset consists of the
marked files (*note VC Directory Mode::).

   The principal VC command is an all-purpose command, `C-x v v'
(`vc-next-action'), that performs either registration, locking, merging
or a check-in (depending on the situation) on the current VC fileset.
You can use `C-x v v' in a file-visiting buffer or in a VC Directory
buffer.

`C-x v v'
     Perform the appropriate next version control operation on the VC
     fileset.

   The precise action of `C-x v v' depends on the state of the VC
fileset, and whether the version control system uses locking or
merging.  This is described in detail in the subsequent sections.

   VC filesets are the way that VC mode bridges the gap between
file-based and changeset-based version control systems.  They are,
essentially, a way to pass multiple file arguments as a group to
version control commands.  For example, on Subversion, a checkin with a
multi-file VC fileset becomes a joint commit, as though you had typed
`svn commit' with those file arguments at the shell command line.  All
files in a VC fileset must be under the same version control system; if
they are not, Emacs signals an error when you attempt to execute a
command on the fileset.

   Support for VC filesets and changeset-based version control systems
is the main improvement to VC in Emacs 23.  When you mark multi-file VC
in a VC Directory buffer, VC operations treat them as a VC fileset, and
operate on them all at once if the version control system is
changeset-based.  *Note VC Directory Mode::.

   VC filesets are distinct from the "named filesets" used for viewing
and visiting files in functional groups (*note Filesets::).  Unlike
named filesets, VC filesets are not named and don't persist across
sessions.

* Menu:

* VC With A Merging VCS::  Without locking: default mode for CVS.
* VC With A Locking VCS::  RCS in its default mode, SCCS, and optionally CVS.
* Advanced C-x v v::       Advanced features available with a prefix argument.
* Log Buffer::             Features available in log entry buffers.


File: emacs,  Node: VC With A Merging VCS,  Next: VC With A Locking VCS,  Up: Basic VC Editing

32.1.3.1 Basic Version Control with Merging
...........................................

When your version control system is merging-based (the default for CVS
and all newer version control systems), work files are always writable;
you need not do anything special to begin editing a file.  The status
indicator on the mode line is `-' if the file is unmodified; it flips
to `:' as soon as you save any changes (*note VC Mode Line::).

   Here is what `C-x v v' does when using a merging-based system:

   * If the work file is in a directory that is not controlled by any
     version control system, prompt for a repository type.  Then,
     create a version control repository of that type and register the
     file with it.

   * If the work file is in a directory that is controlled by a version
     control system but not registered with it, register the file.

   * If the work file is the same as in the repository, do nothing.

   * If you have not changed the work file, but some other user has
     checked in changes to the repository, merge those changes into the
     work file.

   * If you have made modifications to the work file, attempts to check
     in your changes.  To do this, Emacs first reads the log entry for
     the new revision (*note Log Buffer::).  If some other user has
     checked in changes to the repository since you last checked it
     out, the checkin fails.  In that case, type `C-x v v' again to
     merge those changes into your own work file; this puts the work
     file into a "conflicted" state.  Type `C-x v v' to clear the
     "conflicted" state; VC then regards the file as up-to-date and
     modified, and you can try to check it in again.

     To pick up any recent changes from the repository _without_ trying
     to commit your own changes, type `C-x v m <RET>'.  *Note Merging::.

   These rules also apply when you use RCS in its "non-locking" mode,
except that changes are not automatically merged from the repository.
Nothing informs you if another user has checked in changes in the same
file since you began editing it; when you check in your revision, his
changes are removed (however, they remain in the repository and are
thus not irrevocably lost).  Therefore, you must verify that the
current revision is unchanged before checking in your changes.  In
addition, locking is possible with RCS even in this mode: `C-x v v'
with an unmodified file locks the file, just as it does with RCS in its
normal locking mode (*note VC With A Locking VCS::).


File: emacs,  Node: VC With A Locking VCS,  Next: Advanced C-x v v,  Prev: VC With A Merging VCS,  Up: Basic VC Editing

32.1.3.2 Basic Version Control with Locking
...........................................

Under a locking-based version control system (such as SCCS, and RCS in
its default mode), `C-x v v' does the following:

   * If the file is not locked, lock it and make it writable, so that
     you can change it.

   * If the file is locked by you, and contains changes, check in the
     changes.  In order to do this, Emacs first reads the log entry for
     the new revision.  *Note Log Buffer::.

   * If the file is locked by you, but you have not changed it since you
     locked it, release the lock and makes the file read-only again.

   * If the file is locked by some other user, ask whether you want to
     "steal the lock" from that user.  If you say yes, the file becomes
     locked by you, but a message is sent to the person who had formerly
     locked the file, to inform him of what has happened.

   These rules also apply when you use CVS in locking mode, except that
there is no such thing as stealing a lock.


File: emacs,  Node: Advanced C-x v v,  Next: Log Buffer,  Prev: VC With A Locking VCS,  Up: Basic VC Editing

32.1.3.3 Advanced Control in `C-x v v'
......................................

When you give a prefix argument to `vc-next-action' (`C-u C-x v v'), it
still performs the next logical version control operation, but accepts
additional arguments to specify precisely how to do the operation.

   * If the file is modified (or locked), you can specify the revision
     ID to use for the new version that you check in.  This is one way
     to create a new branch (*note Branches::).

   * If the file is not modified (and unlocked), you can specify the
     revision to select; this lets you start working from an older
     revision, or on another branch.  If you do not enter any revision,
     that takes you to the highest ("head") revision on the current
     branch; therefore `C-u C-x v v <RET>' is a convenient way to get
     the latest version of a file from the repository.

   * Instead of the revision ID, you can also specify the name of a
     version control system.  This is useful when one file is being
     managed with two version control systems at the same time (*note
     Local Version Control::).



File: emacs,  Node: Log Buffer,  Prev: Advanced C-x v v,  Up: Basic VC Editing

32.1.3.4 Features of the Log Entry Buffer
.........................................

When you check in changes, Emacs pops up a buffer called `*VC-Log*' for
you to enter a log entry.

   After you have finished editing the log message, type `C-c C-c' to
exit the buffer and commit the change.

   In the `*VC-Log*' buffer, typing `C-c C-f' (`log-edit-show-files')
displays a list of files in the VC fileset you are committing.  If you
called `C-x v v' directly from a work file, the VC fileset consists of
that single file, so this command is not very useful.  If you called
`C-x v v' from a VC directory buffer, the VC fileset may consist of
multiple files (*note VC Directory Mode::).

   Type `C-c C-d' (`log-edit-show-diff') to show a "diff" of the
changes you have made (i.e., the differences between the work file and
the repository revision from which you started editing the file).  The
diff is displayed in a special buffer in another window.  *Note
Comparing Files::.

   If you have written an entry in the `ChangeLog' (*note Change
Log::), type `C-c C-a' (`log-edit-insert-changelog') to pull it into
the `*VC-Log*' buffer.  If the topmost item in the `ChangeLog' was made
under your user name on the current date, this command searches that
item for entries that match the file(s) to be committed; if found,
these entries are inserted.  *Note Change Logs and VC::, for the
opposite way of working--generating ChangeLog entries from the revision
control log.

   To abort a check-in, just *don't* type `C-c C-c' in that buffer.
You can switch buffers and do other editing.  As long as you don't try
to check in another file, the entry you were editing remains in the
`*VC-Log*' buffer, and you can go back to that buffer at any time to
complete the check-in.

   If you change several source files for the same reason, it is often
convenient to specify the same log entry for many of the files.  (This
is the normal way to do things on a changeset-oriented system, where
comments are attached to changesets rather than the history of
individual files.)  The most convenient way to do this is to mark all
the files in VC Directory Mode and check in from there; the log buffer
will carry the fileset information with it and do a group commit when
you type `C-c C-c'.

   You can also browse the history of previous log entries to duplicate
a checkin comment. This can be useful when you want several files to
have checkin comments that vary only slightly from each other. The
commands `M-n', `M-p', `M-s' and `M-r' for doing this work just like
the minibuffer history commands (except that these versions are used
outside the minibuffer).

   Each time you check in a change, the log entry buffer is put into VC
Log Edit mode, which involves running two hooks: `text-mode-hook' and
`vc-log-mode-hook'.  *Note Hooks::.


File: emacs,  Node: Old Revisions,  Next: Secondary VC Commands,  Prev: Basic VC Editing,  Up: Version Control

32.1.4 Examining And Comparing Old Revisions
--------------------------------------------

One of the convenient features of version control is the ability to
examine any revision of a file, or compare two revisions.

`C-x v ~'
     Prompt for a revision of the current file, and visit it in a
     buffer of its own (`vc-revision-other-window').

`C-x v ='
     Compare the files in the current fileset with the working
     revision(s) you started from (`vc-diff').  With a prefix argument,
     prompt for two revisions of the current fileset and compare them.
     You can call this command from a Dired buffer (*note Dired::).

`C-x v D'
     Compare the entire tree corresponding to the current fileset with
     the tree you started from (`vc-root-diff').  With a prefix
     argument, prompt for two revisions and compare their trees.

`C-x v g'
     Display an annotated version of the file: for each line, show the
     latest revision in which it was modified (`vc-annotate').

   To examine an old revision, visit the work file and type `C-x v ~
REVISION <RET>' (`vc-revision-other-window').  Here, REVISION is either
the desired revision ID (*note VCS Concepts::), or the name of a tag or
branch (*note Tags::).  This command puts the text of the old revision
in a file named `FILENAME.~REVISION~', and visits it in its own buffer
in a separate window.

   `C-x v =' (`vc-diff') compares each file in the current VC fileset
(saving them if necessary) with the repository revision(s) from which
you started editing.  Note that the latter may or may not be the latest
revision of the file(s).  The diff is displayed in a special buffer in
another window.  *Note Comparing Files::.

   To compare two arbitrary revisions of the current VC fileset, call
`vc-diff' with a prefix argument: `C-u C-x v ='.  This prompts for two
revision IDs, using the minibuffer, and displays the diff in a special
buffer in another window.  Instead of providing a revision ID, you can
give an empty input, which specifies the current contents of the work
file; or a tag or branch name (*note Tags::).  If your version control
system is file-based (e.g. CVS) rather than changeset-based
(Subversion, GNU Arch, git, Mercurial), supplying a revision ID for a
multi-file fileset (as opposed to a symbolic tag name) is unlikely to
return diffs that are connected in any meaningful way.

   The command `C-x v D' (`vc-root-diff') is similar to `C-x v =', but
it compares the entire tree associated with the current VC fileset with
the tree you started with.  This means all the files controlled by the
current version control repository, even those that are not part of the
current VC fileset.

   If you invoke `C-x v =' or `C-u C-x v =' from a buffer that is
neither visiting a version-controlled file nor a VC directory buffer,
these commands generate a diff of all registered files in the current
directory and its subdirectories.

   `C-x v =' works by running a variant of the `diff' utility designed
to work with the version control system in use.  The options to pass to
the `diff' command are taken from the first non-`nil' value of
`vc-BACKEND-diff-switches', `vc-diff-switches', and `diff-switches'
(*note Comparing Files::), in that order.  Since `nil' means to check
the next variable in the sequence, either of the first two may use the
value `t' to mean no switches at all.  Most of the `vc...diff-switches'
variables default to `nil', but some default to `t'.  These are for
those version control systems (e.g. SVN) whose `diff' implementations
do not accept common options (e.g. `-c') likely to be in
`diff-switches'.

   The buffer produced by `C-x v =' supports the commands of
Compilation mode (*note Compilation Mode::), such as `C-x `' and `C-c
C-c', in both the "old" and "new" text, and they always find the
corresponding locations in the current work file.  (Older revisions are
not, in general, present as files on your disk.)

   For some back ends, you can display the file "annotated" with
per-line revision information, by typing `C-x v g' (`vc-annotate').
This creates a new buffer (the "annotate buffer") displaying the file's
text, with each part colored to show how old it is.  Text colored red
is new, blue means old, and intermediate colors indicate intermediate
ages.  By default, the color is scaled over the full range of ages,
such that the oldest changes are blue, and the newest changes are red.

   When you give a prefix argument to this command, Emacs reads two
arguments using the minibuffer: the ID of which revision to display and
annotate (instead of the current file contents), and the time span in
days the color range should cover.

   From the annotate buffer, these and other color scaling options are
available from the `VC-Annotate' menu.  In this buffer, you can also
use the following keys to browse the annotations of past revisions,
view diffs, or view log entries:

`p'
     Annotate the previous revision, that is to say, the revision before
     the one currently annotated.  A numeric prefix argument is a repeat
     count, so `C-u 10 p' would take you back 10 revisions.

`n'
     Annotate the next revision--the one after the revision currently
     annotated.  A numeric prefix argument is a repeat count.

`j'
     Annotate the revision indicated by the current line.

`a'
     Annotate the revision before the one indicated by the current line.
     This is useful to see the state the file was in before the change
     on the current line was made.

`f'
     Show in a buffer the file revision indicated by the current line.

`d'
     Display the diff between the current line's revision and the
     previous revision.  This is useful to see what the current line's
     revision actually changed in the file.

`D'
     Display the diff between the current line's revision and the
     previous revision for all files in the changeset (for VC systems
     that support changesets).  This is useful to see what the current
     line's revision actually changed in the tree.

`l'
     Show the log of the current line's revision.  This is useful to see
     the author's description of the changes in the revision on the
     current line.

`w'
     Annotate the working revision-the one you are editing.  If you used
     `p' and `n' to browse to other revisions, use this key to return
     to your working revision.

`v'
     Toggle the annotation visibility.  This is useful for looking just
     at the file contents without distraction from the annotations.


File: emacs,  Node: Secondary VC Commands,  Next: VC Directory Mode,  Prev: Old Revisions,  Up: Version Control

32.1.5 The Secondary Commands of VC
-----------------------------------

This section explains the secondary commands of VC.

* Menu:

* Registering::         Putting a file under version control.
* VC Change Log::       Viewing the VC Change Log.
* VC Undo::             Canceling changes before or after check-in.


File: emacs,  Node: Registering,  Next: VC Change Log,  Up: Secondary VC Commands

32.1.5.1 Registering a File for Version Control
...............................................

You can put any file under version control by simply visiting it, and
then typing `C-x v i' (`vc-register').

`C-x v i'
     Register the visited file for version control.

   To register the file, Emacs must choose which version control system
to use for it.  If the file's directory already contains files
registered in a version control system, Emacs uses that system.  If
there is more than one system in use for a directory, Emacs uses the
one that appears first in `vc-handled-backends' (*note Customizing
VC::).  On the other hand, if there are no files already registered,
Emacs uses the first system from `vc-handled-backends' that could
register the file (for example, you cannot register a file under CVS if
its directory is not already part of a CVS tree); with the default value
of `vc-handled-backends', this means that Emacs uses RCS in this
situation.

   If locking is in use, `C-x v i' leaves the file unlocked and
read-only.  Type `C-x v v' if you wish to start editing it.  After
registering a file with CVS, you must subsequently commit the initial
revision by typing `C-x v v'.  Until you do that, the revision ID
appears as `@@' in the mode line.

   The default initial revision ID for a newly registered file varies
by what VCS you are using; normally it will be 1.1 on VCSes that use
dot-pair revision IDs and 1 on VCSes that use monotonic IDs.  You can
specify a different default by setting the variable
`vc-default-init-revision', or you can give `C-x v i' a numeric
argument; then it reads the initial revision ID for this particular
file using the minibuffer.

   If `vc-initial-comment' is non-`nil', `C-x v i' reads an initial
comment to describe the purpose of this source file.  Reading the
initial comment works like reading a log entry (*note Log Buffer::).


File: emacs,  Node: VC Change Log,  Next: VC Undo,  Prev: Registering,  Up: Secondary VC Commands

32.1.5.2 VC Change Log
......................

`C-x v l'
     Display revision control state and change history (`vc-print-log').

`C-x v L'
     Display the change history for the current repository
     (`vc-print-root-log').

   The command `C-x v l' (`vc-print-log') displays a buffer named
`*vc-change-log*' in a new window.  This buffer lists the changes to
the current file, including the associated log entries.  (These are the
log entries associated with the version control system, i.e. the ones
you enter via the `*VC-Log*' buffer.  *Note Log Buffer::.)  Point is
centered at the revision of the file currently being visited.  With a
prefix argument, the command prompts for the revision to center on, and
the maximum number of revisions to display.  You can call this command
from a Dired buffer (*note Dired::).

   Type `C-x v L' (`vc-print-root-log') to display a `*vc-change-log*'
buffer showing the history of the version-controlled directory tree as
a whole.  With a prefix argument, the command prompts for the maximum
number of revisions to display.  RCS, SCCS, and CVS do not support this
feature.

   In the `*vc-change-log*' buffer, you can use the following keys to
move between the logs of revisions and of files, to view past
revisions, to modify change comments, to view annotations and to view
diffs:

`p'
     Move to the previous revision-item in the buffer.  (Revision
     entries in the log buffer are usually in reverse-chronological
     order, so the previous revision-item usually corresponds to a
     newer revision.)  A numeric prefix argument is a repeat count.

`n'
     Move to the next revision-item (which most often corresponds to the
     previous revision of the file).  A numeric prefix argument is a
     repeat count.

`P'
     Move to the log of the previous file, when the logs of multiple
     files are in the log buffer (*note VC Directory Mode::).
     Otherwise, just move to the beginning of the log.  A numeric
     prefix argument is a repeat count, so `C-u 10 P' would move
     backward 10 files.

`N'
     Move to the log of the next file, when the logs of multiple files
     are in the log buffer (*note VC Directory Mode::).  It also takes a
     numeric prefix argument as a repeat count.

`a'
     Annotate the revision indicated by the current line.

`e'
     Modify the change comment displayed at point.  Note that not all VC
     systems support modifying change comments.

`f'
     Visit the revision indicated at the current line, like typing `C-x
     v ~' and specifying this revision's ID (*note Old Revisions::).

`d'
     Display the diff (*note Comparing Files::) between the revision
     indicated at the current line and the next earlier revision.  This
     is useful to see what actually changed in the file when the
     revision indicated on the current line was committed.

`D'
     Display the changeset diff (*note Comparing Files::) between the
     revision indicated at the current line and the next earlier
     revision.  This is useful to see all the changes to all files that
     the revision indicated on the current line did when it was
     committed.

   Because fetching many log entries can be slow, the `*vc-change-log*'
buffer displays no more than 2000 revisions by default.  The variable
`vc-log-show-limit' specifies this limit; if you set the value to zero,
that removes the limit.  You can also increase the number of revisions
shown in an existing `*vc-change-log*' buffer by clicking on the `Show
2X entries' or `Show unlimited entries' buttons at the end of the
buffer.  However, RCS, SCCS, and CVS do not support this feature.


File: emacs,  Node: VC Undo,  Prev: VC Change Log,  Up: Secondary VC Commands

32.1.5.3 Undoing Version Control Actions
........................................

`C-x v u'
     Revert the buffer and the file to the working revision from which
     you started editing the file.

`C-x v c'
     Remove the last-entered change from the master for the visited
     file.  This undoes your last check-in.

   If you want to discard your current set of changes and revert to the
working revision from which you started editing the file, use `C-x v u'
(`vc-revert-buffer').  If the version control system is locking-based,
this leaves the file unlocked, and you must lock it again before making
new changes.  `C-x v u' requires confirmation, unless it sees that you
haven't made any changes with respect to the master copy of the working
revision.

   `C-x v u' is also the command to unlock a file if you lock it and
then decide not to change it.

   To cancel a change that you already checked in, use `C-x v c'
(`vc-rollback').  This command discards all record of the most recent
checked-in revision, but only if your work file corresponds to that
revision--you cannot use `C-x v c' to cancel a revision that is not the
latest on its branch.  Note that many version control systems do not
support rollback at all; this command is something of a historical
relic.


File: emacs,  Node: VC Directory Mode,  Next: Branches,  Prev: Secondary VC Commands,  Up: Version Control

32.1.6 VC Directory Mode
------------------------

When you are working on a large program, it is often useful to find out
which files have changed within an entire directory tree, or to view
the status of all files under version control at once, and to perform
version control operations on collections of files.  You can use the
command `C-x v d' (`vc-dir') to make a directory listing that includes
only files relevant for version control.  This creates a "VC Directory
buffer" and displays it in a separate window.

   The VC Directory buffer works with all the version control systems
that VC supports.  For CVS, Emacs also offers a more powerful facility
called PCL-CVS.  *Note About PCL-CVS: (pcl-cvs)Top.

* Menu:

* Buffer: VC Directory Buffer.      What the buffer looks like and means.
* Commands: VC Directory Commands.  Commands to use in a VC directory buffer.


File: emacs,  Node: VC Directory Buffer,  Next: VC Directory Commands,  Up: VC Directory Mode

32.1.6.1 The VC Directory Buffer
................................

The VC Directory buffer contains a list of version-controlled files in
the current directory and its subdirectories.  Files which are
up-to-date (have no local differences from the repository copy) are
usually hidden; if all files in a subdirectory are up-to-date, the
subdirectory is hidden as well.  There is an exception to this rule: if
VC mode detects that a file has changed to an up-to-date state since
you last looked at it, that file and its state are shown.

   If a directory uses more that one version control system, you can
select which system to use for the `vc-dir' command by invoking
`vc-dir' with a prefix argument: `C-u C-x v d'.

   The line for an individual file shows the version control state of
the file.  Under RCS and SCCS, the name of the user locking the file is
shown; under CVS, an abbreviated version of the `cvs status' output is
used.  Here is an example using CVS:

                            ./
         modified           file1.c
         needs-update       file2.c
         needs-merge        file3.c

In this example, `file1.c' is modified with respect to the repository,
and `file2.c' is not.  `file3.c' is modified, but other changes have
also been checked in to the repository--you need to merge them with the
work file before you can check it in.

   In the above, if the repository were on a remote machine, VC only
contacts it when the variable `vc-stay-local' (or `vc-cvs-stay-local')
is `nil' (*note CVS Options::).  This is because access to the
repository may be slow, or you may be working offline and not have
access to the repository at all.  As a consequence, VC would not be
able to tell you that `file3.c' is in the "merge" state; you would
learn that only when you try to check-in your modified copy of the
file, or use a command such as `C-x v m'.

   In practice, this is not a problem because CVS handles this case
consistently whenever it arises.  In VC, you'll simply get prompted to
merge the remote changes into your work file first.  The benefits of
less network communication usually outweigh the disadvantage of not
seeing remote changes immediately.

   When a VC directory displays subdirectories it omits some that
should never contain any files under version control.  By default, this
includes Version Control subdirectories such as `RCS' and `CVS'; you
can customize this by setting the variable
`vc-directory-exclusion-list'.


File: emacs,  Node: VC Directory Commands,  Prev: VC Directory Buffer,  Up: VC Directory Mode

32.1.6.2 VC Directory Commands
..............................

VC Directory mode has a full set of navigation and marking commands for
picking out filesets.  Some of these are also available in a context
menu invoked by the `mouse-2' button.

   Up- and down-arrow keys move in the buffer; `n' and `p'  also move
vertically as in other list-browsing modes.  <SPC> and <TAB> behave
like down-arrow, and <BackTab> behaves like up-arrow.

   Both `C-m' and `f' visit the file on the current line.  `o' visits
that file in another window.  `q' dismisses the directory buffer.

   `x' hides up-to-date files.

   `m' marks the file or directory on the current line.  If the region
is active, `m' marks all the files in the region.  There are some
restrictions when marking: a file cannot be marked if any of its parent
directories are marked, and a directory cannot be marked if any files
in it or in its child directories are marked.

   `M' marks all the files with the same VC state as the current file
if the cursor is on a file.  If the cursor is on a directory, it marks
all child files.  With a prefix argument: marks all files and
directories.

   `u' unmarks the file or directory on the current line.  If the
region is active, it unmarks all the files in the region.

   `U' marks all the files with the same VC state as the current file
if the cursor is on a file.  If the cursor is on a directory, it
unmarks all child files.  With a prefix argument: unmarks all marked
files and directories.

   It is possible to do search, search and replace, incremental search,
and incremental regexp search on multiple files.  These commands will
work on all the marked files or the current file if nothing is marked.
If a directory is marked, the files in that directory shown in the VC
directory buffer will be used.

   `S' searches the marked files.

   `Q' does a query replace on the marked files.

   `M-s a C-s' does an incremental search on the marked files.

   `M-s a C-M-s' does an incremental search on the marked files.

   Commands are also accessible from the VC-dir menu.  Note that some
VC backends use the VC-dir menu to make available extra,
backend-specific, commands.  For example, Git and Bazaar allow you to
manipulate "stashes" and "shelves".  (These provide a mechanism to
temporarily store uncommitted changes somewhere out of the way, and
bring them back at a later time.)

   Normal VC commands with the `C-x v' prefix work in VC directory
buffers.  Some single-key shortcuts are available as well; `=', `+',
`l', `i', and `v' behave as through prefixed with `C-x v'.

   The command `C-x v v' (`vc-next-action') operates on all the marked
files, so that you can check in several files at once.  If the
underlying VC supports atomic commits of multiple-file changesets, `C-x
v v' with a selected set of modified but not committed files will
commit all of them at once as a single changeset.

   When `C-x v v' (`vc-next-action') operates on multiple files, all of
those files must be either in the same state or in compatible states
(added, modified and removed states are considered compatible).
Otherwise it signals an error.  This differs from the behavior of older
versions of VC, which did not have fileset operations and simply did
`vc-next-action' on each file individually.

   If any files are in a state that calls for commit, `C-x v v' reads a
single log entry and uses it for the changeset as a whole.  If the
underling VCS is file- rather than changeset-oriented, the log entry
will be replicated into the history of each file.


File: emacs,  Node: Branches,  Next: Remote Repositories,  Prev: VC Directory Mode,  Up: Version Control

32.1.7 Multiple Branches of a File
----------------------------------

One use of version control is to maintain multiple "current" revisions
of a file.  For example, you might have different revisions of a
program in which you are gradually adding various unfinished new
features.  Each such independent line of development is called a
"branch".  VC allows you to create branches, switch between different
branches, and merge changes from one branch to another.  Please note,
however, that branches are not supported for SCCS.

   A file's main line of development is usually called the "trunk".
You can create multiple branches from the trunk.  How the difference
between trunk and branch is made visible is dependent on whether the
VCS uses dot-pair or monotonic version IDs.

   In VCSes with dot-pair revision IDs, the revisions on the trunk are
normally IDed 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, etc.  At any such revision, you can start
an independent branch.  A branch starting at revision 1.2 would have
revision ID 1.2.1.1, and consecutive revisions on this branch would
have IDs 1.2.1.2, 1.2.1.3, 1.2.1.4, and so on.  If there is a second
branch also starting at revision 1.2, it would consist of revisions
1.2.2.1, 1.2.2.2, 1.2.2.3, etc.

   In VCSes with monotonic revision IDs, trunk revisions are IDed as 1,
2, 3, etc.  A branch from (say) revision 2 might start with 2.1 and
continue through 2.2, 2.3, etc.  But naming conventions for branches
and subbranches vary widely on these systems, and some (like Mercurial)
never depart from the monotonic integer sequence at all.  Consult the
documentation of the VCS you are using.

   If you omit the final component of a dot-pair revision ID, that is
called a "branch ID".  It refers to the highest existing revision on
that branch--the "head revision" of that branch.  The branches in the
dot-pair example above have branch IDs 1.2.1 and 1.2.2.

* Menu:

* Switching Branches::    How to get to another existing branch.
* Creating Branches::     How to start a new branch.
* Merging::               Transferring changes between branches.
* Multi-User Branching::  Multiple users working at multiple branches
                            in parallel.


File: emacs,  Node: Switching Branches,  Next: Creating Branches,  Up: Branches

32.1.7.1 Switching between Branches
...................................

To switch between branches, type `C-u C-x v v' and specify the revision
ID you want to select.  On a locking-based system, this version is then
visited _unlocked_ (write-protected), so you can examine it before
locking it.  Switching branches in this way is allowed only when the
file is not locked.

   On a VCS with dot-pair IDs, you can omit the minor part, thus giving
only the branch ID; this takes you to the head version on the chosen
branch.  If you only type <RET>, Emacs goes to the highest version on
the trunk.

   After you have switched to any branch (including the main branch),
you stay on it for subsequent VC commands, until you explicitly select
some other branch.


File: emacs,  Node: Creating Branches,  Next: Merging,  Prev: Switching Branches,  Up: Branches

32.1.7.2 Creating New Branches
..............................

To create a new branch from a head revision (one that is the latest in
the branch that contains it), first select that revision if necessary,
lock it with `C-x v v', and make whatever changes you want.  Then, when
you check in the changes, use `C-u C-x v v'.  This lets you specify the
revision ID for the new revision.  You should specify a suitable branch
ID for a branch starting at the current revision.  For example, if the
current revision is 2.5, the branch ID should be 2.5.1, 2.5.2, and so
on, depending on the number of existing branches at that point.

   To create a new branch at an older revision (one that is no longer
the head of a branch), first select that revision (*note Switching
Branches::).  Your procedure will then differ depending on whether you
are using a locking or merging-based VCS.

   On a locking VCS, you will need to lock the old revision branch with
`C-x v v'.  You'll be asked to confirm, when you lock the old revision,
that you really mean to create a new branch--if you say no, you'll be
offered a chance to lock the latest revision instead.  On a
merging-based VCS you will skip this step.

   Then make your changes and type `C-x v v' again to check in a new
revision.  This automatically creates a new branch starting from the
selected revision.  You need not specially request a new branch, because
that's the only way to add a new revision at a point that is not the
head of a branch.

   After the branch is created, you "stay" on it.  That means that
subsequent check-ins create new revisions on that branch.  To leave the
branch, you must explicitly select a different revision with `C-u C-x v
v'.  To transfer changes from one branch to another, use the merge
command, described in the next section.


File: emacs,  Node: Merging,  Next: Multi-User Branching,  Prev: Creating Branches,  Up: Branches

32.1.7.3 Merging Branches
.........................

When you have finished the changes on a certain branch, you will often
want to incorporate them into the file's main line of development (the
trunk).  This is not a trivial operation, because development might
also have proceeded on the trunk, so that you must "merge" the changes
into a file that has already been changed otherwise.  VC allows you to
do this (and other things) with the `vc-merge' command.

`C-x v m (vc-merge)'
     Merge changes into the work file.

   `C-x v m' (`vc-merge') takes a set of changes and merges it into the
current version of the work file.  It firsts asks you in the minibuffer
where the changes should come from.  If you just type <RET>, Emacs
merges any changes that were made on the same branch since you checked
the file out (we call this "merging the news").  This is the common way
to pick up recent changes from the repository, regardless of whether
you have already changed the file yourself.

   You can also enter a branch ID or a pair of revision IDs in the
minibuffer.  Then `C-x v m' finds the changes from that branch, or the
differences between the two revisions you specified, and merges them
into the current revision of the current file.

   As an example, suppose that you have finished a certain feature on
branch 1.3.1.  In the meantime, development on the trunk has proceeded
to revision 1.5.  To merge the changes from the branch to the trunk,
first go to the head revision of the trunk, by typing `C-u C-x v v
<RET>'.  Revision 1.5 is now current.  If locking is used for the file,
type `C-x v v' to lock revision 1.5 so that you can change it.  Next,
type `C-x v m 1.3.1 <RET>'.  This takes the entire set of changes on
branch 1.3.1 (relative to revision 1.3, where the branch started, up to
the last revision on the branch) and merges it into the current revision
of the work file.  You can now check in the changed file, thus creating
revision 1.6 containing the changes from the branch.

   It is possible to do further editing after merging the branch, before
the next check-in.  But it is usually wiser to check in the merged
revision, then lock it and make the further changes.  This will keep a
better record of the history of changes.

   When you merge changes into a file that has itself been modified, the
changes might overlap.  We call this situation a "conflict", and
reconciling the conflicting changes is called "resolving a conflict".

   Whenever conflicts occur during merging, VC detects them, tells you
about them in the echo area, and asks whether you want help in merging.
If you say yes, it starts an Ediff session (*note Ediff: (ediff)Top.).

   If you say no, the conflicting changes are both inserted into the
file, surrounded by "conflict markers".  The example below shows how a
conflict region looks; the file is called `name' and the current master
file revision with user B's changes in it is 1.11.

     <<<<<<< name
       USER A'S VERSION
     =======
       USER B'S VERSION
     >>>>>>> 1.11

   Then you can resolve the conflicts by editing the file manually.  Or
you can type `M-x vc-resolve-conflicts' after visiting the file.  This
starts an Ediff session, as described above.  Don't forget to check in
the merged version afterwards.


File: emacs,  Node: Multi-User Branching,  Prev: Merging,  Up: Branches

32.1.7.4 Multi-User Branching
.............................

It is often useful for multiple developers to work simultaneously on
different branches of a file.  CVS and later systems allow this by
default; for RCS, it is possible if you create multiple source
directories.  Each source directory should have a link named `RCS'
which points to a common directory of RCS master files.  Then each
source directory can have its own choice of selected revisions, but all
share the same common RCS records.

   This technique works reliably and automatically, provided that the
source files contain RCS version headers (*note Version Headers::).
The headers enable Emacs to be sure, at all times, which revision ID is
present in the work file.

   If the files do not have version headers, you must instead tell Emacs
explicitly in each session which branch you are working on.  To do this,
first find the file, then type `C-u C-x v v' and specify the correct
branch ID.  This ensures that Emacs knows which branch it is using
during this particular editing session.


File: emacs,  Node: Remote Repositories,  Next: Revision Tags,  Prev: Branches,  Up: Version Control

32.1.8 Remote Repositories
--------------------------

A common way of using CVS and other more advanced VCSes is to set up a
central repository on some Internet host, then have each developer
check out a personal working copy of the files on his local machine.
Committing changes to the repository, and picking up changes from other
users into one's own working area, then works by direct interactions
with the repository server.

   One difficulty is that access to a repository server is often slow,
and that developers might need to work off-line as well.  While only
third-generation decentralized VCses such as GNU Arch or Mercurial
really solve this problem, VC is designed to reduce the amount of
network interaction necessary.

   If you are using a truly decentralized VCS you can skip the rest of
this section. It describes backup and local-repository techniques that
are only useful for Subversion and earlier VCSes.

* Menu:

* Version Backups::        Keeping local copies of repository versions.
* Local Version Control::  Using another version system for local editing.


File: emacs,  Node: Version Backups,  Next: Local Version Control,  Up: Remote Repositories

32.1.8.1 Version Backups
........................

When VC sees that the repository for a file is on a remote machine, it
automatically makes local backups of unmodified versions of the
file--"automatic version backups".  This means that you can compare the
file to the repository version (`C-x v ='), or revert to that version
(`C-x v u'), without any network interactions.

   The local copy of the unmodified file is called a "version backup"
to indicate that it corresponds exactly to a version that is stored in
the repository.  Note that version backups are not the same as ordinary
Emacs backup files (*note Backup::).  But they follow a similar naming
convention.

   For a file that comes from a remote repository, VC makes a version
backup whenever you save the first changes to the file, and removes it
after you have committed your modified version to the repository. You
can disable the making of automatic version backups by setting
`vc-cvs-stay-local' to `nil' (*note CVS Options::).

   The name of the automatic version backup for version VERSION of file
FILE is `FILE.~VERSION.~'.  This is almost the same as the name used by
`C-x v ~' (*note Old Revisions::), the only difference being the
additional dot (`.')  after the version number.  This similarity is
intentional, because both kinds of files store the same kind of
information.  The file made by `C-x v ~' acts as a "manual version
backup".

   All the VC commands that operate on old versions of a file can use
both kinds of version backups.  For instance, `C-x v ~' uses either an
automatic or a manual version backup, if possible, to get the contents
of the version you request.  Likewise, `C-x v =' and `C-x v u' use
either an automatic or a manual version backup, if one of them exists,
to get the contents of a version to compare or revert to.  If you
changed a file outside of Emacs, so that no automatic version backup
was created for the previous text, you can create a manual backup of
that version using `C-x v ~', and thus obtain the benefit of the local
copy for Emacs commands.

   The only difference in Emacs's handling of manual and automatic
version backups, once they exist, is that Emacs deletes automatic
version backups when you commit to the repository.  By contrast, manual
version backups remain until you delete them.


File: emacs,  Node: Local Version Control,  Prev: Version Backups,  Up: Remote Repositories

32.1.8.2 Local Version Control
..............................

When you make many changes to a file that comes from a remote
repository, it can be convenient to have version control on your local
machine as well.  You can then record intermediate versions, revert to
a previous state, etc., before you actually commit your changes to the
remote server.

   VC lets you do this by putting a file under a second, local version
control system, so that the file is effectively registered in two
systems at the same time.  For the description here, we will assume
that the remote system is CVS, and you use RCS locally, although the
mechanism works with any combination of version control systems ("back
ends").

   To make it work with other back ends, you must make sure that the
"more local" back end comes before the "more remote" back end in the
setting of `vc-handled-backends' (*note Customizing VC::).  By default,
this variable is set up so that you can use remote CVS and local RCS as
described here.

   To start using local RCS for a file that comes from a remote CVS
server, you must _register the file in RCS_, by typing `C-u C-x v v rcs
<RET>'.  (In other words, use `vc-next-action' with a prefix argument,
and specify RCS as the back end.)

   You can do this at any time; it does not matter whether you have
already modified the file with respect to the version in the CVS
repository.  If possible, VC tries to make the RCS master start with
the unmodified repository version, then checks in any local changes as
a new version.  This works if you have not made any changes yet, or if
the unmodified repository version exists locally as a version backup
(*note Version Backups::).  If the unmodified version is not available
locally, the RCS master starts with the modified version; the only
drawback to this is that you cannot compare your changes locally to
what is stored in the repository.

   The version number of the RCS master is derived from the current CVS
version, starting a branch from it.  For example, if the current CVS
version is 1.23, the local RCS branch will be 1.23.1.  Version 1.23 in
the RCS master will be identical to version 1.23 under CVS; your first
changes are checked in as 1.23.1.1.  (If the unmodified file is not
available locally, VC will check in the modified file twice, both as
1.23 and 1.23.1.1, to make the revision numbers consistent.)

   If you do not use locking under CVS (the default), locking is also
disabled for RCS, so that editing under RCS works exactly as under CVS.

   When you are done with local editing, you can commit the final
version back to the CVS repository by typing `C-u C-x v v cvs <RET>'.
This initializes the log entry buffer (*note Log Buffer::) to contain
all the log entries you have recorded in the RCS master; you can edit
them as you wish, and then commit in CVS by typing `C-c C-c'.  If the
commit is successful, VC removes the RCS master, so that the file is
once again registered under CVS only.  (The RCS master is not actually
deleted, just renamed by appending `~' to the name, so that you can
refer to it later if you wish.)

   While using local RCS, you can pick up recent changes from the CVS
repository into your local file, or commit some of your changes back to
CVS, without terminating local RCS version control.  To do this, switch
to the CVS back end temporarily, with the `C-x v b' command:

`C-x v b'
     Switch to another back end that the current file is registered
     under (`vc-switch-backend').

`C-u C-x v b BACKEND <RET>'
     Switch to BACKEND for the current file.

   `C-x v b' does not change the buffer contents, or any files; it only
changes VC's perspective on how to handle the file.  Any subsequent VC
commands for that file will operate on the back end that is currently
selected.

   If the current file is registered in more than one back end, typing
`C-x v b' "cycles" through all of these back ends.  With a prefix
argument, it asks for the back end to use in the minibuffer.

   Thus, if you are using local RCS, and you want to pick up some recent
changes in the file from remote CVS, first visit the file, then type
`C-x v b' to switch to CVS, and finally use `C-x v m <RET>' to merge
the news (*note Merging::).  You can then switch back to RCS by typing
`C-x v b' again, and continue to edit locally.

   But if you do this, the revision numbers in the RCS master no longer
correspond to those of CVS.  Technically, this is not a problem, but it
can become difficult to keep track of what is in the CVS repository and
what is not.  So we suggest that you return from time to time to
CVS-only operation, by committing your local changes back to the
repository using `C-u C-x v v cvs <RET>'.


File: emacs,  Node: Revision Tags,  Next: Miscellaneous VC,  Prev: Remote Repositories,  Up: Version Control

32.1.9 Revision Tags
--------------------

In a VCS with per-file revision numbers (such as SCCS, RCS, or CVS)
"tag" is a named set of file versions (one for each registered file)
that you can treat as a unit.  In a VCS with per-repository version
numbers (Subversion and most later ones) a tag is simply a symbolic
name for a revision.

   One important kind of tag is a "release", a (theoretically) stable
version of the system that is ready for distribution to users.

* Menu:

* Making Revision Tags::		The tag facilities.
* Revision Tag Caveats::		Things to be careful of when using tags.


File: emacs,  Node: Making Revision Tags,  Next: Revision Tag Caveats,  Up: Revision Tags

32.1.9.1 Making and Using Revision Tags
.......................................

There are two basic commands for tags; one makes a tag with a given
name, the other retrieves a named tag.

`C-x v s NAME <RET>'
     Define the working revision of every registered file in or under
     the current directory as a tag named NAME (`vc-create-tag').

`C-x v r NAME <RET>'
     For all registered files at or below the current directory level,
     retrieve the tagged revision NAME. This command will switch to a
     branch if NAME is a branch name and your VCS distinguishes
     branches from tags.  (`vc-retrieve-tag').

     This command reports an error if any files are locked at or below
     the current directory, without changing anything; this is to avoid
     overwriting work in progress.

   Tags are inexpensive, so you need not hesitate to create them
whenever they are useful.  Branches vary in cost depending on your VCS;
in older ones they may be expensive.

   You can give a tag or branch name as an argument to `C-x v =' or
`C-x v ~' (*note Old Revisions::).  Thus, you can use it to compare a
tagged version against the current files, or two tagged versions
against each other.


File: emacs,  Node: Revision Tag Caveats,  Prev: Making Revision Tags,  Up: Revision Tags

32.1.9.2 Revision Tag Caveats
.............................

For SCCS, VC implements tags itself; these tags are visible only
through VC.  Most later systems (including CVS, Subversion, bzr, git,
and hg) have a native tag facility, and VC uses it where available;
those tags will be visible even when you bypass VC.

   There is no support for VC tags using GNU Arch yet.

   Under older VCSes (SCCS, RCS, CVS, early versions of Subversion),
renaming and deletion could create some difficulties with tags.  This is
not a VC-specific problem, but a general design issue in version
control systems that was not solved effectively until the earliest
third-generation systems.

   In a file-oriented VCS, when you rename a registered file you need
to rename its master along with it; the command `vc-rename-file' will
do this automatically.  If you are using SCCS, you must also update the
records of the tag, to mention the file by its new name
(`vc-rename-file' does this, too).  An old tag that refers to a master
file that no longer exists under the recorded name is invalid; VC can
no longer retrieve it.  It would be beyond the scope of this manual to
explain enough about RCS and SCCS to explain how to update the tags by
hand.

   Using `vc-rename-file' makes the tag remain valid for retrieval, but
it does not solve all problems.  For example, some of the files in your
program probably refer to others by name.  At the very least, the
makefile probably mentions the file that you renamed.  If you retrieve
an old tag, the renamed file is retrieved under its new name, which is
not the name that the makefile expects.  So the program won't really
work as retrieved.


File: emacs,  Node: Miscellaneous VC,  Next: Customizing VC,  Prev: Revision Tags,  Up: Version Control

32.1.10 Miscellaneous Commands and Features of VC
-------------------------------------------------

This section explains the less-frequently-used features of VC.

* Menu:

* Change Logs and VC::  Generating a change log file from log entries.
* Renaming and VC::     A command to rename both the source and master
                          file correctly.
* Version Headers::     Inserting version control headers into working files.


File: emacs,  Node: Change Logs and VC,  Next: Renaming and VC,  Up: Miscellaneous VC

32.1.10.1 Change Logs and VC
............................

If you use RCS or CVS for a program and also maintain a change log file
for it (*note Change Log::), you can generate change log entries
automatically from the version control log entries:

`C-x v a'
     Visit the current directory's change log file and, for registered
     files in that directory, create new entries for versions checked
     in since the most recent entry in the change log file.
     (`vc-update-change-log').

     This command works with RCS or CVS only, not with any of the other
     back ends.

`C-u C-x v a'
     As above, but only find entries for the current buffer's file.

`M-1 C-x v a'
     As above, but find entries for all the currently visited files
     that are maintained with version control.  This works only with
     RCS, and it puts all entries in the log for the default directory,
     which may not be appropriate.

   For example, suppose the first line of `ChangeLog' is dated
1999-04-10, and that the only check-in since then was by Nathaniel
Bowditch to `rcs2log' on 1999-05-22 with log text `Ignore log messages
that start with `#'.'.  Then `C-x v a' visits `ChangeLog' and inserts
text like this:

     1999-05-22  Nathaniel Bowditch  <nat@apn.org>

             * rcs2log: Ignore log messages that start with `#'.

You can then edit the new change log entry further as you wish.

   Some of the new change log entries may duplicate what's already in
ChangeLog.  You will have to remove these duplicates by hand.

   Normally, the log entry for file `foo' is displayed as `* foo: TEXT
OF LOG ENTRY'.  The `:' after `foo' is omitted if the text of the log
entry starts with `(FUNCTIONNAME): '.  For example, if the log entry
for `vc.el' is `(vc-do-command): Check call-process status.', then the
text in `ChangeLog' looks like this:

     1999-05-06  Nathaniel Bowditch  <nat@apn.org>

             * vc.el (vc-do-command): Check call-process status.

   When `C-x v a' adds several change log entries at once, it groups
related log entries together if they all are checked in by the same
author at nearly the same time.  If the log entries for several such
files all have the same text, it coalesces them into a single entry.
For example, suppose the most recent check-ins have the following log
entries:

* For `vc.texinfo': `Fix expansion typos.'
* For `vc.el': `Don't call expand-file-name.'
* For `vc-hooks.el': `Don't call expand-file-name.'

They appear like this in `ChangeLog':

     1999-04-01  Nathaniel Bowditch  <nat@apn.org>

             * vc.texinfo: Fix expansion typos.

             * vc.el, vc-hooks.el: Don't call expand-file-name.

   Normally, `C-x v a' separates log entries by a blank line, but you
can mark several related log entries to be clumped together (without an
intervening blank line) by starting the text of each related log entry
with a label of the form `{CLUMPNAME} '.  The label itself is not
copied to `ChangeLog'.  For example, suppose the log entries are:

* For `vc.texinfo': `{expand} Fix expansion typos.'
* For `vc.el': `{expand} Don't call expand-file-name.'
* For `vc-hooks.el': `{expand} Don't call expand-file-name.'

Then the text in `ChangeLog' looks like this:

     1999-04-01  Nathaniel Bowditch  <nat@apn.org>

             * vc.texinfo: Fix expansion typos.
             * vc.el, vc-hooks.el: Don't call expand-file-name.

   A log entry whose text begins with `#' is not copied to `ChangeLog'.
For example, if you merely fix some misspellings in comments, you can
log the change with an entry beginning with `#' to avoid putting such
trivia into `ChangeLog'.


File: emacs,  Node: Renaming and VC,  Next: Version Headers,  Prev: Change Logs and VC,  Up: Miscellaneous VC

32.1.10.2 Renaming VC Work Files and Master Files
.................................................

When you rename a registered file, you must also rename its master file
correspondingly to get proper results.  Use `vc-rename-file' to rename
the source file as you specify, and rename its master file accordingly.
It also updates any tags (*note Revision Tags::) that mention the
file, so that they use the new name; despite this, the tag thus
modified may not completely work (*note Revision Tag Caveats::).

   Some back ends do not provide an explicit rename operation to their
repositories.  After issuing `vc-rename-file', use `C-x v v' on the
original and renamed buffers and provide the necessary edit log.

   You cannot use `vc-rename-file' on a file that is locked by someone
else.


File: emacs,  Node: Version Headers,  Prev: Renaming and VC,  Up: Miscellaneous VC

32.1.10.3 Inserting Version Control Headers
...........................................

Sometimes it is convenient to put version identification strings
directly into working files.  Certain special strings called "version
headers" are replaced in each successive version by the number of that
version, the name of the user who created it, and other relevant
information.  All of the back ends that VC supports have such a
mechanism, except GNU Arch.

   VC does not normally use the information contained in these headers.
The exception is RCS--with RCS, version headers are sometimes more
reliable than the master file to determine which version of the file
you are editing.  Note that in a multi-branch environment, version
headers are necessary to make VC behave correctly (*note Multi-User
Branching::).

   Searching for RCS version headers is controlled by the variable
`vc-consult-headers'.  If it is non-`nil' (the default), Emacs searches
for headers to determine the version number you are editing.  Setting
it to `nil' disables this feature.

   Note that although CVS uses the same kind of version headers as RCS
does, VC never searches for these headers if you are using CVS,
regardless of the above setting.

   You can use the `C-x v h' command (`vc-insert-headers') to insert a
suitable header string.

`C-x v h'
     Insert headers in a file for use with your version-control system.

   The default header string is `$Id$' for RCS and `%W%' for SCCS.  You
can specify other headers to insert by setting the variables
`vc-BACKEND-header' where BACKEND is `rcs' or `sccs'.

   Instead of a single string, you can specify a list of strings; then
each string in the list is inserted as a separate header on a line of
its own.

   It may be necessary to use apparently-superfluous backslashes when
writing the strings that you put in this variable.  For instance, you
might write `"$Id\$"' rather than `"$Id$"'.  The extra backslash
prevents the string constant from being interpreted as a header, if the
Emacs Lisp file containing it is maintained with version control.

   Each header is inserted surrounded by tabs, inside comment
delimiters, on a new line at point.  Normally the ordinary comment
start and comment end strings of the current mode are used, but for
certain modes, there are special comment delimiters for this purpose;
the variable `vc-comment-alist' specifies them.  Each element of this
list has the form `(MODE STARTER ENDER)'.

   The variable `vc-static-header-alist' specifies further strings to
add based on the name of the buffer.  Its value should be a list of
elements of the form `(REGEXP . FORMAT)'.  Whenever REGEXP matches the
buffer name, FORMAT is inserted as part of the header.  A header line
is inserted for each element that matches the buffer name, and for each
string specified by `vc-BACKEND-header'.  The header line is made by
processing the string from `vc-BACKEND-header' with the format taken
from the element.  The default value for `vc-static-header-alist' is as
follows:

     (("\\.c$" .
       "\n#ifndef lint\nstatic char vcid[] = \"\%s\";\n\
     #endif /* lint */\n"))

It specifies insertion of text of this form:


     #ifndef lint
     static char vcid[] = "STRING";
     #endif /* lint */

Note that the text above starts with a blank line.

   If you use more than one version header in a file, put them close
together in the file.  The mechanism in `revert-buffer' that preserves
markers may not handle markers positioned between two version headers.


File: emacs,  Node: Customizing VC,  Prev: Miscellaneous VC,  Up: Version Control

32.1.11 Customizing VC
----------------------

The variable `vc-handled-backends' determines which version control
systems VC should handle.  The default value is `(RCS CVS SVN SCCS BZR
GIT HG Arch)', so it contains all the version systems that are
currently supported.  If you want VC to ignore one or more of these
systems, exclude its name from the list.  To disable VC entirely, set
this variable to `nil'.

   The order of systems in the list is significant: when you visit a
file registered in more than one system (*note Local Version
Control::), VC uses the system that comes first in
`vc-handled-backends' by default.  The order is also significant when
you register a file for the first time, see *Note Registering::, for
details.

* Menu:

* General VC Options::  Options that apply to multiple back ends.
* RCS and SCCS::        Options for RCS and SCCS.
* CVS Options::         Options for CVS.


File: emacs,  Node: General VC Options,  Next: RCS and SCCS,  Up: Customizing VC

32.1.11.1 General Options
.........................

Emacs normally does not save backup files for source files that are
maintained with version control.  If you want to make backup files even
for files that use version control, set the variable
`vc-make-backup-files' to a non-`nil' value.

   Normally the work file exists all the time, whether it is locked or
not.  If you set `vc-keep-workfiles' to `nil', then checking in a new
version with `C-x v v' deletes the work file; but any attempt to visit
the file with Emacs creates it again.  (With CVS, work files are always
kept.)

   Editing a version-controlled file through a symbolic link can be
dangerous.  It bypasses the version control system--you can edit the
file without locking it, and fail to check your changes in.  Also, your
changes might overwrite those of another user.  To protect against
this, VC checks each symbolic link that you visit, to see if it points
to a file under version control.

   The variable `vc-follow-symlinks' controls what to do when a
symbolic link points to a version-controlled file.  If it is `nil', VC
only displays a warning message.  If it is `t', VC automatically
follows the link, and visits the real file instead, telling you about
this in the echo area.  If the value is `ask' (the default), VC asks
you each time whether to follow the link.

   If `vc-suppress-confirm' is non-`nil', then `C-x v v' and `C-x v i'
can save the current buffer without asking, and `C-x v u' also operates
without asking for confirmation.  (This variable does not affect `C-x v
c'; that operation is so drastic that it should always ask for
confirmation.)

   VC mode does much of its work by running the shell commands for RCS,
CVS and SCCS.  If `vc-command-messages' is non-`nil', VC displays
messages to indicate which shell commands it runs, and additional
messages when the commands finish.

   You can specify additional directories to search for version control
programs by setting the variable `vc-path'.  These directories are
searched before the usual search path.  It is rarely necessary to set
this variable, because VC normally finds the proper files automatically.


File: emacs,  Node: RCS and SCCS,  Next: CVS Options,  Prev: General VC Options,  Up: Customizing VC

32.1.11.2 Options for RCS and SCCS
..................................

By default, RCS uses locking to coordinate the activities of several
users, but there is a mode called "non-strict locking" in which you can
check-in changes without locking the file first.  Use `rcs -U' to
switch to non-strict locking for a particular file, see the `rcs'
manual page for details.

   When deducing the version control state of an RCS file, VC first
looks for an RCS version header string in the file (*note Version
Headers::).  If there is no header string, VC normally looks at the
file permissions of the work file; this is fast.  But there might be
situations when the file permissions cannot be trusted.  In this case
the master file has to be consulted, which is rather expensive.  Also
the master file can only tell you _if_ there's any lock on the file,
but not whether your work file really contains that locked version.

   You can tell VC not to use version headers to determine the file
status by setting `vc-consult-headers' to `nil'.  VC then always uses
the file permissions (if it is supposed to trust them), or else checks
the master file.

   You can specify the criterion for whether to trust the file
permissions by setting the variable `vc-mistrust-permissions'.  Its
value can be `t' (always mistrust the file permissions and check the
master file), `nil' (always trust the file permissions), or a function
of one argument which makes the decision.  The argument is the
directory name of the `RCS' subdirectory.  A non-`nil' value from the
function says to mistrust the file permissions.  If you find that the
file permissions of work files are changed erroneously, set
`vc-mistrust-permissions' to `t'.  Then VC always checks the master
file to determine the file's status.

   VC determines the version control state of files under SCCS much as
with RCS.  It does not consider SCCS version headers, though.  Thus,
the variable `vc-mistrust-permissions' affects SCCS use, but
`vc-consult-headers' does not.


File: emacs,  Node: CVS Options,  Prev: RCS and SCCS,  Up: Customizing VC

32.1.11.3 Options specific for CVS
..................................

By default, CVS does not use locking to coordinate the activities of
several users; anyone can change a work file at any time.  However,
there are ways to restrict this, resulting in behavior that resembles
locking.

   For one thing, you can set the `CVSREAD' environment variable (the
value you use makes no difference).  If this variable is defined, CVS
makes your work files read-only by default.  In Emacs, you must type
`C-x v v' to make the file writable, so that editing works in fact
similar as if locking was used.  Note however, that no actual locking
is performed, so several users can make their files writable at the
same time.  When setting `CVSREAD' for the first time, make sure to
check out all your modules anew, so that the file protections are set
correctly.

   Another way to achieve something similar to locking is to use the
"watch" feature of CVS.  If a file is being watched, CVS makes it
read-only by default, and you must also use `C-x v v' in Emacs to make
it writable.  VC calls `cvs edit' to make the file writable, and CVS
takes care to notify other developers of the fact that you intend to
change the file.  See the CVS documentation for details on using the
watch feature.

   When a file's repository is on a remote machine, VC tries to keep
network interactions to a minimum.  This is controlled by the variable
`vc-cvs-stay-local'.  There is another variable, `vc-stay-local', which
enables the feature also for other back ends that support it, including
CVS.  In the following, we will talk only about `vc-cvs-stay-local',
but everything applies to `vc-stay-local' as well.

   If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is `t' (the default), then VC uses only the
entry in the local CVS subdirectory to determine the file's state (and
possibly information returned by previous CVS commands).  One
consequence of this is that when you have modified a file, and somebody
else has already checked in other changes to the file, you are not
notified of it until you actually try to commit.  (But you can try to
pick up any recent changes from the repository first, using `C-x v m
<RET>', *note Merging::).

   When `vc-cvs-stay-local' is `t', VC also makes local version
backups, so that simple diff and revert operations are completely local
(*note Version Backups::).

   On the other hand, if you set `vc-cvs-stay-local' to `nil', then VC
queries the remote repository _before_ it decides what to do in
`vc-next-action' (`C-x v v'), just as it does for local repositories.
It also does not make any version backups.

   You can also set `vc-cvs-stay-local' to a regular expression that is
matched against the repository host name; VC then stays local only for
repositories from hosts that match the pattern.

   You can specify additional command line options to pass to all CVS
operations in the variable `vc-cvs-global-switches'.  These switches
are inserted immediately after the `cvs' command, before the name of
the operation to invoke.


File: emacs,  Node: Change Log,  Next: Tags,  Prev: Version Control,  Up: Maintaining

32.2 Change Logs
================

A change log file contains a chronological record of when and why you
have changed a program, consisting of a sequence of entries describing
individual changes.  Normally it is kept in a file called `ChangeLog'
in the same directory as the file you are editing, or one of its parent
directories.  A single `ChangeLog' file can record changes for all the
files in its directory and all its subdirectories.

* Menu:

* Change Log Commands:: Commands for editing change log files.
* Format of ChangeLog:: What the change log file looks like.


File: emacs,  Node: Change Log Commands,  Next: Format of ChangeLog,  Up: Change Log

32.2.1 Change Log Commands
--------------------------

The Emacs command `C-x 4 a' adds a new entry to the change log file for
the file you are editing (`add-change-log-entry-other-window').  If
that file is actually a backup file, it makes an entry appropriate for
the file's parent--that is useful for making log entries for functions
that have been deleted in the current version.

   `C-x 4 a' visits the change log file and creates a new entry unless
the most recent entry is for today's date and your name.  It also
creates a new item for the current file.  For many languages, it can
even guess the name of the function or other object that was changed.

   When the variable `add-log-keep-changes-together' is non-`nil', `C-x
4 a' adds to any existing item for the file rather than starting a new
item.

   If `add-log-always-start-new-record' is non-`nil', `C-x 4 a' always
makes a new entry, even if the last entry was made by you and on the
same date.

   If the value of the variable `change-log-version-info-enabled' is
non-`nil', `C-x 4 a' adds the file's version number to the change log
entry.  It finds the version number by searching the first ten percent
of the file, using regular expressions from the variable
`change-log-version-number-regexp-list'.

   The change log file is visited in Change Log mode.  In this major
mode, each bunch of grouped items counts as one paragraph, and each
entry is considered a page.  This facilitates editing the entries.
`C-j' and auto-fill indent each new line like the previous line; this
is convenient for entering the contents of an entry.

   You can use the `next-error' command (by default bound to `C-x `')
to move between entries in the Change Log, when Change Log mode is on.
You will jump to the actual site in the file that was changed, not just
to the next Change Log entry.  You can also use `previous-error' to
move back in the same list.

   You can use the command `M-x change-log-merge' to merge other log
files into a buffer in Change Log Mode, preserving the date ordering of
entries.

   Version control systems are another way to keep track of changes in
your program and keep a change log.  In the VC log buffer, typing `C-c
C-a' (`log-edit-insert-changelog') inserts the relevant Change Log
entry, if one exists (*note Log Buffer::).  You can also insert a VC
log entry into a Change Log buffer by typing `C-x v a'
(`vc-update-change-log') in the Change Log buffer (*note Change Logs
and VC::).


File: emacs,  Node: Format of ChangeLog,  Prev: Change Log Commands,  Up: Change Log

32.2.2 Format of ChangeLog
--------------------------

A change log entry starts with a header line that contains the current
date, your name, and your email address (taken from the variable
`add-log-mailing-address').  Aside from these header lines, every line
in the change log starts with a space or a tab.  The bulk of the entry
consists of "items", each of which starts with a line starting with
whitespace and a star.  Here are two entries, both dated in May 1993,
with two items and one item respectively.

     1993-05-25  Richard Stallman  <rms@gnu.org>

             * man.el: Rename symbols `man-*' to `Man-*'.
             (manual-entry): Make prompt string clearer.

             * simple.el (blink-matching-paren-distance):
             Change default to 12,000.

     1993-05-24  Richard Stallman  <rms@gnu.org>

             * vc.el (minor-mode-map-alist): Don't use it if it's void.
             (vc-cancel-version): Doc fix.

   One entry can describe several changes; each change should have its
own item, or its own line in an item.  Normally there should be a blank
line between items.  When items are related (parts of the same change,
in different places), group them by leaving no blank line between them.

   You should put a copyright notice and permission notice at the end
of the change log file.  Here is an example:

     Copyright 1997, 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are
     permitted provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved.

Of course, you should substitute the proper years and copyright holder.


File: emacs,  Node: Tags,  Next: EDE,  Prev: Change Log,  Up: Maintaining

32.3 Tags Tables
================

A "tag" is a reference to a subunit in a program or in a document.  In
program source code, tags reference syntactic elements of the program:
functions, subroutines, data types, macros, etc.  In a document, tags
reference chapters, sections, appendices, etc.  Each tag specifies the
name of the file where the corresponding subunit is defined, and the
position of the subunit's definition in that file.

   A "tags table" records the tags extracted by scanning the source
code of a certain program or a certain document.  Tags extracted from
generated files reference the original files, rather than the generated
files that were scanned during tag extraction.  Examples of generated
files include C files generated from Cweb source files, from a Yacc
parser, or from Lex scanner definitions; `.i' preprocessed C files; and
Fortran files produced by preprocessing `.fpp' source files.

   To produce a tags table, you use the `etags' command, submitting it
a document or the source code of a program.  `etags' writes the tags to
a "tags table file", or "tags file" in short.  The conventional name
for a tags file is `TAGS'.

   Emacs uses the information recorded in tags tables in commands that
search or replace through multiple source files: these commands use the
names of the source files recorded in the tags table to know which
files to search.  Other commands, such as `M-.', which finds the
definition of a function, use the recorded information about the
function names and positions to find the source file and the position
within that file where the function is defined.

   See also the Ebrowse facility, which is tailored for C++.  *Note
Ebrowse: (ebrowse)Top.

* Menu:

* Tag Syntax::		Tag syntax for various types of code and text files.
* Create Tags Table::	Creating a tags table with `etags'.
* Etags Regexps::       Create arbitrary tags using regular expressions.
* Select Tags Table::	How to visit a tags table.
* Find Tag::		Commands to find the definition of a specific tag.
* Tags Search::		Using a tags table for searching and replacing.
* List Tags::		Listing and finding tags defined in a file.


File: emacs,  Node: Tag Syntax,  Next: Create Tags Table,  Up: Tags

32.3.1 Source File Tag Syntax
-----------------------------

Here is how tag syntax is defined for the most popular languages:

   * In C code, any C function or typedef is a tag, and so are
     definitions of `struct', `union' and `enum'.  `#define' macro
     definitions, `#undef' and `enum' constants are also tags, unless
     you specify `--no-defines' when making the tags table.  Similarly,
     global variables are tags, unless you specify `--no-globals', and
     so are struct members, unless you specify `--no-members'.  Use of
     `--no-globals', `--no-defines' and `--no-members' can make the
     tags table file much smaller.

     You can tag function declarations and external variables in
     addition to function definitions by giving the `--declarations'
     option to `etags'.

   * In C++ code, in addition to all the tag constructs of C code,
     member functions are also recognized; member variables are also
     recognized, unless you use the `--no-members' option.  Tags for
     variables and functions in classes are named `CLASS::VARIABLE' and
     `CLASS::FUNCTION'.  `operator' definitions have tag names like
     `operator+'.

   * In Java code, tags include all the constructs recognized in C++,
     plus the `interface', `extends' and `implements' constructs.  Tags
     for variables and functions in classes are named `CLASS.VARIABLE'
     and `CLASS.FUNCTION'.

   * In LaTeX text, the argument of any of the commands `\chapter',
     `\section', `\subsection', `\subsubsection', `\eqno', `\label',
     `\ref', `\cite', `\bibitem', `\part', `\appendix', `\entry',
     `\index', `\def', `\newcommand', `\renewcommand',
     `\newenvironment' or `\renewenvironment' is a tag.

     Other commands can make tags as well, if you specify them in the
     environment variable `TEXTAGS' before invoking `etags'.  The value
     of this environment variable should be a colon-separated list of
     command names.  For example,

          TEXTAGS="mycommand:myothercommand"
          export TEXTAGS

     specifies (using Bourne shell syntax) that the commands
     `\mycommand' and `\myothercommand' also define tags.

   * In Lisp code, any function defined with `defun', any variable
     defined with `defvar' or `defconst', and in general the first
     argument of any expression that starts with `(def' in column zero
     is a tag.

   * In Scheme code, tags include anything defined with `def' or with a
     construct whose name starts with `def'.  They also include
     variables set with `set!' at top level in the file.

   Several other languages are also supported:

   * In Ada code, functions, procedures, packages, tasks and types are
     tags.  Use the `--packages-only' option to create tags for
     packages only.

     In Ada, the same name can be used for different kinds of entity
     (e.g., for a procedure and for a function).  Also, for things like
     packages, procedures and functions, there is the spec (i.e. the
     interface) and the body (i.e. the implementation).  To make it
     easier to pick the definition you want, Ada tag name have suffixes
     indicating the type of entity:

    `/b'
          package body.

    `/f'
          function.

    `/k'
          task.

    `/p'
          procedure.

    `/s'
          package spec.

    `/t'
          type.

     Thus, `M-x find-tag <RET> bidule/b <RET>' will go directly to the
     body of the package `bidule', while `M-x find-tag <RET> bidule
     <RET>' will just search for any tag `bidule'.

   * In assembler code, labels appearing at the beginning of a line,
     followed by a colon, are tags.

   * In Bison or Yacc input files, each rule defines as a tag the
     nonterminal it constructs.  The portions of the file that contain
     C code are parsed as C code.

   * In Cobol code, tags are paragraph names; that is, any word
     starting in column 8 and followed by a period.

   * In Erlang code, the tags are the functions, records and macros
     defined in the file.

   * In Fortran code, functions, subroutines and block data are tags.

   * In HTML input files, the tags are the `title' and the `h1', `h2',
     `h3' headers.  Also, tags are `name=' in anchors and all
     occurrences of `id='.

   * In Lua input files, all functions are tags.

   * In makefiles, targets are tags; additionally, variables are tags
     unless you specify `--no-globals'.

   * In Objective C code, tags include Objective C definitions for
     classes, class categories, methods and protocols.  Tags for
     variables and functions in classes are named `CLASS::VARIABLE' and
     `CLASS::FUNCTION'.

   * In Pascal code, the tags are the functions and procedures defined
     in the file.

   * In Perl code, the tags are the packages, subroutines and variables
     defined by the `package', `sub', `my' and `local' keywords.  Use
     `--globals' if you want to tag global variables.  Tags for
     subroutines are named `PACKAGE::SUB'.  The name for subroutines
     defined in the default package is `main::SUB'.

   * In PHP code, tags are functions, classes and defines.  Vars are
     tags too, unless you use the `--no-members' option.

   * In PostScript code, the tags are the functions.

   * In Prolog code, tags are predicates and rules at the beginning of
     line.

   * In Python code, `def' or `class' at the beginning of a line
     generate a tag.

   You can also generate tags based on regexp matching (*note Etags
Regexps::) to handle other formats and languages.


File: emacs,  Node: Create Tags Table,  Next: Etags Regexps,  Prev: Tag Syntax,  Up: Tags

32.3.2 Creating Tags Tables
---------------------------

The `etags' program is used to create a tags table file.  It knows the
syntax of several languages, as described in *Note Tag Syntax::.  Here
is how to run `etags':

     etags INPUTFILES...

The `etags' program reads the specified files, and writes a tags table
named `TAGS' in the current working directory.  You can optionally
specify a different file name for the tags table by using the
`--output=FILE' option; specifying `-' as a file name prints the tags
table to standard output.

   If the specified files don't exist, `etags' looks for compressed
versions of them and uncompresses them to read them.  Under MS-DOS,
`etags' also looks for file names like `mycode.cgz' if it is given
`mycode.c' on the command line and `mycode.c' does not exist.

   `etags' recognizes the language used in an input file based on its
file name and contents.  You can specify the language with the
`--language=NAME' option, described below.

   If the tags table data become outdated due to changes in the files
described in the table, the way to update the tags table is the same
way it was made in the first place.  If the tags table fails to record
a tag, or records it for the wrong file, then Emacs cannot possibly
find its definition until you update the tags table.  However, if the
position recorded in the tags table becomes a little bit wrong (due to
other editing), the worst consequence is a slight delay in finding the
tag.  Even if the stored position is very far wrong, Emacs will still
find the tag, after searching most of the file for it.  That delay is
hardly noticeable with today's computers.

   Thus, there is no need to update the tags table after each edit.
You should update a tags table when you define new tags that you want
to have listed, or when you move tag definitions from one file to
another, or when changes become substantial.

   One tags table can virtually include another.  Specify the included
tags file name with the `--include=FILE' option when creating the file
that is to include it.  The latter file then acts as if it covered all
the source files specified in the included file, as well as the files
it directly contains.

   If you specify the source files with relative file names when you run
`etags', the tags file will contain file names relative to the
directory where the tags file was initially written.  This way, you can
move an entire directory tree containing both the tags file and the
source files, and the tags file will still refer correctly to the source
files.  If the tags file is `-' or is in the `/dev' directory, however,
the file names are made relative to the current working directory.
This is useful, for example, when writing the tags to `/dev/stdout'.

   When using a relative file name, it should not be a symbolic link
pointing to a tags file in a different directory, because this would
generally render the file names invalid.

   If you specify absolute file names as arguments to `etags', then the
tags file will contain absolute file names.  This way, the tags file
will still refer to the same files even if you move it, as long as the
source files remain in the same place.  Absolute file names start with
`/', or with `DEVICE:/' on MS-DOS and MS-Windows.

   When you want to make a tags table from a great number of files, you
may have problems listing them on the command line, because some systems
have a limit on its length.  The simplest way to circumvent this limit
is to tell `etags' to read the file names from its standard input, by
typing a dash in place of the file names, like this:

     find . -name "*.[chCH]" -print | etags -

   Use the option `--language=NAME' to specify the language explicitly.
You can intermix these options with file names; each one applies to
the file names that follow it.  Specify `--language=auto' to tell
`etags' to resume guessing the language from the file names and file
contents.  Specify `--language=none' to turn off language-specific
processing entirely; then `etags' recognizes tags by regexp matching
alone (*note Etags Regexps::).

   The option `--parse-stdin=FILE' is mostly useful when calling
`etags' from programs.  It can be used (only once) in place of a file
name on the command line.  `Etags' will read from standard input and
mark the produced tags as belonging to the file FILE.

   `etags --help' outputs the list of the languages `etags' knows, and
the file name rules for guessing the language.  It also prints a list
of all the available `etags' options, together with a short
explanation.  If followed by one or more `--language=LANG' options, it
outputs detailed information about how tags are generated for LANG.


File: emacs,  Node: Etags Regexps,  Next: Select Tags Table,  Prev: Create Tags Table,  Up: Tags

32.3.3 Etags Regexps
--------------------

The `--regex' option provides a general way of recognizing tags based
on regexp matching.  You can freely intermix this option with file
names, and each one applies to the source files that follow it.  If you
specify multiple `--regex' options, all of them are used in parallel.
The syntax is:

     --regex=[{LANGUAGE}]/TAGREGEXP/[NAMEREGEXP/]MODIFIERS

   The essential part of the option value is TAGREGEXP, the regexp for
matching tags.  It is always used anchored, that is, it only matches at
the beginning of a line.  If you want to allow indented tags, use a
regexp that matches initial whitespace; start it with `[ \t]*'.

   In these regular expressions, `\' quotes the next character, and all
the GCC character escape sequences are supported (`\a' for bell, `\b'
for back space, `\d' for delete, `\e' for escape, `\f' for formfeed,
`\n' for newline, `\r' for carriage return, `\t' for tab, and `\v' for
vertical tab).

   Ideally, TAGREGEXP should not match more characters than are needed
to recognize what you want to tag.  If the syntax requires you to write
TAGREGEXP so it matches more characters beyond the tag itself, you
should add a NAMEREGEXP, to pick out just the tag.  This will enable
Emacs to find tags more accurately and to do completion on tag names
more reliably.  You can find some examples below.

   The MODIFIERS are a sequence of zero or more characters that modify
the way `etags' does the matching.  A regexp with no modifiers is
applied sequentially to each line of the input file, in a
case-sensitive way.  The modifiers and their meanings are:

`i'
     Ignore case when matching this regexp.

`m'
     Match this regular expression against the whole file, so that
     multi-line matches are possible.

`s'
     Match this regular expression against the whole file, and allow
     `.' in TAGREGEXP to match newlines.

   The `-R' option cancels all the regexps defined by preceding
`--regex' options.  It too applies to the file names following it.
Here's an example:

     etags --regex=/REG1/i voo.doo --regex=/REG2/m \
         bar.ber -R --lang=lisp los.er

Here `etags' chooses the parsing language for `voo.doo' and `bar.ber'
according to their contents.  `etags' also uses REG1 to recognize
additional tags in `voo.doo', and both REG1 and REG2 to recognize
additional tags in `bar.ber'.  REG1 is checked against each line of
`voo.doo' and `bar.ber', in a case-insensitive way, while REG2 is
checked against the whole `bar.ber' file, permitting multi-line
matches, in a case-sensitive way.  `etags' uses only the Lisp tags
rules, with no user-specified regexp matching, to recognize tags in
`los.er'.

   You can restrict a `--regex' option to match only files of a given
language by using the optional prefix {LANGUAGE}.  (`etags --help'
prints the list of languages recognized by `etags'.)  This is
particularly useful when storing many predefined regular expressions
for `etags' in a file.  The following example tags the `DEFVAR' macros
in the Emacs source files, for the C language only:

     --regex='{c}/[ \t]*DEFVAR_[A-Z_ \t(]+"\([^"]+\)"/'

When you have complex regular expressions, you can store the list of
them in a file.  The following option syntax instructs `etags' to read
two files of regular expressions.  The regular expressions contained in
the second file are matched without regard to case.

     --regex=@CASE-SENSITIVE-FILE --ignore-case-regex=@IGNORE-CASE-FILE

A regex file for `etags' contains one regular expression per line.
Empty lines, and lines beginning with space or tab are ignored.  When
the first character in a line is `@', `etags' assumes that the rest of
the line is the name of another file of regular expressions; thus, one
such file can include another file.  All the other lines are taken to
be regular expressions.  If the first non-whitespace text on the line
is `--', that line is a comment.

   For example, we can create a file called `emacs.tags' with the
following contents:

             -- This is for GNU Emacs C source files
     {c}/[ \t]*DEFVAR_[A-Z_ \t(]+"\([^"]+\)"/\1/

and then use it like this:

     etags --regex=@emacs.tags *.[ch] */*.[ch]

   Here are some more examples.  The regexps are quoted to protect them
from shell interpretation.

   * Tag Octave files:

          etags --language=none \
                --regex='/[ \t]*function.*=[ \t]*\([^ \t]*\)[ \t]*(/\1/' \
                --regex='/###key \(.*\)/\1/' \
                --regex='/[ \t]*global[ \t].*/' \
                *.m

     Note that tags are not generated for scripts, so that you have to
     add a line by yourself of the form `###key SCRIPTNAME' if you want
     to jump to it.

   * Tag Tcl files:

          etags --language=none --regex='/proc[ \t]+\([^ \t]+\)/\1/' *.tcl

   * Tag VHDL files:

          etags --language=none \
            --regex='/[ \t]*\(ARCHITECTURE\|CONFIGURATION\) +[^ ]* +OF/' \
            --regex='/[ \t]*\(ATTRIBUTE\|ENTITY\|FUNCTION\|PACKAGE\
            \( BODY\)?\|PROCEDURE\|PROCESS\|TYPE\)[ \t]+\([^ \t(]+\)/\3/'


File: emacs,  Node: Select Tags Table,  Next: Find Tag,  Prev: Etags Regexps,  Up: Tags

32.3.4 Selecting a Tags Table
-----------------------------

Emacs has at any time one "selected" tags table, and all the commands
for working with tags tables use the selected one.  To select a tags
table, type `M-x visit-tags-table', which reads the tags table file
name as an argument, with `TAGS' in the default directory as the
default.

   Emacs does not actually read in the tags table contents until you
try to use them; all `visit-tags-table' does is store the file name in
the variable `tags-file-name', and setting the variable yourself is
just as good.  The variable's initial value is `nil'; that value tells
all the commands for working with tags tables that they must ask for a
tags table file name to use.

   Using `visit-tags-table' when a tags table is already loaded gives
you a choice: you can add the new tags table to the current list of
tags tables, or start a new list.  The tags commands use all the tags
tables in the current list.  If you start a new list, the new tags table
is used _instead_ of others.  If you add the new table to the current
list, it is used _as well as_ the others.

   You can specify a precise list of tags tables by setting the variable
`tags-table-list' to a list of strings, like this:

     (setq tags-table-list
           '("~/emacs" "/usr/local/lib/emacs/src"))

This tells the tags commands to look at the `TAGS' files in your
`~/emacs' directory and in the `/usr/local/lib/emacs/src' directory.
The order depends on which file you are in and which tags table
mentions that file, as explained above.

   Do not set both `tags-file-name' and `tags-table-list'.


File: emacs,  Node: Find Tag,  Next: Tags Search,  Prev: Select Tags Table,  Up: Tags

32.3.5 Finding a Tag
--------------------

The most important thing that a tags table enables you to do is to find
the definition of a specific tag.

`M-. TAG <RET>'
     Find first definition of TAG (`find-tag').

`C-u M-.'
     Find next alternate definition of last tag specified.

`C-u - M-.'
     Go back to previous tag found.

`C-M-. PATTERN <RET>'
     Find a tag whose name matches PATTERN (`find-tag-regexp').

`C-u C-M-.'
     Find the next tag whose name matches the last pattern used.

`C-x 4 . TAG <RET>'
     Find first definition of TAG, but display it in another window
     (`find-tag-other-window').

`C-x 5 . TAG <RET>'
     Find first definition of TAG, and create a new frame to select the
     buffer (`find-tag-other-frame').

`M-*'
     Pop back to where you previously invoked `M-.' and friends.

   `M-.' (`find-tag') is the command to find the definition of a
specified tag.  It searches through the tags table for that tag, as a
string, and then uses the tags table info to determine the file that the
definition is in and the approximate character position in the file of
the definition.  Then `find-tag' visits that file, moves point to the
approximate character position, and searches ever-increasing distances
away to find the tag definition.

   If an empty argument is given (just type <RET>), the balanced
expression in the buffer before or around point is used as the TAG
argument.  *Note Expressions::.

   You don't need to give `M-.' the full name of the tag; a part will
do.  This is because `M-.' finds tags in the table which contain TAG as
a substring.  However, it prefers an exact match to a substring match.
To find other tags that match the same substring, give `find-tag' a
numeric argument, as in `C-u M-.'; this does not read a tag name, but
continues searching the tags table's text for another tag containing
the same substring last used.  If you have a real <META> key, `M-0 M-.'
is an easier alternative to `C-u M-.'.

   Like most commands that can switch buffers, `find-tag' has a variant
that displays the new buffer in another window, and one that makes a
new frame for it.  The former is `C-x 4 .', which invokes the command
`find-tag-other-window'.  The latter is `C-x 5 .', which invokes
`find-tag-other-frame'.

   To move back to places you've found tags recently, use `C-u - M-.';
more generally, `M-.' with a negative numeric argument.  This command
can take you to another buffer.  `C-x 4 .' with a negative argument
finds the previous tag location in another window.

   As well as going back to places you've found tags recently, you can
go back to places _from where_ you found them.  Use `M-*', which
invokes the command `pop-tag-mark', for this.  Typically you would find
and study the definition of something with `M-.' and then return to
where you were with `M-*'.

   Both `C-u - M-.' and `M-*' allow you to retrace your steps to a
depth determined by the variable `find-tag-marker-ring-length'.

   The command `C-M-.' (`find-tag-regexp') visits the tags that match a
specified regular expression.  It is just like `M-.' except that it
does regexp matching instead of substring matching.


File: emacs,  Node: Tags Search,  Next: List Tags,  Prev: Find Tag,  Up: Tags

32.3.6 Searching and Replacing with Tags Tables
-----------------------------------------------

The commands in this section visit and search all the files listed in
the selected tags table, one by one.  For these commands, the tags
table serves only to specify a sequence of files to search.  These
commands scan the list of tags tables starting with the first tags
table (if any) that describes the current file, proceed from there to
the end of the list, and then scan from the beginning of the list until
they have covered all the tables in the list.

`M-x tags-search <RET> REGEXP <RET>'
     Search for REGEXP through the files in the selected tags table.

`M-x tags-query-replace <RET> REGEXP <RET> REPLACEMENT <RET>'
     Perform a `query-replace-regexp' on each file in the selected tags
     table.

`M-,'
     Restart one of the commands above, from the current location of
     point (`tags-loop-continue').

   `M-x tags-search' reads a regexp using the minibuffer, then searches
for matches in all the files in the selected tags table, one file at a
time.  It displays the name of the file being searched so you can
follow its progress.  As soon as it finds an occurrence, `tags-search'
returns.

   Having found one match, you probably want to find all the rest.  To
find one more match, type `M-,' (`tags-loop-continue') to resume the
`tags-search'.  This searches the rest of the current buffer, followed
by the remaining files of the tags table.

   `M-x tags-query-replace' performs a single `query-replace-regexp'
through all the files in the tags table.  It reads a regexp to search
for and a string to replace with, just like ordinary `M-x
query-replace-regexp'.  It searches much like `M-x tags-search', but
repeatedly, processing matches according to your input.  *Note
Replace::, for more information on query replace.

   You can control the case-sensitivity of tags search commands by
customizing the value of the variable `tags-case-fold-search'.  The
default is to use the same setting as the value of `case-fold-search'
(*note Search Case::).

   It is possible to get through all the files in the tags table with a
single invocation of `M-x tags-query-replace'.  But often it is useful
to exit temporarily, which you can do with any input event that has no
special query replace meaning.  You can resume the query replace
subsequently by typing `M-,'; this command resumes the last tags search
or replace command that you did.  For instance, to skip the rest of the
current file, you can type `M-> M-,'.

   The commands in this section carry out much broader searches than the
`find-tag' family.  The `find-tag' commands search only for definitions
of tags that match your substring or regexp.  The commands
`tags-search' and `tags-query-replace' find every occurrence of the
regexp, as ordinary search commands and replace commands do in the
current buffer.

   These commands create buffers only temporarily for the files that
they have to search (those which are not already visited in Emacs
buffers).  Buffers in which no match is found are quickly killed; the
others continue to exist.

   It may have struck you that `tags-search' is a lot like `grep'.  You
can also run `grep' itself as an inferior of Emacs and have Emacs show
you the matching lines one by one.  *Note Grep Searching::.


File: emacs,  Node: List Tags,  Prev: Tags Search,  Up: Tags

32.3.7 Tags Table Inquiries
---------------------------

`M-x list-tags <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Display a list of the tags defined in the program file FILE.

`M-x tags-apropos <RET> REGEXP <RET>'
     Display a list of all tags matching REGEXP.

   `M-x list-tags' reads the name of one of the files described by the
selected tags table, and displays a list of all the tags defined in
that file.  The "file name" argument is really just a string to compare
against the file names recorded in the tags table; it is read as a
string rather than as a file name.  Therefore, completion and
defaulting are not available, and you must enter the file name the same
way it appears in the tags table.  Do not include a directory as part of
the file name unless the file name recorded in the tags table includes a
directory.

   `M-x tags-apropos' is like `apropos' for tags (*note Apropos::).  It
finds all the tags in the selected tags table whose entries match
REGEXP, and displays them.  If the variable `tags-apropos-verbose' is
non-`nil', it displays the names of the tags files together with the
tag names.

   You can customize the appearance of the output by setting the
variable `tags-tag-face' to a face.  You can display additional output
with `M-x tags-apropos' by customizing the variable
`tags-apropos-additional-actions'--see its documentation for details.

   You can also use the collection of tag names to complete a symbol
name in the buffer.  *Note Symbol Completion::.


File: emacs,  Node: Emerge,  Prev: EDE,  Up: Maintaining

32.4 Merging Files with Emerge
==============================

It's not unusual for programmers to get their signals crossed and
modify the same program in two different directions.  To recover from
this confusion, you need to merge the two versions.  Emerge makes this
easier.  For other ways to compare files, see *Note Comparing Files::,
and *Note Ediff: (ediff)Top.

* Menu:

* Overview of Emerge::	How to start Emerge.  Basic concepts.
* Submodes of Emerge::	Fast mode vs. Edit mode.
			  Skip Prefers mode and Auto Advance mode.
* State of Difference::	You do the merge by specifying state A or B
			  for each difference.
* Merge Commands::	Commands for selecting a difference,
			  changing states of differences, etc.
* Exiting Emerge::	What to do when you've finished the merge.
* Combining in Emerge::	    How to keep both alternatives for a difference.
* Fine Points of Emerge::   Miscellaneous issues.


File: emacs,  Node: Overview of Emerge,  Next: Submodes of Emerge,  Up: Emerge

32.4.1 Overview of Emerge
-------------------------

To start Emerge, run one of these four commands:

`M-x emerge-files'
     Merge two specified files.

`M-x emerge-files-with-ancestor'
     Merge two specified files, with reference to a common ancestor.

`M-x emerge-buffers'
     Merge two buffers.

`M-x emerge-buffers-with-ancestor'
     Merge two buffers with reference to a common ancestor in a third
     buffer.

   The Emerge commands compare two files or buffers, and display the
comparison in three buffers: one for each input text (the "A buffer"
and the "B buffer"), and one (the "merge buffer") where merging takes
place.  The merge buffer shows the full merged text, not just the
differences.  Wherever the two input texts differ, you can choose which
one of them to include in the merge buffer.

   The Emerge commands that take input from existing buffers use only
the accessible portions of those buffers, if they are narrowed.  *Note
Narrowing::.

   If a common ancestor version is available, from which the two texts
to be merged were both derived, Emerge can use it to guess which
alternative is right.  Wherever one current version agrees with the
ancestor, Emerge presumes that the other current version is a deliberate
change which should be kept in the merged version.  Use the
`with-ancestor' commands if you want to specify a common ancestor text.
These commands read three file or buffer names--variant A, variant B,
and the common ancestor.

   After the comparison is done and the buffers are prepared, the
interactive merging starts.  You control the merging by typing special
"merge commands" in the merge buffer (*note Merge Commands::).  For
each run of differences between the input texts, you can choose which
one of them to keep, or edit them both together.

   The merge buffer uses a special major mode, Emerge mode, with
commands for making these choices.  But you can also edit the buffer
with ordinary Emacs commands.

   At any given time, the attention of Emerge is focused on one
particular difference, called the "selected" difference.  This
difference is marked off in the three buffers like this:

     vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
     TEXT THAT DIFFERS
     ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

Emerge numbers all the differences sequentially and the mode line
always shows the number of the selected difference.

   Normally, the merge buffer starts out with the A version of the text.
But when the A version of a difference agrees with the common ancestor,
then the B version is initially preferred for that difference.

   Emerge leaves the merged text in the merge buffer when you exit.  At
that point, you can save it in a file with `C-x C-w'.  If you give a
numeric argument to `emerge-files' or `emerge-files-with-ancestor', it
reads the name of the output file using the minibuffer.  (This is the
last file name those commands read.)  Then exiting from Emerge saves
the merged text in the output file.

   Normally, Emerge commands save the output buffer in its file when you
exit.  If you abort Emerge with `C-]', the Emerge command does not save
the output buffer, but you can save it yourself if you wish.


File: emacs,  Node: Submodes of Emerge,  Next: State of Difference,  Prev: Overview of Emerge,  Up: Emerge

32.4.2 Submodes of Emerge
-------------------------

You can choose between two modes for giving merge commands: Fast mode
and Edit mode.  In Fast mode, basic merge commands are single
characters, but ordinary Emacs commands are disabled.  This is
convenient if you use only merge commands.  In Edit mode, all merge
commands start with the prefix key `C-c C-c', and the normal Emacs
commands are also available.  This allows editing the merge buffer, but
slows down Emerge operations.

   Use `e' to switch to Edit mode, and `C-c C-c f' to switch to Fast
mode.  The mode line indicates Edit and Fast modes with `E' and `F'.

   Emerge has two additional submodes that affect how particular merge
commands work: Auto Advance mode and Skip Prefers mode.

   If Auto Advance mode is in effect, the `a' and `b' commands advance
to the next difference.  This lets you go through the merge faster as
long as you simply choose one of the alternatives from the input.  The
mode line indicates Auto Advance mode with `A'.

   If Skip Prefers mode is in effect, the `n' and `p' commands skip
over differences in states "prefer-A" and "prefer-B" (*note State of
Difference::).  Thus you see only differences for which neither version
is presumed "correct."  The mode line indicates Skip Prefers mode with
`S'.  This mode is only relevant when there is an ancestor.

   Use the command `s a' (`emerge-auto-advance-mode') to set or clear
Auto Advance mode.  Use `s s' (`emerge-skip-prefers-mode') to set or
clear Skip Prefers mode.  These commands turn on the mode with a
positive argument, turn it off with a negative or zero argument, and
toggle the mode with no argument.


File: emacs,  Node: State of Difference,  Next: Merge Commands,  Prev: Submodes of Emerge,  Up: Emerge

32.4.3 State of a Difference
----------------------------

In the merge buffer, a difference is marked with lines of `v' and `^'
characters.  Each difference has one of these seven states:

A
     The difference is showing the A version.  The `a' command always
     produces this state; the mode line indicates it with `A'.

B
     The difference is showing the B version.  The `b' command always
     produces this state; the mode line indicates it with `B'.

default-A
default-B
     The difference is showing the A or the B state by default, because
     you haven't made a choice.  All differences start in the default-A
     state (and thus the merge buffer is a copy of the A buffer),
     except those for which one alternative is "preferred" (see below).

     When you select a difference, its state changes from default-A or
     default-B to plain A or B.  Thus, the selected difference never has
     state default-A or default-B, and these states are never displayed
     in the mode line.

     The command `d a' chooses default-A as the default state, and `d
     b' chooses default-B.  This chosen default applies to all
     differences that you have never selected and for which no
     alternative is preferred.  If you are moving through the merge
     sequentially, the differences you haven't selected are those
     following the selected one.  Thus, while moving sequentially, you
     can effectively make the A version the default for some sections
     of the merge buffer and the B version the default for others by
     using `d a' and `d b' between sections.

prefer-A
prefer-B
     The difference is showing the A or B state because it is
     "preferred".  This means that you haven't made an explicit choice,
     but one alternative seems likely to be right because the other
     alternative agrees with the common ancestor.  Thus, where the A
     buffer agrees with the common ancestor, the B version is
     preferred, because chances are it is the one that was actually
     changed.

     These two states are displayed in the mode line as `A*' and `B*'.

combined
     The difference is showing a combination of the A and B states, as a
     result of the `x c' or `x C' commands.

     Once a difference is in this state, the `a' and `b' commands don't
     do anything to it unless you give them a numeric argument.

     The mode line displays this state as `comb'.


File: emacs,  Node: Merge Commands,  Next: Exiting Emerge,  Prev: State of Difference,  Up: Emerge

32.4.4 Merge Commands
---------------------

Here are the Merge commands for Fast mode; in Edit mode, precede them
with `C-c C-c':

`p'
     Select the previous difference.

`n'
     Select the next difference.

`a'
     Choose the A version of this difference.

`b'
     Choose the B version of this difference.

`C-u N j'
     Select difference number N.

`.'
     Select the difference containing point.

`q'
     Quit--finish the merge.

`C-]'
     Abort--exit merging and do not save the output.

`f'
     Go into Fast mode.  (In Edit mode, this is actually `C-c C-c f'.)

`e'
     Go into Edit mode.

`l'
     Recenter (like `C-l') all three windows.  With an argument,
     reestablish the default three-window display.

`-'
     Specify part of a prefix numeric argument.

`DIGIT'
     Also specify part of a prefix numeric argument.

`d a'
     Choose the A version as the default from here down in the merge
     buffer.

`d b'
     Choose the B version as the default from here down in the merge
     buffer.

`c a'
     Copy the A version of this difference into the kill ring.

`c b'
     Copy the B version of this difference into the kill ring.

`i a'
     Insert the A version of this difference at point.

`i b'
     Insert the B version of this difference at point.

`m'
     Put point and mark around the difference.

`^'
     Scroll all three windows down (like `M-v').

`v'
     Scroll all three windows up (like `C-v').

`<'
     Scroll all three windows left (like `C-x <').

`>'
     Scroll all three windows right (like `C-x >').

`|'
     Reset horizontal scroll on all three windows.

`x 1'
     Shrink the merge window to one line.  (Use `C-u l' to restore it
     to full size.)

`x c'
     Combine the two versions of this difference (*note Combining in
     Emerge::).

`x f'
     Show the names of the files/buffers Emerge is operating on, in a
     Help window.  (Use `C-u l' to restore windows.)

`x j'
     Join this difference with the following one.  (`C-u x j' joins
     this difference with the previous one.)

`x s'
     Split this difference into two differences.  Before you use this
     command, position point in each of the three buffers at the place
     where you want to split the difference.

`x t'
     Trim identical lines off the top and bottom of the difference.
     Such lines occur when the A and B versions are identical but
     differ from the ancestor version.


File: emacs,  Node: Exiting Emerge,  Next: Combining in Emerge,  Prev: Merge Commands,  Up: Emerge

32.4.5 Exiting Emerge
---------------------

The `q' command (`emerge-quit') finishes the merge, storing the results
into the output file if you specified one.  It restores the A and B
buffers to their proper contents, or kills them if they were created by
Emerge and you haven't changed them.  It also disables the Emerge
commands in the merge buffer, since executing them later could damage
the contents of the various buffers.

   `C-]' aborts the merge.  This means exiting without writing the
output file.  If you didn't specify an output file, then there is no
real difference between aborting and finishing the merge.

   If the Emerge command was called from another Lisp program, then its
return value is `t' for successful completion, or `nil' if you abort.


File: emacs,  Node: Combining in Emerge,  Next: Fine Points of Emerge,  Prev: Exiting Emerge,  Up: Emerge

32.4.6 Combining the Two Versions
---------------------------------

Sometimes you want to keep _both_ alternatives for a particular
difference.  To do this, use `x c', which edits the merge buffer like
this:

     #ifdef NEW
     VERSION FROM A BUFFER
     #else /* not NEW */
     VERSION FROM B BUFFER
     #endif /* not NEW */

While this example shows C preprocessor conditionals delimiting the two
alternative versions, you can specify the strings to use by setting the
variable `emerge-combine-versions-template' to a string of your choice.
In the string, `%a' says where to put version A, and `%b' says where
to put version B.  The default setting, which produces the results
shown above, looks like this:

     "#ifdef NEW\n%a#else /* not NEW */\n%b#endif /* not NEW */\n"


File: emacs,  Node: Fine Points of Emerge,  Prev: Combining in Emerge,  Up: Emerge

32.4.7 Fine Points of Emerge
----------------------------

During the merge, you mustn't try to edit the A and B buffers yourself.
Emerge modifies them temporarily, but ultimately puts them back the way
they were.

   You can have any number of merges going at once--just don't use any
one buffer as input to more than one merge at once, since the temporary
changes made in these buffers would get in each other's way.

   Starting Emerge can take a long time because it needs to compare the
files fully.  Emacs can't do anything else until `diff' finishes.
Perhaps in the future someone will change Emerge to do the comparison in
the background when the input files are large--then you could keep on
doing other things with Emacs until Emerge is ready to accept commands.

   After setting up the merge, Emerge runs the hook
`emerge-startup-hook'.  *Note Hooks::.


File: emacs,  Node: EDE,  Next: Emerge,  Prev: Tags,  Up: Maintaining

32.5 Emacs Development Environment
==================================

EDE ("Emacs Development Environment") is a package that simplifies the
task of creating, building, and debugging large programs with Emacs.
It provides some of the features of an IDE, or "Integrated Development
Environment", in Emacs.

   This section provides a brief description of EDE usage.  For full
details, see *Note EDE: (ede)Top.

   EDE is implemented as a global minor mode (*note Minor Modes::).  To
enable it, type `M-x global-ede-mode' or click on the `Project Support
(EDE)' item in the `Tools' menu.  You can also enable EDE each time you
start Emacs, by adding the following line to your initialization file:

     (global-ede-mode t)

Activating EDE adds a menu named `Development' to the menu bar.  Many
EDE commands, including the ones described below, can be invoked from
this menu.

   EDE organizes files into "projects", which correspond to directory
trees.  The "project root" is the topmost directory of a project.  To
define a new project, visit a file in the desired project root and type
`M-x ede-new'.  This command prompts for a "project type", which refers
to the underlying method that EDE will use to manage the project (*note
EDE: (ede)Creating a Project.).  The most common project types are
`Make', which uses Makefiles, and `Automake', which uses GNU Automake
(*note Automake: (automake)Top.).  In both cases, EDE also creates a
file named `Project.ede', which stores information about the project.

   A project may contain one or more "targets".  A target can be an
object file, executable program, or some other type of file, which is
"built" from one or more of the files in the project.

   To add a new "target" to a project, type `C-c . t' (`M-x
ede-new-target').  This command also asks if you wish to "add" the
current file to that target, which means that the target is to be built
from that file.  After you have defined a target, you can add more
files to it by typing `C-c . a' (`ede-add-file').

   To build a target, type `C-c . c' (`ede-compile-target').  To build
all the targets in the project, type `C-c . C' (`ede-compile-project').
EDE uses the file types to guess how the target should be built.


File: emacs,  Node: Abbrevs,  Next: Picture Mode,  Prev: Maintaining,  Up: Top

33 Abbrevs
**********

A defined "abbrev" is a word which "expands", if you insert it, into
some different text.  Abbrevs are defined by the user to expand in
specific ways.  For example, you might define `foo' as an abbrev
expanding to `find outer otter'.  Then you could insert `find outer
otter ' into the buffer by typing `f o o <SPC>'.

   A second kind of abbreviation facility is called "dynamic abbrev
expansion".  You use dynamic abbrev expansion with an explicit command
to expand the letters in the buffer before point by looking for other
words in the buffer that start with those letters.  *Note Dynamic
Abbrevs::.

   "Hippie" expansion generalizes abbreviation expansion.  *Note Hippie
Expansion: (autotype)Hippie Expand.

* Menu:

* Abbrev Concepts::   Fundamentals of defined abbrevs.
* Defining Abbrevs::  Defining an abbrev, so it will expand when typed.
* Expanding Abbrevs:: Controlling expansion: prefixes, canceling expansion.
* Editing Abbrevs::   Viewing or editing the entire list of defined abbrevs.
* Saving Abbrevs::    Saving the entire list of abbrevs for another session.
* Dynamic Abbrevs::   Abbreviations for words already in the buffer.
* Dabbrev Customization:: What is a word, for dynamic abbrevs.  Case handling.


File: emacs,  Node: Abbrev Concepts,  Next: Defining Abbrevs,  Up: Abbrevs

33.1 Abbrev Concepts
====================

An "abbrev" is a word which has been defined to "expand" into a
specified "expansion".  When you insert a word-separator character
following the abbrev, that expands the abbrev--replacing the abbrev
with its expansion.  For example, if `foo' is defined as an abbrev
expanding to `find outer otter', then you can insert `find outer
otter.' into the buffer by typing `f o o .'.

   Abbrevs expand only when Abbrev mode (a minor mode) is enabled.
Disabling Abbrev mode does not cause abbrev definitions to be forgotten,
but they do not expand until Abbrev mode is enabled again.  The command
`M-x abbrev-mode' toggles Abbrev mode; with a numeric argument, it
turns Abbrev mode on if the argument is positive, off otherwise.  *Note
Minor Modes::.  `abbrev-mode' is also a variable; Abbrev mode is on
when the variable is non-`nil'.  The variable `abbrev-mode'
automatically becomes local to the current buffer when it is set.

   Abbrevs can have "mode-specific" definitions, active only in one
major mode.  Abbrevs can also have "global" definitions that are active
in all major modes.  The same abbrev can have a global definition and
various mode-specific definitions for different major modes.  A
mode-specific definition for the current major mode overrides a global
definition.

   You can define abbrevs interactively during the editing session.  You
can also save lists of abbrev definitions in files for use in later
sessions.  Some users keep extensive lists of abbrevs that they load in
every session.


File: emacs,  Node: Defining Abbrevs,  Next: Expanding Abbrevs,  Prev: Abbrev Concepts,  Up: Abbrevs

33.2 Defining Abbrevs
=====================

`C-x a g'
     Define an abbrev, using one or more words before point as its
     expansion (`add-global-abbrev').

`C-x a l'
     Similar, but define an abbrev specific to the current major mode
     (`add-mode-abbrev').

`C-x a i g'
     Define a word in the buffer as an abbrev
     (`inverse-add-global-abbrev').

`C-x a i l'
     Define a word in the buffer as a mode-specific abbrev
     (`inverse-add-mode-abbrev').

`M-x define-global-abbrev <RET> ABBREV <RET> EXP <RET>'
     Define ABBREV as an abbrev expanding into EXP.

`M-x define-mode-abbrev <RET> ABBREV <RET> EXP <RET>'
     Define ABBREV as a mode-specific abbrev expanding into EXP.

`M-x kill-all-abbrevs'
     Discard all abbrev definitions, leaving a blank slate.

   The usual way to define an abbrev is to enter the text you want the
abbrev to expand to, position point after it, and type `C-x a g'
(`add-global-abbrev').  This reads the abbrev itself using the
minibuffer, and then defines it as an abbrev for one or more words
before point.  Use a numeric argument to say how many words before
point should be taken as the expansion.  For example, to define the
abbrev `foo' as mentioned above, insert the text `find outer otter' and
then type `C-u 3 C-x a g f o o <RET>'.

   An argument of zero to `C-x a g' means to use the contents of the
region as the expansion of the abbrev being defined.

   The command `C-x a l' (`add-mode-abbrev') is similar, but defines a
mode-specific abbrev.  Mode-specific abbrevs are active only in a
particular major mode.  `C-x a l' defines an abbrev for the major mode
in effect at the time `C-x a l' is typed.  The arguments work the same
as for `C-x a g'.

   If the abbrev text itself is already in the buffer, you can use the
commands `C-x a i g' (`inverse-add-global-abbrev') and `C-x a i l'
(`inverse-add-mode-abbrev') to define it as an abbrev by specify the
expansion in the minibuffer.  These commands are called "inverse"
because they invert the meaning of the two text strings they use (one
from the buffer and one read with the minibuffer).

   You can define an abbrev without inserting either the abbrev or its
expansion in the buffer using the command `define-global-abbrev'.  It
reads two arguments--the abbrev, and its expansion.  The command
`define-mode-abbrev' does likewise for a mode-specific abbrev.

   To change the definition of an abbrev, just define a new definition.
When the abbrev has a prior definition, the abbrev definition commands
ask for confirmation before replacing it.

   To remove an abbrev definition, give a negative argument to the
abbrev definition command: `C-u - C-x a g' or `C-u - C-x a l'.  The
former removes a global definition, while the latter removes a
mode-specific definition.  `M-x kill-all-abbrevs' removes all abbrev
definitions, both global and local.


File: emacs,  Node: Expanding Abbrevs,  Next: Editing Abbrevs,  Prev: Defining Abbrevs,  Up: Abbrevs

33.3 Controlling Abbrev Expansion
=================================

When Abbrev mode is enabled, an abbrev expands whenever it is present
in the buffer just before point and you type a self-inserting
whitespace or punctuation character (<SPC>, comma, etc.).  More
precisely, any character that is not a word constituent expands an
abbrev, and any word-constituent character can be part of an abbrev.
The most common way to use an abbrev is to insert it and then insert a
punctuation or whitespace character to expand it.

   Abbrev expansion preserves case; thus, `foo' expands into `find
outer otter'; `Foo' into `Find outer otter', and `FOO' into `FIND OUTER
OTTER' or `Find Outer Otter' according to the variable
`abbrev-all-caps' (setting it non-`nil' specifies `FIND OUTER OTTER').

   These commands are used to control abbrev expansion:

`M-''
     Separate a prefix from a following abbrev to be expanded
     (`abbrev-prefix-mark').

`C-x a e'
     Expand the abbrev before point (`expand-abbrev').  This is
     effective even when Abbrev mode is not enabled.

`M-x expand-region-abbrevs'
     Expand some or all abbrevs found in the region.

   You may wish to expand an abbrev and attach a prefix to the
expansion; for example, if `cnst' expands into `construction', you
might want to use it to enter `reconstruction'.  It does not work to
type `recnst', because that is not necessarily a defined abbrev.  What
you can do is use the command `M-'' (`abbrev-prefix-mark') in between
the prefix `re' and the abbrev `cnst'.  First, insert `re'.  Then type
`M-''; this inserts a hyphen in the buffer to indicate that it has done
its work.  Then insert the abbrev `cnst'; the buffer now contains
`re-cnst'.  Now insert a non-word character to expand the abbrev `cnst'
into `construction'.  This expansion step also deletes the hyphen that
indicated `M-'' had been used.  The result is the desired
`reconstruction'.

   If you actually want the text of the abbrev in the buffer, rather
than its expansion, you can accomplish this by inserting the following
punctuation with `C-q'.  Thus, `foo C-q ,' leaves `foo,' in the buffer,
not expanding it.

   If you expand an abbrev by mistake, you can undo the expansion and
bring back the abbrev itself by typing `C-_' to undo (*note Undo::).
This also undoes the insertion of the non-word character that expanded
the abbrev.  If the result you want is the terminating non-word
character plus the unexpanded abbrev, you must reinsert the terminating
character, quoting it with `C-q'.  You can also use the command `M-x
unexpand-abbrev' to cancel the last expansion without deleting the
terminating character.

   `M-x expand-region-abbrevs' searches through the region for defined
abbrevs, and for each one found offers to replace it with its expansion.
This command is useful if you have typed in text using abbrevs but
forgot to turn on Abbrev mode first.  It may also be useful together
with a special set of abbrev definitions for making several global
replacements at once.  This command is effective even if Abbrev mode is
not enabled.

   Expanding any abbrev runs `abbrev-expand-functions', a special hook.
Functions in this special hook can make arbitrary changes to the
abbrev expansion.  *Note Abbrev Expansion: (elisp)Abbrev Expansion.


File: emacs,  Node: Editing Abbrevs,  Next: Saving Abbrevs,  Prev: Expanding Abbrevs,  Up: Abbrevs

33.4 Examining and Editing Abbrevs
==================================

`M-x list-abbrevs'
     Display a list of all abbrev definitions.  With a numeric
     argument, list only local abbrevs.

`M-x edit-abbrevs'
     Edit a list of abbrevs; you can add, alter or remove definitions.

   The output from `M-x list-abbrevs' looks like this:

     VARIOUS OTHER TABLES...
     (lisp-mode-abbrev-table)
     "dk"	       0    "define-key"
     (global-abbrev-table)
     "dfn"	       0    "definition"

(Some blank lines of no semantic significance, and some other abbrev
tables, have been omitted.)

   A line containing a name in parentheses is the header for abbrevs in
a particular abbrev table; `global-abbrev-table' contains all the global
abbrevs, and the other abbrev tables that are named after major modes
contain the mode-specific abbrevs.

   Within each abbrev table, each nonblank line defines one abbrev.  The
word at the beginning of the line is the abbrev.  The number that
follows is the number of times the abbrev has been expanded.  Emacs
keeps track of this to help you see which abbrevs you actually use, so
that you can eliminate those that you don't use often.  The string at
the end of the line is the expansion.

   Some abbrevs are marked with `(sys)'.  These "system" abbrevs (*note
Abbrevs: (elisp)Abbrevs.) are pre-defined by various modes, and are not
saved to your abbrev file.  To disable a "system" abbrev, define an
abbrev of the same name that expands to itself, and save it to your
abbrev file.

   `M-x edit-abbrevs' allows you to add, change or kill abbrev
definitions by editing a list of them in an Emacs buffer.  The list has
the same format described above.  The buffer of abbrevs is called
`*Abbrevs*', and is in Edit-Abbrevs mode.  Type `C-c C-c' in this
buffer to install the abbrev definitions as specified in the
buffer--and delete any abbrev definitions not listed.

   The command `edit-abbrevs' is actually the same as `list-abbrevs'
except that it selects the buffer `*Abbrevs*' whereas `list-abbrevs'
merely displays it in another window.


File: emacs,  Node: Saving Abbrevs,  Next: Dynamic Abbrevs,  Prev: Editing Abbrevs,  Up: Abbrevs

33.5 Saving Abbrevs
===================

These commands allow you to keep abbrev definitions between editing
sessions.

`M-x write-abbrev-file <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Write a file FILE describing all defined abbrevs.

`M-x read-abbrev-file <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Read the file FILE and define abbrevs as specified therein.

`M-x quietly-read-abbrev-file <RET> FILE <RET>'
     Similar but do not display a message about what is going on.

`M-x define-abbrevs'
     Define abbrevs from definitions in current buffer.

`M-x insert-abbrevs'
     Insert all abbrevs and their expansions into current buffer.

   `M-x write-abbrev-file' reads a file name using the minibuffer and
then writes a description of all current abbrev definitions into that
file.  This is used to save abbrev definitions for use in a later
session.  The text stored in the file is a series of Lisp expressions
that, when executed, define the same abbrevs that you currently have.

   `M-x read-abbrev-file' reads a file name using the minibuffer and
then reads the file, defining abbrevs according to the contents of the
file.  The function `quietly-read-abbrev-file' is similar except that
it does not display a message in the echo area; you cannot invoke it
interactively, and it is used primarily in your init file (*note Init
File::).  If either of these functions is called with `nil' as the
argument, it uses the file given by the variable `abbrev-file-name',
which is `~/.emacs.d/abbrev_defs' by default.  This is your standard
abbrev definition file, and Emacs loads abbrevs from it automatically
when it starts up.  (As an exception, Emacs does not load the abbrev
file when it is started in batch mode.  *Note Initial Options::, for a
description of batch mode.)

   Emacs will offer to save abbrevs automatically if you have changed
any of them, whenever it offers to save all files (for `C-x s' or `C-x
C-c').  It saves them in the file specified by `abbrev-file-name'.
This feature can be inhibited by setting the variable `save-abbrevs' to
`nil'.

   The commands `M-x insert-abbrevs' and `M-x define-abbrevs' are
similar to the previous commands but work on text in an Emacs buffer.
`M-x insert-abbrevs' inserts text into the current buffer after point,
describing all current abbrev definitions; `M-x define-abbrevs' parses
the entire current buffer and defines abbrevs accordingly.


File: emacs,  Node: Dynamic Abbrevs,  Next: Dabbrev Customization,  Prev: Saving Abbrevs,  Up: Abbrevs

33.6 Dynamic Abbrev Expansion
=============================

The abbrev facility described above operates automatically as you
insert text, but all abbrevs must be defined explicitly.  By contrast,
"dynamic abbrevs" allow the meanings of abbreviations to be determined
automatically from the contents of the buffer, but dynamic abbrev
expansion happens only when you request it explicitly.

`M-/'
     Expand the word in the buffer before point as a "dynamic abbrev",
     by searching in the buffer for words starting with that
     abbreviation (`dabbrev-expand').

`C-M-/'
     Complete the word before point as a dynamic abbrev
     (`dabbrev-completion').

   For example, if the buffer contains `does this follow ' and you type
`f o M-/', the effect is to insert `follow' because that is the last
word in the buffer that starts with `fo'.  A numeric argument to `M-/'
says to take the second, third, etc. distinct expansion found looking
backward from point.  Repeating `M-/' searches for an alternative
expansion by looking farther back.  After scanning all the text before
point, it searches the text after point.  The variable `dabbrev-limit',
if non-`nil', specifies how far away in the buffer to search for an
expansion.

   After scanning the current buffer, `M-/' normally searches other
buffers, unless you have set `dabbrev-check-all-buffers' to `nil'.

   For finer control over which buffers to scan, customize the variable
`dabbrev-ignored-buffer-regexps'.  Its value is a list of regular
expressions.  If a buffer's name matches any of these regular
expressions, dynamic abbrev expansion skips that buffer.

   A negative argument to `M-/', as in `C-u - M-/', says to search
first for expansions after point, then other buffers, and consider
expansions before point only as a last resort.  If you repeat the `M-/'
to look for another expansion, do not specify an argument.  Repeating
`M-/' cycles through all the expansions after point and then the
expansions before point.

   After you have expanded a dynamic abbrev, you can copy additional
words that follow the expansion in its original context.  Simply type
`<SPC> M-/' for each additional word you want to copy.  The spacing and
punctuation between words is copied along with the words.

   The command `C-M-/' (`dabbrev-completion') performs completion of a
dynamic abbrev.  Instead of trying the possible expansions one by one,
it finds all of them, then inserts the text that they have in common.
If they have nothing in common, `C-M-/' displays a list of completions,
from which you can select a choice in the usual manner.  *Note
Completion::.

   Dynamic abbrev expansion is completely independent of Abbrev mode;
the expansion of a word with `M-/' is completely independent of whether
it has a definition as an ordinary abbrev.


File: emacs,  Node: Dabbrev Customization,  Prev: Dynamic Abbrevs,  Up: Abbrevs

33.7 Customizing Dynamic Abbreviation
=====================================

Normally, dynamic abbrev expansion ignores case when searching for
expansions.  That is, the expansion need not agree in case with the word
you are expanding.

   This feature is controlled by the variable
`dabbrev-case-fold-search'.  If it is `t', case is ignored in this
search; if it is `nil', the word and the expansion must match in case.
If the value of `dabbrev-case-fold-search' is `case-fold-search', which
is true by default, then the variable `case-fold-search' controls
whether to ignore case while searching for expansions.

   Normally, dynamic abbrev expansion preserves the case pattern _of
the dynamic abbrev you are expanding_, by converting the expansion to
that case pattern.

   The variable `dabbrev-case-replace' controls whether to preserve the
case pattern of the dynamic abbrev.  If it is `t', the dynamic abbrev's
case pattern is preserved in most cases; if it is `nil', the expansion
is always copied verbatim.  If the value of `dabbrev-case-replace' is
`case-replace', which is true by default, then the variable
`case-replace' controls whether to copy the expansion verbatim.

   However, if the expansion contains a complex mixed case pattern, and
the dynamic abbrev matches this pattern as far as it goes, then the
expansion is always copied verbatim, regardless of those variables.
Thus, for example, if the buffer contains
`variableWithSillyCasePattern', and you type `v a M-/', it copies the
expansion verbatim including its case pattern.

   The variable `dabbrev-abbrev-char-regexp', if non-`nil', controls
which characters are considered part of a word, for dynamic expansion
purposes.  The regular expression must match just one character, never
two or more.  The same regular expression also determines which
characters are part of an expansion.  The value `nil' has a special
meaning: dynamic abbrevs are made of word characters, but expansions are
made of word and symbol characters.

   In shell scripts and makefiles, a variable name is sometimes prefixed
with `$' and sometimes not.  Major modes for this kind of text can
customize dynamic abbrev expansion to handle optional prefixes by
setting the variable `dabbrev-abbrev-skip-leading-regexp'.  Its value
should be a regular expression that matches the optional prefix that
dynamic abbrev expression should ignore.


File: emacs,  Node: Picture Mode,  Next: Sending Mail,  Prev: Abbrevs,  Up: Top

34 Editing Pictures
*******************

To edit a picture made out of text characters (for example, a picture
of the division of a register into fields, as a comment in a program),
use the command `M-x picture-mode' to enter Picture mode.

   In Picture mode, editing is based on the "quarter-plane" model of
text, according to which the text characters lie studded on an area that
stretches infinitely far to the right and downward.  The concept of the
end of a line does not exist in this model; the most you can say is
where the last nonblank character on the line is found.

   Of course, Emacs really always considers text as a sequence of
characters, and lines really do have ends.  But Picture mode replaces
the most frequently-used commands with variants that simulate the
quarter-plane model of text.  They do this by inserting spaces or by
converting tabs to spaces.

   Most of the basic editing commands of Emacs are redefined by Picture
mode to do essentially the same thing but in a quarter-plane way.  In
addition, Picture mode defines various keys starting with the `C-c'
prefix to run special picture editing commands.

   One of these keys, `C-c C-c', is particularly important.  Often a
picture is part of a larger file that is usually edited in some other
major mode.  Picture mode records the name of the previous major mode
so you can use the `C-c C-c' command (`picture-mode-exit') later to go
back to that mode.  `C-c C-c' also deletes spaces from the ends of
lines, unless given a numeric argument.

   The special commands of Picture mode all work in other modes
(provided the `picture' library is loaded), but are not bound to keys
except in Picture mode.  The descriptions below talk of moving "one
column" and so on, but all the picture mode commands handle numeric
arguments as their normal equivalents do.

   Turning on Picture mode runs the hook `picture-mode-hook'.
Additional extensions to Picture mode can be found in `artist.el'.

* Menu:

* Basic Picture::         Basic concepts and simple commands of Picture Mode.
* Insert in Picture::     Controlling direction of cursor motion
                            after "self-inserting" characters.
* Tabs in Picture::       Various features for tab stops and indentation.
* Rectangles in Picture:: Clearing and superimposing rectangles.


File: emacs,  Node: Basic Picture,  Next: Insert in Picture,  Up: Picture Mode

34.1 Basic Editing in Picture Mode
==================================

Most keys do the same thing in Picture mode that they usually do, but
do it in a quarter-plane style.  For example, `C-f' is rebound to run
`picture-forward-column', a command which moves point one column to the
right, inserting a space if necessary so that the actual end of the
line makes no difference.  `C-b' is rebound to run
`picture-backward-column', which always moves point left one column,
converting a tab to multiple spaces if necessary.  `C-n' and `C-p' are
rebound to run `picture-move-down' and `picture-move-up', which can
either insert spaces or convert tabs as necessary to make sure that
point stays in exactly the same column.  `C-e' runs
`picture-end-of-line', which moves to after the last nonblank character
on the line.  There is no need to change `C-a', as the choice of screen
model does not affect beginnings of lines.

   Insertion of text is adapted to the quarter-plane screen model
through the use of Overwrite mode (*note Minor Modes::.)
Self-inserting characters replace existing text, column by column,
rather than pushing existing text to the right.  <RET> runs
`picture-newline', which just moves to the beginning of the following
line so that new text will replace that line.

   In Picture mode, the commands that normally delete or kill text,
instead erase text (replacing it with spaces).  <DEL>
(`picture-backward-clear-column') replaces the preceding character with
a space rather than removing it; this moves point backwards.  `C-d'
(`picture-clear-column') replaces the next character or characters with
spaces, but does not move point.  (If you want to clear characters to
spaces and move forward over them, use <SPC>.)  `C-k'
(`picture-clear-line') really kills the contents of lines, but does not
delete the newlines from the buffer.

   To do actual insertion, you must use special commands.  `C-o'
(`picture-open-line') creates a blank line after the current line; it
never splits a line.  `C-M-o' (`split-line') makes sense in Picture
mode, so it is not changed.  `C-j' (`picture-duplicate-line') inserts
another line with the same contents below the current line.

   To do actual deletion in Picture mode, use `C-w', `C-c C-d' (which
is defined as `delete-char', as `C-d' is in other modes), or one of the
picture rectangle commands (*note Rectangles in Picture::).


File: emacs,  Node: Insert in Picture,  Next: Tabs in Picture,  Prev: Basic Picture,  Up: Picture Mode

34.2 Controlling Motion after Insert
====================================

Since "self-inserting" characters in Picture mode overwrite and move
point, there is no essential restriction on how point should be moved.
Normally point moves right, but you can specify any of the eight
orthogonal or diagonal directions for motion after a "self-inserting"
character.  This is useful for drawing lines in the buffer.

`C-c <'
`C-c <LEFT>'
     Move left after insertion (`picture-movement-left').

`C-c >'
`C-c <RIGHT>'
     Move right after insertion (`picture-movement-right').

`C-c ^'
`C-c <UP>'
     Move up after insertion (`picture-movement-up').

`C-c .'
`C-c <DOWN>'
     Move down after insertion (`picture-movement-down').

`C-c `'
`C-c <HOME>'
     Move up and left ("northwest") after insertion
     (`picture-movement-nw').

`C-c ''
`C-c <prior>'
     Move up and right ("northeast") after insertion
     (`picture-movement-ne').

`C-c /'
`C-c <END>'
     Move down and left ("southwest") after insertion
     (`picture-movement-sw').

`C-c \'
`C-c <next>'
     Move down and right ("southeast") after insertion
     (`picture-movement-se').

   Two motion commands move based on the current Picture insertion
direction.  The command `C-c C-f' (`picture-motion') moves in the same
direction as motion after "insertion" currently does, while `C-c C-b'
(`picture-motion-reverse') moves in the opposite direction.


File: emacs,  Node: Tabs in Picture,  Next: Rectangles in Picture,  Prev: Insert in Picture,  Up: Picture Mode

34.3 Picture Mode Tabs
======================

Two kinds of tab-like action are provided in Picture mode.  Use
`M-<TAB>' (`picture-tab-search') for context-based tabbing.  With no
argument, it moves to a point underneath the next "interesting"
character that follows whitespace in the previous nonblank line.
"Next" here means "appearing at a horizontal position greater than the
one point starts out at."  With an argument, as in `C-u M-<TAB>', this
command moves to the next such interesting character in the current
line.  `M-<TAB>' does not change the text; it only moves point.
"Interesting" characters are defined by the variable
`picture-tab-chars', which should define a set of characters.  The
syntax for this variable is like the syntax used inside of `[...]' in a
regular expression--but without the `[' and the `]'.  Its default value
is `"!-~"'.

   <TAB> itself runs `picture-tab', which operates based on the current
tab stop settings; it is the Picture mode equivalent of
`tab-to-tab-stop'.  Normally it just moves point, but with a numeric
argument it clears the text that it moves over.

   The context-based and tab-stop-based forms of tabbing are brought
together by the command `C-c <TAB>' (`picture-set-tab-stops').  This
command sets the tab stops to the positions which `M-<TAB>' would
consider significant in the current line.  The use of this command,
together with <TAB>, can get the effect of context-based tabbing.  But
`M-<TAB>' is more convenient in the cases where it is sufficient.

   It may be convenient to prevent use of actual tab characters in
pictures.  For example, this prevents `C-x <TAB>' from messing up the
picture.  You can do this by setting the variable `indent-tabs-mode' to
`nil'.


File: emacs,  Node: Rectangles in Picture,  Prev: Tabs in Picture,  Up: Picture Mode

34.4 Picture Mode Rectangle Commands
====================================

Picture mode defines commands for working on rectangular pieces of the
text in ways that fit with the quarter-plane model.  The standard
rectangle commands may also be useful.  *Note Rectangles::.

`C-c C-k'
     Clear out the region-rectangle with spaces
     (`picture-clear-rectangle').  With argument, delete the text.

`C-c C-w R'
     Similar, but save rectangle contents in register R first
     (`picture-clear-rectangle-to-register').

`C-c C-y'
     Copy last killed rectangle into the buffer by overwriting, with
     upper left corner at point (`picture-yank-rectangle').  With
     argument, insert instead.

`C-c C-x R'
     Similar, but use the rectangle in register R
     (`picture-yank-rectangle-from-register').

   The picture rectangle commands `C-c C-k' (`picture-clear-rectangle')
and `C-c C-w' (`picture-clear-rectangle-to-register') differ from the
standard rectangle commands in that they normally clear the rectangle
instead of deleting it; this is analogous with the way `C-d' is changed
in Picture mode.

   However, deletion of rectangles can be useful in Picture mode, so
these commands delete the rectangle if given a numeric argument.  `C-c
C-k' either with or without a numeric argument saves the rectangle for
`C-c C-y'.

   The Picture mode commands for yanking rectangles differ from the
standard ones in that they overwrite instead of inserting.  This is the
same way that Picture mode insertion of other text differs from other
modes.  `C-c C-y' (`picture-yank-rectangle') inserts (by overwriting)
the rectangle that was most recently killed, while `C-c C-x'
(`picture-yank-rectangle-from-register') does likewise for the
rectangle found in a specified register.


File: emacs,  Node: Sending Mail,  Next: Rmail,  Prev: Picture Mode,  Up: Top

35 Sending Mail
***************

To send an "e-mail" message in Emacs, type `C-x m'.  This selects and
initializes a buffer named `*mail*', where you can edit the text and
headers of the message.  Finally, type `C-c C-s' or `C-c C-c' to send
the message.

`C-x m'
     Begin composing mail (`compose-mail').

`C-x 4 m'
     Likewise, in another window (`compose-mail-other-window').

`C-x 5 m'
     Likewise, but in a new frame (`compose-mail-other-frame').

`C-c C-s'
     In the mail buffer, send the message (`message-send').

`C-c C-c'
     In the mail buffer, send the message and bury the buffer
     (`message-send-and-exit').

The command `C-x 4 m' (`compose-mail-other-window') does the same as
`C-x m', except it displays the mail buffer in a different window.  The
command `C-x 5 m' (`compose-mail-other-frame') creates a new frame for
the mail buffer.

   Because the mail buffer is an ordinary Emacs buffer, you can switch
to other buffers while in the middle of composing mail, and switch back
later (or never).  If you type `C-x m' again when you have been
composing another message but have not sent it, Emacs asks for
confirmation before erasing the old message.  If you answer `n', Emacs
selects the mail buffer with its old contents, so you can finish the
old message and send it.  `C-u C-x m' is another way to do this.
Sending the message marks the mail buffer "unmodified," which avoids
the need for confirmation when `C-x m' is next used.

   If you want to send another message before finishing the current
message, use the command `M-x rename-uniquely' to rename the current
mail buffer (*note Misc Buffer::).  Then you can use `C-x m' to make a
new mail buffer, and work with each mail buffer independently.

   Before using Emacs to send mail, you may need to customize the
variable `send-mail-function' if your system is not set up to deliver
mail directly via SMTP (*note Mail Sending::).  In addition, you may
need to customize `user-mail-address' if the system cannot receive mail
via SMTP (*note Mail Headers::).

* Menu:

* Format: Mail Format.	      Format of a mail message.
* Headers: Mail Headers.      Details of some standard mail header fields.
* Aliases: Mail Aliases.      Abbreviating and grouping mail addresses.
* Commands: Mail Commands.    Special commands for editing mail being composed.
* Signature: Mail Signature.  Adding a signature to every message.
* Amuse: Mail Amusements.     Distracting the NSA; adding fortune messages.
* Methods: Mail Methods.      Using alternative mail-composition methods.


File: emacs,  Node: Mail Format,  Next: Mail Headers,  Up: Sending Mail

35.1 The Format of the Mail Buffer
==================================

An email message must contain certain pieces of information, called
"headers", which specify the message's sender, recipient(s), and so on.

   At the top of the mail buffer is a set of "header fields", where you
can enter this information.  You can insert and edit header fields
using ordinary editing commands.  *Note Header Editing::, for commands
specific to editing header fields.

   Some header fields are automatically pre-initialized in the buffer,
when appropriate; other headers, such as `Date' and `Message-Id', are
normally omitted from the mail buffer and created automatically when
the message is sent.

   The line in the buffer that says

     --text follows this line--

separates the header fields from the "body" (or "text") of the message.
Everything above this line is treated as part of the headers;
everything below it is treated as the body.  The delimiter line itself
does not appear in the message actually sent.  The text used for the
delimiter line is controlled by the variable `mail-header-separator'.

   Here is an example of what the headers and text in the mail buffer
might look like.

     To: gnu@example.org
     CC: lungfish@example.com, byob@example.net
     Subject: The Emacs Manual
     --text follows this line--
     Please ignore this message.


File: emacs,  Node: Mail Headers,  Next: Mail Aliases,  Prev: Mail Format,  Up: Sending Mail

35.2 Mail Header Fields
=======================

A header field in the mail buffer starts with a field name at the
beginning of a line, terminated by a colon.  Upper and lower case are
equivalent in field names (and in mailing addresses also).  After the
colon and optional whitespace comes the contents of the field.

   You can use any name you like for a header field, but normally
people use only standard field names with accepted meanings.  Here is a
table of commonly-used fields.  Emacs pre-initializes some of these,
depending on various options you can set.  You can delete or alter any
header field before you send the message, if you wish.

`From'
     The address of the sender (you).  This should be a valid mailing
     address, as replies will normally go there.  Emacs initializes this
     field using the variables `user-full-name' and
     `user-mail-address'; see below.

`To'
     The mailing address(es) to which the message is addressed.  To list
     more than one address, use commas (not spaces) to separate them.

`Subject'
     A piece of text saying what the message is about.  Most
     mail-reading programs can display a summary of messages, listing
     the subject of each message but not its text.

`CC'
     Additional mailing address(es) to send the message to.  This is
     like `To', except that these readers should not regard the message
     as directed at them.

`BCC'
     Additional mailing address(es) to send the message to, which should
     not appear in the header of the message actually sent.  "BCC"
     stands for "blind carbon copies".

`FCC'
     The name of one file, to which a copy of the sent message should be
     appended.  Emacs writes the message in mbox format, unless the
     file is in Babyl format (used by Rmail before Emacs 23), in which
     case Emacs writes Babyl.  If an Rmail buffer is visiting the file,
     Emacs updates it accordingly.  To specify more than one file, use
     several `FCC' fields, with one file name in each field.

`Reply-to'
     An address to which replies should be sent, instead of `From'.
     You can use this header if, for some reason, your `From' address
     is unable to receive replies.

`Mail-reply-to'
     This field takes precedence over `Reply-to'.  It is used because
     some mailing lists set the `Reply-to' field for their own purposes
     (a somewhat controversial practice).

`Mail-followup-to'
     This field contains one or more addresses.  It is typically used
     when you reply to a message from a mailing list that you are
     subscribed to.  It usually indicates that you want replies to go
     to the list, and that you do not need an extra copy sent directly
     to you.

`In-reply-to'
     A piece of text describing the message you are replying to.  Some
     mail systems can use this information to correlate related pieces
     of mail.  Normally, you never need to think about this, because it
     is filled in automatically when you reply to a message in Rmail
     (or any other mail program built into Emacs).

`References'
     The Message-Ids of previous related messages (a Message-Id is a
     unique identifier generated when a message is sent).  Like
     `In-reply-to', this is normally set up automatically for you.

The `To', `CC', and `BCC' fields can appear any number of times, and
each such header field can contain multiple addresses, separated by
commas.  This way, you can specify any number of places to send the
message.  These fields can also have continuation lines: one or more
lines starting with whitespace, following the starting line of the
field, are considered part of the field.  Here's an example of a `To'
field with a continuation line:

     To: foo@example.net, this@example.net,
       bob@example.com

   The default contents of the `From' header field are computed from
the variables `user-full-name' and `user-mail-address'.  On some
operating systems, Emacs initializes these two variables using
environment variables (*note General Variables::).  If this information
is unavailable or wrong, you can customize the variables yourself
(*note Easy Customization::).

   The value of the variable `mail-from-style' specifies how to format
the address in the `From' field:

`nil'
     Use just the address, as in `king@grassland.com'.

`parens'
     Use both address and full name, as in:
     `king@grassland.com (Elvis Parsley)'.

`angles'
     Use both address and full name, as in:
     `Elvis Parsley <king@grassland.com>'.

any other value
     Use `angles' for most addresses.  However, if the address must be
     "quoted" to remain syntactically-valid under the `angles' format
     but not under the `parens' format, use `parens' instead.  This is
     the default.

   You can direct Emacs to insert certain default headers into the mail
buffer by setting the variable `mail-default-headers' to a string.
Then `C-x m' inserts this string into the message headers.  For
example, here is how to add a `Reply-to' and `FCC' header to each
message:

     (setq mail-default-headers
           "Reply-to: foo@example.com\nFCC: ~/Mail/sent")

If the default header fields are not appropriate for a particular
message, edit them as necessary before sending the message.


File: emacs,  Node: Mail Aliases,  Next: Mail Commands,  Prev: Mail Headers,  Up: Sending Mail

35.3 Mail Aliases
=================

You can define "mail aliases", which are short mnemonic names that
stand for mail addresses or groups of mail addresses.  By default, mail
aliases are defined in the file `~/.mailrc'.  You can specify a
different file name to use, by setting the variable
`mail-personal-alias-file'.

   To define an alias in `.mailrc', write a line in the following
format:

     alias NICK FULLADDRESSES

This means that NICK should expand into FULLADDRESSES, where
FULLADDRESSES can be either a single address, or multiple addresses
separated with spaces.  For instance, to make `maingnu' stand for
`gnu@gnu.org' plus a local address of your own, put in this line:

     alias maingnu gnu@gnu.org local-gnu

If an address contains a space, quote the whole address with a pair of
double quotes, like this:

     alias jsmith "John Q. Smith <none@example.com>"

Note that you need not include double quotes around individual parts of
the address, such as the person's full name.  Emacs puts them in if
they are needed.  For instance, it inserts the above address as `"John
Q. Smith" <none@example.com>'.

   Emacs also recognizes "include" commands in `.mailrc'.  They look
like this:

     source FILENAME

The `.mailrc' file is not unique to Emacs; many other mail-reading
programs use it for mail aliases, and it can contain various other
commands.  However, Emacs ignores everything except alias definitions
and include commands.

   Mail aliases expand as abbrevs--that is to say, as soon as you type
a word-separator character after an alias (*note Abbrevs::).  This
expansion takes place only within the `To', `From', `CC', `BCC', and
`Reply-to' header fields (plus their `Resent-' variants); it does not
take place in other header fields, such as `Subject'.

   You can also insert an aliased address directly, using the command
`M-x mail-abbrev-insert-alias'.  This reads an alias name, with
completion, and inserts its definition at point.


File: emacs,  Node: Mail Commands,  Next: Mail Signature,  Prev: Mail Aliases,  Up: Sending Mail

35.4 Mail Commands
==================

The default major mode for the `*mail*' buffer is called Message mode.
It behaves like Text mode in many ways, but provides several additional
commands on the `C-c' prefix, which make editing a message more
convenient.

   In this section, we will describe some of the most commonly-used
commands available in Message mode.  Message mode also has its own
manual, where its features are described in greater detail.  *Note
Message: (message)Top.

* Menu:

* Mail Sending::        Commands to send the message.
* Header Editing::      Commands to move to header fields and edit them.
* Citing Mail::         Quoting a message you are replying to.
* Mail Misc::           Attachments, spell checking, etc.


File: emacs,  Node: Mail Sending,  Next: Header Editing,  Up: Mail Commands

35.4.1 Mail Sending
-------------------

There are two commands to send a message you have been editing:

`C-c C-c'
     Send the message, and deselect the mail buffer
     (`message-send-and-exit').

`C-c C-s'
     Send the message, and leave the mail buffer selected
     (`message-send').

   If you want to send a message and be done with it, type `C-c C-c'
(`mail-send-and-exit').  This sends the message and then either deletes
the window or switches to another buffer.  It also "buries" the mail
buffer, putting it at the lowest priority for reselection.  This is the
usual command for sending a message.

   The command `C-c C-s' (`message-send') sends the message and marks
the mail buffer unmodified, but leaves the buffer selected.  Use this
command if you want to modify the message (perhaps with new recipients)
and send it again.

   Sending a message runs the hook `message-send-hook'.

   In a file-visiting buffer, sending the message does not clear the
modified flag, because only saving the file should do that.  Also, you
don't get a warning if you try to send the same message twice.

   When you send a message containing non-ASCII characters, they need
to be encoded with a coding system (*note Coding Systems::).  Usually
the coding system is specified automatically by your chosen language
environment (*note Language Environments::).  You can explicitly
specify the coding system for outgoing mail by setting the variable
`sendmail-coding-system' (*note Recognize Coding::).  If the coding
system thus determined does not handle the characters in a particular
message, Emacs asks you to select the coding system to use, showing a
list of possible coding systems.

   The variable `send-mail-function' controls how the default mail user
agent sends mail.  Its value should be a function, which can be one of
the following:

`sendmail-send-it'
     Send mail using the system's default `sendmail' (or
     `sendmail'-compatible) program.  This is the default on Unix and
     GNU, and works provided the system is a valid "mail host" (that
     is, provided it can deliver mail via SMTP).

`mailclient-send-it'
     Pass the mail buffer on to the system's designated mail client (see
     `mailclient.el').  This is the default on Mac OS X and MS-Windows.

`smtpmail-send-it'
     Send mail through an external mail host (e.g., your Internet
     service provider's SMTP server).  You will need to tell Emacs how
     to contact the SMTP server, by customizing the variables
     `smtpmail-smtp-server' and `smtpmail-auth-credentials'.  *Note
     Emacs SMTP Library: (smtpmail)Top.

`feedmail-send-it'
     This is similar to `sendmail-send-it', but allows you to queue
     messages for later sending.  See the commentary section in the file
     `feedmail.el' for more information.


File: emacs,  Node: Header Editing,  Next: Citing Mail,  Prev: Mail Sending,  Up: Mail Commands

35.4.2 Mail Header Editing
--------------------------

Message mode provides the following special commands to move to
particular header fields and to complete addresses in headers.

`C-c C-f C-t'
     Move to the `To' header (`message-goto-to').

`C-c C-f C-s'
     Move to the `Subject' header (`message-goto-subject').

`C-c C-f C-c'
     Move to the `CC' header (`message-goto-cc').

`C-c C-f C-b'
     Move to the `BCC' header (`message-goto-bcc').

`C-c C-f C-r'
     Move to the `Reply-To' header (`message-goto-reply-to').

`C-c C-f C-f'
     Move to the `Mail-Followup-To' header field
     (`message-goto-followup-to').

`C-c C-f C-w'
     Add a new `FCC' header field, with file-name completion
     (`message-goto-fcc').

`C-c C-b'
     Move to the start of the message body (`message-goto-body').

`<TAB>'
     Complete a mailing address (`message-tab').

   The commands to move point to particular header fields are all based
on the prefix `C-c C-f' (`C-f' is for "field").  If the field in
question does not exist, the command creates one (the exception is
`mail-fcc', which creates a new field each time).

   The command `C-c C-b' (`message-goto-body') moves point to just
after the header separator line--that is, to the beginning of the body.

   While editing a header field that contains addresses, such as `To:',
`CC:' and `BCC:', you can complete an address by typing <TAB>
(`message-tab').  This attempts to insert the full name corresponding
to the address based on a couple of methods, including EUDC, a library
that recognizes a number of directory server protocols (*note EUDC:
(eudc)Top.).  Failing that, it attempts to expand the address as a mail
alias (*note Mail Aliases::).  If point is on a header field that does
not take addresses, or if it is in the message body, then <TAB> just
inserts a tab character.


File: emacs,  Node: Citing Mail,  Next: Mail Misc,  Prev: Header Editing,  Up: Mail Commands

35.4.3 Citing Mail
------------------

`C-c C-y'
     Yank the selected message from Rmail (`message-yank-original').

`C-c C-q'
     Fill each paragraph cited from another message
     (`message-fill-yanked-message').

   You can use the command `C-c C-y' (`message-yank-original') to
"cite" a message that you are replying to.  This inserts the text of
that message into the mail buffer.  This command is active only when
the mail buffer is invoked from a mail program running in Emacs, such
as Rmail.

   By default, Emacs inserts the string `>' in front of each line of
the cited text; this prefix string is specified by the variable
`message-yank-prefix'.  If you call `message-yank-original' with a
prefix argument, the citation prefix is not inserted.

   After using `C-c C-y', you can type `C-c C-q'
(`message-fill-yanked-message') to fill the paragraphs of the cited
message.  One use of `C-c C-q' fills all such paragraphs, each one
individually.  To fill a single paragraph of the quoted message, use
`M-q'.  If filling does not automatically handle the type of citation
prefix you use, try setting the fill prefix explicitly.  *Note
Filling::.

   You can customize mail citation through the hook
`mail-citation-hook'.  For example, you can use the Supercite package,
which provides more flexible citation (*note Introduction:
(sc)Introduction.).


File: emacs,  Node: Mail Misc,  Prev: Citing Mail,  Up: Mail Commands

35.4.4 Mail Miscellany
----------------------

You can "attach" a file to an outgoing message by typing `C-c C-a'
(`mml-attach-file') in the mail buffer.  Attaching is done using the
MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) standard.

   The `mml-attach-file' command prompts for the name of the file, and
for the attachment's "content type", "description", and "disposition".
The content type is normally detected automatically; just type <RET> to
accept the default.  The description is a single line of text that the
recipient will see next to the attachment; you may also choose to leave
this empty.  The disposition is either `inline' (the default), which
means the recipient will see a link to the attachment within the
message body, or `attachment', which means the link will be separate
from the body.

   The actual contents of the attached file are not inserted into the
mail buffer.  Instead, some placeholder text is inserted into the mail
buffer, like this:

     <#part type="text/plain" filename="~/foo.txt" disposition=inline>
     <#/part>

When you type `C-c C-c' or `C-c C-s' to send the message, the attached
file will be delivered with it.

   While composing a message, you can do spelling correction on the
message text by typing `M-x ispell-message'.  If you have yanked an
incoming message into the outgoing draft, this command skips what was
yanked, but it checks the text that you yourself inserted (it looks for
indentation or `mail-yank-prefix' to distinguish the cited lines from
your input).  *Note Spelling::.

   Turning on Message mode (which `C-x m' does automatically) runs the
normal hooks `text-mode-hook' and `message-mode-hook'.  Initializing a
new outgoing message runs the normal hook `message-setup-hook'; you can
use this hook if you want to make changes to the appearance of the mail
buffer.  *Note Hooks::.

   The main difference between these hooks is just when they are
invoked.  Whenever you type `C-x m', `message-mode-hook' runs as soon
as the mail buffer is created.  Then the `message-setup' function
inserts the default contents of the buffer.  After these default
contents are inserted, `message-setup-hook' runs.

   If you use `C-x m' to continue an existing composition,
`message-mode-hook' runs immediately after switching to the mail
buffer.  If the buffer is unmodified, or if you decide to erase it and
start again, `message-setup-hook' runs after the default contents are
inserted.


File: emacs,  Node: Mail Signature,  Next: Mail Amusements,  Prev: Mail Commands,  Up: Sending Mail

35.5 Mail Signature
===================

You can add a standard piece of text--your "mail signature"--to the end
of every message.  This signature may contain information such as your
telephone number or your physical location.  The variable
`mail-signature' determines how Emacs handles the mail signature.

   The default value of `mail-signature' is `t'; this means to look for
your mail signature in the file `~/.signature'.  If this file exists,
its contents are automatically inserted into the end of the mail
buffer.  You can change the signature file via the variable
`mail-signature-file'.

   If you change `mail-signature' to a string, that specifies the text
of the signature directly.

   If you change `mail-signature' to `nil', Emacs will not insert your
mail signature automatically.  You can insert your mail signature by
typing `C-c C-w' (`message-insert-signature') in the mail buffer.
Emacs will look for your signature in the signature file.

   By convention, a mail signature should be marked by a line whose
contents are `-- '.  If your signature lacks this prefix, it is added
for you.  The remainder of your signature should be no more than four
lines.


File: emacs,  Node: Mail Amusements,  Next: Mail Methods,  Prev: Mail Signature,  Up: Sending Mail

35.6 Mail Amusements
====================

`M-x spook' adds a line of randomly chosen keywords to an outgoing mail
message.  The keywords are chosen from a list of words that suggest you
are discussing something subversive.

   The idea behind this feature is the suspicion that the NSA(1) and
other intelligence agencies snoop on all electronic mail messages that
contain keywords suggesting they might find them interesting.  (The
agencies say that they don't, but that's what they _would_ say.)  The
idea is that if lots of people add suspicious words to their messages,
the agencies will get so busy with spurious input that they will have
to give up reading it all.  Whether or not this is true, it at least
amuses some people.

   You can use the `fortune' program to put a "fortune cookie" message
into outgoing mail.  To do this, add `fortune-to-signature' to
`mail-setup-hook':

     (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook 'fortune-to-signature)

You will probably need to set the variable `fortune-file' before using
this.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The US National Security Agency.


File: emacs,  Node: Mail Methods,  Prev: Mail Amusements,  Up: Sending Mail

35.7 Mail-Composition Methods
=============================

In this chapter we have described the usual Emacs mode for editing and
sending mail--Message mode.  This is only one of several available
modes.  Prior to Emacs 23.2, the default mode was Mail mode, which is
similar to Message mode in many respects but lacks features such as
MIME support.  Another available mode is MH-E (*note MH-E: (mh-e)Top.).

   You can choose any of these "mail user agents" as your preferred
method for editing and sending mail.  The commands `C-x m', `C-x 4 m'
and `C-x 5 m' use whichever agent you have specified; so do various
other parts of Emacs that send mail, such as the bug reporter (*note
Bugs::).  To specify a mail user agent, customize the variable
`mail-user-agent'.  Currently, legitimate values include
`message-user-agent' (Message mode) `sendmail-user-agent' (Mail mode),
`gnus-user-agent', and `mh-e-user-agent'.

   If you select a different mail-composition method, the information
in this chapter about the mail buffer and Message mode does not apply;
the other methods use a different format of text in a different buffer,
and their commands are different as well.

   Similarly, to specify your preferred method for reading mail,
customize the variable `read-mail-command'.  The default is `rmail'
(*note Rmail::).


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail,  Next: Dired,  Prev: Sending Mail,  Up: Top

36 Reading Mail with Rmail
**************************

Rmail is an Emacs subsystem for reading and disposing of mail that you
receive.  Rmail stores mail messages in files called Rmail files.
Reading the messages in an Rmail file is done in a special major mode,
Rmail mode, which redefines most letters to run commands for managing
mail.

* Menu:

* Basic: Rmail Basics.       Basic concepts of Rmail, and simple use.
* Scroll: Rmail Scrolling.   Scrolling through a message.
* Motion: Rmail Motion.      Moving to another message.
* Deletion: Rmail Deletion.  Deleting and expunging messages.
* Inbox: Rmail Inbox.        How mail gets into the Rmail file.
* Files: Rmail Files.        Using multiple Rmail files.
* Output: Rmail Output.	     Copying messages out to files.
* Labels: Rmail Labels.      Classifying messages by labeling them.
* Attrs: Rmail Attributes.   Certain standard labels, called attributes.
* Reply: Rmail Reply.        Sending replies to messages you are viewing.
* Summary: Rmail Summary.    Summaries show brief info on many messages.
* Sort: Rmail Sorting.       Sorting messages in Rmail.
* Display: Rmail Display.    How Rmail displays a message; customization.
* Coding: Rmail Coding.      How Rmail handles decoding character sets.
* Editing: Rmail Editing.    Editing message text and headers in Rmail.
* Digest: Rmail Digest.      Extracting the messages from a digest message.
* Rot13: Rmail Rot13.	     Reading messages encoded in the rot13 code.
* Movemail::                 More details of fetching new mail.
* Remote Mailboxes::         Retrieving mail from remote mailboxes.
* Other Mailbox Formats::    Retrieving mail from local mailboxes in
                             various formats.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Basics,  Next: Rmail Scrolling,  Up: Rmail

36.1 Basic Concepts of Rmail
============================

Using Rmail in the simplest fashion, you have one Rmail file `~/RMAIL'
in which all of your mail is saved.  It is called your "primary Rmail
file".  The command `M-x rmail' reads your primary Rmail file, merges
new mail in from your inboxes, displays the first message you haven't
read yet, and lets you begin reading.  The variable `rmail-file-name'
specifies the name of the primary Rmail file.

   Rmail displays only one message in the Rmail file at a time.  The
message that is shown is called the "current message".  Rmail mode's
special commands can do such things as delete the current message, copy
it into another file, send a reply, or move to another message.  You
can also create multiple Rmail files and use Rmail to move messages
between them.

   Within the Rmail file, messages are normally arranged sequentially in
order of receipt; you can specify other ways to sort them (*note Rmail
Sorting::).  Messages are identified by consecutive integers which are
their "message numbers".  The number of the current message is
displayed in Rmail's mode line, followed by the total number of messages
in the file.  You can move to a message by specifying its message number
with the `j' key (*note Rmail Motion::).

   Following the usual conventions of Emacs, changes in an Rmail file
become permanent only when you save the file.  You can save it with `s'
(`rmail-expunge-and-save'), which also expunges deleted messages from
the file first (*note Rmail Deletion::).  To save the file without
expunging, use `C-x C-s'.  Rmail also saves the Rmail file after
merging new mail from an inbox file (*note Rmail Inbox::).

   You can exit Rmail with `q' (`rmail-quit'); this expunges and saves
the Rmail file, then buries the Rmail buffer as well as its summary
buffer, if present (*note Rmail Summary::).  But there is no need to
"exit" formally.  If you switch from Rmail to editing in other buffers,
and never switch back, you have exited.  Just make sure to save the
Rmail file eventually (like any other file you have changed).  `C-x s'
is a suitable way to do this (*note Save Commands::).  The Rmail
command `b', `rmail-bury', buries the Rmail buffer and its summary
buffer without expunging and saving the Rmail file.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Scrolling,  Next: Rmail Motion,  Prev: Rmail Basics,  Up: Rmail

36.2 Scrolling Within a Message
===============================

When Rmail displays a message that does not fit on the screen, you must
scroll through it to read the rest.  You could do this with `C-v',
`M-v' and `M-<', but in Rmail scrolling is so frequent that it deserves
to be easier.

`<SPC>'
     Scroll forward (`scroll-up').

`<DEL>'
     Scroll backward (`scroll-down').

`.'
     Scroll to start of message (`rmail-beginning-of-message').

`/'
     Scroll to end of message (`rmail-end-of-message').

   Since the most common thing to do while reading a message is to
scroll through it by screenfuls, Rmail makes <SPC> and <DEL> synonyms of
`C-v' (`scroll-up') and `M-v' (`scroll-down')

   The command `.' (`rmail-beginning-of-message') scrolls back to the
beginning of the selected message.  This is not quite the same as `M-<':
for one thing, it does not set the mark; for another, it resets the
buffer boundaries of the current message if you have changed them.
Similarly, the command `/' (`rmail-end-of-message') scrolls forward to
the end of the selected message.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Motion,  Next: Rmail Deletion,  Prev: Rmail Scrolling,  Up: Rmail

36.3 Moving Among Messages
==========================

The most basic thing to do with a message is to read it.  The way to do
this in Rmail is to make the message current.  The usual practice is to
move sequentially through the file, since this is the order of receipt
of messages.  When you enter Rmail, you are positioned at the first
message that you have not yet made current (that is, the first one that
has the `unseen' attribute; *note Rmail Attributes::).  Move forward to
see the other new messages; move backward to re-examine old messages.

`n'
     Move to the next nondeleted message, skipping any intervening
     deleted messages (`rmail-next-undeleted-message').

`p'
     Move to the previous nondeleted message
     (`rmail-previous-undeleted-message').

`M-n'
     Move to the next message, including deleted messages
     (`rmail-next-message').

`M-p'
     Move to the previous message, including deleted messages
     (`rmail-previous-message').

`C-c C-n'
     Move to the next message with the same subject as the current one
     (`rmail-next-same-subject').

`C-c C-p'
     Move to the previous message with the same subject as the current
     one (`rmail-previous-same-subject').

`j'
     Move to the first message.  With argument N, move to message
     number N (`rmail-show-message').

`>'
     Move to the last message (`rmail-last-message').

`<'
     Move to the first message (`rmail-first-message').

`M-s REGEXP <RET>'
     Move to the next message containing a match for REGEXP
     (`rmail-search').

`- M-s REGEXP <RET>'
     Move to the previous message containing a match for REGEXP.

   `n' and `p' are the usual way of moving among messages in Rmail.
They move through the messages sequentially, but skip over deleted
messages, which is usually what you want to do.  Their command
definitions are named `rmail-next-undeleted-message' and
`rmail-previous-undeleted-message'.  If you do not want to skip deleted
messages--for example, if you want to move to a message to undelete
it--use the variants `M-n' and `M-p' (`rmail-next-message' and
`rmail-previous-message').  A numeric argument to any of these commands
serves as a repeat count.

   In Rmail, you can specify a numeric argument by typing just the
digits.  You don't need to type `C-u' first.

   The `M-s' (`rmail-search') command is Rmail's version of search.
The usual incremental search command `C-s' works in Rmail, but it
searches only within the current message.  The purpose of `M-s' is to
search for another message.  It reads a regular expression (*note
Regexps::) nonincrementally, then searches starting at the beginning of
the following message for a match.  It then selects that message.  If
REGEXP is empty, `M-s' reuses the regexp used the previous time.

   To search backward in the file for another message, give `M-s' a
negative argument.  In Rmail you can do this with `- M-s'.  This begins
searching from the end of the previous message.

   It is also possible to search for a message based on labels.  *Note
Rmail Labels::.

   The `C-c C-n' (`rmail-next-same-subject') command moves to the next
message with the same subject as the current one.  A prefix argument
serves as a repeat count.  With a negative argument, this command moves
backward, acting like `C-c C-p' (`rmail-previous-same-subject').  When
comparing subjects, these commands ignore the prefixes typically added
to the subjects of replies.

   To move to a message specified by absolute message number, use `j'
(`rmail-show-message') with the message number as argument.  With no
argument, `j' selects the first message.  `<' (`rmail-first-message')
also selects the first message.  `>' (`rmail-last-message') selects the
last message.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Deletion,  Next: Rmail Inbox,  Prev: Rmail Motion,  Up: Rmail

36.4 Deleting Messages
======================

When you no longer need to keep a message, you can "delete" it.  This
flags it as ignorable, and some Rmail commands pretend it is no longer
present; but it still has its place in the Rmail file, and still has its
message number.

   "Expunging" the Rmail file actually removes the deleted messages.
The remaining messages are renumbered consecutively.

`d'
     Delete the current message, and move to the next nondeleted message
     (`rmail-delete-forward').

`C-d'
     Delete the current message, and move to the previous nondeleted
     message (`rmail-delete-backward').

`u'
     Undelete the current message, or move back to the previous deleted
     message and undelete it (`rmail-undelete-previous-message').

`x'
     Expunge the Rmail file (`rmail-expunge').

   There are two Rmail commands for deleting messages.  Both delete the
current message and select another message.  `d'
(`rmail-delete-forward') moves to the following message, skipping
messages already deleted, while `C-d' (`rmail-delete-backward') moves
to the previous nondeleted message.  If there is no nondeleted message
to move to in the specified direction, the message that was just
deleted remains current.  `d' with a prefix argument is equivalent to
`C-d'.  Note that the Rmail summary versions of these commands behave
slightly differently (*note Rmail Summary Edit::).

   Whenever Rmail deletes a message, it runs the hook
`rmail-delete-message-hook'.  When the hook functions are invoked, the
message has been marked deleted, but it is still the current message in
the Rmail buffer.

   To make all the deleted messages finally vanish from the Rmail file,
type `x' (`rmail-expunge').  Until you do this, you can still
"undelete" the deleted messages.  The undeletion command, `u'
(`rmail-undelete-previous-message'), is designed to cancel the effect
of a `d' command in most cases.  It undeletes the current message if
the current message is deleted.  Otherwise it moves backward to
previous messages until a deleted message is found, and undeletes that
message.

   You can usually undo a `d' with a `u' because the `u' moves back to
and undeletes the message that the `d' deleted.  But this does not work
when the `d' skips a few already-deleted messages that follow the
message being deleted; then the `u' command undeletes the last of the
messages that were skipped.  There is no clean way to avoid this
problem.  However, by repeating the `u' command, you can eventually get
back to the message that you intend to undelete.  You can also select a
particular deleted message with the `M-p' command, then type `u' to
undelete it.

   A deleted message has the `deleted' attribute, and as a result
`deleted' appears in the mode line when the current message is deleted.
In fact, deleting or undeleting a message is nothing more than adding
or removing this attribute.  *Note Rmail Attributes::.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Inbox,  Next: Rmail Files,  Prev: Rmail Deletion,  Up: Rmail

36.5 Rmail Files and Inboxes
============================

When you receive mail locally, the operating system places incoming
mail for you in a file that we call your "inbox".  When you start up
Rmail, it runs a C program called `movemail' to copy the new messages
from your local inbox into your primary Rmail file, which also contains
other messages saved from previous Rmail sessions.  It is in this file
that you actually read the mail with Rmail.  This operation is called
"getting new mail".  You can get new mail at any time in Rmail by
typing `g'.

   The variable `rmail-primary-inbox-list' contains a list of the files
which are inboxes for your primary Rmail file.  If you don't set this
variable explicitly, Rmail uses the `MAIL' environment variable, or, as
a last resort, a default inbox based on `rmail-spool-directory'.  The
default inbox file depends on your operating system; often it is
`/var/mail/USERNAME', `/var/spool/mail/USERNAME', or
`/usr/spool/mail/USERNAME'.

   You can specify the inbox file(s) for any Rmail file for the current
session with the command `set-rmail-inbox-list'; see *Note Rmail
Files::.

   There are two reasons for having separate Rmail files and inboxes.

  1. The inbox file format varies between operating systems and
     according to the other mail software in use.  Only one part of
     Rmail needs to know about the alternatives, and it need only
     understand how to convert all of them to Rmail's own format.

  2. It is very cumbersome to access an inbox file without danger of
     losing mail, because it is necessary to interlock with mail
     delivery.  Moreover, different operating systems use different
     interlocking techniques.  The strategy of moving mail out of the
     inbox once and for all into a separate Rmail file avoids the need
     for interlocking in all the rest of Rmail, since only Rmail
     operates on the Rmail file.

   Rmail was originally written to use the Babyl format as its internal
format.  Since then, we have recognized that the usual inbox format
(`mbox') on Unix and GNU systems is adequate for the job, and so since
Emacs 23 Rmail uses that as its internal format.  The Rmail file is
still separate from the inbox file, even though their format is the
same.

   When getting new mail, Rmail first copies the new mail from the
inbox file to the Rmail file; then it saves the Rmail file; then it
clears out the inbox file.  This way, a system crash may cause
duplication of mail between the inbox and the Rmail file, but cannot
lose mail.  If `rmail-preserve-inbox' is non-`nil', then Rmail does not
clear out the inbox file when it gets new mail.  You may wish to set
this, for example, on a portable computer you use to check your mail
via POP while traveling, so that your mail will remain on the server
and you can save it later on your workstation.

   In some cases, Rmail copies the new mail from the inbox file
indirectly.  First it runs the `movemail' program to move the mail from
the inbox to an intermediate file called `.newmail-INBOXNAME', in the
same directory as the Rmail file.  Then Rmail merges the new mail from
that file, saves the Rmail file, and only then deletes the intermediate
file.  If there is a crash at the wrong time, this file continues to
exist, and Rmail will use it again the next time it gets new mail from
that inbox.

   If Rmail is unable to convert the data in `.newmail-INBOXNAME' into
mbox format, it renames the file to `RMAILOSE.N' (N is an integer
chosen to make the name unique) so that Rmail will not have trouble
with the data again.  You should look at the file, find whatever
message confuses Rmail (probably one that includes the
control-underscore character, octal code 037), and delete it.  Then you
can use `1 g' to get new mail from the corrected file.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Files,  Next: Rmail Output,  Prev: Rmail Inbox,  Up: Rmail

36.6 Multiple Rmail Files
=========================

Rmail operates by default on your "primary Rmail file", which is named
`~/RMAIL' and receives your incoming mail from your system inbox file.
But you can also have other Rmail files and edit them with Rmail.  These
files can receive mail through their own inboxes, or you can move
messages into them with explicit Rmail commands (*note Rmail Output::).

`i FILE <RET>'
     Read FILE into Emacs and run Rmail on it (`rmail-input').

`M-x set-rmail-inbox-list <RET> FILES <RET>'
     Specify inbox file names for current Rmail file to get mail from.

`g'
     Merge new mail from current Rmail file's inboxes
     (`rmail-get-new-mail').

`C-u g FILE <RET>'
     Merge new mail from inbox file FILE.

   To run Rmail on a file other than your primary Rmail file, you can
use the `i' (`rmail-input') command in Rmail.  This visits the file in
Rmail mode.  You can use `M-x rmail-input' even when not in Rmail, but
it is easier to type `C-u M-x rmail', which does the same thing.

   The file you read with `i' should normally be a valid mbox file.  If
it is not, Rmail tries to convert its text to mbox format, and visits
the converted text in the buffer.  If you save the buffer, that
converts the file.

   If you specify a file name that doesn't exist, `i' initializes a new
buffer for creating a new Rmail file.

   You can also select an Rmail file from a menu.  In the Classify menu,
choose the Input Rmail File item; then choose the Rmail file you want.
The variables `rmail-secondary-file-directory' and
`rmail-secondary-file-regexp' specify which files to offer in the menu:
the first variable says which directory to find them in; the second
says which files in that directory to offer (all those that match the
regular expression).  If no files match, you cannot select this menu
item.  These variables also apply to choosing a file for output (*note
Rmail Output::).

   The inbox files to use are specified by the variable
`rmail-inbox-list', which is buffer-local in Rmail mode.  As a special
exception, if you have specified no inbox files for your primary Rmail
file, it uses the `MAIL' environment variable, or your standard system
inbox.

   The `g' command (`rmail-get-new-mail') merges mail into the current
Rmail file from its inboxes.  If the Rmail file has no inboxes, `g'
does nothing.  The command `M-x rmail' also merges new mail into your
primary Rmail file.

   To merge mail from a file that is not the usual inbox, give the `g'
key a numeric argument, as in `C-u g'.  Then it reads a file name and
merges mail from that file.  The inbox file is not deleted or changed
in any way when `g' with an argument is used.  This is, therefore, a
general way of merging one file of messages into another.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Output,  Next: Rmail Labels,  Prev: Rmail Files,  Up: Rmail

36.7 Copying Messages Out to Files
==================================

These commands copy messages from an Rmail file into another file.

`o FILE <RET>'
     Append a full copy of the current message to the file FILE
     (`rmail-output').

`C-o FILE <RET>'
     Append a copy of the current message, as displayed, to the file
     FILE (`rmail-output-as-seen').

`w FILE <RET>'
     Output just the message body to the file FILE, taking the default
     file name from the message `Subject' header.

   The commands `o' and `C-o' copy the current message into a specified
file, adding it at the end.  The two commands differ mainly in how much
to copy: `o' copies the full message headers, even if they are not all
visible, while `C-o' copies exactly the headers currently displayed and
no more.  *Note Rmail Display::.  In addition, `o' converts the message
to Babyl format (used by Rmail in Emacs version 22 and before) if the
file is in Babyl format; `C-o' cannot output to Babyl files at all.

   If the output file is currently visited in an Emacs buffer, the
output commands append the message to that buffer.  It is up to you to
save the buffer eventually in its file.

   Sometimes you may receive a message whose body holds the contents of
a file.  You can save the body to a file (excluding the message header)
with the `w' command (`rmail-output-body-to-file').  Often these
messages contain the intended file name in the `Subject' field, so the
`w' command uses the `Subject' field as the default for the output file
name.  However, the file name is read using the minibuffer, so you can
specify a different name if you wish.

   You can also output a message to an Rmail file chosen with a menu.
In the Classify menu, choose the Output Rmail File menu item; then
choose the Rmail file you want.  This outputs the current message to
that file, like the `o' command.  The variables
`rmail-secondary-file-directory' and `rmail-secondary-file-regexp'
specify which files to offer in the menu: the first variable says which
directory to find them in; the second says which files in that
directory to offer (all those that match the regular expression).  If
no files match, you cannot select this menu item.

   Copying a message with `o' or `C-o' gives the original copy of the
message the `filed' attribute, so that `filed' appears in the mode line
when such a message is current.

   If you like to keep just a single copy of every mail message, set
the variable `rmail-delete-after-output' to `t'; then the `o', `C-o'
and `w' commands delete the original message after copying it.  (You
can undelete it afterward if you wish.)

   The variable `rmail-output-file-alist' lets you specify intelligent
defaults for the output file, based on the contents of the current
message.  The value should be a list whose elements have this form:

     (REGEXP . NAME-EXP)

If there's a match for REGEXP in the current message, then the default
file name for output is NAME-EXP.  If multiple elements match the
message, the first matching element decides the default file name.  The
subexpression NAME-EXP may be a string constant giving the file name to
use, or more generally it may be any Lisp expression that returns a
file name as a string.  `rmail-output-file-alist' applies to both `o'
and `C-o'.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Labels,  Next: Rmail Attributes,  Prev: Rmail Output,  Up: Rmail

36.8 Labels
===========

Each message can have various "labels" assigned to it as a means of
classification.  Each label has a name; different names are different
labels.  Any given label is either present or absent on a particular
message.  A few label names have standard meanings and are given to
messages automatically by Rmail when appropriate; these special labels
are called "attributes".  (*Note Rmail Attributes::.)  All other labels
are assigned only by users.

`a LABEL <RET>'
     Assign the label LABEL to the current message (`rmail-add-label').

`k LABEL <RET>'
     Remove the label LABEL from the current message
     (`rmail-kill-label').

`C-M-n LABELS <RET>'
     Move to the next message that has one of the labels LABELS
     (`rmail-next-labeled-message').

`C-M-p LABELS <RET>'
     Move to the previous message that has one of the labels LABELS
     (`rmail-previous-labeled-message').

`l LABELS <RET>'
`C-M-l LABELS <RET>'
     Make a summary of all messages containing any of the labels LABELS
     (`rmail-summary-by-labels').

   The `a' (`rmail-add-label') and `k' (`rmail-kill-label') commands
allow you to assign or remove any label on the current message.  If the
LABEL argument is empty, it means to assign or remove the same label
most recently assigned or removed.

   Once you have given messages labels to classify them as you wish,
there are three ways to use the labels: in moving, in summaries, and in
sorting.

   The command `C-M-n LABELS <RET>' (`rmail-next-labeled-message')
moves to the next message that has one of the labels LABELS.  The
argument LABELS specifies one or more label names, separated by commas.
`C-M-p' (`rmail-previous-labeled-message') is similar, but moves
backwards to previous messages.  A numeric argument to either command
serves as a repeat count.

   The command `C-M-l LABELS <RET>' (`rmail-summary-by-labels')
displays a summary containing only the messages that have at least one
of a specified set of labels.  The argument LABELS is one or more label
names, separated by commas.  *Note Rmail Summary::, for information on
summaries.

   If the LABELS argument to `C-M-n', `C-M-p' or `C-M-l' is empty, it
means to use the last set of labels specified for any of these commands.

   *Note Rmail Sorting::, for information on sorting messages with
labels.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Attributes,  Next: Rmail Reply,  Prev: Rmail Labels,  Up: Rmail

36.9 Rmail Attributes
=====================

Some labels such as `deleted' and `filed' have built-in meanings, and
Rmail assigns them to messages automatically at appropriate times;
these labels are called "attributes".  Here is a list of Rmail
attributes:

`unseen'
     Means the message has never been current.  Assigned to messages
     when they come from an inbox file, and removed when a message is
     made current.  When you start Rmail, it initially shows the first
     message that has this attribute.

`deleted'
     Means the message is deleted.  Assigned by deletion commands and
     removed by undeletion commands (*note Rmail Deletion::).

`filed'
     Means the message has been copied to some other file.  Assigned by
     the `o' and `C-o' file output commands (*note Rmail Output::).

`answered'
     Means you have mailed an answer to the message.  Assigned by the
     `r' command (`rmail-reply').  *Note Rmail Reply::.

`forwarded'
     Means you have forwarded the message.  Assigned by the `f' command
     (`rmail-forward').  *Note Rmail Reply::.

`edited'
     Means you have edited the text of the message within Rmail.  *Note
     Rmail Editing::.

`resent'
     Means you have resent the message.  Assigned by the command `M-x
     rmail-resend'.  *Note Rmail Reply::.

`retried'
     Means you have retried a failed outgoing message.  Assigned by the
     command `M-x rmail-retry-failure'.  *Note Rmail Reply::.

   All other labels are assigned or removed only by users, and have no
standard meaning.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Reply,  Next: Rmail Summary,  Prev: Rmail Attributes,  Up: Rmail

36.10 Sending Replies
=====================

Rmail has several commands to send outgoing mail.  *Note Sending
Mail::, for information on using Message mode, including certain
features meant to work with Rmail.  What this section documents are the
special commands of Rmail for entering the mail buffer.  Note that the
usual keys for sending mail--`C-x m', `C-x 4 m', and `C-x 5 m'--also
work normally in Rmail mode.

`m'
     Send a message (`rmail-mail').

`c'
     Continue editing the already started outgoing message
     (`rmail-continue').

`r'
     Send a reply to the current Rmail message (`rmail-reply').

`f'
     Forward the current message to other users (`rmail-forward').

`C-u f'
     Resend the current message to other users (`rmail-resend').

`M-m'
     Try sending a bounced message a second time
     (`rmail-retry-failure').

   The most common reason to send a message while in Rmail is to reply
to the message you are reading.  To do this, type `r' (`rmail-reply').
This displays the `*mail*' buffer in another window, much like `C-x 4
m', but preinitializes the `Subject', `To', `CC', `In-reply-to' and
`References' header fields based on the message you are replying to.
The `To' field starts out as the address of the person who sent the
message you received, and the `CC' field starts out with all the other
recipients of that message.

   You can exclude certain recipients from being included automatically
in replies, using the variable `rmail-dont-reply-to-names'.  Its value
should be a regular expression; any recipients that match are excluded
from the `CC' field.  They are also excluded from the `To' field,
unless this would leave the field empty.  If this variable is nil, then
the first time you compose a reply it is initialized to a default value
that matches your own address, and any name starting with `info-'.
(Those names are excluded because there is a convention of using them
for large mailing lists to broadcast announcements.)

   To omit the `CC' field completely for a particular reply, enter the
reply command with a numeric argument: `C-u r' or `1 r'.  This means to
reply only to the sender of the original message.

   Once the `*mail*' buffer has been initialized, editing and sending
the mail goes as usual (*note Sending Mail::).  You can edit the
presupplied header fields if they are not what you want.  You can also
use commands such as `C-c C-y', which yanks in the message that you are
replying to (*note Mail Commands::).  You can also switch to the Rmail
buffer, select a different message there, switch back, and yank the new
current message.

   Sometimes a message does not reach its destination.  Mailers usually
send the failed message back to you, enclosed in a "failure message".
The Rmail command `M-m' (`rmail-retry-failure') prepares to send the
same message a second time: it sets up a `*mail*' buffer with the same
text and header fields as before.  If you type `C-c C-c' right away,
you send the message again exactly the same as the first time.
Alternatively, you can edit the text or headers and then send it.  The
variable `rmail-retry-ignored-headers', in the same format as
`rmail-ignored-headers' (*note Rmail Display::), controls which headers
are stripped from the failed message when retrying it.

   Another frequent reason to send mail in Rmail is to "forward" the
current message to other users.  `f' (`rmail-forward') makes this easy
by preinitializing the `*mail*' buffer with the current message as the
text, and a subject designating a forwarded message.  All you have to
do is fill in the recipients and send.  When you forward a message,
recipients get a message which is "from" you, and which has the
original message in its contents.

   Forwarding a message encloses it between two delimiter lines.  It
also modifies every line that starts with a dash, by inserting `- ' at
the start of the line.  When you receive a forwarded message, if it
contains something besides ordinary text--for example, program source
code--you might find it useful to undo that transformation.  You can do
this by selecting the forwarded message and typing `M-x
unforward-rmail-message'.  This command extracts the original forwarded
message, deleting the inserted `- ' strings, and inserts it into the
Rmail file as a separate message immediately following the current one.

   "Resending" is an alternative similar to forwarding; the difference
is that resending sends a message that is "from" the original sender,
just as it reached you--with a few added header fields (`Resent-From'
and `Resent-To') to indicate that it came via you.  To resend a message
in Rmail, use `C-u f'.  (`f' runs `rmail-forward', which invokes
`rmail-resend' if you provide a numeric argument.)

   Use the `m' (`rmail-mail') command to start editing an outgoing
message that is not a reply.  It leaves the header fields empty.  Its
only difference from `C-x 4 m' is that it makes the Rmail buffer
accessible for `C-c C-y', just as `r' does.  Thus, `m' can be used to
reply to or forward a message; it can do anything `r' or `f' can do.

   The `c' (`rmail-continue') command resumes editing the `*mail*'
buffer, to finish editing an outgoing message you were already
composing, or to alter a message you have sent.

   If you set the variable `rmail-mail-new-frame' to a non-`nil' value,
then all the Rmail commands to start sending a message create a new
frame to edit it in.  This frame is deleted when you send the message,
or when you use the `Cancel' item in the `Mail' menu.

   All the Rmail commands to send a message use the mail-composition
method that you have chosen (*note Mail Methods::).


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Summary,  Next: Rmail Sorting,  Prev: Rmail Reply,  Up: Rmail

36.11 Summaries
===============

A "summary" is a buffer containing one line per message to give you an
overview of the mail in an Rmail file.  Each line shows the message
number and date, the sender, the line count, the labels, and the
subject.  Moving point in the summary buffer selects messages as you
move to their summary lines.  Almost all Rmail commands are valid in
the summary buffer also; when used there, they apply to the message
described by the current line of the summary.

   A summary buffer applies to a single Rmail file only; if you are
editing multiple Rmail files, each one can have its own summary buffer.
The summary buffer name is made by appending `-summary' to the Rmail
buffer's name.  Normally only one summary buffer is displayed at a time.

* Menu:

* Rmail Make Summary::	     Making various sorts of summaries.
* Rmail Summary Edit::	     Manipulating messages from the summary.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Make Summary,  Next: Rmail Summary Edit,  Up: Rmail Summary

36.11.1 Making Summaries
------------------------

Here are the commands to create a summary for the current Rmail buffer.
Once the Rmail buffer has a summary, changes in the Rmail buffer (such
as deleting or expunging messages, and getting new mail) automatically
update the summary.

`h'
`C-M-h'
     Summarize all messages (`rmail-summary').

`l LABELS <RET>'
`C-M-l LABELS <RET>'
     Summarize messages that have one or more of the specified labels
     (`rmail-summary-by-labels').

`C-M-r RCPTS <RET>'
     Summarize messages that match the specified recipients
     (`rmail-summary-by-recipients').

`C-M-t TOPIC <RET>'
     Summarize messages that have a match for the specified regexp
     TOPIC in their subjects (`rmail-summary-by-topic').

`C-M-s REGEXP <RET>'
     Summarize messages whose headers match the specified regular
     expression REGEXP (`rmail-summary-by-regexp').

`C-M-f SENDERS <RET>'
     Summarize messages that match the specified senders.
     (`rmail-summary-by-senders').

   The `h' or `C-M-h' (`rmail-summary') command fills the summary buffer
for the current Rmail buffer with a summary of all the messages in the
buffer.  It then displays and selects the summary buffer in another
window.

   `C-M-l LABELS <RET>' (`rmail-summary-by-labels') makes a partial
summary mentioning only the messages that have one or more of the
labels LABELS.  LABELS should contain label names separated by commas.

   `C-M-r RCPTS <RET>' (`rmail-summary-by-recipients') makes a partial
summary mentioning only the messages that have one or more recipients
matching the regular expression RCPTS.  You can use commas to separate
multiple regular expressions.  These are matched against the `To',
`From', and `CC' headers (with a prefix argument, this header is not
included).

   `C-M-t TOPIC <RET>' (`rmail-summary-by-topic') makes a partial
summary mentioning only the messages whose subjects have a match for
the regular expression TOPIC.  You can use commas to separate multiple
regular expressions.  With a prefix argument, the match is against the
whole message, not just the subject.

   `C-M-s REGEXP <RET>' (`rmail-summary-by-regexp') makes a partial
summary that mentions only the messages whose headers (including the
date and the subject lines) match the regular expression REGEXP.

   `C-M-f SENDERS <RET>' (`rmail-summary-by-senders') makes a partial
summary that mentions only the messages whose `From' fields match the
regular expression SENDERS.  You can use commas to separate multiple
regular expressions.

   Note that there is only one summary buffer for any Rmail buffer;
making any kind of summary discards any previous summary.

   The variable `rmail-summary-window-size' says how many lines to use
for the summary window.  The variable `rmail-summary-line-count-flag'
controls whether the summary line for a message should include the line
count of the message.  Setting this option to nil might speed up the
generation of summaries.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Summary Edit,  Prev: Rmail Make Summary,  Up: Rmail Summary

36.11.2 Editing in Summaries
----------------------------

You can use the Rmail summary buffer to do almost anything you can do
in the Rmail buffer itself.  In fact, once you have a summary buffer,
there's no need to switch back to the Rmail buffer.

   You can select and display various messages in the Rmail buffer, from
the summary buffer, just by moving point in the summary buffer to
different lines.  It doesn't matter what Emacs command you use to move
point; whichever line point is on at the end of the command, that
message is selected in the Rmail buffer.

   Almost all Rmail commands work in the summary buffer as well as in
the Rmail buffer.  Thus, `d' in the summary buffer deletes the current
message, `u' undeletes, and `x' expunges.  (However, in the summary
buffer, a numeric argument to `d', `C-d' and `u' serves as a repeat
count.  A negative argument reverses the meaning of `d' and `C-d'.
Also, if there are no more undeleted messages in the relevant
direction, the delete commands go to the first or last message, rather
than staying on the current message.)  `o' and `C-o' output the current
message to a FILE; `r' starts a reply to it; etc.  You can scroll the
current message while remaining in the summary buffer using <SPC> and
<DEL>.

   `M-u' (`rmail-summary-undelete-many') undeletes all deleted messages
in the summary.  A prefix argument means to undelete that many of the
previous deleted messages.

   The Rmail commands to move between messages also work in the summary
buffer, but with a twist: they move through the set of messages included
in the summary.  They also ensure the Rmail buffer appears on the screen
(unlike cursor motion commands, which update the contents of the Rmail
buffer but don't display it in a window unless it already appears).
Here is a list of these commands:

`n'
     Move to next line, skipping lines saying `deleted', and select its
     message (`rmail-summary-next-msg').

`p'
     Move to previous line, skipping lines saying `deleted', and select
     its message (`rmail-summary-previous-msg').

`M-n'
     Move to next line and select its message
     (`rmail-summary-next-all').

`M-p'
     Move to previous line and select its message
     (`rmail-summary-previous-all').

`>'
     Move to the last line, and select its message
     (`rmail-summary-last-message').

`<'
     Move to the first line, and select its message
     (`rmail-summary-first-message').

`j'
`<RET>'
     Select the message on the current line (ensuring that the Rmail
     buffer appears on the screen; `rmail-summary-goto-msg').  With
     argument N, select message number N and move to its line in the
     summary buffer; this signals an error if the message is not listed
     in the summary buffer.

`M-s PATTERN <RET>'
     Search through messages for PATTERN starting with the current
     message; select the message found, and move point in the summary
     buffer to that message's line (`rmail-summary-search').  A prefix
     argument acts as a repeat count; a negative argument means search
     backward (equivalent to `rmail-summary-search-backward'.)

`C-M-n LABELS <RET>'
     Move to the next message with at least one of the specified labels
     (`rmail-summary-next-labeled-message').  LABELS is a
     comma-separated list of labels.  A prefix argument acts as a repeat
     count.

`C-M-p LABELS <RET>'
     Move to the previous message with at least one of the specified
     labels (`rmail-summary-previous-labeled-message').

`C-c C-n <RET>'
     Move to the next message with the same subject as the current
     message (`rmail-summary-next-same-subject').  A prefix argument
     acts as a repeat count.

`C-c C-p <RET>'
     Move to the previous message with the same subject as the current
     message (`rmail-summary-previous-same-subject').

   Deletion, undeletion, and getting new mail, and even selection of a
different message all update the summary buffer when you do them in the
Rmail buffer.  If the variable `rmail-redisplay-summary' is non-`nil',
these actions also bring the summary buffer back onto the screen.

   When you are finished using the summary, type `Q'
(`rmail-summary-wipe') to delete the summary buffer's window.  You can
also exit Rmail while in the summary: `q' (`rmail-summary-quit')
deletes the summary window, then exits from Rmail by saving the Rmail
file and switching to another buffer.  Alternatively, `b'
(`rmail-summary-bury') simply buries the Rmail summary and buffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Sorting,  Next: Rmail Display,  Prev: Rmail Summary,  Up: Rmail

36.12 Sorting the Rmail File
============================

`C-c C-s C-d'
`M-x rmail-sort-by-date'
     Sort messages of current Rmail buffer by date.

`C-c C-s C-s'
`M-x rmail-sort-by-subject'
     Sort messages of current Rmail buffer by subject.

`C-c C-s C-a'
`M-x rmail-sort-by-author'
     Sort messages of current Rmail buffer by author's name.

`C-c C-s C-r'
`M-x rmail-sort-by-recipient'
     Sort messages of current Rmail buffer by recipient's names.

`C-c C-s C-c'
`M-x rmail-sort-by-correspondent'
     Sort messages of current Rmail buffer by the name of the other
     correspondent.

`C-c C-s C-l'
`M-x rmail-sort-by-lines'
     Sort messages of current Rmail buffer by number of lines.

`C-c C-s C-k <RET> LABELS <RET>'
`M-x rmail-sort-by-labels <RET> LABELS <RET>'
     Sort messages of current Rmail buffer by labels.  The argument
     LABELS should be a comma-separated list of labels.  The order of
     these labels specifies the order of messages; messages with the
     first label come first, messages with the second label come
     second, and so on.  Messages that have none of these labels come
     last.

   The Rmail sort commands perform a _stable sort_: if there is no
reason to prefer either one of two messages, their order remains
unchanged.  You can use this to sort by more than one criterion.  For
example, if you use `rmail-sort-by-date' and then
`rmail-sort-by-author', messages from the same author appear in order
by date.

   With a prefix argument, all these commands reverse the order of
comparison.  This means they sort messages from newest to oldest, from
biggest to smallest, or in reverse alphabetical order.

   The same keys in the summary buffer run similar functions; for
example, `C-c C-s C-l' runs `rmail-summary-sort-by-lines'.  Note that
these commands always sort the whole Rmail buffer, even if the summary
is only showing a subset of messages.

   Note that you cannot undo a sort, so you may wish to save the Rmail
buffer before sorting it.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Display,  Next: Rmail Coding,  Prev: Rmail Sorting,  Up: Rmail

36.13 Display of Messages
=========================

Rmail reformats the header of each message before displaying it for the
first time.  Reformatting hides uninteresting header fields to reduce
clutter.  You can use the `t' command to show the entire header or to
repeat the header reformatting operation.

`t'
     Toggle display of complete header (`rmail-toggle-header').

   Reformatting the header involves deleting most header fields, on the
grounds that they are not interesting.  The variable
`rmail-ignored-headers' holds a regular expression that specifies which
header fields to hide in this way--if it matches the beginning of a
header field, that whole field is hidden.  However, the variable
`rmail-nonignored-headers' provides a further override: a header
matching that regular expression is shown even if it matches
`rmail-ignored-headers' too.

   As an alternative to the previous two variables, you can set
`rmail-displayed-headers' instead.  If non-`nil', this should be a
regular expression specifying which headers to display.

   To see the complete, original header, use the `t' command
(`rmail-toggle-header').  This discards the reformatted headers of the
current message and displays it with the original header.  Repeating
`t' reformats the message again, which shows only the interesting
headers according to the current values of the above variables.
Selecting the message again also reformats it if necessary.

   When the `t' command has a prefix argument, a positive argument
means to show the reformatted header, and a zero or negative argument
means to show the full header.

   Rmail highlights certain header fields that are especially
interesting--by default, the `From' and `Subject' fields.  The variable
`rmail-highlighted-headers' holds a regular expression that specifies
the header fields to highlight; if it matches the beginning of a header
field, that whole field is highlighted.  To turn off this feature, set
`rmail-highlighted-headers' to `nil'.  Customize the face
`rmail-highlight' to adjust the style of the highlighting.

   You can highlight and activate URLs in incoming messages using Goto
Address mode:

     (add-hook 'rmail-show-message-hook (lambda () (goto-address-mode 1)))

Then you can browse these URLs by clicking on them with `Mouse-2' (or
`Mouse-1' quickly) or by moving to one and typing `C-c <RET>'.  *Note
Activating URLs: Goto Address mode.

   The `v' (`rmail-mime') command creates a temporary buffer displaying
the current MIME message.  By default, it displays plain text and
multipart messages, and offers buttons to save attachments.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Coding,  Next: Rmail Editing,  Prev: Rmail Display,  Up: Rmail

36.14 Rmail and Coding Systems
==============================

Rmail automatically decodes messages which contain non-ASCII
characters, just as Emacs does with files you visit and with subprocess
output.  Rmail uses the standard `charset=CHARSET' header in the
message, if any, to determine how the message was encoded by the
sender.  It maps CHARSET into the corresponding Emacs coding system
(*note Coding Systems::), and uses that coding system to decode message
text.  If the message header doesn't have the `charset' specification,
or if CHARSET is not recognized, Rmail chooses the coding system with
the usual Emacs heuristics and defaults (*note Recognize Coding::).

   Occasionally, a message is decoded incorrectly, either because Emacs
guessed the wrong coding system in the absence of the `charset'
specification, or because the specification was inaccurate.  For
example, a misconfigured mailer could send a message with a
`charset=iso-8859-1' header when the message is actually encoded in
`koi8-r'.  When you see the message text garbled, or some of its
characters displayed as empty boxes, this may have happened.

   You can correct the problem by decoding the message again using the
right coding system, if you can figure out or guess which one is right.
To do this, invoke the `M-x rmail-redecode-body' command.  It reads
the name of a coding system, and then redecodes the message using the
coding system you specified.  If you specified the right coding system,
the result should be readable.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Editing,  Next: Rmail Digest,  Prev: Rmail Coding,  Up: Rmail

36.15 Editing Within a Message
==============================

Most of the usual Emacs keybindings are available in Rmail mode, though
a few, such as `C-M-n' and `C-M-h', are redefined by Rmail for other
purposes.  However, the Rmail buffer is normally read only, and most of
the letters are redefined as Rmail commands.  If you want to edit the
text of a message, you must use the Rmail command `e'.

`e'
     Edit the current message as ordinary text.

   The `e' command (`rmail-edit-current-message') switches from Rmail
mode into Rmail Edit mode, another major mode which is nearly the same
as Text mode.  The mode line indicates this change.

   In Rmail Edit mode, letters insert themselves as usual and the Rmail
commands are not available.  You can edit the message body and header
fields.  When you are finished editing the message, type `C-c C-c' to
switch back to Rmail mode.  Alternatively, you can return to Rmail mode
but cancel any editing that you have done, by typing `C-c C-]'.

   Entering Rmail Edit mode runs the hook `text-mode-hook'; then it
runs the hook `rmail-edit-mode-hook' (*note Hooks::).  Returning to
ordinary Rmail mode adds the attribute `edited' to the message, if you
have made any changes in it.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Digest,  Next: Rmail Rot13,  Prev: Rmail Editing,  Up: Rmail

36.16 Digest Messages
=====================

A "digest message" is a message which exists to contain and carry
several other messages.  Digests are used on some moderated mailing
lists; all the messages that arrive for the list during a period of time
such as one day are put inside a single digest which is then sent to the
subscribers.  Transmitting the single digest uses much less computer
time than transmitting the individual messages even though the total
size is the same, because the per-message overhead in network mail
transmission is considerable.

   When you receive a digest message, the most convenient way to read
it is to "undigestify" it: to turn it back into many individual
messages.  Then you can read and delete the individual messages as it
suits you.  To do this, select the digest message and type the command
`M-x undigestify-rmail-message'.  This extracts the submessages as
separate Rmail messages, and inserts them following the digest.  The
digest message itself is flagged as deleted.


File: emacs,  Node: Rmail Rot13,  Next: Movemail,  Prev: Rmail Digest,  Up: Rmail

36.17 Reading Rot13 Messages
============================

Mailing list messages that might offend some readers are sometimes
encoded in a simple code called "rot13"--so named because it rotates
the alphabet by 13 letters.  This code is not for secrecy, as it
provides none; rather, it enables those who might be offended to avoid
seeing the real text of the message.

   To view a buffer which uses the rot13 code, use the command `M-x
rot13-other-window'.  This displays the current buffer in another window
which applies the code when displaying the text.


File: emacs,  Node: Movemail,  Next: Remote Mailboxes,  Prev: Rmail Rot13,  Up: Rmail

36.18 `movemail' program
========================

Rmail uses the `movemail' program to move mail from your inbox to your
Rmail file (*note Rmail Inbox::).  When loaded for the first time,
Rmail attempts to locate the `movemail' program and determine its
version.  There are two versions of the `movemail' program: the native
one, shipped with GNU Emacs (the "emacs version") and the one included
in GNU mailutils (the "mailutils version," *note movemail:
(mailutils)movemail.).  They support the same command line syntax and
the same basic subset of options.  However, the Mailutils version
offers additional features.

   The Emacs version of `movemail' is able to retrieve mail from the
usual UNIX mailbox formats and from remote mailboxes using the POP3
protocol.

   The Mailutils version is able to handle a wide set of mailbox
formats, such as plain UNIX mailboxes, `maildir' and `MH' mailboxes,
etc.  It is able to access remote mailboxes using the POP3 or IMAP4
protocol, and can retrieve mail from them using a TLS encrypted
channel.  It also accepts mailbox arguments in URL form.  The detailed
description of mailbox URLs can be found in *Note URL: (mailutils)URL.
In short, a URL is:

     PROTO://[USER[:PASSWORD]@]HOST-OR-FILE-NAME

where square brackets denote optional elements.

PROTO
     Specifies the "mailbox protocol", or "format" to use.  The exact
     semantics of the rest of URL elements depends on the actual value
     of PROTO (see below).

USER
     User name to access the remote mailbox.

PASSWORD
     User password to access the remote mailbox.

HOST-OR-FILE-NAME
     Hostname of the remote server for remote mailboxes or file name of
     a local mailbox.

PROTO can be one of:

`mbox'
     Usual UNIX mailbox format.  In this case, neither USER nor PASS
     are used, and HOST-OR-FILE-NAME denotes the file name of the
     mailbox file, e.g., `mbox://var/spool/mail/smith'.

`mh'
     A local mailbox in the MH format.  USER and PASS are not used.
     HOST-OR-FILE-NAME denotes the name of MH folder, e.g.,
     `mh://Mail/inbox'.

`maildir'
     A local mailbox in the maildir format.  USER and PASS are not
     used, and HOST-OR-FILE-NAME denotes the name of `maildir' mailbox,
     e.g., `maildir://mail/inbox'.

`file'
     Any local mailbox format.  Its actual format is detected
     automatically by `movemail'.

`pop'
     A remote mailbox to be accessed via POP3 protocol.  USER specifies
     the remote user name to use, PASS may be used to specify the user
     password, HOST-OR-FILE-NAME is the name or IP address of the
     remote mail server to connect to; e.g.,
     `pop://smith:guessme@remote.server.net'.

`imap'
     A remote mailbox to be accessed via IMAP4 protocol.  USER
     specifies the remote user name to use, PASS may be used to specify
     the user password, HOST-OR-FILE-NAME is the name or IP address of
     the remote mail server to connect to; e.g.,
     `imap://smith:guessme@remote.server.net'.

   Alternatively, you can specify the file name of the mailbox to use.
This is equivalent to specifying the `file' protocol:

     /var/spool/mail/USER == file://var/spool/mail/USER

   The variable `rmail-movemail-program' controls which version of
`movemail' to use.  If that is a string, it specifies the absolute file
name of the `movemail' executable.  If it is `nil', Rmail searches for
`movemail' in the directories listed in `rmail-movemail-search-path'
and `exec-path', then in `exec-directory'.


File: emacs,  Node: Remote Mailboxes,  Next: Other Mailbox Formats,  Prev: Movemail,  Up: Rmail

36.19 Retrieving Mail from Remote Mailboxes
===========================================

Some sites use a method called POP for accessing users' inbox data
instead of storing the data in inbox files.  By default, the `Emacs
movemail' can work with POP (unless the Emacs `configure' script was
run with the option `--without-pop').

   Similarly, the Mailutils `movemail' by default supports POP, unless
it was configured with the `--disable-pop' option.

   Both versions of `movemail' only work with POP3, not with older
versions of POP.

   No matter which flavor of `movemail' you use, you can specify a POP
inbox by using a POP "URL" (*note Movemail::).  A POP URL is a "file
name" of the form `pop://USERNAME@HOSTNAME', where HOSTNAME is the host
name or IP address of the remote mail server and USERNAME is the user
name on that server.  Additionally, you may specify the password in the
mailbox URL: `pop://USERNAME:PASSWORD@HOSTNAME'.  In this case,
PASSWORD takes preference over the one set by `rmail-remote-password'
(see below).  This is especially useful if you have several remote
mailboxes with different passwords.

   For backward compatibility, Rmail also supports an alternative way of
specifying remote POP mailboxes.  Specifying an inbox name in the form
`po:USERNAME:HOSTNAME' is equivalent to `pop://USERNAME@HOSTNAME'.  If
you omit the :HOSTNAME part, the `MAILHOST' environment variable
specifies the machine on which to look for the POP server.

   Another method for accessing remote mailboxes is IMAP.  This method
is supported only by the Mailutils `movemail'.  To specify an IMAP
mailbox in the inbox list, use the following mailbox URL:
`imap://USERNAME[:PASSWORD]@HOSTNAME'.  The PASSWORD part is optional,
as described above.

   Accessing a remote mailbox may require a password.  Rmail uses the
following algorithm to retrieve it:

  1. If a PASSWORD is present in the mailbox URL (see above), it is
     used.

  2. If the variable `rmail-remote-password-required' is `nil', Rmail
     assumes no password is required.

  3. If the variable `rmail-remote-password' is non-`nil', its value is
     used.

  4. Otherwise, Rmail will ask you for the password to use.

   If you need to pass additional command-line flags to `movemail', set
the variable `rmail-movemail-flags' a list of the flags you wish to
use.  Do not use this variable to pass the `-p' flag to preserve your
inbox contents; use `rmail-preserve-inbox' instead.

   The `movemail' program installed at your site may support Kerberos
authentication (the Emacs `movemail' does so if Emacs was configured
with the option `--with-kerberos' or `--with-kerberos5').  If it is
supported, it is used by default whenever you attempt to retrieve POP
mail when `rmail-remote-password' and `rmail-remote-password-required'
are unset.

   Some POP servers store messages in reverse order.  If your server
does this, and you would rather read your mail in the order in which it
was received, you can tell `movemail' to reverse the order of
downloaded messages by adding the `-r' flag to `rmail-movemail-flags'.

   Mailutils `movemail' supports TLS encryption.  If you wish to use
it, add the `--tls' flag to `rmail-movemail-flags'.


File: emacs,  Node: Other Mailbox Formats,  Prev: Remote Mailboxes,  Up: Rmail

36.20 Retrieving Mail from Local Mailboxes in Various Formats
=============================================================

If your incoming mail is stored on a local machine in a format other
than UNIX mailbox, you will need the Mailutils `movemail' to retrieve
it.  *Note Movemail::, for the detailed description of `movemail'
versions.  For example, to access mail from a inbox in `maildir' format
located in `/var/spool/mail/in', you would include the following in the
Rmail inbox list:

     maildir://var/spool/mail/in


File: emacs,  Node: Dired,  Next: Calendar/Diary,  Prev: Rmail,  Up: Top

37 Dired, the Directory Editor
******************************

Dired makes an Emacs buffer containing a listing of a directory, and
optionally some of its subdirectories as well.  You can use the normal
Emacs commands to move around in this buffer, and special Dired
commands to operate on the listed files.

   The Dired buffer is "read-only," and inserting text in it is not
allowed.  Ordinary printing characters such as `d' and `x' are
redefined for special Dired commands.  Some Dired commands "mark" or
"flag" the "current file" (that is, the file on the current line);
other commands operate on the marked files or on the flagged files.
You first mark certain files in order to operate on all of them with
one command.

   The Dired-X package provides various extra features for Dired mode.
*Note Dired-X: (dired-x)Top.

   You can also view a list of files in a directory with `C-x C-d'
(`list-directory').  Unlike Dired, this command does not allow you to
operate on the listed files.  *Note Directories::.

* Menu:

* Enter: Dired Enter.         How to invoke Dired.
* Navigation: Dired Navigation.   Special motion commands in the Dired buffer.
* Deletion: Dired Deletion.   Deleting files with Dired.
* Flagging Many Files::       Flagging files based on their names.
* Visit: Dired Visiting.      Other file operations through Dired.
* Marks vs Flags::	      Flagging for deletion vs marking.
* Operating on Files::	      How to copy, rename, print, compress, etc.
			        either one file or several files.
* Shell Commands in Dired::   Running a shell command on the marked files.
* Transforming File Names::   Using patterns to rename multiple files.
* Comparison in Dired::	      Running `diff' by way of Dired.
* Subdirectories in Dired::   Adding subdirectories to the Dired buffer.

* Subdir Switches::           Subdirectory switches in Dired.
* Subdirectory Motion::	      Moving across subdirectories, and up and down.
* Hiding Subdirectories::     Making subdirectories visible or invisible.
* Updating: Dired Updating.   Discarding lines for files of no interest.
* Find: Dired and Find.	      Using `find' to choose the files for Dired.
* Wdired::                    Operating on files by editing the Dired buffer.
* Image-Dired::               Viewing image thumbnails in Dired.
* Misc: Misc Dired Features.  Various other features.


File: emacs,  Node: Dired Enter,  Next: Dired Navigation,  Up: Dired

37.1 Entering Dired
===================

To invoke Dired, type `C-x d' (`dired').  This reads a directory name
using the minibuffer, and opens a "Dired buffer" listing the files in
that directory.  You can also supply a wildcard file name pattern as
the minibuffer argument, in which case the Dired buffer lists all files
matching that pattern.  The usual history and completion commands can
be used in the minibuffer; in particular, `M-n' puts the name of the
visited file (if any) in the minibuffer (*note Minibuffer History::).

   You can also invoke Dired by giving `C-x C-f' (`find-file') a
directory name.

   The variable `dired-listing-switches' specifies the options to give
to `ls' for listing the directory; this string _must_ contain `-l'.  If
you use a numeric prefix argument with the `dired' command, you can
specify the `ls' switches with the minibuffer before you enter the
directory specification.  No matter how they are specified, the `ls'
switches can include short options (that is, single characters)
requiring no arguments, and long options (starting with `--') whose
arguments are specified with `='.

   On MS-Windows and MS-DOS systems, Emacs _emulates_ `ls'; see *Note
ls in Lisp::, for options and peculiarities of that emulation.

   To display the Dired buffer in another window rather than in the
selected window, use `C-x 4 d' (`dired-other-window') instead of `C-x
d'.  `C-x 5 d' (`dired-other-frame') uses a separate frame to display
the Dired buffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Dired Navigation,  Next: Dired Deletion,  Prev: Dired Enter,  Up: Dired

37.2 Navigation in the Dired Buffer
===================================

All the usual Emacs cursor motion commands are available in Dired
buffers.  The keys `C-n' and `C-p' are redefined to put the cursor at
the beginning of the file name on the line, rather than at the
beginning of the line.

   For extra convenience, <SPC> and `n' in Dired are equivalent to
`C-n'.  `p' is equivalent to `C-p'.  (Moving by lines is so common in
Dired that it deserves to be easy to type.)  <DEL> (move up and unflag)
is also often useful simply for moving up (*note Dired Deletion::).

   `j' (`dired-goto-file') prompts for a file name using the
minibuffer, and moves point to the line in the Dired buffer describing
that file.

   `M-s f C-s' (`dired-isearch-filenames') performs a forward
incremental search in the Dired buffer, looking for matches only
amongst the file names and ignoring the rest of the text in the buffer.
`M-s f M-C-s' (`dired-isearch-filenames-regexp') does the same, using
a regular expression search.  If you change the variable
`dired-isearch-filenames' to `t', then the usual search commands also
limit themselves to the file names; for instance, `C-s' behaves like
`M-s f C-s'.  If the value is `dwim', then search commands match the
file names only when point was on a file name initially.  *Note
Search::, for information about incremental search.

   Some additional navigation commands are available when the Dired
buffer includes several directories.  *Note Subdirectory Motion::.


File: emacs,  Node: Dired Deletion,  Next: Flagging Many Files,  Prev: Dired Navigation,  Up: Dired

37.3 Deleting Files with Dired
==============================

One of the most frequent uses of Dired is to first "flag" files for
deletion, then delete the files that were flagged.

`d'
     Flag this file for deletion.

`u'
     Remove deletion flag on this line.

`<DEL>'
     Move point to previous line and remove the deletion flag on that
     line.

`x'
     Delete the files that are flagged for deletion.

   You can flag a file for deletion by moving to the line describing
the file and typing `d' (`dired-flag-file-deletion').  The deletion
flag is visible as a `D' at the beginning of the line.  This command
moves point to the next line, so that repeated `d' commands flag
successive files.  A numeric argument serves as a repeat count.

   The reason for flagging files for deletion, rather than deleting
files immediately, is to reduce the danger of deleting a file
accidentally.  Until you direct Dired to delete the flagged files, you
can remove deletion flags using the commands `u' and <DEL>.  `u'
(`dired-unmark') works just like `d', but removes flags rather than
making flags.  <DEL> (`dired-unmark-backward') moves upward, removing
flags; it is like `u' with argument -1.

   To delete the flagged files, type `x' (`dired-do-flagged-delete').
This command first displays a list of all the file names flagged for
deletion, and requests confirmation with `yes'.  If you confirm, Dired
deletes the flagged files, then deletes their lines from the text of
the Dired buffer.  The Dired buffer, with somewhat fewer lines, remains
selected.

   If you answer `no' or quit with `C-g' when asked to confirm, you
return immediately to Dired, with the deletion flags still present in
the buffer, and no files actually deleted.

   You can delete empty directories just like other files, but normally
Dired cannot delete directories that are nonempty.  If the variable
`dired-recursive-deletes' is non-`nil', then Dired can delete nonempty
directories including all their contents.  That can be somewhat risky.

   On some systems, there is a facility called the "Trash" or "Recycle
Bin", but Emacs does _not_ use it by default.  Thus, when you delete a
file in Dired, it is gone forever.  However, you can tell Emacs to use
the Trash for file deletion, by changing the variable
`delete-by-moving-to-trash' to `t'.  *Note Misc File Ops::, for more
information about the Trash.


File: emacs,  Node: Flagging Many Files,  Next: Dired Visiting,  Prev: Dired Deletion,  Up: Dired

37.4 Flagging Many Files at Once
================================

The `#', `~', `.', `% &', and `% d' commands flag many files for
deletion, based on their file names:

`#'
     Flag all auto-save files (files whose names start and end with `#')
     for deletion (*note Auto Save::).

`~'
     Flag all backup files (files whose names end with `~') for deletion
     (*note Backup::).

`. (Period)'
     Flag excess numeric backup files for deletion.  The oldest and
     newest few backup files of any one file are exempt; the middle
     ones are flagged.

`% &'
     Flag for deletion all files with certain kinds of names which
     suggest you could easily create those files again.

`% d REGEXP <RET>'
     Flag for deletion all files whose names match the regular
     expression REGEXP.

   `#' (`dired-flag-auto-save-files') flags all files whose names look
like auto-save files--that is, files whose names begin and end with
`#'.  *Note Auto Save::.

   `~' (`dired-flag-backup-files') flags all files whose names say they
are backup files--that is, files whose names end in `~'.  *Note
Backup::.

   `.' (period, `dired-clean-directory') flags just some of the backup
files for deletion: all but the oldest few and newest few backups of
any one file.  Normally, the number of newest versions kept for each
file is given by the variable `dired-kept-versions' (*not*
`kept-new-versions'; that applies only when saving).  The number of
oldest versions to keep is given by the variable `kept-old-versions'.

   Period with a positive numeric argument, as in `C-u 3 .', specifies
the number of newest versions to keep, overriding
`dired-kept-versions'.  A negative numeric argument overrides
`kept-old-versions', using minus the value of the argument to specify
the number of oldest versions of each file to keep.

   `% &' (`dired-flag-garbage-files') flags files whose names match the
regular expression specified by the variable
`dired-garbage-files-regexp'.  By default, this matches certain files
produced by TeX, `.bak' files, and the `.orig' and `.rej' files
produced by `patch'.

   `% d' flags all files whose names match a specified regular
expression (`dired-flag-files-regexp').  Only the non-directory part of
the file name is used in matching.  You can use `^' and `$' to anchor
matches.  You can exclude certain subdirectories from marking by hiding
them while you use `% d'.  *Note Hiding Subdirectories::.


File: emacs,  Node: Dired Visiting,  Next: Marks vs Flags,  Prev: Flagging Many Files,  Up: Dired

37.5 Visiting Files in Dired
============================

There are several Dired commands for visiting or examining the files
listed in the Dired buffer.  All of them apply to the current line's
file; if that file is really a directory, these commands invoke Dired on
that subdirectory (making a separate Dired buffer).

`f'
     Visit the file described on the current line, like typing `C-x C-f'
     and supplying that file name (`dired-find-file').  *Note
     Visiting::.

`<RET>'
`e'
     Equivalent to `f'.

`o'
     Like `f', but uses another window to display the file's buffer
     (`dired-find-file-other-window').  The Dired buffer remains visible
     in the first window.  This is like using `C-x 4 C-f' to visit the
     file.  *Note Windows::.

`C-o'
     Visit the file described on the current line, and display the
     buffer in another window, but do not select that window
     (`dired-display-file').

`Mouse-1'
`Mouse-2'
     Visit the file named by the line you click on
     (`dired-mouse-find-file-other-window').  This uses another window
     to display the file, like the `o' command.

`v'
     View the file described on the current line, using `M-x view-file'
     (`dired-view-file').  Viewing a file with `view-file' is like
     visiting it, but is slanted toward moving around in the file
     conveniently and does not allow changing the file.  *Note View
     File: Misc File Ops.

`^'
     Visit the parent directory of the current directory
     (`dired-up-directory').  This is equivalent to moving to the line
     for `..' and typing `f' there.


File: emacs,  Node: Marks vs Flags,  Next: Operating on Files,  Prev: Dired Visiting,  Up: Dired

37.6 Dired Marks vs. Flags
==========================

Instead of flagging a file with `D', you can "mark" the file with some
other character (usually `*').  Most Dired commands to operate on files
use the files marked with `*'.  The only command that operates on
flagged files is `x', which deletes them.

   Here are some commands for marking with `*', for unmarking, and for
operating on marks.  (*Note Dired Deletion::, for commands to flag and
unflag files.)

`m'
`* m'
     Mark the current file with `*' (`dired-mark').  With a numeric
     argument N, mark the next N files starting with the current file.
     (If N is negative, mark the previous -N files.)

`* *'
     Mark all executable files with `*' (`dired-mark-executables').
     With a numeric argument, unmark all those files.

`* @'
     Mark all symbolic links with `*' (`dired-mark-symlinks').  With a
     numeric argument, unmark all those files.

`* /'
     Mark with `*' all files which are directories, except for `.' and
     `..' (`dired-mark-directories').  With a numeric argument, unmark
     all those files.

`* s'
     Mark all the files in the current subdirectory, aside from `.' and
     `..' (`dired-mark-subdir-files').

`u'
`* u'
     Remove any mark on this line (`dired-unmark').

`<DEL>'
`* <DEL>'
     Move point to previous line and remove any mark on that line
     (`dired-unmark-backward').

`* !'
`U'
     Remove all marks from all the files in this Dired buffer
     (`dired-unmark-all-marks').

`* ? MARKCHAR'
`M-<DEL>'
     Remove all marks that use the character MARKCHAR
     (`dired-unmark-all-files').  The argument is a single
     character--do not use <RET> to terminate it.  See the description
     of the `* c' command below, which lets you replace one mark
     character with another.

     With a numeric argument, this command queries about each marked
     file, asking whether to remove its mark.  You can answer `y'
     meaning yes, `n' meaning no, or `!' to remove the marks from the
     remaining files without asking about them.

`* C-n'
`M-}'
     Move down to the next marked file (`dired-next-marked-file') A
     file is "marked" if it has any kind of mark.

`* C-p'
`M-{'
     Move up to the previous marked file (`dired-prev-marked-file')

`t'
`* t'
     Toggle all marks (`dired-toggle-marks'): files marked with `*'
     become unmarked, and unmarked files are marked with `*'.  Files
     marked in any other way are not affected.

`* c OLD-MARKCHAR NEW-MARKCHAR'
     Replace all marks that use the character OLD-MARKCHAR with marks
     that use the character NEW-MARKCHAR (`dired-change-marks').  This
     command is the primary way to create or use marks other than `*'
     or `D'.  The arguments are single characters--do not use <RET> to
     terminate them.

     You can use almost any character as a mark character by means of
     this command, to distinguish various classes of files.  If
     OLD-MARKCHAR is a space (` '), then the command operates on all
     unmarked files; if NEW-MARKCHAR is a space, then the command
     unmarks the files it acts on.

     To illustrate the power of this command, here is how to put `D'
     flags on all the files that have no marks, while unflagging all
     those that already have `D' flags:

          * c D t  * c SPC D  * c t SPC

     This assumes that no files were already marked with `t'.

`% m REGEXP <RET>'
`* % REGEXP <RET>'
     Mark (with `*') all files whose names match the regular expression
     REGEXP (`dired-mark-files-regexp').  This command is like `% d',
     except that it marks files with `*' instead of flagging with `D'.

     Only the non-directory part of the file name is used in matching.
     Use `^' and `$' to anchor matches.  You can exclude subdirectories
     by temporarily hiding them (*note Hiding Subdirectories::).

`% g REGEXP <RET>'
     Mark (with `*') all files whose _contents_ contain a match for the
     regular expression REGEXP (`dired-mark-files-containing-regexp').
     This command is like `% m', except that it searches the file
     contents instead of the file name.

`C-x u'
`C-_'
`C-/'
     Undo changes in the Dired buffer, such as adding or removing marks
     (`dired-undo').  _This command does not revert the actual file
     operations, nor recover lost files!_  It just undoes changes in
     the buffer itself.

     In some cases, using this after commands that operate on files can
     cause trouble.  For example, after renaming one or more files,
     `dired-undo' restores the original names in the Dired buffer,
     which gets the Dired buffer out of sync with the actual contents of
     the directory.


File: emacs,  Node: Operating on Files,  Next: Shell Commands in Dired,  Prev: Marks vs Flags,  Up: Dired

37.7 Operating on Files
=======================

This section describes the basic Dired commands to operate on one file
or several files.  All of these commands are capital letters; all of
them use the minibuffer, either to read an argument or to ask for
confirmation, before they act.  All of them let you specify the files
to manipulate in these ways:

   * If you give the command a numeric prefix argument N, it operates
     on the next N files, starting with the current file.  (If N is
     negative, the command operates on the -N files preceding the
     current line.)

   * Otherwise, if some files are marked with `*', the command operates
     on all those files.

   * Otherwise, the command operates on the current file only.

Certain other Dired commands, such as `!' and the `%' commands, use the
same conventions to decide which files to work on.

   Commands which ask for a destination directory, such as those which
copy and rename files or create links for them, try to guess the default
target directory for the operation.  Normally, they suggest the Dired
buffer's default directory, but if the variable `dired-dwim-target' is
non-`nil', and if there is another Dired buffer displayed in the next
window, that other buffer's directory is suggested instead.

   Here are the file-manipulating Dired commands that operate on files.

`C NEW <RET>'
     Copy the specified files (`dired-do-copy').  The argument NEW is
     the directory to copy into, or (if copying a single file) the new
     name.  This is like the shell command `cp'.

     If `dired-copy-preserve-time' is non-`nil', then copying with this
     command preserves the modification time of the old file in the
     copy, like `cp -p'.

     The variable `dired-recursive-copies' controls whether to copy
     directories recursively (like `cp -r').  The default is `nil',
     which means that directories cannot be copied.

`D'
     Delete the specified files (`dired-do-delete').  This is like the
     shell command `rm'.

     Like the other commands in this section, this command operates on
     the _marked_ files, or the next N files.  By contrast, `x'
     (`dired-do-flagged-delete') deletes all "flagged" files.

`R NEW <RET>'
     Rename the specified files (`dired-do-rename').  If you rename a
     single file, the argument NEW is the new name of the file.  If you
     rename several files, the argument NEW is the directory into which
     to move the files (this is like the shell command `mv').

     Dired automatically changes the visited file name of buffers
     associated with renamed files so that they refer to the new names.

`H NEW <RET>'
     Make hard links to the specified files (`dired-do-hardlink').
     This is like the shell command `ln'.  The argument NEW is the
     directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the
     name to give the link.

`S NEW <RET>'
     Make symbolic links to the specified files (`dired-do-symlink').
     This is like `ln -s'.  The argument NEW is the directory to make
     the links in, or (if making just one link) the name to give the
     link.

`M MODESPEC <RET>'
     Change the mode (also called "permission bits") of the specified
     files (`dired-do-chmod').  This uses the `chmod' program, so
     MODESPEC can be any argument that `chmod' can handle.

`G NEWGROUP <RET>'
     Change the group of the specified files to NEWGROUP
     (`dired-do-chgrp').

`O NEWOWNER <RET>'
     Change the owner of the specified files to NEWOWNER
     (`dired-do-chown').  (On most systems, only the superuser can do
     this.)

     The variable `dired-chown-program' specifies the name of the
     program to use to do the work (different systems put `chown' in
     different places).

`T TIMESTAMP <RET>'
     Touch the specified files (`dired-do-touch').  This means updating
     their modification times to the present time.  This is like the
     shell command `touch'.

`P COMMAND <RET>'
     Print the specified files (`dired-do-print').  You must specify the
     command to print them with, but the minibuffer starts out with a
     suitable guess made using the variables `lpr-command' and
     `lpr-switches' (the same variables that `lpr-buffer' uses; *note
     Printing::).

`Z'
     Compress the specified files (`dired-do-compress').  If the file
     appears to be a compressed file already, uncompress it instead.

`L'
     Load the specified Emacs Lisp files (`dired-do-load').  *Note Lisp
     Libraries::.

`B'
     Byte compile the specified Emacs Lisp files
     (`dired-do-byte-compile').  *Note Byte Compilation: (elisp)Byte
     Compilation.

`A REGEXP <RET>'
     Search all the specified files for the regular expression REGEXP
     (`dired-do-search').

     This command is a variant of `tags-search'.  The search stops at
     the first match it finds; use `M-,' to resume the search and find
     the next match.  *Note Tags Search::.

`Q REGEXP <RET> TO <RET>'
     Perform `query-replace-regexp' on each of the specified files,
     replacing matches for REGEXP with the string TO
     (`dired-do-query-replace-regexp').

     This command is a variant of `tags-query-replace'.  If you exit the
     query replace loop, you can use `M-,' to resume the scan and
     replace more matches.  *Note Tags Search::.


File: emacs,  Node: Shell Commands in Dired,  Next: Transforming File Names,  Prev: Operating on Files,  Up: Dired

37.8 Shell Commands in Dired
============================

The Dired command `!' (`dired-do-shell-command') reads a shell command
string in the minibuffer and runs that shell command on one or more
files.  The files that the shell command operates on are determined in
the usual way for Dired commands (*note Operating on Files::).  The
command `X' is a synonym for `!'.

   The command `&' (`dired-do-async-shell-command') does the same,
except that it runs the shell command asynchronously.  You can also do
this with `!', by appending a `&' character to the end of the shell
command.

   For both `!' and `&', the working directory for the shell command is
the top-level directory of the Dired buffer.

   If you tell `!' or `&' to operate on more than one file, the shell
command string determines how those files are passed to the shell
command:

   * If you use `*' surrounded by whitespace in the command string,
     then the command runs just once, with the list of file names
     substituted for the `*'.  The order of file names is the order of
     appearance in the Dired buffer.

     Thus, `! tar cf foo.tar * <RET>' runs `tar' on the entire list of
     file names, putting them into one tar file `foo.tar'.

     If you want to use `*' as a shell wildcard with whitespace around
     it, write `*""'.  In the shell, this is equivalent to `*'; but
     since the `*' is not surrounded by whitespace, Dired does not
     treat it specially.

   * Otherwise, if the command string contains `?' surrounded by
     whitespace, Emacs runs the shell command once _for each file_,
     substituting the current file name for `?' each time.  You can use
     `?' more than once in the command; the same file name replaces
     each occurrence.

   * If the command string contains neither `*' nor `?', Emacs runs the
     shell command once for each file, adding the file name is added at
     the end.  For example, `! uudecode <RET>' runs `uudecode' on each
     file.

   To iterate over the file names in a more complicated fashion, use an
explicit shell loop.  For example, here is how to uuencode each file,
making the output file name by appending `.uu' to the input file name:

     for file in * ; do uuencode "$file" "$file" >"$file".uu; done

   The `!' and `&' commands do not attempt to update the Dired buffer
to show new or modified files, because they don't know what files will
be changed.  Use the `g' command to update the Dired buffer (*note
Dired Updating::).

   *Note Single Shell::, for information about running shell commands
outside Dired.


File: emacs,  Node: Transforming File Names,  Next: Comparison in Dired,  Prev: Shell Commands in Dired,  Up: Dired

37.9 Transforming File Names in Dired
=====================================

This section describes Dired commands which alter file names in a
systematic way.  Each command operates on some or all of the marked
files, using a new name made by transforming the existing name.

   Like the basic Dired file-manipulation commands (*note Operating on
Files::), the commands described here operate either on the next N
files, or on all files marked with `*', or on the current file.  (To
mark files, use the commands described in *Note Marks vs Flags::.)

   All of the commands described in this section work _interactively_:
they ask you to confirm the operation for each candidate file.  Thus,
you can select more files than you actually need to operate on (e.g.,
with a regexp that matches many files), and then filter the selected
names by typing `y' or `n' when the command prompts for confirmation.

`% u'
     Rename each of the selected files to an upper-case name
     (`dired-upcase').  If the old file names are `Foo' and `bar', the
     new names are `FOO' and `BAR'.

`% l'
     Rename each of the selected files to a lower-case name
     (`dired-downcase').  If the old file names are `Foo' and `bar',
     the new names are `foo' and `bar'.

`% R FROM <RET> TO <RET>'
`% C FROM <RET> TO <RET>'
`% H FROM <RET> TO <RET>'
`% S FROM <RET> TO <RET>'
     These four commands rename, copy, make hard links and make soft
     links, in each case computing the new name by regular-expression
     substitution from the name of the old file.

   The four regular-expression substitution commands effectively
perform a search-and-replace on the selected file names.  They read two
arguments: a regular expression FROM, and a substitution pattern TO;
they match each "old" file name against FROM, and then replace the
matching part with TO.  You can use `\&' and `\DIGIT' in TO to refer to
all or part of what the pattern matched in the old file name, as in
`replace-regexp' (*note Regexp Replace::).  If the regular expression
matches more than once in a file name, only the first match is replaced.

   For example, `% R ^.*$ <RET> x-\& <RET>' renames each selected file
by prepending `x-' to its name.  The inverse of this, removing `x-'
from the front of each file name, is also possible: one method is `% R
^x-\(.*\)$ <RET> \1 <RET>'; another is `% R ^x- <RET> <RET>'.  (Use `^'
and `$' to anchor matches that should span the whole file name.)

   Normally, the replacement process does not consider the files'
directory names; it operates on the file name within the directory.  If
you specify a numeric argument of zero, then replacement affects the
entire absolute file name including directory name.  (A non-zero
argument specifies the number of files to operate on.)

   You may want to select the set of files to operate on using the same
regexp FROM that you will use to operate on them.  To do this, mark
those files with `% m FROM <RET>', then use the same regular expression
in the command to operate on the files.  To make this more convenient,
the `%' commands to operate on files use the last regular expression
specified in any `%' command as a default.


File: emacs,  Node: Comparison in Dired,  Next: Subdirectories in Dired,  Prev: Transforming File Names,  Up: Dired

37.10 File Comparison with Dired
================================

Here are two Dired commands that compare specified files using `diff'.
They show the output in a buffer using Diff mode (*note Comparing
Files::).

`='
     Compare the current file (the file at point) with another file (the
     file at the mark) using the `diff' program (`dired-diff').  The
     file at the mark is the first argument of `diff', and the file at
     point is the second argument.  This refers to the ordinary Emacs
     mark, not Dired marks; use `C-<SPC>' (`set-mark-command') to set
     the mark at the first file's line (*note Setting Mark::).

`M-='
     Compare the current file with its latest backup file
     (`dired-backup-diff').  If the current file is itself a backup,
     compare it with the file it is a backup of; this way, you can
     compare a file with any one of its backups.

     The backup file is the first file given to `diff'.


File: emacs,  Node: Subdirectories in Dired,  Next: Subdir Switches,  Prev: Comparison in Dired,  Up: Dired

37.11 Subdirectories in Dired
=============================

A Dired buffer displays just one directory in the normal case; but you
can optionally include its subdirectories as well.

   The simplest way to include multiple directories in one Dired buffer
is to specify the options `-lR' for running `ls'.  (If you give a
numeric argument when you run Dired, then you can specify these options
in the minibuffer.)  That produces a recursive directory listing showing
all subdirectories at all levels.

   More often, you will want to show only specific subdirectories.  You
can do this with the `i' command:

`i'
     Insert the contents of a subdirectory later in the buffer.

   Use the `i' (`dired-maybe-insert-subdir') command on a line that
describes a file which is a directory.  It inserts the contents of that
directory into the same Dired buffer, and moves there.  Inserted
subdirectory contents follow the top-level directory of the Dired
buffer, just as they do in `ls -lR' output.

   If the subdirectory's contents are already present in the buffer, the
`i' command just moves to it.

   In either case, `i' sets the Emacs mark before moving, so `C-u
C-<SPC>' takes you back to the old position in the buffer (the line
describing that subdirectory).  You can also use `^' to return to the
parent directory in the same Dired buffer.

   Use the `l' command (`dired-do-redisplay') to update the
subdirectory's contents.  Use `C-u k' on the subdirectory header line
to delete the subdirectory (*note Dired Updating::).  You can also hide
and show inserted subdirectories (*note Hiding Subdirectories::).


File: emacs,  Node: Subdir Switches,  Next: Subdirectory Motion,  Prev: Subdirectories in Dired,  Up: Dired

37.12 Subdirectory Switches in Dired
====================================

You can insert subdirectories with specified `ls' switches in Dired
buffers using `C-u i'.  You can change the `ls' switches of an already
inserted subdirectory using `C-u l'.

   Dired preserves the switches if you revert the buffer.  Deleting a
subdirectory forgets about its switches.

   Using `dired-undo' (usually bound to `C-_' and `C-x u') to reinsert
or delete subdirectories that were inserted with explicit switches can
bypass Dired's machinery for remembering (or forgetting) switches.
Deleting a subdirectory using `dired-undo' does not forget its
switches.  When later reinserted using `i', it will be reinserted using
its old switches.  Using `dired-undo' to reinsert a subdirectory that
was deleted using the regular Dired commands (not `dired-undo') will
originally insert it with its old switches.  Reverting the buffer,
however, will relist it using the buffer's default switches.  If any of
this yields problems, you can easily correct the situation using `C-u
i' or `C-u l'.

   Dired does not remember the `R' switch.  Inserting a subdirectory
with switches that include the `R' switch is equivalent to inserting
each of its subdirectories using all remaining switches.  For instance,
updating or killing a subdirectory that was inserted with the `R'
switch will not update or kill its subdirectories.

   The buffer's default switches do not affect subdirectories that were
inserted using explicitly specified switches.  In particular, commands
such as `s' that change the buffer's switches do not affect such
subdirectories.  (They do, however, affect subdirectories without
explicitly assigned switches.)

   You can make Dired forget about all subdirectory switches and relist
all subdirectories with the buffer's default switches using `M-x
dired-reset-subdir-switches'.  This also reverts the Dired buffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Subdirectory Motion,  Next: Hiding Subdirectories,  Prev: Subdir Switches,  Up: Dired

37.13 Moving Over Subdirectories
================================

When a Dired buffer lists subdirectories, you can use the page motion
commands `C-x [' and `C-x ]' to move by entire directories (*note
Pages::).

   The following commands move across, up and down in the tree of
directories within one Dired buffer.  They move to "directory header
lines", which are the lines that give a directory's name, at the
beginning of the directory's contents.

`C-M-n'
     Go to next subdirectory header line, regardless of level
     (`dired-next-subdir').

`C-M-p'
     Go to previous subdirectory header line, regardless of level
     (`dired-prev-subdir').

`C-M-u'
     Go up to the parent directory's header line (`dired-tree-up').

`C-M-d'
     Go down in the directory tree, to the first subdirectory's header
     line (`dired-tree-down').

`<'
     Move up to the previous directory-file line (`dired-prev-dirline').
     These lines are the ones that describe a directory as a file in its
     parent directory.

`>'
     Move down to the next directory-file line (`dired-prev-dirline').


File: emacs,  Node: Hiding Subdirectories,  Next: Dired Updating,  Prev: Subdirectory Motion,  Up: Dired

37.14 Hiding Subdirectories
===========================

"Hiding" a subdirectory means to make it invisible, except for its
header line.

`$'
     Hide or show the subdirectory that point is in, and move point to
     the next subdirectory (`dired-hide-subdir').  This is a toggle.  A
     numeric argument serves as a repeat count.

`M-$'
     Hide all subdirectories in this Dired buffer, leaving only their
     header lines (`dired-hide-all').  Or, if any subdirectory is
     currently hidden, make all subdirectories visible again.  You can
     use this command to get an overview in very deep directory trees
     or to move quickly to subdirectories far away.

   Ordinary Dired commands never consider files inside a hidden
subdirectory.  For example, the commands to operate on marked files
ignore files in hidden directories even if they are marked.  Thus you
can use hiding to temporarily exclude subdirectories from operations
without having to remove the Dired marks on files in those
subdirectories.

   *Note Dired Updating::, for how to insert or delete a subdirectory
listing.


File: emacs,  Node: Dired Updating,  Next: Dired and Find,  Prev: Hiding Subdirectories,  Up: Dired

37.15 Updating the Dired Buffer
===============================

This section describes commands to update the Dired buffer to reflect
outside (non-Dired) changes in the directories and files, and to delete
part of the Dired buffer.

`g'
     Update the entire contents of the Dired buffer (`revert-buffer').

`l'
     Update the specified files (`dired-do-redisplay').  You specify the
     files for `l' in the same way as for file operations.

`k'
     Delete the specified _file lines_--not the files, just the lines
     (`dired-do-kill-lines').

`s'
     Toggle between alphabetical order and date/time order
     (`dired-sort-toggle-or-edit').

`C-u s SWITCHES <RET>'
     Refresh the Dired buffer using SWITCHES as
     `dired-listing-switches'.

   Type `g' (`revert-buffer') to update the contents of the Dired
buffer, based on changes in the files and directories listed.  This
preserves all marks except for those on files that have vanished.
Hidden subdirectories are updated but remain hidden.

   To update only some of the files, type `l' (`dired-do-redisplay').
Like the Dired file-operating commands, this command operates on the
next N files (or previous -N files), or on the marked files if any, or
on the current file.  Updating the files means reading their current
status, then updating their lines in the buffer to indicate that status.

   If you use `l' on a subdirectory header line, it updates the
contents of the corresponding subdirectory.

   If you use `C-x d' or some other Dired command to visit a directory
that is already being shown in a Dired buffer, Dired switches to that
buffer but does not update it.  If the buffer is not up-to-date, Dired
displays a warning telling you to type <g> to update it.  You can also
tell Emacs to revert each Dired buffer automatically when you revisit
it, by setting the variable `dired-auto-revert-buffer' to a non-`nil'
value.

   To delete the specified _file lines_ from the buffer--not delete the
files--type `k' (`dired-do-kill-lines').  Like the file-operating
commands, this command operates on the next N files, or on the marked
files if any; but it does not operate on the current file as a last
resort.

   If you use `k' with a numeric prefix argument to kill the line for a
file that is a directory, which you have inserted in the Dired buffer
as a subdirectory, it deletes that subdirectory from the buffer as
well.  Typing `C-u k' on the header line for a subdirectory also
deletes the subdirectory from the Dired buffer.

   The `g' command brings back any individual lines that you have
killed in this way, but not subdirectories--you must use `i' to
reinsert a subdirectory.

   The files in a Dired buffers are normally listed in alphabetical
order by file names.  Alternatively Dired can sort them by date/time.
The Dired command `s' (`dired-sort-toggle-or-edit') switches between
these two sorting modes.  The mode line in a Dired buffer indicates
which way it is currently sorted--by name, or by date.

   `C-u s SWITCHES <RET>' lets you specify a new value for
`dired-listing-switches'.


File: emacs,  Node: Dired and Find,  Next: Wdired,  Prev: Dired Updating,  Up: Dired

37.16 Dired and `find'
======================

You can select a set of files for display in a Dired buffer more
flexibly by using the `find' utility to choose the files.

   To search for files with names matching a wildcard pattern use `M-x
find-name-dired'.  It reads arguments DIRECTORY and PATTERN, and
chooses all the files in DIRECTORY or its subdirectories whose
individual names match PATTERN.

   The files thus chosen are displayed in a Dired buffer, in which the
ordinary Dired commands are available.

   If you want to test the contents of files, rather than their names,
use `M-x find-grep-dired'.  This command reads two minibuffer
arguments, DIRECTORY and REGEXP; it chooses all the files in DIRECTORY
or its subdirectories that contain a match for REGEXP.  It works by
running the programs `find' and `grep'.  See also `M-x grep-find', in
*Note Grep Searching::.  Remember to write the regular expression for
`grep', not for Emacs.  (An alternative method of showing files whose
contents match a given regexp is the `% g REGEXP' command, see *Note
Marks vs Flags::.)

   The most general command in this series is `M-x find-dired', which
lets you specify any condition that `find' can test.  It takes two
minibuffer arguments, DIRECTORY and FIND-ARGS; it runs `find' in
DIRECTORY, passing FIND-ARGS to tell `find' what condition to test.  To
use this command, you need to know how to use `find'.

   The format of listing produced by these commands is controlled by the
variable `find-ls-option', whose default value specifies using options
`-ld' for `ls'.  If your listings are corrupted, you may need to change
the value of this variable.

   The command `M-x locate' provides a similar interface to the
`locate' program.  `M-x locate-with-filter' is similar, but keeps only
files whose names match a given regular expression.

   These buffers don't work entirely like ordinary Dired buffers: file
operations work, but do not always automatically update the buffer.
Reverting the buffer with `g' deletes all inserted subdirectories, and
erases all flags and marks.


File: emacs,  Node: Wdired,  Next: Image-Dired,  Prev: Dired and Find,  Up: Dired

37.17 Editing the Dired Buffer
==============================

Wdired is a special mode that allows you to perform file operations by
editing the Dired buffer directly (the "W" in "Wdired" stands for
"writable.")  To enter Wdired mode, type `C-x C-q'
(`dired-toggle-read-only') while in a Dired buffer.  Alternatively, use
the `Immediate / Edit File Names' menu item.

   While in Wdired mode, you can rename files by editing the file names
displayed in the Dired buffer.  All the ordinary Emacs editing
commands, including rectangle operations and `query-replace', are
available for this.  Once you are done editing, type `C-c C-c'
(`wdired-finish-edit').  This applies your changes and switches back to
ordinary Dired mode.

   Apart from simply renaming files, you can move a file to another
directory by typing in the new file name (either absolute or relative).
To mark a file for deletion, delete the entire file name.  To change
the target of a symbolic link, edit the link target name which appears
next to the link name.

   The rest of the text in the buffer, such as the file sizes and
modification dates, is marked read-only, so you can't edit it.
However, if you set `wdired-allow-to-change-permissions' to `t', you
can edit the file permissions.  For example, you can change
`-rw-r--r--' to `-rw-rw-rw-' to make a file world-writable.  These
changes also take effect when you type `C-c C-c'.


File: emacs,  Node: Image-Dired,  Next: Misc Dired Features,  Prev: Wdired,  Up: Dired

37.18 Viewing Image Thumbnails in Dired
=======================================

Image-Dired is a facility for browsing image files.  It provides viewing
the images either as thumbnails or in full size, either inside Emacs or
through an external viewer.

   To enter Image-Dired, mark the image files you want to look at in
the Dired buffer, using `m' as usual.  Then type `C-t d'
(`image-dired-display-thumbs').  This creates and switches to a buffer
containing image-dired, corresponding to the marked files.

   You can also enter Image-Dired directly by typing `M-x image-dired'.
This prompts for a directory; specify one that has image files.  This
creates thumbnails for all the images in that directory, and displays
them all in the "thumbnail buffer."  This takes a long time if the
directory contains many image files, and it asks for confirmation if
the number of image files exceeds
`image-dired-show-all-from-dir-max-files'.

   With point in the thumbnail buffer, you can type `RET'
(`image-dired-display-thumbnail-original-image') to display a sized
version of it in another window.  This sizes the image to fit the
window.  Use the arrow keys to move around in the buffer.  For easy
browsing, use `SPC' (`image-dired-display-next-thumbnail-original') to
advance and display the next image.  Typing `DEL'
(`image-dired-display-previous-thumbnail-original') backs up to the
previous thumbnail and displays that instead.

   To view and the image in its original size, either provide a prefix
argument (`C-u') before pressing `RET', or type `C-<RET>'
(`image-dired-thumbnail-display-external') to display the image in an
external viewer.  You must first configure
`image-dired-external-viewer'.

   You can delete images through Image-Dired also.  Type `d'
(`image-dired-flag-thumb-original-file') to flag the image file for
deletion in the Dired buffer.  You can also delete the thumbnail image
from the thumbnail buffer with `C-d' (`image-dired-delete-char').

   More advanced features include "image tags", which are metadata used
to categorize image files.  The tags are stored in a plain text file
configured by `image-dired-db-file'.

   To tag image files, mark them in the dired buffer (you can also mark
files in Dired from the thumbnail buffer by typing `m') and type `C-t
t' (`image-dired-tag-files').  This reads the tag name in the
minibuffer.  To mark files having a certain tag, type `C-t f'
(`image-dired-mark-tagged-files').  After marking image files with a
certain tag, you can use `C-t d' to view them.

   You can also tag a file directly from the thumbnail buffer by typing
`t t' and you can remove a tag by typing `t r'.  There is also a
special "tag" called "comment" for each file (it is not a tag in the
exact same sense as the other tags, it is handled slightly different).
That is used to enter a comment or description about the image.  You
comment a file from the thumbnail buffer by typing `c'.  You will be
prompted for a comment.  Type `C-t c' to add a comment from Dired
(`image-dired-dired-comment-files').

   Image-Dired also provides simple image manipulation.  In the
thumbnail buffer, type `L' to rotate the original image 90 degrees anti
clockwise, and `R' to rotate it 90 degrees clockwise.  This rotation is
lossless, and uses an external utility called JpegTRAN.


File: emacs,  Node: Misc Dired Features,  Prev: Image-Dired,  Up: Dired

37.19 Other Dired Features
==========================

The command `+' (`dired-create-directory') reads a directory name, and
creates the directory if it does not already exist.

   The command `M-s a C-s' (`dired-do-isearch') begins a "multi-file"
incremental search on the marked files.  If a search fails at the end
of a file, typing `C-s' advances to the next marked file and repeats
the search; at the end of the last marked file, the search wraps around
to the first marked file.  The command `M-s a M-C-s'
(`dired-do-isearch-regexp') does the same with a regular expression
search.  *Note Repeat Isearch::, for information about search
repetition.

   The command `w' (`dired-copy-filename-as-kill') puts the names of
the marked (or next N) files into the kill ring, as if you had killed
them with `C-w'.  The names are separated by a space.

   With a zero prefix argument, this uses the absolute file name of
each marked file.  With just `C-u' as the prefix argument, it uses file
names relative to the Dired buffer's default directory.  (This can
still contain slashes if in a subdirectory.)  As a special case, if
point is on a directory headerline, `w' gives you the absolute name of
that directory.  Any prefix argument or marked files are ignored in
this case.

   The main purpose of this command is so that you can yank the file
names into arguments for other Emacs commands.  It also displays what
it added to the kill ring, so you can use it to display the list of
currently marked files in the echo area.

   If the directory you are visiting is under version control (*note
Version Control::), then the normal VC diff and log commands will
operate on the selected files.

   The command `M-x dired-compare-directories' is used to compare the
current Dired buffer with another directory.  It marks all the files
that are "different" between the two directories.  It puts these marks
in all Dired buffers where these files are listed, which of course
includes the current buffer.

   The default comparison method (used if you type <RET> at the prompt)
is to compare just the file names--each file name that does not appear
in the other directory is "different."  You can specify more stringent
comparisons by entering a Lisp expression, which can refer to the
variables `size1' and `size2', the respective file sizes; `mtime1' and
`mtime2', the last modification times in seconds, as floating point
numbers; and `fa1' and `fa2', the respective file attribute lists (as
returned by the function `file-attributes').  This expression is
evaluated for each pair of like-named files, and if the expression's
value is non-`nil', those files are considered "different."

   For instance, the sequence `M-x dired-compare-directories <RET> (>
mtime1 mtime2) <RET>' marks files newer in this directory than in the
other, and marks files older in the other directory than in this one.
It also marks files with no counterpart, in both directories, as always.

   On the X window system, Emacs supports the "drag and drop" protocol.
You can drag a file object from another program, and drop it onto a
Dired buffer; this either moves, copies, or creates a link to the file
in that directory.  Precisely which action is taken is determined by
the originating program.  Dragging files out of a Dired buffer is
currently not supported.


File: emacs,  Node: Calendar/Diary,  Next: Document View,  Prev: Dired,  Up: Top

38 The Calendar and the Diary
*****************************

Emacs provides the functions of a desk calendar, with a diary of
planned or past events.  It also has facilities for managing your
appointments, and keeping track of how much time you spend working on
certain projects.

   To enter the calendar, type `M-x calendar'; this displays a
three-month calendar centered on the current month, with point on the
current date.  With a numeric argument, as in `C-u M-x calendar', it
prompts you for the month and year to be the center of the three-month
calendar.  The calendar uses its own buffer, whose major mode is
Calendar mode.

   `Mouse-3' in the calendar brings up a menu of operations on a
particular date; `Mouse-2' brings up a menu of commonly used calendar
features that are independent of any particular date.  To exit the
calendar, type `q'.

* Menu:

* Calendar Motion::     Moving through the calendar; selecting a date.
* Scroll Calendar::     Bringing earlier or later months onto the screen.
* Counting Days::       How many days are there between two dates?
* General Calendar::    Exiting or recomputing the calendar.
* Writing Calendar Files:: Writing calendars to files of various formats.
* Holidays::            Displaying dates of holidays.
* Sunrise/Sunset::      Displaying local times of sunrise and sunset.
* Lunar Phases::        Displaying phases of the moon.
* Other Calendars::     Converting dates to other calendar systems.
* Diary::               Displaying events from your diary.
* Appointments::	Reminders when it's time to do something.
* Importing Diary::     Converting diary events to/from other formats.
* Daylight Saving::     How to specify when daylight saving time is active.
* Time Intervals::      Keeping track of time intervals.

* Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage:: Advanced Calendar/Diary customization.


File: emacs,  Node: Calendar Motion,  Next: Scroll Calendar,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.1 Movement in the Calendar
=============================

Calendar mode provides commands to move through the calendar in logical
units of time such as days, weeks, months, and years.  If you move
outside the three months originally displayed, the calendar display
"scrolls" automatically through time to make the selected date visible.
Moving to a date lets you view its holidays or diary entries, or
convert it to other calendars; moving by long time periods is also
useful simply to scroll the calendar.

* Menu:

* Calendar Unit Motion::      Moving by days, weeks, months, and years.
* Move to Beginning or End::  Moving to start/end of weeks, months, and years.
* Specified Dates::           Moving to the current date or another
                                specific date.


File: emacs,  Node: Calendar Unit Motion,  Next: Move to Beginning or End,  Up: Calendar Motion

38.1.1 Motion by Standard Lengths of Time
-----------------------------------------

The commands for movement in the calendar buffer parallel the commands
for movement in text.  You can move forward and backward by days,
weeks, months, and years.

`C-f'
     Move point one day forward (`calendar-forward-day').

`C-b'
     Move point one day backward (`calendar-backward-day').

`C-n'
     Move point one week forward (`calendar-forward-week').

`C-p'
     Move point one week backward (`calendar-backward-week').

`M-}'
     Move point one month forward (`calendar-forward-month').

`M-{'
     Move point one month backward (`calendar-backward-month').

`C-x ]'
     Move point one year forward (`calendar-forward-year').

`C-x ['
     Move point one year backward (`calendar-backward-year').

   The day and week commands are natural analogues of the usual Emacs
commands for moving by characters and by lines.  Just as `C-n' usually
moves to the same column in the following line, in Calendar mode it
moves to the same day in the following week.  And `C-p' moves to the
same day in the previous week.

   The arrow keys are equivalent to `C-f', `C-b', `C-n' and `C-p', just
as they normally are in other modes.

   The commands for motion by months and years work like those for
weeks, but move a larger distance.  The month commands `M-}' and `M-{'
move forward or backward by an entire month.  The year commands `C-x ]'
and `C-x [' move forward or backward a whole year.

   The easiest way to remember these commands is to consider months and
years analogous to paragraphs and pages of text, respectively.  But the
commands themselves are not quite analogous.  The ordinary Emacs
paragraph commands move to the beginning or end of a paragraph, whereas
these month and year commands move by an entire month or an entire
year, keeping the same date within the month or year.

   All these commands accept a numeric argument as a repeat count.  For
convenience, the digit keys and the minus sign specify numeric
arguments in Calendar mode even without the Meta modifier.  For example,
`100 C-f' moves point 100 days forward from its present location.


File: emacs,  Node: Move to Beginning or End,  Next: Specified Dates,  Prev: Calendar Unit Motion,  Up: Calendar Motion

38.1.2 Beginning or End of Week, Month or Year
----------------------------------------------

A week (or month, or year) is not just a quantity of days; we think of
weeks (months, years) as starting on particular dates.  So Calendar mode
provides commands to move to the beginning or end of a week, month or
year:

`C-a'
     Move point to start of week (`calendar-beginning-of-week').  

`C-e'
     Move point to end of week (`calendar-end-of-week').  

`M-a'
     Move point to start of month (`calendar-beginning-of-month').  

`M-e'
     Move point to end of month (`calendar-end-of-month').  

`M-<'
     Move point to start of year (`calendar-beginning-of-year').  

`M->'
     Move point to end of year (`calendar-end-of-year').

   These commands also take numeric arguments as repeat counts, with the
repeat count indicating how many weeks, months, or years to move
backward or forward.

   By default, weeks begin on Sunday.  To make them begin on Monday
instead, set the variable `calendar-week-start-day' to 1.


File: emacs,  Node: Specified Dates,  Prev: Move to Beginning or End,  Up: Calendar Motion

38.1.3 Specified Dates
----------------------

Calendar mode provides commands for moving to a particular date
specified in various ways.

`g d'
     Move point to specified date (`calendar-goto-date').

`g D'
     Move point to specified day of year (`calendar-goto-day-of-year').

`g w'
     Move point to specified week of year (`calendar-iso-goto-week').

`o'
     Center calendar around specified month (`calendar-other-month').

`.'
     Move point to today's date (`calendar-goto-today').

   `g d' (`calendar-goto-date') prompts for a year, a month, and a day
of the month, and then moves to that date.  Because the calendar
includes all dates from the beginning of the current era, you must type
the year in its entirety; that is, type `1990', not `90'.

   `g D' (`calendar-goto-day-of-year') prompts for a year and day
number, and moves to that date.  Negative day numbers count backward
from the end of the year.  `g w' (`calendar-iso-goto-week') prompts for
a year and week number, and moves to that week.

   `o' (`calendar-other-month') prompts for a month and year, then
centers the three-month calendar around that month.

   You can return to today's date with `.' (`calendar-goto-today').


File: emacs,  Node: Scroll Calendar,  Next: Counting Days,  Prev: Calendar Motion,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.2 Scrolling in the Calendar
==============================

The calendar display scrolls automatically through time when you move
out of the visible portion.  You can also scroll it manually.  Imagine
that the calendar window contains a long strip of paper with the months
on it.  Scrolling the calendar means moving the strip horizontally, so
that new months become visible in the window.

`>'
     Scroll calendar one month forward (`calendar-scroll-left').

`<'
     Scroll calendar one month backward (`calendar-scroll-right').

`C-v'
`<next>'
     Scroll calendar three months forward
     (`calendar-scroll-left-three-months').

`M-v'
`<prior>'
     Scroll calendar three months backward
     (`calendar-scroll-right-three-months').

   The most basic calendar scroll commands scroll by one month at a
time.  This means that there are two months of overlap between the
display before the command and the display after.  `>' scrolls the
calendar contents one month forward in time.  `<' scrolls the contents
one month backwards in time.

   The commands `C-v' and `M-v' scroll the calendar by an entire
"screenful"--three months--in analogy with the usual meaning of these
commands.  `C-v' makes later dates visible and `M-v' makes earlier
dates visible.  These commands take a numeric argument as a repeat
count; in particular, since `C-u' multiplies the next command by four,
typing `C-u C-v' scrolls the calendar forward by a year and typing `C-u
M-v' scrolls the calendar backward by a year.

   The function keys <next> and <prior> are equivalent to `C-v' and
`M-v', just as they are in other modes.


File: emacs,  Node: Counting Days,  Next: General Calendar,  Prev: Scroll Calendar,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.3 Counting Days
==================

`M-='
     Display the number of days in the current region
     (`calendar-count-days-region').

   To determine the number of days in the region, type `M-='
(`calendar-count-days-region').  The numbers of days shown is
_inclusive_; that is, it includes the days specified by mark and point.


File: emacs,  Node: General Calendar,  Next: Writing Calendar Files,  Prev: Counting Days,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.4 Miscellaneous Calendar Commands
====================================

`p d'
     Display day-in-year (`calendar-print-day-of-year').

`C-c C-l'
     Regenerate the calendar window (`calendar-redraw').

`SPC'
     Scroll the next window up (`scroll-other-window').

`DEL'
     Scroll the next window down (`scroll-other-window-down').

`q'
     Exit from calendar (`calendar-exit').

   To display the number of days elapsed since the start of the year, or
the number of days remaining in the year, type the `p d' command
(`calendar-print-day-of-year').  This displays both of those numbers in
the echo area.  The count of days elapsed includes the selected date.
The count of days remaining does not include that date.

   If the calendar window text gets corrupted, type `C-c C-l'
(`calendar-redraw') to redraw it.  (This can only happen if you use
non-Calendar-mode editing commands.)

   In Calendar mode, you can use `SPC' (`scroll-other-window') and
`DEL' (`scroll-other-window-down') to scroll the other window (if there
is one) up or down, respectively.  This is handy when you display a
list of holidays or diary entries in another window.

   To exit from the calendar, type `q' (`calendar-exit').  This buries
all buffers related to the calendar, selecting other buffers.  (If a
frame contains a dedicated calendar window, exiting from the calendar
deletes or iconifies that frame depending on the value of
`calendar-remove-frame-by-deleting'.)


File: emacs,  Node: Writing Calendar Files,  Next: Holidays,  Prev: General Calendar,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.5 Writing Calendar Files
===========================

You can write calendars and diary entries to HTML and LaTeX files.

   The Calendar HTML commands produce files of HTML code that contain
calendar and diary entries.  Each file applies to one month, and has a
name of the format `YYYY-MM.html', where YYYY and MM are the four-digit
year and two-digit month, respectively.  The variable
`cal-html-directory' specifies the default output directory for the
HTML files.

   Diary entries enclosed by `<' and `>' are interpreted as HTML tags
(for example: this is a diary entry with <font color="red">some red
text</font>).  You can change the overall appearance of the displayed
HTML pages (for example, the color of various page elements, header
styles) via a stylesheet `cal.css' in the directory containing the HTML
files (see the value of the variable `cal-html-css-default' for
relevant style settings).

`H m'
     Generate a one-month calendar (`cal-html-cursor-month').

`H y'
     Generate a calendar file for each month of a year, as well as an
     index page (`cal-html-cursor-year').  By default, this command
     writes files to a YYYY subdirectory - if this is altered some
     hyperlinks between years will not work.

   If the variable `cal-html-print-day-number-flag' is non-`nil', then
the monthly calendars show the day-of-the-year number. The variable
`cal-html-year-index-cols' specifies the number of columns in the
yearly index page.

   The Calendar LaTeX commands produce a buffer of LaTeX code that
prints as a calendar.  Depending on the command you use, the printed
calendar covers the day, week, month or year that point is in.

`t m'
     Generate a one-month calendar (`cal-tex-cursor-month').

`t M'
     Generate a sideways-printing one-month calendar
     (`cal-tex-cursor-month-landscape').

`t d'
     Generate a one-day calendar (`cal-tex-cursor-day').

`t w 1'
     Generate a one-page calendar for one week (`cal-tex-cursor-week').

`t w 2'
     Generate a two-page calendar for one week (`cal-tex-cursor-week2').

`t w 3'
     Generate an ISO-style calendar for one week
     (`cal-tex-cursor-week-iso').

`t w 4'
     Generate a calendar for one Monday-starting week
     (`cal-tex-cursor-week-monday').

`t f w'
     Generate a Filofax-style two-weeks-at-a-glance calendar
     (`cal-tex-cursor-filofax-2week').

`t f W'
     Generate a Filofax-style one-week-at-a-glance calendar
     (`cal-tex-cursor-filofax-week').

`t y'
     Generate a calendar for one year (`cal-tex-cursor-year').

`t Y'
     Generate a sideways-printing calendar for one year
     (`cal-tex-cursor-year-landscape').

`t f y'
     Generate a Filofax-style calendar for one year
     (`cal-tex-cursor-filofax-year').

   Some of these commands print the calendar sideways (in "landscape
mode"), so it can be wider than it is long.  Some of them use Filofax
paper size (3.75in x 6.75in).  All of these commands accept a prefix
argument which specifies how many days, weeks, months or years to print
(starting always with the selected one).

   If the variable `cal-tex-holidays' is non-`nil' (the default), then
the printed calendars show the holidays in `calendar-holidays'.  If the
variable `cal-tex-diary' is non-`nil' (the default is `nil'), diary
entries are included also (in monthly, filofax, and iso-week calendars
only).  If the variable `cal-tex-rules' is non-`nil' (the default is
`nil'), the calendar displays ruled pages in styles that have
sufficient room.  Consult the documentation of the individual cal-tex
functions to see which calendars support which features.

   You can use the variable `cal-tex-preamble-extra' to insert extra
LaTeX commands in the preamble of the generated document if you need to.


File: emacs,  Node: Holidays,  Next: Sunrise/Sunset,  Prev: Writing Calendar Files,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.6 Holidays
=============

The Emacs calendar knows about many major and minor holidays, and can
display them.  You can add your own holidays to the default list.

`h'
     Display holidays for the selected date
     (`calendar-cursor-holidays').

`Mouse-3 Holidays'
     Display any holidays for the date you click on.

`x'
     Mark holidays in the calendar window (`calendar-mark-holidays').

`u'
     Unmark calendar window (`calendar-unmark').

`a'
     List all holidays for the displayed three months in another window
     (`calendar-list-holidays').

`M-x holidays'
     List all holidays for three months around today's date in another
     window.

`M-x list-holidays'
     List holidays in another window for a specified range of years.

   To see if any holidays fall on a given date, position point on that
date in the calendar window and use the `h' command.  Alternatively,
click on that date with `Mouse-3' and then choose `Holidays' from the
menu that appears.  Either way, this displays the holidays for that
date, in the echo area if they fit there, otherwise in a separate
window.

   To view the distribution of holidays for all the dates shown in the
calendar, use the `x' command.  This displays the dates that are
holidays in a different face.  *Note calendar-holiday-marker: Calendar
Customizing.    The command applies both to the currently visible
months and to other months that subsequently become visible by
scrolling.  To turn marking off and erase the current marks, type `u',
which also erases any diary marks (*note Diary::).  If the variable
`calendar-mark-holidays-flag' is non-`nil', creating or updating the
calendar marks holidays automatically.

   To get even more detailed information, use the `a' command, which
displays a separate buffer containing a list of all holidays in the
current three-month range.  You can use <SPC> and <DEL> in the calendar
window to scroll that list up and down, respectively.

   The command `M-x holidays' displays the list of holidays for the
current month and the preceding and succeeding months; this works even
if you don't have a calendar window.  If the variable
`calendar-view-holidays-initially-flag' is non-`nil', creating the
calendar displays holidays in this way.  If you want the list of
holidays centered around a different month, use `C-u M-x holidays',
which prompts for the month and year.

   The holidays known to Emacs include United States holidays and the
major Baha'i, Chinese, Christian, Islamic, and Jewish holidays; also the
solstices and equinoxes.

   The command `M-x holiday-list' displays the list of holidays for a
range of years.  This function asks you for the starting and stopping
years, and allows you to choose all the holidays or one of several
categories of holidays.  You can use this command even if you don't have
a calendar window.

   The dates used by Emacs for holidays are based on _current
practice_, not historical fact.  For example Veteran's Day began in
1919, but is shown in earlier years.


File: emacs,  Node: Sunrise/Sunset,  Next: Lunar Phases,  Prev: Holidays,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.7 Times of Sunrise and Sunset
================================

Special calendar commands can tell you, to within a minute or two, the
times of sunrise and sunset for any date.

`S'
     Display times of sunrise and sunset for the selected date
     (`calendar-sunrise-sunset').

`Mouse-3 Sunrise/sunset'
     Display times of sunrise and sunset for the date you click on.

`M-x sunrise-sunset'
     Display times of sunrise and sunset for today's date.

`C-u M-x sunrise-sunset'
     Display times of sunrise and sunset for a specified date.

`M-x calendar-sunrise-sunset-month'
     Display times of sunrise and sunset for the selected month.

   Within the calendar, to display the _local times_ of sunrise and
sunset in the echo area, move point to the date you want, and type `S'.
Alternatively, click `Mouse-3' on the date, then choose
`Sunrise/sunset' from the menu that appears.  The command `M-x
sunrise-sunset' is available outside the calendar to display this
information for today's date or a specified date.  To specify a date
other than today, use `C-u M-x sunrise-sunset', which prompts for the
year, month, and day.

   You can display the times of sunrise and sunset for any location and
any date with `C-u C-u M-x sunrise-sunset'.  This asks you for a
longitude, latitude, number of minutes difference from Coordinated
Universal Time, and date, and then tells you the times of sunrise and
sunset for that location on that date.

   Because the times of sunrise and sunset depend on the location on
earth, you need to tell Emacs your latitude, longitude, and location
name before using these commands.  Here is an example of what to set:

     (setq calendar-latitude 40.1)
     (setq calendar-longitude -88.2)
     (setq calendar-location-name "Urbana, IL")

Use one decimal place in the values of `calendar-latitude' and
`calendar-longitude'.

   Your time zone also affects the local time of sunrise and sunset.
Emacs usually gets time zone information from the operating system, but
if these values are not what you want (or if the operating system does
not supply them), you must set them yourself.  Here is an example:

     (setq calendar-time-zone -360)
     (setq calendar-standard-time-zone-name "CST")
     (setq calendar-daylight-time-zone-name "CDT")

The value of `calendar-time-zone' is the number of minutes difference
between your local standard time and Coordinated Universal Time
(Greenwich time).  The values of `calendar-standard-time-zone-name' and
`calendar-daylight-time-zone-name' are the abbreviations used in your
time zone.  Emacs displays the times of sunrise and sunset _corrected
for daylight saving time_.  *Note Daylight Saving::, for how daylight
saving time is determined.

   As a user, you might find it convenient to set the calendar location
variables for your usual physical location in your `.emacs' file.  And
when you install Emacs on a machine, you can create a `default.el' file
which sets them properly for the typical location of most users of that
machine.  *Note Init File::.


File: emacs,  Node: Lunar Phases,  Next: Other Calendars,  Prev: Sunrise/Sunset,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.8 Phases of the Moon
=======================

These calendar commands display the dates and times of the phases of
the moon (new moon, first quarter, full moon, last quarter).  This
feature is useful for debugging problems that "depend on the phase of
the moon."

`M'
     Display the dates and times for all the quarters of the moon for
     the three-month period shown (`calendar-lunar-phases').

`M-x lunar-phases'
     Display dates and times of the quarters of the moon for three
     months around today's date.

   Within the calendar, use the `M' command to display a separate
buffer of the phases of the moon for the current three-month range.  The
dates and times listed are accurate to within a few minutes.

   Outside the calendar, use the command `M-x lunar-phases' to display
the list of the phases of the moon for the current month and the
preceding and succeeding months.  For information about a different
month, use `C-u M-x lunar-phases', which prompts for the month and year.

   The dates and times given for the phases of the moon are given in
local time (corrected for daylight saving, when appropriate).  See the
discussion in the previous section.  *Note Sunrise/Sunset::.


File: emacs,  Node: Other Calendars,  Next: Diary,  Prev: Lunar Phases,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.9 Conversion To and From Other Calendars
===========================================

The Emacs calendar displayed is _always_ the Gregorian calendar,
sometimes called the "new style" calendar, which is used in most of the
world today.  However, this calendar did not exist before the sixteenth
century and was not widely used before the eighteenth century; it did
not fully displace the Julian calendar and gain universal acceptance
until the early twentieth century.  The Emacs calendar can display any
month since January, year 1 of the current era, but the calendar
displayed is the Gregorian, even for a date at which the Gregorian
calendar did not exist.

   While Emacs cannot display other calendars, it can convert dates to
and from several other calendars.

* Menu:

* Calendar Systems::	   The calendars Emacs understands
			     (aside from Gregorian).
* To Other Calendar::	   Converting the selected date to various calendars.
* From Other Calendar::	   Moving to a date specified in another calendar.
* Mayan Calendar::	   Moving to a date specified in a Mayan calendar.


File: emacs,  Node: Calendar Systems,  Next: To Other Calendar,  Up: Other Calendars

38.9.1 Supported Calendar Systems
---------------------------------

The ISO commercial calendar is used largely in Europe.

   The Julian calendar, named after Julius Caesar, was the one used in
Europe throughout medieval times, and in many countries up until the
nineteenth century.

   Astronomers use a simple counting of days elapsed since noon, Monday,
January 1, 4713 B.C. on the Julian calendar.  The number of days elapsed
is called the "Julian day number" or the "Astronomical day number".

   The Hebrew calendar is used by tradition in the Jewish religion.  The
Emacs calendar program uses the Hebrew calendar to determine the dates
of Jewish holidays.  Hebrew calendar dates begin and end at sunset.

   The Islamic calendar is used in many predominantly Islamic countries.
Emacs uses it to determine the dates of Islamic holidays.  There is no
universal agreement in the Islamic world about the calendar; Emacs uses
a widely accepted version, but the precise dates of Islamic holidays
often depend on proclamation by religious authorities, not on
calculations.  As a consequence, the actual dates of observance can vary
slightly from the dates computed by Emacs.  Islamic calendar dates begin
and end at sunset.

   The French Revolutionary calendar was created by the Jacobins after
the 1789 revolution, to represent a more secular and nature-based view
of the annual cycle, and to install a 10-day week in a rationalization
measure similar to the metric system.  The French government officially
abandoned this calendar at the end of 1805.

   The Maya of Central America used three separate, overlapping calendar
systems, the _long count_, the _tzolkin_, and the _haab_.  Emacs knows
about all three of these calendars.  Experts dispute the exact
correlation between the Mayan calendar and our calendar; Emacs uses the
Goodman-Martinez-Thompson correlation in its calculations.

   The Copts use a calendar based on the ancient Egyptian solar
calendar.  Their calendar consists of twelve 30-day months followed by
an extra five-day period.  Once every fourth year they add a leap day
to this extra period to make it six days.  The Ethiopic calendar is
identical in structure, but has different year numbers and month names.

   The Persians use a solar calendar based on a design of Omar Khayyam.
Their calendar consists of twelve months of which the first six have 31
days, the next five have 30 days, and the last has 29 in ordinary years
and 30 in leap years.  Leap years occur in a complicated pattern every
four or five years.  The calendar implemented here is the arithmetical
Persian calendar championed by Birashk, based on a 2,820-year cycle.
It differs from the astronomical Persian calendar, which is based on
astronomical events.  As of this writing the first future discrepancy
is projected to occur on March 20, 2025.  It is currently not clear
what the official calendar of Iran will be that far into the future.

   The Chinese calendar is a complicated system of lunar months arranged
into solar years.  The years go in cycles of sixty, each year containing
either twelve months in an ordinary year or thirteen months in a leap
year; each month has either 29 or 30 days.  Years, ordinary months, and
days are named by combining one of ten "celestial stems" with one of
twelve "terrestrial branches" for a total of sixty names that are
repeated in a cycle of sixty.

   The Baha'i calendar system is based on a solar cycle of 19 months
with 19 days each.  The four remaining "intercalary" days are placed
between the 18th and 19th months.


File: emacs,  Node: To Other Calendar,  Next: From Other Calendar,  Prev: Calendar Systems,  Up: Other Calendars

38.9.2 Converting To Other Calendars
------------------------------------

The following commands describe the selected date (the date at point)
in various other calendar systems:

`Mouse-3  Other calendars'
     Display the date that you click on, expressed in various other
     calendars.  

`p o'
     Display the selected date in various other calendars.
     (`calendar-print-other-dates').  

`p c'
     Display ISO commercial calendar equivalent for selected day
     (`calendar-iso-print-date').  

`p j'
     Display Julian date for selected day
     (`calendar-julian-print-date').  

`p a'
     Display astronomical (Julian) day number for selected day
     (`calendar-astro-print-day-number').  

`p h'
     Display Hebrew date for selected day
     (`calendar-hebrew-print-date').  

`p i'
     Display Islamic date for selected day
     (`calendar-islamic-print-date').  

`p f'
     Display French Revolutionary date for selected day
     (`calendar-french-print-date').  

`p b'
     Display Baha'i date for selected day (`calendar-bahai-print-date').  

`p C'
     Display Chinese date for selected day
     (`calendar-chinese-print-date').  

`p k'
     Display Coptic date for selected day
     (`calendar-coptic-print-date').  

`p e'
     Display Ethiopic date for selected day
     (`calendar-ethiopic-print-date').  

`p p'
     Display Persian date for selected day
     (`calendar-persian-print-date').  

`p m'
     Display Mayan date for selected day (`calendar-mayan-print-date').

   If you are using a graphic display, the easiest way to translate a
date into other calendars is to click on it with `Mouse-3', then choose
`Other calendars' from the menu that appears.  This displays the
equivalent forms of the date in all the calendars Emacs understands, in
the form of a menu.  (Choosing an alternative from this menu doesn't
actually do anything--the menu is used only for display.)

   Otherwise, move point to the date you want to convert, then type the
appropriate command starting with `p' from the table above.  The prefix
`p' is a mnemonic for "print," since Emacs "prints" the equivalent date
in the echo area. `p o' displays the date in all forms known to Emacs.


File: emacs,  Node: From Other Calendar,  Next: Mayan Calendar,  Prev: To Other Calendar,  Up: Other Calendars

38.9.3 Converting From Other Calendars
--------------------------------------

You can use the other supported calendars to specify a date to move to.
This section describes the commands for doing this using calendars
other than Mayan; for the Mayan calendar, see the following section.

`g c'
     Move to a date specified in the ISO commercial calendar
     (`calendar-iso-goto-date').

`g w'
     Move to a week specified in the ISO commercial calendar
     (`calendar-iso-goto-week').

`g j'
     Move to a date specified in the Julian calendar
     (`calendar-julian-goto-date').

`g a'
     Move to a date specified with an astronomical (Julian) day number
     (`calendar-astro-goto-day-number').

`g b'
     Move to a date specified in the Baha'i calendar
     (`calendar-bahai-goto-date').

`g h'
     Move to a date specified in the Hebrew calendar
     (`calendar-hebrew-goto-date').

`g i'
     Move to a date specified in the Islamic calendar
     (`calendar-islamic-goto-date').

`g f'
     Move to a date specified in the French Revolutionary calendar
     (`calendar-french-goto-date').

`g C'
     Move to a date specified in the Chinese calendar
     (`calendar-chinese-goto-date').

`g p'
     Move to a date specified in the Persian calendar
     (`calendar-persian-goto-date').

`g k'
     Move to a date specified in the Coptic calendar
     (`calendar-coptic-goto-date').

`g e'
     Move to a date specified in the Ethiopic calendar
     (`calendar-ethiopic-goto-date').

   These commands ask you for a date on the other calendar, move point
to the Gregorian calendar date equivalent to that date, and display the
other calendar's date in the echo area.  Emacs uses strict completion
(*note Strict Completion::) whenever it asks you to type a month name,
so you don't have to worry about the spelling of Hebrew, Islamic, or
French names.

   One common question concerning the Hebrew calendar is the computation
of the anniversary of a date of death, called a "yahrzeit."  The Emacs
calendar includes a facility for such calculations.  If you are in the
calendar, the command `M-x calendar-hebrew-list-yahrzeits' asks you for
a range of years and then displays a list of the yahrzeit dates for
those years for the date given by point.  If you are not in the
calendar, this command first asks you for the date of death and the
range of years, and then displays the list of yahrzeit dates.


File: emacs,  Node: Mayan Calendar,  Prev: From Other Calendar,  Up: Other Calendars

38.9.4 Converting from the Mayan Calendar
-----------------------------------------

Here are the commands to select dates based on the Mayan calendar:

`g m l'
     Move to a date specified by the long count calendar
     (`calendar-mayan-goto-long-count-date').

`g m n t'
     Move to the next occurrence of a place in the tzolkin calendar
     (`calendar-mayan-next-tzolkin-date').

`g m p t'
     Move to the previous occurrence of a place in the tzolkin calendar
     (`calendar-mayan-previous-tzolkin-date').

`g m n h'
     Move to the next occurrence of a place in the haab calendar
     (`calendar-mayan-next-haab-date').

`g m p h'
     Move to the previous occurrence of a place in the haab calendar
     (`calendar-mayan-previous-haab-date').

`g m n c'
     Move to the next occurrence of a place in the calendar round
     (`calendar-mayan-next-calendar-round-date').

`g m p c'
     Move to the previous occurrence of a place in the calendar round
     (`calendar-mayan-previous-calendar-round-date').

   To understand these commands, you need to understand the Mayan
calendars.  The "long count" is a counting of days with these units:

     1 kin = 1 day   1 uinal = 20 kin   1 tun = 18 uinal
     1 katun = 20 tun   1 baktun = 20 katun

Thus, the long count date 12.16.11.16.6 means 12 baktun, 16 katun, 11
tun, 16 uinal, and 6 kin.  The Emacs calendar can handle Mayan long
count dates as early as 7.17.18.13.3, but no earlier.  When you use the
`g m l' command, type the Mayan long count date with the baktun, katun,
tun, uinal, and kin separated by periods.

   The Mayan tzolkin calendar is a cycle of 260 days formed by a pair of
independent cycles of 13 and 20 days.  Since this cycle repeats
endlessly, Emacs provides commands to move backward and forward to the
previous or next point in the cycle.  Type `g m p t' to go to the
previous tzolkin date; Emacs asks you for a tzolkin date and moves point
to the previous occurrence of that date.  Similarly, type `g m n t' to
go to the next occurrence of a tzolkin date.

   The Mayan haab calendar is a cycle of 365 days arranged as 18 months
of 20 days each, followed a 5-day monthless period.  Like the tzolkin
cycle, this cycle repeats endlessly, and there are commands to move
backward and forward to the previous or next point in the cycle.  Type
`g m p h' to go to the previous haab date; Emacs asks you for a haab
date and moves point to the previous occurrence of that date.
Similarly, type `g m n h' to go to the next occurrence of a haab date.

   The Maya also used the combination of the tzolkin date and the haab
date.  This combination is a cycle of about 52 years called a _calendar
round_.  If you type `g m p c', Emacs asks you for both a haab and a
tzolkin date and then moves point to the previous occurrence of that
combination.  Use `g m n c' to move point to the next occurrence of a
combination.  These commands signal an error if the haab/tzolkin date
combination you have typed is impossible.

   Emacs uses strict completion (*note Strict Completion::) whenever it
asks you to type a Mayan name, so you don't have to worry about
spelling.


File: emacs,  Node: Diary,  Next: Appointments,  Prev: Other Calendars,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.10 The Diary
===============

The Emacs diary keeps track of appointments or other events on a daily
basis, in conjunction with the calendar.  To use the diary feature, you
must first create a "diary file" containing a list of events and their
dates.  Then Emacs can automatically pick out and display the events
for today, for the immediate future, or for any specified date.

   The name of the diary file is specified by the variable
`diary-file'; `~/diary' is the default.  Here's an example showing what
that file looks like:

     12/22/1988  Twentieth wedding anniversary!!
     &1/1.       Happy New Year!
     10/22       Ruth's birthday.
     * 21, *:    Payday
     Tuesday--weekly meeting with grad students at 10am
              Supowit, Shen, Bitner, and Kapoor to attend.
     1/13/89     Friday the thirteenth!!
     &thu 4pm    squash game with Lloyd.
     mar 16      Dad's birthday
     April 15, 1989 Income tax due.
     &* 15       time cards due.

This format is essentially the same as the one used by the system's
`calendar' utility.  This example uses extra spaces to align the event
descriptions of most of the entries.  Such formatting is purely a
matter of taste.

   Although you probably will start by creating a diary manually, Emacs
provides a number of commands to let you view, add, and change diary
entries.

* Menu:

* Displaying the Diary::   Viewing diary entries and associated calendar dates.
* Format of Diary File::   Entering events in your diary.
* Date Formats::	   Various ways you can specify dates.
* Adding to Diary::	   Commands to create diary entries.
* Special Diary Entries::  Anniversaries, blocks of dates, cyclic entries, etc.


File: emacs,  Node: Displaying the Diary,  Next: Format of Diary File,  Up: Diary

38.10.1 Displaying the Diary
----------------------------

Once you have created a diary file, you can use the calendar to view
it.  You can also view today's events outside of Calendar mode.  In the
following, key bindings refer to the Calendar buffer.

`d'
     Display all diary entries for the selected date
     (`diary-view-entries').

`Mouse-3 Diary'
     Display all diary entries for the date you click on.

`s'
     Display the entire diary file (`diary-show-all-entries').

`m'
     Mark all visible dates that have diary entries
     (`diary-mark-entries').

`u'
     Unmark the calendar window (`calendar-unmark').

`M-x diary-print-entries'
     Print hard copy of the diary display as it appears.

`M-x diary'
     Display all diary entries for today's date.

`M-x diary-mail-entries'
     Mail yourself email reminders about upcoming diary entries.

   Displaying the diary entries with `d' shows in a separate window the
diary entries for the selected date in the calendar.  The mode line of
the new window shows the date of the diary entries.  Holidays are shown
either in the buffer or in the mode line, depending on the display
method you choose (*note Diary Display::).  If you specify a numeric
argument with `d', it shows all the diary entries for that many
successive days.  Thus, `2 d' displays all the entries for the selected
date and for the following day.

   Another way to display the diary entries for a date is to click
`Mouse-3' on the date, and then choose `Diary entries' from the menu
that appears.  If the variable `calendar-view-diary-initially-flag' is
non-`nil', creating the calendar lists the diary entries for the
current date (provided the current date is visible).

   To get a broader view of which days are mentioned in the diary, use
the `m' command.  This marks the dates that have diary entries in a
different face.  *Note diary-entry-marker: Calendar Customizing.

   The command applies both to the currently visible months and to
other months that subsequently become visible by scrolling.  To turn
marking off and erase the current marks, type `u', which also turns off
holiday marks (*note Holidays::).  If the variable
`calendar-mark-diary-entries-flag' is non-`nil', creating or updating
the calendar marks diary dates automatically.

   To see the full diary file, rather than just some of the entries, use
the `s' command.

   The command `M-x diary' displays the diary entries for the current
date, independently of the calendar display, and optionally for the next
few days as well; the variable `diary-number-of-entries' specifies how
many days to include.  *Note diary-number-of-entries: Diary Customizing.

   If you put `(diary)' in your `.emacs' file, this automatically
displays a window with the day's diary entries, when you enter Emacs.

   Many users like to receive notice of events in their diary as email.
To send such mail to yourself, use the command `M-x
diary-mail-entries'.  A prefix argument specifies how many days
(starting with today) to check; otherwise, the variable
`diary-mail-days' says how many days.


File: emacs,  Node: Format of Diary File,  Next: Date Formats,  Prev: Displaying the Diary,  Up: Diary

38.10.2 The Diary File
----------------------

Your "diary file" is a file that records events associated with
particular dates.  The name of the diary file is specified by the
variable `diary-file'; `~/diary' is the default.  The `calendar'
utility program supports a subset of the format allowed by the Emacs
diary facilities, so you can use that utility to view the diary file,
with reasonable results aside from the entries it cannot understand.

   Each entry in the diary file describes one event and consists of one
or more lines.  An entry always begins with a date specification at the
left margin.  The rest of the entry is simply text to describe the
event.  If the entry has more than one line, then the lines after the
first must begin with whitespace to indicate they continue a previous
entry.  Lines that do not begin with valid dates and do not continue a
preceding entry are ignored.

   You can also use a format where the first line of a diary entry
consists only of the date or day name (with no following blanks or
punctuation).  For example:

     02/11/1989
           Bill B. visits Princeton today
           2pm Cognitive Studies Committee meeting
           2:30-5:30 Liz at Lawrenceville
           4:00pm Dentist appt
           7:30pm Dinner at George's
           8:00-10:00pm concert

This entry will have a different appearance if you use the simple diary
display (*note Diary Display::).  The simple diary display omits the
date line at the beginning; only the continuation lines appear.  This
style of entry looks neater when you display just a single day's
entries, but can cause confusion if you ask for more than one day's
entries.

   You can inhibit the marking of certain diary entries in the calendar
window; to do this, insert an ampersand `diary-nonmarking-symbol'
(default `&') at the beginning of the entry, before the date.  This has
no effect on display of the entry in the diary window; it affects only
marks on dates in the calendar window.  Nonmarking entries are
especially useful for generic entries that would otherwise mark many
different dates.


File: emacs,  Node: Date Formats,  Next: Adding to Diary,  Prev: Format of Diary File,  Up: Diary

38.10.3 Date Formats
--------------------

Here are some sample diary entries, illustrating different ways of
formatting a date.  The examples all show dates in American order
(month, day, year), but Calendar mode supports European order (day,
month, year) and ISO order (year, month, day) as options.

     4/20/93  Switch-over to new tabulation system
     apr. 25  Start tabulating annual results
     4/30  Results for April are due
     */25  Monthly cycle finishes
     Friday  Don't leave without backing up files

   The first entry appears only once, on April 20, 1993.  The second and
third appear every year on the specified dates, and the fourth uses a
wildcard (asterisk) for the month, so it appears on the 25th of every
month.  The final entry appears every week on Friday.

   You can use just numbers to express a date, as in `MONTH/DAY' or
`MONTH/DAY/YEAR'.  This must be followed by a nondigit.  In the date
itself, MONTH and DAY are numbers of one or two digits.  The optional
YEAR is also a number, and may be abbreviated to the last two digits;
that is, you can use `11/12/1989' or `11/12/89'.

   Dates can also have the form `MONTHNAME DAY' or `MONTHNAME DAY,
YEAR', where the month's name can be spelled in full or abbreviated
(with or without a period).  The preferred abbreviations for month and
day names can be set using the variables `calendar-abbrev-length',
`calendar-month-abbrev-array', and `calendar-day-abbrev-array'.  The
default is to use the first three letters of a name as its
abbreviation.  Case is not significant.

   A date may be "generic"; that is, partially unspecified.  Then the
entry applies to all dates that match the specification.  If the date
does not contain a year, it is generic and applies to any year.
Alternatively, MONTH, DAY, or YEAR can be a `*'; this matches any
month, day, or year, respectively.  Thus, a diary entry `3/*/*' matches
any day in March of any year; so does `march *'.

   If you prefer the European style of writing dates (in which the day
comes before the month), or the ISO style (in which the order is year,
month, day), type `M-x calendar-set-date-style' while in the calendar,
or customize the variable `calendar-date-style'.  This affects how
diary dates are interpreted, date display, and the order in which some
commands expect their arguments to be given.

   You can use the name of a day of the week as a generic date which
applies to any date falling on that day of the week.  You can abbreviate
the day of the week as described above, or spell it in full; case is not
significant.


File: emacs,  Node: Adding to Diary,  Next: Special Diary Entries,  Prev: Date Formats,  Up: Diary

38.10.4 Commands to Add to the Diary
------------------------------------

While in the calendar, there are several commands to create diary
entries.  The basic commands are listed here; more sophisticated
commands are in the next section (*note Special Diary Entries::).
Entries can also be based on non-Gregorian calendars.  *Note
Non-Gregorian Diary::.

`i d'
     Add a diary entry for the selected date (`diary-insert-entry').

`i w'
     Add a diary entry for the selected day of the week
     (`diary-insert-weekly-entry').

`i m'
     Add a diary entry for the selected day of the month
     (`diary-insert-monthly-entry').

`i y'
     Add a diary entry for the selected day of the year
     (`diary-insert-yearly-entry').

   You can make a diary entry for a specific date by selecting that date
in the calendar window and typing the `i d' command.  This command
displays the end of your diary file in another window and inserts the
date; you can then type the rest of the diary entry.

   If you want to make a diary entry that applies to a specific day of
the week, select that day of the week (any occurrence will do) and type
`i w'.  This inserts the day-of-week as a generic date; you can then
type the rest of the diary entry.  You can make a monthly diary entry in
the same fashion: select the day of the month, use the `i m' command,
and type the rest of the entry.  Similarly, you can insert a yearly
diary entry with the `i y' command.

   All of the above commands make marking diary entries by default.  To
make a nonmarking diary entry, give a numeric argument to the command.
For example, `C-u i w' makes a nonmarking weekly diary entry.

   When you modify the diary file, be sure to save the file before
exiting Emacs.  Saving the diary file after using any of the above
insertion commands will automatically update the diary marks in the
calendar window, if appropriate.  You can use the command
`calendar-redraw' to force an update at any time.


File: emacs,  Node: Special Diary Entries,  Prev: Adding to Diary,  Up: Diary

38.10.5 Special Diary Entries
-----------------------------

In addition to entries based on calendar dates, the diary file can
contain "sexp entries" for regular events such as anniversaries.  These
entries are based on Lisp expressions (sexps) that Emacs evaluates as
it scans the diary file.  Instead of a date, a sexp entry contains `%%'
followed by a Lisp expression which must begin and end with
parentheses.  The Lisp expression determines which dates the entry
applies to.

   Calendar mode provides commands to insert certain commonly used sexp
entries:

`i a'
     Add an anniversary diary entry for the selected date
     (`diary-insert-anniversary-entry').

`i b'
     Add a block diary entry for the current region
     (`diary-insert-block-entry').

`i c'
     Add a cyclic diary entry starting at the date
     (`diary-insert-cyclic-entry').

   If you want to make a diary entry that applies to the anniversary of
a specific date, move point to that date and use the `i a' command.
This displays the end of your diary file in another window and inserts
the anniversary description; you can then type the rest of the diary
entry.  The entry looks like this:

     %%(diary-anniversary 10 31 1948) Arthur's birthday

This entry applies to October 31 in any year after 1948; `10 31 1948'
specifies the date.  (If you are using the European or ISO calendar
style, the input order of month, day and year is different.)  The
reason this expression requires a beginning year is that advanced diary
functions can use it to calculate the number of elapsed years.

   A "block" diary entry applies to a specified range of consecutive
dates.  Here is a block diary entry that applies to all dates from June
24, 1990 through July 10, 1990:

     %%(diary-block 6 24 1990 7 10 1990) Vacation

The `6 24 1990' indicates the starting date and the `7 10 1990'
indicates the stopping date.  (Again, if you are using the European or
ISO calendar style, the input order of month, day and year is
different.)

   To insert a block entry, place point and the mark on the two dates
that begin and end the range, and type `i b'.  This command displays
the end of your diary file in another window and inserts the block
description; you can then type the diary entry.

   "Cyclic" diary entries repeat after a fixed interval of days.  To
create one, select the starting date and use the `i c' command.  The
command prompts for the length of interval, then inserts the entry,
which looks like this:

     %%(diary-cyclic 50 3 1 1990) Renew medication

This entry applies to March 1, 1990 and every 50th day following; `3 1
1990' specifies the starting date.  (If you are using the European or
ISO calendar style, the input order of month, day and year is
different.)

   All three of these commands make marking diary entries.  To insert a
nonmarking entry, give a numeric argument to the command.  For example,
`C-u i a' makes a nonmarking anniversary diary entry.

   Marking sexp diary entries in the calendar is _extremely_
time-consuming, since every date visible in the calendar window must be
individually checked.  So it's a good idea to make sexp diary entries
nonmarking (with `&') when possible.

   Another sophisticated kind of sexp entry, a "floating" diary entry,
specifies a regularly occurring event by offsets specified in days,
weeks, and months.  It is comparable to a crontab entry interpreted by
the `cron' utility.  Here is a nonmarking, floating diary entry that
applies to the fourth Thursday in November:

     &%%(diary-float 11 4 4) American Thanksgiving

The 11 specifies November (the eleventh month), the 4 specifies Thursday
(the fourth day of the week, where Sunday is numbered zero), and the
second 4 specifies the fourth Thursday (1 would mean "first," 2 would
mean "second," -2 would mean "second-to-last," and so on).  The month
can be a single month or a list of months.  Thus you could change the
11 above to `'(1 2 3)' and have the entry apply to the last Thursday of
January, February, and March.  If the month is `t', the entry applies
to all months of the year.

   Each of the standard sexp diary entries takes an optional parameter
specifying the name of a face or a single-character string to use when
marking the entry in the calendar.  Most generally, sexp diary entries
can perform arbitrary computations to determine when they apply.  *Note
Sexp Diary Entries::.


File: emacs,  Node: Appointments,  Next: Importing Diary,  Prev: Diary,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.11 Appointments
==================

If you have a diary entry for an appointment, and that diary entry
begins with a recognizable time of day, Emacs can warn you several
minutes beforehand that that appointment is pending.  Emacs alerts you
to the appointment by displaying a message in your chosen format, as
specified by the variable `appt-display-format'.  If the value of
`appt-audible' is non-`nil', the warning includes an audible reminder.
In addition, if `appt-display-mode-line' is non-`nil', Emacs displays
the number of minutes to the appointment on the mode line.

   If `appt-display-format' has the value `window', then the variable
`appt-display-duration' controls how long the reminder window is
visible for; and the variables `appt-disp-window-function' and
`appt-delete-window-function' give the names of functions used to
create and destroy the window, respectively.

   To enable appointment notification, use the command `M-x
appt-activate'.  With a positive argument, it enables notification;
with a negative argument, it disables notification; with no argument,
it toggles.  Enabling notification also sets up an appointment list for
today from the diary file, giving all diary entries found with
recognizable times of day, and reminds you just before each of them.

   For example, suppose the diary file contains these lines:

     Monday
       9:30am Coffee break
      12:00pm Lunch

Then on Mondays, you will be reminded at around 9:20am about your
coffee break and at around 11:50am about lunch.  The variable
`appt-message-warning-time' specifies how many minutes (default 12) in
advance to warn you.

   You can write times in am/pm style (with `12:00am' standing for
midnight and `12:00pm' standing for noon), or 24-hour European/military
style.  You need not be consistent; your diary file can have a mixture
of the two styles.  Times must be at the beginning of diary entries if
they are to be recognized.

   Emacs updates the appointments list from the diary file
automatically just after midnight.  You can force an update at any time
by re-enabling appointment notification.  Both these actions also
display the day's diary buffer, unless you set `appt-display-diary' to
`nil'.  The appointments list is also updated whenever the diary file
is saved.

   You can also use the appointment notification facility like an alarm
clock.  The command `M-x appt-add' adds entries to the appointment list
without affecting your diary file.  You delete entries from the
appointment list with `M-x appt-delete'.


File: emacs,  Node: Importing Diary,  Next: Daylight Saving,  Prev: Appointments,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.12 Importing and Exporting Diary Entries
===========================================

You can transfer diary entries between Emacs diary files and a variety
of other formats.

   You can import diary entries from Outlook-generated appointment
messages.  While viewing such a message in Rmail or Gnus, do `M-x
diary-from-outlook' to import the entry.  You can make this command
recognize additional appointment message formats by customizing the
variable `diary-outlook-formats'.

   The icalendar package allows you to transfer data between your Emacs
diary file and iCalendar files, which are defined in "RFC
2445--Internet Calendaring and Scheduling Core Object Specification
(iCalendar)" (as well as the earlier vCalendar format).

   The command `icalendar-import-buffer' extracts iCalendar data from
the current buffer and adds it to your (default) diary file.  This
function is also suitable for automatic extraction of iCalendar data;
for example with the Rmail mail client one could use:

     (add-hook 'rmail-show-message-hook 'icalendar-import-buffer)

   The command `icalendar-import-file' imports an iCalendar file and
adds the results to an Emacs diary file.  For example:

     (icalendar-import-file "/here/is/calendar.ics"
                            "/there/goes/ical-diary")

You can use an `#include' directive to add the import file contents to
the main diary file, if these are different files.  *Note Fancy Diary
Display::.

   Use `icalendar-export-file' to interactively export an entire Emacs
diary file to iCalendar format.  To export only a part of a diary file,
mark the relevant area, and call `icalendar-export-region'.  In both
cases the result is appended to the target file.


File: emacs,  Node: Daylight Saving,  Next: Time Intervals,  Prev: Importing Diary,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.13 Daylight Saving Time
==========================

Emacs understands the difference between standard time and daylight
saving time--the times given for sunrise, sunset, solstices, equinoxes,
and the phases of the moon take that into account.  The rules for
daylight saving time vary from place to place and have also varied
historically from year to year.  To do the job properly, Emacs needs to
know which rules to use.

   Some operating systems keep track of the rules that apply to the
place where you are; on these systems, Emacs gets the information it
needs from the system automatically.  If some or all of this
information is missing, Emacs fills in the gaps with the rules
currently used in Cambridge, Massachusetts.  If the resulting rules are
not what you want, you can tell Emacs the rules to use by setting
certain variables: `calendar-daylight-savings-starts' and
`calendar-daylight-savings-ends'.

   These values should be Lisp expressions that refer to the variable
`year', and evaluate to the Gregorian date on which daylight saving
time starts or (respectively) ends, in the form of a list `(MONTH DAY
YEAR)'.  The values should be `nil' if your area does not use daylight
saving time.

   Emacs uses these expressions to determine the starting date of
daylight saving time for the holiday list and for correcting times of
day in the solar and lunar calculations.

   The values for Cambridge, Massachusetts are as follows:

     (calendar-nth-named-day 2 0 3 year)
     (calendar-nth-named-day 1 0 11 year)

That is, the second 0th day (Sunday) of the third month (March) in the
year specified by `year', and the first Sunday of the eleventh month
(November) of that year.  If daylight saving time were changed to start
on October 1, you would set `calendar-daylight-savings-starts' to this:

     (list 10 1 year)

   If there is no daylight saving time at your location, or if you want
all times in standard time, set `calendar-daylight-savings-starts' and
`calendar-daylight-savings-ends' to `nil'.

   The variable `calendar-daylight-time-offset' specifies the
difference between daylight saving time and standard time, measured in
minutes.  The value for Cambridge, Massachusetts is 60.

   Finally, the two variables `calendar-daylight-savings-starts-time'
and `calendar-daylight-savings-ends-time' specify the number of minutes
after midnight local time when the transition to and from daylight
saving time should occur.  For Cambridge, Massachusetts both variables'
values are 120.


File: emacs,  Node: Time Intervals,  Next: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage,  Prev: Daylight Saving,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.14 Summing Time Intervals
============================

The timeclock package adds up time intervals, so you can (for instance)
keep track of how much time you spend working on particular projects.

   Use the `M-x timeclock-in' command when you start working on a
project, and `M-x timeclock-out' command when you're done.  Each time
you do this, it adds one time interval to the record of the project.
You can change to working on a different project with `M-x
timeclock-change'.

   Once you've collected data from a number of time intervals, you can
use `M-x timeclock-workday-remaining' to see how much time is left to
work today (assuming a typical average of 8 hours a day), and `M-x
timeclock-when-to-leave' which will calculate when you're "done."

   If you want Emacs to display the amount of time "left" of your
workday in the mode line, either customize the
`timeclock-modeline-display' variable and set its value to `t', or
invoke the `M-x timeclock-modeline-display' command.

   Terminating the current Emacs session might or might not mean that
you have stopped working on the project and, by default, Emacs asks
you.  You can, however, set customize the value of the variable
`timeclock-ask-before-exiting' to `nil' to avoid the question; then,
only an explicit `M-x timeclock-out' or `M-x timeclock-change' will
tell Emacs that the current interval is over.

   The timeclock functions work by accumulating the data in a file
called `.timelog' in your home directory.  You can specify a different
name for this file by customizing the variable `timeclock-file'.  If
you edit the timeclock file manually, or if you change the value of any
of timeclock's customizable variables, you should run the command `M-x
timeclock-reread-log' to update the data in Emacs from the file.


File: emacs,  Node: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage,  Prev: Time Intervals,  Up: Calendar/Diary

38.15 Customizing the Calendar and Diary
========================================

There are many customizations that you can use to make the calendar and
diary suit your personal tastes.

* Menu:

* Calendar Customizing::   Calendar layout and hooks.
* Holiday Customizing::    Defining your own holidays.
* Date Display Format::    Changing the format.
* Time Display Format::    Changing the format.
* Diary Customizing::      Defaults you can set.
* Non-Gregorian Diary::    Diary entries based on other calendars.
* Diary Display::          A choice of ways to display the diary.
* Fancy Diary Display::    Sorting diary entries, using included diary files.
* Sexp Diary Entries::     More flexible diary entries.


File: emacs,  Node: Calendar Customizing,  Next: Holiday Customizing,  Up: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage

38.15.1 Customizing the Calendar
--------------------------------

The calendar display unfortunately cannot be changed from three months,
but you can customize the whitespace used by setting the variables:
`calendar-left-margin', `calendar-day-header-width',
`calendar-day-digit-width', `calendar-column-width', and
`calendar-intermonth-spacing'.  To display text _between_ the months,
for example week numbers, customize the variables
`calendar-intermonth-header' and `calendar-intermonth-text' as
described in their documentation.

   The variable `calendar-holiday-marker' specifies how to mark a date
as being a holiday.  Its value may be a single-character string to
insert next to the date, or a face name to use for displaying the date.
Likewise, the variable `diary-entry-marker' specifies how to mark a
date that has diary entries, and `calenday-today-marker' is used by the
function `calendar-mark-today' to mark today's date.  By default, the
calendar uses faces named `holiday', `diary', and `calendar-today' for
these purposes.

   The variable `calendar-load-hook' is a normal hook run when the
calendar package is first loaded (before actually starting to display
the calendar).

   Starting the calendar runs the normal hook
`calendar-initial-window-hook'.  Recomputation of the calendar display
does not run this hook.  But if you leave the calendar with the `q'
command and reenter it, the hook runs again.

   The variable `calendar-today-visible-hook' is a normal hook run
after the calendar buffer has been prepared with the calendar when the
current date is visible in the window.  One use of this hook is to mark
today's date; to do that use either of the functions
`calendar-mark-today' or `calendar-star-date':

     (add-hook 'calendar-today-visible-hook 'calendar-mark-today)

A similar normal hook, `calendar-today-invisible-hook' is run if the
current date is _not_ visible in the window.

   Each of the calendar cursor motion commands runs the hook
`calendar-move-hook' after it moves the cursor.


File: emacs,  Node: Holiday Customizing,  Next: Date Display Format,  Prev: Calendar Customizing,  Up: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage

38.15.2 Customizing the Holidays
--------------------------------

Emacs knows about holidays defined by entries on one of several lists.
The lists of holidays that Emacs uses are for general holidays
(`holiday-general-holidays'), local holidays (`holiday-local-holidays'),
sun- and moon-related holidays (`holiday-solar-holidays'), Baha'i
holidays (`holiday-bahai-holidays'), Christian holidays
(`holiday-christian-holidays'), Hebrew (Jewish) holidays
(`holiday-hebrew-holidays'), Islamic (Muslim) holidays
(`holiday-islamic-holidays'), Oriental holidays
(`holiday-oriental-holidays'), and other holidays
(`holiday-other-holidays').

   You can customize these lists of holidays to your own needs,
deleting or adding holidays as described below.  Set any of them to
`nil' to eliminate the associated holidays.

   The general holidays are, by default, holidays common throughout the
United States.

   There are no default local holidays, but your site may supply some.

   By default, Emacs does not include all the holidays of the religions
that it knows, only those commonly found in secular calendars.  For a
more extensive collection of religious holidays, you can set any (or
all) of the variables `calendar-bahai-all-holidays-flag',
`calendar-christian-all-holidays-flag',
`calendar-hebrew-all-holidays-flag', or
`calendar-islamic-all-holidays-flag' to `t'.

   You can set the variable `holiday-other-holidays' to any list of
holidays.  This list, normally empty, is intended for individual use.

   Each of the holiday variables is a list of "holiday forms", each
form describing a holiday (or sometimes a list of holidays).

   Here is a table of the possible kinds of holiday form.  Day numbers
and month numbers count starting from 1, but "dayname" numbers count
Sunday as 0.  The element STRING is always the description of the
holiday, as a string.

`(holiday-fixed MONTH DAY STRING)'
     A fixed date on the Gregorian calendar.

`(holiday-float MONTH DAYNAME K STRING'
     &optional DAY) The Kth DAYNAME (DAYNAME=0 for Sunday, and so on)
     after or before Gregorian date MONTH, DAY.  Negative K means count
     back from the end of the month.  Optional DAY defaults to 1 if K
     is positive, and the last day of MONTH otherwise.

`(holiday-chinese MONTH DAY STRING)'
     A fixed date on the Chinese calendar.

`(holiday-hebrew MONTH DAY STRING)'
     A fixed date on the Hebrew calendar.

`(holiday-islamic MONTH DAY STRING)'
     A fixed date on the Islamic calendar.

`(holiday-julian MONTH DAY STRING)'
     A fixed date on the Julian calendar.

`(holiday-sexp SEXP STRING)'
     A date calculated by the Lisp expression SEXP.  The expression
     should use the variable `year' to compute and return the date of a
     holiday in the form of a list `(MONTH DAY YEAR)', or `nil' if the
     holiday doesn't happen this year.

`(if CONDITION HOLIDAY-FORM)'
     A holiday that happens only if CONDITION is true.

`(FUNCTION [ARGS])'
     A list of dates calculated by the function FUNCTION, called with
     arguments ARGS.

   For example, suppose you want to add Bastille Day, celebrated in
France on July 14 (i.e., the fourteenth day of the seventh month).  You
can do this as follows:

     (setq holiday-other-holidays '((holiday-fixed 7 14 "Bastille Day")))

   Many holidays occur on a specific day of the week, at a specific time
of month.  Here is a holiday form describing Hurricane Supplication Day,
celebrated in the Virgin Islands on the fourth Monday in August:

     (holiday-float 8 1 4 "Hurricane Supplication Day")

Here the 8 specifies August, the 1 specifies Monday (Sunday is 0,
Tuesday is 2, and so on), and the 4 specifies the fourth occurrence in
the month (1 specifies the first occurrence, 2 the second occurrence,
-1 the last occurrence, -2 the second-to-last occurrence, and so on).

   You can specify holidays that occur on fixed days of the Baha'i,
Chinese, Hebrew, Islamic, and Julian calendars too.  For example,

     (setq holiday-other-holidays
           '((holiday-hebrew 10 2 "Last day of Hanukkah")
             (holiday-islamic 3 12 "Mohammed's Birthday")
             (holiday-julian 4 2 "Jefferson's Birthday")))

adds the last day of Hanukkah (since the Hebrew months are numbered with
1 starting from Nisan), the Islamic feast celebrating Mohammed's
birthday (since the Islamic months are numbered from 1 starting with
Muharram), and Thomas Jefferson's birthday, which is 2 April 1743 on the
Julian calendar.

   To include a holiday conditionally, use either Emacs Lisp's `if' or
the `holiday-sexp' form.  For example, American presidential elections
occur on the first Tuesday after the first Monday in November of years
divisible by 4:

     (holiday-sexp '(if (zerop (% year 4))
                        (calendar-gregorian-from-absolute
                         (1+ (calendar-dayname-on-or-before
                               1 (+ 6 (calendar-absolute-from-gregorian
                                       (list 11 1 year)))))))
                   "US Presidential Election")

or

     (if (zerop (% displayed-year 4))
         (holiday-fixed 11
                (calendar-extract-day
                  (calendar-gregorian-from-absolute
                    (1+ (calendar-dayname-on-or-before
                          1 (+ 6 (calendar-absolute-from-gregorian
                                   (list 11 1 displayed-year)))))))
                "US Presidential Election"))

   Some holidays just don't fit into any of these forms because special
calculations are involved in their determination.  In such cases you
must write a Lisp function to do the calculation.  To include eclipses,
for example, add `(eclipses)' to `holiday-other-holidays' and write an
Emacs Lisp function `eclipses' that returns a (possibly empty) list of
the relevant Gregorian dates among the range visible in the calendar
window, with descriptive strings, like this:

     (((6 27 1991) "Lunar Eclipse") ((7 11 1991) "Solar Eclipse") ... )


File: emacs,  Node: Date Display Format,  Next: Time Display Format,  Prev: Holiday Customizing,  Up: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage

38.15.3 Date Display Format
---------------------------

You can customize the manner of displaying dates in the diary, in mode
lines, and in messages by setting `calendar-date-display-form'.  This
variable holds a list of expressions that can involve the variables
`month', `day', and `year', which are all numbers in string form, and
`monthname' and `dayname', which are both alphabetic strings.  In the
American style, the default value of this list is as follows:

     ((if dayname (concat dayname ", ")) monthname " " day ", " year)

while in the European style this value is the default:

     ((if dayname (concat dayname ", ")) day " " monthname " " year)

The default ISO date representation is:

     ((format "%s-%.2d-%.2d" year (string-to-number month)
              (string-to-number day)))

This specifies a typical American format:

     (month "/" day "/" (substring year -2))


File: emacs,  Node: Time Display Format,  Next: Diary Customizing,  Prev: Date Display Format,  Up: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage

38.15.4 Time Display Format
---------------------------

The calendar and diary by default display times of day in the
conventional American style with the hours from 1 through 12, minutes,
and either `am' or `pm'.  If you prefer the European style, also known
in the US as military, in which the hours go from 00 to 23, you can
alter the variable `calendar-time-display-form'.  This variable is a
list of expressions that can involve the variables `12-hours',
`24-hours', and `minutes', which are all numbers in string form, and
`am-pm' and `time-zone', which are both alphabetic strings.  The
default value is:

     (12-hours ":" minutes am-pm
               (if time-zone " (") time-zone (if time-zone ")"))

Here is a value that provides European style times:

     (24-hours ":" minutes
               (if time-zone " (") time-zone (if time-zone ")"))

   Note that few calendar functions return a time of day (at present,
only solar functions).


File: emacs,  Node: Diary Customizing,  Next: Non-Gregorian Diary,  Prev: Time Display Format,  Up: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage

38.15.5 Customizing the Diary
-----------------------------

Ordinarily, the diary window indicates any holidays that fall on the
date of the diary entries, either in the mode line or the buffer itself.
The process of checking for holidays can be slow, depending on the
defined holidays.  In that case, setting `diary-show-holidays-flag' to
`nil' will speed up the diary display.

   The variable `diary-number-of-entries' controls the number of days
of diary entries to be displayed at one time.  It affects the initial
display when `calendar-view-diary-initially-flag' is `t', as well as
the command `M-x diary'.  For example, a value of 1 (the default)
displays only the current day's diary entries, whereas a value of 2
will also show the next day's entries.  The value can also be a vector
of seven integers: for example, if the value is `[0 2 2 2 2 4 1]' then
no diary entries appear on Sunday, the current date's and the next
day's diary entries appear Monday through Thursday, Friday through
Monday's entries appear on Friday, while on Saturday only that day's
entries appear.

   You can customize the form of dates in your diary file by setting the
variable `diary-date-forms'.  This variable is a list of patterns for
recognizing a date.  Each date pattern is a list whose elements may be
regular expressions (*note Regular Expressions: (elisp)Regular
Expressions.) or the symbols `month', `day', `year', `monthname', and
`dayname'.  All these elements serve as patterns that match certain
kinds of text in the diary file.  In order for the date pattern, as a
whole, to match, all of its elements must match consecutively.

   A regular expression in a date pattern matches in its usual fashion,
using the standard syntax table altered so that `*' is a word
constituent.

   The symbols `month', `day', `year', `monthname', and `dayname' match
the month number, day number, year number, month name, and day name of
the date being considered.  The symbols that match numbers allow
leading zeros; those that match names allow capitalization and
abbreviation (as specified by `calendar-month-abbrev-array' and
`calendar-day-abbrev-array').  All the symbols can match `*'; since `*'
in a diary entry means "any day", "any month", and so on, it should
match regardless of the date being considered.

   The default value of `diary-date-forms' in the American style is
provided by `diary-american-date-forms':

     ((month "/" day "[^/0-9]")
      (month "/" day "/" year "[^0-9]")
      (monthname " *" day "[^,0-9]")
      (monthname " *" day ", *" year "[^0-9]")
      (dayname "\\W"))

Other default styles are provided by `diary-european-date-forms' and
`diary-iso-date-forms'.

   The date patterns in the list must be _mutually exclusive_ and must
not match any portion of the diary entry itself, just the date and one
character of whitespace.  If, to be mutually exclusive, the pattern
must match a portion of the diary entry text--beyond the whitespace
that ends the date--then the first element of the date pattern _must_
be `backup'.  This causes the date recognizer to back up to the
beginning of the current word of the diary entry, after finishing the
match.  Even if you use `backup', the date pattern must absolutely not
match more than a portion of the first word of the diary entry.  For
example, the default value of `diary-european-date-forms' is:

     ((day "/" month "[^/0-9]")
      (day "/" month "/" year "[^0-9]")
      (backup day " *" monthname "\\W+\\<\\([^*0-9]\\|\\([0-9]+[:aApP]\\)\\)")
      (day " *" monthname " *" year "[^0-9]")
      (dayname "\\W"))

Notice the use of `backup' in the third pattern, because it needs to
match part of a word beyond the date itself to distinguish it from the
fourth pattern.


File: emacs,  Node: Non-Gregorian Diary,  Next: Diary Display,  Prev: Diary Customizing,  Up: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage

38.15.6 Diary Entries Using non-Gregorian Calendars
---------------------------------------------------

As well as entries based on the standard Gregorian calendar, your diary
can have entries based on Baha'i, Hebrew, or Islamic dates.
Recognition of such entries can be time-consuming, however, and since
most people don't use them, you must explicitly enable their use.  If
you want the diary to recognize Hebrew-date diary entries, for example,
you must do this:

     (add-hook 'diary-nongregorian-listing-hook 'diary-hebrew-list-entries)
     (add-hook 'diary-nongregorian-marking-hook 'diary-hebrew-mark-entries)

Similarly, for Islamic and Baha'i entries, add
`diary-islamic-list-entries' and `diary-islamic-mark-entries', or
`diary-bahai-list-entries' and `diary-bahai-mark-entries'.

   These diary entries have the same formats as Gregorian-date diary
entries; except that `diary-bahai-entry-symbol' (default `B') must
precede a Baha'i date, `diary-hebrew-entry-symbol' (default `H') a
Hebrew date, and `diary-islamic-entry-symbol' (default `I') an Islamic
date.  Moreover, non-Gregorian month names may not be abbreviated
(because the first three letters are often not unique).  (Note also
that you must use "Adar I" if you want Adar of a common Hebrew year.)
For example, a diary entry for the Hebrew date Heshvan 25 could look
like this:

     HHeshvan 25 Happy Hebrew birthday!

and would appear in the diary for any date that corresponds to Heshvan
25 on the Hebrew calendar.  And here is an Islamic-date diary entry
that matches Dhu al-Qada 25:

     IDhu al-Qada 25 Happy Islamic birthday!

   As with Gregorian-date diary entries, non-Gregorian entries are
nonmarking if preceded by `diary-nonmarking-symbol' (default `&').

   Here is a table of commands used in the calendar to create diary
entries that match the selected date and other dates that are similar in
the Baha'i, Hebrew, or Islamic calendars:

`i h d'
     `diary-hebrew-insert-entry'

`i h m'
     `diary-hebrew-insert-monthly-entry'

`i h y'
     `diary-hebrew-insert-yearly-entry'

`i i d'
     `diary-islamic-insert-entry'

`i i m'
     `diary-islamic-insert-monthly-entry'

`i i y'
     `diary-islamic-insert-yearly-entry'

`i B d'
     `diary-bahai-insert-entry'

`i B m'
     `diary-bahai-insert-monthly-entry'

`i B y'
     `diary-bahai-insert-yearly-entry'

   These commands work much like the corresponding commands for ordinary
diary entries: they apply to the date that point is on in the calendar
window, and what they do is insert just the date portion of a diary
entry at the end of your diary file.  You must then insert the rest of
the diary entry.  The basic commands add an entry for the specific
non-Gregorian date, the `monthly' commands for the given non-Gregorian
day-within-month in every month, and the `yearly' commands for the
given non-Gregorian day and month in every year.


File: emacs,  Node: Diary Display,  Next: Fancy Diary Display,  Prev: Non-Gregorian Diary,  Up: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage

38.15.7 Diary Display
---------------------

Diary display works by preparing the list of diary entries and then
running the function specified by the variable
`diary-display-function'.  The default value `diary-fancy-display'
displays diary entries and holidays by copying them into a special
buffer that exists only for the sake of display.  Copying diary entries
to a separate buffer provides an opportunity to change the displayed
text to make it prettier--for example, to sort the entries by the dates
they apply to.

   Ordinarily, the fancy diary buffer does not show days for which there
are no diary entries, even if that day is a holiday.  If you want such
days to be shown in the fancy diary buffer, set the variable
`diary-list-include-blanks' to `t'.

   The fancy diary buffer enables View mode, a minor mode that provides
commands for scrolling and searching the text.  For example, <SPC> and
<DEL> scroll forward and backward, and <s> starts an incremental
search.  See the documentation of the function `view-mode' for more
information.

   The alternative display method `diary-simple-display' shows the
actual diary buffer, and uses invisible text to hide entries that don't
apply.  Holidays are shown in the mode line.  The advantage of this
method is that you can edit the buffer and save your changes directly to
the diary file.  This method is not as flexible as the fancy method,
however.  For example, it cannot sort entries.  Another disadvantage is
that invisible text can be confusing.  For example, if you copy a region
of text in order to paste it elsewhere, invisible text may be included.
Similarly, since the diary buffer as you see it is an illusion, simply
printing the buffer may not print what you see on your screen.

   For this reason, there is a special command to print hard copy of the
diary buffer _as it appears_; this command is `M-x
diary-print-entries'.  It works with either display method, although
with the fancy display you can also print the buffer like any other.  To
print a hard copy of a day-by-day diary for a week, position point on
the first day of the week, type `7 d', and then do `M-x
diary-print-entries'.  As usual, the inclusion of the holidays slows
down the display slightly; you can speed things up by setting the
variable `diary-show-holidays-flag' to `nil'.

   This command prepares a temporary buffer that contains only the diary
entries currently visible in the diary buffer.  Unlike with the simple
display, the other irrelevant entries are really absent, not just
hidden.  After preparing the buffer, it runs the hook
`diary-print-entries-hook'.  The default value of this hook sends the
data directly to the printer with the command `lpr-buffer' (*note
Printing::).  If you want to use a different command to do the
printing, just change the value of this hook.  Other uses might include,
for example, rearranging the lines into order by day and time.

   You can edit the diary entries as they appear in the simple diary
window, but it is important to remember that the buffer displayed
contains the _entire_ diary file, with portions of it concealed from
view.  This means, for instance, that the `C-f' (`forward-char')
command can put point at what appears to be the end of the line, but
what is in reality the middle of some concealed line.

   _Be careful when editing the diary entries in the simple display!_
Inserting additional lines or adding/deleting characters in the middle
of a visible line cannot cause problems, but editing at the end of a
line may not do what you expect.  Deleting a line may delete other
invisible entries that follow it.  Before editing the simple diary
buffer, it is best to display the entire file with `s'
(`diary-show-all-entries').


File: emacs,  Node: Fancy Diary Display,  Next: Sexp Diary Entries,  Prev: Diary Display,  Up: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage

38.15.8 Fancy Diary Display
---------------------------

The following features only work with the fancy diary display.

   You can use the normal hook `diary-list-entries-hook' to sort each
day's diary entries by their time of day.  Here's how:

     (add-hook 'diary-list-entries-hook 'diary-sort-entries t)

For each day, this sorts diary entries that begin with a recognizable
time of day according to their times.  Diary entries without times come
first within each day.

   Your main diary file can include other files.  This permits a group
of people to share a diary file for events that apply to all of them.
Lines in the diary file starting with `diary-include-string':

     #include "FILENAME"

include the diary entries from the file FILENAME in the fancy diary
buffer.  The include mechanism is recursive, so that included files can
include other files, and so on (you must be careful not to have a cycle
of inclusions, of course).  Here is how to enable the include facility:

     (add-hook 'diary-list-entries-hook 'diary-include-other-diary-files)
     (add-hook 'diary-mark-entries-hook 'diary-mark-included-diary-files)

   The include mechanism works only with the fancy diary display,
because simple diary display shows the entries directly from your diary
file.


File: emacs,  Node: Sexp Diary Entries,  Prev: Fancy Diary Display,  Up: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage

38.15.9 Sexp Entries and the Fancy Diary Display
------------------------------------------------

Sexp diary entries allow you to do more than just have complicated
conditions under which a diary entry applies.  Sexp entries should be
preceded by `diary-sexp-entry-symbol' (default `%%') in the diary file.
With the fancy diary display, sexp entries can generate the text of
the entry depending on the date itself.

   For example, an anniversary diary entry can insert the number of
years since the anniversary date into the text of the diary entry.
Thus the `%d' in this diary entry:

     %%(diary-anniversary 10 31 1948) Arthur's birthday (%d years old)

gets replaced by the age, so on October 31, 1990 the entry appears in
the fancy diary buffer like this:

     Arthur's birthday (42 years old)

If the diary file instead contains this entry:

     %%(diary-anniversary 10 31 1948) Arthur's %d%s birthday

the entry in the fancy diary buffer for October 31, 1990 appears like
this:

     Arthur's 42nd birthday

   Similarly, cyclic diary entries can interpolate the number of
repetitions that have occurred:

     %%(diary-cyclic 50 1 1 1990) Renew medication (%d%s time)

looks like this:

     Renew medication (5th time)

in the fancy diary display on September 8, 1990.

   There is an early reminder diary sexp that includes its entry in the
diary not only on the date of occurrence, but also on earlier dates.
For example, if you want a reminder a week before your anniversary, you
can use

     %%(diary-remind '(diary-anniversary 12 22 1968) 7) Ed's anniversary

and the fancy diary will show `Ed's anniversary' both on December 15
and on December 22.

   The function `diary-date' applies to dates described by a month,
day, year combination, each of which can be an integer, a list of
integers, or `t' (meaning all values).  For example,

     %%(diary-date '(10 11 12) 22 t) Rake leaves

causes the fancy diary to show

     Rake leaves

on October 22, November 22, and December 22 of every year.

   The function `diary-float' allows you to describe diary entries that
apply to dates like the third Friday of November, or the last Tuesday
in April.  The parameters are the MONTH, DAYNAME, and an index N.  The
entry appears on the Nth DAYNAME after the first day of MONTH, where
DAYNAME=0 means Sunday, 1 means Monday, and so on.  If N is negative it
counts backward from the end of MONTH.  The value of MONTH can be a
list of months, a single month, or `t' to specify all months.  You can
also use an optional parameter DAY to specify the Nth DAYNAME on or
after/before DAY of MONTH; the value of DAY defaults to 1 if N is
positive and to the last day of MONTH if N is negative.  For example,

     %%(diary-float t 1 -1) Pay rent

causes the fancy diary to show

     Pay rent

on the last Monday of every month.

   The generality of sexp diary entries lets you specify any diary
entry that you can describe algorithmically.  A sexp diary entry
contains an expression that computes whether the entry applies to any
given date.  If its value is non-`nil', the entry applies to that date;
otherwise, it does not.  The expression can use the variable `date' to
find the date being considered; its value is a list (MONTH DAY YEAR)
that refers to the Gregorian calendar.

   The sexp diary entry applies to a date when the expression's value
is non-`nil', but some values have more specific meanings.  If the
value is a string, that string is a description of the event which
occurs on that date.  The value can also have the form `(MARK .
STRING)'; then MARK specifies how to mark the date in the calendar, and
STRING is the description of the event.  If MARK is a single-character
string, that character appears next to the date in the calendar.  If
MARK is a face name, the date is displayed in that face.  If MARK is
`nil', that specifies no particular highlighting for the date.

   Suppose you get paid on the 21st of the month if it is a weekday, and
on the Friday before if the 21st is on a weekend.  Here is how to write
a sexp diary entry that matches those dates:

     &%%(let ((dayname (calendar-day-of-week date))
              (day (cadr date)))
           (or (and (= day 21) (memq dayname '(1 2 3 4 5)))
               (and (memq day '(19 20)) (= dayname 5)))
              ) Pay check deposited

   The following sexp diary entries take advantage of the ability (in
the fancy diary display) to concoct diary entries whose text varies
based on the date:

`%%(diary-sunrise-sunset)'
     Make a diary entry for today's local times of sunrise and sunset.

`%%(diary-lunar-phases)'
     Make a diary entry for the phases (quarters) of the moon.

`%%(diary-day-of-year)'
     Make a diary entry with today's day number in the current year and
     the number of days remaining in the current year.

`%%(diary-iso-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent ISO commercial date.

`%%(diary-julian-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent Julian calendar date.

`%%(diary-astro-day-number)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent astronomical (Julian)
     day number.

`%%(diary-bahai-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent Baha'i calendar date.

`%%(diary-chinese-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent Chinese calendar date.

`%%(diary-coptic-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent Coptic calendar date.

`%%(diary-ethiopic-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent Ethiopic calendar date.

`%%(diary-french-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent date on the French
     Revolutionary calendar.

`%%(diary-hebrew-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent Hebrew calendar date.

`%%(diary-islamic-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent Islamic calendar date.

`%%(diary-mayan-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent Mayan calendar date.

`%%(diary-persian-date)'
     Make a diary entry with today's equivalent Persian calendar date.

For example, including the diary entry

     &%%(diary-hebrew-date)

causes every day's diary display to contain the equivalent date on the
Hebrew calendar, if you are using the fancy diary display.  (With simple
diary display, the literal line `&%%(diary-hebrew-date)' appears in the
diary for any date.)

   This function has been used to construct certain standard Hebrew sexp
diary entries:

`%%(diary-hebrew-rosh-hodesh)'
     Make a diary entry that tells the occurrence and ritual
     announcement of each new Hebrew month.

`%%(diary-hebrew-parasha)'
     Make a Saturday diary entry that tells the weekly synagogue
     scripture reading.

`%%(diary-hebrew-sabbath-candles)'
     Make a Friday diary entry that tells the _local time_ of Sabbath
     candle lighting.

`%%(diary-hebrew-omer)'
     Make a diary entry that gives the omer count, when appropriate.

`%%(diary-hebrew-yahrzeit MONTH DAY YEAR) NAME'
     Make a diary entry marking the anniversary of a date of death.
     The date is the _Gregorian_ (civil) date of death.  The diary
     entry appears on the proper Hebrew calendar anniversary and on the
     day before.  (The order of the parameters changes according to the
     calendar date style; for example in the European style to DAY,
     MONTH, YEAR.)

   All the functions documented above take an optional argument MARK
which specifies how to mark the date in the calendar display.  If one
of these functions decides that it applies to a certain date, it
returns a value that contains MARK, as described above.


File: emacs,  Node: Document View,  Next: Gnus,  Prev: Calendar/Diary,  Up: Top

39 Document Viewing
*******************

DocView mode (`doc-view-mode') is a viewer for DVI, Postscript (PS),
and PDF documents.  It provides features such as slicing, zooming, and
searching inside documents.  It works by converting the document to a
set of images using the `gs' (GhostScript) command, and displaying
those images.

   When you visit a PDF or DVI file, Emacs automatically switches to
DocView mode.  When you visit a Postscript file, Emacs switches to PS
mode, a major mode for editing Postscript files as text; however, it
also enables DocView minor mode, so you can type `C-c C-c' to view the
document with DocView.  (PDF and DVI files, unlike Postscript files,
are not usually human-editable.)  In either case, repeating `C-c C-c'
(`doc-view-toggle-display') toggles between DocView and the file text.

   You can explicitly toggle DocView mode with the command `M-x
doc-view-mode', and DocView minor mode with the command `M-x
doc-view-minor-mode'.

   When DocView mode starts, it displays a welcome screen and begins
formatting the file, page by page.  It displays the first page once
that has been formatted.

   When in DocView mode, you can enlarge or shrink the document with
`+' (`doc-view-enlarge') and `-' (`doc-view-shrink').  To specify the
default size for DocView, set or customize the variable
`doc-view-resolution'.

   To kill the DocView buffer, type `k'
(`doc-view-kill-proc-and-buffer').  To bury it, type `q'
(`quit-window').

* Menu:

* Navigation::	Navigation inside DocView buffers.
* Searching::	Searching inside documents.
* Slicing::	Specifying which part of pages should be displayed.
* Conversion::	Influencing and triggering conversion.


File: emacs,  Node: Navigation,  Next: Searching,  Up: Document View

39.1 Navigation
===============

When in DocView mode, you can scroll the current page using the usual
Emacs movement keys: `C-p', `C-n', `C-b', `C-f', and the arrow keys.

   By default, the line-motion keys `C-p' and `C-n' stop scrolling at
the beginning and end of the current page, respectively.  However, if
you change the variable `doc-view-continuous' to a non-`nil' value,
then `C-p' displays the previous page if you are already at the
beginning of the current page, and `C-n' displays the next page if you
are at the end of the current page.

   You can also display the next page by typing `n', <next> or `C-x ]'
(`doc-view-next-page').  To display the previous page, type `p',
<prior> or `C-x [' (`doc-view-previous-page').

   The <SPC> (`doc-view-scroll-up-or-next-page') key is a convenient
way to advance through the document.  It scrolls within the current
page or advances to the next.  <DEL> moves backwards in a similar way
(`doc-view-scroll-down-or-previous-page').

   To go to the first page, type `M-<' (`doc-view-first-page'); to go
to the last one, type `M->' (`doc-view-last-page').  To jump to a page
by its number, type `M-g M-g' or `M-g g' (`doc-view-goto-page').


File: emacs,  Node: Searching,  Next: Slicing,  Prev: Navigation,  Up: Document View

39.2 Searching
==============

While in DocView mode, you can search the file's text for a regular
expression (*note Regexps::).  The interface for searching is inspired
by `isearch' (*note Incremental Search::).

   To begin a search, type `C-s' (`doc-view-search') or `C-r'
(`doc-view-search-backward').  This reads a regular expression using a
minibuffer, then echoes the number of matches found within the
document.  You can move forward and back among the matches by typing
`C-s' and `C-r'.  DocView mode has no way to show the match inside the
page image; instead, it displays a tooltip (at the mouse position)
listing all matching lines in the current page.  To force display of
this tooltip, type `C-t' (`doc-view-show-tooltip').

   To start a new search, use the search command with a prefix
argument; i.e., `C-u C-s' for a forward search or `C-u C-r' for a
backward search.


File: emacs,  Node: Slicing,  Next: Conversion,  Prev: Searching,  Up: Document View

39.3 Slicing
============

Documents often have wide margins for printing.  They are annoying when
reading the document on the screen, because they use up screen space
and can cause inconvenient scrolling.

   With DocView you can hide these margins by selecting a "slice" of
pages to display.  A slice is a rectangle within the page area; once
you specify a slice in DocView, it applies to whichever page you look
at.

   To specify the slice numerically, type `s s' (`doc-view-set-slice');
then enter the top left pixel position and the slice's width and height.

   A more convenient graphical way to specify the slice is with `s m'
(`doc-view-set-slice-using-mouse'), where you use the mouse to select
the slice.

   To cancel the selected slice, type `s r' (`doc-view-reset-slice').
Then DocView shows the entire page including its entire margins.


File: emacs,  Node: Conversion,  Prev: Slicing,  Up: Document View

39.4 Conversion
===============

For efficiency, DocView caches the images produced by `gs'.  The name
of this directory is given by the variable `doc-view-cache-directory'.
You can clear the cache directory by typing `M-x doc-view-clear-cache'.

   To force a reconversion of the currently viewed document, type `r'
or `g' (`revert-buffer').  To kill the converter process associated
with the current buffer, type `K' (`doc-view-kill-proc').  The command
`k' (`doc-view-kill-proc-and-buffer') kills the converter process and
the DocView buffer.

   The zoom commands `+' (`doc-view-enlarge') and `-'
(`doc-view-shrink') need to reconvert the document at the new size.
The current page is converted first.


File: emacs,  Node: Gnus,  Next: Shell,  Prev: Document View,  Up: Top

40 Gnus
*******

Gnus is an Emacs package primarily designed for reading and posting
Usenet news.  It can also be used to read and respond to messages from a
number of other sources--mail, remote directories, digests, and so on.
Here we introduce Gnus and describe several basic features.  For full
details, see *Note Gnus: (gnus)Top.

   To start Gnus, type `M-x gnus <RET>'.

* Menu:

* Buffers of Gnus::	The group, summary, and article buffers.
* Gnus Startup::	What you should know about starting Gnus.
* Summary of Gnus::	A short description of the basic Gnus commands.


File: emacs,  Node: Buffers of Gnus,  Next: Gnus Startup,  Up: Gnus

40.1 Gnus Buffers
=================

Unlike most Emacs packages, Gnus uses several buffers to display
information and to receive commands.  The three Gnus buffers users use
most are the "group buffer", the "summary buffer" and the "article
buffer".

   The "group buffer" contains a list of newsgroups.  This is the first
buffer Gnus displays when it starts up.  It normally displays only the
groups to which you subscribe and that contain unread articles.  Use
this buffer to select a specific group.

   The "summary buffer" lists one line for each article in a single
group.  By default, the author, the subject and the line number are
displayed for each article, but this is customizable, like most aspects
of Gnus display.  The summary buffer is created when you select a group
in the group buffer, and is killed when you exit the group.  Use this
buffer to select an article.

   The "article buffer" displays the article.  In normal Gnus usage,
you see this buffer but you don't select it--all useful
article-oriented commands work in the summary buffer.  But you can
select the article buffer, and execute all Gnus commands from that
buffer, if you want to.


File: emacs,  Node: Gnus Startup,  Next: Summary of Gnus,  Prev: Buffers of Gnus,  Up: Gnus

40.2 When Gnus Starts Up
========================

At startup, Gnus reads your `.newsrc' news initialization file and
attempts to communicate with the local news server, which is a
repository of news articles.  The news server need not be the same
computer you are logged in on.

   If you start Gnus and connect to the server, but do not see any
newsgroups listed in the group buffer, type `L' or `A k' to get a
listing of all the groups.  Then type `u' to toggle subscription to
groups.

   The first time you start Gnus, Gnus subscribes you to a few selected
groups.  All other groups start out as "killed groups" for you; you can
list them with `A k'.  All new groups that subsequently come to exist
at the news server become "zombie groups" for you; type `A z' to list
them.  You can subscribe to a group shown in these lists using the `u'
command.

   When you quit Gnus with `q', it automatically records in your
`.newsrc' and `.newsrc.eld' initialization files the subscribed or
unsubscribed status of all groups.  You should normally not edit these
files manually, but you may if you know how.


File: emacs,  Node: Summary of Gnus,  Prev: Gnus Startup,  Up: Gnus

40.3 Summary of Gnus Commands
=============================

Reading news is a two-step process:

  1. Choose a group in the group buffer.

  2. Select articles from the summary buffer.  Each article selected is
     displayed in the article buffer in a large window, below the
     summary buffer in its small window.

   Each Gnus buffer has its own special commands; the meanings of any
given key in the various Gnus buffers are usually analogous, even if
not identical.  Here are commands for the group and summary buffers:

`q'
     In the group buffer, update your `.newsrc' initialization file and
     quit Gnus.

     In the summary buffer, exit the current group and return to the
     group buffer.  Thus, typing `q' twice quits Gnus.

`L'
     In the group buffer, list all the groups available on your news
     server (except those you have killed).  This may be a long list!

`l'
     In the group buffer, list only the groups to which you subscribe
     and which contain unread articles.

`u'
     In the group buffer, unsubscribe from (or subscribe to) the group
     listed in the line that point is on.  When you quit Gnus by typing
     `q', Gnus lists in your `.newsrc' file which groups you have
     subscribed to.  The next time you start Gnus, you won't see this
     group, because Gnus normally displays only subscribed-to groups.

`C-k'
     In the group buffer, "kill" the current line's group--don't even
     list it in `.newsrc' from now on.  This affects future Gnus
     sessions as well as the present session.

     When you quit Gnus by typing `q', Gnus writes information in the
     file `.newsrc' describing all newsgroups except those you have
     "killed."

`<SPC>'
     In the group buffer, select the group on the line under the cursor
     and display the first unread article in that group.

     In the summary buffer,

        * Select the article on the line under the cursor if none is
          selected.

        * Scroll the text of the selected article (if there is one).

        * Select the next unread article if at the end of the current
          article.

     Thus, you can move through all the articles by repeatedly typing
     <SPC>.

`<DEL>'
     In the group buffer, move point to the previous group containing
     unread articles.

     In the summary buffer, scroll the text of the article backwards.

`n'
     Move point to the next unread group, or select the next unread
     article.

`p'
     Move point to the previous unread group, or select the previous
     unread article.

`C-n'
`C-p'
     Move point to the next or previous item, even if it is marked as
     read.  This does not select the article or group on that line.

`s'
     In the summary buffer, do an incremental search of the current
     text in the article buffer, just as if you switched to the article
     buffer and typed `C-s'.

`M-s REGEXP <RET>'
     In the summary buffer, search forward for articles containing a
     match for REGEXP.



File: emacs,  Node: Shell,  Next: Emacs Server,  Prev: Gnus,  Up: Top

41 Running Shell Commands from Emacs
************************************

Emacs has commands for passing single command lines to inferior shell
processes; it can also run a shell interactively with input and output
to an Emacs buffer named `*shell*' or run a shell inside a terminal
emulator window.

`M-! CMD <RET>'
     Run the shell command line CMD and display the output
     (`shell-command').

`M-| CMD <RET>'
     Run the shell command line CMD with region contents as input;
     optionally replace the region with the output
     (`shell-command-on-region').

`M-& CMD <RET>'
     Run the shell command line CMD asynchronously, and display the
     output (`async-shell-command').

`M-x shell'
     Run a subshell with input and output through an Emacs buffer.  You
     can then give commands interactively.

`M-x term'
     Run a subshell with input and output through an Emacs buffer.  You
     can then give commands interactively.  Full terminal emulation is
     available.

   `M-x eshell' invokes a shell implemented entirely in Emacs.  It is
documented in a separate manual.  *Note Eshell: (eshell)Top.

* Menu:

* Single Shell::           How to run one shell command and return.
* Interactive Shell::      Permanent shell taking input via Emacs.
* Shell Mode::             Special Emacs commands used with permanent shell.
* Shell Prompts::          Two ways to recognize shell prompts.
* History: Shell History.  Repeating previous commands in a shell buffer.
* Directory Tracking::     Keeping track when the subshell changes directory.
* Options: Shell Options.  Options for customizing Shell mode.
* Terminal emulator::      An Emacs window as a terminal emulator.
* Term Mode::              Special Emacs commands used in Term mode.
* Paging in Term::         Paging in the terminal emulator.
* Remote Host::            Connecting to another computer.
* Serial Terminal::        Connecting to a serial port.


File: emacs,  Node: Single Shell,  Next: Interactive Shell,  Up: Shell

41.1 Single Shell Commands
==========================

`M-!' (`shell-command') reads a line of text using the minibuffer and
executes it as a shell command in a subshell made just for that
command.  Standard input for the command comes from the null device.
If the shell command produces any output, the output appears either in
the echo area (if it is short), or in an Emacs buffer named `*Shell
Command Output*', which is displayed in another window but not selected
(if the output is long).

   For instance, one way to decompress a file `foo.gz' from Emacs is to
type `M-! gunzip foo.gz <RET>'.  That shell command normally creates
the file `foo' and produces no terminal output.

   A numeric argument, as in `M-1 M-!', says to insert terminal output
into the current buffer instead of a separate buffer.  It puts point
before the output, and sets the mark after the output.  For instance,
`M-1 M-! gunzip < foo.gz <RET>' would insert the uncompressed
equivalent of `foo.gz' into the current buffer.

   If the shell command line ends in `&', it runs asynchronously.  For
a synchronous shell command, `shell-command' returns the command's exit
status (0 means success), when it is called from a Lisp program.  You
do not get any status information for an asynchronous command, since it
hasn't finished yet when `shell-command' returns.

   You can also type `M-&' (`async-shell-command') to execute a shell
command asynchronously.  This behaves exactly like calling
`shell-command' with `&', except that you do not need to add the `&' to
the shell command line.

   `M-|' (`shell-command-on-region') is like `M-!' but passes the
contents of the region as the standard input to the shell command,
instead of no input.  With a numeric argument, meaning insert the
output in the current buffer, it deletes the old region and the output
replaces it as the contents of the region.  It returns the command's
exit status, like `M-!'.

   One use for `M-|' is to run `gpg' to see what keys are in the
buffer.  For instance, if the buffer contains a GPG key, type `C-x h
M-| gpg <RET>' to feed the entire buffer contents to the `gpg' program.
That program will ignore everything except the encoded keys, and will
output a list of the keys the buffer contains.

   Both `M-!' and `M-|' use `shell-file-name' to specify the shell to
use.  This variable is initialized based on your `SHELL' environment
variable when Emacs is started.  If the file name is relative, Emacs
searches the directories in the list `exec-path'; this list is
initialized based on the environment variable `PATH' when Emacs is
started.  Your init file can override either or both of these default
initializations (*note Init File::).

   Both `M-!' and `M-|' wait for the shell command to complete, unless
you end the command with `&' to make it asynchronous.  To stop waiting,
type `C-g' to quit; that terminates the shell command with the signal
`SIGINT'--the same signal that `C-c' normally generates in the shell.
Emacs then waits until the command actually terminates.  If the shell
command doesn't stop (because it ignores the `SIGINT' signal), type
`C-g' again; this sends the command a `SIGKILL' signal which is
impossible to ignore.

   Asynchronous commands ending in `&' feed their output into the
buffer `*Async Shell Command*'.  Output arrives in that buffer
regardless of whether it is visible in a window.

   To specify a coding system for `M-!' or `M-|', use the command `C-x
<RET> c' immediately beforehand.  *Note Communication Coding::.

   Error output from these commands is normally intermixed with the
regular output.  But if the variable
`shell-command-default-error-buffer' has a string as value, and it's
the name of a buffer, `M-!' and `M-|' insert error output before point
in that buffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Interactive Shell,  Next: Shell Mode,  Prev: Single Shell,  Up: Shell

41.2 Interactive Inferior Shell
===============================

To run a subshell interactively, use `M-x shell'.  This creates (or
reuses) a buffer named `*shell*' and runs a subshell with input coming
from and output going to that buffer.  That is to say, any "terminal
output" from the subshell goes into the buffer, advancing point, and
any "terminal input" for the subshell comes from text in the buffer.
To give input to the subshell, go to the end of the buffer and type the
input, terminated by <RET>.

   Emacs does not wait for the subshell to do anything.  You can switch
windows or buffers and edit them while the shell is waiting, or while
it is running a command.  Output from the subshell waits until Emacs
has time to process it; this happens whenever Emacs is waiting for
keyboard input or for time to elapse.

   Input lines, once you submit them, are displayed using the face
`comint-highlight-input', and prompts are displayed using the face
`comint-highlight-prompt'.  This makes it easier to see previous input
lines in the buffer.  *Note Faces::.

   To make multiple subshells, you can invoke `M-x shell' with a prefix
argument (e.g. `C-u M-x shell'), which will read a buffer name and
create (or reuse) a subshell in that buffer.  You can also rename the
`*shell*' buffer using `M-x rename-uniquely', then create a new
`*shell*' buffer using plain `M-x shell'.  Subshells in different
buffers run independently and in parallel.

   The file name used to load the subshell is the value of the variable
`explicit-shell-file-name', if that is non-`nil'.  Otherwise, the
environment variable `ESHELL' is used, or the environment variable
`SHELL' if there is no `ESHELL'.  If the file name specified is
relative, the directories in the list `exec-path' are searched; this
list is initialized based on the environment variable `PATH' when Emacs
is started.  Your init file can override either or both of these
default initializations.  (*note Init File::).

   Emacs sends the new shell the contents of the file
`~/.emacs_SHELLNAME' as input, if it exists, where SHELLNAME is the
name of the file that the shell was loaded from.  For example, if you
use bash, the file sent to it is `~/.emacs_bash'.  If this file is not
found, Emacs tries to fallback on `~/.emacs.d/init_SHELLNAME.sh'.

   To specify a coding system for the shell, you can use the command
`C-x <RET> c' immediately before `M-x shell'.  You can also change the
coding system for a running subshell by typing `C-x <RET> p' in the
shell buffer.  *Note Communication Coding::.

   Emacs sets the environment variable `INSIDE_EMACS' in the subshell
to a comma-separated list including the Emacs version.  Programs can
check this variable to determine whether they are running inside an
Emacs subshell.

   Emacs also sets the `EMACS' environment variable (to `t') if it is
not already defined.  *Warning:* This environment variable is
deprecated.  Programs that check this variable should be changed to
check `INSIDE_EMACS' instead.


File: emacs,  Node: Shell Mode,  Next: Shell Prompts,  Prev: Interactive Shell,  Up: Shell

41.3 Shell Mode
===============

Shell buffers use Shell mode, which defines several special keys
attached to the `C-c' prefix.  They are chosen to resemble the usual
editing and job control characters present in shells that are not under
Emacs, except that you must type `C-c' first.  Here is a complete list
of the special key bindings of Shell mode:

`<RET>'
     At end of buffer send line as input; otherwise, copy current line
     to end of buffer and send it (`comint-send-input').  Copying a line
     in this way omits any prompt at the beginning of the line (text
     output by programs preceding your input).  *Note Shell Prompts::,
     for how Shell mode recognizes prompts.

`<TAB>'
     Complete the command name or file name before point in the shell
     buffer (`comint-dynamic-complete').  <TAB> also completes history
     references (*note History References::) and environment variable
     names.

     The variable `shell-completion-fignore' specifies a list of file
     name extensions to ignore in Shell mode completion.  The default
     setting is `nil', but some users prefer `("~" "#" "%")' to ignore
     file names ending in `~', `#' or `%'.  Other related Comint modes
     use the variable `comint-completion-fignore' instead.

`M-?'
     Display temporarily a list of the possible completions of the file
     name before point in the shell buffer
     (`comint-dynamic-list-filename-completions').

`C-d'
     Either delete a character or send EOF
     (`comint-delchar-or-maybe-eof').  Typed at the end of the shell
     buffer, `C-d' sends EOF to the subshell.  Typed at any other
     position in the buffer, `C-d' deletes a character as usual.

`C-c C-a'
     Move to the beginning of the line, but after the prompt if any
     (`comint-bol-or-process-mark').  If you repeat this command twice
     in a row, the second time it moves back to the process mark, which
     is the beginning of the input that you have not yet sent to the
     subshell.  (Normally that is the same place--the end of the prompt
     on this line--but after `C-c <SPC>' the process mark may be in a
     previous line.)

`C-c <SPC>'
     Accumulate multiple lines of input, then send them together.  This
     command inserts a newline before point, but does not send the
     preceding text as input to the subshell--at least, not yet.  Both
     lines, the one before this newline and the one after, will be sent
     together (along with the newline that separates them), when you
     type <RET>.

`C-c C-u'
     Kill all text pending at end of buffer to be sent as input
     (`comint-kill-input').  If point is not at end of buffer, this
     only kills the part of this text that precedes point.

`C-c C-w'
     Kill a word before point (`backward-kill-word').

`C-c C-c'
     Interrupt the shell or its current subjob if any
     (`comint-interrupt-subjob').  This command also kills any shell
     input pending in the shell buffer and not yet sent.

`C-c C-z'
     Stop the shell or its current subjob if any (`comint-stop-subjob').
     This command also kills any shell input pending in the shell
     buffer and not yet sent.

`C-c C-\'
     Send quit signal to the shell or its current subjob if any
     (`comint-quit-subjob').  This command also kills any shell input
     pending in the shell buffer and not yet sent.

`C-c C-o'
     Delete the last batch of output from a shell command
     (`comint-delete-output').  This is useful if a shell command spews
     out lots of output that just gets in the way.  This command used
     to be called `comint-kill-output'.

`C-c C-s'
     Write the last batch of output from a shell command to a file
     (`comint-write-output').  With a prefix argument, the file is
     appended to instead.  Any prompt at the end of the output is not
     written.

`C-c C-r'
`C-M-l'
     Scroll to display the beginning of the last batch of output at the
     top of the window; also move the cursor there
     (`comint-show-output').

`C-c C-e'
     Scroll to put the end of the buffer at the bottom of the window
     (`comint-show-maximum-output').

`C-c C-f'
     Move forward across one shell command, but not beyond the current
     line (`shell-forward-command').  The variable
     `shell-command-regexp' specifies how to recognize the end of a
     command.

`C-c C-b'
     Move backward across one shell command, but not beyond the current
     line (`shell-backward-command').

`M-x dirs'
     Ask the shell what its current directory is, so that Emacs can
     agree with the shell.

`M-x send-invisible <RET> TEXT <RET>'
     Send TEXT as input to the shell, after reading it without echoing.
     This is useful when a shell command runs a program that asks for
     a password.

     Please note that Emacs will not echo passwords by default.  If you
     really want them to be echoed, evaluate the following Lisp
     expression:

          (remove-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions
                       'comint-watch-for-password-prompt)

`M-x comint-continue-subjob'
     Continue the shell process.  This is useful if you accidentally
     suspend the shell process.(1)

`M-x comint-strip-ctrl-m'
     Discard all control-M characters from the current group of shell
     output.  The most convenient way to use this command is to make it
     run automatically when you get output from the subshell.  To do
     that, evaluate this Lisp expression:

          (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions
                    'comint-strip-ctrl-m)

`M-x comint-truncate-buffer'
     This command truncates the shell buffer to a certain maximum
     number of lines, specified by the variable
     `comint-buffer-maximum-size'.  Here's how to do this automatically
     each time you get output from the subshell:

          (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions
                    'comint-truncate-buffer)

   Shell mode is a derivative of Comint mode, a general-purpose mode for
communicating with interactive subprocesses.  Most of the features of
Shell mode actually come from Comint mode, as you can see from the
command names listed above.  The special features of Shell mode include
the directory tracking feature, and a few user commands.

   Other Emacs features that use variants of Comint mode include GUD
(*note Debuggers::) and `M-x run-lisp' (*note External Lisp::).

   You can use `M-x comint-run' to execute any program of your choice
in a subprocess using unmodified Comint mode--without the
specializations of Shell mode.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) You should not suspend the shell process.  Suspending a subjob
of the shell is a completely different matter--that is normal practice,
but you must use the shell to continue the subjob; this command won't
do it.


File: emacs,  Node: Shell Prompts,  Next: Shell History,  Prev: Shell Mode,  Up: Shell

41.4 Shell Prompts
==================

A prompt is text output by a program to show that it is ready to accept
new user input.  Normally, Comint mode (and thus Shell mode) considers
the prompt to be any text output by a program at the beginning of an
input line.  However, if the variable `comint-use-prompt-regexp' is
non-`nil', then Comint mode uses a regular expression to recognize
prompts.  In Shell mode, `shell-prompt-pattern' specifies the regular
expression.

   The value of `comint-use-prompt-regexp' also affects many motion and
paragraph commands.  If the value is non-`nil', the general Emacs
motion commands behave as they normally do in buffers without special
text properties.  However, if the value is `nil', the default, then
Comint mode divides the buffer into two types of "fields" (ranges of
consecutive characters having the same `field' text property): input
and output.  Prompts are part of the output.  Most Emacs motion
commands do not cross field boundaries, unless they move over multiple
lines.  For instance, when point is in input on the same line as a
prompt, `C-a' puts point at the beginning of the input if
`comint-use-prompt-regexp' is `nil' and at the beginning of the line
otherwise.

   In Shell mode, only shell prompts start new paragraphs.  Thus, a
paragraph consists of a prompt and the input and output that follow it.
However, if `comint-use-prompt-regexp' is `nil', the default, most
paragraph commands do not cross field boundaries.  This means that
prompts, ranges of input, and ranges of non-prompt output behave mostly
like separate paragraphs; with this setting, numeric arguments to most
paragraph commands yield essentially undefined behavior.  For the
purpose of finding paragraph boundaries, Shell mode uses
`shell-prompt-pattern', regardless of `comint-use-prompt-regexp'.


File: emacs,  Node: Shell History,  Next: Directory Tracking,  Prev: Shell Prompts,  Up: Shell

41.5 Shell Command History
==========================

Shell buffers support three ways of repeating earlier commands.  You
can use keys like those used for the minibuffer history; these work
much as they do in the minibuffer, inserting text from prior commands
while point remains always at the end of the buffer.  You can move
through the buffer to previous inputs in their original place, then
resubmit them or copy them to the end.  Or you can use a `!'-style
history reference.

* Menu:

* Ring: Shell Ring.             Fetching commands from the history list.
* Copy: Shell History Copying.  Moving to a command and then copying it.
* History References::          Expanding `!'-style history references.


File: emacs,  Node: Shell Ring,  Next: Shell History Copying,  Up: Shell History

41.5.1 Shell History Ring
-------------------------

`M-p'
`C-<UP>'
     Fetch the next earlier old shell command.

`M-n'
`C-<DOWN>'
     Fetch the next later old shell command.

`M-r'
     Begin an incremental regexp search of old shell commands.

`C-c C-x'
     Fetch the next subsequent command from the history.

`C-c .'
     Fetch one argument from an old shell command.

`C-c C-l'
     Display the buffer's history of shell commands in another window
     (`comint-dynamic-list-input-ring').

   Shell buffers provide a history of previously entered shell
commands.  To reuse shell commands from the history, use the editing
commands `M-p', `M-n', `M-r' and `M-s'.  These work just like the
minibuffer history commands except that they operate on the text at the
end of the shell buffer, where you would normally insert text to send
to the shell.

   `M-p' fetches an earlier shell command to the end of the shell
buffer.  Successive use of `M-p' fetches successively earlier shell
commands, each replacing any text that was already present as potential
shell input.  `M-n' does likewise except that it finds successively
more recent shell commands from the buffer.  `C-<UP>' works like `M-p',
and `C-<DOWN>' like `M-n'.

   The history search command `M-r' begins an incremental regular
expression search of previous shell commands.  After typing `M-r',
start typing the desired string or regular expression; the last
matching shell command will be displayed in the current line.
Incremental search commands have their usual effects--for instance,
`C-s' and `C-r' search forward and backward for the next match (*note
Incremental Search::).  When you find the desired input, type <RET> to
terminate the search.  This puts the input in the command line.  Any
partial input you were composing before navigating the history list is
restored when you go to the beginning or end of the history ring.

   Often it is useful to reexecute several successive shell commands
that were previously executed in sequence.  To do this, first find and
reexecute the first command of the sequence.  Then type `C-c C-x'; that
will fetch the following command--the one that follows the command you
just repeated.  Then type <RET> to reexecute this command.  You can
reexecute several successive commands by typing `C-c C-x <RET>' over
and over.

   The command `C-c .' (`comint-input-previous-argument') copies an
individual argument from a previous command, like `ESC .' in Bash.  The
simplest use copies the last argument from the previous shell command.
With a prefix argument N, it copies the Nth argument instead.
Repeating `C-c .' copies from an earlier shell command instead, always
using the same value of N (don't give a prefix argument when you repeat
the `C-c .' command).

   These commands get the text of previous shell commands from a special
history list, not from the shell buffer itself.  Thus, editing the shell
buffer, or even killing large parts of it, does not affect the history
that these commands access.

   Some shells store their command histories in files so that you can
refer to commands from previous shell sessions.  Emacs reads the
command history file for your chosen shell, to initialize its own
command history.  The file name is `~/.bash_history' for bash,
`~/.sh_history' for ksh, and `~/.history' for other shells.


File: emacs,  Node: Shell History Copying,  Next: History References,  Prev: Shell Ring,  Up: Shell History

41.5.2 Shell History Copying
----------------------------

`C-c C-p'
     Move point to the previous prompt (`comint-previous-prompt').

`C-c C-n'
     Move point to the following prompt (`comint-next-prompt').

`C-c <RET>'
     Copy the input command at point, inserting the copy at the end of
     the buffer (`comint-copy-old-input').  This is useful if you move
     point back to a previous command.  After you copy the command, you
     can submit the copy as input with <RET>.  If you wish, you can edit
     the copy before resubmitting it.  If you use this command on an
     output line, it copies that line to the end of the buffer.

`Mouse-2'
     If `comint-use-prompt-regexp' is `nil' (the default), copy the old
     input command that you click on, inserting the copy at the end of
     the buffer (`comint-insert-input').  If `comint-use-prompt-regexp'
     is non-`nil', or if the click is not over old input, just yank as
     usual.

   Moving to a previous input and then copying it with `C-c <RET>' or
`Mouse-2' produces the same results--the same buffer contents--that you
would get by using `M-p' enough times to fetch that previous input from
the history list.  However, `C-c <RET>' copies the text from the
buffer, which can be different from what is in the history list if you
edit the input text in the buffer after it has been sent.


File: emacs,  Node: History References,  Prev: Shell History Copying,  Up: Shell History

41.5.3 Shell History References
-------------------------------

Various shells including csh and bash support "history references" that
begin with `!' and `^'.  Shell mode recognizes these constructs, and
can perform the history substitution for you.

   If you insert a history reference and type <TAB>, this searches the
input history for a matching command, performs substitution if
necessary, and places the result in the buffer in place of the history
reference.  For example, you can fetch the most recent command
beginning with `mv' with `! m v <TAB>'.  You can edit the command if
you wish, and then resubmit the command to the shell by typing <RET>.

   Shell mode can optionally expand history references in the buffer
when you send them to the shell.  To request this, set the variable
`comint-input-autoexpand' to `input'.  You can make <SPC> perform
history expansion by binding <SPC> to the command `comint-magic-space'.

   Shell mode recognizes history references when they follow a prompt.
*Note Shell Prompts::, for how Shell mode recognizes prompts.


File: emacs,  Node: Directory Tracking,  Next: Shell Options,  Prev: Shell History,  Up: Shell

41.6 Directory Tracking
=======================

Shell mode keeps track of `cd', `pushd' and `popd' commands given to
the inferior shell, so it can keep the `*shell*' buffer's default
directory the same as the shell's working directory.  It recognizes
these commands syntactically, by examining lines of input that are sent.

   If you use aliases for these commands, you can tell Emacs to
recognize them also.  For example, if the value of the variable
`shell-pushd-regexp' matches the beginning of a shell command line,
that line is regarded as a `pushd' command.  Change this variable when
you add aliases for `pushd'.  Likewise, `shell-popd-regexp' and
`shell-cd-regexp' are used to recognize commands with the meaning of
`popd' and `cd'.  These commands are recognized only at the beginning
of a shell command line.

   If Emacs gets confused about changes in the current directory of the
subshell, use the command `M-x dirs' to ask the shell what its current
directory is.  This command works for shells that support the most
common command syntax; it may not work for unusual shells.

   You can also use `M-x dirtrack-mode' to enable (or disable) an
alternative method of tracking changes in the current directory.  This
method relies on your shell prompt containing the full current working
directory at all times.


File: emacs,  Node: Shell Options,  Next: Terminal emulator,  Prev: Directory Tracking,  Up: Shell

41.7 Shell Mode Options
=======================

If the variable `comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-input' is non-`nil',
insertion and yank commands scroll the selected window to the bottom
before inserting.  The default is `nil'.

   If `comint-scroll-show-maximum-output' is non-`nil', then arrival of
output when point is at the end tries to scroll the last line of text
to the bottom line of the window, showing as much useful text as
possible.  (This mimics the scrolling behavior of most terminals.)  The
default is `t'.

   By setting `comint-move-point-for-output', you can opt for having
point jump to the end of the buffer whenever output arrives--no matter
where in the buffer point was before.  If the value is `this', point
jumps in the selected window.  If the value is `all', point jumps in
each window that shows the Comint buffer.  If the value is `other',
point jumps in all nonselected windows that show the current buffer.
The default value is `nil', which means point does not jump to the end.

   If you set `comint-prompt-read-only', the prompts in the Comint
buffer are read-only.

   The variable `comint-input-ignoredups' controls whether successive
identical inputs are stored in the input history.  A non-`nil' value
means to omit an input that is the same as the previous input.  The
default is `nil', which means to store each input even if it is equal
to the previous input.

   Three variables customize file name completion.  The variable
`comint-completion-addsuffix' controls whether completion inserts a
space or a slash to indicate a fully completed file or directory name
(non-`nil' means do insert a space or slash).
`comint-completion-recexact', if non-`nil', directs <TAB> to choose the
shortest possible completion if the usual Emacs completion algorithm
cannot add even a single character.  `comint-completion-autolist', if
non-`nil', says to list all the possible completions whenever
completion is not exact.

   Command completion normally considers only executable files.  If you
set `shell-completion-execonly' to `nil', it considers nonexecutable
files as well.

   You can configure the behavior of `pushd'.  Variables control
whether `pushd' behaves like `cd' if no argument is given
(`shell-pushd-tohome'), pop rather than rotate with a numeric argument
(`shell-pushd-dextract'), and only add directories to the directory
stack if they are not already on it (`shell-pushd-dunique').  The
values you choose should match the underlying shell, of course.


File: emacs,  Node: Terminal emulator,  Next: Term Mode,  Prev: Shell Options,  Up: Shell

41.8 Emacs Terminal Emulator
============================

To run a subshell in a terminal emulator, use `M-x term'.  This creates
(or reuses) a buffer named `*terminal*', and runs a subshell with input
coming from your keyboard, and output going to that buffer.

   The terminal emulator uses Term mode, which has two input modes.  In
line mode, Term basically acts like Shell mode; see *Note Shell Mode::.

   In char mode, each character is sent directly to the inferior
subshell, as "terminal input."  Any "echoing" of your input is the
responsibility of the subshell.  The sole exception is the terminal
escape character, which by default is `C-c' (*note Term Mode::).  Any
"terminal output" from the subshell goes into the buffer, advancing
point.

   Some programs (such as Emacs itself) need to control the appearance
on the terminal screen in detail.  They do this by sending special
control codes.  The exact control codes needed vary from terminal to
terminal, but nowadays most terminals and terminal emulators (including
`xterm') understand the ANSI-standard (VT100-style) escape sequences.
Term mode recognizes these escape sequences, and handles each one
appropriately, changing the buffer so that the appearance of the window
matches what it would be on a real terminal.  You can actually run
Emacs inside an Emacs Term window.

   You can use Term mode to communicate with a device connected to a
serial port of your computer.  *Note Serial Terminal::.

   The file name used to load the subshell is determined the same way
as for Shell mode.  To make multiple terminal emulators, rename the
buffer `*terminal*' to something different using `M-x rename-uniquely',
just as with Shell mode.

   Unlike Shell mode, Term mode does not track the current directory by
examining your input.  But some shells can tell Term what the current
directory is.  This is done automatically by `bash' version 1.15 and
later.


File: emacs,  Node: Term Mode,  Next: Paging in Term,  Prev: Terminal emulator,  Up: Shell

41.9 Term Mode
==============

The terminal emulator uses Term mode, which has two input modes.  In
line mode, Term basically acts like Shell mode; see *Note Shell Mode::.
In char mode, each character is sent directly to the inferior subshell,
except for the Term escape character, normally `C-c'.

   To switch between line and char mode, use these commands:

`C-c C-j'
     Switch to line mode.  Do nothing if already in line mode.

`C-c C-k'
     Switch to char mode.  Do nothing if already in char mode.

   The following commands are only available in char mode:

`C-c C-c'
     Send a literal <C-c> to the sub-shell.

`C-c CHAR'
     This is equivalent to `C-x CHAR' in normal Emacs.  For example,
     `C-c o' invokes the global binding of `C-x o', which is normally
     `other-window'.


File: emacs,  Node: Paging in Term,  Next: Remote Host,  Prev: Term Mode,  Up: Shell

41.10 Page-At-A-Time Output
===========================

Term mode has a page-at-a-time feature.  When enabled it makes output
pause at the end of each screenful.

`C-c C-q'
     Toggle the page-at-a-time feature.  This command works in both line
     and char modes.  When page-at-a-time is enabled, the mode-line
     displays the word `page'.

   With page-at-a-time enabled, whenever Term receives more than a
screenful of output since your last input, it pauses, displaying
`**MORE**' in the mode-line.  Type <SPC> to display the next screenful
of output.  Type `?' to see your other options.  The interface is
similar to the `more' program.


File: emacs,  Node: Remote Host,  Next: Serial Terminal,  Prev: Paging in Term,  Up: Shell

41.11 Remote Host Shell
=======================

You can login to a remote computer, using whatever commands you would
from a regular terminal (e.g. using the `telnet' or `rlogin' commands),
from a Term window.

   A program that asks you for a password will normally suppress
echoing of the password, so the password will not show up in the
buffer.  This will happen just as if you were using a real terminal, if
the buffer is in char mode.  If it is in line mode, the password is
temporarily visible, but will be erased when you hit return.  (This
happens automatically; there is no special password processing.)

   When you log in to a different machine, you need to specify the type
of terminal you're using, by setting the `TERM' environment variable in
the environment for the remote login command.  (If you use bash, you do
that by writing the variable assignment before the remote login
command, without separating comma.)  Terminal types `ansi' or `vt100'
will work on most systems.


File: emacs,  Node: Serial Terminal,  Prev: Remote Host,  Up: Shell

41.12 Serial Terminal
=====================

If you have a device connected to a serial port of your computer, you
can use Emacs to communicate with it.  `M-x serial-term' will ask you
for a serial port name and speed and will then open a new window in
*Note Term Mode::.

   The speed of the serial port is measured in bits per second.  The
most common speed is 9600 bits per second.  You can change the speed
interactively by clicking on the mode line.

   A serial port can be configured even more by clicking on "8N1" in
the mode line.  By default, a serial port is configured as "8N1", which
means that each byte consists of 8 data bits, No parity check bit, and
1 stopbit.

   When you have opened the serial port connection, you will see output
from the device in the window.  Also, what you type in the window is
sent to the device.

   If the speed or the configuration is wrong, you cannot communicate
with your device and will probably only see garbage output in the
window.


File: emacs,  Node: Emacs Server,  Next: Printing,  Prev: Shell,  Up: Top

42 Using Emacs as a Server
**************************

Various programs such as `mail' can invoke your choice of editor to
edit a particular piece of text, such as a message that you are
sending.  By convention, most of these programs use the environment
variable `EDITOR' to specify which editor to run.  If you set `EDITOR'
to `emacs', they invoke Emacs--but in an inconvenient way, by starting
a new Emacs process.  This is inconvenient because the new Emacs
process doesn't share buffers, a command history, or other kinds of
information with any existing Emacs process.

   You can solve this problem by setting up Emacs as an "edit server",
so that it "listens" for external edit requests and acts accordingly.
There are two ways to start an Emacs server:

   The first is to run the command `server-start' in an existing Emacs
process: either type `M-x server-start', or put the expression
`(server-start)' in your initialization file (*note Init File::).  The
existing Emacs process is the server; when you exit Emacs, the server
dies with the Emacs process.

   The second way to start an Emacs server is to run Emacs as a
"daemon", using the `--daemon' command-line option.  *Note Initial
Options::.  When Emacs is started this way, it calls `server-start'
after initialization, and returns control to the calling terminal
instead of opening an initial frame; it then waits in the background,
listening for edit requests.

   Once an Emacs server is set up, you can use a shell command called
`emacsclient' to connect to the existing Emacs process and tell it to
visit a file.  If you set the `EDITOR' environment variable to
`emacsclient', programs such as `mail' will use the existing Emacs
process for editing.(1)

   You can run multiple Emacs servers on the same machine by giving
each one a unique "server name", using the variable `server-name'.  For
example, `M-x set-variable <RET> server-name <RET> foo <RET>' sets the
server name to `foo'.  The `emacsclient' program can specify a server by
name, using the `-s' option (*note emacsclient Options::).

* Menu:

* Invoking emacsclient:: Connecting to the Emacs server.
* emacsclient Options::  Emacs client startup options.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Some programs use a different environment variable; for example,
to make TeX use `emacsclient', set the `TEXEDIT' environment variable to
`emacsclient +%d %s'.


File: emacs,  Node: Invoking emacsclient,  Next: emacsclient Options,  Up: Emacs Server

42.1 Invoking `emacsclient'
===========================

The simplest way to use the `emacsclient' program is to run the shell
command `emacsclient FILE', where FILE is a file name.  This connects
to an Emacs server, and tells that Emacs process to visit FILE in one
of its existing frames--either a graphical frame, or one in a text-only
terminal (*note Frames::).  You can then select that frame to begin
editing.

   If there is no Emacs server, the `emacsclient' program halts with an
error message.  If the Emacs process has no existing frame--which can
happen if it was started as a daemon (*note Emacs Server::)--then Emacs
opens a frame on the terminal in which you called `emacsclient'.

   You can also force `emacsclient' to open a new frame on a graphical
display, or on a text-only terminal, using the `-c' and `-t' options.
*Note emacsclient Options::.

   If you are running on a single text-only terminal, you can switch
between `emacsclient''s shell and the Emacs server using one of two
methods: (i) run the Emacs server and `emacsclient' on different
virtual terminals, and switch to the Emacs server's virtual terminal
after calling `emacsclient'; or (ii) call `emacsclient' from within the
Emacs server itself, using Shell mode (*note Interactive Shell::) or
Term mode (*note Term Mode::); `emacsclient' blocks only the subshell
under Emacs, and you can still use Emacs to edit the file.

   When you finish editing FILE in the Emacs server, type `C-x #'
(`server-edit') in its buffer.  This saves the file and sends a message
back to the `emacsclient' program, telling it to exit.  Programs that
use `EDITOR' usually wait for the "editor"--in this case
`emacsclient'--to exit before doing something else.

   You can also call `emacsclient' with multiple file name arguments:
`emacsclient FILE1 FILE2 ...' tells the Emacs server to visit FILE1,
FILE2, and so forth.  Emacs selects the buffer visiting FILE1, and
buries the other buffers at the bottom of the buffer list (*note
Buffers::).  The `emacsclient' program exits once all the specified
files are finished (i.e., once you have typed `C-x #' in each server
buffer).

   Finishing with a server buffer also kills the buffer, unless it
already existed in the Emacs session before the server was asked to
create it.  However, if you set `server-kill-new-buffers' to `nil',
then a different criterion is used: finishing with a server buffer
kills it if the file name matches the regular expression
`server-temp-file-regexp'.  This is set up to distinguish certain
"temporary" files.

   Each `C-x #' checks for other pending external requests to edit
various files, and selects the next such file.  You can switch to a
server buffer manually if you wish; you don't have to arrive at it with
`C-x #'.  But `C-x #' is the way to tell `emacsclient' that you are
finished.

   If you set the value of the variable `server-window' to a window or
a frame, `C-x #' always displays the next server buffer in that window
or in that frame.


File: emacs,  Node: emacsclient Options,  Prev: Invoking emacsclient,  Up: Emacs Server

42.2 `emacsclient' Options
==========================

You can pass some optional arguments to the `emacsclient' program, such
as:

     emacsclient -c +12 FILE1 +4:3 FILE2

The `+LINE' or `+LINE:COLUMN' arguments specify line numbers, or line
and column numbers, for the next file argument.  These behave like the
command line arguments for Emacs itself.  *Note Action Arguments::.

   The other optional arguments recognized by `emacsclient' are listed
below:

`-a COMMAND'
`--alternate-editor=COMMAND'
     Specify a command to run if `emacsclient' fails to contact Emacs.
     This is useful when running `emacsclient' in a script.  For
     example, the following setting for the `EDITOR' environment
     variable will always give you an editor, even if no Emacs server is
     running:

          EDITOR="emacsclient --alternate-editor emacs +%d %s"

     As a special exception, if COMMAND is the empty string, then
     `emacsclient' starts Emacs in daemon mode and then tries
     connecting again.

     The environment variable `ALTERNATE_EDITOR' has the same effect as
     the `-a' option.  If both are present, the latter takes precedence.

`-c'
     Create a new graphical frame, instead of using an existing Emacs
     frame.  Emacs 23 can create a graphical frame even if it was
     started in a text-only terminal, provided it is able to connect to
     a graphical display.  If no graphical display is available, Emacs
     creates a new text-only terminal frame (*note Frames::).  If you
     omit a filename argument while supplying the `-c' option, the new
     frame displays the `*scratch*' buffer (*note Buffers::).

`-d DISPLAY'
`--display=DISPLAY'
     Tell Emacs to open the given files on the X display DISPLAY
     (assuming there is more than one X display available).

`-e'
`--eval'
     Tell Emacs to evaluate some Emacs Lisp code, instead of visiting
     some files.  When this option is given, the arguments to
     `emacsclient' are interpreted as a list of expressions to
     evaluate, _not_ as a list of files to visit.

`-f SERVER-FILE'
`--server-file=SERVER-FILE'
     Specify a "server file" for connecting to an Emacs server via TCP.

     An Emacs server usually uses an operating system feature called a
     "local socket" to listen for connections.  Some operating systems,
     such as Microsoft Windows, do not support local sockets; in that
     case, Emacs uses TCP instead.  When you start the Emacs server,
     Emacs creates a server file containing some TCP information that
     `emacsclient' needs for making the connection.  By default, the
     server file is in `~/.emacs.d/server/'.  On Microsoft Windows, if
     `emacsclient' does not find the server file there, it looks in the
     `.emacs.d/server/' subdirectory of the directory pointed to by the
     `APPDATA' environment variable.  You can tell `emacsclient' to use
     a specific server file with the `-f' or `--server-file' option, or
     by setting the `EMACS_SERVER_FILE' environment variable.

     Even if local sockets are available, you can tell Emacs to use TCP
     by setting the variable `server-use-tcp' to `t'.  One advantage of
     TCP is that the server can accept connections from remote machines.
     For this to work, you must (i) set the variable `server-host' to
     the hostname or IP address of the machine on which the Emacs server
     runs, and (ii) provide `emacsclient' with the server file.  (One
     convenient way to do the latter is to put the server file on a
     networked file system such as NFS.)

`-n'
`--no-wait'
     Let `emacsclient' exit immediately, instead of waiting until all
     server buffers are finished.  You can take as long as you like to
     edit the server buffers within Emacs, and they are _not_ killed
     when you type `C-x #' in them.

`-s SERVER-NAME'
`--socket-name=SERVER-NAME'
     Connect to the Emacs server named SERVER-NAME.  The server name is
     given by the variable `server-name' on the Emacs server.  If this
     option is omitted, `emacsclient' connects to the first server it
     finds.  (This option is not supported on MS-Windows.)

`-t'
`--tty'
`-nw'
     Create a new Emacs frame on the current text-only terminal,
     instead of using an existing Emacs frame.  Emacs 23 can open a
     text-only terminal even if it was started in another text-only
     terminal, or on a graphical display.  If you omit a filename
     argument while supplying this option, the new frame displays the
     `*scratch*' buffer.  *Note Buffers::.

   If you type `C-x C-c' (`save-buffers-kill-terminal') in an Emacs
frame created with `emacsclient', via the `-c' or `-t' options, Emacs
deletes the frame instead of killing the Emacs process itself.  On a
text-only terminal frame created with the `-t' option, this returns
control to the terminal.  Emacs also marks all the server buffers for
the client as finished, as though you had typed `C-x #' in all of them.

   When Emacs is started as a daemon, all frames are considered client
frames, so `C-x C-c' will never kill Emacs.  To kill the Emacs process,
type `M-x kill-emacs'.


File: emacs,  Node: Printing,  Next: Sorting,  Prev: Emacs Server,  Up: Top

43 Printing Hard Copies
***********************

Emacs provides commands for printing hard copies of either an entire
buffer or just part of one, with or without page headers.  You can
invoke the printing commands directly, as detailed in the following
section, or using the `File' menu on the menu bar.

   Aside from the commands described in this section, you can also
"print" an Emacs buffer to HTML with `M-x htmlfontify-buffer'.  This
command converts the current buffer to a HTML file, replacing Emacs
faces with CSS-based markup.  In addition, see the hardcopy commands of
Dired (*note Misc File Ops::) and the diary (*note Displaying the
Diary::).

`M-x print-buffer'
     Print hardcopy of current buffer with page headings containing the
     file name and page number.

`M-x lpr-buffer'
     Print hardcopy of current buffer without page headings.

`M-x print-region'
     Like `print-buffer' but print only the current region.

`M-x lpr-region'
     Like `lpr-buffer' but print only the current region.

   The hardcopy commands (aside from the PostScript commands) pass extra
switches to the `lpr' program based on the value of the variable
`lpr-switches'.  Its value should be a list of strings, each string an
option starting with `-'.  For example, to specify a line width of 80
columns for all the printing you do in Emacs, set `lpr-switches' like
this:

     (setq lpr-switches '("-w80"))

   You can specify the printer to use by setting the variable
`printer-name'.

   The variable `lpr-command' specifies the name of the printer program
to run; the default value depends on your operating system type.  On
most systems, the default is `"lpr"'.  The variable
`lpr-headers-switches' similarly specifies the extra switches to use to
make page headers.  The variable `lpr-add-switches' controls whether to
supply `-T' and `-J' options (suitable for `lpr') to the printer
program: `nil' means don't add them.  `lpr-add-switches' should be
`nil' if your printer program is not compatible with `lpr'.

* Menu:

* PostScript::	         Printing buffers or regions as PostScript.
* PostScript Variables:: Customizing the PostScript printing commands.
* Printing Package::     An optional advanced printing interface.


File: emacs,  Node: PostScript,  Next: PostScript Variables,  Up: Printing

44 PostScript Hardcopy
**********************

These commands convert buffer contents to PostScript, either printing
it or leaving it in another Emacs buffer.

`M-x ps-print-buffer'
     Print hardcopy of the current buffer in PostScript form.

`M-x ps-print-region'
     Print hardcopy of the current region in PostScript form.

`M-x ps-print-buffer-with-faces'
     Print hardcopy of the current buffer in PostScript form, showing
     the faces used in the text by means of PostScript features.

`M-x ps-print-region-with-faces'
     Print hardcopy of the current region in PostScript form, showing
     the faces used in the text.

`M-x ps-spool-buffer'
     Generate and spool a PostScript image for the current buffer text.

`M-x ps-spool-region'
     Generate and spool a PostScript image for the current region.

`M-x ps-spool-buffer-with-faces'
     Generate and spool a PostScript image for the current buffer,
     showing the faces used.

`M-x ps-spool-region-with-faces'
     Generate and spool a PostScript image for the current region,
     showing the faces used.

`M-x ps-despool'
     Send the spooled PostScript to the printer.

`M-x handwrite'
     Generate/print PostScript for the current buffer as if handwritten.

   The PostScript commands, `ps-print-buffer' and `ps-print-region',
print buffer contents in PostScript form.  One command prints the
entire buffer; the other, just the region.  The corresponding
`-with-faces' commands, `ps-print-buffer-with-faces' and
`ps-print-region-with-faces', use PostScript features to show the faces
(fonts and colors) in the text properties of the text being printed.
The `-with-faces' commands only work if they are used in a window
system, so it has a way to determine color values.

   Interactively, when you use a prefix argument (`C-u'), the command
prompts the user for a file name, and saves the PostScript image in
that file instead of sending it to the printer.

   Noninteractively, the argument FILENAME is treated as follows: if it
is `nil', send the image to the printer.  If FILENAME is a string, save
the PostScript image in a file with that name.

   If you are using a color display, you can print a buffer of program
code with color highlighting by turning on Font-Lock mode in that
buffer, and using `ps-print-buffer-with-faces'.

   The commands whose names have `spool' instead of `print', generate
the PostScript output in an Emacs buffer instead of sending it to the
printer.

   Use the command `ps-despool' to send the spooled images to the
printer.

   This command sends the PostScript generated by  `-spool-' commands
(see commands above) to the printer.

   Interactively, when you use a prefix argument (`C-u'), the command
prompts the user for a file name, and saves the spooled PostScript
image in that file instead of sending it to the printer.

   Noninteractively, the argument FILENAME is treated as follows: if it
is `nil', send the image to the printer.  If FILENAME is a string, save
the PostScript image in a file with that name.

   `M-x handwrite' is more frivolous.  It generates a PostScript
rendition of the current buffer as a cursive handwritten document.  It
can be customized in group `handwrite'.  This function only supports
ISO 8859-1 characters.

   The following section describes variables for customizing these
commands.


File: emacs,  Node: PostScript Variables,  Next: Printing Package,  Prev: PostScript,  Up: Printing

45 Variables for PostScript Hardcopy
************************************

All the PostScript hardcopy commands use the variables `ps-lpr-command'
and `ps-lpr-switches' to specify how to print the output.
`ps-lpr-command' specifies the command name to run, `ps-lpr-switches'
specifies command line options to use, and `ps-printer-name' specifies
the printer.  If you don't set the first two variables yourself, they
take their initial values from `lpr-command' and `lpr-switches'.  If
`ps-printer-name' is `nil', `printer-name' is used.

   The variable `ps-print-header' controls whether these commands add
header lines to each page--set it to `nil' to turn headers off.

   If your printer doesn't support colors, you should turn off color
processing by setting `ps-print-color-p' to `nil'.  By default, if the
display supports colors, Emacs produces hardcopy output with color
information; on black-and-white printers, colors are emulated with
shades of gray.  This might produce illegible output, even if your
screen colors only use shades of gray.

   Alternatively, you can set `ps-print-color-p' to `black-white' to
print colors on black/white printers.

   By default, PostScript printing ignores the background colors of the
faces, unless the variable `ps-use-face-background' is non-`nil'.  This
is to avoid unwanted interference with the zebra stripes and background
image/text.

   The variable `ps-paper-type' specifies which size of paper to format
for; legitimate values include `a4', `a3', `a4small', `b4', `b5',
`executive', `ledger', `legal', `letter', `letter-small', `statement',
`tabloid'.  The default is `letter'.  You can define additional paper
sizes by changing the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.

   The variable `ps-landscape-mode' specifies the orientation of
printing on the page.  The default is `nil', which stands for
"portrait" mode.  Any non-`nil' value specifies "landscape" mode.

   The variable `ps-number-of-columns' specifies the number of columns;
it takes effect in both landscape and portrait mode.  The default is 1.

   The variable `ps-font-family' specifies which font family to use for
printing ordinary text.  Legitimate values include `Courier',
`Helvetica', `NewCenturySchlbk', `Palatino' and `Times'.  The variable
`ps-font-size' specifies the size of the font for ordinary text.  It
defaults to 8.5 points.

   Emacs supports more scripts and characters than a typical PostScript
printer.  Thus, some of the characters in your buffer might not be
printable using the fonts built into your printer.  You can augment the
fonts supplied with the printer with those from the GNU Intlfonts
package, or you can instruct Emacs to use Intlfonts exclusively.  The
variable `ps-multibyte-buffer' controls this: the default value, `nil',
is appropriate for printing ASCII and Latin-1 characters; a value of
`non-latin-printer' is for printers which have the fonts for ASCII,
Latin-1, Japanese, and Korean characters built into them.  A value of
`bdf-font' arranges for the BDF fonts from the Intlfonts package to be
used for _all_ characters.  Finally, a value of `bdf-font-except-latin'
instructs the printer to use built-in fonts for ASCII and Latin-1
characters, and Intlfonts BDF fonts for the rest.

   To be able to use the BDF fonts, Emacs needs to know where to find
them.  The variable `bdf-directory-list' holds the list of directories
where Emacs should look for the fonts; the default value includes a
single directory `/usr/local/share/emacs/fonts/bdf'.

   Many other customization variables for these commands are defined and
described in the Lisp files `ps-print.el' and `ps-mule.el'.


File: emacs,  Node: Printing Package,  Prev: PostScript Variables,  Up: Printing

46 Printing Package
*******************

The basic Emacs facilities for printing hardcopy can be extended using
the Printing package.  This provides an easy-to-use interface for
choosing what to print, previewing PostScript files before printing,
and setting various printing options such as print headers, landscape
or portrait modes, duplex modes, and so forth.  On GNU/Linux or Unix
systems, the Printing package relies on the `gs' and `gv' utilities,
which are distributed as part of the GhostScript program.  On
MS-Windows, the `gstools' port of Ghostscript can be used.

   To use the Printing package, add `(require 'printing)' to your init
file (*note Init File::), followed by `(pr-update-menus)'.  This
function replaces the usual printing commands in the menu bar with a
`Printing' submenu that contains various printing options.  You can
also type `M-x pr-interface RET'; this creates a `*Printing Interface*'
buffer, similar to a customization buffer, where you can set the
printing options.  After selecting what and how to print, you start the
print job using the `Print' button (click `mouse-2' on it, or move
point over it and type `RET').  For further information on the various
options, use the `Interface Help' button.


File: emacs,  Node: Sorting,  Next: Narrowing,  Prev: Printing,  Up: Top

47 Sorting Text
***************

Emacs provides several commands for sorting text in the buffer.  All
operate on the contents of the region.  They divide the text of the
region into many "sort records", identify a "sort key" for each record,
and then reorder the records into the order determined by the sort
keys.  The records are ordered so that their keys are in alphabetical
order, or, for numeric sorting, in numeric order.  In alphabetic
sorting, all upper-case letters `A' through `Z' come before lower-case
`a', in accord with the ASCII character sequence.

   The various sort commands differ in how they divide the text into
sort records and in which part of each record is used as the sort key.
Most of the commands make each line a separate sort record, but some
commands use paragraphs or pages as sort records.  Most of the sort
commands use each entire sort record as its own sort key, but some use
only a portion of the record as the sort key.

`M-x sort-lines'
     Divide the region into lines, and sort by comparing the entire
     text of a line.  A numeric argument means sort into descending
     order.

`M-x sort-paragraphs'
     Divide the region into paragraphs, and sort by comparing the entire
     text of a paragraph (except for leading blank lines).  A numeric
     argument means sort into descending order.

`M-x sort-pages'
     Divide the region into pages, and sort by comparing the entire
     text of a page (except for leading blank lines).  A numeric
     argument means sort into descending order.

`M-x sort-fields'
     Divide the region into lines, and sort by comparing the contents of
     one field in each line.  Fields are defined as separated by
     whitespace, so the first run of consecutive non-whitespace
     characters in a line constitutes field 1, the second such run
     constitutes field 2, etc.

     Specify which field to sort by with a numeric argument: 1 to sort
     by field 1, etc.  A negative argument means count fields from the
     right instead of from the left; thus, minus 1 means sort by the
     last field.  If several lines have identical contents in the field
     being sorted, they keep the same relative order that they had in
     the original buffer.

`M-x sort-numeric-fields'
     Like `M-x sort-fields' except the specified field is converted to
     an integer for each line, and the numbers are compared.  `10'
     comes before `2' when considered as text, but after it when
     considered as a number.  By default, numbers are interpreted
     according to `sort-numeric-base', but numbers beginning with `0x'
     or `0' are interpreted as hexadecimal and octal, respectively.

`M-x sort-columns'
     Like `M-x sort-fields' except that the text within each line used
     for comparison comes from a fixed range of columns.  See below for
     an explanation.

`M-x reverse-region'
     Reverse the order of the lines in the region.  This is useful for
     sorting into descending order by fields or columns, since those
     sort commands do not have a feature for doing that.

   For example, if the buffer contains this:

     On systems where clash detection (locking of files being edited) is
     implemented, Emacs also checks the first time you modify a buffer
     whether the file has changed on disk since it was last visited or
     saved.  If it has, you are asked to confirm that you want to change
     the buffer.

applying `M-x sort-lines' to the entire buffer produces this:

     On systems where clash detection (locking of files being edited) is
     implemented, Emacs also checks the first time you modify a buffer
     saved.  If it has, you are asked to confirm that you want to change
     the buffer.
     whether the file has changed on disk since it was last visited or

where the upper-case `O' sorts before all lower-case letters.  If you
use `C-u 2 M-x sort-fields' instead, you get this:

     implemented, Emacs also checks the first time you modify a buffer
     saved.  If it has, you are asked to confirm that you want to change
     the buffer.
     On systems where clash detection (locking of files being edited) is
     whether the file has changed on disk since it was last visited or

where the sort keys were `Emacs', `If', `buffer', `systems' and `the'.

   `M-x sort-columns' requires more explanation.  You specify the
columns by putting point at one of the columns and the mark at the other
column.  Because this means you cannot put point or the mark at the
beginning of the first line of the text you want to sort, this command
uses an unusual definition of "region": all of the line point is in is
considered part of the region, and so is all of the line the mark is in,
as well as all the lines in between.

   For example, to sort a table by information found in columns 10 to
15, you could put the mark on column 10 in the first line of the table,
and point on column 15 in the last line of the table, and then run
`sort-columns'.  Equivalently, you could run it with the mark on column
15 in the first line and point on column 10 in the last line.

   This can be thought of as sorting the rectangle specified by point
and the mark, except that the text on each line to the left or right of
the rectangle moves along with the text inside the rectangle.  *Note
Rectangles::.

   Many of the sort commands ignore case differences when comparing, if
`sort-fold-case' is non-`nil'.


File: emacs,  Node: Narrowing,  Next: Two-Column,  Prev: Sorting,  Up: Top

48 Narrowing
************

"Narrowing" means focusing in on some portion of the buffer, making the
rest temporarily inaccessible.  The portion which you can still get to
is called the "accessible portion".  Canceling the narrowing, which
makes the entire buffer once again accessible, is called "widening".
The bounds of narrowing in effect in a buffer are called the buffer's
"restriction".

   Narrowing can make it easier to concentrate on a single subroutine or
paragraph by eliminating clutter.  It can also be used to limit the
range of operation of a replace command or repeating keyboard macro.

`C-x n n'
     Narrow down to between point and mark (`narrow-to-region').

`C-x n w'
     Widen to make the entire buffer accessible again (`widen').

`C-x n p'
     Narrow down to the current page (`narrow-to-page').

`C-x n d'
     Narrow down to the current defun (`narrow-to-defun').

   When you have narrowed down to a part of the buffer, that part
appears to be all there is.  You can't see the rest, you can't move
into it (motion commands won't go outside the accessible part), you
can't change it in any way.  However, it is not gone, and if you save
the file all the inaccessible text will be saved.  The word `Narrow'
appears in the mode line whenever narrowing is in effect.

   The primary narrowing command is `C-x n n' (`narrow-to-region').  It
sets the current buffer's restrictions so that the text in the current
region remains accessible, but all text before the region or after the
region is inaccessible.  Point and mark do not change.

   Alternatively, use `C-x n p' (`narrow-to-page') to narrow down to
the current page.  *Note Pages::, for the definition of a page.  `C-x n
d' (`narrow-to-defun') narrows down to the defun containing point
(*note Defuns::).

   The way to cancel narrowing is to widen with `C-x n w' (`widen').
This makes all text in the buffer accessible again.

   You can get information on what part of the buffer you are narrowed
down to using the `C-x =' command.  *Note Position Info::.

   Because narrowing can easily confuse users who do not understand it,
`narrow-to-region' is normally a disabled command.  Attempting to use
this command asks for confirmation and gives you the option of enabling
it; if you enable the command, confirmation will no longer be required
for it.  *Note Disabling::.


File: emacs,  Node: Two-Column,  Next: Editing Binary Files,  Prev: Narrowing,  Up: Top

49 Two-Column Editing
*********************

Two-column mode lets you conveniently edit two side-by-side columns of
text.  It uses two side-by-side windows, each showing its own buffer.

   There are three ways to enter two-column mode:

`<F2> 2' or `C-x 6 2'
     Enter two-column mode with the current buffer on the left, and on
     the right, a buffer whose name is based on the current buffer's
     name (`2C-two-columns').  If the right-hand buffer doesn't already
     exist, it starts out empty; the current buffer's contents are not
     changed.

     This command is appropriate when the current buffer is empty or
     contains just one column and you want to add another column.

`<F2> s' or `C-x 6 s'
     Split the current buffer, which contains two-column text, into two
     buffers, and display them side by side (`2C-split').  The current
     buffer becomes the left-hand buffer, but the text in the right-hand
     column is moved into the right-hand buffer.  The current column
     specifies the split point.  Splitting starts with the current line
     and continues to the end of the buffer.

     This command is appropriate when you have a buffer that already
     contains two-column text, and you wish to separate the columns
     temporarily.

`<F2> b BUFFER <RET>'
`C-x 6 b BUFFER <RET>'
     Enter two-column mode using the current buffer as the left-hand
     buffer, and using buffer BUFFER as the right-hand buffer
     (`2C-associate-buffer').

   `<F2> s' or `C-x 6 s' looks for a column separator, which is a
string that appears on each line between the two columns.  You can
specify the width of the separator with a numeric argument to `<F2> s';
that many characters, before point, constitute the separator string.
By default, the width is 1, so the column separator is the character
before point.

   When a line has the separator at the proper place, `<F2> s' puts the
text after the separator into the right-hand buffer, and deletes the
separator.  Lines that don't have the column separator at the proper
place remain unsplit; they stay in the left-hand buffer, and the
right-hand buffer gets an empty line to correspond.  (This is the way
to write a line that "spans both columns while in two-column mode":
write it in the left-hand buffer, and put an empty line in the
right-hand buffer.)

   The command `C-x 6 <RET>' or `<F2> <RET>' (`2C-newline') inserts a
newline in each of the two buffers at corresponding positions.  This is
the easiest way to add a new line to the two-column text while editing
it in split buffers.

   When you have edited both buffers as you wish, merge them with `<F2>
1' or `C-x 6 1' (`2C-merge').  This copies the text from the right-hand
buffer as a second column in the other buffer.  To go back to
two-column editing, use `<F2> s'.

   Use `<F2> d' or `C-x 6 d' to dissociate the two buffers, leaving
each as it stands (`2C-dissociate').  If the other buffer, the one not
current when you type `<F2> d', is empty, `<F2> d' kills it.


File: emacs,  Node: Editing Binary Files,  Next: Saving Emacs Sessions,  Prev: Two-Column,  Up: Top

50 Editing Binary Files
***********************

There is a special major mode for editing binary files: Hexl mode.  To
use it, use `M-x hexl-find-file' instead of `C-x C-f' to visit the
file.  This command converts the file's contents to hexadecimal and
lets you edit the translation.  When you save the file, it is converted
automatically back to binary.

   You can also use `M-x hexl-mode' to translate an existing buffer
into hex.  This is useful if you visit a file normally and then discover
it is a binary file.

   Ordinary text characters overwrite in Hexl mode.  This is to reduce
the risk of accidentally spoiling the alignment of data in the file.
There are special commands for insertion.  Here is a list of the
commands of Hexl mode:

`C-M-d'
     Insert a byte with a code typed in decimal.

`C-M-o'
     Insert a byte with a code typed in octal.

`C-M-x'
     Insert a byte with a code typed in hex.

`C-x ['
     Move to the beginning of a 1k-byte "page."

`C-x ]'
     Move to the end of a 1k-byte "page."

`M-g'
     Move to an address specified in hex.

`M-j'
     Move to an address specified in decimal.

`C-c C-c'
     Leave Hexl mode, going back to the major mode this buffer had
     before you invoked `hexl-mode'.

Other Hexl commands let you insert strings (sequences) of binary bytes,
move by `short's or `int's, etc.; type `C-h a hexl-<RET>' for details.


File: emacs,  Node: Saving Emacs Sessions,  Next: Recursive Edit,  Prev: Editing Binary Files,  Up: Top

51 Saving Emacs Sessions
************************

Use the desktop library to save the state of Emacs from one session to
another.  Once you save the Emacs "desktop"--the buffers, their file
names, major modes, buffer positions, and so on--then subsequent Emacs
sessions reload the saved desktop.

   You can save the desktop manually with the command `M-x
desktop-save'.  You can also enable automatic saving of the desktop
when you exit Emacs, and automatic restoration of the last saved
desktop when Emacs starts: use the Customization buffer (*note Easy
Customization::) to set `desktop-save-mode' to `t' for future sessions,
or add this line in your init file (*note Init File::):

     (desktop-save-mode 1)

   If you turn on `desktop-save-mode' in your init file, then when
Emacs starts, it looks for a saved desktop in the current directory.
Thus, you can have separate saved desktops in different directories,
and the starting directory determines which one Emacs reloads.  You can
save the current desktop and reload one saved in another directory by
typing `M-x desktop-change-dir'.  Typing `M-x desktop-revert' reverts
to the desktop previously reloaded.

   Specify the option `--no-desktop' on the command line when you don't
want it to reload any saved desktop.  This turns off
`desktop-save-mode' for the current session.  Starting Emacs with the
`--no-init-file' option also disables desktop reloading, since it
bypasses the init file, where `desktop-save-mode' is usually turned on.

   By default, all the buffers in the desktop are restored at one go.
However, this may be slow if there are a lot of buffers in the desktop.
You can specify the maximum number of buffers to restore immediately
with the variable `desktop-restore-eager'; the remaining buffers are
restored "lazily," when Emacs is idle.

   Type `M-x desktop-clear' to empty the Emacs desktop.  This kills all
buffers except for internal ones, and clears the global variables
listed in `desktop-globals-to-clear'.  If you want this to preserve
certain buffers, customize the variable
`desktop-clear-preserve-buffers-regexp', whose value is a regular
expression matching the names of buffers not to kill.

   If you want to save minibuffer history from one session to another,
use the `savehist' library.


File: emacs,  Node: Recursive Edit,  Next: Emulation,  Prev: Saving Emacs Sessions,  Up: Top

52 Recursive Editing Levels
***************************

A "recursive edit" is a situation in which you are using Emacs commands
to perform arbitrary editing while in the middle of another Emacs
command.  For example, when you type `C-r' inside of a `query-replace',
you enter a recursive edit in which you can change the current buffer.
On exiting from the recursive edit, you go back to the `query-replace'.

   "Exiting" the recursive edit means returning to the unfinished
command, which continues execution.  The command to exit is `C-M-c'
(`exit-recursive-edit').

   You can also "abort" the recursive edit.  This is like exiting, but
also quits the unfinished command immediately.  Use the command `C-]'
(`abort-recursive-edit') to do this.  *Note Quitting::.

   The mode line shows you when you are in a recursive edit by
displaying square brackets around the parentheses that always surround
the major and minor mode names.  Every window's mode line shows this in
the same way, since being in a recursive edit is true of Emacs as a
whole rather than any particular window or buffer.

   It is possible to be in recursive edits within recursive edits.  For
example, after typing `C-r' in a `query-replace', you may type a
command that enters the debugger.  This begins a recursive editing level
for the debugger, within the recursive editing level for `C-r'.  Mode
lines display a pair of square brackets for each recursive editing
level currently in progress.

   Exiting the inner recursive edit (such as with the debugger `c'
command) resumes the command running in the next level up.  When that
command finishes, you can then use `C-M-c' to exit another recursive
editing level, and so on.  Exiting applies to the innermost level only.
Aborting also gets out of only one level of recursive edit; it returns
immediately to the command level of the previous recursive edit.  If you
wish, you can then abort the next recursive editing level.

   Alternatively, the command `M-x top-level' aborts all levels of
recursive edits, returning immediately to the top-level command reader.
It also exits the minibuffer, if it is active.

   The text being edited inside the recursive edit need not be the same
text that you were editing at top level.  It depends on what the
recursive edit is for.  If the command that invokes the recursive edit
selects a different buffer first, that is the buffer you will edit
recursively.  In any case, you can switch buffers within the recursive
edit in the normal manner (as long as the buffer-switching keys have
not been rebound).  You could probably do all the rest of your editing
inside the recursive edit, visiting files and all.  But this could have
surprising effects (such as stack overflow) from time to time.  So
remember to exit or abort the recursive edit when you no longer need it.

   In general, we try to minimize the use of recursive editing levels in
GNU Emacs.  This is because they constrain you to "go back" in a
particular order--from the innermost level toward the top level.  When
possible, we present different activities in separate buffers so that
you can switch between them as you please.  Some commands switch to a
new major mode which provides a command to switch back.  These
approaches give you more flexibility to go back to unfinished tasks in
the order you choose.


File: emacs,  Node: Emulation,  Next: Hyperlinking,  Prev: Recursive Edit,  Up: Top

53 Emulation
************

GNU Emacs can be programmed to emulate (more or less) most other
editors.  Standard facilities can emulate these:

CRiSP/Brief (PC editor)
     You can turn on key bindings to emulate the CRiSP/Brief editor with
     `M-x crisp-mode'.  Note that this rebinds `M-x' to exit Emacs
     unless you set the variable `crisp-override-meta-x'.  You can also
     use the command `M-x scroll-all-mode' or set the variable
     `crisp-load-scroll-all' to emulate CRiSP's scroll-all feature
     (scrolling all windows together).

EDT (DEC VMS editor)
     Turn on EDT emulation with the command `M-x edt-emulation-on',
     while `M-x edt-emulation-off' restores normal Emacs command
     bindings.

     Most of the EDT emulation commands are keypad keys, and most
     standard Emacs key bindings are still available.  The EDT
     emulation rebindings are done in the global keymap, so there is no
     problem switching buffers or major modes while in EDT emulation.

TPU (DEC VMS editor)
     `M-x tpu-edt-on' turns on emulation of the TPU editor emulating
     EDT.

vi (Berkeley editor)
     Viper is the newest emulator for vi.  It implements several levels
     of emulation; level 1 is closest to vi itself, while level 5
     departs somewhat from strict emulation to take advantage of the
     capabilities of Emacs.  To invoke Viper, type `M-x viper-mode'; it
     will guide you the rest of the way and ask for the emulation
     level.  *note Viper: (viper)Top.

vi (another emulator)
     `M-x vi-mode' enters a major mode that replaces the previously
     established major mode.  All of the vi commands that, in real vi,
     enter "input" mode are programmed instead to return to the
     previous major mode.  Thus, ordinary Emacs serves as vi's "input"
     mode.

     Because vi emulation works through major modes, it does not work
     to switch buffers during emulation.  Return to normal Emacs first.

     If you plan to use vi emulation much, you probably want to bind a
     key to the `vi-mode' command.

vi (alternate emulator)
     `M-x vip-mode' invokes another vi emulator, said to resemble real
     vi more thoroughly than `M-x vi-mode'.  "Input" mode in this
     emulator is changed from ordinary Emacs so you can use <ESC> to go
     back to emulated vi command mode.  To get from emulated vi command
     mode back to ordinary Emacs, type `C-z'.

     This emulation does not work through major modes, and it is
     possible to switch buffers in various ways within the emulator.
     It is not so necessary to assign a key to the command `vip-mode' as
     it is with `vi-mode' because terminating insert mode does not use
     it.

     *note VIP: (vip)Top, for full information.

WordStar (old wordprocessor)
     `M-x wordstar-mode' provides a major mode with WordStar-like key
     bindings.


File: emacs,  Node: Hyperlinking,  Next: Dissociated Press,  Prev: Emulation,  Up: Top

54 Hyperlinking and Navigation Features
***************************************

Various modes documented elsewhere have hypertext features so that you
can follow links, usually by clicking `Mouse-2' on the link or typing
<RET> while point is on the link.  Clicking `Mouse-1' quickly on the
link also follows it.  (Hold `Mouse-1' for longer if you want to set
point instead.)

   Info mode, Help mode and the Dired-like modes are examples of modes
that have links in the buffer.  The Tags facility links between uses
and definitions in source files, see *Note Tags::.  Imenu provides
navigation amongst items indexed in the current buffer, see *Note
Imenu::.  Info-lookup provides mode-specific lookup of definitions in
Info indexes, see *Note Documentation::.  Speedbar maintains a frame in
which links to files, and locations in files are displayed, see *Note
Speedbar::.

   Other non-mode-specific facilities described in this section enable
following links from the current buffer in a context-sensitive fashion.

* Menu:

* Browse-URL::                  Following URLs.
* Goto Address mode::           Activating URLs.
* FFAP::                        Finding files etc. at point.


File: emacs,  Node: Browse-URL,  Next: Goto Address mode,  Up: Hyperlinking

54.1 Following URLs
===================

`M-x browse-url <RET> URL <RET>'
     Load a URL into a Web browser.

   The Browse-URL package provides facilities for following URLs
specifying links on the World Wide Web.  Usually this works by invoking
a web browser, but you can, for instance, arrange to invoke
`compose-mail' from `mailto:' URLs.

   The general way to use this feature is to type `M-x browse-url',
which displays a specified URL.  If point is located near a plausible
URL, that URL is used as the default.  Other commands are available
which you might like to bind to keys, such as `browse-url-at-point' and
`browse-url-at-mouse'.

   You can customize Browse-URL's behavior via various options in the
`browse-url' Customize group, particularly
`browse-url-browser-function'.  You can invoke actions dependent on the
type of URL by defining `browse-url-browser-function' as an association
list.  The package's commentary available via `C-h p' under the
`hypermedia' keyword provides more information.  Packages with
facilities for following URLs should always go through Browse-URL, so
that the customization options for Browse-URL will affect all browsing
in Emacs.


File: emacs,  Node: Goto Address mode,  Next: FFAP,  Prev: Browse-URL,  Up: Hyperlinking

54.2 Activating URLs
====================

`M-x goto-address-mode'
     Activate URLs and e-mail addresses in the current buffer.

   You can make URLs in the current buffer active with `M-x
goto-address-mode'.  This minor mode finds all the URLs in the buffer,
highlights them, and turns them into "buttons": if you click on a URL
with `Mouse-1' or `Mouse-2' (*note Mouse References::), or move to the
URL and type `C-c <RET>', that displays the web page that the URL
specifies.  For a `mailto' URL, it sends mail instead, using your
selected mail-composition method (*note Mail Methods::).

   It can be useful to add `goto-address-mode' to mode hooks and the
hooks used to display an incoming message (e.g.,
`rmail-show-message-hook' for Rmail, and `mh-show-mode-hook' for MH-E).
This is not needed for Gnus, which has a similar feature of its own.


File: emacs,  Node: FFAP,  Prev: Goto Address mode,  Up: Hyperlinking

54.3 Finding Files and URLs at Point
====================================

FFAP mode replaces certain key bindings for finding files, including
`C-x C-f', with commands that provide more sensitive defaults.  These
commands behave like the ordinary ones when given a prefix argument.
Otherwise, they get the default file name or URL from the text around
point.  If what is found in the buffer has the form of a URL rather
than a file name, the commands use `browse-url' to view it.

   This feature is useful for following references in mail or news
buffers, `README' files, `MANIFEST' files, and so on.  The `ffap'
package's commentary available via `C-h p' under the `files' keyword
and the `ffap' Custom group provide details.

   You can turn on FFAP minor mode by calling `ffap-bindings' to make
the following key bindings and to install hooks for using `ffap' in
Rmail, Gnus and VM article buffers.

`C-x C-f FILENAME <RET>'
     Find FILENAME, guessing a default from text around point
     (`find-file-at-point').

`C-x C-r'
     `ffap-read-only', analogous to `find-file-read-only'.

`C-x C-v'
     `ffap-alternate-file', analogous to `find-alternate-file'.

`C-x d DIRECTORY <RET>'
     Start Dired on DIRECTORY, defaulting to the directory name at
     point (`dired-at-point').

`C-x C-d'
     `ffap-list-directory', analogous to `list-directory'.

`C-x 4 f'
     `ffap-other-window', analogous to `find-file-other-window'.

`C-x 4 r'
     `ffap-read-only-other-window', analogous to
     `find-file-read-only-other-window'.

`C-x 4 d'
     `ffap-dired-other-window', analogous to `dired-other-window'.

`C-x 5 f'
     `ffap-other-frame', analogous to `find-file-other-frame'.

`C-x 5 r'
     `ffap-read-only-other-frame', analogous to
     `find-file-read-only-other-frame'.

`C-x 5 d'
     `ffap-dired-other-frame', analogous to `dired-other-frame'.

`M-x ffap-next'
     Search buffer for next file name or URL, then find that file or
     URL.

`S-Mouse-3'
     `ffap-at-mouse' finds the file guessed from text around the
     position of a mouse click.

`C-S-Mouse-3'
     Display a menu of files and URLs mentioned in current buffer, then
     find the one you select (`ffap-menu').


File: emacs,  Node: Dissociated Press,  Next: Amusements,  Prev: Hyperlinking,  Up: Top

55 Dissociated Press
********************

`M-x dissociated-press' is a command for scrambling a file of text
either word by word or character by character.  Starting from a buffer
of straight English, it produces extremely amusing output.  The input
comes from the current Emacs buffer.  Dissociated Press writes its
output in a buffer named `*Dissociation*', and redisplays that buffer
after every couple of lines (approximately) so you can read the output
as it comes out.

   Dissociated Press asks every so often whether to continue generating
output.  Answer `n' to stop it.  You can also stop at any time by
typing `C-g'.  The dissociation output remains in the `*Dissociation*'
buffer for you to copy elsewhere if you wish.

   Dissociated Press operates by jumping at random from one point in
the buffer to another.  In order to produce plausible output rather
than gibberish, it insists on a certain amount of overlap between the
end of one run of consecutive words or characters and the start of the
next.  That is, if it has just output `president' and then decides to
jump to a different point in the buffer, it might spot the `ent' in
`pentagon' and continue from there, producing `presidentagon'.  Long
sample texts produce the best results.

   A positive argument to `M-x dissociated-press' tells it to operate
character by character, and specifies the number of overlap characters.
A negative argument tells it to operate word by word, and specifies
the number of overlap words.  In this mode, whole words are treated as
the elements to be permuted, rather than characters.  No argument is
equivalent to an argument of two.  For your againformation, the output
goes only into the buffer `*Dissociation*'.  The buffer you start with
is not changed.

   Dissociated Press produces results fairly like those of a Markov
chain based on a frequency table constructed from the sample text.  It
is, however, an independent, ignoriginal invention.  Dissociated Press
techniquitously copies several consecutive characters from the sample
text between random jumps, unlike a Markov chain which would jump
randomly after each word or character.  This makes for more plausible
sounding results, and runs faster.

   It is a mustatement that too much use of Dissociated Press can be a
developediment to your real work, sometimes to the point of outragedy.
And keep dissociwords out of your documentation, if you want it to be
well userenced and properbose.  Have fun.  Your buggestions are welcome.


File: emacs,  Node: Amusements,  Next: Customization,  Prev: Dissociated Press,  Up: Top

56 Other Amusements
*******************

If you are a little bit bored, you can try `M-x hanoi'.  If you are
considerably bored, give it a numeric argument.  If you are very, very
bored, try an argument of 9.  Sit back and watch.

   If you want a little more personal involvement, try `M-x gomoku',
which plays the game Go Moku with you.

   `M-x blackbox', `M-x mpuz' and `M-x 5x5' are puzzles.  `blackbox'
challenges you to determine the location of objects inside a box by
tomography.  `mpuz' displays a multiplication puzzle with letters
standing for digits in a code that you must guess--to guess a value,
type a letter and then the digit you think it stands for.  The aim of
`5x5' is to fill in all the squares.

   `M-x decipher' helps you to cryptanalyze a buffer which is encrypted
in a simple monoalphabetic substitution cipher.

   `M-x dunnet' runs an adventure-style exploration game, which is a
bigger sort of puzzle.

   `M-x lm' runs a relatively non-participatory game in which a robot
attempts to maneuver towards a tree at the center of the window based on
unique olfactory cues from each of the four directions.

   `M-x life' runs Conway's "Life" cellular automaton.

   `M-x morse-region' converts text in a region to Morse code and `M-x
unmorse-region' converts it back.  No cause for remorse.

   `M-x pong' plays a Pong-like game, bouncing the ball off opposing
bats.

   `M-x solitaire' plays a game of solitaire in which you jump pegs
across other pegs.

   `M-x studlify-region' studlify-cases the region, producing text like
this:

     M-x stUdlIfY-RegioN stUdlIfY-CaSeS thE region.

   `M-x tetris' runs an implementation of the well-known Tetris game.
Likewise, `M-x snake' provides an implementation of Snake.

   When you are frustrated, try the famous Eliza program.  Just do `M-x
doctor'.  End each input by typing <RET> twice.

   When you are feeling strange, type `M-x yow'.

   The command `M-x zone' plays games with the display when Emacs is
idle.


File: emacs,  Node: Customization,  Next: Quitting,  Prev: Amusements,  Up: Top

57 Customization
****************

This chapter describes some simple methods to customize the behavior of
Emacs.

   Apart from the methods described here, see *Note X Resources:: for
information about using X resources to customize Emacs, and see *Note
Keyboard Macros:: for information about recording and replaying
keyboard macros.  Making more far-reaching and open-ended changes
involves writing Emacs Lisp code; see *Note Emacs Lisp: (elisp)Top.

* Menu:

* Minor Modes::		Each minor mode is a feature you can turn on
			  independently of any others.
* Easy Customization::  Convenient way to browse and change settings.
* Variables::		Many Emacs commands examine Emacs variables
			  to decide what to do; by setting variables,
			  you can control their functioning.
* Key Bindings::	The keymaps say what command each key runs.
			  By changing them, you can "redefine keys".
* Syntax::		The syntax table controls how words and
			  expressions are parsed.
* Init File::		How to write common customizations in the
			  `.emacs' file.


File: emacs,  Node: Minor Modes,  Next: Easy Customization,  Up: Customization

57.1 Minor Modes
================

Minor modes are optional features which you can turn on or off.  For
example, Auto Fill mode is a minor mode in which <SPC> breaks lines
between words as you type.  Minor modes are independent of one another
and of the selected major mode.  Most minor modes say in the mode line
when they are enabled; for example, `Fill' in the mode line means that
Auto Fill mode is enabled.

   Each minor mode is associated with a command, called the "mode
command", which turns it on or off.  The name of this command consists
of the name of the minor mode, followed by `-mode'; for instance, the
mode command for Auto Fill mode is `auto-fill-mode'.  Calling the minor
mode command with no prefix argument "toggles" the mode, turning it on
if it was off, and off if it was on.  A positive argument always turns
the mode on, and a zero or negative argument always turns it off.  Mode
commands are usually invoked with `M-x', but you can bind keys to them
if you wish (*note Key Bindings::).

   Most minor modes also have a "mode variable", with the same name as
the mode command.  Its value is non-`nil' if the mode is enabled, and
`nil' if it is disabled.  In some minor modes--but not all--the value
of the variable alone determines whether the mode is active: the mode
command works simply by setting the variable, and changing the value of
the variable has the same effect as calling the mode command.  Because
not all minor modes work this way, we recommend that you avoid changing
the mode variables directly; use the mode commands instead.

   Some minor modes are "buffer-local": they apply only to the current
buffer, so you can enable the mode in certain buffers and not others.
Other minor modes are "global": while enabled, they affect everything
you do in the Emacs session, in all buffers.  Some global minor modes
are enabled by default.

   The following is a list of some buffer-local minor modes:

   * Abbrev mode automatically expands text based on pre-defined
     abbreviation definitions.  *Note Abbrevs::.

   * Auto Fill mode inserts newlines as you type to prevent lines from
     becoming too long.  *Note Filling::.

   * Auto Save mode saves the buffer contents periodically to reduce the
     amount of work you can lose in case of a crash.  *Note Auto Save::.

   * Enriched mode enables editing and saving of formatted text.  *Note
     Formatted Text::.

   * Flyspell mode automatically highlights misspelled words.  *Note
     Spelling::.

   * Font-Lock mode automatically highlights certain textual units
     found in programs.  It is enabled globally by default, but you can
     disable it in individual buffers.  *Note Faces::.

   * Linum mode displays each line's line number in the window's left
     margin.  Its mode command is `linum-mode'.

   * Outline minor mode provides similar facilities to the major mode
     called Outline mode.  *Note Outline Mode::.

   * Overwrite mode causes ordinary printing characters to replace
     existing text instead of shoving it to the right.  For example, if
     point is in front of the `B' in `FOOBAR', then in Overwrite mode
     typing a `G' changes it to `FOOGAR', instead of producing
     `FOOGBAR' as usual.  In Overwrite mode, the command `C-q' inserts
     the next character whatever it may be, even if it is a digit--this
     gives you a way to insert a character instead of replacing an
     existing character.  The mode command, `overwrite-mode', is bound
     to the <Insert> key.

   * Binary Overwrite mode is a variant of Overwrite mode for editing
     binary files; it treats newlines and tabs like other characters, so
     that they overwrite other characters and can be overwritten by
     them.  In Binary Overwrite mode, digits after `C-q' specify an
     octal character code, as usual.

   * Visual Line mode performs "word wrapping", causing long lines to be
     wrapped at word boundaries.  *Note Visual Line Mode::.

   Here are some useful global minor modes.  Since Line Number mode and
Transient Mark mode can be enabled or disabled just by setting the
value of the minor mode variable, you _can_ set them differently for
particular buffers, by explicitly making the corresponding variable
local in those buffers.  *Note Locals::.

   * Column Number mode enables display of the current column number in
     the mode line.  *Note Mode Line::.

   * Delete Selection mode causes text insertion to first delete the
     text in the region, if the region is active.  *Note Using Region::.

   * Icomplete mode displays an indication of available completions when
     you are in the minibuffer and completion is active.  *Note
     Completion Options::.

   * Line Number mode enables display of the current line number in the
     mode line.  It is enabled by default.  *Note Mode Line::.

   * Menu Bar mode gives each frame a menu bar.  It is enabled by
     default.  *Note Menu Bars::.

   * Scroll Bar mode gives each window a scroll bar.  It is enabled by
     default, but the scroll bar is only displayed on graphical
     terminals.  *Note Scroll Bars::.

   * Tool Bar mode gives each frame a tool bar.  It is enabled by
     default, but the tool bar is only displayed on graphical
     terminals.  *Note Tool Bars::.

   * Transient Mark mode highlights the region, and makes many Emacs
     commands operate on the region when the mark is active.  It is
     enabled by default.  *Note Mark::.


File: emacs,  Node: Easy Customization,  Next: Variables,  Prev: Minor Modes,  Up: Customization

57.2 Easy Customization Interface
=================================

Emacs has many "settings" which have values that you can change.  Many
are documented in this manual.  Most settings are "user options"--that
is to say, Lisp variables (*note Variables::)--and their names appear
in the Variable Index (*note Variable Index::).  The other settings are
faces and their attributes (*note Faces::).

   You can browse settings and change them using `M-x customize'.  This
creates a "customization buffer", which lets you navigate through a
logically organized list of settings, edit and set their values, and
save them permanently in your initialization file (*note Init File::).

* Menu:

* Customization Groups::     How settings are classified in a structure.
* Browsing Custom::          Browsing and searching for settings.
* Changing a Variable::      How to edit an option's value and set the option.
* Saving Customizations::    Specifying the file for saving customizations.
* Face Customization::       How to edit the attributes of a face.
* Specific Customization::   Making a customization buffer for specific
                                variables, faces, or groups.
* Custom Themes::            How to define collections of customized options
                                that can be loaded and unloaded together.


File: emacs,  Node: Customization Groups,  Next: Browsing Custom,  Up: Easy Customization

57.2.1 Customization Groups
---------------------------

For customization purposes, settings are organized into "groups" to
help you find them.  Groups are collected into bigger groups, all the
way up to a master group called `Emacs'.

   `M-x customize' creates a customization buffer that shows the
top-level `Emacs' group and the second-level groups immediately under
it.  It looks like this, in part:

     /- Emacs group: Customization of the One True Editor. -------------\
           [State]: visible group members are all at standard values.

        See also [Manual].

     [Editing] : Basic text editing facilities.

     [External] : Interfacing to external utilities.

     MORE SECOND-LEVEL GROUPS

     \- Emacs group end ------------------------------------------------/

This says that the buffer displays the contents of the `Emacs' group.
The other groups are listed because they are its contents.  But they
are listed differently, without indentation and dashes, because _their_
contents are not included.  Each group has a single-line documentation
string; the `Emacs' group also has a `[State]' line.

   Most of the text in the customization buffer is read-only, but it
typically includes some "editable fields" that you can edit.  There are
also "buttons" and "links", which do something when you "invoke" them.
To invoke a button or a link, either click on it with `Mouse-1', or
move point to it and type <RET>.

   For example, the phrase `[State]' that appears in a second-level
group is a button.  It operates on the same customization buffer.  Each
group name, such as `[Editing]', is a hypertext link to that group;
invoking it creates a new customization buffer, showing the group and
its contents.

   The `Emacs' group only contains other groups.  These groups, in
turn, can contain settings or still more groups.  By browsing the
hierarchy of groups, you will eventually find the feature you are
interested in customizing.  Then you can use the customization buffer
to set that feature's settings.  You can also go straight to a
particular group by name, using the command `M-x customize-group'.


File: emacs,  Node: Browsing Custom,  Next: Changing a Variable,  Prev: Customization Groups,  Up: Easy Customization

57.2.2 Browsing and Searching for Options and Faces
---------------------------------------------------

`M-x customize-browse' is another way to browse the available settings.
This command creates a special customization buffer which shows only
the names of groups and settings, and puts them in a structure.

   In this buffer, you can show the contents of a group by invoking the
`[+]' button.  When the group contents are visible, this button changes
to `[-]'; invoking that hides the group contents again.

   Each group or setting in this buffer has a link which says
`[Group]', `[Option]' or `[Face]'.  Invoking this link creates an
ordinary customization buffer showing just that group and its contents,
just that user option, or just that face.  This is the way to change
settings that you find with `M-x customize-browse'.

   If you can guess part of the name of the settings you are interested
in, `M-x customize-apropos' is another way to search for settings.
However, unlike `customize' and `customize-browse', `customize-apropos'
can only find groups and settings that are loaded in the current Emacs
session.  *Note Customizing Specific Items: Specific Customization.


File: emacs,  Node: Changing a Variable,  Next: Saving Customizations,  Prev: Browsing Custom,  Up: Easy Customization

57.2.3 Changing a Variable
--------------------------

Here is an example of what a variable (a user option) looks like in the
customization buffer:

     Kill Ring Max: [Hide Value] 60
        [State]: STANDARD.
     Maximum length of kill ring before oldest elements are thrown away.

   The text following `[Hide Value]', `60' in this case, indicates the
current value of the variable.  If you see `[Show Value]' instead of
`[Hide Value]', it means that the value is hidden; the customization
buffer initially hides values that take up several lines.  Invoke
`[Show Value]' to show the value.

   The line after the variable name indicates the "customization state"
of the variable: in the example above, it says you have not changed the
option yet.  The `[State]' button at the beginning of this line gives
you a menu of various operations for customizing the variable.

   The line after the `[State]' line displays the beginning of the
variable's documentation string.  If there are more lines of
documentation, this line ends with a `[More]' button; invoke that to
show the full documentation string.

   To enter a new value for `Kill Ring Max', move point to the value
and edit it textually.  For example, you can type `M-d', then insert
another number.  As you begin to alter the text, you will see the
`[State]' line change to say that you have edited the value:

     [State]: EDITED, shown value does not take effect until you set or ...
                                                                save it.

   Editing the value does not actually set the variable.  To do that,
you must "set" the variable.  To do this, invoke the `[State]' button
and choose `Set for Current Session'.

   The state of the variable changes visibly when you set it:

     [State]: SET for current session only.

   You don't have to worry about specifying a value that is not valid;
the `Set for Current Session' operation checks for validity and will
not install an unacceptable value.

   While editing a field that is a file name, directory name, command
name, or anything else for which completion is defined, you can type
`M-<TAB>' (`widget-complete') to do completion.  (`<ESC> <TAB>' and
`C-M-i' do the same thing.)

   Some variables have a small fixed set of possible legitimate values.
These variables don't let you edit the value textually.  Instead, a
`[Value Menu]' button appears before the value; invoke this button to
change the value.  For a boolean "on or off" value, the button says
`[Toggle]', and it changes to the other value.  `[Value Menu]' and
`[Toggle]' simply edit the buffer; the changes take real effect when
you use the `Set for Current Session' operation.

   Some variables have values with complex structure.  For example, the
value of `file-coding-system-alist' is an association list.  Here is
how it appears in the customization buffer:

     File Coding System Alist: [Hide Value]
     [INS] [DEL] File regexp: \.elc\'
                 Choice: [Value Menu] Encoding/decoding pair:
                 Decoding: emacs-mule
                 Encoding: emacs-mule
     [INS] [DEL] File regexp: \(\`\|/\)loaddefs.el\'
                 Choice: [Value Menu] Encoding/decoding pair:
                 Decoding: raw-text
                 Encoding: raw-text-unix
     [INS] [DEL] File regexp: \.tar\'
                 Choice: [Value Menu] Encoding/decoding pair:
                 Decoding: no-conversion
                 Encoding: no-conversion
     [INS] [DEL] File regexp:
                 Choice: [Value Menu] Encoding/decoding pair:
                 Decoding: undecided
                 Encoding: nil
     [INS]
        [State]: STANDARD.
     Alist to decide a coding system to use for a file I/O ...
                                     operation. [Hide Rest]
     The format is ((PATTERN . VAL) ...),
     where PATTERN is a regular expression matching a file name,
     [...more lines of documentation...]

Each association in the list appears on four lines, with several
editable fields and/or buttons.  You can edit the regexps and coding
systems using ordinary editing commands.  You can also invoke `[Value
Menu]' to switch to a different kind of value--for instance, to specify
a function instead of a pair of coding systems.

   To delete an association from the list, invoke the `[DEL]' button
for that item.  To add an association, invoke `[INS]' at the position
where you want to add it.  There is an `[INS]' button between each pair
of associations, another at the beginning and another at the end, so
you can add a new association at any position in the list.

   Two special commands, <TAB> and `S-<TAB>', are useful for moving
through the customization buffer.  <TAB> (`widget-forward') moves
forward to the next button or editable field; `S-<TAB>'
(`widget-backward') moves backward to the previous button or editable
field.

   Typing <RET> on an editable field also moves forward, just like
<TAB>.  You can thus type <RET> when you are finished editing a field,
to move on to the next button or field.  To insert a newline within an
editable field, use `C-o' or `C-q C-j'.

   Setting the variable changes its value in the current Emacs session;
"saving" the value changes it for future sessions as well.  To save the
variable, invoke `[State]' and select the `Save for Future Sessions'
operation.  This works by writing code so as to set the variable again,
each time you start Emacs (*note Saving Customizations::).

   You can also restore the variable to its standard value by invoking
`[State]' and selecting the `Erase Customization' operation.  There are
actually four reset operations:

`Undo Edits'
     If you have made some modifications and not yet set the variable,
     this restores the text in the customization buffer to match the
     actual value.

`Reset to Saved'
     This restores the value of the variable to the last saved value,
     and updates the text accordingly.

`Erase Customization'
     This sets the variable to its standard value, and updates the text
     accordingly.  This also eliminates any saved value for the
     variable, so that you will get the standard value in future Emacs
     sessions.

`Set to Backup Value'
     This sets the variable to a previous value that was set in the
     customization buffer in this session.  If you customize a variable
     and then reset it, which discards the customized value, you can
     get the discarded value back again with this operation.

   Sometimes it is useful to record a comment about a specific
customization.  Use the `Add Comment' item from the `[State]' menu to
create a field for entering the comment.  The comment you enter will be
saved, and displayed again if you again view the same variable in a
customization buffer, even in another session.

   The state of a group indicates whether anything in that group has
been edited, set or saved.

   Near the top of the customization buffer there are two lines of
buttons:

      [Set for Current Session] [Save for Future Sessions]
      [Undo Edits] [Reset to Saved] [Erase Customization]   [Finish]

Invoking `[Finish]' either buries or kills this customization buffer
according to the setting of the option `custom-buffer-done-kill'; the
default is to bury the buffer.  Each of the other buttons performs an
operation--set, save or reset--on each of the settings in the buffer
that could meaningfully be set, saved or reset.  They do not operate on
settings whose values are hidden, nor on subgroups which are hidden or
not visible in the buffer.


File: emacs,  Node: Saving Customizations,  Next: Face Customization,  Prev: Changing a Variable,  Up: Easy Customization

57.2.4 Saving Customizations
----------------------------

Saving customizations from the customization buffer works by writing
code to a file.  By reading this code, future sessions can set up the
customizations again.  Normally, the code is saved in your
initialization file (*note Init File::).

   You can choose to save your customizations in a file other than your
initialization file.  To make this work, you must add a couple of lines
of code to your initialization file, to set the variable `custom-file'
to the name of the desired file, and to load that file.  For example:

     (setq custom-file "~/.emacs-custom.el")
     (load custom-file)

   You can use `custom-file' to specify different customization files
for different Emacs versions, like this:

     (cond ((< emacs-major-version 22)
            ;; Emacs 21 customization.
            (setq custom-file "~/.custom-21.el"))
           ((and (= emacs-major-version 22) (< emacs-minor-version 3))
            ;; Emacs 22 customization, before version 22.3.
            (setq custom-file "~/.custom-22.el"))
           (t
            ;; Emacs version 22.3 or later.
            (setq custom-file "~/.emacs-custom.el")))

     (load custom-file)

   If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options
(*note Initial Options::), it will not let you save your customizations
in your initialization file.  This is because saving customizations
from such a session would wipe out all the other customizations you
might have on your initialization file.


File: emacs,  Node: Face Customization,  Next: Specific Customization,  Prev: Saving Customizations,  Up: Easy Customization

57.2.5 Customizing Faces
------------------------

In addition to variables, some customization groups also include faces.
When you show the contents of a group, both the variables and the
faces in the group appear in the customization buffer.  Here is an
example of how a face looks:

     Custom Changed Face:(sample) [Hide Face]
        [State]: STANDARD.
     Face used when the customize item has been changed.
     Parent groups: [Custom Magic Faces]
     Attributes: [ ] Font Family: *
                 [ ] Width: *
                 [ ] Height: *
                 [ ] Weight: *
                 [ ] Slant: *
                 [ ] Underline: *
                 [ ] Overline: *
                 [ ] Strike-through: *
                 [ ] Box around text: *
                 [ ] Inverse-video: *
                 [X] Foreground: white       (sample)
                 [X] Background: blue        (sample)
                 [ ] Stipple: *
                 [ ] Inherit: *

   Each face attribute has its own line.  The `[X]' button before the
attribute name indicates whether the attribute is "enabled"; `[X]'
means that it's enabled, and `[ ]' means that it's disabled.  You can
enable or disable the attribute by clicking that button.  When the
attribute is enabled, you can change the attribute value in the usual
ways.

   For the colors, you can specify a color name (use `M-x
list-colors-display' for a list of them) or a hexadecimal color
specification of the form `#RRGGBB'.  (`#000000' is black, `#ff0000' is
red, `#00ff00' is green, `#0000ff' is blue, and `#ffffff' is white.)
On a black-and-white display, the colors you can use for the background
are `black', `white', `gray', `gray1', and `gray3'.  Emacs supports
these shades of gray by using background stipple patterns instead of a
color.

   Setting, saving and resetting a face work like the same operations
for variables (*note Changing a Variable::).

   A face can specify different appearances for different types of
display.  For example, a face can make text red on a color display, but
use a bold font on a monochrome display.  To specify multiple
appearances for a face, select `For All Kinds of Displays' in the menu
you get from invoking `[State]'.

   Another more basic way to set the attributes of a specific face is
with `M-x modify-face'.  This command reads the name of a face, then
reads the attributes one by one.  For the color and stipple attributes,
the attribute's current value is the default--type just <RET> if you
don't want to change that attribute.  Type `none' if you want to clear
out the attribute.


File: emacs,  Node: Specific Customization,  Next: Custom Themes,  Prev: Face Customization,  Up: Easy Customization

57.2.6 Customizing Specific Items
---------------------------------

Instead of finding the setting you want to change by navigating the
structure of groups, here are other ways to specify the settings that
you want to customize.

`M-x customize-option <RET> OPTION <RET>'
     Set up a customization buffer with just one user option variable,
     OPTION.

`M-x customize-face <RET> FACE <RET>'
     Set up a customization buffer with just one face, FACE.

`M-x customize-group <RET> GROUP <RET>'
     Set up a customization buffer with just one group, GROUP.

`M-x customize-apropos <RET> REGEXP <RET>'
     Set up a customization buffer with all the settings and groups that
     match REGEXP.

`M-x customize-changed <RET> VERSION <RET>'
     Set up a customization buffer with all the settings and groups
     whose meaning has changed since Emacs version VERSION.

`M-x customize-saved'
     Set up a customization buffer containing all settings that you
     have saved with customization buffers.

`M-x customize-unsaved'
     Set up a customization buffer containing all settings that you have
     set but not saved.

   If you want to alter a particular user option with the customization
buffer, and you know its name, you can use the command `M-x
customize-option' and specify the user option (variable) name.  This
sets up the customization buffer with just one user option--the one
that you asked for.  Editing, setting and saving the value work as
described above, but only for the specified user option.  Minibuffer
completion is handy if you only know part of the name.  However, this
command can only see options that have been loaded in the current Emacs
session.

   Likewise, you can modify a specific face, chosen by name, using `M-x
customize-face'.  By default it operates on the face used on the
character after point.

   You can also set up the customization buffer with a specific group,
using `M-x customize-group'.  The immediate contents of the chosen
group, including settings (user options and faces), and other groups,
all appear as well (even if not already loaded).  However, the
subgroups' own contents are not included.

   For a more general way of controlling what to customize, you can use
`M-x customize-apropos'.  You specify a regular expression as argument;
then all _loaded_ settings and groups whose names match this regular
expression are set up in the customization buffer.  If you specify an
empty regular expression, this includes _all_ loaded groups and
settings--which takes a long time to set up.

   When you upgrade to a new Emacs version, you might want to consider
customizing new settings, and settings whose meanings or default values
have changed.  To do this, use `M-x customize-changed' and specify a
previous Emacs version number using the minibuffer.  It creates a
customization buffer which shows all the settings and groups whose
definitions have been changed since the specified version, loading them
if necessary.

   If you change settings and then decide the change was a mistake, you
can use two special commands to revisit your previous changes.  Use
`M-x customize-saved' to look at the settings that you have saved.  Use
`M-x customize-unsaved' to look at the settings that you have set but
not saved.


File: emacs,  Node: Custom Themes,  Prev: Specific Customization,  Up: Easy Customization

57.2.7 Customization Themes
---------------------------

"Custom themes" are collections of settings that can be enabled or
disabled as a unit.  You can use Custom themes to switch quickly and
easily between various collections of settings, and to transfer such
collections from one computer to another.

   To define a Custom theme, use `M-x customize-create-theme', which
brings up a buffer named `*New Custom Theme*'.  At the top of the
buffer is an editable field where you can specify the name of the
theme.  Click on the button labelled `Insert Variable' to add a
variable to the theme, and click on `Insert Face' to add a face.  You
can edit these values in the `*New Custom Theme*' buffer like in an
ordinary Customize buffer.  To remove an option from the theme, click
on its `State' button and select `Delete'.

   After adding the desired options, click on `Save Theme' to save the
Custom theme.  This writes the theme definition to a file
`FOO-theme.el' (where FOO is the theme name you supplied), in the
directory `~/.emacs.d/'.  You can specify the directory by setting
`custom-theme-directory'.

   You can view and edit the settings of a previously-defined theme by
clicking on `Visit Theme' and specifying the theme name.  You can also
import the variables and faces that you have set using Customize by
visiting the "special" theme named `user'.  This theme, which records
all the options that you set in the ordinary customization buffer, is
always enabled, and always takes precedence over all other enabled
Custom themes.  Additionally, the `user' theme is recorded with code in
your `.emacs' file, rather than a `user-theme.el' file.

   Once you have defined a Custom theme, you can use it by customizing
the variable `custom-enabled-themes'.  This is a list of Custom themes
that are "enabled", or put into effect.  If you set
`custom-enabled-themes' using the Customize interface, the theme
definitions are automatically loaded from the theme files, if they
aren't already.  If you save the value of `custom-enabled-themes' for
future Emacs sessions, those Custom themes will be enabled whenever
Emacs is started up.

   If two enabled themes specify different values for an option, the
theme occurring earlier in `custom-enabled-themes' takes effect.

   You can temporarily enable a Custom theme with `M-x enable-theme'.
This prompts for a theme name in the minibuffer, loads the theme from
the theme file if necessary, and enables the theme.  You can "disable"
any enabled theme with the command `M-x disable-theme'; this returns
the options specified in the theme to their original values.  To
re-enable the theme, type `M-x enable-theme' again.  If a theme file is
changed during your Emacs session, you can reload it by typing `M-x
load-theme'.  (This also enables the theme.)


File: emacs,  Node: Variables,  Next: Key Bindings,  Prev: Easy Customization,  Up: Customization

57.3 Variables
==============

A "variable" is a Lisp symbol which has a value.  The symbol's name is
also called the "variable name".  A variable name can contain any
characters that can appear in a file, but most variable names consist
of ordinary words separated by hyphens.

   The name of the variable serves as a compact description of its
role.  Most variables also have a "documentation string", which
describes what the variable's purpose is, what kind of value it should
have, and how the value will be used.  You can view this documentation
using the help command `C-h v' (`describe-variable').  *Note
Examining::.

   Emacs uses many Lisp variables for internal record keeping, but the
most interesting variables for a non-programmer user are those meant
for users to change--these are called "user options".  *Note Easy
Customization::, for information about using the Customize facility to
set user options.  In the following sections, we describe will other
aspects of Emacs variables, such as how to set them outside Customize.

   Emacs Lisp allows any variable (with a few exceptions) to have any
kind of value.  However, many variables are meaningful only if assigned
values of a certain type.  For example, only numbers are meaningful
values for `kill-ring-max', which specifies the maximum length of the
kill ring (*note Earlier Kills::); if you give `kill-ring-max' a string
value, commands such as `C-y' (`yank') will signal an error.  On the
other hand, some variables don't care about type; for instance, if a
variable has one effect for `nil' values and another effect for
"non-`nil'" values, then any value that is not the symbol `nil' induces
the second effect, regardless of its type (by convention, we usually
use the value `t'--a symbol which stands for "true"--to specify a
non-`nil' value).  If you set a variable using the customization
buffer, you need not worry about giving it an invalid type: the
customization buffer usually only allows you to enter meaningful
values.  When in doubt, use `C-h v' (`describe-variable') to check the
variable's documentation string to see kind of value it expects (*note
Examining::).

* Menu:

* Examining::	        Examining or setting one variable's value.
* Hooks::	        Hook variables let you specify programs for parts
		          of Emacs to run on particular occasions.
* Locals::	        Per-buffer values of variables.
* File Variables::      How files can specify variable values.
* Directory Variables:: How variable values can be specified by directory.


File: emacs,  Node: Examining,  Next: Hooks,  Up: Variables

57.3.1 Examining and Setting Variables
--------------------------------------

`C-h v VAR <RET>'
     Display the value and documentation of variable VAR
     (`describe-variable').

`M-x set-variable <RET> VAR <RET> VALUE <RET>'
     Change the value of variable VAR to VALUE.

   To examine the value of a single variable, use `C-h v'
(`describe-variable'), which reads a variable name using the
minibuffer, with completion.  It displays both the value and the
documentation of the variable.  For example,

     C-h v fill-column <RET>

displays something like this:

     fill-column is a variable defined in `C source code'.
     fill-column's value is 70
     Local in buffer custom.texi; global value is 70
     Automatically becomes buffer-local when set in any fashion.

       Automatically becomes buffer-local when set in any fashion.
       This variable is safe as a file local variable if its value
       satisfies the predicate `integerp'.

     Documentation:
     *Column beyond which automatic line-wrapping should happen.
     Interactively, you can set the buffer local value using C-x f.

     You can customize this variable.

The line that says "You can customize the variable" indicates that this
variable is a user option.  `C-h v' is not restricted to user options;
it allows any variable name.

   The most convenient way to set a specific user option variable is
with `M-x set-variable'.  This reads the variable name with the
minibuffer (with completion), and then reads a Lisp expression for the
new value using the minibuffer a second time (you can insert the old
value into the minibuffer for editing via `M-n').  For example,

     M-x set-variable <RET> fill-column <RET> 75 <RET>

sets `fill-column' to 75.

   `M-x set-variable' is limited to user option variables, but you can
set any variable with a Lisp expression, using the function `setq'.
Here is a `setq' expression to set `fill-column':

     (setq fill-column 75)

   To execute an expression like this one, go to the `*scratch*'
buffer, type in the expression, and then type `C-j'.  *Note Lisp
Interaction::.

   Setting variables, like all means of customizing Emacs except where
otherwise stated, affects only the current Emacs session.  The only way
to alter the variable in future sessions is to put something in your
initialization file to set it those sessions (*note Init File::).


File: emacs,  Node: Hooks,  Next: Locals,  Prev: Examining,  Up: Variables

57.3.2 Hooks
------------

"Hooks" are an important mechanism for customizing Emacs.  A hook is a
Lisp variable which holds a list of functions, to be called on some
well-defined occasion.  (This is called "running the hook".)  The
individual functions in the list are called the "hook functions" of the
hook.  With rare exceptions, hooks in Emacs are empty when Emacs starts
up, so the only hook functions in any given hook are the ones you
explicitly put there as customization.

   Most major modes run one or more "mode hooks" as the last step of
initialization.  This makes it easy for you to customize the behavior
of the mode, by setting up a hook function to override the local
variable assignments already made by the mode.  But hooks are also used
in other contexts.  For example, the hook `kill-emacs-hook' runs just
before quitting the Emacs job (*note Exiting::).

   Most Emacs hooks are "normal hooks".  This means that running the
hook operates by calling all the hook functions, unconditionally, with
no arguments.  We have made an effort to keep most hooks normal so that
you can use them in a uniform way.  Every variable in Emacs whose name
ends in `-hook' is a normal hook.

   There are also a few "abnormal hooks".  These variables' names end
in `-hooks' or `-functions', instead of `-hook'.  What makes these
hooks abnormal is that there is something peculiar about the way its
functions are called--perhaps they are given arguments, or perhaps the
values they return are used in some way.  For example,
`find-file-not-found-functions' (*note Visiting::) is abnormal because
as soon as one hook function returns a non-`nil' value, the rest are
not called at all.  The documentation of each abnormal hook variable
explains in detail what is peculiar about it.

   You can set a hook variable with `setq' like any other Lisp
variable, but the recommended way to add a hook function to a hook
(either normal or abnormal) is by calling `add-hook'.  *Note Hooks:
(elisp)Hooks.

   For example, here's how to set up a hook to turn on Auto Fill mode
when entering Text mode and other modes based on Text mode:

     (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)

   The next example shows how to use a hook to customize the indentation
of C code.  (People often have strong personal preferences for one
format compared to another.)  Here the hook function is an anonymous
lambda expression.

     (setq my-c-style
       '((c-comment-only-line-offset . 4)
         (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator
     		       empty-defun-braces
     		       defun-close-semi))
         (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist)
     			(substatement-open . 0)))))

     (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
       '(lambda ()
          (c-add-style "my-style" my-c-style t)))

   It is best to design your hook functions so that the order in which
they are executed does not matter.  Any dependence on the order is
"asking for trouble."  However, the order is predictable: the most
recently added hook functions are executed first.

   If you play with adding various different versions of a hook
function by calling `add-hook' over and over, remember that all the
versions you added will remain in the hook variable together.  You can
clear out individual functions by calling `remove-hook', or do `(setq
HOOK-VARIABLE nil)' to remove everything.


File: emacs,  Node: Locals,  Next: File Variables,  Prev: Hooks,  Up: Variables

57.3.3 Local Variables
----------------------

`M-x make-local-variable <RET> VAR <RET>'
     Make variable VAR have a local value in the current buffer.

`M-x kill-local-variable <RET> VAR <RET>'
     Make variable VAR use its global value in the current buffer.

`M-x make-variable-buffer-local <RET> VAR <RET>'
     Mark variable VAR so that setting it will make it local to the
     buffer that is current at that time.

   Almost any variable can be made "local" to a specific Emacs buffer.
This means that its value in that buffer is independent of its value in
other buffers.  A few variables are always local in every buffer.
Every other Emacs variable has a "global" value which is in effect in
all buffers that have not made the variable local.

   `M-x make-local-variable' reads the name of a variable and makes it
local to the current buffer.  Changing its value subsequently in this
buffer will not affect others, and changes in its global value will not
affect this buffer.

   `M-x make-variable-buffer-local' marks a variable so it will become
local automatically whenever it is set.  More precisely, once a
variable has been marked in this way, the usual ways of setting the
variable automatically do `make-local-variable' first.  We call such
variables "per-buffer" variables.  Many variables in Emacs are normally
per-buffer; the variable's document string tells you when this is so.
A per-buffer variable's global value is normally never effective in any
buffer, but it still has a meaning: it is the initial value of the
variable for each new buffer.

   Major modes (*note Major Modes::) always make variables local to the
buffer before setting the variables.  This is why changing major modes
in one buffer has no effect on other buffers.  Minor modes also work by
setting variables--normally, each minor mode has one controlling
variable which is non-`nil' when the mode is enabled (*note Minor
Modes::).  For many minor modes, the controlling variable is per
buffer, and thus always buffer-local.  Otherwise, you can make it local
in a specific buffer like any other variable.

   A few variables cannot be local to a buffer because they are always
local to each display instead (*note Multiple Displays::).  If you try
to make one of these variables buffer-local, you'll get an error
message.

   `M-x kill-local-variable' makes a specified variable cease to be
local to the current buffer.  The global value of the variable
henceforth is in effect in this buffer.  Setting the major mode kills
all the local variables of the buffer except for a few variables
specially marked as "permanent locals".

   To set the global value of a variable, regardless of whether the
variable has a local value in the current buffer, you can use the Lisp
construct `setq-default'.  This construct is used just like `setq', but
it sets variables' global values instead of their local values (if
any).  When the current buffer does have a local value, the new global
value may not be visible until you switch to another buffer.  Here is
an example:

     (setq-default fill-column 75)

`setq-default' is the only way to set the global value of a variable
that has been marked with `make-variable-buffer-local'.

   Lisp programs can use `default-value' to look at a variable's
default value.  This function takes a symbol as argument and returns its
default value.  The argument is evaluated; usually you must quote it
explicitly.  For example, here's how to obtain the default value of
`fill-column':

     (default-value 'fill-column)


File: emacs,  Node: File Variables,  Next: Directory Variables,  Prev: Locals,  Up: Variables

57.3.4 Local Variables in Files
-------------------------------

A file can specify local variable values for use when you edit the file
with Emacs.  Visiting the file checks for local variable
specifications; it automatically makes these variables local to the
buffer, and sets them to the values specified in the file.

* Menu:

* Specifying File Variables:: Specifying file local variables.
* Safe File Variables::       Making sure file local variables are safe.


File: emacs,  Node: Specifying File Variables,  Next: Safe File Variables,  Up: File Variables

57.3.4.1 Specifying File Variables
..................................

There are two ways to specify file local variable values: in the first
line, or with a local variables list.  Here's how to specify them in the
first line:

     -*- mode: MODENAME; VAR: VALUE; ... -*-

You can specify any number of variable/value pairs in this way, each
pair with a colon and semicolon as shown above.  The special
variable/value pair `mode: MODENAME;', if present, specifies a major or
minor mode; if you use this to specify a major mode, it should come
first in the line.  The VALUEs are used literally, and not evaluated.

   You can use the command `add-file-local-variable-prop-line' instead
of adding entries by hand.  It prompts for a variable and value, and
adds them to the first line in the appropriate way.  The command
`delete-file-local-variable-prop-line' deletes a variable from the
line.  The command `copy-dir-locals-to-file-locals-prop-line' copies
directory-local variables (*note Directory Variables::) to the first
line.

   Here is an example first line that specifies Lisp mode and sets two
variables with numeric values:

     ;; -*- mode: Lisp; fill-column: 75; comment-column: 50; -*-

Aside from `mode', other keywords that have special meanings as file
variables are `coding', `unibyte', and `eval'.  These are described
below.

   In shell scripts, the first line is used to identify the script
interpreter, so you cannot put any local variables there.  To
accommodate this, Emacs looks for local variable specifications in the
_second_ line if the first line specifies an interpreter.  The same is
true for man pages which start with the magic string `'\"' to specify a
list of troff preprocessors (not all do, however).

   Instead of using a `-*-' line, you can define file local variables
using a "local variables list" near the end of the file.  The start of
the local variables list should be no more than 3000 characters from
the end of the file, and must be on the last page if the file is
divided into pages.

   If a file has both a local variables list and a `-*-' line, Emacs
processes _everything_ in the `-*-' line first, and _everything_ in the
local variables list afterward.

   A local variables list starts with a line containing the string
`Local Variables:', and ends with a line containing the string `End:'.
In between come the variable names and values, one set per line, like
this:

     /* Local Variables: */
     /* mode:c           */
     /* comment-column:0 */
     /* End:             */

In this example, each line starts with the prefix `/*' and ends with
the suffix `*/'.  Emacs recognizes the prefix and suffix by finding
them surrounding the magic string `Local Variables:', on the first line
of the list; it then automatically discards them from the other lines
of the list.  The usual reason for using a prefix and/or suffix is to
embed the local variables list in a comment, so it won't confuse other
programs that the file is intended for.  The example above is for the C
programming language, where comment lines start with `/*' and end with
`*/'.

   You can construct the local variables list yourself, or use the
command `add-file-local-variable'.  This prompts for a variable and
value, and adds them to the list.  If necessary, it also adds the start
and end markers.  The command `delete-file-local-variable' deletes a
variable from the list.  The command `copy-dir-locals-to-file-locals'
copies directory-local variables (*note Directory Variables::) to the
list.

   As with the `-*-' line, the variables in a local variables list are
used literally, and are not evaluated first.  If you want to split a
long string across multiple lines of the file, you can use
backslash-newline, which is ignored in Lisp string constants; you
should put the prefix and suffix on each line, even lines that start or
end within the string, as they will be stripped off when processing the
list.  Here is an example:

     # Local Variables:
     # compile-command: "cc foo.c -Dfoo=bar -Dhack=whatever \
     #   -Dmumble=blaah"
     # End:

   Some "variable names" have special meanings in a local variables
list:

   * `mode' enables the specified major or minor mode.

   * `eval' evaluates the specified Lisp expression (the value returned
     by that expression is ignored).

   * `coding' specifies the coding system for character code conversion
     of this file.  *Note Coding Systems::.

   * `unibyte' says to visit the file in a unibyte buffer, if the value
     is `t'.  *Note Enabling Multibyte::.

These four "variables" are not really variables; setting them in any
other context has no special meaning.

   _If `mode' is used to set a major mode, it should be the first
"variable" in the list._  Otherwise, the entries that precede it will
usually have no effect, since most major modes kill all local variables
as part of their initialization.

   You can use the `mode' "variable" to enable minor modes as well as
the major modes; in fact, you can use it more than once, first to set
the major mode and then to enable minor modes which are specific to
particular buffers.

   Often, however, it is a mistake to enable minor modes this way.
Most minor modes, like Auto Fill mode, represent individual user
preferences.  If you want to use a minor mode, it is better to set up
major mode hooks with your init file to turn that minor mode on for
yourself alone (*note Init File::), instead of using a local variable
list to impose your taste on everyone.

   Use the command `normal-mode' to reset the local variables and major
mode of a buffer according to the file name and contents, including the
local variables list if any.  *Note Choosing Modes::.


File: emacs,  Node: Safe File Variables,  Prev: Specifying File Variables,  Up: File Variables

57.3.4.2 Safety of File Variables
.................................

File-local variables can be dangerous; when you visit someone else's
file, there's no telling what its local variables list could do to your
Emacs.  Improper values of the `eval' "variable", and other variables
such as `load-path', could execute Lisp code you didn't intend to run.

   Therefore, whenever Emacs encounters file local variable values that
are not known to be safe, it displays the file's entire local variables
list, and asks you for confirmation before setting them.  You can type
`y' or <SPC> to put the local variables list into effect, or `n' to
ignore it.  When Emacs is run in batch mode (*note Initial Options::),
it can't really ask you, so it assumes the answer `n'.

   Emacs normally recognizes certain variable/value pairs as safe.  For
instance, it is safe to give `comment-column' or `fill-column' any
integer value.  If a file specifies only known-safe variable/value
pairs, Emacs does not ask for confirmation before setting them.
Otherwise, you can tell Emacs to record all the variable/value pairs in
this file as safe, by typing `!' at the confirmation prompt.  When
Emacs encounters these variable/value pairs subsequently, in the same
file or others, it will assume they are safe.

   Some variables, such as `load-path', are considered particularly
"risky": there is seldom any reason to specify them as local variables,
and changing them can be dangerous.  If a file contains only risky
local variables, Emacs neither offers nor accepts `!' as input at the
confirmation prompt.  If some of the local variables in a file are
risky, and some are only potentially unsafe, you can enter `!' at the
prompt.  It applies all the variables, but only marks the non-risky
ones as safe for the future.  If you really want to record safe values
for risky variables, do it directly by customizing
`safe-local-variable-values' (*note Easy Customization::).

   The variable `enable-local-variables' allows you to change the way
Emacs processes local variables.  Its default value is `t', which
specifies the behavior described above.  If it is `nil', Emacs simply
ignores all file local variables.  `:safe' means use only the safe
values and ignore the rest.  Any other value says to query you about
each file that has local variables, without trying to determine whether
the values are known to be safe.

   The variable `enable-local-eval' controls whether Emacs processes
`eval' variables.  The three possibilities for the variable's value are
`t', `nil', and anything else, just as for `enable-local-variables'.
The default is `maybe', which is neither `t' nor `nil', so normally
Emacs does ask for confirmation about processing `eval' variables.

   As an exception, Emacs never asks for confirmation to evaluate any
`eval' form if that form occurs within the variable
`safe-local-eval-forms'.


File: emacs,  Node: Directory Variables,  Prev: File Variables,  Up: Variables

57.3.5 Per-Directory Local Variables
------------------------------------

A "project" is a collection of files on which you work together.
Usually, the project's files are kept in one or more directories.
Occasionally, you may wish to define Emacs settings that are common to
all the files that belong to the project.

   Emacs provides two ways to specify settings that are applicable to
files in a specific directory: you can put a special file in that
directory, or you can define a "project class" for that directory.

   If you put a file with a special name `.dir-locals.el'(1) in a
directory, Emacs will read it when it visits any file in that directory
or any of its subdirectories, and apply the settings it specifies to
the file's buffer.  Emacs searches for `.dir-locals.el' starting in the
directory of the visited file, and moving up the directory tree.  (To
avoid slowdown, this search is skipped for remote files.)

   The `.dir-locals.el' file should hold a specially-constructed list.
This list maps Emacs mode names (symbols) to alists; each alist
specifies values for variables to use when the respective mode is
turned on.  The special mode name `nil' means that its alist applies to
any mode.  Instead of a mode name, you can specify a string that is a
name of a subdirectory of the project's directory; then the
corresponding alist applies to all the files in that subdirectory.

   Here's an example of a `.dir-locals.el' file:

     ((nil . ((indent-tabs-mode . t)
              (tab-width . 4)
              (fill-column . 80)))
      (c-mode . ((c-file-style . "BSD")))
      (java-mode . ((c-file-style . "BSD")))
      ("src/imported"
       . ((nil . ((change-log-default-name . "ChangeLog.local"))))))

This example shows some settings for a hypothetical project.  It sets
`indent-tabs-mode', `tab-width', and `fill-column' for any file in the
project's directory tree, and it sets the indentation style for any C
or Java source file.  Finally, it specifies a different `ChangeLog'
file name for any file in the `src/imported' subdirectory of the
directory where you put the `.dir-locals.el' file.

   You can edit the `.dir-locals.el' file by hand, or use the command
`add-dir-local-variable'.  This prompts for a mode (or subdirectory),
variable and value, and adds an entry to the file.  The command
`delete-dir-local-variable' deletes an entry.  The command
`copy-file-locals-to-dir-locals' copies file local variables (*note
File Variables::) to the `.dir-locals.el' file.

   Another method of specifying directory-local variables is to
explicitly define a project class using
`dir-locals-set-class-variables', and then tell Emacs which directories
correspond to that class, using `dir-locals-set-directory-class'.  You
can put calls to these functions in your `~/.emacs' init file; this can
be useful when you can't put `.dir-locals.el' in the directory for some
reason, or if you want to keep in a single place settings for several
directories that don't have a common parent.  For example, you could
apply settings to an unwritable directory this way:

     (dir-locals-set-class-variables 'unwritable-directory
        '((nil . ((some-useful-setting . value)))))

     (dir-locals-set-directory-class
        "/usr/include/" 'unwritable-directory)

   Unsafe directory-local variables are handled in the same way as
unsafe file-local variables (*note Safe File Variables::).

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) On MS-DOS, the name of this file should be `_dir-locals.el', due
to limitations of the DOS filesystems.  If the filesystem is limited to
8+3 file names, the name of the file will be truncated by the OS to
`_dir-loc.el'.


File: emacs,  Node: Key Bindings,  Next: Syntax,  Prev: Variables,  Up: Customization

57.4 Customizing Key Bindings
=============================

This section describes "key bindings", which map keys to commands, and
"keymaps", which record key bindings.  It also explains how to
customize key bindings, which is done by editing your init file (*note
Init Rebinding::).

* Menu:

* Keymaps::             Generalities.  The global keymap.
* Prefix Keymaps::      Keymaps for prefix keys.
* Local Keymaps::       Major and minor modes have their own keymaps.
* Minibuffer Maps::     The minibuffer uses its own local keymaps.
* Rebinding::           How to redefine one key's meaning conveniently.
* Init Rebinding::      Rebinding keys with your init file, `.emacs'.
* Modifier Keys::       Using modifier keys in key bindings.
* Function Keys::       Rebinding terminal function keys.
* Named ASCII Chars::   Distinguishing <TAB> from C-i, and so on.
* Mouse Buttons::       Rebinding mouse buttons in Emacs.
* Disabling::           Disabling a command means confirmation is required
                          before it can be executed.  This is done to protect
                          beginners from surprises.


File: emacs,  Node: Keymaps,  Next: Prefix Keymaps,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.1 Keymaps
--------------

As described in *Note Commands::, each Emacs command is a Lisp function
whose definition provides for interactive use.  Like every Lisp
function, a command has a function name, which usually consists of
lower-case letters and hyphens.

   A "key sequence" ("key", for short) is a sequence of "input events"
that have a meaning as a unit.  Input events include characters,
function keys and mouse buttons--all the inputs that you can send to
the computer.  A key sequence gets its meaning from its "binding",
which says what command it runs.

   The bindings between key sequences and command functions are
recorded in data structures called "keymaps".  Emacs has many of these,
each used on particular occasions.

   The "global" keymap is the most important keymap because it is
always in effect.  The global keymap defines keys for Fundamental mode
(*note Major Modes::); most of these definitions are common to most or
all major modes.  Each major or minor mode can have its own keymap
which overrides the global definitions of some keys.

   For example, a self-inserting character such as `g' is
self-inserting because the global keymap binds it to the command
`self-insert-command'.  The standard Emacs editing characters such as
`C-a' also get their standard meanings from the global keymap.
Commands to rebind keys, such as `M-x global-set-key', work by storing
the new binding in the proper place in the global map (*note
Rebinding::).

   Most modern keyboards have function keys as well as character keys.
Function keys send input events just as character keys do, and keymaps
can have bindings for them.  Key sequences can mix function keys and
characters.  For example, if your keyboard has a <Home> function key,
Emacs can recognize key sequences like `C-x <Home>'.  You can even mix
mouse events with keyboard events, such as `S-down-mouse-1'.

   On text terminals, typing a function key actually sends the computer
a sequence of characters; the precise details of the sequence depends
on the function key and on the terminal type.  (Often the sequence
starts with `<ESC> ['.)  If Emacs understands your terminal type
properly, it automatically handles such sequences as single input
events.


File: emacs,  Node: Prefix Keymaps,  Next: Local Keymaps,  Prev: Keymaps,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.2 Prefix Keymaps
---------------------

Internally, Emacs records only single events in each keymap.
Interpreting a key sequence of multiple events involves a chain of
keymaps: the first keymap gives a definition for the first event, which
is another keymap, which is used to look up the second event in the
sequence, and so on.  Thus, a prefix key such as `C-x' or <ESC> has its
own keymap, which holds the definition for the event that immediately
follows that prefix.

   The definition of a prefix key is usually the keymap to use for
looking up the following event.  The definition can also be a Lisp
symbol whose function definition is the following keymap; the effect is
the same, but it provides a command name for the prefix key that can be
used as a description of what the prefix key is for.  Thus, the binding
of `C-x' is the symbol `Control-X-prefix', whose function definition is
the keymap for `C-x' commands.  The definitions of `C-c', `C-x', `C-h'
and <ESC> as prefix keys appear in the global map, so these prefix keys
are always available.

   Aside from ordinary prefix keys, there is a fictitious "prefix key"
which represents the menu bar; see *Note Menu Bar: (elisp)Menu Bar, for
special information about menu bar key bindings.  Mouse button events
that invoke pop-up menus are also prefix keys; see *Note Menu Keymaps:
(elisp)Menu Keymaps, for more details.

   Some prefix keymaps are stored in variables with names:

   * `ctl-x-map' is the variable name for the map used for characters
     that follow `C-x'.

   * `help-map' is for characters that follow `C-h'.

   * `esc-map' is for characters that follow <ESC>.  Thus, all Meta
     characters are actually defined by this map.

   * `ctl-x-4-map' is for characters that follow `C-x 4'.

   * `mode-specific-map' is for characters that follow `C-c'.


File: emacs,  Node: Local Keymaps,  Next: Minibuffer Maps,  Prev: Prefix Keymaps,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.3 Local Keymaps
--------------------

So far, we have explained the ins and outs of the global map.  Major
modes customize Emacs by providing their own key bindings in "local
keymaps".  For example, C mode overrides <TAB> to make it indent the
current line for C code.  Minor modes can also have local keymaps;
whenever a minor mode is in effect, the definitions in its keymap
override both the major mode's local keymap and the global keymap.  In
addition, portions of text in the buffer can specify their own keymaps,
which override all other keymaps.

   A local keymap can redefine a key as a prefix key by defining it as
a prefix keymap.  If the key is also defined globally as a prefix, its
local and global definitions (both keymaps) effectively combine: both
definitions are used to look up the event that follows the prefix key.
For example, if a local keymap defines `C-c' as a prefix keymap, and
that keymap defines `C-z' as a command, this provides a local meaning
for `C-c C-z'.  This does not affect other sequences that start with
`C-c'; if those sequences don't have their own local bindings, their
global bindings remain in effect.

   Another way to think of this is that Emacs handles a multi-event key
sequence by looking in several keymaps, one by one, for a binding of the
whole key sequence.  First it checks the minor mode keymaps for minor
modes that are enabled, then it checks the major mode's keymap, and then
it checks the global keymap.  This is not precisely how key lookup
works, but it's good enough for understanding the results in ordinary
circumstances.


File: emacs,  Node: Minibuffer Maps,  Next: Rebinding,  Prev: Local Keymaps,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.4 Minibuffer Keymaps
-------------------------

The minibuffer has its own set of local keymaps; they contain various
completion and exit commands.

   * `minibuffer-local-map' is used for ordinary input (no completion).

   * `minibuffer-local-ns-map' is similar, except that <SPC> exits just
     like <RET>.

   * `minibuffer-local-completion-map' is for permissive completion.

   * `minibuffer-local-must-match-map' is for strict completion and for
     cautious completion.

   * Finally, `minibuffer-local-filename-completion-map' and
     `minibuffer-local-must-match-filename-map' are like the two
     previous ones, but they are specifically for file name completion.
     They do not bind <SPC>.


File: emacs,  Node: Rebinding,  Next: Init Rebinding,  Prev: Minibuffer Maps,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.5 Changing Key Bindings Interactively
------------------------------------------

The way to redefine an Emacs key is to change its entry in a keymap.
You can change the global keymap, in which case the change is effective
in all major modes (except those that have their own overriding local
bindings for the same key).  Or you can change a local keymap, which
affects all buffers using the same major mode.

   In this section, we describe how to rebind keys for the present
Emacs session.  *Note Init Rebinding::, for a description of how to
make key rebindings affect future Emacs sessions.

`M-x global-set-key <RET> KEY CMD <RET>'
     Define KEY globally to run CMD.

`M-x local-set-key <RET> KEY CMD <RET>'
     Define KEY locally (in the major mode now in effect) to run CMD.

`M-x global-unset-key <RET> KEY'
     Make KEY undefined in the global map.

`M-x local-unset-key <RET> KEY'
     Make KEY undefined locally (in the major mode now in effect).

   For example, the following binds `C-z' to the `shell' command (*note
Interactive Shell::), replacing the normal global definition of `C-z':

     M-x global-set-key <RET> C-z shell <RET>

The `global-set-key' command reads the command name after the key.
After you press the key, a message like this appears so that you can
confirm that you are binding the key you want:

     Set key C-z to command:

   You can redefine function keys and mouse events in the same way; just
type the function key or click the mouse when it's time to specify the
key to rebind.

   You can rebind a key that contains more than one event in the same
way.  Emacs keeps reading the key to rebind until it is a complete key
(that is, not a prefix key).  Thus, if you type `C-f' for KEY, that's
the end; it enters the minibuffer immediately to read CMD.  But if you
type `C-x', since that's a prefix, it reads another character; if that
is `4', another prefix character, it reads one more character, and so
on.  For example,

     M-x global-set-key <RET> C-x 4 $ spell-other-window <RET>

redefines `C-x 4 $' to run the (fictitious) command
`spell-other-window'.

   You can remove the global definition of a key with
`global-unset-key'.  This makes the key "undefined"; if you type it,
Emacs will just beep.  Similarly, `local-unset-key' makes a key
undefined in the current major mode keymap, which makes the global
definition (or lack of one) come back into effect in that major mode.

   If you have redefined (or undefined) a key and you subsequently wish
to retract the change, undefining the key will not do the job--you need
to redefine the key with its standard definition.  To find the name of
the standard definition of a key, go to a Fundamental mode buffer in a
fresh Emacs and use `C-h c'.  The documentation of keys in this manual
also lists their command names.

   If you want to prevent yourself from invoking a command by mistake,
it is better to disable the command than to undefine the key.  A
disabled command is less work to invoke when you really want to.  *Note
Disabling::.


File: emacs,  Node: Init Rebinding,  Next: Modifier Keys,  Prev: Rebinding,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.6 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File
---------------------------------------

If you have a set of key bindings that you like to use all the time,
you can specify them in your initialization file by writing Lisp code.
*Note Init File::, for a description of the initialization file.

   There are several ways to write a key binding using Lisp.  The
simplest is to use the `kbd' macro, which converts a textual
representation of a key sequence--similar to how we have written key
sequences in this manual--into a form that can be passed as an argument
to `global-set-key'.  For example, here's how to bind `C-z' to the
`shell' command (*note Interactive Shell::):

     (global-set-key (kbd "C-z") 'shell)

The single-quote before the command name, `shell', marks it as a
constant symbol rather than a variable.  If you omit the quote, Emacs
would try to evaluate `shell' as a variable.  This probably causes an
error; it certainly isn't what you want.

   Here are some additional examples, including binding function keys
and mouse events:

     (global-set-key (kbd "C-c y") 'clipboard-yank)
     (global-set-key (kbd "C-M-q") 'query-replace)
     (global-set-key (kbd "<f5>") 'flyspell-mode)
     (global-set-key (kbd "C-<f5>") 'linum-mode)
     (global-set-key (kbd "C-<right>") 'forward-sentence)
     (global-set-key (kbd "<mouse-2>") 'mouse-save-then-kill)
     (global-set-key (kbd "C-<down-mouse-3>") 'mouse-yank-at-click)

   Instead of using the `kbd' macro, you can use a Lisp string or
vector to specify the key sequence.  Using a string is simpler, but
only works for ASCII characters and Meta-modified ASCII characters.
For example, here's how to bind `C-x M-l' to `make-symbolic-link'
(*note Misc File Ops::):

     (global-set-key "\C-x\M-l" 'make-symbolic-link)

   To put <TAB>, <RET>, <ESC>, or <DEL> in the string, use the Emacs
Lisp escape sequences `\t', `\r', `\e', and `\d' respectively.  Here is
an example which binds `C-x <TAB>' to `indent-rigidly' (*note
Indentation::):

     (global-set-key "\C-x\t" 'indent-rigidly)

   When the key sequence includes function keys or mouse button events,
or non-ASCII characters such as `C-=' or `H-a', you can use a vector to
specify the key sequence.  Each element in the vector stands for an
input event; the elements are separated by spaces and surrounded by a
pair of square brackets.  If a vector element is a character, write it
as a Lisp character constant: `?' followed by the character as it would
appear in a string.  Function keys are represented by symbols (*note
Function Keys::); simply write the symbol's name, with no other
delimiters or punctuation.  Here are some examples:

     (global-set-key [?\C-=] 'make-symbolic-link)
     (global-set-key [?\M-\C-=] 'make-symbolic-link)
     (global-set-key [?\H-a] 'make-symbolic-link)
     (global-set-key [f7] 'make-symbolic-link)
     (global-set-key [C-mouse-1] 'make-symbolic-link)

You can use a vector for the simple cases too:

     (global-set-key [?\C-z ?\M-l] 'make-symbolic-link)

   Language and coding systems may cause problems with key bindings for
non-ASCII characters.  *Note Init Non-ASCII::.

   As described in *Note Local Keymaps::, major modes and minor modes
can define local keymaps.  These keymaps are constructed when the mode
is used for the first time in a session.  If you wish to change one of
these keymaps, you must use the "mode hook" (*note Hooks::).

   For example, Texinfo mode runs the hook `texinfo-mode-hook'.  Here's
how you can use the hook to add local bindings for `C-c n' and `C-c p'
in Texinfo mode:

     (add-hook 'texinfo-mode-hook
               '(lambda ()
                  (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-cp" 'backward-paragraph)
                  (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-cn" 'forward-paragraph)))


File: emacs,  Node: Modifier Keys,  Next: Function Keys,  Prev: Init Rebinding,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.7 Modifier Keys
--------------------

The default key bindings in Emacs are set up so that modified
alphabetical characters are case-insensitive.  In other words, `C-A'
does the same thing as `C-a', and `M-A' does the same thing as `M-a'.
This concerns only alphabetical characters, and does not apply to
"shifted" versions of other keys; for instance, `C-@' is not the same
as `C-2'.

   A <Control>-modified alphabetical character is always considered
case-insensitive: Emacs always treats `C-A' as `C-a', `C-B' as `C-b',
and so forth.  The reason for this is historical.

   For all other modifiers, you can make the modified alphabetical
characters case-sensitive when you customize Emacs.  For instance, you
could make `M-a' and `M-A' run different commands.

   Although only the <Control> and <Meta> modifier keys are commonly
used, Emacs supports three other modifier keys.  These are called
<Super>, <Hyper> and <Alt>.  Few terminals provide ways to use these
modifiers; the key labeled <Alt> on most keyboards usually issues the
<Meta> modifier, not <Alt>.  The standard key bindings in Emacs do not
include any characters with these modifiers.  However, you can
customize Emacs to assign meanings to them.  The modifier bits are
labelled as `s-', `H-' and `A-' respectively.

   Even if your keyboard lacks these additional modifier keys, you can
enter it using `C-x @': `C-x @ h' adds the "hyper" flag to the next
character, `C-x @ s' adds the "super" flag, and `C-x @ a' adds the
"alt" flag.  For instance, `C-x @ h C-a' is a way to enter
`Hyper-Control-a'.  (Unfortunately, there is no way to add two
modifiers by using `C-x @' twice for the same character, because the
first one goes to work on the `C-x'.)


File: emacs,  Node: Function Keys,  Next: Named ASCII Chars,  Prev: Modifier Keys,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.8 Rebinding Function Keys
------------------------------

Key sequences can contain function keys as well as ordinary characters.
Just as Lisp characters (actually integers) represent keyboard
characters, Lisp symbols represent function keys.  If the function key
has a word as its label, then that word is also the name of the
corresponding Lisp symbol.  Here are the conventional Lisp names for
common function keys:

`left', `up', `right', `down'
     Cursor arrow keys.

`begin', `end', `home', `next', `prior'
     Other cursor repositioning keys.

`select', `print', `execute', `backtab'
`insert', `undo', `redo', `clearline'
`insertline', `deleteline', `insertchar', `deletechar'
     Miscellaneous function keys.

`f1', `f2', ... `f35'
     Numbered function keys (across the top of the keyboard).

`kp-add', `kp-subtract', `kp-multiply', `kp-divide'
`kp-backtab', `kp-space', `kp-tab', `kp-enter'
`kp-separator', `kp-decimal', `kp-equal'
     Keypad keys (to the right of the regular keyboard), with names or
     punctuation.

`kp-0', `kp-1', ... `kp-9'
     Keypad keys with digits.

`kp-f1', `kp-f2', `kp-f3', `kp-f4'
     Keypad PF keys.

   These names are conventional, but some systems (especially when using
X) may use different names.  To make certain what symbol is used for a
given function key on your terminal, type `C-h c' followed by that key.

   *Note Init Rebinding::, for examples of binding function keys.

   Many keyboards have a "numeric keypad" on the right hand side.  The
numeric keys in the keypad double up as cursor motion keys, toggled by
a key labeled `Num Lock'.  By default, Emacs translates these keys to
the corresponding keys in the main keyboard.  For example, when `Num
Lock' is on, the key labeled `8' on the numeric keypad produces `kp-8',
which is translated to `8'; when `Num Lock' is off, the same key
produces `kp-up', which is translated to <UP>.  If you rebind a key
such as `8' or <UP>, it affects the equivalent keypad key too.
However, if you rebind a `kp-' key directly, that won't affect its
non-keypad equivalent.  Note that the modified keys are not translated:
for instance, if you hold down the <META> key while pressing the `8'
key on the numeric keypad, that generates `M-<kp-8>'.

   Emacs provides a convenient method for binding the numeric keypad
keys, using the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-numlock-setup',
`keypad-shifted-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup'.  These can
be found in the `keyboard' customization group (*note Easy
Customization::).  You can rebind the keys to perform other tasks, such
as issuing numeric prefix arguments.


File: emacs,  Node: Named ASCII Chars,  Next: Mouse Buttons,  Prev: Function Keys,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.9 Named ASCII Control Characters
-------------------------------------

<TAB>, <RET>, <BS>, <LFD>, <ESC> and <DEL> started out as names for
certain ASCII control characters, used so often that they have special
keys of their own.  For instance, <TAB> was another name for `C-i'.
Later, users found it convenient to distinguish in Emacs between these
keys and the "same" control characters typed with the <CTRL> key.
Therefore, on most modern terminals, they are no longer the same: <TAB>
is different from `C-i'.

   Emacs can distinguish these two kinds of input if the keyboard does.
It treats the "special" keys as function keys named `tab', `return',
`backspace', `linefeed', `escape', and `delete'.  These function keys
translate automatically into the corresponding ASCII characters _if_
they have no bindings of their own.  As a result, neither users nor
Lisp programs need to pay attention to the distinction unless they care
to.

   If you do not want to distinguish between (for example) <TAB> and
`C-i', make just one binding, for the ASCII character <TAB> (octal code
011).  If you do want to distinguish, make one binding for this ASCII
character, and another for the "function key" `tab'.

   With an ordinary ASCII terminal, there is no way to distinguish
between <TAB> and `C-i' (and likewise for other such pairs), because
the terminal sends the same character in both cases.


File: emacs,  Node: Mouse Buttons,  Next: Disabling,  Prev: Named ASCII Chars,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.10 Rebinding Mouse Buttons
-------------------------------

Emacs uses Lisp symbols to designate mouse buttons, too.  The ordinary
mouse events in Emacs are "click" events; these happen when you press a
button and release it without moving the mouse.  You can also get
"drag" events, when you move the mouse while holding the button down.
Drag events happen when you finally let go of the button.

   The symbols for basic click events are `mouse-1' for the leftmost
button, `mouse-2' for the next, and so on.  Here is how you can
redefine the second mouse button to split the current window:

     (global-set-key [mouse-2] 'split-window-vertically)

   The symbols for drag events are similar, but have the prefix `drag-'
before the word `mouse'.  For example, dragging the first button
generates a `drag-mouse-1' event.

   You can also define bindings for events that occur when a mouse
button is pressed down.  These events start with `down-' instead of
`drag-'.  Such events are generated only if they have key bindings.
When you get a button-down event, a corresponding click or drag event
will always follow.

   If you wish, you can distinguish single, double, and triple clicks.
A double click means clicking a mouse button twice in approximately the
same place.  The first click generates an ordinary click event.  The
second click, if it comes soon enough, generates a double-click event
instead.  The event type for a double-click event starts with
`double-': for example, `double-mouse-3'.

   This means that you can give a special meaning to the second click at
the same place, but it must act on the assumption that the ordinary
single click definition has run when the first click was received.

   This constrains what you can do with double clicks, but user
interface designers say that this constraint ought to be followed in
any case.  A double click should do something similar to the single
click, only "more so."  The command for the double-click event should
perform the extra work for the double click.

   If a double-click event has no binding, it changes to the
corresponding single-click event.  Thus, if you don't define a
particular double click specially, it executes the single-click command
twice.

   Emacs also supports triple-click events whose names start with
`triple-'.  Emacs does not distinguish quadruple clicks as event types;
clicks beyond the third generate additional triple-click events.
However, the full number of clicks is recorded in the event list, so if
you know Emacs Lisp you can distinguish if you really want to (*note
Click Events: (elisp)Click Events.).  We don't recommend distinct
meanings for more than three clicks, but sometimes it is useful for
subsequent clicks to cycle through the same set of three meanings, so
that four clicks are equivalent to one click, five are equivalent to
two, and six are equivalent to three.

   Emacs also records multiple presses in drag and button-down events.
For example, when you press a button twice, then move the mouse while
holding the button, Emacs gets a `double-drag-' event.  And at the
moment when you press it down for the second time, Emacs gets a
`double-down-' event (which is ignored, like all button-down events, if
it has no binding).

   The variable `double-click-time' specifies how much time can elapse
between clicks and still allow them to be grouped as a multiple click.
Its value is in units of milliseconds.  If the value is `nil', double
clicks are not detected at all.  If the value is `t', then there is no
time limit.  The default is 500.

   The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse can
move between clicks and still allow them to be grouped as a multiple
click.  Its value is in units of pixels on windowed displays and in
units of 1/8 of a character cell on text-mode terminals; the default is
3.

   The symbols for mouse events also indicate the status of the modifier
keys, with the usual prefixes `C-', `M-', `H-', `s-', `A-' and `S-'.
These always precede `double-' or `triple-', which always precede
`drag-' or `down-'.

   A frame includes areas that don't show text from the buffer, such as
the mode line and the scroll bar.  You can tell whether a mouse button
comes from a special area of the screen by means of dummy "prefix
keys."  For example, if you click the mouse in the mode line, you get
the prefix key `mode-line' before the ordinary mouse-button symbol.
Thus, here is how to define the command for clicking the first button in
a mode line to run `scroll-up':

     (global-set-key [mode-line mouse-1] 'scroll-up)

   Here is the complete list of these dummy prefix keys and their
meanings:

`mode-line'
     The mouse was in the mode line of a window.

`vertical-line'
     The mouse was in the vertical line separating side-by-side
     windows.  (If you use scroll bars, they appear in place of these
     vertical lines.)

`vertical-scroll-bar'
     The mouse was in a vertical scroll bar.  (This is the only kind of
     scroll bar Emacs currently supports.)

`menu-bar'
     The mouse was in the menu bar.

`header-line'
     The mouse was in a header line.

   You can put more than one mouse button in a key sequence, but it
isn't usual to do so.


File: emacs,  Node: Disabling,  Prev: Mouse Buttons,  Up: Key Bindings

57.4.11 Disabling Commands
--------------------------

Disabling a command means that invoking it interactively asks for
confirmation from the user.  The purpose of disabling a command is to
prevent users from executing it by accident; we do this for commands
that might be confusing to the uninitiated.

   Attempting to invoke a disabled command interactively in Emacs
displays a window containing the command's name, its documentation, and
some instructions on what to do immediately; then Emacs asks for input
saying whether to execute the command as requested, enable it and
execute it, or cancel.  If you decide to enable the command, you must
then answer another question--whether to do this permanently, or just
for the current session.  (Enabling permanently works by automatically
editing your `.emacs' file.)  You can also type `!' to enable _all_
commands, for the current session only.

   The direct mechanism for disabling a command is to put a non-`nil'
`disabled' property on the Lisp symbol for the command.  Here is the
Lisp program to do this:

     (put 'delete-region 'disabled t)

   If the value of the `disabled' property is a string, that string is
included in the message displayed when the command is used:

     (put 'delete-region 'disabled
          "It's better to use `kill-region' instead.\n")

   You can make a command disabled either by editing the `.emacs' file
directly, or with the command `M-x disable-command', which edits the
`.emacs' file for you.  Likewise, `M-x enable-command' edits `.emacs'
to enable a command permanently.  *Note Init File::.

   If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options
(*note Initial Options::), it will not edit your `~/.emacs' init file.
Doing so could lose information because Emacs has not read your init
file.

   Whether a command is disabled is independent of what key is used to
invoke it; disabling also applies if the command is invoked using
`M-x'.  However, disabling a command has no effect on calling it as a
function from Lisp programs.


File: emacs,  Node: Syntax,  Next: Init File,  Prev: Key Bindings,  Up: Customization

57.5 The Syntax Table
=====================

All the Emacs commands which parse words or balance parentheses are
controlled by the "syntax table".  The syntax table says which
characters are opening delimiters, which are parts of words, which are
string quotes, and so on.  It does this by assigning each character to
one of fifteen-odd "syntax classes".  In some cases it specifies some
additional information also.

   Each major mode has its own syntax table (though related major modes
sometimes share one syntax table), which it installs in each buffer
that uses the mode.  The syntax table installed in the current buffer
is the one that all commands use, so we call it "the" syntax table.

   To display a description of the contents of the current syntax
table, type `C-h s' (`describe-syntax').  The description of each
character includes the string you would have to give to
`modify-syntax-entry' to set up that character's current syntax,
starting with the character which designates its syntax class, plus
some English text to explain its meaning.

   A syntax table is actually a Lisp object, a char-table, whose
elements are cons cells.  For full information on the syntax table, see
*Note Syntax Tables: (elisp)Syntax Tables.


File: emacs,  Node: Init File,  Prev: Syntax,  Up: Customization

57.6 The Init File, `~/.emacs'
==============================

When Emacs is started, it normally tries to load a Lisp program from an
"initialization file", or "init file" for short.  This file, if it
exists, specifies how to initialize Emacs for you.  Emacs looks for
your init file using the filenames `~/.emacs', `~/.emacs.el', or
`~/.emacs.d/init.el'; you can choose to use any one of these three
names (*note Find Init::).  Here, `~/' stands for your home directory.

   You can use the command line switch `-q' to prevent loading your
init file, and `-u' (or `--user') to specify a different user's init
file (*note Initial Options::).

   There can also be a "default init file", which is the library named
`default.el', found via the standard search path for libraries.  The
Emacs distribution contains no such library; your site may create one
for local customizations.  If this library exists, it is loaded
whenever you start Emacs (except when you specify `-q').  But your init
file, if any, is loaded first; if it sets `inhibit-default-init'
non-`nil', then `default' is not loaded.

   Your site may also have a "site startup file"; this is named
`site-start.el', if it exists.  Like `default.el', Emacs finds this
file via the standard search path for Lisp libraries.  Emacs loads this
library before it loads your init file.  To inhibit loading of this
library, use the option `--no-site-file'.  *Note Initial Options::.  We
recommend against using `site-start.el' for changes that some users may
not like.  It is better to put them in `default.el', so that users can
more easily override them.

   You can place `default.el' and `site-start.el' in any of the
directories which Emacs searches for Lisp libraries.  The variable
`load-path' (*note Lisp Libraries::) specifies these directories.  Many
sites put these files in the `site-lisp' subdirectory of the Emacs
installation directory, typically `/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp'.

   Byte-compiling your init file is not recommended (*note Byte
Compilation: (elisp)Byte Compilation.).  It generally does not speed up
startup very much, and often leads to problems when you forget to
recompile the file.  A better solution is to use the Emacs server to
reduce the number of times you have to start Emacs (*note Emacs
Server::).  If your init file defines many functions, consider moving
them to a separate (byte-compiled) file that you load in your init file.

   If you are going to write actual Emacs Lisp programs that go beyond
minor customization, you should read the `Emacs Lisp Reference Manual'.
*Note Emacs Lisp: (elisp)Top.

* Menu:

* Init Syntax::	        Syntax of constants in Emacs Lisp.
* Init Examples::       How to do some things with an init file.
* Terminal Init::       Each terminal type can have an init file.
* Find Init::	        How Emacs finds the init file.
* Init Non-ASCII::      Using non-ASCII characters in an init file.


File: emacs,  Node: Init Syntax,  Next: Init Examples,  Up: Init File

57.6.1 Init File Syntax
-----------------------

The init file contains one or more Lisp expressions.  Each of these
consists of a function name followed by arguments, all surrounded by
parentheses.  For example, `(setq fill-column 60)' calls the function
`setq' to set the variable `fill-column' (*note Filling::) to 60.

   You can set any Lisp variable with `setq', but with certain
variables `setq' won't do what you probably want in the `.emacs' file.
Some variables automatically become buffer-local when set with `setq';
what you want in `.emacs' is to set the default value, using
`setq-default'.  Some customizable minor mode variables do special
things to enable the mode when you set them with Customize, but
ordinary `setq' won't do that; to enable the mode in your `.emacs'
file, call the minor mode command.  The following section has examples
of both of these methods.

   The second argument to `setq' is an expression for the new value of
the variable.  This can be a constant, a variable, or a function call
expression.  In `.emacs', constants are used most of the time.  They
can be:

Numbers:
     Numbers are written in decimal, with an optional initial minus
     sign.

Strings:
     Lisp string syntax is the same as C string syntax with a few extra
     features.  Use a double-quote character to begin and end a string
     constant.

     In a string, you can include newlines and special characters
     literally.  But often it is cleaner to use backslash sequences for
     them: `\n' for newline, `\b' for backspace, `\r' for carriage
     return, `\t' for tab, `\f' for formfeed (control-L), `\e' for
     escape, `\\' for a backslash, `\"' for a double-quote, or `\OOO'
     for the character whose octal code is OOO.  Backslash and
     double-quote are the only characters for which backslash sequences
     are mandatory.

     `\C-' can be used as a prefix for a control character, as in
     `\C-s' for ASCII control-S, and `\M-' can be used as a prefix for
     a Meta character, as in `\M-a' for `Meta-A' or `\M-\C-a' for
     `Control-Meta-A'.

     *Note Init Non-ASCII::, for information about including non-ASCII
     in your init file.

Characters:
     Lisp character constant syntax consists of a `?' followed by
     either a character or an escape sequence starting with `\'.
     Examples: `?x', `?\n', `?\"', `?\)'.  Note that strings and
     characters are not interchangeable in Lisp; some contexts require
     one and some contexts require the other.

     *Note Init Non-ASCII::, for information about binding commands to
     keys which send non-ASCII characters.

True:
     `t' stands for `true'.

False:
     `nil' stands for `false'.

Other Lisp objects:
     Write a single-quote (`'') followed by the Lisp object you want.


File: emacs,  Node: Init Examples,  Next: Terminal Init,  Prev: Init Syntax,  Up: Init File

57.6.2 Init File Examples
-------------------------

Here are some examples of doing certain commonly desired things with
Lisp expressions:

   * Add a directory to the variable `load-path'.  You can then put
     Lisp libraries that are not included with Emacs in this directory,
     and load them with `M-x load-library'.  *Note Lisp Libraries::.

          (add-to-list 'load-path "/path/to/lisp/libraries")

   * Make <TAB> in C mode just insert a tab if point is in the middle
     of a line.

          (setq c-tab-always-indent nil)

     Here we have a variable whose value is normally `t' for `true' and
     the alternative is `nil' for `false'.

   * Make searches case sensitive by default (in all buffers that do not
     override this).

          (setq-default case-fold-search nil)

     This sets the default value, which is effective in all buffers
     that do not have local values for the variable (*note Locals::).
     Setting `case-fold-search' with `setq' affects only the current
     buffer's local value, which is probably not what you want to do in
     an init file.

   * Specify your own email address, if Emacs can't figure it out
     correctly.

          (setq user-mail-address "cheney@torture.gov")

     Various Emacs packages, such as Message mode, consult
     `user-mail-address' when they need to know your email address.
     *Note Mail Headers::.

   * Make Text mode the default mode for new buffers.

          (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)

     Note that `text-mode' is used because it is the command for
     entering Text mode.  The single-quote before it makes the symbol a
     constant; otherwise, `text-mode' would be treated as a variable
     name.

   * Set up defaults for the Latin-1 character set which supports most
     of the languages of Western Europe.

          (set-language-environment "Latin-1")

   * Turn off Line Number mode, a global minor mode.

          (line-number-mode 0)

   * Turn on Auto Fill mode automatically in Text mode and related
     modes.

          (add-hook 'text-mode-hook
            '(lambda () (auto-fill-mode 1)))

     This shows how to add a hook function to a normal hook variable
     (*note Hooks::).  The function we supply is a list starting with
     `lambda', with a single-quote in front of it to make it a list
     constant rather than an expression.

     It's beyond the scope of this manual to explain Lisp functions,
     but for this example it is enough to know that the effect is to
     execute `(auto-fill-mode 1)' when Text mode is entered.  You can
     replace that with any other expression that you like, or with
     several expressions in a row.

     Emacs comes with a function named `turn-on-auto-fill' whose
     definition is `(lambda () (auto-fill-mode 1))'.  Thus, a simpler
     way to write the above example is as follows:

          (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)

   * Load the installed Lisp library named `foo' (actually a file
     `foo.elc' or `foo.el' in a standard Emacs directory).

          (load "foo")

     When the argument to `load' is a relative file name, not starting
     with `/' or `~', `load' searches the directories in `load-path'
     (*note Lisp Libraries::).

   * Load the compiled Lisp file `foo.elc' from your home directory.

          (load "~/foo.elc")

     Here an absolute file name is used, so no searching is done.

   * Tell Emacs to find the definition for the function `myfunction' by
     loading a Lisp library named `mypackage' (i.e. a file
     `mypackage.elc' or `mypackage.el'):

          (autoload 'myfunction "mypackage" "Do what I say." t)

     Here the string `"Do what I say."' is the function's documentation
     string.  You specify it in the `autoload' definition so it will be
     available for help commands even when the package is not loaded.
     The last argument, `t', indicates that this function is
     interactive; that is, it can be invoked interactively by typing
     `M-x myfunction <RET>' or by binding it to a key.  If the function
     is not interactive, omit the `t' or use `nil'.

   * Rebind the key `C-x l' to run the function `make-symbolic-link'
     (*note Init Rebinding::).

          (global-set-key "\C-xl" 'make-symbolic-link)

     or

          (define-key global-map "\C-xl" 'make-symbolic-link)

     Note once again the single-quote used to refer to the symbol
     `make-symbolic-link' instead of its value as a variable.

   * Do the same thing for Lisp mode only.

          (define-key lisp-mode-map "\C-xl" 'make-symbolic-link)

   * Redefine all keys which now run `next-line' in Fundamental mode so
     that they run `forward-line' instead.

          (substitute-key-definition 'next-line 'forward-line
                                     global-map)

   * Make `C-x C-v' undefined.

          (global-unset-key "\C-x\C-v")

     One reason to undefine a key is so that you can make it a prefix.
     Simply defining `C-x C-v ANYTHING' will make `C-x C-v' a prefix,
     but `C-x C-v' must first be freed of its usual non-prefix
     definition.

   * Make `$' have the syntax of punctuation in Text mode.  Note the
     use of a character constant for `$'.

          (modify-syntax-entry ?\$ "." text-mode-syntax-table)

   * Enable the use of the command `narrow-to-region' without
     confirmation.

          (put 'narrow-to-region 'disabled nil)

   * Adjusting the configuration to various platforms and Emacs
     versions.

     Users typically want Emacs to behave the same on all systems, so
     the same init file is right for all platforms.  However, sometimes
     it happens that a function you use for customizing Emacs is not
     available on some platforms or in older Emacs versions.  To deal
     with that situation, put the customization inside a conditional
     that tests whether the function or facility is available, like
     this:

          (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
              (blink-cursor-mode 0))

          (if (boundp 'coding-category-utf-8)
              (set-coding-priority '(coding-category-utf-8)))

     You can also simply disregard the errors that occur if the
     function is not defined.

          (condition case ()
              (set-face-background 'region "grey75")
            (error nil))

     A `setq' on a variable which does not exist is generally harmless,
     so those do not need a conditional.


File: emacs,  Node: Terminal Init,  Next: Find Init,  Prev: Init Examples,  Up: Init File

57.6.3 Terminal-specific Initialization
---------------------------------------

Each terminal type can have a Lisp library to be loaded into Emacs when
it is run on that type of terminal.  For a terminal type named
TERMTYPE, the library is called `term/TERMTYPE' and it is found by
searching the directories `load-path' as usual and trying the suffixes
`.elc' and `.el'.  Normally it appears in the subdirectory `term' of
the directory where most Emacs libraries are kept.

   The usual purpose of the terminal-specific library is to map the
escape sequences used by the terminal's function keys onto more
meaningful names, using `input-decode-map' (or `function-key-map'
before it).  See the file `term/lk201.el' for an example of how this is
done.  Many function keys are mapped automatically according to the
information in the Termcap data base; the terminal-specific library
needs to map only the function keys that Termcap does not specify.

   When the terminal type contains a hyphen, only the part of the name
before the first hyphen is significant in choosing the library name.
Thus, terminal types `aaa-48' and `aaa-30-rv' both use the library
`term/aaa'.  The code in the library can use `(getenv "TERM")' to find
the full terminal type name.

   The library's name is constructed by concatenating the value of the
variable `term-file-prefix' and the terminal type.  Your `.emacs' file
can prevent the loading of the terminal-specific library by setting
`term-file-prefix' to `nil'.

   Emacs runs the hook `term-setup-hook' at the end of initialization,
after both your `.emacs' file and any terminal-specific library have
been read in.  Add hook functions to this hook if you wish to override
part of any of the terminal-specific libraries and to define
initializations for terminals that do not have a library.  *Note
Hooks::.


File: emacs,  Node: Find Init,  Next: Init Non-ASCII,  Prev: Terminal Init,  Up: Init File

57.6.4 How Emacs Finds Your Init File
-------------------------------------

Normally Emacs uses the environment variable `HOME' (*note HOME:
General Variables.) to find `.emacs'; that's what `~' means in a file
name.  If `.emacs' is not found inside `~/' (nor `.emacs.el'), Emacs
looks for `~/.emacs.d/init.el' (which, like `~/.emacs.el', can be
byte-compiled).

   However, if you run Emacs from a shell started by `su', Emacs tries
to find your own `.emacs', not that of the user you are currently
pretending to be.  The idea is that you should get your own editor
customizations even if you are running as the super user.

   More precisely, Emacs first determines which user's init file to use.
It gets your user name from the environment variables `LOGNAME' and
`USER'; if neither of those exists, it uses effective user-ID.  If that
user name matches the real user-ID, then Emacs uses `HOME'; otherwise,
it looks up the home directory corresponding to that user name in the
system's data base of users.


File: emacs,  Node: Init Non-ASCII,  Prev: Find Init,  Up: Init File

57.6.5 Non-ASCII Characters in Init Files
-----------------------------------------

Language and coding systems may cause problems if your init file
contains non-ASCII characters, such as accented letters, in strings or
key bindings.

   If you want to use non-ASCII characters in your init file, you
should put a `-*-coding: CODING-SYSTEM-*-' tag on the first line of the
init file, and specify a coding system that supports the character(s)
in question.  *Note Recognize Coding::.  This is because the defaults
for decoding non-ASCII text might not yet be set up by the time Emacs
reads those parts of your init file which use such strings, possibly
leading Emacs to decode those strings incorrectly.  You should then
avoid adding Emacs Lisp code that modifies the coding system in other
ways, such as calls to `set-language-environment'.

   To bind non-ASCII keys, you must use a vector (*note Init
Rebinding::).  The string syntax cannot be used, since the non-ASCII
characters will be interpreted as meta keys.  For instance:

     (global-set-key [?CHAR] 'some-function)

Type `C-q', followed by the key you want to bind, to insert CHAR.

   *Warning:* if you change the keyboard encoding, or change between
multibyte and unibyte mode, or anything that would alter which code
`C-q' would insert for that character, this key binding may stop
working.  It is therefore advisable to use one and only one coding
system, for your init file as well as the files you edit.  For example,
don't mix the `latin-1' and `latin-9' coding systems.


File: emacs,  Node: Quitting,  Next: Lossage,  Prev: Customization,  Up: Top

58 Quitting and Aborting
************************

`C-g'
`C-<BREAK> (MS-DOS only)'
     Quit: cancel running or partially typed command.

`C-]'
     Abort innermost recursive editing level and cancel the command
     which invoked it (`abort-recursive-edit').

`<ESC> <ESC> <ESC>'
     Either quit or abort, whichever makes sense
     (`keyboard-escape-quit').

`M-x top-level'
     Abort all recursive editing levels that are currently executing.

`C-/'
`C-x u'
`C-_'
     Cancel a previously made change in the buffer contents (`undo').

   There are two ways of canceling a command before it has finished:
"quitting" with `C-g', and "aborting" with `C-]' or `M-x top-level'.
Quitting cancels a partially typed command, or one which is still
running.  Aborting exits a recursive editing level and cancels the
command that invoked the recursive edit.  (*Note Recursive Edit::.)

   Quitting with `C-g' is the way to get rid of a partially typed
command, or a numeric argument that you don't want.  Furthermore, if
you are in the middle of a command that is running, `C-g' stops the
command in a relatively safe way.  For example, if you quit out of a
kill command that is taking a long time, either your text will _all_
still be in the buffer, or it will _all_ be in the kill ring, or maybe
both.  If the region is active, `C-g' deactivates the mark, unless
Transient Mark mode is off (*note Persistent Mark::).  If you are in
the middle of an incremental search, `C-g' does special things; it may
take two successive `C-g' characters to get out of a search.  *Note
Incremental Search::, for details.

   On MS-DOS, the character `C-<BREAK>' serves as a quit character like
`C-g'.  The reason is that it is not feasible, on MS-DOS, to recognize
`C-g' while a command is running, between interactions with the user.
By contrast, it _is_ feasible to recognize `C-<BREAK>' at all times.
*Note MS-DOS Keyboard::.

   `C-g' works by setting the variable `quit-flag' to `t' the instant
`C-g' is typed; Emacs Lisp checks this variable frequently, and quits
if it is non-`nil'.  `C-g' is only actually executed as a command if
you type it while Emacs is waiting for input.  In that case, the
command it runs is `keyboard-quit'.

   On a text terminal, if you quit with `C-g' a second time before the
first `C-g' is recognized, you activate the "emergency escape" feature
and return to the shell.  *Note Emergency Escape::.

   There are some situations where you cannot quit.  When Emacs is
waiting for the operating system to do something, quitting is
impossible unless special pains are taken for the particular system
call within Emacs where the waiting occurs.  We have done this for the
system calls that users are likely to want to quit from, but it's
possible you will encounter a case not handled.  In one very common
case--waiting for file input or output using NFS--Emacs itself knows
how to quit, but many NFS implementations simply do not allow user
programs to stop waiting for NFS when the NFS server is hung.

   Aborting with `C-]' (`abort-recursive-edit') is used to get out of a
recursive editing level and cancel the command which invoked it.
Quitting with `C-g' does not do this, and could not do this, because it
is used to cancel a partially typed command _within_ the recursive
editing level.  Both operations are useful.  For example, if you are in
a recursive edit and type `C-u 8' to enter a numeric argument, you can
cancel that argument with `C-g' and remain in the recursive edit.

   The sequence `<ESC> <ESC> <ESC>' (`keyboard-escape-quit') can either
quit or abort.  (We defined it this way because <ESC> means "get out"
in many PC programs.)  It can cancel a prefix argument, clear a
selected region, or get out of a Query Replace, like `C-g'.  It can get
out of the minibuffer or a recursive edit, like `C-]'.  It can also get
out of splitting the frame into multiple windows, as with `C-x 1'.  One
thing it cannot do, however, is stop a command that is running.  That's
because it executes as an ordinary command, and Emacs doesn't notice it
until it is ready for the next command.

   The command `M-x top-level' is equivalent to "enough" `C-]' commands
to get you out of all the levels of recursive edits that you are in; it
also exits the minibuffer if it is active.  `C-]' gets you out one
level at a time, but `M-x top-level' goes out all levels at once.  Both
`C-]' and `M-x top-level' are like all other commands, and unlike
`C-g', in that they take effect only when Emacs is ready for a command.
`C-]' is an ordinary key and has its meaning only because of its
binding in the keymap.  *Note Recursive Edit::.

   `C-/' (`undo') is not strictly speaking a way of canceling a
command, but you can think of it as canceling a command that already
finished executing.  *Note Undo::, for more information about the undo
facility.


File: emacs,  Node: Lossage,  Next: Bugs,  Prev: Quitting,  Up: Top

59 Dealing with Emacs Trouble
*****************************

This section describes various conditions in which Emacs fails to work
normally, and how to recognize them and correct them.  For a list of
additional problems you might encounter, see *Note Bugs and problems:
(efaq)Bugs and problems, and the file `etc/PROBLEMS' in the Emacs
distribution.  Type `C-h C-f' to read the FAQ; type `C-h C-p' to read
the `PROBLEMS' file.

* Menu:

* DEL Does Not Delete::   What to do if <DEL> doesn't delete.
* Stuck Recursive::       `[...]' in mode line around the parentheses.
* Screen Garbled::        Garbage on the screen.
* Text Garbled::          Garbage in the text.
* Memory Full::           How to cope when you run out of memory.
* After a Crash::         Recovering editing in an Emacs session that crashed.
* Emergency Escape::      Emergency escape---
                            What to do if Emacs stops responding.
* Total Frustration::     When you are at your wits' end.


File: emacs,  Node: DEL Does Not Delete,  Next: Stuck Recursive,  Up: Lossage

59.1 If <DEL> Fails to Delete
=============================

Every keyboard has a large key, usually labelled <Backspace>, which is
ordinarily used to erase the last character that you typed.  We call
this key "the usual erasure key".  In Emacs, it is supposed to be
equivalent to <DEL>.

   When Emacs starts up on a graphical display, it determines
automatically which key should be <DEL>.  In some unusual cases, Emacs
gets the wrong information from the system.  If the usual erasure key
deletes forwards instead of backwards, that is probably what
happened--Emacs ought to be treating the <Backspace> key as <DEL>, but
it isn't.

   Some keyboards also have a <Delete> key, which is ordinarily used to
delete forwards.  If this key deletes backward in Emacs, that too
suggests Emacs got the wrong information--but in the opposite sense.

   On a text-only terminal, if you find the usual erasure key prompts
for a Help command, like `Control-h', instead of deleting a character,
it means that key is actually sending the <BS> character.  Emacs ought
to be treating <BS> as <DEL>, but it isn't.

   In all of those cases, the immediate remedy is the same: use the
command `M-x normal-erase-is-backspace-mode'.  This toggles between the
two modes that Emacs supports for handling <DEL>, so if Emacs starts in
the wrong mode, this should switch to the right mode.  On a text-only
terminal, if you want to ask for help when <BS> is treated as <DEL>,
use <F1>; `C-?' may also work, if it sends character code 127.

   To fix the problem automatically for every Emacs session, you can
put one of the following lines into your `.emacs' file (*note Init
File::).  For the first case above, where <Backspace> deletes forwards
instead of backwards, use this line to make <Backspace> act as <DEL>
(resulting in behavior compatible with Emacs 20 and previous versions):

     (normal-erase-is-backspace-mode 0)

For the other two cases, use this line:

     (normal-erase-is-backspace-mode 1)

   Another way to fix the problem for every Emacs session is to
customize the variable `normal-erase-is-backspace': the value `t'
specifies the mode where <BS> or <BACKSPACE> is <DEL>, and `nil'
specifies the other mode.  *Note Easy Customization::.


File: emacs,  Node: Stuck Recursive,  Next: Screen Garbled,  Prev: DEL Does Not Delete,  Up: Lossage

59.2 Recursive Editing Levels
=============================

Recursive editing levels are important and useful features of Emacs, but
they can seem like malfunctions if you do not understand them.

   If the mode line has square brackets `[...]' around the parentheses
that contain the names of the major and minor modes, you have entered a
recursive editing level.  If you did not do this on purpose, or if you
don't understand what that means, you should just get out of the
recursive editing level.  To do so, type `M-x top-level'.  This is
called getting back to top level.  *Note Recursive Edit::.


File: emacs,  Node: Screen Garbled,  Next: Text Garbled,  Prev: Stuck Recursive,  Up: Lossage

59.3 Garbage on the Screen
==========================

If the text on a text terminal looks wrong, the first thing to do is
see whether it is wrong in the buffer.  Type `C-l' to redisplay the
entire screen.  If the screen appears correct after this, the problem
was entirely in the previous screen update.  (Otherwise, see the
following section.)

   Display updating problems often result from an incorrect terminfo
entry for the terminal you are using.  The file `etc/TERMS' in the
Emacs distribution gives the fixes for known problems of this sort.
`INSTALL' contains general advice for these problems in one of its
sections.  To investigate the possibility that you have this sort of
problem, try Emacs on another terminal made by a different
manufacturer.  If problems happen frequently on one kind of terminal
but not another kind, it is likely to be a bad terminfo entry, though
it could also be due to a bug in Emacs that appears for terminals that
have or that lack specific features.


File: emacs,  Node: Text Garbled,  Next: Memory Full,  Prev: Screen Garbled,  Up: Lossage

59.4 Garbage in the Text
========================

If `C-l' shows that the text is wrong, first type `C-h l' to see what
commands you typed to produce the observed results.  Then try undoing
the changes step by step using `C-x u', until it gets back to a state
you consider correct.

   If a large portion of text appears to be missing at the beginning or
end of the buffer, check for the word `Narrow' in the mode line.  If it
appears, the text you don't see is probably still present, but
temporarily off-limits.  To make it accessible again, type `C-x n w'.
*Note Narrowing::.


File: emacs,  Node: Memory Full,  Next: After a Crash,  Prev: Text Garbled,  Up: Lossage

59.5 Running out of Memory
==========================

If you get the error message `Virtual memory exceeded', save your
modified buffers with `C-x s'.  This method of saving them has the
smallest need for additional memory.  Emacs keeps a reserve of memory
which it makes available when this error happens; that should be enough
to enable `C-x s' to complete its work.  When the reserve has been
used, `!MEM FULL!' appears at the beginning of the mode line,
indicating there is no more reserve.

   Once you have saved your modified buffers, you can exit this Emacs
session and start another, or you can use `M-x kill-some-buffers' to
free space in the current Emacs job.  If this frees up sufficient
space, Emacs will refill its memory reserve, and `!MEM FULL!' will
disappear from the mode line.  That means you can safely go on editing
in the same Emacs session.

   Do not use `M-x buffer-menu' to save or kill buffers when you run
out of memory, because the buffer menu needs a fair amount of memory
itself, and the reserve supply may not be enough.


File: emacs,  Node: After a Crash,  Next: Emergency Escape,  Prev: Memory Full,  Up: Lossage

59.6 Recovery After a Crash
===========================

If Emacs or the computer crashes, you can recover the files you were
editing at the time of the crash from their auto-save files.  To do
this, start Emacs again and type the command `M-x recover-session'.

   This command initially displays a buffer which lists interrupted
session files, each with its date.  You must choose which session to
recover from.  Typically the one you want is the most recent one.  Move
point to the one you choose, and type `C-c C-c'.

   Then `recover-session' considers each of the files that you were
editing during that session; for each such file, it asks whether to
recover that file.  If you answer `y' for a file, it shows the dates of
that file and its auto-save file, then asks once again whether to
recover that file.  For the second question, you must confirm with
`yes'.  If you do, Emacs visits the file but gets the text from the
auto-save file.

   When `recover-session' is done, the files you've chosen to recover
are present in Emacs buffers.  You should then save them.  Only
this--saving them--updates the files themselves.

   As a last resort, if you had buffers with content which were not
associated with any files, or if the autosave was not recent enough to
have recorded important changes, you can use the `etc/emacs-buffer.gdb'
script with GDB (the GNU Debugger) to retrieve them from a core
dump-provided that a core dump was saved, and that the Emacs executable
was not stripped of its debugging symbols.

   As soon as you get the core dump, rename it to another name such as
`core.emacs', so that another crash won't overwrite it.

   To use this script, run `gdb' with the file name of your Emacs
executable and the file name of the core dump, e.g. `gdb /usr/bin/emacs
core.emacs'.  At the `(gdb)' prompt, load the recovery script: `source
/usr/src/emacs/etc/emacs-buffer.gdb'.  Then type the command
`ybuffer-list' to see which buffers are available.  For each buffer, it
lists a buffer number.  To save a buffer, use `ysave-buffer'; you
specify the buffer number, and the file name to write that buffer into.
You should use a file name which does not already exist; if the file
does exist, the script does not make a backup of its old contents.


File: emacs,  Node: Emergency Escape,  Next: Total Frustration,  Prev: After a Crash,  Up: Lossage

59.7 Emergency Escape
=====================

On text-only terminals, the "emergency escape" feature suspends Emacs
immediately if you type `C-g' a second time before Emacs can actually
respond to the first one by quitting.  This is so you can always get
out of GNU Emacs no matter how badly it might be hung.  When things are
working properly, Emacs recognizes and handles the first `C-g' so fast
that the second one won't trigger emergency escape.  However, if some
problem prevents Emacs from handling the first `C-g' properly, then the
second one will get you back to the shell.

   When you resume Emacs after a suspension caused by emergency escape,
it asks two questions before going back to what it had been doing:

     Auto-save? (y or n)
     Abort (and dump core)? (y or n)

Answer each one with `y' or `n' followed by <RET>.

   Saying `y' to `Auto-save?' causes immediate auto-saving of all
modified buffers in which auto-saving is enabled.  Saying `n' skips
this.

   Saying `y' to `Abort (and dump core)?' causes Emacs to crash,
dumping core.  This is to enable a wizard to figure out why Emacs was
failing to quit in the first place.  Execution does not continue after
a core dump.

   If you answer this question `n', Emacs execution resumes.  With
luck, Emacs will ultimately do the requested quit.  If not, each
subsequent `C-g' invokes emergency escape again.

   If Emacs is not really hung, just slow, you may invoke the double
`C-g' feature without really meaning to.  Then just resume and answer
`n' to both questions, and you will get back to the former state.  The
quit you requested will happen by and by.

   Emergency escape is active only for text terminals.  On graphical
displays, you can use the mouse to kill Emacs or switch to another
program.

   On MS-DOS, you must type `C-<BREAK>' (twice) to cause emergency
escape--but there are cases where it won't work, when system call hangs
or when Emacs is stuck in a tight loop in C code.


File: emacs,  Node: Total Frustration,  Prev: Emergency Escape,  Up: Lossage

59.8 Help for Total Frustration
===============================

If using Emacs (or something else) becomes terribly frustrating and none
of the techniques described above solve the problem, Emacs can still
help you.

   First, if the Emacs you are using is not responding to commands, type
`C-g C-g' to get out of it and then start a new one.

   Second, type `M-x doctor <RET>'.

   The Emacs psychotherapist will help you feel better.  Each time you
say something to the psychotherapist, you must end it by typing <RET>
<RET>.  This indicates you are finished typing.


File: emacs,  Node: Bugs,  Next: Contributing,  Prev: Lossage,  Up: Top

60 Reporting Bugs
*****************

Sometimes you will encounter a bug in Emacs.  Although we cannot
promise we can or will fix the bug, and we might not even agree that it
is a bug, we want to hear about problems you encounter.  Often we agree
they are bugs and want to fix them.

   To make it possible for us to fix a bug, you must report it.  In
order to do so effectively, you must know when and how to do it.

   Before reporting a bug, it is a good idea to see if it is already
known.  You can find the list of known problems in the file
`etc/PROBLEMS' in the Emacs distribution; type `C-h C-p' to read it.
Some additional user-level problems can be found in *Note Bugs and
problems: (efaq)Bugs and problems.  Looking up your problem in these
two documents might provide you with a solution or a work-around, or
give you additional information about related issues.

* Menu:

* Criteria:  Bug Criteria.	 Have you really found a bug?
* Understanding Bug Reporting::	 How to report a bug effectively.
* Checklist::			 Steps to follow for a good bug report.
* Sending Patches::		 How to send a patch for GNU Emacs.


File: emacs,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Understanding Bug Reporting,  Up: Bugs

60.1 When Is There a Bug
========================

If Emacs accesses an invalid memory location ("segmentation fault"), or
exits with an operating system error message that indicates a problem
in the program (as opposed to something like "disk full"), then it is
certainly a bug.

   If Emacs updates the display in a way that does not correspond to
what is in the buffer, then it is certainly a bug.  If a command seems
to do the wrong thing but the problem corrects itself if you type
`C-l', it is a case of incorrect display updating.

   Taking forever to complete a command can be a bug, but you must make
certain that it was really Emacs's fault.  Some commands simply take a
long time.  Type `C-g' (`C-<BREAK>' on MS-DOS) and then `C-h l' to see
whether the input Emacs received was what you intended to type; if the
input was such that you _know_ it should have been processed quickly,
report a bug.  If you don't know whether the command should take a long
time, find out by looking in the manual or by asking for assistance.

   If a command you are familiar with causes an Emacs error message in a
case where its usual definition ought to be reasonable, it is probably a
bug.

   If a command does the wrong thing, that is a bug.  But be sure you
know for certain what it ought to have done.  If you aren't familiar
with the command, or don't know for certain how the command is supposed
to work, then it might actually be working right.  Rather than jumping
to conclusions, show the problem to someone who knows for certain.

   Finally, a command's intended definition may not be the best
possible definition for editing with.  This is a very important sort of
problem, but it is also a matter of judgment.  Also, it is easy to come
to such a conclusion out of ignorance of some of the existing features.
It is probably best not to complain about such a problem until you
have checked the documentation in the usual ways, feel confident that
you understand it, and know for certain that what you want is not
available.  Ask other Emacs users, too.  If you are not sure what the
command is supposed to do after a careful reading of the manual, check
the index and glossary for any terms that may be unclear.

   If after careful rereading of the manual you still do not understand
what the command should do, that indicates a bug in the manual, which
you should report.  The manual's job is to make everything clear to
people who are not Emacs experts--including you.  It is just as
important to report documentation bugs as program bugs.

   If the on-line documentation string of a function or variable
disagrees with the manual, one of them must be wrong; that is a bug.


File: emacs,  Node: Understanding Bug Reporting,  Next: Checklist,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Bugs

60.2 Understanding Bug Reporting
================================

When you decide that there is a bug, it is important to report it and to
report it in a way which is useful.  What is most useful is an exact
description of what commands you type, starting with the shell command
to run Emacs, until the problem happens.

   The most important principle in reporting a bug is to report
_facts_.  Hypotheses and verbal descriptions are no substitute for the
detailed raw data.  Reporting the facts is straightforward, but many
people strain to posit explanations and report them instead of the
facts.  If the explanations are based on guesses about how Emacs is
implemented, they will be useless; meanwhile, lacking the facts, we will
have no real information about the bug.

   For example, suppose that you type `C-x C-f /glorp/baz.ugh <RET>',
visiting a file which (you know) happens to be rather large, and Emacs
displays `I feel pretty today'.  The best way to report the bug is with
a sentence like the preceding one, because it gives all the facts.

   A bad way would be to assume that the problem is due to the size of
the file and say, "I visited a large file, and Emacs displayed `I feel
pretty today'."  This is what we mean by "guessing explanations."  The
problem is just as likely to be due to the fact that there is a `z' in
the file name.  If this is so, then when we got your report, we would
try out the problem with some "large file," probably with no `z' in its
name, and not see any problem.  There is no way in the world that we
could guess that we should try visiting a file with a `z' in its name.

   Alternatively, the problem might be due to the fact that the file
starts with exactly 25 spaces.  For this reason, you should make sure
that you inform us of the exact contents of any file that is needed to
reproduce the bug.  What if the problem only occurs when you have typed
the `C-x C-a' command previously?  This is why we ask you to give the
exact sequence of characters you typed since starting the Emacs session.

   You should not even say "visit a file" instead of `C-x C-f' unless
you _know_ that it makes no difference which visiting command is used.
Similarly, rather than saying "if I have three characters on the line,"
say "after I type `<RET> A B C <RET> C-p'," if that is the way you
entered the text.

   So please don't guess any explanations when you report a bug.  If you
want to actually _debug_ the problem, and report explanations that are
more than guesses, that is useful--but please include the facts as well.


File: emacs,  Node: Checklist,  Next: Sending Patches,  Prev: Understanding Bug Reporting,  Up: Bugs

60.3 Checklist for Bug Reports
==============================

The best way to send a bug report is to mail it electronically to the
Emacs maintainers at <bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org>.  (If you want to suggest
a change as an improvement, use the same address.)

   If you'd like to read the bug reports, you can find them on the
newsgroup `gnu.emacs.bug'; keep in mind, however, that as a spectator
you should not criticize anything about what you see there.  The
purpose of bug reports is to give information to the Emacs maintainers.
Spectators are welcome only as long as they do not interfere with
this.  In particular, some bug reports contain fairly large amounts of
data; spectators should not complain about this.

   Please do not post bug reports using netnews; mail is more reliable
than netnews about reporting your correct address, which we may need in
order to ask you for more information.  If your data is more than
500,000 bytes, please don't include it directly in the bug report;
instead, offer to send it on request, or make it available by ftp and
say where.

   A convenient way to send a bug report for Emacs is to use the command
`M-x report-emacs-bug'.  This sets up a mail buffer (*note Sending
Mail::) and automatically inserts _some_ of the essential information.
However, it cannot supply all the necessary information; you should
still read and follow the guidelines below, so you can enter the other
crucial information by hand before you send the message.

   To enable maintainers to investigate a bug, your report should
include all these things:

   * The version number of Emacs.  Without this, we won't know whether
     there is any point in looking for the bug in the current version
     of GNU Emacs.

     You can get the version number by typing `M-x emacs-version
     <RET>'.  If that command does not work, you probably have something
     other than GNU Emacs, so you will have to report the bug somewhere
     else.

   * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
     and version number.  `M-x emacs-version <RET>' provides this
     information too.  Copy its output from the `*Messages*' buffer, so
     that you get it all and get it accurately.

   * The operands given to the `configure' command when Emacs was
     installed.

   * A complete list of any modifications you have made to the Emacs
     source.  (We may not have time to investigate the bug unless it
     happens in an unmodified Emacs.  But if you've made modifications
     and you don't tell us, you are sending us on a wild goose chase.)

     Be precise about these changes.  A description in English is not
     enough--send a context diff for them.

     Adding files of your own, or porting to another machine, is a
     modification of the source.

   * Details of any other deviations from the standard procedure for
     installing GNU Emacs.

   * The complete text of any files needed to reproduce the bug.

     If you can tell us a way to cause the problem without visiting any
     files, please do so.  This makes it much easier to debug.  If you
     do need files, make sure you arrange for us to see their exact
     contents.  For example, it can matter whether there are spaces at
     the ends of lines, or a newline after the last line in the buffer
     (nothing ought to care whether the last line is terminated, but
     try telling the bugs that).

   * The precise commands we need to type to reproduce the bug.

     The easy way to record the input to Emacs precisely is to write a
     dribble file.  To start the file, execute the Lisp expression

          (open-dribble-file "~/dribble")

     using `M-:' or from the `*scratch*' buffer just after starting
     Emacs.  From then on, Emacs copies all your input to the specified
     dribble file until the Emacs process is killed.

   * For possible display bugs, the terminal type (the value of
     environment variable `TERM'), the complete termcap entry for the
     terminal from `/etc/termcap' (since that file is not identical on
     all machines), and the output that Emacs actually sent to the
     terminal.

     The way to collect the terminal output is to execute the Lisp
     expression

          (open-termscript "~/termscript")

     using `M-:' or from the `*scratch*' buffer just after starting
     Emacs.  From then on, Emacs copies all terminal output to the
     specified termscript file as well, until the Emacs process is
     killed.  If the problem happens when Emacs starts up, put this
     expression into your `.emacs' file so that the termscript file
     will be open when Emacs displays the screen for the first time.

     Be warned: it is often difficult, and sometimes impossible, to fix
     a terminal-dependent bug without access to a terminal of the type
     that stimulates the bug.

   * If non-ASCII text or internationalization is relevant, the locale
     that was current when you started Emacs.  On GNU/Linux and Unix
     systems, or if you use a Posix-style shell such as Bash, you can
     use this shell command to view the relevant values:

          echo LC_ALL=$LC_ALL LC_COLLATE=$LC_COLLATE LC_CTYPE=$LC_CTYPE \
            LC_MESSAGES=$LC_MESSAGES LC_TIME=$LC_TIME LANG=$LANG

     Alternatively, use the `locale' command, if your system has it, to
     display your locale settings.

     You can use the `M-!' command to execute these commands from
     Emacs, and then copy the output from the `*Messages*' buffer into
     the bug report.  Alternatively, `M-x getenv <RET> LC_ALL <RET>'
     will display the value of `LC_ALL' in the echo area, and you can
     copy its output from the `*Messages*' buffer.

   * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
     incorrect.  For example, "The Emacs process gets a fatal signal,"
     or, "The resulting text is as follows, which I think is wrong."

     Of course, if the bug is that Emacs gets a fatal signal, then one
     can't miss it.  But if the bug is incorrect text, the maintainer
     might fail to notice what is wrong.  Why leave it to chance?

     Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
     still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
     such as, your copy of the source is out of sync, or you have
     encountered a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has
     happened!)  Your copy might crash and the copy here might not.  If
     you _said_ to expect a crash, then when Emacs here fails to crash,
     we would know that the bug was not happening.  If you don't say to
     expect a crash, then we would not know whether the bug was
     happening--we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
     observations.

   * If the bug is that the Emacs Manual or the Emacs Lisp Reference
     Manual fails to describe the actual behavior of Emacs, or that the
     text is confusing, copy in the text from the online manual which
     you think is at fault.  If the section is small, just the section
     name is enough.

   * If the manifestation of the bug is an Emacs error message, it is
     important to report the precise text of the error message, and a
     backtrace showing how the Lisp program in Emacs arrived at the
     error.

     To get the error message text accurately, copy it from the
     `*Messages*' buffer into the bug report.  Copy all of it, not just
     part.

     To make a backtrace for the error, use `M-x toggle-debug-on-error'
     before the error happens (that is to say, you must give that
     command and then make the bug happen).  This causes the error to
     start the Lisp debugger, which shows you a backtrace.  Copy the
     text of the debugger's backtrace into the bug report.  *Note The
     Lisp Debugger: (elisp)Debugger, for information on debugging Emacs
     Lisp programs with the Edebug package.

     This use of the debugger is possible only if you know how to make
     the bug happen again.  If you can't make it happen again, at least
     copy the whole error message.

   * Check whether any programs you have loaded into the Lisp world,
     including your `.emacs' file, set any variables that may affect the
     functioning of Emacs.  Also, see whether the problem happens in a
     freshly started Emacs without loading your `.emacs' file (start
     Emacs with the `-q' switch to prevent loading the init file).  If
     the problem does _not_ occur then, you must report the precise
     contents of any programs that you must load into the Lisp world in
     order to cause the problem to occur.

   * If the problem does depend on an init file or other Lisp programs
     that are not part of the standard Emacs system, then you should
     make sure it is not a bug in those programs by complaining to
     their maintainers first.  After they verify that they are using
     Emacs in a way that is supposed to work, they should report the
     bug.

   * If you wish to mention something in the GNU Emacs source, show the
     line of code with a few lines of context.  Don't just give a line
     number.

     The line numbers in the development sources don't match those in
     your sources.  It would take extra work for the maintainers to
     determine what code is in your version at a given line number, and
     we could not be certain.

   * Additional information from a C debugger such as GDB might enable
     someone to find a problem on a machine which he does not have
     available.  If you don't know how to use GDB, please read the GDB
     manual--it is not very long, and using GDB is easy.  You can find
     the GDB distribution, including the GDB manual in online form, in
     most of the same places you can find the Emacs distribution.  To
     run Emacs under GDB, you should switch to the `src' subdirectory
     in which Emacs was compiled, then do `gdb emacs'.  It is important
     for the directory `src' to be current so that GDB will read the
     `.gdbinit' file in this directory.

     However, you need to think when you collect the additional
     information if you want it to show what causes the bug.

     For example, many people send just a backtrace, but that is not
     very useful by itself.  A simple backtrace with arguments often
     conveys little about what is happening inside GNU Emacs, because
     most of the arguments listed in the backtrace are pointers to Lisp
     objects.  The numeric values of these pointers have no
     significance whatever; all that matters is the contents of the
     objects they point to (and most of the contents are themselves
     pointers).

     To provide useful information, you need to show the values of Lisp
     objects in Lisp notation.  Do this for each variable which is a
     Lisp object, in several stack frames near the bottom of the stack.
     Look at the source to see which variables are Lisp objects,
     because the debugger thinks of them as integers.

     To show a variable's value in Lisp syntax, first print its value,
     then use the user-defined GDB command `pr' to print the Lisp
     object in Lisp syntax.  (If you must use another debugger, call
     the function `debug_print' with the object as an argument.)  The
     `pr' command is defined by the file `.gdbinit', and it works only
     if you are debugging a running process (not with a core dump).

     To make Lisp errors stop Emacs and return to GDB, put a breakpoint
     at `Fsignal'.

     For a short listing of Lisp functions running, type the GDB
     command `xbacktrace'.

     The file `.gdbinit' defines several other commands that are useful
     for examining the data types and contents of Lisp objects.  Their
     names begin with `x'.  These commands work at a lower level than
     `pr', and are less convenient, but they may work even when `pr'
     does not, such as when debugging a core dump or when Emacs has had
     a fatal signal.

     More detailed advice and other useful techniques for debugging
     Emacs are available in the file `etc/DEBUG' in the Emacs
     distribution.  That file also includes instructions for
     investigating problems whereby Emacs stops responding (many people
     assume that Emacs is "hung," whereas in fact it might be in an
     infinite loop).

     To find the file `etc/DEBUG' in your Emacs installation, use the
     directory name stored in the variable `data-directory'.

   Here are some things that are not necessary in a bug report:

   * A description of the envelope of the bug--this is not necessary
     for a reproducible bug.

     Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
     which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
     changes will not affect it.

     This is often time-consuming and not very useful, because the way
     we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
     debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
     examples.  You might as well save time by not searching for
     additional examples.  It is better to send the bug report right
     away, go back to editing, and find another bug to report.

     Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_ of
     the original one, that is a convenience.  Errors in the output
     will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take less
     time, etc.

     However, simplification is not vital; if you can't do this or
     don't have time to try, please report the bug with your original
     test case.

   * A core dump file.

     Debugging the core dump might be useful, but it can only be done on
     your machine, with your Emacs executable.  Therefore, sending the
     core dump file to the Emacs maintainers won't be useful.  Above
     all, don't include the core file in an email bug report!  Such a
     large message can be extremely inconvenient.

   * A system-call trace of Emacs execution.

     System-call traces are very useful for certain special kinds of
     debugging, but in most cases they give little useful information.
     It is therefore strange that many people seem to think that _the_
     way to report information about a crash is to send a system-call
     trace.  Perhaps this is a habit formed from experience debugging
     programs that don't have source code or debugging symbols.

     In most programs, a backtrace is normally far, far more
     informative than a system-call trace.  Even in Emacs, a simple
     backtrace is generally more informative, though to give full
     information you should supplement the backtrace by displaying
     variable values and printing them as Lisp objects with `pr' (see
     above).

   * A patch for the bug.

     A patch for the bug is useful if it is a good one.  But don't omit
     the other information that a bug report needs, such as the test
     case, on the assumption that a patch is sufficient.  We might see
     problems with your patch and decide to fix the problem another
     way, or we might not understand it at all.  And if we can't
     understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your patch
     should be an improvement, we mustn't install it.

     *Note Sending Patches::, for guidelines on how to make it easy for
     us to understand and install your patches.

   * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.

     Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even experts can't guess right
     about such things without first using the debugger to find the
     facts.


File: emacs,  Node: Sending Patches,  Prev: Checklist,  Up: Bugs

60.4 Sending Patches for GNU Emacs
==================================

If you would like to write bug fixes or improvements for GNU Emacs,
that is very helpful.  When you send your changes, please follow these
guidelines to make it easy for the maintainers to use them.  If you
don't follow these guidelines, your information might still be useful,
but using it will take extra work.  Maintaining GNU Emacs is a lot of
work in the best of circumstances, and we can't keep up unless you do
your best to help.

   * Send an explanation with your changes of what problem they fix or
     what improvement they bring about.  For a bug fix, just include a
     copy of the bug report, and explain why the change fixes the bug.

     (Referring to a bug report is not as good as including it, because
     then we will have to look it up, and we have probably already
     deleted it if we've already fixed the bug.)

   * Always include a proper bug report for the problem you think you
     have fixed.  We need to convince ourselves that the change is
     right before installing it.  Even if it is correct, we might have
     trouble understanding it if we don't have a way to reproduce the
     problem.

   * Include all the comments that are appropriate to help people
     reading the source in the future understand why this change was
     needed.

   * Don't mix together changes made for different reasons.  Send them
     _individually_.

     If you make two changes for separate reasons, then we might not
     want to install them both.  We might want to install just one.  If
     you send them all jumbled together in a single set of diffs, we
     have to do extra work to disentangle them--to figure out which
     parts of the change serve which purpose.  If we don't have time
     for this, we might have to ignore your changes entirely.

     If you send each change as soon as you have written it, with its
     own explanation, then two changes never get tangled up, and we can
     consider each one properly without any extra work to disentangle
     them.

   * Send each change as soon as that change is finished.  Sometimes
     people think they are helping us by accumulating many changes to
     send them all together.  As explained above, this is absolutely
     the worst thing you could do.

     Since you should send each change separately, you might as well
     send it right away.  That gives us the option of installing it
     immediately if it is important.

   * Use `diff -c' to make your diffs.  Diffs without context are hard
     to install reliably.  More than that, they are hard to study; we
     must always study a patch to decide whether we want to install it.
     Unidiff format is better than contextless diffs, but not as easy
     to read as `-c' format.

     If you have GNU diff, use `diff -c -F'^[_a-zA-Z0-9$]+ *('' when
     making diffs of C code.  This shows the name of the function that
     each change occurs in.

   * Avoid any ambiguity as to which is the old version and which is
     the new.  Please make the old version the first argument to diff,
     and the new version the second argument.  And please give one
     version or the other a name that indicates whether it is the old
     version or your new changed one.

   * Write the change log entries for your changes.  This is both to
     save us the extra work of writing them, and to help explain your
     changes so we can understand them.

     The purpose of the change log is to show people where to find what
     was changed.  So you need to be specific about what functions you
     changed; in large functions, it's often helpful to indicate where
     within the function the change was.

     On the other hand, once you have shown people where to find the
     change, you need not explain its purpose in the change log.  Thus,
     if you add a new function, all you need to say about it is that it
     is new.  If you feel that the purpose needs explaining, it
     probably does--but put the explanation in comments in the code.
     It will be more useful there.

     Please read the `ChangeLog' files in the `src' and `lisp'
     directories to see what sorts of information to put in, and to
     learn the style that we use.  *Note Change Log::.

   * When you write the fix, keep in mind that we can't install a
     change that would break other systems.  Please think about what
     effect your change will have if compiled on another type of system.

     Sometimes people send fixes that _might_ be an improvement in
     general--but it is hard to be sure of this.  It's hard to install
     such changes because we have to study them very carefully.  Of
     course, a good explanation of the reasoning by which you concluded
     the change was correct can help convince us.

     The safest changes are changes to the configuration files for a
     particular machine.  These are safe because they can't create new
     bugs on other machines.

     Please help us keep up with the workload by designing the patch in
     a form that is clearly safe to install.


File: emacs,  Node: Contributing,  Next: Service,  Prev: Bugs,  Up: Top

61 Contributing to Emacs Development
************************************

If you would like to help pretest Emacs releases to assure they work
well, or if you would like to work on improving Emacs, please contact
the maintainers at <emacs-devel@gnu.org>.  A pretester should be
prepared to investigate bugs as well as report them.  If you'd like to
work on improving Emacs, please ask for suggested projects or suggest
your own ideas.

   If you have already written an improvement, please tell us about it.
If you have not yet started work, it is useful to contact
<emacs-devel@gnu.org> before you start; it might be possible to suggest
ways to make your extension fit in better with the rest of Emacs.

   The development version of Emacs can be downloaded from the
repository where it is actively maintained by a group of developers.
See the Emacs project page `http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/'
for details.

   For more information on how to contribute, see the `etc/CONTRIBUTE'
file in the Emacs distribution.


File: emacs,  Node: Service,  Next: Copying,  Prev: Contributing,  Up: Top

62 How To Get Help with GNU Emacs
*********************************

If you need help installing, using or changing GNU Emacs, there are two
ways to find it:

   * Send a message to the mailing list <help-gnu-emacs@gnu.org>, or
     post your request on newsgroup `gnu.emacs.help'.  (This mailing
     list and newsgroup interconnect, so it does not matter which one
     you use.)

   * Look in the service directory for someone who might help you for a
     fee.  The service directory is found in the file named
     `etc/SERVICE' in the Emacs distribution.


File: emacs,  Node: Copying,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Service,  Up: Top

Appendix A GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
*************************************

                        Version 3, 29 June 2007

     Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. `http://fsf.org/'

     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
     license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble
========

The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software
and other kinds of works.

   The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
to take away your freedom to share and change the works.  By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains
free software for all its users.  We, the Free Software Foundation, use
the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies
also to any other work released this way by its authors.  You can apply
it to your programs, too.

   When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
free programs, and that you know you can do these things.

   To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
these rights or asking you to surrender the rights.  Therefore, you
have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software,
or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.

   For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
freedoms that you received.  You must make sure that they, too, receive
or can get the source code.  And you must show them these terms so they
know their rights.

   Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.

   For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
that there is no warranty for this free software.  For both users' and
authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
authors of previous versions.

   Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
modified versions of the software inside them, although the
manufacturer can do so.  This is fundamentally incompatible with the
aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software.  The
systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for
individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.
Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the
practice for those products.  If such problems arise substantially in
other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains
in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of
users.

   Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
make it effectively proprietary.  To prevent this, the GPL assures that
patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.

   The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS
====================

  0. Definitions.

     "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public
     License.

     "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other
     kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.

     "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
     License.  Each licensee is addressed as "you".  "Licensees" and
     "recipients" may be individuals or organizations.

     To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the
     work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the
     making of an exact copy.  The resulting work is called a "modified
     version" of the earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.

     A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work
     based on the Program.

     To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
     permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
     infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it
     on a computer or modifying a private copy.  Propagation includes
     copying, distribution (with or without modification), making
     available to the public, and in some countries other activities as
     well.

     To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
     parties to make or receive copies.  Mere interaction with a user
     through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not
     conveying.

     An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
     to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
     feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
     tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to
     the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may
     convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this
     License.  If the interface presents a list of user commands or
     options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this
     criterion.

  1. Source Code.

     The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
     for making modifications to it.  "Object code" means any
     non-source form of a work.

     A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an
     official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in
     the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming
     language, one that is widely used among developers working in that
     language.

     The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything,
     other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal
     form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that
     Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work
     with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface
     for which an implementation is available to the public in source
     code form.  A "Major Component", in this context, means a major
     essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the
     specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work
     runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code
     interpreter used to run it.

     The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
     the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
     work) run the object code and to modify the work, including
     scripts to control those activities.  However, it does not include
     the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally
     available free programs which are used unmodified in performing
     those activities but which are not part of the work.  For example,
     Corresponding Source includes interface definition files
     associated with source files for the work, and the source code for
     shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work
     is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data
     communication or control flow between those subprograms and other
     parts of the work.

     The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can
     regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
     Source.

     The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
     same work.

  2. Basic Permissions.

     All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
     copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
     conditions are met.  This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
     permission to run the unmodified Program.  The output from running
     a covered work is covered by this License only if the output,
     given its content, constitutes a covered work.  This License
     acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as
     provided by copyright law.

     You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
     convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise
     remains in force.  You may convey covered works to others for the
     sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for
     you, or provide you with facilities for running those works,
     provided that you comply with the terms of this License in
     conveying all material for which you do not control copyright.
     Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so
     exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on
     terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your
     copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.

     Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
     the conditions stated below.  Sublicensing is not allowed; section
     10 makes it unnecessary.

  3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.

     No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
     measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under
     article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December
     1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of
     such measures.

     When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
     circumvention of technological measures to the extent such
     circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License
     with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention
     to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of
     enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal
     rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.

  4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.

     You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
     receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
     appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
     keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
     non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the
     code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and
     give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.

     You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
     and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.

  5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.

     You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
     produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
     terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these
     conditions:

       a. The work must carry prominent notices stating that you
          modified it, and giving a relevant date.

       b. The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
          released under this License and any conditions added under
          section 7.  This requirement modifies the requirement in
          section 4 to "keep intact all notices".

       c. You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
          License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy.  This
          License will therefore apply, along with any applicable
          section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all
          its parts, regardless of how they are packaged.  This License
          gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but
          it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately
          received it.

       d. If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
          Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has
          interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal
          Notices, your work need not make them do so.

     A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
     works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered
     work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger
     program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is
     called an "aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting
     copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the
     compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
     Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this
     License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.

  6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.

     You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
     of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
     machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this
     License, in one of these ways:

       a. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
          (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
          Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
          customarily used for software interchange.

       b. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
          (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
          written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for
          as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that
          product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code
          either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the
          software in the product that is covered by this License, on a
          durable physical medium customarily used for software
          interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of
          physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access
          to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no
          charge.

       c. Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of
          the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source.  This
          alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially,
          and only if you received the object code with such an offer,
          in accord with subsection 6b.

       d. Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
          place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access
          to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same
          place at no further charge.  You need not require recipients
          to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code.
          If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the
          Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated
          by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying
          facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to
          the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source.
          Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you
          remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long
          as needed to satisfy these requirements.

       e. Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission,
          provided you inform other peers where the object code and
          Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the
          general public at no charge under subsection 6d.


     A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is
     excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need
     not be included in conveying the object code work.

     A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means
     any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal,
     family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for
     incorporation into a dwelling.  In determining whether a product
     is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of
     coverage.  For a particular product received by a particular user,
     "normally used" refers to a typical or common use of that class of
     product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the
     way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is
     expected to use, the product.  A product is a consumer product
     regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial,
     industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the
     only significant mode of use of the product.

     "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
     procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to
     install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that
     User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source.
     The information must suffice to ensure that the continued
     functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or
     interfered with solely because modification has been made.

     If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with,
     or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying
     occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession
     and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in
     perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction
     is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this
     section must be accompanied by the Installation Information.  But
     this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party
     retains the ability to install modified object code on the User
     Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).

     The requirement to provide Installation Information does not
     include a requirement to continue to provide support service,
     warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or
     installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it
     has been modified or installed.  Access to a network may be denied
     when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the
     operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for
     communication across the network.

     Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information
     provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is
     publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the
     public in source code form), and must require no special password
     or key for unpacking, reading or copying.

  7. Additional Terms.

     "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of
     this License by making exceptions from one or more of its
     conditions.  Additional permissions that are applicable to the
     entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in
     this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable
     law.  If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program,
     that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the
     entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to
     the additional permissions.

     When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
     remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part
     of it.  (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
     removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)  You may place
     additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
     for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.

     Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material
     you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright
     holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License
     with terms:

       a. Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from
          the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or

       b. Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices
          or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate
          Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or

       c. Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material,
          or requiring that modified versions of such material be
          marked in reasonable ways as different from the original
          version; or

       d. Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors
          or authors of the material; or

       e. Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
          trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or

       f. Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
          material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified
          versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to
          the recipient, for any liability that these contractual
          assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.

     All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
     restrictions" within the meaning of section 10.  If the Program as
     you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that
     it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further
     restriction, you may remove that term.  If a license document
     contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or
     conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work
     material governed by the terms of that license document, provided
     that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or
     conveying.

     If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
     must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
     additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
     where to find the applicable terms.

     Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in
     the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
     the above requirements apply either way.

  8. Termination.

     You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
     provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
     modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights
     under this License (including any patent licenses granted under
     the third paragraph of section 11).

     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly
     and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
     after your receipt of the notice.

     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
     you under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and
     not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new
     licenses for the same material under section 10.

  9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.

     You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
     run a copy of the Program.  Ancillary propagation of a covered work
     occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer
     transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require
     acceptance.  However, nothing other than this License grants you
     permission to propagate or modify any covered work.  These actions
     infringe copyright if you do not accept this License.  Therefore,
     by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your
     acceptance of this License to do so.

 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.

     Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
     receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
     propagate that work, subject to this License.  You are not
     responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
     License.

     An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
     organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
     organization, or merging organizations.  If propagation of a
     covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
     transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
     licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or
     could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to
     possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the
     predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it
     with reasonable efforts.

     You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
     rights granted or affirmed under this License.  For example, you
     may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for
     exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not
     initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a
     lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making,
     using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any
     portion of it.

 11. Patents.

     A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
     License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.
     The work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor
     version".

     A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
     owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
     hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner,
     permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its
     contributor version, but do not include claims that would be
     infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the
     contributor version.  For purposes of this definition, "control"
     includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner
     consistent with the requirements of this License.

     Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide,
     royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential
     patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and
     otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its
     contributor version.

     In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any
     express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to
     enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a
     patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement).  To
     "grant" such a patent license to a party means to make such an
     agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.

     If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent
     license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available
     for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this
     License, through a publicly available network server or other
     readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the
     Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive
     yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular
     work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements
     of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream
     recipients.  "Knowingly relying" means you have actual knowledge
     that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work
     in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a
     country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
     country that you have reason to believe are valid.

     If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
     arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
     covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
     receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate,
     modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the
     patent license you grant is automatically extended to all
     recipients of the covered work and works based on it.

     A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
     the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
     conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that
     are specifically granted under this License.  You may not convey a
     covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third
     party that is in the business of distributing software, under
     which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of
     your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third
     party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered
     work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection
     with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made
     from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with
     specific products or compilations that contain the covered work,
     unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license
     was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.

     Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
     any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
     otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.

 12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.

     If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
     agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
     License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
     License.  If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy
     simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
     pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it
     at all.  For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to
     collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you
     convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those
     terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying
     the Program.

 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.

     Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
     permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
     under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a
     single combined work, and to convey the resulting work.  The terms
     of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the
     covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero
     General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through
     a network will apply to the combination as such.

 14. Revised Versions of this License.

     The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
     versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time.
     Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
     version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
     concerns.

     Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
     Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU
     General Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you
     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
     that numbered version or of any later version published by the
     Free Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a
     version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose
     any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

     If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
     versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that
     proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
     authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.

     Later license versions may give you additional or different
     permissions.  However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
     author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
     later version.

 15. Disclaimer of Warranty.

     THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
     APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
     COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
     WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
     INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
     MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE
     RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.
     SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
     NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

 16. Limitation of Liability.

     IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
     WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES
     AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
     FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
     CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
     THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
     BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
     PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
     PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
     THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.

     If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
     above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
     reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely
     approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in
     connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of
     liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.


END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
===========================

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
=============================================

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
terms.

   To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

     ONE LINE TO GIVE THE PROGRAM'S NAME AND A BRIEF IDEA OF WHAT IT DOES.
     Copyright (C) YEAR NAME OF AUTHOR

     This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
     it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
     the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at
     your option) any later version.

     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
     WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
     General Public License for more details.

     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     along with this program.  If not, see `http://www.gnu.org/licenses/'.

   Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
mail.

   If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

     PROGRAM Copyright (C) YEAR NAME OF AUTHOR
     This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
     This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
     under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.

   The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the
appropriate parts of the General Public License.  Of course, your
program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would
use an "about box".

   You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or
school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
necessary.  For more information on this, and how to apply and follow
the GNU GPL, see `http://www.gnu.org/licenses/'.

   The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your
program into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
applications with the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the
GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.  But first,
please read `http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html'.


File: emacs,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: Emacs Invocation,  Prev: Copying,  Up: Top

Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
*****************************************

                     Version 1.3, 3 November 2008

     Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     `http://fsf.org/'

     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

  0. PREAMBLE

     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
     functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
     assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
     with or without modifying it, either commercially or
     noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
     author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
     being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
     license designed for free software.

     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
     We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
     instruction or reference.

  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

     This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
     that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
     can be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
     grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
     to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
     "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
     of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you".  You
     accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a
     way requiring permission under copyright law.

     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
     modifications and/or translated into another language.

     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
     fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
     is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
     explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
     historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
     of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
     regarding them.

     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
     the notice that says that the Document is released under this
     License.  If a section does not fit the above definition of
     Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.
     The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document
     does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.

     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
     that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
     Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
     be at most 25 words.

     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
     general public, that is suitable for revising the document
     straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
     composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
     widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
     text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
     formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
     otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of
     markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent
     modification by readers is not Transparent.  An image format is
     not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text.  A
     copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".

     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
     standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for
     human modification.  Examples of transparent image formats include
     PNG, XCF and JPG.  Opaque formats include proprietary formats that
     can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or
     XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
     available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF
     produced by some word processors for output purposes only.

     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.

     The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
     of the Document to the public.

     A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
     whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
     following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
     stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
     "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
     To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
     Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
     to this definition.

     The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
     which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
     Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
     this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
     implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
     has no effect on the meaning of this License.

  2. VERBATIM COPYING

     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
     the conditions in section 3.

     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
     and you may publicly display copies.

  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY

     If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
     have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
     the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
     enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
     these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
     front cover must present the full title with all words of the
     title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
     on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
     covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
     satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
     other respects.

     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
     adjacent pages.

     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
     numbering more than 100, you must either include a
     machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
     state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from
     which the general network-using public has access to download
     using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent
     copy of the Document, free of added material.  If you use the
     latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
     begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
     this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
     location until at least one year after the last time you
     distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
     retailers) of that edition to the public.

     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
     the Document well before redistributing any large number of
     copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
     version of the Document.

  4. MODIFICATIONS

     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
     the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
     licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
     whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
     things in the Modified Version:

       A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
          distinct from that of the Document, and from those of
          previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed
          in the History section of the Document).  You may use the
          same title as a previous version if the original publisher of
          that version gives permission.

       B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
          entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
          the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
          principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
          authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
          from this requirement.

       C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
          Modified Version, as the publisher.

       D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.

       E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
          adjacent to the other copyright notices.

       F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
          notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
          Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
          the Addendum below.

       G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
          Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
          license notice.

       H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.

       I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
          and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
          authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on
          the Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled "History" in
          the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors,
          and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page,
          then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in
          the previous sentence.

       J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
          for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
          likewise the network locations given in the Document for
          previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in
          the "History" section.  You may omit a network location for a
          work that was published at least four years before the
          Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version
          it refers to gives permission.

       K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
          Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the
          section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
          acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.

       L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
          unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
          or the equivalent are not considered part of the section
          titles.

       M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements".  Such a section
          may not be included in the Modified Version.

       N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
          "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
          Section.

       O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.

     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
     material copied from the Document, you may at your option
     designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
     add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
     Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
     other section titles.

     You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
     parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
     has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
     definition of a standard.

     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
     of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
     passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
     added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
     Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
     previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
     you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
     replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
     publisher that added the old one.

     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS

     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
     all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
     combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
     their Warranty Disclaimers.

     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
     combined work.

     In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
     Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
     "Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications".  You
     must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."

  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS

     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
     documents in all other respects.

     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
     this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
     that document.

  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS

     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
     a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
     copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
     legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
     works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
     License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
     are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
     of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
     on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
     electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
     form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
     the whole aggregate.

  8. TRANSLATION

     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
     translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
     Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
     include the original English version of this License and the
     original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
     disagreement between the translation and the original version of
     this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
     prevail.

     If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
     "Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
     Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
     actual title.

  9. TERMINATION

     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
     and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.

     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly
     and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
     after your receipt of the notice.

     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
     you under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and
     not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of
     the same material does not give you any rights to use it.

 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
     `http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/'.

     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
     that specified version or of any later version that has been
     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
     the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
     you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
     Free Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy
     can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
     proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
     authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.

 11. RELICENSING

     "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
     World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
     provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
     public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
     A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
     site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
     site.

     "CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
     license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
     corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
     California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
     published by that same organization.

     "Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
     in part, as part of another Document.

     An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
     License, and if all works that were first published under this
     License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
     incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
     texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
     to November 1, 2008.

     The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
     site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
     2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.


ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
====================================================

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
notices just after the title page:

       Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
       with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
       Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
       Free Documentation License''.

   If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:

         with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
         the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
         being LIST.

   If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
situation.

   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
permit their use in free software.


File: emacs,  Node: Emacs Invocation,  Next: X Resources,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top

Appendix C Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation
******************************************************

Emacs supports command line arguments to request various actions when
invoking Emacs.  These are for compatibility with other editors and for
sophisticated activities.  We don't recommend using them for ordinary
editing (*Note Emacs Server::, for a way to access an existing Emacs
job from the command line).

   Arguments starting with `-' are "options", and so is `+LINENUM'.
All other arguments specify files to visit.  Emacs visits the specified
files while it starts up.  The last file specified on the command line
becomes the current buffer; the other files are also visited in other
buffers.  As with most programs, the special argument `--' says that
all subsequent arguments are file names, not options, even if they
start with `-'.

   Emacs command options can specify many things, such as the size and
position of the X window Emacs uses, its colors, and so on.  A few
options support advanced usage, such as running Lisp functions on files
in batch mode.  The sections of this chapter describe the available
options, arranged according to their purpose.

   There are two ways of writing options: the short forms that start
with a single `-', and the long forms that start with `--'.  For
example, `-d' is a short form and `--display' is the corresponding long
form.

   The long forms with `--' are easier to remember, but longer to type.
However, you don't have to spell out the whole option name; any
unambiguous abbreviation is enough.  When a long option takes an
argument, you can use either a space or an equal sign to separate the
option name and the argument.  Thus, you can write either `--display
sugar-bombs:0.0' or `--display=sugar-bombs:0.0'.  We recommend an equal
sign because it makes the relationship clearer, and the tables below
always show an equal sign.

   Most options specify how to initialize Emacs, or set parameters for
the Emacs session.  We call them "initial options".  A few options
specify things to do, such as loading libraries or calling Lisp
functions.  These are called "action options".  These and file names
together are called "action arguments".  The action arguments are
stored as a list of strings in the variable `command-line-args'.
(Actually, when Emacs starts up, `command-line-args' contains all the
arguments passed from the command line; during initialization, the
initial arguments are removed from this list when they are processed,
leaving only the action arguments.)

* Menu:

* Action Arguments::    Arguments to visit files, load libraries,
                          and call functions.
* Initial Options::     Arguments that take effect while starting Emacs.
* Command Example::     Examples of using command line arguments.
* Resume Arguments::    Specifying arguments when you resume a running Emacs.
* Environment::         Environment variables that Emacs uses.
* Display X::           Changing the default display and using remote login.
* Font X::              Choosing a font for text, under X.
* Colors::              Choosing display colors.
* Window Size X::       Start-up window size, under X.
* Borders X::           Internal and external borders, under X.
* Title X::             Specifying the initial frame's title.
* Icons X::             Choosing what sort of icon to use, under X.
* Misc X::              Other display options.


File: emacs,  Node: Action Arguments,  Next: Initial Options,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.1 Action Arguments
====================

Here is a table of action arguments:

`FILE'
`--file=FILE'
`--find-file=FILE'
`--visit=FILE'
     Visit FILE using `find-file'.  *Note Visiting::.

     When Emacs starts up, it displays the startup buffer in one window,
     and the buffer visiting FILE in another window (*note Windows::).
     If you supply more than one file argument, the displayed file is
     the last one specified on the command line; the other files are
     visited but their buffers are not shown.

     If the startup buffer is disabled (*note Entering Emacs::), then
     FILE is visited in a single window if one file argument was
     supplied; with two file arguments, Emacs displays the files in two
     different windows; with more than two file argument, Emacs displays
     the last file specified in one window, plus a Buffer Menu in a
     different window (*note Several Buffers::).  To inhibit using the
     Buffer Menu for this, change the variable
     `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu' to `t'.

`+LINENUM FILE'
     Visit FILE using `find-file', then go to line number LINENUM in it.

`+LINENUM:COLUMNNUM FILE'
     Visit FILE using `find-file', then go to line number LINENUM and
     put point at column number COLUMNNUM.

`-l FILE'
`--load=FILE'
     Load a Lisp library named FILE with the function `load'.  *Note
     Lisp Libraries::.  If FILE is not an absolute file name, the
     library can be found either in the current directory, or in the
     Emacs library search path as specified with `EMACSLOADPATH' (*note
     General Variables::).

     *Warning:* If previous command-line arguments have visited files,
     the current directory is the directory of the last file visited.

`-L DIR'
`--directory=DIR'
     Add directory DIR to the variable `load-path'.

`-f FUNCTION'
`--funcall=FUNCTION'
     Call Lisp function FUNCTION.  If it is an interactive function (a
     command), it reads the arguments interactively just as if you had
     called the same function with a key sequence.  Otherwise, it calls
     the function with no arguments.

`--eval=EXPRESSION'
`--execute=EXPRESSION'
     Evaluate Lisp expression EXPRESSION.

`--insert=FILE'
     Insert the contents of FILE into the `*scratch*' buffer (*note
     Lisp Interaction::).  This is like what `M-x insert-file' does
     (*note Misc File Ops::).

`--kill'
     Exit from Emacs without asking for confirmation.

`--help'
     Print a usage message listing all available options, then exit
     successfully.

`--version'
     Print Emacs version, then exit successfully.


File: emacs,  Node: Initial Options,  Next: Command Example,  Prev: Action Arguments,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.2 Initial Options
===================

The initial options specify parameters for the Emacs session.  This
section describes the more general initial options; some other options
specifically related to the X Window System appear in the following
sections.

   Some initial options affect the loading of the initialization file.
The normal actions of Emacs are to first load `site-start.el' if it
exists, then your own initialization file `~/.emacs' if it exists, and
finally `default.el' if it exists.  *Note Init File::.  Certain options
prevent loading of some of these files or substitute other files for
them.

`-t DEVICE'
`--terminal=DEVICE'
     Use DEVICE as the device for terminal input and output.
     `--terminal' implies `--no-window-system'.

`-d DISPLAY'
`--display=DISPLAY'
     Use the X Window System and use the display named DISPLAY to open
     the initial Emacs frame.  *Note Display X::, for more details.

`-nw'
`--no-window-system'
     Don't communicate directly with the window system, disregarding the
     `DISPLAY' environment variable even if it is set.  This means that
     Emacs uses the terminal from which it was launched for all its
     display and input.

`-batch'
`--batch'
     Run Emacs in "batch mode".  Batch mode is used for running
     programs written in Emacs Lisp from shell scripts, makefiles, and
     so on.  To invoke a Lisp program, use the `-batch' option in
     conjunction with one or more of `-l', `-f' or `--eval' (*note
     Action Arguments::).  *Note Command Example::, for an example.

     In batch mode, Emacs does not display the text being edited, and
     the standard terminal interrupt characters such as `C-z' and `C-c'
     have their usual effect.  Emacs functions that normally print a
     message in the echo area will print to either the standard output
     stream (`stdout') or the standard error stream (`stderr') instead.
     (To be precise, functions like `prin1', `princ' and `print' print
     to `stdout', while `message' and `error' print to `stderr'.)
     Functions that normally read keyboard input from the minibuffer
     take their input from the terminal's standard input stream
     (`stdin') instead.

     `--batch' implies `-q' (do not load an initialization file), but
     `site-start.el' is loaded nonetheless.  It also causes Emacs to
     exit after processing all the command options.  In addition, it
     disables auto-saving except in buffers for which it has been
     explicitly requested.

`--script FILE'
     Run Emacs in batch mode, like `--batch', and then read and execute
     the Lisp code in FILE.

     The normal use of this option is in executable script files that
     run Emacs.  They can start with this text on the first line

          #!/usr/bin/emacs --script

     which will invoke Emacs with `--script' and supply the name of the
     script file as FILE.  Emacs Lisp then treats `#!'  as a comment
     delimiter.

`-q'
`--no-init-file'
     Do not load your Emacs initialization file, and do not load the
     file `default.el' either (*note Init File::).  Regardless of this
     switch, `site-start.el' is still loaded.  When Emacs is invoked
     like this, the Customize facility does not allow options to be
     saved (*note Easy Customization::).

`--no-site-file'
     Do not load `site-start.el'.  The options `-q', `-u' and `--batch'
     have no effect on the loading of this file--this option and `-Q'
     are the only options that block it.

`--no-splash'
     Do not display a startup screen.  You can also achieve this effect
     by setting the variable `inhibit-startup-screen' to non-`nil' in
     your initialization file (*note Entering Emacs::).

`-Q'
`--quick'
     Start emacs with minimum customizations, similar to using `-q',
     `--no-site-file', and `--no-splash' together.  This also stops
     Emacs from processing X resources by setting `inhibit-x-resources'
     to `t' (*note Resources::).

`-daemon'
`--daemon'
     Start Emacs as a daemon--after Emacs starts up, it starts the Emacs
     server and disconnects from the terminal without opening any
     frames.  You can then use the `emacsclient' command to connect to
     Emacs for editing.  *Note Emacs Server::, for information about
     using Emacs as a daemon.

`-daemon=SERVER-NAME'
     Start emacs in background as a daemon, and use SERVER-NAME as the
     server name.

`--no-desktop'
     Do not reload any saved desktop.  *Note Saving Emacs Sessions::.

`-u USER'
`--user=USER'
     Load USER's initialization file instead of your own(1).

`--debug-init'
     Enable the Emacs Lisp debugger for errors in the init file.  *Note
     Entering the Debugger on an Error: (elisp)Error Debugging.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) This option has no effect on MS-Windows.


File: emacs,  Node: Command Example,  Next: Resume Arguments,  Prev: Initial Options,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.3 Command Argument Example
============================

Here is an example of using Emacs with arguments and options.  It
assumes you have a Lisp program file called `hack-c.el' which, when
loaded, performs some useful operation on the current buffer, expected
to be a C program.

     emacs --batch foo.c -l hack-c -f save-buffer >& log

This says to visit `foo.c', load `hack-c.el' (which makes changes in
the visited file), save `foo.c' (note that `save-buffer' is the
function that `C-x C-s' is bound to), and then exit back to the shell
(because of `--batch').  `--batch' also guarantees there will be no
problem redirecting output to `log', because Emacs will not assume that
it has a display terminal to work with.


File: emacs,  Node: Resume Arguments,  Next: Environment,  Prev: Command Example,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.4 Resuming Emacs with Arguments
=================================

You can specify action arguments for Emacs when you resume it after a
suspension.  To prepare for this, put the following code in your
`.emacs' file (*note Hooks::):

     (add-hook 'suspend-hook 'resume-suspend-hook)
     (add-hook 'suspend-resume-hook 'resume-process-args)

   As further preparation, you must execute the shell script
`emacs.csh' (if you use csh as your shell) or `emacs.bash' (if you use
bash as your shell).  These scripts define an alias named `edit', which
will resume Emacs giving it new command line arguments such as files to
visit.  The scripts are found in the `etc' subdirectory of the Emacs
distribution.

   Only action arguments work properly when you resume Emacs.  Initial
arguments are not recognized--it's too late to execute them anyway.

   Note that resuming Emacs (with or without arguments) must be done
from within the shell that is the parent of the Emacs job.  This is why
`edit' is an alias rather than a program or a shell script.  It is not
possible to implement a resumption command that could be run from other
subjobs of the shell; there is no way to define a command that could be
made the value of `EDITOR', for example.  Therefore, this feature does
not take the place of the Emacs Server feature (*note Emacs Server::).

   The aliases use the Emacs Server feature if you appear to have a
server Emacs running.  However, they cannot determine this with complete
accuracy.  They may think that a server is still running when in
actuality you have killed that Emacs, because the file `/tmp/esrv...'
still exists.  If this happens, find that file and delete it.


File: emacs,  Node: Environment,  Next: Display X,  Prev: Resume Arguments,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.5 Environment Variables
=========================

The "environment" is a feature of the operating system; it consists of
a collection of variables with names and values.  Each variable is
called an "environment variable"; environment variable names are
case-sensitive, and it is conventional to use upper case letters only.
The values are all text strings.

   What makes the environment useful is that subprocesses inherit the
environment automatically from their parent process.  This means you
can set up an environment variable in your login shell, and all the
programs you run (including Emacs) will automatically see it.
Subprocesses of Emacs (such as shells, compilers, and version-control
software) inherit the environment from Emacs, too.

   Inside Emacs, the command `M-x getenv' gets the value of an
environment variable.  `M-x setenv' sets a variable in the Emacs
environment.  (Environment variable substitutions with `$' work in the
value just as in file names; see *Note File Names with $::.)  The
variable `initial-environment' stores the initial environment inherited
by Emacs.

   The way to set environment variables outside of Emacs depends on the
operating system, and especially the shell that you are using.  For
example, here's how to set the environment variable `ORGANIZATION' to
`not very much' using Bash:

     export ORGANIZATION="not very much"

and here's how to do it in csh or tcsh:

     setenv ORGANIZATION "not very much"

   When Emacs is using the X Window System, various environment
variables that control X work for Emacs as well.  See the X
documentation for more information.

* Menu:

* General Variables::   Environment variables that all versions of Emacs use.
* Misc Variables::      Certain system-specific variables.
* MS-Windows Registry:: An alternative to the environment on MS-Windows.


File: emacs,  Node: General Variables,  Next: Misc Variables,  Up: Environment

C.5.1 General Variables
-----------------------

Here is an alphabetical list of environment variables that have special
meanings in Emacs.  Most of these variables are also used by some other
programs.  Emacs does not require any of these environment variables to
be set, but it uses their values if they are set.

`CDPATH'
     Used by the `cd' command to search for the directory you specify,
     when you specify a relative directory name.

`EMACSDATA'
     Directory for the architecture-independent files that come with
     Emacs.  This is used to initialize the Lisp variable
     `data-directory'.

`EMACSDOC'
     Directory for the documentation string file, `DOC-EMACSVERSION'.
     This is used to initialize the Lisp variable `doc-directory'.

`EMACSLOADPATH'
     A colon-separated list of directories(1) to search for Emacs Lisp
     files--used to initialize `load-path'.

`EMACSPATH'
     A colon-separated list of directories to search for executable
     files--used to initialize `exec-path'.

`EMAIL'
     Your email address; used to initialize the Lisp variable
     `user-mail-address', which the Emacs mail interface puts into the
     `From' header of outgoing messages (*note Mail Headers::).

`ESHELL'
     Used for shell-mode to override the `SHELL' environment variable.

`HISTFILE'
     The name of the file that shell commands are saved in between
     logins.  This variable defaults to `~/.bash_history' if you use
     Bash, to `~/.sh_history' if you use ksh, and to `~/.history'
     otherwise.

`HOME'
     The location of your files in the directory tree; used for
     expansion of file names starting with a tilde (`~').  On MS-DOS,
     it defaults to the directory from which Emacs was started, with
     `/bin' removed from the end if it was present.  On Windows, the
     default value of `HOME' is the `Application Data' subdirectory of
     the user profile directory (normally, this is `C:/Documents and
     Settings/USERNAME/Application Data', where USERNAME is your user
     name), though for backwards compatibility `C:/' will be used
     instead if a `.emacs' file is found there.

`HOSTNAME'
     The name of the machine that Emacs is running on.

`INCPATH'
     A colon-separated list of directories.  Used by the `complete'
     package to search for files.

`INFOPATH'
     A colon-separated list of directories in which to search for Info
     files.

`LC_ALL'
`LC_COLLATE'
`LC_CTYPE'
`LC_MESSAGES'
`LC_MONETARY'
`LC_NUMERIC'
`LC_TIME'
`LANG'
     The user's preferred locale.  The locale has six categories,
     specified by the environment variables `LC_COLLATE' for sorting,
     `LC_CTYPE' for character encoding, `LC_MESSAGES' for system
     messages, `LC_MONETARY' for monetary formats, `LC_NUMERIC' for
     numbers, and `LC_TIME' for dates and times.  If one of these
     variables is not set, the category defaults to the value of the
     `LANG' environment variable, or to the default `C' locale if
     `LANG' is not set.  But if `LC_ALL' is specified, it overrides the
     settings of all the other locale environment variables.

     On MS-Windows, if `LANG' is not already set in the environment
     when Emacs starts, Emacs sets it based on the system-wide default
     language, which you can set in the `Regional Settings' Control
     Panel on some versions of MS-Windows.

     The value of the `LC_CTYPE' category is matched against entries in
     `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
     `locale-preferred-coding-systems', to select a default language
     environment and coding system.  *Note Language Environments::.

`LOGNAME'
     The user's login name.  See also `USER'.

`MAIL'
     The name of your system mail inbox.

`MH'
     Name of setup file for the mh system.  (The default is
     `~/.mh_profile'.)

`NAME'
     Your real-world name.

`NNTPSERVER'
     The name of the news server.  Used by the mh and Gnus packages.

`ORGANIZATION'
     The name of the organization to which you belong.  Used for
     setting the `Organization:' header in your posts from the Gnus
     package.

`PATH'
     A colon-separated list of directories in which executables reside.
     This is used to initialize the Emacs Lisp variable `exec-path'.

`PWD'
     If set, this should be the default directory when Emacs was
     started.

`REPLYTO'
     If set, this specifies an initial value for the variable
     `mail-default-reply-to'.  *Note Mail Headers::.

`SAVEDIR'
     The name of a directory in which news articles are saved by
     default.  Used by the Gnus package.

`SHELL'
     The name of an interpreter used to parse and execute programs run
     from inside Emacs.

`SMTPSERVER'
     The name of the outgoing mail server.  Used by the SMTP library
     (*note Top: (smtpmail)Top.).  

`TERM'
     The type of the terminal that Emacs is using.  This variable must
     be set unless Emacs is run in batch mode.  On MS-DOS, it defaults
     to `internal', which specifies a built-in terminal emulation that
     handles the machine's own display.  If the value of `TERM'
     indicates that Emacs runs in non-windowed mode from `xterm' or a
     similar terminal emulator, the background mode defaults to
     `light', and Emacs will choose colors that are appropriate for a
     light background.

`TERMCAP'
     The name of the termcap library file describing how to program the
     terminal specified by the `TERM' variable.  This defaults to
     `/etc/termcap'.

`TMPDIR'
     Used by the Emerge package as a prefix for temporary files.

`TZ'
     This specifies the current time zone and possibly also daylight
     saving time information.  On MS-DOS, if `TZ' is not set in the
     environment when Emacs starts, Emacs defines a default value as
     appropriate for the country code returned by DOS.  On MS-Windows,
     Emacs does not use `TZ' at all.

`USER'
     The user's login name.  See also `LOGNAME'.  On MS-DOS, this
     defaults to `root'.

`VERSION_CONTROL'
     Used to initialize the `version-control' variable (*note Backup
     Names::).

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Here and below, whenever we say "colon-separated list of
directories," it pertains to Unix and GNU/Linux systems.  On MS-DOS and
MS-Windows, the directories are separated by semi-colons instead, since
DOS/Windows file names might include a colon after a drive letter.


File: emacs,  Node: Misc Variables,  Next: MS-Windows Registry,  Prev: General Variables,  Up: Environment

C.5.2 Miscellaneous Variables
-----------------------------

These variables are used only on particular configurations:

`COMSPEC'
     On MS-DOS and MS-Windows, the name of the command interpreter to
     use when invoking batch files and commands internal to the shell.
     On MS-DOS this is also used to make a default value for the
     `SHELL' environment variable.

`NAME'
     On MS-DOS, this variable defaults to the value of the `USER'
     variable.

`TEMP'
`TMP'
     On MS-DOS and MS-Windows, these specify the name of the directory
     for storing temporary files in.

`EMACSTEST'
     On MS-DOS, this specifies a file to use to log the operation of the
     internal terminal emulator.  This feature is useful for submitting
     bug reports.

`EMACSCOLORS'
     On MS-DOS, this specifies the screen colors.  It is useful to set
     them this way, since otherwise Emacs would display the default
     colors momentarily when it starts up.

     The value of this variable should be the two-character encoding of
     the foreground (the first character) and the background (the second
     character) colors of the default face.  Each character should be
     the hexadecimal code for the desired color on a standard PC
     text-mode display.  For example, to get blue text on a light gray
     background, specify `EMACSCOLORS=17', since 1 is the code of the
     blue color and 7 is the code of the light gray color.

     The PC display usually supports only eight background colors.
     However, Emacs switches the DOS display to a mode where all 16
     colors can be used for the background, so all four bits of the
     background color are actually used.

`PRELOAD_WINSOCK'
     On MS-Windows, if you set this variable, Emacs will load and
     initialize the network library at startup, instead of waiting
     until the first time it is required.

`emacs_dir'
     On MS-Windows, `emacs_dir' is a special environment variable, which
     indicates the full path of the directory in which Emacs is
     installed.  If Emacs is installed in the standard directory
     structure, it calculates this value automatically.  It is not much
     use setting this variable yourself unless your installation is
     non-standard, since unlike other environment variables, it will be
     overridden by Emacs at startup.  When setting other environment
     variables, such as `EMACSLOADPATH', you may find it useful to use
     `emacs_dir' rather than hard-coding an absolute path.  This allows
     multiple versions of Emacs to share the same environment variable
     settings, and it allows you to move the Emacs installation
     directory, without changing any environment or registry settings.


File: emacs,  Node: MS-Windows Registry,  Prev: Misc Variables,  Up: Environment

C.5.3 The MS-Windows System Registry
------------------------------------

Under MS-Windows, the installation program `addpm.exe' adds values for
`emacs_dir', `EMACSLOADPATH', `EMACSDATA', `EMACSPATH', `EMACSDOC',
`SHELL' and `TERM' to the `HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE' section of the system
registry, under `/Software/GNU/Emacs'.  It does this because there is
no standard place to set environment variables across different
versions of Windows.  Running `addpm.exe' is no longer strictly
necessary in recent versions of Emacs, but if you are upgrading from an
older version, running `addpm.exe' ensures that you do not have older
registry entries from a previous installation, which may not be
compatible with the latest version of Emacs.

   When Emacs starts, as well as checking the environment, it also
checks the System Registry for those variables and for `HOME', `LANG'
and `PRELOAD_WINSOCK'.

   To determine the value of those variables, Emacs goes through the
following procedure.  First, the environment is checked.  If the
variable is not found there, Emacs looks for registry keys by that name
under `/Software/GNU/Emacs'; first in the `HKEY_CURRENT_USER' section
of the registry, and if not found there, in the `HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE'
section.  Finally, if Emacs still cannot determine the values,
compiled-in defaults are used.

   In addition to the environment variables above, you can also add many
of the settings which on X belong in the `.Xdefaults' file (*note X
Resources::) to the `/Software/GNU/Emacs' registry key.  Settings you
add to the `HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE' section will affect all users of the
machine.  Settings you add to the `HKEY_CURRENT_USER' section will only
affect you, and will override machine wide settings.


File: emacs,  Node: Display X,  Next: Font X,  Prev: Environment,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.6 Specifying the Display Name
===============================

The environment variable `DISPLAY' tells all X clients, including
Emacs, where to display their windows.  Its value is set by default in
ordinary circumstances, when you start an X server and run jobs
locally.  Occasionally you may need to specify the display yourself; for
example, if you do a remote login and want to run a client program
remotely, displaying on your local screen.

   With Emacs, the main reason people change the default display is to
let them log into another system, run Emacs on that system, but have the
window displayed at their local terminal.  You might need to log in to
another system because the files you want to edit are there, or because
the Emacs executable file you want to run is there.

   The syntax of the `DISPLAY' environment variable is
`HOST:DISPLAY.SCREEN', where HOST is the host name of the X Window
System server machine, DISPLAY is an arbitrarily-assigned number that
distinguishes your server (X terminal) from other servers on the same
machine, and SCREEN is a rarely-used field that allows an X server to
control multiple terminal screens.  The period and the SCREEN field are
optional.  If included, SCREEN is usually zero.

   For example, if your host is named `glasperle' and your server is
the first (or perhaps the only) server listed in the configuration, your
`DISPLAY' is `glasperle:0.0'.

   You can specify the display name explicitly when you run Emacs,
either by changing the `DISPLAY' variable, or with the option `-d
DISPLAY' or `--display=DISPLAY'.  Here is an example:

     emacs --display=glasperle:0 &

   You can inhibit the direct use of the window system and GUI with the
`-nw' option.  It tells Emacs to display using ordinary ASCII on its
controlling terminal.  This is also an initial option.

   Sometimes, security arrangements prevent a program on a remote system
from displaying on your local system.  In this case, trying to run Emacs
produces messages like this:

     Xlib:  connection to "glasperle:0.0" refused by server

You might be able to overcome this problem by using the `xhost' command
on the local system to give permission for access from your remote
machine.


File: emacs,  Node: Font X,  Next: Colors,  Prev: Display X,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.7 Font Specification Options
==============================

You can use the command line option `-fn FONT' (or `--font', which is
an alias for `-fn') to specify a default font:

`-fn FONT'
`--font=FONT'
     Use FONT as the default font.

   When passing a font specification to Emacs on the command line, you
may need to "quote" it, by enclosing it in quotation marks, if it
contains characters that the shell treats specially (e.g. spaces).  For
example:

     emacs -fn "DejaVu Sans Mono-12"

   *Note Fonts::, for other ways to specify the default font and font
name formats.


File: emacs,  Node: Colors,  Next: Window Size X,  Prev: Font X,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.8 Window Color Options
========================

On a color display, you can specify which color to use for various
parts of the Emacs display.  To find out what colors are available on
your system, type `M-x list-colors-display', or press `C-Mouse-2' and
select `Display Colors' from the pop-up menu.  (A particular window
system might support many more colors, but the list displayed by
`list-colors-display' shows their portable subset that can be safely
used on any display supported by Emacs.)  If you do not specify colors,
on windowed displays the default for the background is white and the
default for all other colors is black.  On a monochrome display, the
foreground is black, the background is white, and the border is gray if
the display supports that.  On terminals, the background is usually
black and the foreground is white.

   Here is a list of the command-line options for specifying colors:

`-fg COLOR'
`--foreground-color=COLOR'
     Specify the foreground color.  COLOR should be a standard color
     name, or a numeric specification of the color's red, green, and
     blue components as in `#4682B4' or `RGB:46/82/B4'.

`-bg COLOR'
`--background-color=COLOR'
     Specify the background color.

`-bd COLOR'
`--border-color=COLOR'
     Specify the color of the border of the X window.

`-cr COLOR'
`--cursor-color=COLOR'
     Specify the color of the Emacs cursor which indicates where point
     is.

`-ms COLOR'
`--mouse-color=COLOR'
     Specify the color for the mouse cursor when the mouse is in the
     Emacs window.

`-r'
`-rv'
`--reverse-video'
     Reverse video--swap the foreground and background colors.

`--color=MODE'
     For a character terminal only, specify the mode of color support.
     This option is intended for overriding the number of supported
     colors that the character terminal advertises in its `termcap' or
     `terminfo' database.  The parameter MODE can be one of the
     following:
    `never'
    `no'
          Don't use colors even if the terminal's capabilities specify
          color support.

    `default'
    `auto'
          Same as when `--color' is not used at all: Emacs detects at
          startup whether the terminal supports colors, and if it does,
          turns on colored display.

    `always'
    `yes'
    `ansi8'
          Turn on the color support unconditionally, and use color
          commands specified by the ANSI escape sequences for the 8
          standard colors.

    `NUM'
          Use color mode for NUM colors.  If NUM is -1, turn off color
          support (equivalent to `never'); if it is 0, use the default
          color support for this terminal (equivalent to `auto');
          otherwise use an appropriate standard mode for NUM colors.
          Depending on your terminal's capabilities, Emacs might be
          able to turn on a color mode for 8, 16, 88, or 256 as the
          value of NUM.  If there is no mode that supports NUM colors,
          Emacs acts as if NUM were 0, i.e. it uses the terminal's
          default color support mode.
     If MODE is omitted, it defaults to ANSI8.

   For example, to use a coral mouse cursor and a slate blue text
cursor, enter:

     emacs -ms coral -cr 'slate blue' &

   You can reverse the foreground and background colors through the
`-rv' option or with the X resource `reverseVideo'.

   The `-fg', `-bg', and `-rv' options function on text-only terminals
as well as on graphical displays.


File: emacs,  Node: Window Size X,  Next: Borders X,  Prev: Colors,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.9 Options for Window Size and Position
========================================

Here is a list of the command-line options for specifying size and
position of the initial Emacs frame:

`-g WIDTHxHEIGHT[{+-}XOFFSET{+-}YOFFSET]]'
`--geometry=WIDTHxHEIGHT[{+-}XOFFSET{+-}YOFFSET]]'
     Specify the size WIDTH and HEIGHT (measured in character columns
     and lines), and positions XOFFSET and YOFFSET (measured in
     pixels).  The WIDTH and HEIGHT parameters apply to all frames,
     whereas XOFFSET and YOFFSET only to the initial frame.

`-fs'
`--fullscreen'
     Specify that width and height shall be the size of the screen.
     Normally no window manager decorations are shown.

`-mm'
`--maximized'
     Specify that the Emacs frame shall be maximized.  This normally
     means that the frame has window manager decorations.

`-fh'
`--fullheight'
     Specify that the height shall be the height of the screen.

`-fw'
`--fullwidth'
     Specify that the width shall be the width of the screen.

In the `--geometry' option, `{+-}' means either a plus  sign or a minus
sign.  A plus sign before XOFFSET means it is the distance from the
left side of the screen; a minus sign means it counts from the right
side.  A plus sign before YOFFSET means it is the distance from the top
of the screen, and a minus sign there indicates the distance from the
bottom.  The values XOFFSET and YOFFSET may themselves be positive or
negative, but that doesn't change their meaning, only their direction.

   Emacs uses the same units as `xterm' does to interpret the geometry.
The WIDTH and HEIGHT are measured in characters, so a large font
creates a larger frame than a small font.  (If you specify a
proportional font, Emacs uses its maximum bounds width as the width
unit.)  The XOFFSET and YOFFSET are measured in pixels.

   You do not have to specify all of the fields in the geometry
specification.  If you omit both XOFFSET and YOFFSET, the window
manager decides where to put the Emacs frame, possibly by letting you
place it with the mouse.  For example, `164x55' specifies a window 164
columns wide, enough for two ordinary width windows side by side, and
55 lines tall.

   The default frame width is 80 characters and the default height is
40 lines.  You can omit either the width or the height or both.  If you
start the geometry with an integer, Emacs interprets it as the width.
If you start with an `x' followed by an integer, Emacs interprets it as
the height.  Thus, `81' specifies just the width; `x45' specifies just
the height.

   If you start with `+' or `-', that introduces an offset, which means
both sizes are omitted.  Thus, `-3' specifies the XOFFSET only.  (If
you give just one offset, it is always XOFFSET.)  `+3-3' specifies both
the XOFFSET and the YOFFSET, placing the frame near the bottom left of
the screen.

   You can specify a default for any or all of the fields in your X
resource file (*note Resources::), and then override selected fields
with a `--geometry' option.

   Since the mode line and the echo area occupy the last 2 lines of the
frame, the height of the initial text window is 2 less than the height
specified in your geometry.  In non-X-toolkit versions of Emacs, the
menu bar also takes one line of the specified number.  But in the X
toolkit version, the menu bar is additional and does not count against
the specified height.  The tool bar, if present, is also additional.

   Enabling or disabling the menu bar or tool bar alters the amount of
space available for ordinary text.  Therefore, if Emacs starts up with
a tool bar (which is the default), and handles the geometry
specification assuming there is a tool bar, and then your
initialization file disables the tool bar, you will end up with a frame
geometry different from what you asked for.  To get the intended size
with no tool bar, use an X resource to specify "no tool bar" (*note
Table of Resources::); then Emacs will already know there's no tool bar
when it processes the specified geometry.

   When using one of `--fullscreen', `--maximized', `--fullwidth' or
`--fullheight' there may be some space around the frame anyway.  That
is because Emacs rounds the sizes so they are an even number of
character heights and widths.

   Some window managers have options that can make them ignore both
program-specified and user-specified positions.  If these are set,
Emacs fails to position the window correctly.


File: emacs,  Node: Borders X,  Next: Title X,  Prev: Window Size X,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.10 Internal and External Borders
==================================

An Emacs frame has an internal border and an external border.  The
internal border is an extra strip of the background color around the
text portion of the frame.  Emacs itself draws the internal border.
The external border is added by the window manager outside the frame;
depending on the window manager you use, it may contain various boxes
you can click on to move or iconify the window.

`-ib WIDTH'
`--internal-border=WIDTH'
     Specify WIDTH as the width of the internal border (between the text
     and the main border), in pixels.

`-bw WIDTH'
`--border-width=WIDTH'
     Specify WIDTH as the width of the main border, in pixels.

   When you specify the size of the frame, that does not count the
borders.  The frame's position is measured from the outside edge of the
external border.

   Use the `-ib N' option to specify an internal border N pixels wide.
The default is 1.  Use `-bw N' to specify the width of the external
border (though the window manager may not pay attention to what you
specify).  The default width of the external border is 2.


File: emacs,  Node: Title X,  Next: Icons X,  Prev: Borders X,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.11 Frame Titles
=================

An Emacs frame may or may not have a specified title.  The frame title,
if specified, appears in window decorations and icons as the name of
the frame.  If an Emacs frame has no specified title, the default title
has the form `INVOCATION-NAME@MACHINE' (if there is only one frame) or
the selected window's buffer name (if there is more than one frame).

   You can specify a title for the initial Emacs frame with a command
line option:

`-T TITLE'
`--title=TITLE'
     Specify TITLE as the title for the initial Emacs frame.

   The `--name' option (*note Resources::) also specifies the title for
the initial Emacs frame.


File: emacs,  Node: Icons X,  Next: Misc X,  Prev: Title X,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.12 Icons
==========

`-iconic'
`--iconic'
     Start Emacs in an iconified ("minimized") state.

`-nbi'
`--no-bitmap-icon'
     Do not use a picture of a gnu as the Emacs icon.

   Most window managers allow you to "iconify" (or "minimize") an Emacs
frame, hiding it from sight.  Some window managers replace iconified
windows with tiny "icons", while others remove them entirely from
sight.  The `-iconic' option tells Emacs to begin running in an
iconified state, rather than showing a frame right away.  The text
frame doesn't appear until you deiconify (or "un-minimize") it.

   By default, Emacs uses an icon containing the Emacs logo.  On
desktop environments such as Gnome, this icon is also displayed on the
"taskbar".  The `-nbi' or `--no-bitmap-icon' option tells Emacs to let
the window manager choose what sort of icon to use--usually just a
small rectangle containing the frame's title.


File: emacs,  Node: Misc X,  Prev: Icons X,  Up: Emacs Invocation

C.13 Other Display Options
==========================

`-vb'
`--vertical-scroll-bars'
     Enable vertical scroll bars.

`-lsp PIXELS'
`--line-spacing=PIXELS'
     Specify PIXELS as additional space to put between lines, in pixels.

`-nbc'
`--no-blinking-cursor'
     Disable the blinking cursor on graphical displays.

`-D'
`--basic-display'
     Disable the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, and tool tips,
     and turn off the blinking cursor.  This can be useful for making a
     test case that simplifies debugging of display problems.

   The `--xrm' option (*note Resources::) specifies additional X
resource values.


File: emacs,  Node: X Resources,  Next: Antinews,  Prev: Emacs Invocation,  Up: Top

Appendix D X Options and Resources
**********************************

You can customize some X-related aspects of Emacs behavior using X
resources, as is usual for programs that use X.  On MS-Windows, you can
customize some of the same aspects using the system registry.  *Note
MS-Windows Registry::.

   When Emacs is built using an "X toolkit", such as Lucid or LessTif,
you need to use X resources to customize the appearance of the widgets,
including the menu-bar, scroll-bar, and dialog boxes.  This is because
the libraries that implement these don't provide for customization
through Emacs.  GTK+ widgets use a separate system of "GTK resources",
which we will also describe.

* Menu:

* Resources::           Using X resources with Emacs (in general).
* Table of Resources::  Table of specific X resources that affect Emacs.
* Face Resources::      X resources for customizing faces.
* Lucid Resources::     X resources for Lucid menus.
* LessTif Resources::   X resources for LessTif and Motif menus.
* GTK resources::       Resources for GTK widgets.


File: emacs,  Node: Resources,  Next: Table of Resources,  Up: X Resources

D.1 X Resources
===============

Programs running under the X Window System organize their user options
under a hierarchy of classes and resources.  You can specify default
values for these options in your "X resource file", usually named
`~/.Xdefaults' or `~/.Xresources'.  Changes in this file do not take
effect immediately, because the X server stores its own list of
resources; to update it, use the command `xrdb'--for instance, `xrdb
~/.Xdefaults'.

   (MS-Windows systems do not support X resource files; on Windows,
Emacs looks for X resources in the Windows Registry, first under the
key `HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\GNU\Emacs' and then under the key
`HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\GNU\Emacs'.  The menu and scroll bars are
native widgets on MS-Windows, so they are only customizable via the
system-wide settings in the Display Control Panel.  You can also set
resources using the `-xrm' command line option, as explained below.)

   Each line in the X resource file specifies a value for one option or
for a collection of related options.  Each resource specification
consists of a "program name" and a "resource name".  Case distinctions
are significant in each of these names.  Here is an example:

     emacs.borderWidth: 2

   The program name is the name of the executable file to which the
resource applies.  For Emacs, this is normally `emacs'.  To specify a
definition that applies to all instances of Emacs, regardless of the
name of the Emacs executable, use `Emacs'.

   The resource name is the name of a program setting.  For instance,
Emacs recognizes a `borderWidth' resource that controls the width of
the external border for graphical frames.

   Resources are grouped into named classes.  For instance, the
`BorderWidth' class contains both the `borderWidth' resource (which we
just described), as well as the `internalBorder' resource, which
controls the width of the internal border for graphical frames.
Instead of using a resource name, you can use a class name to specify
the same value for all resources in that class.  Here's an example:

     emacs.BorderWidth: 2

   If you specify a value for a class, it becomes the default for all
resources in that class.  You can specify values for individual
resources as well; these override the class value, for those particular
resources.  The following example specifies 2 as the default width for
all borders, but overrides this value with 4 for the external border:

     emacs.BorderWidth: 2
     emacs.borderWidth: 4

   The order in which the lines appear in the file does not matter.
One way to experiment with the effect of different resource settings is
to use the `editres' program.  See the `editres' man page for more
details.

   Emacs does not process X resources at all if you set the variable
`inhibit-x-resources' to a non-`nil' value, or if you specify the `-Q'
(or `--quick') command-line argument (*note Initial Options::).  (The
`-Q' argument automatically sets `inhibit-x-resources' to `t'.)

   In addition, you can use the following command-line options to
override the X resources file:

`-name NAME'
`--name=NAME'
     This option sets the program name of the initial Emacs frame to
     NAME.  It also sets the title of the initial frame to NAME.  This
     option does not affect subsequent frames.

     If you don't specify this option, the default is to use the Emacs
     executable's name as the program name.

     For consistency, `-name' also specifies the name to use for other
     resource values that do not belong to any particular frame.

     The resources that name Emacs invocations also belong to a class,
     named `Emacs'.  If you write `Emacs' instead of `emacs', the
     resource applies to all frames in all Emacs jobs, regardless of
     frame titles and regardless of the name of the executable file.

`-xrm RESOURCE-VALUES'
`--xrm=RESOURCE-VALUES'
     This option specifies X resource values for the present Emacs job.

     RESOURCE-VALUES should have the same format that you would use
     inside a file of X resources.  To include multiple resource
     specifications in RESOURCE-VALUES, put a newline between them,
     just as you would in a file.  You can also use `#include
     "FILENAME"' to include a file full of resource specifications.
     Resource values specified with `-xrm' take precedence over all
     other resource specifications.


File: emacs,  Node: Table of Resources,  Next: Face Resources,  Prev: Resources,  Up: X Resources

D.2 Table of X Resources for Emacs
==================================

This table lists the resource names that designate options for Emacs,
not counting those for the appearance of the menu bar, each with the
class that it belongs to:

`background' (class `Background')
     Background color name.

`bitmapIcon' (class `BitmapIcon')
     Use a bitmap icon (a picture of a gnu) if `on', let the window
     manager choose an icon if `off'.

`borderColor' (class `BorderColor')
     Color name for the external border.

`borderWidth' (class `BorderWidth')
     Width in pixels of the external border.

`cursorColor' (class `Foreground')
     Color name for text cursor (point).

`cursorBlink' (class `CursorBlink')
     Specifies whether to make the cursor blink. The default is `on'.
     Use `off' or `false' to turn cursor blinking off.

`font' (class `Font')
     Font name for the `default' font.  *Note Fonts::.  You can also
     specify a fontset name (*note Fontsets::).

`fontBackend' (class `FontBackend')
     The backend(s) to use for drawing fonts; if multiple backends are
     specified, they must be comma-delimited and given in order of
     precedence.  On X, for instance, the value `x,xft' tells Emacs to
     draw fonts using the X core font driver, falling back on the Xft
     font driver if that fails.  Normally, you can leave this resource
     unset, in which case Emacs tries using all font backends available
     on your graphical device.

`foreground' (class `Foreground')
     Color name for text.

`geometry' (class `Geometry')
     Window size and position.  Be careful not to specify this resource
     as `emacs*geometry', because that may affect individual menus as
     well as the Emacs frame itself.

     If this resource specifies a position, that position applies only
     to the initial Emacs frame (or, in the case of a resource for a
     specific frame name, only that frame).  However, the size, if
     specified here, applies to all frames.

`fullscreen' (class `Fullscreen')
     The desired fullscreen size.  The value can be one of `fullboth',
     `maximized', `fullwidth' or `fullheight', which correspond to the
     command-line options `-fs', `-mm', `-fw', and `-fh' (*note Window
     Size X::).

     Note that this applies to the initial frame only.

`iconName' (class `Title')
     Name to display in the icon.

`internalBorder' (class `BorderWidth')
     Width in pixels of the internal border.

`lineSpacing' (class `LineSpacing')
     Additional space ("leading") between lines, in pixels.

`menuBar' (class `MenuBar')
     Give frames menu bars if `on'; don't have menu bars if `off'.
     *Note Lucid Resources::, and *Note LessTif Resources::, for how to
     control the appearance of the menu bar if you have one.

`minibuffer' (class `Minibuffer')
     If `none', don't make a minibuffer in this frame.  It will use a
     separate minibuffer frame instead.

`paneFont' (class `Font')
     Font name for menu pane titles, in non-toolkit versions of Emacs.

`pointerColor' (class `Foreground')
     Color of the mouse cursor.

`privateColormap' (class `PrivateColormap')
     If `on', use a private color map, in the case where the "default
     visual" of class PseudoColor and Emacs is using it.

`reverseVideo' (class `ReverseVideo')
     Switch foreground and background default colors if `on', use
     colors as specified if `off'.

`screenGamma' (class `ScreenGamma')
     Gamma correction for colors, equivalent to the frame parameter
     `screen-gamma'.

`scrollBarWidth' (class `ScrollBarWidth')
     The scroll bar width in pixels, equivalent to the frame parameter
     `scroll-bar-width'.

`selectionFont' (class `SelectionFont')
     Font name for pop-up menu items, in non-toolkit versions of Emacs.
     (For toolkit versions, see *Note Lucid Resources::, also see
     *Note LessTif Resources::.)

`selectionTimeout' (class `SelectionTimeout')
     Number of milliseconds to wait for a selection reply.  If the
     selection owner doesn't reply in this time, we give up.  A value
     of 0 means wait as long as necessary.

`synchronous' (class `Synchronous')
     Run Emacs in synchronous mode if `on'.  Synchronous mode is useful
     for debugging X problems.

`title' (class `Title')
     Name to display in the title bar of the initial Emacs frame.

`toolBar' (class `ToolBar')
     Number of lines to reserve for the tool bar.  A zero value
     suppresses the tool bar.  For the Emacs tool bar (i.e. not Gtk+),
     if the value is non-zero and `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-`nil',
     the tool bar's size will be changed automatically so that all tool
     bar items are visible.    If the value of `auto-resize-tool-bars'
     is `grow-only', the tool bar expands automatically, but does not
     contract automatically.  To contract the tool bar, you must redraw
     the frame by entering `C-l'.  For the Gtk+ tool bar, any non-zero
     value means on and `auto-resize-tool-bars' has no effect.

`useXIM' (class `UseXIM')
     Turn off use of X input methods (XIM) if `false' or `off'.  This
     is only relevant if your Emacs is actually built with XIM support.
     It is potentially useful to turn off XIM for efficiency,
     especially slow X client/server links.

`verticalScrollBars' (class `ScrollBars')
     Give frames scroll bars if `on'; don't have scroll bars if `off'.

`visualClass' (class `VisualClass')
     Specify the "visual" that X should use.  This tells X how to handle
     colors.

     The value should start with one of `TrueColor', `PseudoColor',
     `DirectColor', `StaticColor', `GrayScale', and `StaticGray',
     followed by `-DEPTH', where DEPTH is the number of color planes.
     Most terminals only allow a few "visuals," and the `dpyinfo'
     program outputs information saying which ones.


File: emacs,  Node: Face Resources,  Next: Lucid Resources,  Prev: Table of Resources,  Up: X Resources

D.3 X Resources for Faces
=========================

You can use resources to customize the appearance of particular faces
(*note Faces::):

`FACE.attributeForeground'
     Foreground color for face FACE.

`FACE.attributeBackground'
     Background color for face FACE.

`FACE.attributeUnderline'
     Underline flag for face FACE.  Use `on' or `true' for yes.

`FACE.attributeStrikeThrough'
`FACE.attributeOverline'
`FACE.attributeBox'
`FACE.attributeInverse'
     Likewise, for other boolean font attributes.

`FACE.attributeStipple'
     The name of a pixmap data file to use for the stipple pattern, or
     `false' to not use stipple for the face FACE.

`FACE.attributeBackgroundPixmap'
     The background pixmap for the face FACE.  Should be a name of a
     pixmap file or `false'.

`FACE.attributeFont'
     Font name (full XFD name or valid X abbreviation) for face FACE.
     Instead of this, you can specify the font through separate
     attributes.

   Instead of using `attributeFont' to specify a font name, you can
select a font through these separate attributes:

`FACE.attributeFamily'
     Font family for face FACE.

`FACE.attributeHeight'
     Height of the font to use for face FACE: either an integer
     specifying the height in units of 1/10pt, or a floating point
     number that specifies a scale factor to scale the underlying face's
     default font, or a function to be called with the default height
     which will return a new height.

`FACE.attributeWidth'
`FACE.attributeWeight'
`FACE.attributeSlant'
     Each of these resources corresponds to a like-named font attribute,
     and you write the resource value the same as the symbol you would
     use for the font attribute value.

`FACE.attributeBold'
     Bold flag for face FACE--instead of `attributeWeight'.  Use `on'
     or `true' for yes.

`FACE.attributeItalic'
     Italic flag for face FACE--instead of `attributeSlant'.


File: emacs,  Node: Lucid Resources,  Next: LessTif Resources,  Prev: Face Resources,  Up: X Resources

D.4 Lucid Menu X Resources
==========================

If the Emacs installed at your site was built to use the X toolkit with
the Lucid menu widgets, then the menu bar is a separate widget and has
its own resources.  The resource names contain `pane.menubar'
(following, as always, the name of the Emacs invocation, or `Emacs',
which stands for all Emacs invocations).  Specify them like this:

     Emacs.pane.menubar.RESOURCE:  VALUE

For example, to specify the font `8x16' for the menu-bar items, write
this:

     Emacs.pane.menubar.font:  8x16

Resources for _non-menubar_ toolkit pop-up menus have `menu*' instead
of `pane.menubar'.  For example, to specify the font `8x16' for the
pop-up menu items, write this:

     Emacs.menu*.font:	8x16

For dialog boxes, use `dialog*':

     Emacs.dialog*.font:	8x16

The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale.  For more
information about fontsets see the man page for `XCreateFontSet'.  To
enable multilingual menu text you specify a `fontSet' resource instead
of the font resource.  If both `font' and `fontSet' resources are
specified, the `fontSet' resource is used.

   Thus, to specify `-*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*' for
both the popup and menu bar menus, write this:

     Emacs*menu*fontSet:  -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*

The `*menu*' as a wildcard matches `pane.menubar' and `menu...'.

   Experience shows that on some systems you may need to add `shell.'
before the `pane.menubar' or `menu*'.  On some other systems, you must
not add `shell.'.  The generic wildcard approach should work on both
kinds of systems.

   Here is a list of the specific resources for menu bars and pop-up
menus:

`font'
     Font for menu item text.

`fontSet'
     Fontset for menu item text.

`foreground'
     Color of the foreground.

`background'
     Color of the background.

`buttonForeground'
     In the menu bar, the color of the foreground for a selected item.

`horizontalSpacing'
     Horizontal spacing in pixels between items.  Default is 3.

`verticalSpacing'
     Vertical spacing in pixels between items.  Default is 2.

`arrowSpacing'
     Horizontal spacing between the arrow (which indicates a submenu)
     and the associated text.  Default is 10.

`shadowThickness'
     Thickness of shadow line around the widget.  Default is 1.

     Also determines the thickness of shadow lines around other objects,
     for instance 3D buttons and arrows.  If you have the impression
     that the arrows in the menus do not stand out clearly enough or
     that the difference between "in" and "out" buttons is difficult to
     see, set this to 2.  If you have no problems with visibility, the
     default probably looks better.  The background color may also have
     some effect on the contrast.

`margin'
     The margin of the menu bar, in characters.  Default is 1.


File: emacs,  Node: LessTif Resources,  Next: GTK resources,  Prev: Lucid Resources,  Up: X Resources

D.5 LessTif Menu X Resources
============================

If the Emacs installed at your site was built to use the X toolkit with
the LessTif or Motif widgets, then the menu bar, the dialog boxes, the
pop-up menus, and the file-selection box are separate widgets and have
their own resources.

   The resource names for the menu bar contain `pane.menubar'
(following, as always, the name of the Emacs invocation, or `Emacs',
which stands for all Emacs invocations).  Specify them like this:

     Emacs.pane.menubar.SUBWIDGET.RESOURCE:  VALUE

   Each individual string in the menu bar is a subwidget; the
subwidget's name is the same as the menu item string.  For example, the
word `File' in the menu bar is part of a subwidget named
`emacs.pane.menubar.File'.  Most likely, you want to specify the same
resources for the whole menu bar.  To do this, use `*' instead of a
specific subwidget name.  For example, to specify the font `8x16' for
the menu-bar items, write this:

     Emacs.pane.menubar.*.fontList:  8x16

This also specifies the resource value for submenus.

   Each item in a submenu in the menu bar also has its own name for X
resources; for example, the `File' submenu has an item named `Save
(current buffer)'.  A resource specification for a submenu item looks
like this:

     Emacs.pane.menubar.popup_*.MENU.ITEM.RESOURCE: VALUE

For example, here's how to specify the font for the `Save (current
buffer)' item:

     Emacs.pane.menubar.popup_*.File.Save (current buffer).fontList: 8x16

For an item in a second-level submenu, such as `Complete Word' under
`Spell Checking' under `Tools', the resource fits this template:

     Emacs.pane.menubar.popup_*.popup_*.MENU.RESOURCE: VALUE

For example,

     Emacs.pane.menubar.popup_*.popup_*.Spell Checking.Complete Word: VALUE

(This should be one long line.)

   It's impossible to specify a resource for all the menu-bar items
without also specifying it for the submenus as well.  So if you want the
submenu items to look different from the menu bar itself, you must ask
for that in two steps.  First, specify the resource for all of them;
then, override the value for submenus alone.  Here is an example:

     Emacs.pane.menubar.*.fontList:  8x16
     Emacs.pane.menubar.popup_*.fontList: 8x16

For LessTif pop-up menus, use `menu*' instead of `pane.menubar'.  For
example, to specify the font `8x16' for the pop-up menu items, write
this:

     Emacs.menu*.fontList:  8x16

For LessTif dialog boxes, use `dialog' instead of `menu':

     Emacs.dialog*.fontList: 8x16
     Emacs.dialog*.foreground: hotpink

   To specify resources for the LessTif file-selection box, use `fsb*',
like this:

     Emacs.fsb*.fontList: 8x16

   Here is a list of the specific resources for LessTif menu bars and
pop-up menus:

`armColor'
     The color to show in an armed button.

`fontList'
     The font to use.

`marginBottom'
`marginHeight'
`marginLeft'
`marginRight'
`marginTop'
`marginWidth'
     Amount of space to leave around the item, within the border.

`borderWidth'
     The width of the border around the menu item, on all sides.

`shadowThickness'
     The width of the border shadow.

`bottomShadowColor'
     The color for the border shadow, on the bottom and the right.

`topShadowColor'
     The color for the border shadow, on the top and the left.


File: emacs,  Node: GTK resources,  Prev: LessTif Resources,  Up: X Resources

D.6 GTK resources
=================

If Emacs was built to use the GTK widget set, then the menu bar, tool
bar, scroll bar and the dialogs are customized with the standard GTK
customization file, `~/.gtkrc-2.0', or with the Emacs specific file
`~/.emacs.d/gtkrc'.  We recommend that you use `~/.emacs.d/gtkrc' for
customizations, since `~/.gtkrc-2.0' seems to be ignored when running
GConf with GNOME.  These files apply only to GTK widget features.  To
customize Emacs font, background, faces, etc., use the normal X
resources (*note Resources::).

   Some GTK themes override these mechanisms, which means that using
these mechanisms will not work to customize them.

   In these files you first define a style and say what it means; then
you specify to apply the style to various widget types (*note GTK
widget names::).  Here is an example of how to change the font for
Emacs menus:

     # Define the style `menufont'.
     style "menufont"
     {
       font_name = "helvetica bold 14"  # This is a Pango font name
     }

     # Specify that widget type `*emacs-menuitem*' uses `menufont'.
     widget "*emacs-menuitem*" style "menufont"

   Here is a more elaborate example, showing how to change the parts of
the scroll bar:

     style "scroll"
     {
       fg[NORMAL] = "red"     # The arrow color.
       bg[NORMAL] = "yellow"  # The thumb and background around the arrow.
       bg[ACTIVE] = "blue"    # The trough color.
       bg[PRELIGHT] = "white" # The thumb color when the mouse is over it.
     }

     widget "*verticalScrollBar*" style "scroll"

   There are also parameters that affect GTK as a whole.  For example,
the property `gtk-font-name' sets the default font for GTK.  You must
use Pango font names (*note GTK styles::).  A GTK resources file that
just sets a default font looks like this:

     gtk-font-name = "courier 12"

   The GTK resources file is fully described in the GTK API document.
This can be found in
`PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/gtk/gtk-resource-files.html', where `prefix'
is the directory in which the GTK libraries were installed (usually
`/usr' or `/usr/local').  You can also find the document online, at
`http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtk-Resource-Files.html'.

* Menu:

* GTK widget names::      How widgets in GTK are named in general.
* GTK Names in Emacs::    GTK widget names in Emacs.
* GTK styles::            What can be customized in a GTK widget.


File: emacs,  Node: GTK widget names,  Next: GTK Names in Emacs,  Up: GTK resources

D.6.1 GTK widget names
----------------------

A GTK widget is specified by its "widget class" and "widget name".  The
widget class is the type of the widget: for example, `GtkMenuBar'.  The
widget name is the name given to a specific widget.  A widget always
has a class, but need not have a name.

   "Absolute names" are sequences of widget names or widget classes,
corresponding to hierarchies of widgets embedded within other widgets.
For example, if a `GtkWindow' named `top' contains a `GtkVBox' named
`box', which in turn contains a `GtkMenuBar' called `menubar', the
absolute class name of the menu-bar widget is
`GtkWindow.GtkVBox.GtkMenuBar', and its absolute widget name is
`top.box.menubar'.

   When assigning a style to a widget, you can use the absolute class
name or the absolute widget name.

   There are two commands to specify changes for widgets:

`widget_class'
     specifies a style for widgets based on the absolute class name.

`widget'
     specifies a style for widgets based on the absolute class name, or
     just the class.

You must specify the class and the style in double-quotes, and put
these commands at the top level in the GTK customization file, like
this:

     style "menufont"
     {
       font_name = "helvetica bold 14"
     }

     widget "top.box.menubar" style "menufont"
     widget_class "GtkWindow.GtkVBox.GtkMenuBar" style "menufont"

   Matching of absolute names uses shell wildcard syntax: `*' matches
zero or more characters and `?' matches one character.  This example
assigns `base_style' to all widgets:

     widget "*" style "base_style"

   Given the absolute class name `GtkWindow.GtkVBox.GtkMenuBar' and the
corresponding absolute widget name `top.box.menubar', all these
examples specify `my_style' for the menu bar:

     widget_class "GtkWindow.GtkVBox.GtkMenuBar" style "my_style"
     widget_class "GtkWindow.*.GtkMenuBar" style "my_style"
     widget_class "*GtkMenuBar" style "my_style"
     widget "top.box.menubar" style "my_style"
     widget "*box*menubar" style "my_style"
     widget "*menubar" style "my_style"
     widget "*menu*" style "my_style"


File: emacs,  Node: GTK Names in Emacs,  Next: GTK styles,  Prev: GTK widget names,  Up: GTK resources

D.6.2 GTK Widget Names in Emacs
-------------------------------

In Emacs, the top level widget for a frame is a `GtkWindow' that
contains a `GtkVBox'.  The `GtkVBox' contains the `GtkMenuBar' and a
`GtkFixed' widget.  The vertical scroll bars, `GtkVScrollbar', are
contained in the `GtkFixed' widget.  The text you write in Emacs is
drawn in the `GtkFixed' widget.

   Dialogs in Emacs are `GtkDialog' widgets.  The file dialog is a
`GtkFileSelection' widget.

To set a style for the menu bar using the absolute class name, use:

     widget_class "GtkWindow.GtkVBox.GtkMenuBar" style "my_style"

For the scroll bar, the absolute class name is:

     widget_class
       "GtkWindow.GtkVBox.GtkFixed.GtkVScrollbar"
          style "my_style"

The names for the emacs widgets, and their classes, are:

`emacs-filedialog'         `GtkFileSelection'
`emacs-dialog'             `GtkDialog'
`Emacs'                    `GtkWindow'
`pane'                     `GtkVHbox'
`emacs'                    `GtkFixed'
`verticalScrollBar'        `GtkVScrollbar'
`emacs-toolbar'            `GtkToolbar'
`menubar'                  `GtkMenuBar'
`emacs-menuitem'           anything in menus

Thus, for Emacs you can write the two examples above as:

     widget "Emacs.pane.menubar" style "my_style"
     widget "Emacs.pane.emacs.verticalScrollBar" style "my_style"

   GTK absolute names are quite strange when it comes to menus and
dialogs.  The names do not start with `Emacs', as they are
free-standing windows and not contained (in the GTK sense) by the Emacs
GtkWindow.  To customize the dialogs and menus, use wildcards like this:

     widget "*emacs-dialog*" style "my_dialog_style"
     widget "*emacs-filedialog* style "my_file_style"
     widget "*emacs-menuitem* style "my_menu_style"

   If you specify a customization in `~/.emacs.d/gtkrc', then it
automatically applies only to Emacs, since other programs don't read
that file.  For example, the drop down menu in the file dialog can not
be customized by any absolute widget name, only by an absolute class
name.  This is because the widgets in the drop down menu do not have
names and the menu is not contained in the Emacs GtkWindow.  To have
all menus in Emacs look the same, use this in `~/.emacs.d/gtkrc':

     widget_class "*Menu*" style "my_menu_style"


File: emacs,  Node: GTK styles,  Prev: GTK Names in Emacs,  Up: GTK resources

D.6.3 GTK styles
----------------

In a GTK style you specify the appearance widgets shall have.  You can
specify foreground and background color, background pixmap and font.
The edit widget (where you edit the text) in Emacs is a GTK widget, but
trying to specify a style for the edit widget will have no effect.
This is so that Emacs compiled for GTK is compatible with Emacs
compiled for other X toolkits.  The settings for foreground, background
and font for the edit widget is taken from the X resources; *note
Resources::.  Here is an example of two style declarations, `default'
and `ruler':

     pixmap_path "/usr/share/pixmaps:/usr/include/X11/pixmaps"

     style "default"
     {
       font_name = "helvetica 12"

       bg[NORMAL] = { 0.83, 0.80, 0.73 }
       bg[SELECTED] = { 0.0, 0.55, 0.55 }
       bg[INSENSITIVE] = { 0.77, 0.77, 0.66 }
       bg[ACTIVE] = { 0.0, 0.55, 0.55 }
       bg[PRELIGHT] = { 0.0, 0.55, 0.55 }

       fg[NORMAL] = "black"
       fg[SELECTED] = { 0.9, 0.9, 0.9 }
       fg[ACTIVE] = "black"
       fg[PRELIGHT] = { 0.9, 0.9, 0.9 }

       base[INSENSITIVE] = "#777766"
       text[INSENSITIVE] = { 0.60, 0.65, 0.57 }

       bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "background.xpm"
       bg_pixmap[INSENSITIVE] = "background.xpm"
       bg_pixmap[ACTIVE] = "background.xpm"
       bg_pixmap[PRELIGHT] = "<none>"

     }

     style "ruler" = "default"
     {
       font_name = "helvetica 8"
     }

   The style `ruler' inherits from `default'.  This way you can build
on existing styles.  The syntax for fonts and colors is described below.

   As this example shows, it is possible to specify several values for
foreground and background depending on the widget's "state".  The
possible states are:

`NORMAL'
     This is the default state for widgets.

`ACTIVE'
     This is the state for a widget that is ready to do something.  It
     is also for the trough of a scroll bar, i.e.  `bg[ACTIVE] = "red"'
     sets the scroll bar trough to red.  Buttons that have been pressed
     but not released yet ("armed") are in this state.

`PRELIGHT'
     This is the state for a widget that can be manipulated, when the
     mouse pointer is over it--for example when the mouse is over the
     thumb in the scroll bar or over a menu item.  When the mouse is
     over a button that is not pressed, the button is in this state.

`SELECTED'
     This is the state for data that has been selected by the user.  It
     can be selected text or items selected in a list.  This state is
     not used in Emacs.

`INSENSITIVE'
     This is the state for widgets that are visible, but they can not be
     manipulated in the usual way--for example, buttons that can't be
     pressed, and disabled menu items.  To display disabled menu items
     in yellow, use `fg[INSENSITIVE] = "yellow"'.

   Here are the things that can go in a style declaration:

`bg[STATE] = COLOR'
     This specifies the background color for the widget.  Note that
     editable text doesn't use `bg'; it uses `base' instead.

`base[STATE] = COLOR'
     This specifies the background color for editable text.  In Emacs,
     this color is used for the background of the text fields in the
     file dialog.

`bg_pixmap[STATE] = "PIXMAP"'
     This specifies an image background (instead of a background color).
     PIXMAP should be the image file name.  GTK can use a number of
     image file formats, including XPM, XBM, GIF, JPEG and PNG.  If you
     want a widget to use the same image as its parent, use `<parent>'.
     If you don't want any image, use `<none>'.  `<none>' is the way
     to cancel a background image inherited from a parent style.

     You can't specify the file by its absolute file name.  GTK looks
     for the pixmap file in directories specified in `pixmap_path'.
     `pixmap_path' is a colon-separated list of directories within
     double quotes, specified at the top level in a `gtkrc' file (i.e.
     not inside a style definition; see example above):

          pixmap_path "/usr/share/pixmaps:/usr/include/X11/pixmaps"

`fg[STATE] = COLOR'
     This specifies the foreground color for widgets to use.  It is the
     color of text in menus and buttons, and the color for the arrows in
     the scroll bar.  For editable text, use `text'.

`text[STATE] = COLOR'
     This is the color for editable text.  In Emacs, this color is used
     for the text fields in the file dialog.

`font_name = "FONT"'
     This specifies the font for text in the widget.  FONT is a Pango
     font name, for example `Sans Italic 10', `Helvetica Bold 12',
     `Courier 14', `Times 18'.  See below for exact syntax.  The names
     are case insensitive.

   There are three ways to specify a color: by name, in hexadecimal
form, and with an RGB triplet.

A color name is written within double quotes, for example `"red"'.

Hexadecimal form is the same as in X: `#RRRRGGGGBBBB', where all three
color specs must have the same number of hex digits (1, 2, 3 or 4).

An RGB triplet looks like `{ R, G, B }', where R, G and B are either
integers in the range 0-65535 or floats in the range 0.0-1.0.

   Pango font names have the form "FAMILY-LIST STYLE-OPTIONS SIZE."  FAMILY-LIST
is a comma separated list of font families optionally terminated by a
comma.  This way you can specify several families and the first one
found will be used.  FAMILY corresponds to the second part in an X font
name, for example in

     -adobe-times-medium-r-normal--12-120-75-75-p-64-iso10646-1

the family name is `times'.

STYLE-OPTIONS is a whitespace separated list of words where each word
is a style, variant, weight, or stretch.  The default value for all of
these is `normal'.

A `style' corresponds to the fourth part of an X font name.  In X font
names it is the character `r', `i' or `o'; in Pango font names the
corresponding values are `normal', `italic', or `oblique'.

A `variant' is either `normal' or `small-caps'.  Small caps is a font
with the lower case characters replaced by smaller variants of the
capital characters.

Weight describes the "boldness" of a font.  It corresponds to the third
part of an X font name.  It is one of `ultra-light', `light', `normal',
`bold', `ultra-bold', or `heavy'.

Stretch gives the width of the font relative to other designs within a
family.  It corresponds to the fifth part of an X font name.  It is one
of `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', `condensed', `semi-condensed',
`normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', `extra-expanded', or
`ultra-expanded'.

SIZE is a decimal number that describes the font size in points.


File: emacs,  Node: Antinews,  Next: Mac OS / GNUstep,  Prev: X Resources,  Up: Top

Appendix E Emacs 22 Antinews
****************************

For those users who live backwards in time, here is information about
downgrading to Emacs version 22.3.  We hope you will enjoy the greater
simplicity that results from the absence of many Emacs 23.2 features.

   * We have switched to a character representation specially designed
     for Emacs.  Rather than forcing all the widely used scripts into
     artificial alignment, as Unicode does, Emacs treats them all
     equally, giving each one a place in the space of character codes.
     We have eliminated the confusing practice, in Emacs 23, whereby
     one character can belong to multiple character sets.  Now each
     script has its own variant, and they all are different as far as
     Emacs is concerned.  For example, there's a Latin-1 c-cedilla
     character, and there's a Latin-2 c-cedilla; searching a buffer for
     the Latin-1 variant only finds that variant, but not the others.

   * Emacs now uses its own special internal encoding for non-ASCII
     characters, known as `emacs-mule'.  This was imperative to support
     several different variants of the same character, each one
     belonging to its own script: `emacs-mule' marks each character
     with its script, to better discern them from one another.

   * For simplicity, the functions `encode-coding-region' and
     `decode-coding-region' no longer accept an argument saying where
     to store the result of their conversions.  The result always
     replaces the original, so there's no need to look for it elsewhere.

   * Emacs no longer performs font anti-aliasing.  If your fonts look
     ugly, try choosing a larger font and increasing the screen
     resolution.  Admittedly, this becomes difficult as you go further
     back in time, since available screen resolutions will decrease.

   * The Fontconfig font library is no longer supported.  To specify a
     font, you must use an XLFD (X Logical Font Descriptor).  The other
     ways of specifying fonts--so-called "Fontconfig" and "GTK" font
     names--are redundant, so they have been removed.

   * Transient Mark mode is now disabled by default.  Furthermore, some
     commands that operate specifically on the region when it is active
     and Transient Mark mode is enabled (such as `fill-paragraph'
     `ispell-word', and `indent-for-tab-command'), no longer do so.

   * Holding <shift> while typing a motion command no longer creates a
     temporarily active region, since that's inconsistent with how Emacs
     normally handles keybindings.  The variable `shift-select-mode'
     has been deleted.  You can, however, still create temporarily
     active regions by dragging the mouse.

   * The line motion commands, `C-n' and `C-p', now move by logical
     text lines, not screen lines.  Even if a long text line is
     continued over multiple screen lines, `C-n' and `C-p' treat it as a
     single line, because that's ultimately what it is.

   * Visual Line mode, which provides "word wrap" functionality, has
     been removed.  You can still use Long Lines mode to gain an
     approximation of word wrapping, though this has some
     drawbacks--for instance, syntax highlighting often doesn't work
     well on wrapped lines.

   * `C-l' now runs `recenter' instead of `recenter-top-bottom'.  This
     always sets the current line at the center of the window, instead
     of cycling through the center, top, and bottom of the window on
     successive invocations.  This lets you type `C-l C-l C-l C-l' to
     be _absolutely sure_ that you have recentered the line.

   * The way Emacs generates possible minibuffer completions is now much
     simpler to understand.  It matches alternatives to the text before
     point, ignoring the text after point; it also does not attempt to
     perform partial completion if the first completion attempt fails.

   * Typing `M-n' at the start of the minibuffer history list no longer
     attempts to generate guesses of possible minibuffer input.  It
     instead does the straightforward thing, by issuing the message
     `End of history; no default available'.

   * Individual buffers can no longer display faces specially.  The text
     scaling commands `C-x C-+', `C-x C--', and `C-x C-0' have been
     removed, and so has the buffer face menu bound to `S-down-mouse-1'.

   * VC no longer supports fileset-based operations on distributed
     version control systems (DVCSs) such as Arch, Bazaar, Subversion,
     Mercurial, and Git.  For instance, multi-file commits will be
     performed by committing one file at a time.  As you go further
     back in time, we will remove DVCS support entirely, so you should
     migrate your projects to CVS.

   * Rmail now uses a special file format, Babyl format, specifically
     designed for storing and editing mail.  When you visit a file in
     Rmail, or get new mail, Rmail converts it automatically to Babyl
     format.

   * Emacs can no longer display frames on X windows and text terminals
     (ttys) simultaneously.  If you start Emacs as an X application, it
     can only create X frames; if you start Emacs on a tty, it can only
     use that tty.  No more confusion about which type of frame
     `emacsclient' will use in any given Emacs session!

   * Emacs can no longer be started as a daemon.  You can be sure that
     if you don't see Emacs, then it's not running.

   * Emacs has added support for many soon-to-be-non-obsolete platforms,
     including VMS, DECstation, SCO Unix, and systems lacking alloca.
     Support for Sun windows has been added.

   * To keep up with decreasing computer memory capacity and disk
     space, many other functions and files have been eliminated in
     Emacs 22.3.


File: emacs,  Node: Mac OS / GNUstep,  Next: Microsoft Windows,  Prev: Antinews,  Up: Top

Appendix F Emacs and Mac OS / GNUstep
*************************************

This section briefly describes the peculiarities of using Emacs built
with the GNUstep libraries on GNU/Linux or other operating systems, or
on Mac OS X with native window system support.  For Mac OS X, Emacs can
be built either without window system support, with X11, or with the
Cocoa interface.  This section only applies to the Cocoa build.  Emacs
23 does not support Mac OS Classic.

   Emacs, when built on Mac OS X, uses the Cocoa application interface.
For various historical and technical reasons, Emacs uses the term
`Nextstep' internally, instead of "Cocoa" or "Mac OS X"; for instance,
most of the commands and variables described in the following sections
begin with `ns-', which is short for `Nextstep'.  NeXTstep was an
application interface released by NeXT Inc during the 1980s, of which
Cocoa is a direct descendant.  Apart from Cocoa, there is another
NeXTstep-style system: GNUstep, which is free software.  As of this
writing, the GNUstep support is alpha status (*note GNUstep Support::),
but we hope to improve it in the future.

* Menu:

* Mac / GNUstep Basics::        Basic Emacs usage under GNUstep or Mac OS.
* Mac / GNUstep Customization:: Customizations under GNUstep or Mac OS.
* Mac / GNUstep Events::        How window system events are handled.
* GNUstep Support::             Details on status of GNUstep support.


File: emacs,  Node: Mac / GNUstep Basics,  Next: Mac / GNUstep Customization,  Up: Mac OS / GNUstep

F.1 Basic Emacs usage under Mac OS and GNUstep
==============================================

By default, the <alt> and <option> keys are the same as <Meta> when
running under Mac OS.  The Mac <Cmd> key is the same as <Super>, and
Emacs provides a set of keybindings using this modifier key that mimic
other Mac / GNUstep applications (*note Mac / GNUstep Events::).  You
can change these bindings in the usual way (*note Key Bindings::).

   The standard Mac / GNUstep font and color panels are accessible via
Lisp commands.    To use the color panel, drag from it to an Emacs
frame to change the foreground color of the face at that position (if
the <shift> key is held down, it changes the background color instead).
To discard the settings, create a new frame and close the altered one.

   <S-Mouse-1> (i.e., clicking the left mouse button while holding down
the <Shift> key) adjusts the region to the click position, just like
<Mouse-3> (`mouse-save-then-kill'); it does not pop up a menu for
changing the default face, as <S-Mouse-1> normally does (*note
Temporary Face Changes::).  This change makes Emacs behave more like
other Mac / GNUstep applications.

   When you open or save files using the menus, or using the <Cmd-o>
and <Cmd-S> bindings, Emacs uses graphical file dialogs to read file
names.  However, if you use the regular Emacs key sequences, such as
<C-x C-f>, Emacs uses the minibuffer to read file names.

   On GNUstep, in an X-windows environment you need to use <Cmd-c>
instead of one of the <C-w> or <M-w> commands to transfer text to the X
primary selection; otherwise, Emacs will use the "clipboard" selection.
Likewise, <Cmd-y> (instead of <C-y>) yanks from the X primary
selection instead of the kill-ring or clipboard.

F.1.1 Grabbing environment variables
------------------------------------

Many programs which may run under Emacs, like latex or man, depend on
the settings of environment variables.  If Emacs is launched from the
shell, it will automatically inherit these environment variables and
its subprocesses will inherit them from it.  But if Emacs is launched
from the Finder it is not a descendant of any shell, so its environment
variables haven't been set, which often causes the subprocesses it
launches to behave differently than they would when launched from the
shell.

   For the PATH and MANPATH variables, a system-wide method of setting
PATH is recommended on Mac OS X 10.5 and later, using the `/etc/paths'
files and the `/etc/paths.d' directory.


File: emacs,  Node: Mac / GNUstep Customization,  Next: Mac / GNUstep Events,  Prev: Mac / GNUstep Basics,  Up: Mac OS / GNUstep

F.2 Mac / GNUstep Customization
===============================

Emacs can be customized in several ways in addition to the standard
customization buffers and the Options menu.

F.2.1 Font and Color Panels
---------------------------

The Font Panel may be accessed with M-x ns-popup-font-panel.  It will
set the default font in the frame most recently used or clicked on.

   You can bring up a color panel with M-x ns-popup-color-panel. and
drag the color you want over the emacs face you want to change.  Normal
dragging will alter the foreground color.  Shift dragging will alter the
background color.

   Useful in this context is the listing of all faces obtained by <M-x>
`list-faces-display'.

F.2.2 Open files by dragging to an Emacs window
-----------------------------------------------

The default behaviour when a user drags files from another application
into an Emacs frame is to insert the contents of all the dragged files
into the current buffer.  To remap the `ns-drag-file' event to open the
dragged files in the current frame use the following line:

     (define-key global-map [ns-drag-file] 'ns-find-file)


File: emacs,  Node: Mac / GNUstep Events,  Next: GNUstep Support,  Prev: Mac / GNUstep Customization,  Up: Mac OS / GNUstep

F.3 Windowing System Events under Mac OS / GNUstep
==================================================

Nextstep applications receive a number of special events which have no
X equivalent.  These are sent as specially defined "keys", which do not
correspond to any sequence of keystrokes.  Under Emacs, these "key"
events can be bound to functions just like ordinary keystrokes.  Here
is a list of these events.

<ns-open-file>
     This event occurs when another Nextstep application requests that
     Emacs open a file.  A typical reason for this would be a user
     double-clicking a file in the Finder application.  By default,
     Emacs responds to this event by opening a new frame and visiting
     the file in that frame (`ns-find-file').  As an exception, if the
     selected buffer is the `*scratch*' buffer, Emacs visits the file
     in the selected frame.

     You can change how Emacs responds to <ns-open-file> by changing
     the variable `ns-pop-up-frames'.  Its default value, `'fresh', is
     what we have just described.  A value of `t' means to always visit
     the file in a new frame.  A value of `nil' means to always visit
     the file in an existing frame.

<ns-open-temp-file>
     This event occurs when another application requests that Emacs
     open a temporary file.  By default, this is handled by just
     generating a `ns-open-file' event, the results of which are
     described above.

     You can bind <ns-pop-up-frames> and <ns-open-temp-file> to other
     Lisp functions.  When the event is registered, the name of the
     file to open is stored in the variable `ns-input-file'.

<ns-open-file-line>
     Some applications, such as ProjectBuilder and gdb, request not
     only a particular file, but also a particular line or sequence of
     lines in the file.  Emacs handles this by visiting that file and
     highlighting the requested line (`ns-open-file-select-line').

<ns-drag-file>
     This event occurs when a user drags files from another application
     into an Emacs frame.  The default behavior is to insert the
     contents of all the dragged files into the current buffer
     (`ns-insert-files').  The list of dragged files is stored in the
     variable `ns-input-file'.

<ns-drag-color>
     This event occurs when a user drags a color from the color well (or
     some other source) into an Emacs frame.  The default behavior is to
     alter the foreground color of the area the color was dragged onto
     (`ns-set-foreground-at-mouse').  If this event is issued with a
     <Shift> modifier, Emacs changes the background color instead
     (`ns-set-background-at-mouse').  The name of the dragged color is
     stored in the variable `ns-input-color'.

<ns-change-font>
     This event occurs when the user selects a font in a Nextstep font
     panel (which can be opened with `Cmd-t').  The default behavior is
     to adjust the font of the selected frame
     (`ns-respond-to-changefont').  The name and size of the selected
     font are stored in the variables `ns-input-font' and
     `ns-input-fontsize', respectively.

<ns-power-off>
     This event occurs when the user logs out and Emacs is still
     running, or when `Quit Emacs' is chosen from the application menu.
     The default behavior is to save all file-visiting buffers.

   Emacs also allows users to make use of Nextstep services, via a set
of commands whose names begin with `ns-service-' and end with the name
of the service.  Type `M-x ns-service-<TAB><TAB>' to see a list of
these commands.  These functions either operate on marked text
(replacing it with the result) or take a string argument and return the
result as a string.  You can also use the Lisp function
`ns-perform-service' to pass arbitrary strings to arbitrary services
and receive the results back.  Note that you may need to restart Emacs
to access newly-available services.


File: emacs,  Node: GNUstep Support,  Prev: Mac / GNUstep Events,  Up: Mac OS / GNUstep

F.4 GNUstep Support
===================

Emacs can be built and run under GNUstep, however there are still some
issues to be addressed.  Interested developers should contact
<emacs-devel@gnu.org>.


File: emacs,  Node: Microsoft Windows,  Next: Manifesto,  Prev: Mac OS / GNUstep,  Up: Top

Appendix G Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS
*********************************************

This section describes peculiarities of using Emacs on Microsoft
Windows.  Some of these peculiarities are also relevant to Microsoft's
older MS-DOS "operating system" (also known as "MS-DOG").  However,
Emacs features that are relevant _only_ to MS-DOS are described in a
separate section (*note MS-DOS::).

   The behavior of Emacs on MS-Windows is reasonably similar to what is
documented in the rest of the manual, including support for long file
names, multiple frames, scroll bars, mouse menus, and subprocesses.
However, a few special considerations apply, and they are described
here.

* Menu:

* Text and Binary::     Text files use CRLF to terminate lines.
* Windows Files::       File-name conventions on Windows.
* ls in Lisp::          Emulation of `ls' for Dired.
* Windows HOME::        Where Emacs looks for your `.emacs'.
* Windows Keyboard::    Windows-specific keyboard features.
* Windows Mouse::       Windows-specific mouse features.
* Windows Processes::   Running subprocesses on Windows.
* Windows Printing::    How to specify the printer on MS-Windows.
* Windows Fonts::       Specifying fonts on MS-Windows.
* Windows Misc::        Miscellaneous Windows features.

* MS-DOS::              Using Emacs on MS-DOS (otherwise known as "MS-DOG").


File: emacs,  Node: Text and Binary,  Next: Windows Files,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.1 Text Files and Binary Files
===============================

GNU Emacs uses newline characters to separate text lines.  This is the
convention used on GNU, Unix, and other Posix-compliant systems.

   By contrast, MS-DOS and MS-Windows normally use carriage-return
linefeed, a two-character sequence, to separate text lines.  (Linefeed
is the same character as newline.)  Therefore, convenient editing of
typical files with Emacs requires conversion of these end-of-line (EOL)
sequences.  And that is what Emacs normally does: it converts
carriage-return linefeed into newline when reading files, and converts
newline into carriage-return linefeed when writing files.  The same
mechanism that handles conversion of international character codes does
this conversion also (*note Coding Systems::).

   One consequence of this special format-conversion of most files is
that character positions as reported by Emacs (*note Position Info::) do
not agree with the file size information known to the operating system.

   In addition, if Emacs recognizes from a file's contents that it uses
newline rather than carriage-return linefeed as its line separator, it
does not perform EOL conversion when reading or writing that file.
Thus, you can read and edit files from GNU and Unix systems on MS-DOS
with no special effort, and they will retain their Unix-style
end-of-line convention after you edit them.

   The mode line indicates whether end-of-line translation was used for
the current buffer.  If MS-DOS end-of-line translation is in use for the
buffer, the MS-Windows build of Emacs displays a backslash `\' after
the coding system mnemonic near the beginning of the mode line (*note
Mode Line::).  If no EOL translation was performed, the string `(Unix)'
is displayed instead of the backslash, to alert you that the file's EOL
format is not the usual carriage-return linefeed.

   To visit a file and specify whether it uses DOS-style or Unix-style
end-of-line, specify a coding system (*note Text Coding::).  For
example, `C-x <RET> c unix <RET> C-x C-f foobar.txt' visits the file
`foobar.txt' without converting the EOLs; if some line ends with a
carriage-return linefeed pair, Emacs will display `^M' at the end of
that line.  Similarly, you can direct Emacs to save a buffer in a
specified EOL format with the `C-x <RET> f' command.  For example, to
save a buffer with Unix EOL format, type `C-x <RET> f unix <RET> C-x
C-s'.  If you visit a file with DOS EOL conversion, then save it with
Unix EOL format, that effectively converts the file to Unix EOL style,
like `dos2unix'.

   When you use NFS, Samba, or some other similar method to access file
systems that reside on computers using GNU or Unix systems, Emacs
should not perform end-of-line translation on any files in these file
systems--not even when you create a new file.  To request this,
designate these file systems as "untranslated" file systems by calling
the function `add-untranslated-filesystem'.  It takes one argument: the
file system name, including a drive letter and optionally a directory.
For example,

     (add-untranslated-filesystem "Z:")

designates drive Z as an untranslated file system, and

     (add-untranslated-filesystem "Z:\\foo")

designates directory `\foo' on drive Z as an untranslated file system.

   Most often you would use `add-untranslated-filesystem' in your
`.emacs' file, or in `site-start.el' so that all the users at your site
get the benefit of it.

   To countermand the effect of `add-untranslated-filesystem', use the
function `remove-untranslated-filesystem'.  This function takes one
argument, which should be a string just like the one that was used
previously with `add-untranslated-filesystem'.

   Designating a file system as untranslated does not affect character
set conversion, only end-of-line conversion.  Essentially, it directs
Emacs to create new files with the Unix-style convention of using
newline at the end of a line.  *Note Coding Systems::.

   Some kinds of files should not be converted at all, because their
contents are not really text.  Therefore, Emacs on MS-Windows
distinguishes certain files as "binary files".  (This distinction is
not part of MS-Windows; it is made by Emacs only.)  Binary files
include executable programs, compressed archives, etc.  Emacs uses the
file name to decide whether to treat a file as binary: the variable
`file-name-buffer-file-type-alist' defines the file-name patterns that
indicate binary files.  If a file name matches one of the patterns for
binary files (those whose associations are of the type `(PATTERN . t)',
Emacs reads and writes that file using the `no-conversion' coding
system (*note Coding Systems::) which turns off _all_ coding-system
conversions, not only the EOL conversion.
`file-name-buffer-file-type-alist' also includes file-name patterns for
files which are known to be Windows-style text files with
carriage-return linefeed EOL format, such as `CONFIG.SYS'; Emacs always
writes those files with Windows-style EOLs.

   If a file which belongs to an untranslated file system matches one of
the file-name patterns in `file-name-buffer-file-type-alist', the EOL
conversion is determined by `file-name-buffer-file-type-alist'.


File: emacs,  Node: Windows Files,  Next: ls in Lisp,  Prev: Text and Binary,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.2 File Names on MS-Windows
============================

MS-Windows and MS-DOS normally use a backslash, `\', to separate name
units within a file name, instead of the slash used on other systems.
Emacs on MS-DOS/MS-Windows permits use of either slash or backslash,
and also knows about drive letters in file names.

   On MS-DOS/MS-Windows, file names are case-insensitive, so Emacs by
default ignores letter-case in file names during completion.

   The variable `w32-get-true-file-attributes' controls whether Emacs
should issue additional system calls to determine more accurately file
attributes in primitives like `file-attributes' and
`directory-files-and-attributes'.  These additional calls are needed to
report correct file ownership, link counts and file types for special
files such as pipes.  Without these system calls, file ownership will
be attributed to the current user, link counts will be always reported
as 1, and special files will be reported as regular files.

   If the value of this variable is `local' (the default), Emacs will
issue these additional system calls only for files on local fixed
drives.  Any other non-`nil' value means do this even for removable and
remote volumes, where this could potentially slow down Dired and other
related features.  The value of `nil' means never issue those system
calls.  Non-`nil' values are more useful on NTFS volumes, which support
hard links and file security, than on FAT, FAT32, and XFAT volumes.


File: emacs,  Node: ls in Lisp,  Next: Windows HOME,  Prev: Windows Files,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.3 Emulation of `ls' on MS-Windows
===================================

Dired normally uses the external program `ls' (or its close work-alike)
to produce the directory listing displayed in Dired buffers (*note
Dired::).  However, MS-Windows and MS-DOS systems don't come with such
a program, although several ports of GNU `ls' are available.
Therefore, Emacs on those systems _emulates_ `ls' in Lisp, by using the
`ls-lisp.el' package.  While `ls-lisp.el' provides a reasonably full
emulation of `ls', there are some options and features peculiar to that
emulation; they are described in this section.

   The `ls' emulation supports many of the `ls' switches, but it
doesn't support all of them.  Here's the list of the switches it does
support: `-A', `-a', `-B', `-C', `-c', `-i', `-G', `-g', `-R', `-r',
`-S', `-s', `-t', `-U', `-u', and `-X'.  The `-F' switch is partially
supported (it appends the character that classifies the file, but does
not prevent symlink following).

   On MS-Windows and MS-DOS, `ls-lisp.el' is preloaded when Emacs is
built, so the Lisp emulation of `ls' is always used on those platforms.
If you have a ported `ls', setting
`ls-lisp-use-insert-directory-program' to a non-`nil' value will revert
to using an external program named by the variable
`insert-directory-program'.

   By default, `ls-lisp.el' uses a case-sensitive sort order for the
directory listing it produces; this is so the listing looks the same as
on other platforms.  If you wish that the files be sorted in
case-insensitive order, set the variable `ls-lisp-ignore-case' to a
non-`nil' value.

   By default, files and subdirectories are sorted together, to emulate
the behavior of `ls'.  However, native MS-Windows/MS-DOS file managers
list the directories before the files; if you want that behavior,
customize the option `ls-lisp-dirs-first' to a non-`nil' value.

   The variable `ls-lisp-verbosity' controls the file attributes that
`ls-lisp.el' displays.  The value should be a list that contains one or
more of the symbols `links', `uid', and `gid'.  `links' means display
the count of different file names that are associated with (a.k.a.
"links to") the file's data; this is only useful on NTFS volumes.
`uid' means display the numerical identifier of the user who owns the
file.  `gid' means display the numerical identifier of the file owner's
group.  The default value is `(links uid gid)' i.e. all the 3 optional
attributes are displayed.

   The variable `ls-lisp-emulation' controls the flavour of the `ls'
emulation by setting the defaults for the 3 options described above:
`ls-lisp-ignore-case', `ls-lisp-dirs-first', and `ls-lisp-verbosity'.
The value of this option can be one of the following symbols:

`GNU'
`nil'
     Emulate GNU systems; this is the default.  This sets
     `ls-lisp-ignore-case' and `ls-lisp-dirs-first' to `nil', and
     `ls-lisp-verbosity' to `(links uid gid)'.

`UNIX'
     Emulate Unix systems.  Like `GNU', but sets `ls-lisp-verbosity' to
     `(links uid)'.

`MacOS'
     Emulate MacOS.  Sets `ls-lisp-ignore-case' to `t', and
     `ls-lisp-dirs-first' and `ls-lisp-verbosity' to `nil'.

`MS-Windows'
     Emulate MS-Windows.  Sets `ls-lisp-ignore-case' and
     `ls-lisp-dirs-first' to `t', and `ls-lisp-verbosity' to `(links)'
     on Windows NT/2K/XP/2K3 and to `nil' on Windows 9X.  Note that the
     default emulation is _not_ `MS-Windows', even on Windows, since
     many users of Emacs on those platforms prefer the GNU defaults.

Any other value of `ls-lisp-emulation' means the same as `GNU'.  Note
that this option needs to be set _before_ `ls-lisp.el' is loaded, which
means that on MS-Windows and MS-DOS you will have to set the value from
your `.emacs' file and then restart Emacs, since `ls-lisp.el' is
preloaded.

   The variable `ls-lisp-support-shell-wildcards' controls how
file-name patterns are supported: if it is non-`nil' (the default),
they are treated as shell-style wildcards; otherwise they are treated
as Emacs regular expressions.

   The variable `ls-lisp-format-time-list' defines how to format the
date and time of files.  _The value of this variable is ignored_,
unless Emacs cannot determine the current locale.  (However, if the
value of `ls-lisp-use-localized-time-format' is non-`nil', Emacs obeys
`ls-lisp-format-time-list' even if the current locale is available; see
below.)

   The value of `ls-lisp-format-time-list' is a list of 2 strings.  The
first string is used if the file was modified within the current year,
while the second string is used for older files.  In each of these two
strings you can use `%'-sequences to substitute parts of the time.  For
example:
     ("%b %e %H:%M" "%b %e  %Y")

Note that the strings substituted for these `%'-sequences depend on the
current locale.  *Note Time Parsing: (elisp)Time Parsing, for more
about format time specs.

   Normally, Emacs formats the file time stamps in either traditional
or ISO-style time format.  However, if the value of the variable
`ls-lisp-use-localized-time-format' is non-`nil', Emacs formats file
time stamps according to what `ls-lisp-format-time-list' specifies.
The `%'-sequences in `ls-lisp-format-time-list' produce
locale-dependent month and day names, which might cause misalignment of
columns in Dired display.


File: emacs,  Node: Windows HOME,  Next: Windows Keyboard,  Prev: ls in Lisp,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.4 HOME Directory on MS-Windows
================================

The Windows equivalent of the `HOME' directory is the "user-specific
application data directory".  The actual location depends on your
Windows version and system configuration; typical values are
`C:\Documents and Settings\USERNAME\Application Data' on Windows 2K/XP
and later, and either `C:\WINDOWS\Application Data' or
`C:\WINDOWS\Profiles\USERNAME\Application Data' on the older Windows
9X/ME systems.

   The home directory is where your init file `.emacs' is stored.  When
Emacs starts, it first checks whether the environment variable `HOME'
is set.  If it is, it looks for the init file in the directory pointed
by `HOME'.  If `HOME' is not defined, Emacs checks for an existing
`.emacs' file in `C:\', the root directory of drive `C:'(1).  If
there's no such file in `C:\', Emacs next uses the Windows system calls
to find out the exact location of your application data directory.  If
that system call fails, Emacs falls back to `C:\'.

   Whatever the final place is, Emacs sets the value of the `HOME'
environment variable to point to it, and it will use that location for
other files and directories it normally creates in the user's home
directory.

   You can always find out where Emacs thinks is your home directory's
location by typing `C-x d ~/ <RET>'.  This should present the list of
files in the home directory, and show its full name on the first line.
Likewise, to visit your init file, type `C-x C-f ~/.emacs <RET>'.

   Because MS-DOS does not allow file names with leading dots, and
because older Windows systems made it hard to create files with such
names, the Windows port of Emacs supports an alternative name `_emacs'
as a fallback, if such a file exists in the home directory, whereas
`.emacs' does not.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The check in `C:\' is for compatibility with older versions of
Emacs, which didn't check the application data directory.


File: emacs,  Node: Windows Keyboard,  Next: Windows Mouse,  Prev: Windows HOME,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.5 Keyboard Usage on MS-Windows
================================

This section describes the Windows-specific features related to
keyboard input in Emacs.

   Many key combinations (known as "keyboard shortcuts") that have
conventional uses in MS-Windows programs conflict with traditional
Emacs key bindings.  (These Emacs key bindings were established years
before Microsoft was founded.)  Examples of conflicts include `C-c',
`C-x', `C-z', `C-a', and `W-<SPC>'.  You can redefine some of them with
meanings more like the MS-Windows meanings by enabling CUA Mode (*note
CUA Bindings::).

   The <F10> key on Windows activates the menu bar in a way that makes
it possible to use the menus without a mouse.  In this mode, the arrow
keys traverse the menus, <RET> selects a highlighted menu item, and
<ESC> closes the menu.

   By default, the key labeled <Alt> is mapped as the <META> key.  If
you wish it to produce the `Alt' modifier instead, set the variable
`w32-alt-is-meta' to a `nil' value.

   MS-Windows reserves certain key combinations, such as `Alt-<TAB>',
for its own use.  These key combinations are intercepted by the system
before Emacs can see them.  You can use the `w32-register-hot-key'
function to allow a key sequence to be seen by Emacs instead of being
grabbed by Windows.  This functions registers a key sequence as a "hot
key", overriding the special meaning of that key sequence for Windows.
(MS-Windows is told that the key sequence is a hot key only when one of
the Emacs windows has focus, so that the special keys still have their
usual meaning for other Windows applications.)

   The argument to `w32-register-hot-key' must be a single key, with or
without modifiers, in vector form that would be acceptable to
`define-key'.  The meta modifier is interpreted as the <ALT> key if
`w32-alt-is-meta' is `t' (the default), and the hyper modifier is
always interpreted as the Windows key (usually labeled with <start> and
the Windows logo).  If the function succeeds in registering the key
sequence, it returns the hotkey ID, a number; otherwise it returns
`nil'.

   For example, `(w32-register-hot-key [M-tab])' lets you use `M-TAB'
normally in Emacs, for instance, to complete the word or symbol at
point at top level, or to complete the current search string against
previously sought strings during incremental search.

   The function `w32-unregister-hot-key' reverses the effect of
`w32-register-hot-key' for its argument key sequence.

   By default, the <CapsLock> key only affects normal character keys
(it converts lower-case characters to their upper-case variants).
However, if you set the variable `w32-capslock-is-shiftlock' to a
non-`nil' value, the <CapsLock> key will affect non-character keys as
well, as if you pressed the <Shift> key while typing the non-character
key.

   If the variable `w32-enable-caps-lock' is set to a `nil' value, the
<CapsLock> key produces the symbol `capslock' instead of the shifted
version of they keys.  The default value is `t'.

   Similarly, if `w32-enable-num-lock' is `nil', the <NumLock> key will
produce the symbol `kp-numlock'.  The default is `t', which causes
<NumLock> to work as expected: toggle the meaning of the keys on the
numeric keypad.

   The variable `w32-apps-modifier' controls the effect of the <Apps>
key (usually located between the right <Alt> and the right <Ctrl>
keys).  Its value can be one of the symbols `hyper', `super', `meta',
`alt', `control', or `shift' for the respective modifier, or `nil' to
appear as the key `apps'.  The default is `nil'.

   The variable `w32-lwindow-modifier' determines the effect of the
left Windows key (usually labeled with <start> and the Windows logo).
If its value is `nil' (the default), the key will produce the symbol
`lwindow'.  Setting it to one of the symbols `hyper', `super', `meta',
`alt', `control', or `shift' will produce the respective modifier.  A
similar variable `w32-rwindow-modifier' controls the effect of the right
Windows key, and `w32-scroll-lock-modifier' does the same for the
<ScrLock> key.  If these variables are set to `nil', the right Windows
key produces the symbol `rwindow' and <ScrLock> produces the symbol
`scroll'.

   Emacs compiled as a native Windows application normally turns off
the Windows feature that tapping the <ALT> key invokes the Windows
menu.  The reason is that the <ALT> serves as <META> in Emacs.  When
using Emacs, users often press the <META> key temporarily and then
change their minds; if this has the effect of bringing up the Windows
menu, it alters the meaning of subsequent commands.  Many users find
this frustrating.

   You can re-enable Windows' default handling of tapping the <ALT> key
by setting `w32-pass-alt-to-system' to a non-`nil' value.

   The variables `w32-pass-lwindow-to-system' and
`w32-pass-rwindow-to-system' determine whether the respective keys are
passed to Windows or swallowed by Emacs.  If the value is `nil', the
respective key is silently swallowed by Emacs, otherwise it is passed
to Windows.  The default is `t' for both of these variables.  Passing
each of these keys to Windows produces its normal effect: for example,
`<Lwindow>' opens the `Start' menu, etc.(1)

   The variable `w32-recognize-altgr' controls whether the <AltGr> key
(if it exists on your keyboard), or its equivalent, the combination of
the right <Alt> and left <Ctrl> keys pressed together, is recognized as
the <AltGr> key.  The default is `t', which means these keys produce
`AltGr'; setting it to `nil' causes <AltGr> or the equivalent key
combination to be interpreted as the combination of <CTRL> and <META>
modifiers.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Some combinations of the "Windows" keys with other keys are
caught by Windows at low level in a way that Emacs currently cannot
prevent.  For example, `<Lwindow> r' always pops up the Windows `Run'
dialog.  Customizing the value of `w32-phantom-key-code' might help in
some cases, though.


File: emacs,  Node: Windows Mouse,  Next: Windows Processes,  Prev: Windows Keyboard,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.6 Mouse Usage on MS-Windows
=============================

This section describes the Windows-specific variables related to mouse.

   The variable `w32-mouse-button-tolerance' specifies the time
interval, in milliseconds, for faking middle mouse button press on
2-button mice.  If both mouse buttons are depressed within this time
interval, Emacs generates a middle mouse button click event instead of
a double click on one of the buttons.

   If the variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' is
non-`nil', Emacs passes the fourth and fifth mouse buttons to Windows.

   The variable `w32-swap-mouse-buttons' controls which of the 3 mouse
buttons generates the `mouse-2' events.  When it is `nil' (the
default), the middle button generates `mouse-2' and the right button
generates `mouse-3' events.  If this variable is non-`nil', the roles
of these two buttons are reversed.


File: emacs,  Node: Windows Processes,  Next: Windows Printing,  Prev: Windows Mouse,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.7 Subprocesses on Windows 9X/ME and Windows NT/2K/XP
======================================================

Emacs compiled as a native Windows application (as opposed to the DOS
version) includes full support for asynchronous subprocesses.  In the
Windows version, synchronous and asynchronous subprocesses work fine on
both Windows 9X/ME and Windows NT/2K/XP as long as you run only 32-bit
Windows applications.  However, when you run a DOS application in a
subprocess, you may encounter problems or be unable to run the
application at all; and if you run two DOS applications at the same
time in two subprocesses, you may have to reboot your system.

   Since the standard command interpreter (and most command line
utilities) on Windows 9X are DOS applications, these problems are
significant when using that system.  But there's nothing we can do
about them; only Microsoft can fix them.

   If you run just one DOS application subprocess, the subprocess should
work as expected as long as it is "well-behaved" and does not perform
direct screen access or other unusual actions.  If you have a CPU
monitor application, your machine will appear to be 100% busy even when
the DOS application is idle, but this is only an artifact of the way CPU
monitors measure processor load.

   You must terminate the DOS application before you start any other DOS
application in a different subprocess.  Emacs is unable to interrupt or
terminate a DOS subprocess.  The only way you can terminate such a
subprocess is by giving it a command that tells its program to exit.

   If you attempt to run two DOS applications at the same time in
separate subprocesses, the second one that is started will be suspended
until the first one finishes, even if either or both of them are
asynchronous.

   If you can go to the first subprocess, and tell it to exit, the
second subprocess should continue normally.  However, if the second
subprocess is synchronous, Emacs itself will be hung until the first
subprocess finishes.  If it will not finish without user input, then
you have no choice but to reboot if you are running on Windows 9X.  If
you are running on Windows NT/2K/XP, you can use a process viewer
application to kill the appropriate instance of NTVDM instead (this
will terminate both DOS subprocesses).

   If you have to reboot Windows 9X in this situation, do not use the
`Shutdown' command on the `Start' menu; that usually hangs the system.
Instead, type `CTL-ALT-<DEL>' and then choose `Shutdown'.  That usually
works, although it may take a few minutes to do its job.

   The variable `w32-quote-process-args' controls how Emacs quotes the
process arguments.  Non-`nil' means quote with the `"' character.  If
the value is a character, use that character to escape any quote
characters that appear; otherwise chose a suitable escape character
based on the type of the program.

   The function `w32-shell-execute' can be useful for writing
customized commands that run MS-Windows applications registered to
handle a certain standard Windows operation for a specific type of
document or file.  This function is a wrapper around the Windows
`ShellExecute' API.  See the MS-Windows API documentation for more
details.


File: emacs,  Node: Windows Printing,  Next: Windows Fonts,  Prev: Windows Processes,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.8 Printing and MS-Windows
===========================

Printing commands, such as `lpr-buffer' (*note Printing::) and
`ps-print-buffer' (*note PostScript::) work in MS-DOS and MS-Windows by
sending the output to one of the printer ports, if a Posix-style `lpr'
program is unavailable.  The same Emacs variables control printing on
all systems, but in some cases they have different default values on
MS-DOS and MS-Windows.

   Emacs on Windows automatically determines your default printer and
sets the variable `printer-name' to that printer's name.  But in some
rare cases this can fail, or you may wish to use a different printer
from within Emacs.  The rest of this section explains how to tell Emacs
which printer to use.

   If you want to use your local printer, then set the Lisp variable
`lpr-command' to `""' (its default value on Windows) and `printer-name'
to the name of the printer port--for example, `"PRN"', the usual local
printer port or `"LPT2"', or `"COM1"' for a serial printer.  You can
also set `printer-name' to a file name, in which case "printed" output
is actually appended to that file.  If you set `printer-name' to
`"NUL"', printed output is silently discarded (sent to the system null
device).

   You can also use a printer shared by another machine by setting
`printer-name' to the UNC share name for that printer--for example,
`"//joes_pc/hp4si"'.  (It doesn't matter whether you use forward
slashes or backslashes here.)  To find out the names of shared
printers, run the command `net view' from the command prompt to obtain
a list of servers, and `net view SERVER-NAME' to see the names of
printers (and directories) shared by that server.  Alternatively, click
the `Network Neighborhood' icon on your desktop, and look for machines
which share their printers via the network.

   If the printer doesn't appear in the output of `net view', or if
setting `printer-name' to the UNC share name doesn't produce a hardcopy
on that printer, you can use the `net use' command to connect a local
print port such as `"LPT2"' to the networked printer.  For example,
typing `net use LPT2: \\joes_pc\hp4si'(1) causes Windows to "capture"
the `LPT2' port and redirect the printed material to the printer
connected to the machine `joes_pc'.  After this command, setting
`printer-name' to `"LPT2"' should produce the hardcopy on the networked
printer.

   With some varieties of Windows network software, you can instruct
Windows to capture a specific printer port such as `"LPT2"', and
redirect it to a networked printer via the `Control Panel->Printers'
applet instead of `net use'.

   If you set `printer-name' to a file name, it's best to use an
absolute file name.  Emacs changes the working directory according to
the default directory of the current buffer, so if the file name in
`printer-name' is relative, you will end up with several such files,
each one in the directory of the buffer from which the printing was
done.

   If the value of `printer-name' is correct, but printing does not
produce the hardcopy on your printer, it is possible that your printer
does not support printing plain text (some cheap printers omit this
functionality).  In that case, try the PostScript print commands,
described below.

   The commands `print-buffer' and `print-region' call the `pr'
program, or use special switches to the `lpr' program, to produce
headers on each printed page.  MS-DOS and MS-Windows don't normally
have these programs, so by default, the variable `lpr-headers-switches'
is set so that the requests to print page headers are silently ignored.
Thus, `print-buffer' and `print-region' produce the same output as
`lpr-buffer' and `lpr-region', respectively.  If you do have a suitable
`pr' program (for example, from GNU Coreutils), set
`lpr-headers-switches' to `nil'; Emacs will then call `pr' to produce
the page headers, and print the resulting output as specified by
`printer-name'.

   Finally, if you do have an `lpr' work-alike, you can set the
variable `lpr-command' to `"lpr"'.  Then Emacs will use `lpr' for
printing, as on other systems.  (If the name of the program isn't
`lpr', set `lpr-command' to specify where to find it.)  The variable
`lpr-switches' has its standard meaning when `lpr-command' is not `""'.
If the variable `printer-name' has a string value, it is used as the
value for the `-P' option to `lpr', as on Unix.

   A parallel set of variables, `ps-lpr-command', `ps-lpr-switches',
and `ps-printer-name' (*note PostScript Variables::), defines how
PostScript files should be printed.  These variables are used in the
same way as the corresponding variables described above for
non-PostScript printing.  Thus, the value of `ps-printer-name' is used
as the name of the device (or file) to which PostScript output is sent,
just as `printer-name' is used for non-PostScript printing.  (There are
two distinct sets of variables in case you have two printers attached
to two different ports, and only one of them is a PostScript printer.)

   The default value of the variable `ps-lpr-command' is `""', which
causes PostScript output to be sent to the printer port specified by
`ps-printer-name', but `ps-lpr-command' can also be set to the name of
a program which will accept PostScript files.  Thus, if you have a
non-PostScript printer, you can set this variable to the name of a
PostScript interpreter program (such as Ghostscript).  Any switches
that need to be passed to the interpreter program are specified using
`ps-lpr-switches'.  (If the value of `ps-printer-name' is a string, it
will be added to the list of switches as the value for the `-P' option.
This is probably only useful if you are using `lpr', so when using an
interpreter typically you would set `ps-printer-name' to something
other than a string so it is ignored.)

   For example, to use Ghostscript for printing on the system's default
printer, put this in your `.emacs' file:

     (setq ps-printer-name t)
     (setq ps-lpr-command "D:/gs6.01/bin/gswin32c.exe")
     (setq ps-lpr-switches '("-q" "-dNOPAUSE" "-dBATCH"
     			"-sDEVICE=mswinpr2"
     			"-sPAPERSIZE=a4"))

(This assumes that Ghostscript is installed in the `D:/gs6.01'
directory.)

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Note that the `net use' command requires the UNC share name to be
typed with the Windows-style backslashes, while the value of
`printer-name' can be set with either forward- or backslashes.


File: emacs,  Node: Windows Fonts,  Next: Windows Misc,  Prev: Windows Printing,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.9 Specifying Fonts on MS-Windows
==================================

Starting with Emacs 23, fonts are specified by their name, size and
optional properties.  The format for specifying fonts comes from the
fontconfig library used in modern Free desktops:

       [Family[-PointSize]][:Option1=Value1[:Option2=Value2[...]]]

   The old XLFD based format is also supported for backwards
compatibility.

   Emacs 23 supports a number of backends.  Currently, the `gdi' and
`uniscribe' font backends are supported on Windows.  The `gdi' font
backend is available on all versions of Windows, and supports all fonts
that are natively supported by Windows.  The `uniscribe' font backend
is available on Windows 2000 and later, and supports Truetype and
Opentype fonts.  Some languages requiring complex layout can only be
properly supported by the uniscribe backend.  By default, both backends
are enabled if supported, with `uniscribe' taking priority over `gdi'.

Optional properties common to all font backends on MS-Windows are:

`weight'
     Specifies the weight of the font.  Special values `light',
     `medium', `demibold', `bold', and `black' can be specified without
     `weight=' (e.g., `Courier New-12:bold').  Otherwise, the weight
     should be a numeric value between 100 and 900, or one of the named
     weights in `font-weight-table'.  If unspecified, a regular font is
     assumed.

`slant'
     Specifies whether the font is italic.  Special values `roman',
     `italic' and `oblique' can be specified without `slant=' (e.g.,
     `Courier New-12:italic').  Otherwise, the slant should be a
     numeric value, or one of the named slants in `font-slant-table'.
     On Windows, any slant above 150 is treated as italics, and
     anything below as roman.

`family'
     Specifies the font family, but normally this will be specified at
     the start of the font name.

`pixelsize'
     Specifies the font size in pixels.  This can be used instead of
     the point size specified after the family name.

`adstyle'
     Specifies additional style information for the font.  On
     MS-Windows, the values `mono', `sans', `serif', `script' and
     `decorative' are recognized.  These are most useful as a fallback
     with the font family left unspecified.

`registry'
     Specifies the character set registry that the font is expected to
     cover.  Most Truetype and Opentype fonts will be unicode fonts
     that cover several national character sets, but you can narrow
     down the selection of fonts to those that support a particular
     character set by using a specific registry from
     `w32-charset-info-alist' here.

`spacing'
     Specifies how the font is spaced.  The `p' spacing specifies a
     proportional font, and `m' or `c' specify a monospaced font.

`foundry'
     Not used on Windows, but for informational purposes and to prevent
     problems with code that expects it to be set, is set internally to
     `raster' for bitmapped fonts, `outline' for scalable fonts, or
     `unknown' if the type cannot be determined as one of those.

   Options specific to `GDI' fonts:

`script'
     Specifies a unicode subrange the font should support.

     The following scripts are recognized on Windows: `latin', `greek',
     `coptic', `cyrillic', `armenian', `hebrew', `arabic', `syriac',
     `nko', `thaana', `devanagari', `bengali', `gurmukhi', `gujarati',
     `oriya', `tamil', `telugu', `kannada', `malayam', `sinhala',
     `thai', `lao', `tibetan', `myanmar', `georgian', `hangul',
     `ethiopic', `cherokee', `canadian-aboriginal', `ogham', `runic',
     `khmer', `mongolian', `symbol', `braille', `han',
     `ideographic-description', `cjk-misc', `kana', `bopomofo',
     `kanbun', `yi', `byzantine-musical-symbol', `musical-symbol', and
     `mathematical'.

`antialias'
     Specifies the antialiasing to use for the font.  The value `none'
     means no antialiasing, `standard' means use standard antialiasing,
     `subpixel' means use subpixel antialiasing (known as Cleartype on
     Windows), and `natural' means use subpixel antialiasing with
     adjusted spacing between letters.  If unspecified, the font will
     use the system default antialiasing.


File: emacs,  Node: Windows Misc,  Next: MS-DOS,  Prev: Windows Fonts,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.10 Miscellaneous Windows-specific features
============================================

This section describes miscellaneous Windows-specific features.

   The variable `w32-use-visible-system-caret' is a flag that
determines whether to make the system caret visible.  The default when
no screen reader software is in use is `nil', which means Emacs draws
its own cursor to indicate the position of point.  A non-`nil' value
means Emacs will indicate point location by the system caret; this
facilitates use of screen reader software, and is the default when such
software is detected when running Emacs.  When this variable is
non-`nil', other variables affecting the cursor display have no effect.

   The variable `w32-grab-focus-on-raise', if set to a non-`nil' value
causes a frame to grab focus when it is raised.  The default is `t',
which fits well with the Windows default click-to-focus policy.


File: emacs,  Node: MS-DOS,  Prev: Windows Misc,  Up: Microsoft Windows

G.11 Emacs and MS-DOS
=====================

This section briefly describes the peculiarities of using Emacs on the
MS-DOS "operating system" (also known as "MS-DOG").  Information about
peculiarities common to MS-DOS and Microsoft's current operating
systems Windows (also known as "Losedows") is in *Note Microsoft
Windows::.

   If you build Emacs for MS-DOS, the binary will also run on Windows
3.X, Windows NT, Windows 9X/ME, Windows 2000/XP, or OS/2 as a DOS
application; all of this chapter applies for all of those systems, if
you use an Emacs that was built for MS-DOS.

   *Note Text and Binary::, for information about Emacs' special
handling of text files under MS-DOS (and Windows).

* Menu:

* Keyboard: MS-DOS Keyboard.   Keyboard conventions on MS-DOS.
* Mouse: MS-DOS Mouse.         Mouse conventions on MS-DOS.
* Display: MS-DOS Display.     Fonts, frames and display size on MS-DOS.
* Files: MS-DOS File Names.    File name conventions on MS-DOS.
* Printing: MS-DOS Printing.   Printing specifics on MS-DOS.
* I18N: MS-DOS and MULE.       Support for internationalization on MS-DOS.
* Processes: MS-DOS Processes. Running subprocesses on MS-DOS.


File: emacs,  Node: MS-DOS Keyboard,  Next: MS-DOS Mouse,  Up: MS-DOS

G.11.1 Keyboard Usage on MS-DOS
-------------------------------

The key that is called <DEL> in Emacs (because that's how it is
designated on most workstations) is known as <BS> (backspace) on a PC.
That is why the PC-specific terminal initialization remaps the <BS> key
to act as <DEL>; the <DELETE> key is remapped to act as `C-d' for the
same reasons.

   Emacs built for MS-DOS recognizes `C-<BREAK>' as a quit character,
just like `C-g'.  This is because Emacs cannot detect that you have
typed `C-g' until it is ready for more input.  As a consequence, you
cannot use `C-g' to stop a running command (*note Quitting::).  By
contrast, `C-<BREAK>' _is_ detected as soon as you type it (as `C-g' is
on other systems), so it can be used to stop a running command and for
emergency escape (*note Emergency Escape::).

   The PC keyboard maps use the left <ALT> key as the <META> key.  You
have two choices for emulating the <SUPER> and <HYPER> keys: choose
either the right <CTRL> key or the right <ALT> key by setting the
variables `dos-hyper-key' and `dos-super-key' to 1 or 2 respectively.
If neither `dos-super-key' nor `dos-hyper-key' is 1, then by default
the right <ALT> key is also mapped to the <META> key.  However, if the
MS-DOS international keyboard support program `KEYB.COM' is installed,
Emacs will _not_ map the right <ALT> to <META>, since it is used for
accessing characters like `~' and `@' on non-US keyboard layouts; in
this case, you may only use the left <ALT> as <META> key.

   The variable `dos-keypad-mode' is a flag variable that controls what
key codes are returned by keys in the numeric keypad.  You can also
define the keypad <ENTER> key to act like `C-j', by putting the
following line into your `_emacs' file:

     ;; Make the <ENTER> key from the numeric keypad act as `C-j'.
     (define-key function-key-map [kp-enter] [?\C-j])


File: emacs,  Node: MS-DOS Mouse,  Next: MS-DOS Display,  Prev: MS-DOS Keyboard,  Up: MS-DOS

G.11.2 Mouse Usage on MS-DOS
----------------------------

Emacs on MS-DOS supports a mouse (on the default terminal only).  The
mouse commands work as documented, including those that use menus and
the menu bar (*note Menu Bar::).   Scroll bars don't work in MS-DOS
Emacs.  PC mice usually have only two buttons; these act as `Mouse-1'
and `Mouse-2', but if you press both of them together, that has the
effect of `Mouse-3'.  If the mouse does have 3 buttons, Emacs detects
that at startup, and all the 3 buttons function normally, as on X.

   Help strings for menu-bar and pop-up menus are displayed in the echo
area when the mouse pointer moves across the menu items.  Highlighting
of mouse-sensitive text (*note Mouse References::) is also supported.

   Some versions of mouse drivers don't report the number of mouse
buttons correctly.  For example, mice with a wheel report that they
have 3 buttons, but only 2 of them are passed to Emacs; the clicks on
the wheel, which serves as the middle button, are not passed.  In these
cases, you can use the `M-x msdos-set-mouse-buttons' command to tell
Emacs how many mouse buttons to expect.  You could make such a setting
permanent by adding this fragment to your `_emacs' init file:

     ;; Treat the mouse like a 2-button mouse.
     (msdos-set-mouse-buttons 2)

   Emacs built for MS-DOS supports clipboard operations when it runs on
Windows.  Commands that put text on the kill ring, or yank text from
the ring, check the Windows clipboard first, just as Emacs does on the
X Window System (*note Mouse Commands::).  Only the primary selection
and the cut buffer are supported by MS-DOS Emacs on Windows; the
secondary selection always appears as empty.

   Due to the way clipboard access is implemented by Windows, the
length of text you can put into the clipboard is limited by the amount
of free DOS memory that is available to Emacs.  Usually, up to 620KB of
text can be put into the clipboard, but this limit depends on the system
configuration and is lower if you run Emacs as a subprocess of another
program.  If the killed text does not fit, Emacs outputs a message
saying so, and does not put the text into the clipboard.

   Null characters also cannot be put into the Windows clipboard.  If
the killed text includes null characters, Emacs does not put such text
into the clipboard, and displays in the echo area a message to that
effect.

   The variable `dos-display-scancodes', when non-`nil', directs Emacs
to display the ASCII value and the keyboard scan code of each
keystroke; this feature serves as a complement to the `view-lossage'
command, for debugging.


File: emacs,  Node: MS-DOS Display,  Next: MS-DOS File Names,  Prev: MS-DOS Mouse,  Up: MS-DOS

G.11.3 Display on MS-DOS
------------------------

Display on MS-DOS cannot use font variants, like bold or italic, but it
does support multiple faces, each of which can specify a foreground and
a background color.  Therefore, you can get the full functionality of
Emacs packages that use fonts (such as `font-lock', Enriched Text mode,
and others) by defining the relevant faces to use different colors.
Use the `list-colors-display' command (*note Frame Parameters::) and
the `list-faces-display' command (*note Faces::) to see what colors and
faces are available and what they look like.

   *Note MS-DOS and MULE::, later in this chapter, for information on
how Emacs displays glyphs and characters that aren't supported by the
native font built into the DOS display.

   When Emacs starts, it changes the cursor shape to a solid box.  This
is for compatibility with other systems, where the box cursor is the
default in Emacs.  This default shape can be changed to a bar by
specifying the `cursor-type' parameter in the variable
`default-frame-alist' (*note Creating Frames::).  The MS-DOS terminal
doesn't support a vertical-bar cursor, so the bar cursor is horizontal,
and the `WIDTH' parameter, if specified by the frame parameters,
actually determines its height.  For this reason, the `bar' and `hbar'
cursor types produce the same effect on MS-DOS.  As an extension, the
bar cursor specification can include the starting scan line of the
cursor as well as its width, like this:

      '(cursor-type bar WIDTH . START)

In addition, if the WIDTH parameter is negative, the cursor bar begins
at the top of the character cell.

   The MS-DOS terminal can only display a single frame at a time.  The
Emacs frame facilities work on MS-DOS much as they do on text-only
terminals (*note Frames::).  When you run Emacs from a DOS window on
MS-Windows, you can make the visible frame smaller than the full
screen, but Emacs still cannot display more than a single frame at a
time.

   The `mode4350' command switches the display to 43 or 50 lines,
depending on your hardware; the `mode25' command switches to the
default 80x25 screen size.

   By default, Emacs only knows how to set screen sizes of 80 columns by
25, 28, 35, 40, 43 or 50 rows.  However, if your video adapter has
special video modes that will switch the display to other sizes, you can
have Emacs support those too.  When you ask Emacs to switch the frame to
N rows by M columns dimensions, it checks if there is a variable called
`screen-dimensions-NxM', and if so, uses its value (which must be an
integer) as the video mode to switch to.  (Emacs switches to that video
mode by calling the BIOS `Set Video Mode' function with the value of
`screen-dimensions-NxM' in the `AL' register.)  For example, suppose
your adapter will switch to 66x80 dimensions when put into video mode
85.  Then you can make Emacs support this screen size by putting the
following into your `_emacs' file:

     (setq screen-dimensions-66x80 85)

   Since Emacs on MS-DOS can only set the frame size to specific
supported dimensions, it cannot honor every possible frame resizing
request.  When an unsupported size is requested, Emacs chooses the next
larger supported size beyond the specified size.  For example, if you
ask for 36x80 frame, you will get 40x80 instead.

   The variables `screen-dimensions-NxM' are used only when they
exactly match the specified size; the search for the next larger
supported size ignores them.  In the above example, even if your VGA
supports 38x80 dimensions and you define a variable
`screen-dimensions-38x80' with a suitable value, you will still get
40x80 screen when you ask for a 36x80 frame.  If you want to get the
38x80 size in this case, you can do it by setting the variable named
`screen-dimensions-36x80' with the same video mode value as
`screen-dimensions-38x80'.

   Changing frame dimensions on MS-DOS has the effect of changing all
the other frames to the new dimensions.


File: emacs,  Node: MS-DOS File Names,  Next: MS-DOS Printing,  Prev: MS-DOS Display,  Up: MS-DOS

G.11.4 File Names on MS-DOS
---------------------------

On MS-DOS, file names are case-insensitive and limited to eight
characters, plus optionally a period and three more characters.  Emacs
knows enough about these limitations to handle file names that were
meant for other operating systems.  For instance, leading dots `.'  in
file names are invalid in MS-DOS, so Emacs transparently converts them
to underscores `_'; thus your default init file (*note Init File::) is
called `_emacs' on MS-DOS.  Excess characters before or after the
period are generally ignored by MS-DOS itself; thus, if you visit the
file `LongFileName.EvenLongerExtension', you will silently get
`longfile.eve', but Emacs will still display the long file name on the
mode line.  Other than that, it's up to you to specify file names which
are valid under MS-DOS; the transparent conversion as described above
only works on file names built into Emacs.

   The above restrictions on the file names on MS-DOS make it almost
impossible to construct the name of a backup file (*note Backup Names::)
without losing some of the original file name characters.  For example,
the name of a backup file for `docs.txt' is `docs.tx~' even if single
backup is used.

   If you run Emacs as a DOS application under Windows 9X, Windows ME,
or Windows 2000/XP, you can turn on support for long file names.  If
you do that, Emacs doesn't truncate file names or convert them to lower
case; instead, it uses the file names that you specify, verbatim.  To
enable long file name support, set the environment variable `LFN' to
`y' before starting Emacs.  Unfortunately, Windows NT doesn't allow DOS
programs to access long file names, so Emacs built for MS-DOS will only
see their short 8+3 aliases.

   MS-DOS has no notion of home directory, so Emacs on MS-DOS pretends
that the directory where it is installed is the value of the `HOME'
environment variable.  That is, if your Emacs binary, `emacs.exe', is
in the directory `c:/utils/emacs/bin', then Emacs acts as if `HOME'
were set to `c:/utils/emacs'.  In particular, that is where Emacs looks
for the init file `_emacs'.  With this in mind, you can use `~' in file
names as an alias for the home directory, as you would on GNU or Unix.
You can also set `HOME' variable in the environment before starting
Emacs; its value will then override the above default behavior.

   Emacs on MS-DOS handles the directory name `/dev' specially, because
of a feature in the emulator libraries of DJGPP that pretends I/O
devices have names in that directory.  We recommend that you avoid
using an actual directory named `/dev' on any disk.


File: emacs,  Node: MS-DOS Printing,  Next: MS-DOS and MULE,  Prev: MS-DOS File Names,  Up: MS-DOS

G.11.5 Printing and MS-DOS
--------------------------

Printing commands, such as `lpr-buffer' (*note Printing::) and
`ps-print-buffer' (*note PostScript::) can work on MS-DOS by sending
the output to one of the printer ports, if a Posix-style `lpr' program
is unavailable.  The same Emacs variables control printing on all
systems, but in some cases they have different default values on MS-DOS.

   *Note Windows Printing::, for details about setting up printing to a
networked printer.

   Some printers expect DOS codepage encoding of non-ASCII text, even
though they are connected to a Windows machine which uses a different
encoding for the same locale.  For example, in the Latin-1 locale, DOS
uses codepage 850 whereas Windows uses codepage 1252.  *Note MS-DOS and
MULE::.  When you print to such printers from Windows, you can use the
`C-x RET c' (`universal-coding-system-argument') command before `M-x
lpr-buffer'; Emacs will then convert the text to the DOS codepage that
you specify.  For example, `C-x RET c cp850-dos RET M-x lpr-region RET'
will print the region while converting it to the codepage 850 encoding.

   For backwards compatibility, the value of `dos-printer'
(`dos-ps-printer'), if it has a value, overrides the value of
`printer-name' (`ps-printer-name'), on MS-DOS.


File: emacs,  Node: MS-DOS and MULE,  Next: MS-DOS Processes,  Prev: MS-DOS Printing,  Up: MS-DOS

G.11.6 International Support on MS-DOS
--------------------------------------

Emacs on MS-DOS supports the same international character sets as it
does on GNU, Unix and other platforms (*note International::),
including coding systems for converting between the different character
sets.  However, due to incompatibilities between MS-DOS/MS-Windows and
other systems, there are several DOS-specific aspects of this support
that you should be aware of.  This section describes these aspects.

   The description below is largely specific to the MS-DOS port of
Emacs, especially where it talks about practical implications for Emacs
users.

`M-x dos-codepage-setup'
     Set up Emacs display and coding systems as appropriate for the
     current DOS codepage.

   MS-DOS is designed to support one character set of 256 characters at
any given time, but gives you a variety of character sets to choose
from.  The alternative character sets are known as "DOS codepages".
Each codepage includes all 128 ASCII characters, but the other 128
characters (codes 128 through 255) vary from one codepage to another.
Each DOS codepage is identified by a 3-digit number, such as 850, 862,
etc.

   In contrast to X, which lets you use several fonts at the same time,
MS-DOS normally doesn't allow use of several codepages in a single
session.  MS-DOS was designed to load a single codepage at system
startup, and require you to reboot in order to change it(1).  Much the
same limitation applies when you run DOS executables on other systems
such as MS-Windows.

   For multibyte operation on MS-DOS, Emacs needs to know which
characters the chosen DOS codepage can display.  So it queries the
system shortly after startup to get the chosen codepage number, and
stores the number in the variable `dos-codepage'.  Some systems return
the default value 437 for the current codepage, even though the actual
codepage is different.  (This typically happens when you use the
codepage built into the display hardware.)  You can specify a different
codepage for Emacs to use by setting the variable `dos-codepage' in
your init file.

   Multibyte Emacs supports only certain DOS codepages: those which can
display Far-Eastern scripts, like the Japanese codepage 932, and those
that encode a single ISO 8859 character set.

   The Far-Eastern codepages can directly display one of the MULE
character sets for these countries, so Emacs simply sets up to use the
appropriate terminal coding system that is supported by the codepage.
The special features described in the rest of this section mostly
pertain to codepages that encode ISO 8859 character sets.

   For the codepages which correspond to one of the ISO character sets,
Emacs knows the character set based on the codepage number.  Emacs
automatically creates a coding system to support reading and writing
files that use the current codepage, and uses this coding system by
default.  The name of this coding system is `cpNNN', where NNN is the
codepage number.(2)

   All the `cpNNN' coding systems use the letter `D' (for "DOS") as
their mode-line mnemonic.  Since both the terminal coding system and
the default coding system for file I/O are set to the proper `cpNNN'
coding system at startup, it is normal for the mode line on MS-DOS to
begin with `-DD\-'.  *Note Mode Line::.  Far-Eastern DOS terminals do
not use the `cpNNN' coding systems, and thus their initial mode line
looks like the Emacs default.

   Since the codepage number also indicates which script you are using,
Emacs automatically runs `set-language-environment' to select the
language environment for that script (*note Language Environments::).

   If a buffer contains a character belonging to some other ISO 8859
character set, not the one that the chosen DOS codepage supports, Emacs
displays it using a sequence of ASCII characters.  For example, if the
current codepage doesn't have a glyph for the letter `o`' (small `o'
with a grave accent), it is displayed as `{`o}', where the braces serve
as a visual indication that this is a single character.  (This may look
awkward for some non-Latin characters, such as those from Greek or
Hebrew alphabets, but it is still readable by a person who knows the
language.)  Even though the character may occupy several columns on the
screen, it is really still just a single character, and all Emacs
commands treat it as one.

   MS-Windows provides its own codepages, which are different from the
DOS codepages for the same locale.  For example, DOS codepage 850
supports the same character set as Windows codepage 1252; DOS codepage
855 supports the same character set as Windows codepage 1251, etc.  The
MS-Windows version of Emacs uses the current codepage for display when
invoked with the `-nw' option.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Normally, one particular codepage is burnt into the display
memory, while other codepages can be installed by modifying system
configuration files, such as `CONFIG.SYS', and rebooting.  While there
is third-party software that allows changing the codepage without
rebooting, we describe here how a stock MS-DOS system behaves.

   (2) The standard Emacs coding systems for ISO 8859 are not quite
right for the purpose, because typically the DOS codepage does not
match the standard ISO character codes.  For example, the letter `c,'
(`c' with cedilla) has code 231 in the standard Latin-1 character set,
but the corresponding DOS codepage 850 uses code 135 for this glyph.


File: emacs,  Node: MS-DOS Processes,  Prev: MS-DOS and MULE,  Up: MS-DOS

G.11.7 Subprocesses on MS-DOS
-----------------------------

Because MS-DOS is a single-process "operating system," asynchronous
subprocesses are not available.  In particular, Shell mode and its
variants do not work.  Most Emacs features that use asynchronous
subprocesses also don't work on MS-DOS, including Shell mode and GUD.
When in doubt, try and see; commands that don't work output an error
message saying that asynchronous processes aren't supported.

   Compilation under Emacs with `M-x compile', searching files with
`M-x grep' and displaying differences between files with `M-x diff' do
work, by running the inferior processes synchronously.  This means you
cannot do any more editing until the inferior process finishes.

   Spell checking also works, by means of special support for
synchronous invocation of the `ispell' program.  This is slower than the
asynchronous invocation on other platforms

   Instead of the Shell mode, which doesn't work on MS-DOS, you can use
the `M-x eshell' command.  This invokes the Eshell package that
implements a Posix-like shell entirely in Emacs Lisp.

   By contrast, Emacs compiled as a native Windows application *does*
support asynchronous subprocesses.  *Note Windows Processes::.

   Printing commands, such as `lpr-buffer' (*note Printing::) and
`ps-print-buffer' (*note PostScript::), work in MS-DOS by sending the
output to one of the printer ports.  *Note MS-DOS Printing::.

   When you run a subprocess synchronously on MS-DOS, make sure the
program terminates and does not try to read keyboard input.  If the
program does not terminate on its own, you will be unable to terminate
it, because MS-DOS provides no general way to terminate a process.
Pressing `C-c' or `C-<BREAK>' might sometimes help in these cases.

   Accessing files on other machines is not supported on MS-DOS.  Other
network-oriented commands such as sending mail, Web browsing, remote
login, etc., don't work either, unless network access is built into
MS-DOS with some network redirector.

   Dired on MS-DOS uses the `ls-lisp' package where other platforms use
the system `ls' command.  Therefore, Dired on MS-DOS supports only some
of the possible options you can mention in the `dired-listing-switches'
variable.  The options that work are `-A', `-a', `-c', `-i', `-r', `-S',
`-s', `-t', and `-u'.


File: emacs,  Node: Manifesto,  Prev: Microsoft Windows,  Up: Top

The GNU Manifesto
*****************

     The GNU Manifesto which appears below was written by Richard
     Stallman at the beginning of the GNU project, to ask for
     participation and support.  For the first few years, it was
     updated in minor ways to account for developments, but now it
     seems best to leave it unchanged as most people have seen it.

     Since that time, we have learned about certain common
     misunderstandings that different wording could help avoid.
     Footnotes added in 1993 help clarify these points.

     For up-to-date information about available GNU software, please see
     our web site, `http://www.gnu.org'.  For software tasks and other
     ways to contribute, see `http://www.gnu.org/help'.

What's GNU?  Gnu's Not Unix!
============================

GNU, which stands for Gnu's Not Unix, is the name for the complete
Unix-compatible software system which I am writing so that I can give it
away free to everyone who can use it.(1) Several other volunteers are
helping me.  Contributions of time, money, programs and equipment are
greatly needed.

   So far we have an Emacs text editor with Lisp for writing editor
commands, a source level debugger, a yacc-compatible parser generator,
a linker, and around 35 utilities.  A shell (command interpreter) is
nearly completed.  A new portable optimizing C compiler has compiled
itself and may be released this year.  An initial kernel exists but
many more features are needed to emulate Unix.  When the kernel and
compiler are finished, it will be possible to distribute a GNU system
suitable for program development.  We will use TeX as our text
formatter, but an nroff is being worked on.  We will use the free,
portable X window system as well.  After this we will add a portable
Common Lisp, an Empire game, a spreadsheet, and hundreds of other
things, plus on-line documentation.  We hope to supply, eventually,
everything useful that normally comes with a Unix system, and more.

   GNU will be able to run Unix programs, but will not be identical to
Unix.  We will make all improvements that are convenient, based on our
experience with other operating systems.  In particular, we plan to
have longer file names, file version numbers, a crashproof file system,
file name completion perhaps, terminal-independent display support, and
perhaps eventually a Lisp-based window system through which several
Lisp programs and ordinary Unix programs can share a screen.  Both C
and Lisp will be available as system programming languages.  We will
try to support UUCP, MIT Chaosnet, and Internet protocols for
communication.

   GNU is aimed initially at machines in the 68000/16000 class with
virtual memory, because they are the easiest machines to make it run
on.  The extra effort to make it run on smaller machines will be left
to someone who wants to use it on them.

   To avoid horrible confusion, please pronounce the `G' in the word
`GNU' when it is the name of this project.

Why I Must Write GNU
====================

I consider that the golden rule requires that if I like a program I must
share it with other people who like it.  Software sellers want to divide
the users and conquer them, making each user agree not to share with
others.  I refuse to break solidarity with other users in this way.  I
cannot in good conscience sign a nondisclosure agreement or a software
license agreement.  For years I worked within the Artificial
Intelligence Lab to resist such tendencies and other inhospitalities,
but eventually they had gone too far: I could not remain in an
institution where such things are done for me against my will.

   So that I can continue to use computers without dishonor, I have
decided to put together a sufficient body of free software so that I
will be able to get along without any software that is not free.  I
have resigned from the AI lab to deny MIT any legal excuse to prevent
me from giving GNU away.

Why GNU Will Be Compatible with Unix
====================================

Unix is not my ideal system, but it is not too bad.  The essential
features of Unix seem to be good ones, and I think I can fill in what
Unix lacks without spoiling them.  And a system compatible with Unix
would be convenient for many other people to adopt.

How GNU Will Be Available
=========================

GNU is not in the public domain.  Everyone will be permitted to modify
and redistribute GNU, but no distributor will be allowed to restrict its
further redistribution.  That is to say, proprietary modifications will
not be allowed.  I want to make sure that all versions of GNU remain
free.

Why Many Other Programmers Want to Help
=======================================

I have found many other programmers who are excited about GNU and want
to help.

   Many programmers are unhappy about the commercialization of system
software.  It may enable them to make more money, but it requires them
to feel in conflict with other programmers in general rather than feel
as comrades.  The fundamental act of friendship among programmers is the
sharing of programs; marketing arrangements now typically used
essentially forbid programmers to treat others as friends.  The
purchaser of software must choose between friendship and obeying the
law.  Naturally, many decide that friendship is more important.  But
those who believe in law often do not feel at ease with either choice.
They become cynical and think that programming is just a way of making
money.

   By working on and using GNU rather than proprietary programs, we can
be hospitable to everyone and obey the law.  In addition, GNU serves as
an example to inspire and a banner to rally others to join us in
sharing.  This can give us a feeling of harmony which is impossible if
we use software that is not free.  For about half the programmers I
talk to, this is an important happiness that money cannot replace.

How You Can Contribute
======================

I am asking computer manufacturers for donations of machines and money.
I'm asking individuals for donations of programs and work.

   One consequence you can expect if you donate machines is that GNU
will run on them at an early date.  The machines should be complete,
ready to use systems, approved for use in a residential area, and not
in need of sophisticated cooling or power.

   I have found very many programmers eager to contribute part-time
work for GNU.  For most projects, such part-time distributed work would
be very hard to coordinate; the independently-written parts would not
work together.  But for the particular task of replacing Unix, this
problem is absent.  A complete Unix system contains hundreds of utility
programs, each of which is documented separately.  Most interface
specifications are fixed by Unix compatibility.  If each contributor
can write a compatible replacement for a single Unix utility, and make
it work properly in place of the original on a Unix system, then these
utilities will work right when put together.  Even allowing for Murphy
to create a few unexpected problems, assembling these components will
be a feasible task.  (The kernel will require closer communication and
will be worked on by a small, tight group.)

   If I get donations of money, I may be able to hire a few people full
or part time.  The salary won't be high by programmers' standards, but
I'm looking for people for whom building community spirit is as
important as making money.  I view this as a way of enabling dedicated
people to devote their full energies to working on GNU by sparing them
the need to make a living in another way.

Why All Computer Users Will Benefit
===================================

Once GNU is written, everyone will be able to obtain good system
software free, just like air.(2)

   This means much more than just saving everyone the price of a Unix
license.  It means that much wasteful duplication of system programming
effort will be avoided.  This effort can go instead into advancing the
state of the art.

   Complete system sources will be available to everyone.  As a result,
a user who needs changes in the system will always be free to make them
himself, or hire any available programmer or company to make them for
him.  Users will no longer be at the mercy of one programmer or company
which owns the sources and is in sole position to make changes.

   Schools will be able to provide a much more educational environment
by encouraging all students to study and improve the system code.
Harvard's computer lab used to have the policy that no program could be
installed on the system if its sources were not on public display, and
upheld it by actually refusing to install certain programs.  I was very
much inspired by this.

   Finally, the overhead of considering who owns the system software
and what one is or is not entitled to do with it will be lifted.

   Arrangements to make people pay for using a program, including
licensing of copies, always incur a tremendous cost to society through
the cumbersome mechanisms necessary to figure out how much (that is,
which programs) a person must pay for.  And only a police state can
force everyone to obey them.  Consider a space station where air must
be manufactured at great cost: charging each breather per liter of air
may be fair, but wearing the metered gas mask all day and all night is
intolerable even if everyone can afford to pay the air bill.  And the
TV cameras everywhere to see if you ever take the mask off are
outrageous.  It's better to support the air plant with a head tax and
chuck the masks.

   Copying all or parts of a program is as natural to a programmer as
breathing, and as productive.  It ought to be as free.

Some Easily Rebutted Objections to GNU's Goals
==============================================

     "Nobody will use it if it is free, because that means they can't
     rely on any support."

     "You have to charge for the program to pay for providing the
     support."

   If people would rather pay for GNU plus service than get GNU free
without service, a company to provide just service to people who have
obtained GNU free ought to be profitable.(3)

   We must distinguish between support in the form of real programming
work and mere handholding.  The former is something one cannot rely on
from a software vendor.  If your problem is not shared by enough
people, the vendor will tell you to get lost.

   If your business needs to be able to rely on support, the only way
is to have all the necessary sources and tools.  Then you can hire any
available person to fix your problem; you are not at the mercy of any
individual.  With Unix, the price of sources puts this out of
consideration for most businesses.  With GNU this will be easy.  It is
still possible for there to be no available competent person, but this
problem cannot be blamed on distribution arrangements.  GNU does not
eliminate all the world's problems, only some of them.

   Meanwhile, the users who know nothing about computers need
handholding: doing things for them which they could easily do
themselves but don't know how.

   Such services could be provided by companies that sell just
hand-holding and repair service.  If it is true that users would rather
spend money and get a product with service, they will also be willing
to buy the service having got the product free.  The service companies
will compete in quality and price; users will not be tied to any
particular one.  Meanwhile, those of us who don't need the service
should be able to use the program without paying for the service.

     "You cannot reach many people without advertising, and you must
     charge for the program to support that."

     "It's no use advertising a program people can get free."

   There are various forms of free or very cheap publicity that can be
used to inform numbers of computer users about something like GNU.  But
it may be true that one can reach more microcomputer users with
advertising.  If this is really so, a business which advertises the
service of copying and mailing GNU for a fee ought to be successful
enough to pay for its advertising and more.  This way, only the users
who benefit from the advertising pay for it.

   On the other hand, if many people get GNU from their friends, and
such companies don't succeed, this will show that advertising was not
really necessary to spread GNU.  Why is it that free market advocates
don't want to let the free market decide this?(4)

     "My company needs a proprietary operating system to get a
     competitive edge."

   GNU will remove operating system software from the realm of
competition.  You will not be able to get an edge in this area, but
neither will your competitors be able to get an edge over you.  You and
they will compete in other areas, while benefiting mutually in this
one.  If your business is selling an operating system, you will not
like GNU, but that's tough on you.  If your business is something else,
GNU can save you from being pushed into the expensive business of
selling operating systems.

   I would like to see GNU development supported by gifts from many
manufacturers and users, reducing the cost to each.(5)

     "Don't programmers deserve a reward for their creativity?"

   If anything deserves a reward, it is social contribution.
Creativity can be a social contribution, but only in so far as society
is free to use the results.  If programmers deserve to be rewarded for
creating innovative programs, by the same token they deserve to be
punished if they restrict the use of these programs.

     "Shouldn't a programmer be able to ask for a reward for his
     creativity?"

   There is nothing wrong with wanting pay for work, or seeking to
maximize one's income, as long as one does not use means that are
destructive.  But the means customary in the field of software today
are based on destruction.

   Extracting money from users of a program by restricting their use of
it is destructive because the restrictions reduce the amount and the
ways that the program can be used.  This reduces the amount of wealth
that humanity derives from the program.  When there is a deliberate
choice to restrict, the harmful consequences are deliberate destruction.

   The reason a good citizen does not use such destructive means to
become wealthier is that, if everyone did so, we would all become
poorer from the mutual destructiveness.  This is Kantian ethics; or,
the Golden Rule.  Since I do not like the consequences that result if
everyone hoards information, I am required to consider it wrong for one
to do so.  Specifically, the desire to be rewarded for one's creativity
does not justify depriving the world in general of all or part of that
creativity.

     "Won't programmers starve?"

   I could answer that nobody is forced to be a programmer.  Most of us
cannot manage to get any money for standing on the street and making
faces.  But we are not, as a result, condemned to spend our lives
standing on the street making faces, and starving.  We do something
else.

   But that is the wrong answer because it accepts the questioner's
implicit assumption: that without ownership of software, programmers
cannot possibly be paid a cent.  Supposedly it is all or nothing.

   The real reason programmers will not starve is that it will still be
possible for them to get paid for programming; just not paid as much as
now.

   Restricting copying is not the only basis for business in software.
It is the most common basis because it brings in the most money.  If it
were prohibited, or rejected by the customer, software business would
move to other bases of organization which are now used less often.
There are always numerous ways to organize any kind of business.

   Probably programming will not be as lucrative on the new basis as it
is now.  But that is not an argument against the change.  It is not
considered an injustice that sales clerks make the salaries that they
now do.  If programmers made the same, that would not be an injustice
either.  (In practice they would still make considerably more than
that.)

     "Don't people have a right to control how their creativity is
     used?"

   "Control over the use of one's ideas" really constitutes control over
other people's lives; and it is usually used to make their lives more
difficult.

   People who have studied the issue of intellectual property rights(6)
carefully (such as lawyers) say that there is no intrinsic right to
intellectual property.  The kinds of supposed intellectual property
rights that the government recognizes were created by specific acts of
legislation for specific purposes.

   For example, the patent system was established to encourage
inventors to disclose the details of their inventions.  Its purpose was
to help society rather than to help inventors.  At the time, the life
span of 17 years for a patent was short compared with the rate of
advance of the state of the art.  Since patents are an issue only among
manufacturers, for whom the cost and effort of a license agreement are
small compared with setting up production, the patents often do not do
much harm.  They do not obstruct most individuals who use patented
products.

   The idea of copyright did not exist in ancient times, when authors
frequently copied other authors at length in works of non-fiction.  This
practice was useful, and is the only way many authors' works have
survived even in part.  The copyright system was created expressly for
the purpose of encouraging authorship.  In the domain for which it was
invented--books, which could be copied economically only on a printing
press--it did little harm, and did not obstruct most of the individuals
who read the books.

   All intellectual property rights are just licenses granted by society
because it was thought, rightly or wrongly, that society as a whole
would benefit by granting them.  But in any particular situation, we
have to ask: are we really better off granting such license?  What kind
of act are we licensing a person to do?

   The case of programs today is very different from that of books a
hundred years ago.  The fact that the easiest way to copy a program is
from one neighbor to another, the fact that a program has both source
code and object code which are distinct, and the fact that a program is
used rather than read and enjoyed, combine to create a situation in
which a person who enforces a copyright is harming society as a whole
both materially and spiritually; in which a person should not do so
regardless of whether the law enables him to.

     "Competition makes things get done better."

   The paradigm of competition is a race: by rewarding the winner, we
encourage everyone to run faster.  When capitalism really works this
way, it does a good job; but its defenders are wrong in assuming it
always works this way.  If the runners forget why the reward is offered
and become intent on winning, no matter how, they may find other
strategies--such as, attacking other runners.  If the runners get into
a fist fight, they will all finish late.

   Proprietary and secret software is the moral equivalent of runners
in a fist fight.  Sad to say, the only referee we've got does not seem
to object to fights; he just regulates them ("For every ten yards you
run, you can fire one shot").  He really ought to break them up, and
penalize runners for even trying to fight.

     "Won't everyone stop programming without a monetary incentive?"

   Actually, many people will program with absolutely no monetary
incentive.  Programming has an irresistible fascination for some
people, usually the people who are best at it.  There is no shortage of
professional musicians who keep at it even though they have no hope of
making a living that way.

   But really this question, though commonly asked, is not appropriate
to the situation.  Pay for programmers will not disappear, only become
less.  So the right question is, will anyone program with a reduced
monetary incentive?  My experience shows that they will.

   For more than ten years, many of the world's best programmers worked
at the Artificial Intelligence Lab for far less money than they could
have had anywhere else.  They got many kinds of non-monetary rewards:
fame and appreciation, for example.  And creativity is also fun, a
reward in itself.

   Then most of them left when offered a chance to do the same
interesting work for a lot of money.

   What the facts show is that people will program for reasons other
than riches; but if given a chance to make a lot of money as well, they
will come to expect and demand it.  Low-paying organizations do poorly
in competition with high-paying ones, but they do not have to do badly
if the high-paying ones are banned.

     "We need the programmers desperately.  If they demand that we stop
     helping our neighbors, we have to obey."

   You're never so desperate that you have to obey this sort of demand.
Remember: millions for defense, but not a cent for tribute!

     "Programmers need to make a living somehow."

   In the short run, this is true.  However, there are plenty of ways
that programmers could make a living without selling the right to use a
program.  This way is customary now because it brings programmers and
businessmen the most money, not because it is the only way to make a
living.  It is easy to find other ways if you want to find them.  Here
are a number of examples.

   A manufacturer introducing a new computer will pay for the porting of
operating systems onto the new hardware.

   The sale of teaching, hand-holding and maintenance services could
also employ programmers.

   People with new ideas could distribute programs as freeware(7),
asking for donations from satisfied users, or selling hand-holding
services.  I have met people who are already working this way
successfully.

   Users with related needs can form users' groups, and pay dues.  A
group would contract with programming companies to write programs that
the group's members would like to use.

   All sorts of development can be funded with a Software Tax:

     Suppose everyone who buys a computer has to pay x percent of the
     price as a software tax.  The government gives this to an agency
     like the NSF to spend on software development.

     But if the computer buyer makes a donation to software development
     himself, he can take a credit against the tax.  He can donate to
     the project of his own choosing--often, chosen because he hopes to
     use the results when it is done.  He can take a credit for any
     amount of donation up to the total tax he had to pay.

     The total tax rate could be decided by a vote of the payers of the
     tax, weighted according to the amount they will be taxed on.

     The consequences:

        * The computer-using community supports software development.

        * This community decides what level of support is needed.

        * Users who care which projects their share is spent on can
          choose this for themselves.

   In the long run, making programs free is a step toward the
post-scarcity world, where nobody will have to work very hard just to
make a living.  People will be free to devote themselves to activities
that are fun, such as programming, after spending the necessary ten
hours a week on required tasks such as legislation, family counseling,
robot repair and asteroid prospecting.  There will be no need to be
able to make a living from programming.

   We have already greatly reduced the amount of work that the whole
society must do for its actual productivity, but only a little of this
has translated itself into leisure for workers because much
nonproductive activity is required to accompany productive activity.
The main causes of this are bureaucracy and isometric struggles against
competition.  Free software will greatly reduce these drains in the
area of software production.  We must do this, in order for technical
gains in productivity to translate into less work for us.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The wording here was careless.  The intention was that nobody
would have to pay for _permission_ to use the GNU system.  But the
words don't make this clear, and people often interpret them as saying
that copies of GNU should always be distributed at little or no charge.
That was never the intent; later on, the manifesto mentions the
possibility of companies providing the service of distribution for a
profit.  Subsequently I have learned to distinguish carefully between
"free" in the sense of freedom and "free" in the sense of price.  Free
software is software that users have the freedom to distribute and
change.  Some users may obtain copies at no charge, while others pay to
obtain copies--and if the funds help support improving the software, so
much the better.  The important thing is that everyone who has a copy
has the freedom to cooperate with others in using it.

   (2) This is another place I failed to distinguish carefully between
the two different meanings of "free."  The statement as it stands is
not false--you can get copies of GNU software at no charge, from your
friends or over the net.  But it does suggest the wrong idea.

   (3) Several such companies now exist.

   (4) The Free Software Foundation raises most of its funds from a
distribution service, although it is a charity rather than a company.
If _no one_ chooses to obtain copies by ordering from the FSF, it will
be unable to do its work.  But this does not mean that proprietary
restrictions are justified to force every user to pay.  If a small
fraction of all the users order copies from the FSF, that is sufficient
to keep the FSF afloat.  So we ask users to choose to support us in
this way.  Have you done your part?

   (5) A group of computer companies recently pooled funds to support
maintenance of the GNU C Compiler.

   (6) In the 80s I had not yet realized how confusing it was to speak
of "the issue" of "intellectual property."  That term is obviously
biased; more subtle is the fact that it lumps together various
disparate laws which raise very different issues.  Nowadays I urge
people to reject the term "intellectual property" entirely, lest it
lead others to suppose that those laws form one coherent issue.  The
way to be clear is to discuss patents, copyrights, and trademarks
separately.  See `http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/not-ipr.xhtml' for more
explanation of how this term spreads confusion and bias.

   (7) Subsequently we have discovered the need to distinguish between
"free software" and "freeware".  The term "freeware" means software you
are free to redistribute, but usually you are not free to study and
change the source code, so most of it is not free software.  See
`http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/words-to-avoid.html' for more
explanation.


File: emacs,  Node: Glossary,  Next: Key Index,  Prev: Intro,  Up: Top

Glossary
********

Abbrev
     An abbrev is a text string which expands into a different text
     string when present in the buffer.  For example, you might define
     a few letters as an abbrev for a long phrase that you want to
     insert frequently.  *Note Abbrevs::.

Aborting
     Aborting means getting out of a recursive edit (q.v.).  The
     commands `C-]' and `M-x top-level' are used for this.  *Note
     Quitting::.

Alt
     Alt is the name of a modifier bit that a keyboard input character
     may have.  To make a character Alt, type it while holding down the
     <ALT> key.  Such characters are given names that start with `Alt-'
     (usually written `A-' for short).  (Note that many terminals have a
     key labeled <ALT> that is really a <META> key.)  *Note Alt: User
     Input.

Argument
     See `numeric argument.'

ASCII character
     An ASCII character is either an ASCII control character or an
     ASCII printing character.  *Note User Input::.

ASCII control character
     An ASCII control character is the Control version of an upper-case
     letter, or the Control version of one of the characters `@[\]^_?'.

ASCII printing character
     ASCII printing characters include letters, digits, space, and these
     punctuation characters: `!@#$%^& *()_-+=|\~` {}[]:;"' <>,.?/'.

Auto Fill Mode
     Auto Fill mode is a minor mode (q.v.) in which text that you
     insert is automatically broken into lines of a given maximum width.
     *Note Filling::.

Auto Saving
     Auto saving is the practice of periodically saving the contents of
     an Emacs buffer in a specially-named file, so that the information
     will be preserved if the buffer is lost due to a system error or
     user error.  *Note Auto Save::.

Autoloading
     Emacs can automatically load Lisp libraries when a Lisp program
     requests a function from those libraries.  This is called
     `autoloading.'  *Note Lisp Libraries::.

Backtrace
     A backtrace is a trace of a series of function calls showing how a
     program arrived at a certain point.  It is used mainly for finding
     and correcting bugs (q.v.).  Emacs can display a backtrace when it
     signals an error or when you type `C-g' (see `quitting').  *Note
     Checklist::.

Backup File
     A backup file records the contents that a file had before the
     current editing session.  Emacs makes backup files automatically
     to help you track down or cancel changes you later regret making.
     *Note Backup::.

Balancing Parentheses
     Emacs can balance parentheses (or other matching delimiters) either
     manually or automatically.  You do manual balancing with the
     commands to move over parenthetical groupings (*note Moving by
     Parens::).  Automatic balancing works by blinking or highlighting
     the delimiter that matches the one you just inserted (*note
     Matching Parens: Matching.).

Balanced Expressions
     A balanced expression is a syntactically recognizable expression,
     such as a symbol, number, string constant, block, or parenthesized
     expression in C.  *Note Balanced Expressions: Expressions.

Balloon Help
     See `tooltips.'

Base Buffer
     A base buffer is a buffer whose text is shared by an indirect
     buffer (q.v.).

Bind
     To bind a key sequence means to give it a binding (q.v.).  *Note
     Rebinding::.

Binding
     A key sequence gets its meaning in Emacs by having a binding,
     which is a command (q.v.), a Lisp function that is run when you
     type that sequence.  *Note Binding: Commands.  Customization often
     involves rebinding a character to a different command function.
     The bindings of all key sequences are recorded in the keymaps
     (q.v.).  *Note Keymaps::.

Blank Lines
     Blank lines are lines that contain only whitespace.  Emacs has
     several commands for operating on the blank lines in the buffer.

Bookmark
     Bookmarks are akin to registers (q.v.) in that they record
     positions in buffers to which you can return later.  Unlike
     registers, bookmarks persist between Emacs sessions.

Border
     A border is a thin space along the edge of the frame, used just for
     spacing, not for displaying anything.  An Emacs frame has an
     ordinary external border, outside of everything including the menu
     bar, plus an internal border that surrounds the text windows,
     their scroll bars and fringes, and separates them from the menu
     bar and tool bar.  You can customize both borders with options and
     resources (*note Borders X::).  Borders are not the same as
     fringes (q.v.).

Buffer
     The buffer is the basic editing unit; one buffer corresponds to
     one text being edited.  You can have several buffers, but at any
     time you are editing only one, the `current buffer,' though
     several can be visible when you are using multiple windows or
     frames (q.v.).  Most buffers are visiting (q.v.) some file.  *Note
     Buffers::.

Buffer Selection History
     Emacs keeps a buffer selection history which records how recently
     each Emacs buffer has been selected.  This is used for choosing a
     buffer to select.  *Note Buffers::.

Bug
     A bug is an incorrect or unreasonable behavior of a program, or
     inaccurate or confusing documentation.  Emacs developers treat bug
     reports, both in Emacs code and its documentation, very seriously
     and ask you to report any bugs you find.  *Note Bugs::.

Button Down Event
     A button down event is the kind of input event (q.v.) generated
     right away when you press down on a mouse button.  *Note Mouse
     Buttons::.

By Default
     See `default.'

Byte Compilation
     See `compilation.'

`C-'
     `C-' in the name of a character is an abbreviation for Control.
     *Note C-: User Input.

`C-M-'
     `C-M-' in the name of a character is an abbreviation for
     Control-Meta.  If your terminal lacks a real <META> key, you type
     a Control-Meta character by typing <ESC> and then typing the
     corresponding Control character.  *Note C-M-: User Input.

Case Conversion
     Case conversion means changing text from upper case to lower case
     or vice versa.  *Note Case::, for the commands for case conversion.

Character
     Characters form the contents of an Emacs buffer.  Also, key
     sequences (q.v.) are usually made up of characters (though they
     may include other input events as well).  *Note User Input::.

Character Set
     Emacs supports a number of character sets, each of which
     represents a particular alphabet or script.  *Note International::.

Character Terminal
     See `text-only terminal.'

Click Event
     A click event is the kind of input event (q.v.) generated when you
     press a mouse button and release it without moving the mouse.
     *Note Mouse Buttons::.

Clipboard
     A clipboard is a buffer provided by the window system for
     transferring text between applications.  On the X Window system,
     the clipboard is provided in addition to the primary selection
     (q.v.); on MS-Windows and Mac, the clipboard is used _instead_ of
     the primary selection.  *Note Clipboard::.

Coding System
     A coding system is an encoding for representing text characters in
     a file or in a stream of information.  Emacs has the ability to
     convert text to or from a variety of coding systems when reading
     or writing it.  *Note Coding Systems::.

Command
     A command is a Lisp function specially defined to be able to serve
     as a key binding in Emacs.  When you type a key sequence (q.v.),
     its binding (q.v.) is looked up in the relevant keymaps (q.v.) to
     find the command to run.  *Note Commands::.

Command History
     See `minibuffer history.'

Command Name
     A command name is the name of a Lisp symbol which is a command
     (*note Commands::).  You can invoke any command by its name using
     `M-x' (*note M-x: M-x.).

Comment
     A comment is text in a program which is intended only for humans
     reading the program, and which is specially marked so that it will
     be ignored when the program is loaded or compiled.  Emacs offers
     special commands for creating, aligning and killing comments.
     *Note Comments::.

Common Lisp
     Common Lisp is a dialect of Lisp (q.v.) much larger and more
     powerful than Emacs Lisp.  Emacs provides a subset of Common Lisp
     in the CL package.  *Note Common Lisp: (cl)Top.

Compilation
     Compilation is the process of creating an executable program from
     source code.  Emacs has commands for compiling files of Emacs Lisp
     code (*note Byte Compilation: (elisp)Byte Compilation.) and
     programs in C and other languages (*note Compilation::).

Complete Key
     A complete key is a key sequence which fully specifies one action
     to be performed by Emacs.  For example, `X' and `C-f' and `C-x m'
     are complete keys.  Complete keys derive their meanings from being
     bound (q.v.) to commands (q.v.).  Thus, `X' is conventionally
     bound to a command to insert `X' in the buffer; `C-x m' is
     conventionally bound to a command to begin composing a mail
     message.  *Note Keys::.

Completion
     Completion is what Emacs does when it automatically expands an
     abbreviation for a name into the entire name.  Completion is done
     for minibuffer (q.v.) arguments when the set of possible valid
     inputs is known; for example, on command names, buffer names, and
     file names.  Completion usually occurs when <TAB>, <SPC> or <RET>
     is typed.  *Note Completion::.

Continuation Line
     When a line of text is longer than the width of the window, it
     normally (but see `Truncation') takes up more than one screen line
     when displayed.  We say that the text line is continued, and all
     screen lines used for it after the first are called continuation
     lines.  *Note Continuation Lines::.  A related Emacs feature is
     `filling' (q.v.).

Control Character
     A control character is a character that you type by holding down
     the <CTRL> key.  Some control characters also have their own keys,
     so that you can type them without using <CTRL>.  For example,
     <RET>, <TAB>, <ESC> and <DEL> are all control characters.  *Note
     User Input::.

Copyleft
     A copyleft is a notice giving the public legal permission to
     redistribute and modify a program or other work of art, but
     requiring modified versions to carry similar permission.
     Copyright is normally used to keep users divided and helpless;
     with copyleft we turn that around to empower users and encourage
     them to cooperate.

     The particular form of copyleft used by the GNU project is called
     the GNU General Public License.  *Note Copying::.

<CTRL>
     The <CTRL> or "control" key is what you hold down in order to
     enter a control character (q.v.).  See also ``C-'.'

Current Buffer
     The current buffer in Emacs is the Emacs buffer on which most
     editing commands operate.  You can select any Emacs buffer as the
     current one.  *Note Buffers::.

Current Line
     The current line is the line that point is on (*note Point::).

Current Paragraph
     The current paragraph is the paragraph that point is in.  If point
     is between two paragraphs, the current paragraph is the one that
     follows point.  *Note Paragraphs::.

Current Defun
     The current defun is the defun (q.v.) that point is in.  If point
     is between defuns, the current defun is the one that follows point.
     *Note Defuns::.

Cursor
     The cursor is the rectangle on the screen which indicates the
     position (called point; q.v.) at which insertion and deletion
     takes place.  The cursor is on or under the character that follows
     point.  Often people speak of `the cursor' when, strictly
     speaking, they mean `point.'  *Note Cursor: Point.

Customization
     Customization is making minor changes in the way Emacs works, to
     reflect your preferences or needs.  It is often done by setting
     variables (*note Variables::) or faces (*note Face
     Customization::), or by rebinding key sequences (*note Keymaps::).

Cut and Paste
     See `killing' and `yanking.'

Daemon
     A daemon is a standard term for a system-level process that runs
     in the background.  Daemons are often started when the system
     first starts up.  When Emacs runs in daemon-mode, it runs in the
     background and does not open a display.  You can then connect to
     it with the `emacsclient' program.  *Note Emacs Server::.

Default Argument
     The default for an argument is the value that will be assumed if
     you do not specify one.  When the minibuffer is used to read an
     argument, the default argument is used if you just type <RET>.
     *Note Minibuffer::.

Default
     A default is the value that is used for a certain purpose if and
     when you do not specify a value to use.

Default Directory
     When you specify a file name that does not start with `/' or `~',
     it is interpreted relative to the current buffer's default
     directory.  (On MS-Windows and MS-DOS, file names which start with
     a drive letter `X:' are treated as absolute, not relative.)  *Note
     Default Directory: Minibuffer File.

Defun
     A defun is a major definition at the top level in a program.  The
     name `defun' comes from Lisp, where most such definitions use the
     construct `defun'.  *Note Defuns::.

<DEL>
     <DEL> is a character that runs the command to delete one character
     of text before the cursor.  It is typically either the <DELETE>
     key or the <BACKSPACE> key, whichever one is easy to type.  *Note
     DEL: Erasing.

Deletion
     Deletion means erasing text without copying it into the kill ring
     (q.v.).  The alternative is killing (q.v.).  *Note Deletion:
     Killing.

Deletion of Files
     Deleting a file means erasing it from the file system.  (Note that
     some systems use the concept of a "trash can", or "recycle bin",
     to allow you to "undelete" files.)  *Note Misc File Ops: Misc File
     Ops.

Deletion of Messages
     Deleting a message (in Rmail, and other mail clients) means
     flagging it to be eliminated from your mail file.  Until you
     expunge (q.v.)  the Rmail file, you can still undelete the
     messages you have deleted.  *Note Rmail Deletion::.

Deletion of Windows
     Deleting a window means eliminating it from the screen.  Other
     windows expand to use up the space.  The text that was in the
     window is not lost, and you can create a new window with the same
     dimensions as the old if you wish.  *Note Windows::.

Directory
     File directories are named collections in the file system, within
     which you can place individual files or subdirectories.  They are
     sometimes referred to as "folders."  *Note Directories::.

Dired
     Dired is the Emacs facility that displays the contents of a file
     directory and allows you to "edit the directory," performing
     operations on the files in the directory.  *Note Dired::.

Disabled Command
     A disabled command is one that you may not run without special
     confirmation.  The usual reason for disabling a command is that it
     is confusing for beginning users.  *Note Disabling::.

Down Event
     Short for `button down event' (q.v.).

Drag Event
     A drag event is the kind of input event (q.v.) generated when you
     press a mouse button, move the mouse, and then release the button.
     *Note Mouse Buttons::.

Dribble File
     A dribble file is a file into which Emacs writes all the
     characters that you type on the keyboard.  Dribble files can be
     used to make a record for debugging Emacs bugs.  Emacs does not
     make a dribble file unless you tell it to.  *Note Bugs::.

Echo Area
     The echo area is the bottom line of the screen, used for echoing
     the arguments to commands, for asking questions, and showing brief
     messages (including error messages).  The messages are stored in
     the buffer `*Messages*' so you can review them later.  *Note Echo
     Area::.

Echoing
     Echoing is acknowledging the receipt of input events by displaying
     them (in the echo area).  Emacs never echoes single-character key
     sequences; longer key sequences echo only if you pause while typing
     them.

Electric
     We say that a character is electric if it is normally
     self-inserting (q.v.), but the current major mode (q.v.) redefines
     it to do something else as well.  For example, some programming
     language major modes define particular delimiter characters to
     reindent the line, or insert one or more newlines in addition to
     self-insertion.

End Of Line
     End of line is a character or a sequence of characters that
     indicate the end of a text line.  On GNU and Unix systems, this is
     a newline (q.v.), but other systems have other conventions.  *Note
     end-of-line: Coding Systems.  Emacs can recognize several
     end-of-line conventions in files and convert between them.

Environment Variable
     An environment variable is one of a collection of variables stored
     by the operating system, each one having a name and a value.
     Emacs can access environment variables set by its parent shell,
     and it can set variables in the environment it passes to programs
     it invokes.  *Note Environment::.

EOL
     See `end of line.'

Error
     An error occurs when an Emacs command cannot execute in the current
     circumstances.  When an error occurs, execution of the command
     stops (unless the command has been programmed to do otherwise) and
     Emacs reports the error by displaying an error message (q.v.).

Error Message
     An error message is output displayed by Emacs when you ask it to do
     something impossible (such as, killing text forward when point is
     at the end of the buffer), or when a command malfunctions in some
     way.  Such messages appear in the echo area, accompanied by a beep.

<ESC>
     <ESC> is a character used as a prefix for typing Meta characters on
     keyboards lacking a <META> key.  Unlike the <META> key (which,
     like the <SHIFT> key, is held down while another character is
     typed), you press the <ESC> key as you would press a letter key,
     and it applies to the next character you type.

Expression
     See `balanced expression.'

Expunging
     Expunging an Rmail, Gnus newsgroup, or Dired buffer is an operation
     that truly discards the messages or files you have previously
     flagged for deletion.

Face
     A face is a style of displaying characters.  It specifies
     attributes such as font family and size, foreground and background
     colors, underline and strike-through, background stipple, etc.
     Emacs provides features to associate specific faces with portions
     of buffer text, in order to display that text as specified by the
     face attributes.  *Note Faces::.

File Locking
     Emacs uses file locking to notice when two different users start
     to edit one file at the same time.  *Note Interlocking::.

File Name
     A file name is a name that refers to a file.  File names may be
     relative or absolute; the meaning of a relative file name depends
     on the current directory, but an absolute file name refers to the
     same file regardless of which directory is current.  On GNU and
     Unix systems, an absolute file name starts with a slash (the root
     directory) or with `~/' or `~USER/' (a home directory).  On
     MS-Windows/MS-DOS, an absolute file name can also start with a
     drive letter and a colon, e.g.  `D:'.

     Some people use the term "pathname" for file names, but we do not;
     we use the word "path" only in the term "search path" (q.v.).

File-Name Component
     A file-name component names a file directly within a particular
     directory.  On GNU and Unix systems, a file name is a sequence of
     file-name components, separated by slashes.  For example, `foo/bar'
     is a file name containing two components, `foo' and `bar'; it
     refers to the file named `bar' in the directory named `foo' in the
     current directory.  MS-DOS/MS-Windows file names can also use
     backslashes to separate components, as in `foo\bar'.

Fill Prefix
     The fill prefix is a string that should be expected at the
     beginning of each line when filling is done.  It is not regarded
     as part of the text to be filled.  *Note Filling::.

Filling
     Filling text means adjusting the position of line-breaks to shift
     text between consecutive lines, so that all the lines are
     approximately the same length.  *Note Filling::.  Some other
     editors call this feature `line wrapping.'

Font Lock
     Font Lock is a mode that highlights parts of buffer text in
     different faces, according to the syntax.  For example, all
     comments (q.v.)  might be colored red.  *Note Font Lock::.

Fontset
     A fontset is a named collection of fonts.  A fontset specification
     lists character sets and which font to use to display each of
     them.  Fontsets make it easy to change several fonts at once by
     specifying the name of a fontset, rather than changing each font
     separately.  *Note Fontsets::.

Formatted Text
     Formatted text is text that displays with formatting information
     while you edit.  Formatting information includes fonts, colors,
     and specified margins.  *Note Formatted Text::.

Formfeed Character
     See `page.'

Frame
     A frame is a rectangular cluster of Emacs windows.  Emacs starts
     out with one frame, but you can create more.  You can subdivide
     each frame into Emacs windows (q.v.).  When you are using a window
     system (q.v.), more than one frame can be visible at the same time.
     *Note Frames::.  Some other editors use the term "window" for this,
     but in Emacs a window means something else.

Free Software
     Free software is software that gives you the freedom to share,
     study and modify it.  Emacs is free software, part of the GNU
     project (q.v.), and distributed under a copyleft (q.v.) license
     called the GNU General Public License.  *Note Copying::.

Free Software Foundation
     The Free Software Foundation (FSF) is a charitable foundation
     dedicated to promoting the development of free software (q.v.).
     For more information, see the FSF website (http://fsf.org/).

Fringe
     On a graphical display (q.v.), there's a narrow portion of the
     frame (q.v.) between the text area and the window's border.  These
     `fringes' are used to display symbols that provide information
     about the buffer text (*note Fringes::).  Emacs displays the
     fringe using a special face (q.v.) called `fringe'.  *Note fringe:
     Faces.

FSF
     See `Free Software Foundation.'

FTP
     FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol.  This is one standard
     method for retrieving remote files (q.v.).

Function Key
     A function key is a key on the keyboard that sends input but does
     not correspond to any character.  *Note Function Keys::.

Global
     Global means "independent of the current environment; in effect
     throughout Emacs."  It is the opposite of local (q.v.).  Particular
     examples of the use of `global' appear below.

Global Abbrev
     A global definition of an abbrev (q.v.) is effective in all major
     modes that do not have local (q.v.) definitions for the same
     abbrev.  *Note Abbrevs::.

Global Keymap
     The global keymap (q.v.) contains key bindings that are in effect
     everywhere, except when overridden by local key bindings in a major
     mode's local keymap (q.v.).  *Note Keymaps::.

Global Mark Ring
     The global mark ring records the series of buffers you have
     recently set a mark (q.v.) in.  In many cases you can use this to
     backtrack through buffers you have been editing, or in which you
     have found tags (see `tags table').  *Note Global Mark Ring::.

Global Substitution
     Global substitution means replacing each occurrence of one string
     by another string throughout a large amount of text.  *Note
     Replace::.

Global Variable
     The global value of a variable (q.v.) takes effect in all buffers
     that do not have their own local (q.v.) values for the variable.
     *Note Variables::.

GNU
     GNU is a recursive acronym for GNU's Not Unix, and it refers to a
     Unix-compatible operating system which is free software (q.v.).
     *Note Manifesto::.  GNU is normally used with Linux as the kernel
     since Linux works better than the GNU kernel.  For more
     information, see the GNU website (http://www.gnu.org/).

Graphic Character
     Graphic characters are those assigned pictorial images rather than
     just names.  All the non-Meta (q.v.) characters except for the
     Control (q.v.) characters are graphic characters.  These include
     letters, digits, punctuation, and spaces; they do not include
     <RET> or <ESC>.  In Emacs, typing a graphic character inserts that
     character (in ordinary editing modes).  *Note Inserting Text::.

Graphical Display
     A graphical display is one that can display images and multiple
     fonts.  Usually it also has a window system (q.v.).

Highlighting
     Highlighting text means displaying it with a different foreground
     and/or background color to make it stand out from the rest of the
     text in the buffer.

     Emacs uses highlighting in several ways.  It highlights the region
     whenever it is active (*note Mark::).  Incremental search also
     highlights matches (*note Incremental Search::).  See also `font
     lock.'

Hardcopy
     Hardcopy means printed output.  Emacs has various commands for
     printing the contents of Emacs buffers.  *Note Printing::.

<HELP>
     <HELP> is the Emacs name for `C-h' or <F1>.  You can type <HELP>
     at any time to ask what options you have, or to ask what any
     command does.  *Note Help::.

Help Echo
     Help echo is a short message displayed in the echo area (q.v.) when
     the mouse pointer is located on portions of display that require
     some explanations.  Emacs displays help echo for menu items, parts
     of the mode line, tool-bar buttons, etc.  On graphics displays,
     the messages can be displayed as tooltips (q.v.).  *Note
     Tooltips::.

Home Directory
     Your home directory contains your personal files.  On a multi-user
     GNU or Unix system, each user has his or her own home directory.
     When you start a new login session, your home directory is the
     default directory in which to start.  A standard shorthand for
     your home directory is `~'.  Similarly, `~USER' represents the
     home directory of some other user.

Hook
     A hook is a list of functions to be called on specific occasions,
     such as saving a buffer in a file, major mode activation, etc.  By
     customizing the various hooks, you can modify Emacs's behavior
     without changing any of its code.  *Note Hooks::.

Hyper
     Hyper is the name of a modifier bit that a keyboard input
     character may have.  To make a character Hyper, type it while
     holding down the <HYPER> key.  Such characters are given names
     that start with `Hyper-' (usually written `H-' for short).  *Note
     User Input::.

Iff
     "Iff" means "if and only if."  This terminology comes from
     mathematics.  Try to avoid using this term in documentation, since
     many are unfamiliar with it and mistake it for a typo.

Inbox
     An inbox is a file in which mail is delivered by the operating
     system.  Rmail transfers mail from inboxes to Rmail files (q.v.)
     in which the mail is then stored permanently or until explicitly
     deleted.  *Note Rmail Inbox::.

Incremental Search
     Emacs provides an incremental search facility, whereby Emacs begins
     searching for a string as soon as you type the first character.
     As you type more characters, it refines the search.  *Note
     Incremental Search::.

Indentation
     Indentation means blank space at the beginning of a line.  Most
     programming languages have conventions for using indentation to
     illuminate the structure of the program, and Emacs has special
     commands to adjust indentation.  *Note Indentation::.

Indirect Buffer
     An indirect buffer is a buffer that shares the text of another
     buffer, called its base buffer (q.v.).  *Note Indirect Buffers::.

Info
     Info is the hypertext format used by the GNU project for writing
     documentation.

Input Event
     An input event represents, within Emacs, one action taken by the
     user on the terminal.  Input events include typing characters,
     typing function keys, pressing or releasing mouse buttons, and
     switching between Emacs frames.  *Note User Input::.

Input Method
     An input method is a system for entering non-ASCII text characters
     by typing sequences of ASCII characters (q.v.).  *Note Input
     Methods::.

Insertion
     Insertion means adding text into the buffer, either from the
     keyboard or from some other place in Emacs.

Interlocking
     Interlocking is a feature for warning when you start to alter a
     file that someone else is already editing.  *Note Interlocking:
     Interlocking.

Isearch
     See `incremental search.'

Justification
     Justification means adding extra spaces within lines of text in
     order to adjust the position of the text edges.  *Note Format
     Justification::.

Key Binding
     See `binding.'

Keyboard Macro
     Keyboard macros are a way of defining new Emacs commands from
     sequences of existing ones, with no need to write a Lisp program.
     You can use a macro to record a sequence of commands, then play
     them back as many times as you like.  *Note Keyboard Macros::.

Keyboard Shortcut
     A keyboard shortcut is a key sequence (q.v.) which invokes a
     command.  What some programs call "assigning a keyboard shortcut,"
     Emacs calls "binding a key sequence."  See `binding.'

Key Sequence
     A key sequence (key, for short) is a sequence of input events
     (q.v.)  that are meaningful as a single unit.  If the key sequence
     is enough to specify one action, it is a complete key (q.v.); if
     it is not enough, it is a prefix key (q.v.).  *Note Keys::.

Keymap
     The keymap is the data structure that records the bindings (q.v.)
     of key sequences to the commands that they run.  For example, the
     global keymap binds the character `C-n' to the command function
     `next-line'.  *Note Keymaps::.

Keyboard Translation Table
     The keyboard translation table is an array that translates the
     character codes that come from the terminal into the character
     codes that make up key sequences.

Kill Ring
     The kill ring is where all text you have killed recently is saved.
     You can reinsert any of the killed text still in the ring; this is
     called yanking (q.v.).  *Note Yanking::.

Killing
     Killing means erasing text and saving it on the kill ring so it
     can be yanked (q.v.) later.  Some other systems call this
     "cutting."  Most Emacs commands that erase text perform killing,
     as opposed to deletion (q.v.).  *Note Killing::.

Killing a Job
     Killing a job (such as, an invocation of Emacs) means making it
     cease to exist.  Any data within it, if not saved in a file, is
     lost.  *Note Exiting::.

Language Environment
     Your choice of language environment specifies defaults for the
     input method (q.v.) and coding system (q.v.).  *Note Language
     Environments::.  These defaults are relevant if you edit non-ASCII
     text (*note International::).

Line Wrapping
     See `filling.'

Lisp
     Lisp is a programming language.  Most of Emacs is written in a
     dialect of Lisp, called Emacs Lisp, which is extended with special
     features that make it especially suitable for text editing tasks.

List
     A list is, approximately, a text string beginning with an open
     parenthesis and ending with the matching close parenthesis.  In C
     mode and other non-Lisp modes, groupings surrounded by other kinds
     of matched delimiters appropriate to the language, such as braces,
     are also considered lists.  Emacs has special commands for many
     operations on lists.  *Note Moving by Parens::.

Local
     Local means "in effect only in a particular context"; the relevant
     kind of context is a particular function execution, a particular
     buffer, or a particular major mode.  It is the opposite of `global'
     (q.v.).  Specific uses of `local' in Emacs terminology appear
     below.

Local Abbrev
     A local abbrev definition is effective only if a particular major
     mode is selected.  In that major mode, it overrides any global
     definition for the same abbrev.  *Note Abbrevs::.

Local Keymap
     A local keymap is used in a particular major mode; the key bindings
     (q.v.) in the current local keymap override global bindings of the
     same key sequences.  *Note Keymaps::.

Local Variable
     A local value of a variable (q.v.) applies to only one buffer.
     *Note Locals::.

`M-'
     `M-' in the name of a character is an abbreviation for <META>, one
     of the modifier keys that can accompany any character.  *Note M-:
     User Input.

`M-C-'
     `M-C-' in the name of a character is an abbreviation for
     Control-Meta; it means the same thing as ``C-M-'' (q.v.).

`M-x'
     `M-x' is the key sequence that is used to call an Emacs command by
     name.  This is how you run commands that are not bound to key
     sequences.  *Note M-x: M-x.

Mail
     Mail means messages sent from one user to another through the
     computer system, to be read at the recipient's convenience.  Emacs
     has commands for composing and sending mail, and for reading and
     editing the mail you have received.  *Note Sending Mail::.  *Note
     Rmail::, for one way to read mail with Emacs.

Mail Composition Method
     A mail composition method is a program runnable within Emacs for
     editing and sending a mail message.  Emacs lets you select from
     several alternative mail composition methods.  *Note Mail
     Methods::.

Major Mode
     The Emacs major modes are a mutually exclusive set of options,
     each of which configures Emacs for editing a certain sort of text.
     Ideally, each programming language has its own major mode.  *Note
     Major Modes::.

Margin
     The space between the usable part of a window (including the
     fringe) and the window edge.

Mark
     The mark points to a position in the text.  It specifies one end
     of the region (q.v.), point being the other end.  Many commands
     operate on all the text from point to the mark.  Each buffer has
     its own mark.  *Note Mark::.

Mark Ring
     The mark ring is used to hold several recent previous locations of
     the mark, just in case you want to move back to them.  Each buffer
     has its own mark ring; in addition, there is a single global mark
     ring (q.v.).  *Note Mark Ring::.

Menu Bar
     The menu bar is a line at the top of an Emacs frame.  It contains
     words you can click on with the mouse to bring up menus, or you
     can use a keyboard interface to navigate it.  *Note Menu Bars::.

Message
     See `mail.'

Meta
     Meta is the name of a modifier bit which you can use in a command
     character.  To enter a meta character, you hold down the <META>
     key while typing the character.  We refer to such characters with
     names that start with `Meta-' (usually written `M-' for short).
     For example, `M-<' is typed by holding down <META> and at the same
     time typing `<' (which itself is done, on most terminals, by
     holding down <SHIFT> and typing `,').  *Note Meta: User Input.

     On some terminals, the <META> key is actually labeled <ALT> or
     <EDIT>.

Meta Character
     A Meta character is one whose character code includes the Meta bit.

Minibuffer
     The minibuffer is the window that appears when necessary inside the
     echo area (q.v.), used for reading arguments to commands.  *Note
     Minibuffer::.

Minibuffer History
     The minibuffer history records the text you have specified in the
     past for minibuffer arguments, so you can conveniently use the
     same text again.  *Note Minibuffer History::.

Minor Mode
     A minor mode is an optional feature of Emacs which can be switched
     on or off independently of all other features.  Each minor mode
     has a command to turn it on or off.  Some minor modes are global
     (q.v.), and some are local (q.v.).  *Note Minor Modes::.

Minor Mode Keymap
     A minor mode keymap is a keymap that belongs to a minor mode and is
     active when that mode is enabled.  Minor mode keymaps take
     precedence over the buffer's local keymap, just as the local
     keymap takes precedence over the global keymap.  *Note Keymaps::.

Mode Line
     The mode line is the line at the bottom of each window (q.v.),
     giving status information on the buffer displayed in that window.
     *Note Mode Line::.

Modified Buffer
     A buffer (q.v.) is modified if its text has been changed since the
     last time the buffer was saved (or since it was created, if it has
     never been saved).  *Note Saving::.

Moving Text
     Moving text means erasing it from one place and inserting it in
     another.  The usual way to move text is by killing (q.v.) it and
     then yanking (q.v.) it.  *Note Killing::.

MULE
     MULE refers to the Emacs features for editing multilingual
     non-ASCII text using multibyte characters (q.v.).  *Note
     International::.

Multibyte Character
     A multibyte character is a character that takes up several bytes
     in a buffer.  Emacs uses multibyte characters to represent
     non-ASCII text, since the number of non-ASCII characters is much
     more than 256.  *Note International Characters: International
     Chars.

Named Mark
     A named mark is a register (q.v.) in its role of recording a
     location in text so that you can move point to that location.
     *Note Registers::.

Narrowing
     Narrowing means creating a restriction (q.v.) that limits editing
     in the current buffer to only a part of the text.  Text outside
     that part is inaccessible for editing (or viewing) until the
     boundaries are widened again, but it is still there, and saving
     the file saves it all.  *Note Narrowing::.

Newline
     Control-J characters in the buffer terminate lines of text and are
     therefore also called newlines.  See `End of Line.'

`nil'
     `nil' is a value usually interpreted as a logical "false."  Its
     opposite is `t', interpreted as "true."

Numeric Argument
     A numeric argument is a number, specified before a command, to
     change the effect of the command.  Often the numeric argument
     serves as a repeat count.  *Note Arguments::.

Overwrite Mode
     Overwrite mode is a minor mode.  When it is enabled, ordinary text
     characters replace the existing text after point rather than
     pushing it to the right.  *Note Minor Modes::.

Page
     A page is a unit of text, delimited by formfeed characters (ASCII
     control-L, code 014) coming at the beginning of a line.  Some Emacs
     commands are provided for moving over and operating on pages.
     *Note Pages::.

Paragraph
     Paragraphs are the medium-size unit of human-language text.  There
     are special Emacs commands for moving over and operating on
     paragraphs.  *Note Paragraphs::.

Parsing
     We say that certain Emacs commands parse words or expressions in
     the text being edited.  Really, all they know how to do is find
     the other end of a word or expression.  *Note Syntax::.

Point
     Point is the place in the buffer at which insertion and deletion
     occur.  Point is considered to be between two characters, not at
     one character.  The terminal's cursor (q.v.) indicates the
     location of point.  *Note Point::.

Prefix Argument
     See `numeric argument.'

Prefix Key
     A prefix key is a key sequence (q.v.) whose sole function is to
     introduce a set of longer key sequences.  `C-x' is an example of
     prefix key; any two-character sequence starting with `C-x' is
     therefore a legitimate key sequence.  *Note Keys::.

Primary Rmail File
     Your primary Rmail file is the file named `RMAIL' in your home
     directory.  That's where Rmail stores your incoming mail, unless
     you specify a different file name.  *Note Rmail::.

Primary Selection
     The primary selection is one particular X selection (q.v.); it is
     the selection that most X applications use for transferring text
     to and from other applications.

     The Emacs kill commands set the primary selection and the yank
     command uses the primary selection when appropriate.  *Note
     Killing::.

Prompt
     A prompt is text used to ask you for input.  Displaying a prompt
     is called prompting.  Emacs prompts always appear in the echo area
     (q.v.).  One kind of prompting happens when the minibuffer is used
     to read an argument (*note Minibuffer::); the echoing that happens
     when you pause in the middle of typing a multi-character key
     sequence is also a kind of prompting (*note Echo Area::).

Query-Replace
     Query-replace is an interactive string replacement feature
     provided by Emacs.  *Note Query Replace::.

Quitting
     Quitting means canceling a partially typed command or a running
     command, using `C-g' (or `C-<BREAK>' on MS-DOS).  *Note Quitting::.

Quoting
     Quoting means depriving a character of its usual special
     significance.  The most common kind of quoting in Emacs is with
     `C-q'.  What constitutes special significance depends on the
     context and on convention.  For example, an "ordinary" character
     as an Emacs command inserts itself; so in this context, a special
     character is any character that does not normally insert itself
     (such as <DEL>, for example), and quoting it makes it insert
     itself as if it were not special.  Not all contexts allow quoting.
     *Note Quoting: Inserting Text.

Quoting File Names
     Quoting a file name turns off the special significance of
     constructs such as `$', `~' and `:'.  *Note Quoted File Names::.

Read-Only Buffer
     A read-only buffer is one whose text you are not allowed to change.
     Normally Emacs makes buffers read-only when they contain text which
     has a special significance to Emacs; for example, Dired buffers.
     Visiting a file that is write-protected also makes a read-only
     buffer.  *Note Buffers::.

Rectangle
     A rectangle consists of the text in a given range of columns on a
     given range of lines.  Normally you specify a rectangle by putting
     point at one corner and putting the mark at the diagonally
     opposite corner.  *Note Rectangles::.

Recursive Editing Level
     A recursive editing level is a state in which part of the
     execution of a command involves asking you to edit some text.
     This text may or may not be the same as the text to which the
     command was applied.  The mode line indicates recursive editing
     levels with square brackets (`[' and `]').  *Note Recursive Edit::.

Redisplay
     Redisplay is the process of correcting the image on the screen to
     correspond to changes that have been made in the text being edited.
     *Note Redisplay: Screen.

Regexp
     See `regular expression.'

Region
     The region is the text between point (q.v.) and the mark (q.v.).
     Many commands operate on the text of the region.  *Note Region:
     Mark.

Register
     Registers are named slots in which text, buffer positions, or
     rectangles can be saved for later use.  *Note Registers::.  A
     related Emacs feature is `bookmarks' (q.v.).

Regular Expression
     A regular expression is a pattern that can match various text
     strings; for example, `a[0-9]+' matches `a' followed by one or more
     digits.  *Note Regexps::.

Remote File
     A remote file is a file that is stored on a system other than your
     own.  Emacs can access files on other computers provided that they
     are connected to the same network as your machine, and (obviously)
     that you have a supported method to gain access to those files.
     *Note Remote Files::.

Repeat Count
     See `numeric argument.'

Replacement
     See `global substitution.'

Restriction
     A buffer's restriction is the amount of text, at the beginning or
     the end of the buffer, that is temporarily inaccessible.  Giving a
     buffer a nonzero amount of restriction is called narrowing (q.v.);
     removing a restriction is called widening (q.v.).  *Note
     Narrowing::.

<RET>
     <RET> is a character that in Emacs runs the command to insert a
     newline into the text.  It is also used to terminate most arguments
     read in the minibuffer (q.v.).  *Note Return: User Input.

Reverting
     Reverting means returning to the original state.  Emacs lets you
     revert a buffer by re-reading its file from disk.  *Note
     Reverting::.

Rmail File
     An Rmail file is a file containing text in the format used by
     Rmail for storing mail.  *Note Rmail::.

Saving
     Saving a buffer means copying its text into the file that was
     visited (q.v.) in that buffer.  This is the way text in files
     actually gets changed by your Emacs editing.  *Note Saving::.

Scroll Bar
     A scroll bar is a tall thin hollow box that appears at the side of
     a window.  You can use mouse commands in the scroll bar to scroll
     the window.  The scroll bar feature is supported only under
     windowing systems.  *Note Scroll Bars::.

Scrolling
     Scrolling means shifting the text in the Emacs window so as to see
     a different part of the buffer.  *Note Scrolling::.

Searching
     Searching means moving point to the next occurrence of a specified
     string or the next match for a specified regular expression.
     *Note Search::.

Search Path
     A search path is a list of directory names, to be used for
     searching for files for certain purposes.  For example, the
     variable `load-path' holds a search path for finding Lisp library
     files.  *Note Lisp Libraries::.

Secondary Selection
     The secondary selection is one particular X selection (q.v.); some
     X applications can use it for transferring text to and from other
     applications.  Emacs has special mouse commands for transferring
     text using the secondary selection.  *Note Secondary Selection::.

Selected Frame
     The selected frame is the one your input currently operates on.
     *Note Frames::.

Selected Window
     The selected window is the one your input currently operates on.
     *Note Basic Window::.

Selecting a Buffer
     Selecting a buffer means making it the current (q.v.) buffer.
     *Note Select Buffer::.

Selection
     Windowing systems allow an application program to specify
     selections whose values are text.  A program can also read the
     selections that other programs have set up.  This is the principal
     way of transferring text between window applications.  Emacs has
     commands to work with the primary (q.v.) selection and the
     secondary (q.v.)  selection, and also with the clipboard (q.v.).

Self-Documentation
     Self-documentation is the feature of Emacs that can tell you what
     any command does, or give you a list of all commands related to a
     topic you specify.  You ask for self-documentation with the help
     character, `C-h'.  *Note Help::.

Self-Inserting Character
     A character is self-inserting if typing that character inserts that
     character in the buffer.  Ordinary printing and whitespace
     characters are self-inserting in Emacs, except in certain special
     major modes.

Sentences
     Emacs has commands for moving by or killing by sentences.  *Note
     Sentences::.

Sexp
     A sexp (short for "s-expression") is the basic syntactic unit of
     Lisp in its textual form: either a list, or Lisp atom.  Sexps are
     also the balanced expressions (q.v.) of the Lisp language; this is
     why the commands for editing balanced expressions have `sexp' in
     their name.  *Note Sexps: Expressions.

Simultaneous Editing
     Simultaneous editing means two users modifying the same file at
     once.  Simultaneous editing, if not detected, can cause one user
     to lose his or her work.  Emacs detects all cases of simultaneous
     editing, and warns one of the users to investigate.  *Note
     Interlocking: Interlocking.

<SPC>
     <SPC> is the space character, which you enter by pressing the
     space bar.

Speedbar
     The speedbar is a special tall frame that provides fast access to
     Emacs buffers, functions within those buffers, Info nodes, and
     other interesting parts of text within Emacs.  *Note Speedbar::.

Spell Checking
     Spell checking means checking correctness of the written form of
     each one of the words in a text.  Emacs can use various external
     spelling-checker programs to check the spelling of parts of a
     buffer via a convenient user interface.  *Note Spelling::.

String
     A string is a kind of Lisp data object which contains a sequence of
     characters.  Many Emacs variables are intended to have strings as
     values.  The Lisp syntax for a string consists of the characters
     in the string with a `"' before and another `"' after.  A `"' that
     is part of the string must be written as `\"' and a `\' that is
     part of the string must be written as `\\'.  All other characters,
     including newline, can be included just by writing them inside the
     string; however, backslash sequences as in C, such as `\n' for
     newline or `\241' using an octal character code, are allowed as
     well.

String Substitution
     See `global substitution.'

Syntax Highlighting
     See `font lock.'

Syntax Table
     The syntax table tells Emacs which characters are part of a word,
     which characters balance each other like parentheses, etc.  *Note
     Syntax::.

Super
     Super is the name of a modifier bit that a keyboard input
     character may have.  To make a character Super, type it while
     holding down the <SUPER> key.  Such characters are given names
     that start with `Super-' (usually written `s-' for short).  *Note
     User Input::.

Suspending
     Suspending Emacs means stopping it temporarily and returning
     control to its parent process, which is usually a shell.  Unlike
     killing a job (q.v.), you can later resume the suspended Emacs job
     without losing your buffers, unsaved edits, undo history, etc.
     *Note Exiting::.

<TAB>
     <TAB> is the tab character.  In Emacs it is typically used for
     indentation or completion.

Tags Table
     A tags table is a file that serves as an index to the function
     definitions in one or more other files.  *Note Tags::.

Termscript File
     A termscript file contains a record of all characters sent by
     Emacs to the terminal.  It is used for tracking down bugs in Emacs
     redisplay.  Emacs does not make a termscript file unless you tell
     it to.  *Note Bugs::.

Text
     `Text' has two meanings (*note Text::):

        * Data consisting of a sequence of characters, as opposed to
          binary numbers, executable programs, and the like.  The basic
          contents of an Emacs buffer (aside from the text properties,
          q.v.) are always text in this sense.

        * Data consisting of written human language (as opposed to
          programs), or following the stylistic conventions of human
          language.

Text-only Terminal
     A text-only terminal is a display that is limited to displaying
     text in character units.  Such a terminal cannot control
     individual pixels it displays.  Emacs supports a subset of display
     features on text-only terminals.

Text Properties
     Text properties are annotations recorded for particular characters
     in the buffer.  Images in the buffer are recorded as text
     properties; they also specify formatting information.  *Note
     Editing Format Info::.

Tool Bar
     The tool bar is a line (sometimes multiple lines) of icons at the
     top of an Emacs frame.  Clicking on one of these icons executes a
     command.  You can think of this as a graphical relative of the
     menu bar (q.v.).  *Note Tool Bars::.

Tooltips
     Tooltips are small windows displaying a help echo (q.v.) text,
     which explains parts of the display, lists useful options
     available via mouse clicks, etc.  *Note Tooltips::.

Top Level
     Top level is the normal state of Emacs, in which you are editing
     the text of the file you have visited.  You are at top level
     whenever you are not in a recursive editing level (q.v.) or the
     minibuffer (q.v.), and not in the middle of a command.  You can
     get back to top level by aborting (q.v.) and quitting (q.v.).
     *Note Quitting::.

Transposition
     Transposing two units of text means putting each one into the place
     formerly occupied by the other.  There are Emacs commands to
     transpose two adjacent characters, words, balanced expressions
     (q.v.) or lines (*note Transpose::).

Truncation
     Truncating text lines in the display means leaving out any text on
     a line that does not fit within the right margin of the window
     displaying it.  See also `continuation line.'  *Note Truncation:
     Continuation Lines.

TTY
     See `text-only terminal.'

Undoing
     Undoing means making your previous editing go in reverse, bringing
     back the text that existed earlier in the editing session.  *Note
     Undo::.

Unix
     Unix is a class of multi-user computer operating systems with a
     long history.  There are several implementations today.  The GNU
     project (q.v.) aims to develop a complete Unix-like operating
     system that is free software (q.v.).

User Option
     A user option is a face (q.v.) or a variable (q.v.) that exists so
     that you can customize Emacs by setting it to a new value.  *Note
     Easy Customization::.

Variable
     A variable is an object in Lisp that can store an arbitrary value.
     Emacs uses some variables for internal purposes, and has others
     (known as `user options'; q.v.) just so that you can set their
     values to control the behavior of Emacs.  The variables used in
     Emacs that you are likely to be interested in are listed in the
     Variables Index in this manual (*note Variable Index::).  *Note
     Variables::, for information on variables.

Version Control
     Version control systems keep track of multiple versions of a
     source file.  They provide a more powerful alternative to keeping
     backup files (q.v.).  *Note Version Control::.

Visiting
     Visiting a file means loading its contents into a buffer (q.v.)
     where they can be edited.  *Note Visiting::.

Whitespace
     Whitespace is any run of consecutive formatting characters (space,
     tab, newline, and backspace).

Widening
     Widening is removing any restriction (q.v.) on the current buffer;
     it is the opposite of narrowing (q.v.).  *Note Narrowing::.

Window
     Emacs divides a frame (q.v.) into one or more windows, each of
     which can display the contents of one buffer (q.v.) at any time.
     *Note Screen::, for basic information on how Emacs uses the screen.
     *Note Windows::, for commands to control the use of windows.  Some
     other editors use the term "window" for what we call a `frame'
     (q.v.) in Emacs.

Window System
     A window system is software that operates on a graphical display
     (q.v.), to subdivide the screen so that multiple applications can
     have their] own windows at the same time.  All modern operating
     systems include a window system.

Word Abbrev
     See `abbrev.'

Word Search
     Word search is searching for a sequence of words, considering the
     punctuation between them as insignificant.  *Note Word Search::.

WYSIWYG
     WYSIWYG stands for "What you see is what you get."  Emacs generally
     provides WYSIWYG editing for files of characters; in Enriched mode
     (*note Formatted Text::), it provides WYSIWYG editing for files
     that include text formatting information.

Yanking
     Yanking means reinserting text previously killed (q.v.).  It can be
     used to undo a mistaken kill, or for copying or moving text.  Some
     other systems call this "pasting."  *Note Yanking::.


File: emacs,  Node: Acknowledgments,  Next: Screen,  Prev: Concept Index,  Up: Top

Acknowledgments
***************

Many people have contributed code included in the Free Software
Foundation's distribution of GNU Emacs.  To show our appreciation for
their public spirit, we list here in alphabetical order those who have
written substantial portions.  Others too numerous to mention have
reported and fixed bugs, and added features to many parts of Emacs.  We
thank them for their generosity as well.

   This list is intended to mention every contributor of a major
package or feature we currently distribute; if you know of someone we
have omitted, please report that as a manual bug.  More comprehensive
information is available in the `ChangeLog' files, summarized in the
file `etc/AUTHORS' in the distribution.

   * Per Abrahamsen wrote the customization facilities, as well as
     `double.el', for typing accented characters not normally available
     from the keyboard; `xt-mouse.el', which allows mouse commands
     through Xterm; `gnus-cus.el', which implements customization
     commands for Gnus; `gnus-cite.el', a citation-parsing facility for
     news articles); `gnus-score.el', scoring for Gnus; `cpp.el', which
     hides or highlights parts of C programs according to preprocessor
     conditionals; and the widget library files `wid-browse.el',
     `wid-edit.el', `widget.el'.  He also co-wrote `gnus-soup.el'.

   * Tomas Abrahamsson wrote `artist.el', a package for producing ASCII
     art with a mouse or with keyboard keys.

   * Jay K. Adams wrote `jka-compr.el' and `jka-cmpr-hook.el',
     providing automatic decompression and recompression for compressed
     files.

   * Michael Albinus wrote `dbus.el', a package that implements the
     D-Bus message bus protocol; `zeroconf.el', a mode for browsing
     Avahi services; and `xesam.el', a Xesam-based search engine
     interface.  He and Kai Grossjohann wrote the Tramp package, which
     provides transparent remote file editing using rcp, ssh, ftp, and
     other network protocols.  He and Daniel Pittman wrote
     `tramp-cache.el'.

   * Ralf Angeli wrote `scroll-lock.el', a minor mode which keeps the
     point vertically fixed by scrolling the window when moving up and
     down in the buffer.

   * Joe Arceneaux wrote the original text property implementation, and
     implemented support for X11.

   * Miles Bader wrote `image-file.el', support code for visiting image
     files; `minibuf-eldef.el', a minor mode that hides the minibuffer
     default value when appropriate; `rfn-eshadow.el', shadowing of
     `read-file-name' input; `mb-depth.el', display of minibuffer
     depth; `button.el', the library that implements clickable buttons;
     `face-remap.el', a package for changing the default face in
     individual buffers; and `macroexp.el' for macro-expansion.

   * David Bakhash wrote `strokes.el', a mode for controlling Emacs by
     moving the mouse in particular patterns.

   * Eli Barzilay wrote `calculator.el', a desktop calculator for Emacs.

   * Steven L. Baur wrote `footnote.el' which lets you include
     footnotes in email messages; and `gnus-audio.el' and `earcon.el',
     which provide sound effects for Gnus.  He also wrote
     `gnus-setup.el'.

   * Alexander L. Belikoff, Sergey Berezin, Sacha Chua, David Edmondson,
     Noah Friedman, Andreas Fuchs, Mario Lang, Ben Mesander, Lawrence
     Mitchell, Gergely Nagy, Michael Olson, Per Persson, Jorgen
     Schaefer, Alex Schroeder, and Tom Tromey wrote ERC, an advanced
     Internet Relay Chat client (for more information, see the file
     `CREDITS' in the ERC distribution).

   * Scott Bender, Michael Brouwer, Christophe de Dinechin, Carl Edman,
     Christian Limpach and Adrian Robert developed and maintained the
     NeXTstep port of Emacs.

   * Anna M. Bigatti wrote `cal-html.el', which produces HTML calendars.

   * Ray Blaak and Simon South wrote `delphi.el', a mode for editing
     Delphi (Object Pascal) source code.

   * Martin Blais, Stefan Merten, and David Goodger wrote `rst.el', a
     mode for editing reStructuredText documents.

   * Jim Blandy wrote Emacs 19's input system, brought its
     configuration and build process up to the GNU coding standards,
     and contributed to the frame support and multi-face support.  Jim
     also wrote `tvi970.el', terminal support for the TeleVideo 970
     terminals; and co-wrote `wyse50.el' (q.v.).

   * Per Bothner wrote `term.el', a terminal emulator in an Emacs
     buffer.

   * Terrence M. Brannon wrote `landmark.el', a neural-network robot
     that learns landmarks.

   * Frank Bresz wrote `diff.el', a program to display `diff' output.

   * Peter Breton implemented `dirtrack.el', a library for tracking
     directory changes in shell buffers; `filecache.el', which records
     which directories your files are in; `locate.el', which interfaces
     to the `locate' command; `find-lisp.el', an Emacs Lisp emulation
     of the `find' program; `net-utils.el'; and the "generic mode"
     feature.

   * Emmanuel Briot wrote `xml.el', an XML parser for Emacs; and
     `ada-prj.el', editing of Ada mode project files, as well as
     co-authoring `ada-mode.el' and `ada-xref.el'.

   * Kevin Broadey wrote `foldout.el', providing folding extensions to
     Emacs's outline modes.

   * David M. Brown wrote `array.el', for editing arrays and other
     tabular data.

   * W/lodek Bzyl and Ryszard Kubiak wrote `ogonek.el', a package for
     changing the encoding of Polish characters.

   * Bill Carpenter provided `feedmail.el', a package for massaging
     outgoing mail messages and sending them through various popular
     mailers.

   * Per Cederqvist and Inge Wallin wrote `ewoc.el', an Emacs widget for
     manipulating object collections.  Per Cederqvist, Inge Wallin, and
     Thomas Bellman wrote `avl-tree.el', for balanced binary trees.

   * Hans Chalupsky wrote `advice.el', an overloading mechanism for
     Emacs Lisp functions; and `trace.el', a tracing facility for Emacs
     Lisp.

   * Chris Chase, Carsten Dominik, and J. D. Smith wrote IDLWAVE mode,
     for editing IDL and WAVE CL.

   * Bob Chassell wrote `texnfo-upd.el', `texinfo.el', and
     `makeinfo.el', modes and utilities for working with Texinfo files;
     and `page-ext.el', commands for extended page handling.

   * Jihyun Cho wrote `hanja-util.el' and `hangul.el', utilities for
     Korean Hanja.

   * Andrew Choi and Yamamoto Mitsuharu wrote the Carbon support, used
     prior to Emacs 23 for Mac OS.

   * Chong Yidong was the Emacs co-maintainer for Emacs 23.  He made
     many improvements to the Emacs display engine; and, together with
     Kai Grossjohann and Alex Schroeder, wrote `longlines.el', a minor
     mode for wrapping long lines.

   * James Clark wrote SGML mode, a mode for editing SGML documents; and
     nXML mode, a mode for editing XML documents.  He also contributed
     to Emacs's dumping procedures.

   * Mike Clarkson wrote `edt.el', an emulation of DEC's EDT editor.

   * Glynn Clements provided `gamegrid.el' and a couple of games that
     use it, Snake and Tetris.

   * Andrew Cohen wrote `spam-wash.el', to decode and clean email before
     it is analysed for spam.

   * Georges Brun-Cottan and Stefan Monnier wrote `easy-mmode.el', a
     package for easy definition of major and minor modes.

   * Andrew Csillag wrote M4 mode (`m4-mode.el').

   * Doug Cutting and Jamie Zawinski wrote `disass.el', a disassembler
     for compiled Emacs Lisp code.

   * Mathias Dahl wrote `image-dired.el', a package for viewing image
     files as "thumbnails."

   * Vivek Dasmohapatra wrote `htmlfontify.el', to convert a buffer or
     source tree to HTML.

   * Michael DeCorte wrote `emacs.csh', a C-shell script that starts a
     new Emacs job, or restarts a paused Emacs if one exists.

   * Gary Delp wrote `mailpost.el', an interface between RMAIL and the
     `/usr/uci/post' mailer.

   * Matthieu Devin wrote `delsel.el', a package to make newly-typed
     text replace the current selection.

   * Eric Ding wrote `goto-addr.el',

   * Jan Dja"rv added support for the GTK+ toolkit and X drag-and-drop.

   * Carsten Dominik wrote RefTeX, a package for setting up labels and
     cross-references in LaTeX documents; and co-wrote IDLWAVE mode
     (q.v.).  He was the main author of Org mode, for maintaining notes,
     todo lists, and project planning.  Thomas Baumann, Lennart Borgman,
     Baoqiu Cui, Daniel German, Bastien Guerry, Tassilo Horn, Philip
     Jackson, Tokuya Kameshima, Ross Patterson, Sebastian Rose, Eric
     Schulte, Andy Stewart, David O'Toole, John Wiegley, and Piotr
     Zielinski also wrote various Org mode components.

   * Scott Draves wrote `tq.el', help functions for maintaining
     transaction queues between Emacs and its subprocesses.

   * Benjamin Drieu wrote `pong.el', an implementation of the classical
     pong game.

   * Viktor Dukhovni wrote support for dumping under SunOS version 4.

   * John Eaton and Kurt Hornik wrote Octave mode.

   * Rolf Ebert co-wrote Ada mode.

   * Stephen Eglen wrote `mspools.el', which tells you which Procmail
     folders have mail waiting in them; and `iswitchb.el', a feature
     for incremental reading and completion of buffer names.

   * Torbjo"rn Einarsson wrote `f90.el', a mode for Fortran 90 files.

   * Tsugutomo Enami co-wrote the support for international character
     sets.

   * David Engster wrote `mairix.el' and `nnmairix.el', an interface to
     the Mairix indexing tool.

   * Hans Henrik Eriksen wrote `simula.el', a mode for editing SIMULA 87
     code.

   * Michael Ernst wrote `reposition.el', a command for recentering a
     function's source code and preceding comment on the screen.

   * Ata Etemadi wrote `cdl.el', functions for working with Common Data
     Language source code.

   * Frederick Farnbach implemented `morse.el', which converts text to
     Morse code.

   * Oscar Figueiredo wrote EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client,
     which is an interface to directory servers via LDAP, CCSO PH/QI,
     or BBDB; and `ldap.el', the LDAP client interface.

   * Fred Fish wrote the support for dumping COFF executable files.

   * Karl Fogel wrote `bookmark.el', which implements named
     placeholders; `mail-hist.el', a history mechanism for outgoing
     mail messages; and `saveplace.el', for preserving point's location
     in files between editing sessions.

   * Gary Foster wrote `crisp.el', the emulation for CRiSP and Brief
     editors; and `scroll-all.el', a mode for scrolling several buffers
     together.

   * Noah Friedman wrote `rlogin.el', an interface to Rlogin,
     `type-break.el', which reminds you to take periodic breaks from
     typing, and `eldoc-mode', a mode to show the defined parameters or
     the doc string for the Lisp function near point.

   * Shigeru Fukaya wrote a testsuite for the byte-compiler.

   * Keith Gabryelski wrote `hexl.el', a mode for editing binary files.

   * Kevin Gallagher rewrote and enhanced the EDT emulation, and wrote
     `flow-ctrl.el', a package for coping with unsuppressible XON/XOFF
     flow control.

   * Kevin Gallo added multiple-frame support for Windows NT and wrote
     `w32-win.el', support functions for the MS-Windows window system.

   * Juan Leo'n Lahoz Garci'a wrote `wdired.el', a package for
     performing file operations by directly editing Dired buffers.

   * Howard Gayle wrote much of the C and Lisp code for display tables
     and case tables.  He also wrote `rot13.el', a command to display
     the plain-text form of a buffer encoded with the Caesar cipher;
     `vt100-led.el', a package for controlling the LEDs on
     VT100-compatible terminals; and much of the support for ISO-8859
     European character sets (which includes `iso-ascii.el',
     `iso-insert.el', `iso-swed.el', `iso-syntax.el', `iso-transl.el',
     and `swedish.el').

   * Stephen Gildea made the Emacs quick reference card, and made many
     contributions for `time-stamp.el', a package for maintaining
     last-change time stamps in files.

   * Julien Gilles wrote `gnus-ml.el', a mailing list minor mode for
     Gnus.

   * David Gillespie wrote the Common Lisp compatibility packages;
     `Calc', an advanced calculator and mathematical tool, since
     maintained and developed by Jay Belanger; `complete.el', a partial
     completion mechanism; and `edmacro.el', a package for editing
     keyboard macros.

   * Bob Glickstein wrote `sregex.el', a facility for writing regexps
     using a Lisp-like syntax.

   * Boris Goldowsky wrote `avoid.el', a package to keep the mouse
     cursor out of the way of the text cursor; `shadowfile.el', a
     package for keeping identical copies of files in more than one
     place; `format.el', a package for reading and writing files in
     various formats; `enriched.el', a package for saving text
     properties in files; `facemenu.el', a package for specifying
     faces; and `descr-text.el', describing text and character
     properties.

   * Michelangelo Grigni wrote `ffap.el' which visits a file, taking
     the file name from the buffer.

   * Odd Gripenstam wrote `dcl-mode.el' for editing DCL command files.

   * Michael Gschwind wrote `iso-cvt.el', a package to convert between
     the ISO 8859-1 character set and the notations for non-ASCII
     characters used by TeX and net tradition.

   * Bastien Guerry wrote `gnus-bookmark.el', bookmark support for Gnus;
     as well as contributing to Org mode (q.v.).

   * Henry Guillaume wrote `find-file.el', a package to visit files
     related to the currently visited file.

   * Doug Gwyn wrote the portable `alloca' implementation.

   * Ken'ichi Handa implemented most of the support for international
     character sets, and wrote most of the Emacs 23 font handling code.
     He also wrote `composite.el', which provides a minor mode that
     composes characters automatically when they are displayed;
     `isearch-x.el', a facility for searching non-ASCII text; and
     `ps-bdf.el', a BDF font support for printing non-ASCII text on a
     PostScript printer.  Together with Naoto Takahashi, he wrote
     `quail.el', an input facility for typing non-ASCII text from an
     ASCII keyboard.

   * Jesper Harder wrote `yenc.el', for decoding yenc encoded messages.

   * K. Shane Hartman wrote `chistory.el' and `echistory.el', packages
     for browsing command history lists; `electric.el' and `helper.el',
     which provide an alternative command loop and appropriate help
     facilities; `emacsbug.el', a package for reporting Emacs bugs;
     `picture.el', a mode for editing ASCII pictures; and `view.el', a
     package for perusing files and buffers without editing them.

   * John Heidemann wrote `mouse-copy.el' and `mouse-drag.el', which
     provide alternative mouse-based editing and scrolling features.

   * Jon K Hellan wrote `utf7.el', support for mail-safe transformation
     format of Unicode.

   * Markus Heritsch co-wrote Ada mode.

   * Karl Heuer wrote the original blessmail script, implemented the
     `intangible' text property, and rearranged the structure of the
     `Lisp_Object' type to allow for more data bits.

   * Manabu Higashida ported Emacs to MS-DOS.

   * Anders Holst wrote `hippie-exp.el', a versatile completion and
     expansion package.

   * Tassilo Horn wrote DocView mode, allowing viewing of PDF,
     PostScript and DVI documents.

   * Tom Houlder wrote `mantemp.el', which generates manual C++
     template instantiations.

   * Joakim Hove wrote `html2text.el', a html to plain text converter.

   * Denis Howe wrote `browse-url.el', a package for invoking a WWW
     browser to display a URL.

   * Lars Magne Ingebrigtsen did a major redesign of the Gnus
     news-reader and wrote many of its parts.  Several of these are now
     general components of Emacs: `dns.el' for Domain Name Service
     lookups; `format-spec.el' for formatting arbitrary format strings;
     `netrc.el' for parsing of `.netrc' files; and `time-date.el' for
     general date and time handling.  Components of Gnus have also been
     written by: Nagy Andras, David Blacka, Scott Byer, Kevin Greiner,
     Kai Grossjohann, Joe Hildebrand, Paul Jarc, Sascha Lu"decke, David
     Moore, Jim Radford, Benjamin Rutt, Raymond Scholz, Thomas Steffen,
     Reiner Steib, Didier Verna, Ilja Weis, Katsumi Yamaoka, Teodor
     Zlatanov, and others (*note Contributors: (gnus)Contributors.).

   * Andrew Innes contributed extensively to the MS-Windows support.

   * Seiichiro Inoue improved Emacs's XIM support.

   * Philip Jackson wrote `find-cmd.el', to build a `find' command-line.

   * Ulf Jasper wrote `icalendar.el', a package for converting Emacs
     diary entries to and from the iCalendar format; `newsticker.el',
     an RSS and Atom based Newsticker; and `bubbles.el', a puzzle game.

   * Kyle Jones wrote `life.el', a package to play Conway's "life" game.

   * Terry Jones wrote `shadow.el', a package for finding potential
     load-path problems when some Lisp file "shadows" another.

   * Simon Josefsson wrote `dns-mode.el', an editing mode for Domain
     Name System master files; `dig.el', a Domain Name System interface;
     `flow-fill.el', a package for interpreting RFC2646 formatted text
     in messages; `fringe.el', a package for customizing the fringe;
     `imap.el', an Emacs Lisp library for talking to IMAP servers;
     `password-cache.el', a password reader; `nnimap.el', the IMAP
     back-end for Gnus; `url-imap.el' for the URL library;
     `rfc2104.el', a hashed message authentication facility; the Gnus
     S/MIME and Sieve components; and `tls.el' and `starttls.el' for
     the Transport Layer Security protocol.

   * Arne J/orgensen wrote `latexenc.el', a package to automatically
     guess the correct coding system in LaTeX files.

   * Alexandre Julliard wrote `vc-git.el', support for the Git version
     control system.

   * Tomoji Kagatani implemented `smtpmail.el', used for sending out
     mail with SMTP.

   * Ivan Kanis wrote `vc-hg.el', support for the Mercurial version
     control system.

   * Henry Kautz wrote `bib-mode.el', a mode for maintaining
     bibliography databases compatible with `refer' (the `troff'
     version) and `lookbib', and `refbib.el', a package to convert
     those databases to the format used by the LaTeX text formatting
     package.

   * Taichi Kawabata added support for Devanagari script and the Indian
     languages, and wrote `ucs-normalize.el' for Unicode normalization.

   * Taro Kawagishi implented the MD4 Message Digest Algorithm in Lisp;
     and wrote `ntlm.el' and `sasl-ntlm.el' for NT LanManager
     authentication support.

   * Howard Kaye wrote `sort.el', commands to sort text in Emacs
     buffers.

   * Michael Kifer wrote `ediff', an interactive interface to the
     `diff', `patch', and `merge' programs; and Viper, the newest
     emulation for VI.

   * Richard King wrote the first version of `userlock.el' and
     `filelock.c', which provide simple support for multiple users
     editing the same file.  He also wrote the initial version of
     `uniquify.el', a facility to make buffer names unique by adding
     parts of the file's name to the buffer name.

   * Peter Kleiweg wrote `ps-mode.el', a mode for editing PostScript
     files and running a PostScript interpreter interactively from
     within Emacs.

   * Shuhei Kobayashi wrote `hex-util.el', for operating on hexadecimal
     strings; support for HMAC (Keyed-Hashing for Message
     Authentication); and a Lisp implementation of the SHA1 Secure Hash
     Algorithm.

   * Pavel Kobyakov wrote `flymake.el', a minor mode for performing
     on-the-fly syntax checking.

   * David M. Koppelman wrote `hi-lock.el', a minor mode for
     interactive automatic highlighting of parts of the buffer text.

   * Koseki Yoshinori wrote `iimage.el', a minor mode for displaying
     inline images.

   * Robert Krawitz wrote the original `xmenu.c', part of Emacs's pop-up
     menu support.

   * Sebastian Kremer wrote `dired-mode', with contributions by Lawrence
     R. Dodd.  He also wrote `ls-lisp.el', a Lisp emulation of the `ls'
     command for platforms which don't have `ls' as a standard program.

   * Ken Stevens wrote `ispell.el', a spell-checker interface.

   * David Ka*gedal wrote `tempo.el', providing support for easy
     insertion of boilerplate text and other common constructions.

   * Daniel LaLiberte wrote `edebug.el', a source-level debugger for
     Emacs Lisp; `cl-specs.el', specifications to help `edebug' debug
     code written using David Gillespie's Common Lisp support;
     `cust-print.el', a customizable package for printing lisp objects;
     and `isearch.el', Emacs's incremental search minor mode.  He also
     co-wrote `hideif.el' (q.v.).

   * Karl Landstrom and Daniel Colascione wrote `js.el', a mode for
     editing JavaScript.

   * Vinicius Jose Latorre wrote the Emacs printing facilities, as well
     as `ps-print' (with Jim Thompson, Jacques Duthen, and Kenichi
     Handa), a package for pretty-printing Emacs buffers to PostScript
     printers; `delim-col.el', a package to arrange text into columns;
     `ebnf2ps.el', a package that translates EBNF grammar to a syntactic
     chart that can be printed to a PostScript printer; and
     `whitespace.el', a package that detects and cleans up excess
     whitespace in a file.  The previous version of `whitespace.el',
     used prior to Emacs 23, was written by Rajesh Vaidheeswarran.

   * Frederic Lepied wrote `expand.el', which uses the abbrev mechanism
     for inserting programming constructs.

   * Peter Liljenberg wrote `elint.el', a Lint-style code checker for
     Emacs Lisp programs.

   * Lars Lindberg wrote `msb.el', which provides more flexible menus
     for buffer selection; co-wrote `imenu.el' (q.v.); and rewrote
     `dabbrev.el', originally written by Don Morrison.

   * Anders Lindgren wrote `autorevert.el', a package for automatically
     reverting files visited by Emacs that were changed on disk;
     `cwarn.el', a package to highlight suspicious C and C++
     constructs; and `follow.el', a minor mode to synchronize windows
     that show the same buffer.

   * Thomas Link wrote `filesets.el', a package for handling sets of
     files.

   * Juri Linkov wrote `misearch.el', extending isearch to multi-buffer
     searches; the code in `files-x.el' for handling file- and
     directory-local variables; and the `info-finder' feature that
     creates a virtual Info manual of package keywords.

   * Ka'roly Lo''rentey wrote the "multi-terminal" code, which allows
     Emacs to run on graphical and text-only terminals simultaneously.

   * Martin Lorentzon wrote `vc-annotate.el', support for version
     control annotation.

   * Dave Love wrote much of the code dealing with Unicode support and
     Latin-N unification.  He added support for many coding systems,
     including the various UTF-7 and UTF-16 coding systems.  He also
     wrote `autoarg-mode', a global minor mode whereby digit keys supply
     prefix arguments; `autoarg-kp-mode', which redefines the keypad
     numeric keys to digit arguments; `autoconf.el', a mode for editing
     Autoconf files; `cfengine.el', a mode for editing Cfengine files;
     `elide-head.el', a package for eliding boilerplate text from file
     headers; `hl-line.el', a minor mode for highlighting the line in
     the current window on which point is; `cap-words.el', a minor mode
     for motion in "CapitalizedWordIdentifiers"; `latin1-disp.el', a
     package that lets you display ISO 8859 characters on Latin-1
     terminals by setting up appropriate display tables; `python.el', a
     major mode for the Python programming language; `refill.el', a
     mode for automatic paragraph refilling, akin to typical word
     processors; `smiley.el', a facility for displaying smiley faces;
     `sym-comp.el', a library for performing mode-dependent symbol
     completion; `benchmark.el' for timing code execution; and
     `tool-bar.el', a mode to control the display of the Emacs tool bar.
     With Riccardo Murri he wrote `vc-bzr.el', support for the Bazaar
     version control system.

   * Eric Ludlam wrote the Speedbar package; `checkdoc.el', for checking
     doc strings in Emacs Lisp programs; `dframe.el', providing
     dedicated frame support modes; `ezimage.el', a generalized way to
     place images over text; `chart.el' for drawing bar charts etc; and
     the EIEIO (Enhanced Implementation of Emacs Interpreted Objects)
     package.  He was also the main author of the CEDET (Collection of
     Emacs Development Environment Tools) package.  Portions were also
     written by Jan Moringen, David Ponce, and Joakim Verona.

   * Alan Mackenzie wrote the integrated AWK support in CC Mode, and
     maintained CC Mode from Emacs 22 onwards.

   * Christopher J. Madsen wrote `decipher.el', a package for cracking
     simple substitution ciphers.

   * Neil M. Mager wrote `appt.el', functions to notify users of their
     appointments.  It finds appointments recorded in the diary files
     used by the `calendar' package.

   * Ken Manheimer wrote `allout.el', a mode for manipulating and
     formatting outlines, and `icomplete.el', which provides incremental
     completion feedback in the minibuffer.

   * Bill Mann wrote `perl-mode.el', a mode for editing Perl code.

   * Brian Marick and Daniel LaLiberte wrote `hideif.el', support for
     hiding selected code within C `#ifdef' clauses.

   * Simon Marshall wrote `regexp-opt.el', which generates a regular
     expression from a list of strings; and the fast-lock and lazy-lock
     font-lock support modes.  He also extended `comint.el' and
     `shell.el', originally written by Olin Shivers.

   * Bengt Martensson, Dirk Herrmann, Marc Shapiro, Mike Newton, Aaron
     Larson, and Stefan Schoef, wrote `bibtex.el', a mode for editing
     BibTeX bibliography files.

   * Charlie Martin wrote `autoinsert.el', which provides automatic
     mode-sensitive insertion of text into new files.

   * Yukihiro Matsumoto and Nobuyoshi Nakada wrote Ruby-mode.

   * Thomas May wrote `blackbox.el', a version of the traditional
     blackbox game.

   * Roland McGrath wrote `compile.el' (since updated by Daniel
     Pfeiffer), a package for running compilations in a buffer, and then
     visiting the locations reported in error messages; `etags.el', a
     package for jumping to function definitions and searching or
     replacing in all the files mentioned in a `TAGS' file;
     `find-dired.el', for using `dired' commands on output from the
     `find' program, with Sebastian Kremer; `grep.el' for running the
     `grep' command; `map-ynp.el', a general purpose boolean
     question-asker; `autoload.el', providing semi-automatic
     maintenance of autoload files.

   * Michael McNamara and Wilson Snyder wrote Verilog mode.

   * David Megginson wrote `derived.el', which allows one to define new
     major modes by inheriting key bindings and commands from existing
     major modes.

   * Will Mengarini wrote `repeat.el', a command to repeat the preceding
     command with its arguments.

   * Richard Mlynarik wrote `cl-indent.el', a package for indenting
     Common Lisp code; `ebuff-menu.el', an "electric" browser for
     buffer listings; `ehelp.el', bindings for browsing help screens;
     `rfc822.el', a parser for E-mail addresses in the RFC-822 format,
     used in mail messages and news articles; `terminal.el', a terminal
     emulator for Emacs subprocesses; and `yow.el', an essential
     utility.

   * Gerd Moellmann was the Emacs maintainer from the beginning of
     Emacs 21 development until the release of 21.1.  He wrote the new
     display engine used from Emacs 21 onwards, and the asynchronous
     timers facility.  He also wrote `ebrowse', the C++ browser;
     `jit-lock.el', the Just-In-Time font-lock support mode;
     `tooltip.el', a package for displaying tooltips; `authors.el', a
     package for maintaining the `AUTHORS' file; and `rx.el', a regular
     expression constructor.

   * Stefan Monnier was the Emacs co-maintainer for Emacs 23.  He added
     support for Arch and Subversion to VC, re-wrote much of the Emacs
     server to use the built-in networking primitives, and re-wrote the
     abbrev and minibuffer completion code for Emacs 23.  He also wrote
     `PCL-CVS', a directory-level front end to the CVS version control
     system; `reveal.el', a minor mode for automatically revealing
     invisible text; `smerge-mode.el', a minor mode for resolving
     `diff3' conflicts; `diff-mode.el', a mode for viewing and editing
     context diffs; `css-mode.el' for Cascading Style Sheets;
     `bibtex-style.el' for BibTeX Style files; and `mpc.el', a client
     for the "Music Player Daemon".

   * Morioka Tomohiko wrote several packages for MIME support in Gnus
     and elsewhere.

   * Takahashi Naoto co-wrote `quail.el' (q.v.), and wrote `robin.el',
     another input method.

   * Sen Nagata wrote `crm.el', a package for reading multiple strings
     with completion, and `rfc2368.el', support for `mailto:' URLs.

   * Erik Naggum wrote the time-conversion functions.  He also wrote
     `disp-table.el', a package for dealing with display tables;
     `mailheader.el', a package for parsing email headers; and
     `parse-time.el', a package for parsing time strings.

   * Thomas Neumann and Eric Raymond wrote `make-mode.el', a mode for
     editing makefiles.

   * Thien-Thi Nguyen and Dan Nicolaescu wrote `hideshow.el', a minor
     mode for selectively displaying blocks of text.

   * Dan Nicolaescu added support for running Emacs as a daemon.  He
     also wrote `romanian.el', support for editing Romanian text;
     `iris-ansi.el', support for running Emacs on SGI's `xwsh' and
     `winterm' terminal emulators; and `vc-dir.el', displaying the
     status of version-controlled directories.

   * Jurgen Nickelsen wrote `ws-mode.el', providing WordStar emulation.

   * Hrvoje Niksic wrote `savehist.el', for saving the minibuffer
     history between Emacs sessions.

   * Jeff Norden wrote `kermit.el', a package to help the Kermit dialup
     communications program run comfortably in an Emacs shell buffer.

   * Andrew Norman wrote `ange-ftp.el', providing transparent FTP
     support.

   * Edward O'Connor wrote `json.el', a file for parsing and generating
     JSON files.

   * Kentaro Ohkouchi created the Emacs icons used beginning with Emacs
     23.

   * Alexandre Oliva wrote `gnus-mlspl.el', a group params-based mail
     splitting mechanism.

   * Takaaki Ota wrote `table.el', a package for creating and editing
     embedded text-based tables.

   * Pieter E. J. Pareit wrote `mixal-mode.el', an editing mode for the
     MIX assembly language.

   * David Pearson wrote `quickurl.el', a simple method of inserting a
     URL into the current buffer based on text at point; `5x5.el', a
     game to fill all squares on the field.

   * Jeff Peck wrote `sun.el', key bindings for sunterm keys.

   * Damon Anton Permezel wrote `hanoi.el', an animated demonstration of
     the "Towers of Hanoi" puzzle.

   * William M. Perry wrote `mailcap.el' (with Lars Magne
     Ingebrigtsen), a MIME media types configuration facility;
     `mwheel.el', a package for supporting mouse wheels; co-wrote (with
     Dave Love) `socks.el', a Socks v5 client; and developed the URL
     package.

   * Per Persson wrote `gnus-vm.el', the VM interface for Gnus.

   * Jens Petersen wrote `find-func.el', which makes it easy to find
     the source code for an Emacs Lisp function or variable.

   * Daniel Pfeiffer wrote `conf-mode.el', a mode for editing
     configuration files; `copyright.el', a package for updating
     copyright notices in files; `executable.el', a package for
     executing interpreter scripts; `sh-script.el', a mode for editing
     shell scripts; `skeleton.el', implementing a concise language for
     writing statement skeletons; and `two-column.el', a minor mode for
     simultaneous two-column editing.

     Daniel also rewrote `apropos.el' (originally written by Joe Wells),
     for finding commands, functions, and variables matching a regular
     expression; and, together with Jim Blandy, co-authored `wyse50.el',
     support for Wyse 50 terminals.  He also co-wrote `compile.el'
     (q.v.) and `ada-stmt.el'.

   * Richard L. Pieri wrote `pop3.el', a Post Office Protocol (RFC
     1460) interface for Emacs.

   * Fred Pierresteguy and Paul Reilly made Emacs work with X Toolkit
     widgets.

   * Franc,ois Pinard, Greg McGary, and Bruno Haible wrote `po.el',
     support for PO translation files.

   * Christian Plaunt wrote `soundex.el', an implementation of the
     Soundex algorithm for comparing English words by their
     pronunciation.

   * David Ponce wrote `recentf.el', a package that puts a menu of
     recently visited files in the Emacs menu bar; `ruler-mode.el', a
     minor mode for displaying a ruler in the header line; and
     `tree-widget.el', a package to display hierarchical data
     structures.

   * Francesco A. Potorti wrote `cmacexp.el', providing a command which
     runs the C preprocessor on a region of a file and displays the
     results.  He also expanded and redesigned the `etags' program.

   * Michael D. Prange and Steven A. Wood wrote `fortran.el', a mode
     for editing Fortran code.

   * Ashwin Ram wrote `refer.el', commands to look up references in
     bibliography files by keyword.

   * Eric S. Raymond wrote `vc.el', an interface to the RCS and SCCS
     source code version control systems, with Paul Eggert; `gud.el', a
     package for running source-level debuggers like GDB and SDB in
     Emacs; `asm-mode.el', a mode for editing assembly language code;
     `AT386.el', terminal support package for IBM's AT keyboards;
     `cookie1.el', support for "fortune-cookie" programs like `yow.el'
     and `spook.el'; `finder.el', a package for finding Emacs Lisp
     packages by keyword and topic; `keyswap.el', code to swap the <BS>
     and <DEL> keys; `loadhist.el', functions for loading and unloading
     Emacs features; `lisp-mnt.el', functions for working with the
     special headers used in Emacs Lisp library files; and code to set
     and make use of the `load-history' lisp variable, which records
     the source file from which each lisp function loaded into Emacs
     came.

   * Edward M. Reingold wrote the extensive calendar and diary support,
     with contributions from Stewart Clamen (`cal-mayan.el'), Nachum
     Dershowitz (`cal-hebrew.el'), Paul Eggert (`cal-dst.el'), Steve
     Fisk (`cal-tex.el'), Michael Kifer (`cal-x.el'), Lara Rios
     (`cal-menu.el'), and Denis B. Roegel (`solar.el').  Andy Oram
     contributed to its documentation.  Reingold also contributed to
     `tex-mode.el', a mode for editing TeX files, as did William F.
     Schelter, Dick King, Stephen Gildea, Michael Prange, and Jacob
     Gore.

   * David Reitter wrote `mailclient.el' which can send mail via the
     system's designated mail client.

   * Alex Rezinsky wrote `which-func.el', a mode that shows the name of
     the current function in the mode line.

   * Rob Riepel wrote `tpu-edt.el' and its associated files, providing
     an emulation of the VMS TPU text editor emulating the VMS EDT
     editor, and `vt-control.el', providing some control functions for
     the DEC VT line of terminals.

   * Nick Roberts wrote `t-mouse.el', for mouse support in text
     terminals; and `gdb-ui.el', a graphical user interface to GDB.
     Together with Dmitry Dzhus, he wrote `gdb-mi.el', the successor to
     `gdb-ui.el'.

   * Danny Roozendaal implemented `handwrite.el', which converts text
     into "handwriting."

   * Markus Rost wrote `cus-test.el', a testing framework for customize.

   * Guillermo J. Rozas wrote `scheme.el', a mode for editing Scheme and
     DSSSL code, and `fakemail.c', an interface to the System V mailer.

   * Ivar Rummelhoff wrote `winner.el', which records recent window
     configurations so you can move back to them.

   * Jason Rumney ported the Emacs 21 display engine to MS-Windows, and
     has contributed extensively to the MS-Windows port of Emacs.

   * Wolfgang Rupprecht wrote Emacs 19's floating-point support
     (including `float-sup.el' and `floatfns.c'), and `sup-mouse.el',
     support for the Supdup mouse on lisp machines.

   * Kevin Ryde wrote `info-xref.el', a library for checking references
     in Info files.

   * James B. Salem and Brewster Kahle wrote `completion.el', providing
     dynamic word completion.

   * Masahiko Sato wrote `vip.el', an emulation of the VI editor.

   * Holger Schauer wrote `fortune.el', a package for using fortune in
     message signatures.

   * William Schelter wrote `telnet.el', support for `telnet' sessions
     within Emacs.

   * Ralph Schleicher wrote `battery.el', a package for displaying
     laptop computer battery status, and `info-look.el', a package for
     looking up Info documentation for symbols in the buffer.

   * Michael Schmidt and Tom Perrine wrote `modula2.el', a mode for
     editing Modula-2 code, based on work by Mick Jordan and Peter
     Robinson.

   * Ronald S. Schnell wrote `dunnet.el', a text adventure game.

   * Philippe Schnoebelen wrote `gomoku.el', a Go Moku game played
     against Emacs; and `mpuz.el', a multiplication puzzle.

   * Rainer Schoepf contributed to Alpha and OSF1 support.

   * Jan Schormann wrote `solitaire.el', an implementation of the
     Solitaire game.

   * Alex Schroeder wrote `ansi-color.el', a package for translating
     ANSI color escape sequences to Emacs faces; `sql.el', a package
     for interactively running an SQL interpreter in an Emacs buffer;
     `cus-theme.el', an interface for custom themes; `master.el', a
     package for making a buffer `master' over another; and
     `spam-stat.el', for statistical detection of junk email.  He also
     wrote parts of the IRC client ERC (q.v.).

   * Randal Schwartz wrote `pp.el', a pretty-printer for lisp objects.

   * Oliver Seidel wrote `todo-mode.el', a package for maintaining
     `TODO' list files.

   * Manuel Serrano wrote the Flyspell package, which does spell
     checking as you type.

   * Hovav Shacham wrote `windmove.el', a set of commands for selecting
     windows based on their geometrical position on the frame.

   * Stanislav Shalunov wrote `uce.el', for responding to unsolicited
     commercial email.

   * Richard Sharman wrote `hilit-chg.el', which uses colors to show
     recent editing changes.

   * Olin Shivers wrote `comint.el', a library for modes running
     interactive command-line-oriented subprocesses, and `shell.el', for
     running inferior shells (both since extended by Simon Marshall);
     `cmuscheme.el', for running inferior Scheme processes;
     `inf-lisp.el', for running inferior Lisp process.

   * Espen Skoglund wrote `pascal.el', a mode for editing Pascal code.

   * Rick Sladkey wrote `backquote.el', a lisp macro for creating
     mostly-constant data.

   * Lynn Slater wrote `help-macro.el', a macro for writing interactive
     help for key bindings.

   * Chris Smith wrote `icon.el', a mode for editing Icon code.

   * David Smith wrote `ielm.el', a mode for interacting with the Emacs
     Lisp interpreter as a subprocess.

   * Paul D. Smith wrote `snmp-mode.el'.

   * William Sommerfeld wrote `scribe.el', a mode for editing Scribe
     files, and `server.el', a package allowing programs to send files
     to an extant Emacs job to be edited.

   * Andre Spiegel made many contributions to the Emacs Version Control
     package, and in particular made it support multiple back ends.

   * Michael Staats wrote `pc-select.el', which rebinds keys for
     selecting regions to follow many other systems.

   * Richard Stallman invented Emacs.  He is the original author of GNU
     Emacs, and has been Emacs maintainer over several non-contiguous
     periods.  In addition to much of the "core" Emacs code, he has
     written `easymenu.el', a facility for defining Emacs menus;
     `image-mode.el', support for visiting image files; `menu-bar.el',
     the Emacs menu bar support code; `paren.el', a package to make
     matching parentheses stand out in color; and also co-authored
     portions of CC mode.

   * Sam Steingold wrote `gulp.el', a facility for asking package
     maintainers for updated versions of their packages via e-mail, and
     `midnight.el', a package for running a command every midnight.

   * Ake Stenhoff and Lars Lindberg wrote `imenu.el', a framework for
     browsing indices made from buffer contents.

   * Peter Stephenson wrote `vcursor.el', which implements a "virtual
     cursor" that you can move with the keyboard and use for copying
     text.

   * Ken Stevens wrote the initial version of `ispell.el' and maintains
     that package since Ispell 3.1 release.

   * Kim F. Storm made many improvements to the Emacs display engine,
     process support, and networking support. He also wrote
     `bindat.el', a package for encoding and decoding binary data; CUA
     mode, which allows Emacs to emulate the standard CUA key bindings;
     `ido.el', a package for selecting buffers and files quickly;
     `keypad.el' for simplified keypad bindings; and `kmacro.el', the
     keyboard macro facility.

   * Martin Stjernholm co-authored CC Mode, a major editing mode for C,
     C++, Objective-C, Java, Pike, CORBA IDL, and AWK code.

   * Steve Strassman did not write `spook.el', and even if he did, he
     really didn't mean for you to use it in an anarchistic way.

   * Olaf Sylvester wrote `bs.el', a package for manipulating Emacs
     buffers.

   * Tibor S<imko and Milan Zamazal wrote `slovak.el', support for
     editing text in Slovak language.

   * Luc Teirlinck wrote `help-at-pt.el', providing local help through
     the keyboard.

   * Jean-Philippe Theberge wrote `thumbs.el', a package for viewing
     image files as "thumbnails."

   * Spencer Thomas wrote the original `dabbrev.el', providing a command
     which completes the partial word before point, based on other
     nearby words for which it is a prefix.  He also wrote the original
     dumping support.

   * Toru Tomabechi contributed to Tibetan support.

   * Markus Triska wrote `linum.el', a minor mode that displays line
     numbers in the left margin.

   * Tom Tromey and Chris Lindblad wrote `tcl.el', a mode for editing
     Tcl/Tk source files and running a Tcl interpreter as an Emacs
     subprocess.

   * Tom Tromey wrote `bug-reference.el', providing clickable links to
     bug reports.

   * Eli Tziperman wrote `rmail-spam-filter.el', a spam filter for
     RMAIL.

   * Daiki Ueno wrote `starttls.el', support for Transport Layer
     Security protocol; `sasl-cram.el' and `sasl-digest.el' (with
     Kenichi Okada), and `sasl.el', support for Simple Authentication
     and Security Layer (SASL); and the EasyPG (and its predecessor PGG)
     package, for GnuPG and PGP support.

   * Masanobu Umeda wrote GNUS, a feature-rich reader for Usenet news
     that was the ancestor of the current Gnus package.  He also wrote
     `prolog.el', a mode for editing Prolog code; `rmailsort.el', a
     package for sorting messages in RMAIL folders; `metamail.el', an
     interface to the Metamail program; `gnus-kill.el', the Kill File
     mode for Gnus; `gnus-mh.el', an mh-e interface for Gnus;
     `gnus-msg.el', a mail and post interface for Gnus; and
     `timezone.el', providing functions for dealing with time zones.

   * Neil W. Van Dyke wrote `webjump.el', a "hot links" package.

   * Didier Verna wrote `rect.el', a package of functions for
     operations on rectangle regions of text.  He also contributed to
     Gnus (q.v.).

   * Ulrik Vieth implemented `meta-mode.el', for editing MetaFont code.

   * Geoffrey Voelker wrote the Windows NT support.  He also wrote
     `dos-w32.el', functions shared by the MS-DOS and MS-Windows ports
     of Emacs, and `w32-fns.el', MS-Windows specific support functions.

   * Johan Vromans wrote `forms.el' and its associated files, a mode for
     filling in forms.  He also wrote `iso-acc.el', a minor mode
     providing electric accent keys.

   * Colin Walters wrote Ibuffer, an enhanced buffer menu.

   * Barry Warsaw wrote `assoc.el', a set of utility functions for
     working with association lists; `cc-mode.el', a mode for editing
     C, C++, and Java code, based on earlier work by Dave Detlefs,
     Stewart Clamen, and Richard Stallman; `elp.el', a profiler for
     Emacs Lisp programs; `man.el', a mode for reading UNIX manual
     pages; `regi.el', providing an AWK-like functionality for use in
     lisp programs; `reporter.el', providing customizable bug reporting
     for lisp packages; and `supercite.el', a minor mode for quoting
     sections of mail messages and news articles.

   * Christoph Wedler wrote `antlr-mode.el', a major mode for ANTLR
     grammar files.

   * Morten Welinder helped port Emacs to MS-DOS, and introduced face
     support into the MS-DOS port of Emacs.  He also wrote
     `desktop.el', facilities for saving some of Emacs's state between
     sessions; `timer.el', the Emacs facility to run commands at a
     given time or frequency, or when Emacs is idle, and its C-level
     support code; `pc-win.el', the MS-DOS "window-system" support;
     `internal.el', an "internal terminal" emulator for the MS-DOS port
     of Emacs; `arc-mode.el', the mode for editing compressed archives;
     `s-region.el', commands for setting the region using the shift key
     and motion commands; and `dos-fns.el', functions for use under
     MS-DOS.

   * Joe Wells wrote the original version of `apropos.el' (q.v.);
     `resume.el', support for processing command-line arguments after
     resuming a suspended Emacs job; and `mail-extr.el', a package for
     extracting names and addresses from mail headers, with
     contributions from Jamie Zawinski.

   * Rodney Whitby and Reto Zimmermann wrote `vhdl-mode.el', a major
     mode for editing VHDL source code.

   * John Wiegley wrote `align.el', a set of commands for aligning text
     according to regular-expression based rules; `isearchb.el' for fast
     buffer switching; `timeclock.el', a package for keeping track of
     time spent on projects; the Baha'i calendar support;
     `pcomplete.el', a programmable completion facility; `remember.el',
     a mode for jotting down things to remember; `eudcb-mab.el', an
     address book backend for the Emacs Unified Directory Client; and
     `eshell', a command shell implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp.  He
     also contributed to Org mode (q.v.).

   * Ed Wilkinson wrote `b2m.c', a program to convert mail files from
     RMAIL format to Unix `mbox' format.

   * Mike Williams wrote `mouse-sel.el', providing enhanced mouse
     selection; and `thingatpt.el', a library of functions for finding
     the "thing" (word, line, s-expression) containing point.

   * Roland Winkler wrote `proced.el', a system process editor.

   * Bill Wohler wrote MH-E, the Emacs interface to the MH mail system;
     making use of earlier work by James R. Larus.  Satyaki Das, Peter
     S.  Galbraith, Stephen Gildea, and Jeffrey C. Honig also wrote
     various MH-E components.

   * Dale R. Worley wrote `emerge.el', a package for interactively
     merging two versions of a file.

   * Francis J. Wright wrote `woman.el', a package for browsing manual
     pages without the `man' command.

   * Tom Wurgler wrote `emacs-lock.el', which makes it harder to exit
     with valuable buffers unsaved.

   * Masatake Yamato wrote `ld-script.el', an editing mode for GNU
     linker scripts, and contributed subword handling in CC mode.

   * Jonathan Yavner wrote `testcover.el', a package for keeping track
     of the testing status of Emacs Lisp code; `unsafep.el' to determine
     if a Lisp form is safe; and the SES spreadsheet package.

   * Ryan Yeske wrote `rcirc.el' a simple Internet Relay Chat client.

   * Ilya Zakharevich and Bob Olson wrote `cperl-mode.el', a major mode
     for editing Perl code.  Ilya Zakharevich also wrote `tmm.el', a
     mode for accessing the Emacs menu bar on a text-mode terminal.

   * Milan Zamazal wrote `czech.el', support for editing Czech text;
     `glasses.el', a package for easier reading of source code that
     uses illegible identifier names; and `tildify.el', commands for
     adding hard spaces to text, TeX, and SGML/HTML files.

   * Victor Zandy wrote `zone.el', a package for people who like to
     zone out in front of Emacs.

   * Eli Zaretskii made many standard Emacs features work on MS-DOS and
     Microsoft Windows.  He also wrote `tty-colors.el', which
     implements transparent mapping of X colors to tty colors; and
     `rxvt.el'.

   * Jamie Zawinski wrote much of the support for faces and X
     selections.  With Hallvard Furuseth, he wrote the optimizing byte
     compiler used from Emacs 19 onwards.  He also wrote
     `mailabbrev.el', a package that provides automatic expansion of
     mail aliases, and `tar-mode.el', which provides simple viewing and
     editing commands for tar files.

   * Andrew Zhilin created the Emacs 22 icons.

   * Shenghuo Zhu wrote `binhex.el', a package for reading and writing
     binhex files; `mm-partial.el', message/partial support for MIME
     messages; `rfc1843.el', an HZ decoding package; `uudecode.el', an
     Emacs Lisp decoder for uuencoded data; and `webmail.el', an
     interface to Web mail.  He also wrote several other Gnus
     components.

   * Ian T. Zimmerman wrote `gametree.el'.

   * Reto Zimmermann wrote `vera-mode.el'.

   * Neal Ziring and Felix S. T. Wu wrote `vi.el', an emulation of the
     VI text editor.

   * Detlev Zundel wrote `re-builder.el', a package for building regexps
     with visual feedback.



File: emacs,  Node: Key Index,  Next: Option Index,  Prev: Glossary,  Up: Top

Key (Character) Index
*********************

[index]
* Menu:

* ! (Dired):                             Shell Commands in Dired.
                                                              (line   6)
* " (TeX mode):                          TeX Editing.         (line  25)
* # (Dired):                             Flagging Many Files. (line  30)
* $ (Dired):                             Hiding Subdirectories.
                                                              (line  10)
* % & (Dired):                           Flagging Many Files. (line  51)
* % C (Dired):                           Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  33)
* % d (Dired):                           Flagging Many Files. (line  57)
* % g (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line 112)
* % H (Dired):                           Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  34)
* % l (Dired):                           Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  27)
* % m (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line 103)
* % R (Dired):                           Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  32)
* % S (Dired):                           Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  35)
* % u (Dired):                           Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  21)
* * ! (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  49)
* * % (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line 103)
* * * (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  22)
* * / (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  30)
* * ? (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  54)
* * @ (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  26)
* * c (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  81)
* * C-n (Dired):                         Marks vs Flags.      (line  67)
* * C-p (Dired):                         Marks vs Flags.      (line  72)
* * DEL (Dired):                         Marks vs Flags.      (line  44)
* * m (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  17)
* * s (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  35)
* * t (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  76)
* * u (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  40)
* + (Dired):                             Misc Dired Features. (line   6)
* . (Calendar mode):                     Specified Dates.     (line  37)
* . (Dired):                             Flagging Many Files. (line  38)
* . (Rmail):                             Rmail Scrolling.     (line  27)
* / (Rmail):                             Rmail Scrolling.     (line  27)
* < (Calendar mode):                     Scroll Calendar.     (line  28)
* < (Dired):                             Subdirectory Motion. (line  30)
* < (Rmail):                             Rmail Motion.        (line  90)
* <TAB> (Help mode):                     Help Mode.           (line  42)
* = (Dired):                             Comparison in Dired. (line  11)
* > (Calendar mode):                     Scroll Calendar.     (line  28)
* > (Dired):                             Subdirectory Motion. (line  35)
* > (Rmail):                             Rmail Motion.        (line  90)
* ^ (Dired):                             Dired Visiting.      (line  45)
* a (Calendar mode):                     Holidays.            (line  50)
* A (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line 119)
* a (Rmail):                             Rmail Labels.        (line  34)
* AltGr (MS-Windows):                    Windows Keyboard.    (line 105)
* B (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line 114)
* b (Rmail summary):                     Rmail Summary Edit.  (line 102)
* b (Rmail):                             Rmail Basics.        (line  35)
* BS (MS-DOS):                           MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line   6)
* C (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  34)
* c (Rmail):                             Rmail Reply.         (line 106)
* C-/:                                   Undo.                (line  21)
* C-<SPC> C-<SPC>:                       Persistent Mark.     (line  54)
* C-<TAB>:                               File Name Cache.     (line   6)
* C-@:                                   Setting Mark.        (line  28)
* C-\:                                   Select Input Method. (line  28)
* C-]:                                   Quitting.            (line  70)
* C-_:                                   Undo.                (line  21)
* C-_ (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line 120)
* C-a:                                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* C-a (Calendar mode):                   Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  11)
* C-b:                                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* C-b (Calendar mode):                   Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  34)
* C-BREAK (MS-DOS):                      MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  12)
* C-c ' (Picture mode):                  Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* C-c , <SPC>:                           Semantic.            (line  36)
* C-c , j:                               Semantic.            (line  28)
* C-c , J:                               Semantic.            (line  32)
* C-c , l:                               Semantic.            (line  44)
* C-c . (C mode):                        Custom C Indent.     (line  26)
* C-c . (Picture mode):                  Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* C-c . (Shell mode):                    Shell Ring.          (line  21)
* C-c / (Picture mode):                  Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* C-c / (SGML mode):                     HTML Mode.           (line  52)
* C-c 8 (SGML mode):                     HTML Mode.           (line  57)
* C-c ; (Fortran mode):                  Fortran Comments.    (line  80)
* C-c < (GUD):                           Commands of GUD.     (line  80)
* C-c < (Picture mode):                  Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* C-c <DEL> (C Mode):                    Hungry Delete.       (line  14)
* C-c <DELETE> (C Mode):                 Hungry Delete.       (line  20)
* C-c > (GUD):                           Commands of GUD.     (line  85)
* C-c > (Picture mode):                  Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* C-c ? (SGML mode):                     HTML Mode.           (line  48)
* C-c @ (Outline minor mode):            Outline Mode.        (line  30)
* C-c @ C-h:                             Hideshow.            (line  16)
* C-c @ C-l:                             Hideshow.            (line  16)
* C-c @ C-M-h:                           Hideshow.            (line  16)
* C-c @ C-M-s:                           Hideshow.            (line  16)
* C-c @ C-r:                             Hideshow.            (line  16)
* C-c @ C-s:                             Hideshow.            (line  16)
* C-c [ (Enriched mode):                 Format Indentation.  (line  52)
* C-c \ (Picture mode):                  Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* C-c ] (Enriched mode):                 Format Indentation.  (line  52)
* C-c ^ (Picture mode):                  Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* C-c ` (Picture mode):                  Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* C-c C-<DEL> (C Mode):                  Hungry Delete.       (line  14)
* C-c C-<DELETE> (C Mode):               Hungry Delete.       (line  20)
* C-c C-\ (C mode):                      Other C Commands.    (line  57)
* C-c C-\ (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line  78)
* C-c C-a (C mode):                      Electric C.          (line  29)
* C-c C-a (F90 mode):                    Fortran Motion.      (line  31)
* C-c C-a (Message mode):                Mail Misc.           (line   6)
* C-c C-a (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  80)
* C-c C-a (SGML mode):                   HTML Mode.           (line  27)
* C-c C-a (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line  43)
* C-c C-b (Message mode):                Header Editing.      (line  43)
* C-c C-b (Outline mode):                Outline Motion.      (line  36)
* C-c C-b (Picture mode):                Insert in Picture.   (line  48)
* C-c C-b (SGML mode):                   HTML Mode.           (line  36)
* C-c C-b (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line 111)
* C-c C-b (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line  46)
* C-c C-c (C mode):                      Multi-Line Comments. (line  14)
* C-c C-c (Edit Abbrevs):                Editing Abbrevs.     (line  42)
* C-c C-c (Edit Tab Stops):              Tab Stops.           (line  10)
* C-c C-c (Message mode):                Mail Sending.        (line  16)
* C-c C-c (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  58)
* C-c C-c (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line  68)
* C-c C-c (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line 148)
* C-c C-d (C Mode):                      Hungry Delete.       (line  20)
* C-c C-d (Fortran mode):                ForIndent Commands.  (line  30)
* C-c C-d (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  68)
* C-c C-d (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  63)
* C-c C-d (Picture mode):                Basic Picture.       (line  43)
* C-c C-d (SGML mode):                   HTML Mode.           (line  42)
* C-c C-e (C mode):                      Other C Commands.    (line  45)
* C-c C-e (F90 mode):                    Fortran Motion.      (line  23)
* C-c C-e (LaTeX mode):                  LaTeX Editing.       (line  28)
* C-c C-e (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  58)
* C-c C-e (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line 101)
* C-c C-f (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  97)
* C-c C-f (Outline mode):                Outline Motion.      (line  36)
* C-c C-f (Picture mode):                Insert in Picture.   (line  48)
* C-c C-f (SGML mode):                   HTML Mode.           (line  31)
* C-c C-f (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line 105)
* C-c C-f (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line 109)
* C-c C-f C-b (Message mode):            Header Editing.      (line  38)
* C-c C-f C-c (Message mode):            Header Editing.      (line  38)
* C-c C-f C-f (Message mode):            Header Editing.      (line  38)
* C-c C-f C-r (Message mode):            Header Editing.      (line  38)
* C-c C-f C-s (Message mode):            Header Editing.      (line  38)
* C-c C-f C-t (Message mode):            Header Editing.      (line  38)
* C-c C-f C-w (Message mode):            Header Editing.      (line  38)
* C-c C-i (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  52)
* C-c C-i (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  76)
* C-c C-j (Term mode):                   Term Mode.           (line  13)
* C-c C-k (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  70)
* C-c C-k (Picture mode):                Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line  27)
* C-c C-k (Term mode):                   Term Mode.           (line  16)
* C-c C-k (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line  77)
* C-c C-l (C mode):                      Electric C.          (line  19)
* C-c C-l (Calendar mode):               General Calendar.    (line  27)
* C-c C-l (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  35)
* C-c C-l (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  70)
* C-c C-l (Shell mode):                  Shell Ring.          (line  24)
* C-c C-l (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line  77)
* C-c C-n (C mode):                      Motion in C.         (line  35)
* C-c C-n (Fortran mode):                Fortran Motion.      (line  13)
* C-c C-n (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  47)
* C-c C-n (Outline mode):                Outline Motion.      (line  29)
* C-c C-n (Rmail):                       Rmail Motion.        (line  83)
* C-c C-n (SGML mode):                   HTML Mode.           (line  11)
* C-c C-n (Shell mode):                  Shell History Copying.
                                                              (line   9)
* C-c C-o (LaTeX mode):                  LaTeX Editing.       (line  17)
* C-c C-o (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  92)
* C-c C-o (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line  83)
* C-c C-p (C mode):                      Motion in C.         (line  30)
* C-c C-p (Fortran mode):                Fortran Motion.      (line  17)
* C-c C-p (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  56)
* C-c C-p (Outline mode):                Outline Motion.      (line  29)
* C-c C-p (Rmail):                       Rmail Motion.        (line  83)
* C-c C-p (Shell mode):                  Shell History Copying.
                                                              (line   6)
* C-c C-p (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line  46)
* C-c C-q (C mode):                      C Indent.            (line   9)
* C-c C-q (Message mode):                Citing Mail.         (line  24)
* C-c C-q (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  88)
* C-c C-q (Term mode):                   Paging in Term.      (line   9)
* C-c C-q (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line  46)
* C-c C-r (Fortran mode):                Fortran Columns.     (line  33)
* C-c C-r (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  62)
* C-c C-r (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line  96)
* C-c C-r (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line  87)
* C-c C-s (C mode):                      Other C Commands.    (line  76)
* C-c C-s (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  41)
* C-c C-s (Message mode):                Mail Sending.        (line  16)
* C-c C-s (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  63)
* C-c C-s (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line  89)
* C-c C-t (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  74)
* C-c C-t (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  80)
* C-c C-t (SGML mode):                   HTML Mode.           (line  15)
* C-c C-u (C mode):                      Motion in C.         (line  20)
* C-c C-u (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  90)
* C-c C-u (Outline mode):                Outline Motion.      (line  36)
* C-c C-u (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line  60)
* C-c C-v (SGML mode):                   HTML Mode.           (line  62)
* C-c C-v (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line  46)
* C-c C-w (Fortran mode):                Fortran Columns.     (line  52)
* C-c C-w (Message mode):                Mail Signature.      (line  20)
* C-c C-w (Picture mode):                Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line  27)
* C-c C-w (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line  65)
* C-c C-x:                               Foldout.             (line  39)
* C-c C-x (Picture mode):                Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line  38)
* C-c C-x (Shell mode):                  Shell Ring.          (line  18)
* C-c C-y (Message mode):                Citing Mail.         (line  13)
* C-c C-y (Picture mode):                Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line  38)
* C-c C-z:                               Foldout.             (line  16)
* C-c C-z (Shell mode):                  Shell Mode.          (line  73)
* C-c RET (Shell mode):                  Shell History Copying.
                                                              (line  12)
* C-c TAB (Picture mode):                Tabs in Picture.     (line  25)
* C-c TAB (SGML mode):                   HTML Mode.           (line  66)
* C-c TAB (TeX mode):                    TeX Print.           (line 138)
* C-c { (TeX mode):                      TeX Editing.         (line  51)
* C-c } (TeX mode):                      TeX Editing.         (line  51)
* C-d (Rmail):                           Rmail Deletion.      (line  29)
* C-d (Shell mode):                      Shell Mode.          (line  37)
* C-Down-Mouse-1:                        Buffer Menus.        (line  16)
* C-e:                                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* C-e (Calendar mode):                   Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  12)
* C-f:                                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* C-f (Calendar mode):                   Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  34)
* C-g:                                   Quitting.            (line  32)
* C-g (MS-DOS):                          MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  12)
* C-h:                                   Help.                (line   6)
* C-h .:                                 Help Echo.           (line  14)
* C-h a:                                 Apropos.             (line  31)
* C-h b:                                 Misc Help.           (line  42)
* C-h c:                                 Key Help.            (line   6)
* C-h C:                                 Coding Systems.      (line  42)
* C-h C-\:                               Select Input Method. (line  14)
* C-h C-c:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h C-d:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h C-e:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h C-f:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h C-h:                               Help.                (line  13)
* C-h C-m:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h C-n:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h C-o:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h C-p:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h C-t:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h C-w:                               Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h d:                                 Apropos.             (line  81)
* C-h e:                                 Misc Help.           (line  33)
* C-h f:                                 Name Help.           (line   6)
* C-h F:                                 Name Help.           (line  55)
* C-h g:                                 Help Files.          (line  13)
* C-h h:                                 International Chars. (line  18)
* C-h i:                                 Misc Help.           (line   6)
* C-h I:                                 Select Input Method. (line  14)
* C-h K:                                 Key Help.            (line  16)
* C-h k:                                 Key Help.            (line  12)
* C-h L:                                 Language Environments.
                                                              (line  76)
* C-h l:                                 Misc Help.           (line  28)
* C-h m:                                 Misc Help.           (line  37)
* C-h p:                                 Library Keywords.    (line   6)
* C-h S <1>:                             Info Lookup.         (line   6)
* C-h S:                                 Misc Help.           (line  22)
* C-h s:                                 Syntax.              (line  18)
* C-h t:                                 Basic.               (line   6)
* C-h v:                                 Name Help.           (line  40)
* C-h w:                                 Key Help.            (line  25)
* C-j:                                   Basic Indent.        (line  30)
* C-j (and major modes):                 Major Modes.         (line   6)
* C-j (Lisp Interaction mode):           Lisp Interaction.    (line  10)
* C-j (MS-DOS):                          MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  31)
* C-j (TeX mode):                        TeX Editing.         (line  58)
* C-k:                                   Killing by Lines.    (line  12)
* C-k (Gnus):                            Summary of Gnus.     (line  40)
* C-l:                                   Scrolling.           (line  40)
* C-M-%:                                 Query Replace.       (line  24)
* C-M-.:                                 Find Tag.            (line  76)
* C-M-/:                                 Dynamic Abbrevs.     (line  12)
* C-M-<SPC>:                             Expressions.         (line  68)
* C-M-@:                                 Expressions.         (line  68)
* C-M-\:                                 Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  37)
* C-M-a:                                 Moving by Defuns.    (line  19)
* C-M-b:                                 Expressions.         (line  37)
* C-M-c:                                 Recursive Edit.      (line  12)
* C-M-d:                                 Moving by Parens.    (line  42)
* C-M-d (Dired):                         Subdirectory Motion. (line  26)
* C-M-e:                                 Moving by Defuns.    (line  19)
* C-M-f:                                 Expressions.         (line  37)
* C-M-f (Rmail):                         Rmail Make Summary.  (line  62)
* C-M-h:                                 Moving by Defuns.    (line  19)
* C-M-h (C mode):                        Moving by Defuns.    (line  32)
* C-M-j:                                 Multi-Line Comments. (line   6)
* C-M-j (Fortran mode):                  ForIndent Commands.  (line  25)
* C-M-k:                                 Expressions.         (line  54)
* C-M-l:                                 Scrolling.           (line 117)
* C-M-l (Rmail):                         Rmail Make Summary.  (line  41)
* C-M-l (Shell mode):                    Shell Mode.          (line  96)
* C-M-n:                                 Moving by Parens.    (line  31)
* C-M-n (Dired):                         Subdirectory Motion. (line  15)
* C-M-n (Fortran mode):                  Fortran Motion.      (line  36)
* C-M-n (Rmail):                         Rmail Labels.        (line  43)
* C-M-o:                                 Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  17)
* C-M-p:                                 Moving by Parens.    (line  31)
* C-M-p (Dired):                         Subdirectory Motion. (line  19)
* C-M-p (Fortran mode):                  Fortran Motion.      (line  44)
* C-M-p (Rmail):                         Rmail Labels.        (line  43)
* C-M-q:                                 Multi-line Indent.   (line  26)
* C-M-q (C mode):                        C Indent.            (line  13)
* C-M-q (Fortran mode):                  ForIndent Commands.  (line  21)
* C-M-r:                                 Regexp Search.       (line  19)
* C-M-r (Rmail):                         Rmail Make Summary.  (line  45)
* C-M-s:                                 Regexp Search.       (line  19)
* C-M-s (Rmail):                         Rmail Make Summary.  (line  58)
* C-M-t:                                 Expressions.         (line  58)
* C-M-t (Rmail):                         Rmail Make Summary.  (line  52)
* C-M-u:                                 Moving by Parens.    (line  35)
* C-M-u (Dired):                         Subdirectory Motion. (line  23)
* C-M-v:                                 Other Window.        (line  34)
* C-M-w:                                 Appending Kills.     (line  38)
* C-M-x (Emacs-Lisp mode):               Lisp Eval.           (line  44)
* C-M-x (Lisp mode):                     External Lisp.       (line  31)
* C-Mouse-1:                             Menu Mouse Clicks.   (line  10)
* C-Mouse-2:                             Menu Mouse Clicks.   (line  16)
* C-mouse-2 (mode line):                 Mode Line Mouse.     (line  31)
* C-Mouse-2 (scroll bar) <1>:            Mode Line Mouse.     (line  34)
* C-Mouse-2 (scroll bar):                Split Window.        (line  32)
* C-Mouse-3:                             Menu Mouse Clicks.   (line  20)
* C-Mouse-3 (when menu bar is disabled): Menu Bars.           (line  13)
* C-n:                                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* C-n (Calendar mode):                   Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  34)
* C-n (Dired):                           Dired Navigation.    (line   6)
* C-n (Gnus Group mode):                 Summary of Gnus.     (line  80)
* C-n (Gnus Summary mode):               Summary of Gnus.     (line  80)
* C-o:                                   Blank Lines.         (line  16)
* C-o (Dired):                           Dired Visiting.      (line  27)
* C-o (Occur mode):                      Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  32)
* C-o (Rmail):                           Rmail Output.        (line  20)
* C-p:                                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* C-p (Calendar mode):                   Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  34)
* C-p (Dired):                           Dired Navigation.    (line   6)
* C-p (Gnus Group mode):                 Summary of Gnus.     (line  80)
* C-p (Gnus Summary mode):               Summary of Gnus.     (line  80)
* C-q:                                   Inserting Text.      (line  26)
* C-r:                                   Basic Isearch.       (line  48)
* C-s:                                   Basic Isearch.       (line  12)
* C-S-backspace:                         Killing by Lines.    (line  35)
* C-S-Mouse-3 (FFAP):                    FFAP.                (line  68)
* C-SPC:                                 Setting Mark.        (line  28)
* C-SPC C-SPC:                           Mark Ring.           (line  18)
* C-t:                                   Transpose.           (line  18)
* C-t d (Image-Dired):                   Image-Dired.         (line  10)
* C-u:                                   Arguments.           (line  41)
* C-u C-/:                               Undo.                (line  52)
* C-u C-c C-w (Fortran mode):            Fortran Columns.     (line  57)
* C-u C-SPC:                             Mark Ring.           (line  27)
* C-u C-x C-x:                           Persistent Mark.     (line  60)
* C-u C-x v =:                           Old Revisions.       (line  41)
* C-u M-;:                               Comment Commands.    (line  59)
* C-u TAB:                               Multi-line Indent.   (line  39)
* C-v:                                   Scrolling.           (line  81)
* C-v (Calendar mode):                   Scroll Calendar.     (line  34)
* C-w:                                   Other Kill Commands. (line   6)
* C-x #:                                 Invoking emacsclient.
                                                              (line  31)
* C-x $:                                 Selective Display.   (line   6)
* C-x (:                                 Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  87)
* C-x ):                                 Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  87)
* C-x +:                                 Change Window.       (line  70)
* C-x -:                                 Change Window.       (line  65)
* C-x .:                                 Fill Prefix.         (line  27)
* C-x 0:                                 Change Window.       (line  35)
* C-x 1:                                 Change Window.       (line  46)
* C-x 2:                                 Split Window.        (line  17)
* C-x 3:                                 Split Window.        (line  23)
* C-x 4:                                 Pop Up Window.       (line   6)
* C-x 4 .:                               Find Tag.            (line  56)
* C-x 4 0:                               Change Window.       (line  43)
* C-x 4 a:                               Change Log Commands. (line   6)
* C-x 4 b:                               Select Buffer.       (line  66)
* C-x 4 b (Iswitchb mode):               Iswitchb.            (line   6)
* C-x 4 c:                               Indirect Buffers.    (line  19)
* C-x 4 C-o (Iswitchb mode):             Iswitchb.            (line   6)
* C-x 4 d:                               Dired Enter.         (line  29)
* C-x 4 f:                               Visiting.            (line 153)
* C-x 4 f (FFAP):                        FFAP.                (line  40)
* C-x 4 m:                               Sending Mail.        (line  27)
* C-x 5:                                 Creating Frames.     (line   6)
* C-x 5 .:                               Find Tag.            (line  56)
* C-x 5 0:                               Frame Commands.      (line  13)
* C-x 5 1:                               Frame Commands.      (line  22)
* C-x 5 2:                               Creating Frames.     (line  18)
* C-x 5 b:                               Select Buffer.       (line  74)
* C-x 5 b (Iswitchb mode):               Iswitchb.            (line   6)
* C-x 5 d:                               Dired Enter.         (line  29)
* C-x 5 f:                               Visiting.            (line 161)
* C-x 5 f (FFAP):                        FFAP.                (line  50)
* C-x 5 m:                               Sending Mail.        (line  27)
* C-x 5 o:                               Frame Commands.      (line  17)
* C-x 5 r:                               Creating Frames.     (line  43)
* C-x 6 1:                               Two-Column.          (line  60)
* C-x 6 2:                               Two-Column.          (line  12)
* C-x 6 b:                               Two-Column.          (line  35)
* C-x 6 d:                               Two-Column.          (line  65)
* C-x 6 RET:                             Two-Column.          (line  55)
* C-x 6 s:                               Two-Column.          (line  22)
* C-x 8:                                 Unibyte Mode.        (line  67)
* C-x 8 RET:                             Inserting Text.      (line  59)
* C-x ;:                                 Options for Comments.
                                                              (line   6)
* C-x <:                                 Horizontal Scrolling.
                                                              (line  39)
* C-x <LEFT>:                            Select Buffer.       (line  60)
* C-x <RET> F:                           File Name Coding.    (line  13)
* C-x <RIGHT>:                           Select Buffer.       (line  60)
* C-x = <1>:                             International Chars. (line  35)
* C-x =:                                 Position Info.       (line  54)
* C-x >:                                 Horizontal Scrolling.
                                                              (line  39)
* C-x [:                                 Pages.               (line  28)
* C-x [ (Calendar mode):                 Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  43)
* C-x ]:                                 Pages.               (line  28)
* C-x ] (Calendar mode):                 Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  43)
* C-x ^:                                 Change Window.       (line  51)
* C-x `:                                 Compilation Mode.    (line  56)
* C-x a g:                               Defining Abbrevs.    (line  31)
* C-x a i g:                             Defining Abbrevs.    (line  49)
* C-x a i l:                             Defining Abbrevs.    (line  49)
* C-x a l:                               Defining Abbrevs.    (line  43)
* C-x b:                                 Select Buffer.       (line  28)
* C-x b (Iswitchb mode):                 Iswitchb.            (line   6)
* C-x C-+:                               Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line   8)
* C-x C--:                               Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line   8)
* C-x C-0:                               Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line   8)
* C-x C-<SPC>:                           Global Mark Ring.    (line  11)
* C-x C-=:                               Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line   8)
* C-x C-a (GUD):                         Commands of GUD.     (line  28)
* C-x C-a C-j (GUD):                     Commands of GUD.     (line 104)
* C-x C-a C-w (GUD):                     Watch Expressions.   (line   6)
* C-x C-b:                               List Buffers.        (line   9)
* C-x C-c:                               Exiting.             (line  13)
* C-x C-d:                               Directories.         (line  26)
* C-x C-e:                               Lisp Eval.           (line  58)
* C-x C-f:                               Visiting.            (line  52)
* C-x C-f (FFAP):                        FFAP.                (line  23)
* C-x C-k b:                             Save Keyboard Macro. (line  28)
* C-x C-k C-a:                           Keyboard Macro Counter.
                                                              (line  65)
* C-x C-k C-c:                           Keyboard Macro Counter.
                                                              (line  57)
* C-x C-k C-e:                           Edit Keyboard Macro. (line  16)
* C-x C-k C-f:                           Keyboard Macro Counter.
                                                              (line  71)
* C-x C-k C-i:                           Keyboard Macro Counter.
                                                              (line  31)
* C-x C-k C-k:                           Keyboard Macro Ring. (line  33)
* C-x C-k C-n:                           Keyboard Macro Ring. (line  43)
* C-x C-k C-p:                           Keyboard Macro Ring. (line  43)
* C-x C-k e:                             Edit Keyboard Macro. (line  22)
* C-x C-k l:                             Edit Keyboard Macro. (line  27)
* C-x C-k n:                             Save Keyboard Macro. (line  17)
* C-x C-k r:                             Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  82)
* C-x C-k RET:                           Edit Keyboard Macro. (line  16)
* C-x C-k SPC:                           Keyboard Macro Step-Edit.
                                                              (line   6)
* C-x C-l:                               Case.                (line  47)
* C-x C-n:                               Moving Point.        (line 104)
* C-x C-o:                               Blank Lines.         (line  16)
* C-x C-p:                               Pages.               (line  34)
* C-x C-q:                               Misc Buffer.         (line  18)
* C-x C-r:                               Visiting.            (line 149)
* C-x C-r (FFAP):                        FFAP.                (line  27)
* C-x C-s:                               Save Commands.       (line  26)
* C-x C-t:                               Transpose.           (line  31)
* C-x C-u:                               Case.                (line  47)
* C-x C-v:                               Visiting.            (line 123)
* C-x C-v (FFAP):                        FFAP.                (line  30)
* C-x C-w:                               Save Commands.       (line  99)
* C-x C-x:                               Setting Mark.        (line  38)
* C-x C-z:                               External Lisp.       (line  12)
* C-x d:                                 Dired Enter.         (line   6)
* C-x d (FFAP):                          FFAP.                (line  33)
* C-x DEL:                               Sentences.           (line  40)
* C-x e:                                 Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  87)
* C-x ESC ESC:                           Repetition.          (line  20)
* C-x f:                                 Fill Commands.       (line  51)
* C-x h:                                 Marking Objects.     (line  38)
* C-x i:                                 Misc File Ops.       (line  22)
* C-x k:                                 Kill Buffer.         (line  21)
* C-x l:                                 Pages.               (line  49)
* C-x m:                                 Sending Mail.        (line   6)
* C-x n d:                               Narrowing.           (line  41)
* C-x n n:                               Narrowing.           (line  36)
* C-x n p:                               Narrowing.           (line  41)
* C-x n w:                               Narrowing.           (line  46)
* C-x o:                                 Other Window.        (line  20)
* C-x q:                                 Keyboard Macro Query.
                                                              (line  14)
* C-x r +:                               RegNumbers.          (line  14)
* C-x r b:                               Bookmarks.           (line  27)
* C-x r c:                               Rectangles.          (line  91)
* C-x r d:                               Rectangles.          (line  61)
* C-x r f:                               RegConfig.           (line   6)
* C-x r i:                               RegText.             (line  38)
* C-x r j:                               RegPos.              (line  19)
* C-x r k:                               Rectangles.          (line  61)
* C-x r l:                               Bookmarks.           (line  34)
* C-x r m:                               Bookmarks.           (line  27)
* C-x r n:                               RegNumbers.          (line  11)
* C-x r o:                               Rectangles.          (line  91)
* C-x r r:                               RegRect.             (line  10)
* C-x r s:                               RegText.             (line  23)
* C-x r SPC:                             RegPos.              (line  14)
* C-x r t:                               Rectangles.          (line 103)
* C-x r w:                               RegConfig.           (line   6)
* C-x r y:                               Rectangles.          (line  75)
* C-x RET:                               International Chars. (line  32)
* C-x RET c:                             Text Coding.         (line  36)
* C-x RET C-\:                           Select Input Method. (line  22)
* C-x RET f:                             Text Coding.         (line  23)
* C-x RET k:                             Terminal Coding.     (line  27)
* C-x RET p:                             Communication Coding.
                                                              (line  44)
* C-x RET r:                             Text Coding.         (line  67)
* C-x RET t:                             Terminal Coding.     (line  12)
* C-x RET X:                             Communication Coding.
                                                              (line  24)
* C-x RET x:                             Communication Coding.
                                                              (line  24)
* C-x s:                                 Save Commands.       (line  42)
* C-x SPC:                               Commands of GUD.     (line  26)
* C-x TAB:                               Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  37)
* C-x TAB (Enriched mode):               Format Indentation.  (line  15)
* C-x u:                                 Undo.                (line  21)
* C-x v =:                               Old Revisions.       (line  35)
* C-x v a:                               Change Logs and VC.  (line  11)
* C-x v b:                               Local Version Control.
                                                              (line  74)
* C-x v c:                               VC Undo.             (line  25)
* C-x v d:                               VC Directory Mode.   (line   6)
* C-x v g:                               Old Revisions.       (line  81)
* C-x v h:                               Version Headers.     (line  29)
* C-x v i:                               Registering.         (line   6)
* C-x v l:                               VC Change Log.       (line  13)
* C-x v m:                               Merging.             (line  16)
* C-x v r:                               Making Revision Tags.
                                                              (line  13)
* C-x v s:                               Making Revision Tags.
                                                              (line   9)
* C-x v u:                               VC Undo.             (line  14)
* C-x v v:                               Basic VC Editing.    (line  23)
* C-x v ~:                               Old Revisions.       (line  28)
* C-x w b:                               Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  54)
* C-x w h:                               Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  25)
* C-x w i:                               Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  65)
* C-x w l:                               Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  50)
* C-x w r:                               Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  38)
* C-x z:                                 Repeating.           (line  12)
* C-x }:                                 Change Window.       (line  51)
* C-y:                                   Kill Ring.           (line  15)
* C-z:                                   Exiting.             (line  48)
* C-z (X windows):                       Frame Commands.      (line   9)
* d (Calendar mode):                     Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  36)
* d (Dired):                             Dired Deletion.      (line  22)
* D (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  48)
* D (GDB breakpoints buffer):            Breakpoints Buffer.  (line  19)
* D (GDB speedbar):                      Watch Expressions.   (line  25)
* d (Rmail):                             Rmail Deletion.      (line  29)
* DEL (and major modes):                 Major Modes.         (line   6)
* DEL (Dired):                           Dired Deletion.      (line  28)
* DEL (Gnus):                            Summary of Gnus.     (line  66)
* DEL (MS-DOS):                          MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line   6)
* DEL (programming modes):               Program Modes.       (line  33)
* DEL (Rmail):                           Rmail Scrolling.     (line  23)
* DOWN:                                  Moving Point.        (line  16)
* e (Dired):                             Dired Visiting.      (line  18)
* e (Rmail):                             Rmail Editing.       (line  15)
* ESC ESC ESC:                           Quitting.            (line  78)
* f (Dired):                             Dired Visiting.      (line  12)
* f (Rmail):                             Rmail Reply.         (line  75)
* F1:                                    Help.                (line   6)
* F10:                                   Menu Bar.            (line  10)
* F10 (MS-Windows):                      Windows Keyboard.    (line  17)
* F2 1:                                  Two-Column.          (line  60)
* F2 2:                                  Two-Column.          (line  12)
* F2 b:                                  Two-Column.          (line  35)
* F2 d:                                  Two-Column.          (line  65)
* F2 RET:                                Two-Column.          (line  55)
* F2 s:                                  Two-Column.          (line  22)
* F3:                                    Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  25)
* F4:                                    Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  25)
* g (Dired):                             Dired Updating.      (line  29)
* G (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  81)
* g (Rmail):                             Rmail Files.         (line  54)
* g CHAR (Calendar mode):                From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* g D (Calendar mode):                   Specified Dates.     (line  29)
* g d (Calendar mode):                   Specified Dates.     (line  24)
* g m (Calendar mode):                   Mayan Calendar.      (line  42)
* g w (Calendar mode):                   Specified Dates.     (line  29)
* h (Calendar mode):                     Holidays.            (line  33)
* H (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  64)
* h (Rmail):                             Rmail Make Summary.  (line  36)
* Help:                                  Help.                (line   6)
* i (Dired):                             Subdirectories in Dired.
                                                              (line  18)
* i (Rmail):                             Rmail Files.         (line  25)
* i a (Calendar mode):                   Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  29)
* i b (Calendar mode):                   Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  54)
* i c (Calendar mode):                   Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  59)
* i d (Calendar mode):                   Adding to Diary.     (line  27)
* i m (Calendar mode):                   Adding to Diary.     (line  32)
* i w (Calendar mode):                   Adding to Diary.     (line  32)
* i y (Calendar mode):                   Adding to Diary.     (line  32)
* INSERT:                                Minor Modes.         (line  65)
* j (Dired):                             Dired Navigation.    (line  16)
* j (Rmail):                             Rmail Motion.        (line  90)
* k (Dired):                             Dired Updating.      (line  51)
* k (Rmail):                             Rmail Labels.        (line  34)
* l (Dired):                             Dired Updating.      (line  34)
* L (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line 110)
* L (Gnus Group mode):                   Summary of Gnus.     (line  25)
* l (Gnus Group mode):                   Summary of Gnus.     (line  29)
* l (Rmail):                             Rmail Make Summary.  (line  41)
* LEFT:                                  Moving Point.        (line  16)
* m (Calendar mode):                     Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  51)
* M (Calendar mode):                     Lunar Phases.        (line  19)
* M (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  76)
* m (Dired):                             Marks vs Flags.      (line  17)
* m (Rmail):                             Rmail Reply.         (line 100)
* M-!:                                   Single Shell.        (line   6)
* M-$:                                   Spelling.            (line  49)
* M-$ (Dired):                           Hiding Subdirectories.
                                                              (line  15)
* M-%:                                   Query Replace.       (line  14)
* M-% (Incremental search):              Special Isearch.     (line  36)
* M-':                                   Expanding Abbrevs.   (line  32)
* M-*:                                   Find Tag.            (line  67)
* M-,:                                   Tags Search.         (line  31)
* M--:                                   Arguments.           (line  15)
* M-- M-c:                               Fixing Case.         (line  15)
* M-- M-l:                               Fixing Case.         (line  15)
* M-- M-u:                               Fixing Case.         (line  15)
* M-.:                                   Find Tag.            (line  35)
* M-/:                                   Dynamic Abbrevs.     (line  12)
* M-1:                                   Arguments.           (line  15)
* M-;:                                   Comment Commands.    (line  27)
* M-<:                                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* M-< (Calendar mode):                   Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  21)
* M-<colon>:                             Lisp Eval.           (line  38)
* M-=:                                   Position Info.       (line  50)
* M-= (Calendar mode):                   Counting Days.       (line  10)
* M-= (Dired):                           Comparison in Dired. (line  18)
* M->:                                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* M-> (Calendar mode):                   Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  24)
* M-? (Nroff mode):                      Nroff Mode.          (line  14)
* M-? (Shell mode):                      Shell Mode.          (line  32)
* M-@:                                   Words.               (line  61)
* M-\:                                   Deletion.            (line  35)
* M-^:                                   Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  24)
* M-^ (Fortran mode):                    ForIndent Commands.  (line  30)
* M-`:                                   Menu Bar.            (line  10)
* M-a:                                   Sentences.           (line  22)
* M-a (C mode):                          Motion in C.         (line  40)
* M-a (Calendar mode):                   Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  15)
* M-b:                                   Words.               (line  32)
* M-c:                                   Case.                (line  24)
* M-d:                                   Words.               (line  41)
* M-DEL:                                 Words.               (line  50)
* M-DEL (Dired):                         Marks vs Flags.      (line  54)
* M-Drag-Mouse-1:                        Secondary Selection. (line  11)
* M-e:                                   Sentences.           (line  22)
* M-e (C mode):                          Motion in C.         (line  49)
* M-e (Calendar mode):                   Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  18)
* M-f:                                   Words.               (line  32)
* M-g M-n:                               Compilation Mode.    (line  56)
* M-g n:                                 Compilation Mode.    (line  56)
* M-h:                                   Paragraphs.          (line  36)
* M-i <1>:                               Tab Stops.           (line   6)
* M-i:                                   Indentation.         (line  72)
* M-j:                                   Multi-Line Comments. (line   6)
* M-j b (Enriched mode):                 Format Justification.
                                                              (line  48)
* M-j c (Enriched mode):                 Format Justification.
                                                              (line  51)
* M-j l (Enriched mode):                 Format Justification.
                                                              (line  44)
* M-j r (Enriched mode):                 Format Justification.
                                                              (line  45)
* M-j u (Enriched mode):                 Format Justification.
                                                              (line  55)
* M-k:                                   Sentences.           (line  33)
* M-l:                                   Case.                (line  24)
* M-m:                                   Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* M-m (Rmail):                           Rmail Reply.         (line  64)
* M-Mouse-1:                             Secondary Selection. (line  22)
* M-Mouse-2:                             Secondary Selection. (line  33)
* M-Mouse-3:                             Secondary Selection. (line  26)
* M-n (minibuffer history):              Minibuffer History.  (line  29)
* M-n (Nroff mode):                      Nroff Mode.          (line  14)
* M-n (Rmail):                           Rmail Motion.        (line  55)
* M-n (Shell mode):                      Shell Ring.          (line  10)
* M-o b (Enriched mode):                 Format Faces.        (line  18)
* M-o d (Enriched mode):                 Format Faces.        (line  15)
* M-o i (Enriched mode):                 Format Faces.        (line  22)
* M-o l (Enriched mode):                 Format Faces.        (line  26)
* M-o M-s (Text mode):                   Fill Commands.       (line  46)
* M-o o (Enriched mode):                 Format Faces.        (line  34)
* M-o u (Enriched mode):                 Format Faces.        (line  30)
* M-p (minibuffer history):              Minibuffer History.  (line  29)
* M-p (Nroff mode):                      Nroff Mode.          (line  14)
* M-p (Rmail):                           Rmail Motion.        (line  55)
* M-p (Shell mode):                      Shell Ring.          (line   6)
* M-q:                                   Fill Commands.       (line  21)
* M-q (C mode):                          Other C Commands.    (line  39)
* M-q (Fortran mode):                    ForIndent Commands.  (line  35)
* M-r:                                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* M-r (minibuffer history):              Minibuffer History.  (line  51)
* M-r (Shell mode):                      Shell Ring.          (line  14)
* M-S (Enriched mode):                   Format Justification.
                                                              (line  51)
* M-s (Gnus Summary mode):               Summary of Gnus.     (line  90)
* M-s (minibuffer history):              Minibuffer History.  (line  51)
* M-s (Rmail):                           Rmail Motion.        (line  68)
* M-s o:                                 Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  43)
* M-s w:                                 Word Search.         (line  26)
* M-SPC:                                 Deletion.            (line  35)
* M-t:                                   Transpose.           (line  31)
* M-TAB:                                 Symbol Completion.   (line  10)
* M-TAB (customization buffer):          Changing a Variable. (line  49)
* M-TAB (Incremental search):            Special Isearch.     (line  40)
* M-TAB (Picture mode):                  Tabs in Picture.     (line   6)
* M-TAB (Text mode):                     Text Mode.           (line  36)
* M-TAB, (MS-Windows):                   Windows Keyboard.    (line  45)
* M-u:                                   Case.                (line  24)
* M-v:                                   Scrolling.           (line  81)
* M-v (Calendar mode):                   Scroll Calendar.     (line  34)
* M-w:                                   Other Kill Commands. (line  39)
* M-x:                                   M-x.                 (line  17)
* M-y:                                   Earlier Kills.       (line   6)
* M-z:                                   Other Kill Commands. (line  49)
* M-{:                                   Paragraphs.          (line   6)
* M-{ (Calendar mode):                   Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  43)
* M-{ (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  72)
* M-|:                                   Single Shell.        (line  35)
* M-}:                                   Paragraphs.          (line   6)
* M-} (Calendar mode):                   Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  43)
* M-} (Dired):                           Marks vs Flags.      (line  67)
* M-~:                                   Save Commands.       (line  78)
* Mouse-1:                               Mouse Commands.      (line   6)
* Mouse-1 (mode line):                   Mode Line Mouse.     (line  16)
* Mouse-1 (scroll bar):                  Mode Line Mouse.     (line  34)
* Mouse-1 (selection):                   Mouse References.    (line   6)
* Mouse-2:                               Mouse Commands.      (line   6)
* Mouse-2 (GDB breakpoints buffer):      Breakpoints Buffer.  (line  26)
* Mouse-2 (mode line):                   Mode Line Mouse.     (line  23)
* Mouse-2 (selection):                   Mouse References.    (line   6)
* Mouse-3:                               Mouse Commands.      (line   6)
* Mouse-3 (mode line):                   Mode Line Mouse.     (line  26)
* n (Gnus):                              Summary of Gnus.     (line  72)
* n (Rmail):                             Rmail Motion.        (line  55)
* next:                                  Scrolling.           (line  81)
* o (Calendar mode):                     Specified Dates.     (line  34)
* O (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  85)
* o (Dired):                             Dired Visiting.      (line  21)
* o (Occur mode):                        Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  32)
* o (Rmail):                             Rmail Output.        (line  20)
* p (Calendar mode):                     To Other Calendar.   (line  11)
* P (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  99)
* p (Gnus):                              Summary of Gnus.     (line  76)
* p (Rmail):                             Rmail Motion.        (line  55)
* p d (Calendar mode):                   General Calendar.    (line  21)
* PageDown:                              Scrolling.           (line  81)
* PageUp:                                Scrolling.           (line  81)
* prior:                                 Scrolling.           (line  81)
* q (Calendar mode):                     General Calendar.    (line  36)
* Q (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line 127)
* q (Gnus Group mode):                   Summary of Gnus.     (line  18)
* Q (Rmail summary):                     Rmail Summary Edit.  (line 102)
* q (Rmail summary):                     Rmail Summary Edit.  (line 102)
* q (Rmail):                             Rmail Basics.        (line  35)
* R (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  55)
* r (Rmail):                             Rmail Reply.         (line  33)
* RET:                                   Inserting Text.      (line  11)
* RET (Dired):                           Dired Visiting.      (line  18)
* RET (GDB breakpoints buffer):          Breakpoints Buffer.  (line  22)
* RET (GDB speedbar):                    Watch Expressions.   (line  28)
* RET (Occur mode):                      Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  32)
* RET (Shell mode):                      Shell Mode.          (line  13)
* RIGHT:                                 Moving Point.        (line  16)
* S (Calendar mode):                     Sunrise/Sunset.      (line  25)
* s (Calendar mode):                     Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  62)
* S (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  70)
* s (Dired):                             Dired Updating.      (line  67)
* s (Gnus Summary mode):                 Summary of Gnus.     (line  85)
* s (Rmail):                             Rmail Basics.        (line  28)
* S-<TAB> (Help mode):                   Help Mode.           (line  42)
* S-Mouse-2:                             Hideshow.            (line  16)
* S-Mouse-3 (FFAP):                      FFAP.                (line  64)
* S-TAB (customization buffer):          Changing a Variable. (line 103)
* SPC:                                   Completion Commands. (line  56)
* SPC (Calendar mode):                   General Calendar.    (line  31)
* SPC (Dired):                           Dired Navigation.    (line  11)
* SPC (GDB breakpoints buffer):          Breakpoints Buffer.  (line  12)
* SPC (Gnus):                            Summary of Gnus.     (line  49)
* SPC (Rmail):                           Rmail Scrolling.     (line  23)
* t (Calendar mode):                     Writing Calendar Files.
                                                              (line  41)
* t (Dired):                             Marks vs Flags.      (line  76)
* T (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line  94)
* t (Rmail):                             Rmail Display.       (line  27)
* TAB:                                   Completion Commands. (line  29)
* TAB (and major modes):                 Major Modes.         (line   6)
* TAB (completion):                      Completion Example.  (line   6)
* TAB (customization buffer):            Changing a Variable. (line 103)
* TAB (GUD):                             Commands of GUD.     (line 113)
* TAB (Message mode):                    Header Editing.      (line  46)
* TAB (programming modes):               Basic Indent.        (line  16)
* TAB (Shell mode):                      Shell Mode.          (line  20)
* TAB (Text mode):                       Text Mode.           (line  15)
* u (Calendar mode):                     Holidays.            (line  40)
* u (Dired deletion):                    Dired Deletion.      (line  28)
* U (Dired):                             Marks vs Flags.      (line  49)
* u (Dired):                             Marks vs Flags.      (line  40)
* u (Gnus Group mode):                   Summary of Gnus.     (line  33)
* u (Rmail):                             Rmail Deletion.      (line  44)
* UP:                                    Moving Point.        (line  16)
* v (Dired):                             Dired Visiting.      (line  38)
* v (Rmail):                             Rmail Display.       (line  55)
* w (Dired):                             Misc Dired Features. (line  18)
* w (Rmail):                             Rmail Output.        (line  32)
* x (Calendar mode):                     Holidays.            (line  40)
* x (Dired):                             Dired Deletion.      (line  36)
* X (Dired):                             Shell Commands in Dired.
                                                              (line   6)
* x (Rmail):                             Rmail Deletion.      (line  44)
* Z (Dired):                             Operating on Files.  (line 106)
* ~ (Dired):                             Flagging Many Files. (line  34)


File: emacs,  Node: Option Index,  Next: Command Index,  Prev: Key Index,  Up: Top

Command-Line Options Index
**************************

[index]
* Menu:

* +LINENUM:                              Action Arguments.    (line  30)
* --background-color:                    Colors.              (line  29)
* --basic-display:                       Misc X.              (line  20)
* --batch:                               Initial Options.     (line  36)
* --border-color:                        Colors.              (line  33)
* --border-width:                        Borders X.           (line  20)
* --color:                               Colors.              (line  51)
* --cursor-color:                        Colors.              (line  37)
* --daemon:                              Initial Options.     (line 100)
* --debug-init:                          Initial Options.     (line 118)
* --directory:                           Action Arguments.    (line  49)
* --display:                             Initial Options.     (line  25)
* --eval:                                Action Arguments.    (line  59)
* --execute:                             Action Arguments.    (line  60)
* --file:                                Action Arguments.    (line   9)
* --find-file:                           Action Arguments.    (line  10)
* --font:                                Font X.              (line  11)
* --foreground-color:                    Colors.              (line  23)
* --fullheight:                          Window Size X.       (line  28)
* --fullscreen:                          Window Size X.       (line  18)
* --fullwidth:                           Window Size X.       (line  32)
* --funcall:                             Action Arguments.    (line  53)
* --geometry:                            Window Size X.       (line  11)
* --help:                                Action Arguments.    (line  71)
* --iconic:                              Icons X.             (line   7)
* --insert:                              Action Arguments.    (line  63)
* --internal-border:                     Borders X.           (line  15)
* --kill:                                Action Arguments.    (line  68)
* --line-spacing:                        Misc X.              (line  12)
* --load:                                Action Arguments.    (line  38)
* --maximized:                           Window Size X.       (line  23)
* --mouse-color:                         Colors.              (line  42)
* --name:                                Resources.           (line  70)
* --no-bitmap-icon:                      Icons X.             (line  12)
* --no-blinking-cursor:                  Misc X.              (line  16)
* --no-desktop:                          Initial Options.     (line 111)
* --no-init-file:                        Initial Options.     (line  75)
* --no-site-file:                        Initial Options.     (line  82)
* --no-splash:                           Initial Options.     (line  87)
* --no-window-system:                    Initial Options.     (line  30)
* --quick:                               Initial Options.     (line  93)
* --reverse-video:                       Colors.              (line  48)
* --script:                              Initial Options.     (line  61)
* --terminal:                            Initial Options.     (line  20)
* --title:                               Title X.             (line  17)
* --user:                                Initial Options.     (line 115)
* --version:                             Action Arguments.    (line  75)
* --vertical-scroll-bars:                Misc X.              (line   8)
* --visit:                               Action Arguments.    (line  11)
* --xrm:                                 Resources.           (line  87)
* -bd:                                   Colors.              (line  32)
* -bg:                                   Colors.              (line  28)
* -bw:                                   Borders X.           (line  19)
* -cr:                                   Colors.              (line  36)
* -D:                                    Misc X.              (line  19)
* -d:                                    Initial Options.     (line  24)
* -daemon:                               Initial Options.     (line  99)
* -f:                                    Action Arguments.    (line  52)
* -fg:                                   Colors.              (line  22)
* -fh:                                   Window Size X.       (line  27)
* -fn:                                   Font X.              (line  10)
* -fs:                                   Window Size X.       (line  17)
* -fw:                                   Window Size X.       (line  31)
* -g:                                    Window Size X.       (line  10)
* -ib:                                   Borders X.           (line  14)
* -l:                                    Action Arguments.    (line  37)
* -L:                                    Action Arguments.    (line  48)
* -lsp:                                  Misc X.              (line  11)
* -mm:                                   Window Size X.       (line  22)
* -ms:                                   Colors.              (line  41)
* -nbc:                                  Misc X.              (line  15)
* -nbi:                                  Icons X.             (line  11)
* -nw:                                   Initial Options.     (line  29)
* -q:                                    Initial Options.     (line  74)
* -Q:                                    Initial Options.     (line  92)
* -r:                                    Colors.              (line  46)
* -rv:                                   Colors.              (line  47)
* -T:                                    Title X.             (line  16)
* -t:                                    Initial Options.     (line  19)
* -u:                                    Initial Options.     (line 114)
* -vb:                                   Misc X.              (line   7)


File: emacs,  Node: Command Index,  Next: Variable Index,  Prev: Option Index,  Up: Top

Command and Function Index
**************************

[index]
* Menu:

* 2C-associate-buffer:                   Two-Column.          (line  35)
* 2C-dissociate:                         Two-Column.          (line  65)
* 2C-merge:                              Two-Column.          (line  60)
* 2C-newline:                            Two-Column.          (line  55)
* 2C-split:                              Two-Column.          (line  22)
* 2C-two-columns:                        Two-Column.          (line  12)
* 5x5:                                   Amusements.          (line  13)
* abbrev-mode:                           Abbrev Concepts.     (line  13)
* abbrev-prefix-mark:                    Expanding Abbrevs.   (line  32)
* abort-recursive-edit:                  Quitting.            (line  70)
* add-change-log-entry-other-window:     Change Log Commands. (line   6)
* add-change-log-entry-other-window, in Diff mode: Diff Mode. (line 106)
* add-dir-local-variable:                Directory Variables. (line  47)
* add-file-local-variable:               Specifying File Variables.
                                                              (line  72)
* add-file-local-variable-prop-line:     Specifying File Variables.
                                                              (line  18)
* add-global-abbrev:                     Defining Abbrevs.    (line  31)
* add-hook:                              Hooks.               (line  37)
* add-mode-abbrev:                       Defining Abbrevs.    (line  43)
* add-name-to-file:                      Misc File Ops.       (line  71)
* add-untranslated-filesystem:           Text and Binary.     (line  50)
* append-next-kill:                      Appending Kills.     (line  38)
* append-to-buffer:                      Accumulating Text.   (line   6)
* append-to-file:                        Accumulating Text.   (line   6)
* append-to-register:                    RegText.             (line  31)
* apply-macro-to-region-lines:           Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  82)
* appt-activate:                         Appointments.        (line  21)
* appt-add:                              Appointments.        (line  52)
* appt-delete:                           Appointments.        (line  52)
* apropos:                               Apropos.             (line  72)
* apropos-command:                       Apropos.             (line  31)
* apropos-documentation:                 Apropos.             (line  81)
* apropos-value:                         Apropos.             (line  84)
* apropos-variable:                      Apropos.             (line  77)
* ask-user-about-lock:                   Interlocking.        (line  18)
* auto-compression-mode:                 Compressed Files.    (line  17)
* auto-fill-mode:                        Auto Fill.           (line  17)
* auto-lower-mode:                       Frame Parameters.    (line  19)
* auto-raise-mode:                       Frame Parameters.    (line   9)
* auto-revert-mode:                      Reverting.           (line  34)
* auto-revert-tail-mode:                 Reverting.           (line  34)
* auto-save-mode:                        Auto Save Control.   (line   6)
* back-to-indentation:                   Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* backward-char:                         Moving Point.        (line  16)
* backward-kill-sentence:                Sentences.           (line  40)
* backward-kill-word:                    Words.               (line  50)
* backward-list:                         Moving by Parens.    (line  31)
* backward-page:                         Pages.               (line  28)
* backward-paragraph:                    Paragraphs.          (line   6)
* backward-sentence:                     Sentences.           (line  22)
* backward-sexp:                         Expressions.         (line  37)
* backward-text-line:                    Nroff Mode.          (line  14)
* backward-up-list:                      Moving by Parens.    (line  35)
* backward-word:                         Words.               (line  32)
* balance-windows:                       Change Window.       (line  70)
* beginning-of-buffer:                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* beginning-of-defun:                    Moving by Defuns.    (line  19)
* beginning-of-visual-line:              Visual Line Mode.    (line  23)
* bibtex-mode:                           TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* binary-overwrite-mode:                 Minor Modes.         (line  75)
* blackbox:                              Amusements.          (line  13)
* blink-cursor-mode:                     Cursor Display.      (line   6)
* bookmark-delete:                       Bookmarks.           (line  69)
* bookmark-insert:                       Bookmarks.           (line  76)
* bookmark-insert-location:              Bookmarks.           (line  72)
* bookmark-jump:                         Bookmarks.           (line  19)
* bookmark-load:                         Bookmarks.           (line  60)
* bookmark-save:                         Bookmarks.           (line  25)
* bookmark-set:                          Bookmarks.           (line  16)
* bookmark-write:                        Bookmarks.           (line  66)
* browse-url <1>:                        Help Mode.           (line  38)
* browse-url:                            Browse-URL.          (line   6)
* browse-url-at-mouse:                   Browse-URL.          (line   6)
* browse-url-at-point:                   Browse-URL.          (line   6)
* bs-show:                               Buffer Menus.        (line   6)
* buffer-menu:                           Several Buffers.     (line  18)
* buffer-menu-other-window:              Several Buffers.     (line  18)
* c-backslash-region:                    Other C Commands.    (line  57)
* c-backward-conditional:                Motion in C.         (line  30)
* c-beginning-of-defun:                  Motion in C.         (line  11)
* c-beginning-of-statement:              Motion in C.         (line  40)
* c-context-line-break:                  Other C Commands.    (line  19)
* c-electric-backspace:                  Program Modes.       (line  33)
* c-end-of-defun:                        Motion in C.         (line  11)
* c-end-of-statement:                    Motion in C.         (line  49)
* c-fill-paragraph:                      Other C Commands.    (line  39)
* c-forward-conditional:                 Motion in C.         (line  35)
* c-hungry-delete-backwards:             Hungry Delete.       (line  14)
* c-hungry-delete-forward:               Hungry Delete.       (line  20)
* c-indent-command <1>:                  C Indent.            (line  18)
* c-indent-command:                      Basic Indent.        (line  16)
* c-indent-defun:                        C Indent.            (line   9)
* c-indent-exp:                          C Indent.            (line  13)
* c-macro-expand:                        Other C Commands.    (line  45)
* c-mark-function:                       Moving by Defuns.    (line  32)
* c-set-style:                           Custom C Indent.     (line  26)
* c-show-syntactic-information:          Other C Commands.    (line  76)
* c-toggle-auto-newline:                 Electric C.          (line  29)
* c-toggle-electric-state:               Electric C.          (line  19)
* c-toggle-hungry-state:                 Hungry Delete.       (line  30)
* c-up-conditional:                      Motion in C.         (line  20)
* calendar:                              Calendar/Diary.      (line   6)
* calendar-astro-goto-day-number:        From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-astro-print-day-number:       To Other Calendar.   (line  23)
* calendar-backward-day:                 Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  34)
* calendar-backward-month:               Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  43)
* calendar-backward-week:                Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  34)
* calendar-bahai-goto-date:              From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-bahai-print-date:             To Other Calendar.   (line  39)
* calendar-beginning-of-month:           Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  15)
* calendar-beginning-of-week:            Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  11)
* calendar-beginning-of-year:            Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  21)
* calendar-chinese-goto-date:            From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-chinese-print-date:           To Other Calendar.   (line  42)
* calendar-coptic-goto-date:             From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-coptic-print-date:            To Other Calendar.   (line  46)
* calendar-count-days-region:            Counting Days.       (line  10)
* calendar-cursor-holidays:              Holidays.            (line  33)
* calendar-end-of-month:                 Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  18)
* calendar-end-of-week:                  Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  12)
* calendar-end-of-year:                  Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  24)
* calendar-ethiopic-goto-date:           From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-ethiopic-print-date:          To Other Calendar.   (line  50)
* calendar-forward-day:                  Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  34)
* calendar-forward-month:                Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  43)
* calendar-forward-week:                 Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  34)
* calendar-forward-year:                 Calendar Unit Motion.
                                                              (line  43)
* calendar-french-goto-date:             From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-french-print-date:            To Other Calendar.   (line  35)
* calendar-goto-date:                    Specified Dates.     (line  24)
* calendar-goto-day-of-year:             Specified Dates.     (line  29)
* calendar-goto-today:                   Specified Dates.     (line  37)
* calendar-hebrew-goto-date:             From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-hebrew-list-yahrzeits:        From Other Calendar. (line  65)
* calendar-hebrew-print-date:            To Other Calendar.   (line  27)
* calendar-islamic-goto-date:            From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-islamic-print-date:           To Other Calendar.   (line  31)
* calendar-iso-goto-date:                From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-iso-goto-week <1>:            From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-iso-goto-week:                Specified Dates.     (line  29)
* calendar-iso-print-date:               To Other Calendar.   (line  15)
* calendar-julian-goto-date:             From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-julian-print-date:            To Other Calendar.   (line  19)
* calendar-list-holidays:                Holidays.            (line  50)
* calendar-lunar-phases:                 Lunar Phases.        (line  19)
* calendar-mark-holidays:                Holidays.            (line  40)
* calendar-mark-today:                   Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  39)
* calendar-mayan-goto-long-count-date:   Mayan Calendar.      (line  42)
* calendar-mayan-next-calendar-round-date: Mayan Calendar.    (line  64)
* calendar-mayan-next-haab-date:         Mayan Calendar.      (line  56)
* calendar-mayan-next-tzolkin-date:      Mayan Calendar.      (line  48)
* calendar-mayan-previous-haab-date:     Mayan Calendar.      (line  56)
* calendar-mayan-previous-tzolkin-date:  Mayan Calendar.      (line  48)
* calendar-mayan-print-date:             To Other Calendar.   (line  58)
* calendar-other-month:                  Specified Dates.     (line  34)
* calendar-persian-goto-date:            From Other Calendar. (line  10)
* calendar-persian-print-date:           To Other Calendar.   (line  54)
* calendar-print-day-of-year:            General Calendar.    (line  21)
* calendar-print-other-dates:            To Other Calendar.   (line  11)
* calendar-redraw:                       General Calendar.    (line  27)
* calendar-scroll-left:                  Scroll Calendar.     (line  28)
* calendar-scroll-left-three-months:     Scroll Calendar.     (line  34)
* calendar-scroll-right:                 Scroll Calendar.     (line  28)
* calendar-scroll-right-three-months:    Scroll Calendar.     (line  34)
* calendar-set-date-style:               Date Formats.        (line  43)
* calendar-star-date:                    Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  33)
* calendar-sunrise-sunset:               Sunrise/Sunset.      (line  25)
* calendar-unmark:                       Holidays.            (line  40)
* capitalize-word:                       Case.                (line  24)
* cd:                                    File Names.          (line  42)
* center-line:                           Fill Commands.       (line  46)
* change-log-merge:                      Change Log Commands. (line  43)
* change-log-mode:                       Change Log Commands. (line  31)
* check-parens:                          Parentheses.         (line   6)
* choose-completion:                     Completion Commands. (line  79)
* clean-buffer-list:                     Kill Buffer.         (line  49)
* clear-rectangle:                       Rectangles.          (line  91)
* clipboard-kill-region:                 Clipboard.           (line  13)
* clipboard-kill-ring-save:              Clipboard.           (line  16)
* clipboard-yank:                        Clipboard.           (line  20)
* clone-indirect-buffer:                 Indirect Buffers.    (line  12)
* clone-indirect-buffer-other-window:    Indirect Buffers.    (line  19)
* column-number-mode:                    Optional Mode Line.  (line  23)
* comint-bol-or-process-mark:            Shell Mode.          (line  43)
* comint-continue-subjob:                Shell Mode.          (line 131)
* comint-copy-old-input:                 Shell History Copying.
                                                              (line  12)
* comint-delchar-or-maybe-eof:           Shell Mode.          (line  37)
* comint-delete-output:                  Shell Mode.          (line  83)
* comint-dynamic-complete:               Shell Mode.          (line  20)
* comint-dynamic-list-filename...:       Shell Mode.          (line  32)
* comint-dynamic-list-input-ring:        Shell Ring.          (line  24)
* comint-get-next-from-history:          Shell Ring.          (line  18)
* comint-history-isearch-backward-regexp: Shell Ring.         (line  14)
* comint-input-previous-argument:        Shell Ring.          (line  21)
* comint-interrupt-subjob:               Shell Mode.          (line  68)
* comint-kill-input:                     Shell Mode.          (line  60)
* comint-magic-space:                    History References.  (line  17)
* comint-next-input:                     Shell Ring.          (line  10)
* comint-next-prompt:                    Shell History Copying.
                                                              (line   9)
* comint-previous-input:                 Shell Ring.          (line   6)
* comint-previous-prompt:                Shell History Copying.
                                                              (line   6)
* comint-quit-subjob:                    Shell Mode.          (line  78)
* comint-run:                            Shell Mode.          (line 161)
* comint-send-input:                     Shell Mode.          (line  13)
* comint-show-maximum-output:            Shell Mode.          (line 101)
* comint-show-output:                    Shell Mode.          (line  96)
* comint-stop-subjob:                    Shell Mode.          (line  73)
* comint-strip-ctrl-m:                   Shell Mode.          (line 135)
* comint-truncate-buffer:                Shell Mode.          (line 144)
* comint-write-output:                   Shell Mode.          (line  89)
* comment-dwim:                          Comment Commands.    (line  27)
* comment-indent-new-line:               Multi-Line Comments. (line   6)
* comment-kill:                          Comment Commands.    (line  59)
* comment-region:                        Multi-Line Comments. (line  14)
* comment-set-column:                    Options for Comments.
                                                              (line   6)
* compare-windows:                       Comparing Files.     (line  26)
* compilation-next-error:                Compilation Mode.    (line 103)
* compilation-next-file:                 Compilation Mode.    (line 103)
* compilation-previous-error:            Compilation Mode.    (line 103)
* compilation-previous-file:             Compilation Mode.    (line 103)
* compile:                               Compilation.         (line  22)
* compile (MS-DOS):                      MS-DOS Processes.    (line   6)
* compile-goto-error:                    Compilation Mode.    (line  48)
* complete-symbol:                       Symbol Completion.   (line  25)
* compose-mail:                          Sending Mail.        (line   6)
* compose-mail-other-frame:              Sending Mail.        (line  27)
* compose-mail-other-window:             Sending Mail.        (line  27)
* copy-dir-locals-to-file-locals:        Specifying File Variables.
                                                              (line  72)
* copy-dir-locals-to-file-locals-prop-line: Specifying File Variables.
                                                              (line  18)
* copy-directory:                        Misc File Ops.       (line  78)
* copy-file:                             Misc File Ops.       (line  78)
* copy-file-locals-to-dir-locals:        Directory Variables. (line  47)
* copy-rectangle-to-register:            RegRect.             (line  10)
* copy-to-buffer:                        Accumulating Text.   (line   6)
* copy-to-register:                      RegText.             (line  23)
* count-lines-page:                      Pages.               (line  49)
* count-lines-region:                    Position Info.       (line  50)
* count-text-lines:                      Nroff Mode.          (line  14)
* cpp-highlight-buffer:                  Other C Commands.    (line  67)
* create-fontset-from-fontset-spec:      Defining Fontsets.   (line 104)
* crisp-mode:                            Emulation.           (line  10)
* cua-mode:                              CUA Bindings.        (line   6)
* customize:                             Easy Customization.  (line  12)
* customize-apropos:                     Specific Customization.
                                                              (line  56)
* customize-browse:                      Browsing Custom.     (line   6)
* customize-changed:                     Specific Customization.
                                                              (line  63)
* customize-create-theme:                Custom Themes.       (line  11)
* customize-face:                        Specific Customization.
                                                              (line  46)
* customize-group:                       Specific Customization.
                                                              (line  50)
* customize-option:                      Specific Customization.
                                                              (line  36)
* customize-saved:                       Specific Customization.
                                                              (line  71)
* customize-unsaved:                     Specific Customization.
                                                              (line  71)
* cwarn-mode:                            Other C Commands.    (line  82)
* dabbrev-completion:                    Dynamic Abbrevs.     (line  12)
* dabbrev-expand:                        Dynamic Abbrevs.     (line  12)
* dbx:                                   Starting GUD.        (line  20)
* debug_print:                           Checklist.           (line 220)
* decipher:                              Amusements.          (line  20)
* default-value:                         Locals.              (line  70)
* define-abbrevs:                        Saving Abbrevs.      (line  49)
* define-global-abbrev:                  Defining Abbrevs.    (line  56)
* define-key:                            Init Rebinding.      (line  78)
* define-mode-abbrev:                    Defining Abbrevs.    (line  56)
* delete-backward-char:                  Deletion.            (line   6)
* delete-blank-lines:                    Blank Lines.         (line  16)
* delete-char:                           Deletion.            (line   6)
* delete-dir-local-variable:             Directory Variables. (line  47)
* delete-file:                           Misc File Ops.       (line  40)
* delete-file-local-variable:            Specifying File Variables.
                                                              (line  72)
* delete-file-local-variable-prop-line:  Specifying File Variables.
                                                              (line  18)
* delete-frame:                          Frame Commands.      (line  13)
* delete-horizontal-space:               Deletion.            (line  35)
* delete-indentation:                    Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  24)
* delete-other-frames:                   Frame Commands.      (line  22)
* delete-other-windows:                  Change Window.       (line  46)
* delete-rectangle:                      Rectangles.          (line  61)
* delete-selection-mode <1>:             Mouse Commands.      (line  97)
* delete-selection-mode:                 Using Region.        (line  43)
* delete-trailing-whitespace:            Useless Whitespace.  (line  22)
* delete-whitespace-rectangle:           Rectangles.          (line  97)
* delete-window:                         Change Window.       (line  35)
* describe-bindings:                     Misc Help.           (line  42)
* describe-categories:                   Regexp Backslash.    (line 140)
* describe-character-set:                Charsets.            (line  24)
* describe-coding-system:                Coding Systems.      (line  42)
* describe-copying:                      Help Files.          (line  13)
* describe-distribution:                 Help Files.          (line  13)
* describe-function:                     Name Help.           (line   6)
* describe-gnu-project:                  Help Files.          (line  13)
* describe-input-method:                 Select Input Method. (line  14)
* describe-key:                          Key Help.            (line  12)
* describe-key-briefly:                  Key Help.            (line   6)
* describe-language-environment:         Language Environments.
                                                              (line  76)
* describe-mode:                         Misc Help.           (line  37)
* describe-no-warranty:                  Help Files.          (line  13)
* describe-syntax:                       Syntax.              (line  18)
* describe-text-properties:              Editing Format Info. (line  25)
* describe-variable:                     Name Help.           (line  40)
* desktop-change-dir:                    Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line  20)
* desktop-clear:                         Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line  40)
* desktop-revert:                        Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line  20)
* desktop-save:                          Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line  11)
* diary:                                 Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  65)
* diary-anniversary <1>:                 Sexp Diary Entries.  (line  16)
* diary-anniversary:                     Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  35)
* diary-astro-day-number:                Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-bahai-date:                      Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-bahai-insert-entry:              Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  72)
* diary-bahai-insert-monthly-entry:      Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  72)
* diary-bahai-insert-yearly-entry:       Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  72)
* diary-bahai-list-entries:              Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  13)
* diary-bahai-mark-entries:              Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  13)
* diary-block:                           Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  47)
* diary-chinese-date:                    Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-coptic-date:                     Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-cyclic <1>:                      Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  64)
* diary-cyclic:                          Sexp Diary Entries.  (line  35)
* diary-date:                            Sexp Diary Entries.  (line  53)
* diary-day-of-year:                     Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-ethiopic-date:                   Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-fancy-display:                   Diary Display.       (line   6)
* diary-float <1>:                       Sexp Diary Entries.  (line  65)
* diary-float:                           Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  86)
* diary-french-date:                     Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-hebrew-date:                     Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-hebrew-insert-entry:             Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  72)
* diary-hebrew-insert-monthly-entry:     Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  72)
* diary-hebrew-insert-yearly-entry:      Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  72)
* diary-hebrew-list-entries:             Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  13)
* diary-hebrew-mark-entries:             Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  13)
* diary-hebrew-omer:                     Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* diary-hebrew-parasha:                  Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* diary-hebrew-rosh-hodesh:              Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* diary-hebrew-sabbath-candles:          Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* diary-hebrew-yahrzeit:                 Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* diary-include-other-diary-files:       Fancy Diary Display. (line  28)
* diary-insert-anniversary-entry:        Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  29)
* diary-insert-block-entry:              Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  54)
* diary-insert-cyclic-entry:             Special Diary Entries.
                                                              (line  59)
* diary-insert-entry:                    Adding to Diary.     (line  27)
* diary-insert-monthly-entry:            Adding to Diary.     (line  32)
* diary-insert-weekly-entry:             Adding to Diary.     (line  32)
* diary-insert-yearly-entry:             Adding to Diary.     (line  32)
* diary-islamic-date:                    Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-islamic-insert-entry:            Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  72)
* diary-islamic-insert-monthly-entry:    Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  72)
* diary-islamic-insert-yearly-entry:     Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  72)
* diary-islamic-list-entries:            Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  13)
* diary-islamic-mark-entries:            Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  13)
* diary-iso-date:                        Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-julian-date:                     Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-lunar-phases:                    Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-mail-entries:                    Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  73)
* diary-mark-entries:                    Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  51)
* diary-mark-included-diary-files:       Fancy Diary Display. (line  28)
* diary-mayan-date:                      Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-persian-date:                    Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-print-entries:                   Diary Display.       (line  37)
* diary-remind:                          Sexp Diary Entries.  (line  48)
* diary-show-all-entries:                Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  62)
* diary-simple-display:                  Diary Display.       (line   6)
* diary-sort-entries:                    Fancy Diary Display. (line  11)
* diary-sunrise-sunset:                  Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 116)
* diary-view-entries:                    Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  36)
* diff:                                  Comparing Files.     (line   6)
* diff-add-change-log-entries-other-window: Diff Mode.        (line 106)
* diff-apply-hunk:                       Diff Mode.           (line  56)
* diff-backup:                           Comparing Files.     (line  17)
* diff-buffer-with-file:                 Comparing Files.     (line  22)
* diff-context->unified:                 Diff Mode.           (line  96)
* diff-ediff-patch:                      Diff Mode.           (line  69)
* diff-file-kill:                        Diff Mode.           (line  52)
* diff-file-next:                        Diff Mode.           (line  41)
* diff-file-prev:                        Diff Mode.           (line  45)
* diff-goto-source:                      Diff Mode.           (line  65)
* diff-hunk-kill:                        Diff Mode.           (line  49)
* diff-hunk-next:                        Diff Mode.           (line  35)
* diff-hunk-prev:                        Diff Mode.           (line  38)
* diff-mode:                             Diff Mode.           (line   6)
* diff-refine-hunk:                      Diff Mode.           (line  60)
* diff-restrict-view:                    Diff Mode.           (line  73)
* diff-reverse-direction:                Diff Mode.           (line  79)
* diff-show-trailing-whitespaces:        Diff Mode.           (line 116)
* diff-split-hunk:                       Diff Mode.           (line  83)
* diff-unified->context:                 Diff Mode.           (line  91)
* digit-argument:                        Arguments.           (line  15)
* dir-locals-set-class-variables:        Directory Variables. (line  54)
* dir-locals-set-directory-class:        Directory Variables. (line  54)
* dired:                                 Dired Enter.         (line   6)
* dired-at-point:                        FFAP.                (line   6)
* dired-backup-diff:                     Comparison in Dired. (line  18)
* dired-change-marks:                    Marks vs Flags.      (line  81)
* dired-clean-directory:                 Flagging Many Files. (line  38)
* dired-compare-directories:             Misc Dired Features. (line  39)
* dired-copy-filename-as-kill:           Misc Dired Features. (line  18)
* dired-create-directory:                Misc Dired Features. (line   6)
* dired-diff:                            Comparison in Dired. (line  11)
* dired-display-file:                    Dired Visiting.      (line  27)
* dired-do-byte-compile:                 Operating on Files.  (line 114)
* dired-do-chgrp:                        Operating on Files.  (line  81)
* dired-do-chmod:                        Operating on Files.  (line  76)
* dired-do-chown:                        Operating on Files.  (line  85)
* dired-do-compress:                     Operating on Files.  (line 106)
* dired-do-copy:                         Operating on Files.  (line  34)
* dired-do-copy-regexp:                  Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  33)
* dired-do-delete:                       Operating on Files.  (line  48)
* dired-do-flagged-delete:               Dired Deletion.      (line  36)
* dired-do-hardlink:                     Operating on Files.  (line  64)
* dired-do-hardlink-regexp:              Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  34)
* dired-do-kill-lines:                   Dired Updating.      (line  51)
* dired-do-load:                         Operating on Files.  (line 110)
* dired-do-print:                        Operating on Files.  (line  99)
* dired-do-query-replace-regexp:         Operating on Files.  (line 127)
* dired-do-redisplay:                    Dired Updating.      (line  34)
* dired-do-rename:                       Operating on Files.  (line  55)
* dired-do-rename-regexp:                Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  32)
* dired-do-search:                       Operating on Files.  (line 119)
* dired-do-shell-command:                Shell Commands in Dired.
                                                              (line   6)
* dired-do-symlink:                      Operating on Files.  (line  70)
* dired-do-symlink-regexp:               Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  35)
* dired-do-touch:                        Operating on Files.  (line  94)
* dired-downcase:                        Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  27)
* dired-find-file:                       Dired Visiting.      (line  12)
* dired-find-file-other-window:          Dired Visiting.      (line  21)
* dired-flag-auto-save-files:            Flagging Many Files. (line  30)
* dired-flag-backup-files:               Flagging Many Files. (line  34)
* dired-flag-file-deletion:              Dired Deletion.      (line  22)
* dired-flag-files-regexp:               Flagging Many Files. (line  57)
* dired-flag-garbage-files:              Flagging Many Files. (line  51)
* dired-goto-file:                       Dired Navigation.    (line  16)
* dired-hide-all:                        Hiding Subdirectories.
                                                              (line  15)
* dired-hide-subdir:                     Hiding Subdirectories.
                                                              (line  10)
* dired-mark:                            Marks vs Flags.      (line  17)
* dired-mark-directories:                Marks vs Flags.      (line  30)
* dired-mark-executables:                Marks vs Flags.      (line  22)
* dired-mark-files-containing-regexp:    Marks vs Flags.      (line 112)
* dired-mark-files-regexp:               Marks vs Flags.      (line 103)
* dired-mark-subdir-files:               Marks vs Flags.      (line  35)
* dired-mark-symlinks:                   Marks vs Flags.      (line  26)
* dired-maybe-insert-subdir:             Subdirectories in Dired.
                                                              (line  18)
* dired-mouse-find-file-other-window:    Dired Visiting.      (line  33)
* dired-next-dirline:                    Subdirectory Motion. (line  35)
* dired-next-marked-file:                Marks vs Flags.      (line  67)
* dired-next-subdir:                     Subdirectory Motion. (line  15)
* dired-other-frame:                     Dired Enter.         (line  29)
* dired-other-window:                    Dired Enter.         (line  29)
* dired-prev-dirline:                    Subdirectory Motion. (line  30)
* dired-prev-marked-file:                Marks vs Flags.      (line  72)
* dired-prev-subdir:                     Subdirectory Motion. (line  19)
* dired-sort-toggle-or-edit:             Dired Updating.      (line  67)
* dired-toggle-marks:                    Marks vs Flags.      (line  76)
* dired-tree-down:                       Subdirectory Motion. (line  26)
* dired-tree-up:                         Subdirectory Motion. (line  23)
* dired-undo:                            Marks vs Flags.      (line 120)
* dired-unmark:                          Marks vs Flags.      (line  40)
* dired-unmark-all-files:                Marks vs Flags.      (line  54)
* dired-unmark-all-marks:                Marks vs Flags.      (line  49)
* dired-unmark-backward:                 Marks vs Flags.      (line  44)
* dired-up-directory:                    Dired Visiting.      (line  45)
* dired-upcase:                          Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  21)
* dired-view-file:                       Dired Visiting.      (line  38)
* dirs:                                  Directory Tracking.  (line  20)
* dirtrack-mode:                         Directory Tracking.  (line  25)
* disable-command:                       Disabling.           (line  33)
* disable-theme:                         Custom Themes.       (line  47)
* display-battery-mode:                  Optional Mode Line.  (line  72)
* display-local-help:                    Help Echo.           (line  14)
* display-time:                          Optional Mode Line.  (line  48)
* dissociated-press:                     Dissociated Press.   (line   6)
* do-auto-save:                          Auto Save Control.   (line  37)
* doc-view-clear-cache:                  Conversion.          (line   6)
* doc-view-enlarge:                      Document View.       (line  28)
* doc-view-first-page:                   Navigation.          (line  25)
* doc-view-goto-page:                    Navigation.          (line  25)
* doc-view-kill-proc:                    Conversion.          (line  10)
* doc-view-kill-proc-and-buffer:         Conversion.          (line  10)
* doc-view-last-page:                    Navigation.          (line  25)
* doc-view-mode:                         Document View.       (line   6)
* doc-view-next-page:                    Navigation.          (line  16)
* doc-view-previous-page:                Navigation.          (line  16)
* doc-view-reset-slice:                  Slicing.             (line  22)
* doc-view-scroll-down-or-previous-page: Navigation.          (line  20)
* doc-view-scroll-up-or-next-page:       Navigation.          (line  20)
* doc-view-search:                       Searching.           (line  10)
* doc-view-search-backward:              Searching.           (line  10)
* doc-view-set-slice:                    Slicing.             (line  10)
* doc-view-set-slice-using-mouse:        Slicing.             (line  10)
* doc-view-show-tooltip:                 Searching.           (line  10)
* doc-view-shrink:                       Document View.       (line  28)
* doc-view-toggle-display:               Document View.       (line  12)
* doctex-mode:                           TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* doctor:                                Total Frustration.   (line  13)
* down-list:                             Moving by Parens.    (line  42)
* downcase-region:                       Case.                (line  47)
* downcase-word:                         Case.                (line  24)
* dunnet:                                Amusements.          (line  23)
* edit-abbrevs:                          Editing Abbrevs.     (line  42)
* edit-kbd-macro:                        Edit Keyboard Macro. (line  22)
* edit-tab-stops <1>:                    Tab Stops.           (line  10)
* edit-tab-stops:                        Indentation.         (line  72)
* edit-tab-stops-note-changes:           Tab Stops.           (line  10)
* edt-emulation-off:                     Emulation.           (line  18)
* edt-emulation-on:                      Emulation.           (line  18)
* eldoc-mode:                            Lisp Doc.            (line  16)
* electric-nroff-mode:                   Nroff Mode.          (line  25)
* emacs-lisp-mode:                       Lisp Eval.           (line   6)
* emacs-version:                         Understanding Bug Reporting.
                                                              (line   6)
* emerge-auto-advance-mode:              Submodes of Emerge.  (line  31)
* emerge-buffers:                        Overview of Emerge.  (line  15)
* emerge-buffers-with-ancestor:          Overview of Emerge.  (line  18)
* emerge-files:                          Overview of Emerge.  (line   9)
* emerge-files-with-ancestor:            Overview of Emerge.  (line  12)
* emerge-skip-prefers-mode:              Submodes of Emerge.  (line  31)
* enable-command:                        Disabling.           (line  33)
* enable-theme:                          Custom Themes.       (line  47)
* end-of-buffer:                         Moving Point.        (line  16)
* end-of-defun:                          Moving by Defuns.    (line  19)
* end-of-visual-line:                    Visual Line Mode.    (line  23)
* enlarge-window:                        Change Window.       (line  51)
* enlarge-window-horizontally:           Change Window.       (line  51)
* enriched-mode:                         Requesting Formatted Text.
                                                              (line  11)
* eval-buffer:                           Lisp Eval.           (line  73)
* eval-defun:                            Lisp Eval.           (line  44)
* eval-expression:                       Lisp Eval.           (line  38)
* eval-last-sexp:                        Lisp Eval.           (line  58)
* eval-print-last-sexp:                  Lisp Interaction.    (line  10)
* eval-region:                           Lisp Eval.           (line  73)
* exchange-point-and-mark:               Setting Mark.        (line  38)
* execute-extended-command:              M-x.                 (line  57)
* exit-calendar:                         General Calendar.    (line  36)
* exit-recursive-edit:                   Recursive Edit.      (line  12)
* expand-abbrev:                         Expanding Abbrevs.   (line  26)
* expand-region-abbrevs:                 Expanding Abbrevs.   (line  59)
* f90-beginning-of-block:                Fortran Motion.      (line  44)
* f90-end-of-block:                      Fortran Motion.      (line  36)
* f90-mode:                              Fortran.             (line   6)
* f90-next-block:                        Fortran Motion.      (line  23)
* f90-next-statement:                    Fortran Motion.      (line  13)
* f90-previous-block:                    Fortran Motion.      (line  31)
* f90-previous-statement:                Fortran Motion.      (line  17)
* facemenu-remove-all:                   Editing Format Info. (line  21)
* facemenu-remove-face-props:            Editing Format Info. (line  17)
* facemenu-set-background:               Format Colors.       (line  28)
* facemenu-set-bold:                     Format Faces.        (line  18)
* facemenu-set-bold-italic:              Format Faces.        (line  26)
* facemenu-set-default:                  Format Faces.        (line  15)
* facemenu-set-face:                     Format Faces.        (line  34)
* facemenu-set-foreground:               Format Colors.       (line  28)
* facemenu-set-italic:                   Format Faces.        (line  22)
* facemenu-set-underline:                Format Faces.        (line  30)
* ff-find-related-file:                  Other C Commands.    (line 107)
* ffap:                                  FFAP.                (line   6)
* ffap-menu:                             FFAP.                (line   6)
* ffap-mode:                             FFAP.                (line  18)
* ffap-next:                             FFAP.                (line   6)
* file-cache-add-directory:              File Name Cache.     (line  17)
* file-cache-minibuffer-complete:        File Name Cache.     (line   6)
* file-name-shadow-mode:                 Minibuffer File.     (line  32)
* filesets-add-buffer:                   Filesets.            (line  13)
* filesets-init:                         Filesets.            (line   6)
* filesets-remove-buffer:                Filesets.            (line  13)
* fill-individual-paragraphs:            Fill Prefix.         (line  63)
* fill-nonuniform-paragraphs:            Fill Prefix.         (line  70)
* fill-paragraph:                        Fill Commands.       (line  21)
* fill-region:                           Fill Commands.       (line  28)
* fill-region-as-paragraph:              Fill Commands.       (line  31)
* find-alternate-file:                   Visiting.            (line 123)
* find-dired:                            Dired and Find.      (line  27)
* find-file:                             Visiting.            (line  52)
* find-file-at-point:                    FFAP.                (line   6)
* find-file-literally:                   Visiting.            (line 178)
* find-file-other-frame:                 Visiting.            (line 161)
* find-file-other-window:                Visiting.            (line 153)
* find-file-read-only:                   Visiting.            (line 149)
* find-file-read-only-other-frame:       Creating Frames.     (line  43)
* find-grep:                             Grep Searching.      (line  53)
* find-grep-dired:                       Dired and Find.      (line  17)
* find-name-dired:                       Dired and Find.      (line   9)
* find-tag:                              Find Tag.            (line  35)
* find-tag-other-frame:                  Find Tag.            (line  56)
* find-tag-other-window:                 Find Tag.            (line  56)
* find-tag-regexp:                       Find Tag.            (line  76)
* finder-by-keyword:                     Library Keywords.    (line   6)
* flush-lines:                           Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  12)
* flyspell-mode:                         Spelling.            (line 169)
* flyspell-prog-mode:                    Spelling.            (line 183)
* foldout-exit-fold:                     Foldout.             (line  39)
* foldout-zoom-subtree:                  Foldout.             (line  16)
* follow-mode:                           Follow Mode.         (line   6)
* font-lock-add-keywords:                Font Lock.           (line  82)
* font-lock-mode:                        Font Lock.           (line  15)
* font-lock-remove-keywords:             Font Lock.           (line  93)
* format-find-file:                      Forcing Enriched Mode.
                                                              (line  28)
* fortran-beginning-of-block:            Fortran Motion.      (line  44)
* fortran-column-ruler:                  Fortran Columns.     (line  33)
* fortran-comment-region:                Fortran Comments.    (line  80)
* fortran-end-of-block:                  Fortran Motion.      (line  36)
* fortran-indent-subprogram:             ForIndent Commands.  (line  21)
* fortran-join-line:                     ForIndent Commands.  (line  30)
* fortran-mode:                          Fortran.             (line   6)
* fortran-next-statement:                Fortran Motion.      (line  13)
* fortran-previous-statement:            Fortran Motion.      (line  17)
* fortran-split-line:                    ForIndent Commands.  (line  25)
* fortran-strip-sequence-nos:            Fortran Columns.     (line  62)
* fortran-window-create:                 Fortran Columns.     (line  57)
* fortran-window-create-momentarily:     Fortran Columns.     (line  52)
* fortune-to-signature:                  Mail Amusements.     (line  19)
* forward-char:                          Moving Point.        (line  16)
* forward-list:                          Moving by Parens.    (line  31)
* forward-page:                          Pages.               (line  28)
* forward-paragraph:                     Paragraphs.          (line   6)
* forward-sentence:                      Sentences.           (line  22)
* forward-sexp:                          Expressions.         (line  37)
* forward-text-line:                     Nroff Mode.          (line  14)
* forward-word:                          Words.               (line  32)
* frame-configuration-to-register:       RegConfig.           (line   6)
* fringe-mode:                           Fringes.             (line  24)
* gdb:                                   Starting GUD.        (line  10)
* gdb-delete-breakpoint:                 Breakpoints Buffer.  (line  19)
* gdb-edit-value:                        Watch Expressions.   (line  28)
* gdb-frames-select:                     Stack Buffer.        (line  10)
* gdb-goto-breakpoint:                   Breakpoints Buffer.  (line  22)
* gdb-many-windows:                      GDB-UI Layout.       (line  31)
* gdb-restore-windows:                   GDB-UI Layout.       (line  27)
* gdb-threads-select:                    Other GDB-UI Buffers.
                                                              (line  46)
* gdb-toggle-breakpoint:                 Breakpoints Buffer.  (line  12)
* gdb-var-delete:                        Watch Expressions.   (line  25)
* getenv:                                Environment.         (line  19)
* glasses-mode:                          Glasses.             (line   6)
* global-auto-revert-mode:               Reverting.           (line  34)
* global-cwarn-mode:                     Other C Commands.    (line  82)
* global-font-lock-mode:                 Font Lock.           (line  20)
* global-hl-line-mode:                   Cursor Display.      (line  34)
* global-set-key:                        Rebinding.           (line  16)
* global-unset-key:                      Rebinding.           (line  16)
* global-visual-line-mode:               Visual Line Mode.    (line  13)
* gnus:                                  Gnus.                (line  12)
* gnus-group-exit:                       Summary of Gnus.     (line  18)
* gnus-group-kill-group:                 Summary of Gnus.     (line  40)
* gnus-group-list-all-groups:            Summary of Gnus.     (line  25)
* gnus-group-list-groups:                Summary of Gnus.     (line  29)
* gnus-group-next-group:                 Summary of Gnus.     (line  80)
* gnus-group-next-unread-group:          Summary of Gnus.     (line  72)
* gnus-group-prev-group:                 Summary of Gnus.     (line  80)
* gnus-group-prev-unread-group:          Summary of Gnus.     (line  76)
* gnus-group-read-group:                 Summary of Gnus.     (line  49)
* gnus-group-unsubscribe-current-group:  Summary of Gnus.     (line  33)
* gnus-summary-isearch-article:          Summary of Gnus.     (line  85)
* gnus-summary-next-subject:             Summary of Gnus.     (line  80)
* gnus-summary-next-unread-article:      Summary of Gnus.     (line  72)
* gnus-summary-prev-page:                Summary of Gnus.     (line  70)
* gnus-summary-prev-subject:             Summary of Gnus.     (line  80)
* gnus-summary-prev-unread-article:      Summary of Gnus.     (line  76)
* gnus-summary-search-article-forward:   Summary of Gnus.     (line  90)
* gomoku:                                Amusements.          (line   6)
* goto-address-mode:                     Goto Address mode.   (line   6)
* goto-char:                             Moving Point.        (line  16)
* goto-followup-to:                      Header Editing.      (line  38)
* goto-line <1>:                         Select Buffer.       (line  91)
* goto-line:                             Moving Point.        (line  16)
* goto-reply-to:                         Header Editing.      (line  38)
* gpm-mouse-mode:                        Text-Only Mouse.     (line  16)
* grep:                                  Grep Searching.      (line  29)
* grep (MS-DOS):                         MS-DOS Processes.    (line   6)
* grep-find:                             Grep Searching.      (line  53)
* gud-cont:                              Commands of GUD.     (line  63)
* gud-def:                               GUD Customization.   (line  18)
* gud-down:                              Commands of GUD.     (line  86)
* gud-finish:                            Commands of GUD.     (line  98)
* gud-gdb:                               Starting GUD.        (line  15)
* gud-gdb-complete-command:              Commands of GUD.     (line 113)
* gud-jump:                              Commands of GUD.     (line 104)
* gud-next:                              Commands of GUD.     (line  48)
* gud-print:                             Commands of GUD.     (line  57)
* gud-refresh:                           Commands of GUD.     (line  36)
* gud-remove:                            Commands of GUD.     (line  69)
* gud-step:                              Commands of GUD.     (line  42)
* gud-stepi:                             Commands of GUD.     (line  53)
* gud-tbreak:                            Commands of GUD.     (line  75)
* gud-until:                             Commands of GUD.     (line  91)
* gud-up:                                Commands of GUD.     (line  81)
* gud-watch:                             Watch Expressions.   (line   6)
* handwrite:                             PostScript.          (line  82)
* hanoi:                                 Amusements.          (line   6)
* help-command:                          Help.                (line   6)
* help-for-help:                         Help.                (line  13)
* help-next-ref:                         Help Mode.           (line  42)
* help-previous-ref:                     Help Mode.           (line  42)
* help-with-tutorial:                    Basic.               (line   6)
* hi-lock-find-patterns:                 Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  65)
* hi-lock-mode:                          Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  11)
* hi-lock-write-interactive-patterns:    Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  54)
* hide-body:                             Outline Visibility.  (line  80)
* hide-entry:                            Outline Visibility.  (line  58)
* hide-ifdef-mode:                       Other C Commands.    (line  99)
* hide-leaves:                           Outline Visibility.  (line  70)
* hide-other:                            Outline Visibility.  (line  92)
* hide-sublevels:                        Outline Visibility.  (line  88)
* hide-subtree:                          Outline Visibility.  (line  63)
* highlight-changes-mode:                Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line   6)
* highlight-lines-matching-regexp:       Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  50)
* highlight-regexp:                      Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  25)
* hl-line-mode:                          Cursor Display.      (line  34)
* holidays:                              Holidays.            (line  55)
* how-many:                              Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  12)
* hs-hide-all:                           Hideshow.            (line  16)
* hs-hide-block:                         Hideshow.            (line  16)
* hs-hide-level:                         Hideshow.            (line  16)
* hs-minor-mode:                         Hideshow.            (line  16)
* hs-show-all:                           Hideshow.            (line  16)
* hs-show-block:                         Hideshow.            (line  16)
* hs-show-region:                        Hideshow.            (line  16)
* html-mode:                             HTML Mode.           (line   6)
* htmlfontify-buffer:                    Printing.            (line  11)
* icalendar-export-file, icalendar-export-region: Importing Diary.
                                                              (line  37)
* icalendar-import-buffer:               Importing Diary.     (line  20)
* icalendar-import-file:                 Importing Diary.     (line  27)
* icomplete-mode:                        Completion Options.  (line  49)
* ielm:                                  Lisp Interaction.    (line  27)
* image-dired-display-thumbs:            Image-Dired.         (line  10)
* image-mode:                            File Conveniences.   (line  20)
* image-toggle-display:                  File Conveniences.   (line  20)
* imenu:                                 Imenu.               (line  11)
* imenu-add-menubar-index:               Imenu.               (line  16)
* increase-left-margin:                  Format Indentation.  (line  15)
* increment-register:                    RegNumbers.          (line  14)
* indent-code-rigidly:                   Multi-line Indent.   (line  49)
* indent-for-tab-command:                Basic Indent.        (line  16)
* indent-line-function:                  Basic Indent.        (line  16)
* indent-pp-sexp:                        Multi-line Indent.   (line  26)
* indent-region:                         Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  37)
* indent-relative:                       Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  50)
* indent-rigidly:                        Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  37)
* info:                                  Misc Help.           (line   6)
* Info-goto-emacs-command-node:          Name Help.           (line  55)
* Info-goto-emacs-key-command-node:      Key Help.            (line  16)
* info-lookup-file:                      Info Lookup.         (line   6)
* info-lookup-symbol <1>:                Info Lookup.         (line   6)
* info-lookup-symbol:                    Misc Help.           (line  22)
* insert-abbrevs:                        Saving Abbrevs.      (line  49)
* insert-file:                           Misc File Ops.       (line  22)
* insert-file-literally:                 Misc File Ops.       (line  28)
* insert-kbd-macro:                      Save Keyboard Macro. (line  46)
* insert-register:                       RegText.             (line  38)
* inverse-add-global-abbrev:             Defining Abbrevs.    (line  49)
* inverse-add-mode-abbrev:               Defining Abbrevs.    (line  49)
* isearch-backward:                      Basic Isearch.       (line  48)
* isearch-backward-regexp:               Regexp Search.       (line  19)
* isearch-forward:                       Basic Isearch.       (line  12)
* isearch-forward-regexp:                Regexp Search.       (line  19)
* isearch-forward-word:                  Word Search.         (line  26)
* isearch-toggle-input-method:           Special Isearch.     (line  32)
* isearch-toggle-specified-input-method: Special Isearch.     (line  32)
* iso-gtex2iso:                          TeX Misc.            (line  11)
* iso-iso2gtex:                          TeX Misc.            (line  11)
* iso-iso2tex:                           TeX Misc.            (line  11)
* iso-tex2iso:                           TeX Misc.            (line  11)
* ispell:                                Spelling.            (line  56)
* ispell-buffer:                         Spelling.            (line  56)
* ispell-complete-word:                  Spelling.            (line 133)
* ispell-kill-ispell:                    Spelling.            (line 142)
* ispell-message:                        Mail Misc.           (line  30)
* ispell-region:                         Spelling.            (line  56)
* ispell-word:                           Spelling.            (line  49)
* iswitchb-mode:                         Iswitchb.            (line   6)
* jdb:                                   Starting GUD.        (line  47)
* jump-to-register:                      RegPos.              (line  19)
* just-one-space:                        Deletion.            (line  35)
* kbd:                                   Init Rebinding.      (line  10)
* kbd-macro-query:                       Keyboard Macro Query.
                                                              (line  14)
* keep-lines:                            Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  12)
* keyboard-escape-quit:                  Quitting.            (line  78)
* keyboard-quit:                         Quitting.            (line  50)
* kill-all-abbrevs:                      Defining Abbrevs.    (line  65)
* kill-buffer:                           Kill Buffer.         (line  21)
* kill-buffer-and-window:                Change Window.       (line  43)
* kill-compilation:                      Compilation.         (line  72)
* kill-emacs:                            Exiting.             (line  38)
* kill-line:                             Killing by Lines.    (line  12)
* kill-local-variable:                   Locals.              (line  51)
* kill-matching-buffers:                 Kill Buffer.         (line  34)
* kill-rectangle:                        Rectangles.          (line  61)
* kill-region:                           Other Kill Commands. (line   6)
* kill-ring-save:                        Other Kill Commands. (line  39)
* kill-sentence:                         Sentences.           (line  33)
* kill-sexp:                             Expressions.         (line  54)
* kill-some-buffers:                     Kill Buffer.         (line  29)
* kill-whole-line:                       Killing by Lines.    (line  35)
* kill-word:                             Words.               (line  41)
* kmacro-add-counter:                    Keyboard Macro Counter.
                                                              (line  65)
* kmacro-bind-to-key:                    Save Keyboard Macro. (line  28)
* kmacro-cycle-ring-next:                Keyboard Macro Ring. (line  43)
* kmacro-cycle-ring-previous:            Keyboard Macro Ring. (line  43)
* kmacro-edit-lossage:                   Edit Keyboard Macro. (line  27)
* kmacro-edit-macro:                     Edit Keyboard Macro. (line  16)
* kmacro-end-and-call-macro:             Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  25)
* kmacro-end-macro:                      Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  87)
* kmacro-end-or-call-macro:              Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  25)
* kmacro-end-or-call-macro-repeat:       Keyboard Macro Ring. (line  33)
* kmacro-insert-counter:                 Keyboard Macro Counter.
                                                              (line  31)
* kmacro-name-last-macro:                Save Keyboard Macro. (line  17)
* kmacro-set-counter:                    Keyboard Macro Counter.
                                                              (line  57)
* kmacro-set-format:                     Keyboard Macro Counter.
                                                              (line  71)
* kmacro-start-macro:                    Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  87)
* kmacro-start-macro-or-insert-counter:  Basic Keyboard Macro.
                                                              (line  25)
* kmacro-step-edit-macro:                Keyboard Macro Step-Edit.
                                                              (line   6)
* latex-mode:                            TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* lgrep:                                 Grep Searching.      (line  59)
* life:                                  Amusements.          (line  30)
* line-number-mode:                      Optional Mode Line.  (line  18)
* linum-mode:                            Minor Modes.         (line  59)
* lisp-complete-symbol:                  Symbol Completion.   (line  36)
* lisp-eval-defun:                       External Lisp.       (line  31)
* lisp-interaction-mode:                 Lisp Interaction.    (line  23)
* lisp-mode:                             External Lisp.       (line  27)
* list-abbrevs:                          Editing Abbrevs.     (line  13)
* list-bookmarks:                        Bookmarks.           (line  22)
* list-buffers:                          List Buffers.        (line   9)
* list-character-sets:                   Charsets.            (line  31)
* list-charset-chars:                    Charsets.            (line  24)
* list-coding-systems:                   Coding Systems.      (line  50)
* list-colors-display:                   Colors.              (line   6)
* list-command-history:                  Repetition.          (line  12)
* list-directory:                        Directories.         (line  26)
* list-faces-display:                    Standard Faces.      (line   6)
* list-holidays:                         Holidays.            (line  67)
* list-input-methods:                    Select Input Method. (line  85)
* list-matching-lines:                   Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  12)
* list-tags:                             List Tags.           (line  12)
* lm:                                    Amusements.          (line  26)
* load:                                  Lisp Libraries.      (line  22)
* load-file:                             Lisp Libraries.      (line  16)
* load-library:                          Lisp Libraries.      (line  22)
* load-theme:                            Custom Themes.       (line  47)
* local-set-key:                         Rebinding.           (line  16)
* local-unset-key:                       Rebinding.           (line  16)
* locate:                                Dired and Find.      (line  38)
* locate-with-filter:                    Dired and Find.      (line  38)
* log-edit-insert-changelog:             Log Buffer.          (line  19)
* log-edit-show-diff:                    Log Buffer.          (line  12)
* log-edit-show-files:                   Log Buffer.          (line  12)
* longlines-auto-wrap:                   Longlines.           (line  29)
* longlines-mode:                        Longlines.           (line  19)
* longlines-show-hard-newlines:          Longlines.           (line  42)
* lpr-buffer:                            Printing.            (line  31)
* lpr-region:                            Printing.            (line  31)
* lunar-phases:                          Lunar Phases.        (line  23)
* mail-abbrev-insert-alias:              Mail Aliases.        (line  44)
* mail-attach-file:                      Mail Misc.           (line   6)
* mail-fill-yanked-message:              Citing Mail.         (line  24)
* mail-text:                             Header Editing.      (line  43)
* make-frame-command:                    Creating Frames.     (line  18)
* make-frame-on-display:                 Multiple Displays.   (line  11)
* make-indirect-buffer:                  Indirect Buffers.    (line  10)
* make-local-variable:                   Locals.              (line  22)
* make-symbolic-link:                    Misc File Ops.       (line  82)
* make-variable-buffer-local:            Locals.              (line  27)
* Man-fontify-manpage:                   Man Page.            (line  42)
* manual-entry:                          Man Page.            (line  12)
* mark-defun:                            Moving by Defuns.    (line  19)
* mark-page:                             Pages.               (line  34)
* mark-paragraph:                        Paragraphs.          (line  36)
* mark-sexp <1>:                         Marking Objects.     (line  33)
* mark-sexp:                             Expressions.         (line  68)
* mark-whole-buffer:                     Marking Objects.     (line  38)
* mark-word <1>:                         Words.               (line  61)
* mark-word:                             Marking Objects.     (line  33)
* menu-bar-mode:                         Menu Bars.           (line   6)
* menu-bar-open:                         Menu Bar.            (line  10)
* message-goto-bcc:                      Header Editing.      (line  38)
* message-goto-cc:                       Header Editing.      (line  38)
* message-goto-fcc:                      Header Editing.      (line  38)
* message-goto-subject:                  Header Editing.      (line  38)
* message-goto-to:                       Header Editing.      (line  38)
* message-insert-signature:              Mail Signature.      (line  20)
* message-send:                          Mail Sending.        (line  16)
* message-send-and-exit:                 Mail Sending.        (line  22)
* message-tab:                           Header Editing.      (line  46)
* message-yank-original:                 Citing Mail.         (line  13)
* message-yank-prefix:                   Citing Mail.         (line  13)
* minibuffer-complete:                   Completion Commands. (line  29)
* minibuffer-complete-word:              Completion Commands. (line  56)
* mode, thumbs:                          File Conveniences.   (line  28)
* mode25:                                MS-DOS Display.      (line  43)
* mode4350:                              MS-DOS Display.      (line  43)
* modify-face:                           Face Customization.  (line  55)
* morse-region:                          Amusements.          (line  32)
* mouse-avoidance-mode:                  Mouse Avoidance.     (line  39)
* mouse-buffer-menu:                     Buffer Menus.        (line  16)
* mouse-choose-completion:               Completion Commands. (line  66)
* mouse-save-then-kill:                  Mouse Commands.      (line  61)
* mouse-secondary-save-then-kill:        Secondary Selection. (line  26)
* mouse-set-point:                       Mouse Commands.      (line  23)
* mouse-set-region:                      Mouse Commands.      (line  37)
* mouse-set-secondary:                   Secondary Selection. (line  11)
* mouse-start-secondary:                 Secondary Selection. (line  22)
* mouse-wheel-mode:                      Wheeled Mice.        (line   6)
* mouse-yank-at-click:                   Mouse Commands.      (line  52)
* mouse-yank-secondary:                  Secondary Selection. (line  33)
* move-beginning-of-line:                Moving Point.        (line  16)
* move-end-of-line:                      Moving Point.        (line  16)
* move-to-window-line:                   Moving Point.        (line  16)
* mpuz:                                  Amusements.          (line  13)
* msb-mode:                              Buffer Menus.        (line  16)
* msdos-set-mouse-buttons:               MS-DOS Mouse.        (line  18)
* multi-occur:                           Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  12)
* multi-occur-in-matching-buffers:       Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  12)
* narrow-to-defun:                       Narrowing.           (line  41)
* narrow-to-page:                        Narrowing.           (line  41)
* narrow-to-region:                      Narrowing.           (line  36)
* negative-argument:                     Arguments.           (line  15)
* newline-and-indent:                    Basic Indent.        (line  30)
* next-buffer:                           Select Buffer.       (line  60)
* next-completion:                       Completion Commands. (line  85)
* next-error:                            Compilation Mode.    (line  56)
* next-error-follow-minor-mode:          Compilation Mode.    (line 110)
* next-history-element:                  Minibuffer History.  (line  29)
* next-line:                             Moving Point.        (line  16)
* next-logical-line:                     Visual Line Mode.    (line  23)
* next-matching-history-element:         Minibuffer History.  (line  51)
* normal-erase-is-backspace-mode:        DEL Does Not Delete. (line  34)
* normal-mode:                           Choosing Modes.      (line 132)
* not-modified:                          Save Commands.       (line  78)
* nroff-mode:                            Nroff Mode.          (line   6)
* number-to-register:                    RegNumbers.          (line  11)
* nxml-mode <1>:                         HTML Mode.           (line  69)
* nxml-mode:                             Text.                (line  22)
* occur:                                 Other Repeating Search.
                                                              (line  12)
* open-dribble-file:                     Checklist.           (line  78)
* open-line:                             Blank Lines.         (line  16)
* open-rectangle:                        Rectangles.          (line  91)
* open-termscript:                       Checklist.           (line  87)
* other-frame:                           Frame Commands.      (line  17)
* other-window:                          Other Window.        (line  20)
* outline-backward-same-level:           Outline Motion.      (line  36)
* outline-forward-same-level:            Outline Motion.      (line  36)
* outline-minor-mode:                    Outline Mode.        (line   6)
* outline-mode:                          Outline Mode.        (line   6)
* outline-next-visible-heading:          Outline Motion.      (line  29)
* outline-previous-visible-heading:      Outline Motion.      (line  29)
* outline-up-heading:                    Outline Motion.      (line  36)
* overwrite-mode:                        Minor Modes.         (line  65)
* paragraph-indent-minor-mode:           Text Mode.           (line  26)
* paragraph-indent-text-mode:            Text Mode.           (line  26)
* pdb:                                   Starting GUD.        (line  50)
* perldb:                                Starting GUD.        (line  43)
* picture-backward-clear-column:         Basic Picture.       (line  27)
* picture-backward-column:               Basic Picture.       (line   6)
* picture-clear-column:                  Basic Picture.       (line  27)
* picture-clear-line:                    Basic Picture.       (line  27)
* picture-clear-rectangle:               Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line  27)
* picture-clear-rectangle-to-register:   Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line  27)
* picture-forward-column:                Basic Picture.       (line   6)
* picture-mode:                          Picture Mode.        (line   6)
* picture-motion:                        Insert in Picture.   (line  48)
* picture-motion-reverse:                Insert in Picture.   (line  48)
* picture-move-down:                     Basic Picture.       (line   6)
* picture-move-up:                       Basic Picture.       (line   6)
* picture-movement-down:                 Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* picture-movement-left:                 Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* picture-movement-ne:                   Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* picture-movement-nw:                   Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* picture-movement-right:                Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* picture-movement-se:                   Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* picture-movement-sw:                   Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* picture-movement-up:                   Insert in Picture.   (line   6)
* picture-newline:                       Basic Picture.       (line  20)
* picture-open-line:                     Basic Picture.       (line  37)
* picture-set-tab-stops:                 Tabs in Picture.     (line  25)
* picture-tab:                           Tabs in Picture.     (line  20)
* picture-tab-search:                    Tabs in Picture.     (line   6)
* picture-yank-rectangle:                Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line  38)
* picture-yank-rectangle-from-register:  Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line  38)
* plain-tex-mode:                        TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* point-to-register:                     RegPos.              (line  14)
* pong:                                  Amusements.          (line  35)
* pop-global-mark:                       Global Mark Ring.    (line  11)
* pop-tag-mark:                          Find Tag.            (line  67)
* pr-interface:                          Printing Package.    (line  15)
* prefer-coding-system:                  Recognize Coding.    (line  31)
* prepend-to-buffer:                     Accumulating Text.   (line   6)
* prepend-to-register:                   RegText.             (line  31)
* previous-buffer:                       Select Buffer.       (line  60)
* previous-completion:                   Completion Commands. (line  90)
* previous-history-element:              Minibuffer History.  (line  29)
* previous-line:                         Moving Point.        (line  16)
* previous-logical-line:                 Visual Line Mode.    (line  23)
* previous-matching-history-element:     Minibuffer History.  (line  51)
* print-buffer:                          Printing.            (line  31)
* print-buffer (MS-DOS):                 Windows Printing.    (line  66)
* print-region:                          Printing.            (line  31)
* print-region (MS-DOS):                 Windows Printing.    (line  66)
* ps-despool:                            PostScript.          (line  71)
* ps-print-buffer:                       PostScript.          (line  43)
* ps-print-buffer (MS-DOS):              Windows Printing.    (line  86)
* ps-print-buffer-with-faces:            PostScript.          (line  43)
* ps-print-region:                       PostScript.          (line  43)
* ps-print-region-with-faces:            PostScript.          (line  43)
* ps-spool-buffer:                       PostScript.          (line  64)
* ps-spool-buffer (MS-DOS):              Windows Printing.    (line  86)
* ps-spool-buffer-with-faces:            PostScript.          (line  64)
* ps-spool-region:                       PostScript.          (line  64)
* ps-spool-region-with-faces:            PostScript.          (line  64)
* pwd:                                   File Names.          (line  42)
* quail-set-keyboard-layout:             Select Input Method. (line  73)
* quail-show-key:                        Select Input Method. (line  79)
* query-replace:                         Query Replace.       (line  14)
* query-replace-regexp:                  Query Replace.       (line  24)
* quietly-read-abbrev-file:              Saving Abbrevs.      (line  30)
* quoted-insert:                         Inserting Text.      (line  26)
* re-search-backward:                    Regexp Search.       (line  57)
* re-search-forward:                     Regexp Search.       (line  57)
* read-abbrev-file:                      Saving Abbrevs.      (line  30)
* recenter-top-bottom:                   Scrolling.           (line  40)
* recentf-edit-list:                     File Conveniences.   (line  10)
* recentf-mode:                          File Conveniences.   (line  10)
* recentf-save-list:                     File Conveniences.   (line  10)
* recode-file-name:                      File Name Coding.    (line  35)
* recode-region:                         Text Coding.         (line  71)
* recompile:                             Compilation.         (line  61)
* recover-file:                          Recover.             (line   6)
* recover-session:                       Recover.             (line  22)
* remove-hook:                           Hooks.               (line  69)
* remove-untranslated-filesystem:        Text and Binary.     (line  71)
* rename-buffer:                         Misc Buffer.         (line  35)
* rename-file:                           Misc File Ops.       (line  57)
* rename-uniquely:                       Misc Buffer.         (line  40)
* repeat:                                Repeating.           (line  12)
* repeat-complex-command:                Repetition.          (line  20)
* replace-regexp:                        Regexp Replace.      (line   6)
* replace-string:                        Unconditional Replace.
                                                              (line   6)
* report-emacs-bug:                      Checklist.           (line  25)
* reposition-window:                     Scrolling.           (line 117)
* reveal-mode:                           Outline Visibility.  (line  97)
* revert-buffer:                         Reverting.           (line   6)
* revert-buffer (Dired):                 Dired Updating.      (line  29)
* revert-buffer-with-coding-system:      Text Coding.         (line  67)
* rgrep:                                 Grep Searching.      (line  59)
* rmail:                                 Rmail.               (line   6)
* rmail-add-label:                       Rmail Labels.        (line  34)
* rmail-beginning-of-message:            Rmail Scrolling.     (line  27)
* rmail-bury:                            Rmail Basics.        (line  35)
* rmail-continue:                        Rmail Reply.         (line 106)
* rmail-delete-backward:                 Rmail Deletion.      (line  29)
* rmail-delete-forward:                  Rmail Deletion.      (line  29)
* rmail-edit-current-message:            Rmail Editing.       (line  15)
* rmail-end-of-message:                  Rmail Scrolling.     (line  27)
* rmail-expunge:                         Rmail Deletion.      (line  44)
* rmail-expunge-and-save:                Rmail Basics.        (line  28)
* rmail-first-message:                   Rmail Motion.        (line  90)
* rmail-forward:                         Rmail Reply.         (line  75)
* rmail-get-new-mail:                    Rmail Files.         (line  54)
* rmail-input:                           Rmail Files.         (line  25)
* rmail-kill-label:                      Rmail Labels.        (line  34)
* rmail-last-message:                    Rmail Motion.        (line  90)
* rmail-mail:                            Rmail Reply.         (line 100)
* rmail-mime:                            Rmail Display.       (line  55)
* rmail-mode:                            Rmail.               (line   6)
* rmail-next-labeled-message:            Rmail Labels.        (line  43)
* rmail-next-message:                    Rmail Motion.        (line  55)
* rmail-next-same-subject:               Rmail Motion.        (line  83)
* rmail-next-undeleted-message:          Rmail Motion.        (line  55)
* rmail-output:                          Rmail Output.        (line  20)
* rmail-output-as-seen:                  Rmail Output.        (line  20)
* rmail-output-body-to-file:             Rmail Output.        (line  32)
* rmail-previous-labeled-message:        Rmail Labels.        (line  43)
* rmail-previous-message:                Rmail Motion.        (line  55)
* rmail-previous-same-subject:           Rmail Motion.        (line  83)
* rmail-previous-undeleted-message:      Rmail Motion.        (line  55)
* rmail-quit:                            Rmail Basics.        (line  35)
* rmail-redecode-body:                   Rmail Coding.        (line  24)
* rmail-reply:                           Rmail Reply.         (line  33)
* rmail-resend:                          Rmail Reply.         (line  93)
* rmail-retry-failure:                   Rmail Reply.         (line  64)
* rmail-search:                          Rmail Motion.        (line  68)
* rmail-show-message:                    Rmail Motion.        (line  90)
* rmail-sort-by-author:                  Rmail Sorting.       (line  14)
* rmail-sort-by-correspondent:           Rmail Sorting.       (line  22)
* rmail-sort-by-date:                    Rmail Sorting.       (line   6)
* rmail-sort-by-labels:                  Rmail Sorting.       (line  31)
* rmail-sort-by-lines:                   Rmail Sorting.       (line  27)
* rmail-sort-by-recipient:               Rmail Sorting.       (line  18)
* rmail-sort-by-subject:                 Rmail Sorting.       (line  10)
* rmail-summary:                         Rmail Make Summary.  (line  36)
* rmail-summary-bury:                    Rmail Summary Edit.  (line 102)
* rmail-summary-by-labels:               Rmail Make Summary.  (line  41)
* rmail-summary-by-recipients:           Rmail Make Summary.  (line  45)
* rmail-summary-by-regexp:               Rmail Make Summary.  (line  58)
* rmail-summary-by-senders:              Rmail Make Summary.  (line  62)
* rmail-summary-by-topic:                Rmail Make Summary.  (line  52)
* rmail-summary-quit:                    Rmail Summary Edit.  (line 102)
* rmail-summary-undelete-many:           Rmail Summary Edit.  (line  28)
* rmail-summary-wipe:                    Rmail Summary Edit.  (line 102)
* rmail-toggle-header:                   Rmail Display.       (line  27)
* rmail-undelete-previous-message:       Rmail Deletion.      (line  44)
* rot13-other-window:                    Rmail Rot13.         (line  12)
* run-lisp:                              External Lisp.       (line  12)
* save-buffer:                           Save Commands.       (line  26)
* save-buffers-kill-terminal:            Exiting.             (line  13)
* save-some-buffers:                     Save Commands.       (line  42)
* scroll-all-mode:                       Emulation.           (line  10)
* scroll-bar-mode:                       Scroll Bars.         (line  30)
* scroll-down:                           Scrolling.           (line  81)
* scroll-left:                           Horizontal Scrolling.
                                                              (line  39)
* scroll-other-window:                   Other Window.        (line  34)
* scroll-right:                          Horizontal Scrolling.
                                                              (line  39)
* scroll-up:                             Scrolling.           (line  81)
* sdb:                                   Starting GUD.        (line  31)
* search-backward:                       Nonincremental Search.
                                                              (line  26)
* search-forward:                        Nonincremental Search.
                                                              (line  26)
* select-frame-by-name:                  Non-Window Terminals.
                                                              (line  19)
* send-invisible:                        Shell Mode.          (line 119)
* serial-term:                           Serial Terminal.     (line   6)
* server-edit:                           Invoking emacsclient.
                                                              (line  31)
* server-start:                          Emacs Server.        (line  19)
* set-buffer-file-coding-system:         Text Coding.         (line  23)
* set-buffer-process-coding-system:      Communication Coding.
                                                              (line  44)
* set-face-background:                   Faces.               (line  34)
* set-face-foreground:                   Faces.               (line  34)
* set-file-modes:                        Misc File Ops.       (line  93)
* set-file-name-coding-system:           File Name Coding.    (line  13)
* set-fill-column:                       Fill Commands.       (line  51)
* set-fill-prefix:                       Fill Prefix.         (line  27)
* set-fontset-font:                      Modifying Fontsets.  (line   6)
* set-frame-name:                        Non-Window Terminals.
                                                              (line  19)
* set-fringe-style:                      Fringes.             (line  24)
* set-goal-column:                       Moving Point.        (line 104)
* set-input-method:                      Select Input Method. (line  22)
* set-justification-center:              Format Justification.
                                                              (line  51)
* set-justification-full:                Format Justification.
                                                              (line  48)
* set-justification-left:                Format Justification.
                                                              (line  44)
* set-justification-none:                Format Justification.
                                                              (line  55)
* set-justification-right:               Format Justification.
                                                              (line  45)
* set-keyboard-coding-system:            Terminal Coding.     (line  27)
* set-language-environment:              Language Environments.
                                                              (line  20)
* set-left-margin:                       Format Indentation.  (line  52)
* set-locale-environment:                Language Environments.
                                                              (line  47)
* set-mark-command:                      Setting Mark.        (line  28)
* set-next-selection-coding-system:      Communication Coding.
                                                              (line  24)
* set-right-margin:                      Format Indentation.  (line  52)
* set-selection-coding-system:           Communication Coding.
                                                              (line  24)
* set-selective-display:                 Selective Display.   (line   6)
* set-terminal-coding-system:            Terminal Coding.     (line  12)
* set-variable:                          Examining.           (line  41)
* set-visited-file-name:                 Save Commands.       (line  91)
* setenv:                                Environment.         (line  19)
* setq-default:                          Locals.              (line  57)
* sgml-attributes:                       HTML Mode.           (line  27)
* sgml-close-tag:                        HTML Mode.           (line  52)
* sgml-delete-tag:                       HTML Mode.           (line  42)
* sgml-mode:                             HTML Mode.           (line   6)
* sgml-name-8bit-mode:                   HTML Mode.           (line  57)
* sgml-name-char:                        HTML Mode.           (line  11)
* sgml-skip-tag-backward:                HTML Mode.           (line  36)
* sgml-skip-tag-forward:                 HTML Mode.           (line  31)
* sgml-tag:                              HTML Mode.           (line  15)
* sgml-tag-help:                         HTML Mode.           (line  48)
* sgml-tags-invisible:                   HTML Mode.           (line  66)
* sgml-validate:                         HTML Mode.           (line  62)
* shadow-initialize:                     File Shadowing.      (line   6)
* shell:                                 Interactive Shell.   (line   6)
* shell-backward-command:                Shell Mode.          (line 111)
* shell-command:                         Single Shell.        (line   6)
* shell-command-on-region:               Single Shell.        (line  35)
* shell-forward-command:                 Shell Mode.          (line 105)
* shell-pushd-dextract:                  Shell Options.       (line  47)
* shell-pushd-dunique:                   Shell Options.       (line  47)
* shell-pushd-tohome:                    Shell Options.       (line  47)
* show-all:                              Outline Visibility.  (line  80)
* show-branches:                         Outline Visibility.  (line  70)
* show-children:                         Outline Visibility.  (line  76)
* show-entry:                            Outline Visibility.  (line  58)
* show-paren-mode:                       Matching.            (line  33)
* show-subtree:                          Outline Visibility.  (line  63)
* shrink-window-if-larger-than-buffer:   Change Window.       (line  65)
* size-indication-mode:                  Optional Mode Line.  (line   6)
* slitex-mode:                           TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* smerge-mode:                           Comparing Files.     (line  46)
* snake:                                 Amusements.          (line  46)
* solitaire:                             Amusements.          (line  38)
* sort-columns:                          Sorting.             (line  96)
* sort-fields:                           Sorting.             (line  22)
* sort-lines:                            Sorting.             (line  22)
* sort-numeric-fields:                   Sorting.             (line  22)
* sort-pages:                            Sorting.             (line  22)
* sort-paragraphs:                       Sorting.             (line  22)
* split-line:                            Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  17)
* split-window-horizontally:             Split Window.        (line  23)
* split-window-vertically:               Split Window.        (line  17)
* spook:                                 Mail Amusements.     (line   6)
* standard-display-8bit:                 Unibyte Mode.        (line  39)
* string-insert-rectangle:               Rectangles.          (line 109)
* string-rectangle:                      Rectangles.          (line 103)
* studlify-region:                       Amusements.          (line  41)
* substitute-key-definition:             Init Examples.       (line 132)
* subword-mode:                          Other C Commands.    (line   8)
* sunrise-sunset:                        Sunrise/Sunset.      (line  25)
* suspend-frame <1>:                     Exiting.             (line  48)
* suspend-frame:                         Frame Commands.      (line   9)
* switch-to-buffer:                      Select Buffer.       (line  28)
* switch-to-buffer-other-frame:          Select Buffer.       (line  74)
* switch-to-buffer-other-window:         Select Buffer.       (line  66)
* switch-to-completions:                 Completion Commands. (line  71)
* tab-to-tab-stop <1>:                   Tab Stops.           (line   6)
* tab-to-tab-stop:                       Indentation.         (line  72)
* tabify:                                Just Spaces.         (line  18)
* table-backward-cell:                   Cell Commands.       (line   6)
* table-capture:                         Table Conversion.    (line   6)
* table-delete-row:                      Row Commands.        (line  14)
* table-fixed-width-mode:                Fixed Width Mode.    (line   6)
* table-forward-cell:                    Cell Commands.       (line   6)
* table-generate-source:                 Table Misc.          (line  10)
* table-heighten-cell:                   Cell Commands.       (line  40)
* table-insert:                          Table Creation.      (line   6)
* table-insert-column:                   Column Commands.     (line   6)
* table-insert-row:                      Row Commands.        (line   6)
* table-insert-sequence:                 Table Misc.          (line   6)
* table-justify:                         Cell Justification.  (line  10)
* table-narrow-cell:                     Cell Commands.       (line  47)
* table-query-dimension:                 Measuring Tables.    (line   6)
* table-recognize:                       Table Recognition.   (line   6)
* table-recognize-cell:                  Table Recognition.   (line  30)
* table-recognize-region:                Table Recognition.   (line  20)
* table-recognize-table:                 Table Recognition.   (line  24)
* table-release:                         Table Conversion.    (line  34)
* table-shorten-cell:                    Cell Commands.       (line  41)
* table-span-cell:                       Cell Commands.       (line  13)
* table-split-cell:                      Cell Commands.       (line  18)
* table-split-cell-horizontally:         Cell Commands.       (line  28)
* table-split-cell-vertically:           Cell Commands.       (line  24)
* table-unrecognize:                     Table Recognition.   (line   6)
* table-unrecognize-cell:                Table Recognition.   (line  33)
* table-unrecognize-region:              Table Recognition.   (line  21)
* table-unrecognize-table:               Table Recognition.   (line  27)
* table-widen-cell:                      Cell Commands.       (line  44)
* tags-apropos:                          List Tags.           (line  22)
* tags-loop-continue:                    Tags Search.         (line  31)
* tags-query-replace:                    Tags Search.         (line  36)
* tags-search:                           Tags Search.         (line  25)
* term:                                  Terminal emulator.   (line   6)
* term-char-mode:                        Term Mode.           (line  13)
* term-line-mode:                        Term Mode.           (line  16)
* term-pager-toggle:                     Paging in Term.      (line   9)
* tetris:                                Amusements.          (line  46)
* tex-bibtex-file:                       TeX Print.           (line 138)
* tex-buffer:                            TeX Print.           (line  46)
* tex-close-latex-block:                 LaTeX Editing.       (line  28)
* tex-compile:                           TeX Print.           (line 148)
* tex-file:                              TeX Print.           (line 109)
* tex-insert-braces:                     TeX Editing.         (line  51)
* tex-insert-quote:                      TeX Editing.         (line  25)
* tex-kill-job:                          TeX Print.           (line  77)
* tex-latex-block:                       LaTeX Editing.       (line  17)
* tex-mode:                              TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* tex-print:                             TeX Print.           (line  46)
* tex-recenter-output-buffer:            TeX Print.           (line  77)
* tex-region:                            TeX Print.           (line  87)
* tex-show-print-queue:                  TeX Print.           (line  46)
* tex-terminate-paragraph:               TeX Editing.         (line  58)
* tex-validate-region:                   TeX Editing.         (line  58)
* tex-view:                              TeX Print.           (line  46)
* text-mode:                             Text Mode.           (line   6)
* text-scale-adjust:                     Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line   8)
* text-scale-decrease:                   Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line  20)
* text-scale-increase:                   Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line  20)
* text-scale-mode:                       Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line  29)
* text-scale-set:                        Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line  25)
* thumbs-mode:                           File Conveniences.   (line  28)
* time-stamp:                            Time Stamps.         (line  17)
* timeclock-change:                      Time Intervals.      (line   9)
* timeclock-in:                          Time Intervals.      (line   9)
* timeclock-modeline-display:            Time Intervals.      (line  20)
* timeclock-out:                         Time Intervals.      (line   9)
* timeclock-reread-log:                  Time Intervals.      (line  32)
* timeclock-when-to-leave:               Time Intervals.      (line   9)
* timeclock-workday-remaining:           Time Intervals.      (line   9)
* tmm-menubar:                           Menu Bar.            (line  10)
* toggle-debug-on-error:                 Checklist.           (line 160)
* toggle-enable-multibyte-characters:    Enabling Multibyte.  (line  48)
* toggle-gdb-all-registers:              Other GDB-UI Buffers.
                                                              (line  31)
* toggle-input-method:                   Select Input Method. (line  28)
* toggle-read-only:                      Misc Buffer.         (line  25)
* toggle-scroll-bar:                     Scroll Bars.         (line  41)
* toggle-truncate-lines:                 Line Truncation.     (line  15)
* tool-bar-mode:                         Tool Bars.           (line  19)
* tooltip-mode:                          Tooltips.            (line  15)
* top-level:                             Quitting.            (line  88)
* tpu-edt-on:                            Emulation.           (line  28)
* transient-mark-mode:                   Persistent Mark.     (line  19)
* transpose-chars:                       Transpose.           (line  18)
* transpose-lines:                       Transpose.           (line  31)
* transpose-sexps:                       Expressions.         (line  58)
* transpose-words:                       Transpose.           (line  31)
* tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors: Display Custom.   (line  57)
* turn-on-flyspell:                      Spelling.            (line 174)
* turn-on-font-lock:                     Font Lock.           (line  30)
* ucs-insert:                            Inserting Text.      (line  59)
* undigestify-rmail-message:             Rmail Digest.        (line  15)
* undo:                                  Undo.                (line  21)
* undo-only:                             Undo.                (line  29)
* unexpand-abbrev:                       Expanding Abbrevs.   (line  50)
* unforward-rmail-message:               Rmail Reply.         (line  83)
* unhighlight-regexp:                    Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  38)
* universal-argument:                    Arguments.           (line  41)
* universal-coding-system-argument:      Text Coding.         (line  36)
* unmorse-region:                        Amusements.          (line  32)
* untabify:                              Just Spaces.         (line  18)
* up-list:                               TeX Editing.         (line  51)
* upcase-region:                         Case.                (line  47)
* upcase-word:                           Case.                (line  24)
* variable-pitch-mode:                   Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line  33)
* vc-annotate:                           Old Revisions.       (line  81)
* vc-create-tag:                         Making Revision Tags.
                                                              (line   9)
* vc-diff:                               Old Revisions.       (line  41)
* vc-dir:                                VC Directory Mode.   (line   6)
* vc-insert-headers:                     Version Headers.     (line  29)
* vc-merge:                              Merging.             (line  16)
* vc-next-action:                        Basic VC Editing.    (line  23)
* vc-print-log:                          VC Change Log.       (line  13)
* vc-print-root-log:                     VC Change Log.       (line  23)
* vc-register:                           Registering.         (line   6)
* vc-rename-file:                        Renaming and VC.     (line   6)
* vc-retrieve-tag:                       Making Revision Tags.
                                                              (line  13)
* vc-revert-buffer:                      VC Undo.             (line  14)
* vc-revision-other-window:              Old Revisions.       (line  28)
* vc-rollback:                           VC Undo.             (line  25)
* vc-switch-backend:                     Local Version Control.
                                                              (line  74)
* vc-update-change-log:                  Change Logs and VC.  (line  11)
* vi-mode:                               Emulation.           (line  40)
* view-buffer:                           Misc Buffer.         (line  52)
* view-echo-area-messages:               Misc Help.           (line  33)
* view-emacs-debugging:                  Help Files.          (line  13)
* view-emacs-FAQ:                        Help Files.          (line  13)
* view-emacs-news:                       Help Files.          (line  13)
* view-emacs-problems:                   Help Files.          (line  13)
* view-emacs-todo:                       Help Files.          (line  13)
* view-external-packages:                Help Files.          (line  13)
* view-file:                             Misc File Ops.       (line   9)
* view-hello-file:                       International Chars. (line  18)
* view-lossage:                          Misc Help.           (line  28)
* view-order-manuals:                    Help Files.          (line  13)
* view-register:                         Registers.           (line  16)
* vip-mode:                              Emulation.           (line  53)
* viper-mode:                            Emulation.           (line  32)
* visit-tags-table:                      Select Tags Table.   (line   6)
* visual-line-mode:                      Visual Line Mode.    (line  13)
* w32-register-hot-key:                  Windows Keyboard.    (line  26)
* w32-shell-execute:                     Windows Processes.   (line  57)
* w32-unregister-hot-key:                Windows Keyboard.    (line  26)
* wdired-change-to-wdired-mode:          Wdired.              (line   6)
* wdired-finish-edit:                    Wdired.              (line  12)
* what-cursor-position <1>:              Position Info.       (line  54)
* what-cursor-position:                  International Chars. (line  35)
* what-line:                             Position Info.       (line  38)
* what-page:                             Position Info.       (line  38)
* where-is:                              Key Help.            (line  25)
* which-function-mode:                   Which Function.      (line   9)
* widen:                                 Narrowing.           (line  46)
* widget-backward:                       Changing a Variable. (line 103)
* widget-complete:                       Changing a Variable. (line  49)
* widget-forward:                        Changing a Variable. (line 103)
* windmove-default-keybindings:          Window Convenience.  (line  14)
* windmove-right:                        Window Convenience.  (line  14)
* window-configuration-to-register:      RegConfig.           (line   6)
* winner-mode:                           Window Convenience.  (line   6)
* woman:                                 Man Page.            (line  46)
* word-search-backward:                  Word Search.         (line  34)
* word-search-forward:                   Word Search.         (line  34)
* wordstar-mode:                         Emulation.           (line  68)
* write-abbrev-file:                     Saving Abbrevs.      (line  24)
* write-file:                            Save Commands.       (line  99)
* write-region:                          Misc File Ops.       (line  33)
* xdb:                                   Starting GUD.        (line  26)
* yank:                                  Kill Ring.           (line  15)
* yank-pop:                              Earlier Kills.       (line   6)
* yank-rectangle:                        Rectangles.          (line  75)
* yow:                                   Amusements.          (line   6)
* zap-to-char:                           Other Kill Commands. (line  49)
* zone:                                  Amusements.          (line  54)
* zrgrep:                                Grep Searching.      (line  59)


File: emacs,  Node: Variable Index,  Next: Concept Index,  Prev: Command Index,  Up: Top

Variable Index
**************

[index]
* Menu:

* abbrev-all-caps:                       Expanding Abbrevs.   (line  14)
* abbrev-file-name:                      Saving Abbrevs.      (line  30)
* abbrev-mode:                           Abbrev Concepts.     (line  13)
* adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp:       Adaptive Fill.       (line  31)
* adaptive-fill-function:                Adaptive Fill.       (line  52)
* adaptive-fill-mode:                    Adaptive Fill.       (line  46)
* adaptive-fill-regexp:                  Adaptive Fill.       (line  46)
* add-log-always-start-new-record:       Change Log Commands. (line  21)
* add-log-keep-changes-together:         Change Log Commands. (line  17)
* ange-ftp-default-user:                 Remote Files.        (line  56)
* ange-ftp-gateway-host:                 Remote Files.        (line  68)
* ange-ftp-generate-anonymous-password:  Remote Files.        (line  60)
* ange-ftp-make-backup-files:            Remote Files.        (line  49)
* ange-ftp-smart-gateway:                Remote Files.        (line  68)
* appt-audible:                          Appointments.        (line   6)
* appt-delete-window-function:           Appointments.        (line  15)
* appt-disp-window-function:             Appointments.        (line  15)
* appt-display-diary:                    Appointments.        (line  45)
* appt-display-duration:                 Appointments.        (line  15)
* appt-display-format:                   Appointments.        (line   6)
* appt-display-mode-line:                Appointments.        (line   6)
* appt-message-warning-time:             Appointments.        (line  34)
* apropos-do-all:                        Apropos.             (line  89)
* apropos-documentation-sort-by-scores:  Apropos.             (line  97)
* apropos-sort-by-scores:                Apropos.             (line  92)
* auto-coding-alist:                     Recognize Coding.    (line  85)
* auto-coding-functions:                 Recognize Coding.    (line  85)
* auto-coding-regexp-alist:              Recognize Coding.    (line  85)
* auto-compression-mode:                 Compressed Files.    (line  17)
* auto-hscroll-mode:                     Horizontal Scrolling.
                                                              (line   6)
* auto-mode-alist:                       Choosing Modes.      (line  15)
* auto-mode-case-fold:                   Choosing Modes.      (line  99)
* auto-revert-check-vc-info:             VC Mode Line.        (line  23)
* auto-revert-interval:                  Reverting.           (line  34)
* auto-save-default:                     Auto Save Control.   (line   6)
* auto-save-file-name-transforms:        Auto Save Files.     (line  26)
* auto-save-interval:                    Auto Save Control.   (line  15)
* auto-save-list-file-prefix:            Recover.             (line  37)
* auto-save-timeout:                     Auto Save Control.   (line  22)
* auto-save-visited-file-name:           Auto Save Files.     (line  40)
* backup-by-copying:                     Backup Copying.      (line  27)
* backup-by-copying-when-linked:         Backup Copying.      (line  27)
* backup-by-copying-when-mismatch:       Backup Copying.      (line  27)
* backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch: Backup Copying. (line  27)
* backup-directory-alist:                Backup Names.        (line  50)
* backup-enable-predicate:               Backup.              (line  31)
* battery-mode-line-format:              Optional Mode Line.  (line  72)
* baud-rate:                             Display Custom.      (line  20)
* bdf-directory-list:                    PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  65)
* blink-cursor-alist:                    Cursor Display.      (line   6)
* blink-matching-delay:                  Matching.            (line  17)
* blink-matching-paren:                  Matching.            (line  17)
* blink-matching-paren-distance:         Matching.            (line  17)
* bookmark-save-flag:                    Bookmarks.           (line  47)
* bookmark-search-size:                  Bookmarks.           (line  52)
* browse-url-browser-function:           Browse-URL.          (line  20)
* buffer-file-coding-system:             Output Coding.       (line   6)
* buffer-read-only:                      Misc Buffer.         (line  18)
* buffer-stale-function:                 Supporting additional buffers.
                                                              (line  16)
* c-default-style:                       Custom C Indent.     (line  33)
* c-hungry-delete-key:                   Hungry Delete.       (line  34)
* c-mode-hook:                           Program Modes.       (line  47)
* c-tab-always-indent:                   C Indent.            (line  21)
* cal-html-css-default:                  Writing Calendar Files.
                                                              (line  15)
* calendar-bahai-all-holidays-flag:      Holiday Customizing. (line  26)
* calendar-christian-all-holidays-flag:  Holiday Customizing. (line  26)
* calendar-date-display-form:            Date Display Format. (line   6)
* calendar-date-style:                   Date Formats.        (line  43)
* calendar-daylight-savings-ends:        Daylight Saving.     (line  13)
* calendar-daylight-savings-ends-time:   Daylight Saving.     (line  52)
* calendar-daylight-savings-starts:      Daylight Saving.     (line  13)
* calendar-daylight-time-offset:         Daylight Saving.     (line  48)
* calendar-daylight-time-zone-name:      Sunrise/Sunset.      (line  56)
* calendar-hebrew-all-holidays-flag:     Holiday Customizing. (line  26)
* calendar-holiday-marker:               Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  15)
* calendar-holidays:                     Holiday Customizing. (line   6)
* calendar-initial-window-hook:          Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  28)
* calendar-intermonth-text:              Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line   6)
* calendar-islamic-all-holidays-flag:    Holiday Customizing. (line  26)
* calendar-latitude:                     Sunrise/Sunset.      (line  44)
* calendar-load-hook:                    Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  24)
* calendar-location-name:                Sunrise/Sunset.      (line  44)
* calendar-longitude:                    Sunrise/Sunset.      (line  44)
* calendar-mark-diary-entries-flag:      Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  51)
* calendar-mark-holidays-flag:           Holidays.            (line  40)
* calendar-move-hook:                    Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  44)
* calendar-remove-frame-by-deleting:     General Calendar.    (line  36)
* calendar-standard-time-zone-name:      Sunrise/Sunset.      (line  56)
* calendar-time-display-form:            Time Display Format. (line   6)
* calendar-time-zone:                    Sunrise/Sunset.      (line  56)
* calendar-today-invisible-hook:         Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  41)
* calendar-today-visible-hook:           Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  33)
* calendar-view-diary-initially-flag:    Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  36)
* calendar-view-holidays-initially-flag: Holidays.            (line  33)
* calendar-week-start-day:               Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  33)
* calenday-today-marker:                 Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  15)
* cannot-suspend:                        Exiting.             (line  57)
* case-fold-search:                      Search Case.         (line  23)
* case-replace:                          Replacement and Case.
                                                              (line  12)
* change-log-version-info-enabled:       Change Log Commands. (line  25)
* change-log-version-number-regexp-list: Change Log Commands. (line  25)
* change-major-mode-with-file-name:      Choosing Modes.      (line 138)
* clone-indirect-buffer-hook:            Indirect Buffers.    (line  38)
* coding:                                Specify Coding.      (line  12)
* colon-double-space:                    Fill Commands.       (line  73)
* comint-completion-addsuffix:           Shell Options.       (line  33)
* comint-completion-autolist:            Shell Options.       (line  33)
* comint-completion-fignore:             Shell Mode.          (line  25)
* comint-completion-recexact:            Shell Options.       (line  33)
* comint-input-autoexpand:               History References.  (line  17)
* comint-input-ignoredups:               Shell Options.       (line  27)
* comint-move-point-for-output:          Shell Options.       (line  16)
* comint-prompt-read-only:               Shell Options.       (line  24)
* comint-prompt-regexp:                  Shell Prompts.       (line   6)
* comint-scroll-show-maximum-output:     Shell Options.       (line  10)
* comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-input:      Shell Options.       (line   6)
* comint-use-prompt-regexp:              Shell Prompts.       (line   6)
* command-history:                       Repetition.          (line  47)
* command-line-args:                     Emacs Invocation.    (line  40)
* comment-column:                        Options for Comments.
                                                              (line   6)
* comment-end:                           Options for Comments.
                                                              (line  31)
* comment-indent-function:               Options for Comments.
                                                              (line  54)
* comment-multi-line:                    Options for Comments.
                                                              (line  44)
* comment-padding:                       Options for Comments.
                                                              (line  38)
* comment-start:                         Options for Comments.
                                                              (line  31)
* comment-start-skip:                    Options for Comments.
                                                              (line  20)
* compare-ignore-case:                   Comparing Files.     (line  40)
* compare-ignore-whitespace:             Comparing Files.     (line  40)
* compilation-auto-jump-to-first-error:  Compilation Mode.    (line  48)
* compilation-environment:               Compilation.         (line 100)
* compilation-error-regexp-alist:        Compilation Mode.    (line  95)
* compilation-scroll-output:             Compilation.         (line  54)
* compilation-skip-threshold:            Compilation Mode.    (line  73)
* compile-command:                       Compilation.         (line  29)
* completion-auto-help:                  Completion Options.  (line   6)
* completion-ignored-extensions:         Completion Options.  (line  13)
* completion-styles:                     Completion Options.  (line  38)
* confirm-kill-emacs:                    Exiting.             (line  31)
* confirm-nonexistent-file-or-buffer <1>: Select Buffer.      (line  46)
* confirm-nonexistent-file-or-buffer:    Visiting.            (line 109)
* crisp-override-meta-x:                 Emulation.           (line  10)
* ctl-arrow:                             Text Display.        (line  28)
* ctl-x-4-map:                           Prefix Keymaps.      (line  40)
* ctl-x-map:                             Prefix Keymaps.      (line  32)
* cua-enable-cua-keys:                   CUA Bindings.        (line   6)
* cua-mode:                              CUA Bindings.        (line   6)
* current-input-method:                  Select Input Method. (line  22)
* current-language-environment:          Language Environments.
                                                              (line  20)
* cursor-in-non-selected-windows:        Cursor Display.      (line  21)
* custom-buffer-done-function:           Changing a Variable. (line 160)
* custom-enabled-themes:                 Custom Themes.       (line  35)
* custom-file:                           Saving Customizations.
                                                              (line   6)
* custom-theme-directory:                Custom Themes.       (line  20)
* dabbrev-abbrev-char-regexp:            Dabbrev Customization.
                                                              (line  35)
* dabbrev-abbrev-skip-leading-regexp:    Dabbrev Customization.
                                                              (line  43)
* dabbrev-case-fold-search:              Dabbrev Customization.
                                                              (line  10)
* dabbrev-case-replace:                  Dabbrev Customization.
                                                              (line  17)
* dabbrev-check-all-buffers:             Dynamic Abbrevs.     (line  31)
* dabbrev-ignored-buffer-regexps:        Dynamic Abbrevs.     (line  34)
* dabbrev-limit:                         Dynamic Abbrevs.     (line  21)
* dbx-mode-hook:                         GUD Customization.   (line   6)
* default-directory:                     File Names.          (line  17)
* default-input-method:                  Select Input Method. (line  41)
* default-justification:                 Format Justification.
                                                              (line  65)
* delete-auto-save-files:                Auto Save Files.     (line  45)
* delete-by-moving-to-trash <1>:         Dired Deletion.      (line  52)
* delete-by-moving-to-trash:             Misc File Ops.       (line  40)
* delete-old-versions:                   Backup Deletion.     (line  21)
* desktop-clear-preserve-buffers-regexp: Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line  40)
* desktop-globals-to-clear:              Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line  40)
* desktop-restore-eager:                 Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line  34)
* desktop-save-mode:                     Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line  11)
* diary-bahai-entry-symbol:              Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  20)
* diary-date-forms:                      Diary Customizing.   (line  24)
* diary-display-function:                Diary Display.       (line   6)
* diary-entry-marker:                    Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line  15)
* diary-file:                            Format of Diary File.
                                                              (line   6)
* diary-hebrew-entry-symbol:             Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  20)
* diary-include-string:                  Fancy Diary Display. (line  17)
* diary-islamic-entry-symbol:            Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  20)
* diary-list-entries-hook:               Fancy Diary Display. (line  28)
* diary-list-include-blanks:             Diary Display.       (line  15)
* diary-mail-days:                       Displaying the Diary.
                                                              (line  73)
* diary-mark-entries-hook:               Fancy Diary Display. (line  28)
* diary-nongregorian-listing-hook:       Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  13)
* diary-nongregorian-marking-hook:       Non-Gregorian Diary. (line  13)
* diary-nonmarking-symbol:               Format of Diary File.
                                                              (line  40)
* diary-number-of-entries:               Diary Customizing.   (line  12)
* diary-outlook-formats:                 Importing Diary.     (line   9)
* diary-print-entries-hook:              Diary Display.       (line  37)
* diary-sexp-entry-symbol:               Sexp Diary Entries.  (line   6)
* diary-show-holidays-flag:              Diary Customizing.   (line   6)
* diff-switches:                         Comparing Files.     (line   6)
* diff-update-on-the-fly:                Diff Mode.           (line  20)
* directory-free-space-args:             Directories.         (line  50)
* directory-free-space-program:          Directories.         (line  50)
* dired-auto-revert-buffer:              Dired Updating.      (line  43)
* dired-chown-program:                   Operating on Files.  (line  90)
* dired-copy-preserve-time:              Operating on Files.  (line  39)
* dired-dwim-target:                     Operating on Files.  (line  25)
* dired-garbage-files-regexp:            Flagging Many Files. (line  51)
* dired-isearch-filenames:               Dired Navigation.    (line  20)
* dired-kept-versions:                   Flagging Many Files. (line  38)
* dired-listing-switches:                Dired Enter.         (line   6)
* dired-listing-switches (MS-DOS):       MS-DOS Processes.    (line  44)
* dired-recursive-copies:                Operating on Files.  (line  43)
* dired-recursive-deletes:               Dired Deletion.      (line  47)
* display-battery-mode:                  Optional Mode Line.  (line  72)
* display-buffer-reuse-frames:           Select Buffer.       (line  82)
* display-hourglass:                     Display Custom.      (line  30)
* display-time-24hr-format:              Optional Mode Line.  (line  56)
* display-time-mail-directory:           Optional Mode Line.  (line  62)
* display-time-mail-face:                Optional Mode Line.  (line  62)
* display-time-mail-file:                Optional Mode Line.  (line  62)
* display-time-use-mail-icon:            Optional Mode Line.  (line  62)
* dnd-open-file-other-window:            Drag and Drop.       (line  13)
* doc-view-cache-directory:              Conversion.          (line   6)
* doc-view-continuous:                   Navigation.          (line   9)
* doc-view-resolution:                   Document View.       (line  28)
* dos-codepage:                          MS-DOS and MULE.     (line  36)
* dos-display-scancodes:                 MS-DOS Mouse.        (line  49)
* dos-hyper-key:                         MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  20)
* dos-keypad-mode:                       MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  31)
* dos-printer:                           MS-DOS Printing.     (line  25)
* dos-ps-printer:                        MS-DOS Printing.     (line  25)
* dos-super-key:                         MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  20)
* double-click-fuzz:                     Mouse Buttons.       (line  74)
* double-click-time:                     Mouse Buttons.       (line  68)
* echo-keystrokes:                       Display Custom.      (line  14)
* emacs-lisp-mode-hook:                  Program Modes.       (line  47)
* emerge-combine-versions-template:      Combining in Emerge. (line  16)
* emerge-startup-hook:                   Fine Points of Emerge.
                                                              (line  20)
* enable-local-eval:                     Safe File Variables. (line  46)
* enable-local-variables:                Safe File Variables. (line  38)
* enable-recursive-minibuffers:          Minibuffer Edit.     (line  57)
* enriched-translations:                 Requesting Formatted Text.
                                                              (line  27)
* eol-mnemonic-dos:                      Optional Mode Line.  (line  98)
* eol-mnemonic-mac:                      Optional Mode Line.  (line  98)
* eol-mnemonic-undecided:                Optional Mode Line.  (line  98)
* eol-mnemonic-unix:                     Optional Mode Line.  (line  98)
* esc-map:                               Prefix Keymaps.      (line  37)
* eval-expression-debug-on-error:        Lisp Eval.           (line  82)
* eval-expression-print-length:          Lisp Eval.           (line  82)
* eval-expression-print-level:           Lisp Eval.           (line  82)
* even-window-heights:                   Select Buffer.       (line  66)
* exit-language-environment-hook:        Language Environments.
                                                              (line  95)
* explicit-shell-file-name:              Interactive Shell.   (line  32)
* ff-related-file-alist:                 Other C Commands.    (line 107)
* file-coding-system-alist:              Recognize Coding.    (line  43)
* file-name-buffer-file-type-alist:      Text and Binary.     (line  81)
* file-name-coding-system:               File Name Coding.    (line   9)
* fill-column:                           Fill Commands.       (line  51)
* fill-nobreak-predicate:                Fill Commands.       (line  76)
* fill-prefix:                           Fill Prefix.         (line  79)
* find-file-existing-other-name:         File Aliases.        (line  15)
* find-file-hook:                        Visiting.            (line 188)
* find-file-not-found-functions:         Visiting.            (line 188)
* find-file-run-dired:                   Visiting.            (line 132)
* find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings: File Aliases.        (line  15)
* find-file-visit-truename:              File Aliases.        (line  27)
* find-file-wildcards:                   Visiting.            (line  80)
* find-ls-option:                        Dired and Find.      (line  33)
* find-tag-marker-ring-length:           Find Tag.            (line  67)
* focus-follows-mouse:                   Frame Commands.      (line  32)
* foldout-mouse-modifiers:               Foldout.             (line  79)
* font-lock-beginning-of-syntax-function: Font Lock.          (line  60)
* font-lock-maximum-decoration:          Font Lock.           (line  44)
* font-lock-maximum-size:                Font Lock.           (line  55)
* font-slant-table (MS-Windows):         Windows Fonts.       (line  34)
* font-weight-table (MS-Windows):        Windows Fonts.       (line  26)
* fortran-analyze-depth:                 ForIndent Cont.      (line  17)
* fortran-break-before-delimiters:       Fortran Autofill.    (line  14)
* fortran-check-all-num...:              ForIndent Vars.      (line   6)
* fortran-column-ruler-fixed:            Fortran Columns.     (line  45)
* fortran-column-ruler-tabs:             Fortran Columns.     (line  45)
* fortran-comment-indent-char:           Fortran Comments.    (line  64)
* fortran-comment-indent-style:          Fortran Comments.    (line  47)
* fortran-comment-line-extra-indent:     Fortran Comments.    (line  47)
* fortran-comment-line-start:            Fortran Comments.    (line  11)
* fortran-comment-region:                Fortran Comments.    (line  80)
* fortran-continuation-indent:           ForIndent Vars.      (line   6)
* fortran-continuation-string:           ForIndent Cont.      (line   6)
* fortran-directive-re:                  Fortran Comments.    (line  69)
* fortran-do-indent:                     ForIndent Vars.      (line   6)
* fortran-electric-line-number:          ForIndent Num.       (line  18)
* fortran-if-indent:                     ForIndent Vars.      (line   6)
* fortran-line-length:                   Fortran Columns.     (line   6)
* fortran-line-number-indent:            ForIndent Num.       (line  10)
* fortran-minimum-statement-indent...:   ForIndent Vars.      (line   6)
* fortran-structure-indent:              ForIndent Vars.      (line   6)
* fortran-tab-mode-default:              ForIndent Cont.      (line  17)
* gdb-delete-out-of-scope:               Watch Expressions.   (line  39)
* gdb-many-windows:                      GDB-UI Layout.       (line   6)
* gdb-mode-hook:                         GUD Customization.   (line   6)
* gdb-show-changed-values:               Watch Expressions.   (line  33)
* gdb-speedbar-auto-raise:               Watch Expressions.   (line  50)
* gdb-use-colon-colon-notation:          Watch Expressions.   (line  45)
* gdb-use-separate-io-buffer:            Other GDB-UI Buffers.
                                                              (line   7)
* global-cwarn-mode:                     Other C Commands.    (line  82)
* global-font-lock-mode:                 Font Lock.           (line  20)
* grep-regexp-alist:                     Compilation Mode.    (line  95)
* gud-gdb-command-name:                  GDB Graphical Interface.
                                                              (line  17)
* gud-tooltip-echo-area:                 Debugger Operation.  (line  26)
* gud-tooltip-mode:                      Debugger Operation.  (line  26)
* gud-xdb-directories:                   Starting GUD.        (line  26)
* help-at-pt-display-when-idle:          Help Echo.           (line  14)
* help-map:                              Prefix Keymaps.      (line  35)
* hi-lock-exclude-modes:                 Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  83)
* hi-lock-file-patterns-policy:          Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  73)
* hide-ifdef-shadow:                     Other C Commands.    (line  99)
* highlight-nonselected-windows:         Mark.                (line  27)
* history-delete-duplicates:             Minibuffer History.  (line  79)
* history-length:                        Minibuffer History.  (line  74)
* holiday-bahai-holidays:                Holiday Customizing. (line  26)
* holiday-christian-holidays:            Holiday Customizing. (line  26)
* holiday-general-holidays:              Holiday Customizing. (line  21)
* holiday-hebrew-holidays:               Holiday Customizing. (line  26)
* holiday-islamic-holidays:              Holiday Customizing. (line  26)
* holiday-local-holidays:                Holiday Customizing. (line  24)
* holiday-oriental-holidays:             Holiday Customizing. (line   6)
* holiday-other-holidays:                Holiday Customizing. (line  34)
* holiday-solar-holidays:                Holiday Customizing. (line   6)
* hourglass-delay:                       Display Custom.      (line  30)
* hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all:      Hideshow.            (line  38)
* hs-isearch-open:                       Hideshow.            (line  38)
* hs-special-modes-alist:                Hideshow.            (line  38)
* hscroll-margin:                        Horizontal Scrolling.
                                                              (line  18)
* hscroll-step:                          Horizontal Scrolling.
                                                              (line  23)
* image-dired-external-viewer:           Image-Dired.         (line  32)
* imenu-auto-rescan:                     Imenu.               (line  25)
* imenu-sort-function:                   Imenu.               (line  31)
* indent-tabs-mode:                      Just Spaces.         (line   6)
* indent-tabs-mode (Fortran mode):       ForIndent Cont.      (line  17)
* indicate-buffer-boundaries:            Displaying Boundaries.
                                                              (line   6)
* indicate-empty-lines:                  Useless Whitespace.  (line  26)
* inferior-lisp-program:                 External Lisp.       (line  12)
* inhibit-eol-conversion:                Recognize Coding.    (line  56)
* inhibit-iso-escape-detection:          Recognize Coding.    (line  66)
* inhibit-startup-buffer-menu:           Action Arguments.    (line  12)
* inhibit-startup-screen <1>:            Entering Emacs.      (line  50)
* inhibit-startup-screen:                Initial Options.     (line  87)
* initial-environment:                   Environment.         (line  19)
* initial-scratch-message:               Lisp Interaction.    (line  17)
* input-method-highlight-flag:           Input Methods.       (line  91)
* input-method-verbose-flag:             Input Methods.       (line  91)
* insert-default-directory <1>:          File Names.          (line  17)
* insert-default-directory:              Minibuffer File.     (line  53)
* interpreter-mode-alist:                Choosing Modes.      (line  41)
* isearch-allow-scroll:                  Isearch Scroll.      (line   6)
* isearch-lazy-highlight:                Repeat Isearch.      (line  14)
* isearch-mode-map:                      Special Isearch.     (line  47)
* isearch-resume-in-command-history:     Repetition.          (line  40)
* ispell-complete-word-dict:             Spelling.            (line 148)
* ispell-dictionary:                     Spelling.            (line 148)
* ispell-local-dictionary:               Spelling.            (line 148)
* ispell-personal-dictionary:            Spelling.            (line 148)
* jdb-mode-hook:                         GUD Customization.   (line   6)
* kept-new-versions:                     Backup Deletion.     (line  11)
* kept-old-versions:                     Backup Deletion.     (line  11)
* keyboard-coding-system:                Terminal Coding.     (line  27)
* kill-buffer-hook:                      Kill Buffer.         (line  45)
* kill-do-not-save-duplicates:           Kill Options.        (line  16)
* kill-read-only-ok:                     Kill Options.        (line   6)
* kill-ring:                             Earlier Kills.       (line  51)
* kill-ring-max:                         Earlier Kills.       (line  48)
* kill-whole-line:                       Killing by Lines.    (line  31)
* kmacro-ring-max:                       Keyboard Macro Ring. (line  55)
* large-file-warning-threshold:          Visiting.            (line  71)
* latex-block-names:                     LaTeX Editing.       (line  17)
* latex-mode-hook:                       TeX Misc.            (line   6)
* latex-run-command:                     TeX Print.           (line  61)
* latin1-display:                        Undisplayable Characters.
                                                              (line  20)
* line-move-visual:                      Moving Point.        (line 114)
* line-number-display-limit:             Optional Mode Line.  (line  36)
* line-number-display-limit-width:       Optional Mode Line.  (line  42)
* lisp-body-indent:                      Lisp Indent.         (line  22)
* lisp-indent-offset:                    Lisp Indent.         (line  17)
* lisp-interaction-mode-hook:            Program Modes.       (line  47)
* lisp-mode-hook:                        Program Modes.       (line  47)
* list-directory-brief-switches:         Directories.         (line  43)
* list-directory-verbose-switches:       Directories.         (line  43)
* load-dangerous-libraries:              Lisp Libraries.      (line  63)
* load-path:                             Lisp Libraries.      (line  40)
* locale-charset-language-names:         Language Environments.
                                                              (line  47)
* locale-coding-system:                  Communication Coding.
                                                              (line  58)
* locale-language-names:                 Language Environments.
                                                              (line  47)
* locale-preferred-coding-systems:       Language Environments.
                                                              (line  64)
* locate-command:                        Dired and Find.      (line  38)
* lpr-add-switches:                      Printing.            (line  43)
* lpr-command (MS-DOS):                  Windows Printing.    (line  78)
* lpr-commands:                          Printing.            (line  43)
* lpr-headers-switches:                  Printing.            (line  43)
* lpr-headers-switches (MS-DOS):         Windows Printing.    (line  66)
* lpr-switches:                          Printing.            (line  31)
* lpr-switches (MS-DOS):                 Windows Printing.    (line  78)
* ls-lisp-dirs-first:                    ls in Lisp.          (line  35)
* ls-lisp-emulation:                     ls in Lisp.          (line  50)
* ls-lisp-format-time-list:              ls in Lisp.          (line  87)
* ls-lisp-ignore-case:                   ls in Lisp.          (line  29)
* ls-lisp-support-shell-wildcards:       ls in Lisp.          (line  82)
* ls-lisp-use-insert-directory-program:  ls in Lisp.          (line  22)
* ls-lisp-use-localized-time-format:     ls in Lisp.          (line 105)
* ls-lisp-verbosity:                     ls in Lisp.          (line  40)
* magic-fallback-mode-alist:             Choosing Modes.      (line 106)
* magic-mode-alist:                      Choosing Modes.      (line  57)
* mail-citation-hook:                    Citing Mail.         (line  32)
* mail-default-headers:                  Mail Headers.        (line 117)
* mail-from-style:                       Mail Headers.        (line  97)
* mail-header-separator:                 Mail Format.         (line  19)
* mail-mode-hook:                        Mail Misc.           (line  37)
* mail-personal-alias-file:              Mail Aliases.        (line   6)
* mail-setup-hook:                       Mail Misc.           (line  37)
* mail-signature:                        Mail Signature.      (line   6)
* mail-signature-file:                   Mail Signature.      (line   6)
* mail-user-agent:                       Mail Methods.        (line  12)
* major-mode:                            Choosing Modes.      (line 114)
* make-backup-file-name-function:        Backup Names.        (line  61)
* make-backup-files:                     Backup.              (line   6)
* make-pointer-invisible <1>:            Mouse Avoidance.     (line   9)
* make-pointer-invisible:                Display Custom.      (line  36)
* Man-fontify-manpage-flag:              Man Page.            (line  37)
* Man-switches:                          Man Page.            (line  31)
* mark-even-if-inactive:                 Mark Ring.           (line  47)
* mark-ring-max:                         Mark Ring.           (line  42)
* max-mini-window-height:                Minibuffer Edit.     (line  45)
* menu-bar-mode:                         Menu Bars.           (line   6)
* message-log-max:                       Echo Area.           (line  36)
* message-send-hook:                     Mail Sending.        (line  27)
* midnight-hook:                         Kill Buffer.         (line  58)
* midnight-mode:                         Kill Buffer.         (line  58)
* minibuffer-local-completion-map:       Minibuffer Maps.     (line   6)
* minibuffer-local-filename-completion-map: Minibuffer Maps.  (line   6)
* minibuffer-local-map:                  Minibuffer Maps.     (line   6)
* minibuffer-local-must-match-filename-map: Minibuffer Maps.  (line   6)
* minibuffer-local-must-match-map:       Minibuffer Maps.     (line   6)
* minibuffer-local-ns-map:               Minibuffer Maps.     (line   6)
* minibuffer-prompt-properties:          Standard Faces.      (line 123)
* mode-line-in-non-selected-windows:     Optional Mode Line.  (line  94)
* mode-require-final-newline:            Customize Save.      (line  16)
* mode-specific-map:                     Prefix Keymaps.      (line  42)
* mouse-1-click-follows-link:            Mouse References.    (line  36)
* mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows: Mouse References.    (line  30)
* mouse-autoselect-window:               Other Window.        (line  46)
* mouse-avoidance-mode:                  Mouse Avoidance.     (line  14)
* mouse-drag-copy-region:                Mouse Commands.      (line  37)
* mouse-highlight:                       Mouse References.    (line   6)
* mouse-scroll-min-lines:                Mouse Commands.      (line  45)
* mouse-wheel-follow-mouse:              Wheeled Mice.        (line  14)
* mouse-wheel-progressive-speed:         Wheeled Mice.        (line  14)
* mouse-wheel-scroll-amount:             Wheeled Mice.        (line  14)
* mouse-yank-at-point:                   Mouse Commands.      (line  52)
* next-error-highlight:                  Compilation Mode.    (line  56)
* next-line-add-newlines:                Moving Point.        (line 138)
* next-screen-context-lines:             Scrolling.           (line  90)
* no-redraw-on-reenter:                  Display Custom.      (line  62)
* nobreak-char-display:                  Text Display.        (line  41)
* normal-erase-is-backspace:             DEL Does Not Delete. (line  46)
* nroff-mode-hook:                       Nroff Mode.          (line  38)
* ns-pop-up-frames:                      Mac / GNUstep Events.
                                                              (line  13)
* ns-standard-fontset-spec:              Defining Fontsets.   (line   6)
* open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start: Left Margin Paren.   (line  42)
* outline-level:                         Outline Format.      (line  56)
* outline-minor-mode-prefix:             Outline Mode.        (line   6)
* outline-mode-hook:                     Outline Mode.        (line  36)
* outline-regexp:                        Outline Format.      (line  37)
* overflow-newline-into-fringe:          Line Truncation.     (line  30)
* overline-margin:                       Display Custom.      (line  53)
* page-delimiter:                        Pages.               (line  59)
* paragraph-separate:                    Paragraphs.          (line  47)
* paragraph-start:                       Paragraphs.          (line  47)
* pdb-mode-hook:                         GUD Customization.   (line   6)
* perldb-mode-hook:                      GUD Customization.   (line   6)
* picture-mode-hook:                     Picture Mode.        (line  40)
* picture-tab-chars:                     Tabs in Picture.     (line   6)
* plain-tex-mode-hook:                   TeX Misc.            (line   6)
* print-region-function (MS-DOS):        Windows Printing.    (line  78)
* printer-name:                          Printing.            (line  40)
* printer-name, (MS-DOS/MS-Windows):     Windows Printing.    (line  19)
* ps-font-family:                        PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  45)
* ps-font-info-database:                 PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  45)
* ps-font-size:                          PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  45)
* ps-landscape-mode:                     PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  38)
* ps-lpr-command:                        PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line   6)
* ps-lpr-command (MS-DOS):               Windows Printing.    (line  86)
* ps-lpr-switches:                       PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line   6)
* ps-lpr-switches (MS-DOS):              Windows Printing.    (line  86)
* ps-multibyte-buffer:                   PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  51)
* ps-number-of-columns:                  PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  42)
* ps-page-dimensions-database:           PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  32)
* ps-paper-type:                         PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  32)
* ps-print-color-p:                      PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  17)
* ps-print-header:                       PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  14)
* ps-printer-name:                       PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line   6)
* ps-printer-name (MS-DOS):              Windows Printing.    (line  86)
* ps-use-face-background:                PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  27)
* read-buffer-completion-ignore-case:    Completion Options.  (line  29)
* read-file-name-completion-ignore-case: Completion Options.  (line  29)
* read-mail-command:                     Mail Methods.        (line  26)
* read-quoted-char-radix:                Inserting Text.      (line  51)
* recenter-positions:                    Scrolling.           (line  50)
* recenter-redisplay:                    Scrolling.           (line  75)
* recentf-mode:                          File Conveniences.   (line  10)
* require-final-newline:                 Customize Save.      (line   6)
* resize-mini-windows:                   Minibuffer Edit.     (line  34)
* revert-without-query:                  Reverting.           (line  24)
* rmail-decode-mime-charset:             Recognize Coding.    (line  97)
* rmail-delete-after-output:             Rmail Output.        (line  50)
* rmail-delete-message-hook:             Rmail Deletion.      (line  39)
* rmail-displayed-headers:               Rmail Display.       (line  23)
* rmail-dont-reply-to-names:             Rmail Reply.         (line  42)
* rmail-edit-mode-hook:                  Rmail Editing.       (line  25)
* rmail-file-coding-system:              Recognize Coding.    (line  97)
* rmail-file-name:                       Rmail Basics.        (line   6)
* rmail-highlighted-headers:             Rmail Display.       (line  38)
* rmail-ignored-headers:                 Rmail Display.       (line  14)
* rmail-inbox-list:                      Rmail Files.         (line  48)
* rmail-mail-new-frame:                  Rmail Reply.         (line 110)
* rmail-mode-hook:                       Rmail.               (line   6)
* rmail-movemail-flags:                  Remote Mailboxes.    (line  53)
* rmail-movemail-program:                Movemail.            (line  87)
* rmail-movemail-search-path:            Movemail.            (line  87)
* rmail-nonignored-headers:              Rmail Display.       (line  14)
* rmail-output-file-alist:               Rmail Output.        (line  59)
* rmail-preserve-inbox:                  Rmail Inbox.         (line  49)
* rmail-primary-inbox-list:              Rmail Inbox.         (line  15)
* rmail-redisplay-summary:               Rmail Summary Edit.  (line  97)
* rmail-remote-password:                 Remote Mailboxes.    (line  39)
* rmail-remote-password-required:        Remote Mailboxes.    (line  39)
* rmail-retry-ignored-headers:           Rmail Reply.         (line  64)
* rmail-secondary-file-directory:        Rmail Files.         (line  38)
* rmail-secondary-file-regexp:           Rmail Files.         (line  38)
* rmail-summary-line-count-flag:         Rmail Make Summary.  (line  70)
* rmail-summary-window-size:             Rmail Make Summary.  (line  70)
* safe-local-eval-forms:                 Safe File Variables. (line  46)
* safe-local-variable-values:            Safe File Variables. (line  27)
* same-window-buffer-names:              Force Same Window.   (line  12)
* same-window-regexps:                   Force Same Window.   (line  26)
* save-abbrevs:                          Saving Abbrevs.      (line  43)
* save-interprogram-paste-before-kill:   Cut/Paste Other App. (line  38)
* scheme-mode-hook:                      Program Modes.       (line  47)
* scroll-all-mode:                       Window Convenience.  (line  25)
* scroll-bar-mode:                       Scroll Bars.         (line  30)
* scroll-bar-width:                      Scroll Bars.         (line  44)
* scroll-conservatively:                 Auto Scrolling.      (line   9)
* scroll-down-aggressively:              Auto Scrolling.      (line  15)
* scroll-margin:                         Auto Scrolling.      (line  30)
* scroll-preserve-screen-position:       Scrolling.           (line 107)
* scroll-up-aggressively:                Auto Scrolling.      (line  15)
* sdb-mode-hook:                         GUD Customization.   (line   6)
* search-slow-speed:                     Slow Isearch.        (line  17)
* search-slow-window-lines:              Slow Isearch.        (line  22)
* search-whitespace-regexp:              Regexp Search.       (line  38)
* select-active-regions:                 Cut/Paste Other App. (line  27)
* selective-display-ellipses:            Selective Display.   (line  27)
* send-mail-function:                    Mail Sending.        (line  43)
* sendmail-coding-system <1>:            Mail Sending.        (line  33)
* sendmail-coding-system:                Output Coding.       (line  41)
* sentence-end:                          Sentences.           (line  63)
* sentence-end-double-space:             Sentences.           (line  54)
* sentence-end-without-period:           Sentences.           (line  71)
* server-host:                           emacsclient Options. (line  58)
* server-kill-new-buffers:               Invoking emacsclient.
                                                              (line  45)
* server-name:                           Emacs Server.        (line  38)
* server-temp-file-regexp:               Invoking emacsclient.
                                                              (line  45)
* server-use-tcp:                        emacsclient Options. (line  58)
* server-window:                         Invoking emacsclient.
                                                              (line  59)
* set-language-environment-hook:         Language Environments.
                                                              (line  85)
* set-mark-command-repeat-pop:           Mark Ring.           (line  33)
* sgml-xml-mode:                         HTML Mode.           (line  76)
* shell-cd-regexp:                       Directory Tracking.  (line   6)
* shell-command-default-error-buffer:    Single Shell.        (line  72)
* shell-command-regexp:                  Shell Mode.          (line 105)
* shell-completion-execonly:             Shell Options.       (line  43)
* shell-completion-fignore:              Shell Mode.          (line  25)
* shell-file-name:                       Single Shell.        (line  48)
* shell-input-ring-file-name:            Shell Ring.          (line  73)
* shell-popd-regexp:                     Directory Tracking.  (line   6)
* shell-prompt-pattern:                  Shell Prompts.       (line   6)
* shell-pushd-regexp:                    Directory Tracking.  (line   6)
* show-trailing-whitespace:              Useless Whitespace.  (line   6)
* slitex-mode-hook:                      TeX Misc.            (line   6)
* slitex-run-command:                    TeX Print.           (line  61)
* small-temporary-file-directory:        Backup.              (line  31)
* sort-fold-case:                        Sorting.             (line 115)
* sort-numeric-base:                     Sorting.             (line  22)
* special-display-buffer-names:          Special Buffer Frames.
                                                              (line   6)
* special-display-frame-alist:           Special Buffer Frames.
                                                              (line  31)
* special-display-regexps:               Special Buffer Frames.
                                                              (line  25)
* split-height-threshold:                Pop Up Window.       (line  42)
* split-width-threshold:                 Pop Up Window.       (line  42)
* split-window-keep-point:               Split Window.        (line  55)
* standard-fontset-spec:                 Defining Fontsets.   (line   6)
* standard-indent:                       Format Indentation.  (line  47)
* suggest-key-bindings:                  M-x.                 (line  45)
* tab-always-indent:                     Indentation.         (line  81)
* tab-stop-list:                         Tab Stops.           (line  10)
* tab-width <1>:                         Text Display.        (line  10)
* tab-width:                             Indentation.         (line  64)
* table-cell-horizontal-chars:           Table Definition.    (line  29)
* table-cell-intersection-char:          Table Definition.    (line  33)
* table-cell-vertical-char:              Table Definition.    (line  25)
* table-detect-cell-alignment:           Cell Justification.  (line  24)
* tags-apropos-additional-actions:       List Tags.           (line  28)
* tags-apropos-verbose:                  List Tags.           (line  22)
* tags-case-fold-search:                 Tags Search.         (line  43)
* tags-file-name:                        Select Tags Table.   (line   6)
* tags-table-list:                       Select Tags Table.   (line  26)
* tags-tag-face:                         List Tags.           (line  28)
* temporary-file-directory:              Backup.              (line  31)
* term-file-prefix:                      Terminal Init.       (line  27)
* term-setup-hook:                       Terminal Init.       (line  32)
* tex-bibtex-command:                    TeX Print.           (line 138)
* tex-default-mode:                      TeX Mode.            (line  14)
* tex-directory:                         TeX Print.           (line  54)
* tex-dvi-print-command:                 TeX Print.           (line  61)
* tex-dvi-view-command:                  TeX Print.           (line  61)
* tex-main-file:                         TeX Print.           (line 128)
* tex-mode-hook:                         TeX Misc.            (line   6)
* tex-run-command:                       TeX Print.           (line  61)
* tex-shell-hook:                        TeX Misc.            (line   6)
* tex-show-queue-command:                TeX Print.           (line  61)
* tex-start-commands:                    TeX Print.           (line 124)
* tex-start-options:                     TeX Print.           (line 121)
* text-mode-hook:                        Text Mode.           (line  43)
* timeclock-ask-before-exiting:          Time Intervals.      (line  25)
* timeclock-file:                        Time Intervals.      (line  32)
* timeclock-modeline-display:            Time Intervals.      (line  20)
* tool-bar-mode:                         Tool Bars.           (line  19)
* tooltip-delay:                         Tooltips.            (line  22)
* tooltip-gud-modes:                     Debugger Operation.  (line  26)
* track-eol:                             Moving Point.        (line 133)
* truncate-lines:                        Line Truncation.     (line  15)
* truncate-partial-width-windows:        Split Window.        (line  38)
* underline-minimum-offset:              Display Custom.      (line  43)
* undo-limit:                            Undo.                (line  65)
* undo-outer-limit:                      Undo.                (line  65)
* undo-strong-limit:                     Undo.                (line  65)
* unibyte-display-via-language-environment: Unibyte Mode.     (line  22)
* uniquify-buffer-name-style:            Uniquify.            (line  11)
* use-dialog-box:                        Dialog Boxes.        (line   6)
* use-file-dialog:                       Dialog Boxes.        (line  17)
* user-full-name:                        Mail Headers.        (line  90)
* user-mail-address <1>:                 Mail Headers.        (line  90)
* user-mail-address <2>:                 Init Examples.       (line  34)
* user-mail-address:                     Mail Headers.        (line  18)
* user-mail-address, initialization:     General Variables.   (line  33)
* vc-BACKEND-header:                     Version Headers.     (line  35)
* vc-command-messages:                   General VC Options.  (line  37)
* vc-comment-alist:                      Version Headers.     (line  49)
* vc-consult-headers:                    RCS and SCCS.        (line  21)
* vc-cvs-global-switches:                CVS Options.         (line  58)
* vc-cvs-stay-local <1>:                 VC Directory Buffer. (line  33)
* vc-cvs-stay-local:                     CVS Options.         (line  29)
* vc-default-init-revision:              Registering.         (line  30)
* vc-diff-switches:                      Old Revisions.       (line  63)
* vc-directory-exclusion-list:           VC Directory Buffer. (line  48)
* vc-follow-symlinks:                    General VC Options.  (line  17)
* vc-handled-backends:                   Customizing VC.      (line   6)
* vc-initial-comment:                    Registering.         (line  38)
* vc-keep-workfiles:                     General VC Options.  (line  11)
* vc-log-mode-hook:                      Log Buffer.          (line  56)
* vc-log-show-limit:                     VC Change Log.       (line  81)
* vc-make-backup-files <1>:              Backup.              (line   6)
* vc-make-backup-files:                  General VC Options.  (line   6)
* vc-mistrust-permissions:               RCS and SCCS.        (line  26)
* vc-path:                               General VC Options.  (line  42)
* vc-rcs-diff-switches:                  Old Revisions.       (line  63)
* vc-static-header-alist:                Version Headers.     (line  56)
* vc-stay-local <1>:                     CVS Options.         (line  29)
* vc-stay-local:                         VC Directory Buffer. (line  33)
* vc-suppress-confirm:                   General VC Options.  (line  31)
* version-control:                       Backup Names.        (line  21)
* visible-bell:                          Display Custom.      (line   9)
* visible-cursor:                        Cursor Display.      (line  14)
* w32-alt-is-meta:                       Windows Keyboard.    (line  22)
* w32-apps-modifier:                     Windows Keyboard.    (line  69)
* w32-capslock-is-shiftlock:             Windows Keyboard.    (line  53)
* w32-charset-info-alist:                Windows Fonts.       (line  56)
* w32-enable-caps-lock:                  Windows Keyboard.    (line  60)
* w32-enable-num-lock:                   Windows Keyboard.    (line  64)
* w32-get-true-file-attributes:          Windows Files.       (line  14)
* w32-grab-focus-on-raise:               Windows Misc.        (line  17)
* w32-lwindow-modifier:                  Windows Keyboard.    (line  75)
* w32-mouse-button-tolerance:            Windows Mouse.       (line   8)
* w32-pass-alt-to-system:                Windows Keyboard.    (line  86)
* w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system: Windows Mouse.      (line  14)
* w32-pass-lwindow-to-system:            Windows Keyboard.    (line  97)
* w32-pass-rwindow-to-system:            Windows Keyboard.    (line  97)
* w32-quote-process-args:                Windows Processes.   (line  51)
* w32-recognize-altgr:                   Windows Keyboard.    (line 105)
* w32-rwindow-modifier:                  Windows Keyboard.    (line  75)
* w32-scroll-lock-modifier:              Windows Keyboard.    (line  75)
* w32-standard-fontset-spec:             Defining Fontsets.   (line   6)
* w32-swap-mouse-buttons:                Windows Mouse.       (line  17)
* w32-use-visible-system-caret:          Windows Misc.        (line   8)
* which-func-modes:                      Which Function.      (line   9)
* window-min-height:                     Change Window.       (line  51)
* window-min-width:                      Change Window.       (line  51)
* write-region-inhibit-fsync:            Customize Save.      (line  22)
* x-cut-buffer-max:                      Cut/Paste Other App. (line  44)
* x-gtk-file-dialog-help-text:           Dialog Boxes.        (line  23)
* x-gtk-show-hidden-files:               Dialog Boxes.        (line  23)
* x-gtk-use-old-file-dialog:             Dialog Boxes.        (line  32)
* x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position:   Mouse Commands.      (line  27)
* x-select-enable-clipboard:             Clipboard.           (line  23)
* x-select-request-type:                 Communication Coding.
                                                              (line  32)
* x-stretch-cursor:                      Cursor Display.      (line  28)
* x-underline-at-descent-line:           Display Custom.      (line  43)
* xdb-mode-hook:                         GUD Customization.   (line   6)
* yank-excluded-properties:              Kill Ring.           (line  25)
* yank-pop-change-selection:             Cut/Paste Other App. (line  34)


File: emacs,  Node: Concept Index,  Next: Acknowledgments,  Prev: Variable Index,  Up: Top

Concept Index
*************

[index]
* Menu:

* $ in file names:                       File Names.          (line  50)
* ( in leftmost column:                  Left Margin Paren.   (line   6)
* *Messages* buffer:                     Echo Area.           (line  36)
* -/--/.-./.../.:                        Amusements.          (line  32)
* .dir-locals.el file:                   Directory Variables. (line  15)
* .mailrc file:                          Mail Aliases.        (line   6)
* .timelog file:                         Time Intervals.      (line  32)
* // in file name:                       Minibuffer File.     (line  32)
* 8-bit display:                         Unibyte Mode.        (line  39)
* 8-bit input:                           Unibyte Mode.        (line  46)
* <BACKSPACE> vs <DEL>:                  DEL Does Not Delete. (line   6)
* <DEL> vs <BACKSPACE>:                  DEL Does Not Delete. (line   6)
* <ESC> replacing <Meta> key:            User Input.          (line  31)
* ? in display:                          International Chars. (line  18)
* _emacs init file, MS-Windows:          Windows HOME.        (line  33)
* A and B buffers (Emerge):              Overview of Emerge.  (line  21)
* abbrev file:                           Saving Abbrevs.      (line  30)
* Abbrev mode:                           Abbrev Concepts.     (line  13)
* abbrevs:                               Abbrevs.             (line   6)
* abnormal hook:                         Hooks.               (line  27)
* aborting recursive edit:               Quitting.            (line  70)
* accented characters:                   Unibyte Mode.        (line   6)
* accessible portion:                    Narrowing.           (line   6)
* accumulating scattered text:           Accumulating Text.   (line   6)
* action options (command line):         Emacs Invocation.    (line  40)
* adaptive filling:                      Adaptive Fill.       (line   6)
* Adding to the kill ring in Dired.:     Misc Dired Features. (line  18)
* addpm, MS-Windows installation program: MS-Windows Registry.
                                                              (line   6)
* adjust buffer face height:             Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line   8)
* againformation:                        Dissociated Press.   (line  28)
* aggressive scrolling:                  Auto Scrolling.      (line  15)
* alarm clock:                           Appointments.        (line  52)
* alignment for comments:                Comment Commands.    (line   6)
* Alt key (MS-Windows):                  Windows Keyboard.    (line  22)
* Alt key invokes menu (Windows):        Windows Keyboard.    (line  86)
* Alt-<TAB> vs M-<TAB> (MS-Windows):     Windows Keyboard.    (line  45)
* ALTERNATE_EDITOR environment variable: emacsclient Options. (line  32)
* AltGr key (MS-Windows):                Windows Keyboard.    (line 105)
* ange-ftp:                              Remote Files.        (line  56)
* anonymous FTP:                         Remote Files.        (line  60)
* appending kills in the ring:           Appending Kills.     (line   6)
* appointment notification:              Appointments.        (line   6)
* apropos:                               Apropos.             (line  31)
* apropos search results, order by score: Apropos.            (line  92)
* arc:                                   File Archives.       (line  42)
* Arch:                                  Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  41)
* Archive mode:                          File Archives.       (line  42)
* arguments (command line):              Emacs Invocation.    (line   6)
* arguments to commands:                 Arguments.           (line   6)
* arrow keys:                            Moving Point.        (line   6)
* ASCII:                                 User Input.          (line   6)
* ASCII art:                             Text.                (line  29)
* Asm mode:                              Asm Mode.            (line   6)
* assembler mode:                        Asm Mode.            (line   6)
* astronomical day numbers:              Calendar Systems.    (line  12)
* attached frame (of speedbar):          Speedbar.            (line   6)
* attribute (Rmail):                     Rmail Labels.        (line   6)
* attributes of mode line, changing:     Optional Mode Line.  (line  80)
* Auto Compression mode:                 Compressed Files.    (line   6)
* Auto Fill mode:                        Auto Fill.           (line   6)
* Auto Save mode:                        Auto Save.           (line   6)
* Auto-Lower mode:                       Frame Parameters.    (line   6)
* Auto-Raise mode:                       Frame Parameters.    (line   6)
* Auto-Revert mode:                      Reverting.           (line  34)
* auto-save for remote files:            Auto Save Files.     (line  26)
* autoload:                              Lisp Libraries.      (line  56)
* autoload Lisp libraries:               Init Examples.       (line  99)
* automatic typing:                      Text.                (line  33)
* automatic version backups:             Version Backups.     (line   6)
* autotyping:                            Text.                (line  33)
* available colors:                      Colors.              (line   6)
* avoiding mouse in the way of your typing: Mouse Avoidance.  (line   6)
* AWK mode:                              C Modes.             (line   6)
* back end (version control):            Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line   6)
* back reference, in regexp:             Regexp Backslash.    (line  54)
* back reference, in regexp replacement: Regexp Replace.      (line  13)
* background color, command-line argument: Colors.            (line  29)
* background mode, on xterm:             General Variables.   (line 139)
* background syntax highlighting:        Font Lock.           (line  97)
* backtrace for bug reports:             Checklist.           (line 211)
* backup file:                           Backup.              (line   6)
* backup file names on MS-DOS:           MS-DOS File Names.   (line  20)
* backup, and user-id:                   Backup Copying.      (line  27)
* backups for remote files:              Remote Files.        (line  49)
* Baha'i calendar:                       Calendar Systems.    (line  66)
* balanced expression:                   Expressions.         (line   6)
* balloon help:                          Help Echo.           (line   6)
* base buffer:                           Indirect Buffers.    (line   6)
* batch mode:                            Initial Options.     (line  35)
* Bazaar:                                Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  65)
* binary files, on MS-DOS/MS-Windows:    Text and Binary.     (line  81)
* binding:                               Commands.            (line   6)
* binding keyboard macros:               Save Keyboard Macro. (line  28)
* binding keys:                          Rebinding.           (line   6)
* blank lines:                           Blank Lines.         (line  16)
* blank lines in programs:               Multi-Line Comments. (line   6)
* blinking cursor disable, command-line argument: Misc X.     (line  16)
* body lines (Outline mode):             Outline Format.      (line   6)
* bold font:                             Face Customization.  (line   6)
* bookmarks:                             Bookmarks.           (line   6)
* border color, command-line argument:   Colors.              (line  33)
* borders (X Window System):             Borders X.           (line   6)
* boredom:                               Amusements.          (line   6)
* brace in column zero and fontification: Font Lock.          (line  60)
* braces, moving across:                 Moving by Parens.    (line   6)
* branch (version control):              Branches.            (line   6)
* Brief emulation:                       Emulation.           (line  10)
* Browse-URL:                            Browse-URL.          (line   6)
* buffer definitions index:              Imenu.               (line   6)
* buffer list, customizable:             Buffer Menus.        (line   6)
* buffer menu <1>:                       Buffer Menus.        (line  16)
* buffer menu:                           Several Buffers.     (line   6)
* buffer size display:                   Optional Mode Line.  (line   6)
* buffer size, maximum:                  Buffers.             (line  37)
* buffers:                               Buffers.             (line   6)
* buggestion:                            Dissociated Press.   (line  45)
* bugs:                                  Bugs.                (line   6)
* building programs:                     Building.            (line   6)
* button down events:                    Mouse Buttons.       (line   6)
* buttons (customization buffer):        Customization Groups.
                                                              (line  33)
* buttons at buffer position:            Editing Format Info. (line  25)
* bypassing init and default.el file:    Initial Options.     (line  75)
* byte code:                             Lisp Libraries.      (line  10)
* byte-compiling several files (in Dired): Operating on Files.
                                                              (line 114)
* bzr:                                   Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  65)
* C editing:                             Programs.            (line   6)
* C mode:                                C Modes.             (line   6)
* C++ class browser, tags:               Tags.                (line  34)
* C++ mode:                              C Modes.             (line   6)
* C-:                                    User Input.          (line   6)
* cache of file names:                   File Name Cache.     (line   6)
* calendar:                              Calendar/Diary.      (line   6)
* calendar and HTML:                     Writing Calendar Files.
                                                              (line   8)
* calendar and LaTeX:                    Writing Calendar Files.
                                                              (line  37)
* calendar layout:                       Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line   6)
* calendar week numbers:                 Calendar Customizing.
                                                              (line   6)
* calendar, first day of week:           Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  33)
* call Lisp functions, command-line argument: Action Arguments.
                                                              (line  53)
* candle lighting times:                 Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* capitalizing words:                    Case.                (line  24)
* case conversion:                       Case.                (line   6)
* case-sensitivity and completion:       Completion Options.  (line  29)
* case-sensitivity and tags search:      Tags Search.         (line  43)
* categories of characters:              Regexp Backslash.    (line 140)
* cell text justification:               Cell Justification.  (line   6)
* Celtic:                                International.       (line   6)
* centering:                             Fill Commands.       (line  46)
* centralized vs. decentralized version control: VCS Concepts.
                                                              (line  88)
* change buffers:                        Select Buffer.       (line   6)
* change log:                            Change Log.          (line   6)
* Change Log mode:                       Change Log Commands. (line  31)
* changes, undoing:                      Undo.                (line   6)
* changing file group (in Dired):        Operating on Files.  (line  81)
* changing file owner (in Dired):        Operating on Files.  (line  85)
* changing file permissions (in Dired):  Operating on Files.  (line  76)
* changing file time (in Dired):         Operating on Files.  (line  94)
* character set (keyboard):              User Input.          (line   6)
* character set of character at point:   International Chars. (line  58)
* characters (in text):                  Text Display.        (line   6)
* characters in a certain charset:       Charsets.            (line  24)
* characters which belong to a specific language: Regexp Backslash.
                                                              (line 140)
* charsets:                              Charsets.            (line   6)
* checking out files:                    VCS Concepts.        (line  13)
* checking spelling:                     Spelling.            (line   6)
* checking syntax:                       Flymake.             (line   6)
* Chinese:                               International.       (line   6)
* Chinese calendar:                      Calendar Systems.    (line  58)
* choosing a major mode:                 Choosing Modes.      (line   6)
* ciphers:                               Amusements.          (line  20)
* citing mail:                           Citing Mail.         (line   6)
* class browser, C++:                    Tags.                (line  34)
* click events:                          Mouse Buttons.       (line   6)
* client-side fonts:                     Fonts.               (line 190)
* clipboard:                             Clipboard.           (line   6)
* codepage, MS-DOS:                      MS-DOS and MULE.     (line  21)
* coding systems:                        Coding Systems.      (line   6)
* collision:                             Interlocking.        (line  25)
* color customization, in init file:     Creating Frames.     (line  47)
* color emulation on black-and-white printers: PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  17)
* color of window, from command line:    Colors.              (line   6)
* Column Number mode:                    Optional Mode Line.  (line  23)
* columns (and rectangles):              Rectangles.          (line   6)
* columns (indentation):                 Indentation.         (line   6)
* columns, splitting:                    Two-Column.          (line   6)
* Comint mode:                           Shell Mode.          (line 152)
* comint-highlight-input face:           Interactive Shell.   (line  20)
* comint-highlight-prompt face:          Interactive Shell.   (line  20)
* command:                               Commands.            (line   6)
* command history:                       Repetition.          (line   6)
* command line arguments:                Emacs Invocation.    (line   6)
* comments:                              Comments.            (line   6)
* comments on customized settings:       Changing a Variable. (line 145)
* compare files (in Dired):              Comparison in Dired. (line   6)
* comparing 3 files (diff3):             Comparing Files.     (line  46)
* comparing files:                       Comparing Files.     (line   6)
* compilation buffer, keeping point at end: Compilation.      (line  54)
* compilation errors:                    Compilation.         (line   6)
* Compilation mode:                      Compilation Mode.    (line   6)
* compilation under MS-DOS:              MS-DOS Processes.    (line   6)
* complete key:                          Keys.                (line  11)
* completion:                            Completion.          (line   6)
* completion (Lisp symbols):             Symbol Completion.   (line  36)
* completion (symbol names):             Symbol Completion.   (line   6)
* compose character:                     Unibyte Mode.        (line  67)
* compressing files (in Dired):          Operating on Files.  (line 106)
* compression:                           Compressed Files.    (line   6)
* Conf mode:                             Program Modes.       (line  21)
* confirming in the minibuffer <1>:      Select Buffer.       (line  35)
* confirming in the minibuffer:          Visiting.            (line 109)
* conflicts:                             Merging.             (line  46)
* connecting to remote host:             Remote Host.         (line   6)
* continuation line:                     Continuation Lines.  (line   6)
* contributing to Emacs:                 Contributing.        (line   6)
* Control:                               User Input.          (line  23)
* control characters:                    User Input.          (line   6)
* Control-Meta:                          Expressions.         (line  31)
* converting text to upper or lower case: Case.               (line  24)
* Coptic calendar:                       Calendar Systems.    (line  41)
* copy:                                  Clipboard.           (line  16)
* copying files:                         Misc File Ops.       (line  78)
* copying files (in Dired):              Operating on Files.  (line  34)
* copying text:                          Yanking.             (line   6)
* CORBA IDL mode:                        C Modes.             (line   6)
* correcting spelling:                   Spelling.            (line   6)
* CPerl mode:                            Program Modes.       (line  21)
* crashes:                               Auto Save.           (line   6)
* create a text-based table:             Table Creation.      (line   6)
* creating files:                        Visiting.            (line 104)
* creating frames:                       Creating Frames.     (line   6)
* CRiSP mode:                            Emulation.           (line  10)
* cryptanalysis:                         Amusements.          (line  20)
* CSSC:                                  Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  16)
* CUA key bindings:                      CUA Bindings.        (line   6)
* current buffer:                        Buffers.             (line  23)
* current function name in mode line:    Which Function.      (line   6)
* cursor:                                Point.               (line   6)
* cursor color, command-line argument:   Colors.              (line  37)
* cursor in non-selected windows:        Cursor Display.      (line  21)
* cursor location:                       Position Info.       (line  38)
* cursor location, on MS-DOS:            Text and Binary.     (line  19)
* cursor motion:                         Moving Point.        (line   6)
* cursor shape on MS-DOS:                MS-DOS Display.      (line  19)
* cursor, blinking:                      Cursor Display.      (line   6)
* cursor, locating visually:             Cursor Display.      (line   6)
* custom themes:                         Custom Themes.       (line   6)
* customization:                         Customization.       (line   6)
* customization buffer:                  Easy Customization.  (line  12)
* customization groups:                  Customization Groups.
                                                              (line   6)
* customization of menu face:            Standard Faces.      (line 156)
* customizing faces:                     Face Customization.  (line   6)
* customizing Lisp indentation:          Lisp Indent.         (line   6)
* cut:                                   Clipboard.           (line  13)
* cut and paste:                         Glossary.            (line 304)
* cut buffer:                            Cut/Paste Other App. (line  44)
* cutting text:                          Killing.             (line  13)
* cvs:                                   VC Directory Mode.   (line  14)
* CVS:                                   Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  26)
* CVS directory mode:                    VC Directory Mode.   (line  14)
* cvs watch feature:                     CVS Options.         (line  21)
* CVSREAD environment variable (CVS):    CVS Options.         (line  11)
* CWarn mode:                            Other C Commands.    (line  82)
* Cyrillic:                              International.       (line   6)
* Czech:                                 International.       (line   6)
* daemon, Emacs:                         Emacs Server.        (line  25)
* day of year:                           General Calendar.    (line  21)
* daylight saving time:                  Daylight Saving.     (line   6)
* DBX:                                   Debuggers.           (line   6)
* dead character:                        Unibyte Mode.        (line  67)
* debuggers:                             Debuggers.           (line   6)
* debugging Emacs, tricks and techniques: Checklist.          (line 246)
* debugging X problems:                  Table of Resources.  (line 115)
* decoding mail messages (Rmail):        Rmail Coding.        (line   6)
* decoding non-ASCII keyboard input on X: Communication Coding.
                                                              (line  58)
* decrease buffer face height:           Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line  20)
* default argument:                      Minibuffer.          (line  23)
* default-frame-alist:                   Creating Frames.     (line  47)
* default.el file, not loading:          Initial Options.     (line  75)
* default.el, the default init file:     Init File.           (line  17)
* defining keyboard macros:              Keyboard Macros.     (line   6)
* defuns:                                Moving by Defuns.    (line   6)
* delete column in table:                Column Commands.     (line  13)
* delete row in table:                   Row Commands.        (line  14)
* Delete Selection mode <1>:             Using Region.        (line  43)
* Delete Selection mode:                 Mouse Commands.      (line  97)
* deleting auto-save files:              Flagging Many Files. (line  30)
* deleting blank lines:                  Blank Lines.         (line   6)
* deleting characters and lines:         Erasing.             (line  39)
* deleting files (in Dired):             Dired Deletion.      (line   6)
* deleting some backup files:            Flagging Many Files. (line  51)
* deletion:                              Killing.             (line  13)
* deletion (of files):                   Misc File Ops.       (line  40)
* deletion (Rmail):                      Rmail Deletion.      (line   6)
* Delphi mode:                           Program Modes.       (line  21)
* desktop:                               Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line   6)
* Devanagari:                            International.       (line   6)
* developediment:                        Dissociated Press.   (line  45)
* device for Emacs terminal I/O:         Initial Options.     (line  20)
* dialog boxes:                          Dialog Boxes.        (line   6)
* diary:                                 Diary.               (line   6)
* diary buffer:                          Diary Display.       (line   6)
* diary file:                            Format of Diary File.
                                                              (line   6)
* Diff mode:                             Diff Mode.           (line   6)
* digest message:                        Rmail Digest.        (line   6)
* directional window selection:          Window Convenience.  (line  14)
* directories in buffer names:           Uniquify.            (line   6)
* directory header lines:                Subdirectory Motion. (line  10)
* directory listing:                     Directories.         (line   6)
* directory listing on MS-DOS:           MS-DOS Processes.    (line  44)
* directory local variables:             Directory Variables. (line   6)
* directory tracking:                    Directory Tracking.  (line   6)
* Dired:                                 Dired.               (line   6)
* Dired and version control:             Misc Dired Features. (line  35)
* Dired sorting:                         Dired Updating.      (line  67)
* Dired, and MS-Windows/MS-DOS:          ls in Lisp.          (line   6)
* disable window system:                 Initial Options.     (line  30)
* disabled command:                      Disabling.           (line   6)
* disabling remote files:                Remote Files.        (line  33)
* DISPLAY environment variable:          Display X.           (line   6)
* display for Emacs frame:               Initial Options.     (line  25)
* display name (X Window System):        Display X.           (line   6)
* display of buffer size:                Optional Mode Line.  (line   6)
* display of line number:                Optional Mode Line.  (line  18)
* DNS mode:                              Program Modes.       (line  21)
* doc-view-minor-mode:                   Document View.       (line  12)
* DocTeX mode:                           TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* doctor:                                Total Frustration.   (line   6)
* document viewer (DocView):             Document View.       (line   6)
* DocView mode:                          Document View.       (line   6)
* DOS applications, running from Emacs:  Windows Processes.   (line   6)
* DOS codepages:                         MS-DOS and MULE.     (line  21)
* DOS-style end-of-line display:         Recognize Coding.    (line  56)
* DOS-to-Unix conversion of files:       Text and Binary.     (line  38)
* double clicks:                         Mouse Buttons.       (line  28)
* double slash in file name:             Minibuffer File.     (line  32)
* down events:                           Mouse Buttons.       (line   6)
* downcase file names:                   Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  27)
* drag and drop:                         Drag and Drop.       (line   6)
* drag and drop, Dired:                  Misc Dired Features. (line  61)
* drag events:                           Mouse Buttons.       (line   6)
* drastic changes:                       Reverting.           (line   6)
* dribble file:                          Checklist.           (line  78)
* DSSSL mode:                            Program Modes.       (line  21)
* Dutch:                                 International.       (line   6)
* DVI file:                              Document View.       (line   6)
* Ebrowse:                               Tags.                (line  34)
* echo area:                             Echo Area.           (line   6)
* EDE (Emacs Development Environment):   EDE.                 (line   6)
* Edebug:                                Checklist.           (line 160)
* editable fields (customization buffer): Customization Groups.
                                                              (line  33)
* editing binary files:                  Editing Binary Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* editing in Picture mode:               Basic Picture.       (line   6)
* editing level, recursive:              Recursive Edit.      (line   6)
* EDITOR environment variable:           Emacs Server.        (line   6)
* EDT:                                   Emulation.           (line   6)
* Eldoc mode:                            Lisp Doc.            (line  16)
* Eliza:                                 Total Frustration.   (line   6)
* Emacs as a server:                     Emacs Server.        (line   6)
* Emacs Development Environment:         EDE.                 (line   6)
* EMACS environment variable:            Interactive Shell.   (line  57)
* Emacs icon, a gnu:                     Icons X.             (line  12)
* Emacs initialization file:             Init File.           (line   6)
* Emacs-Lisp mode:                       Lisp Eval.           (line   6)
* EMACS_SERVER_FILE environment variable: emacsclient Options.
                                                              (line  58)
* emacsclient:                           Emacs Server.        (line   6)
* emacsclient invocation:                Invoking emacsclient.
                                                              (line   6)
* emacsclient options:                   emacsclient Options. (line   6)
* email:                                 Sending Mail.        (line   6)
* Emerge:                                Emerge.              (line   6)
* emulating other editors:               Emulation.           (line   6)
* emulation of Brief:                    Emulation.           (line  10)
* encoding of characters:                International.       (line   6)
* end-of-line conversion:                Coding Systems.      (line  55)
* end-of-line conversion on MS-DOS/MS-Windows: Text and Binary.
                                                              (line   9)
* end-of-line conversion, mode-line indication: Mode Line.    (line  36)
* enlarge a table cell:                  Cell Commands.       (line  36)
* Enriched mode:                         Formatted Text.      (line   6)
* entering Emacs:                        Entering Emacs.      (line   6)
* environment variables:                 Environment.         (line   6)
* environment variables for subshells:   Interactive Shell.   (line  32)
* environment variables in file names:   File Names.          (line  50)
* erasing characters and lines:          Erasing.             (line  39)
* error log:                             Compilation.         (line   6)
* error message in the echo area:        Echo Area.           (line  20)
* errors in init file:                   Initial Options.     (line 118)
* escape sequences in files:             Recognize Coding.    (line  66)
* ESHELL environment variable:           Interactive Shell.   (line  32)
* etags program:                         Create Tags Table.   (line   6)
* Ethiopic:                              International.       (line   6)
* Ethiopic calendar:                     Calendar Systems.    (line  41)
* Euro sign:                             Language Environments.
                                                              (line  26)
* European character sets:               Unibyte Mode.        (line   6)
* evaluate expression, command-line argument: Action Arguments.
                                                              (line  60)
* exiting:                               Exiting.             (line   6)
* exiting recursive edit:                Recursive Edit.      (line  12)
* expanding subdirectories in Dired:     Subdirectories in Dired.
                                                              (line   6)
* expansion (of abbrevs):                Abbrevs.             (line   6)
* expansion of C macros:                 Other C Commands.    (line  45)
* expansion of environment variables:    File Names.          (line  50)
* expression:                            Expressions.         (line   6)
* expunging (Rmail):                     Rmail Deletion.      (line  11)
* face at point:                         International Chars. (line  58)
* face colors, setting:                  Faces.               (line  27)
* face customization, in init file:      Creating Frames.     (line  47)
* faces:                                 Faces.               (line   6)
* faces for highlighting query replace:  Query Replace.       (line  28)
* faces for highlighting search matches: Basic Isearch.       (line  22)
* faces under MS-DOS:                    MS-DOS Display.      (line   6)
* failed merges:                         Comparing Files.     (line  46)
* Feedmail:                              Mail Sending.        (line  43)
* FFAP minor mode:                       FFAP.                (line  18)
* file archives:                         File Archives.       (line   6)
* file comparison (in Dired):            Comparison in Dired. (line   6)
* file database (locate):                Dired and Find.      (line  38)
* file dates:                            Interlocking.        (line   6)
* file directory:                        Directories.         (line   6)
* file local variables:                  File Variables.      (line   6)
* file management:                       Dired.               (line   6)
* file modes:                            Misc File Ops.       (line  93)
* file name caching:                     File Name Cache.     (line   6)
* file names:                            File Names.          (line   6)
* file names on MS-Windows:              Windows Files.       (line   6)
* file names under MS-DOS:               MS-DOS File Names.   (line   6)
* file names under Windows 95/NT:        MS-DOS File Names.   (line  26)
* file names with non-ASCII characters:  File Name Coding.    (line   9)
* file names, quote special characters:  Quoted File Names.   (line   6)
* file ownership, and backup:            Backup Copying.      (line  27)
* file permissions:                      Misc File Ops.       (line  93)
* file selection dialog:                 Visiting.            (line  89)
* file selection dialog, how to disable: Dialog Boxes.        (line  17)
* file shadows:                          File Shadowing.      (line   6)
* file truenames:                        File Aliases.        (line  27)
* file version in change log entries:    Change Log Commands. (line  25)
* file-name completion, on MS-Windows:   Windows Files.       (line  11)
* files:                                 Files.               (line   6)
* files versus changesets.:              VCS Concepts.        (line  74)
* files, visiting and saving:            Visiting.            (line  28)
* filesets:                              Filesets.            (line   6)
* filesets, VC:                          Basic VC Editing.    (line   6)
* fill prefix:                           Fill Prefix.         (line   6)
* filling text:                          Filling.             (line   6)
* find:                                  File Name Cache.     (line   6)
* find and Dired:                        Dired and Find.      (line   6)
* find Info manual by its file name:     Misc Help.           (line  11)
* finding file at point:                 FFAP.                (line   6)
* finding files containing regexp matches (in Dired): Marks vs Flags.
                                                              (line 112)
* finding strings within text:           Search.              (line   6)
* firewall, and accessing remote files:  Remote Files.        (line  68)
* fix width of table cells:              Fixed Width Mode.    (line   6)
* fixing incorrectly decoded mail messages: Rmail Coding.     (line  16)
* flagging files (in Dired):             Dired Deletion.      (line   6)
* flagging many files for deletion (in Dired): Flagging Many Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* Flyspell mode:                         Spelling.            (line 169)
* folding editing:                       Foldout.             (line   6)
* Follow mode:                           Follow Mode.         (line   6)
* font (default):                        Creating Frames.     (line  53)
* font antialiasing (MS Windows):        Windows Fonts.       (line  90)
* font for menus:                        Table of Resources.  (line  83)
* Font Lock mode:                        Font Lock.           (line   6)
* font name (X Window System):           Font X.              (line   6)
* font of character at point:            International Chars. (line  58)
* font properties (MS Windows gdi backend): Windows Fonts.    (line  74)
* font properties (MS Windows):          Windows Fonts.       (line  24)
* font scripts (MS Windows):             Windows Fonts.       (line  76)
* font specification (MS Windows):       Windows Fonts.       (line   6)
* font unicode subranges (MS Windows):   Windows Fonts.       (line  76)
* fontconfig:                            Fonts.               (line  35)
* fonts:                                 Fonts.               (line   6)
* fonts and faces:                       Face Customization.  (line   6)
* fonts for PostScript printing:         PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  51)
* fonts for various scripts:             Language Environments.
                                                              (line  41)
* fonts, emulating under MS-DOS:         MS-DOS Display.      (line   6)
* fontsets:                              Fontsets.            (line   6)
* fontsets, modifying:                   Modifying Fontsets.  (line   6)
* foreground color, command-line argument: Colors.            (line  23)
* formatted text:                        Formatted Text.      (line   6)
* formfeed character:                    Pages.               (line   6)
* Fortran 77 and Fortran 90, 95, 2003:   Fortran.             (line   6)
* Fortran continuation lines:            ForIndent Cont.      (line   6)
* Fortran fixed form and free form:      Fortran.             (line   6)
* Fortran mode:                          Fortran.             (line   6)
* fortune cookies:                       Mail Amusements.     (line  19)
* forwarding a message:                  Rmail Reply.         (line  75)
* frame focus policy, MS-Windows:        Windows Misc.        (line  17)
* frame size under MS-DOS:               MS-DOS Display.      (line  43)
* frame title, command-line argument:    Title X.             (line  17)
* frames:                                Frames.              (line   6)
* frames on MS-DOS:                      MS-DOS Display.      (line  36)
* French Revolutionary calendar:         Calendar Systems.    (line  29)
* fringe face:                           Standard Faces.      (line 130)
* fringes:                               Fringes.             (line   6)
* fringes, and continuation lines:       Continuation Lines.  (line   6)
* fringes, and current execution line in GUD: Debugger Operation.
                                                              (line   6)
* fringes, and unused line indication:   Useless Whitespace.  (line  26)
* FTP:                                   Remote Files.        (line   6)
* fullheight, command-line argument:     Window Size X.       (line  28)
* fullscreen, command-line argument:     Window Size X.       (line  18)
* fullwidth, command-line argument:      Window Size X.       (line  32)
* function definition:                   Commands.            (line   6)
* function key:                          Keymaps.             (line  35)
* function, move to beginning or end:    Moving by Defuns.    (line  19)
* gamma correction:                      Table of Resources.  (line  97)
* gateway, and remote file access with ange-ftp: Remote Files.
                                                              (line  68)
* GDB:                                   Debuggers.           (line   6)
* GDB commands in Fringe:                Source Buffers.      (line   6)
* GDB User Interface layout:             GDB-UI Layout.       (line   6)
* geometry of Emacs window:              Window Size X.       (line   6)
* geometry, command-line argument:       Window Size X.       (line  11)
* German:                                International.       (line   6)
* getting help with keys:                Basic Help.          (line   6)
* Ghostscript, use for PostScript printing: Windows Printing. (line  96)
* git:                                   Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  49)
* Glasses mode:                          Glasses.             (line   6)
* Global Auto-Revert mode:               Reverting.           (line  34)
* global keymap:                         Keymaps.             (line  21)
* global mark:                           CUA Bindings.        (line  35)
* global mark ring:                      Global Mark Ring.    (line   6)
* global substitution:                   Replace.             (line   6)
* GNU Arch:                              Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  41)
* Gnus:                                  Gnus.                (line   6)
* GNUstep:                               Mac OS / GNUstep.    (line   6)
* Go Moku:                               Amusements.          (line  10)
* Goto Address mode:                     Goto Address mode.   (line   6)
* graphic characters:                    Inserting Text.      (line   6)
* Greek:                                 International.       (line   6)
* Gregorian calendar:                    Other Calendars.     (line   6)
* growing minibuffer:                    Minibuffer Edit.     (line  26)
* GTK resources and customization:       GTK resources.       (line   6)
* GTK styles:                            GTK styles.          (line   6)
* GTK widget classes:                    GTK Names in Emacs.  (line   6)
* GTK widget names <1>:                  GTK widget names.    (line   6)
* GTK widget names:                      GTK Names in Emacs.  (line   6)
* GUD library:                           Debuggers.           (line   6)
* gzip:                                  Compressed Files.    (line   6)
* handwriting:                           PostScript.          (line  82)
* hard links (creation):                 Misc File Ops.       (line  71)
* hard links (in Dired):                 Operating on Files.  (line  64)
* hard links (visiting):                 File Aliases.        (line   6)
* hard newline:                          Hard and Soft Newlines.
                                                              (line   6)
* hardcopy:                              Printing.            (line   6)
* head revision:                         Branches.            (line  34)
* header (TeX mode):                     TeX Print.           (line  96)
* header line (Dired):                   Subdirectory Motion. (line  10)
* headers (of mail message):             Mail Headers.        (line   6)
* heading lines (Outline mode):          Outline Format.      (line   6)
* Hebrew:                                International.       (line   6)
* Hebrew calendar:                       Calendar Systems.    (line  16)
* height of minibuffer:                  Minibuffer Edit.     (line  26)
* help:                                  Help.                (line   6)
* help text, in GTK+ file chooser:       Dialog Boxes.        (line  23)
* help, viewing web pages:               Help Mode.           (line  38)
* hex editing:                           Editing Binary Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* Hexl mode:                             Editing Binary Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* hg:                                    Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  59)
* Hi Lock mode:                          Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  11)
* hidden files, in GTK+ file chooser:    Dialog Boxes.        (line  23)
* Hide-ifdef mode:                       Other C Commands.    (line  99)
* hiding subdirectories (Dired):         Hiding Subdirectories.
                                                              (line   6)
* Highlight Changes mode:                Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line   6)
* highlight current line:                Cursor Display.      (line  34)
* highlighting by matching:              Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line   6)
* highlighting lines of text:            Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  50)
* highlighting matching parentheses:     Matching.            (line  33)
* highlighting region:                   Persistent Mark.     (line   6)
* Hindi:                                 International.       (line   6)
* history of commands:                   Repetition.          (line   6)
* history of minibuffer input:           Minibuffer History.  (line   6)
* history reference:                     History References.  (line   6)
* holiday forms:                         Holiday Customizing. (line  37)
* holidays:                              Holidays.            (line   6)
* HOME directory on MS-Windows:          Windows HOME.        (line   6)
* home directory shorthand:              Minibuffer File.     (line  39)
* HOME directory under MS-DOS:           MS-DOS File Names.   (line  35)
* hook:                                  Hooks.               (line   6)
* horizontal scrolling:                  Horizontal Scrolling.
                                                              (line   6)
* hourglass pointer display:             Display Custom.      (line  30)
* HTML mode:                             HTML Mode.           (line   6)
* hungry deletion (C Mode):              Hungry Delete.       (line   6)
* hunk, diff:                            Diff Mode.           (line  12)
* Hyper (under MS-DOS):                  MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  20)
* hyperlinking:                          Hyperlinking.        (line   6)
* iCalendar support:                     Importing Diary.     (line  15)
* Icomplete mode:                        Completion Options.  (line  49)
* Icon mode:                             Program Modes.       (line  21)
* iconifying:                            Exiting.             (line  41)
* icons (X Window System):               Icons X.             (line   6)
* icons, toolbar:                        Tool Bars.           (line   6)
* identifiers, making long ones readable: Glasses.            (line   6)
* IDL mode:                              C Modes.             (line   6)
* ignored file names, in completion:     Completion Options.  (line  13)
* ignoriginal:                           Dissociated Press.   (line  37)
* image-dired:                           Image-Dired.         (line   6)
* image-dired mode:                      Image-Dired.         (line   6)
* images, viewing:                       File Conveniences.   (line  20)
* IMAP mailboxes:                        Remote Mailboxes.    (line  33)
* in-situ subdirectory (Dired):          Subdirectories in Dired.
                                                              (line  19)
* inbox file:                            Rmail Inbox.         (line   6)
* incorrect fontification:               Font Lock.           (line  60)
* increase buffer face height:           Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line  20)
* incremental search:                    Incremental Search.  (line   6)
* incremental search, input method interference: Input Methods.
                                                              (line  84)
* indentation:                           Indentation.         (line   6)
* indentation for comments:              Comment Commands.    (line   6)
* indentation for programs:              Program Indent.      (line   6)
* index of buffer definitions:           Imenu.               (line   6)
* indirect buffer:                       Indirect Buffers.    (line   6)
* indirect buffers and outlines:         Outline Views.       (line   6)
* inferior process:                      Compilation.         (line   6)
* inferior processes under MS-DOS:       MS-DOS Processes.    (line   6)
* Info:                                  Misc Help.           (line   6)
* Info index completion:                 Symbol Completion.   (line  25)
* init file:                             Init File.           (line   6)
* init file .emacs on MS-Windows:        Windows HOME.        (line  14)
* init file, and non-ASCII characters:   Enabling Multibyte.  (line  29)
* init file, default name under MS-DOS:  MS-DOS File Names.   (line   6)
* init file, not loading:                Initial Options.     (line  75)
* initial options (command line):        Emacs Invocation.    (line  40)
* initial revision ID to register:       Registering.         (line  30)
* initial-frame-alist:                   Creating Frames.     (line  47)
* input event:                           User Input.          (line  43)
* input methods:                         Input Methods.       (line   6)
* input methods, X:                      Table of Resources.  (line 133)
* input with the keyboard:               User Input.          (line   6)
* insert column in table:                Column Commands.     (line   6)
* insert file contents, command-line argument: Action Arguments.
                                                              (line  63)
* insert row in table:                   Row Commands.        (line   6)
* insert string into table cells:        Table Misc.          (line   6)
* inserted subdirectory (Dired):         Subdirectories in Dired.
                                                              (line  19)
* inserting blank lines:                 Blank Lines.         (line   6)
* insertion:                             Inserting Text.      (line   6)
* INSIDE_EMACS environment variable:     Interactive Shell.   (line  52)
* Integrated development environment:    EDE.                 (line   6)
* interactive highlighting:              Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line   6)
* internal border width, command-line argument: Borders X.    (line  15)
* international characters in .emacs:    Init Non-ASCII.      (line   6)
* international files from DOS/Windows systems: Coding Systems.
                                                              (line  20)
* international scripts:                 International.       (line   6)
* international support (MS-DOS):        MS-DOS and MULE.     (line   6)
* Intlfonts for PostScript printing:     PostScript Variables.
                                                              (line  51)
* Intlfonts package, installation:       Language Environments.
                                                              (line  41)
* invisible lines:                       Outline Mode.        (line   6)
* invocation (command line arguments):   Emacs Invocation.    (line   6)
* IPA:                                   International.       (line   6)
* isearch:                               Incremental Search.  (line   6)
* Islamic calendar:                      Calendar Systems.    (line  20)
* ISO commercial calendar:               Calendar Systems.    (line   6)
* ISO Latin character sets:              Unibyte Mode.        (line   6)
* iso-ascii library:                     Unibyte Mode.        (line  33)
* iso-transl library:                    Unibyte Mode.        (line  67)
* ispell program:                        Spelling.            (line 142)
* Iswitchb mode:                         Iswitchb.            (line   6)
* italic font:                           Face Customization.  (line   6)
* Japanese:                              International.       (line   6)
* jar:                                   File Archives.       (line  42)
* Java class archives:                   File Archives.       (line  42)
* Java mode:                             C Modes.             (line   6)
* Javascript mode:                       Program Modes.       (line  21)
* JDB:                                   Debuggers.           (line   6)
* Julian calendar:                       Calendar Systems.    (line   8)
* Julian day numbers:                    Calendar Systems.    (line  12)
* just-in-time (JIT) font-lock:          Font Lock.           (line  97)
* justification:                         Fill Commands.       (line  38)
* Kerberos POP authentication:           Remote Mailboxes.    (line  58)
* key:                                   Keys.                (line  11)
* key bindings:                          Key Bindings.        (line   6)
* key rebinding, permanent:              Init File.           (line   6)
* key rebinding, this session:           Rebinding.           (line   6)
* key sequence:                          Keys.                (line  11)
* keyboard input:                        User Input.          (line   6)
* keyboard macro:                        Keyboard Macros.     (line   6)
* keyboard shortcuts:                    Glossary.            (line 728)
* keyboard, MS-Windows:                  Windows Keyboard.    (line   6)
* keymap:                                Keymaps.             (line   6)
* keypad:                                Function Keys.       (line  45)
* keypad keys (MS-Windows):              Windows Keyboard.    (line  64)
* keys stolen by window manager:         User Input.          (line  49)
* kill DOS application:                  Windows Processes.   (line  37)
* kill ring:                             Yanking.             (line   6)
* killing buffers:                       Kill Buffer.         (line   6)
* killing characters and lines:          Erasing.             (line  39)
* killing Emacs:                         Exiting.             (line   6)
* killing expressions:                   Expressions.         (line  54)
* killing rectangular areas of text:     Rectangles.          (line   6)
* killing text:                          Killing.             (line  13)
* Korean:                                International.       (line   6)
* label (Rmail):                         Rmail Labels.        (line   6)
* landmark game:                         Amusements.          (line  26)
* language environment, automatic selection on MS-DOS: MS-DOS and MULE.
                                                              (line  46)
* language environments:                 Language Environments.
                                                              (line   6)
* Lao:                                   International.       (line   6)
* LaTeX mode:                            TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* LaTeX references:                      TeX Misc.            (line  15)
* Latin:                                 International.       (line   6)
* Latin-1 TeX encoding:                  TeX Misc.            (line  11)
* lazy search highlighting:              Repeat Isearch.      (line  14)
* leading:                               Table of Resources.  (line  71)
* leaving Emacs:                         Exiting.             (line   6)
* LessTif Widget X Resources:            LessTif Resources.   (line   6)
* libraries:                             Lisp Libraries.      (line   6)
* Life:                                  Amusements.          (line  30)
* line endings:                          Coding Systems.      (line  55)
* line number commands:                  Position Info.       (line  38)
* line number display:                   Optional Mode Line.  (line  18)
* line spacing:                          Table of Resources.  (line  71)
* line spacing, command-line argument:   Misc X.              (line  12)
* line truncation, and fringes <1>:      Continuation Lines.  (line  20)
* line truncation, and fringes:          Line Truncation.     (line   6)
* line wrapping:                         Continuation Lines.  (line   6)
* lines, highlighting:                   Highlight Interactively.
                                                              (line  50)
* links (customization buffer):          Customization Groups.
                                                              (line  33)
* Linum mode:                            Minor Modes.         (line  59)
* Lisp editing:                          Programs.            (line   6)
* Lisp files byte-compiled by XEmacs:    Lisp Libraries.      (line  63)
* Lisp files, and multibyte operation:   Enabling Multibyte.  (line  29)
* Lisp string syntax:                    Init Syntax.         (line  31)
* Lisp symbol completion:                Symbol Completion.   (line  36)
* lisp-indent-function property:         Lisp Indent.         (line  27)
* list commands:                         Moving by Parens.    (line   6)
* listing current buffers:               List Buffers.        (line   9)
* listing system fonts:                  Fonts.               (line 197)
* load init file of another user:        Initial Options.     (line 115)
* loading Lisp code:                     Lisp Libraries.      (line   6)
* loading Lisp libraries automatically:  Init Examples.       (line  99)
* loading Lisp libraries, command-line argument: Action Arguments.
                                                              (line  38)
* loading several files (in Dired):      Operating on Files.  (line 110)
* local back end (version control):      Local Version Control.
                                                              (line   6)
* local keymap:                          Local Keymaps.       (line   6)
* local variables:                       Locals.              (line  16)
* local variables in files:              File Variables.      (line   6)
* local variables, for all files in a directory: Directory Variables.
                                                              (line   6)
* local version control:                 Local Version Control.
                                                              (line   6)
* locale, date format:                   Time Stamps.         (line   6)
* locales:                               Language Environments.
                                                              (line  47)
* location of point:                     Position Info.       (line  38)
* locking (CVS):                         CVS Options.         (line   6)
* locking files:                         Interlocking.        (line  18)
* locking versus merging:                VCS Concepts.        (line  31)
* locking, non-strict (RCS):             RCS and SCCS.        (line   6)
* log File, types of:                    Types of Log File.   (line   6)
* logging keystrokes:                    Checklist.           (line  78)
* long file names in DOS box under Windows 95/NT: MS-DOS File Names.
                                                              (line  26)
* Long Lines minor mode:                 Longlines.           (line   6)
* looking for a subject in documentation: Help.               (line  29)
* lpr usage under MS-DOS:                Windows Printing.    (line  78)
* ls emulation:                          ls in Lisp.          (line   6)
* Lucid Widget X Resources:              Lucid Resources.     (line   6)
* lzh:                                   File Archives.       (line  42)
* M-:                                    User Input.          (line  23)
* M-<TAB> vs Alt-<TAB> (MS-Windows):     Windows Keyboard.    (line  45)
* M4 mode:                               Program Modes.       (line  21)
* Mac OS X:                              Mac OS / GNUstep.    (line   6)
* Macintosh:                             Mac OS / GNUstep.    (line   6)
* Macintosh end-of-line conversion:      Coding Systems.      (line  55)
* Macintosh key bindings:                Emulation.           (line   6)
* macro expansion in C:                  Other C Commands.    (line  45)
* mail:                                  Sending Mail.        (line   6)
* mail (on mode line):                   Optional Mode Line.  (line  72)
* mail aliases:                          Mail Aliases.        (line   6)
* MAIL environment variable:             Rmail Inbox.         (line  15)
* Mail mode:                             Mail Methods.        (line   6)
* mail signature:                        Mail Signature.      (line   6)
* mail-composition methods:              Mail Methods.        (line   6)
* Mailclient:                            Mail Sending.        (line  43)
* MAILHOST environment variable:         Remote Mailboxes.    (line  17)
* mailrc file:                           Mail Aliases.        (line   6)
* main border width, command-line argument: Borders X.        (line  20)
* major modes:                           Major Modes.         (line   6)
* make:                                  Compilation.         (line   6)
* Makefile mode:                         Program Modes.       (line  21)
* making pictures out of text characters: Picture Mode.       (line   6)
* man pages, and local file variables:   Specifying File Variables.
                                                              (line  35)
* manipulating paragraphs:               Paragraphs.          (line   6)
* manipulating sentences:                Sentences.           (line   6)
* manipulating text:                     Text.                (line   6)
* manual page:                           Man Page.            (line   6)
* manual pages, on MS-DOS/MS-Windows:    Man Page.            (line  46)
* manual version backups:                Version Backups.     (line  24)
* manuals, on-line:                      Misc Help.           (line   6)
* Marathi:                               International.       (line   6)
* mark:                                  Mark.                (line   6)
* mark rectangle:                        Rectangles.          (line  13)
* mark ring:                             Mark Ring.           (line   6)
* marking executable files (in Dired):   Marks vs Flags.      (line  22)
* marking many files (in Dired):         Marks vs Flags.      (line   6)
* marking sections of text:              Marking Objects.     (line   6)
* marking subdirectories (in Dired):     Marks vs Flags.      (line  30)
* marking symbolic links (in Dired):     Marks vs Flags.      (line  26)
* Markov chain:                          Dissociated Press.   (line  37)
* matching parentheses:                  Matching.            (line   6)
* matching parenthesis and braces, moving to: Moving by Parens.
                                                              (line   6)
* maximized, command-line argument:      Window Size X.       (line  23)
* maximum buffer size exceeded, error message: Visiting.      (line  71)
* Mayan calendar:                        Calendar Systems.    (line  35)
* Mayan calendar round:                  Mayan Calendar.      (line  64)
* Mayan haab calendar:                   Mayan Calendar.      (line  56)
* Mayan long count:                      Mayan Calendar.      (line  36)
* Mayan tzolkin calendar:                Mayan Calendar.      (line  48)
* memory full:                           Memory Full.         (line   6)
* menu bar <1>:                          Table of Resources.  (line  74)
* menu bar:                              Menu Bar.            (line   6)
* menu bar access using keyboard (MS-Windows): Windows Keyboard.
                                                              (line  17)
* menu bar appearance:                   Standard Faces.      (line 156)
* Menu Bar mode:                         Menu Bars.           (line   6)
* menu face, no effect if customized:    Standard Faces.      (line 156)
* Menu X Resources (LessTif widgets):    LessTif Resources.   (line   6)
* Menu X Resources (Lucid widgets):      Lucid Resources.     (line   6)
* Mercurial:                             Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  59)
* merge buffer (Emerge):                 Overview of Emerge.  (line  21)
* merges, failed:                        Comparing Files.     (line  46)
* merging changes:                       Merging.             (line   6)
* merging files:                         Emerge.              (line   6)
* message:                               Sending Mail.        (line   6)
* Message mode:                          Mail Commands.       (line   6)
* Message mode for sending mail:         Mail Methods.        (line   6)
* message number:                        Rmail Basics.        (line  20)
* messages saved from echo area:         Echo Area.           (line  36)
* Meta:                                  User Input.          (line  23)
* Meta (under MS-DOS):                   MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  20)
* Meta commands and words:               Words.               (line   6)
* Metafont mode:                         Program Modes.       (line  21)
* MH mail interface:                     Mail Methods.        (line   6)
* Microsoft Windows:                     Microsoft Windows.   (line   6)
* Midnight mode:                         Kill Buffer.         (line  58)
* MIME:                                  Mail Misc.           (line   6)
* MIME messages (Rmail):                 Rmail Display.       (line  55)
* minibuffer <1>:                        Echo Area.           (line  46)
* minibuffer:                            Minibuffer.          (line   6)
* minibuffer confirmation <1>:           Select Buffer.       (line  35)
* minibuffer confirmation:               Visiting.            (line 109)
* minibuffer history:                    Minibuffer History.  (line   6)
* minibuffer history, searching:         Isearch Minibuffer.  (line   6)
* minibuffer keymaps:                    Minibuffer Maps.     (line   6)
* minibuffer-prompt face:                Standard Faces.      (line 123)
* minimizing a frame:                    Exiting.             (line  41)
* minimizing a frame at startup:         Icons X.             (line   6)
* minor mode keymap:                     Local Keymaps.       (line   6)
* minor modes:                           Minor Modes.         (line   6)
* mistakes, correcting:                  Fixit.               (line   6)
* mode hook:                             Program Modes.       (line  47)
* mode line:                             Mode Line.           (line   6)
* mode line (MS-DOS):                    MS-DOS and MULE.     (line  63)
* mode line, 3D appearance:              Optional Mode Line.  (line  80)
* mode line, mouse:                      Mode Line Mouse.     (line   6)
* mode, Abbrev:                          Abbrev Concepts.     (line  13)
* mode, archive:                         File Archives.       (line  42)
* mode, Auto Compression:                Compressed Files.    (line   6)
* mode, Auto Fill:                       Auto Fill.           (line   6)
* mode, Auto Save:                       Auto Save.           (line   6)
* mode, Auto-Revert:                     Reverting.           (line  34)
* mode, AWK:                             C Modes.             (line   6)
* mode, C:                               C Modes.             (line   6)
* mode, C++:                             C Modes.             (line   6)
* mode, Column Number:                   Optional Mode Line.  (line  23)
* mode, Comint:                          Shell Mode.          (line 152)
* mode, Compilation:                     Compilation Mode.    (line   6)
* mode, CORBA IDL:                       C Modes.             (line   6)
* mode, CRiSP:                           Emulation.           (line  10)
* mode, Delete Selection <1>:            Mouse Commands.      (line  97)
* mode, Delete Selection:                Using Region.        (line  43)
* mode, DocTeX:                          TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* mode, DocView:                         Document View.       (line   6)
* mode, Emacs-Lisp:                      Lisp Eval.           (line   6)
* mode, Enriched:                        Formatted Text.      (line   6)
* mode, Follow:                          Follow Mode.         (line   6)
* mode, Font Lock:                       Font Lock.           (line   6)
* mode, Fortran:                         Fortran.             (line   6)
* mode, Global Auto-Revert:              Reverting.           (line  34)
* mode, Hexl:                            Editing Binary Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* mode, HTML:                            HTML Mode.           (line   6)
* mode, Iswitchb:                        Iswitchb.            (line   6)
* mode, Java:                            C Modes.             (line   6)
* mode, LaTeX:                           TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* mode, Mail:                            Mail Methods.        (line   6)
* mode, major:                           Major Modes.         (line   6)
* mode, Menu Bar:                        Menu Bars.           (line   6)
* mode, Message:                         Mail Commands.       (line   6)
* mode, minor:                           Minor Modes.         (line   6)
* mode, Mouse Wheel:                     Wheeled Mice.        (line   6)
* mode, MSB:                             Buffer Menus.        (line  16)
* mode, nXML <1>:                        HTML Mode.           (line  69)
* mode, nXML:                            Text.                (line  22)
* mode, Objective C:                     C Modes.             (line   6)
* mode, Outline:                         Outline Mode.        (line   6)
* mode, Overwrite:                       Minor Modes.         (line  65)
* mode, Paragraph-Indent Text:           Text Mode.           (line  26)
* mode, Pike:                            C Modes.             (line   6)
* mode, Scroll Bar:                      Scroll Bars.         (line   6)
* mode, Scroll-all:                      Window Convenience.  (line  25)
* mode, SGML:                            HTML Mode.           (line   6)
* mode, Shell:                           Shell Mode.          (line   6)
* mode, SliTeX:                          TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* mode, tar:                             File Archives.       (line   6)
* mode, Term:                            Term Mode.           (line   6)
* mode, TeX:                             TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* mode, Text:                            Text Mode.           (line   6)
* mode, Tool Bar:                        Tool Bars.           (line   6)
* mode, Transient Mark:                  Persistent Mark.     (line   6)
* mode, View:                            Misc File Ops.       (line   9)
* mode, Winner:                          Window Convenience.  (line   6)
* mode, XML:                             Text.                (line  22)
* modes for programming languages:       Program Modes.       (line   6)
* modes, Long Lines:                     Longlines.           (line   6)
* modes, Refill:                         Refill.              (line   6)
* modification dates:                    Time Stamps.         (line   6)
* modified (buffer):                     Visiting.            (line  47)
* modifier keys <1>:                     User Input.          (line  23)
* modifier keys:                         Modifier Keys.       (line   6)
* Modula2 mode:                          Program Modes.       (line  21)
* moon, phases of:                       Lunar Phases.        (line   6)
* Morse code:                            Amusements.          (line  32)
* Motif key bindings:                    Emulation.           (line   6)
* mouse avoidance:                       Mouse Avoidance.     (line   6)
* mouse button events:                   Mouse Buttons.       (line   6)
* mouse buttons (what they do):          Mouse Commands.      (line   6)
* mouse on mode line:                    Mode Line Mouse.     (line   6)
* mouse pointer:                         Display Custom.      (line  30)
* mouse pointer color, command-line argument: Colors.         (line  42)
* mouse support:                         Text-Only Mouse.     (line   6)
* mouse support under MS-DOS:            MS-DOS Mouse.        (line   6)
* mouse wheel:                           Wheeled Mice.        (line   6)
* Mouse Wheel minor mode:                Wheeled Mice.        (line   6)
* mouse, and MS-Windows:                 Windows Mouse.       (line   6)
* mouse, set number of buttons:          MS-DOS Mouse.        (line  18)
* move to beginning or end of function:  Moving by Defuns.    (line  19)
* movemail:                              Remote Mailboxes.    (line   6)
* movemail program:                      Movemail.            (line   6)
* movement:                              Moving Point.        (line   6)
* moving files (in Dired):               Operating on Files.  (line  55)
* moving inside the calendar:            Calendar Motion.     (line   6)
* moving point:                          Moving Point.        (line   6)
* moving text:                           Yanking.             (line   6)
* moving the cursor:                     Moving Point.        (line   6)
* MS-DOG:                                MS-DOS.              (line   6)
* MS-DOS end-of-line conversion:         Coding Systems.      (line  55)
* MS-DOS peculiarities:                  MS-DOS.              (line   6)
* MS-Windows codepages:                  MS-DOS and MULE.     (line  87)
* MS-Windows keyboard shortcuts:         Windows Keyboard.    (line   9)
* MS-Windows, Emacs peculiarities:       Microsoft Windows.   (line   6)
* MSB mode:                              Buffer Menus.        (line  16)
* MULE:                                  International.       (line   6)
* multibyte characters:                  International.       (line   6)
* multibyte operation, and Lisp files:   Enabling Multibyte.  (line  29)
* multiple displays:                     Multiple Displays.   (line   6)
* multiple views of outline:             Outline Views.       (line   6)
* multiple windows in Emacs:             Windows.             (line   6)
* multiple-file search and replace:      Tags Search.         (line   6)
* Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions: Mail Misc.           (line   6)
* mustatement:                           Dissociated Press.   (line  45)
* narrowing:                             Narrowing.           (line   6)
* narrowing, and line number display:    Optional Mode Line.  (line  31)
* navigation:                            Hyperlinking.        (line   6)
* net use, and printing on MS-Windows:   Windows Printing.    (line  38)
* networked printers (MS-Windows):       Windows Printing.    (line  38)
* newline:                               Inserting Text.      (line  11)
* newlines, hard and soft:               Hard and Soft Newlines.
                                                              (line   6)
* Next Error Follow mode:                Compilation Mode.    (line 110)
* NFS and quitting:                      Quitting.            (line  60)
* nil:                                   Glossary.            (line 946)
* no-break hyphen, display:              Text Display.        (line  41)
* no-break space, display:               Text Display.        (line  41)
* non-ASCII characters in .emacs:        Init Non-ASCII.      (line   6)
* non-ASCII keys, binding:               Init Non-ASCII.      (line   6)
* non-greedy regexp matching:            Regexps.             (line  78)
* non-integral number of lines in a window: Optional Mode Line.
                                                              (line  80)
* non-selected windows, mode line appearance: Optional Mode Line.
                                                              (line  86)
* non-strict locking (RCS):              RCS and SCCS.        (line   6)
* non-window terminals:                  Non-Window Terminals.
                                                              (line   6)
* nonincremental search:                 Nonincremental Search.
                                                              (line   6)
* normal hook:                           Hooks.               (line  21)
* nroff:                                 Nroff Mode.          (line   6)
* NSA:                                   Mail Amusements.     (line   6)
* numeric arguments:                     Arguments.           (line   6)
* nXML mode <1>:                         Text.                (line  22)
* nXML mode:                             HTML Mode.           (line  69)
* Objective C mode:                      C Modes.             (line   6)
* Octave mode:                           Program Modes.       (line  21)
* omer count:                            Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* on-line manuals:                       Misc Help.           (line   6)
* open file:                             Visiting.            (line   6)
* open-parenthesis in leftmost column:   Left Margin Paren.   (line   6)
* operating on files in Dired:           Operating on Files.  (line   6)
* operations on a marked region:         Using Region.        (line   6)
* option, user:                          Variables.           (line   6)
* options (command line):                Emacs Invocation.    (line   6)
* other editors:                         Emulation.           (line   6)
* out of memory:                         Memory Full.         (line   6)
* Outline mode:                          Outline Mode.        (line   6)
* outline with multiple views:           Outline Views.       (line   6)
* outragedy:                             Dissociated Press.   (line  45)
* overlays at character position:        Editing Format Info. (line  25)
* override character terminal color support: Colors.          (line  51)
* Overwrite mode:                        Minor Modes.         (line  65)
* page-at-a-time:                        Paging in Term.      (line   6)
* pages:                                 Pages.               (line   6)
* Pango font name:                       GTK styles.          (line 134)
* Paragraph-Indent Text mode:            Text Mode.           (line  26)
* paragraphs:                            Paragraphs.          (line   6)
* parasha, weekly:                       Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* parentheses, displaying matches:       Matching.            (line   6)
* parentheses, moving across:            Moving by Parens.    (line   6)
* parenthesis in column zero and fontification: Font Lock.    (line  60)
* parenthetical groupings:               Moving by Parens.    (line   6)
* parts of the screen:                   Screen.              (line   6)
* paste:                                 Clipboard.           (line  20)
* pasting:                               Yanking.             (line   6)
* patches, editing:                      Diff Mode.           (line   6)
* patches, sending:                      Sending Patches.     (line   6)
* PC key bindings:                       Emulation.           (line   6)
* PC selection:                          Emulation.           (line   6)
* PCL-CVS:                               VC Directory Mode.   (line  14)
* PDB:                                   Debuggers.           (line   6)
* PDF file:                              Document View.       (line   6)
* per-buffer variables:                  Locals.              (line  27)
* per-directory local variables:         Directory Variables. (line   6)
* Perl mode:                             Program Modes.       (line  21)
* Perldb:                                Debuggers.           (line   6)
* Persian calendar:                      Calendar Systems.    (line  47)
* phases of the moon:                    Lunar Phases.        (line   6)
* Picture mode and rectangles:           Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line   6)
* pictures:                              Picture Mode.        (line   6)
* Pike mode:                             C Modes.             (line   6)
* point:                                 Point.               (line   6)
* point location:                        Position Info.       (line  38)
* point location, on MS-DOS:             Text and Binary.     (line  19)
* Polish:                                International.       (line   6)
* Pong game:                             Amusements.          (line  35)
* POP mailboxes:                         Remote Mailboxes.    (line  17)
* position and size of Emacs frame:      Window Size X.       (line   6)
* Postscript file:                       Document View.       (line   6)
* PostScript mode:                       Program Modes.       (line  21)
* prefix arguments:                      Arguments.           (line   6)
* prefix key:                            Keys.                (line  11)
* preprocessor highlighting:             Other C Commands.    (line  67)
* presidentagon:                         Dissociated Press.   (line  19)
* pretty-printer:                        Program Indent.      (line  19)
* primary Rmail file:                    Rmail Basics.        (line   6)
* primary selection:                     Cut/Paste Other App. (line   6)
* printing:                              Printing.            (line   6)
* printing files (in Dired):             Operating on Files.  (line  99)
* Printing package:                      Printing Package.    (line   6)
* printing under MS-DOS:                 MS-DOS Processes.    (line  29)
* program building:                      Building.            (line   6)
* program editing:                       Programs.            (line   6)
* Prolog mode:                           Program Modes.       (line  21)
* prompt:                                Minibuffer.          (line  13)
* prompt, shell:                         Shell Prompts.       (line   6)
* properbose:                            Dissociated Press.   (line  45)
* PS file:                               Document View.       (line   6)
* puzzles:                               Amusements.          (line  13)
* Python mode:                           Program Modes.       (line  21)
* query replace:                         Query Replace.       (line   6)
* quitting:                              Quitting.            (line  32)
* quitting (in search):                  Error in Isearch.    (line  22)
* quitting Emacs:                        Exiting.             (line   6)
* quitting on MS-DOS:                    MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  12)
* quoting:                               Inserting Text.      (line  26)
* quoting file names:                    Quoted File Names.   (line   6)
* rar:                                   File Archives.       (line  42)
* RCS:                                   Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  20)
* read-only buffer:                      Misc Buffer.         (line  18)
* read-only text, killing:               Kill Options.        (line   6)
* reading mail:                          Rmail.               (line   6)
* reading netnews:                       Gnus.                (line   6)
* rebinding keys, permanently:           Init File.           (line   6)
* rebinding major mode keys:             Init Rebinding.      (line   6)
* rebinding mouse buttons:               Mouse Buttons.       (line   6)
* rebinding non-ASCII keys:              Init Non-ASCII.      (line   6)
* rectangle:                             Rectangles.          (line   6)
* rectangle highlighting:                CUA Bindings.        (line  22)
* rectangles and Picture mode:           Rectangles in Picture.
                                                              (line   6)
* recursive copying:                     Operating on Files.  (line  43)
* recursive deletion:                    Dired Deletion.      (line  47)
* recursive editing level:               Recursive Edit.      (line   6)
* recycle bin:                           Misc File Ops.       (line  45)
* redefining keys, this session:         Rebinding.           (line   6)
* redo:                                  Undo.                (line  29)
* references, LaTeX:                     TeX Misc.            (line  15)
* Refill minor mode:                     Refill.              (line   6)
* refilling text, word processor style <1>: Refill.           (line   6)
* refilling text, word processor style:  Longlines.           (line   6)
* refreshing displayed files:            Dired Updating.      (line   6)
* RefTeX package:                        TeX Misc.            (line  15)
* regexp:                                Regexp Search.       (line   6)
* region:                                Mark.                (line   6)
* region highlighting:                   Persistent Mark.     (line   6)
* registered file:                       VCS Concepts.        (line   6)
* registers:                             Registers.           (line   6)
* Registry (MS-Windows):                 Resources.           (line  14)
* registry, setting environment variables and resources on MS-Windows: MS-Windows Registry.
                                                              (line   6)
* regular expression:                    Regexp Search.       (line   6)
* related files:                         Other C Commands.    (line 107)
* reload files:                          Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line   6)
* remember editing session:              Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line   6)
* remote file access:                    Remote Files.        (line   6)
* remote host:                           Remote Host.         (line   6)
* remote host, debugging on:             Starting GUD.        (line  59)
* remote repositories:                   Remote Repositories. (line   6)
* remote repositories (CVS):             CVS Options.         (line  29)
* remove indentation:                    Indentation Commands.
                                                              (line  47)
* renaming files (in Dired):             Operating on Files.  (line  55)
* repeating a command:                   Repeating.           (line   6)
* replacement:                           Replace.             (line   6)
* reply to a message:                    Rmail Reply.         (line  33)
* reporting bugs:                        Checklist.           (line   6)
* repository:                            VCS Concepts.        (line   6)
* reread a file:                         Reverting.           (line   6)
* resizing minibuffer:                   Minibuffer Edit.     (line  26)
* resolving conflicts:                   Merging.             (line  46)
* resource files for GTK:                GTK resources.       (line   6)
* resource name, command-line argument:  Resources.           (line  71)
* resource values, command-line argument: Resources.          (line  88)
* resources:                             Resources.           (line   6)
* restore session:                       Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line   6)
* restriction:                           Narrowing.           (line   6)
* retrying a failed message:             Rmail Reply.         (line  64)
* reverse order in POP inboxes:          Remote Mailboxes.    (line  65)
* reverse video, command-line argument:  Colors.              (line  48)
* revision:                              VCS Concepts.        (line  19)
* revision ID:                           VCS Concepts.        (line  19)
* revision ID to check in/out:           Advanced C-x v v.    (line   6)
* risky variable:                        Safe File Variables. (line  27)
* Rlogin:                                Remote Host.         (line   6)
* Rmail:                                 Rmail.               (line   6)
* Rmail file sorting:                    Rmail Sorting.       (line   6)
* Romanian:                              International.       (line   6)
* rosh hodesh:                           Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* rot13 code:                            Rmail Rot13.         (line   6)
* Ruby mode:                             Program Modes.       (line  21)
* running a hook:                        Hooks.               (line   6)
* running Lisp functions:                Building.            (line   6)
* saved echo area messages:              Echo Area.           (line  36)
* saving a setting:                      Changing a Variable. (line 114)
* saving file name in a register:        RegFiles.            (line   6)
* saving files:                          Visiting.            (line  28)
* saving keyboard macros:                Save Keyboard Macro. (line  17)
* saving number in a register:           RegNumbers.          (line   6)
* saving position in a register:         RegPos.              (line   6)
* saving rectangle in a register:        RegRect.             (line   6)
* saving sessions:                       Saving Emacs Sessions.
                                                              (line   6)
* saving text in a register:             RegText.             (line   6)
* saving window configuration in a register: RegConfig.       (line   6)
* SCCS:                                  Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line   9)
* screen:                                Screen.              (line   6)
* screen reader software, MS-Windows:    Windows Misc.        (line   8)
* script mode:                           Initial Options.     (line  61)
* Scroll Bar mode:                       Scroll Bars.         (line   6)
* Scroll-all mode:                       Window Convenience.  (line  25)
* scrollbar width:                       Table of Resources.  (line 101)
* scrolling:                             Scrolling.           (line  10)
* scrolling all windows:                 Emulation.           (line   6)
* scrolling in the calendar:             Scroll Calendar.     (line   6)
* scrolling windows together:            Window Convenience.  (line  25)
* SDB:                                   Debuggers.           (line   6)
* search and replace in multiple files:  Tags Search.         (line   6)
* search and replace in multiple files (in Dired): Operating on Files.
                                                              (line 127)
* search multiple files (in Dired):      Operating on Files.  (line 119)
* search ring:                           Repeat Isearch.      (line  43)
* search-and-replace commands:           Replace.             (line   6)
* searching:                             Search.              (line   6)
* searching Dired buffers:               Dired Navigation.    (line  20)
* searching documentation efficiently:   Help.                (line  29)
* searching in Rmail:                    Rmail Motion.        (line  68)
* searching multiple files via Dired:    Misc Dired Features. (line   9)
* secondary selection:                   Secondary Selection. (line   6)
* sections of manual pages:              Man Page.            (line  22)
* selected buffer:                       Buffers.             (line  23)
* selected window:                       Basic Window.        (line  12)
* selecting buffers in other windows:    Pop Up Window.       (line   6)
* selection, primary:                    Cut/Paste Other App. (line   6)
* selective display:                     Selective Display.   (line   6)
* selective undo:                        Undo.                (line  52)
* self-documentation:                    Help.                (line   6)
* Semantic package:                      Semantic.            (line   6)
* sending mail:                          Sending Mail.        (line   6)
* sending patches for GNU Emacs:         Sending Patches.     (line   6)
* Sendmail:                              Mail Sending.        (line  43)
* sentences:                             Sentences.           (line   6)
* server file:                           emacsclient Options. (line  58)
* server, using Emacs as:                Emacs Server.        (line   6)
* server-side fonts:                     Fonts.               (line 190)
* set buffer face height:                Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line  25)
* setting a mark:                        Mark.                (line   6)
* setting variables:                     Examining.           (line   6)
* settings:                              Easy Customization.  (line   6)
* settings, how to save:                 Changing a Variable. (line 114)
* settings, how to set:                  Changing a Variable. (line  37)
* sexp:                                  Expressions.         (line   6)
* sexp diary entries:                    Sexp Diary Entries.  (line   6)
* SGML mode:                             HTML Mode.           (line   6)
* shadow files:                          File Shadowing.      (line   6)
* shell commands:                        Shell.               (line   6)
* shell commands, Dired:                 Shell Commands in Dired.
                                                              (line   6)
* SHELL environment variable:            Interactive Shell.   (line  32)
* Shell mode:                            Shell Mode.          (line   6)
* shell scripts, and local file variables: Specifying File Variables.
                                                              (line  35)
* Shell-script mode:                     Program Modes.       (line  21)
* shelves in version control:            VC Directory Commands.
                                                              (line  52)
* shift-selection <1>:                   Shift Selection.     (line   6)
* shift-selection:                       Setting Mark.        (line  56)
* Show Paren mode:                       Matching.            (line  33)
* showing hidden subdirectories (Dired): Hiding Subdirectories.
                                                              (line   6)
* shrink a table cell:                   Cell Commands.       (line  36)
* shy group, in regexp:                  Regexp Backslash.    (line  47)
* Simula mode:                           Program Modes.       (line  21)
* simulation of middle mouse button:     Windows Mouse.       (line   8)
* simultaneous editing:                  Interlocking.        (line   6)
* single-frame terminals:                Non-Window Terminals.
                                                              (line   6)
* site init file:                        Init File.           (line  25)
* site-start.el file, not loading:       Initial Options.     (line  82)
* site-start.el, the site startup file:  Init File.           (line  25)
* size of minibuffer:                    Minibuffer Edit.     (line  26)
* skeletons:                             Text.                (line  33)
* slashes repeated in file name:         Minibuffer File.     (line  32)
* SliTeX mode:                           TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* Slovak:                                International.       (line   6)
* Slovenian:                             International.       (line   6)
* slow display during scrolling:         Font Lock.           (line  70)
* Smerge mode:                           Comparing Files.     (line  46)
* SMTP:                                  Mail Sending.        (line  43)
* Snake:                                 Amusements.          (line  46)
* soft hyphen, display:                  Text Display.        (line  41)
* soft newline:                          Hard and Soft Newlines.
                                                              (line   6)
* solitaire:                             Amusements.          (line  38)
* sorting:                               Sorting.             (line   6)
* sorting diary entries:                 Fancy Diary Display. (line   8)
* sorting Dired buffer:                  Dired Updating.      (line  67)
* sorting Rmail file:                    Rmail Sorting.       (line   6)
* Spanish:                               International.       (line   6)
* specific version control system:       Advanced C-x v v.    (line  21)
* specify default font from the command line: Font X.         (line  11)
* specify end-of-line conversion:        Text Coding.         (line  31)
* specifying fullscreen for Emacs frame: Window Size X.       (line   6)
* speedbar:                              Speedbar.            (line   6)
* spell-checking the active region:      Spelling.            (line  56)
* spelling, checking and correcting:     Spelling.            (line   6)
* splash screen:                         Initial Options.     (line  87)
* split table cell:                      Cell Commands.       (line  18)
* splitting columns:                     Two-Column.          (line   6)
* standard colors on a character terminal: Colors.            (line  51)
* standard fontset:                      Defining Fontsets.   (line   6)
* start iconified, command-line argument: Icons X.            (line   8)
* starting Emacs:                        Entering Emacs.      (line   6)
* startup (command line arguments):      Emacs Invocation.    (line   6)
* startup (init file):                   Init File.           (line   6)
* startup fontset:                       Defining Fontsets.   (line  22)
* startup message:                       Initial Options.     (line  87)
* startup screen:                        Entering Emacs.      (line  11)
* stashes in version control:            VC Directory Commands.
                                                              (line  52)
* string substitution:                   Replace.             (line   6)
* string syntax:                         Init Syntax.         (line  31)
* StudlyCaps:                            Amusements.          (line  41)
* StudlyCaps, making them readable:      Glasses.             (line   6)
* style (for indentation):               Custom C Indent.     (line   6)
* subdirectories in Dired:               Subdirectories in Dired.
                                                              (line   6)
* subprocesses on MS-Windows:            Windows Processes.   (line   6)
* subscribe groups:                      Summary of Gnus.     (line  33)
* subshell:                              Shell.               (line   6)
* subtree (Outline mode):                Outline Visibility.  (line  63)
* Subversion:                            Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  36)
* summary (Rmail):                       Rmail Summary.       (line   6)
* summing time intervals:                Time Intervals.      (line   6)
* sunrise and sunset:                    Sunrise/Sunset.      (line   6)
* Super (under MS-DOS):                  MS-DOS Keyboard.     (line  20)
* suspending:                            Exiting.             (line  41)
* suspicious constructions in C, C++:    Other C Commands.    (line  82)
* SVN:                                   Version Control Systems.
                                                              (line  36)
* switch buffers:                        Select Buffer.       (line   6)
* switches (command line):               Emacs Invocation.    (line   6)
* symbolic links (creation in Dired):    Operating on Files.  (line  70)
* symbolic links (creation):             Misc File Ops.       (line  82)
* symbolic links (visiting):             File Aliases.        (line   6)
* synchronizing windows:                 Follow Mode.         (line   6)
* synchronous X mode:                    Table of Resources.  (line 115)
* syntax highlighting and coloring:      Font Lock.           (line   6)
* syntax of regexps:                     Regexps.             (line   6)
* syntax table:                          Syntax.              (line   6)
* t:                                     Glossary.            (line 946)
* tab stops:                             Tab Stops.           (line   6)
* table column commands:                 Column Commands.     (line   6)
* table creation:                        Table Creation.      (line   6)
* table dimensions:                      Measuring Tables.    (line   6)
* table for HTML and LaTeX:              Table Misc.          (line  10)
* table in language format:              Table Misc.          (line  10)
* table mode:                            Text Based Tables.   (line   6)
* table recognition:                     Table Recognition.   (line   6)
* table row commands:                    Row Commands.        (line   6)
* table to text:                         Table Conversion.    (line   6)
* tables, indentation for:               Tab Stops.           (line   6)
* tabs:                                  Indentation.         (line   6)
* tags and tag tables:                   Tags.                (line   6)
* tags and version control:              Revision Tags.       (line   6)
* tags, C++:                             Tags.                (line  34)
* tags-based completion:                 Symbol Completion.   (line  25)
* Tar mode:                              File Archives.       (line   6)
* Tcl mode:                              Program Modes.       (line  21)
* techniquitous:                         Dissociated Press.   (line  37)
* Telnet:                                Remote Host.         (line   6)
* templates:                             Text.                (line  33)
* TERM environment variable:             Checklist.           (line  87)
* Term mode:                             Term Mode.           (line   6)
* terminal emulators, mouse support:     Text-Only Mouse.     (line   6)
* terminal, serial:                      Serial Terminal.     (line   6)
* termscript file:                       Checklist.           (line  87)
* Tetris:                                Amusements.          (line  46)
* TeX encoding:                          TeX Misc.            (line  11)
* TeX mode:                              TeX Mode.            (line   6)
* TEXEDIT environment variable:          Emacs Server.        (line  32)
* TEXINPUTS environment variable:        TeX Print.           (line  54)
* text:                                  Text.                (line   6)
* text and binary files on MS-DOS/MS-Windows: Text and Binary.
                                                              (line   6)
* text colors, from command line:        Colors.              (line   6)
* Text mode:                             Text Mode.           (line   6)
* text properties at point:              International Chars. (line  58)
* text properties of characters:         Editing Format Info. (line  25)
* text to table:                         Table Conversion.    (line   6)
* text-based tables:                     Text Based Tables.   (line   6)
* text-based tables, split a cell:       Cell Commands.       (line  18)
* text/enriched MIME format:             Formatted Text.      (line  17)
* Thai:                                  International.       (line   6)
* Tibetan:                               International.       (line   6)
* time (on mode line):                   Optional Mode Line.  (line  48)
* time intervals, summing:               Time Intervals.      (line   6)
* time stamps:                           Time Stamps.         (line   6)
* timeclock:                             Time Intervals.      (line   6)
* TLS encryption (Rmail):                Remote Mailboxes.    (line  70)
* toggling marks (in Dired):             Marks vs Flags.      (line  76)
* tool bar:                              Table of Resources.  (line 122)
* Tool Bar mode:                         Tool Bars.           (line   6)
* tooltips <1>:                          Help Echo.           (line   6)
* tooltips:                              Tooltips.            (line   6)
* tooltips with GUD:                     Debugger Operation.  (line  26)
* top level:                             Mode Line.           (line   6)
* tower of Hanoi:                        Amusements.          (line   6)
* TPU:                                   Emulation.           (line  28)
* trailing whitespace:                   Useless Whitespace.  (line   6)
* Tramp:                                 Remote Files.        (line   6)
* Transient Mark mode:                   Persistent Mark.     (line   6)
* transposition of expressions:          Expressions.         (line  58)
* trash:                                 Misc File Ops.       (line  45)
* triple clicks:                         Mouse Buttons.       (line  28)
* truenames of files:                    File Aliases.        (line  27)
* truncation <1>:                        Line Truncation.     (line   6)
* truncation:                            Continuation Lines.  (line  20)
* trunk (version control):               Branches.            (line   6)
* Turkish:                               International.       (line   6)
* turn multibyte support on or off:      Enabling Multibyte.  (line  11)
* two directories (in Dired):            Operating on Files.  (line  25)
* two-column editing:                    Two-Column.          (line   6)
* types of log file:                     Types of Log File.   (line   6)
* typos, fixing:                         Fixit.               (line   6)
* unbalanced parentheses and quotes:     Parentheses.         (line   6)
* uncompression:                         Compressed Files.    (line   6)
* undecided, coding system:              Coding Systems.      (line  85)
* undeletion (Rmail):                    Rmail Deletion.      (line  44)
* undigestify:                           Rmail Digest.        (line   6)
* undisplayable characters:              International Chars. (line  18)
* undo:                                  Undo.                (line   6)
* undo limit:                            Undo.                (line  65)
* undoing window configuration changes:  Window Convenience.  (line   6)
* Unibyte operation:                     Unibyte Mode.        (line   6)
* unibyte operation, and Lisp files:     Enabling Multibyte.  (line  29)
* Unicode <1>:                           International Chars. (line  11)
* Unicode:                               Inserting Text.      (line  59)
* unique buffer names:                   Uniquify.            (line   6)
* unmarking files (in Dired):            Marks vs Flags.      (line  44)
* unsubscribe groups:                    Summary of Gnus.     (line  33)
* untranslated file system:              Text and Binary.     (line  50)
* unused lines:                          Useless Whitespace.  (line  26)
* unzip archives:                        File Archives.       (line  42)
* upcase file names:                     Transforming File Names.
                                                              (line  21)
* updating Dired buffer:                 Dired Updating.      (line   6)
* URL, viewing in help:                  Help Mode.           (line  38)
* URLs:                                  Browse-URL.          (line   6)
* URLs, activating:                      Goto Address mode.   (line   6)
* use-hard-newlines:                     Hard and Soft Newlines.
                                                              (line   6)
* user name for remote file access:      Remote Files.        (line  56)
* user option:                           Variables.           (line   6)
* user options, how to set:              Changing a Variable. (line  37)
* userenced:                             Dissociated Press.   (line  45)
* using tab stops in making tables:      Tab Stops.           (line   6)
* usual erasure key:                     DEL Does Not Delete. (line   6)
* UTF-8:                                 Language Environments.
                                                              (line  26)
* variable:                              Variables.           (line   6)
* variable pitch mode:                   Temporary Face Changes.
                                                              (line  33)
* variables, how to set:                 Changing a Variable. (line  37)
* vc-resolve-conflicts:                  Merging.             (line  65)
* version backups:                       Version Backups.     (line   6)
* version control:                       Version Control.     (line   6)
* version control log:                   Types of Log File.   (line   6)
* VERSION_CONTROL environment variable:  Backup Names.        (line  42)
* vertical scroll bars, command-line argument: Misc X.        (line   8)
* VHDL mode:                             Program Modes.       (line  21)
* vi:                                    Emulation.           (line   6)
* Vietnamese:                            International.       (line   6)
* View mode:                             Misc File Ops.       (line   9)
* viewing:                               Misc File Ops.       (line   9)
* viewing web pages in help:             Help Mode.           (line  38)
* views of an outline:                   Outline Views.       (line   6)
* visiting files:                        Visiting.            (line   6)
* visiting files, command-line argument: Action Arguments.    (line  12)
* Visual Line mode:                      Visual Line Mode.    (line  13)
* Watching expressions in GDB:           Watch Expressions.   (line   6)
* watching files (CVS):                  CVS Options.         (line  21)
* wdired mode:                           Wdired.              (line   6)
* Web:                                   Browse-URL.          (line   6)
* web pages, viewing in help:            Help Mode.           (line  38)
* weeks, which day they start on:        Move to Beginning or End.
                                                              (line  33)
* wheel, mouse:                          Wheeled Mice.        (line   6)
* whitespace, trailing:                  Useless Whitespace.  (line   6)
* wide block cursor:                     Cursor Display.      (line  28)
* widening:                              Narrowing.           (line   6)
* widgets at buffer position:            Editing Format Info. (line  25)
* width and height of Emacs frame:       Window Size X.       (line   6)
* width of the scroll bar:               Scroll Bars.         (line  44)
* wildcard characters in file names:     Visiting.            (line  80)
* Windmove package:                      Window Convenience.  (line  14)
* window configuration changes, undoing: Window Convenience.  (line   6)
* window manager, keys stolen by:        User Input.          (line  49)
* Windows clipboard support:             MS-DOS Mouse.        (line  29)
* windows in Emacs:                      Windows.             (line   6)
* Windows system menu:                   Windows Keyboard.    (line  86)
* windows, synchronizing:                Follow Mode.         (line   6)
* Winner mode:                           Window Convenience.  (line   6)
* word processing:                       Formatted Text.      (line   6)
* word search:                           Word Search.         (line   6)
* word wrap <1>:                         Longlines.           (line   6)
* word wrap <2>:                         Visual Line Mode.    (line   6)
* word wrap:                             Continuation Lines.  (line  35)
* words:                                 Words.               (line   6)
* words, case conversion:                Case.                (line  24)
* WordStar:                              Emulation.           (line   6)
* work file:                             VCS Concepts.        (line  13)
* World Wide Web:                        Browse-URL.          (line   6)
* wrapping:                              Continuation Lines.  (line   6)
* WYSIWYG:                               Formatted Text.      (line   6)
* X cutting and pasting:                 Cut/Paste Other App. (line   6)
* X defaults file:                       Fonts.               (line  18)
* X input methods:                       Table of Resources.  (line 133)
* X Logical Font Description:            Fonts.               (line 106)
* X resources:                           Resources.           (line   6)
* X resources file:                      Fonts.               (line  18)
* X selection:                           Cut/Paste Other App. (line   6)
* XDB:                                   Debuggers.           (line   6)
* XIM:                                   Table of Resources.  (line 133)
* XLFD:                                  Fonts.               (line 106)
* XML schema:                            HTML Mode.           (line  69)
* xterm:                                 Text-Only Mouse.     (line   8)
* yahrzeits <1>:                         Sexp Diary Entries.  (line 176)
* yahrzeits:                             From Other Calendar. (line  65)
* yanking:                               Yanking.             (line   6)
* yanking and text properties:           Kill Ring.           (line  25)
* yanking previous kills:                Earlier Kills.       (line   6)
* zip:                                   File Archives.       (line  42)
* Zippy:                                 Amusements.          (line  52)
* Zmacs mode:                            Persistent Mark.     (line   6)
* zoo:                                   File Archives.       (line  42)
* ~/.emacs.d/gtkrc file:                 GTK resources.       (line   6)
* ~/.gtkrc-2.0 file:                     GTK resources.       (line   6)
* ~/.Xdefaults file:                     Resources.           (line   6)
* ~/.Xresources file:                    Resources.           (line   6)



Tag Table:
Node: Top1205
Node: Distrib51935
Ref: Distrib-Footnote-154629
Node: Intro54977
Node: Screen56969
Node: Point59943
Ref: Point-Footnote-161747
Node: Echo Area61931
Node: Mode Line64875
Node: Menu Bar70546
Node: User Input72351
Ref: User Input-Footnote-175115
Node: Keys75175
Node: Commands77599
Node: Entering Emacs80035
Ref: Entering Emacs-Footnote-183469
Node: Exiting83681
Node: Basic87418
Node: Inserting Text88522
Node: Moving Point91688
Node: Erasing97303
Node: Basic Undo99176
Node: Basic Files100319
Node: Basic Help101919
Node: Blank Lines102493
Node: Continuation Lines103897
Node: Position Info106211
Node: Arguments109660
Node: Repeating113835
Node: Minibuffer115051
Node: Minibuffer File117190
Node: Minibuffer Edit119939
Node: Completion123047
Node: Completion Example124630
Node: Completion Commands125615
Node: Strict Completion129490
Node: Completion Options131082
Node: Minibuffer History133845
Node: Repetition137683
Node: Passwords140183
Node: M-x141614
Node: Help144162
Node: Help Summary147044
Node: Key Help150473
Node: Name Help151806
Node: Apropos154723
Node: Help Mode159277
Node: Library Keywords160989
Node: Language Help163238
Node: Misc Help164288
Node: Help Files166889
Node: Help Echo168401
Node: Mark169364
Node: Setting Mark171604
Ref: Setting Mark-Footnote-1174569
Node: Marking Objects174868
Node: Using Region177390
Node: Mark Ring179378
Node: Global Mark Ring181918
Node: Shift Selection182544
Node: Persistent Mark184233
Ref: Persistent Mark-Footnote-1187529
Node: Killing187663
Node: Deletion189773
Node: Killing by Lines191703
Ref: Killing by Lines-Footnote-1193496
Node: Other Kill Commands193591
Node: Kill Options195464
Node: Yanking196386
Node: Kill Ring197289
Node: Appending Kills198967
Node: Earlier Kills201375
Node: Accumulating Text204202
Node: Rectangles207369
Node: CUA Bindings212466
Node: Registers214776
Node: RegPos216471
Node: RegText217503
Node: RegRect219226
Node: RegConfig220028
Node: RegNumbers220998
Node: RegFiles221841
Node: Bookmarks222503
Node: Display225743
Node: Scrolling227514
Node: Auto Scrolling233129
Node: Horizontal Scrolling234809
Node: Follow Mode237802
Node: Faces238614
Node: Standard Faces241368
Node: Temporary Face Changes247221
Node: Font Lock248859
Node: Highlight Interactively254158
Node: Fringes258341
Node: Displaying Boundaries259646
Node: Useless Whitespace260994
Node: Selective Display262788
Node: Optional Mode Line264295
Node: Text Display269395
Node: Cursor Display272045
Node: Line Truncation273931
Node: Visual Line Mode275710
Node: Display Custom277757
Ref: baud-rate278560
Node: Search281502
Node: Incremental Search282729
Node: Basic Isearch284014
Node: Repeat Isearch286402
Node: Error in Isearch289056
Node: Special Isearch290818
Node: Isearch Yank293238
Node: Isearch Scroll294673
Node: Isearch Minibuffer296403
Node: Slow Isearch297688
Node: Nonincremental Search298821
Node: Word Search299980
Node: Regexp Search301953
Node: Regexps305027
Node: Regexp Backslash314668
Node: Regexp Example320647
Node: Search Case321205
Node: Replace322980
Node: Unconditional Replace324015
Node: Regexp Replace325277
Node: Replacement and Case328436
Node: Query Replace329706
Node: Other Repeating Search334320
Node: Fixit338412
Node: Undo339553
Ref: Undo-Footnote-1343992
Node: Transpose344248
Node: Fixing Case346786
Node: Spelling347453
Node: Keyboard Macros354824
Node: Basic Keyboard Macro356800
Node: Keyboard Macro Ring361689
Node: Keyboard Macro Counter364199
Node: Keyboard Macro Query368780
Node: Save Keyboard Macro370748
Node: Edit Keyboard Macro373859
Node: Keyboard Macro Step-Edit374982
Node: Files378112
Node: File Names380039
Ref: File Names with $382557
Node: Visiting383734
Node: Saving394089
Node: Save Commands394762
Node: Backup399596
Node: Backup Names401936
Node: Backup Deletion404854
Node: Backup Copying406249
Node: Customize Save408883
Node: Interlocking410390
Node: File Shadowing414264
Node: Time Stamps416313
Node: Reverting417211
Node: Autorevert419970
Node: Auto Reverting the Buffer Menu421822
Node: Auto Reverting Dired422637
Node: Supporting additional buffers424797
Node: Auto Save428932
Node: Auto Save Files430100
Node: Auto Save Control432709
Node: Recover434738
Node: File Aliases436840
Node: Directories438483
Node: Comparing Files441219
Node: Diff Mode443852
Node: Misc File Ops448405
Node: Compressed Files453687
Node: File Archives454554
Node: Remote Files457561
Node: Quoted File Names460997
Node: File Name Cache462576
Node: File Conveniences464358
Node: Filesets465799
Node: Buffers467728
Node: Select Buffer470481
Node: List Buffers475625
Node: Misc Buffer477414
Node: Kill Buffer480471
Node: Several Buffers483458
Node: Indirect Buffers488479
Node: Buffer Convenience490900
Node: Uniquify491424
Node: Iswitchb493263
Node: Buffer Menus494629
Node: Windows495474
Node: Basic Window496428
Node: Split Window498553
Node: Other Window501748
Node: Pop Up Window503908
Node: Force Same Window505607
Node: Change Window507428
Node: Window Convenience510517
Node: Frames512052
Node: Cut and Paste514586
Node: Mouse Commands515202
Node: Word and Line Mouse520251
Node: Cut/Paste Other App521461
Node: Secondary Selection524845
Node: Clipboard526625
Node: Mouse References527917
Node: Menu Mouse Clicks530175
Ref: Menu Mouse Clicks-Footnote-1531356
Node: Mode Line Mouse531664
Node: Creating Frames533214
Node: Frame Commands535597
Node: Fonts537358
Node: Speedbar545499
Node: Multiple Displays548361
Node: Special Buffer Frames549620
Node: Frame Parameters552374
Node: Scroll Bars554112
Ref: Scroll Bars-Footnote-1556500
Node: Wheeled Mice556617
Node: Drag and Drop557467
Node: Menu Bars558265
Node: Tool Bars559257
Node: Dialog Boxes560073
Node: Tooltips561876
Node: Mouse Avoidance562982
Node: Non-Window Terminals564457
Node: Text-Only Mouse565632
Node: International566523
Node: International Chars570543
Node: Enabling Multibyte575450
Node: Language Environments578142
Ref: Describe Language Environment582824
Ref: Language Environments-Footnote-1583832
Ref: Language Environments-Footnote-2584038
Node: Input Methods584151
Node: Select Input Method589429
Node: Coding Systems593218
Ref: Coding Systems-Footnote-1598870
Node: Recognize Coding599082
Node: Specify Coding604896
Node: Output Coding606027
Node: Text Coding608728
Node: Communication Coding612510
Node: File Name Coding616210
Node: Terminal Coding618129
Node: Fontsets620441
Ref: Fontsets-Footnote-1622713
Node: Defining Fontsets622802
Node: Modifying Fontsets627282
Node: Undisplayable Characters628614
Node: Unibyte Mode629816
Node: Charsets634067
Node: Major Modes636168
Node: Choosing Modes638652
Node: Indentation645304
Node: Indentation Commands649354
Node: Tab Stops652451
Node: Just Spaces654462
Node: Text655608
Node: Words657990
Node: Sentences660932
Node: Paragraphs664306
Node: Pages667111
Node: Filling669804
Node: Auto Fill670779
Node: Fill Commands673132
Node: Fill Prefix676941
Node: Adaptive Fill680934
Node: Refill683536
Node: Longlines684638
Node: Case687549
Node: Text Mode689866
Node: Outline Mode692162
Node: Outline Format694305
Node: Outline Motion696973
Node: Outline Visibility698557
Node: Outline Views702732
Node: Foldout703632
Node: TeX Mode707356
Ref: TeX Mode-Footnote-1709321
Node: TeX Editing709406
Node: LaTeX Editing712616
Node: TeX Print713987
Node: TeX Misc721040
Node: HTML Mode721702
Node: Nroff Mode725005
Node: Formatted Text726742
Node: Requesting Formatted Text728726
Node: Hard and Soft Newlines730401
Node: Editing Format Info731839
Node: Format Faces733638
Node: Format Colors737213
Node: Format Indentation738791
Node: Format Justification741827
Node: Format Properties744569
Node: Forcing Enriched Mode745522
Node: Text Based Tables747296
Node: Table Definition749948
Node: Table Creation752080
Node: Table Recognition752996
Node: Cell Commands754519
Node: Cell Justification756720
Node: Row Commands758765
Node: Column Commands759498
Node: Fixed Width Mode760215
Node: Table Conversion760709
Node: Measuring Tables765920
Node: Table Misc766623
Node: Programs767343
Node: Program Modes768953
Node: Defuns771853
Node: Left Margin Paren772546
Node: Moving by Defuns774933
Node: Imenu777259
Node: Which Function779218
Node: Program Indent779972
Node: Basic Indent780831
Node: Multi-line Indent783546
Node: Lisp Indent786016
Node: C Indent787577
Node: Custom C Indent789005
Node: Parentheses791788
Node: Expressions792834
Ref: Expressions-Footnote-1796871
Node: Moving by Parens796938
Node: Matching798886
Node: Comments800909
Node: Comment Commands801481
Node: Multi-Line Comments805743
Node: Options for Comments807464
Node: Documentation810829
Node: Info Lookup811376
Node: Man Page812392
Ref: Man Page-Footnote-1815923
Ref: Man Page-Footnote-2816167
Node: Lisp Doc816288
Node: Hideshow817616
Node: Symbol Completion819482
Node: Glasses821737
Node: Semantic822487
Ref: Semantic-Footnote-1824771
Node: Misc for Programs824818
Node: C Modes826292
Node: Motion in C827081
Node: Electric C829139
Node: Hungry Delete830723
Ref: Hungry Delete-Footnote-1832119
Node: Other C Commands832250
Node: Asm Mode837057
Node: Fortran837626
Node: Fortran Motion839393
Node: Fortran Indent841607
Node: ForIndent Commands842370
Node: ForIndent Cont843747
Node: ForIndent Num846138
Node: ForIndent Conv847170
Node: ForIndent Vars848234
Node: Fortran Comments850256
Node: Fortran Autofill854300
Node: Fortran Columns855465
Node: Fortran Abbrev858426
Node: Building859197
Node: Compilation860491
Node: Compilation Mode865598
Node: Compilation Shell871395
Node: Grep Searching872753
Node: Flymake876062
Node: Debuggers877330
Node: Starting GUD878399
Node: Debugger Operation881197
Ref: Debugger Operation-Footnote-1883449
Node: Commands of GUD883549
Node: GUD Customization888159
Node: GDB Graphical Interface890462
Node: GDB-UI Layout891980
Node: Source Buffers894566
Node: Breakpoints Buffer896745
Node: Stack Buffer897938
Node: Other GDB-UI Buffers898708
Node: Watch Expressions902073
Node: Reverse Debugging904760
Node: Executing Lisp905936
Node: Lisp Libraries907363
Node: Lisp Eval910739
Node: Lisp Interaction915029
Node: External Lisp916562
Node: Maintaining918850
Node: Version Control919467
Node: Introduction to VC921038
Node: Why Version Control?922159
Node: Version Control Systems923106
Node: VCS Concepts926940
Node: Types of Log File932495
Node: VC Mode Line934341
Node: Basic VC Editing936049
Node: VC With A Merging VCS938622
Node: VC With A Locking VCS941241
Node: Advanced C-x v v942390
Node: Log Buffer943624
Node: Old Revisions946535
Node: Secondary VC Commands953170
Node: Registering953602
Node: VC Change Log955580
Node: VC Undo959325
Node: VC Directory Mode960689
Node: VC Directory Buffer961675
Node: VC Directory Commands964241
Node: Branches967905
Node: Switching Branches970204
Node: Creating Branches971045
Node: Merging972958
Node: Multi-User Branching976349
Node: Remote Repositories977486
Node: Version Backups978677
Node: Local Version Control981093
Node: Revision Tags985912
Node: Making Revision Tags986619
Node: Revision Tag Caveats987911
Node: Miscellaneous VC989677
Node: Change Logs and VC990221
Node: Renaming and VC993941
Node: Version Headers994849
Node: Customizing VC998465
Node: General VC Options999459
Node: RCS and SCCS1001707
Node: CVS Options1003830
Node: Change Log1006940
Node: Change Log Commands1007604
Node: Format of ChangeLog1010168
Node: Tags1011888
Node: Tag Syntax1014125
Node: Create Tags Table1019737
Node: Etags Regexps1024550
Node: Select Tags Table1029732
Node: Find Tag1031444
Node: Tags Search1034698
Node: List Tags1038108
Node: Emerge1039653
Node: Overview of Emerge1040629
Node: Submodes of Emerge1043859
Node: State of Difference1045632
Node: Merge Commands1048150
Node: Exiting Emerge1050676
Node: Combining in Emerge1051547
Node: Fine Points of Emerge1052439
Node: EDE1053391
Node: Abbrevs1055692
Node: Abbrev Concepts1057027
Node: Defining Abbrevs1058658
Node: Expanding Abbrevs1061633
Node: Editing Abbrevs1065036
Node: Saving Abbrevs1067227
Node: Dynamic Abbrevs1069697
Node: Dabbrev Customization1072615
Node: Picture Mode1075089
Node: Basic Picture1077496
Node: Insert in Picture1079968
Node: Tabs in Picture1081493
Node: Rectangles in Picture1083340
Node: Sending Mail1085206
Node: Mail Format1087842
Node: Mail Headers1089280
Node: Mail Aliases1094635
Node: Mail Commands1096705
Node: Mail Sending1097548
Node: Header Editing1100437
Node: Citing Mail1102381
Node: Mail Misc1103838
Node: Mail Signature1106362
Node: Mail Amusements1107645
Ref: Mail Amusements-Footnote-11108805
Node: Mail Methods1108846
Node: Rmail1110251
Node: Rmail Basics1112058
Node: Rmail Scrolling1114423
Node: Rmail Motion1115598
Node: Rmail Deletion1119426
Node: Rmail Inbox1122453
Node: Rmail Files1126360
Node: Rmail Output1129225
Node: Rmail Labels1132619
Node: Rmail Attributes1135044
Node: Rmail Reply1136675
Node: Rmail Summary1142434
Node: Rmail Make Summary1143439
Node: Rmail Summary Edit1146508
Node: Rmail Sorting1151094
Node: Rmail Display1153193
Node: Rmail Coding1155900
Node: Rmail Editing1157509
Node: Rmail Digest1158835
Node: Rmail Rot131159943
Node: Movemail1160588
Node: Remote Mailboxes1164163
Node: Other Mailbox Formats1167483
Node: Dired1168092
Node: Dired Enter1170531
Node: Dired Navigation1172092
Node: Dired Deletion1173692
Node: Flagging Many Files1176184
Node: Dired Visiting1178717
Node: Marks vs Flags1180409
Node: Operating on Files1185184
Node: Shell Commands in Dired1190614
Node: Transforming File Names1193309
Node: Comparison in Dired1196603
Node: Subdirectories in Dired1197665
Node: Subdir Switches1199391
Node: Subdirectory Motion1201413
Node: Hiding Subdirectories1202616
Node: Dired Updating1203821
Node: Dired and Find1207007
Node: Wdired1209181
Node: Image-Dired1210673
Node: Misc Dired Features1214084
Node: Calendar/Diary1217498
Node: Calendar Motion1219440
Node: Calendar Unit Motion1220311
Node: Move to Beginning or End1222567
Node: Specified Dates1223715
Node: Scroll Calendar1225018
Node: Counting Days1226738
Node: General Calendar1227178
Node: Writing Calendar Files1228753
Node: Holidays1232607
Node: Sunrise/Sunset1235736
Node: Lunar Phases1238879
Node: Other Calendars1240187
Node: Calendar Systems1241372
Node: To Other Calendar1245033
Node: From Other Calendar1247355
Node: Mayan Calendar1249883
Node: Diary1253112
Node: Displaying the Diary1254896
Node: Format of Diary File1258073
Node: Date Formats1260282
Node: Adding to Diary1262960
Node: Special Diary Entries1265035
Node: Appointments1269521
Node: Importing Diary1272160
Node: Daylight Saving1273979
Node: Time Intervals1276602
Node: Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage1278520
Node: Calendar Customizing1279337
Node: Holiday Customizing1281475
Node: Date Display Format1287604
Node: Time Display Format1288634
Node: Diary Customizing1289720
Node: Non-Gregorian Diary1293606
Node: Diary Display1296622
Node: Fancy Diary Display1300502
Node: Sexp Diary Entries1301916
Node: Document View1309592
Node: Navigation1311363
Node: Searching1312630
Node: Slicing1313604
Node: Conversion1314546
Node: Gnus1315323
Node: Buffers of Gnus1315973
Node: Gnus Startup1317211
Node: Summary of Gnus1318410
Node: Shell1321475
Node: Single Shell1323484
Node: Interactive Shell1327346
Node: Shell Mode1330456
Ref: Shell Mode-Footnote-11337126
Node: Shell Prompts1337346
Node: Shell History1339267
Node: Shell Ring1340077
Node: Shell History Copying1343505
Node: History References1344979
Node: Directory Tracking1346142
Node: Shell Options1347565
Node: Terminal emulator1350165
Node: Term Mode1352184
Node: Paging in Term1353074
Node: Remote Host1353810
Node: Serial Terminal1354898
Node: Emacs Server1355956
Ref: Emacs Server-Footnote-11358263
Node: Invoking emacsclient1358431
Node: emacsclient Options1361528
Node: Printing1366750
Node: PostScript1369061
Node: PostScript Variables1372483
Node: Printing Package1376240
Node: Sorting1377564
Node: Narrowing1383072
Node: Two-Column1385507
Node: Editing Binary Files1388612
Node: Saving Emacs Sessions1390102
Node: Recursive Edit1392499
Node: Emulation1395941
Node: Hyperlinking1398886
Node: Browse-URL1400163
Node: Goto Address mode1401425
Node: FFAP1402370
Node: Dissociated Press1404644
Node: Amusements1407240
Node: Customization1409324
Node: Minor Modes1410452
Node: Easy Customization1415990
Node: Customization Groups1417424
Node: Browsing Custom1419649
Node: Changing a Variable1420955
Node: Saving Customizations1428630
Node: Face Customization1430284
Node: Specific Customization1433010
Node: Custom Themes1436409
Node: Variables1439311
Node: Examining1441954
Node: Hooks1444404
Node: Locals1447842
Node: File Variables1451473
Node: Specifying File Variables1452038
Node: Safe File Variables1457860
Node: Directory Variables1460852
Ref: Directory Variables-Footnote-11464387
Node: Key Bindings1464615
Node: Keymaps1465834
Node: Prefix Keymaps1468147
Node: Local Keymaps1470081
Node: Minibuffer Maps1471780
Node: Rebinding1472592
Node: Init Rebinding1475742
Node: Modifier Keys1479633
Node: Function Keys1481462
Node: Named ASCII Chars1484194
Node: Mouse Buttons1485697
Node: Disabling1491034
Node: Syntax1493151
Node: Init File1494482
Node: Init Syntax1497477
Node: Init Examples1500338
Node: Terminal Init1506872
Node: Find Init1508809
Node: Init Non-ASCII1509914
Node: Quitting1511529
Node: Lossage1516470
Node: DEL Does Not Delete1517524
Node: Stuck Recursive1519843
Node: Screen Garbled1520551
Node: Text Garbled1521643
Node: Memory Full1522317
Node: After a Crash1523466
Node: Emergency Escape1525830
Node: Total Frustration1527902
Node: Bugs1528554
Node: Bug Criteria1529750
Node: Understanding Bug Reporting1532520
Node: Checklist1535187
Node: Sending Patches1550862
Node: Contributing1556059
Node: Service1557159
Node: Copying1557799
Node: GNU Free Documentation License1595373
Node: Emacs Invocation1620545
Node: Action Arguments1624085
Node: Initial Options1626763
Ref: Initial Options-Footnote-11631642
Node: Command Example1631691
Node: Resume Arguments1632528
Node: Environment1634319
Node: General Variables1636265
Ref: General Variables-Footnote-11642473
Node: Misc Variables1642749
Node: MS-Windows Registry1645582
Node: Display X1647406
Node: Font X1649720
Node: Colors1650390
Node: Window Size X1653949
Node: Borders X1658474
Node: Title X1659704
Node: Icons X1660454
Node: Misc X1661443
Node: X Resources1662146
Node: Resources1663296
Node: Table of Resources1667764
Node: Face Resources1673700
Node: Lucid Resources1675732
Node: LessTif Resources1678716
Node: GTK resources1682148
Node: GTK widget names1684653
Node: GTK Names in Emacs1686871
Node: GTK styles1689283
Node: Antinews1695935
Node: Mac OS / GNUstep1701798
Node: Mac / GNUstep Basics1703319
Node: Mac / GNUstep Customization1705931
Node: Mac / GNUstep Events1707195
Node: GNUstep Support1711224
Node: Microsoft Windows1711513
Node: Text and Binary1712970
Node: Windows Files1718287
Node: ls in Lisp1719867
Node: Windows HOME1725261
Ref: Windows HOME-Footnote-11727206
Node: Windows Keyboard1727335
Ref: Windows Keyboard-Footnote-11733115
Node: Windows Mouse1733412
Node: Windows Processes1734412
Node: Windows Printing1737744
Ref: Windows Printing-Footnote-11744089
Node: Windows Fonts1744287
Node: Windows Misc1748618
Node: MS-DOS1749624
Node: MS-DOS Keyboard1750865
Node: MS-DOS Mouse1752808
Node: MS-DOS Display1755538
Node: MS-DOS File Names1759612
Node: MS-DOS Printing1762351
Node: MS-DOS and MULE1763751
Ref: MS-DOS and MULE-Footnote-11768653
Ref: MS-DOS and MULE-Footnote-21768988
Node: MS-DOS Processes1769334
Node: Manifesto1771752
Ref: Manifesto-Footnote-11795946
Ref: Manifesto-Footnote-21796835
Ref: Manifesto-Footnote-31797108
Ref: Manifesto-Footnote-41797150
Ref: Manifesto-Footnote-51797670
Ref: Manifesto-Footnote-61797776
Ref: Manifesto-Footnote-71798377
Node: Glossary1798728
Node: Acknowledgments1855565
Node: Key Index1905842
Node: Option Index1970137
Node: Command Index1976213
Node: Variable Index2085310
Node: Concept Index2142199

End Tag Table
